


μη 


ΜΙ] 


ἈΝ ἌΝ. 
ANN Rats 1) 
ΔΝ tas if 





᾿ γᾷ 
iy oY iN ia ty 
i 


Ae 


τῇ 


"ΟΝ 
han TRO 


Ψ 


ἡ i Ἷ mh ie 

ane ae 
EA i 

wit ae Ae 








Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2008 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


https://archive.org/details/greekreaderconsi0Ogoodrich 





GREEK READER. 


CONSISTING OF SELECTIONS FROM 


XENOPHON, PLATO, HERODOTUS, AND THUCYDIDES, 


ith Notes 


ADAPTED TO THE REVISED AND ENLARGED EDITION OF 
GOODWIN’S GREEK GRAMMAR, 


AND COPPERPLATE MAPS. 


EDITED BY 


WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, P#.D., 


ELIOT PROFESSOR OF GREEK LITERATURE IN HARVARD COLLEGE. 
Second Lyition, 


BOSTON: 
GINN AND HEATH. 
1881. 


Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1877. 


BY WILLIAM W. GOODWIN, 


$n the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington. 


Press OF ROCKWELL AND CHURCHILL, 
39 Arch St., Boston. 


PREFACE TO THE FIRST EDITION. 





ΤῊΙΒ Reader is designed to supply an equivalent for 
Xenophon’s Anabasis, which is now almost universally 
read in preparation for American colleges. It surely needs 
no argument to show that a better knowledge even of the 
elements of a language is gained from a variety of styles 
than from a single author, or that even the briefest course 
of reading is the better for exhibiting the higher qualities 
of the literature which it represents. The fact that the 
Anabasis is accessible in carefully prepared editions has 
given it a prominence in our schools which neither its 
literary merit nor its historic importance could justly 
claim; and its exclusive reign has not been without its 
injurious effect on our scholarship. 

Xenophon and Herodotus are perhaps the only strictly 
classic prose-writers of Greece who can be studied with 
success by beginners, except in selected passages. Demos- 
thenes and Thucydides are by no means as well adapted as 
Cicero and Caesar to the attainments of young students; 
and Plato must be divested, to a great extent, of his philo- 
sophic robes before he can enter our schoolrooms. It will 
therefore surprise no one that so large a part of the present 
work is given to Xenophon and Herodotus. 

We have attempted to select characteristic passages from 


G062S 


1v PREFACE. 


the four authors included in the work, and at the same 
time to admit nothing which a diligent scholar cannot 
reasonably be expected to master in the first two years of 
his Greek studies. We have given the Third and Fourth 
books of the Anabasis entire, as being the most interesting 
part of the Retreat of the Ten Thousand, and as admirably 
adapted by its simplicity of style for elementary drill. 
Then follows the greater part of the Second Book of the 
Hellenica, describing the capture of Athens by the Spartan 
Lysander, the tragic end of the long Peloponnesian war 
in the destruction of the Piraeus and of the Long Walls 
of Athens—the pride of Themistocles and Pericles — to 
the insulting music of flutes, the odious rule of the Thirty 
Tyrants, with the expulsion of the oligarchy and the res- 
toration of the democracy by Thrasybulus and his band 
of exiled patriots from Phyle; to which are added the last 
sections of the Hellenica, describing the battle of Man- 
tinea and the death of Epaminondas. 

Next comes the first chapter of the Memorabilia, giving 
the character of Socrates as drawn by Xenophon, followed 
by the last section of the same work. The short extracts 
from Plato which follow consist of the final address of 
Socrates to his judges from the Apology, and the narrative 
part of the Phaedo describing the last hours of the great 
philosopher. 

The selections from Herodotus are in four parts. The 
first contains the account of the invasion of Darius and 
the battle of Marathon. The three others contain the 
most important passages in the Seventh and Eighth books, 
forming a continuous account of the invasion of Xerxes, — 
the pomp of the Great King’s preparation; the march of 
the mighty host from Asia to Greece, including bridging 


PREFACE. Vv 


the Hellespont and cutting the canal through Athos; the 
preparations of the terrified Greeks; the wisdom of the 
Delphic oracle and the craft of Themistocles ; the battles 
of Thermopylae, Artemisium, and Salamis; and finally the 
ignominious retreat of Xerxes from Salamis to Asia. The 
campaign of Mardonius in the following year, with the 
battles of Plataea and Mycale, is omitted for want of space. 
In thus condensing two long books of Herodotus into so 
small a compass, great pains have been taken to avoid 
abrupt transitions; and often single sentences have been 
taken from a chapter to keep up the continuity of the 
narrative. It is hoped that the wonderful story of the 
campaign of Xerxes has thus been presented to the pupil 
in greater vividness and completeness than it could have 
been by detached extracts. 

The passage from Thucydides has been abridged by 
omitting the speeches, and such parts of the narrative as 
are not essential to the main account. As there is no 
continuous passage of this length in Thucydides which 
does not contain difficulties of construction or style too 
great for beginners, occasional liberties have been taken in 
omitting sentences or even clauses which are not essential 
to the story, simply to avoid difficulties. There is perhaps 
no other part of Thucydides from which 50 simple a narra- 
tive passage of equal interest with this story of Pylus 
could have been taken. 

Although this Reader is especially designed for those 
who are preparing for college, with a view of giving them 
the best material afforded by the Greek literature to en- 
liven the course of their earlier studies, it is yet hoped that 
it may be of use also to those whose study of Greek must 
be confined to the school or academy. It is especially 


v1 PREFACE. 


hard for such persons to spend a year or more in reading 
Greek, but to see nothing except the Anabasis, — a story 
οὗ an expedition saved from oblivion chiefly by a skilful 
retreat, — when the great deeds of Marathon, Thermopylae 
and Salamis, Leonidas and his Three Hundred, Miltiades. — 
Themistocles, Aristides, Socrates, and Epaminondas are 
equally within their reach. For such, and indeed for all 
who may use the work, we desire that it may “enlarge and 
not belittle the notion of what a classic language and liter- 
ature mean. The best justification of classical study, after 
all, is not its value as a means of mental discipline, but 
that it combines that discipline with some guiding of the 
mind towards the higher interpretation of history and the 
deeper lessons of human life.” 

The notes make no pretension to learning, and aim 
merely at aiding beginners in laying a solid foundation for 
future scholarship. The grammatical aid is given chiefly 
in the form of references, in which alone it can be syste- 
matic. No notes can supply all the collateral information 
needed for the full understanding of an ancient historian. 
Constant reference should be made to a classical dictionary 
and to some Greek history. It may be too much to expect 
of school-boys in these days that they should read a history 
hike that of Grote ; but we cannot too strongly recommend 
all who wish to catch the true spirit of the history they 
are studying, to read Grote’s graphic account of the Per- 
sian wars with Herodotus, his story of Pylus and Cleon 
with Thucydides, and his chapters on the Thirty Tyrants 
and on Epaminondas with Xenophon’s Hellenica. Many 
parts too of his chapter on Socrates (in vol. viii.) would 
be appreciated by every thoughtful reader of the extracts 
here made from the Memorabilia and from Plato. We 








PREFACE. Vil 


believe, further, that the time spent in reading these chap- 
ters of Grote would be more than saved by their aid as a 
commentary to the Greek text, while the increased interest 
which they would awaken might often change the study 
from a task to a pleasure. 

It is of course impossible in notes like these to give 
special credit for every remark which is wholly or partly 
borrowed. We must therefore express, once for all, our 
obligations to the long and familiar line of commentators 
on Xenophon, Herodotus, Thucydides, and Plato ; and 
last, not least, to Grote, from whose notes many valuable 
hints have been derived which could not be acknowledged 
by quotation-marks. The maps at the end of the volume 
are chiefly copied from larger maps in Kiepert’s “ Atlas 
von Hellas.” 

No Poetry has been added to this Reader, partly because 
the masterpieces of Greek Poetry are nearly all accessible 
in a convenient form, but chiefly because no ancient poetry 
is so well adapted to the minds of youth as the Homeric 
poems, which every scholar should carry with him to 
college without abridgment. One great advantage of the 
extended course of preparatory study which, it is to be 
hoped, all our best colleges will soon expect of those who 
intend to be classical scholars will be the more thorough 
acquaintance with Homer which young men will thereby 
gain before they enter college. 

In the extracts from Xenophon, the chapters and sec- 
tions are numbered as they are in recent editions. The 
other selections are divided into new sections as they stand, 
and numbered accordingly. In all cases (except in Plato), 
the numbers of the original chapter and section with which 
the right-hand page ends are given at the top of the page. 


vill PREFACE. 


No special lexicon is added to the volume, partly from 
the impossibility of making a really complete small lexi- 
~ eon to such a variety of authors, but chiefly from the belief 
that the use of a partial lexicon is injurious to sound 
scholarship. We do not refer to such special works as are 
really more full than a general lexicon, which are often 
invaluable in reading a difficult author; but to such 1m- 
perfect glossaries as are sometimes expected at the end of 
a Greek Reader. The abridgment of Liddell and Scott's 
Greek-English Lexicon, which admirably combines con- 
venience in size with completeness and exactness in 
definitions, is now so easily accessible, that all difficulty 
in this respect is happily removed. 


THE EDITORS. 


CamsrRipcE, Mass., July, 1871. 





PREFACE TO THE SECOND EDITION. 





THE first edition of this Reader, which was published 
in 1871, was prepared by the undersigned and the Rey. 
Joseph H. Allen of Cambridge, Mass. The Preface to that 
edition, which is here reprinted without change, shows the 
general plan of the work and the purposes at which it 
aimed. In the present edition the First and Second Books 
of the Anabasis have been substituted for the Third and 
Fourth, and the notes on the Anabasis here given contain 
more than twice as much matter as those belonging to the 
same amount of text in the former edition. This change 
has been made in deference to the opinion of many prac- 
tical teachers, whose views on the nature of a commentary 
intended for beginners seemed to the Editor entitled to 
the highest respect. It will be seen that the notes on the 
First Book of the Anabasis, which it is assumed will be 
used for giving pupils a solid foundation in the general 
principles of Greek Syntax, are especially copious; while 
those on the Second Book of the Anabasis, like those on. 
the following extracts, are written for pupils who are sup- 
posed to have mastered the rudiments. In the opinion of 
the Editor, it is highly desirable to use as small a portion 
as possible of the classic literature as a corpus vile for the 


x PREFACE. 


more minute dissection, and to enable pupils at the earli- 
est possible moment to read Greek and Latin with an 
appreciative mind. The notes on the Anabasis have been 
prepared in great part by my colleague, Professor John 
W. White, with whose “First Lessons in Greek” the stu- 
dents of this Reader have, it is hoped, already become 
acquainted. The notes on the remainder of the work are, 
with few changes, the same as those which appeared in 
the former edition. A map designed to illustrate the Ana- 
basis, copied chiefly from Kiepert’s map in Rehdantz’s 
Anabasis (1873), has been added in this edition. 
W. W. GOODWIN. 


Harvard CoLLEGE, March, 1877. 





ΟΝ ΕΝ Ls. 


—o— 
XENOPHON. 
Paar 
‘J. Awasasts, Booxs I. anp II ὃ ° e e . ° 1 
II. FALL AND RESTORATION OF ATHENS ᾿ - = - 61 
II]. Tue BatruE ΟΕ MANTINEA . ‘ - ὃ - - .« 80 
IV. CHARACTER OF SOCRATES . 5 2 - 2 - 2 90 
ELATS. 

I. SocRATES BEFORE HIS JUDGES . Ξ = = - ae: 
II, Tur DratH oF SOCRATES A : - - ° τ 101 
HERODOTUS. 

I. INVASION oF GREECE BY Darius. : : ς τς 15 
II. Marcu oF XERXES: PREPARATIONS OF THE GREEKS < 120 
111. Tue Pass ΟΕ THERMOPYLAE. : Ξ 2 5 ! >. 2 136 

IV. Artremistum: Marcu or XERXES TO ATHENS: SALAMIS: 
RETREAT OF XERXES TO ASIA. ξ z Ε 156 
THUCYDIDES. 
PYLUS AND SPHACTERIA ‘ Z Ξ ᾽ : = ice 


Notes ‘ . 4 : Ε : 5 ὲ : : Σ ἘΞῚΤῸ9 
PARALLEL REFERENCES . 5 5 Ε 2 a Ε ᾿Ξ . 160 


TABLE OF DATES . . . Φ ΕΙ e e Φ . 162 





Rie RM 


’ 





XENOPHON. 





I. ANABASIS. 


BOOK FIRST. 


: 



















/ Ν / , a , 
I, Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδος γίγνονται παῖδες δύο, 
] 4 XN >] / ᾿ Ν lal 3 \ 
πρεσβύτερος μὲν Aptakep&ns, νεώτερος de Κῦρος. ἐπεὶ 
ἊΝ ᾽ / “ ς ¢ ’ de a / > 7 
δὲ ἠσθένει Aapetos καὶ uTwmTEve τελευτὴν τοῦ βίου, εβού- 
\ n 2 ,ὔ a ε ‘ 5 ΄, 
\eTo TW παῖδε ἀμφοτέρω παρεῖναι. 2 ὁ μεν οὖν πρεσβύ- 
Ν 2 a ‘ 7 ΠΣ ~ 
repos παρὼν etvyyave: Κῦρον δὲ μεταπέμπεται aro τῆς 
ἘΑ PN ΄ὔ 5) / ἈΝ \ \ SFR 
ἱρχῆς ἧς αὐτὸν σατρώπην ἐποίησε, καὶ στρατηγὸν δὲ αὐτὸν 
> , 7 5 “ / 3 / 
ἱπέδειξε πάντων ὅσοι εἰς Καστωλοῦ πεδίον ἀθροίζονται. 
> r 5 ε A Χ ͵ ε , N 
vaBaive. οὖν ὁ Κῦρος λαβων Τισσαφέρνην ws φίλον, καὶ 
’ἢ ΓΝ « / > / / “ 
ov ᾿Ελλήνων δὲ ἔχων ὁπλίτας ἀνέβη τριακοσίους, ἄρχον- 
\ ot a oe 7 , 2 ἈΝ ae ΄ 
a δὲ αὐτῶν Ξενίαν Παρράσιον. 8. ἐπεὶ δὲ ετελεύτησε 
A ‘\ / , Ἂς / > δ 
apelos καὶ κατέστη εἰς την βασιλείαν Αρταξερξης, Τισ- 
/ , Ἂς A > Ἂν 3 De e > 
αφέρνης διαβάλλει τὸν Κῦρον πρὸς τὸν ἀδελῴφον ws εἐπι- 
᾽ὔ SLA ς N / / Ν / A 
ουλεύοι αὑτῷ. ὁ δε πείθεται TE καὶ συύλλαμβανει Κῦρον 
> a € ς ’ > / >t > / 
S ὠὡποκτενῶν" 7 δὲ μήτηρ εξαιτησαμένη αὑτὸν ἀποπέμπει 
/ au '% N ᾽ 7 ec a. > A 4 Ν 
λιν ἐπὶ τὴν ἀρχην. 4.0 δ᾽ ὡς ἀπῆλθε κινδυνεύσας καὶ 
bs ΄ Ὁ , ΓΜ x aS A 
τιμασθεῖς, βουλεύεται ὅπως μήποτε ETL EGTAaL ETL TO 
a 2 3. on ΄ ΄ 3 y 2 7 ΄ 
δελφῷ, arr, ἢν δύνηται, βασιλεύσει ἀντ᾽ ἐκείνου. Παρύ- 
‘ » e 4 ς A A / A Law, 
atis μὲν δὴ ἡ μήτηρ ὑπῆρχε TO Κύρῳ, φιλοῦσα αὑτὸν 
a ALN ΄ > , / ἘΝ 
ἄλλον ἢ τὸν βασιλεύοντα Αρταξέρξην. 5. ὅστις 8 adu- 
tad a Ν , Ν ΣΟ ἊΝ , [χά 
νείτο τῶν παρὰ βασίλεως πρὸς αὑτὸν, πάντας οὕτω διατι- 
\ ? / ἢ 7 7 ὧν A Λ 3 \ - 
ὃς ἀπεπέμπετο ὥστε αὐτῷ μᾶλλον φίλους εἶναι ἢ βασιλεῖ. 
‘\ al ᾿ ς al Ν , ᾽ fal e A 
ὁ τῶν Tap ἑαυτῷ de βαρβάρων επεμελεῖτο ὡς πολεμεῖν 
g id Ἂς Υὔ Ν ᾽ ἀν τ ρὲ Ν ? A Ν τς 
: ἑκανοὶ εἰησαν καὶ εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχοιεν αὑτῷ. 6. τὴν δε ᾿ Ελ- 


Ν ΄ “ ς ΄ In 7 > 7, 
νικὴν δύναμιν ἡθροιζεν ὡς μάλιστα εδύνατο επικρυπτο- 


ε 
€ 
c 
E τ 


Ana at peli of Cyrus the Younger. [XEn. 


€ 
rams ess 
Ἐξ ες, chica κῶς ξ 
« eat 


eee ‘hicvos, Saws ὅτι ὁ ἀπαρασκευότατον λάβοι βασιλέα. ὧδε οὖν 

ἐποιεῖτο τὴν συλλογήν. ὁπόσας εἶχε φυλακὰς ἐν ταῖς πό-᾿ 
λεσι; παρήγγειλε τοῖς φρουράρχοις ἑκάστοις λαμβάνειν ἄν-᾿ 
dpas Πελοποννησίους ὅτι πλείστους καὶ βελτίστους, ὡς 
πε βουλεύοντος Τισσαφέρνους ταῖς πόλεσι. καὶ γὰρ ἦσαν 
αἱ ᾿Ιωνικαὶ πόλεις Τισσαφέρνους, τὸ -apyator ἐκ βασιλέως 
δεδομέναι, τότε δ᾽ ἀφειστήκεσαν πρὸς Κῦρον πᾶσαι πλὴν 
Μιλήτου" 7. ἐν Μιλήτῳ δὲ Τισσαφέρνης προαισθόμενος 
τὰ αὐτὰ Ταῦτα βουλευομένους, ἀποστῆναι πρὸς Κύρον, τοὺς 
μὲν αὐτῶν ἀπέκτεινε τοὺς δ᾽ ἐξέβαλεν. ὁ δὲ Κῦρος, ὑπο- 
λαβὼν τοὺς alee συλλέξας στράτευμα ἘΠΟΝΟΟΒΕΕΝ 
Mirntov καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν, καὶ ἐπειρᾶτο 


asia τοὺς ἐκπεπτωκότας. καὶ αὕτη αὖ ἄλλη προφασις 
ἃς ἃς 
8. πρὸς δὲ βασιλέα 


ἴ- 
ἐπι: 



























ἣν αὐτῷ τοῦ ἀθροίζειν sugges 
πέμπων ἠξίου ae ὧν αὐτοῦ δοθῆναι of ταύτας τὰς 
πόλεις μᾶλλον ἢ Τισσαφέρνην ἄρχειν αὐτῶν. καὶ ἣ μήτηρ 
ay ania αὐτῷ ταῦτα" ὥστε βασιλεὺς τὴν μὲν πρὸ 


ἑαυτὸν ἐπιβουλὴν οὐκ is ti Τισσαφέρνει δὲ ἐνόμιξ 


πολεμοῦντα αὐτὸν ἀμφὶ τὰ στρατεύματα, δαπανᾶν: ὥστ 


οὐδὲν ἤχθετο αὐτῶν πολεμούντων. 
πτεμητε τοὺς γιγνομένους δασμοὺς βασιλεῖ ἐκ τῶν πόλεω 
ὧν Τισσαφέρνης Enya ἔχων. <9, ἄλλο δὲ στράτευμ 
αὐτῷ συνελέγετο ἐν Χερρονήσῳ τῇ καταντιπέρας ᾿Αβύδο 
τόνδε τὸν τρόπον. Κλέαρχος Λακεδαιμόνιος φυγὰς ἣν 
τούτῳ Ὅλο, ΔΝ ο Kupos ἠγάσθη τε αὐτὸν καὶ δίδωσιν 
αὐτῷ μυρίους δαρεικούς. ὁ δὲ λαβὼν τὸ χρυσίον στράτει 
μα εὐ χέξεν ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν χρημάτων, καὶ ἐπολέμει ἐ 
Χερρονήσου ὁρμώμενος τοῖς Θρφεξὶ τοῖς ὑπ Ἕλλήσπο 
τον οἰκοῦσι, καὶ ὠφέλει τοὺς “ΕΒλληνας" ὥστε καὶ χρήμα ¢ 
συνεβάλλοντο αὐτῷ εἰς τὴν τροφὴν τῶν imeinel 


ς Ν «ς a 
Eddnotovtiakat πόλεις ἐκουσαι. τοῦτο δ᾽ av οὕτω" 


καὶ γὰρ ὁ Κῦρος ἀπέ 


Anas. 1, 1. Collecting an Army. 5 


3 7 >? ἴω Ν 7 ᾽ / 
φόμενον ἐλάνθανεν αὑτῷ TO στράτευμα. 10. ᾿Αρίστιππος 
oe Ν / sx\ > 4 ? cal Ν / ς Ν 
δὲ ὁ Θετταλὸς ἕένος wy ἐτύγχανεν αὑτῷ, καὶ πιεζόμενος ὑπὸ 
an Μ > A Μ ‘\ Ν a Ν P| a 
τῶν OLKOL ἀντιστασιωτῶν EpyEeTat προς τὸν Κῦρον καὶ αἰτεῖ 
πᾷς > § / / Ν na na Ν ἕ cd 
αὐτὸν εἰς δισχιλίους Eevous καὶ τριῶν μηνῶν μισθὸν, ὡς οὕτω 
7] \ a ? rn id Ν val / 
περιγενόμενος ἂν TOV ἀντιστασιωτῶν. ὁ δὲ Κῦρος didw- 
> a - / Ν \ rn Ν Ν 
σιν αὑτῷ εἰς τετρακισχιλίους καὶ EE μηνῶν μισθὸν, καὶ 
al 3 A = / val ἧς Ν > 
δεῖται αὐτοῦ μὴ πρόσθεν καταλῦσαι πρὸς τοὺς avTioTta- 
, \ Ἃ Ἄν δ Τρ ΄ Pad Ν 3 
σιωτας πρὶν ἂν αὐτῷ συμβουλεύσηται. οὕτω δὲ αὖ 
᾿ς > / 3 , 2 Aa / / 
τὸ ev Θετταλίᾳ ἐλάνθανεν αὐτῷ τρεφόμενον στράτευμα. 
ἐ ra 
7 Ν Ν / / yf > a Jk 
11. Πρόξενον δε tov Bowwtiov ἕένον ὄντα αὐτῷ εκέλευσε 
/ y UL / / ς > 7 
λαβόντα avdpas ὅτι πλείστους παραγενέσθαι, ws εἰς Πισί- 
, ΄ c , , 
δας βουλόμενος στρατεύεσθαι, ws πράγματα παρεχόντων 
a fa ω ¢ a / / Ν Ἂς 
τῶν Πισιδῶν τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χώρᾳ. Σοφαίνετον δὲ τὸν Στυμ- 
Λ Ἧς; , Ν > ‘ / Μ Ν ΄ 
φάλιον καὶ Σωκράτην tov Αχαιον, Eevovs ovtas καὶ τού- 
δ Ὁ y+ / 3 a 7 / e 
Tous, ἐκέλευσεν ἄνδρας λαβόντας ἐλθεῖν ὅτι πλείστους, ὡς 
/ / ‘ a / a “ 
πολεμήσων Τισσαφέρνει συν τοῖς φυγασι τῶν Μιλησίων. 
; x 3 / , Ὁ 
καὶ ἐποίουν οὕτως OUTOL. 
ΤΙ ἢ ἐν Ν ¥ Ὁ / ὩΣ 7 6 ? aA »¥ Ν Ν 
: Te. δ᾽ ἐδόκει NON πορεύεσθαι αὐτῷ ἄνω, THY μὲν 
, ᾽ κα € 7 7 3 A 7 
πρόφασιν ἐποιεῖτο ὡς Πισίδας βουλόμενος ἐκβαλεῖν παντά- 
ἢ A , Ss, / ¢ ἌΝ , , 
πασιν εκ τῆς χωρας" καὶ ἀθροίζει, ws ἐπὶ τούτους TO TE 
Ν \ x. ε / > a Ν / 
BapBapixov καὶ τὸ ᾿Ελληνικον. ενταῦθα καὶ παραγγελλει 
F a Kr if Ν B / Ὡ «“ 9 FTA , 
τῷ Te Κλεαρχῳ λαβόντι ἥκειν ὅσον ἣν αὑτῷ στράτευμα, 
Ν tr toge | / / ἈΝ Χ y+ 2 / 
kat τῷ ApiotiTT@ συναλλαγεέντι πρὸς TOUS οἴκοι ATTOTEL- 
ἫΝ ς Ν aA > ,  — / a 3 / 
at πρὸς εαυτον ὃ εἶχε στράτευμα" καὶ Beviatwo Ἀρκάδι, 
‘A 2 A ᾽ὔ a ? - /. a / 
ὃς αὑτῷ προειστήκει TOU EV ταῖς πόλεσι ξενικοῦ, ἥκειν πα- 
, eae Χ x Ν δ; Σο ς Ν 
ραγγέλλει λαβοντᾶ τοὺς ἀνδρας πλὴν ὁπόσοι ἱκανοὶ ἦσαν 
Ν > , , rey \ \ x Ἅ 
τὰς ἀκροπόλεις φυλάττειν. 42. ἐκάλεσε δὲ καὶ τοὺς Μίλη- 
A Ἂς ‘ / »-᾿.. ἃ ᾿ ? a 
Tov πολιορκοῦντας, καὶ τοὺς φυγάδας ἐκέλευσε σὺν αὐτῷ 
/ e 7 > r 2 - 3 ᾿Ξ 
στρατεύεσθαι, ὑποσχόμενος αὑτοῖς, εἰ καλῶς καταπράξειεν 
νυ ἃ: / x / 7 N yes 
ep ἃ €otpateveto, μὴ πρόσθεν παύσασθαι πρὶν αὐτοὺς 


/ yy Ps «ς Χ e ͵ 3 7 3 / Ν 
KaTayayou οἰκαδε. οἱ δὲ ἡδέως ἐπείθοντο" ἐπίστευον yao 


ΩΝ 


+ Expedition of Cyrus the Younger. [Xen. 


, a Ν / Ν 7 A >) / 
αὐτῷ" καὶ λαβόντες τὰ ὅπλα παρῆσαν εἰς Σάρδεις. 
/ Ν Ν nr / Ὡς v4 
3. Ἐενίας μὲν δὴ τοὺς ἐκ τῶν πόλεων λαβὼν παρεγένετο 
/ 7 / / Ν 
εἰς Σάρδεις ὁπλίτας εἰς τετρακισχιλίους, Πρόξενος δὲ πα- 
a Arg \ ᾽ Ἢ , 3 
ρὴν ἔχων ὁπλίτας μὲν εἰς πεντακοσίους καὶ χιλίους, γυμνη- 
/ / Me ’ ¢ / 
τας δὲ πεντακοσίους, Σοφαίνετος δε ὁ Στυμφαλιος ὁπλίτας 
/ Ν tie Ν ¢t / a4 τ 
ἔχων χιλίους, Σωκράτης δὲ ὁ ᾿ἄχαιος ὁπλίτας ἔχων ὡς 
, / Ἂ ε \ / Ν 
πεντακοσίους, Πασίων δὲ ὁ Μεγαρεὺς τριακοσίους μεν 
/ \ Ν + , 9 
ὁπλίτας, τριακοσίους δὲ πελταστὰς ἔχων παρεγένετο" HV 
/ ἴω 2 Ν / 
δὲ καὶ οὗτος Kal ὁ Σωκράτης τῶν ἀμφὶ Μίλητον στρατευο- 
7 @ Ν b) / DAs RPO 19, / 
μένων. 4. οὗτοι μὲν εἰς Σάρδεις αὐτῷ ἀφίκοντο. Τισσα- 
= Ν / ¢ , Φ 
φέρνης δὲ κατανοήσας ταῦτα, καὶ μείξονα i at i. 
ἢ ὡς ἐπὶ Πισίδας τὴν παρασκευὴν, πορεύεται ὡς pare 
ἢ ἐδύνατο τάχιστα ἱππέας ἔχων ὡς πεντακοσίους. : ὅ. καὶ 
βασιλεὺς μὲν δὴ, ἐπεὶ ἤκουσε Τισσαφέρνους τὸν Κύρου στό- 
2 / 
λον, ἀντυπαρεσκευάζετο. 
ἃς nai okay ἃ Υ ς Ξ > νι , Ν 
Κῦρος δὲ ἔχων ovs εἰρηκα ὡρμᾶτο ἀπὸ Σάρδεων" καὶ 
> ‘ Ν A / x a , ΕΣ 
ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς Λυδίας σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας εἴ- 
Ν / > et ‘\ / 7 ‘ Ν 3 
κοσι καὶ δύο ἐπὶ τὸν Μαίανδρον ποταμόν. τούτου τὸ εὖ- 
/ / / Ν 3 A > 4 / « / 
pos δύο πλέθρα" γέφυρα δε ἐπὴν εζευγμένη πλοίοις ἔπτα. 
n Ν ? , \ / ἊΝ / 
6. τοῦτον διαβὰς εξελαύνει διὰ Φρυγίας στωθμὸν ἕνα πα- 
, 2 Ν ει Ν 7, > , 3 / 
pacayyas oKT@ εἰς Κολοσσας. πολιν οἰκουμενῆν, εὐδαι- 
Ν / 3 A “ Ἔκ ς f 
μονα καὶ μεγάλην. ενταῦθα ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας ἔπτὰ" καὶ 
ες , ς Ν ἵ , Ν 
ἧκε Μένων ὁ Θετταλὸς ὁπλίτας ἔχων χιλίους καὶ πελτα- 
Ν 7 , Ν δ an ἃ τ ΝΖ Vi 
στας πεντακοσίους, Aorotras καὶ Awviavas καὶ Ολυνθι- 
2 a 5) ΄ x ω / 
ous. ἢ. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας 
Υ b) ‘ A / , 3 ‘ U 
εἰκοσιν εἰς Κελαινας, τῆς Φρυγίας πολιν οἰκουμένην, μεγα- 
\ ’ / ΟῚ an Λ 53 Ν ΄ 
Anv καὶ εὐδαίμονα. ἐνταῦθα Κύρῳ βασίλεια ἣν καὶ Tapa- 
ὃ / ? 7 θ / 7 Ave al 35 7 
εἰσος μέγας ἀγρίων θηρίων πλήρης, ἃ ἐκεῖνος eOnpevev 
> eee ς , / , Ἀ 
ἅπὸ ἵππου, ὁπότε γυμνάσαι βούλοιτο ἑαυτόν τε καὶ τοὺς 
Ὡ“ Ν / Ν a a 
ἵππους. διὰ μέσου δὲ τοῦ παραδείσου pet ὁ Μαίανδρος 


/ τ « δὲ Ν > a ’ ? - / en 
ποταμὸς" al O€ πηγαι αὐτοῦ εἰσιν εκ τῶν βασιλείων " ῥεῖ 





ΑΝΑΒ. 1, π.] On the March. 5 


δὲ καὶ διὰ τῆς Κελαινῶν πόλεως. 5. ἔστι δὲ Kal μεγάλου 


βασιλέως βασίλεια ἐν Κελαιναῖς ἐρυμνὰ ἐπὶ ταῖς πηγαῖς 
fa a a “ c a \ \ 
τοῦ Μαρσύου ποταμοῦ ὑπὸ τῇ ἀκροπόλει" ῥεῖ δὲ Kal οὗτος 
Qn \ / lal \ 
διὰ THs πόλεως καὶ ἐμβάλλει εἰς τὸν Μαίανδρον" τοῦ δὲ 
95 / lal > ‘al 
“Μαρσύου τὸ εὗρός ἐστιν εἴκοσι καὶ πέντε ποδῶν. ἐνταῦ- 
al / 5 / / 
θα λέγεται ᾿Απόλλων ἐκδεῖραι Μαρσύαν, νικήσας ἐρίζοντά 
ε > nS “ 
οἱ περὶ σοφίας, καὶ τὸ δέρμα κρεμάσαι ἐν τῷ ἄντρῳ ὅθεν 
ΐ (+ διὰ δὲ τοῦτο ὁ ὸ λεῖται Μαρσύας 
ai πηγαί! διὰ δὲ τοῦτο ὁ ποταμὸς καλεῖται Map ; 
3 a / f 2 A ¢ / e Ν A / 
9. ἐνταῦθα Ἐέρξης. ὅτε ex τῆς Ελλάδος ἡττηθεὶς τῇ μάχῃ 
᾽ A = os , Ν " Ν 
ἀπεχώρει, λέγεται οἰκοδομῆσαι ταῦτα τε Ta βασίλεια καὶ 
ἂν “ 3 / 3 a Μ rn ς 7 
τὴν Κελαινῶν ἀκρόπολιν. ἐνταῦθα ἐμεινε Κῦρος ἡμέρας 
νφ ΄ e / \ Μ 
τριάκοντα" καὶ ἧκε Κλέαρχος ὁ Δακεδαιμόνιος φυγᾶς ἔχων 
/ Ν ‘ A > / Ἂς 
ὁπλίτας χιλίους καὶ πελταστὰς Θρᾷκας οκτακοσίους καὶ 
/ fal / 7 ἈΝ Ν ral A ΄ 
τοξότας Κρῆτας διακοσίους. ἅμα δὲ καὶ Σῶσις παρὴν ὁ 
/ 4 e / 7 / Ν ᾿ « 
Συρακόσιος ἔχων ὁπλίτας τριακοσίους, καὶ Σοφαίνετος ὁ 
3 Ν Μ ,ὔ 7 Ν 3 A a ον 
Ἀρκὰς ἔχων ὁπλίτας χιλίους. καὶ ἐνταῦθα Κῦρος εξέτα- 
2 Ν na « / 3 7 3 A / 
σιν καὶ ἀριθμὸν τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων ἐποίησεν ἐν τῷ παραδείσῳ, 
Ν 3 / e £ e A Ν / Ν E 
καὶ ἐγένοντο οἱ σύμπαντες OTALTAL MEV μύριοι καὶ χίλιοι, 
ΟΣ \ \ ͵ ) A ) ͵ 
πελτασταὶ δὲ ἀμφὶ τους δισχιλίους. 10. ἐντεῦθεν εἐξελαύ- 
Ν ΄ , / 3 / Λ 
νει σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας δέκα εἰς Πέλτας, πόλιν 
9 ͵, : Aah oF δ τ ἃ a 3 eae 
οἰκουμένην. ἐνταῦθ εμεινεν ἡμέρας τρεῖς" ἐν αἷς Ξενίας 
e 3 Ν ἈΝ / Μ Ν > “ » Ν Ν 3 
ὁ Apxas ta Λυκαια εθυσε καὶ ἀγῶνα ἔθηκε" τὰ δὲ ἄθλα 
9 δ val 20 , Ν Ν > ee eo \ a 
ἦσαν στλεγγίδες χρυσαῖ" εθεωρει δε τὸν ἀγῶνα καὶ Κῦρος. 
3 An > / QA 4 a, 7 , 
ἐντεῦθεν εξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας δώδεκα εἰς 
~ al 3 Ν , | / 2 / Ν rf 
Κεραμῶν ayopav, πόλιν οἰκουμένην, ἐσχάτην πρὸς τῇ Μυ- 
/ , 3 A 3 7 ‘\ “ 
σίᾳ χωρᾳ. Ub. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρα- 
/ , 3 of. / , >? ,ὔ 
σάγγας τριώκοντα εἰς Καὔστρου πεδίον, πόλιν οἰκουμένην. 
pov π μ 
2 npn? w+ e / / Ν a , > / 
ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἐμεινεν ἥμερας πέντε" καὶ τοῖς στρατιώταις ὠφεί- 
Ν / “Ὁ al - Ν / Ψ 3 Ν 
AeTO μισθὸς πλέον ἢ τριῶν μηνῶν, καὶ πολλάκις ἰόντες ἐπὶ 
ἈΝ ν 3 ’ ς Ν 3 / / Ν A 
tas θύρας amntovy. ὁ δὲ ἐλπίδας λέγων διῆγε καὶ δῆλος 
ῃ ¥ ay 7) 


3 ᾽ 7 ᾽ \ 3 Ν A ΄ , ¥ 
NV ἀνιώμενος" OU yep nv προς του Kupov τροπου EXOVTa 


6 Expedition of Cyrus the Younger. [Xen. 


NAS 7 3 ΝΥ 5) Wan ame) ΄ 
μὴ ἀποδιδόναι. 12. ἐνταῦθα ἀφικνεῖται Επύαξα ἡ Σύυεν- 
! ἈΝ ΝΥ / / \ A ΓΑ a 2 
νέσιος γυνὴ τοῦ Κιλίκων βασιλέως παρα Κυρον" καὶ ἐλε- 
4 r / / a δ 39 a 
geto Κύρῳ δοῦναι χρήματα πολλά. τῇ ovv oTpaTia 
/ ? / a Ν , a 3 Ν € 
τότε ἀπέδωκε Κῦρος μισθὸν τεττάρων μηνῶν. εἶχε δὲ 7 
rx ς Ν ᾿ Ν ϑ 
Κίλισσα καὶ φύλακας περὶ αὑτην Κίλικας καὶ Aorrev- 
/ ? Ν Ν , a A 7) 
δίους " ἐλέγετο δὲ καὶ συγγενέσθαι Κῦρον tn Κιλίσσῃ. 
ΕΞ > a 2 ΄ Ν ΄ , / 
43. ἐντεῦθεν δὲ ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο Tapacayyas δέκα 
>] 7 v2 3 7 3 a 5 ‘ Ν 
εἰς Θύμβριον, πόλιν οἰκουμένην. ἐνταῦθα ἣν παρὰ τὴν 
¢ / A r / 5. 8} 
ὁδὸν κρήνη ἡ Μίδου καλουμένη τοῦ Φρυγῶν βασίλέως, ἐφ 
- » / Ν ΄ fa) y / 3 
ἢ λέγεται Μίδας τὸν Σατυρον θηρεῦσαι οἰνῳ κεράσας av- 
7) > A 3 , \ ΄ ΄, 
τήν. 14. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρασώγγας 
/ > rn Λ 2 Ψ 3 a yy 
δέκα εἰς Tupiatov, πόλιν οἰκουμένην. ενταῦθα εμεινεν 
tal Ν / a ¢ Λ ΄ 
ἡμέρας τρεῖς. καὶ λέγεται δεηθῆναι ἡ Κίλισσα Κύρου 
᾽ A Ν 7, oo ly , ΓῚ ? 2 
ἐπιδεῖξαι TO στράτευμα αὑτῇ" βουλομενος οὖν επιδείῖξαι, 
2 / r 3 a / a ς ’ Ν a 
ἐξετασιν ποιεῖται ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ τῶν ᾿Ελληνων καὶ τῶν Bap- 
7ὔ ae Ν Χ “ ς 4 2 an 
Bupwv. 5. ἐκέλευσε δὲ Tous Edd vas, ws νομος αὑτοῖς 
ΕΣ / ed A Ν. A / b No 4 
ELS μάχην, οὕτω ταχθῆναι καὶ στῆναι, συντάξαι δ᾽ ἕκαστον 
δ A AVE Ly SLX J 3 Ni ES Ν 
τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ. ἐτάχθησαν οὖν ἐπὶ τεττάρων" εἶχε δὲ τὸ μὲν 
Ν rd Ν « Ν Shes Ν Ν oa ς ΄ 
δεξιὸν Μένων καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ, τὸ δὲ εὐωνυμον Κλέαρχος 
Ν e 3 7 N / wee. ὁ / 2 , 
καὶ οἱ ἐκείνου, TO δὲ μέσον οἱ ἄλλοι στρατηγοι. 16. εθεω- 
3 ε A = \ Ν / AS ,ὕ 
ρει οὖν ὁ Κῦρος πρῶτον μὲν tous βαρβάρους" οἱ δὲ παρὴή- 
, > N X , 3 N \ 
λαυνον τεταγμένοι KAT LAGS καὶ κατα τάξεις" εἶτα δὲ τοὺς 
7 ΄ 35,9 / z Ν ¢ , >»? 
Ελληνας, παρελαύνων εᾧ ἅρματος καὶ ἡ Κίλισσα ep 
¢ / 9 Pe ’ ’ “ Ν a 
ἁρμαμάξης. εἶχον δὲ πάντες Kpuvn χαλκᾶ καὶ χιτῶνας 
a Ν “ Ν 2 / 3 / 
φοινικοῦς καὶ κνημίδας καὶ τὰς ἀσπίδας εἐκκεκαλυμμεένας. 
5 Ν Ν , ͵7 , Ν « Ν A 
LY. ἐπειδὴ δὲ πάντας παρήλασε. στήσας τὸ ἅρμα πρὸ τῆς 
/ / / / Ν « / x Ν 
φάλαγγος μέσης. πέμψας Πίγρητα τὸν ἑρμηνέα παρᾶ Tous 
᾿ Ay Sle , DLs , Ne 
στρατηγοὺς τῶν EXdnvwv ἐκέλευσε προβαλέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα 
Ne to A /. N 7 e x a a 
Kal ἐπιχωρῆσαι ὅλην τὴν φάλαγγα. οἱ δὲ ταῦτα προεῖπον 
a "4 ΜΌΝ δι νῦν δ \ 
TOUS OTPATIMTALS* καὶ ἐπεὶ ἐσαλπιγξε, προβαλλόμενοι TA 


“ 8. 11} ᾽ \ , A Sis ‘\ »" 
ὄπλα ΕΠΏΕσαν. EK δὲ TOUTOU θᾶττον προιοντῶν συν κραυγῇ» 





AnaB. 1, 11] Entrance into Cilicia. 7 


A > y,? 7 »] 7 r lA 3 XV 
ἀπὸ TOU αὐτομώτου δρόμος ἐγένετο τοῖς στρατιωταῖς επὶ 
, a Ν , 7 Ν ἣν / 
Tas σκηνάς. 18. τῶν δὲ BapBupwy hoBos πολύς, καὶ ἣ τε 
2 oy 3 Bax A ς / ae Aut, A ? A 
Κίλισσα ἔφυγεν ἐπὶ τῆς ἁρμαμάξης Kat οἱ εἰ τῆς ayopas 
, LY » ¢ ν . ͵ 
καταλίποντες τὰ ὥνια εφυγον" οἱ δε Ελληνες συν γελωτι 
Ν ς \ /. 3 val Ν / 
ἐπὶ Tas σκηνὰς ἦλθον. ἡ δὲ Κίλισσα ἰδοῦσα τὴν λαμπρο- 
a x ͵ A 7 2 Ζ an δ 
τητα καὶ τὴν τάξιν τοῦ στρατεύματος ἐθαύμασε. Κῦρος δε 
Ny ; Ἄς , > \ ΄ , In 7 
ἥσθη τὸν ἐκ τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων εἰς τοὺς βαρβάρους φοβον ἰδων. 
2 a ? 7 \ rn , + 
19. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμους τρεῖς Tapacuyyas εἰκοσιν 
7 > / A / / 3 / > ad ΝΜ 
εἰς ᾿Ικόνιον, τῆς Φρυγίας πόλιν ἐσχάτην. ἐνταῦθα epee 
΄“ ¢ / 3 a 2 7 Ν A / 
τρεῖς ἡμέρας. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς AvKaovias σταθ- 
\ 7 7 7 7 Ν ’ὔ 
μοὺς πέντε παρασάγγας τριάκοντα. ταύτην τὴν χωραν 
3 / / A “ e / 3 
ἐπέτρεψε διαρπάσαι τοῖς EAAnow ὡς πολεμίαν οὖσαν. 


᾿ 3 a n bs 7. 2 Ν / ’ 
20. ἐντεῦθεν Κῦρος τὴν Κιλισσαν εἰς την Κιλικίαν atro- 


—— 
/ Ἂς 


/ e , Ν , [τ 7 
πέμπει τὴν ταχίστην ὁδον" καὶ συνέπεμψεν αὐτῇ στρατιω- 
᾿ , 5 \ ey A \ \ A » 
tas ovs Μένων εἶχε καὶ avtov. Κῦρος δε μετὰ τῶν ἄλλων 

3 7 Αι, / Ν / 7 
ἐξελαύνει διὰ Καππαδοκίας σταθμοὺς τέτταρας παρασαγ- 
y Ν / ~ ᾽ὔ / 5 / / 
yas εἰκοσι καὶ πέντε προς Aava, πόλιν οἰκουμένην, μεγα- 
Xr Ν ἮΝ / 3 70 yy ε / r " Φ 
ἣν καὶ εὐδαίμονα. ενταῦθα ἐμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς" εν @ 
A πον yo / 7 Ν 
Κῦρος ἀπέκτεινεν ἄνδρα Πέρσην Μεγαφέρνην, φοινικιστὴν 
/ Nee , c ς , / ? 
βασίλειον, καὶ ἕτερον τινα τῶν ὑπάρχων δυνάστην, αἰὐτια- 
/ ? ΄ ) A 3 A > a > 
σάμενος ἐπιβουλεύειν αὑτῷ: BH. ἐντεῦθεν ἐπειρῶντο εἰσ- 
΄ ᾿ \ / e Ν 9. ye eas Ν 
βάλλειν εἰς την Κιλικίαν" ἡ δὲ εἰσβολὴ ἣν ὁδὸς ἁμαξιτὸς 
3 , > a δι Οἕὲ , ? - ΄ y 
ορθια ἰσχυρῶς, Kal ἄμήχανος εἰσελθεῖν στρατεύματι εἰ TLS 
’ , 3 / Ν Ν / 3 > Sais.” A BA 
exwAvev.. ἐλέγετο δὲ καὶ Συέννεσις εἶναι ETL τῶν ἄκρων 
φυλάττ Ν 3 βολή 4 δ y+ c / > a sf 7 
ἅττων τὴν εἰσβολὴν" SLO ἐμειναν ἡμέραν EV τῷ πεδίῳ. 
a De , - yo / / N ” , 
τῇ ὃ υστεραίᾳ ἢκεν ἄγγελος λεγων OTL λελούπως εἰη YvEV- 
Ν yy > Ν ΓΥ͂ fod Ν / ¥ y+ 
veils Ta ἄκρα, ἐπεὶ ἤσθετο ὅτι TO Mevwvos otpatevpa ἤδη 
2 Κ λ / 9 ᾿ a 4. by Nie, , ¥ 
ev Κιλικίᾳ nv εἰσω τῶν ὁρέων, καὶ OTL τριήρεις ἤκουε περι- 
i aes / " / A Μ Ν 
πλεούσας at Iwas εἰς Κιλικίαν Ταμῶν ἔχοντα tas Aa- 
, \ 2 en ΄ κα > » Sie 
κεδαιμονίων καὶ αὐτοῦ Kupov. 22. Κῦρος δ᾽ οὖν ἀνεβη 


eS A ἢν» 3 Ἂς 7 Ν 3 Ν Ἂν e e 
ἐπὶ TA OPN OVOEVOS κωλύοντος, καὶ εἶδε TAS σκηνὰς OV οἱ 


ὃ Expedition of Cyrus the Younger. [ Xen. 


Λ 3 ΄ > an Ν , 5) y 
Κίλικες ἐφύλαττον. ἐντεῦθεν δὲ κατεβαινεν εἰς πεδίον 
/ Ἂς aa ? / Ν / an ΄ 
μεγα Kat καλον. ETLPPUTOV, καὶ δένδρων παντοδαπῶν σύμ- 

\ 2 7 ᾿ ἣν, Ν ͵7 Ν 7 ὟΝ 
πλεων καὶ ἀμπέλων" πολὺ δὲ καὶ σήσαμον καὶ μελίνην καὶ 
/ \ Ν Ν Ν 7, yf ὩΣ ἤν 
κέγχρον καὶ πυρους καὶ κριθὰς φέρει. ορος δ᾽ αὐτὸ περι- 
/ > Ν ali: Ν ΄, 2 , 2 ἃ 
eyel οχυρον καὶ υὑψηλον TuvTy εκ θαλαττῆς εἰς θάλατταν. 
Ν Ν Ν ΄ “ / Μ΄ Ν 
23. καταβὰς δὲ διὰ τούτου τοῦ πεδίου ἤλασε σταθμοὺς 
7, 7, / \ y > Ἀ a 
τέτταρας Tapacuyyas πέντε και ELKOTLY ELS Tapoous, τῆς 
7 , Ν 2 / > “ = Ν 
Κιλικίας πόλιν μεγώλην καὶ εὐδαίμονα. ἐνταῦθα ἧσαν τὰ 
/ / aA / / \ 7 \ 
Συεννέσιος βασίλεια τοῦ Κιλίκων βασιλέως " διὰ μέσου δε 
a / Can ἧς te “ 3 ΄ / 
τῆς πόλεως ῥεῖ ποταμὸς Κύδνος ὄνομα, εὕρος δύο πλέθρων. 
΄ Ν ͵ oped ἘΝ A \ 7 
94. ταύτην τὴν πολιν εξελίπον οἱ ἐνοικοῦντες μετὰ Συεννε- 
᾿ / 5 Ἂς > Ἂς Ν BA Ν «ς Ἃς rn 
σιος εἰς χωρίον OYUPOV ETL TA OPH, πλὴν οἱ Ta καπηλεία 
+ + be Ν « Ἂς Ν if τ a 
ἔχοντες " Emwelvav δὲ καὶ οἱ Tapa τὴν θώλατταν οἰκοῦντες 
> / χὰ ἀπ OE n Re ἢ / ΧΦ , 
ἐν Σόλοις καὶ ἐν Ισσοῖς. | 25. Επύαξα δὲ ἡ Συεννέσιος 
Ν ᾿ yz, / / gC / ? \ 3 / 
γυνὴ mpotepa Kupov πεντε ἡμεέραῖς εἰς Ταρσοὺυς αφίκετο " 
> Ν A ς r nr >) / “- >) ‘\ / / / 
ev δὲ τῇ ὑπερβολῇ τῶν ὀρέων τῶν ELS TO πεδίον δύο λο- 
a / / 2 / ¢ \ y 
you τοῦ Mevwvos στρατεύματος ἀπωλοντο" of μεν ehacay 
ς / / A ς Ν a / c Ἂς ¢ 
ἁὡρπάζοντάς Te κατακοπῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν Κιλίκων, ot δε ὑπο- 
‘ Ν ᾽ / ¢ a Ν yy , 
λειφθεντας καὶ ov δυναμένους εὑρεῖν τὸ ἄλλο στρατευμα 
sar Ν ¢ Ν > , > / 3 > 3 
οὐδὲ τὰς ὁδοὺς εἶτα πλανωμένους «πολέεσθαι" ἦσαν δ᾽ οὖν 
- τ Ν ς a ¢ 2. ἐϑν 2 Ἂ @ , 
οὕτοι ἑκατὸν ὁπλῖται. 926. οἱ ὃ ἄλλοι ἐπεί ἧκον, τὴν TE 
7 \ Χ , \ N ¥ a 
πόλιν tous Ταρσοὺς διήρπασαν, διὰ tov ὄλεθρον τῶν 
n >] / Ν Ἂ , Ν 2 SS ies 
συστρατιωτῶν οργιζόμενοι. καὶ Ta βασίλεια Ta εν αὑτῇ. 
re as ᾿ς 2 , > be / / Ν 
Κῦρος δε ἐπεὶ εἰσήλασεν εἰς τὴν πολίν, μετεπέμπετο TOV 
͵ Ν ς / ς > + / 2 7 
Συέννεσιν πρὸς ἑαυτὸν: ὁ δ᾽ οὗτε πρότερον οὐδενί πω 
7 ¢ A b) an 3 “ + 5, ,ὔ / 
κρείττονι EAUTOV εἰς χείρας ἐλθεῖν Edy, οὔτε τότε Κύρῳ 
7 BA Ν ξ ᾿ς aN yy Ν VA ἡ 
ἱεναι ἤθελε, πρὶν ἢ γυνὴ avtov ἔπεισε καὶ πίστεις ἐλαβε. 
Ν Ν nA ? Ν / > / (4 
27. μετὰ δε ταῦτα ἐπεὶ συνεέγένοντο ἀλληλοις. Συέννεσις 


μὲν ἔδωκε Κύρῳ χρήματα πολλὰ εἰς τὴν στρατιὰν, Κῦρος 


δὲ > 7 κ᾿ ἃ / Ν a 7 σ΄ 
ε εκείνῳ δῶρα a νομίζεται παρα βασιλεὶ TLULA, LRT © 


f \ Ἂς A / > ΄ 
χρυσοχάλινον καὶ στρεπτὸν χρυσουν καὶ ψελια καὶ ἀκινώ- 





Anas. 1, πα. Speech by Clearchus. 9 


A \ \ \ \ \ , / 
Knv χρυσοῦν καὶ στολὴν ]Π]ερσικην, καὶ THY χωραν pnKeTt 
> 7 Ἀ \ ¢ 7 ? ΄ ya > 
ἀφαρπάζεσθαι" τὰ δὲ ἡρπασμένα ἀνδρώποδα, ἣν που εν- 
/ ; ΡΟΝ 
τυγχάνωσιν, ὠὡπολαμβὰάνειν. 
Ἢ 70 yf Ko ® ¢ Ν e / ΜΝ 
IIT. vtav0a ἐμεινε Kupos καὶ ἡ στρατία ἡμερᾶς εἰ- 
. Ν a 2 + 7 A / 
κοσιν" οἱ γὰρ στρατιῶται οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι TOU πρόσω" 
¢ / Ν δ ok 4, 7 A ‘ 2 
ὑπώπτευον γὰρ ἤδη ἐπὶ βασιλέα ἰέναι" μισθωθῆναι δὲ οὐκ 
> Ν / Μ a Ν / Ν ς - 
ἐπὶ τούτῳ ἔφασαν. πρῶτος δὲ Κλέαρχος τοὺς αὑτοῦ στρα- 
4. e Ν 2 / Μ Ν Ν ς 
τιώτας ἐβιάζετο ἱέναι" οἱ δὲ αὐτὸν τε ἔβαλλον καὶ τὰ ὑπο- 
7 Ἂς, > / > \ + act / Ν 
ζύγια τὰ ἐκείνου, ἐπεὶ ἤρξατο προΐεναι. 2. Κλεαρχος δε 
͵7 \ Ν 9... Ν A dA >] 
τότε μὲν μικρὸν ἐξεφυγε μὴ καταπετρωθῆναι, ὕστερον ὃ, 
> ie Δ Py ? , ῃ , > 
ἐπεὶ ἔγνω OTL ov δυνήσεται βιάσασθαι, συνήγαγεν ἐκκλη- 
a A ω XN a N Ἵ / 
σίαν τῶν αὑτοῦ στρατιωτῶν. καὶ πρῶτον μὲν εδάκρυε 
Χ / ¢ / ς Χ ς κα 3 7 Ν > ͵ 
πολὺυν χρόνον ἐστως" οἱ δὲ ὁρῶντες εθαύμαζον καὶ. εσιω- 
Ν > Ν δ / ΝΜ cad XN 
πων" εἶτα δὲ edefe Torade. 8. Avdpes στρατιῶται, μὴ 
7 iA a / a a / 
θαυμάζετε OTL χαλεπῶς φέρω τοῖς παροῦσι πράγμασιν. 
᾽ Ν Ν , A 3 / / / > a 
ἐμοὶ yap Eevos Κῦρος ἐγένετο καί με φεύγοντα ex τῆς πα- 
ἦ ͵ x Seay, \ / ” / 
τρίδος Ta TE ἄλλα ετίμησε καὶ μυρίους ἔδωκε δαρεικοὺς " 


Ἂς uv 


\ -" ‘ Ν 2 ᾽ 7 3 Ν 2 > Ia 
ous eyo λαβὼν ove εἰς TO LOLov κατεθεμην ἐμοὶ αλλ οὐδε 


/ > 3 2 A ? / \ tal 
᾿καθηδυπάθησα, ἀλλ εἰς ὑμᾶς ἐδαπάνων. 4. καὶ πρῶτον 


\ Ν Ν A > / pel ees. “-- _.€ / 
μὲν πρὸς Tous Θρᾷκας ἐπολεμησα, καὶ ὑπερ τῆς Ελλάδος 
3 / >? ct rn > A / > XN >? / 
ἐτιμωρούμην μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν, εκ τῆς Χερρονήσου avTous εξελαὺύ- 

/ > a Ἂ > fal vA 
νων βουλομένους ἀφαιρείσθαι τοὺς ενοικοῦντας Ελληνας 

Ν A > ἈΝ ἊΝ A " 7 Ν e A > / 

τὴν γῆν. ἐπειδὴ δὲ Κῦρος ἐκάλει, λαβὼν ὑμᾶς ἐπορευό- 
σ“ Υ / > / b hea 3 > Ὁ 3 Κ 
μην, wa εἰ τι δέοιτο ὠφελοίην αὐτὸν avO ὧν εὖ ἔπαθον 

«ς δον." 7 3 Ν Ν - > ὕ / 
ὑπ εκείνου. 5. ἐπεὶ δὲ ὑμεῖς ov βούλεσθε συμπορεύεσθαι, 
- ΑΝ ὦ / ae ye A 7 A / / A 
ἀνάγκη δὴ μοι ἢ ὑμᾶς προδόντα τῇ Kupov φιλίᾳ χρῆσθαι 
x Ν Ἀν ae , ra Seer 7 > \ Ν 
ἢ πρὸς εκεῖνον ψευσάμενον μεθ ὑμῶν ἰεναι. εἰ μὲν On 

, r 2 3 ¢ ᾽ὔ > 3 nA \ 
δίκαια ποιήσω οὐκ οἶδα, αἱρήσομαι δ᾽ οὖν ὑμᾶς καὶ σὺν 
POE) 7 Ἃ / / \ x 5) A 2 \ ε ΡΝ 
viv ὃ τι ἂν δέῃ πείσομαι. καὶ οὔποτε ἐρεῖ οὐδεὶς ὡς ἐγὼ, 
@/ 3 Ν > ‘ 7 Ν ΝΑ 
Ελληνας ayay@v εἰς τους βαρβάρους, προδους τους E)- 


ληνᾶς τὴν τῶν βαρβάρων φιλίαν εἱλόμην. 6. add ἐπεὶ 


10 Expedition of Cyrus the Younger. [Xen, 


» a 3 \ 2 Ins / Jar vA Oe Ν 
ὑμεῖς ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἐθέλετε πείθεσθαι οὐδὲ ἕπεσθαι, ἔγω συν 


¢ “ “ἢ Ἂς Clee, “Ὁ / / / x ¢ a 
υμιν ἔψομαι καὶ ὁ TL ἂν den πείσομαι. νομίζω yap ὑμᾶς 


2 Ν 5 Ν / Ν ᾿ Ν , Ν \ 
€MOL ELVAL καὶ πατρίδα καὶ φίλους καὶ συμμάχους, καὶ συν 5 


(see ΤᾺ Χ x 3 3 / vA Ἃ x Ebay δὲ ¥ 
ὑμῖν μὲν ἂν οἶμαι εἶναι τίμιος ὅπου ἂν ὦ, ὑμῶν δε ἔρημος 
‘\ 2 “Δ ¢ ἈΝ “ 5 αν Λ > A Sf, 3» 
ὧν οὐκ ἂν ἱκανὸς εἶναι οἶμαι ovt av φίλον ὠφελῆσαι οὔτ 
x 3 Ν “τὰ ς 2 ΜᾺ ἄν αν, « x Sime 2 
ἂν ἐχθρὸν ἀλέξασθαι. ws ἐμοῦ οὖν ἰόντος ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς, 
Ν / yf n 4 € x “ 
οὕτω τὴν γνώμην ἔχετε. -. ταῦτα εἶπεν" οἱ δὲ στρατιῶ- 
“ ? ana ΄ Ses ey, A ? ΄ Ψ 
ται οἱ τε αὐτοῦ εκείνου καὶ OL ἄλλοι ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες, ὅτι 
> 7 Ν / 4 3 ’ὔ \ ‘ 
ov dain παρα βασίλεα πορεύεσθαι, ἐπήνεσαν" παρὰ δε He- 
7 Ν / / ΝΥ Λ vy Ν JA 
viov καὶ Πασίωνος πλείους ἢ δισχίλιοι λαβόντες τὰ ὅπλα 
Ν Ν 7 2 ΄ \ , 
καὶ τὰ σκευοφόρα ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο παρὰ Κλεάρχῳ. 
A Ν Τὰ > lal Ν ΄ / 
5. Κῦρος δὲ τούτοις atopav τε καὶ λυπούμενος μετεπέμ- 
\ / ς Slay ἧς 2 Μ , N 
meto Tov Κλέαρχον" ὁ δὲ teva μὲν οὐκ ἤθελε, λάθρᾳ δε 
a - / > A yf yf “-“ ς 
τῶν στρατιωτῶν πέμπων αὐτῷ ἄγγελον ἐλεγε θαρρεῖν ὡς 
/ Ce 9 Ν / / > 
καταστησομένων τούτων εἰς TO δέον" μεταπέμπεσθαι ὃ 
δεν Dy. Ἐν 2 > 2 " ΕΝ N \ Ps 
ἐκέλευεν αὑτὸν" autos & οὐκ edn ἱέναι. 9. μετὰ δε ταῦτα 
Ἂς νὴ ? ς a , Ν ἊΝ 
συναγαγὼν τούς @ ἑαυτοῦ στρατιωτας καὶ τοὺς προσελ- 
/ δα Ν = Υ Ἂς ͵ " ΄ 
θόντας αὐτῷ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων τὸν βουλόμενον. εἐλεξε τοιάδε. 
Ν a Ἂς x x ΄ A “ [4 Υ 
Ανδρες στρατιῶται, Ta μὲν δὴ Κύρου δῆλον ὅτι οὕτως ἔχει 
Ν Ἐν τας 7 Nee / Ν Ε] a yo \ ¢ a 
πρὸς ἡμᾶς ὥσπερ TA ἡμέτερα πρὸς EKELVOV' οὔτε Yap NMELS 
2 / Ε a 2 / ? / Cpt yo 
ἐκείνου ETL στρατιῶται, ἐπεί γε οὐ συνεπόμεθα AUTH, οὔτε 
> a Μ ἘΝ / f / > “ 
ἔκεινος eTL ἡμῖν μισθοδότης. | 10. ὅτι μέντοι ἀδικεῖσθαι 
Clare he. oP ik > Si ea N , 2 = 
νομίζει up ἡμῶν οἶδα" WOTE καὶ μεταπεμπομένου αὐτοῦ 
2 Ins 3 an ὌΝ Ν , ? / ἉΨ 4 
οὐκ ἐθέλω ἐλθεῖν, TO μὲν μέγιστον αἰσχυνόμενος OTL σύν- 
3 a / 3 rd i y+ Ἂς Ν 
οἰδα ἐμαυτῷ πάντα ἐψευσμένος αὐτὸν, ἔπειτα καὶ δεδιὼς 
me , / 2 a ® / e273) ey a A 
μὴ λαβων με δίκην ἐπιθῇ ὧν νομίζει ὑπ εμοῦ ἠδικῆσθαι. 
3 Ν 3 a > Jd 3 (er ΄ Ia? τ 
LL. εμοὶ οὖν δοκεῖ οὐχ wpa εἷναι ἡμῖν καθεύδειν οὐδ ἀμε- 
a Clataan α IA 2 N ΄ 7] \ ᾿ 3 
λεών ἡμῶν αὑτῶν, ἀλλὰ βουλεύεσθαι ὃ TL χρὴ ποιεῖν εκ 


΄ Ae. / 2 A / ¥ a 
TOUTOD. Kab ες TE MEVOLEV αὐτου OKETTTEOV μοί δοκεῖ 


4 Ψ 5 , ͵ x x aoe? ,ὔ ἐν 
εἰναι ὅπως ἀσφαλέστατα μενωμεν, εἰ τε ἤδη δοκεῖ ἀπιέναι, 


v4 4 / Μ \ of Ν b] / od. 
ὅπως ἀσφαλέστατα ἄπιμεν καὶ ὅπως TA ἐπιτήδεια ἕξομεν" 





ΑΝΑΒ. 1,11] Speeches by the Soldiers. 11 


” Ν 4 ¥ rn ¥ ’ ? ¥ ? 
ἄνευ yap τουτων οὔτε OTPATNHYOU οὔτε ἰδιώτου ὄφελος οὐ- 
τ ε Ν᾿ Ἀν. ἃ, A δ y Λ @N , 
δέν. _12.0 5 ἀνὴρ πολλοῦ pev ἄξιος φίλος w av φίλος 
3 ΄ ra ee, Ν “νὰ / > + N 
ἢ, χαλεπώτατος ὃ ἐχθρὸς wm ἂν πολέμιος ἢ. ἔχει δὲ 

͵΄ \ 2.9 Ν « Ν Ων ‘N \ 7 
δύναμιν καὶ πεζην καὶ ἱππίκην καὶ ναυτικὴν ἣν πάντες 
7] € a / Ν > / Ν Ν Ia 7, 
ὁμοίως ὁρῶμέν τε καὶ ἐπιστάμεθα" καὶ yap οὐδὲ πόρρω 
A / ? A A cd “ 4 Ψ 
δοκοῦμέν μοι αὐτοῦ καθῆσθαι. ὥστε ὥρα λεγεὺν O TL τις 

7 ¥ > A 2 Ν ? ͵΄ 2 
γιγνώσκει ἄριστον εἰναι. ταῦτα εἰπὼν ἐπαύσατο. 18. εκ 
Ν Ὡν » 7] ¢ ‘ > an 2 7 / 
δὲ τούτου ἀνίσταντο ol μὲν EK TOU αὐτομάτου, λέξοντες 
ἘΜΗ͂Σ, ΨΨΤΙ ε Ν Meee Our, F / 2 / > 
ἃ εγίγνωσκον, οἱ δὲ καὶ UT ἐκείνου εγκελευστοί, επίδει- 
7 ov ¥ ε > & Μ A 7 , Ν ͵7ὔ 
KVUVTES οἵα εἰὴ ἡ ἀπορία ἄνευ τῆς Κύρου γνωμῆης καὶ μένειν 
Ν 2 ΄ὔ i Ν Ν > 7 ἊΝ 
καὶ ἀπιέναι. 14. εἷς δὲ δὴ εἶπε, προσποιούμενος σπεύδειν 
ε ΄ ἣν 2 Ἀ ε 7, εν N 
ὡς τάχιστα πορεύεσθαι εἰς τὴν EdXada, otpatnyous μὲν 
Be is + « / ? Ν ΄ 7 
ἐλέσθαι ἀλλους ὡς ταχίστα, εἰ μὴ βούλεται Κλέαρχος 
5) , N ne , ME, 7 e Pip 23 <x hs > 
ἀπάγειν" τὰ ὃ επιτήδει ἀγοράζεσθαι" ἡ δ᾽ ἀγορὰ ἣν ev 
βαρβαρικῷ ἤματι" καὶ ζεσθαι" €dOo 
τῷ βαρβαρίκῳ στρατεύματι" καὶ συσκευαζεσθαι" ελθοντας 
Ν A 2 lal - ε 2 ΔΛ 35% \ Ν A 
δὲ Κῦρον αἰτεῖν πλοῖα, ws atom eovev: ἐὰν δὲ μὴ διδῷ 
A ς / 3 ἴω a “ ἊΝ ‘ A ’, 
ταῦτα, ἡγεμόνα αἰτεῖν Κῦρον ὅστις διὰ φιλίας τῆς χωρας 
ἰπάξει" | ἐὰν δὲ μηδὲ ἡγεμόνα διδῷ ἴττεσθαι τὴ 
ἀπάξει" ἷ eav ὃὲ pnde ἡγεμόνα διδῷ, συντάττεσθαι τὴν 
7 om t \ ‘ 7 « "ἔν 
ταχίστην, πέμψαι δὲ καὶ προκαταληψομένους τὰ ἄκρα, 
“ » / / a , ς / , 
ὅπως un φθάσωσι μὴτε Κῦρος μήτε ot Κίλικες καταλαβον- 
Φ \ Ν Ν / 2 > / 
TES, WY πολλοὺς καὶ πολλῷ χρήματα ἔχομεν aVYNpPTTAKOTES. 
@ Ν A 3 Ν Ν - / “ 
οὗτος μεν τοιαῦτα εἶπε: μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον Κλέαρχος εἶπε 
A rd Ν , ἄς ΄ Ν 
τοσοῦτον. 45. ὥς μεν στρατηγήσοντα ἐμὲ ταυτην τὴν 
/ Ν ς A / Ν Ν 3 - > aA 
στρατηγίαν μηδεὶς ὑμῶν λεγέτω" πολλὰ Yup Evopw δι ἃ 
> Ν a ? / ε \ a 2 © ak XK ¢/ / 
ἐμοί τοῦτο οὐ ποιήητεον" ws δε τῷ ἀνδρὶ ὃν ἂν ἐλησθε TeEl- 
® Ν , 6 INA «“ <1 3 3 , 
σομαι ἢ δυνατὸν μάλιστα, ἵνα εἰδῆτε ὅτι καὶ ἄρχεσθαι εἐπί- 
“ ΝΣ ΤΩ͂Ν , 2 hs x 
σταμαι WS τίς καὶ AdXOS μάλιστα ἀνθρώπων. 16. μετα 
a ΕἾ > FS 2 \ x Ν i A “ 
τοῦτον ἄλλος ἀνέστη, ETLOELKVUS μεν THY εὐήθειαν TOU Ta 
ce - nr Z 7 7, ἈΝ , ΄ 
πλοία αἰτεῖν κελεύοντος. ὥσπερ πάλιν tov στόλον Κύρου 
/ 3 Ν δε 6 oS yf ¢ ,ὔ Cy a Ν 
ποιουμένου, ἐπιδεικνὺς δε ὡς εὔηθες ELN ἡγέμονα αἰτειν παρα 


΄ e@ x / θ Ν a 2 de \ A e / 
τούτου @ λυμαινομεθα THY πρᾶξιν. εἰ ὃε καὶ τῷ ἡγέμονε 


12 Expedition of Cyrus the Younger. [ Xen. 


πιστεύσομεν ὃν ἂν Κῦρος διδῷ, τί κωλύει καὶ τὰ ἄκρα ἡμῖν 
κελεύειν Κῦρον προκαταλαμβάνειν; | a7. ἐγὼ yap ὀκνοίην 
N \ > \ r > / NPE 
pep ἂν εἰς τὰ πλοία ἐμβαίνειν ἃ ἡμῖν Soin, μὴ ἡμᾶς αὐταῖς 
a , / / > ἃ Te / ® ὃ / 
ταῖς τριήρεσι καταδύσῃ, φοβοίμην δ᾽ av τῷ ἡγεμόνι w δοίη 
«“ Vee AP 3 7 od 2 ε΄ + > r 
ἕπεσθαι, μὴ ἡμᾶς ἀγάγῃ ὅθεν οὐχ οἷον τε ἐσταῖι ἐξελθεῖν" 
/ > xX + 3 ᾿ς 7 a Bb, 2 
βουλοίμην δ᾽ ἂν ἄκοντος ἀπιὼν Κύρου λαθεῖν αὐτὸν ὠπελ- 
, \ > Tae 2 Sips hoktea = \ 
θων" 0 ov δυνατὸν ἐστιν. αλλ eyo φημι ταῦτα μεν φλυ- 
/ 3 ἊΝ / + > ,ὔ Ἂς a 
aptas εἶναι" 18. δοκεῖ δὲ μοι avdpas ἐλθόντας πρὸς Κῦρον 
“ 2 7 ‘ / 3 a 3 “ / / 
οἰτινες ἐπιτήδειοι συν Κλεάρχῳ ἐρωτᾶν εκεῖνον τί βούλεται 
con A ΝΙΝ Ν ¢ κ᾿ ἊΣ / “ 
ἡμίν χρῆσθαι" καὶ ἐὰν μεν ἡ πρᾶξις ἢ παραπλησία οἰᾳπερ 
Ἂς 7 > A rf / 7 Ν ¢ A Χ Ν 
καὶ πρόσθεν ἐχρῆτο τοῖς ἕενοις, ἕπεσθαι καὶ ἡμᾶς καὶ μὴ 
7 3 A 7 ΄ ΄ὔ ἮΝ 
κακίους εἶναι τῶν πρόσθεν TOUT@ cvvavaPavtwv: 19. eav 
XN / ¢ ἴω A / / pee / 
de μείζων ἡ πρᾶξις τῆς πρόσθεν φαίνηται καὶ ἐπιπονωτέρα 
5 9 / > a Χ / eon y+ \ : 
καὶ ἐπικινδυνοτέρα, ἀξιοῦν ἢ πείσαντα ἡμᾶς ἄγειν ἢ πει- 
/ \ ἢ ἌΣ ὅτ Ν εἰν αν ee id 
σθεντα πρὸς φιλίαν ἀφιέναι" οὕτω γὰρ καὶ ἑπόμενοι ἂν 
/ iar \ , ς γ΄ ΝΉ ΣΝ ᾽ 2 A 
φίλοι αὐτῷ καὶ προθυμοι ἐποίμεθα, καὶ ἁπίόντες ἀσφαλῶς 
ἂν ἀπίοιμεν ὅ τι δ᾽ ἂν πρὸς ταῦτα λέγη ἀναγγεῖλαι δεῦρο" 
μ pes γῇ Pe cn po 
LS A 2 9 ΄ Ἂς A 7. 
ἡμᾶς δ᾽ ἀκούσαντας προς ταῦτα βουλεύεσθαι. 290. eee 
a Nee Co Ἂ ΄ , 
ταῦτα, Kal ἄνδρας ἔλομενοι συν Κλεάρχῳ πεμπουσιν ob 
3 7 A Ν , A lal e > > 7 
npwtwv Κῦρον τὰ δοξαντα τῇ στρατιᾷ. ὁ δ᾽ ἀπεκρίνατο 
“ > ΄ 3 7 ΟῚ τε + 9. ἃ A > s 
ort ἀκούει Αβροκόμαν ἐχθρὸν avdpa ἐπι τῷ Ευφράτῃ πο- 
Bi. ΤΩ ΒΟ 4 ͵ / \ a 5 
τάμῳ εἶναι, ἀπέχοντα δώδεκα σταθμοὺς" πρὸς τοῦτον οὖν 
+ ,ὔ 3 - \ Ν 3 9 lal Ν / A / 
εφη βούλεσθαι ελθεῖν" κἂν μὲν ἢ Exel, τὴν δίκην ἔφη χρῇ- 
> aA > A Ν / ς “ 3 a \ A 
ζειν ἐπιθειναι αὐτῷ, ἢν de φεύγῃ, ἡμεῖς ἐκεῖ πρὸς ταῦτα 
͵ ᾽ , \ rn € ς ACLS 
βουλευσόμεθα. 31. ἀκούσαντες δὲ ταῦτα οἱ αἱρετοὶ avay- 
7 a 7 a \ [ὦ / x 3 / 
γελλουσι τοὺς στρατιωταις" τοῖς δὲ ὑποψία μεν ἣν ὅτι 
oo Ν / 7 Χο / as 
ἄγει πρὸς βασιλεα, ὅμως δὲ ἐδόκει ἕπεσθαι. προσαιτοῦσι 
δ θ 7 3 td Ὡς: A ς a ic /. ἊΝ , 
€ μισθον" ὁ δὲ cite τω, 1: esate) πᾶσε δωσειν 
οὗ πρότερον ἔφερον, ἀντὶ δαρεικοῦ τρία ἡμιδαρεικὰ τοῦ μη- 
νὸς τῷ ᾿ σνώνῃ; ὅτι δὲ ἐπὶ βασιλέα ἄγοι οὐδὲ ἐνταῦθα 
ἤκουσεν οὐδεὶς ἔν γε τῷ φανερῷ. 








AnaB. 1, 1v.] Arrival of the Ships. 13 


> a ’ 7 Ν ’ὔ , 
IV. ᾿Εντεῦθεν εξελαύνει σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας 
, ἄν as Ν / Ν Ὁ, τὰ be 9 / “ 
δέκα ἐπὶ Tov Ψάρον ποταμὸν, ov ἣν τὸ εὖρος τρία πλεθρα. 
aa 2 ΄ Ν / 7 / vee ἢ Ν 
ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγγας πέντε ἐπὶ τὸν 
τ Ν Ὁ \ 93 7 ᾿ κ > 7 
Πύραμον ποταμὸν, ov τὸ εὖρος στάδιον. ἐντεῦθεν εξελαύ- 
\ ΄ 7 / > 5) \ 
ver σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας πεντεκαίδεκα εἰς ἴσσους, 
A L 3 7 / 2 Ν al 7, 3 7 
τῆς Κιλικίας ἐσχάτην πόλιν ἐπὶ τῇ θαλωττῃ οἰκουμένην, 
Ν 2 / 2 A y+ ¢ / vad 
μεγάλην καὶ εὐδαίμονα. 9. ἐνταῦθα εἐμειναν μερας τρεις " 
Ν S A Ce? / A 4 Ν 
καὶ Κύρῳ παρῆσαν at εκ “Πελοποννήσου νῆες τρίωκοντα Kat 
RA Ni 5-349 ? r ΄ , ὃ / 
πέντε καὶ ἐπ αὑταῖς ναύαρχος [Πυθαγόρας Λακεδαιμόνιος. 
ΠΕ τ πος ? 5..} Ὁ Ἃ A Sue Tee) / Υ A 
ἡγεῖτο δ᾽ αὐταῖς Tapas Αιγύπτιος εξ Εφέσου, ἔχων ναῦς 
ee / UA Nd @ ? / " Ψ 
τέρας Κύρου πέντε καὶ εἰκοσιν, αἷς ἐπολιόρκει Μίλητον, ore 
/ /. 5 Ν / / ΄ 2 , 
Τισσαφέρνει φίλη nv, Kat συνεπολέμει Κύρῳ προς avtov. 
A τ Ν 7 ζ 2 Ν a rn 
3. παρὴν oe καὶ Χειρίσοφος Λακεδαιμόνιος ἐπὶ τῶν νεῶν, 
, nx ΄ « , x ς / e 
μετώπεμπτος ὑπὸ Κύρου. ἐπτακοσίους ἔχων οπλίέτας, ὧν 
3 , Ν 4 ¢ wt A c/ Ν »ἶ ΄ 
ἐστρατήγει Tapa Κύρῳ. αἱ ὃε νῆες ὥρμουν Tapa τὴν Κυ- 
, 2 A Ἀ ξ 2 3 / / 
pov σκηνήν. ἐνταῦθα καὶ ot παρ Αβροκομα μισθοφόροι 
, > 7 3 \ A / [ὦ rn 
"EXXnves ATOOTUVTES ἤλθον Tapa Kupov TETPAKOGLOL OTTAL- 
Ν 7 3 Ν / > an 2 
Tal καὶ συνεστρατεύοντο ἐπὶ βασιλέα. 4. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξε- 
4 Ν ivf 7 / Ps / A 
λαύνει σταθμὸν ἕνα Tapacayyas πέντε ἐπὶ πῦλας τῆς 
/ Ν A / 53 \ A Zz / \ 
Κιλικίας καὶ τῆς Συρίας. ἦσαν δὲ ταῦτα δύο τείχη. Kat 
Ν \ ~ « Ν A 7 } 53 Ν 
To μὲν ἔσωθεν τὸ πρὸ τῆς Κιλικίας Συέννεσις εἶχε καὶ 
/ Ν N Ν yy Ν a A / / 
Κιλίκων φυλακη, τὸ δὲ ἔξω TO προ τῆς Συρίας βασιλέως 
2 ,ὔ Ν 7 7 ἈΝ en 7 
ἐλέγετο φυλακὴ φυλαττειν. διὰ μέσου δε ῥεῖ τούτων πο- 
‘\ , yy 3 / e/ X \ , 
ταμὸς Κάρσος ὄνομα, εὖρος πλέθρου. ἅπαν δὲ τὸ μέσον 
A a 5 , rn N lal 2 > 7, 
τῶν τειχῶν ἦσαν στάδιοι τρεῖς" καὶ παρεέλθειν οὐκ ἣν Bias 
ς "ἡ id Ψ Ν Ν Ν 7 " Ἂς , 
ἣν yap ἢ πάροδος στενὴ καὶ Ta τείχη εἰς THY θαλατταν 
“ 7 > 2 ,ὕ 7 ZEN \ “ 
καθήκοντα, ὕπερθεν δ᾽ ἦσαν πέτραι ἠλίβατοι" ἐπὶ δὲ τοῖς 
τείχεσιν ἀμφοτέ : ὅλαι. ἢ ὅ. ταύτης ἕνεκα 
Χ μ ροις ἐφειστήκεσαν πύλαι. | 5. ης | 
a / a \ An / « ς / 
τῆς Tapodov Κῦρος tas ναῦς μετεπέμψατο, ὅπως ὁπλίτας 
3 , ΕΣ eer A an Ν , 
ἀποβιβασειεν εἴσω καὶ ἔξω τῶν πυλῶν, καὶ βιασάμενοι 


x 7 7 > , pea A / 
TOUS πολεμίους παρέλθοιεν, ευ φυλαττοίεν €7 tL TALS Συρίαες 


14 Expedition of Cyrus the Younger. [Xen. 


oN, Ψ 7 / € Ko Ν "AB / 
πύλαις, OTEP WETO ποιήσειν ὁ Kupos τον ροκομαν, 
“ \ ΄ 5) , \ 2 Pha ee 7 
ἔχοντα πολυ στρατευμα. Αβροκόμας δὲ οὐ τοῦτ εποίη- 
> 3 2 So a 2 / ay > / 
σεν, ἀλλ επεὶ ἤκουσε Κῦρον ev Κιλικίᾳ ovta, ἀναστρέψας 
? / N ͵ ΣῊ y ε Cee / 
ex Φοινίκης παρὰ Bacirea ἀπήλαυνεν, ἔχων, ws ἐλέγετο, 
7 7 A 3 a > 7 » ἢ 
τριάκοντα μυριώδας στρατιᾶς. 6. εντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει Sia 
/ Ν “ / / > / Ν 
Συρίας σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγγας πέντε εἰς Μυρίανδον, 
, ? / eS / BIR a , ? 7 
πόλιν οἰκουμένην ὑπὸ Φοινίκων ἐπὶ TH θαλάττῃ" ἐμπορίον 
> Ν / Nit) το δῶν e , , 
δ᾽ ἦν τὸ χωρίον καὶ ὥρμουν αὑτοθι ὁλκάδες πολλαί. 
>) “- > Μ ς Fi ¢ , Ν — / € 93 Ν 
7. ἐνταῦθ εμειναν ἡμέρας eTTas καὶ Βενίας ὁ ἄρκας 
ἈΝ Ν / ς x 5) / ’ ε 
στρατηγὸς καὶ Ilacwwv ὁ Μεγαρευς ἐμβάντες εἰς πλοῖον 
‘ Ν / yy 7 / > ΄, ς ᾿ς rn 
Kal Ta πλείστου ἀξια ἐνθέμενοι ἀπέπλευσαν, ὡς μὲν τοῖς 
/ 2 / / Ὡ Ν i 2 
πλείστοις ἐδόκουν, φιλοτιμηθέντες OTL TOUS στρατιώτας αὖ- 
an Χ \ / > 7 rd 2 / ΟῚ ἈΝ 
τῶν Tous παρὰ Κλέαρχον ἀπελθόντας ὡς ἀπίοντας εἰς τὴν 
¢ ΄ , Ν > % / By A A Ν / 
Ελλάδα tadw καὶ ov πρὸς βασίλεα eva Κῦρος tov Κλε- 
“ ἬΝ > x » 9 > an = , / r 
ἄρχον ἔχειν. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἦσαν ἀφανεῖς, διῆλθε λόγος ὅτε διω- 
> \ A , Ν ς Ν + ς Ν 
Kot avtous Κῦρος τριηρεσι" Kat οἱ μεν εὔχοντο ὡς δείλους 
yf > \ A e > ᾿ >) ξ 7 
ὄντας αὐτοὺς ληφθῆναι, οἱ 5 ῳκτειρον εἰ ἁλωσοιντο. 
A Ν / Ἂν Ν 5 > 
5. Κῦρος δὲ συγκαλεσας τοὺς στρατηγους εἶπεν. 4πο- 
/ a / Ν ͵ 3 3 > 7, 
λελοίπασιν ἡμᾶς Ξενίας καὶ Πασίων. αλλ ev γε μέντοι 
2 7, “ yo 2 / 53 Ν “ μ“ 
ἐπιστάσθωσαν ὅτι οὔτε ὠποδεδράκασιν" οἶδα γὰρ ὅπῃ οὐχον- 
͵ 2 / Μ ἊΝ / e/ ¢ al 
Tal’ οὔτε ἀποπεφεύγασιν" ἔχω γὰρ τριήρεις ὥστε ἐλεὶν 
A > if cr 2 Ν Ν Ν XN > Μ 3 Ν 
τὸ ἐκείνων πλοῖον: ἀλλὰ pa τοὺς θεους οὐκ ἔγωγε αὑτοὺς 
, Ind 2 a ? κ᾿ ¢ 3 Ἂς ec Ν 3) Ὁ a 
διωξω. οὐδ΄ ἐρεῖ οὐδεὶς ὡς ἐγὼ EWS MEV ἂν παρῇ TLS χρώ- 
> δ \ 5) ͵ ΄ NN \ > \ 
μαι, ἐπειδὰν δὲ ἀπιέναι βούληται, συλλαβὼν Kal αὑτους 
a a Ἂς Ν , 2 a 3 \ ae 
κακῶς TOLW καὶ TA χρήματα aTOTVAW. ἀλλα ιοντων, 
Ia / e/ / IN NE ayia A ae a Ne ae 7 
εἰδότες OTL κακίους εἰσὶ περὶ ἡμᾶς ἢ ημεῖς περί EKELVOUS. 
/ Μ 2 a Ν / Ν re 3 / 
καίτοι ἔχω γε αὐτῶν καὶ τέκνα καὶ γυναῖκας ev Τραλλεσι 
΄ > 3 ΘΝ ΄ὔ / >] > 3 
φρουρούμενα: αλλ οὐδὲ τούτων στερήσονται. αλλ απο- 
/ A / «“ Ν 3 Ν, > A Ν € 
λήψονται τῆς πρόσθεν ἕνεκα περὶ ἐμὲ ἀρετῆς. 9. καὶ ὁ 
δ a 9 € MF + Sy ΩΣ , 
μεν ταῦτα εἶπεν" οἱ δὲ Ελληνες, εἰ τις καὶ ἀθυμότερος ἣν 
Ν Ν > / 3 / Ν / 5 \ ¢/ Q 
πρὸς την ἀνάβασιν, ἀκούοντες τὴν Κύρου ἀρετὴν ἥδιον καὶ 


’ ΄ 
προθυμότερον συνεπορεύοντο. 


eS κυ ωι. τ νοῶ 


a ιν εὐ ἢ 


ΑΝΑΒ. 1, τν.1 Leal Object of the Expedition. 15 


\ a A > 7 \ / 
Mera ταῦτα Κῦρος εξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τέτταρας παρα- 
΄ ΕΙΣ 3 Ν Ν / Ν xy Ν s 
σάγγας εἰκοσιν ἐπὶ tov Χαλον ποταμὸν, ὄντα τὸ Evpos 
/ U4 9.5 ΄ ΄ \ / \ « 
πλέθρου, πλήρη ὃ χθύων μεγάλων καὶ πραέων, οὺς οἱ 
, \ ta ty N > rn 2 ” 2 ΩΝ ᾿ 
Σύροι θεοὺς evoutlov καὶ ἀδικειν οὐκ εἴων. οὐδὲ τὰς περι- 
[ id X ἴω > - ? / / 3 
otepas. αἱ δὲ κῶμαι εν αἷς ἐσκήνουν Παρυσάτιδος ἦσαν, 
> , / > a 3 / Ν 
εἰς ζωνην δεδομέναι. 10. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς 
4 7 ’ 2 2S Ν Ν a / 
πέντε παρασάγγας τριώκοντα ETL τὰς πηγᾶς τοῦ AupdaTos 
A - Ν 3 / 3 A 3 bs / 
ποταμοῦ, οὗ TO εὖρος πλέεθρους ἐνταῦθα ἦσαν ta Βελέ- 
Λ A / SYA Ν ΄, , 
συος βασίλεια τοῦ Συρίας ἀρξαντος, καὶ παράδεισος πάνυ 
/ \ Ν y 7 «“ - z a > 
μέγας καὶ καλος, ἔχων TuvTa ὅσα ὡραι φύουσι. Κῦρος ὃ 
Fs Je, f \ \ / / > A 
avtov ἐξέκοψε καὶ τὰ βασίλεια κατέκαυσεν. LE. εντεῦθεν 
3 / XN A / / > Ν 
ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς τρεῖς παρασάγγας πεντεκαίδεκα ἐπὶ 
N 2 7 N 4 ᾿ς 3 ᾽ , 
tov Ευφράτην ποταμὸν, ὄντα τὸ εὖρος τεττάρων σταδίων" 
Ν / ? / > “ , \ 2 / ἦν, 
καὶ πόλις αὐτόθι ὠκεῖτο μεγάλη καὶ εὐδαίμων Θάψακος 
4 χ 9 “ Μ ς / Fo Ν A 
Baas ἐνταῦθα εμειναν ἡμερᾶς πέντε" και Κῦρος μετα- 
, ᾿ \ Ν a ¢ , Υἷ “ ¢ 
πεμψώωμενος TOUS στρατηγους τῶν Ελλήνων ελεγεν OTL ἢ 
ear 4 ἣν , / > a \ 
δος ἔσοιτο πρὸς βασιλέα μέγαν εἰς Βαβυλῶνα: καὶ κε- 
/ ? \ 7 A ἐξ , Yo , 
λεύειν αὐτους λέγειν ταῦτα τοῖς στρατιωταῖς καὶ ἀναπείθειν 
vf ε Ν 7, 3 / 2 ᾽ὔ 
ἕπεσθαι. 12. οἱ δὲ ποιήσαντες ἐκκλησίαν ἀπήγγελλον 
κ᾿ € as : a 2 / - a \ 
ταῦτα" οἱ δε στρατιῶται ἐχαλέπαινον τοῖς στρατηγοῖς, καὶ 
> > Ν /. a > b) 7 / Ν ? Μ» 
εφασαν αὑτοὺς πάλαι ταῦτ᾽ εἰδοτας κρύπτειν, καὶ οὐκ ἔφα- 
= al oN , 2 cr / A «“ a 
σαν ἱέναι, ἐαν μὴ TIS αὑτοῖς χρήματα διδῷ, ὥσπερ τοῖς 
/ Ν , > A ἈΝ Ν fd A / 
προτεροίς μετα Kupov αναβᾶσι παρὰ tov πατέρα τοῦ Kv- 
Ν A > 5} Ἂς 7 eee > ἣν A A 
βου, και ταυτὰ οὐκ ἐπὶ μάχην LOVTWY, ἀλλα καλουντος TOU 
Ν Ko 13 A e ‘\ Ko > , Χ, 
πατρὸς Κύρον. . ταῦτα οἱ στρατηγοὶ Κύρῳ απηγγελ- 
« A / > Ν ς ri , / ? / 
λον" ὁ δ᾽ ὑπέσχετο ἀνδρὶ ἑκάστῳ δώσειν πέντε ἀργυρίου 
A aN ᾽ A 7 . Ν N 2 a 
μνᾶς ἐπὴν εἰς Βαβυλῶνα ἥκωσι, καὶ τὸν μισθὸν ἐντελῆ 
΄ XN / τς τ 3 J Λ Ν 
μέχρι ἂν καταστήσῃ τους Eddnvas εἰς Iwviav πάλιν. τὸ 
Ν ἈΝ ‘ a "ὁ = 4 5 7 , \ 
μὲν δὴ πολὺ τοῦ ᾿Ελληνικοῦ οὕτως ἐπείσθη. Μένων δὲ, 
Ν A 3 / 7 ς ΓΚ A / 
πρὶν δῆλον εἶναι TL ποιήσουσιν οἱ ἄλλοι στρατιῶται, TOTE- 
“ / “Ὁ XK / Ν ς aA ’ὔ 
ρον ἔψονται Κυρῳ ἢ ov, συνελεξἕξε τὸ αὑτοῦ στρατευμα 
a a Μ Ἂς νῶν 7 = » PP 
Xepis τῶν ἄλλων καὶ εἐλεξε τάδε. 14. Avdpes, ἐών μοι 
“= A 


10 Expediion of Cyrus the Younger. [Xen. 


a + / Μ / a + 
πεισθῆτε, οὔτε κινδυνεύσαντες οὔτε πονήσαντες TOV ἀλλων 
/ 7 - ς \ / / 3 
πλέον προτιμήσεσθε στρατιωτῶν ὑπὸ Κύρου. τί οὖν κε- 

/ A a tal a od Ἐν 
evo ποιῆσαι; νῦν δεῖται Κῦρος ἕπεσθαι τοὺς Ελληνας 
5» ς / 3 Ν . ς ω A A εὖ > 
ἐπὶ βασιλέα" eyo οὖν φημι ὑμᾶς χρῆναι διαβῆναι tov Ev- 
7 Ν Ν A 5 7 ΒΨ “ 
φράτην ποταμὸν πρὶν δῆλον εἶναι ὃ TL οἱ ἄλλοι ἔλληνες 
? na / \ » ἣν / c/ 
ἀποκρινοῦνται Κύρῳ. 15. nv μὲν yap ψηφίσωνται ἔπε- 
ΕΑ bare 7 y 3 Υ a 5 / \ 
σθαι, ὑμεῖς δόξετε αἰτιοι εἶναι ἄρξαντες τοῦ διαβαίνειν, Kat 
« 7] 3 CAs if + A \ > 
ὡς προθυμοτάτοις οὖσιν ὑμῖν χάριν εἰσεται Κῦρος και ὡπο- 
A 2 / > yA XS Κι Δ \ 3 3 / 
δώσει" ἐπίσταται δ᾽ εἰ τις καὶ ἄλλος" ἢν δ᾽ ἀποψηφίσων- 
δ τὰν + ‘ «“ + ¢. Ss Ν ε 
TAL OL ἄλλοι, ATLLEV MEV ἅπαντες τουμπαλιν,. υμιν δὲ ὡς 
7 / / / Ν ᾽ 7 
μόνοις πειθομένοις πιστοτάτοις χρήσεται καὶ εἰς φρούρια 
Ν 7 , ἈΝ Χο 1 Ἃ / bey Ψ ς 
καὶ εἰς λοχαγίας, καὶ ἄλλου OUTLVOS ἂν δέησθε οἶδα ὅτι ὡς 
Λ / / 2 / an 2 7 ~ 
φίλου τεύξεσθε Κύρου. 16. ἀκούσαντες ταῦτα ἐπείθοντο καὶ 
/ x NY “ 3 / A 3 2 Ν 
διέβησαν πρὶν τοὺς ἄλλους ἀποκρίνασθαι. Κῦρος δ᾽ ἐπεὶ 


ἤσθετο διαβεβηκότας, ἥσθη τε καὶ τῷ στρατεύματι πέμψας 


A 3 > ἘΝ Ν > w+ 5 ay ¢ a > a “ 
Γλοῦν εἶπεν, Eyw μεν, ὦ avopes, ἤδη ὑμᾶς ἐπαινῶ" ὅπως. 


Ν SIE rn Deas 3 / 3 Ν , xX / A 
δὲ καὶ ὑμεῖς EME ἐπαινέσετε ἐμοὶ MEAT CEL, ἢ μηκέτι με Κύ- 
ς Ν Ν al 2 3 / / 
pov νομίζετε. ΕἾ. οἱ μὲν δὴ στρατιῶται ἐν ἐλπίσι μεγά- 
x x 5. > A / \ x a 
Aas ὄντες εὔχοντο αὑτὸν εὐτυχῆσαι, ενωνι δε καὶ δῶρα 
2a ᾧ' / a a Ν 7 / 
ἐλέγετο πέμψαι μεγαλοπρεπῶς. ταῦτα δὲ ποιήσας διε- 
/ XN Ν Ν y+ , ? a “ 
βαινε" συνείπετο δὲ καὶ τὸ ἄλλο στράτευμα αὐτῷ ἅπαν. 
N a 7 ἈΝ ἈΝ ? Ν 3 / 2 
καὶ τῶν διαβαινόντων τὸν ποταμὸν οὐδεὶς ἐβρεχθὴ ἀνω- 
/ a a Cas a A Ξε Ν Ν 
τέρω τῶν μαστῶν ὑπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ. LS. οἱ δε Θαψακηνοὶ 
Sd ec ? τς 3 - e Ν Ν / 
ἔλεγον OTL οὐπώποθ οὗτος ὁ ποταμὸς διαβατος γένοιτο 
δίνω, Ἢ Ν , 2 x / \ / ? " οἰῶν 
πεΐζῃ εἰ μὴ TOTE, ἀλλα πλοίοις. ἃ TOTE ᾿Αβροκόμας προΐων 
/ “ Ν A a In / Ν re 95 
κατέκαυσεν, ἵνα μὴ Κῦρος διαβῇ. ἐδόκει δὴ θεῖον εἶναι 
Ν rn ς A Ν Ν / ε / 
καὶ σαφῶς ὑποχωρῆσαι tov ποταμὸν Κύρῳ ws βασιλεὺ- 
3 a 5, / ἃς A / x 
σοντι. 19. ἐντεῦθεν εξελαύνει dia τῆς Συρίας σταθμους 
3 / / , A 2 5 a“ Ss Ἂς 
evvea παρασάγγας πεντήκοντα" καὶ αφικνουνται προς TOV 
ΧΩ 7 / 3 70 3 n ἣν Ν 
ράξην ποταμὸν. ἐνταυθα ἦσαν κῶμαι πολλαί, μεσταὶ 
7 Ν + 3 A +” εἶν rn NS 
σίτου καὶ olvov. ἐνταῦθα ἐμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς Kal ἐπεσι- 
/ 
τίσαντο. 


rite. 








ΑΝΑΒ. 1, v.] The Desert of Arabia. 17 


3 a 3 ’ \ A ᾽ / Ν ? , 
V. EvretOev ἐξελαύνει dua τῆς ApaBias, τὸν Εὐφράτην 
2 Ν ᾽ Aa Χ eZ / / 
ποταμὸν ἐν δεξιᾷ ἔχων, σταθμοὺς ἐρήμους πέντε Tapacay- 
/ Ν / >? / Ν a / > Ν a 
yas τριώκοντα καὶ πέντε. ἐν τούτῳ δὲ τῷ τόπῳ ἦν μὲν ἡ 
A / if ς ἊΣ Ὡ / 2 / Ν A 
γῆ πεδίον ἅπαν ὁμαλες ὥσπερ θάλαττα, ἁψινθίου Se πλῆς- 
> / \ + rie e/ x / “ 9 
pes* εἰ δὲ TL καὶ ἄλλο ενῆν VANS ἢ καλάμου, ἅπαντα ἦσαν 
/ heal: / . Ve~a Oe ees / 
εὐώδη ὥσπερ ἀρώματα" Sevdpov δ᾽ οὐδὲν ενῆν. 2. θηρία 
Ν ΄ r Μ + Ν Ν Ν ς 
δὲ παντοῖα, πλεῖστοι OVOL ἄγριοι, πολλοι δὲ στρουθοι οἱ 
, ἈΝ N Ν 2 / Ν , a Ν Ν 
μεγάλοι" ενῆσαν δε καὶ ὠτίδες καὶ δορκαδες" ταῦτα δε τὰ 
/ af ae: al δ ἢ 5." \ 5 ἮΝ + 2 / 
θηρία οἱ ἱππεῖς ἐνίοτε ἐδίωκον. καὶ OL μεν ὄνοι. ἐπεί TLS 
/ / if Ν \ “- “ Μ 
διώκοι, προδραμοόντες ἕστασαν" πολυ yap τῶν ἵππων ετρε- 
A Ν / 2 Ν / ¢ @ baa. 
ov θᾶττον" καὶ πάλιν, ἐπεὶ πλησιαζοιεν οἱ ἔπποι. TaUTOV 
2 / \ 2 3 r > Ν 7, Ce a 
ἐποίουν. Kal οὐκ ἣν λαβεῖν. εἰ μὴ StacTavTeES οἱ ὑππεῖς On- 
lad / \ Χ / - ς / 5 
ρῴεν διαδεχόμενοι. τὰ δὲ κρεα TOV ἁλισκομένων ἦν παρα- 
7 a > 7 ς ἢ 7ὔ Ἂς Ν 
πλήσια τοῖς ἐλαφείοις, ἁπαλωτερα Oe. 8. στρουθὸν δὲ 
2 N Υ « Ν , a ¢ / ee J / 
οὐδεὶς ehaBev οἱ δὲ duwkavtes τῶν ἑππεων ταχὺ ἐπαύοντο" 
Ἁ Ν 2 A / Ὁ“ Ν Ν / nr 
πολυ yap ἀπεσπᾶτο φεύγουσα. τοῖς μεν ποσὶ δρόμῳ, ταῖς 
> / A «“ ς / ), \ Ng Ser 
de πτέρυξιν αἴρουσα ὥσπερ ἱστίῳ χρωμένη. τὰς δὲ wri- 
x \ ? a 7 , ae N 
δας av Tis ταχὺ ανιστῇ, ἔστι λαμβώνειν" πέτονται γὰρ 
Ἂν “ / Ν \ ? , \ Ν 
βραχυ ὥσπερ πέρδικες καὶ ταχὺ ἀπαγορεύουσι. τὰ δὲ 
’ > r co 3 7 ἈΝ Ν / A 
κρεα αὐτῶν ἥδιστα ἦν. 4. πορευόμενοι δὲ διὰ ταύτης τῆς 
, ? A see N Ν 7, \ ἈΝ 3 
χώρας ἀφικνοῦνται ἐπὶ τὸν ωσκαν ποταμὸν, τὸ evpos 
An ᾽ A > , Say ΄ ¥y > 
πλεθριαῖον. ἐνταῦθα ἦν πόλις ἐρήμη μεγάλη, ὄνομα ὃ 
2 A 7 val > ed δ Ν a 7 / 
αὑτῇ Kopowtn: περιερρεῖτο ὃ αὕτη ὑπο τοῦ Macka κύ- 
3 en? 4 ς / r \ 3 7 
κλῳ. ἐνταῦθ εἐμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς καὶ ἐπεσιτίσαντο. 
> a > / Χ >] 7 / 
5. ἐντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει σταθμοὺς ἐρήμους τρισκαίδεκα Tapa- 
/ > , Ν > | , ἃ ᾽ =  'ἪἝ ἢ 
σάγγας evevnxovta, τὸν Evdpurnv ποταμὸν εν δεξιᾷ ἔχων, 
Ν > A " Ἂς / 2 / r - Ν 
καὶ ἀφικνεῖται ἐπὶ [IvXas. εν τούτοις τοῖς σταθμοῖς πολλὰ 
a ς 7 > , δον A 7 \ 3 7 5 τῶν 
τῶν ὑποζυγίων ἀπώλετο ὕπο λιμοῦ" OV γὰρ ἦν χόρτος οὐδὲ 
¥ ar , ? \ \ 4 / ε , CALAN 
ἄλλο οὐδὲν δένδρον, ἀλλα ψιλὴ ἦν ἅπασα ἡ χώρα" οἱ δὲ 
3 A ¥ Cea Scots ΝΞ ew \ 
ἐνοικοῦντες OVOUS ἀλετας TAA TOV ποταμὸν OPUTTOVTES καὶ 


κ > a 3 ee , <n 5 7 
ποιοῦντες εἰς Βαβυλῶνα ἢγον καὶ ἐπώλουν, καὶ avTayopa- 


18 Lxpedition of Cyrus the Younger. [ Xen. 


r Μ ᾿ Ν Ν / e r 2 4 
Covtes σῖτον ἔζων. 6. τὸ δὲ στρώτευμα ὁ σίτος ἐπελύπε, 
Ν / ? he ] Δ. a yA > a ? a , 
καὶ πρίασθαι οὐκ ἣν ev μὴ ev τῇ Avdia ἀγορᾷ ev τῷ Kv- 
A \ / 2 / ΝΥ 2 ᾿ς , 
ρου βαρβαρικῷ τὴν καπίθην ἀλεύρων ἢ αλφίτων τεττάρων 
/ Ν 7 , ς Ν 3 Ν Ν € 7 
σίγλων. ὁ δὲ σίγλος δύναται ἐπτὰ ὀβολοὺς καὶ ἡμιωβο- 
> / ¢ Ν / ’ ΄ > * ’ t 
λιον ᾿Αττικοὺς" ἡ δὲ καπίθη δύο χοίνικας ATTLKAS ἔχωρει. 
/ 9 > , ¢ a ὃ / 3 Ν 
Kpea οὖν ἐσθίοντες οἱ στρατιῶται διεγίγνοντο. ἢ. ἣν δὲ 
/ a a \ / ‘ ΝΜ ς 7 A 
τούτων τῶν σταθμῶν οὺς πάνυ μακρους ἤλαυνεν. ὅποτε ἢ 
ἃς 7 / / \ Ἂς / Ν , 
πρὸς ὕδωρ βούλοιτο διατελέσαι ἢ πρὸς χιλὸν. καὶ δὴ ποτε 
/ Ny A / ω ς κι / 
στενοχωρίας καὶ πηλοῦ φανέντος ταῖς ὦμαξαις δυσπορεύτου, 
5 ’ὔ a Ἂς - ον > ess 3 / Ν > 
ἐπέστη ὁ Κῦρος σὺν τοῖς περὶ αὑτον ἀρίστοις Kat εὐδαιμο- 
, τ᾿ + a Ἂς / / A 
νεστώτοις καὶ εταξε Ιλοῦν καὶ Iliypnra, λαβόντας τοῦ 
" A , Ν ἜΝ 3 N 
βαρβαρικοῦ στρατοῦ. συνεκβιβαζειν tas ἁἀμαξας. 8. επεὶ 
he ὃ / > a >a / a “4 5 A 3 ὌΝ 
ἐδόκουν αὐτῷ σχολαίως ποιεῖν, ὥσπερ ὀργῇ ἐκέλευσε 
\ Ν ΟΝ ‘ Ν / a 
τοὺς περὶ αὑτὸν Ilepoas τοὺς κρατίστους συνεπισπεῦσαι 
\ ς , y ἊΝ / aA > / 3 / 
τὰς ἁμάξας. “ἔνθα δὴ μερος τι τῆς εὐταξίας Hv θεάσασθαι. 
MY | ἈΝ \ A / «“ + “ 
ῥίψαντες γὰρ τοὺς πορφυροῦς κάνδυς ὅπου ἐτυχεν ἕκαστος 
ς Ν “ ed Ἃ ΄ Ν / ἊΣ ΄ 
ἐστηκῶς, ἵεντο ὥσπερ ἂν δραμοι τις περὶ νίκης καὶ μᾶλα 
Ν “Ὁ / A / \ ΄- 
κατὰ πρανοῦς γηλόφου, ἔχοντες τούτους TE TOUS πολυτελεῖς 
rn Ν Ν 7, >) / + Ἂν Ν 
χιτῶνας καὶ τὰς ποικίλας ἀναξυρίδας. ἔνιοι δὲ καὶ στρεπ- 
Ν ἃς rn Ν ὔ Ν ca Ἔν > 
TOUS περὶ τοῖς τραχήλοις καὶ ψελια περι ταῖς χερσίν" εὑ- 
\ N \ , ’ / ἢ \ N A = 
θυς δὲ σὺν τούτοις εἰσπηδήσαντες εἰς TOV THAOY θᾶττον ἢ 
e xX + 4 > / Ἂ € / Ὁ 
ὡς τις ἂν WETO μετεωρους ἐξεκομισαν Tas apak~as. 9. τὸ 
Ν ΄ A ) r Fe 7 A Ν eas 
de σύμπαν δῆλος ἦν Kipos ws σπεύδων πᾶσαν τὴν ὁδὸν 
Ν > / “ eee a od “ + 
καὶ ov διατρίβων ὅπου μὴ ἐπισιτισμοῦ ἕνεκα ἢ τινος ἄλλου 
> / b) / / “ X A Sf 
ἀναγκαίου ἐκαθέζετο, νομίζων, ὅσῳ μὲν θᾶττον ελθοι, το- 
/ 3 / ra an θ ¢ δὲ / 
σούτῳ ἁπαρασκευοτερῳ βασιλεῖ μαχεῖσθαι, ὅσῳ δε σχολαί- 
/ / / c , 
τερον, τοσούτῳ πλέον συναγείρεσθαι βασιλεῖ στρατευμα. 
Ν ὃ “ Ὧν 3 a / Ν A ¢ λέ 
καὶ συνιδεῖν ἣν τῷ προσέχοντι τὸν νοῦν ἡ βασιίλεως 
γον x ‘9 \ , Ne LS , 3 \ 3 a 
ἀρχὴ πληθει μὲν Ywpas Kai ἀνθρώπων ἰσχυρὰ οὖσα, τοῖς 
> , -- RS ν a , Ν , ἐν 3 
εμήκεσι τῶν ὁδῶν καὶ τῷ διεσπασθαι τὰς δυνάμεις ἀσθε- 


ἧς yA rs N 7) Ν a ΟἿ a ’ 
νης, εἰ τίς OLA ταχεων TOV πόλεμον εποίειτο. 0. περᾶν 





Anas.1,v.] Quarrel of the Greek Troops. 19 


\ a ᾽ , e ‘ Ν as 6 NE ee 
δὲ τοῦ Εὐφράτου ποταμοῦ Kata Tous ἐρήμους σταθμους ἣν 
> / Ν / + ‘ / > 7 
πόλις εὐδαίμων καὶ μεγάλη, ὄνομα δε Χαρμανδη" εκ ταύ- 
ἱ 5 γγο ὰ ἐπιτήδ δίαις ὃ f 
TNS οἱ στρατιῶται ἠγοραζον Ta ἐπιτηδεια, σχεδίαις διαβαί- 
2 / a 3 , 2, «ὦ 
νοντες ὧδε. διφθέρας ΕΣ Rigonige Kemae Hane STRAT NA 
χόρτου. κούφου, εἶτα aca γον, καὶ συνέσπων, ὡς μὴ ἅπτε- 
σθαι τῆς κάρφης τὸ ὕδωρ" ἐπὶ τούτων διέβαινον καὶ ἐλάμ- 
\ 92 , > 7 
Εν τὰ ἐπιτήδεια, οἶνον τε ἐκ τῆς βαλάνου πεποιημένον 
» \ 3 > 
Τῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ φοίνικος καὶ σῖτον μελίνης" τοῦτο γὰρ ἣν ἐν 
τῇ χώρᾳ πλεῖστον. ΚΑ. ἀμφιλεξάντων δέ τε ἐνταῦθα τῶν 
a , 
te τοῦ Μένωνος στρατιωτῶν καὶ τῶν tov Κλεάρχου, 
/ / 3 “ Ν A / ω oe κΑ 
Κλεαρχος κρίνας ἀδικεῖν τὸν τοῦ Mevwvos πληγὰς ἐνεβα- 
ξ Ἄν Ν Ν Ν ς a ie + > / 
Nev: ὁ δὲ EAOwY προς TO εαυτοῦ Pee ne eNeER ἀκοῦὺ- 
σαντες δ᾽ οἱ σπρασέοται ἐχαλέπαινον καὶ ὠργίζοντο! a ate 
τῷ Κλεάρχῳ. 113. τῇ δὲ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ Κλέαρχος ἐλθὼν ἐπὶ 
N / 
τὴν διάβασιν τοῦ ποταμοῦ καὶ ἐκεῖ κατασκεψάμενος τὴν 
> x ? / pets 5 Ν ¢ a Ν \ A / 
ayopav, apimmeves ἐπὶ τὴν εαυὐτοῦ σκηνὴν διὰ τοῦ Mevo- 
/ \ 5, 1} val Ν Tey A \ 
νος στρατεύματος συν Ολίγοις τοῖς περὶ avtov: Kupos δε 
yo : > > + ΄ A \ / 
οὕπω ἧκεν, GAX ETL προσήλαυνε" τῶν Se Μένωνος στρα- 
χω / / id 9 / / 
τιωτῶν Evra σχίζων tis, ws εἶδε Κλεαρχον διελαύνοντα, 
“ Ὶ A > / XN - Ἀ 3 »" τ BA Ν 
ῆσι /TN ἀξινη" καὶ οὗτος μὲν αὑτοῦ ἥμαρτεν: ἄλλος δε 
/ Res 3 \ = 7ὔ 
λίθῳ καὶ ἀλλος, εἶτα πολλοὶ, κραυγῆς γενομένης. 148. 
Ν / ? Ν ς a / x IAN 
de καταφεύγει εἰς TO ἑαυτοῦ στράτευμα, καὶ εὐθὺς παραγ- 
/ > VS Ν Ν ‘ ¢ / ~ A νῦν. 
γέλλει εἰς τα OTTAG* καὶ TOUS μεν ὁπλίτας AUTOU ἐκελευσε 
“ \ 3 / Ν Ν 7 ᾽ Sr aN XV 
μεῖναι Tas ἀσπίδας πρὸς Ta γόνατα Oevtas, αὐτὸς δὲ λα- 
. Ν \ a Ν ‘ e / A 9 Pra odie a 
Bov tovs Θρᾷκας καὶ τοὺς ἱππέας, ol ἦσαν αὐτῷ ἐν τῷ 
, / Ἃ ͵ / wee a 
στρατεύματι πλείους ἢ τετταράκοντα, τούτων OE OL πλεῖ- 
a ΕΣ a ᾿ς / « > 3 / 
otot Θρᾷκες, ἤλαυνεν ἐπὶ τοὺς Mevwvos, ὥστ᾽ ἐκείνους 
2 A Ν Peas , Ν ’ > Ν \ “ὦ 
τ τλῆχθαι καὶ avtov Mevwva, καὶ mpENEEY ἐπὶ τὰ ὅπλα: 
οἱ δὲ καὶ ἕστασαν ἀποβοῦχτες τῷ πράγματι. ΝΠ 4. οὐδὲ 
Τρόξενος, ἔ ἔτυχε γὰρ Ἵ τεβῆ: προσιὼν. καὶ ase αὐτῷ ἕπο- 


μένη τῶν ὁπλιτῶν, εὐθὺς οὖν εἰς τὸ μέσον ἀμφοτέρων a ἄγων 


20 Expedition of Cyrus the Younger. [Xen. 


x κ / aan Yt ΝΥ , Ν a A 
ἔθετο Ta ὅπλα Kal ἐδεῖτο τοῦ Κλεάρχου μὴ ποιεῖν ταῦτα. 
᾽ / / > lad 3 / / A 
ὁ δ᾽ ἐχαλέπαινεν ὅτε αὐτοῦ ὀλίγου δεήσαντος καταλευσθῆ- 
7 / Ν ς a , Peay eK / Dias > a 
vat πράως λέγοι TO αὑτοῦ πάθος, ἐκέλευσε TE AUTOV εκ TOU 
/ Ig/ > ‘ Me / Ἂς a Ἂν 
μέσου ἐξίστασθαι. 15. ἐν TovT@ δὲ ἐπῆει καὶ Kupos καὶ 
> 7 Ν a Ln Vos Dee OP: Ν Ν ᾽ Ν 
ἐπύθετο τὸ πρᾶγμα" εὐθὺς δ᾽ εἐλαβε τὰ παλτὰ εἰς τᾶς 
a Ν \ rn a a a - 3 / i) 
χεῖρας καὶ σὺν τοῖς παροῦσι τῶν πιστῶν ἧκεν ἐλαύνων εἰς 
Ν ‘ Ν / / / Ἂν 7 ν 
τὸ μέσον, καὶ λέγει τὰδε. 16. Kreapye καὶ ]Π]ροξενε καὶ 
ς / ¢/ 2 + vA a 2 
οἱ ἄλλοι οἱ παρόντες Ελληνες, οὐκ στε ὃ τι ποιεῖτε. εἰ 
7 3 7 / / / > an a 
yap τινα ἀλλήλοις μαχην συνάψετε, νομίζετε EV τῇδε τῇ 
ς 7 ? / / hele A 3 Nice “ὦ 
ἡμέρᾳ EME TE κατακεκόψεσθαι Kal ὑμᾶς οὐ πολὺ ἐμοῦ ὕστε- 
A Ν a e / >? / / Ξε \ 
ρον" κακῶς γὰρ τῶν NMETEPOV ἐχόντων πᾶντες οὔτοι οὺς 
con / “4 ¢ “ yy A Ν 
ὁρᾶτε βάρβαροι πολεμιώτεροι ἡμῖν ἔσονται τῶν Tapa βασι- 
A S57 3 7 A ε / 3 ς Weer 
het ὄντων. LY. ἀκούσας ταῦτα o KXeapyos ἐν eavtw eyeve- 
Ν / > / Ν fi + \ ὧ 
το" καὶ παυσάμενοι ἀμφότεροι κατὰ Ywpav εθεντο Ta ὅπλα. 
3 a tA 2 / δὴ “ Ν , 
VI. ᾿Εντεῦθεν προϊοντων εφαίνετο ἐχνὴ ἵππων καὶ κο- 
Bilas ? 9 ε if ς / “ 
προς" εἰκάζετο δ᾽ εἶναι ὁ στιβος ὡς δισχιλίων ἵππων. 
Ὁ ἰδ, + Ν XN Ν yy + / 
οὗτοι προΐοντες EKAOV καὶ χίλον καὶ εἰ TL AAO χρησιμον © 
5 ᾽ 7 Ν / Daas / Ἅ a 
ἣν. ᾿᾽Ορόντας de Ilepons ἀνὴρ, yever τε προσήκων βασιλεῖ 
Ν Ν / ͵ ? ie 2 of a ? 
Kal τὰ πολέμια λεγόμενος ἐν τοὺς ἀρίστοις ]]ερσῶν, επι- 
Ν / , Ν 1m 
βουλεύει Κύρῳ, καὶ πρόσθεν πολεμήσας καταλλαγεὶς δε. 
e / 5 > Ἄν ΤΑ / € / / Ψ = 
2. οὗτος Κύρῳ εἶπεν. εἰ αὐτῷ δοίη immeas χιλίους, OTL τοὺς 
, ε 7 Ἃ ͵ \ 3 ͵ ΕἾ A 
προκατακάοντας ἵππέας ἢ κατακάνοι ἂν Evedpevaas ἢ ζῶν- 
Ν ϑ' τα A Ν 7 a / τὶ ,ὔ 
τας πολλους αὕτων EXOL καὶ κωλύυσείε TOU KAELW ETLOVTAS, 
Ν 7 e/ , ΄ > Ν IA / Ν 
καὶ ποιήσειεν ὥστε μήποτε δύνασθαι αὐτοὺς ἰδοντας τὸ 
/ / nr - al XN / ’ / 
Κύρου στράτευμα βασιλεῖ διαγγεῖλαι. τῷ de Κύρῳ axov- 
A Ia? ee 5 ὙΠΟ 2 ἃ 
σαντι ταῦτα ἐδόκει ὠφελιμα εἶναι, καὶ εκελευσεν αὕτον 
/ / > ΟΝ a ¢ / ς > 
λαμβάνειν μέρος Tap ἑκάστου τῶν ἡγεμόνων. 8. ὁ ὃ 
3 / / ς / 3 δὺν ΠΑ Ν € / / 
Οροντας, νομίσας ετοίμους εἶναι αὐτῷ τοὺς LTTEAas, γραφεῖ 
> ἈΝ \ , 7 / yx ε / td Ἃ 
ἐπιστολὴν παρὰ βασίλεα Ort ἧξοι ἔχων ὑππεας ὡς ἂν 
δύ / 3 Ν / “ € a e a 3 
ὕνηται πλείστους" αλλα φράσαι τοῖς εαυὐτοῦ LmaTEevoW 
ΚΞ, 


are it ς / 2A ¢ / ; Md | \ 3 , 
ἐκέλευεν ὡς φίλιον αὐτὸν ὑποδέχεσθαι. ἐνῆν δὲ ἐν τ 


Ὁ 





Anas. 1, VI] Trial of Orontas. 21 


a Ν a , / ΄ , Ν ͵ 
ἐπιστολῇ καὶ τῆς προσθεν φιλίας ὑυπομνηματα και πίστεως. 
Ν > Ν / a > Ν e 4 ec Ν 
ταύτην τὴν ἐπιστολὴν δίδωσι πιστῷ avdpl, ὡς φετο" ὁ δε 
r ! / > Χ ‘i. > Ἂς ΄ val 
λαβὼν Κύρῳ δίδωσιν. 4. ἀναγνοὺς δὲ αὐτὴν ὁ Kupos συλ- 
,ὔ 3 / Ν “ > x ¢ a Ν 
λαμβάνει Opovtav, καὶ συγκαλεῖ εἰς τὴν EavTOV σκηνὴν 
» > ae a Ν Fs ¢ Ν ‘ Ν “-“ 
Πέρσας τοὺς ἀρίστους τῶν περὶ αὑτὸν ETA, καὶ TOUS τῶν 
, \ 3 / ¢ / 3 a / 
“Ελλήνων στρατηγους ἐκέλευεν ὁπλίτας ἀγαγειν, TOUTOUS 
\ , nee 4 Na a Pal: ; Η δὲ ας 
δὲ θέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα περὶ την αὑτοῦ σκηνην. οἱ ὃε ταῦυτα 
’ 4 3 / ¢e if. ¢ / / 
ἐποίησαν, ayayovTes WS τρισχιλίους ὁπλίτας. 3 Κλε- 
\ ey 7 7 “ Ν oo 
apxov δὲ καὶ εἰσω παρεκάλεσε σύμβουλον, OS YE καὶ αὐτῷ 
\ any Ts A / A c , 
καὶ τοῖς ANAOLS EOOKEL προτιμηθῆναι μάλιστα τῶν Ελλη- 
> Ν ? > A ? / a / x / 
νων. emer ὃ ἐξῆλθεν, eEnyyere τοῖς φίλοις THY κρίσιν 
> τ, 4 e 3 , >? ω 3 7 > Μ δὲ 
τοῦ Opovta ὡς ἐγένετο" οὐ yap ἀπόρρητον ἣν. εφη ὃε 
a yf an / e / e A ΝΜ 
Κύρον apyew τοῦ λογου ὧδε. 16. Παρεκάλεσα υμᾶς, av- 
/ a \ con , Ψ 7 7 > 
Spes φίλοι, ὅπως σὺν ὑμῖν βουλευόμενος, 6 Tb δίκαιὸν ἐστι 
Ν Ν rn \ Ν > / A , \ 
καὶ πρὸς θεῶν καὶ πρὸς ἀνθρώπων. τοῦτο πράξω περὶ 
3 7 J “-“ ᾿ς a Ν et ie Ν 
Opovtov tovtovi. τοῦτον γὰρ πρῶτον μὲν O ἐμὸς πατὴρ 
x ¢ ΄ > 2 / δ Ν Ν Ν ς Μ ΩΝ 
ἔδωκεν ὑπήκοον εἶναι, ἐμοί" ἐπεὶ δὲ ταχθεὶς. ὡς ἔφη αὐτὸς, 
ς Ν a 3 A 2 A e 2 / 3 Ἂν αν Ἀ > 
ὕπο TOU εμοῦ ἀδελφοῦ οὗτος ἐπολέμησεν ἐμοί ἔχων τὴν ἐν 
/ >? 7 Ν > Ν Ψι cr > / 
Σάρδεσιν ἀκρόπολιν καὶ ἐγὼ αὑτὸν προσπολεμῶν ἐποίησα 
“ / ΄ A Ν TEN ΄ ΄ Υ x 
@ote δόξαι τούτῳ TOU πρὸς ἐμὲ πολέμου παύσασθαι Kat 
\ + Ἂν" ΑΓ Ν A x 59? 7, 
δεξιὰν ἐλαβον καὶ ἔδωκα, 7%. μετὰ ταῦτα, Edn, ὦ Οροντα, 
A d 50 > / «“ oS / Ν ε 
ἔστιν ὃ τί σε ἠδίκησα; ἀπεκρίνατο ὅτι οὐ. πάλιν δε ὁ 
a > , 2 a d ξ δὲν Ὁ Ν ¢e a 
Κῦρος npwta, Ουκοῦν ὕστερον. ws αὑτὸς au ομολογεῖς 
Jar ea: 3 3 A τ Ξ 2 Ν b) Ν - 
οὐδὲν ὑπ εμοῦ αδικούμενος, ἀποστὰς εἰς Mucous κακῶς 
> / Ν Σ Ν , [2 >] 7 A adie ’ὔ 2 
ἐποίεις τὴν ἐμὴν χώραν ὃ τι ἐδύνω; Edn ὁ Ορόντας. Ov- 
a yy ¢ A e | se > ἐν x a / 
κοῦν, ebn ὁ Κῦρος, orot av ἔγνως την σεαυτοῦ δύναμιν, 
>. Ν PAS x A 3 / Ν / / 
ἐλθὼν ἐπὶ τὸν τῆς Ἀρτέμιδος βωμὸν μεταμέλειν TE σοι 
>” \ SAN \ , ” , \ »” 
εἐφησθα καὶ πείσας ἐμὲ πιστὰ πάλιν ἐδωκας μοι καὶ ελαβες 
οὐ A Ἧς An? ¢ , ee , ud his 
παρ ἐμοῦ; καὶ ταῦθ ὡμολόγει ὁ Opovtas.\ 8. Ti ovr, 
x” ε A 5) \ Cy ass AeA N , Ls ΄ὕ 
epn ὁ Κῦρος, ἀδικηθεὶς ὑπ ἐμοῦ νῦν τὸ τρίτον ἐπιβουλεύων 


Ν / > , X a3 , «“ Ia 
pot avepos γέγονας ; εἰπόντος δε τοῦ Οροντα ott οὐδεν 


22 Expedition of Cyrus the Younger. [ Xen. 


3 Ν , e A b ae ε a 3 ΟΥ̓ 
ἀδικηθεὶς, ἠρώτησεν ὁ Κῦρος αὐτὸν, Oporoyers οὖν περὶ 
> yy A i Ν 3 7 + ee » 
ἐμὲ ἄδικος γεγενῆσθαι; ᾿Η yap ἀνάγκη, epn ὁ Upovtas. 
3 / / ᾽ , € ο » 3 Ἃ ὔ 
ἐκ τούτου πάλιν ἠρώτησεν ὁ Κῦρος, ἔτι οὖν ἂν γένοιο 
aA 2 A > a / > Ν Ν ,ὔ οὐ 7 ς XN 
τῷ ἐμῷ ἀδελφῷ πολέμιος, ἐμοὶ δὲ φίλος καὶ πιστὸς; ὁ δὲ 
3 / A Io? ? / 3 a / > + 
ἀπεκρίνατο OTL οὐδ᾽ εἰ γενοίμην, ὦ Kupe, cot y av ποτε 
Ν fal a 3 r al ¢ 
ἔτι δόξαιμι. 9. πρὸς ταῦτα Κῦρος εἶπε τοῖς παροῦσιν, O 
ἃ, Ν A ‘ / A Ν / ς an Ν 
μὲν ἀνὴρ τοιαῦτα μὲν πεποίηκε, τοιαῦτα δὲ λέγει" ὑμῶν δε 
Ν a 3 7 / 3 / / «“ a 
σὺ πρῶτος, ὦ Κλέαρχε, ἀπόφηναι yrounv ὃ τι cou δοκεῖ. 
Ν 3 ὧν 3 x “ x A 
Κλέαρχος δὲ εἶπε τάδε. Συμβουλεύω eyw τον ἄνδρα τοῦ- 
ἧς, al ς “4 ¢ / / lal 
Tov ἐκποδὼν ποιεῖσθαι ws τώχιστα, ὡς μηκέτι δέῃ τοῦτον 
, 2 Ν ἃς 5 ξ r Ν Ν a 3 
φυλάττεσθαι, ἀλλὰ σχολὴ ἢ ἡμίν TO κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι 
\ ᾽ παν. ie 2 3 A Be ΄ Ν 
tous εθέλοντας φίλους τούτους εὖ ποιεῖν. | 10. ταυτῇ δὲ 
A ΄, + N Ai ey / ἊΣ Ν a 
τῇ γνώμῃ epn Kat τοὺς ἄλλους προσθέσθαι. μετὰ ταῦτα 
΄ ͵΄ " A , Sete | , BREN 
κελεύοντος Κύρου ἐλαβον τῆς ζωνης tov Opovtav ἐπὶ θα- 
7 / ἢ , ‘ -€ a 3 eae me 
νάτῳ ἅπαντες aVAaTTAYTES καὶ οἱ συγγενεῖς" εἶτα δὲ ἐξῆγον 
δ, ἢ - 7 - Ν Ν 3 3 N [72 ὔ 
αὐτὸν οἷς προσετάχθη. ἐπεὶ δε εἶδον αὐτὸν οἵπερ πρόσθεν 
4 , 7 / 2 / “ὦ 
προσεκύνουν, καὶ τότε προσεκύνησαν, καίπερ εἰδότες ὅτι 
> Ν 7 ΝΜ >) Ν Ν 2 ‘“ > ’ 
ἐπὶ θάνατον ἄγοιτο. ἈΠ. ἐπεὶ δὲ εἰς τὴν ἄρταπατου σκη- 
a) 3 , A "4 nr ΩΣ ἡ z. Ν 
νὴν εἰσήχθη τοῦ πιστοτωτου τῶν Κύρου σκηπτούχων, μετὰ 
A Μ A 3 , 7 , ee 3 , 
ταῦτα οὔτε ζῶντα Opovtav οὔτε τεθνηκοτα οὐδεὶς εἶδε πω- 
ar 4 > , > Ν Jas ” yy ‘ 
ποτε οὐδὲ ὅπως ἀπέθανεν οὐδεὶς εἰδὼς ἐλεγεν" εἰκαζον δὲ 
Μ / / x 2 Ν z 3 Cae , 
ἄλλοι ἄλλως" τάφος δὲ οὐδεὶς πώποτε αὑτοῦ εφανη. 
3 a 3 7 Ν A / 
VII, ᾿Εντεῦθεν ἐξελαύνει διὰ τῆς Βαβυλωνίας ota- 
Ν ΓΟ / , 5 ω n 7 aA 
θμους τρεῖς παρασάγγας δωδεκα. ev Oe τῷ τρίτῳ σταθμῷ 
A 2 / lal a « A 
Κῦρος εξέτασιν ποιεῖται τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων καὶ τῶν βαρβαρων 
2 aA / ‘ z 7 Tan ἂν . Ν 3 A 
EV τῷ πεδίῳ περὶ μέσας νύκτας" ἐδόκει γὰρ εἰς τὴν ἐπιοῦ- 
σαν ἕω ἥξειν βασιλέα ov , : ; ; 
ne ἀσίλέα σὺν τῷ στρατεύματι μαχούμενον 
tee od U Ἁ a > F φ e Zz 
καὶ ἐκέλευε Κλέαρχον μεν tov δεξιοῦ kepws ἡγεισθαι. Me- 
ἐν Ν Ν a 2 “ eS Χ Ν ¢ a 
νωνα δὲ τὸν Θετταλὸν τοῦ εὐωνύμου, αὑτὸς δὲ τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ 
διέταξε. 2. μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἐξέ 4 ) ἐπιούσῃ ἡμέ 
a pe Be ἣν ἐξέτασιν ἅμα τῇ ἐπιούσῃ ἡμέρᾳ 


ἥκοντες αὐτόμολοι παρὰ μεγάλου βασιλέως ἀπήγγελλον 





ΑΝΑΒ. 1, γπ.1 Magnificent Promises to the Greeks. 425 


7 Ν A / a a Ν 7 
Κύρῳ περὶ τῆς βασίλεως στρατιᾶς. Kupos δὲ συγκαλέσας 
\ Ν ἈΝ Ν a ¢ ᾽ὔ 
τους στρατηγους καὶ λοχαγους τῶν Ελλήνων συνεβου- 
4 Ἔ n ΝΥ Ν , fal A » & / 
λεύετο TE πώς ἂν τὴν μάχην ποιοῖτο καὶ αὑτὸς “ππαρῇνει 
4 , 3 Y “ 2 > , 
θαρρύνων τοιάδε. 8. 2 avdpes “Ελληνες, οὐκ ἀνθρώπων 
᾽ a , ΄ Ch a x ? \ / 
ἀπορῶν βαρβάρων συμμάχους vuas ἄγω, ἀλλὰ νομίζων 
2 7 Ν , κ᾿ , en 3 Ν 
ἀμείνους καὶ κρείττους πολλῶν βαρβάρων ὑμᾶς εἶναι, διὰ 
“- / “ SL Ὁ ΞΡ yo + ΡῈ 
τοῦτο προσέλαβον. ὅπως οὖν ἐσεσθε ἀνδρες ἀξιοι τῆς ἐλευ- 
/ Ὁ 7 ν»»ρ ¢ va) 3 Ν 2 / 3 Ν 
θερίας ἧς κέκτησθε καὶ ἣς ὑμᾶς eyw εὐδαιμονίζω. εὖ γὰρ 
Ν Ὡ Ν 3 / ¢ / ΕΥ > 9. @ Μ / 
boTE OTL τὴν ἐλευθερίαν ἐλοίμην ἂν avO ὧν EXO πάντων 
ΝΗ ἂν, / “ Ν Ν Ian > @ 
καὶ ἄλλων πολλαπλασίων. 4. ὅπως SE καὶ εἰδῆτε εἰς οἷον 
x 2A ἘΝ ἊΝ ΄ ‘ x \ A 
ἔρχεσθε ἀγῶνα, ὑμᾶς εἰδὼς διδαξω. τὸ μὲν yap TAH- 
\ Ν a a 3 / “Ὁ Ν a 2 7 
Gos πολυ, καὶ κραυγῇ πολλῇ επίασιν' av δὲ ταῦτα ava- 
4 ἈΝ ΕῚ ͵΄ / - “ ΣΝ , 
σχησθε, τάλλα καὶ αἰσχύνεσθαι μοι δοκῶ οἵους ἡμῖν γνώ- 
θε τοὺς ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ ὄντας ἀνθρώπους. ὑμῶν δὲ ἀνδρῶ 
σεσῦε τους ἐν τῇ χώρᾳ OVTAS ρ ς, | Up νὸρων 
“ Ν ΕΔ, ΄ 9S ea rix Ν Ν y 
ὄντων καὶ εὐτόλμων γενομένων, εγὼ ὑμῶν τὸν μὲν οἰκαδε 
/ 2 4 n 7 me ’ 2 a 
βουλόμενον ἀπιέναι τοῖς otxot ζηλωτὸν ποιήσω ἀπελθεῖν, 
\ \ 3 , Ν pied: 5:5 ἂς δι 3 Ν - 
πολλοὺς. δὲ οἶμαι ποιήσειν τὰ παρ ἐμοὶ ἐλέσθαι ἀντὶ τῶν 
Υ Ε a , Ν Ν ΄ὔ ὃς 
οἰκοί. 5. ἐνταῦθα Γαυλίτης παρὼν φυγὰς Σάμιος, πιστὸς 
Ν 7 5 Ν Ν 53 a / / 7 bs 
δε Κύρῳ, εἶπε, Kai μην, ὦ Κῦρε, λέγουσί τινες ὅτι πολλὰ 
τ “ cal Ν Ν | A 5 a 7 
ὑπισχνεῖ νῦν διὰ τὸ EV τοιούτῳ εἶναι τοῦ κινδύνου προσι- 
/ Ἃ he 3 / / \ ? / / , 
ὄντος. av δὲ εὖ γένηταί τι, οὐ μεμνησεσθαὶ σὲ φασιν" 
» Ν Ind >) as \ 7 7 ΝΥ > 
Evtot δὲ OVS εἰ μεμνῇο TE καὶ setae, δύνασθαι ἂν ἀπο- 
A Ὡ ς ~ 
δοῦναι σα ὑπο νει. 6. ἀκούσας ταῦτα ἐλεξεν ὁ Kupos, 
“AYN ἔστι μὲν ἡμῖν. ὦ ἄνδρες, ἡ ῃ ἀρχὴ ἡ πατρῴα πρὸς μὲν 
μεσημβρίαν μέχρι οὗ διὰ καῦμα οὐ δύνανται οἰκεῖν ἄνθρω- 
᾿ ἘΝ ἘΝ / st Ν [οὶ \ 3503 ΄ 
Mot, πρὸς δε ἄρκτον μέχρι οὗ δια χειμῶνα" τὰ δ᾽ ἐν μέσῳ 
; / 7 4 ¢ a τῶι A > A / 
τούτων πάντα σατραπεύουσιν οἱ TOV ἐμοῦ ἀδελφοῦ φίλοι. 
x Γ Ὡς a , CoA 5 n . ε / Λ 
7. ἣν δ᾽ ἡμεῖς νικήσωμεν, ἡμᾶς δεῖ Tous ἡμετέρους φίλους 
, 3 tal a “ 2 a / Ν ? 
τούτων ἐγκρατεῖς ποιῆσαι. WOTE οὐ τοῦτο δέδοικα μὴ οὐκ 
Μ “ i ΓΟ a / Ἃ 3 ΄ b) Ν Χ 
ἔχω 0 τι δῶ ἐκάστῳ τῶν φίλων, ἂν εὖ γένηται, ἀλλὰ μὴ 


2 “»ῃ; e ‘ - a ς a Ἂς a ς , Ν ͵ 
OUK EYW LKAVOUS οἷς 6@. ὑμῶν δε τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων καὶ στε- 


24 Expediiion of Cyrus the Younger. [Xen. 


δον ca , ς Ν a 2 ’ 
φανον ἑκάστῳ χρυσοῦν δώσω. 8. οἱ δὲ ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες 
2 / ΕῚ ἈΝ 7 οὖ Ν a δ“ Diese: 
αυτοι TE HoaV πολυ προθυμότεροι Kal τοὺς αἀλλοις eEny- 
2 Cf Ων > 2s “ Ν \ a 
γέλλον. εἰσῃεσαν δὲ Tap QvTOV οἱ TE OTPATHYOL Kal των 
+ «ς rd Ν 2 a 2 / / / y 
ἄλλων ᾿Ελλήνων tives, ἀξιοῦντες εἰδέναι TL σφίσιν ἔσται 
ὅν ἈΝ > Ἂς , X 7 
εαν κρατήσωσιν. ὁ δὲ ἐμπιμπλὰς πάντων τὴν γνωμην 
) / / Ν 2 a 7, “ 
ἀπέπεμπε. 9. παρεκελεύοντο δὲ αὐτῷ πάντες ὁσοίπερ 
/ Ν , > δεν Ὑν ¢ a 4 
διελέγοντο μὴ μάχεσθαι, adr ὁπισθεν ἑαυτῶν τάττεσθαι. 
2 \ A A / , eal + Ν A 
ev δὲ τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ Κλέαρχος ὧδε πως ἤρετο τὸν Κύρον. 
Υ 7, rn > - Ν ᾿ / Ν 9 
Ove. yap σοι μαχεῖσθαι, ὦ Kupe, τὸν ἀδελῴφον; Νὴ Ai, 
a ΄ A + / ‘\ / / > [οὐ 
εφη ὁ Κῦρος, εἴπερ γε Δαρείου καὶ Παρυσάτιδος ἐστι παις 
> -ς \ 2 Ν 2 > ἃς ἀν Ry } Ν 7ὔ 3 
ἐμὸς δὲ ἀδελῴος, οὐκ ἀμαχεὶ ταῦτ ἐγὼ λήψομαι. 10. εν- 
A > ee) ao: / > Ν Ομ Ve a ΘΗΝ τὸς , 
ταῦθα δὴ ev τῇ ἐξοπλισίᾳ ἀριθμὸς ἐγένετο τῶν μεν Ελλη- 
3 ᾿, / Ν / x \ 7 
νὼν ασπις μυρία καὶ τετρακοσία, πελτασται δὲ δισχίλιοι 
Ν / a \ Ν / / / 
καὶ πεντακοσίοι, τῶν δὲ μετὰ Κύρου βαρβάρων δέκα pupi- 
/ Ν 7 7 >’ \ \ xy : ᾿ς 
aces καὶ ἅρματα δρεπανηφόρα ἀμφὶ τὰ εἰκοσι. LL. τῶν 
\ / 5" 7 5 ς Ν Ν ΕΣ / Ν 
δὲ πολεμίων ἐλέγοντο εἶναι ἕκατον καὶ εἴκοσι μυριάδες καὶ 
"79 ΜΚ \ 95 ¢ / 
ἅρματα Speravnpopa διακόσια. ardor δὲ ἦσαν ἐξακισχί- 
oe κα “- - > / 3 - 3° 3 Ν > “-“ 
tou ἡππεις. ὧν Αρταγερσης ἤρχεν" οὗτοι ὃ αὖ προ αὐτου 
/ / 9 ᾿ a \ / / 
βασιλέως τεταγμένοι ἦσαν. 12. τοῦ de βασιλέως στρατεύ- 
3 A Ἂς Ν A 5 / / 
ματος OAV ἄρχοντες καὶ OTPATHYOL καὶ ἡγεμόνες τέτταρες, 
/ / 7 3 ,ὔ / 
τριάκοντα μυριάδων ἕκαστος, ABpoxopas, Τισσαφέρνης, Ϊὼ- 
/ 3 / / ᾿ \ / > al / 3 , | 
βρύας, ApBakns. τούτων δὲ παρεγένοντο EV Τῇ μαχῇ ἐνενὴ- 
/ Ν f / re Ν ᾿ς , 
κοντα μυριάδες καὶ ἅρματα δρεπανηφορα ἑκατὸν καὶ πεντῆη- 
3 / \ ς / A / ¢ / ΄ 
κοντα" ἄβροκομας δὲ ὑστέρησε τῆς μάχης ἡμέραις TEVTE, 
? / a= / a Sees Ν a 
ex Φοινίκης ἐλαύνων. LB. ταῦτα δὲ ἤγγελλον πρὸς Κῦρον 
ς 3 , 3 a Ν / 
Ol αὐτομολήσαντες εκ τῶν πολεμίων Tapa μεγάλου βασι- 
/ Ν a , ἣν ‘ ν᾿ , A Ὁ 3 , 
λεως TPO TNS HAYS, καὶ μετὰ την μάχην Ol ὕστερον EA7)- 
rn 7 ἄν ΨΚ 7 > a \4 
φθησαν τῶν πολεμίων ταὐτὰ ἤγγελλον. 14. ἐντεῦθεν bE 
a 5) / Ν / , a ; 
Κῦρος ἐξελαύνει σταθμὸν ἕνα παρασάγγας τρεῖς συντε- 
7 a , Ν re “ \ aw 
ταγμένῳ τῷ στρατεύματι παντὶ καὶ τῷ Ελληνικῷ καὶ TO 


βαρβαρικῷ" ᾧετο γὰρ ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ μαχεῖσθαι βασιλέα" 








νὰ 


Anas. 1, vitr.] Apparent Retreat of the King. 25 


Ν Ν ξ Ν Ν a / 9 >’ Ν 
κατὰ γὰρ μέσον τὸν σταθμὸν τοῦτον τάφρος ἣν opuKTy 
r XN Ν 9 5 Ν / Ν ‘ / 3 \ 
βαθεῖα, τὸ μὲν εὖρος ὀργυιαὶ πέντε, τὸ δὲ βάθος οργυιαὶ 
fal f 7 \ Ν ξ ,ὔ yy ¥ al / 7 Ν 
τρεῖς. 1δ.Γπαρετέτατοδε ἡ τάφρος ἄνω ova τοῦ πεδίου ETL 
΄ , ν 7 A 7 7 " . 
δώδεκα παρασάγγας μέχρι τοῦ Μηδίας τείχους. ενθα αἱ 
Ν a ᾿ A / a Ν / 
διώρυχες, ἀπὸ τοῦ Τίγρητος ποταμοῦ ἱῥέουσαιεὴ εἰσὶ δὲ τέτ- 
Ἂς Ν 3 lal r Ν " A Ν 
Tapes, τὸ μὲν εὖρος πλεθριαῖαι, βαθεῖαι δὲ ισχυρῶς, καὶ 
fal “a 5 > fal y >] / Ν ») Ν 
Toa πλει EV AUTALS συταγωγα" εἰσβάλλουσι δε εἰς TOV 
? READS l / > 
Eudparqy, διαλείπουσι δ᾽ ἐκάστη Tapacayyny, γέφυραι ὃ 
3 Ν Ν \ 2 / ΄ N Ν 
(ἔπεισιν.) ἣν δὲ παρα, τα εὐυφραπῆν Facts στενῇ ΒΆΘΕΙ 
τοῦ ΤῊ καὶ τῆς τάφρου ὡς εἴκοσι ποδῶν τὸ εὖρος 
16. ταύτην δὲ τὴν τάφρον βασιλεὺς ποιεῖ μέγας ἀντὶ ἐρύ- 
3 ΄ A / 7 
patos, ἐπειδὴ πυνθάνεται Κῦρον προσελαύνοντα. ταύτην 
‘ XN ἥν an / ‘\ ¢ XN A Ν 2 7 
δὴ τὴν Bamioay Κῦρος τε καὶ ἢ ππρασια Ties eS 
vovTO εἴσω τῆς τάφρου. ᾿ 47. ταύτῃ μὲν οὖν τῇ ἡβερα οὐκ ἃ 


ἐμαχέσατο βασιλεὺς, ἀλλ᾿ ὑποχωρούντων φανερὰ 7 ἤσαν καὶ 


ἵππων καὶ ἀνθρώπων ἴχνη πολλώ. 18. ἐνταῦθα Kupos 


Ν 7 Ν 3 , εν ox Te 
Σιλανὸν καλέσας τὸν Αμβρακιωτην μάντιν edwKEev αὐτῷ 
c 
5 Ν ΧΩ (oA A ¢ ὃ , 2 3 2 Wi ς 7 
APELKOUS τρισχιλίους, OTL τῇ EVOEKUTH UT ἐκείνης NEPA 
/ 3 J A ce Ν ) ΄“ 7] ς 
θυόμενος εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὅτι βασιλεὺς οὐ μαχεῖται δέκα ἡμε- 
al “- ’ 93 2 Μ yy lal 5 3 ΄ 
ρῶν, Κῦρος 6 εἰπεν, Ουκ apa ets μαχεῖται, εἰ ἐν ταύταις 
2 fal a ¢ / aN bee: 7 Ξ an / 
eee στο Tats: ἡμέραις, seay 5 ἁληθεύσης; ὑπισχνοῦμαι 
/. A Ν / / 2 / 3 Ν 
σοι δέκα τάλαντα. τοῦτο τὸ χρυσίον τότε ἀπέδωκεν, ἐπεὶ 
A ς , rs tate ? \ ἌΣ > SN A / oh 
παρῆλθον αἱ dexa ἡμέραι. 19. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τῇ τάφρῳ οὐκ 
2 7 Ν " ΄ 7, / y us 
ἐκωλυε βασιλεὺς τὸ Κύρου στράτευμα διαβαίνειν. ἐδοξε καὶ 
2 \ r + 5 / a 7 “ a 
Κύρῳ καὶ τοῖς adXous ATEYVMKEVAL TOU μάχεσθαι: wate TH 
e / a > 7 / A a Ν 
ΑΜ Κῦρος GARNET ἠμελημένως adnan 20. τῇ δὲ 
τρίτῃ ἐπί τε τοῦ ἅρματος καθήμενος) τὴν πορείαν ἐποιεῖτο 
καὶ ὀλίγους ἐν y τάξει ἔχων πρὸ αὑτοῦ, τὸ δὲ πολὺ αὐτῷ 
ἀνατεταραγμένον ἐπορεύετο καὶ τῶν ὅπλων τοῖς στρατιω- 
ταις πολλὰ ἐπὶ ΠΝ ἤγἕτο καὶ ὑποξυγίων. 


VILL Καὶ ἤδη τε ἦν ἀμφὶ ἀγορὰν πλήθουσαν καὶ πλη- 


20 Expedition of Cyrus the Younger. [Xen. 


/ 3 Ἂς, + + ΄ αν cA 
σίον ἣν ὁ σταθμὸς ἐνθα ἔμελλε καταλύειν, ἡνίκα Πατηγύας 
> Ν / A > Ν n ων VA 3 / 
avnp Ilepons τῶν ἀμφὶ Κῦρον πιστῶν προφαίνεται ἐλαύνων 
πέδας lA «ς a an tf Ν ? Ν a - > 7 
ἄνα κρατος ἱδροῦντι τῷ ἵππῳ, καὶ εὐθὺς πᾶσιν οἷς ἐνετύγχα- 

3 / Ν “- Ἰν « n 7 x X 
vev €Boa καὶ βαρβαρικῶςζτκαὶ ἑλληνικῶς OTL βασίλευς συν 
Ψ a / ¢ > 4 
OTPATEVUATL πολλῳ TPOTEPYETAL ὡς εἰς μάχην παρεσκευ- 
΄ y+ Ν Χ , 2 ,ὔ ᾿ Aah Ά, 
ἀσμενος. 2. ἔνθα δὴ πολὺυς τάραχος ἐγένετο" αὐτίκα γὰρ 
3. ἡ ed \ / ἈΝ Tse U 3 
ἐδόκουν ot Ελληνες καὶ πάντες δὲ ἀτάκτοις σφίσιν ἐπίπε- 
al a , ’ὔ 3 Ν γ»υ % 
σεῖσθαι" 8. Κῦρος te καταπηδησας ἀπὸ Tov ἅρματος Tov 

4 3 / > 2 ‘ > Ν ἧς “ Ν Ἂς >) Ν 
θώρακα ἐνέδυ καὶ ἀναβὰς ἐπὶ τὸν ἵππον τὰ παλτὰ εἰς τὰς 

a yf rn y+ A ,ὔ 2 / 
χείρας ἔλαβε, τοῖς TE ἄλλοις πᾶσι παρηγγέελλεν εξοπλιζε- 

Ν 7 2 “ [s a te vA » 
σθαι καὶ καθίστασθαι εἰς THY εαυτοῦ τάξιν ἕκαστον. 4. ἐνθα 

ἈΝ \ A A / 7 Ν Ν ἈΝ 
δὴ σὺν πολλῇ σπουδῇ καθίσταντο, Κλέαρχος μὲν τὰ δεξιὰ 

a ΄ a4 Ν a E 2 , e Tl fe δὲ 
τοῦ κέρατος ἔχων πρὸς τῷ ξυφράτῃ ποταμῳ, Π]ροξενος δὲ 
2 / e > Wit Ν a / ‘ Ν x 7 
ἔχόμενος, οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι μετὰ τοῦτον, Μένων δε καὶ τὸ στρά- 

Ν ΡΥ, ΄ » ae A f a \ 
τευμα TO εὐωνυμον κέρας ἔσχε τοῦ Ελληνικοῦ. [ὅ. τοῦ δε 
ae a x / 2 / Ν / 
βαρβαρικοῦ ἱππεῖς μεν Παφλαγονες εἰς χιλίους παρα Κλε- 
ΕΣ 3 A a ae ee Ng ‘ Ν 
ἄρχον ἔστησαν ἐν τῷ δεξιῷ καὶ τὸ Ελληνικον πελταστικον, 
2 ς A εἷ ΄ > a7 ¢ / [72 ᾿ς Ἂς ΝΜ 
ἐν δὲ τῷ εὐωνύμῳ ApLatos τε ὁ Κύρου ὕπαρχος καὶ TO ἀλλο 
4 an Ὡ XN Clk A = ἣν» ¢ 
βαρβαρικὸν. 6. Κῦρος δε καὶ οἱ ἵππεις τούτου ὅσον ἐξα- 

/ € / / ἃς > ὦ Ἂς / Ν 

κόσιοι ὡπλισμένοι θωραξι μὲν αὐτοὶ καὶ παραμηριδίοις καὶ 
/ / ‘ 4 -“ Ν Ν +S ἈΝ 
κράνεσι πάντες πλὴν Κύρου" Κῦρος δὲ ψίλην ἔχων τὴν 
Ν > . ΄ / ¢ oe Ak 
κεφαλὴν εἰς τὴν μάχην καθίστατο. 7. οἱ ὃ immo πᾶντες 

e \ 7 3 \ / Ὡ- / 
ot μετὰ Κύρου εἶχον καὶ προμετωπίδια καὶ προστερνίδια * 
93 Ν Ν / ς ¢ “ « / oe SP 
εἶχον δὲ καὶ μαχαίρας οἱ ἱππεῖς Εἰλληνικας. 8. Kat 70 

3 7, ems \ “ἤ AS oe e 7 
τε ἣν μέσον ἡμέρας καὶ οὕπω καταφανεῖς σαν ol πολέμιοι" 
ἜΧΕΝ \ , ey 5 Sosy, N / , 
ἡνίκα δὲ δείλη ἐγίγνετο, ἐφάνη κονιορτὸς ὥσπερ νεφελὴη 
Xs , \ a ὦ / / ? a 
λευκὴ, χρόνῳ δὲ συχνῷ ὕστερον ὥσπερ μελανία TLS EV TO 
/ » Ν ΄ Ὡ Ν Ε] ΄ > / 7 Ν Ν 
πεδίῳ ἐπὶ πολύ. ὅτε δὲ ἐγγύτερον ἐγίγνοντο, τάχα δὴ καὶ 
Ψ' y+ Ν ¢ / Ν ε , 
χαλκὸς TLS ἤστραπτε καὶ al λόγχαι καὶ at Tukets καταφα- 

ag 2 / Ἂς eS “ Ἧς , 3 

νεῖς ἐγίγνοντο. 9. καὶ ἦσαν ἱππεῖς μὲν λευκοθώρακες ἐπὶ 


n τ , an / / pee / 
TOV €vwyupoV τῶν πολεμίων' Τισσαφέρνης ἐλέγετο τούτων 


ANAB. 1, να. The Battle. 27 


A oo ye / Ν 7 ὔ 3 / Se ε - 
ἄρχειν" ἐχόμενοι δὲ τούτων γερροφοόροι, ἐχόμενοι OE ὁπλῖται 
> = 7 / 3 7 7 7 Ss? φ 3 ΄ 
συν ποδήρεσι ξυλίναις ἀσπίσιν" AvyuTtiot OUTOL ελε- 
+ aT lal » / / > 
γοντο εἶναι: ἄλλοι δ᾽ ἱππεῖς, ἄλλοι tofotat. πᾶντες ὃ 
@ ee ? / 7ὔ 2 θ 4 “ Ν 
οὗτοι κατα €Ovn ἐν πλαισίῳ πλήρει ἀνθρωπων ἕκαστον τὸ 
3 ΄ὕ Ν Ν 9). “ts / 7 
ἔθνος emopeveto. 10. πρὸ δὲ αὑτῶν ἅρματα διαλείποντα 
Ν > > > / Ν * , ΄ = 
συχνὸν at ἀλλήλων Ta On δρεπανηφόρα καλούμενα" εἶχον 
Ὗ , ? a ? / :] ΄ 3 / Ν 
δὲ τὰ δρέπανα ἐκ τῶν ἀξόνων εἰς πλαγίον «ποτεταμένα καὶ 
en a , 5) A / ε 7 Ψ ? 
ὑπὸ τοῖς δίφροις εἰς γῆν βλέποντα, ws διακόπτειν ὅτῳ εν- 
7 ς \ / 3 ε ’ Ν / ane , 
τυγχάνοιεν. ἡ δὲ yvoun ἣν ws εἰς Tas τάξεις τῶν Ελλη- 
3 a 4 / \ / a 3 7 
νων ἐλῶντα καὶ διακόψοντα. BB. ὃ μεντοι Kupos εἶπεν ote 
/ 4 re Ν Ν a 
KANETAS TAPEKENEVETO τοῖς Ελλησι την κραυγὴν των βαρ- 
7 2 EY, 2 ΄ A 5) \ ais \ 
βάρων ἀνέχεσθαι, ἐψεύσθη τοῦτο" ov yap κραυγῇ αλλὰ 
ae ? nN > Ὁ ἄν, Sa N / 7 
σιγῇ ὡς ἀνυστὸν καὶ ἡσυχῇ ἐν ἴσῳ καὶ βραδέως προσῃεσαν. 
Ν 3 ΄ »-» 7 9" \ / 

12. καὶ ev τούτῳ Κῦρος παρελαύνων avtos συν [Πίγρητι 
Ἄς a ᾧ αν ee ἰς 7 A , > 7 
τῷ ἐρμηνεῖ καὶ ἄλλοις τρισιν ἢ τέτταρσι τῷ Κλεάρχῳ εβοα 
x Ν , Ν / Ν a / ¢ 2 a 
ἄγειν TO στρώτευμα KATA μέσον TO τῶν πολεμίων, OTL ἐκεῖ 

Ἂς 7 “Ἁ σον τὴν - ΄ δι ee / 
βασιλεὺς εἰη" Kav TOUT , Edy, νικῶμεν, TavO ἡμῖν πεποίηται. 
e ἴω Ν ς / Ν / nr Ν 3 7 » 
13. ὁρῶν δε ὁ Κλεαρχος τὸ μέσον στίφος καὶ ἀκούων Kv- 
¥ +S ne A » ΄ / a 
pov €€&m ovta τοῦ EdXnvixov εὐωνύμου βασιλέα" τοσοῦτον 
Ν 7ὔ A \ «“ / ᾿ς ς γὼ ΤᾺ 
yap πλήθει περιῆν βασίλευς στε μέσον τὸ ἑαυτοῦ ἔχων 
a / > 7 yf 3 ? 2. Ley ε / 2 
τοῦ Κύρου εὐωνύμου εἐξἕω nv: add ὁμως ὁ Κλέαρχος οὐκ 
yf > 7 >] Ν A A Ν ᾿ / 
ἤθελεν ἀποσπάσαι ἀπὸ τοῦ ποταμοῦ τὸ δεξιὸν κέρας, φο- 
β md Ν ὌΝ θ / e / 6 a Se K ἢ) 3 
ουμενος μὴ κυκλωθείη εκατερωθεν, τῳ Se Κύρῳ arrexpi- 
/ ve , a a ΓΚ acer) r 
VATO OTL αὑτῷ MEAL OTWS καλῶς Eyolt. 14. καὶ EY τουτῳ 
an A Ν ἈΝ Ν / ς. a / 
Τῷ καιρῷ τὸ μὲν βαρβαρικὸν στράτευμα ὁμαλῶς προῇει, 
Ν xe Ν mA 3 al > A 4 7 ; A 
τὸ δὲ Ελληνικὸν ἔτι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ μένον συνετάττετο EK TOV 
4 / ἣν ς “Ὁ / 3 / Ἂν; 
ETL προσιόντων. Kat o Κύρος παρελαύνων οὐ πανυ πρὸς 
" A A / A ¢ / 2 ΄ ΥΚΥ 
αὐτῷ τῳ στρατεύματι κατεθεᾶτο ἐκατέρωσε ἀποβλέπων εἰς 
S / Ν Χ / ΟΝ Χ JS Ὄπ ας 
τε TOUS πολεμίους καὶ τους φίλους. 15. ἰδὼν δὲ αὐτὸν ἀπὸ 
a ¢ a “ 3 r ¢ « A 
τοῦ Ελληνικοῦ Ξενοφων A@nvaios, ὑπελάσας ὡς συναντῆς- 


+ » ,ὔ e 3 , 3 Ν ΄ 
σαι NPETO EL TL παραγγελλοι" O δ᾽ ἐπιστήσας εἶπε καὶ λε- 


28 Lixpedition of Cyrus the Younger. [Xey. 


3. i. n e/ Ν Se Ν Ν Ν \ ᾽ὔ 
yelv ἐκέλευσε πᾶσιν OTL καὶ τὰ ἱερὰ καλὰ καὶ τὰ σφαγια 
/ a A Ν 7, is Μ Ἂν a 7 
καλά. (16. ταῦτα δὲ λέγων θορύβου ἤκουσε δια τῶν τάξεων 

ey) Noy. / r / 5 A ς Ν ΄ 3 [7 
ἰόντος, καὶ ἤρετο τίς ὁ θόρυβος εἰη. ὁ δε λεαρχος εἶπεν ore 
ἧς / t / + Xa 2 UA / 
τὸ σύνθημα παρέρχεται δεύτερον ἤδη. καὶ ὃς εθαύμασε τὶς 
/ ἌΝ δὴ Ν / e ϑι. 9 / 
παραγγέλλει καὶ ἤρετο ὃ TL ELN TO σύνθημα. ὁ δ᾽ ἀπεκρίνατο, 
e \ n 3 ’ 
ΖΕΥΣ ΣΩΤΗΡ KAI ΝΙΚΗ. 28%. ὁ δε Kupos ἀκούσας 
3 Ν / + x rn + a 9 Pp] Ἂς 
Adda δέχομαί τε, Edn, καὶ τοῦτο ἔστω. ταῦτα δ᾽ εἰπὼν 
᾽ Ἰς ¢ rn / 3 , \ 3 / / ΝΥ A 
εἰς τὴν ἑαυτοῦ χώραν ἀπήλαυνε" καὶ OVKETL τρία ἢ τέτταρα 
, ͵ \ , Stent) ὔ ἘΝ l7 δ / 
στάδια διευχέτην τῶ φαλαγγε απ ἀλληλὼν ἡνικα επαιανι- 
oo. i “EXXnves Kat προή IVTLOL ἰέναι τοῖς πολε- 
Ὃν TE οἱ ηνες προήρχοντο ἀντίοι ἰέναι τοὺς 
/ id ‘ ΄ 3 / ἐν a Ve 
μίοις. 18. ws de πορευομένων ἐξεκύμαινέ TL τῆς φάλαγγος, 
Aca / Μ ,ὔ nr Nee 3 / 
TO επιλευπόμενον ἤρξατο δρόμῳ θεῖν" καὶ ἅμα ἐφθέγξαντο 
7 as n>? / 2 / N / \ » 
πάντες οἵονπερ τῷ Ενυαλίῳ ἐλελίζουσι, καὶ πᾶντες δε εθεον. 
/ 7 « ν κα 3 / Ν ἣν 7 3 7 
λέγουσι δέ τινες WS καὶ ταῖς ἀσπίσι πρὸς τὰ δόρατα εδοὺ- 
7 rn rn [72 Ι ‘A Ν / 
mnoav, φόβον ποιοῦντες τοῖς ὑπποίς. 19. πρὶν de τόξευμα 
2 r 3 / e / Ν / Ν 
ἐξικνεῖσθαι, ἐκκλίνουσιν οἱ βαρβαροι Kat φεύγουσι. Kat 
? a SEK x \ , ce ey ἢ \ 
ἐνταῦθα δὴ ἐδίωκον μὲν κατὰ κρωτος Ob Ελληνες., εβοων δὲ 
2 Ξ 2 ἌΣ ͵ 7, N PY 
ἀλλήλοις μὴ θεῖν δρόμῳ arr ev τάξει ἕπεσθαι. 30. τὰ ὃ 
ce , / Ν \ 3 > “-“ a / ἧς ἣν Ν 
ἅρματα ἐφέροντο τὰ μὲν δι’ αὐτῶν τῶν πολεμίων, TA δε καὶ 
\ A ς , Ν ¢ / ¢ ey Pc \ eh. 
διὰ τῶν “Ελλήνων κενὰ ἡνιόχων. οἱ δ᾽ ἐπεὶ προΐδοιεν, 
/ By > ef ΟΝ ,ὔ c/ 3 « 
διίσταντο" ἔστι ὃ ὅστις καὶ κατεληφθὴηὴ ὥσπερ εν ἵππο- 
/ 2 , Ν ΘΝ / Jat a “ 
δρόμῳ ἐκπλαγείς" καὶ οὐδὲν μέντοι οὐδὲ τοῦτον παθεῖν 
y+ Did a 2, \ a ¢ 7 > / a / 
egacav, οὐ ἄλλος δὲ τῶν λληνων ἐν TAUTH τῇ μαχῇῃ 
Μ ? Ν ΩΝ \ Sen a 3 / a“ / 
ἔπαθεν οὐδεὶς οὐδὲν, πλὴν ETL τῷ εὐωνύμῳ τοξευθῆναι τις 
3 4 ra > a XN ¢/ a Ἂς 
ἐλέγετο. 21. Κῦρος ὃ ὁρῶν τους EXAnvas νικῶντας τὸ 
> ς Ν N 7 ς 7 Ν / 
καθ αὑτοὺς καὶ διώκοντας, ἡδόμενος καὶ TPOTKUVOUMEVOS 
+ ς Ν τὸν Ψ'.- a 3 > aon Ind A 3 / , 
ἤδη ὡς βασιλεὺς ὑπὸ τῶν ἀμφ᾽ αὐτὸν, οὐδ᾽ ὥς ἐξήχθη διώ- 
2 Ων / ΕΣ Ν - Ν ς Tal c 
KELV, ἄλλα συνεσπειραμενην ἔχων τὴν τῶν συν EAVTH εξἕα- 
/ ¢ / 7, b) rn ¢/ 7, / 
κοσίων ὑππεων ταξιν ἐπεμελεῖτο ὁ TL ποιήσει βασιλεὺς. 
Ἂν \ yA aN “ ͵ ΕΣ a a / 
καὶ yap noel αὐτὸν ὅτι μέσον ἔχοι τοῦ Περσικοῦ στρατεὺ- 


᾿ Ν / a ry 7 2 / 
ματος. | 22. καὶ πάντες δ᾽ οἱ τῶν βαρβάρων ἄρχοντες μέσον 





Anas. 1, ντπ.] Death of Cyrus. 29 


ΕΣ Ν ce n ς - / c/ Ν . > 
ἔχοντες TO αὑτῶν ἡγουνταῖ, νομίζοντες οὕτω καὶ εν ἀσφα- 
7 > ΑΥ̓͂ OT ee Ν > a ¢ / Ν yy 
λεστάτῳ εἶναι, ἢν ἢ ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτῶν ExaTEpwUeEv, καὶ εἰ TL 
la) / e / s\ / Ψ / Ν 
παραγγεῖλαι χρήζοιεν, ἡμίσει ἂν χρόνῳ αἰσθάνεσθαι τὸ 
, \ Sar tee / y a 
στρατευμα. 2B. καὶ βασιλευς δὴ TOTE μέσον εχων τῆς 
¢ A na ¢/ y+ ? / A / 3 / 
αὑτοῦ στρατιᾶς ὁμως εξω ἐγένετο τοῦ Κύρου εὐωνύμου 
/ 2 Ν \ > % > ass / 2 A > / Iar 
κέρατος. ἐπεὶ δὲ οὐδεὶς αὐτῷ ἐμάχετο εκ TOU ἀντίου οὐδὲ 
rn > ra / 4 " / ΄ 2 7 
τοῖς αὐτοῦ τεταγμένοις ἐμπροσθεν, ἐπέκαμπτεν WS εἰς κὺ- 
y Ν κ , ἌΣ / 
κλωσιν. 24. ἔνθα δὴ Κῦρος δείσας μὴ Ὅπισθεν γενόμενος 
»} Ὧν -€ Ἂν 2 / ? 7 Ἀπ 5 - Ν Ν 
κατακοψῇ τὸ Βλληνικὸν ἐλαύνει ἀντίος" καὶ ἐμβαλων συν 
ca ς / & ‘ \ / / Ν 5 
τοῖς ἑξακοσίοις viKa τους πρὸ βασιλεως τεταγμένους και: εἰς 
Ν yY \ ς 7 ἡ αν, er / ,’ 
φυγὴν ετρεψε Tous εξακισχιλίους, καὶ ATOKTELVAL λέγεται αὖ- 
Ν ana t: a ae / Ν Μ ? “ «ς 
τὸς τῇ εαυτοῦ χειρὲ ApTayEepany TOV ἄρχοντα αὑτων. 25. ὡς 
᾿ς 12 ιν ,ὔ / Ν «ε / ¢ / ? 
5 ἡ τροπὴ ἐγένετο, διασπείρονται Kat οἱ Κυρου ἑξακόσιοι εἰς 
Ν / ¢ , 3. og 7 b) / > > Sighs 
TO OLWKELY ὁρμήσαντες, πλὴν Tavu odALyoL aud αὕτον κατε- 
/ Ν ἘΠ ΄. / - \ / 
λείφθησαν. σχεδὸν οὐ ὁμοτράπεζοι καλουμενοι.( 39. συν Tov- 
Ν <A A / \ 2 9 35° 2 r A Ν 
Tous δὲ ὧν καθορᾷ βασίλεα καὶ τὸ aud εκείνον στιῴος " καί 
3ΔΧᾺ > 3... ἢ 2 > ee ie. Ν aN CAS ree rae. 
εὐθὺς οὐκ ἠνέσχετο, ἀλλ εἰπὼν Tov avopa ope, leTo ἐπ᾿ αὐτὸν 
Ν / Ν Ν / Ν Ps ᾿ς A 7 
Kal παίει KATA TO στέρνον καὶ τιτρώσκει δια TOU Owpaxos, 
“ / .«} Ν XA > Pape! Ἂς ta / 
ὡς φησι Κτησίας ὁ ἰατρὸς καὶ ιᾶσθαι αὑτὸς τὸ τραῦμα φησι. 
/ 3 > Xs > / A. ie ἊΣ Ν 3 
2%. παίοντα ὃ avtov αἀκοντίζει τις παλτῳ ὑπο τον οφθαλ- 
Ν / Xx > “ ͵ὔ Ν N ᾿ς ran 
μὸν βιαίως" καὶ ἐνταῦθα μαχόμενοι καὶ Baorrevs και Kv- 
ἃς ἀν, ? ? ‘ ς \ ς΄ / ς / \ a > Ν 
ρος καὶ οἱ au αὑτους ὑπερ εκατερου, ὁπόσοι μὲν τῶν ἀμφι 
7 ΟΝ, / / ee als Set 
βασιλεα απεθνησκον Κτησίας Neyer’ παρ ἐκείνῳ yup ἣν" 
Η a Se > / > / S39 Ν wit. 4 a Ν 
Κύρος δὲ αὐτὸς τε ἄπέθανε καὶ oxTw οἱ ἄρίστοι τῶν περί 
ΧΝ BA bee | ΕἾ A 3 ’ὔ, ewe [ 
αὐτὸν ἔκειντο ἐπ αὐτῷ: 28. Αρταπάτης ὃ ὁ πιστότατος 
? A rn ΄ὔ , / 3 ‘ / 
αὑτῷ τῶν σκηπτούχων θεράπων λέγεται. ἐπειδὴ TETTWKOTA 
3 a / 3S rn +f an Sun (rl 
εἰδε Kupov, καταπηδήσας ἀπὸ τοῦ ἵππου περίπεσειν AUTH. 
Ν ς / / - va ? / ᾿ 
29. καὶ οἱ μὲν φασι βασιλεα κελεῦσαί Twa ἐπισφάξαι av- 
Ἂ >/ ε ΡΥ ον Ν ? s 7 / > 
tov Κύρῳ, οἱ 5 ἑαυτὸν εἐπισφάξασθαι σπασάμενον Tov 
? , 3 x A Ν ἊΝ a , \ 
ἀκινάκην" εἶχε yap ypucouv’ καὶ στρεπτὸν ὃ eEopEl Kat 
/ ᾽ Ν Μ cd Cr ΝΕ rf > / Ἂς 
ψέλια καὶ τάλλα ὥσπερ οἱ ἀρίστοι Περσῶν" ετετίμητο γὰρ 


BS Kx, ants 9Ὁ / Ν , 
ὑπο Κύρου 64 εὑὐνοίὰαν τε καὶ πιστοτητα." 


90 Expedition of Cyrus the Younger. ΓΧεν. 


A \ 5 a 2 ΄ 5S ἊΝ 
IX. Κῦρος μὲν οὖν οὕτως ετελεύτησεν, ἀνὴρ wv Περ- 
A a Ἂς A Ἂς >] r / f / 
σῶν τῶν μετὰ Κῦρον τὸν ἀρχαῖον yevouevwv βασιλικωτατος 
Sa 37 > , ε N ͵ ε a a 
τε καὶ ἄρχειν ἀξιώωτατος, ὡς Tapa πάντων ομολογείται τῶν 
/ / 2 / / tal ἊΝ x 
Κύρου δοκούντων ev πείρᾳ γενέσθαι. 3. πρῶτον μὲν yap 
y+ ral xX = die ἃς. 4 Ν Ἂν A ἊΣ a \ Ν a 
ETL παῖς ὧν, ὅτ᾽ ἐπαιδεύετο καὶ συν τῷ ἀδελῴφῳ καὶ συν τοῖς 
N 7 ΄ 7, 2 / 7 
ἄλλοις παισὶ, πάντων πάντα κράτιστος ἐνομίζετο. 8. Tav- 
Ἂς 4 a oe a r = BBS) - ,ὔ 
τες γὰρ οἱ τῶν ἀρίστων Περσῶν παῖδες ἐπὶ ταῖς βασίλεως 
4 4 BA XN ἈΝ ΄ 
θύραις παιδεύονται" ἐνθα πολλὴν μὲν σωφροσύνην κατα- 
/ yf 3 Ν 3 Iar yy 3 > a es dee Meee! - + 
μάθοι av τις, αἰσχρὸν δ᾽ οὐδὲν οὐτ ἀκοῦσαι ovT ἰδεῖν ἐστι. 
a 2 ςε “ ὡς ᾽ὔ πον οἷ / \ 
4. θεῶνται δ᾽ οἱ παῖδες καὶ τιμωμένους ὑπὸ βασίλεως καὶ 
3 7 Ν + 3 ΄ ef In a 
ἀκούουσι, Kal ἄλλους ἀτιμαζομένους" wate εὐθὺς παῖδες 
y+ / y ΨΥ θ ΔΡΑ͂Ν 6 ral 
ὄντες μανθάνουσιν ἄρχειν τε καὶ ἄρχεσθαι. 5. ενθα Kupos 
3 / Ἀ a “ ig a 3 / 9 -“ 
αἰδημονέστατος μὲν πρῶτον τῶν ἡλικιωτῶν EOOKEL εἶναι, τοῖς 
,ὔ ης A ς A.C , na 4 
τε πρεσβυτέροις καὶ τῶν ἑαυτοῦ ὑποδεεστέρων μᾶλλον TEL- 
x \ ae N nf ¥ 
θεσθαι, erecta δὲ φιλιππότατος Kal τοῖς ITTOLS apLoTa 
A +S 3 ΣΑΣ ἂς A 9 Ἂς / Μ 
χρῆσθαι" ἔκρινον 6 αὑτὸν καὶ τῶν εἰς τὸν πόλεμον ἔργων, 
A x 3 ,ὔ ,ὔ 3 \ 
τοξικῆς TE καὶ ἀκοντίσεως, φιλομαθεστατον εἶναι καὶ μελε- 
6. ἐπεὶ δὲ τῇ ἡλικίᾳ ἔπρεπε, καὶ φιλοθηρότατο 
τηρότατον. 10. ἐπεὶ δὲ τῇ ἢ ψ ἔπρεπε, np ς 
> Ἄς AN Ἀ ͵7 , , a Τὰ 
ἣν καὶ πρὸς τὰ θηρία μέντοι φιλοκινδυνοτατος. καὶ ἄρκτον 
ΟΣ / > + 2 Ν Ν , 
ποτε ἐπιφερομένην οὐκ ETPEDEV, ἀλλα TUUTETWY κατεσπα- 
ΠΥ ἢ ao \ τ N Μ - N \ > Ν 
σθη ἀπὸ τοῦ ἵππου, καὶ τὰ μὲν ἔπαθεν, ὧν και TAS ὠτείλας 
> , Ν / Q Ν a / / 
εἶχε, τέλος δὲ KATEKAVE* καὶ TOY πρῶτον μέντοι βοηθησαντα 
lal x 3 / 2 Ν x / ¢ Ν 
πολλοῖς μακαριστον ἐποίησεν. “Fe ETTEL δὲ κατεπεέμφθη UO 
a Ν / / Ν 7 A , 
τοῦ πατρὸς σατράπης Λυδίας τε καὶ Φρυγίας τῆς μεγάλης 
Ν / Ν Ν N , 2 , ae 
καὶ Καππαδοκίας, στρατηγὸς δὲ καὶ πάντων ἀπεδείχθη οἷς 
/ 5 aA / 2 / a XN > 4 
καθήκει εἰς Καστωλοῦ πεδίον ἀθροίζεσθαι, πρῶτον μεν ἐπεέ- 
7 ae f Ν / ral »Μ / 
δειξεν αὑτὸν ὅτι περὶ πλείστου ποιοῖτο, EL TW σπείσαιτο 
ὃν 5 a Ν + ¢ / ,ὔ > f 
καὶ εἰ τῷ συνθοῖτο καὶ εἰ TW ὑπόσχοιτο TL, μηδὲν ψεύδε- 
Ν ᾿ς i) 3 / x > A ¢ 7 > 
σθαι. 8. καὶ yap οὖν ἐπίστευον μεν αὐτῷ αἱ TOAELS ἐπι- 
͵ ape 3 ec ΓΚ \ Υ , 
τρεπόμεναι, ἐπίστευον ὃ οἱ ἄνδρες" Kab εἰ TLS πολέμιος 


Pat ed ,ὔ ΄ Dies \ δ τ Ν : 
ἐγένετο, σπεισαμένου Κύρου ἐπίστευε μηδὲν av Tapa Tas 





ΑΝΑΒ.1,1χ.}]ὼ Zhe Character of Cyrus. 31 


\ a a 3 Ν 7 3 / 
σπονδὰς παθεῖν. 9. τοιγαροῦν ἐπεὶ Τισσαφέρνει εἐπολε- 
A «ς / ¢ a an [7 ? \ 
μησε, πᾶσαι αἱ πόλεις ἐκοῦσαι Κῦρον εἴχοντο avti Τισσα- 

Ν 7 - Me ? Ε Ν ΄ 
φέρνους πλὴν Μιλησίων" οὗτοι δε, ὅτι οὐκ ἤθελε τοὺς φεύ- 
/ 3 -“ ᾽ / Ν A 4 
yovtas προέσθαι, ἐφοβοῦντο avtov. 40. καὶ yap ἔργῳ 
2 / ΝΥ “ 2 x see 2 \ eo 
ἐπεδείκνυτο καὶ ἔλεγεν OTL οὐκ ἂν ποτε προοιτο, ἐπεὶ ἅπαξ 
Λ 2 ral δ Ὁ ἢ Ves oD Ν / / xy ‘ 
φίλος αὐτοῖς ἐγένετο, οὐδ᾽ εἰ ETL μὲν μείους γένοιντο ETL δε 
, ’ Ι Ν 2 9 Ris 8 λον ao 
κάκιον πράξειαν. 11. φανερὸς ὃ ἣν καὶ, εἰ Tis TL ayabov 
ἣν N , es a , \ χ.. , 
ἢ κακὸν ποιήσειεν αὑτὸν, νικᾶν πειρώμενος" καὶ εὐχὴν δὲ 
? na ee ry 4 a / A yx 
τίνες αὐτοῦ ἐξέφερον ws εὔχοιτο τοσοῦτον χρόνον Env ἔστε 
/ Ν Ν Φ \ x a a 3 / 
νικῴη Kal TOUS εὖ καὶ TOUS κακῶς ποιοῦντας ἀλεξόμενος. 
Q > “ Ν 3 a cur > Ν va >,? 
12. καὶ yap οὖν πλεῖστοι δὴ αὐτῷ ἐνὶ ye ἀνδρὶ τῶν ε 
[ an > ΄ Ν la Ν / Ν Ν « a 
ἡμῶν ἐπεθύμησαν καὶ χρήματα Kal πόλεις καὶ τὰ εαυτῶν 
, / > ‘ Ν IAN ee, ee: y 
σώματα προέσθαι. 18. ov μεν δὴ οὐδὲ TOUT ἂν τις εὐποι 
e Ν 4 \ 3 / yy A > > > 
ως TOUS KAKOUPYOUS και ἀδίκους εἰα καταγελᾶν, arr ἀφει- 
A , 3 r / > 3 > rn \ 
δέστατα πάντων ἐτιμωρεῖτο. πολλάκις 5 ἣν Lely παρὰ 
Ν 4 e Ν X r ΑΝ ral ἌΓΑΝ - 
τὰς στειβομένας ὁδοὺς καὶ ποδῶν καὶ χειρῶν καὶ οφθαλμῶν 
/ ? 7 , 5, 15 A ΄ 5) Ps ey, 
στερομένους ἀνθρωπους" wat ev τῇ Κύρου ἀρχῇ ἐγένετο 
Ν Ν , ‘ 3 A 3 a Ζ 
καὶ EXdnve καὶ βαρβάρῳ μηδὲν ἀδικοῦντι ἀδεῶς πορεύε- 
4 + 4 ἉΨ / Z 
σθαι ὅποι τις ἤθελεν, ἔχοντι ὃ TL προχωροίη. 14. τοὺς ye 
/ > Ν | / « / / a 
μέντοι ἀγαθους εἰς πόλεμον ὠὡμολογήῆτο διαφερόντως τιμαν. 
Ν a x 3 51: εἱς , Ν , \ 
καὶ πρῶτον μὲν ἦν αὐτῷ πόλεμος πρὸς Πισίδας καὶ Mv- 
/ / 3 Ν 9 *% ’ ΄ Ν 7 
σοὺς" στρατευόμενος οὖν καὶ AUTOS εἰς ταύτας τας χωρας΄ 
aA ts ἀπ Ud 4 4 a 2 SP 2 7 
ous ewpa εθελοντας κινδυνεύειν, τούτους καὶ ἄρχοντας ἐποίει 
φ / , »Μ ἈΝ ἃ. -¥ 7 3... 
ἧς κατεστρέφετο χωρας, ETELTA δε καὶ ἄλλοις δωροις ἐτίμα" 
1 «“ , \ \ 5) Χ 5) y 
15. ὥστε φαίνεσθαι τοὺς μὲν ἀγαθοὺς εὐδαιμονεστάτους, 
ΜΝ Ν ‘ ΄ 7 3 a 9 A 
Tous δὲ κακοὺς δούλους τούτων ἀξιοῦσθαι εἶναι. τοιγαροῦν 
\ 9% 2 7 PA a 2 / / 7 
πολλὴ ἣν ἀφθονία αὐτῷ τῶν εθελοντων κινδυνεύειν, ὅπου 
Υ A > , 5] \ , 
τίς οἰοιτο Κῦρον αἰσθήσεσθαι. 16. εἰς ye μὴν δικαιοσύ- 
4 2 a Ν / >? / / 
νὴν εἰ τις αὐτῷ havepos γένοιτο ἐπιδείκνυσθαι βουλόμενος, 
Ν Ἂς 3 “ 4 / “ al 2 
περὶ παντὸς ETTOLELTO τούτους πλουσιωτέρους ποιεῖν TOV EK 
a Ia 7 x \ > ” 
τοῦ ἀδίκου φιλοκερδούντων. 1%. καὶ yap οὖν adda τε 


7, 


na Σ,.λ 


Ως Rise Se 2 
92 Expedition of Cyrus the Younger. [ Xen. 
N 7 Flee at 7 Ν ΄ 5) A 
πολλὰ δικαίως αὐτῷ διεχειρίζετο καὶ στρατεύματι ἀληθινῷ 
2 , τὰ \ N \ Ἢ 2 7, 
ἐχρήσατο. καὶ γὰρ στρατηγοί καὶ λοχαγοί οὐ χρημώτων 
“ δ ete > 2 = ae RS LS Ξ 
EVEKG προς EXELVOY ἔπλευσαν, αλλ επει εγνωσαν κερδαλεω- 
53 ΄ a rc “Ὁ Ἂς Ν A G 
τερον εἶναι Κύρῳ καλῶς πειθαρχεῖν ἢ TO κατὰ μῆνα κέρδος. 
3 Ν Ν yy 7 / 2 tal 7 lal ς 
15. ἀλλὰ μὴν εἰ τίς γέ TL AUT@ προσταξαντι καλῶς υπηρ- 
/ 2 Ά, / > , yy Ν / 
ετήσειεν, οὐδενὶ πώποτε ἀχώριστον εἴασε THY προθυμίαν. 
A / \ ¢ / Ν + 4 2 / 
τουγαροῦν κρώτιστοι On ὑπηρέται παντὸς Epyou Κύρῳ ελε- 
/ 3 / ς / Ἂς + 32 / 
χθησαν γενέσθαι. 19. εἰ δὲ τινα ὁρῳὴ δεινὸν ὄντα οἰκονό- 
3 a / Ν , , « “ 7 
μον εἰ τοῦ δικαίου καὶ κατασκευάζοντα τε ἧς ἄρχοι Ywpas 
\ 7 a 5 / 3 ,ὔ 2 rf 2 3 
καὶ προσόδους ποιοῦντα, οὐδένα ἂν πώποτε ἀφείλετο, ἀλλ 
Ἄν, ἃ / J e/ eres 4 3 / Ν 
ἀεὶ πλείω προσεδίδου" WATE καὶ ἡδέως ἐπόνουν καὶ θαρρα- 
7 2 an See ΄ = Ψ A ΕΣ 
λέως ἐκτῶντο καὶ ὃ ἐπέπατο αὖ τις ἥκιστα Kupov εκρυπτεν" 
> Ν na rn a A 3 / 3 Ν 
οὐ yap φθονῶν τοῖς φανερῶς πλουτοῦσιν ἐφαίνετο, ἀλλὰ 
4 A r fal 3 / Ψ 
πειρώμενος χρῆσθαι τοῖς τῶν ἀποκρυπτομένων χρήμασι. 
le /. ἈΝ «“ , Ν “ J. 2p 
[39. φίλους γε μὴν ὁσους ποιήσαιτο καὶ EUVOUS γνοιὴ οντας 
xe \ / x 95 7 / / 
καὶ ἱκανοὺς κρίνειε συνεργοὺς εἶναι ὃ TL τυγχάνοι βουλο- 
Ub e ΄“ Ν / / 
μενος κατεργάζεσθαι, ὁμολογεῖται πρὸς πάντων κράτιστος 
Ν / ΄ \ Ν DP Κὴς n e 
δὴ γενέσθαι θεραπεύειν. 3}. καὶ γὰρ αὑτὸ τοῦτο οὕπερ 
ἌΝ “ , ἡ a € \ + x 
autos “ἕνεκα φίλων weto δεῖσθαι, ws συνεργοὺς ἔχοι, καὶ 
aes 2 A \ a L , > / 
AUTOS ἐπειρᾶτο συνεργὸς τοις φίλοις KPATLOTOS εἶναι TOUTOU 
“ vA > / > A a \ a 
ὅτου ἕκαστον αἰσθώνοιτο ἐπιθυμοῦντα. 22. δῶρα oe πλεῖ- 
Ν > - \ 3 ~ 3 / Ν ’ὔ’ “ ΄ς 
στα μεν οἶμαι εἰς γε ὧν ἀνὴρ ἐλάμβανε διὰ πολλὰ" ταῦτα δε 
/ Ὁ , a Λ / Ν ‘ / 
πάντων δὴ μάλιστα τοῖς φίλοις διεδίδου, πρρὸς τους τρόπους 
Cone A \ ΄ὔ / / / 
εἐκάστου σκοπῶν καὶ ὅτου μάλιστα ὁρῳὴ ἕκαστον δεόμενον. 
δον Ὁ a i, ? A , ‘ ὧν - κα ? 
23. καὶ OCA TW σωματι αὐτοῦ KOT MOV πεμποι TLS ἢ WS εἰς 
/. ΕΥ ς 3 Ἂς Ν Ν / / 
πόλεμον ἢ WS εἰς καλλωπίσμον, Kal περὶ τουτων λέγειν 
> ἧς aS Ὡ ς Ν ς A a ? x 7 A 
avtov εφασαν OTL TO μεν ἑαυτοῦ σῶμα οὐκ ἂν δύναιτο τού- 
lal A /. Ἂς “ / Ps 
To“ πᾶσι κοσμηθῆναι, φίλους δὲ καλῶς κεκοσμημένους με- 
/ > Ν 7 ᾿ Ν Ν \ μέ 
γίστον κοσμον ἀνδρι νομίζοι. 24. καὶ τὸ μὲν τὰ μεγαλα 
A τ / 5 A ar \ 3 / 
νικᾶν Tous φίλους εὖ ποιοῦντα οὐδὲν θαυμαστὸν, ἐπειδὴ YE 


καὶ δυνατώτερος ἣν" τὸ δὲ τῇ ἐπιμελεί εἶναι τῶν φίλων 
pos ἣν" τὸ δὲ τῇ ἐπιμελείᾳ περιεῖναι τῶν φίλων. 








ΑΝΑΒ. 1, 1x.] Character of Cyrus. 99 


᾿ς a ce / A Μ n 
καὶ τῷ προθυμεῖσθαι χαρίζεσθαι, ταῦτα ἔμοιγε μῶλλον 
mci? es ¢ A ‘ x / + 
δοκεῖ uyaota εἶναι. | 25. Κῦρος yap ἔπεμπε Bixous otvov 
ξ rn 7 ς ΠΟ. 7 tat 7 / 7 yy 
ἡμιδεεῖς TOAAUKLS ὅποτε πάνυ ἡδυν λάβοι, λέγων OTL οὕπω 
\ A , ΄ eas 4 ? ΄ n 9 
δὴ πολλοῦ χρόνου τούτου ἡδίονι OLV@ ἐπιτύχοι" τοῦτον οὖν 
oy, Ν a / , a 3 “ Ν - 
σοὺ ἔπεμψε καὶ δεῖταί σου τήμερον τοῦτον εκπίειν σὺν οἷς 
/ r 7ὔ Ν lal ¢ / » 
μάλιστα φιλεῖς. 96. πολλάκις δὲ χῆνας ἡμιβρωτους ἔπεμπε 
x oS ¢ "4 δ ΣΡ a 2 , ΄ Ν 
και ἄρτων ἡμίσεα KAL ἄλλα τοιαυτα, ἐπιλέγειν κέλευων τον 
/ / 7 A 7 3 Ν Ν 
φέροντα, Τούτοις ἥσθη Κῦρος" βούλεται οὖν καὶ σε τούτων 
/ 7 ; Ν / / Υγ ὍΡΟΝ > 
γεύσασθαι. 2%. ὅπου δὲ χιλὸς σπάνιος πάνυ εἴη, αὑτὸς ὃ 
99 ἡ / \ ὡς ἣΝ 4 ς / 
ἐδύνατο παρασκευάσασθαι διὰ τὸ πολλοὺυς εἐχειν UTNPETAS 
Χ 5 Χ 3 / / ae, \ / r 
καὶ διὰ THY ἐπιμέλειαν, διαπέμπων ἐκέλευε TOUS φίλους τοῖς 
ἂν 6 n , y ¢/ > rf A Ν 
τὰ ἑαυτῶν σώματα ἄγουσιν TTS ἐμβάλλειν τοῦτον τον 
Ν c ‘ a x ¢ a / ” > 
χίλον, WS μὴ πεινῶντες TOUS EauTOU φίλους aywow. 28. εἰ 
Ν , 7 \ tal Λ Μ 
δὲ δή ποτε πορεύοιτο καὶ πλεῖστοι μέλλοιεν ὄψεσθαι, προσ- 
a \ I 2 r ε / \ ca! 
καλὼν Tovs φιλους ἐσπουδαιολογεῖτο. ὡς δηλοίη οὺς τιμᾷ. 
“ y+ 2 - >] A 2 ΄ te ra , 

@ate ἔγωγε ἐξ ὧν ἀκούω οὐδένα κρίνω ὑπὸ πλειόνων πεφι- 
A Sf em / BA , | / Ν 
λῆσθαι ovte Ελλήνων οὔτε βαρβάρων. \ 29. τεκμήριον δε 
΄ x / Ν Ν ΄ Ψ Μ 2 Ν 
τούτου καὶ τοῦδε. παρὰ μεν Κύρου δούλου ὄντος οὐδεὶς 

Taf \ , ee , ’ / ee Ae 
amet πρὸς βασίλεα, πλὴν Opovtas ἐπεχείρησε" καὶ οὗτος 
Ἂς ταὶ oy / (ed: \ en” @ ; Ρ ͵7 
δὴ ὃν ETO πιστὸν οἱ εἶναι ταχὺ αὑτὸν εὑρε Κύρῳ φιλαίτερον 
Ἀν ἢ a N ‘ / \ ἈΝ a Thin 
ἢ ἑαυτῷ" παρὰ δε βασιλέως πολλοὶ πρὸς Κῦρον «απῆλθον, 
? \ / ᾽ , ποτ \ - , ¢ 
ἐπειδὴ πολέμιοι ἀλλήλοις EYEVOVTO, καὶ οὗτοι [EVTOL οἱ 
/ ¢ > > A 3 ὁ / Ὡς 7 
μάλιστα UT αὐτοῦ ayaTwpmeEvol, νομίζοντες Tapa Κύρῳ 
Μἷ Ρ] ee / xX A ΄, A Ν - 
ovtes ἀγαθοι ἀξιωτέρας ἂν τιμῆς τυγχάνειν ἢ Tapa βασιλεῖ. 
49 / δὲ / Ν Ν δ ἢ A A a / 3 »“ 
. μέγα δε τεκμήριον καὶ τὸ EV τῇ τελευτῇ τοῦ βίου αὐτῷ 
7ὔ dg Ν Fi on 3 > Ν Ν 7 5 a > ΄ 
γενόμενον ὅτι καὶ αὐτὸς ἣν ἀγαθὸς καὶ κρίνειν ορθῶς εδύ- 
Ν Ν ἈΝ Μ Ν / z , 
VaTO TOUS πιστοὺς καὶ εὔνους καὶ βεβαίους. 81. ἀποθνη- 
\ ? a 7 « ? bans 7 Ν / 
OKOVTOS Yap αὑτοῦ πᾶντες οἱ παρ auTOV φίλοι καὶ συντρά- 
’ / / e XN 7 Ν > / 
πεζοι ἀπέθανον μαχόμενοι ὑπερ Κύρου πλὴν Apvaiov’ 
e Ν / 2 ΄ Ὁ i Me A > 7 PY ie 
οὗτος δὲ τεταγμένος ετύγχανεν ETL τῷ εὐωνύμῳ TOU LTT I~ 
a « Ἄς a / Μ Μ 
κοῦ ἀρχων" ὡς ὃ ἤσθετο Κῦρον πεπτωκότα, epuyev ἐγὼν 


Ν Ν 7 A e ¢ nr 
καὶ TO στρατευμα πᾶν OV ἡγεῖτο. 


94 Expedition of Cyrus the Younger. [ Xen. 


3 a N ΄ > / € Ν ΚΟΤΕ 
Χ. Ενταῦθα δὴ Κύρου ἀποτέμνεται ἡ κεφαλὴ καὶ ἢ 
Ν ¢ , Ν Ν XN ε Ν ? a / an aes 
χεὶρ ἡ δεξιώ, βασιλεὺς δὲ καὶ ob GUY αὐτῷ διωκων εἰσ- 
7 ᾽ Ν , , N ς τ 59 
πίπτει εἰς τὸ Κύρειον στρατόπεδον" καὶ οὐ μεν μετὰ ᾿Αρι- 
͵ yd o 5) \ ΄ κ - δ ΣΝ 
ALOU οὐκέτι ἵστανται; ἀλλὰ φεύγουσι δια τοῦ αὑτῶν στρατο- 
/ ? Ν Ν + ~ «“ if 5 9 / 
πέδου εἰς τὸν σταθμὸν ἐνθεν ὥρμηντο" τέτταρες ὃ ἐλέγοντο 
͵ 5 A ξ΄ A Ν Ἂν Ν ct ἈΝ 
παρασάγγαι εἶναι τῆς ὁδοῦ. 2. βασιλεὺς δὲ καὶ οἱ σὺν 
> “-“ , + Ν / \ Ἂ, Fie > 
αὐτῷ τώ TE ἄλλα πολλὰ διαρπάζουσι, καὶ τὴν Φωκαΐδα τὴν 
» ; / x Ν Ν ‘\ / cn) 
Κύρου παλλακίδα τὴν σοφὴν καὶ καλὴν λεγομένην εἶναι 
i ¢ Ν 4 6 / a Coe a 
λαμβάνει. 8. ἡ de Μιλησία ἡ νεωτέρα ληφθεῖσα ὑπὸ τῶν 
2 \ , 3 ΄ὕἹ Ν Ν Lee 7, ΝΥ 
αμφὶ βασιλέα ἐκφεύγει γυμνὴ πρὸς τῶν Ελληνων ob ετυ- 
> al 7 if yf \ 2 / 
χον ἐν τοῖς aKEvopopolts ὅπλα ἔχοντες, καὶ ἀντιταχθέντες 
x Ν al e / 3 / € XN ᾿Ἶ 2 a 
πολλοὺς μὲν TOV ἁρπαζόντων ἀπέκτειναν, οἱ δὲ καὶ αὐτῶν 
2 ,ὔ > Ν od / > Ν Ν ΄ + Ν 
ἀπέθανον" οὐ μὴν epuyov γε, ἀλλα καὶ ταύτην ἐσωσαν καὶ 
" ee Ye aN 5. en \ , Ac ey. any 
ἄλλα OT0TAa EVTOS AUTWY καὶ χρηματα Kal ἄνθρωποι εγε- 
/ + > na / > / 
vovTo Tauvta ἔσωσαν. 4. ενταῦθα διέσχον ἀλλήλων βασι- 
΄ Ν Ces. td , 7 td Ν tA 
Aevs τε καὶ οἱ ᾿Ελληνες ὡς τριάκοντα στάδια, οἱ μὲν διω- 
ΧΝ % ¢ Ν € s tal € see , 
KOVTES TOUS καθ αὑτοὺς ὡς παντας νικῶντες, οἱ δ᾽ ἁρπάζοντες 
ony Py: , n Pegg ae EN NOLS, fr, Ne ey, 
ὡς ἤδη πάντες νικῶντες. 5. ἐπεὶ ὃ ῃσθοντο οἱ wev Εἔλληνες 
JA Ν Ν “-“ / » - 7 yf 
ott βασιλεὺυς συν τῷ στρατεύματι EV τοῖς TKEVOdOPOLS EN, 
ὃς ᾽ 3 Κ / f ec a 
βασιλεὺς ὃ av ἤκουσε Τισσαφέρνους ὅτι οἱ ἔλληνες νικῷεν 
τς 3 ς Ἂν Ἀ ᾿Ὶ ὧν 7 Μ΄ / οι 
τὸ καθ᾽ αὑτοὺς καὶ εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν οἴχονται διώκοντες, ἐν- 
a Ν \ ‘ 2 / δ G a ‘ / 
ταῦθα δὴ βασιλεὺς μεν aOpoiver τε τους ἑαυτοῦ και συντάτ- 
2 ἊΝ ΄ 3 ft / / 
tetat, ὁ δε Κλέαρχος εβουλεύετο Πρόξενον καλέσας, πλη- 
/ Ν 3 ᾽ / / , xy 3 Ν τ 
σιαίτατος γὰρ ἦν, εἰ πέμποιεν τινας ἢ πάντες LOLEV ETL TO 
στρατόπεδον ἀρήξοντ 6. ἐ j ὶ βασιλεὺς δῆλο 
ρατοπ ἀρήξοντες. . ἐν τούτῳ και βασιλεὺς δῆλος 
3 Ἂς Ῥ Cd IA? ΕΣ Ν € Dee (ἡ 
ἣν προσιὼν παλιν ws ἐδόκει ὄπισθεν. καὶ οἱ μὲν Ελληνες 
στραφέντες Tapecxeval ὃ ) σιόντος καὶ defo 
ρ Ε ρ ναξαύτιο, Css at me ἫΝ SK 0 
ς ‘XN ἊΝ 3 > ἮΝ A 
εν 
μενοι, ὁ δὲ βασιλεὺς ταύτῃ μὲν οὐκ ἦγεν, ἢ δὲ παρῆλθεν 
y+ A ? ΄ ͵ 7 Not, ,ὔ τ > 
e€w TOU εὐωνύμου κέρατος ταύτῃ καὶ ἀπήγαγεν, ἀναλαβὼν 
\ \ 3 a 7 Ν Neath 2 if 
Kal TOUS EV Τῇ μαχῃ κατα TOUS Ελληνας αὐτομολήσαντας 


Ν / Ni Ν Ξ bs ΄ 
καὶ Τισσαφέρνην καὶ τοὺς σὺν αὐτῷ. ἢ. ὁ γὰρ Τισσαφέρ- 














AnaB.1,x.] Second Aliack of the Greeks. 90 


? a , 7 ? Υ 2 \ rae Ν 
νης ἐν Τῇ πρωτῃ συνόδῳ οὐκ epuyer, ἀλλὰ διήλασε παρα 
Ν Ν Ν ἊΝ Ὁ 7, , 
τὸν ποταμὸν κατὰ τοὺς Ελληνας πελταστάς" διελαύνων δὲ 
͵ Ν 3 / Ud > ec + Ν 
κατέκανε μὲν οὐδένα. διασταντες ὃ ot Ελληνες ἔπαιον καὶ 
. , ? / > / ἈΤῸ , 3 
καὶ ἠκοντιζον αὐτοὺς" Επισθένης δε. Αμφιυιπολίτης ἦρχε 
a a ‘ > / , / e > 
TOV πελταστῶν καὶ ἐλέγετο φρόνιμος γενέσθαι. 8.0 ὃ 
3 , ς an “ ? 7 , \ ? 
οὺν Τισσαφέρνης ως μείον EYWY ἀπηλλάγη, παλιν μὲν οὐκ 
> / 2 Ν Ν / 2 / Ν a ¢ 
ἀναστρέφει, εἰς δὲ TO στρατόπεδον ἀφικόμενος τὸ τῶν ᾿Ελ- 
, 2 r , τὰν ἈΠ τ A Ν , 
λήνων ἐκεῖ συντυγχάνει βασιίλει, καὶ ὁμοῦ δὴ πάλιν συν- 
, > / 3 Ν > 4 Ν Ἂς 5 
ταξάμενοι ἐπορεύοντο. 9. ἐπεὶ ὃ ἦσαν κατὰ TO εὐωνυμον 
n « , / x ( ΩΡ Χ ,ὔ 
τῶν Ελλήνων κεραᾶς, ἐδείσαν ot Ελληνες μὴ προσαγοιεν 
ν X 7 ἃς 7 2 2 \ 
Mpos TO κέρας καὶ περιπτύξαντες ἀμφοτερωθεν αὑτοὺς κατα- 
7 Ὡς: Φρ 2 ω ? / Ν / Ν , 
κοψειαν" καὶ ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς ἀναπτύσσειν TO KEPAasS καὶ ποιη- 
Μ ἣν ,7 2 {τὰ val 2 
σασθαι ὁπισθεν τὸν ποταμὸν. 10. ev ᾧ Ce ταῦτα εβου- 
/ Ν Ν Χ / 5 Ν ἜΣ A 
λεύοντο, καὶ δὴ Bacireus παραμειψάμενος εἰς TO AUTO σχῆμα 
/ > ΄ Ν / «“ x a / 
κατέστησεν aVTLaV THY Purayya ὥσπερ TO TPWTOV μαχου- 
/ ς Ἐπ ed 3 / Μ Ν 
μενος συνῇει. ὡς δε εἶδον οὐ Ελληνες ἐγγὺς τε ὄντας καὶ 
΄ 3 / > ,ὔ . Κ 
παρατεταγμένους, αὖθις παιανίσαντες ἐπῃεσαν πολὺ ETL προ- 
7 \ Ν , id ? = , > 2a/ 
θυμότερον ἢ τὸ πρόσθεν. 11. οἱ δ᾽ av βάρβαροι οὐκ ἐδε- 
? > te , ΕῪ Ν , x ¢ ee 
YOvTO, ANN εκ πλείονος ἢ TO πρόσθεν εφευγον" οἱ δ᾽ ἐπε- 
id / ’ , 3 A > 4 ΄ 
δίωκον μεχρύὶ κωμὴῆς τινος" 812. ἐνταῦθα δ᾽ ἐστησαν οἱ 
a Εἰ: ὧν ἧς a ἢ)» , > i=? @ 3 , 
ἔλληνες ὑπερ yap τῆς κώμης γήλοῴφος ἣν, Eh οὗ ἀνεστρα- 
oes Ν ’ Ν ει 2 a ν ς / 
φησαν οἱ ἀμφὶ βασίλεα, πεζοὶ μὲν οὐκετι, τῶν δε ITTEwWY 
« / 3 , 6 cd Ν 3 Ν , 

ὁ λόφος ενεπλησθη. ὥστε TO ποιούμενον μὴ YLyVwoKeELy. 
\ Ν / - δ᾿. ὃς ” > 7 - 
καὶ τὸ βασίλειον σημεῖον opav εφασαν ἀετὸν τινα χρυσοῦν 
Beit / > ~ / > / 2 \ Χ Ν ) 
ἐπὶ πελτῃ επί ξύλου ἀανατεταμένον. 18. ἐπεὶ δε καὶ ev- 

np? > , «ὦ / Ν Ν Ν , ς 
ταῦθ eywpovv οἱ ᾿λληνες, λείπουσι δὴ καὶ τον λόφον οἱ 
et [Φὶ 3 Ν ΝΜ 3 / 2 a Ἂν Μ > a 
"ππεις" οὐ μὴν ἔτι APpoot αλλ ἀλλοι ἀλλοθεν" εψιλοῦτο 

ΑΝ ὁ / A ς / / Ν Ν ͵ ? , 
ὃ ὁ λόφος τῶν ἱππέων: τέλος δὲ καὶ πάντες ATEXWPNTAV, 
ε > , > ? / 1 ἃ Ν , ? > 
14. ὁ οὖν Κλέαρχος οὐκ ἀνεβιβαζεν ἐπὶ τὸν λόφον. αλλ 
δι. ΑΜ αν , Ν 4 / / Ν 
ὑπ αὑτὸν στήσας τὸ στράτευμα πέμπει Δύκιον τον Συρα- 


/ oy 2. Ἢ Ν / Ν ,ὔ , Ν 
κοσιον Kal αλλον επι TOV λοφον καὶ κελεύει, κατιδοντας τὰ 



















ov Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen 


ς Ἂ Le) id δον “Ἃ 9 a . Ν ra , ςς 
ὑπερ τοῦ λόφου TL ἐστιν aTrayyelhal, 45. Kat ὁ Δύκιος. 
By / Nie ἈΝ > / “ ΄ Be τὰς / 
ἤλασε TE καὶ ἰδὼν ἀπαγγελλει OTL φεύγουσιν ava κράτος. 
ὡς ) gf a 5 ᾿ς leh, Ia7 3 = > 
σχεδὸν δ᾽ ὅτε ταῦτα ἦν Kal ἥλιος EdveTO. 16. ενταῦθα ὃ 
x ed Ν / NDAs, ? / \a 
ἐστησαν ot ἔλληνες καὶ θεμενοι Ta ὅπλα ἀνεπαύοντο" καὶ — 
, δ > ͵ / > a a ! a3) ἂν 
ἅμα μὲν ἐθαύμαζον. ὅτε οὐδαμοῦ Κῦρος φαίνοιτο ovd addos — 
> 3 > “ἅμ 2 Ν 2 Ν τὴς δι Ὁ ͵7 
aT αὐτοῦ οὐδεὶς παρείη" οὐ yap ἤδεσαν αὑτὸν τεθνηκότα, 
> δὲν ; / 7 \ / / * 
arr εἴκαζον ἢ διώκοντα οἴχεσθαι ἢ καταληψόμενον TL προ- — 
/ Ν 2 NG / > ? a / : 
εληλακέναι" LY. καὶ αὐτοὶ εβουλεύοντο εἰ αὐτοῦ μείναντες 
Ν ͵ 3 a +o re Shiney? ie Nes ia 
Ta oKevopopa ἐνταῦθα ayowTo ἢ ἀπίοιεν ἐπὶ TO στρατό- 
yy » a 3 / \ Ρ) A 9 Ν 
πεδον. εδοξεν αὐτοῖς ἀπιέναι" καὶ ἀφικνοῦνται ἀμφὶ δορ- — 
Ν 31 UN Ν / / N A WA aA 4 
πηστὸν ἔπι τὰς σκηνάς. LS. ταύτης μεν τῆς ἡμέρας τοῦτο 
Ν / 35 ὦ , Ν a Μ 
τὸ τέλος ἐγένετο. καταλαμβωνουσι δε τῶν τε ἄλλων χρη- 
΄, \ rn / Ν 7 / \ = + 
μάτων τὰ πλεῖστα διηρπασμένα καὶ εἰ TL σιτίον ἢ ποτὸν 
49 \ Ν ς 7, Χ > , . ” a τ 
nV, καὶ Tas ἁμάξας μεστὰς ἀλεύρων καὶ οἰνου, ἃς παρε- 
, a vA ἡ \ Ν , ’ὔ | 
σκευάσατο Κῦρος iva, εἰ ποτε σφοδρὰ τὸ στράτευμα λαβοι 
7 / Ch 2 ? - 4 3} 
evoera, διαδοίη τοῖς Ελλησιν' ἦσαν 6 avtat TeTpakootat — 
ε mee?) “ N ͵ ῃ ε \ a ? 
ὡς ἐλέγοντο ἅμαξαι" καὶ ταῦτας τότε οἱ συν βασιλεῖ Sunp- — 
7 yo 5 ς n “᾽ννὁ = 
πασαν. 49. ὥστε ἀδειπνοι ἦσαν οἱ πλεῖστοι τῶν Ελλη- | 
3 ἂν \ ᾽ , Ν \ ἃς a - τη 
νων" ἦσαν δὲ καὶ ἀνάριστοι" πρὶν γὰρ δὴ καταλῦσαι τὸ 
, ‘ +” \ ? , / Ἂ μὰ 
στράτευμα πρὸς ἄριστον βασίλευς ehavn. ταύτην μὲν οὐν 


Ν ’ὔ 7 / 
τὴν νύκτα οὕτω διεγένοντο. 


BOOK SECOND. 


€ κ᾿ 3 ΟῚ / , Swe ἈΝ Ὡ 3 ΝΣ “ἋΣ 
I. Qs μὲν οὖν ἠθροίσθη Κυρῳ to Ελληνικὸν ὅτε emt 

ἐν ? Ν 3 / ? / \o¢ 2 ον. 
τὸν ἀδελφὸν Αρταξερξην ἐστρατεύετο, καὶ ὅσα ἐν τῇ ἀνόδῳ 
3 ͵ Ν ς ς / > / \ « lal 3 / ᾿ 
ἐπρώχθη καὶ ὡς ἡ μάχη ἐγένετο καὶ ὡς Κῦρος ἐτελεύτησε, 
ΩΝ Ν , > ee 3 ‘= 
καὶ ws ἐπὶ TO στρατόπεδον ἐλθόντες οἱ ᾿ Ελληνες εκοιμήτ᾽ 


θ a OL / € \ or / - “ Ν Ko ζῆ 3 a + ν᾽ 
σαν οἰόμενοί Ta TavtTa νικᾶν Kat Kupov ζὴν, ἐν τῷ ἐμ 


προσθεν λόγῳ δεδήλωται. 2. ἅμα δὲ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ συνελθόντες, 


Anas. 2,11 Proposal to make Ariaeus King. 97 


«ε ΟῚ, / Ἁ a Μ ΚΜ / 
οἱ στρατηγοὶ εθαύμαζον ore Κῦρος οὔτε ἀλλον πέμποι on- 
~ Ψ δ n yo EN , Υ > 
μανοῦντα ὃ TL χρὴ ποίειν οὔτε αὑτὸς φαίνοιτο. εδοξεν οὖν 
> a / \ > No / 5- 
αὑτοῖς συσκευασαμένοις ἃ εἶχον καὶ εξοπλισαμεένοις προΐ- 
/ > Ν / of / / x > Ὁ 
ἕναν εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν ἕως Κύρῳ συμμίξειαν. 8. ἤδη δὲ ἐν 
As / Caf Sf 3 my pee 
ὁρμῇ ὄντων ἅμα ἡλίῳ ἀνίσχοντι ἦλθε Προκλῆς ὁ TevOpa- 
7 yf Ν 5 Ἂς ΄ὔ val / Ν 
vias ἄρχων, γεγονὼς ἀπὸ ΖΦαμαρατου τοῦ Λάκωνος, καὶ 
> = @ M7 7 A \ , 
Trovs ὁ Tayo. οὗτοι ἐλεγον ὅτι Κῦρος μὲν τέθνηκεν, 
> rn Ν Ν ? a a y \ a ΚΜ 
Αριαΐος δὲ πεφευγὼς ev τῷ σταθμῷ εἰὴ μετὰ τῶν ἄλλων 
yy 4 «“ a / « \ / “ , 
BapBapwv ὅθεν τῇ προτεραίᾳ ὥρμηντο, καὶ λέγοι OTL ταύ- 
ν \ Cue / \ ? Ν ? / 
τὴν μὲν τὴν ἡμέραν περιμείνειεν ἂν auUTOUS, εἰ μέλλοιεν 
/ “ ee, 2 / , 2) Ne / / 3 
ἥκειν, τῇ δὲ ἀλλῃ ἀπιέναι φαίη «πὶ Ιωνίας, ὅθενπερ ἦλθε. 
rn 2 / € Ν ‘\ κι ¢/ 
4. ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες οἱ aoTpaTyyol Kat οἱ ἄλλοι EXANVES 
, , y ᾿ Ν / 5 
πυνθανόμενοι Bapews epepov. Κλέαρχος δὲ τάδε εἶπεν, 
> ? / ν A A > Ἂ ΧΝ ti 3 
Arr ὠφελε μὲν Κῦρος ζῆν" επεὶ δὲ τετελεύτηκεν, ἀπαγ- 
WV, > / “ ¢ val a 7 / be 3 ΠΑΝ ἐς 
γέλλετε Aplaiw ote ἡμεῖς νικῶμεν τε βασίλεα καὶ ὡς ὁρᾶτε 
σιν τ econ , V5 Re ως, 5} > , 
οὐδεὶς ETL ἡμῖν μάχεται, καὶ EL μὴ ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα 
“Δ ᾽ Ν r 3 / x > / + 3 / 
av emt βασιλεα. εἐπαγγελλόμεθα Se Apiniw, ἐὰν ἐνθάδε 
" 7 Ἂς 7 Ν / -“ > ͵7 “ Ν 
εἐλθῃ, εἰς τὸν θρόνον τὸν βασίλειον καθιεῖν αὐτόν" τῶν γὰρ 
/ / Ν No > / a Φ > Ν > 
μαχη νικωντων καὶ TO ἀρχείν ἐστί. 3. ταῦτ ELTaV ἀπο- 
͵ Ν > 7 Ν x 2 ra / Ν / 
στέλλει TOUS ἀγγέλους καὶ συν αὑτοῖς Χειρίαγφον τὸν Aa- 
Ν / Ἂς 7 Ἂς Ν 2 Ἃς ΄ 
kava καὶ Mevwva τὸν Θετταλὸν" καὶ γὰρ αὐτὸς Μένων 
3 / 5 \ Ἵ \ , > / ε \ 
εβούλετο: ἢν yap φίλος καὶ Eevos ᾿Αριαίουι 68. οἱ wer 
Ε) / \ / ᾿ς \ ὔ 3 / 
w@xovto, Κλέαρχος δὲ περιέμενε. τὸ δὲ στράτουμα ἐπορί- 
ἂν 7 5. 3 > a ς / / ‘ 
ζετο σιτον ὅπως εδύνατο Ex τῶν ὑποζυγίων κόπτοντες τοὺς 
A NS / 3 3 a Ν NAY 3 Ν 
βοῦς καὶ ὀνους" ξύλοις δ᾽ ἐχρῶντο μικρὸν προϊόντες ama 
a / ete , 4, a 5 ms = 
τῆς φαλαγγος ov ἡ μάχη EVEVETO τοις τε OLOTOLS πολλοῖς 
> δ , ς 2 ,ὔ Χ 2 
οὖσιν, ovs ἠνάγκαζον ot “Ελληνες ἐκβάλλειν τοὺς αὐτομο- 
“- Ν / Ν - / Ν al > / 
λουντας Tapa βασιλέως, καὶ τοῖς γέρροις καὶ ταῖς ἀσπίσι 
lal / a ᾿] , ᾿ς Ν ἣν / Ἂν 
ταις ξυλίναις ταῖς Αιγυπτίιαις" πολλαὶ δὲ καὶ πέλται καὶ 
od 3 / Μ - aA x , 
ἅμαξαι ἦσαν φέρεσθαι ἔρημοι" οἷς πᾶσι χρώμενοι κρέα 
ad y 3 / Ν ς ’ Ne ay 5 Ν 
ἐψοντες ἤσθιον ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν. ἢ. καὶ ἤδη τε ἦν περὶ 


38 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xex. 


/ > Ν Ἂς yy X / XV fi 
πληθουσαν ἄγοραν καὶ EpyovTal Tapa βασίλεως και 1ιτσ- 
/ / ¢ ’ 4 / 3 a? I. a 
σαφέρνους κήρυκες οὐ μὲν ἄλλου βάρβαροι, ἣν ὁ αὐτῶν 
r @ ¢ ‘\ 2 7 Ν / \ \ 
Φαλῖνος εἷς “Ελλην, ὃς ἐτύγχανε παρα Τισσαφερνει wy καὶ 
3 Ν r > 7 “ rn 
ἐντίμως ἔχων᾽ καὶ γαρ προσεποίειτο εἐπίστημων εἶναι τῶν 
3 \ / i ek / Θ Ν / 
αμφι τάξεις τε καὶ ὁοπλομαχίαν. 8. οὔτοι δὲ προσέλθοντες 
Ν , Ν cr € / + / “ 
καὶ καλέσαντες Tous τῶν Ελληνων ἄρχοντας λεγουσιν OTL 
Ν "ἢ Ν “ > τς rn / Ν 
βασιλεὺς κελεύει τοὺς Ελληνας, ἐπεί νικῶν τυγχάνει καὶ 
A > / / WAG! pect A 2 Ν Ν 
Kupov amrextove, παραδοντας Ta ὅπλα LoVTas ἐπι τας βασι- 
/ ΄ Coe + ΄ > , a 
λέως θύρας εὑρίσκεσθαι av τι δύνωνται ayafov. 9%. ταῦτα 
Ν 3 ς ͵ ,ὔ ς Se , ἈΝ 
μὲν εἶπον οἱ βασίλεως KNPUKES* Ob de Ελληνες βαρέως μεν 
BA “ Σ ΄ Ἂ 53 vA ? a 
ἤκουσαν, ὄμως δὲ Κλεαρχος τοσοῦτον εἶπεν, OTL οὐ τῶν νυ- 
ἧς + Ν / ΄ 2 > - 3} ς a Ν 3 
κώντων €LN TA ὅπλα παραδιδοναι" GAN, εφη. ὑμεις MEV, ὦ 
ΕΣ Ν / ΚΝ ΤΟΣ , “ / / 
ἀνδρες στρατήγοι, τούτοις ἁποκρίνασθε ὁ TL καλλιστον TE 
τ x 3) iN \ 2) ee e/ > ͵ ΄ 
καὶ ἄριστον ἔχετε" EY ὃε αὐτίκα ἥξω. εκαλεσε yup τις 
ΟΥΤΩΣ ὦ κ᾿ ς rf “ Μ « Ν 2 7 y 
QUTOV TWY ὑπηρετῶν. ὅπως Loo, Ta lepa εξηρημενα " €TUXE 
Ν / Bf Ν 2 / 3 / hs ¢e 
yap θυόμενος. . 10. ἐνθα δὴ ἀπεκρίνατο Κλεανωρ μεν o 
3 \ γ᾽ Ἃ A Lf Ἃ 2 4 Xx Ἷ 
Apxas πρεσβύτατος ὧν OTL προσθεν av ὠποθανοιεν ἢ τὰ 
7 rc 7 Ν ε a 3 PGRN: AS BA 
ὅπλα παραδοῖεν: Πρόξενος δε ὁ Θηβαῖος, ᾿Αλλ eyo, edn, 
3 al / / € 6 τορῶς >] r Ν 
ὦ Parive, θαυμάζω πότερα ὡς κρατῶν βασιλεὺς αἰτεῖ τὰ 
/ Tri το Ν ῃ κα ? \ Ν ς an / a 
ὅπλα ἢ ws διὰ φιλίαν δῶρα. εἰ μὲν yap ws κρατῶν, TL δεῖ 
5% ΟῚ a Ν Σ r 3 7 γ Χ / / 
αὐτὸν αἰτεῖν Kat ov λαβεῖν ελθοντα; εἰ Oe πείσας βούλεται 
r / LM: rr / ᾿ Ἂς 2 A n 
λαβεῖν. λεγέτω τί εἐσταῖ TOLS στρατιωταῖς, ELV αὐτῷ ταῦτα 
/ Ν A nf Cy \ An 
χαρίσωνται. LL. πρὸς ταῦτα Φαλῖνος εἶπε, Bactdeus νικᾶν 
ξ΄ re > ἧς a 2 / / x 2 a Μ 7 
ηγείται. ἐπεὶ Κῦρον ἁπέκτονε. τίς yap avT@ εστιν ὅστις 
a > A > “ / Ἂς \ Γο “A ς an 9S 
τῆς ἀρχῆς AVTUTOLELTAaL ; νομίζει δε καὶ ὑμᾶς ἑαυτοῦ εἶναι, 
é > / A « lal , ον a 3 Se aD B , 
NOV ἐν μέσῃ TH EAUTOV χωρᾳ καὶ TOTAUwWY EVTOS ἀδιαβα- 
N a ΠῚ 7 5... ACG ΄ > a «“ 
τῶν καὶ πλῆθος ἀνθρώπων eh ὑμᾶς δυνάμενος ἀγαγεῖν σον 
.2 3 ᾿ ΄ Cle ΄ \ 3 a ~ 
ovo εἰ παρέχοι ὑμῖν͵ δύναισθε ἂν ἀποκτεῖναι. U2. μετὰ 
“Ὁ / b ] “- i 3 rol A ἂν 
τοῦτον Θεόπομπος ᾿Αθηναῖος εἶπεν, ᾿᾽Ὦ Φαλῖνε, νῦν, ὡς συ 
cea Cine Ia ΝΜ 2 ἂν Μ ’ Ν 7 Ν 2 / 
Opas, ἡμιν οὐδεν ἐστιν ἀγαθὸν ἄλλο εἰ μὴ ὅπλα καὶ ἀρετή. 


«“ x Ν > x 3 ἐν θ Ἃ Ν A ΡῚ a A θ 
OT AGA μὲν ουν ἔχοντες οἰομεσα AV Kab Τῇ ApeTn XPNF at, 





Anas. 2, 1.1 Surrender of the Greeks demanded. 39 


, ϑινΝ A Ν tal 3 - Ν 
παραδόντες δ᾽ ἂν ταῦτα καὶ τῶν σωμάτων στερηθῆναι. μὴ 
Φ y+ Ν / 2 \ ς ἴω yf ( ὃ γυ ὃ / > ‘ 
οὖν oLov Ta μόνα ayala ἡμῖν ὄντα ὑμῖν παραδώσειν, ara 
4 \ Ν cr ς / 2 cal ΄ 
σὺν τούτοις καὶ περὶ τῶν ὑμετέρων ἀγαθῶν μαχούμεθα. 
Ν a ΄ a 2 / Ν 53 > Ν 
13. ἀκούσας δὲ ταῦτα ὁ Φαλῖνος ἐγέλασε Kat εἶπεν, ἄλλα 
, Ἂν BA = / Ν Xx / 3 > , Ἷ 
φιλοσόφῳ μεν ἐοικας, ὦ νεανίσκε, καὶ λέγεις οὐκ ἀχάριστα 
͵ fay \ > οὖ \ ¢ / > τ 
ἴσθι μέντοι ἀνόητος ὧν, εἰ OLEL THY ὑμετέραν ἀρετὴν περί- 
‘\ A / , + / 
γενέσθαι ἂν τῆς βασιλέως δυνάμεως. ΚΑ. ἄλλους δέ τινας 
/ c / € Ν ΄ ν 
ἔφασαν λεγειν ὑπομαλακιζομένους ὡς καὶ Κύρῳ πιστοὶ 
a ~~ , > 4 
ἐγένοντο καὶ βασιλεῖ ἂν πολλοῦ ἀξιοι γένοιντο, εἰ βούλοιτο 
͵7ὔ Ν 4 Μ / A ἌΣ 9 ) > 
φίλος γενεσθαι" Kat εἰτε ἀλλο TL θελοι χρῆσθαι ELT ἐπ 
yf ft 4 bd er τ τ of 5 ᾽ 
Αἴγυπτον στρατεύειν, συγκαταστρεψαιντ ἂν αὐτῷ. 15. εν 
ν᾿ ͵ e Ν ᾽ , 2 yy > / 
τούτῳ Κλέαρχος ἧκε, Kal ἠρωτησεν εἰ ἤδη «ποκεκριμενοι 
χυ r Ν ἐπ Ν εν e XN > ’ 
εἶεν. Φαλῖνος δε ὑπολαβὼν εἶπεν. Οὑτοι μεν. ὦ Κλεαρχε, 
Μ Μ / \ 2 - Ὁ >. Seats ,ὔ ς > 
ἄλλος ἄλλα λέγει" σὺ O ἡμιν εἰπε TL λέγεις. 16.0 ὃ 
5 > , 5 A ” cr 5 \ \ ε 
εἶπεν, ᾿Εγω σε. ὦ Φαλῖνε, ἄσμενος Ewpaxa, οἶμαι δε καὶ οἱ 
“ ΄ / Ν “ 3 NR “ἢ r a 
ἄλλοι πάντες" σὺ τε yap Ελλην εἶ καὶ ἡμεῖς τοσοῦτοι 
Μ 7d ee «Ἐς ? ΄ δὲ + / 
ὄντες ὅσους σὺ ὁρᾶς" εν τοιούτοις δε ὄντες πράγμασι συμ- 
͵ὕὔ Υ̓ / Ν rp \ @ 4 ‘ 3 
βουλευόμεθα σοι τι χρὴ ποιεῖν περὶ ὧν λέγεις. LY. συ οὖν 
τας na , ΄ ς ε 7 rn , Ν 
πρὸς θεῶν ουμβούλευσον nv ὃ τι σοι δοκεῖ κάλλιστον καὶ 
a 3 Lo \ y+ 3 \ ¥ , 
ἄριστον εἶναι, καὶ ὃ GOL τιμὴν OlaEL εἰς τὸν ἔπειτα χρόνον 
/ 7ἷ Ce vf. Ν Ν 7 
λεγόμενον, ὅτε Φαλῖνος ποτε πεμφθεις παρὰ Bacirews κε- 
΄ \ e/ Ν / A 
Aevowy τοὺς EAAnvas τὰ ὅπλα παραδοῦναι συμβουλευο- 
7 Pe > a 7, 3 NG > , 
μένοις συνεβούλευσεν αὑτοῖς τάδε. οἶσθα δὲ ὅτε ἀνάγκη 
, > we , oe ΄, ere 
λεγεσθαι ev τῇ Ελλωδι ἃ ἂν συμβουλεύσῃς. 18. ὁ δὲ 
- ι 
/ fal ς / , Ἀ δ Ν ‘ 
Κλεαρχος ταῦτα ὑπήγετο βουλόμενος Kat αὐτὸν τὸν παρὰ 
/ 7 A Ν an \ 
Baothews πρεσβεύοντα συμβουλεῦσαι μὴ παραδοῦναι τὰ 
7 / 2/ A > ew 6 
ὅπλα, ὅπως εὐέλπιδες μᾶλλον εἶεν οἱ “Ελληνες. . Φαλῖνος 
aN - / Ν Ν / > A > 5 Ν ΕῚ 
δὲ ὑποστρέψας παρὰ τὴν δοξαν αὐτοῦ εἶπεν, 19. ἔγω, εἰ 
Ἂ a / 3 , / Gin. 2 - 
μὲν τῶν μυρίων ελπίδων μία τις ὑμῖν ἐστι σωθῆναι πολε- 
A r 4 XN , Ν 7 > 
povvtas βασιλεῖ, συμβουλεύω μὴ παραδιδόναι Ta ὅπλα" εἰ 


/ / / 2 X 2 Ν y / 
δὲ Tov μηδεμία σωτηρίας ἐστὶν ἐλπὶς ἄκοντος βασιλέως, 


40 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen. 


’ , ς «α A , , Ν 
συμβουλεύω σώζεσθαι ὑμῖν ὅπη δυνατὸν. 20. Κλεαρχος δε 
Ν a > 3 Χ a ᾿ Sn δ / > 
προς ταῦτα ELTED, ἄλλα TavTa μεν δὴ σὺ AEVELS* Tap 
Cogn a Ne ΄ / e a ae 3 \ , 
ἡμῶν δὲ ἀπάγγελλε τάδε, OTL ἡμεῖς οἰόμεθα, εἰ μὲν δεοι βα- 
a I. 5 / \ + 9 Λ Μ Σ τ 
σιλεῖ φίλους εἶναι, πλείονος ἂν ἀξιοι εἶναι φίλοι ἔχοντες τὰ 
7 \ / 4 3 \ ,ὔ a ΕἾ) \ 
ὅπλα ἢ παραδόντες ἄλλῳ, εἰ δὲ OEOL πολεμεῖν, ἄμεινον ἂν 
an ΕΣ Ν 7 Δ, ἦν / os ς Ν 
πολεμεῖν ἔχοντες τὰ ὅπλα ἢ ἄλλῳ παραδόντες. BH. ὁ δὲ 
a a ms Ὁ Nahe Ὁ ΝΥ 3 x N , 
Φαλῖνος εἶπε, Ταῦτα μεν δὴ ἁπαγγελοῦμεν" adda καὶ τώδε 
᾿ a 3 “- 3. oF ‘ ed / he > a 
ὑμῖν εἰπεῖν ἐκέλευσε βασίλεὺυς OTL μενουσι μὲν αὐτοῦ σπον- 
Κατ οὶ ὦ \ Nee: a , 7 > 
δαὶ εἴησαν, προϊοῦσι δὲ καὶ απιοῦσι πόλεμος. εἴπατε οὖν 
Ν \ 7, / \ Pee Ae are 
καὶ περὶ τούτου πότερα MEVELTE καὶ σπονδαί εἰσιν ἢ ὡς 
/ Μ 3... γΕ, κι 2 a ͵ 2 
πολέμου ὄντος παρ ὑμῶν ἀπαγγελῶ 22. Κλεαρχος ὃ 
3. 3 7 / \ Ν / e/ ᾿ς con 
ἐλεξεν, ἄπαγγελλε τοίνυν καὶ TEPL τούτου OTL καὶ ἡμίν 
oe,’ cr ed Ν a / 3 a χε ἃ ΕΣ ς 
ταὐτὰ δοκεῖ ἅπερ καὶ βασιλεῖ. Ti οὖν ταῦτά ἐστιν; edn ὁ 
a 2 , , Ἃ x / \ 
Parivos. ἀπεκρίνατο Κλεαρχος, Ἦν μεν μένωμεν, σπονδαι, 
2 A Ν Ν ὦ ΤᾺ , e Ν / » , 
ἀπιοῦσι δὲ καὶ προϊοῦσι πόλεμος. 38. ὁ δὲ πάλιν ρωτη- 
N \ / ’ A : , \ ἘΠΕῚ 
σε, Σπονδὰς ἢ πόλεμον ἀπαγγελῶ; Κλεαρχος δὲ ταὐτὰ 
/ > / Ν Ν UL 2 a Ν ΕΥ 
πάλιν ἀπεκρίνατο, Σ᾽ πονδαὶ μὲν μένουσιν, ἀπιοῦσι δὲ ἢ 
ἀν ἘΝ / d ΧΝ ,ὔ Σ , 
προϊοῦσι πόλεμος. OTL δὲ ποιήσοι οὐ διεσήμηνε. 
Φ A Ἂν δὴ ΕΣ Ν « \ > a € δὲ ἧς 
IT, Φαλῖνος μὲν δὴ ὠχετο καὶ οἱ συν αὐτῷ. οἱ O€ παρὰ 
9 / Ὁ a Ν / / Ν 3 κα 
Ἀριαίου ἧκον Προκλῆς καὶ Χειρίσοφος" Mevwy δε αὐτοῦ 
»Μ Ἀ Θ , Ὄ Se 5h “ Ν 7 
ἔμενε παρὰ Αριαίῳ' οὗτοι δὲ ἔλεγον OTL πολλοὺς Hain 
9 a 3 , e a / a ? xX 2 ’ 
Aptatos εἶναι Πέρσας εαυτοῦ βελτίους, οὺς οὐκ ἂν avacye- 
2 - , ’ 3 9 ͵ ͵ 
σθαι αὐτοῦ βασιλεύοντος" arr εἰ βούλεσθε συναπιέναι. 
«“ ΕΝ ,ὔ a , 3 Ν ἣν 2528 \ > , 
ἥκειν NON κελεύει τῆς νυκτὸς. εἰ δὲ μη, AUTOS πρῷ ἀπιέναι 
/ ς Ν ,ὔ 9D 3 3 [72 Ν a 
φησίν. 2. ὁ δε Κλέαρχος εἶπεν, AAN οὕτω χρὴ Tove: 
IS Ν Ψ Ὡ / ? x Ν , ε a 
ἐαν μὲν ἥκωμεν, ὥσπερ λέγετε" EL δὲ μὴ, πρώττετε ὁποῖον 
Ε »"» y , / 72 ν ͵ 
ἂν τι ὑμῖν οἰησθε μαλιστα συμφερειν.. ὁ τι δὲ ποιήσοι 
Jar 7 3 Ν A δ) ¢ / / 
οὐδὲ τούτοις εἶπε. B. μετὰ ταῦτα ἤδη ἡλίου δύνοντος συγ- 
7 Ν \ Ν N " 4 3 Ν 
καλεσας τοὺς στρατηγοὺς καὶ λοχαγους ελεξε τοιάδε. ᾿Ἐμοὶ, 
ΦΥ͂ / 52) yoke / SOS a nite , 
ὦ ἄνδρες, θυομενῳ evar ἐπὶ βασίλεα οὐκ ἐγίγνετο Ta ἱερὰ. 
Ν Ὅν A 3 ee ε Ν SiN a ΄ 
καὶ εἰκότως ἄρα οὐκ ἐγίγνετο" ὡς γὰρ ἐγὼ νῦν πυνθάνομαι, 


3 / ς a Ν / ς ,ὔ / 3 / 
ἐν μέσῳ ἡμῶν καὶ βασίλεως ὁ Tivons ποταμὸς ἐστι ναυσί- 


ANAB. 2, 1ι.] The Greeks jon Arvaeus. 4] 


\ ? 7 Υ 7 A Ἴ a 
πορος,. OV οὐκ ἂν δυναίμεθα ἄνευ πλοίων διαβῆναι" πλοῖα 


lal > + τ > Ν Ν 2 al ‘ e/ 
δὲ ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἔχομεν. (ov μὲν δὴ αυτοῦ γε μένειν οἷόν τε" 
ἃ \ ? / ? 357 4 3. ἢ a: Ν Ν Κ 7 
τὰ γὰρ ἐπιτήδεια οὐκ ἐστιν ἔχειν" ἱέναι ὃε πάρα τοὺς Ku- 
᾽, , Ν ξ re Ν ς Ν > - 3 ‘ 
pov φίλους πανυ Kaha ἡμῖν τὰ LEpa HV. 4. ὧδε οὖν χρη 
rn ? , ae Υ ? \ \ ΄ 
ποιεῖν" ὠπιόντας δειπνεῖν ὃ TL τις ἔχει" ἐπειδὰν δὲ σημήνῃ 
vad / ¢ > / 7] θ 3 δὰ δὲ Ν 
τῷ κέρατι ὡς ἀναπαύεσθαι, συσκευάξζεσθε" επειδαν ὃὲ TO 
/ > / IN \ ς , > te δὲ a 7 
δεύτερον, ἀνατίθεσθε ἐπὶ τὰ ὑποζύγια" ἐπὶ ὃε τῷ τρίτῳ 
cd Aes 7 Ν Ν ς / + ; = a 
ἕπεσθε TH ἡγουμένῳ, τὰ μεν ὑποζύγια ἔχοντες προς TOV 
a > Such x a > / - 
ποταμοῦ. τὰ δὲ ὁπλα εἕξω. ὅ. ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες οἱ στρα- 
N N N > ar are / “ » N 
τηγοὶ Kat λοχαγοὶ ἀπῆλθον καὶ ἐποίουν οὕτω. καὶ TO 
Ν Ν 3 ς Ν 2 / 2 [ἐ / 2 x 
λοιπὸν ὁ μὲν ἦρχεν, οἱ δὲ ἐπείθοντο, οὐχ ἐλόμενοι, ἀλλα 
ε a “ , 2 , - a Ν Μ ς δ᾽ y 
OPWVTES OTL μονος εφρονει οἷα δεῖ τὸν ἄρχοντα, οἱ αλλοι 
y 3 > N . “ὩΣ Fe POS τίσι ᾿ς, Ἢ / 
ἄπειροι ἦσαν. 6. ἀριθμὸς δὲ τῆς ὁδοῦ ἣν ἦλθον εξ Ede- 
A? / / a ,ὔ \ r tate. , 
σου τῆς Iwvias μέχρι τῆς μάχης σταθμοὶ τρεῖς καὶ EvEVT- 
, / Ν s \ / 
κοντα, Tapacayyal TEVTE καὶ τριάκοντα καὶ TEVTAKOCLOL, 
He , Ν ς , \ / ᾽ Ν δὲ 
στάδιοι πεντήκοντα καὶ ἐξακισχίλιοι καὶ μύριοι" ATO OE 
A 7 3. / 3 > al / ¢ / 
τῆς μάχης ἐλέγοντο εἶναι εἰς Βαβυλῶνα στάδιοι ἑξήκοντα 
Ν / 2 A 2 Ν / 3 / 
καὶ τριακόσιοι. ἢ. ἐντεῦθεν ἐπεὶ σκότος ἐγένετο Midroxv- 
Ν ec a Μ 7 ¢ , a. ὌΝ ὧδ ra ’ 
Ons μὲν ὁ Θρᾷξ ἔχων τούς τε ἱππέας Tous μεθ ἑαυτοῦ εἰς 
’, \ a a - e / ? 
τετταράκοντα καὶ τῶν πεζῶν Θρᾳκῶν ws τριακοσίους NUTO- 
7 Ν / = / ‘ “Ὁ Ν e ΄- 
μόλησε προς βασιλεα. 8. K Neapyos δε τοῖς ἄλλοις NYELTO 
\ ba / ¢ ik 16, > at A ? 
κατὰ τὰ παρηγγελμένα, οἱ ὃ εἰποντο" καὶ ἀφικνοῦνται εἰς 
ἃς fal Ἂν Ἂς r Ἂς Ν > / 
Tov πρῶτον σταθμὸν παρὰ Αριαῖον καὶ THY ἐκείνου στρα- 
\ ? \ , / ene / / Sac 
Tiav ἀμῷι μέσας νύκτας" καὶ ev τάξει θεμενοι Ta oTAa 
A « Ν Ν Ἂς -“ e , \ 
συνῆλθον οἱ στρατηγοι καὶ λοχαγοὶ τῶν Ελληνων παρὰ 
? vas NY Av, “ d Nort) cam a \ 
Aptatov: καὶ ὥμοσαν ot τε ἔλληνες καὶ ὁ Αριαίος Kat 
a ‘ ? ta id , 7ὔ ὃ 7 3 / / 
τῶν συν αὐτῷ οἱ KPUTLITOL NTE προδωσειν AAANAOUS συμ- 
/ Μ € Ν / , \ ξ , 
payot τε ἐσεσθαι" ot de βάρβαροι προσωμοσαν καὶ ἡγήσε- 
3 / —< a 3 7) 7 ~ \ 
σθαι ἀδόλως. 79. ταῦτα δ᾽ wpocav, σφάξαντες ταῦρον καὶ 
/ Ν rg Ν Ν 2 > / ε » { 
λύκον καὶ κώπρον καὶ κριὸν εἰς ἀσπίδα, ob μεν Ελληνες 
, / e Ν , , , Ν N\ Ν 
βώπτοντες ξιφος. οἱ δὲ βαρβαροι λογχὴην. 10. eres δὲ τὰ 
a Diy IP 3 a ear 4 <a A ᾽ / 
πιστὰ EVEVETO. εἶπεν ὁ Κλεαρονος. Ave δὴ. ὦ ADLALE. ETTEI- 


42 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [XEN. 


e oN | / > Ν Ν ς rad 5 Ν / 7 
περ ὁ AUTOS ὑμῖν στόλος εστί καὶ ἡμίν, εὐπε TLVA γνωμην 
“ Ν A 7 / x e/ + θ “Ὁ 
ἔχεις περι τῆς πορείας, πότερον ἀπιμὲεν ἥνπερ ἡλθομεν ἢ 
+S ΝᾺ 3 / ἣν ean / ἡ > 95 
ἄλλην τινὰ ἐννενοηκεναι δοκεῖς ὁδὸν κρείττω. LB. OO El- 

\ Ἂ +S > / 5 ΝΥ ς Ἀ - 
πεν, Ἣν μεν ἤλθομεν ἀπιόντες παντελῶς ἂν ὑπὸ λιμοῦ 
? / rus . A con ar n 2 ͵ 
ἀπολοίμεθα: ὑπάρχει γὰρ νῦν ἡμῖν οὐδὲν τῶν επιτηδείων. 

7 Ν “ n ? 7 Ia a Fit 
ἑπτακαίδεκα γὰρ σταθμῶν τῶν ἐγγυτάτω οὐδε δεῦρο ἰόντες 
> n 7 ar Υ / ἣν oh 5 δ fea 
ἐκ τῆς χώρας οὐδεν εὐχομεν λαμβάνειν", ενθα δ᾽ εἰ τι ἣν, ἡμεῖς 

/ / A 3:2 A / 
διαπορευόμενοι κατεδαπανήσαμεν. νῦν δ᾽ ἐπινοοῦμεν πορεύ- 
/ ἂν re 5 / Ἵ 3 f 
εσθαι μακροτεραν μὲν, τῶν ὃ επιτηδείων οὐκ ἀπορήσομεν. 
/ 3. "Ὁ “ ὃς 7 ἣν € “δ be 
L2. πορευτέον ὃ ἡμῖν τους πρώτους σταθμοὺς ws ἂν δυνωμεθα 

/ “ ς a 5) a A n 
μακροτάτους, να ὡς πλεῖστον «ποσπασθῶμεν τοῦ βασιλικοῦ 

/ “Δ Ν e/ / xX rn ξ - eas 3 ͵ὕ 
στρατεύματος" ἢν yap ἅπαξ δύο ἢ τριῶν ἡμερῶν ὁδὸν aTro- 

> / Ν / Ν ¢ A cr 5 / 
σχωμεν, OVKETL μὴ δύνηται βασιλεὺς ἡμᾶς καταλαβεῖν. ολέγῳ 
\ . / 2 / Mga \ >» 
μὲν Yup στρατευματι OV τολμήσει εφέπεσθαι" πολυν δ᾽ ἔχων 
7 ? , / / 7 x \ rn 
στόλον ov δυνήσεται ταχέως πορεύεσθαι" tows δε καὶ τῶν 
2 § 7 - ΄ + ‘ f Μ Μ 
ἐπιτηδείων σπανιεῖ. ταύτην, Edy, τὴν γνωμὴν ἔχω εγωγε. 
4 Ν ς / >] Ν A / “Ὁ 
15. Ἣν δὲ αὕτη ἡ στρατηγία οὐδὲν ἄλλο δυναμένη ἢ 
’ A aia £9 a € 9. / ? , / 
ἀποδρᾶναι ἢ ἀποφυγεῖν" ἢ δὲ τύχη ἐστρατήγησε καλλιον͵ 
> Ν Ν ξ , > / 3 / ? ὃ ἕξ A + VTE TOV 
ἐπεὶ YAP ἡμέρα ἐγένετο, ἐπορεύοντο εν δεξιᾷ EXOVTES 
7 / / « ¢ / οὖ 3 7 A 
ἥλιον, λογιζόμενοι ἥξειν ἅμα ἡλίῳ δύνοντι εἰς κῶωμας τῆς 
/ / Ἂς lal ἧς 3 3 / 
Βαβυλωνίας χώρας" καὶ τοῦτο μὲν οὐκ ἐψεύσθησαν. 

ΝΜ ἊΣ 7 \ /. 7 / € al «ε / Ν 

BA. ere δὲ ἀμφὶ δείλην ἐδοξαν πολεμίους ὁρᾶν ὑππεας" καὶ 
r ς , ἃ ἈΝ b>] - f Μ 3 Ν 
τῶν τε λληνων cl μὴ ετυχον Ev ταῖς τάξεσιν OVTES εἰς τὰς 
,ὔ » ΟὟ) a > / Ν 3.9.3. ὁ / / 
τάξεις ἐθεον, καὶ Apvatos, ετύγχανε yap eb ἁμαξης Topevo- 

, ew Seb ἢ Mane Ν > UNan 

ἰὼν διότι ἐτέτρωτο, 56 es gutters Ὁ και οἱ συν ALTO.) 

BS. ἐν ᾧ δὲ ὠπλίξοντο ἧκον λέγοντες οἱ προπεμφθέντες 

σκοποὶ ὅτι οὐχ ἱππεῖς εἰσιν ἀλλ ὑποζύγια νέμοιτο. καὶ 

. εὐθὺς ἔγνωσαν πάντες ὅτι ἐγγύς που ἐστρατοπεδεύετο βασι- 
΄ Ν Ν Ν Ν 3 3 7ὔ 2 / 

λεὺς" καὶ yap καὶ καπνὸς εφαίνετο EV κώμαις οὐ πρόσω. 

τι , Ν Baas Ν -N / > 5 * 
EG. ἤλεαργος δὲ ert μὲν τοὺς πολεμίους οὐκ ἦγεν" HOEL 

Ν Ν > / \ if Ν > / yy 
yup Kal ἀπειρηκότας TOUS στρατιωτας καὶ ἀσίτους ὄντας" 


ἂν \ δι UN δ 2 / DNS τοὺς ἢ / 
wim Be καὶ ove ἦν" οὐ ὠέντοι οὐδὲ ἀπέκλινε, φυλαττόμενος 








ANAB. 2, III.] Alarm of the King. 43 


at 7 / > > 2 4 Μ 7 ἕ / 
μὴ δοκοίη φεύγειν, adr εὐθύωρον ἄγων ἅμα τῷ ἡλίῳ δυο- 
3 Ἂς 3 / 7, Χ , . + / 
μένῳ ELS TAS EYYUTATW κωμας TOUS πρώτους ἔχων KATETK?- 
2 e / ¢ Ἂς a A 4 
νωσεν, εἕ ὧν διήρπαστο ὑπὸ τοῦ βασιλικοῦ στρατεύματος 
Ν ? Ν Ν > \ a ν᾽ vad / ς Ν 3 -“ 
καὶ αὐτὰ Ta ὠπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν ξύλα. LF. οἱ μεν οὖν πρῶτοι 
f / 1 ee) 7 ct \ / Qn 
ὅμως τρόπῳ τινί ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο, οἱ δὲ ὕστεροι TKOTALOL 
/ ς 3 oe d/ > if Ν Ν 
προσιόντες ὡς ετύγχανον ἕκαστοι ηὐλίζοντο, καὶ κραυγὴν 
Ν 3 / - 2 7, 7 Ν Ν 
πολλὴν ἐποίουν καλοῦντες αλλήλους, ὥστε καὶ TOUS πολε- 
7 ) ΄ / e \ > , a 7, Ν 
μίους ἀκούειν: ὥστε OL μὲν ἐγγύτατα τῶν πολεμίων καὶ 
wy 7 Qn , A Ν An lal ¢ 
ἔφυγον εκ TOV σκηνωμάτων. 18. δῆλον δὲ τοῦτο TH VOTE- 
/ > / BY Ν ς / ole) Ia > Δ Μ 
pata ἐγένετο" οὔτε yap ὑποζύγιον er οὐδὲν εφανὴ οὔτε 
/ Μ Ν 2 n 7 3 7 ἂν 
στρατόπεδον οὔτε καπνὸς οὐδαμοῦ πλησίον. εξεπλαγὴ δε, 
e ς yf Ν ἣν “Ὁ 3 / A / > / 
ὡς ἔοικε, καὶ βασιλεὺς τῇ ἐφόδῳ TOU στρατεύματος. εδη- 
Ἀ al - a ς / + es 
λωσε δὲ τοῦτο οἷς TH ὑστεραίᾳ ἔπραττε. 149. προϊουσης 
/ A Ν / Ν a tf / ? / 
μέντου τῆς νυκτὸς ταύτης καὶ τοῖς Βλλησι φόβος ἐμπίπτει, 
Ν , \ A 3 - ὁ NN / 2 / / 
καὶ θόρυβος καὶ δοῦπος ἢν οἷον εἰκὸς φόβου ἐμπεσόντος γίγ- 
/ Ν 7] 5 rn \ > / 
νεσθαι. 20. Kreapyos δὲ Τολμίδην Ηλεῖον, ov ἐτύγχανεν 
yxy 2 7€ A 7 Μ An / A > r 
ἔχων TAP EAUT@ κηρυκα ἄριστον τῶν τότε, τοῦτον ἀνεύπείν 
ἈΝ χ ΄ / , c+ 
ἐκέλευσε σίγην κατακηρύξαντα OTL προαγορεύουσιν οἱ ἄρχον- 
ee ἊΝ 2 ΄ Ν 4 > Sag Χ / v4 xX 
TES, OS ἂν τον ἀφέντα TOV ονον εἰς TA ὅπλα μηνύσῃ, OTL ληψε- 
Ν 7 3 / 3 \ \ A >’ / 
Tat μισθὸν τώλαντον ἀργυρίου. 31. eet de ταῦτα ἐκηρύχθη, 
x ¢ = “ \ e , y Ne ey. 
εἐγνωσαν οἱ στρατιῶται OTL κενὸς ὁ φοβος ELN καὶ οἱ ἀρχον- 
A / XN. Se / ¢ σ , y) ΄ 
τες σῶοι. ἅμα δε ὀρθρῳ παρήγγειλεν ὁ Κλέαρχος εἰς τάξιν 
atte / Δ a 3 “ 3 ε , 
τὰ ὁπλα τίθεσθαι τους Ελληνας ἤπερ εἶχον ὁτε ἦν ἡ μάχη. 
“<E ἃ ς Se “ Χ > / a3 7 
AIT. “Ὃ δε bn ἔγραψα ors βασιλευς ἐξεπλάγη τῇ ἐφόδῳ, 
a A 3 A Ν Ἀ 7 ς ͵7 ͵7 ‘ 
τῷδε δῆλον ἦν. TH μὲν γὰρ πρόσθεν ἡμέρᾳ πέμπων τὰ 
“ ,ὔ Ἄν / ‘ fs τὰν ? , 
oT ha παραδιδόναι ἐκέλευε, τότε δὲ ἅμα ἡλίῳ ανατελλοντι 
/ ¥ \ A Cony 3 SAS \ 
κήρυκας ἔπεμψε περὶ σπονδῶν. 2. οἱ δ᾽ ἐπεὶ ἦλθον πρὸς 
\ 7, τεσ ἢ Ν “ 5) Ν ἈΠ ὟΣ 7ὕ 
Tous προφύλακας, εζητουν Tous ἄρχοντας. ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἀπήγ- 
¢ / ,ὔ ἧς «Ὅν. Ν ,ὔ 
γελλον οἱ προφύλακες, Κλεαρχος τυχὼν tote τὰς τάξεις 
’ r 3 rn / / Ν , 
ἐπισκοπῶν εἶπε τοῖς προφύλαξι κελεύειν TOUS κήρυκας περι- 
ἕνειν a ἢ λά 8. ἐπεὶ δὲ $ Ὁ στρά 
με ἄχρι ἂν σχολασῃ. . ἐπεί O€ κατέστησε TO στρά 


ce a + Co en , 7, Ν 
τευμα ὥστε καλως εχειν ορᾶσθαι TavTn φωλαγγα πυκνὴν, 


44 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen. 


A ve bee , κι τς 9 aw \ 5) , 
τῶν δὲ aoTA@Y uNndeva καταφανῆ εἶναι, ἐκάλεσε TOUS ἀγγεέ- 
ὡς 5... 3} A / 2 / 4 Ν 
λους. καὶ αὑτὸς τε προῆλθε τοὺς τε EVOTTAOTATOUS ἔχων καὶ 
2 (4 a ς a a X\ lal of 
EVELOETTATOUS τῶν αὑτοῦ στρατιωτῶν καὶ τοῖς AAXOLS στρα- 
a“ Dan © OF 2 Ν \ 9 Ν rn 3 / 
τηγοῖς ταὐτὰ eppacev. 4. επεὶ δὲ ἣν πρὸς τοῖς ἀγγελοίς, 
᾽ / / / ¢ a? Ὁ e/ \ hemes y 4 
ἀνηρώτα τί βούλοιντο. οἱ δ᾽ ἔλεγον OTL TEpl σπονδῶν HKOLEV 
Μ [74 « Ν Ὑ / \ / r 
ἄνδρες οἵτινες ἱκανοὶ EcovTal Ta TE Tapa βασίλεως τοῖς 
γ > A ἈΝ N \ κ᾿ ς , A 
Ελλησιν ἀπαγγεῖλαι καὶ Ta Tapa τῶν EAAHvwWY βασιλεῖ. 
ς δὲ ? / "A ΄ / Mabie aC. / 
3d. 0 ὃε aTEKplVaTO, ἄπαγγελλετε τοίνυν αὐτῷ OTL LAaYNS 
a n o \ 2 y SIND cane / Ἂς 
δεῖ πρῶτον" ἄριστον yap οὐκ ἐστιν οὐδ ὁ τολμήσων περὶ 
nr / a Ν / + A 
σπονδῶν λεγείν τοὺς ἔλλησι μὴ πορίσας ἄριστον. 6. Tav- 
> / e+ Jee Se , @ \ 
τα ἀκούσαντες OL ἄγγελοι ἀπήλαυνον, καὶ ἧκον ταχὺ" ᾧ καὶ 
Ξ ἊΝ Ὁ 9 ͵ ie Pg el Nase τα / 
δῆλον ἣν oTL ἐγγὺς που βασιλεὺς ἢν ἢ AANOS τις @ ETETE- 
a f ieee eG baat / Ca , 
TAKTO ταῦτα πράττειν" ἐλέγον δὲ OTL εἰκότα δοκοίεν λέγειν 
a \ oo ς 7 oy \ > Ν 2ν 
βασιλεῖ, καὶ ἥκοιεν ἡγεμόνας ἔχοντες Ol aUTOUS, ἐὰν σπον- 
Ν / yf BA «. Ν 3 / id x 
δαὶ γένωνται, ἄξουσιν ἔνθεν ἕξουσι Ta ἐπιτήδεια. 7. ὁ δὲ 
’ 3 2 - ἴω 3 ͵ / me -" Ἂς 2 a 
ἠρώτα εἰ αὑτοῖς τοῖς ἀνδράσι σπένδοιτο ἰοῦσι καὶ ἀπιοῦσιν, 
Δ Ν a of ἡ / eat 7 
ἢ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις ἐσοιντο σπονδαὶ. οἱ δε, ἅπασιν, εφασαν, 
΄ > lal \ Pole. es a ? \ \ 
μέχρι av βασιλεῖ τὰ παρ᾽ ὑμῶν διαγγελθῇ. 8. επεὶ de 
a 53 / 3 Ν e / 3 / 
ταῦτα εἶπον, μεταστησάμενος avTous ὁ Κλέαρχος εβουλευ- 
59 / Ν ΄ς Ν a \ 2. ὦ 
ετο" καὶ ἐδόκει ταχὺ Tas σπονδὰς ποιεῖσθαι Kal καθ᾽ ἡσυ- 
/ > fal 5 ΧΤΑΝ, ya 5 ,ὕ \ a & ς , ,ὔ 
χίαν ἐλθεῖν τε ἐπὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια καὶ λαβεῖν. | 9. ὁ de Κλε- 
3 “Ὁ Ν 3 Ν A > / , 
apyos εἶπε, Aoxer μὲν καμοὶ ταῦτα" οὐ μέντοι ταχὺ YE 
5) a b) Ν / y ase 3 , Chua 
aATAYYEA®, ἀλλα διατρίψω ἐστ ἂν οκνησωσιν OL ἄγγελοι 
> 5 / ¢ ral A Ν ͵7 3 / / 
μὴ ἀποδοξη ἡμῖν tas σπονδὰς ποιήσασθαι" οἶμαι γε μεν- 
yy ἊΝ ἕν g / , Ν δὲν ἃς / 
Tol, Eby, καὶ τοῖς ἡμετέροις OTPAaTLWTaLs τὸν αὐτὸν φοβον 
/ 2 Ν Ν In? Ν 3 3 , “ 
παρέσεσθαι. ἐπεὶ δὲ εδόκει καιρὸς εἶναι, ἀπήγγελλεν OTL 
, Ἢ “πῇ eke ΤΕ A N > , 
σπένδοιτο, καὶ εὐθὺς ἡγεῖσθαι ἐκέλευε πρὸς ταπιτήδεια. 
Ν ¢ Ν ᾿Ξ a r / / 3 7 Ν. Ν 
Ε9. καὶ οὐ μὲν ἤγουντο, Κλεαρχος μέντοι ETTOPEVETO TAS μὲν 
Ν 7 Ν ‘ 7 +” 3 7 Ν 
σπονδὰς ποιησόμενος, TO δὲ στράτευμα ἔχων εν τάξει, καὶ 
ΘΝ 3 7 \ 3 nA 4 Ν 2 
αὐτὸς ὠπισθοφυλάκει. καὶ ἐνετύγχανον τάφροις Kal av- 
ΝΥ , , e \ ΄, / Μ 
λῶσιν ὕδατος πλήρεσιν ὡς μὴ δύνασθαι διαβαίνειν avev γε- 
a > ’ 3 A μ A / ἃὰ 9 3 
φυρῶν" arr ἐποιοῦντο εκ τῶν φοινίκων Cb ἦσαν ἐκπέεπτω- 


5» aie ᾿ A mea 














ANAB. 2, 1π|.} Truce with the King. 48 


\ \ Sr Pe Rie A 2 ΄ 
κότες, τοὺς δὲ καὶ ἐξέκοπτον. 11. καὶ ἐνταῦθα ἣν Κλέαρχον 
lal ? / 2 ‘ a ὟΝ “- Ν Ν 7 
καταμαθεῖν ὡς ἐπεστάτει, ἐν μὲν τῇ ἀριστερᾷ χειρὶ TO δόρυ 
yx” > Ν r a / Ν ” 2 »“ yA a 
ἔχων, ev δὲ τῇ δεξιᾷ βακτηρίαν" καὶ εἰ τις αὐτῷ δοκοίη τῶν 
Ν a 4 4 > 7 Ν 3 7 
mpos τοῦτο τεταγμένων βλακεύειν, ἐκλεγόμενος TOV ἐπιτη- 
“¥ yy Ν cd Oe. 7 » Ν 
δειον ἔπαισεν ἂν, καὶ ἅμα αὐτὸς προσέλαμβανεν εἰς TOV 
Ἂ, 2 / ‘A A 5 / 95 Ν > 
πηλὸν ἐμβαίνων" ὥστε πᾶσιν αἰσχύνην εἶναι μη OV συσπου- 
/ ee eles \ ἣν > mw. fe ΄, 
dave. 12. καὶ ἐτάχθησαν μεν προς AUTOU OL TPLAKOVTA 
» / 3 \ Ν ᾿ 7 CF a / 
ἔτη γεγονότες " ἐπεὶ de καὶ Κλέαρχον ewpwv σπουδάζοντα, 
, x ς 7 ‘\ Ν na 
προσελαμβανον και Ob πρεσβύτεροι. 13. πολυ δὲ μαλλον 
¢ me ἡ y ς ΄ we ἘΔ ἘΤ , > 
o Κλέαρχος EOTEVOEV, ὑποπτεύων μὴ ἀεὶ οὕτω TANPELS εἰναι 
\ 7 ed 2 Ν ΕῚ 4 “ Ν 7 ¥ 
τὰς τάφρους ὕδατος: ov yap ἦν ὥρα ola τὸ πεδίον ἄρδειν" 
3 > of Μ x 7 -~ ¢ Ν 5 Ν 
ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα ἤδη πολλὰ προφαίνοιτο τοῖς " Ελλησι δεινὰ εἰς τὴν 
é / “ / ¢ / ϑι “ΑΝ Ν᾿ / Ν 
πορείαν, τούτου ἕνεκα βασίλέα ὑπώπτευεν ἐπὶ TO πεδίον τὸ 
Ix > ͵ 7 \ a / ) , 
ὕδωρ ἀφεικέναι. 14. πορευόμενοι δὲ ἀφίκοντο εἰς κώμας 
¢ > / «ε ¢ , / \ ᾽ 7, x ὧν 
ὅθεν ἀπέδειξαν οἱ ἡγεμόνες λαμβάνειν τὰ ἐπιτηδεία. ἐενὴν 
TS Lae hips \ \ 94 / Ἂς ¢ N 5 ὦ a 
δὲ σῖτος πολὺς καὶ οἶνος φοινίκων καὶ O€0s ἐψητὸν απὸ τῶν 
> nr > os Ν ξ Ἂ rn 7 vA Ν 3 
αὐτῶν. ᾿ 45. αὐταὶ δε at βάλανοι τῶν φοινίκων ovas μεν εν 
ce od ΕΝ 3 vad ra 5 / 3 / ε Ν rc 
τοῖς “Ελλησιν ἔστιν ἰδεῖν τοῖς οἰκέταις ἀπέκειντο, αἱ δὲ τοῖς 
, > / 5 mee Te , a 7 
δεσπόταις «ποκείμεναι ἦσαν ἀπόλεκτοι, θαυμάσιαι τοῦ Kad- 
Ν 7 ς ‘ yy , IAS / Ν 
λους καὶ μεγέθους, ἡ Se ὄψις ἠλέκτρου οὐδὲν διέφερε" τὰς 
/ / / 2 / be 2 Ἕ 
δὲ τινας ξηραίνοντες τραγήματα ἀπετίθεσαν. καὶ ἣν καὶ 
Ν / eat Ν Ν , 2 A Ν Ν 
παρὰ πότον ἡδὺ μὲν, κεφαλαλγες δέ. 16. ἐνταῦθα καὶ τὸν 
> / an / a yy id “- Ν 
ἐγκεῴφαλον Tov φοίνικος πρώτον Epayov ol στρατιωταῖ, Kat 
« 928) ΄ 7 > Ν Ἂ 4 / A e A 
οἱ πολλοὶ ἐθαύμασαν TO TE εἶδος καὶ τὴν ἰδιότητα τῆς NOOVTS. 
3 ὃς / Ἂς A , e \ cr 7 
ἦν δὲ σφόδρα καὶ τοῦτο κεφαλαλγές. ὁ δὲ hoi ὅθεν 
3 7 e 3 , 7. 2 / 
ἐξαιρεθείη ὁ ἐγκεῴφαλος ὅλος αὐὑαίνετο. 
> A yw e / - \ Ν /. 
ΕἼ. ᾿Ενταῦθα εμειναν ἡμέρας τρεῖς" καὶ Tapa μεγάλου 
᾽ὔ @ / a A , Ν 
βασιλέως ἧκε Τισσαφέρνης καὶ ὁ τῆς βασίλέως γυναικὸς 
> Ν ee / a lal x Ν “, 
ἀδέλφος καὶ ἄλλοι Πέρσαι τρεῖς" δοῦλοι δὲ πολλοὶ ELT OVTO. 
? Re eS , 2 ω ε ase , \ ὩΡ 
ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀπήντησαν αὑτοῖς οἱ τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων στρατηγοί, ἐλεγε 
a 7, 2. + ͵ ΄ > Ν a 
πρῶτος Τισσαφέρνης δι ἑρμηνέως τοιώδε. 18. Eyo, ὦ 
¥ “ ,ὕ DT ae , wo Ns OM eS 
avooes EXXnves. «γείτων οἰκῶ τῇ Ελλαδι, καὶ ἐπεὶ ὑμᾶς 


40 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen. 


9 tS) Ν 3 , / [4 3 7 ΐ 
εἶδον εἰς πολλὰ καμήχανα πεπτωκότας, εὕρημα ἐποιησάμην 
y / Ν , p) / - 3 . =a 
εἴ πως δυναίμην παρὰ βασιλέως αἰτήσασθαι δοῦναι ἐμοὶ 
5) a 5. A > \ ς 7 3 \ AN 2 > 
ἀποσῶσαι ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν ᾿“Ελλωδα. οἶμαι yap ἂν οὐκ aya- 
/ “ Μ > ς a + Ν an / “Ke 
ρίστως μοι ἔχειν οὔτε πρὸς ὑμῶν οὔτε πρὸς τῆς πάσης E}- 


A Ἂς Ἂς >) ΄ A 
Addos. 19. ταῦτα δὲ yvous ῃτούμην βασιλέα, λέγων αὐτῷ 





“ ὃ / + ἢ oe ome) Ko / 2 
OTL δικαίως ἂν μοι χαρίζοιτο. OTL αὑτῳ Κύρον τε ἐπιστρα- 
j 5 ἤγγειλα καὶ βοήθειαν ἔχων a  ἀγγελί, 
TEVOVTA πρῶτος NYVEL ν ἔχων ἅμα τῇ ἀγγελίᾳ 
3 / Ν / A \ τ “ > 
ἀφικόμην. καὶ μονος των KATA TOUS Ελληνας τεταγμένων 
> yy 3 Ν iA Ὶς / a >] A ς 
οὐκ ἔφυγον. ἀλλα διήλασα καὶ συνέμιξα βασιλεῖ ev τῷ ὑμε- 
id / Rf \ 2 / 2 Ν χα 2 / 
τέρῳ στρατοπέδῳ, ενθα βασιλεὺς αφίκετο, eves Κῦρον arre- 
Ν Ν Ν ΄ ΄, 5 ἡ Ν - 
κτεινε, καὶ τοὺς σὺν Κύρῳ βαρβαρους εδιωξα συν τοῖσδε 
fa A A be ae] n “ 2 ον 3 , 
τοῖς παροῦσι νῦν μετ ἐμοῦ, OLTEP αὑτῷ εἰσι πιστοτατοι. 
Ν \ Ν ΄ ς / / ΄ 2. Fi 
99. καὶ περὶ μὲν τούτων ὑπέσχετο μοι βουλεύσεσθαι" ἐρέ- — 
/ ¢ A bey 3 / / cd 2 Γ᾿ 
σθαι δὲ με ὑμᾶς ἐκέλευσεν ἐλθόντα τίνος ἕνεκεν ἐστρατεῦ- — 
5..." at ἃ Ν ΄ Cane / ἢ / | 
cate ἐπ᾿ αὐτὸν. καὶ συμβουλεύω ὑμῖν μετρίως ὠποκρίνα- ὦ 
“ 2 , Soh δ. ? Ν con | 
σθαι, ἵνα μοι εὐπρωκτότερον ἢ εἐὧν TL δύνωμαι ἀγαθὸν υμῖν ' 
3 2 A / Ἂς an 7 | 
map αὐτοῦ διαπράξασθαι. 31. πρὸς ταῦτα μεταστάντες 
cd ’ ΄ ΝΡ / es > 
ot Eddnves εβουλεύοντο" καὶ ἀπεκρίναντο, KXeapyos ὃ : 
" ς a 7 , ς ω ,ὕ ἐπὶ 
ἔλεγεν: Ἡμεῖς οὔτε συνήλθομεν ὡς βασιλεῖ πολεμήσοντες | 
9 3. ἢν , > \ \ t Ἔ 
OUT ἐπορευόμεθα ἐπὶ βασίλεα, αλλα πολλὰς προφασεις s 
a «“ ς Ν δ, 3 3 δ, ς A > ‘ 
Κῦρος εὕρισκεν, ὡς καὶ ov εὖ οἶσθα, iva ὑμᾶς τε ἁπαρα- ὦ 


7 τ e A 3 Υ Ε / 2 Ν / 
σκεύους λάβοι καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐνθάδε avayayor. 32. ewes μέντοι 






“AS 5. τὰς rd a > ὃ an Sf b>] ΄ θ Ν θ Ν Ν 
yON QUTOV EMP WLEV εν ELV oVTa, ῃησχυν NMEV καὶ ὕεους Kab 


Pei Sie 


Caer 


2 ’ a 2a 2 a / / , 
ἀνθρώπους προδοῦναι αὐτὸν, ἐν τῷ πρόσθεν χρόνῳ TapE- 


¢ A 3 Ν 3 a 3 Ἂς x a / 
NOVTES ἡμᾶς αὐτους εὖ ποίειν. ZB. ETEL δὲ Κύρος τεθνη- 


Se 
<a 


+ an? ΄ A " A 2a «“ 
κεν, οὔτε βασιλεῖ αντιποιούμεθα τῆς ἀρχῆς OUT ἐστιν ὅτου 
“ / 3. ἫΝ x , 7 a κ 
ἕνεκα βουλοιίμεθ᾽ ἂν τὴν βασίλέως χωραν κακῶς ποιεῖν, 

ΕΝ] eae > rn ἍΟ 5.27 / > ἃ 7 
ovO αὐτὸν ἀποκτεῖναι av ἐθέλοιμεν, πορευοίμεθα δ᾽ ἂν οἱ- 

Μ c A Ν / »] an / Δ 
καδε, εἰ τις ἡμᾶς μὴ λυποίη" ἀδικοῦντα μέντοι πειρασόμεθα 

Ν - rn > ΄ N / ¢ a LN 9S - 
συν τοῖς θεοῖς ἀμύνασθαι" ἐὰν μέντοι τις ἡμᾶς καὶ εὖ ποιῶν 


¢ / Ν ΄ yy ΄ >) e , > { 
UTUPXNH, Καὶ TOUTOV εἰς YE δύναμιν ουχ ηττησομεθα εὖ TOl= 


NAB. 2, 1Υ̓.] Conclusion of a Treaty. 47 




















a ε Χ / 9 ᾽ ΄ ‘He , 
bytes. 24. ὁ μὲν οὕτως εἶπεν" ἀκούσας δε ὁ Τισσαφέρνης 
Μ - 3 Ν » ~~ lal Ν ¢ "»" / 4 
py, Ταῦτα εγω απαγγέλω βασιλεῖ καὶ υμῖν πάλιν τὰ 
| > b] / / 5... δὲ ᾽ "Ὁ d ¢ Ν 7 
ap εκείνου" μέχρι ὃ ἂν eyw ἥκω αἱ σπονδαὶ μενόντων" 
Ν τ ΩΝ Ι ω / Ν >] XN Ἂ ς / 
yopav δὲ ἡμεῖς παρέξομεν. 25. καὶ εἰς μεν τὴν ὑστεραίαν 
> - , 2. ες δ 2 ’ Αἱ as ἘΝ, “ 
ὕχ ἧκεν" ὡσθ᾽ ot ἔλληνες ἐφροντιζον' τῇ δὲ τρίτη ἥκων 
aN ὅτι ὃ ‘ ἥ 4 βασιλέως δοθῆ 
ἔλεγεν OTL διαπεπράγμενος ἧκοι παρὰ βασιλέως δοθῆναι 
eee] a , ᾿ ¢/ / / rn 5) 
αὐτῷ owlew τοὺς ἔλληνας, καίπερ πάνυ πολλῶν ἀντι- 
7 ς 3 »Μ » σὰ 5 rn Ν δ Fe Ν 
λεγόντων ws οὐκ ἄξιον evn βασιλεῖ αφείναι τους eh εαυτὸν 
͵ , She \ Aa SR 
στρατευσαμένους. 26. τέλος δε εἶπε, Καὶ viv ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν 
\ a “9 ¢ A 5 Ἂν / / (en. Ν 
πιστὰ λαβεῖν παρ ἡμῶν ἢ μὴν φιλίαν παρέξειν ὑμῖν την 
,ὔ Ἂν τῆν ἢ 3 ΄ > \ ¢ , > \ 7 
χωραν καὶ ἀδόλως ἀπάξειν εἰς τὴν Ελλαδα ἀγορὰν παρέ- 
“Ψ ϑς δ᾽ eK / , ¢ - 3 A 
χοντας" ὅπου ὃ av μὴ ἢ πρίασθαι, λαμβωνειν ὑμᾶς ἐκ τῆς 
΄, a eee) , ¢ lal 3 5 ton , 
χώρας edoouev Ta ἐπιτήδεια. BF. ὑμᾶς ὃ av ημῖν δεήσει 
> / 3 Ν ΄ ra Ν / ? a r Ν 
μόσαι ἦ μὴν πορεύσεσθαι ὡς διὰ φιλίας ἀσινῶς σῖτα καὶ 
Ν 7] ¢ , Ring Ν 7 \ \ 
οτὰ λαμβάνοντας ὅποταν μὴ ἀγορὰν παρέχωμεν" ἢν δὲ πα- 
/ 3 Ν > / co 9 7 A 
ἔχωμεν ἀγορὰν, ὠνουμένους ἕξειν τα ἐπιτήδεια. 38. ταῦτα 
y Ye Ν Μ / Wyte - 
δοξε, καὶ ὦμοσαν καὶ δεξιὰς ἔδοσαν Τισσαφέρνης καὶ ὁ τῆς 
/ Ν 2 Ν A a ¢€ , “ 
αἀσίλεως γυναικος αδελῴφος τοῖς τῶν Ελληνων στρατηγοις 
Ν al Lf Ἂ an «ς / Ν 3 
αι λοχαγοῖς καὶ ἐλαβον Tapa τῶν Ελλήνων. 9399. μετὰ 
Ν al 4 9 A Ν yo Φ / 
εταῦτα Τισσαφέρνης εἶπε. Nov μὲν δὴ ἄπειμι ws βασιλέα" 
μὠ Ν Ν ΄ \ / / , ¢ 
πειδὰν δὲ διαπράξωμαι ἃ δέομαι, ἥξω συσκευασάμενος ὡς 
> 7 ταν 5 ΧΝ ε 7 Ν KN ? Ν TAOS \ 
πάξων ὑμᾶς es τὴν EXXada καὶ αὐτὸς ἀπίων ἐπὶ τὴν 
3 a > / 
μαυτοῦ ἀρχήν. 
Ν A / / “ av 
IV. Mera ταῦτα περιέμενον Τισσαφέρνην οἱ te” Ελλη- 
ἈΝ ee a > XN > 7, ν᾿ / ¢e / 
ες Kato Apu.atos eyyus adAnrA@v εστρατοπεδευμένοι ἡμέρας 
' / “ἡ yy > Ν ΄ >] A Ν ? - 
λείους ἢ εἰκοσιν. εν δὲ ταύταις ἀφικνοῦνται πρὸς Αριαῖον 
ΠΑ ὁ 59 ‘ 5 eh IE ? κ ᾿ Ν Es \ ᾽ 7 
Qt οἱ ἀδελφοὶ καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι ἀναγκαῖοι καὶ πρὸς τοὺς σὺν εκεί- 
Π a 7 / ἐν Ν ἄν τ Ν 
@ Ilepowv τινες. παρεθάρρυνον τε καὶ δεξιὰς ενίοις Tapa 
Ἵ ΝΜ x , / > a a Ν 
ἀσίλεως εφερον μὴ μνησικακήσειν βασίλεα αὕτοις τῆς συν 
΄ 3 / Ef \ fal ’ὔ 
Κύρῳ ἐπιστρατείας μηδὲ ἄλλου μηδενὸς τῶν παροιχομένων. 


΄ ἣν / yx 5 ἕ Ki id r e 
+ τούτων δε γιγνομένων ἐνδηλοι ἦσαν οἱ περὶ Ἀριαῖον ἣτ- 


48 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. ΓΧεν. } 
























, ne δ A “ Ses ,. a 
Tov προσέχοντες Tots Βίλλησι Tov νοῦν" ὥστε Kal διὰ τοῦτο 
» Ν rad an ς / > + 3 ᾿, re 
τοις μεν πολλοῖς τῶν Ελληνων οὐκ ἤρεσκον, ἀλλὰ προσι- 
, a , " Ν ΡΥ, οὶ τ 
ὄντες τῷ Κλεάρχῳ ελεγον καὶ τοις ἄλλοις στρατηγοῖς," 8. Τι 
/ ΕἾ 5) 2 7, “ Χ ἜΡΟΝ ? / Sa 
μένομεν; ἢ οὐκ επισταμεθα ott Bactrevs ἡμᾶς ἀπολέσαι, 
\ Ν Ν 7 “ Ν ΡΥ mae: “ lay 
ἂν περὶ παντὸς ποιήσαιτο, Wa καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις λλησι φο- ἢ 
On aCe , ΄ 7 oa . ¢ ΔΕ 
Bos ἡ emt βασίλεα μεγαν στρατεύειν ; καὶ νῦν μεν ἡμᾶς 
¢ , / ἃς Ν / >] a Ν ΄ὔ ᾿ Ι 
υπώγεται μενεῖν δια τὸ διεσπάρθαι QUT@ TO στρατευμα" 
9 Ν Ν ᾿ς ς lal 3 a δ Ν 3 yf ivf 3 an Ι 
ἐπὴν δὲ πάλιν ἀλισθῃ QUT@ ἡ OTPATLU, οὐκ ἐστιν ὅπως οὐκ 
? / δε νοὶ y+ / “Ὁ 3 / “Δ >? ' 
ἐπιθήσεται ἡμῖν. 4. tows δὲ που ἢ ἀποσκάπτει TL ἢ arom 
/ ξ + > e ¢ / 3 / C-\ f. ᾿ 
τειχίζει, ὡς ἄπορος ἢ ἢ ὁδὸς. οὔ γὰρ ποτε ἑκὼν γε βου- 
/ δὸς ve ἊΣ , ἢ Ἄς ͵ ? a a 
λήσεται ἡμᾶς edMovtas εἰς τὴν Ελλάδα ἀπαγγεῖλαι ὡς 
΄ κα / ¥ 3 n Lair’ ta ͵΄ ΤΙ ay 
ημεῖς τοσοίδε ὄντες ἐνικῶμεν βασίλεα ETL ταῖς θύραις αὐτοῦ 
Ν Υ̓͂ Ἵ ῇ 4 ‘ > se 
καὶ καταγέλασαντες ἀπήλθομεν. ὅ. Κλεαρχος δὲ απεκρί-. 
r A 4 >] Ν 9 A % » A Ὑ 
vato τοῖς ταῦτα λέγουσιν, Eyw ἐνθυμοῦμαι μεν καὶ ταῦτα 
, 3 A 2 ὦ ᾿ A x ἢ en / “| 
TavTa* ἐννοῶ ὃ OTL εἰ νῦν ἄπιμεν, δοξομεν ἐπὶ πολεμῳ. 
3 , \ N \ κ a yx a a 
ἀπιέναι καὶ παρὰ Tas σπονδὰς ποιεῖν, ἔπειτα πρῶτον μεν 


3 \ IAN / Coa DON? 5 / 3 Ma 
ayopav οὐδεὶς παρέξει ἡμῖν οὐδὲ Ofer ἐπισιτιούμεθα" αὖθι 
\ ς ¢ / 3 Ν y+ Νο δῷ A ΄ 2 
δὲ ὁ ἡγησόμενος οὐδεὶς ἔσται" καὶ ἅμα ταῦτα ποιούντων 
το να Baile A Σ / e/ Λ Cats 29 Ὁ 
ἡμῶν εὐθὺς Aptatos ἀφεστήξει:" ὥστε φίλος nuw οὐδεὶς 
/ 9 Ν Q € , + / 6 ear Μ δ 
λελείψεται. αλλα καὶ οἱ πρόσθεν OVTES TOAEMLLOL ἡμίν ἐσον- 
Ἂς 3 τὶ / 5 Saar x eco 39 

Tat. 6. ποταμὸς ὃ εἰ μὲν TIS Kal ἄλλος apa ἡμῖν ἐστί 
/ 2 3 Ν ὝΜΟΣΣ 3 , ” “ 20.7 }Ὸ 
διαβατέος οὐκ οἶδα" τὸν δ᾽ οὖν Εὐφράτην ἴσμεν οτι aduvar 
A , 7 3 \ oe ͵ : 

Tov διαβῆναι κωλυόντων πολεμίων. OU μὲν δὴ ἂν mayer Oa 
αν κε 3 con ΄ a Ν / ε ἃ 

γε δέη ὑππεῖς εἰσιν ἡμῖν σύμμαχοι, τῶν δὲ πολεμίων ὑππεῖ 
2 ¢ a A; / + « to a 
εἰσιν Ol TAELTTOL καὶ πλείστου AELOL* ὥστε νικῶντες 
/ Ἃ ’ , e , he are @} gg 
τίνα ἂν ἀποκτείναιμεν ; ἡττωμένων δὲ οὐδένα οἷον TE σ 
a Bs ‘ 3 / Ξε / 4% 3 δ 
θῆναι. % ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν βασιλέα, ᾧ οὕτω πολλά ἔστι Τ 
͵΄ ” ~ εἰ > ͵, > 3 ῳ 2 
σύμμαχα, εἴπερ προθυμεῖται ἡμᾶς ἀπολέσαι. οὐκ οἶδα ὃ Τί 
a Zia 5 / Ν ξ Ν A Ν Ἂ; ? ne 
δεῖ αὐτὸν ὀμόσαι καὶ δεξιὰν δοῦναι Kat θεοὺς ἐπιορκῆσ 
Ν ρον A eC a “ / Ν Ρ 
καὶ τὰ εαυτοῦ πιστὰ ἄπιστα ποιῆσαι Ελλησί τε καὶ β 


᾿ / a ee 7 
Papo. τοιαῦτα πολλὰ ἐλεγεν. 


















Anas. 2,1v.] Beginning of the Κατάβασις. 49 


΄, : , “ ‘ ς A ΄ 
. Ev δὲ τούτῳ ἧκε Τισσαφέρνης ἔχων τὴν ἑαυτοῦ δύνα- 
> 2 Ν ὡς ON / Ν ς a / 
μιν ὡς εἰς οἶκον ἀπιὼν καὶ Opovtas τὴν ἑαυτοῦ δύναμιν" 
τ , \ / ts ΄ 3 
ἦγε δὲ καὶ τὴν θυγατερα τὴν βασιλέως ἐπὶ γώμῳ. 9. ἐν- 
' a x 5 / ς΄ / Ν > Ν , 
τεῦθεν δὲ ἤδη Τισσαφέρνους ἡγουμένου καὶ ἀγορὰν trape- 
2 ΄ 2 ΄ Ν “ 4 La ἣν ΄ 
χοντος ἐπορεύοντο" ἐπορεύετο δὲ καὶ Αριαιος τὸ Κύρου 
Ν Μ / vA / τ / 
βαρβαρικὸν ἔχων otpatevpa ἅμα Τισσαφέρνει καὶ Opovta 
Ζ΄ τς > 7 ¢ . Th. 
καὶ συνεστρατοπεδεύετο συν ἐκείνοις. 10. οἱ de Ελληνες 
ς = ͵΄ ? \ Die eRe A Th ap ς , 
ὑφορῶντες τούτους αὐτοὶ eb εαυτῶν ἐχωροὺυν ἡγεμόνας 
» 3 / Ν ¢ / 2 / 3 7 
ἔχοντες. ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο δὲ ἑκάστοτε ἀπέχοντες ἀαλλη- 
7 Ν rn ? 7] Ν 2 / 
λων Tapacuyynv Kat μειον" εφυλάττοντο δὲ ὠμῴφοτεροι 
7 5) ΄ z ἣν 2 Ν “ ς 7 
ὥσπερ πολεμίους ἀλλήλους, καὶ εὐθὺς τοῦτο ὑποψίαν πα- 
lal ΤΣ Ν Ν 7 > A 2 A Ν 7 
ρεῖχεν. EM. ἐνίοτε δὲ καὶ ξυλιζόμενοι εκ τοῦ αὐτοῦ καὶ χοόρ- 
¥ α / \ ὅ.. ὼ > , 
TOV καὶ ἄλλα τοιαῦτα συλλέγοντες πληγας ενέτεινον ἀλλη- 
Ν A 4 al / Ν 
λοις" ὥστε καὶ τοῦτο ἔχθραν παρεῖχε. 13. διελθόντες δὲ 
r \ > 7 Ν Ἂς / 7 a 
τρεῖς σταθμους ἀφίκοντο πρὸς τὸ Μηδίας καλούμενον τεῖ- 
\ A yy > A 3 Ν > / 7 
0S, καὶ παρῆλθον εἴσω αὐτοῦ. HY δὲ ῳκοδομημένον πλίν- 
5 rn 3 3 , ἢ > y a [72 = 
θοις om Tals Ev ἀσφαλτῳ KELMEVALS, EUPOS ELKOTL ποδῶν. ὕψος 
Ν ς / A . 3 3 / 93 yy rn 
δὲ exatov' μῆκος 6 ἐλέγετο εἶναι εἴκοσι παρασαγγῶν" 


3 


/ 
ATEN EL 










Ν al 3 4 > rn > , 
de Βαβυλῶνος ov πολύ. 18. ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύ- 
δ \ ΄ , δ , δ , ΄, 
θησαν σταθμοὺς δύο παρασάγγας ὀκτω" καὶ διέβησαν διώ- 

Se Ἂς - 3 "ἢ r ἈΝ > 3 / / 
yas δύο, τὴν μὲν ἐπὶ γεφύρας, THY δ᾽ ἐζευγμένην πλοίοις 

᾿ ͵΄ e 29 a A / nA , 
ἔπτα" αὑται δ᾽ ἦσαν απὸ τοῦ Τίγρητος ποταμοῦ" κατετέτ- 

Rec > a Ν 7 ἂν Ἀ , N “-“ 
μῆντο δὲ ἐξ αὐτῶν καὶ τάφροι ἐπὶ τὴν χώραν, αἱ μὲν πρῶται 
ety y Sia 7 / Ν κ᾿ Ae 5 Ν 
γάλαι, ἔπειτα δ᾽ ἐλάττους" τέλος δὲ καὶ μικροὶ ὄχετοῖ, 
περ ἐν τῇ ᾿Ελλάδι ἐπὶ τὰς μελίνας . καὶ ἀφικνοῦνται ἐπὶ 
τὸν Τίγρητα ποταμόν" πρὸς ᾧ πόλις ἦν μεγάλη καὶ πολυ- 
νθρωπος ἢ ὄνομα Σιττάκη, ἀπέχουσα τοῦ ποταμοῦ σταδί- 

ἡ ὄνομ χο μ 
πεντεκαίδεκα. fF 14. of μὲν οὖν Ἕλληνες παρ᾽ αὐτὴν 
» , " κ δ , \ A \ / 
σκήνησαν εγγὺς παραδείσου μεγώλου Kab καλοῦ καὶ δασέος 

/ / Ν ,ὔ Ἂς / 
παντοίων δένδρων" οἱ de βάρβαροι διαβεβηκότες τὸν Ti- 
! 3 ΄ κ 3 Ν Ν Ν a 

PNT, ov μέντοι καταφανεῖς ἦσαν. 8S. μετὰ δὲ τὸ δεῖπνον 


50 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen | 








» 3 , » Ν - Ψ ,ὕ & 
ἔτυχον ἐν περιπώτῳ oVvTEs πρὸ τῶν ὅπλων Πρόξενος καὶ 
ewe A Ν Ν yY / ’ 7 \ Deal 
Ἐενοφῶν" καὶ προσελθὼν ἀνθρωπὸς τις ἡρωτησε TOUS προ-. 
ΞΟ 4 / \ ΄, 7 wv 
φύλακας ποῦ av ἰδοι Πρόξενον ἢ Kreapyov: Μένωνα ὃ 
> Jig Ἢ a 2S / BN a , / a, 
οὐκ ἐζήτει, καὶ ταῦτα παρ Apiatov wv τοῦ Mevwvos ξένου. 
2 \ 3 7 πῶ ys ᾽ \ a a ἫΣ 
16. ἐπεὶ δὲ Πρόξενος εἶπεν OTe αὑτὸς εἰμι ov ζητεις, εἶπεν. 
if / ἡ / 3 “ <9, en! 7 me 
ὁ ἄνθρωπος τάδε. ἔπεμψέ μὲ Apsatos καὶ Aptaofos, 
ἈΝ ΄ ᾿ ς “ 3 Ν 4 , * 
πιστοὶ ovtes Κύρῳ kat vty evvol, καὶ κελεύουσι isthe ' 
σθαι μὴ ὑμῖν ἐπιθῶνται τῆς νυκτὸς οἱ βάρβαροι" ἔστι δὲ 
στράτευμα πολὺ ἐν τῷ πλησίον παραδείσῳ. ἈἾ. καὶ παρὰ 
τὴν γέφυραν τοῦ Τίγρητος ποταμοῦ πέμψαι κελεύουσι ove . 
λακῆν, ὡς διανοεῖται αὐτὴν λῦσαι Τισσαφέρνης τῆς νυκτὸς, 
ἐὰν δύνηται, ὡς μὴ διαβῆτε ἀλλ᾽ ἐν μέσῳ ἀποληφθῆτε τοῦ 
τον καὶ μὲς διώρυχος. ES. ἀκούσαντες ταῦτα ἀγουσα 
αὐτὸν παρὰ τὸν Κλέαρχον καὶ φράζουσιν ἃ λέγει. ὁ δὲ 
/ 2 ΄ 3 ͵ 7 ἢ Ὁ =, 
Κλέαρχος ἀκούσας ἐταράχθη σφόδρα καὶ εφοβεῖτο. 19. vea- 
7 / a ,ὔ 2 , 3 « 3 δ τ δ ' 
νίσκος δέ τις τῶν παρόντων ἐννοήσας εἶπεν WS οὐκ ἀκόλουθα. 
” 7 2 ΄ Ν ΄ Ν / A Ν ἥ 
en τὸ τε ἐπιθήσεσθαι καὶ λύσειν τὴν γέφυραν. δῆλον yap” 
“ 2 / “Ὁ r , x06 a 6 2S . 9. a 
OTL ἐπιτιθεμένους ἢ νικᾶν δεῆσει ἢ ἡττᾶσθαι. ἐὰν μεν οὖν 
a / “ > ΝΥ 7 Ν ἠδὲ Ν ΕΥ̓ 
νικῶσι, TL δεῖ αὐτοὺς λύειν τὴν γεφυραν ; οὐδε γὰρ ἂν πολ-᾿ 
Ν ͵ 53 » x “ ΄ c iS ὡς 0 
λαι γέφυραι ὦσιν, ἔχοιμεν av ὅποι φυγόντες ἡμεῖς TWOGmeEV, 
ἜΝ ΩΝ ξ ce x 4 A ᾿ 3 7 
20. cay δὲ ἡμεῖς νικῶμεν, λελυμένης τῆς γεφύρας οὐχ ἕξου- 
3 ω 7 ΄ ΣῸΧ Ν A a f 
σιν ἐκεῖνοι ὅποι φύγωσιν" οὐδὲ μὴν βοηθῆσαι πολλῶν Ov= 
/ RNS 2 a 7 4s A ΄ Ε΄! 
τῶν πέραν οὐδεὶς αὐτοῖς δυνήσεται λελυμένης τῆς γεφύρας. 
2 ΄ AN S48 σ ͵ - 7 Ν + / i 
2H. ἀκούσας δε ὁ Κλέαρχος ταῦτα ἤρετο τὸν ἄγγελον Toon ἢ 
» ΄ ς 3 / A / Ν A 7 
Tis eln χώρα ἡ ἐν μέσῳ tov Τίγρητος καὶ τῆς διωρυχος. 
OES ey / \ κ a , | 
ὁ δὲ εἶπεν OTL πολλὴ Kal κῶμαι ἔνεισι καὶ πόλεις πολλαὶ | 
Ν 7 ,ὔ ἃς Ν 2 ΄ “ e / 
Kal μεγάλαι. 22. tote δὴ καὶ ἐγνώσθη ὅτι οἱ βάρβαροι 
Ν x ε / " a oe 
Tov ἄνθρωπον ὑποπέμψειαν, ὀκνοῦντες μὴ οἱ “Ελληνες διε-᾿ 
Ἷ \ / / 2 κε ΄ ; 
λόντες τὴν γεῴφυρον μείνειαν ἐν τῇ νήσῳ ἐρύματα ἔχοντες 
> Ν \ / yy Ν \ > 
evOev μὲν τὸν Τίγρητα, ἔνθεν δὲ τὴν διώρυχα" ta δ᾽ ἐπιτή- 
x 2 eee / , A Ne 3 A + 
eva ἔχοιεν ἐκ τῆς ἐν μέσῳ χώρας πολλῆς καὶ ἀγαθῆς οὐσης 


ANAB. 2, IV.] Passage of the Tigris. 91 


Ἂ a 2 / am oF 53 Ν 4 > Ν / 
καὶ τῶν ἐργασομένων ἐνόντων" εἶτα δὲ καὶ «ἀποστροφὴ γέ- 
yf ΄ / a r Ν \ 
νοιτο εἰ τις βούλοιτο βασιλέα κακῶς ποιεῖν. 2B. μετὰ δὲ 
A 3 ΄ {8 Bin / Ν / c/ Ν 
ταῦτα ἀνεπαύοντο" ETL μέντοι τὴν γέφυραν ὅμως φυλακὴν 
y+ Ν δ») > / 2 Ν > / y+ Ν Ν 
ἔπεμψαν" καὶ οὔτε ἐπέθετο οὐδεις οὐδαμόθεν οὔτε προς τὴν 
΄, Ia \ 3 a 7 « ¢ ΄ 
γέφυραν οὐδεὶς ἦλθε τῶν πολεμίων, ὡς οἱ φυλαττοντες 


ἀπήγγελλον. 34. ἐπειδὴ δ᾽ ἕως ἐγένετο, διέβαινον τὴν γέ- 





/ / Ν ς \ « a? 
dupav ἐζευγμένην πλοίοις τριάκοντα καὶ ἑπτὰ WS OLOV TE 
΄ / > / / “-“ Ν 
μώλιστα πεφυλαγμένως" εξηγγελλον yup τινες τῶν παρὰ 
/ « / / ? /, 
Τισσαφέρνους “Ελλήνων ὡς διαβαινόντων μελλοῖίεν ἐπιθη- 
2 A \ a 9 7 ΄ 
σεσθαι. ἀλλὰ ταῦτα μὲν ψευδῆ ἣν" διαβαινόντων μέντοι 
a 3 “ > , 3. 9. rn 3 7 
ὁ Γλοῦς αὐτοῖς ἐπεφανὴ μετ ἄλλων σκοπῶν εἰ διαβαίνοιεν 
bs / 3 Ν \ 9 5A > ΄ 
τὸν ποταμόν" επειδὴ δὲ εἶδεν, WYETO «ἀπελαύνων. 
> Ν A / 2 7 Ν 7 
95. ᾿Απὸ δὲ τοῦ Τίγρητος ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμοὺς τέττα- 
7 y a ΄ Ν Ν > 
pas παρασάγγας εἰκοσιν ἐπὶ Tov Φύσκον ποταμὸν, τὸ εὑρος 
/ | A \ / Ν > al 4 “- / 
πλεθρου" emnv de γέφυρα. Kat ἐνταῦθα ῳκεῖτο πόλις με- 
, e 7 3 Ν \ 2 7 lal “ 
γώλη ἢ ὄνομα ᾿πις" πρὸς ἣν ἀπήντησε τοῖς Βίλλησιν ὁ 
—- ff ἈΠ / / 3 Ν > Ν 7 ~ 9 
Κύρου καὶ Αρταξέρξου vobos ἀδελῴφος ἀπὸ Σούσων καὶ Ex- 
7 Ν x yf € / “ 
βατανων στρατιαν πολλὴν aywv ὡς βοηθήσων βασιλεῖ" 
Ν > 7 Ν ς n / 4 ‘ 
καὶ ἐπιστήσας TO EAUTOU στράτευμα παρερχομένους TOUS 
“ > ΄ εν, Ὁ \ / ¢ - \ τὴ ΄ 
Ελληνας εθεωρει. _ 28. ὁ δὲ λεαρχος ἡγεῖτο μὲν εἰς δύο. 
2 ΄ ete ὁ Ny, : / / Χ 
ἐπορεύετο δὲ ἄλλοτε καὶ ἄλλοτε εφιστάμενος. ὅσον δὲ χρό- 
Ν ς / a / 3 A 
νον TO ἡγούμενον τοῦ στρατεύματος ἐπιστήσειε, τοσοῦτον 
3 > , 7] > of. A / / ‘ 
ἦν ἀνώγκη χρόνον dv ὅλου τοῦ στρατεύματος γίγνεσθαι τὴν 
3 / « Ν / Ν > - lal vA 
ἐπίστασιν" ὥστε TO στράτευμα καὶ αὑτοῖς τοις βίλλησι 
᾿ ΄ 3 N \ , > a 
Sofa. πάμπολυ εἶναι. καὶ tov Πέρσην ἐκπεπλῆχθαι θεω- 
“- ᾽ “- \ 3 ᾽ὔ A ’ 
pouvta. 2%. ἐντεῦθεν δὲ ἐπορεύθησαν διὰ τῆς Μηδίας 
‘ 3... 2 ἃ / / 3 ὡς 
σταθμους ἐρήμους εξ παρασάγγας τριάκοντα εἰς τὰς Παρυ- 
tA 7 A , Ν / £ , 
σάτιδος κωμας τῆς Κύρου καὶ βασιλέως μητρός. ταύτας 
,ὔ 7 > a s auth 2 
Τισσαφέρνης, Κύρῳ ereyyedov, διαρπώσαι τοῖς "Ελλησιν 
> / x > / , A \ a ἈΝ 
ἐπέτρεψε πλὴν ἀνδραπόδων. ενῆν δὲ σῖτος πολὺς καὶ πρό- 


Bata καὶ ἄλλα χρήματα. 28. ἐντεῦθεν δ᾽ ἐπορεύθησαν 


52 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [ XEN. 


See ἐν , / Υ Ἂς / 3 
σταθμοὺς ἐρήμους τέτταρας Tapacayyas εἰκοσι Tov Tiypn- 
Ν > 2 AH 2 \ a , aa 
Ta ποταμὸν ἐν ἀριστερᾷ ἔχοντες. EV δὲ τῷ πρωτῳ σταθμῷ 
/ nan A / 3 r 4 x ’ / Μ 
πέραν του ποταμοῦ πολις ὠκειτο MEYUAN Kal εὐδαίμων ὄνο- 
\ 5 - ς i A ἌΝ Me ͵ 
μα Kawai, ἐξ ἧς οἱ βάρβαροι διῆγον ἐπὶ σχεδίαις διφθερί- 
oS Ν “- 
Vals ἄρτους, TUpOUS, οἶνον. 
Ν A 2 A 3 Ν Ν , 3, 
V. Μετὰ ταῦτα ἀφικνοῦνται ἐπὶ τὸν Ζαπωταν ποταμὸν, 
δ 98 , 7 κ = " ἘΣ 
τὸ εὖρος τεττάρων πλεθρων. καὶ ἐνταῦθα ἐμειναν ἡμέρας 
= 9 \ / ¢ / ee en > ; 
τρεῖς" ἐν δὲ ταύταις ὑποψίαι μὲν ἦσαν, φανερὰ δε οὐδεμία 
3 / > / + 9 A > / ΄ 
ἐφαίνετο ἐπιβουληῆ. 2 εδοξεν οὖν τῷ Κλεάρχῳ συγγενέ- 
A / yy / -“ \ ¢ J 
σθαι τῷ Τισσαφέρνει, εἰ πως δυναῖτο παῦσαι Tas ὑποψίας 
\ 2 ? a / Υ \ ἐν 7 > a 
πρὶν εξ αὐτῶν πόλεμον γενεσθαι" Kat ἔπεμψε τινα ἐροῦντα 
“ / ee / e Nise / Cel ε΄ 
OT’ συγγενεσθαι αὐτῷ χρῇζοι. ὁ δὲ ἑτοίμως ἐκέλευεν ἥκειν. 
ἢ Sar A , δ , , ἢ <a 
8. ἐπειδὴ δὲ συνῆλθον, λέγει ὁ Κλέαρχος tade. Eyo. ὦ 
7 3 <a Her one ἢ Ν ι 
Τισσαφεέρνη,. oida μὲν ἡμῖν ὅρκους γεγενημένους καὶ δεξιὰς 
/ Me ὦ 9 , ? 7 / \ , 
δεδομενας μὴ ἀδικήσειν ἀλλήλους φυλαττόμενον δε GE TE 
ta A € J ¢ A Ν ἴ ς lal e ΄“- A 5 
Op® ὡς πολεμίους ἡμᾶς καὶ ἡμεῖς ορῶντες ταῦτα ἀαντιφυλατ- 
/ 3 \ \ a 3 / + \ ? (4 
τόμεθα. Δ. ἐπεὶ δὲ σκοπῶν οὐ δύναμαι οὔτε σε αἰσθέσθαι 
, δ δ a aloe. , - 53 “ ς a 
πειρώμενον ἡμᾶς κακῶς ποιεῖν ἐγὼ TE σαφῶς οἶδα OTL ἡμεῖς 
aime). "3 A A ΩΝ Μ / 9 / 
γε οὐδ᾽ ἐπινοοῦμεν τοιοῦτον οὐδὲν. ἔδοξε μοι εἰς λόγους σοι 
? a “ b) δε ἢ 3 7 x > / 
ελθεῖν. oTws εἰ δυναίμεθα ἐξέλοιμεν ἀλλήλων τὴν ἀπιστίαν. 
Ν \ 5 3 7 7 Χ \ ? A \ 
5. καὶ yap οἶδα ἀνθρώπους ἤδη, Tous μὲν ἐκ διαβολῆς τοὺς 
\ x ¢ / A / ? / / / 
δὲ καὶ εξ ὑποψίας, ct φοβηθέντες ἀλλήλους φθάσαι βουλο- 
ἊΝ a 3 / aE ah Ν \ Μ / 
μενοι πρὶν παθεῖν ἐποίησαν ἀνήκεστα KAKA TOUS οὔτε μελ- 
“2 5 Tey x ea \ 3 
λοντας οὔτ αὖ βουλομένους τοιοῦτον οὐδὲν. Gs. τὰς οὖν 
΄ ? / / / / \ A 
τοιαύτας ἀγνωμοσύνας νομίζων συνουσίαις μαλιστα ἂν Tav- 
θ Ἁ \ Suda, ΄ td \ era ? τὶ ὩΣ 
εσθαι ἤκω καὶ διδάσκειν σε βούλομαι ὡς συ ἡμῖν οὐκ ορθῶς 
2 r an Ν Ν Ν y ¢ al ΄ n 
ἀπιστεῖς. To πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ καὶ μέγιστον οἱ θεῶν ἡμᾶς 
“ ; ΄ 7, 3 3 , ͵ ὃ " 
ὅρκοι κωλύουσι πολεμίους εἶναι ἀλλήλοις" ὅστις δὲ τούτων 
΄ δ ς κα ἧς a rents + 3. τ 3 
TUVOLOEY αὐτῷ παρημελήκως, τοῦτον ἐγὼ οὔποτ ἂν εὑδαι- 
, N N τ , ? 5 Ἂ 5; 5.5. aN / 
μονίσαιμι. Tov yap θεῶν πόλεμον οὐκ οἶδα OUT ἀπὸ ποίου 


Ἅ 7 / ven Y, dike hee) na Ἃ / 
av τάχους φεύγων τις ἀποφύγοι out εἰς ποῖον ἂν σκότος 








Anas. 2,v.] Conference with Tissaphernes. 53 


ἱποδραίη οὔθ᾽ ὅπως ἂν εἰς ἐχυρὸν χωρίον ἀποσταίη. Ta 
α ρ "Ὁ ς ᾿ χυρ x p ἢ. : avTn 
Ν “Ὁ “ ¢ fal © 
yap πάντα τοῖς θεοῖς ὕποχα καὶ πανταχῇ πάντων ἴσον οἵ 
Ν fal Ν Ν XN “-“ “ Ν A 4 
θεοὶ κρατοῦσι. 8. περὶ μὲν δὴ τῶν θεῶν τε καὶ τῶν ὅρκων 
“ , 3)» Ὁ δ e A » / / 
οὕτω γιγνώσκω, Tap οὺς ἡμεῖς τὴν φιλίαν συνθέμενοι κατε- 
/ rn 3 3 / Ν 3 Ν > A / / 
θέμεθα" τῶν 8 ἀνθρωπίνων σε ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ παρόντι νομίζω 
/ > oA > 7 \ Ν ‘ ‘ A ἈΝ 
μέγιστον εἶναι ἡμῖν ἀγαθόν. 9. σὺν μεν γὰρ σοὶ πᾶσα μεν 
tant oY an Ν ΄ \ a 5 7 
ὁδος εὔπορος, πᾶς δὲ ποταμὸς διαβατὸς, τῶν τε ἐπιτηδείων 
? b / yY Ν an ἴω ὃς Ν / e ¢ / 
οὐκ ὠπορία" ἄνευ δὲ σοῦ πᾶσα μεν διὰ σκότους ἡ ὁδός" 
InN’ >" > A 3 , A Ν Ν ' 
οὐδὲν γὰρ αὐτῆς ἐπιστώμεθα" πᾶς δὲ ποταμὸς δύσπορος, 
α ee 4 \ , τ, / \ \ 
mas δὲ ὄχλος φοβερὸς, φοβερώτατον ὃ ἐρημία" μεστὴ yap 
- > / ) 7 3 Ν Ν Ν / 
TOAANS ἀπορίας ἐστιν. 0. εἰ δε On καὶ μανεντες σε κατα- 
/ δ \ 3X Ν 2 7 / Ν 
κτείναίμεν, ἀλλο TL ἂν ἢ TOV εὐεργέτην KATAKTELVAVYES πρὸς 
΄, x / yy ? / “ be 
βασιλέα Tov μέγιστον ededpov ἀαγωνιζοίμεθα; ὅσων de dn 
\ “ \ 2 γ΄ 2 ." / > 4 Ν 
καὶ οἰων ἂν ἐλπίδων ἐμαυτὸν στερήσαιμι, εἰ σὲ TL KAKOV 
3 7 nr io / : 3 ἈΝ Ν “- 
ἐπιχειρησαιμι ποιεῖν, ταῦτα λέξω. 11. ἐγὼ yap Κῦρον» 
Σ᾿ ΄ , / / leaf φράσαι , t / 
ἐπεθύμησα μοι φίλον γενέσθαι, νομίζων τῶν τότε ἱκανώτα- 
> 53 ὄνον τ δὲ ΄ Ν᾿ ὧν er e 7 ͵ 
τον εἶναι εὖ Troe ὃν βούλοιτο" σε δε νῦν ὁρῶ τήν τε Κύρου 
΄ Ν ps Μ Ν Ν lal >’ Ν γ΄ 
δύναμιν καὶ χώραν ἔχοντα καὶ τὴν σαυτοῦ ἀρχὴν σώζοντα, 
Ν nN / ΄ Θ a / 3 A ἈΝ 
τὴν δὲ βασιλέως δύναμιν, ἡ Κῦρος πολεμίᾳ ἐχρῆτο. σοὶ 
΄ ΄' 3 ΄, \ ΄' ΕΣ 
ταυτην συμμαχον οὔσαν. U2. τουτων δὲ τοιούτων ὄντων 
/ 7 J “ 2 ie / Λ 53 > Ν 
τίς οὕτω μαίνεται ὅστις οὐ βούλεταί σοι φίλος εἶναι; αλλὰ 
Ν 3 Τα Ν Ν A 2m Mee. > , \ \ , 
μὴν ερῶ yap καὶ ταῦτα εξ ὧν ἔχω ἐλπίδας καὶ σὲ βουλη- 
/ eon 3 3 Ἂς Ν ea \ 
σεσθαι φίλον nui εἶναι. 13. οἶδα μὲν yap ὑμῖν Μυσοὺς 
Nae ἃ Moe τ Ἃ eae eee ΄ , 
λυπηρους OVTAS, OVS νομίζω ἂν συν τῇ παρούσῃ δυνάμει τα- 
Ν δι, ee ἴω 5 Χ x Ζ ? 7 Ν Ν 
πεινοὺυς ὑμῖν παρασχεῖν" οἶδα δε καὶ Πισίδας " ἀκούω δὲ καὶ 
x Ν \ a 5 \ 4 \ A 2 n 
ἄλλα €Ovn πολλὰ τοιαῦτα εἶναι, ἃ οἶμαι ἂν παῦσαι ἐνοχλουν- 
aN By ie / ἿΣ 7 Ai 7 δὲ e oy 
τα ἀεὶ TH ὑμετέρᾳ εὐδαιμονίᾳ. Αιγυπτίους δε, οἷς μαλιστα 
eK tal 7 / 2 et) / 7 
ὑμᾶς νῦν γιγνώσκω τεθυμωμένους, οὐχ ὁρῶ ποίᾳ δυνάμει 
Υ 7 an Δ tA A a Χ 
συμμαχῳ χρησάμενοι μᾶλλον ἂν κολαάσαισθε τῆς νῦν συν 
3 Ν + 2 ἥν“ ἃ Ν Μ “ / >) tal Ἁ 2 
ἐμοί ουὐσης. 4. ἀλλα μὴν εν γε τοις περιξ οἰκοῦσι συ εἰ 
\ 7 ,ὔ , 53 ot / or yy ᾽ / / 
μὲν βούλοιὸ τῳ φίλος εἶναι, ὡς μέγιστος ἂν εἴης, εἰ δέ τίς 


54 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen. 


/ « / “Ὁ μὴ ΄ yy - ¢ A ς ͵΄ 
σε λυποίη, ὡς δεσπότης ἂν ἀναστρεέφοιο, ἔχων ἡμᾶς υὑπηρε- 
A ? x A a ¢ ὕὔ ¢ “- 3 Ny 
TAS, οἱ GOL οὐκ ἂν τοῦ μισθοῦ ἕνεκα μονον ὑπηρετοίμεν ἀλλὰ 
Ν A tf aA / ς Ν na Ν oS yf / 
και τῆς χάριτος HV σωθέντες ὑπὸ σοῦ σοι ἂν ἔχοιμεν δικαίως. 
3 Ν Ν n , 2 / e/ rn 
15. ἐμοι μεν TavTa TuvTa ἐνθυμουμένῳ οὕτω δοκεῖ θαυμα- 
ν 5 Ν ΑΔ ΣΝ οἱ > PN Kee ies, 7x 2 x 
στον εἶναι TO σε ημιν ἀπιστεῖν ὥστε και ἥδιστ᾽ ἂν ἀκούσαιμι 
Ε / d 2 Ν Ν / «“ tal / 
TOUVOMA TLS οὕτως EOTL δεινὸς λεγείν WOTE σε πεῖσαι λέγων 
΄ς id r 2 7 > th Ν > es 
ὡς ἡμεῖς σοι ἐπιβουλεύομεν. Κλέαρχος μὲν οὖν τοσαυτα 
2 / ¥ Θ 2 / 
εἶπε: Τισσαφέρνης δὲ ὧδε arrnuerpOn. 
9 ᾽ / Ν 3 / 5 7 7 
16. ᾿Αλλ ἥδομαι μεν, ὦ Κλέαρχε, ἀκούων σου φρονί- 
ῃ A Ν fi yf > Ν ὡς 
μους λόγους" TavTa yap γιγνώσκων εἰ TL ἐμοί κακον βου- 
7 “ + Ca \ a ῇ 5 ε 3 
λεύοις. ἅμα ἂν μοι δοκεῖς καὶ σαυτῳ KAKOVOUS εἶναι. WS ὃ 
Ἃ / e/ 707 N ς tal / “ rn ΝῊ Ν 
ἂν μαθῃς ὅτι OVO ἂν ὑμεῖς δικαίως οὔτε βασιλεῖ οὔτ᾽ ἐμοὶ 
2 , b) td =< 2 Ν ha ? 7 > 
UTLOTOLNTE, AVTAKOVGOY, | 14. εἰ yap LEAS εβουλομεθα atro- 
/ / 7 a ε ΄ , 5) | 
ETAL, TOTEPA GOL δοκοῦμεν ἵππέων πλήθους ἀπορεῖν ἢ πε- 
A Δ Ἔ , ? Slee ΔΑ \ , € a gt!) Ἃ 
ζῶν ἢ ὁπλίσεως ἐν ἢ ὑμᾶς μεν βλαπτειν ἱκανοὶ εἴημεν ἂν, 
7 , Ν 2 Ν / 3 Ν ΄ 2 
ἀντιπάσχειν δὲ οὐδεὶς κίνδυνος; 18. ἀλλὰ χωρίων ἐπιτη- 
na 3 / 2 r + A 3 na 
δείων ὑμῖν ἐπιτίθεσθαι ἀπορεῖν av σοι δοκοῦμεν ; οὐ τοσαῦτα 
ἈΝ 7 Arce A Λ + Ν A 7 ΄ 
μὲν πεδία ἃ ὑμεῖς φίλια ὄντα συν πολλῷ πόνῳ διαπορεύεσθε, 
a X +S con eA Μ / εν. Μ 
τοσαῦτα δὲ OPN υὑμιν OPATE OVTA πορεῦτεα, ἃ ἡμιν εἕεστι 
a y+ ς lal / al > aes. 
προκαταλαβουσιν ἄπορα vw παρέχειν, TOTOUTOL δ΄ εἰσὶ 
ΣΡ gi Oe Μ coe ΄ e / Ἅ ς a 
ποταμοὶ ep ὧν εἕεστιν ἡμῖν ταμιεύεσθαι, ὁπόσοις ἂν ὑμῶν 
͵ , Di. oN 3 > al ἃ Ia? ἃ fo 
βουλώμεθα μάχεσθαι; εἰσὶ δ᾽ αυτῶν ovs οὐδ ἂν Tavta- 
/ 9 ἈΠ 76 “ δ ΚΝ ΄ 3 > 
Tact διαβαίητε., EL μὴ ἡμεις υμας διαπορεύοιμεν. 19. εἰ ὃ 
2 A 4 ς / 3 Ν 7 4 A a A 
εν πᾶσι τούτοις ἡττώμεθα, ANNA TO YE TOL πῦρ κρεῖττον τοῦ 
ἌΣ 9 ἃ ς a / Δ ΤΩΝ 7 N 
καρπου ἐστιν" OV ἡμεῖς δυναίμεθ᾽ ἂν κατακαύσαντες λιμὸν 
σ᾿ Νὰ 3 / eae - ὯΝ b>] , ») θ Ν yy , 6 
vu αντυταάξαι. @ ὑμεις OVD EL πανυ ἀγαῦοι ENTE μάχεσθαι 
Ἃ 7 ς a Ἃ 3 Μ 7 / 
av δύναισθες 20. πῶς av οὖν ἔχοντες TODOUTOUS TOPOUS 
Ν Αι ς fal “- Ἂς / / οἱ “ 2 / 
προς TO UILLV TTONEMELY, καὶ τούτων μήδενα ἡμῖν ἐπικίνδυνον, 
Μ 5 ,ὔ 7 A ΕΥ Ἂν 7 2 / 
ETELTA EK τούτων TAVTWVY τοῦτον ἂν TOV TPOTTOV ἐξελοίμεθα 
ἃ / ΩΣ ‘ a 3 Ν , Ν Ν 2 7 
OS μόνος MEV προς θεῶν aceBns, μονος δὲ προς ἀνθρωπων 


> / , Ἂς 3 , 3 ἃς Ν 3 / 
αἰσχρὸς; 21. παντάπασι δὲ ἀπόρων ἐστὶ καὶ ἀμηχάνων 








ANAB. 2, V.] Clearchus entrapped. 55 


wi Ὁ “ἀν "Κ᾽ τ , Ν / a “ 3 , 
καὶ ἐν ἀνάγκῃ ἐχομένων, καὶ τούτων πονηρῶν, οἵτινες εθε- 
Γ “) « / Ν \ ys / \ ; 
λουσι Su ἐπιορκίας τε πρὸς θεοὺς καὶ ἀπιστίας πρὸς ἀνθρώ- 
7 > ed r > - / », 5 7 
TOUS πράττειν TL. οὐχ οὕτως ἡμεῖς, ὦ KXEapye, οὔτε adoyi- 
yy / ΤΟ 2 \ / oa ET os or > / 
στοι οὔτε HALOLOL ἐσμεν. 32. adda τί δὴ ὑμᾶς ἐξον «πολέσαι 
2 BAN a Μ 90 “ ἘΝ ee ͵ Υ 
οὐκ ἐπὶ τοῦτο ἤλθομεν ; εὖ ἐσθι ὅτι ὁ ἐμὸς ἔρως τούτου αἴτιος 
Ν a cd a ἐϑς Ν ΄ ν᾿ ΜΝ a D Lh 
τὸ τοῖς Βλλησιν ἐμὲ πιστὸν γενέσθαι, καὶ ᾧ Κῦρος ἀνέβη 
a Ν / / / 5. AS a > 
ξενικῷ διὰ μισθοδοσίας πιστεύων τούτῳ ἐμὲ καταβῆναι δι 
? / 2 / v4 me: Ν , ς r > Ν 
εὐεργεσίας ἰσχυρον. 23. ὁσα δ΄ ἐμοὶ χρήσιμοι ὑμεῖς ἐστε τὰ 
Ν Ν Ν 3 Ν Ν / 3% > Ν Ν Ν + ao 
μὲν καὶ σὺ εἶπας, TO δὲ μέγιστον ἐγὼ οἶδα" THY μὲν yap επί 
“- a / r / + 5 Ν Ψ ‘ yee 
τῇ κεφαλῇ Trapav βασιλεῖ μόνῳ εἐξεστιν ὀρθὴν ἔχειν, τὴν δ᾽ ἐπὶ 
κ fit \ ¢ a / nee 4 2 rn ¥ 
τῇ καρδίᾳ LOWS ἂν υμῶν ἥταροντων καὶ ἕτερος εὐπετῶς ἔχοι. 
΄ς a SN y a 7 ? A / \ 
| 24. Ταῦτα εἰπὼν ἔδοξε τῷ Κλεάρχῳ ἀληθῆ λέγειν" καὶ 
9 2 a Μ ad / € A 2 / e 
εἶπεν, Ouxovv, ep, olTives τοιούτων ἡμίν εἰς φιλίαν ὑπαρ- 
/ nr , A / id a 
YOVTMV TELPWVTAL διαβάλλοντες ποιῆσαι πολεμίους ἡμᾶς 
ΒΕ ͵ὕὔ 2 Sy. ἴω Ν > Ν / Μ e 
ἄξιοι εἰσι Ta ἔσχατα παθεῖν; 25. Καὶ ἐγὼ μὲν ye, edn ὁ 
΄ > / / “ Ν Ν « 
Τισσαφέρνης. εἰ βούλεσθε μοι οἱ τε στρατήηγοι και ol λοχα- 
\ 6 “Ὁ 3 -“ 3 » Xe ὦ XA > Ν >t a ξ΄ 
you ehGew ev τῷ ἐμφανεῖ, λεξω TOUS πρὸς ἐμὲ EYOVTAS WS 
\ 3 Ἅ, > / \ a ‘ 3 Ν A > ‘\ 
συ ἐμοὶ εἐπιβουλεύεις και TH συν εμοὶ στρατιᾳ. 26. Eyo 
‘ x ς / Μ ΄ Ν Ν 3 , / 
de, efn ὁ Κλέαρχος. ἄξω πάντας. καὶ σοὶ av δηλώσω ὅθεν 
are \ A 3 / 2 / Ν rn , ς 
€Y@ περι σον ἀκούω. VF. εκ τουτων 67 τῶν AoYyav ὁ Τισ- 
/ / / \ / b ΕΝ 
σαφερνὴης φιλοφρονούμενος τότε μεν μένειν τε αὑτὸν ἐκέλευσε 
Ν 7 2 , a \ ς / ¢ , 
καὶ σύνδειπνον ἐποιήσατο. τῇ δὲ ὑστεραίᾳ ὁ Κλέαρχος 
2 Ν ΤΩΝ Ν 7 - Α 32. 9 ᾿᾿ a “ἢ 
ἐλθὼν ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον δῆλος T ἦν πάνυ PLALKWS οἰομε- 
r a / A A >. 3 nr > / 
vos διακεῖσθαι τῷ Τισσαφέρνει καὶ ἃ ἔλεγεν ἐκεῖνος ὠπῊγ- 
+ 5.) hw κι , Nes so. 
γελλεν. en τε χρῆναι ἱέναι παρὰ Τισσαφέρνην ovs ἐκέλευσε, 
ΑΕ A, 5) n , πο: ΄, « 
καὶ ol ἂν ἐλεγχθῶσι διαβάλλοντες τῶν ᾿ Ελλήνων. ὡς προ- 
J 3 Ν Ν / gen yA 4 a 
δότας αὐτοὺς Kal κακόνους τοῖς Ελλησιν ovtas τιμωρηθῆναι. 
ς / \ > Ν / / ᾽ Ν > 
28. ὑπώπτευε Oe εἶναι Tov διαβάλλοντα Mevwva, εἰδως av- 
aN Ἂς , / aS / ΑΝ 
Tov καὶ συγγεγενημενον Τισσαφερνει wet Ἀριαίου και στα- 
ve Pues ee / “ Ν ΄ e/ 
σιάζοντα αὐτῷ καὶ ἐπιβουλεύοντα, ὅπως TO στράτευμα ἅπαν 


πρὸς ἑαυτὸν λαβὼν φίλος ἢ Τισσαφέρνει. 39. ἐβούλετο δὲ 


56 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen. | | 


Nine ’ Ἁ Ἂς ΄ Ν ¢ Ν vy Ν 
καὶ ὁ Κλεαρχος ἅπαν τὸ oTpaTevpa πρὸς εαυὑτον ἔχειν τὴν 
Ν Ν n 2 Ἂς 3 a \ 
γνώμην καὶ τοὺς παραλυποῦντας ἐκποδων εἶναι. τῶν δὲ 
an 3 / 2 A Sr, 7 N 
στρατιωτῶν ἀντέλεγόν τινες αὐτῷ μὴ ἱέναι πάντας τοὺς λο- 
\ κ Χ Ν / ΠῚ “ ΒΞ ς 
χαγοὺς καὶ στρατηγοὺς μηδὲ πιστεύειν Τισσαφέρνει. BO. ὁ 
/ ? an / + ΄ὔ 77 \ 
δὲ Κλέαρχος ἰσχυρῶς κατέτεινεν, ἔστε διεπράξατο πέντε μὲν 
Ἀ bia Υ̓ ἘΣ / ὦ A ‘0 ἊΣ 
στρατηγους ἱέναι, εἰκοσι δὲ λοχαγοὺς" συνηκολουθησαν δε 
a γ a « / 
ὡς εἰς ἀγορὰν καὶ τῶν ἄλλων στρατιωτῶν ὡς διακοσιοι. 
᾽ \ lal / a 7 
| 81. ᾿Επεὶ δὲ ἦσαν ἐπὶ ταῖς θύραις ταῖς Τισσαφέρνους, 
re Ae ; / δὴ , 4 
οἱ μὲν στρατηγοὶ παρεκλήθησαν εἰσω, II poéevos Βοιωτιος, 
Ν > 7 3 \ / / 7 
Μένων Θετταλὸς, Ayias ᾿άρκας, Κλεαρχος Auxwv, Swxpa- 
͵ \ Va LN n 7 y 2 
τῆς ᾿Αχαιός" οἱ δὲ λοχαγοί ETL TALS θύραις εμενον. 2. οὐ 
ral \ / >| x a > A / e/ Seo 
πολλῷ δὲ ὕστερον ἀπὸ τοῦ αὑτοῦ σημείου οἱ T ἐνδον συν- 
/ Ν Ὁ / Ν \ ἴω - 
ελαμβάνοντο καὶ οἱ ἔξω κατεκόπησαν. μετὰ δε ταῦτα τῶν 
/ Mie ie Yi \ a / 3 z @ 3 
βαρβάρων τινὲς ἱππέων δια τοῦ πεδίου ἐλαύνοντες ᾧτινι EV- 
¢/ ΝΥ , Wear) / , yy 
τυγχάνοιεν Ελληνι ἢ δούλῳ ἢ εἐλευθερῳ πάντας ἐκτεινον. 
Ε (4 , ¢ / 2 a 2 / 2 a 
88. οἱ δὲ “Ελληνες τὴν τε ἱππασίαν αὐτῶν ἐθαύμαζον εκ τοῦ 
/ 5 “ ἌΣ νον 3 / ὡς ,ὔ Ν / 
στρατοπέδου ὁρῶντες καὶ ὃ TL ἐποίουν ἠμφεγνοουν, πρὶν Ni- 
> Ν - / / 2 Ν / Ν Ν 
καρχος Apkas ἧκε φεύγων τετρωμένος εἰς τὴν γαστέρα καὶ τὰ 
Μ ? nr Ν “ Ν 3 Ρ , ἂν ,ὔ 
EVTEPA ἐν ταῖς χερσίν ἔχων, καὶ εἰπέ παντα τὰ γεγενημενα. 
? 7 Ν ed BY 2 Meta <P / 
34. ex τούτου δὴ ot ᾿Ελληνες ἔθεον ἐπὶ τὰ ὅπλα πάντες 
3 ͵ Ν / 35. Ὁ ἡ ef 3 Ν 3. ὟΝ Ν 
EXTETANYMEVOL καὶ νομίζοντες αὐτίκα ἥξειν AUTOUS ἐπὶ TO 
/ € \ Z \ 2 3 > - Ν 
στρατόπεδον. 85. οἱ δὲ πάντες μὲν οὐκ ἦλθον, Aptaios δε 
ΝῊ ἈΝ / unis ΄ , 
καὶ Aptaolos καὶ Μιθριδάτης, ot ἦσαν Κύρῳ πιστοότατοι" 
ς Ν a ς / ¢ x 7 Ses / τὶ 
ὁ δε τῶν “Ελλήνων ἑρμηνεὺς ἔφη καὶ τὸν Τισσαφέρνους ἀδελ- 
Ν ἮΝ 2 an ΡΣ \ / 7 ἊΣ 
Pov συν αὑτοῖς ορᾶν καὶ γιγνώσκειν" συνηκολούθουν δὲ καὶ 
x a 7, Pp] / ε 
αλλοι Π]ερσῶν τεθωρακισμένοι εἰς τριακοσίους. 89. οὔτοι 
3 Ν 3 Ν 3 a δον + By nr 
ἐπεὶ EYYUS ἦσαν, προσελθεῖν ἐκέλευον EL TLS ELN τῶν “Ἑλλή- 
i SON Ὲ “ > / N ἈΝ 
νῶν ἢ στρατηγὸς ἢ λοχαγος, wa ἀπαγγείλωσι τὰ Tapa βασι- 
7 \ A IEA / ἴω e / 
λεως. BY. μετα ταῦτα ἐξῆλθον φυλαττόμενοι τῶν “Ελλήνων 
Ν \ > 7 3 7 Ν / 
στρατηγοι μεν Κλεάνωρ Opyopuevios καὶ Σ᾽οφαίνετος Στυμ- 
΄ Ν 3 - Ν — a 3 “ 
φάλίος, σὺν αὐτοῖς de Ξενοφῶν ᾿Αθηναῖος, ὅπως μάθοι τὰ 











Anas. 2, vi.] Parley of the Greeks with Ariaeus. O7 


\ / / 2). 3) ΄ ᾽ Ν Ἵ 7 
περὶ Προξένου" Χειρίσοφος δ᾽ etuyxavev ἀπὼν ἐν κώμῃ τινὶ 
.- ε 
% Μ 2 / ὶ > Ν ΝΣ, OF , ; , 
σὺν ἄλλοις ἐπισιτιζόμενος. BS. Eres δὲ ἐστησαν εἰς ἐπήκοον, 
2 a , / x 5S » “ ‘ 
εἶπεν Aptatos tude. Κλέαρχος μεν, ὦ ἀνδρες “ἔλληνες, ἐπεὶ 
> - > / Ν \ \ ΄ 4 Ν δ΄, Ν 
ἐπιορκῶν τε ehavn καὶ τὰς σπονδὰς λύων. ἔχει τὴν δίκην καὶ 
’ , Ν Ν ,ὔ 7 / > a Ν 
τέθνηκε, Πρόξενος δε καὶ Μένων, ὅτι κατήηγγείλαν αὐτοῦ τὴν 
3 Ν >] 4. A Ἂ ¢ Aa Ν ‘ , 
ἐπιβουλην, EV μεγωλῃ τεμῇῃ εἰσιν. ὑμᾶς δε βασιλεὺς τὰ ὅπλα 
8 ΄“ ς rn Ν 53 / ᾽ / » ὅ 5 bo 
ὠπαιτεῖ" εαυτοῦ yap εἰναί φησιν, ἐπείπερ Kupov ἦσαν τοῦ 
/ / Ν A > / ce 
ἐκείνου δούλου. 39. προς ταῦτα ἀπεκρίναντο οὐ ϊδλληνες, 
y \ 7 en. / 3 7, 5) , 
ἔλεγε δὲ Κλεώνωρ ὁ Opxopevios: “2 κάκιστε ἀνθρώπων 
> ω Ν ἘΝ iA 3 σ΄ ΄ ) ? / 
Apwate καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι ὅσοι ἦτε Kupov φίλοι, οὐκ αἰσχύνεσθε 
yy Ν aes See , “, 5 ͵΄ con ἈΝ > 
οὔτε θεους ovt ἀνθρωπους, olTLVvEes ὀμόσαντες ἡμῖν τοὺς αὖὐ- 
Ν / ἧς > Ν r , ΄ A ‘ 

Tous φίλους καὶ ἐχθροὺς νομιεῖν, Tpodovtes ἡμᾶς σὺν Τισ- 
7 A > 7 Ν / / Μ 
σαφέρνει τῷ ἀθεωτάτῳ τε καὶ πανουργοτάτῳ τούς τε ἄνδρας 

2 \ (ee, > / \ \ y+ δ 
QUTOUS οἷς ὠμνυτε UTOAWANEKATE καὶ TOUS AAXOUS μας προ- 
, \ r / Fuga) € a y+ ¢ Ν 
δεδωκότες σὺν τοῖς πολεμίοις Eh ἡμᾶς ἔρχεσθε; 40. ὁ δὲ 
> a 3 ͵΄ Ν 7 2 7 Ν 
Aptaios εἶπε, Κλέαρχος yap πρόσθεν ἐπιβουλεύων φανερὸς 
δ ἢ / : ᾿ΕΝ / \ A ἘΝῚ a \ 
ἐγένετο Τισσαφέρνει te καὶ Opovta, και πᾶσιν ἡμῖν τοῖς σὺν 
΄ 3 Ν 7 - ’ 3 / ‘ 
τούτοις. 41. ἐπὶ τούτοις Ξενοφῶν tude εἶπε. Κλέαρχος μὲν 
/ > Ν Ν 7 y N ἢ; Ν ͵ “ 
τοίνυν εἰ παρὰ TOUS ὅρκους EAE τὰς σπονδὰς, τὴν δίκην ἔχει" 
/ Ν ᾿] / Ν 3 A ͵7] \ 
δίκαιον yap ἀπόλλυσθαι τοὺς επιορκοῦντας" Πρόξενος δὲ 
\ / 2 / ᾽ Ν ς / Ν ) / ¢ / ‘ 
καὶ Mevwv ἐπείπερ εἰσὶν ὑμέτεροι μεν εὐεργέται, ἡμέτεροι δε 
\ , > δ a Ἄ δ / / 
στρατηγοί, πέμψατε avtous δεῦρο" δῆλον yap ὅτι φίλοι γε 
yy 2 , 7 el ae Se oe Ν 4 
ὄντες UPOTEPOLS TELPUTOVTAL καὶ ὑμῖν καὶ ἡμῖν Ta βελτιστα 
a “‘ a ξ ᾿' Ν , 
συμβουλεῦσαι. 42. πρὸς ταῦτα οἱ βάρβαροι πολὺν χρένον 
/ 2 7; 2 A Ia > / 
duareyGevres ἀλλήλοις ἀπῆλθον οὐδὲν ἀποκρινάμενοι. 
ς Ν N ἂς, / ͵΄ 2 , 
VI. Οἱ μεν δὴ στρατηγοὶ οὕτω ληφθέντες ἀνηχθησαν 
«ς / Ν > / \ Ν 2 ΄ - 
ὡς βασιλέα καὶ ἁἀποτμηθεντες Tas κεφαλὰς ετελεύτησαν, εἷς 
Ὺ 2 A / / 2 / - ? / 
μὲν αὑυὐτων Κλέαρχος ὁμολογουμένως εκ TAVT@V τῶν ἐεμπει- 
> A 3 / / / PD ae. Ν Ν Ν 
pws αὑτοῦ ἐχόντων δόξας γενέσθαι ἀνὴρ καὶ πολεμίκος καὶ 
/ 2 / ΜΙ Ν Ν ἧς ea Ν / 3 
φιλοπόλεμος ἐσχάτως. | 2. καὶ yap δὴ ἕως μὲν πόλεμος ἣν 


a , ν \ > 7 ; ; Ν 
τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις πρὸς Tous Αθηναίους παρέμενεν, ἐπεὶ 


58 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Xen, 


Ν 3 / ᾽ ͵7 Ν ς fal / ¢ ξ ω 2 
δὲ εἰρήνη ἐγένετο, πείσας τὴν αὑτοῦ πολιν ὡς οἱ Θρᾷκες ἀδι- 
A i tied Ν 7 ι i) = Ν rn 
κοῦσι τοὺς ἔλληνας καὶ διαπραξάμενος ὡς ἐδυνατο Tapa τῶν 
> / 3o/ « ,ὔ > ¢ \ xX / Ν 
εφόρων ἐξεπλει ὡς πολεμήσων τοις UTEP Χερρονήσου καὶ 

ἂν / > \ Ν / ς ὦν yf 
Περίνθου Θρᾳξίν. ἃ. ἐπεὶ de μεταγνόντες πὼς οὐ Edopor ἤδη 
“ “ 2 er) / SN 3 rn 3 ἢ A 
εἕω ὄντος αὐτοῦ ἀποστρέφειν αὑτὸν ἐπειρῶντο εξ Ισθμοῦ, 
3 a >? / / 3 > 5d / ᾿] e / 
ἐνταῦθα οὐκέτι πείθεται. αλλ @MYETO πλεῶων εἰς Ελλησπον- 
> 4 Sy ate , ¢ Ν a > A 7 
τον. 4. εκ τούτου καὶ ἐθανατωθη ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν τῇ Σπάρτῃ 
A c > Ss yy Ν Ν ΝῊ y+ 48 a 
τελῶν ws ἀπειθῶν. ἤδη δε φυγὰς ὧν ἔρχεται προς Κύρον, 
an 1 / Ἃ / + an Μ / , 
καὶ ὁποίοις μὲν λόγοις ἔπεισε Κῦρον addy γεγραπται, δίδωσι 
Ν 3 a va) / / ¢ Ἂς Ν ? FSS 
de αὑτῷ Κύρος μυρίους δαρεικούς" 5. ὁ δὲ λαβὼν οὐκ ἐπὶ 
€ / ᾽ ͵, > ἤν Η5) wes ΄ A , ͵ 
ῥᾳθυμίαν ετρώπετο, αλλ, ἀπὸ τούτων τῶν χρηματῶων συλλε- 
΄ ? / val / Ν / Roh Ἂς 
Eas στράτευμα ἐπολέμει τοῖς Θρᾳξί, καὶ μάχη τε ἐνίκησε καὶ 
4 ἃς ᾽᾽ We ἂν \ 49 4 Ν rn / 
πο τούτου δὴ ἔφερε καὶ ἦγε τούτους καὶ 7 oe διεγένετο 
μέχρι πο ΠῚ τοῦ στρατεύματος" τότε δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὡς 
σὺν ἐκείνῳ αὖ πολεμήσων. 6. ταῦτα οὖν φιλοπολέμου Het 
δοκεῖ ἀνδρὸς ἔργα εἶναι, ὅστις ἐξὸν μὲν εἰρήνην ἔχειν ἄνευ 
> ΄ Ν / € - - 5..Ν Ἀ ε -“ 
αἰσχύνης καὶ βλάβης αἱρεῖται πολεμεῖν, εξὸν δὲ ῥᾳθυμεῖν 
, ns “ cr oN \ , “ ο 
βούλεται πονεῖν ὧστε πολεμεῖν, ἐξὸν δὲ χρήματα ἔχειν ἀκιν- 
/ ς Li rn 7 ἴω ἴω > “ XN c/ 
δύνως ALPELTAL πολεμῶν μείονα ταῦτα ποιεῖν" ἐκεῖνος δὲ WO- 
ΕῚ Ν τι BA Ν ξ Ν + lal 3 
TEP εἰς παιδικὰ ἢ εἰς ἄλλην τινὰ ἤδονην ἤθελε δαπανᾶν εἰς 
/ / \ / 5 N \ 3 
πόλεμον. οὕτω μεν φιλοπόλεμος ἦν' . πολεμικὸς δε αὖ 
͵ 5.0. ἡ 53 ¢ ῃ , 5 Menthe N 
ταύτῃ ἐδόκει εἶναι OTL φιλοκίνδυνος τε ἣν καὶ ἡμέρας καὶ 
Ν + νυν ἃ δ᾿ / Sis a A ͵ 
νυκτὸς ἄγων ἐπὶ TOUS πολεμίους καὶ ἐν τοῖς δεινοῖς φρόνιμος, 
« ς 7 A , c 7 Ni es 
ὡς OL παρόντες πανταχοῦ TuVTES ὡμολόγουν. 8. καὶ ἀρχι- 
Ἂ πὲ. ‘ 9S ς Ν 3 a / / @ 
Kos ὃ ελέγετο εἶναι ws δυνατὸν ἐκ τοῦ τοιούτου τρόπου οἷον 
3 nr 53 « Ν Ν 4 c/ A Ver: / 
κακείνος εἶχεν. LKAVOS MEV Yap ὡς τίς καὶ ἄλλος φροντίζειν 


n 


S e/ + ς \ 2 \- 9 7 Ν ’, 
ἣν OTWS ἔχοι ἢ στρατιὰ αὐτῷ τὰ επιτηδεια καὶ παρασκευα- 
a ¢ Ἂς Ἃ oS) A “ A e 
ζειν ταῦτα. ἱκανὸς δὲ καὶ ELTOLNTAL τοις παρουσιν WS πει- 
/ yy ᾽ A 3... / > lal Ν 

στεον ELN Κλεάρχῳ. 9. τοῦτο ὃ εποίει EK τοῦ χαλεπος 
3 ᾿ Ν Ν ς A Ἂς 9 \ a a “ 3 . 

εἰναι" καὶ γὰρ opay στυγνος ἣν καὶ TH φωνῃ Tpayus, ἐκολα- 


/ εν, a Le avis. ἢ ¢ \ > a / 
be TE GEL LONUPWS, καὶ Οργῇ ἐνίοτε, WS KAL AUTM μεταμελειν 









EE ΝΝΘΘΝΝΝΒΕΒΒΞΒΛΑΙΘΝΝΝΝΝΝΝΝ ΝΝΙΝΝΝηιι πε ιυ τιν, 


“Awan. 2, νι] Character of the betrayed Generals. 59 


x AD? Φ΄ \ , ον ΔΝ, ᾽ ΄ Ν ’ 
ἔσθ᾽ ὅτε. καὶ γνωμῃ δ᾽ ἐκόλαζεν" ἀκολάστου yap στρατεύ- 
Iar ¢ r + 3 > \ ‘ / 
ματος οὐδὲν ἡγείτο ὀφελος εἶναι, 10. adda καὶ λέγειν av- 
Ν ΕΝ « ,ὔ Ν 7ὔ κα > < 
τὸν ἔφασαν ws δεοι τὸν oTpatiwTnv φοβεῖσθαι μᾶλλον Tov 

BA ΕΥ \ / > / xX Ν , 
ἄρχοντα ἢ τους πολεμίους, εἰ wEhrOL ἢ φυλακας φυλάξειν 
, Fite OF We) , 57) Ν \ 

ἢ φίλων ἀφεξεσθαι ἢ ἀπροφασίστως ἰέναι πρὸς τοὺς πολε- 
/ 3 = 3 a ὃ r Ae ? ae , 
pious. Ab. ἐν μὲν οὖν τοῖς ὁεινοίς ἤθελον AUTOU ἀκούειν 

, \ 2 Υ̓ « a ¢ “ Ν Ν ἈΝ 
σφοδρα καὶ οὐκ adXov ῃροῦντο οἱ στρατιῶται" καὶ γὰρ τὸ 
ἈΝ 7 Ν 2 mS r , Μ / 
oTUYyVOV τότε φαιδρον αὑτοῦ ἐν τοῖς προσώποις ἐφασαν φαί- 
‘ XN Ν 3 / Ν ‘ / In ἡ 
νεσθαι καὶ TO χαλεπὸν ἐρρωμένον πρὸς TOUS πολεμίους εδο- 
> « 7 a 4 Ν > / “ 
KEL εἶναι, WOTE σωτηρίον, OVKETL χάλεπον εφαίνετο: 12. ὃτε 
a oe A A / 5 5 / Ν Μ > / 
δ᾽ ἔξω Tov δεινοῦ yevowvto Kat ἐξείη πρὸς ἄλλον ἀρχομένους 
? / \ PE ? / Ν Ν 2 / ? 3 
ATLEVAL, TONAOL AUTOV ἀπελείπον" TO γὰρ επίχαρι οὐκ εἶχεν, 
> 5d ll Ν 5 ὉΠ Ὰ / cd / Ν 3. Ἢ c 
αλλ, AEL χάλεπος HV καὶ MMOS* ὠστε διέκειντο πρὸς αὑτὸν οἱ, 
Led «“ r Ν , X Ν ΕῚ 
στρατιῶται ὥσπερ παῖδες πρὸς διδάσκαλον. 18. καὶ γὰρ οὖν 
/ Χ Ν 2 / e / Ia/ 3 “ Von 
φιλίᾳ μεν Kal εὐνοίᾳ ETTOMEVOUS οὐδέποτε εἶχεν" οἰτινες δὲ ἢ 
SUN Ὁ / a Mere TOO DELO A adr τὰν Ta! « 
ὑπὸ πόλεως TETAYMEVOL ἢ ὑπὸ TOU δεισθαι ἢ AAAD τινι ἀναγ Κῇ 
/ / ? a / / > cal 
κατεχόμενοι παρείησαν αὐτῷ, σφοδρα πειθομενοις ἐχρῆτο. 
14 2 A δὲ Μ A Ν > A ‘ x / “4s ΟὟ 
«ἐπεὶ δε ἡρξαντονικᾶν συν αὑτῷ TOUS πολεμίους, NON μεγαλα 
> ce ͵ an 3 \ ‘ ἈΝ ΄ 
ἣν TA χρησίμους ποιουντα εἰναι TOUS συν αὐτῷ στρατιωτας" 
/ \ Ν Ν / / Μ A Ν Ν 
τὸ τε γὰρ πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους θαρραλεως ἐχειν παρῆν Kat τὸ 
Ν ae / / “A ? Ν ? ,ὔ > , 
τὴν Tap εκείνου τιμωρίαν φοβεισθαι avTOUS EUTUKTOUS ἐποίει. 
an Ν \N Ὁ 3 ΕΣ ae a ee > , 
15. τοιοῦτος μὲν δὴ ἄρχων ἣν" ἄρχεσθαι δε ὑπὸ ἄλλων οὐ μα- 
In?’ Ἄν 7 > ‘oa ἊΣ / 3 εὖ \ 7 ¥ 
λαεθελειν ἐλέγετο. ἣν δε δὁτεετελεύτα αμφὶ τὰ πεντήκοντα ETN. 
( , ae , SAN \ , x > 
416. Πρόξενος δε ὁ Βοιωτιος evOus μὲν μειράκιον wv επε- 
ΕΝ , HAN \ / , ε , \ \ 
θύμει γενεσθαι ἀνὴρ τὰ μεγώλα πρώττειν ἱκανὸς" Kat διὰ 
ταύτ ἣν ἐπιθυμίαν ἔδωκε Γοργίᾳ ἀργύριον τῷ Λεοντίνῳ 
αὐτὴν την ἐπιθυμιαν εδὺὼώκε ἱ οργίᾳ ἀργύρι f OF 
> Ν »! / > / « Ν / Μ 53 Ν 
1%. ἐπεὶ δὲ συνεγένετο ἐκείνῳ, LKAVOS νομίσας ἤδη εἶναι καὶ 
oA Ν Λ \ + , Ν e A 7 A 
ἄρχειν καὶ φίλος ὧν τοῖς πρώτοις wn ἡττᾶσθαι εὐεργετῶν, 
3 ’ / Ν Ἀ / ΄, ΦΥῊΝ / 
ἦλθεν eis ταύτας Tas σὺν Κύρῳ πράξεις" καὶ weto κτήσεσθαι 
3 ΄ yy / Ν ,ὔ / \ ’ 
EX τούτων ὄνομα μέγα καὶ δίναμιν μεγάλην καὶ χρηματα πολ- 


, 7 a ” > \ a 
λώ: 18. τοσούτων δ᾽ ἐπιθυμῶν σφόδρα ἐνδηλον av καὶ τοῦ- 


00 Retreat of the Ten Thousand. [Χεν. 


7 / Jar ΝΥ ,ὔ al Ἂς 3 / ᾽ 
το εἶχεν ὅτι τούτων οὐδεν ἂν θελοι κτᾶσθαι μετὰ αδικίας, ἀλ- 
Ἂς Χ al ve \ “- yy al / , ΕΣ 
AG σὺν τῷ δικαίῳ καὶ καλῷ φετο δεῖν τουτων τυγχάνειν, ἄνευ 
x / / + Ν - Ν > A ΄ς 5 
δὲ τούτων μή. 19. ἄρχειν δὲ καλῶν μεν καγαθῶν δυνατὸς ἣν 
>? 7 τ ’ a r , ¢ a“ Μ / ε 
οὐ μέντοι OUT αἰδῶ τοῖς στρατιωταῖς εαυτοῦ οὔτε φοβον LKa- 
aren tS a > N ear 7 A , \ 7 
νος ἐμποιῆσαι. ἀλλα καὶ ῃσχύνετο μαλλὸν TOUS στρατιωτας 
\ 3 ? r Ν / a > Ν 
ἢ οἱ ἀρχόμενοι ἐκεῖνον" καὶ φοβούμενος μᾶλλον ἣν φανερὸς 
/ cr / ΝΥ . a XN 5 
τὸ ἀπεχθάνεσθαι τοῖς στρατιωταῖς ἢ οἱ στρατιῶται τὸ ἀπι- 
΄σ 3 4 Ν ? cr Ν Ν 2 Ν 5 Ν 
στειν ἐκείνῳ. 20. weTO δε ἀρκεῖν πρὸς TO ἀρχικὸν εἶναι καὶ 
lal %\ Ἀ fal rn > cal Ν Ν 53 n Ἂς 
δοκεῖν τὸν μὲν καλῶς ποιοῦντα επαινεῖν, τὸν δε ἀδικοῦντα μὴ 
3 al a 2 n ¢ Ν ff >] Ν a 
ἐπαινεῖν. τοιγαροῦν αὐτῷ οἱ μὲν καλοί TE καγαθοι τῶν συν- 
/ 9 5 € Ἂς + 3 / « > ͵ὕ 
ὄντων εὖνοι ἦσαν, οἱ δὲ ἄδικοι ἐπεβούλευον ὡς ευὐμεταχειρί- 
Μ “ N >? / 53 2A iC / 
στῳ OVTL. OTE δε ἀπέθνησκεν ἣν ἐτῶν WS τριάκοντα. 
/ XN Ν A 3 3 n ἧς; 

21. ίενων δὲ ὁ Θετταλὸς δῆλος ἣν ἐπιθυμῶν μεν πλου- 
Ae a 3 a Nig Ὁ “ ΠΕΣ / 
τεῖν ἰσχυρῶς, ἐπιθυμῶν δὲ ἄρχειν, ὅπως πλείω λαμβάνοι, 
3 a Ν lo “ / / 4 3 / 
ἐπιθυμῶν δὲ τιμᾶσθαι, ἵνα πλείω κερδαίνοι" φίλος τε ERov- 

5 a / Q / σ“ > a Ν / 
λετο εἶναι τοῖς μέγιστον δυναμένοις, wa ἀδικῶν μὴ διδοίη 
/ eee ΓΌΩΝ / - 3 / 
δίκην. 22. ἐπὶ δὲ τὸ κατεργάζεσθαι ὧν ἐπιθυμοίη συντομω- 
͵ὔ + ran 3 Ν (oe ot. - ς / Ν 
τάτην WETO ὁδὸν εἶναι διὰ τοῦ ἐπιορκεῖν τε καὶ ψεύδεσθαι καὶ 
? A \ 7 A V3 \ Ν Sars as / > 
ἐξαπατᾶν" τὸ δ᾽ ἁπλοῦν καὶ ἀληθὲς TO αὐτὸ τῷ ἠλιθίῳ εἶναι. 
7 \ Ν Ν 5 ΕΝ / Χ / / 
23. στέργων δὲ φανερὸς μὲν ἣν ovdeva, ὅτῳ δὲ φαίη φίλος 
53 / x δ χ Ie tf ? B ἃ; ΄ Ν ὌΝ ἘΠ 
εἶναι, τούτῳ ἔνδηλος ἐγίγνετο ἐπιβουλεύων. καὶ πολεμίου 
\ 2 Ν / a \ / 3 «ς 
μὲν οὐδενὸς κατεγέλα, τῶν δὲ συνόντων πάντων ὡς κατα- 
ἴω a oN / \ rn \ al / 4 
γέλων ἀεὶ διελέγετο. . 94. καὶ τοὺς μεν των πολεμίων κτης- 
P > , Ἂς Ν ἡ 3 x a 
μασιν οὐκ ἐπεβούλευε' χαλεπὸν yap @ETO εἶναι τὰ τῶν 
/ / Ν Ν “ Λ / yf 2 
φυλαττομένων λαμβάνειν" τὰ δὲ τῶν φίλων μόνος ῳετο εἰ- 
ὔ cn “Δ ? / / pay 3 \ 
δέναι ρᾷστον ὃν αφύλακτα λαμβανειν. 25. καὶ ὅσους μὲν 
> / 2 7 Ny IE A ¢ 5 € / 3 
αἰσθάνοιτο ἐπιόρκους καὶ ἀδίκους ὡς εὖ ὠὡπλιίσμενοῦυς εφο- 
cr r ee / Ν 3 7 2 a ς 3 / 
Beito, τοῖς δ᾽ ὁσίοις καὶ ἀλήθειαν ἀσκοῦσιν ws avavdpois 
> A A / , Seid ἈΠ} ἘΝ 
ἐπειρᾶτο χρῆσθαι. 26. ὥσπερ δὲ τις ἀγάλλεται emt θεο- 
/ \ > / Ν 7 7 / , 
σεβείᾳ και ἀληθείᾳ καὶ δικαιότητι, οὕτω Μένων ἠγάλλετο 
a 3 A / A / Qa Δ /. 
τῷ εξαπατᾶν δύνασθαι, τῷ πλάσασθαι ψευδῆ, τῷ φίλους 





HEL. 2, πῇ Fall and Restoration of Athens. 61 


A ~ A Ν A “ > / ν 
διαγελᾶν- τὸν δὲ μὴ πανοῦργον τῶν ἀπαιδεύτων ἀεὶ ἐνόμι- 
> Ν ’ Ἂν \ 2 3 / / ὁ 7 
ev εἶναι. καὶ Tap ols μέν κὐ abe πρωτεύειν φιλίᾳ, δια- 
/ x ΄ » c / Ν 
βάλλων Tovs πρωτοὺυς τουτοὺς WETO δεῖν κτήσασθαι. 2%. τὸ 
\ , \ , / δ nr 
δὲ πειθομένους TOUS στρατιώτας παρέχεσθαι ἐκ τοῦ συναδι- 
rn > r > οενᾶλ J A a \ Ν / / 
κεῖν αὑτοῖς ἐμηχανᾶτο. τιμᾶσθαι δὲ καὶ θεραπεύεσθαι ἠξίου 
> / / r / Ν 2 ͵ “δ ) a 
ἐπιδεικνύμενος ὅτι πλεῖστα δυναυτο καὶ ἐθέλοι ἂν αδικεῖν. 
> 7 \ 7 e , > A aa. “ 
εὐεργεσίαν δὲ κατέλεγεν, ὁπότε τις αὐτοῦ αφίσταιτο, OTe 
/ > “ 3 > / 9 / Ν Ν \ as 
χρώμενος αὐτῷ οὐκ ἀπώλεσεν αὐτὸν. 328. Kal τὰ μεν δὴ 
? ax . > a / ‘var, ἢ ” In? 
ἀφανῆ ἔξεστι περὶ αὐτου ψεύδεσθαι, ἃ δὲ παντες ἰσᾶσι TAO 
2 7 ee! / \ y ¢e fa xX αν 
ἐστί. παρὰ ᾿Αριστίππῳ μεν ETS WpaLos ὧν στρατήγειν διε- 
/ a / ? 7 Ν ,ὔ y “ s 
πράξατο τῶν ξένων, Apia δὲ βαρβάρῳ οντι, OTL μειρακίοις 
no : / Y cam ma Rt” ad 2 iN \ 
καλοῖς ἥδετο, οἰκειότατος ETL WPALOS ὧν ἐγένετο, AUTOS δὲ παύ- 
a 7 a δ XN a " ? , 
Sica εἶχε Θαρύπαν ἀγένειος ὧν γενείωντα. 29. ἀποθνησκοὸν- 
\ a / cd b / cial Aye) / Ν 
των δὲ τῶν συστρατήγων OTL ἐστρατεύυσαν ETL βασίλεα συν 
7 3 Ν Ν > > / x \ Ν A Μ 
Κύρῳ, Tavta πεποιήκως οὐκ ἀπέθανε. μετὰ δὲ τὸν των ἄλλων 
/ a ἣν cs / ? / > 
θάνατον στρατηγῶν τιμωρηθεὶς ὑπὸ βασίιλεως ἀπέθανεν, οὐχ 
“ Υ, ͵ Ν δ, τ ἘΝ ͵ \ 
ὥσπερ ἰζλεαρχος Kat ob αλλοι TTPATHYOL ἀποτμήηθεντες TAS 
ise / Zz / nr 49 3 Ας cr 3 
κεφαλὰς, ὅσπερ τάχιστος θάνατος δοκεῖ εἶναι, ἀλλα ζῶν αἰκι- 
ὡς > ἂς ς ‘ / a A r 
σθεὶς ἐνιαυτὸν ὡς πονηρὸς λέγεται της τελευτῆς TUNEL. 
2 / Ay Ee Ν Ν ΕΟ Ν Ν / 
80. ᾿Αγίας δὲ ὁ ἄρκας και Σωκράτης ὁ ἄχαιος Kat TOVTO 
> / , Neg Pe ἦς / 5 πῚ 
ἀπεθανέτην. τούτων δὲ οὐθ᾽ ὡς ἐν πολεμῳῷ κακῶν οὐδεὶς KATE- 
7 ΝΣ... > Ν Ὁ + \ ὦ ᾽ Ν 
γέλα οὔτ᾽ εἰς φιλίαν αὐτοὺς ἐμέμφετο. ἤστην de audw αμφι 
Ν / ‘ / yy Be val 
τὰ πέντε καὶ τριάκοντα ETN ATO γενεᾶς. 





Il. FALL AND RESTORATION OF ATHENS. 
{Hellenica, 11.] 


> \ Co Sener] 4 A / 
II. 2. Ἔν δὲ ταῖς ᾿Αθήναις, τῆς Παράλου ἀφικομένης 
Ὃς ϑιι. ἢ ¢ Ν Mi 6 2 5 a κ 
νυκτὸς, ἐλέγετο ἡ ξυμφορα, καὶ ἡ οἰμωγὴ εκ TOU Πειραιῶς 
Ν fal a a 3 A a ¢ 
διὰ TOV μακρῶν τειχὼν ες ἄστυ διῆκεν, 6 ἕτερος τῷ ἑτέρῳ 


EXX Ὁ ed ait | / A Ν 5 Ν Ἵ a) 7 
παραγγε @V* WOT EKELVNS TNS VUKTOS QUOELS EKOLL1NO7), ου 


Υ - . 
62 Full and Restoration of Athens. [Xen 
, 3 7 A ? \ Ν a Μ δ 
μονον τους ἀπολωλότας πενθοῦντες, ἀλλὰ πολυ μαλλον ETL 
2 Re ane \ / / τ 3 / ι / ; 
αὐτοὶ ἑαυτοὺς, πείσεσθαι νομίζοντες οἷα ἐποίησαν Μηλίους 
2 τ » ’ / 
te Δακεδαιμονίων ἀποίκους ovTas, κρατήσαντες πολιορκίᾳ, 
Ve / Ν / Ν / Ν 3 / 
καὶ ᾿Ϊστιαιέας, καὶ Xxiwvaious, καὶ Topwvatous, καὶ Avyiw7- 
͵ \ eh) ne ΄, a w ¢ 
Tas, καὶ ἄλλους πολλοὺς τῶν ᾿Ελλήηνων. 4. τῇ ὃ ὕστε- 
δ 9 / 2 / πεν RE, ΄ ’ Ξ 
pata ἐκκλησίαν ἐποίησαν, εν ἢ εδοξε τοὺς τε λιμένας ἀπο- 
an Ν CX Ν A / 2 / ‘ ΄ 
χῶσαι πλὴν ἑνὸς, καὶ τὰ τείχη εὐτρεπίζειν, καὶ φύλακας 
5 / Ν + / c 2 7, , 
εφισταναι, καὶ TANNA TUVTA ὡς ἐς TOALOPKLAY παρασκευα- 
\ , \ : Χ ἈΝ ~ “- 
Sew τὴν πολιν. Καὶ οὗτοι μεν περὶ ταῦτα ἦσαν. 
͵ as wil, € t Ν 
5. Δύσανδρος 5 ἐκ τοῦ Ελλησποντου ναυσὶ διακο- 
/ >] >| / 7 7 Μ. 
σίαις ἀφικόμενος εἰς έσβον, κατεσκευάσατο Tas τε ἄλλας 
" 5) en N 7 Ο x N ai iS, 7 
πόλεις ἐν αὐτῇ, καὶ Μιτυλήνην" εἰς δὲ τὰ ἐπὶ Θρᾳκης 
ie way 7 , ox ἢ ἢ ἃ ἘΠ ΑΞ 
χωρία ἔπεμψε δέκα τριήρεις ἔχοντα Ετεονικον, ὃς τὰ ἐκεῖ 
7 Ν 7 ΄ »>n* \ Ν 
πάντα πρὸς Δακεδαιμονίους μετέστησεν. Φ. evOus δε καὶ 
CS, € Ν 2 , 3 / \ Ν Ι 
7) ἀλλη Ελλας ἀφειστήκει ᾿Αθηναίων μετὰ τὴν ναυμαχίαν, 
ὅν: / Φ Ν Ν a / A 
πλὴν Σαμίων. οὗτοι δε, σφαγὰς τῶν γνωρίμων ποιή- 
= x t ͵΄ Ν N A 
σαντες, κατεῖχον τὴν πολιν. 7% Δύσανδρος δε μετα ταῦτα 
y+ Ν > / 3 = Λ Ἂν ? / 
ἔπεμψε πρὸς Ayiv τε εἰς Δεκέλειαν καὶ εἰς Aaxedaimova, 
(v4 - Ν / / , x 
ὅτε προσπλεῖ σὺν διακοσίαις ναυσί.  Aaxedatmovor δὲ 
tai ἢ Ν COM / ‘ 
ἐξηεσαν πανδημεὶ, Kat ot αλλοι Πελοποννήσιοι, πλὴν ’Ap- 
/ Λ -“ « / / / 
γείων, παραγγείλαντος τοῦ ἑτέρου Λακεδαιμονίων βασίλεως, 
͵ 5) N SO Treg ‘ / 3 Ν 
σανίου. . ἐπεὶ δε ἅπαντες ἠθροιίσ α ων 
ITavoaviov. 8 ὃ Ἰθροίσθησαν., ἀναλα 
3 \ Ν Ἂς i, 3 / 2 “3 / 
GUTOUS, πρὸς τὴν πόλιν ἐστρατοπέδευσεν ἐν TH Δ καδημίᾳ, 
" / / 4 x ᾽ / 
τῷ καλουμένῳ γυμνασίῳ. 9. Avaavdpos δε, adixopevos 
Ν y Dey N , 5) , ἡ 297 
πρὸς Arywav, ἀπέδωκε THY πολιν Αιγινήταις, ὅσους εδύ- 
/ 3 / > a ¢€ > + Ἂς , 
vaTo πλείστους ἀθροίσας αὐτῶν" ὡς ὃ αὕτως καὶ Μηλίοις, 
Ν = 5 “ἢ A ς vad 3 7 Ν Ἂ A 
Kat τοῖς ἄλλοις ὅσοι τῆς αὑτῶν ἐστέροντο. μετα δε τοῦτο 
΄ an ε 7 Ν Ν a N 
δηωσας Σαλαμῖνα, ὡρμίσατο πρὸς τὸν Πειραιᾷ ναυσὶ πεν- 
᾽7 Ν € Ν Ν x r 3 A + 
τήκοντα καὶ ExaToV, καὶ τὰ πλοία εἶργε TOU εἰσπλου. 
S099 a ΄ vat N 
10. Οἱ δ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, πολιορκούμενοι κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ 


fi > / / Ν ἊΝ 5 lal + 
θάλατταν, ἡπόρουν τί χρὴ ποιεῖν, οὔτε νεῶν οὔτε συμμά- 





κι. 2, 1.1]  Consternation in the Cily. 63 





| ey αὐτοῖς ὄντων, οὔτε σίτου" ἐνόμεξον δ᾽ οὐδεμίαν εἶναι 
σωτηρίαν τοῦ μὴ παθεῖν ἃ οὐ τιμωρούμενοι ἐποίησαν. ἀλλὰ 
᾿ διὰ τὴν σῶν. ‘18 ag ἀνθρώπους μικροπολίέτας, οὐδ ἐπὶ 
μιᾷ αἰτίᾳ ἑτέρᾳ ἢ ὅτι ἐκείνοις συνεμάχουν. Mi. διὰ 
A ‘ 3 ἣν 2 7 / > , Ν 
ταῦτα TOUS ἀτίμους ἐπιτίμους ποιήσαντες, ἐκαρτέρουν" καὶ 
> / “ a ΄ A 5 , 
ἀποθνησκόντων ἐν TH πόλει λιμῷ πολλῶν, οὐ διελέγοντο 
Ν A ,] Ν Ν a Μ ΄ » ΕῚ 7 
περὶ διαλλαγῆς. Επεὶ δὲ παντελῶς ἤδη ὁσῖτος ἐπελελοί- 
x ΄ Σ᾽ 9 / ΄ 
πεῖ, ἔπεμψαν πρέσβεις παρα Ay, βουλόμενοι ξύμμαχοι 
Ss / + Ν / Ν Ν ~ 
εἶναι Λακεδαιμονίοις, ἔχοντες Ta τείχη καὶ Tov ITeipaca, 
,; ἈΠ ΗΒ. “¢ , r ς . Ν 2 Ν > 
καὶ ἐπὶ τούτοις ξυνθήκας ποιεῖσθαι. B22. ὁ dE αὑτοὺς ες 
Υ a 3. 4 2 εἶ 3 ΄ δι. αὶ 
Aaxedaipova ἐκέλευεν ἰέναι" ov yap εἶναι κύριος αυτος. 
> ‘ > > 7 «ς / A r ? / 
ἐπεὶ ὃ απηγγείλαν οἱ πρέσβεις ταῦτα τοῖς AOnvaioss, 
ΕἾ >? Ν 3 ,ὔ ¢ > ᾽ \ #4 > 
ἔπεμψαν αὑτοὺς ἐς Aaxedaiwova. 13. οἱ δ΄, ἐπεὶ ἦσαν εν 
/ / A A a Ta ΄ > A ¢ 
Σελλασίᾳ, πλησίον τῆς Λακωνικῆς, καὶ ἐπύθοντο αὐτῶν οἱ 
ΝΜ \ wy. ΕΣ @7 Ν Ν 53 > / 
Εφοροι ἃ ἔλεγον, ὄντα οἷα περ καὶ πρὸς ‘Ayw, αὐτόθεν 
2 Ἁ 3 ΓΥ͂. 3 ΄,ὕ Ψ Μ / 7 / ͵ 
αὑτους ἐκέλευον ἀπιέναι, KAL, εἰ TL δέονται εἰρήνης, κάλλιον 
/ / « \ , 2 ἂς. 
ἥκειν βουλευσαμένους. 14. Οἱ δὲ πρέσβεις ἐπεὶ ἧκον 
x ον Ὁ A ? ‘ / ? | ate ἈΦ; 
οἰκαδε, καὶ ἀπηγγείλαν ταῦτα ἐς τὴν πόλιν, ἀθυμία ἐνέπεσε 
rt : » \ 3 ὃ ὃ θ , 6 Ν .“ “Δ / 
πᾶσιν" wovTo yap ανδραποδισθησεσθαι, καὶ, ἕως ἂν πέμ- 
e / "s Ν - a ᾽ a 
πωσιν ETEpovs πρέσβεις, πολλους τῷ λιμῳ ἀπολεῖσθαι. 
Ἂς Ν “ “ A / > Ν 3 , 
BS. περὶ de τῶν τειχῶν τῆς καθαιρέσεως οὐδεὶς ἐβούλετο 
te + 7 Ν " Ν ᾽ = A 
ξυμβουλέύειν: Ἀρχέστρατος γὰρ, εἰπὼν ev τῇ βουλῇ 
/ / Ὁ > , a lal 
“ακεδαιμονίοις κράτιστον εἶναι eb οἷς προεκαλοῦντο 
2 / rn 4 / r ‘ r “- 
εἰρήνην ποιεῖσθαι, ἐδέθη" (προεκαλοῦντο δὲ τῶν μακρῶν 
lal Phe | / Λ ΄“ e / 2 ͵ Ν 
τειχῶν ἐπὶ δέκα σταδίους καθελεῖν ἑκάτερον ") ἐγένετο δὲ 
, δ ὦ a Ά, ΄ ΄ 
ψήφισμα μη ἐξειναι περὶ τούτων ξυμβουλεύειν. 
΄ x se / 3 ? > / 
Τοιούτων δὲ ὄντων, Θηραμένης εἶπεν ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ, 
“ > / > 7 \ ΄ Sas 
ὅτι, εἰ βούλονται αὐτὸν πέμψαι παρὰ Avaavdpov, εἰδως 
7 / / 2 / Ν Λ 
ἥξει Λακεδαιμονίους πότερον εἐξανδραποδίσασθαι τὴν πόλιν 
͵7 > 7 Ν a A Ἃ 7 “ 
βουλόμενοι ἀντέχουσι περὶ τῶν τειχῶν, ἢ πίστεως ἕνεκα. 
Ν Ν / Ν 7 al A 5 
πεμφθεὶς δὲ διέτριβε παρὰ Λυσάνδρῳ τρεῖς μῆνας και 


64 Fall and Restoration of Athens. | [Xen | 





! 3 A , > a x \ at τς + 
πλείω, ἐπιτηρῶν ὁπότε ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐμέλλον, διὰ TO eTLAE 
Ν a 7 7] / e , ὐ 
λοιπέναι τὸν σῖτον ἅπαντα, OTL τις Aeyou ομολογὴσειν, — 
—_— vd 
> Ν Ν Ὁ A“ / Ν »] ’ὔ =) ΡῚ - 
‘AY. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἧκε τῷ τετάρτῳ μηνὶ, ἀπηγγείλεν EV ἐκκλη- > 
7 9% / / Ν / 4S ͵΄ d 4 
σίᾳ ὅτι αὐτὸν Λύσανδρος τεως μεν κατέχοι, ELTA κελεύοι EG 
͵ 37 2 N 3 ΄ Ὁ 5) A εὐ 
Λακεδαίμονα ἰέναι" ov yap εἶναι κύριος ὧν ἐρωτῷτο UT 
2 aA > Ν \ "Ee ‘ Ν a ς Ὅ f 
αὑτοῦ, adda τους Edopouvs. peta ταῦτα ῃρεθὴ πρεσ- 
Ν > / ? 7 / eee 
βευτὴς ἐς Μακεδαίμονα αὐτοκράτωρ δέκατος autos. 
/ Ν lal 2] / yf > A 
ES. Λύσανδρος δὲ τοῖς Edopois ἔπεμψεν ἀγγελοῦντα 
> + / 2 Λ ΄ > re 
μετ᾽ ἄλλων “ακεδαιμονίων Ἀριστοτέλην, φυγαδα APnvaiov 
" > , / Shey ᾿ δὶ 
ὄντα, ὅτε ἀποκρίναντο Θηραμένει ἐκείνους κυρίους εἶναι 
“ s / 3 Ν Ν " γ΄. 
εἰρήνης καὶ πολεμουι 49. Θηραμενῆης δὲ καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι 
/ ? ἊΝ 3 3 7 Ὕ 7, δ ὦν , 
πρέσβεις, ἐπεί ἦσαν ἐν Σελλασίᾳ, EPWTWMEVOL ἐπι τίνι 
/ / 9 / 2 , \ Vie 
λόγῳ ἥκοιεν, εἶπον OTL αὐτοκράτορες περὶ ELPHVNS. μετα 
mn eo” a suet 2 δ δὲν" δ ? 
ταῦτα ot Εφοροι καλεῖν ἐκέλευον. ἐπεὶ ὃ ἧκον, εἐκκλη- 
/ 3 7 2 ο 3 / / Ν - , 
σίαν ἐποίησαν, ἐν ἢ ἀντέλεγον Κορινθιοι καὶ Θηβαῖοι pu- 
Ν \ NTE a e , ‘ / 
λιστα, πολλοὶ δε καὶ ἄλλοι TOV ᾿Ελληνων, μη σπενδεσθαι 
? / 2 3 A , \ 2 Ἄν 
Αθηναίοις, arr ἐξαιρεῖν. 20. “ακεδαιμονιοι δὲ οὐκ εφα- 

7 ᾽ ἮΝ ; 2 \ ΟῚ : 
σαν πόλιν ᾿Ελληνίδα ἀνδραποδιεῖν, peya ἀγαθὸν eipya- 
/ 3 r / / ,ὔ a ¢ ; 
σμένην ἐν τοῖς μεγίστοις κινδύνοις γενομένοις TH Ελλαδι" 
> a3 a 4 / >»? Ξε £ ἃς / Ν \ 
αλλ ἐποιοῦντο εἰρήνην. EP ᾧ TA TE μάκρα τείχη καὶ TOV 

- / Ν Ν A ἧς ’ / 
Πειραιᾶ καθελόντας. καὶ τὰς ναῦς πλὴν δωδεκα παραδον- 
5 . 
< \ , 1 Ny ΤᾺ > Ν \ Λ 
Tas, καὶ Tous φυγάδας καθέντας, τὸν αὑτὸν eyOpov καὶ φίλον 
ἣ / y Ἢ Ν a \ N 
νομίζοντας, Aaxedarpoviors ἕπεσθαι καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ 
Λ ἣν ΝΥ ς al Ϊ / ~ Ν e 
θάλατταν, ὅποι ἂν ἡγῶνται. 218. Θηραμένης δὲ καὶ οἱ 
XN ? A 7 5 , A 3 Ν 2 iy 
συν αὑτῷ πρέσβεις ἐπανεῴφεροντο ταῦτα es tas Αθηνας. 
? ’ 9 ctx ν a \ ei 
εἰσιόντας 5 αὐτοὺς ὄχλος περιεχεῖτο πολὺς, φοβούμενοι 
Ν yY 7 3 Ν Μ ’ 7 ’ A \ Ν 
μὴ ἄπρακτοι ἥκοιεν" οὐ γὰρ ETL ἐνέχωρει μενεῖ διὰ τὸ 
ral a 3 ’ “- a A Ἂς Ὁ 
πλῆθος τῶν «ἀπολλυμένων τῷ λιμῷ. 22. Τῇ δὲ ὑστεραΐᾳ 
? / ¢ , 3, 99 τ ς , ε 
ἀπήγγελλον οἱ πρεσβεις eb οἷς οἱ Aaxedatmovtoe ποιοῖντο 
XN 2 / / ΧΝ 2 ἴω / / 
τὴν εἰρήνην " Tponyoper δὲ αὐτῶν Θηραμένης, λέγων ὡς 
Ν 7 / Ν Ν ᾿ς - ad 
χρὴ πείθεσθαι Λακεδαιμονίοις καὶ τὰ τείχη περιαιρεῖν. 





' HELL. 2, 111.} | The T. harty Tyrants. 65 


, : > a A Ν 
ἀντειπόντων δέ τίνων αὐτῷ, πολλῷ δε πλειόνων Evve- 
32 N ‘ Ν 
παινεσάντων, ἔδοξε δέχεσθαι τὴν εἰρήνην. 38. Μετὰ δε 
a 7 / / > Ν A Ν Π 
ταῦτα ΔΛύσανδρός τε κατέπλει ἐς τὸν Πειραιᾶ, καὶ οὐ 
/ \ Ν or ἢ 
φυγάδες κατῇεσαν, καὶ τὰ τείχη κατέσκαπτον ὑπ αὐλητρί- 
a Sf, Ν ΄ - 
δων πολλῇ προθυμίᾳ, νομίζοντες ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν τῇ 
A > 
«Ελλάδι ἄρχειν τῆς ἐλευθερίας. 
ρ ἢ ρ 
A > ae / yy > Ὁ Ν e Ν 
III. Τῷ δ᾽ ἐπίοντι ετει ----εν ᾧ ἣν ᾿Ολυμπιὰς, ἣ τὸ στά- 
3. ἢ If Ν 7 ᾽ ΄ 
διον ἐνίκα Κροκίνας Θετταλος, Εὐδίου ἐν Σπάρτῃ epopev- 
΄ >] τ “ 
οντος, Πυθοδώρου δ᾽ ἐν ᾿Αθήναις ἄρχοντος, ὃν ᾿Αθηναῖοι, 
“ 2 > / ot ἢ 2 > ΄ > > ? / 
oTe ἐν ολιγαρχίῳ ηρέθη, οὐκ ονομαζουσιν, add ἀναρχίαν 
> A μν © e 
TOV EVLAVTOV καλουσιν" ἐγένετο δὲ αὕτη ἡ ὀλιγαρχία woe — 
; Μ a , / ἃ Ν 
2, ἔδοξε τῷ δήμῳ τριάκοντα ἄνδρας ἑλέσθαι, ob TOUS πα- 
/ / f- 7 aA 7 Ν 
τρίους νόμους ξυγγράψουσι, καθ᾽ ovs πολιτεύσουσι" καὶ 
ε - , 
ἡἠρέθησαν οὗτοι, Ilokvapyxns, Κριτίας, Μηλόβιος, Ἱππό- 
2 / ς / 
λοχος, Εὐκλείδης, [έρων, Μνησίλοχος, Χρέμων, Θηρα- 
/ > ft A Λ 3 
μένης, ᾿Αρεσίας, Διοκλῆς, Φαιδρίας, Χαιρεέλεως, Αναίτιος, 
A 3 / “- > a 
Πείσων, Σοφοκλῆς, Ἐρατοσθένης, Χαρικλῆς, Ονομακλῆς, 
/ >) / / 
Θέογνις, Δισχινης, Ocoyevns, Κλεομήδης, ᾿Ερασίστρατος, 
, / 2 / > 4 / 
Φείδων, Δρακοντίδης, Εὐμάθης, Αριστοτελης, Ἵππομαχος, 
’ i Ν 
Μνησιθείδης. 8. Τούτων δὴ πραχθέντων. ἀπέπλει Λύσαν- 
7 > 3. ὃ a / > Ν Ν 
Spos πρὸς Σάμον" Ayis δ᾽ ἐκ τῆς Δεκέλείας ἀπαγαγὼν τὸ 
Ν /. Ν , 
πεζὸν στράτευμα, διέλυσε KATA πολεις ἑκάστους. . . + - 
e x / e / ἈΝ 3 Ν jf Χ 
(i. Οἱ Se τριακοντὰ ἠρέθησαν μὲν ἐπεὶ τάχιστα τὰ 
ἀκρὼ τείνη καὶ τὰ περὶ τὸν Πειραιᾷ καθ ἔθη " αἱρεθέν- 
— x" ρ ᾿ saat mp ἢ ΘΑΡΕΥ͂ΘΕ 
x a , 
τες δὲ ἐφ ᾧτε ξυγγραψαι vopous, καθ᾽ οὕστινας πολιτευ- 
. 7 ἴω 3 " 7 ὃς > 
σοιντὸ, τούτους μὲν ἀεὶ ἔμελλον ξυγγράφειν TE καὶ ἀπο- 
" Ν f Ν / ε 
δεικνύναι, βουλὴν δὲ καὶ τὰς ἄλλας ἀρχᾶς κατεστησαν, ὡς 
3. ) 2 re ΕΣ rn x ἃ 7 + 
ἐδόκει αὑτοῖς. U2. Επειτα πρῶτον μεν, OUS σαντες ῃδε- 
Bb] - / RAS 7] a Ν δι 
σαν ἐν τῇ δημοκρατίᾳ ἀπὸ συκοφαντίας ζῶντας, καὶ τοις 
ἃ. > a ral 7 , Cita 
καλοῖς καὶ ἀγαθοῖς βαρεις ὄντας, συλλαμβανοντες UTNYOV 
, 3 r / [4 
θανάτου" καὶ ἥ τε βουλὴ ἡδέως αὐτῶν κατεψηφίζετο, οἱ TE 


66 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xen. 


ΨΜ , 7 e r Ν oy A Jar 
ἄλλοι, ὅσον ξυνήδεσαν εαὐυτοῖς μὴ OVTES τοιοῦτοι, οὐδεν. 


4 ae ye 2 : 
ἤχθοντο. 18. Ere. δὲ ἤρξαντο βουλεύεσθαι ὅπως ἂν 


3 , 2 ΄ A / A ce / ᾽ 4 
ἐξείη αὐτοῖς τῇ πόλει χρῆσθαι ὅπως βούλοιντο, εκ τούτου 


ΡῚ . / > / > / AG 
πρῶτον μεν, πέμψαντες ἐς “ακεδαίμονα Δισχίνην TE Kal 


᾽ Λ Μ ΄ Ν / 
Ἀριστοτέλην, ἔπεισαν Λύσανδρον φρουροὺς σφίσι Evp- 
“ 5 - / A a x >| Ν 7ὕ 
πρᾶξαι ἐλθεῖν, ἕως δὴ, τοὺς πονηροὺς ἐκποδὼν ποιησώμε- 
, . / / Ν > \ ¢ 
νοι, καταστήσαιντο τὴν πολιτείαν " θρέψειν δὲ avTOL ὑπι- 
“ ἣν Ν ee XN Ν / 
σχνοῦντο. ὁ δὲ πεισθεὶς, τούς τε Ppovpous Kat Καλλίβιον 
ε Ν / 2 “-“ nm 
ἁρμοστὴν ξυνέπραξεν αὑτοῖς πεμφθῆναι. 
ς ae Ν Ν \ Υ. \ Ν / 
84. Οἱ δ᾽ ἐπεὶ τὴν φρουρὰν ἔλαβον, τὸν μεν Καλλίβιον 
2 / ‘ / ¢ 7 2 / ‘\ / 
ἐθεράπευον πάσῃ θεραπείᾳ, ὡς πάντα επαινοίη ἃ πρατ- 
“ \ a / / 3 r \ 
τοιεν" τῶν δὲ φρουρῶν τούτου ξυμπέμποντος αὑτοῖς ovs 
> ΄ 7 35 . ΄ ν 
ἐβούλοντο, ξυνελάμβανον οὔκετε τοὺς Tovnpovs TE Kab 
Sf 5.2.7 3 35. ¥ ‘\ 5. / Ν 
ὀλίγου ἀξίους, ἀλλ᾽ ἤδη οὺς ενομιζον ἥκιστω μὲν παρω- 
7] ae > / / >] A 
θουμένους ἀνέχεσθαι, ἀντιπράττειν δὲ TL ἐπιχειροῦντας 
7 "oN \ ΛΑ 7 A x 
πλείστους ἂν τοὺς ξυνεθέλοντας λαμβάνειν. 15. To μεν 
5 7 / ἰς f κ i ε , 
οὖν πρώτῳ χρόνῳ ὁ Κριτίας τῷ Θηραμένει ομογνώμων τε 
\ /. 5 ἢ Notes IRN \ Χο ee eS 
καὶ φίλος ἦν - ἐπεὶ δε αὐτὸς MEV προπετὴς ἣν ETL TO TOA- 
\ 2 7 « Ν Ν ΣΟ; aA 7 e τ 
λοὺς ἀποκτείνειν, ἅτε καὶ φυγὼν ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου, ὁ δὲ Θηρα- 
/ ’ 1 , / 3 TaN ov A M7 
μένης ἀντέκοπτε, λέγων OTL οὐκ ELKOS ELN θανατοῦν, EL τις 
3 “ ue os a , ὮΝ Ν x \ 2 Ν 
ἐτιμᾶτο ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου, τοὺς δὲ καλοὺς καὶ ἀγαθοὺς μηδεν 
Ν 3 / 2 Ν Ἂν > XN Μ Ν Χ \ \ 
κακὸν εἰργάζετο " Eve: καὶ eyo, edn, Kat συ πολλὰ δὴ 
A ἌΡ᾿, f A Λ Ν yy s 3 / 
TOU ἀρέσκειν ἕνεκα TH πόλει καὶ εἴπομεν καὶ εἐπραξαμεν. 
¢ Ἃ, Μ ‘\ ’ , 3 A a , 3 : 
16. Ὃ δὲ (ἔτι yap οἰκείως ἐχρῆτο τῷ Θηραμενει) avte- 
e/ > 2 / - -“ / ‘ 
λεγεν, OTL οὐκ EYXWpOLN τοῖς πλεονεκτεῖν βουλομένοις, μὴ 
5 9 Ν r Ν ς , ΄ ’ 
οὐκ ἐκποδὼν ποιεῖσθαι τοὺς ἱκανωτατους διακωλύειν " He 
Ν᾿ Σὰ , Feed Ride ΡΟΣ hee " ᾿ 
δε, OTL τριώκοντά ἐσμεν καὶ οὐχ εἷς, ἧττον TL οἴει, ὡσ- 
/ ΄ A > aA A *] ἴω 
περ τυραννίδος, ταύτης τῆς ἀρχῆς χρῆναι επιμελείσθαι, 
rey 9 
εὐήθης ev. 
a 3 Ἂ Ν > / a 5ὼ 7 
17. Ere δε, ἀποθνησκόντων πολλῶν καὶ ἀδίκως, 


sr SA A > ΄ 7 \ 
πολλοὶ δῆλοι ἦσαν ξυνιστώμενοί τε καὶ θαυμάζοντες τί 


« 





: Hevt.2,01) Last of Three Thousand. 67 





΄ / 7ὔ 51. e / 7 ᾽ 
ἔσοιτο ἡ πολιτεία, πάλιν ἔλεγεν ὁ Θηραμένης, ὅτι, εἰ, μὴ 
Ν ¢ \ Z “ ΄ In Z 
TIS KOLVMVOUS ἱκανοὺς λήψοιτο των πραγμωτων, ἀδύνατον 
yy Xx ] } ΄ ’ 4 , 
ἔσοιτο THY ὀλιγαρχίαν διαμένειν. US. εκ τούτου μέντοι 
7 Ν ΕΥ̓ / + ΄ Ν ? 
Κριτίας καὶ οἱ aAXAOL τριάκοντα, 70 φοβούμενοι, Kal οὐχ 
oa Ν ΄ Ν / Ν . ψΦ." ξ - 
ἥκιστα Tov Θηραμένην, μὴ συρρυείησαν πρὸς αὑτὸν οἱ πολῖί- 
/ 7 ‘ / Ν “ 
ται, καταλέγουσι τρισχιλίους τοὺς μεθέξοντας δὴ τῶν 
7 ε ᾽ 3 Ν Ν a 
πραγμάτων. 19. ὁ δ᾽ av Θηραμένης καὶ πρὸς ταῦτα 
ΜΝ. f yy / ς - 5 Ν A . 
ἔλεγεν, ὅτε ἄτοπον δοκοίη ἑαυτῷ εἶναι, TO πρῶτον μὲν 
/ \ / “- an \ 
βουλομένους Tous βελτίστους τῶν πολιτῶν KOLVWVOUS ποιής- 
, «“ Ν > Ν A + « 
σασθαι τρισχιλίους, ὥσπερ τὸν ἀριθμὸν τοῦτον ἔχοντά 
> , \ Ν > bY i) Ν os of ψ 
τινα ἀνάγκην καλοὺς καὶ ἀγαθοὺς εἶναι, καὶ οὔτ᾽ ἔξω τούτων 
/ ἊΝ 5. 3 Ν ΄ Ν @ 7 "ἡ ΄ 
σπουδαίους, OUT ἐντὸς τούτων πονηροὺς οἷον τε ELN γενέ- 
wv > Μ te a YY ΄ ς lal Ν > / 
σθαι - ᾿Επειτα 6 , en, ὁρῶ ἔγωγε δύο ὑμᾶς τὰ ἐναντιώτατα 
΄, / x 2 Ν Ν / rn > / 
πρώττοντᾶς, βιαίαν τε τὴν ἀρχὴν καὶ ἥττονα τῶν ἀρχομέ- 
, Ze, ¢ . a > “ΚΑ ξ 
νων κατασκευαζομένους. | 20. O μεν ταῦτ ἔλεγεν. οἱ δ᾽ 
2 ΄ / val hi: / 2 A > Σ,ς al a 
ἐξέτασιν ποιήσαντες τῶν μεν τρισχιλίων EV TH ἀγορᾷ, τῶν 
‘ Μ A , Μ > al y+ 4 
δὲ ἔξω Tov καταλογου ἄλλων ὠλλαχου, ἔπειτα κελεύσαντες 
aN \ ὧ τ ἐπε ? r ’ / , 5» 
επί τὰ ὅπλα EV ῳ EKELVOL απεληλύθεσαν. πέμψαντες τους 
\ Ν a fa) ‘ ¢ , ς a Ν 
φρουρους καὶ τῶν πολιτῶν TOUS ὁμογνώμονας αὑτοῖς, τὰ 
ce , Ν al , / Ν >? 
ὅπλα πάντων, πλὴν TOV τρισχιλίων, TAPELNOVTO* Kal ἀνα- 
J ~~ 3 ‘ ᾽ , 7, ’ a A 
κομίσαντες ταῦτα ες THY ἀκρόπολιν, ξυνέθηκαν εν τῷ ναῷ. 
4 x / ε 2 ΩΝ By al 2 rn 
24. Τούτων δὲ γενομένων, ὡς ἐξὸν ἤδη ποιεῖν αὑτοῖς 
[72 f. Ν Ἂς Μ cd > / 
ὅτι βούλοιντο, πολλοὺς μεν ἔχθρας ἕνεκα aTrEKTELVOV, TOA- 
\ \ , 4 ΟῚ ? a “ 54 Ν rn 
hous δὲ χρημάτων. εδοξε δ᾽ αὑτοῖς, ὅπως ἔχοιεν καὶ τοῖς 
an , , Ν a / “ «“ 
φρουροῖς χρήματα διδόναι, καὶ τῶν μετοίκων ἕνα ἕκαστον 
a rn Ν 2 Χ ‘ > “ Ν ‘ , > A 
λαβεῖν Kat αὑτοὺς μὲν ἀποκτεῖναι, Ta δὲ χρηματα αὑτῶν 
2 ͵ὕ / : Ν Ν Ν / 
ἀποσημήνασθαι. 22. “Exerevov δὲ καὶ τὸν Θηραμένην 
aA 4 7 4,9 , ? ? - 
λαβεῖν ὅντινα βούλοιτο. ὁ ὃ ἀπεκρίνατο" ᾿Αλλ, οὐ δοκεῖ 
Μ ἣν 3 / , > 2 ΄ 
μου, εφη., καλον εἰναι. φάσκοντας βελτίστους εἴναι, αἀδικω- 
rn an rn 3 r ω Ν > e 
“Tepa τῶν συκοφαντῶν Trove. εκείνοι μὲν yap, Tap ὧν 
3 f , , A y rd a Ἂς > - 
χρήματα λαμβάνοιεν, ζῆν εἴων " ἡμεῖς δὲ αποκτενοῦμεν 


; 


κ᾿ 


68 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xen 
μηδὲν ἀδικοῦντας, iva χρήματα λαμβάνωμεν ; “τῶς οὐ 
ταῦτα τῷ παντὶ ἐκείνων ἀδικώτερα ; 38. Οἱ δ᾽, ἐμποδὼν 


/ 51 ας 3 “ a “ ΄ ? 
νομίζοντες αὐτὸν εἶναι τῷ ποιεῖν OTL βούλοιντο, ἐπιβου- 
΄ > εκ STC Ν Ν er + \ 
λεύουσιν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἰδίᾳ πρὸς τους βουλευτὰς ἄλλος πρὸς 
7 / « / Ν / x 
ἄλλον διέβαλλον, ὡς λυμαινόμενον THY πολιτείαν. καὶ 

Λ Ν f \ 2 / > lal ΄ 
παραγγείλαντες νεανίσκοις, Ob ἐδόκουν αὑτοῖς θρασύτατοι 
> / Cas Λ Y / ‘ 
εἶναι, ξιφίδια ὑπὸ μάλης ἔχοντας παραγενέσθαι, ξυνελεξαν 
eto. 7 3 Ν Ν ς ,ὔ A 9 Ν ε 
την βουλην. 34. ἐπει δὲ ὁ Θηραμενὴης πάρην, αναστὰς O 

/ 2, e 
Κριτίας ἔλεξεν ὧδε: 
53 x Ν τι / Pao / ’ 
"2 ἄνδρες βουλευταί, εἰ μὲν τις ὑμῶν νομίζει TAEOVAS 
a a ? / ) / if ed “ 
τοῦ καιροῦ ἀποθνήσκειν, ἐννοησάτω ὅτι, ὅπου πολιτεῖαι 


fal a / / 
μεθίστανται, πανταχοῦ ταῦτα γίγνεται" πλείστους δ᾽ 


acai 


? Zz / 53 ΄ 2 τ / a Z 
avayKn πολεμίους εἰναι τοὺς ES ολιγαρχίαν μεθιστᾶσι, cua 





x / a ¢€ / » /. 3 
τε τὸ πολυανθρωποτάτην τῶν Ελληνίδων τὴν πόλιν εἶναι, 
Ν Ν Ν A ͵ > 3 / \ A , 
καὶ διὰ TO πλείστον χρόνον ἐν ελευθερίᾳ τὸν δῆμον τεθρά- 
¢ ol Ἂν , XN a ¢/ ca . 
φθαι. 25. ἡμεῖς δε, γνόντες μὲν τοῖς οἱοις ἡμῖν TE καὶ 
ἘΜΗ͂Σ, Ν ᾽ 3 / ῃ ἀν τον 
υμιν χαλεήτν πολιτείαν εἰναι δημοκρατίαν, γνοντες δὲ ὅτι 
7 a / ¢ a e 4 a ᾿ +S 
“Δακεδαιμονίοις τοῖς περίισωσασιν ἡμᾶς ὁ μὲν δῆμος οὕποτ᾽ 
\ Λ / CNS / IO oN \ a 
ἂν φίλος γένοιτο, οἱ δὲ βελτιστοι ἀεὶ ἂν πιστοὶ διατέλοϊεν, 
διὰ ταῦ ὺν τῇ Λακεδαιμονίων ) IVOE τὴ λ 
a ταῦτα σὺν τῇ Λακεδαιμονίων γνωμῃ τὴνδε τὴν πολι- 
/ / i ac RA 2 7 2 7 
τείαν καθίσταμεν. 26. καὶ eav τινα αἰσθανωμεθα ἐναντίον 
a 5 / cd Υ͂ 3 Ἂς ΄ Ν 
τῇ ολιγαρχίᾳ, ὅσον δυνώμεθα ἐκποδὼν ποιούμεθα" πολὺ 
Ν Λ CoA “ 7 3 y , r a 
ὃε μώλιστα ἡμῖν δοκεῖ δίκαιον εἶναι, εἰ TLS ἡμῶν αὐτῶν 
/ ἧς a ΄ / 2 ΤΩΝ , 
λυμαίνεται ταύτῃ τῇ καταστάσει, δίκην αὐτὸν διδόναι. 
a 5 ? , / ee ΄ 
27. Nov οὖν αἰσθανόμεθα Θηραμένην τουτονὶ, οἷς δύναται, 
> / ¢ ω Ν ς A ς Ν A 3 A s\ 
ἀπολλύντα ἡμᾶς TE καὶ ὑμᾶς. ὡς δὲ ταῦτα ἀληθῆ. ἢν 
a Cume yy / sas A / 
KATAVONTE, εὑρήσετε οὔτε ψέγοντα οὐδένα μᾶλλον Onpape- 
i. Ν / x 3 ΄ “ 
VOUS τουτου τὰ παρόντα, οὗτε ἐναντιούμενον, ὅταν τινὰ 
| Ν / / a a - ᾿ 
ἐκποδὼν βουλώμεθα ποιήσασθαι τῶν δημαγωγῶν. εἰ μεν 
/ ς 3 A n " / / XN Φ 2 
τοίνυν ἐξ ἀρχῆς ταῦτα ἐγίγνωσκε, πολέμιος μὲν ἣν, οὐ 
/ , ieee / > , A Ν 
KEvTOL πονηῆρος y ἂν δικαίως ἐνομίζετο" 2B. νῦν de,— 








Hew.2,u1} Critias attacks Theramenes. 69 


Ss a ὃ yy n x \ , 
a@uTos μεν ἄρξας τῆς προς Δατεδαιμονιους πίστεως καὶ 
A 3 5% ‘ A A , _/ , ὰ 
φιλίας, AUTOS δὲ τῆς τοῦ δήμου καταλύσεως, μάλιστα δὲ 
᾿ ᾿ [ “ “ ,ὔ, 8 7 κι ¢ al / 
ἐξορμήσας ἡμᾶς τοῖς πρώτοις ὑπαγομένους εἰς Ἰμᾶς δίκην 
2 / “-“ ) N Ν - “- Γ - aA 5 
ἐπιτιθέναι, --- νῦν, ἐπεὶ καὶ ὑμεῖς καὶ ἡμεῖς PavEepws ἐχθροὶ 
a f ΄, ae ΑΒ, 2 a Ἂν / ’ / 
τῷ δημῷ γεγενήμεθα, οὐκέτ᾽ αὐτῷ τὰ γιγνόμενα ἀρέσκει, 
Ἁ “ιν Ν 3 > lal > a A ΄ - ἐν ͵ 
ὕπως αὐτὸς μὲν αὖ ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ καταστῇῃ, ἡμεις δὲ δίκην 
a a / “ ᾽ / id ΩΣ 
δῶμεν τῶν πεπραγμένων. 329. ὥστε οὐ μόνον ὡς ἐχθρῷ 
a , > * \ oe / Bal ta Cie ΣᾺ 
αὐτῷ προσήκει, ἀλλα. καὶ ὡς προδότῃ ὑμῶν τε και ἡμῶν, 
/ Ν , 7 ΄ Ν , 
διδόναι τὴν δίκην. KaLTOL τοσουτῷ μὲν δεινότερον προδο- 
/ / “ / Ν ? . 
σία πολέμου, ὁσῳ χαλεπωτέερον φυλάξασθαι τὸ ἀφανες 
A a ΄ »ν ce / 5» ΓΝ 
τοῦ φανεροῦ" τοσουτῷ δ᾽ ἔχθιον, ὅσῳ πολέμιοι μεν ἄνθρω- 
. / 5 N N } A 5 lk 
ποι καὶ σπένδονται αὖθις, καὶ πιστοῦ γιγνονται" OV ὃ ἂν 
/ , ed By A 2 / , 
προδιδόντα λαμβάνωσι, τουτῷ οὔτε ἐσπείσατο πώποτε 
2 Ν ἀρίναι 5. ai aA A ¢/ x “χὰ 
οὐδεὶς, οὔτ᾽ ἐπίστευσε τοῦ λούίπουι 980. Iva δὲ εἰδῆτε 
cd 2 Ἂν fal - al P| Ν Ἂ , 3 Ν 
OTL οὐ KALVA ταῦτα OUTOS “ποίει, αλλα φύσει προδοτης εστιν, 
) / e a \ / / e \ ? 
ἀναμνήσω ὑμᾶς τὰ τούτῳ πεπραγμένα. οὗτος γάρ, εξ 
3 ry ‘ f ς ἣν A / Ν Ἂ / 
ἀρχῆς μὲν τιμώμενος ὑπὸ TOV δήμου κατὰ τὸν πατέρα 
ψ i 3 / Ν 7] 
ἄγνωνα, προπετέστατος ἐγένετο THY δημοκρατίαν μετα- 
a > Ν / Ν 2 ᾿ 2 > , 
στῆσαι εἰς TOUS τετρακοσίους, καὶ ἐπρώτευεν ἐν ἐκείνοις. 
3 Ν 3... H 2 / / a =| / 7 
ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἤσθετο ἀντίπαλον τι τῇ ὀλιγαρχίᾳ ξυνιστάμενον, 
nr Ss ¢ ia a ie 2 / 7 / 7 
πρῶτος αὖ ἡγεμὼν τῷ δήμῳ ἐπ᾿ ἐκείνους ἐγένετο. Bi. ὅθεν 
’ὔ Ν / 3 - % ‘ ς / x 
δήπου καὶ κόθορνος ἐπικαλειται. καὶ γὰρ ὁ κόθορνος ap- 
, N a ἈΝ 2 , am 13 ͵ πὰ Oe 
μόττειν μὲν τοῖς ποσὶν ἀμφοτεροις δοκεῖ, ἀποβλέπει ὃ ἐπ 
2 , a Ν 5 , ΕἾ Ν y A 2 
ἀμφότερον. δεῖ δε, ὦ Θηράμενες, ἄνδρα tov ἀξιον ζῆν ov 
, ἈΝ ᾿; 3 ? 7, \ , ‘\ 
προάγειν μεν δεινὸν εἶναι εἰς πρώγματα τοὺς EvvovTas, ἣν 
ra 3 ͵7ὔ > Ν Λ 2 7 cd ᾽ Ν 
δέ τι ἀντικόπτῃ, εὐθὺς μεταβάλλεσθαι" αλλ ὥσπερ ἐν VIL 
rn 7 Ν " 5 n 5 Ν ἈΝ a 
διαπονεῖσθαι, ἕως ἂν εἰς οὐρον καταστωσιν" EL δὲ μη, πῶς 
Ἃ “ἂν ὦ , + a b) 7 ’, > 7 >A’ 
ἂν ἀφίκοιντο ποτε ἔνθα δεῖ, εἰ; ἐπειδάν τι ἀντικόψη, εὐθὺς 
‘ > ἂ / ~ 3 Ν Ν / lal 
ἐς TavavTla TEOLEV ; )82. Καὶ εἰσὶ μὲν δήπου πᾶσαι μετα- 
Ἂς rn a 7 ᾿ Ἀ χ Ν 7 7 
Borat πολιτειῶν θανατηφοροι" συ δὲ, διὰ τὸ εὐμετάβολος 


4 / a / 3 ’ 3 / ¢ Ν ΄ 
εἶναι, πλείστοις μὲν μεταίύτιος εἰ εξ ολιγαρχίας νπὸ τοῦ 





70 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xen ξ 





΄ > / / 3 ἡ ὃ / CaN a 
δήμου ἀπολωλέναι, πλείστοις ὃ EK δημοκρατίας ὑπὸ τῶν 
/ e / | baad δ᾿ ‘ 2 / es 
βελτιόνων. Ovtos δὲ τοι ἐστιν, OS, ταχθεὶς ἀνελέσθαι ὑπὸ 
an a QA ΄ 7 / 7 a X\ 
τῶν στρατηγῶν τοὺς καταδύντας Αθηναίων ev τῇ περὶ 
7 Sa Ε 3 / “ cad 3 
Δέσβον ναυμαχίᾳ, αὐτὸς οὐκ ἀνελόμενος, ὅμως τῶν στρατη- 
: an a ? / 2 ‘ “ δ κ / 
γῶν κατηγορῶν ἀπέκτεινεν auTous, ἵνα αὑτὸς περισωθείη. 
/ Ν / > a Ν la) Ξ. 
88. ὅστις γε μην φανερὸς ἐστι του μεν πλεονεκτεῖν AEL 
3 ΄ a Ν a ἃς a ἐς Ν > 
ἐπιμελούμενος, TOD δὲ καλοῦ καὶ τῶν φίλων μηδεν ἐντρε- 
n 4 va / a 3 >? 
TOMEVOS, πῶς τούτου χρή ποτε φείσασθαι ; πῶς ὃ ov 
/ ) / 2 An Ν Ν © ‘ Ν ¢e an 
φυλάξασθαι, εἰδότας αὐτοῦ τὰς μεταβολὰς, ὡς μὴ καὶ ἡμᾶς 
7S a A ¢ a 9S a e Ἄ Ν 
ταὐτὸ δυνασθῇ ποιῆσαι; ἡμεῖς οὖν τοῦτον ὑπάγομεν Kat 
« >] ΄ Ἂς ς , e A \ ς “ 
ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοντα, καὶ ὡς προδιδοντα ἡμᾶς τε καὶ ὑμᾶς. 
; ς 2 ᾽ / A Ἃ γον ἃ #4 7 
184. ‘Os δ᾽ εἰκότα ποιοῦμεν, καὶ TAS ἐννοήσατε. καλλίστη 
= \ / ca / 9 e 3 ΡῚ 
μὲν γὰρ δήπου δοκεῖ πολιτεία εἶναι ἡ “Δακεδαιμονίων " εἰ 
δ᾽ ἐν ἐκείνη ἐ ἠσειέ τις τῶν ᾿Εφόρων, ἀντὶ τοῦ τοῖς 
WN ἐπιχειρήσειε τις pov, 

/ / / Ν 3 ῆς Ν 3 A 
πλείοσι πείθεσθαι, ψέγειν τε THY ἀρχὴν Kat ἐναντιοῦσθαι 
“ ΄ 2 ΝΥ ” Mee Ne ’ 2 rn n 
τοῖς πραττομένοις, οὐκ ἂν οἰεσθε αὑτὸν καὶ UT αὑτῶν τῶν 

IW / \ Weir s A Μ « ’, / A / 
Edopwv καὶ ὑπὸ τῆς adANS ἁπάσης πόλεως τῆς μεγίστης 
/ 5 A ἌΡ lal 9) aN an 7 ἐς 
τιμωρίας ἀξιωθῆναι ; καὶ ὑμεῖς οὖν, CAV σωφρονῆτε, οὐ του- 
Ε 2 ς a 3 a / « - Ν x 
Tov ἀλλ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν φείσεσθε: ws οὗτος, σωθεὶς μεν, 
Ν \ δ “ , a 3 ! / 
πολλοὺς av μέγα φρονειν ποιήσειε τῶν EVAVTLA γυγνωσκον- 
Cue > / Χ / ἊΝ a 3 a , Ν 
των ὑμῖν" ἀπολόμενος δε, πάντων καὶ τῶν EV τῇ πόλει καὶ 
ἜΝ" ¢ , Δ i 3 ἢ 
τῶν ἔξω ὑποτέμοι ἂν τὰς ελπίδας. 
- « Ν a 2 Pp) XN 3 / / Ν 5 
85. ‘O μὲν ταῦτ᾽ εἰπὼν ἐκαθέζετο: Θηραμένης δὲ ava- 
ΡΣ ? \ a \ , ἄχ, Sy \ 
στὰς ἔλεξεν: ᾿Αλλὰ πρῶτον μὲν μνησθήσομαι, ὦ avdpes, Ὁ 
΄ οὐ ok | a 9 Ν ΄ Ν \ 
τελευταῖον KAT ἐμοῦ εἶπε. NTL Yup με TOUS OTPATNYOUS 
᾿ oe Ξ SiN \ > Ξ 5 / 
ἀποκτεῖναι κατηγοροῦντα. εγὼ δε οὐκ ἦρχον KAT εκείνων 
, ? ae Tey 7 ͵ ΠΣ ΝΣ a 
λόγου, αλλ eExewvor ehacav, προσταχθὲν μοι vp εαυτῶν, 
> 3 / Χ A 5) a Ν / 
οὐκ ἀνελέσθαι τους δυστυχοῦντας εν TH περὶ AeoBov vav- 
/ ? Ν Ἂ 7 ΄ὔ ς Ν Ν a : Ia 
μαχίᾳψ. ἐγὼ ὃς ἀπολογούμενος, ws διὰ τὸν χειμῶνα οὐδε 
a Ν Ὡ 2 “ \ + > 5S + 
πλεῖν, μὴ ὅτι ἀναιρεῖσθαι τοὺς ἄνδρας, δυνατὸν Hv, edoka 


- , " 7 7 5) a Ν ς rn ral >? / 
Τῇ πόλει εἰκότα λέγειν, EKELVOL δὲ ἑαυτῶν κατήγορειν εφαι- 








Hett. 2, 11] Defenee of Theranenes. Τί 


μ ‘ A gt > a ‘ Μ 
νοντο" φιισκοντες yep OvOV TE E1VaL COWOAL τους ἄνδρας, 
7 > Ν , 7 5 / v > 
προέμενοι αὐτοὺς uTrohea Oa, ἀποπλεοντες WYOVTO. BG. οὐ 
/ / \ = , , “ ‘ 
μέντοι θαυμάζω ye το Κριτίαν παρανενομηκέναι" ὅτε yap 
» 3 > \ S07, ἢ x? > Θ Ψ, ‘ 
ταῦτα ἦν, OV παρων ετύγχανεν, ὦ ἐν Θετταλίᾳ μετὰ 
/ / “ὦ Ν \ / 
Προμηθέως δημοκρατίαν κατεσκεύαζε, καὶ τοὺς πένέστας 
“ τὰς \ , z \ > : 
ὥπλιζεν ἐπὶ τοὺς δεσπότας. 3%. ὧν μεν οὖν οὗτος 
, Ae ὟΝ 2 (ὃ ΄ 4 ͵ ‘ 
ἐκεῖ ἔπραττε, μηδὲν ἐνθάδε γένοιτο" Tude γε μέντοι ὁμο- 
a 2 Ν ΄ ἡ ς A Ν A 2 A / 
λογῶ ἐγὼ τούτῳ, εἰ τις ὑμᾶς μὲν τῆς ἀρχῆς βούλεται 
a ἈΝ ? 2 ,ὔ ς a γι \ a 7 
παῦσαι, τους δ᾽ ἐπιβουλεύοντας υμῖν ἰσχυρους ποιεῖν, δί- 
δὰ ~ / 7 %& / / “ἢ 
καιον εἶναι τῆς μεγίστης αὑτὸν τιμωρίας τυγχάνειν. ὅστις 
A ¢ al 4 2 Ν 3 \ e “A / 
μέντοι ὁ ταῦτα πράττων ἐστίν, οἶμαι ἂν ὑμᾶς καλλιστα 
/ T , \ \ lal / ad 
κρίνειν, τά TE πεπραγμένα καὶ ἃ νῦν πράττει ἕκαστος 
¢ al 3 / 2 al / Ν na ¢ A 
ἡμῶν εἰ KaTavonceTE. B8. Ουκοῦν μέχρι μεν TOU ὑμᾶς TE 
Ἔ Σ Ν 7 Ν 5 Ν 5) A \ 
καταστῆναι ἐς τὴν βουλείαν, Kat ἀρχὰς ἀποδειχθῆναι, καὶ 
\ e 7 , ς , 7 7 
TOUS ὁμολογουμένως συκοφαντας ὑπάγεσθαι, πάντες ταυτὰ 
2 ’ 2 Ἂ ΄ e A Μ 7 
ἐγιγνώσκομεν" ἐπεὶ δὲ γε οὗτοι ἤρξαντο ἄνδρας καλούς 
> \ 7 2 , eo" , ) 
τε κάγαθους ξυλλαμβάνειν, εκ τούτου καγὼ ἠρξάμην τα- 
͵ ΄ 7 " \ d > , 
ναντία τούτοις γιγνώσκειν. 89. ῃδειν yap OTL, ἀποθνη- 
Ἂς / A / 2 Ν Ν yy 
σκοντος μὲν Aéovtos τοῦ Σαλαμινίου. ἀνδρὸς καὶ ὄντος 
Ν n ¢ A > 3 A bd) Iar A ν΄. 
καὶ δοκοῦντος ἱκανοῦ εἶναι, αδικοῦντος ὃ οὐδὲ EV, οἱ ὅμοιοι 
7 , 4 Ν ΕῚ 7 a a 
τούτῳ φοβήσοιντο, φοβούμενοι δὲ ἐναντίοι THOSE τῇ TO- 
/ 7 3. ἢ \ Ψ , 
λιτείᾳ ἐσοίντο. εγίγνωσκον δὲ ὅτι, ξυλλαμβανομέτνου 
7 lal / \ / Ν ΘΝ , 
Νικηράτου tov Νικίου, καὶ πλουσίου καὶ οὐδὲν πώποτε 
ν Υ > τ “ a 7 c ΄ 
δημοτικὸν οὔτε αὐτοῦ οὔτε τοῦ πατρὸς πράξαντος, οἱ τούτῳ 
“ ω Con 7 ? Ν ~. Ν 
ὅμοιοι δυσμενεῖς ὑμῖν γενήσοιντο. ἍΦ. ἀλλὰ μὴν, καὶ 
3 lal Cos ς - Ψ / Aa” 2 ω / ΄ 
Ἀντιφῶντος ὑφ ὑμῶν ἀπολλυμένου. ὃς ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ δύο 
/ Se a / / / b e 
τρίηρεις εὖ TAEOVTAS παρείχετο, ἠπιστάμην OTL καὶ οἱ 
/ a t / / ¢ , Ce 
πρόθυμοι τῇ πόλει γεγενημένοι πᾶντες ὑπόπτως ὑμίν 
e/. > r Ἂς Ν 4 - / “ “ 
ἔξοιεν. ἀντεῖπον δὲ καὶ ὅτε τῶν μετοίκων ἕνα ἕκαστον 
a _¥, A 54 Ν > df / » 
λαβεῖν εφασαν χρῆναι" εὔδηλον yap Hv OTL, τούτων ἀπο- 


f ¢ / τ / a / 
λομένων, καὶ οἱ μέτοικοι ἅπαντες πολέμιοι TH πολιτείᾳ 


12. Fall and Restoration of Athens. (Xen. 


yx 3 κε N Lo , Τ᾽, a 4 
ἔσοιντο. 483. ἀντεῖπον δὲ Kal ὅτε τὰ ὅπλα TOU πληθους πα- 
A 2 / a 3 A Ν , ΄σ Ind 
ρηροῦντο, ov νομίζων χρῆναι ἀσθενῆ τὴν πόλιν ποιεῖν" οὐδὲ 
N \ / cv , «“ ΄ 
yap τοὺς Aaxedatpmoviovs ἑώρων τούτου ἕνεκα βουλομένους 
a δὰ ἐν “ δ τι δος / Ss L 
περισῶσαι ἡμᾶς, OTS, OALYOL γενόμενοι, μηδὲν δυναίμεθα 
2 \ 2 a Sime \ 3 rn > ΄ 2 ee 
autous ὠφελεῖν" εξῆν γὰρ αὑτοῖς, εἰ τούτου γ εδέοντο, 
Ν / vad ᾿] / yf / a a / 
καὶ μηδένα λιπεῖν, ολίγον ETL χρόνον τῷ λιμῷ πιέσαντας. 
2 / Ν x a / / Ion 
42. οὐδὲ. ye τὸ φρουρους μισθοῦσθαι ξυνήρεσκέ μοι, ἐξὸν 
9 a an rod v4 γι 7 ¢ / 
αὐτῶν TOV πολιτῶν τοσούτους προσλαμβάνειν, ἕως ῥαδίως 
ἡ "4 3 Λ “-“ > / / 9 ? 
οὐ ἄρχοντες ἐμέλλομεν τῶν ἀρχομένων κρατήσειν. ᾿Επεί 
x Ν εν AYR, A /. A 2 a a 
ye μὴν πολλοὺς EWpwv ἐν TH πόλει TH ἀρχῇ τῇδε δυσμε- 
an \ N 7, ΄ > > Ws 
νεῖς, πολλοὺς δὲ φυγάδας γιγνομένους, οὐκ αὖ ἐδόκει pot 
Μ aay Μ my + > 4 
οὔτε Θρασύβουλον ovte Avutov οὔτε Αλκιβιαδην φυγα- 
᾿ BY] N ef “ N 3 / 3 N 
δεύειν" ἥδειν γὰρ OTL οὕτω γε TO ἀντίπαλον ἰσχυρὸν 
Χ ᾽ A Ν / ς ,ὔ « Ν / 
ἔσοιτο, εἰ TH μεν TAI DEL ἡγεμόνες ἱκανοὶ προσγενήσοιντο, 
r Ἂς ξ a ͵ὔ a Ν tg 
τοῖς δε ἡγείσθαι βουλομένοις ξύμμαχοι πολλοὶ φανήσοιντο. 
43 ‘O a 3 θ -“ > | ral A , 2 Ν 
ἑ ταῦτα οὖν νουθετῶν εν τῷ φανερῷ, TOTEPA εὐμενὴς 
ἜΝ / x / / ? Ga Ν 3 
ἂν δικαίως, ἢ προδότης νομίζοιτο ; οὐχ οἱ ἐχθροὺς, ὦ Κρι- 
ἤ ΄ Ν ΄ Ia ¢ , 7 
τία, κωλύοντες πολλους ποιεῖσθαι. οὐδε OL ξυμμάχους πλει- 
, A oe \ / 5 Ν 
στους διδάσκοντες κτᾶσθαι, οὗτοι τοὺς πολεμίους ἰσχυροὺς 
a 2 Ν Ν A δ τ σιν ’ ) 
ποιοῦσιν - ἀλλὰ πολὺ μᾶλλον οἱ ἀδίκως TE χρήματα ἀαφαι- 
΄ Ν Ἂν Iar 2 a 2 , - " 
ρούμενοι, καὶ TOUS οὐδὲν αδικοῦντας ὠποκτείινοντες, OUTOL 
? ς \ \ Ν 3 7 a κ᾿ 
εἰσιν Ol καὶ πολλους TOUS ἐναντίους ποιοῦντες, καὶ προδι- 
ὃ , 5 , \ ΕΠ; ᾽ Ν Nee \ ? 5 
OVTES οὐ μονον TOUS φίλους, ἀλλὰ καὶ ἑαυτους. δι αιἰσχρο- 
/ 5 \ 7 Ἀ ¢/ « A / 
κέρδειαν. 44. Ei δὲ μὴ ἄλλως γνωστον OTL αληθὴ λέγω, 
Te ? 4 / iy ΄ A 
WOE ἐπισκέψασθε. πότερον οἴεσθε Θρασύβουλον, Kab 
ἡ Ν \ A / ἡδὺν πὶ / cal \ 
Avutov, Kat Tous ἄλλους φυγάδας, ἃ eyw λέγω μᾶλλον ἂν 
3 / 7 ; / \ \ Ὁ / ἂς 
vOade βούλεσθαι γίγνεσθαι, ἢ ἃ οὗτοι πράττουσιν ; ἐγὼ 
ἈΝ ἈΝ 9 : A Ν 3 x / 7 / 
μεν γὰρ οἰμαι vuy μὲν αὐτοὺς νομίζειν Evupayov πάντα 
ἈΝ 2 Ῥ)} 7 ων , Ἐς , πὶ 
μεστα εἶναι" εἰ δὲ τὸ κράτιστον τῆς πόλεως προσφιλῶς 
eon 3 Ν xX e n 3 Ἂν Ἂς ον 3 / 
Huw εἶχε, χαλεπὸν ἂν ἡγεῖσθαι εἶναι καὶ TO ἐπιβαίνειν ποι 


A ΄ a en eer raat pee daa, Φ ἍΝ 
τῆς χωρας. 45. A ὃ αὐ εἶπεν, ὡς ἐγώ εἰμι οἷος ἀεί πτοτε 














Hert. 2, 1.1 Defence of Theramenes. 73 


/. ’ὔ’ Ν a“ x ἣν ΝΜ 
μεταβάλλεσθαι, κατανοήσατε καὶ ταῦτα. τὴν μὲν γὰρ 
a / / Ν ΘΝ ΤᾺΝ, , A 
τῶν τετρακοσίων πολιτείαν καὶ AUTOS δηπου ὁ δῆμος ἐψη- 
/ / ¢ ¢ , ΄ , 
φίσατο, διδασκόμενος ὡς ol “ακεδαιμόνιοι πάσῃ πολιτείᾳ 
« 
n Δ x / ΄ ? S as 
μᾶλλον av ἢ δημοκρατίᾳ πιστεύσειαν. AG. επεὶ δὲ γε 
3 cr % Ia’ ? / € ‘ 2 Ν > / Ν 
ἐκεῖνοι μὲν οὐδὲν ἀνίεσαν, ol δὲ aude Αριστοτέλην καὶ 
7 Ἄς 9. / “ Ν > ’ 
Μελάνθιον καὶ ᾿Αρίσταρχον, στρατηγοῦντες, φανεροὶ ἐγέ- 
δ, τ a 7, » / ἢ ἘΝῚ ΑΥ̓͂ 
VOVTO ἐπὶ τῷ χώματι ἐρυμα τειχίζοντες, ες ὃ εβούλοντο 
Ν / / ¢ ? oy a Ν ΄- ς 7 ‘ 
Tous πολεμίους δεξωμενοι vp αὑτοῖς καὶ τοῖς ἑτέροις τὴν 
λ ΄ P| aA 9% 2 7 > Ν , 
πόλιν ποιήσασθαι, ---- εἰ ταῦτ᾽ αἰσθόμενος eyw διεκώλυσα, 
ee Ἣἂρ / 3 π Λ ᾽ ~ «wr 
TOUT ἔστι προδότην εἶναι τῶν φίλων ; 47. Αποκαλεῖ δὲ 
, ͵ ε ᾽ / / af / “ 
κοθορνὸον με. ὡς ἀμφοτέροις πειρώμενον ὡρμόττειν" ὅστις 
Ν / 2 / A 3 Ν val A 
de μηδετέροις ἀρέσκει, TOVTOY——@ πρὸς τῶν θεῶν “--- τί 
- / , ‘ Ν a Ν A J 
ποτε καὶ καλέσαι χρή; ov yap δὴ ἐν μεν TH δημοκρατίᾳ 
7 7 3 / 3 XN a ? 7 
πάντων μισοδημότατος ενομίζου, ἐν δὲ τῇ ἀριστοκρατίᾳ 
7 ,ὔ / ye ἃ. ἃ 
πάντων μισοχρηστότατος γεγένησαι. 48. ἐγὼ ὃ, ὦ Κρι- 
͵7 3 / x aie i a “- > / z / 
τία, ἐκείνοις μεν ἀεί ποτε πολεμῶ τοῖς οὐ πρόσθεν οἰομένοις 
eS Ἃ pr Εἰ 9 Χ Ἂς, « a Ν ς 
καλὴν ἂν δημοκρατίαν εἶναι, πρὶν καὶ οἱ δοῦλοι, καὶ οἱ 
5 2 3 7] A “Δ 3 ὃ / ’ Ν 7 A 
t ἀπορίαν δραχμῆς av ἀποδόμενοι τὴν πόλιν, δραχμῆς 
7, Ν rn Bey Go Nas , 7 ng), ete > ” 
μετέχοιεν" Kal τοῖσδε Y αὖ ἀεὶ ἐναντίος εἰμὶ, CL οὐκ OLOV= 
ν Ἃ 2 / 5 / Ν b) Ν ΠΟΥ͂Ν, 
Tat κάλην ἂν ἐγγενέσθαι ολυιγαρχίαν, πρίν εἰς TO UT 
fe 7] ral Ἂς 7] 7 Ν 7 
ολίγων τυραννεῖσθαι τὴν πόλιν καταστήσειαν. τὸ μέντοι 
\ rn 7 κ eed, Ν > 3 / 
συν τοῖς δυναμένοις, Kat μεθ ἵππων καὶ μετ ἀσπίδων 
> ra Ν ΄ \ 7 , yo ε ΄ 
ὠφελεῖν δια τούτων τὴν πολιτείαν, πρόσθεν ἄριστον ἡγού- 
3 ᾿ A ? , ? > ὃ 
μην εἶναι, καὶ νῦν ov μεταβαλλομαι. 49. εἰ ὃ EX ELS 
> n 9 K / A 3. N \ na BS cal x 
εὐπειν, ὦ Κριτία, ὅπου eyw Evy τοῖς δημοτικοῖς ἢ τυραν- 
a XN 7 >) Ν > r / 2 
νικοῖς τους καλοὺς TE καγαθοὺς ἀποστερεῖν πολιτείας ἔπε- 
/ / 38 Ν > a ΝΥ a a , 
χείρησα, λέγε" ἐὰν yup εἐλεγχθῶ ἢ νῦν ταῦτα πράττων, 
x / 7, a XN « ra Ν / 
ἢ πρότερον πώποτε ταῦτα TETTOLNKWS, ομολογῶ TA πάντων 


? 7, Ν Ἃ / > , 
éeoyatwtata παθὼν av δικαίως ἀποθνήσκειν. 
id 7 ᾽ Ν “- 2 7 Ν ¢ ἈΝ , 
50. ‘Qs δ᾽ εἰπὼν ταῦτα ἐπαύσατο, καὶ ἡ βουλὴ δηλὴη 


3 f > a 2 7 Ν ξ Ὑ , « > 
ἐγένετο εὐμενῶς ἐπιθορυβήσασα, γνοὺς ὁ Apitias ὅτι; εὖ 


74 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [ Xen. 


2 / a a 7 Ν > An > if 
ἐπίτρέψει τῇ βουλῇ διαψηφίζεσθαι περὶ αὐτοῦ. ἀναφευξουτο, 
Ν a 2 Ν ¢ / χθὰ ν 5 
καὶ τοῦτο ov βιωτὸν γησάμενος, προσελθων καὶ διαλε- 
/ cr 2 Ign 49 A 3 Λ \ 
χθείς τι τοῖς τριάκοντα. ἐξῆλθε, καὶ ἐπιστῆναι ἐκέλευσε TOUS 
Ν 3 / Μ n a - > iS “ 7 
Ta ἐγχειρίδια ἔχοντας φανερῶς τῇ βουλῇ emt τοῖς Spuda- 
/ δ» 9 Ν > > Nae ne ͵ 
κτοις. SB. πάλιν ὃ εἰσελθων, εἶπεν: Eyo, ὦ βουλη, νομίζω 
7 + 3 “ co ἃ x ΕΝ Ν Λ 
προστάτου ἔργον εἶναι οἵου δεῖ, ὃς ἂν ὁρῶν Tous φίλους 
7 Nove? / NU 2 3 a / 
ἐξαπατωμένους μὴ ἐπιτρέπῃ. καὶ EYW οὖν τοῦτο ποιήσω. 
Ν Ν [ἢ ς >] , Sf Ῥω νι 2 ΄ 
και vo? OLOE οἱ ἐφεστηκότες ου φασιν ἡμῖν ἐπιτρέψειν, 
εἰ ἀνήσομεν ἄνδρα τὸν ss τὴν ὀλιγαρχίαν λυμαινό- 
μενον. ἔστι δὲ ἐν τοῖς καινοῖς νόμοις, τῶν μὲν ἐν τοῖς 
τρισχιλίοις ὄντων μηδένα ἀποθνήσκειν ἄνευ τῆς ὑμετέρας 
΄, a 2 0, A 7 ͵ 5 Ν 7 
Ψψηφου:" τῶν ὃ ἐξω τοῦ καταλόγου κυρίους εἰναι τους τρια- 
A oye ahs 5 x / Nees 
κοντα θανατοῦν. ἐγὼ οὖν, edn, Θηραμένην τουτονὶ e&a- 
/ > a / a “ Cue ἃς 
λείφω ἐκ τοῦ καταλόγου, ξυνδοκοῦν ἅπασιν ἡμίν. καὶ 
a Μ 6 rad A . 
τοῦτον, Edn, ἡμεῖς θανατούῦμεν.] 
? / a ς / > Γ SN x 
Axovaas ταῦτα ὁ Θηραμένης ἀνεπήδησεν ert τὴν 
ς / Ν 5 9 Ν ? Μ 3 y+ ς / \ 
Ἑστίαν, καὶ εἶπεν" ᾿Εγω 6, ἐφη, ὦ ἄνδρες, ἱκετεύω τὰ 
΄, 3 , Ν δ ἂν KC / 3 2 x / , 
πάντων ἐννομώτατα, μὴ επὶ Kpitia εἶναι ἐξαλείφειν μὴτε 
ae 7 ς a a Ω ΄ 2 3 vA / Le 
EME, μήτε ὑμῶν ὃν ἂν βούληται, ar, OVTTEP νόμον οὗτοι 
yy Ν A 3 A , Ν n ἃς Ci 
εἐγραψαν περὶ τῶν EV τῷ καταλόγῳ, KATA τοῦτον καὶ ὑμιν 
Axes \ \ / 5 ἣν a . “ N ἢ 
καὶ ἐμοὶ τὴν κρίσιν εἶναι. BB. καὶ τοῦτο μεν, EDN, μα TOUS 
Ν 3 > a «“ 3, ΄ "ἢ / “ ς , 3 A 
θεους, οὐκ ἀγνοῶ, ὅτι οὐδέν μοι ἀρκέσει ὅδε ὁ βωμος " adda 
᾿ς Ν A 2 cr ed Φ 2 / ree Ἂς 
βούλομαι καὶ τοῦτο ἐπιδεῖξαι, ὅτι οὗτοι OV μόνον εἰσὶ περὶ 
9 i 3 ΤΑ 3 XV Ν Ν iN 2 / 
ἀνθρώπους ἀδικώτατοι, ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ θεοὺς ἀσεβέστατοι. 
ε a , yo > ΓΚ \ 3 \ ΄ > 
Ὑμῶν μέντοι, edn, ὦ ἄνδρες καλοὶ καγαθοὶ, θαυμάζω, εἰ 
X ¢ roe a! > a Ν a 7 “ 
μὴ βοηθήσετε ὑμῖν αὑτοῖς, καὶ ταῦτα γιγνώσκοντες OTL 
ΝΣ TERED “ 5) 7 Δ Ἂ ἀρ Cn ey) 
οὐδὲν TO ἐμὸν Ovoua εὐεξαλευπτότερον ἢ TO ὑμῶν εκαστου. 
> \ / 3 Λ Ν ς rn 7 a 
54. Ex δὲ τούτου ἐκέλευσε μὲν ὁ τῶν τριώκοντα κῆρυξ 
Ν PS ee. Ν / > oR x ? , 
Tous ἐνδεκα ἐπὶ τὸν Θηραμένην. ἐκεῖνοι δὲ εἰσέλθοντες 
Ν - ς / e / > - 4 A 
συν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις, ἡγουμένου αὐτῶν Σατύρου, τοῦ θρασυ- 


/ δὺς ἐς Nats , 5 Soa ge ἢ 
τάτου αὐτῶν καὶ αναιδεστατου, εἶπε μὲν ὁ Κριτίας " Παρα- 





Het. 2, rv.] Thrasybulus at Phylae. 79d 

r My / Ν ἣν 
δίδομεν ὑμῖν, ἔφη, Θηραμένην τουτονί, κατακεκριμένον κατὰ 
τὸν νόμον" ὑμεῖς δὲ λαβόντες καὶ ἀπαγαγόντες, οἱ ἕνδεκα, 
οὗ δεῖ, τὰ ἐκ τούτων πράσσετε. δ. ‘Qs δὲ ταῦτα εἶπεν, 


®. Ν 3 Ν lal lal ς / ©. \ e ¢ / 
εἷλκε μὲν ἀπὸ TOU βωμοῦ ὁ Σάτυρος, εἷλκον δὲ οἱ ὑπηρέται. 





ς Ν 7 e/ pe Ν XN ᾽ - Ν 

ὁ δὲ Θηραμένης, ὥσπερ ELKOS, καὶ θεοὺς ἐπεκαλειτο καὶ 

> ΄ a Ν / ς \ ete / 

ἀνθρωπους καθορᾶν Ta γιγνόμενα. ἢ de βουλὴ ησυχίαν 

“" fal δ Ὁ XN >] Ν rc 

εἶχεν, ὁρῶσα και TOUS ἐπί TOLS δρυφάκτοις ὁμοίους Σατύρῳ, 
Ἂς Ν Μ A / al rn 

καὶ τὸ ἔμπροσθεν TOU βουλευτηρίου πλὴρες τῶν φρου- 
τὶ \ 2 > n “ > A 
ὧν, καὶ οὐκ ayvooUVTES OTL ἐγχειρίδια ἔχοντες παρῆσαν. 
58 € δ᾽ ᾽ / 5, “ 5 ὃ Ν a 3 A Xr be 
. οἱ δ᾽ ἀπήγαγον Tov avopa Ola τῆς ἄγορας, BA a με- 
/. A a A - 57 ͵ ¢ 

yarn τῇ φωνῇῃ δηλοῦντα οἷα ἔπασχε.,, Ἅ4ἐγεται δὲ ἕν 


tn Ν - >? A [4 93 (3 7 cd ἂ / 
ῥῆμα καὶ τοῦτο αὐτου" ὡς ELTEV ὁ Σάτυρος, ὅτι οἰμωξοιτο 
> χ , b) ᾽ ΟῚ \ a ? ¥ y+ 
EL μὴ σιωπῆήσειεν, ETT|PETO " Av δὲ σιωπῶ, οὐκ apa, εφη, 
Φ ΄ Ἂς > / 2 / 2 / ἢ, 
οἰμώξομαι; Καὶ ἐπεὶ γε ἀποθνήσκειν ἀναγκαζόμενος τὸ 
/ + 7 + > / 
κώνειον ἔπιε, TO λειπόμενον EpacaV ἀποκοτταβίσαντα 
5 Tal 2 / / an ? Y a “ Ν rn 
εἰπεῖν αὐτὸν: Κριτίᾳ τοῦτ eoT@ τῷ καλῷ. Καὶ τοῦτο 
XN 2 3 - «“ n 3 / > > 4 
μὲν οὐκ ἀγνοῶ, OT’ TaUTa ἀποφθέγματα οὐκ αξιολογα" 
2 la Ν 7 Ren 2 Ν 3 Ν Ν na , 
ἐκεῖνο δὲ κρίνω τοῦ ἀνδρὸς ἀγαστον, TO TOV θανάτου παρε- 
7 ’ Ν / - / Ν na > “- 
στηκότος μήτε TO φρονίμον μῆτε τὸ παιγνιῶδες ἀπολέπειν 
> ἴω ~ 
εκ τῆς ψυχῆς. 
ῇ χ \ 7 ΓΝ, ε \ , 
IV. Θηραμένης μὲν δη οὕτως ἀπέθανεν" οἱ δὲ τριὰ- 
e 2% 7 ’ ἴω r 5 - -“ Ν 
κοντα, ὡς ἐξὸν ἤδη αὑτοῖς τυραννεῖν ἀδεῶς, προεῖπον μεν 
Pa haf A ἢ RASS / 2 eo ὧν 5 \ 
τοῖς ἔξω τοῦ καταλόγου pm εἰσιέναι ες TO ἄστυ, ἦγον δὲ 
" re / “, > % Ν ς 7 Ν / > XN 
ἐκ TOV χωρίων, LWA αὐτοί Kal οἱ φίλοι τοὺς τούτων ἀγροὺς 
A , Ν 2 Ν a ene | n 
ἔχοιεν. φευγόντων δε ἐς TOV Πειραιᾶ, καὶ ἐντεῦθεν ποὰ- 
\ y Boi Ν 5, / Ν Ν , 
hous ἄγοντες, ἐνέπλησαν καὶ τὰ Μέγαρα και Tas Θηβας 
an ¢ ‘3 
TOV ὑποχωρούντων. 
> Ν Υ͂ 4 et Ν - 
2, Ἔκ δὲ τούτου Θρασύβουλος, ὁρμηθεὶς ἐκ Θηβὼν ὡς 
Ν ¢ 7ὔ » / / ? / 
σὺν ἑβδομήκοντα, Φυλὴν χωρίον καταλαμβάνει ἰσχυρον. 
e \ > μι ἘΣ 4 / e 
οἱ δὲ τριάκοντα ἐβοήθουν ἐκ τοῦ ἄστεος σὺν τε τοὺς τρίσ- 


/ Ν XN rn ς a Ν ΑΒΓ >? / Μ 
χιλίοις καὶ συν τοὺς LTTEVOL, καὶ μαλ, εὐημερίας ουσῆς. 


2 


76 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xen, 


3 Ν Ν 9 id ? Ἂν Ν / / fal / 
ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀφίκοντο, ev0us μεν θρασυνομενοί τινες τῶν νεῶν 


J Ἂς Ἂς / Ν 7 / Be Wy: vs 
προσέβαλον T pos TO χώριον, και ETTOLNOAV μὲν οὐὔόοέν, Tpau- 





Ν 7 > κ i / X rn , 
pata δὲ λαβόντες ἁπῆλθον. 8. βουλομένων δε τῶν τριώ- 
5 / / ar Sia 7, 2 Ν > ,ὕ 
κοντα ἀποτειχίζειν, ὅπως ἐκπολιορκήσειαν αὐτοὺς ἀποκλεύς- 
2 r ‘ ΟῚ 7 al > / >) / “-“ 
σαντες αὐτοῖς τὰς ἐφόδους τῶν ETLTNOELWY, ἐπιγίγνεται τῆς 
Ν Ν ~ Ν ω ¢ ΄ « Ν , 
νυκτὸς χιὼν παμπληθῆὴς καὶ TH ὑστεραίᾳ" ou δὲ νιφόμενοι 
A 2 SS , Ἂ - , Cas 
ἀπῆλθον εἰς TO ATU, μώλα συχνοὺς τῶν σκευοφόρων ὑπὸ 
-“ 2 Qn ? / ς “ ἣ 
τῶν ἐκ Φυλῆς ἀποβαλόντες. As γιγνώσκοντες δὲ ὅτι καὶ 
3 al 3 al / 5 / Ny: 
ες τῶν AYPwV λεηλατησοιεν, EL μή TLS φυλακὴ ἔσοιτο, δια- 
7 3 Ν 2 ΟΝ {2 / J . ‘ 
πέμπουσιν εἰς TUS ἐσχατιὰς, ὅσον πεντεκαίδεκα στώδια aTrO 
͵΄ \ Ν 5». 7 Ν Ν 
Φυλῆς. τούς τε ΔΛακωνικους πλὴν ολίγων gpoupous, καὶ 
rn ¢ / / / -τ ΧΝ ὃ ’ 3 
τῶν ἱππέων δύο φυλάς. οὗτοι d€ στρατοπεδευσάαμενοι ἐν 
/ / 2 / 
χωρίῳ acim, ἐφύλαττον. 
ra ἐ 
¢€ Ν / + Ἢ Ψ ἂν Ν 
5. Ὃ δὲ Θρασύβουλος, ἡδη συνειλεγμένων ες τὴν Φυλὴν 
x sat / Ν ? \ / A , 
περὶ ἑπτακοσίους, λαβὼν αὐτους, καταβαίνει τῆς VUKTOS " 
a! . ν᾿ δ ef ea tk / ᾿ ΕΚ a 
θέμενος δὲ τὰ σπλα σον τρία ἢ τέτταρα στώδια ἀπὸ τῶν 
- ¢ / 3 3 Ν x ΗΝ e i 2 / 
φρουρῶν, ἡσυχίαν εἶχεν. 6. ἐπεὶ δὲ πρὸς ἡμέραν ἐγίγνετο, 
Ν + 3 , e/ 3 ω cd “- ἄς rn e/ 
καὶ ἤδη ἀνίσταντο, ὅποι ἐδεῖτο ἕκαστος, ATO τῶν OTTAWD, 
Ν τς / , ἣΝ es / τ / > 
καὶ οἱ ὕπποκομοι ψήχοντες TOUS ἔππους ψοῴφον εποίουν, ἐν 
/ 3 / ς \ / N ac / 
τούτῳ ἀναλαβόντες οἱ περὶ Θρασύβουλον ta oma, δρόμῳ 
͵ Ν᾿ Oy \ \ = / ee 
προσέπιπτον" καὶ ἐστι μὲν OVS αὐτῶν κατέβαλον, πάντας 
\ ΄, 5. 7 ἃ Ὧν Ὁ \ / eee 
Se τρεψώμενοι ἐδιωξαν εξ ἢ ἐπτὰ στάδια" καὶ ἀπέκτειναν 
n Ν ς tal / s\ yy \ ς ἃς rn No af / 
TOV [LEV ὁπλιτῶν πλέον ἢ ELKOTL καὶ ἑκατὸν. τῶν δὲ LTTEWV 
, 7 \ x 3 7 ΠΤ \ 
Νικοστρατον τε τὸν καλὸν ἐπικαλούμενον, καὶ ἄλλους OE 
6 yf rd 3 val 2 a a > , 
δύο, €TL καταλαβόντες ἐν ταῖς evvais.—| 7. ἐπαναχωρη- 
\ \ 7 Ψ 7 “ 
σαντες δὲ καὶ τρόπαιον OTNTUMEVOL, συσκευασάμενοι OTAG 
+. Ν a >) A 3 Ἂς -- ¢ x 3 
τε όσα ἔλαβον καὶ σκεύη, ἀπῆλθον ἐπὶ Φυλῆς. οἱ δὲ εἕ 
y ς a 7 a \ / 2 / y+ 
ἄστεος ὑππεῖς βοηθήσαντες TOV μὲν πολεμίων οὐδένα ETL 
5 , x cd N Ν 3 /. « 
εἶδον" προσμείναντες δὲ ἕως τοὺς νεκροὺς ἀνείλοντο οἱ 
/ ? / 3 Ν + 
προσήκοντες. ἀνεχωρῆσαν ἐς TO ἄστυ. 


> \ / ς , > / / ve A 
8. Ex δὲ τούτου οἱ TPLUKOVTA, OUKETL νομίζοντες acpary 








δι 


Hew.2,1v.) 1) αδυθιζιδ at Puacus. 77 


/ Ν , 3 f ᾿] - ᾽ 
σφίσι Ta πράγματα, ἐβουλήθησαν ᾿Ελευσῖνα ἐξιδιώσασθαι, 
7 3 , Ν ᾽ , κ ͵ 
ὥστε εἶναι σφίσι καταφυγὴν, ει δεήσειε. καὶ παραγγει- 
A ¢ a“ 3 5 > r , 
λαντες τοῖς ἱππεῦσιν, ἦχθον εἰς Ἐλευσίνα Κριτίας τε καὶ 
© ν Ὁ ΄ 2 ΄ / / ? ε΄ 
οἱ αἀλλοι των τριακοντα " ἐξέτασιν τε ποιήσαντες EV τοῖς 
e A , ’ / 7 , > ‘ , 
ἱππεῦσι, φάσκοντες εἰδεναι βούλεσθαι πόσοι εἰεν καὶ πόσης 
A , et > , , 
φυλακῆς προσδεήσοιντο, ἐκέλευον ἀπογράφεσθαι πάντας " 
ἈΝ Ἀν 7 7 N ‘ A J wo . J 
τὸν δὲ ἀπογραψάμενον ae διὰ τῆς πυλίδος ἐπὶ τὴν θάλατ- 
> / re. \ a 9 a Ν Ν « / Μ Ν 
ταν ἐξιέναι. ἐπὶ δὲ τῷ αὐγιαλῳ τοὺς μεν ὑππεᾶς ενθεν καὶ 
Μ Ν = ae / Ὁ ἃ 4 Ψ' ͵ / 
ἔνθεν κατέστησαν, Tov ὃ εξιοντα ael οἱ υπηρεται ξυνεδουν. 
? My tN ΄ / 5 / \ “ 
ἐπεὶ δὲ πάντες ξυνειλημμένοι ἦσαν, Δυσιμαχον Tov ὑππαρ- 
ΡΥ ἢ ᾽ , a > Ν a. τὰνΖἥἷἾ 
χον ἐκέλευσαν ἀναγαγοντα παραδοῦναι avTous τοῖς ἕνδεκα. 
a a (Ὲ / 5 i Teer | r ͵7 Ν 7 
9. Τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ εἰς τὸ Ὠιδεῖον παρεκάλεσαν τοὺς ἐν 
a / . / Ν Ν + ς / ᾽ . 
τῷ καταλόγῳ OTTALTAS καὶ TOUS αλλους ἱππεας. ανᾶστας 
Ν / Ψ. ς re BA 59 Ο Ὑ ad φ ea 
δὲ Κριτίας ελεξεν" Ἡμεῖς, ἔφη, ὦ ἄνδρες, οὐδὲν ἧττον ὑμὲν 
x Ν / ΝΥ ¢ wf > lal a 9S ς A 
κατασκευάζομεν τὴν πολιτείαν ἢ ἡμῖν AVTOLS. δεῖ οὖν vas, 
/ Ν a , / Ν n / / 
ὥσπερ καὶ τιμῶν μεθεξετε, οὕτω καὶ τῶν κινδύνων μετέχειν. 
tad 3 ,ὔ 2 / / > Ν 
τῶν οὖν ξυνειλεγμένων Ἐλευσινίων καταψηφιστεον ἐστιν, 
“ ag a δι χὴν Ἂς A x a / / 
ἵνα ταὐτὰ ἡμῖν Kat θαρρῆτε Kat φοβῆσθε. AevEas δὲ τί 
/ 5 ω 2 / x / ~ cal 
χωρίον, εἰς τοῦτο ἐκέλευσε φανερὰν φέρειν τὴν ψῆφον. 
e \ be Ν 2 “Ὁ ς / ALi / 
10. οἱ δὲ Aaxwvixor Ppovpos ἐν TH ἡμίσει TOU Nidevov 
vA 3 9S X a ει \ Ν fal ΄ 
Ζξωπλισμένοι ἦσαν" ἣν δὲ ταῦτα ἀρεστὰ καὶ τῶν πολιτῶν 
J ἘΣ » / + 
ὅσοις TO πλεονεκτεῖν μονον ἐμέελεν. 
3 Ν ͵, \ e yi \ HS A 
Ex δὲ τούτου λαβὼν ὁ Θρασύβουλος Tovs απὸ Φυλῆς, 
Ν 7 sf /, ᾽ la A x > | 
περὶ χιλίους ἤδη ξυνειλεγμένους, ἀφικνεῖται τῆς VUKTOS ες 
ν- A e \ P 3 πὶ ῃ᾿ - > Ν 
τὸν Πειραιᾶ. οἱ δὲ τριάκοντα, Emel ἤσθοντο ταῦτα, εὐθὺς 
5 / ΄ a lal Ν Ἁ εκ ε A 
ἐβοήθουν σύν τε τοῖς Λακωνικοις, καὶ σὺν τοὺς ὑππευσί 
᾿ ~ e S A 5 / Ν Ἀ >] Ν 
καὶ τοῖς ὁπλίταις" ἔπειτα εχωρουν κατὰ τὴν εἰς TOV 
mn e x ὃ / e Ν >] Ἂς A 
Πειραιᾶ ἁμαξιτον avagepovoav. Ek. οἱ δὲ απὸ Φυλὴης 
Ἂν XN 2 , ‘ ,’ , 2 / + \ \ / e 
ἔτι μὲν ἐπεχείρησαν μὴ avleval αὐτοὺς " ET el de peyas ὁ 
/ δ “- a = , κ Mv r 
κύκλος ὧν πολλῆς φυλακῆς ἐδόκει δεῖσθαι, οὕπω TOAAOLS 


9S , > ‘ ἈΝ 7 ¢ \ > A 
οὖσι, συνεσπειραθησαν ETL THY Μουνυχίαν. οἱ δὲ εκ TOU 







78 Fali and Restoration of Athens. (Xuwl 


” Ε δου ας , 2 κ 2 , - \ 
ἄστεος εἰς τὴν ᾿Ιπποδάμειον ἀγορὰν ελθοντες, πρῶτον μὲν 
/ / > A Ν ear a , ; «Ὁ 
ξυνετάξαντο, ὥστε ἐμπλῆσαι τὴν ὁδὸν ἣ φέρει πρὸς τε τὸ 
XX κε ῃ 7 Ν Ν / ΠΥ 
ἱερὸν τῆς Μουνυχίας ᾿Αρτέμιδος καὶ τὸ Βενδίδειον" καὶ ’ 
» 4 / 2 Μ΄ s\ > Ν 7] 5 / τῇ ἢ 
ἐγένοντο βάθος οὐκ ἔλαττον ἢ ἐπὶ πεντήκοντα ἀσπίδων. ‘ 
cd % / 5 / + [ὦ \ 3 NS A 
οὕτω δὲ συντεταγμένοι ἔχωρουν ἄνω. 13. οἱ de ἀπὸ Φυ- 
“- >? / Ν Ν eas ΄ \ 2 ͵7 \ 5 | 
λῆς ἀντανέπλησαν μὲν THY ὁδον, βαθος δὲ ov πλέον ἢ εἰς, 
/ > 7 Sint / ,.»ϑβ0.ὴ) a 
δέκα ὁπλίτας eyevovto. ἐτάχθησαν μέντοι em αὑτοῖς 
᾿ δ ΧΩ aR a ΄ ea 
πελτοφόροι τε καὶ ψιλοὶ ἀκοντισταὶ, emt δὲ τούτοις Ob 
/ Φ' / \ 9 Ν \ 2 , 
πετροβόλοι. οὗτοι μέντοι συχνοὶ ἦσαν" καὶ yap αὐτόθεν 
2 @ \ / « > / ΤᾺ 
προσεγένοντο. ἐν ᾧ δὲ προσήεσαν οἱ εναντίοι, Θρασὺ- 
Ἂς 3 ? a , 4 Ν 2 ἡ 
βουλος τοὺς μετ αὐτοῦ θέσθαι κελεύσας Tas ἀσπίδας, 
Ν 3. & ΄ \ ’ yy e yy Ἂς ¥ 
καὶ αὐτὸς θέμενος, Ta O ἀλλα ὅπλα ἔχων, KATA μεσον 
Ν +. 
στας, ἔλεξεν " 
v a N N 7 κ N 9 
13. “Avdpes πολῖται, τοὺς μὲν διδάξαι, Tous δὲ ἀναμνῆ- 
ς a A 7] ΩΝ “ / ξ Ν SS 
cat ὑμῶν βούλομαι, OTL εἰσὶ τῶν προσιόντων OL μὲν TO 
Ν + a ¢e - ς ΄ / , ? , 
δεξιὸν ἔχοντες, οὺς ὑμεῖς ἡμέραν πέμπτην τρεψάμενοι εδιω- 
Co τὸ eS Sere ΄ Υ e \ ε 7 
ξατε" οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τοῦ εὐωνύμου ἔσχατοι, οὗτοι δὴ οἱ τριά- 
Ν A Ν 7 3 7 at 3 a 
κοντα, Ol ἡμᾶς καὶ πόλεως ἀπεστέρουν οὐδὲν ἀδικοῦντας, 
Ἂς, 2 a ? 4 Ν Ν / rn ¢e ‘ . 
Kal οἰκιῶν εξήλαυνον, καὶ τους φιλτάτους τῶν ἡμετέρων 
> / 2 δι n / e eo 
απεσημαίνοντο. AAG VUY TOL π᾿αραγεγενηνται., OU οὕτοι 
Ν of 5 e A \ aN > , “ 
μὲν οὔποτε WoVTO, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἀεὶ εὐχόμεθα. 14. eyovTes 
Ν “ Ν 3 / ? a / id Ἂν Ν «“ 
γὰρ ὅπλα μὲν ἐναντίοι αὐτοῖς καθέσταμεν" οἱ δε θεοὶ ---- ὅτε 
\ Ν a , ‘ Μ᾽ ‘ 
ποτὲ καὶ δειπνοῦντες ξυνελαμβανόμεθα καὶ καθεύδοντες Kat 
2 7 ¢ Ν \ 2 “ > a 5 3 In? 2 
ayopufovTes, οἱ δὲ καὶ ουχ OTWS ἀδικοῦντες. αλλ OVO ἐπι- 
A 2 / oe -“ ¢c nr 
δημοῦντες εφυγαδευόμεθα ---- νῦν φανερῶς ἡμῖν συμμα- 
a Ν x ? Ia/ fal “- d Con 
χοῦσι. καὶ γὰρ ἐν εὐδίᾳ χειμῶνα ποιοῦσιν, ὁταν piv 
, Nes 5) n a " ? Ἵ 
συμφερῃ " καὶ ὅταν ἐγχειρῶμεν, πολλῶν οντῶν ἐναντίων, 
ey > , e/ ͵ ἃς os ᾿ 
ολίγοις οὖσι τρόπαια ἵστασθαι διδόασι. Ἐῶ. καὶ νῦν δε 
/ ¢ a Ἄ / 3 Ὁ ς XN y I 
κεκομίκασιν ἡμᾶς εἰς χωρίον, ἐν w οὗτοι μεν οὔτε βάλλειν 
Μ > / ¢ Ν a / Ν Ν ἂν 
οὔτε ἀκοντίζειν ὑπερ τῶν προτεταγμένων, δια τὸ πρὸς 


» 7 7 > » ¢ a Ν >? X / Ν 
ὀρθιον ἱέναι, δύναιντ ἂν" ἡμεῖς δὲ, ες τὸ κάταντες καὶ 










ΤΕΙτ. 2,10] The Fight αὐ Munychia. 19 


,ὔ ? / Ν 3 / % , 3 , 7) 
δόρατα ἀφιέντες καὶ axovtia καὶ πέτρους, εξιξομεθὰ τε 
is a Ν ne ΄ “ ν ἡ Ν " 
χύτων, καὶ πολλοὺυς κατατρωσομεν. 1G. καὶ ὠετο μεν ἂν 
Ἷ f n , 3 A ” , 

Tis δεήσειν τοῖς γε πρωτοσταταῖς EK TOU Loov μάχεσθαι" 
Ϊ a N oN ς ta “ / / 3 A Ν 4 
νῦν δε, ἂν ὑμεῖς, ὥσπερ προσήκει, προθύμως ἀφιῆτε τὰ βέλη, 
Ι-ς / 
“μαρτη 
ine ᾿ ΄ See ORs '\ lal ? εἰ « Ie / 

δὲ δραπετεύσουσιν ἀεὶ ὑπὸ ταῖς ἀσπίσιν" ὥστε ἐξέσται 








‘\ ? Ν - Ν ΄ tar / 
σεται μὲν οὐδεὶς ὧν γε μεστὴ ἢ 000s, φυλαττόμενοι 


BA δ τι / «“ \ , : ἃ 
ὥσπερ τυφλους καὶ τύπτειν, ὅπου ἂν βουλωμεθα, καὶ Evar~ 
Ϊ , ) , 3 > > Κ / ‘ 
λομένους ἀνατρέπειν. UY AXA, ὦ avdpes, οὕτω χρὴ 
"Ἂν ¥ 7 / ς a / A , ᾿] 7, 
'ποίειν, ὅπως ἕκαστος τις ἑαυτῷ συνείσεται τῆς νίκης αἰτιώω- 
Ι Μ Ὡ \ Cr xX Ν Λ a ? , 
τατος ὦν. αὕτη yap ἡμῖν, av θεὸς θέλῃ, viv ἀποδώσει 
] Ν / ἃ, μ Ν 2 , \ \ Ν 
καὶ πατρίδα καὶ οἰκους καὶ ἐλευθερίαν καὶ τιμὰς καὶ 
cr - 27 PX Ν ce 9S / A ἃ “Δ 
Maioas, οἷς εἰσὶ, καὶ γυναῖκας. @ μακάριοι δῆτα, dl ἂν 
¢ an yo 3 / ἈΝ n Ε / Ὁ / > 
ἡμῶν νικήσαντες ἐπίδωσι τὴν πασῶν ἡδίστην ἡμέραν" εὑ- 
δαί δὲ καὶ av τις ἀποθάνη" μνημείου γὰρ οὐδεὶς οὕ 
peer καὶ av τις αποθανῃ" μνὴμ yap ς οὕτω 
\ A ΄ > ΄ Ν 5 α΄ ἃ εν ἡ 
πλούσιος wy καλοῦ τεύξεται. Εξαρξω μεν οὖν eyo, ἡνίκ 
xX Ν > a «“ Ν Ν ? /. / 
ἂν καιρὸς ἡ, παιᾶνα " ὅταν δὲ Tov Evuudiov παρακαλέσω- 
/ , ΄ Ν > + @& ¢ / ΄ 
μεν, τότε πώντες ὁμοθυμαδὸν, ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ὑβρίσθημεν, τιμωρω- 
᾿ διὸ ον 
μεθα τοὺς ἀνδρας. 
a 7 3 ἧς Ἂς \ Ν 25 3 
15. Ταῦτα ὃ εἰπῶων, καὶ μεταστραφεὶς πρὸς τοὺς ἐναν- 
: / e / 3 Ν Ν « / , ? a 
| τίους, ἡσυχίαν εἶχε" καὶ γὰρ ὁ μάντις παρηγγείλεν αὑτοῖς 
Ν 7ὔ 3 7 Ν rn / \ / \ 
μὴ πρότερον ἐπιτίθεσθαι, πρὶν τῶν σφετέρων ἢ πέσοι TLS ἢ 
/ 2 Ν i A / ς / S 
τρωθείη" Επειδὰαν μέντοι τοῦτο γένηται, ἡγησόμεθα μεν, 
y+ ¢ rn / 5 [- rt iy ‘ «ς 7 > \ / / 
edn, ἡμεῖς " νίκη de ἡμῖν ἔσται ἑπομένη, ἐμοὶ μέντοι θάνατος, 
“ > mene Ν a, ιῷ ἃς 3 ? Ψ» 3 3 “ἃ Ν > A 
ὡς y εμοι δοκεῖ. .19. καὶ οὐκ ἐψεύσατο, αλλ ἐπεὶ ἀνελα- 
ἈΝ vey Ὁ Χ 7 τ τὰς 7 Ν ᾿ς Ὁ" 
βον τὰ ὅπλα, αὑτὸς μεν, ὥσπερ ὑπο μοίρας τινος ἀγόμενος, 
>? , re >] Ν ra ᾿ ? / 
ἐκπηδησας πρῶτος, ἐμπεσὼν τοῖς πολεμίοις ἀποθνήσκει" 
x / > A , a A id ? yy 
καὶ τέθαπται ev τῇ διαβάσει τοῦ Κηφισοῦ" οἱ 5 ἀλλοι 
= Ss N / , A ς a ) / § 
ἐνίκων καὶ κατεδίωξαν μέχρι τοῦ ὁμαλοῦ. ἀπέθανον 
3 A a Ἂν ’ 7 XH / 
ἐνταῦθα τῶν μὲν τριώκοντα Κριτίας te καὶ Ϊἱππόμαχος" 
cal ᾿] 2 Ὁ / 3 ,ὔ / « ΄ 
τῶν ὃ ev Πειραιεῖ δέκα ἀρχόντων, Χαρμίδης ὁ Γλαύκωνος" 
“ Ως ue , N Ν Ν od » 
τῶν ὃ ἄλλων περὶ ἑβδομήκοντα. καὶ τὰ μεν ὅπλα ἐλαβον, 


80 Fall and Restoration of Athens. ΓΧ 






aN ἣν a 2 \ a a pb] / 3 
τοὺς δὲ χιτῶνας οὐδενὸς τῶν πολιτῶν ἐσκύλευσαν. επ 
Ν a ? / Ν x \ ¢ / 3 δὲ x 
O€ τοῦτο ee ae τοὺς νεκροὺς ὑποσπονδοὺυς α'πεδίδ 
σαν, -- ἀλλήλοις πολλοὶ διελέγοντο. 
9. Κλεόκριτος δὲ, ὁ τῶν μυστῶν κῆρυξ, wun εὔφωνος, 
\ 
ani κατασιωπησάμενος ἔλεξεν" "ἄνδρες πολῖται, τέ ἡμᾶς. 
2 ΄ / >? a / ig - Ν ς an i 
ἐξελαύνετε; τί ἀποκτεῖναι βούλεσθε; ἡμεῖς yap ὑμᾶς. 
N IAN , > , 7, x" Mew |] 
κακὸν οὐδὲν πώποτε ἐποιήσαμεν, μετεσχήκαμεν δε ὑμῖν Kab | 
A a / > a Ν ς an rn / 
ἱερῶν τῶν σεμνοτάτων, καὶ θυσιῶν καὶ EopT@v τῶν Ka 
Ν \ \ \ , ἜΝ 
στων, καὶ ξυγχορευταὶ καὶ ξυμφοιτηταὶ γεγενήμεθα καὶ 
-Ξ Ν Ν > ς na rd Ν 
ξυστρατιῶται, καὶ πολλὰ μεθ ὑμῶν κεκινδυνεύκαμεν κατὰ 
a \ \ 7 δον A = 5) 7 a 
γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν ὑπερ τῆς κοινῆς ἀμφοτέρων ἡμῶν 
7 A ed: / - Ν n 7 ᾷ 
σωτηρίας τε καὶ ἐλευθερίας. | 321. πρὸς θεῶν πατρῴων καὶ 
, ᾿ / Nn / hae / ΄ 
μητρῴων, καὶ ξυγγενείας, καὶ κηδεστίας, καὶ ἑταιρίας (πάν- 
Ν 4 πὶ a 2 / 3 Fi 
των Yap τούτων TOAAOL κοινωνουμεν ἀλλήλοις), αἰδούμενοι 
Ν Ν " ΄ς > 7 Zz. ς Lg 2 Ν 
καὶ θεοὺς καὶ ἀνθρώπους, παύσασθε ἁμαρτάνοντες ἐς τὴν 
/ Ν ἮΝ / c 3 / / A 
πατρίδα, καὶ μὴ πείθεσθε τοῖς ἀνοσιωτάτοις τριάκοντα, Ob 
Ὁ 7 / «“ >] / an / 3 / 9 
ἰδίων κερδέων ἕνεκα ὀλίγου δεῖν πλείους ἁπεκτόνασιν AOn= 
/ 2 3 Ν Ν “Ὁ 7ὔ / / + 
ναίων ἐν ὀκτῶ μησὶν, ἢ πάντες Πελοποννήσιοι δέκα ETH 
A IeN ? Cece 3 3 / / 
πολεμοῦντες. 22. e€ov O ἡμίν ἐν εἰρήνῃ πολιτεύεσθαι, 
© > / + / Ν 7 ΧΑ 
οὗτοι τὸν πάντων αἰσχίστον τε καὶ χαλεπώτατον καὶ ἀνο- 
7 Ν + ἃς al Ν > £ Λ 
σιώτατον καὶ ἔχθιστον καὶ θεοῖς καὶ ἀνθρώποις πόλεμον 
εἰς ἊΣ 5 ,ὔ / > > 3 / 2 / 
ἡμῖν πρὸς ἀλλήλους TrapexXoValV. αλλ εὖ YE μέντοι ETTL= 
ed Ἂς a A Ce e a 2 / 2 / 
στασθε, ὅτι Kai TOV νῦν ὑφ ἡμῶν ἀποθανόντων οὐ μόνον 
ΡΥ ἢ \ oleae Ua ἃ \ a 
UMELS, AANA καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐστιν OVS πολλὰ κατεδακρύσαμεν. 
ς ay a 3Λ ς Χ nN + \ Ν 
O μεν τοιαῦτα ἔλεγεν. οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ ἄρχοντες, καὶ δια 
Ν a ΄ ἣν S'S, a 3 / Ἅ ᾿: 
τὸ τοιαῦτα προσακούειν, τοὺς μεθ ἑαυτῶν ἀπήγαγον εἰς τὸ 
+ a igh ωρ 7 ε N , ͵ ΝΝ 
ἄστυ. 38. τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ οἱ μὲν τριώκοντα πάνυ δὴ 
ταπεινοὶ καὶ ἔρημοι ξυνεκάθ ἣν τῷ δρίῳ τῶν δὲ 
Se: pare vexalnvto ev τῷ Evvedpiw: τῶν é 
¢ ty / 3 a 
τρισχιλίων ὅπου ἕκαστοι Sa asa ἧσαν, ποίθα es Sues 
‘ 3 4 
povTo πρὸς ἀλλήλους. ὅσοι μὲν γὰρ ἐπεποιήκεσάν τί 
βιαιότερον καὶ ἐφοβοῦντο, ἐντόνως ἔλεγον ὡς οὐ χρὴ καθυ- 











FLL. 2, 1v-] An Armaisiice. 81 
ἫΝ 
ίεσθαι ao ἐν Πειραιεῖ" ὅσοι δὲ ἐπίστευον μηδὲν ἠδικη- 
κέναι, αὐτοί τε ἀνελογίζοντο καὶ τοὺς ἄλλους ἐδίδασκον, 
ὡς οὐδὲν δέοιντο τούτων τῶν κακῶν, καὶ τοῖς τριάκοντα 
οὐκ ἔφασαν τα ρα πείθεσθαι, οὐδ᾽ ἐπιτρέπειν ἀπολλύναι 
τὴν πόλιν. καὶ τὸ τελευταῖον ἐψηφίσαντο ἐκείνους ΜῈΝ 
καταπαῦσαι, ἄλλους δὲ ἐλέσθαι" καὶ εἵλοντο δέκα, ἕνα 
ἀπὸ ΠΡ 

. Καὶ οἱ μὲν τριάκοντα ᾿Ελευσῖϊνάδε ἀπῆλθον. οἱ δὲ 
ἊΝ τῶν ἐν ἄστει, καὶ μάχα τεταραγμένων καὶ ἀπιστούν- 
των ἀχλήλοις, σὺν τοῖς ἱππάρχοις ἐπεμέλοντο. ἐξεκάθευν 
δον δὲ καὶ οἱ ἱππεῖς ἐν τῷ ᾿Ωιδείῳ, τούς τε ἵππους καὶ τὰς 
ἀσπίδας ἔχοντες, καὶ δ ἀπιστίαν ssa be τὸ μὲν ἀφ᾿ 
ἑσπέρας σὺν ταῖς ἀσπίσι κατὰ τὰ τείχη. τὸ δὲ πρὸς ὄρθρον 
σὺν τοῖς ἵπποις, ἀεὶ φοβούμενοι μὴ ἐπεισπέσοιέν τινες 
aarois τῶν ἐκ τοῦ Πειραιῶς. | 25. Οἱ δὲ, πολλοί τε ἤδη 
ὄντες καὶ παντοδαποὶ, ὅπλα ἐποιοῦντο, οἱ μὲν ξύλινα, οἱ δὲ 
οἰσύϊνα, καὶ ταῦτα ἐλευκοῦντο. πρὶν δὲ ἡμέρας, δέκα γενέ- 
σθαι. πιστὰ δόντες οἵτινες ξυμπολεμήσειαν, καὶ εἰ, ξένοι εἶεν, 
ἰσοτέλειαν ἔσεσθαι, ἐξήεσαν. πολλοὶ μεν OTALTAL, πολλοὶ 
Se γυμνῆτες (ἐγένοντο δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ ἱππεῖς ὡσεὶ ἑβδομή- 
kovra), προνομὰς δὲ ποιούμενοι. καὶ λαμβάνοντες ξύλα καὶ 
Ε τὡραν; ἐκάθευδον πάλιν ἐν Πειραιεὶ. 46. τῶν δ᾽ ἐκ τοῦ 
ἄστεος ἄλλος μὲν οὐδεὶς σὺν ὅπλοις ἐξήει, οἱ δὲ ἱππεῖς 
ἔστιν ὅτε καὶ λῃστὰς ἐχειροῦντο τῶν ἐκ τοῦ Πειραιῶς, καὶ 
τὴν φάλαγγα αὐτῶν ἐκακούργουν. περιέτυχον δὲ καὶ τῶν 
Αἰξωνέων τισὶν, εἰς τοὺς αὑτῶν ἀγροὺς ἐπὶ τὰ ἐπιτήδεια 
πορευομένοις " καὶ τούτους Λυσίμαχος ὁ ἵππαρχος ἀπέ- 
pace, πολλὰ ALTAVEvOVTAS, καὶ πολλῶν ὁ claphiis φερόντων 
ἱππέων. 327. ἀνταπέκτεινον δὲ καὶ οἱ ἐν Πειραιεῖ τῶν ἱπ- 
πέων ἐπ᾿ ἀγροῦ raBovres Kaxhiorparov, pudis Λεοντίδος " 


καὶ γὰρ ἤδη μέγα ἐφρόνουν, ὥστε καὶ πρὸς τὸ τεῖχος τοῦ 


82 Fail and Restoration of Athens. [Xew: 








ὕ / 
ἄστεος ΕΓ Raho. Εἰ δὲ καὶ τοῦτο aes εἰπεῖν τοῦ μῆς. 





χανοποιοῦ τοῦ ἐν τῷ ἄστει, ὃς, ἐπεὶ ἔγνω ὅτι κατὰ τὸν ἐκ, 
“υκείου δρόμον μέλλοιεν τὰς μηχανὰς peso τὰ ζεύγη 
ἐκέλευσε πάντα ὡμαξιαίους λέθους ἄγειν, καὶ καταβάλλειν 
«“ a / “ / e \ a re 
ὅπου ἕκαστος βούλοιτο TOU δρόμου. ws δε τοῦτο ἐγίνετο," 
Ν @ / a / / a 
πολλὰ εἷς ἕκαστος TOV λίθων πράγματα παρεῖχε. 
7 \ ἢ)» 2 / a Α 
Πεμπόντων δὲ πρέσβεις ἐς Λακεδαίμονα, τῶν μὲν. 
΄ 3 > cr a δου ,ὔ 3 Yi 
τριάκοντα εξ E)evotvos, τῶν 6 ἐν καταλόγῳ εξ ἄστεος, 
Ν ce / ς 3 , a 7, 4“. 
καὶ βοηθεῖν κελευόντων, ὡς ἀφεστηκότος τοῦ δήμου ἀπὸ 
7 ΄ 7 ¢/ @/ 53 
“ακεδαιμονίων, Λύσανδρος, λογισάμενος OTL οἷον TE Ein 
Sees A ἣν 2 A - if A Ν 
ταχὺ εἐκπολιορκῆσαι Tous ἐν τῷ Πειραιεῖ κατὰ τε γῆν καὶ 
ἐν VA » n 7 3 2 / 7 
κατὰ θάλατταν. εἰ τῶν ἐπιτηδείων ὠὡποκλεισθείησαν, ἕυνέ- 
r ᾽ , > a Ξ N 9. 
πρᾶξεν ἐκατὸν τε τάλαντα αὑτοῖς δανεισθῆναι, καὶ αὐτὸν 
\ \ A Ν / \ Ν 5. Ν A 
μὲν κατὰ γῆν appoornv, AiBvv δὲ τὸν ἀδελφὸν ναυαρχοῦν- 
2 A NS] ss be \ 3 lal ἤ 
τα ἐκπεμφθῆναι. 929. καὶ ἐξελθὼν αὐτὸς μεν Ελευσίναδε, 
/ ¢ v7 Ν , rd \ . ΄ὔ 
ξυνελέγετο ὁπλίτας πολλοὺυς Πελοποννησίους " ὁ δὲ vavap= 
/ 3 ΄ “ Ν ? / ? a 
“OS κατὰ θάλατταν εφυλαττεν, ὅπως μηδὲν εἰσπλέοι αὑτοῖς 
po 5 / } \ , > ᾽ ΚΞ € 9? 
τῶν ETLTNOELMY* WOTE TAYU TUAW EV ἀπορίᾳ ἦσαν οἱ EV 
TS a ¢ Ke 2 a ΠΑ Xr 3 / > , 0 ple. a 
εἰραιεῖ, οἱ O EV TH ἄστει πάλιν αὖ μέγα εφρονουν ETL TO 
/ 7 \ / / e 
Avoavipo. οὕτω δὲ προχωρούντων, Ilavcavias ὁ βασι- 
c 
x Ν θ , A 7, ὃ ? / ἴω iA 
eus, φθονήσας Λυσάνδρῳ, εἰ κατειργασμένος ταῦτα ἅμα 
᾿ ? ᾽ὔ c/ \ ») / 7 \ > / ͵7 
μὲν εὐδοκιμήσοι. ἅμα δὲ ἰδίας ποιήσοιτο Tas ἄθηνας, πεί- 
A ? “ 2 / / / 
σας τῶν φόρων τρεῖς. ἐξάγει φρουράν. 89. συνείποντο 
\ Ν id ΄ ͵7 Ν n τ 7 
δὲ καὶ οἱ σύμμαχοι πάντες πλὴν Βοιωτῶν καὶ Κορινθίων. 
@ ΘΝ, Vs “ 2 / 32 ce Ἃ 
οὗτοι δ᾽ ἔλεγον pev, OTL- οὐ νομίζοιεν εὐορκεῖν ἂν στρα- 
, 3 3... / \ , a 
Tevouevor ἐπ Αθηναίους: μηδὲν παράσπονδον ποιοῦντας " 
ya ‘ a e/ Reet / 
ἔπραττον δε ταῦτα, OTL ἐγίγνωσκον AaKedatpoviovs Bov- 
7 ἣν a ? ,ὔ if Subs N \ 
λομένους THY τῶν Αθηναίων χώραν οἰκείαν καὶ πιστὴν. 
’ rd \ / 3 7 \ > 
ποιήσασθαι. ὁ de Παυσανίας ἐστρατοπεδεύσατο μὲν ἐν 
Ape / / Ν a na Ἂς yy 
τῷ Δλιπεδῳ καλουμένῳ πρὸς τῷ Πειραιεῖ, δεξιὸν ἔχων 


/ / \ x n 
κέρας, Avoavdpos δὲ σὺν τοῖς μισθοφόροις TO εὐώνυμον. 


| Hett. 2, rv-] fighting Renewed. 83 





/ Ν , e / Ν A 
81. Πεέμπων δὲ πρέσβεις ὁ Παυσανίας πρὸς τοὺς ἐν 
Ϊ ΝΠ 4 / > 7 > Ν Ν ¢ a ? Ν > > > / 
| Πειραιεῖ, ἐκέλευεν ἀπιεναί ἐπὶ Ta εαυὐτῶν" ere ὃ οὐκ ἐπεί- 
7 “ aD bis a ¢ ¢ \ - 
| Oovto, προσέβαλλεν ocov ἀπὸ βοῆς evexev, ὅπως μὴ δῆλος 
y > Ν > r yy > Ν > Ia > Ν A A 
εἰη εὐμενὴς αὐτοῖς wy. ἔπει O οὐδὲν ἀπὸ τῆς προσβολῆς 
/ 2 A a c / Ν a \ 
πραξας ἀπῆλθε, τῇ υστεραίᾳ, λαβων τῶν μὲν Aaxedaipo- 
Id ἊΨ / a A= 3 / ¢ / A \ 
νίων δύο μόρας, τῶν δὲ Αθηναίων ἵππεων τρεῖς φυλὰς, 
A Ἵ Ν Ν Ν / al ral > / 
παρῆλθεν emt τὸν κωφὸν λίμενα. σκοπῶν πῆ εὐαποτείχι- 
ye hae | > Ns ee, / > A : 
στος εἴη ὁ Πειραιεύς. 83. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀπίοντος αὐτοῦ προσε- 
7 Ν 7 2 tal - ? Ν 
θεὸν τινες, καὶ πράγματα αὐτῷ παρεῖχον, ἀχθεσθεὶς παρ- 
͵ \ \ Ἑ / ? 7 ? . ‘ ee a Ν 
HY YELrE TOUS μὲν ὕππεαᾶς ελαύνειν ELS AUTOUS EVEVTAS, καί 
\ \ , 5 πε “ef ͵ \ \ a Υ 
Tous τὰ δεκα ἀφ ἥβης συνέπεσθαι" συν δὲ τοῖς ἀλλοις 
ΜΝ 2 7 Ν 3 / \ > \ 4, 
αὑτὸς ἐπηκολούθει. καὶ ἀπέκτειναν μὲν εγγὺς τριάκοντα 
“Ὁ an Ν ἣν" ΟΡ / Ν “Ὁ n 
τῶν ψιλῶν, Tous ὃ ἄλλους κατεδίωξαν πρὸς τὸ ev Πειραιεῖ 
7 2 a ee 3 / vA 
Gear pov. 83. exes δὲ ετυχον εξοπλιζόμενον οἱ τε πελτα- 
Ν / ., ¢ ς lal al > al Ν ς \ 
σταὶ TavTes, καὶ οἱ ὁπλῖται τῶν Ex Πειραιῶς. Kat οἱ μεν 
Ν τ \ ? / / Μ > / 
ψιλοὶ εὐθὺς εκδραμοντες ἠκοντιζον, εβαλλον, ἐτόξευον, 
? / © al / >. ἘΝ Fhe ) 
ἐσφενδόνων " οἱ δὲ Μακεδαιμοόνιοι, ἐπεὶ αὐτῶν πολλοὶ ETI- 
if / ,, > / 3 Ν 7 id ᾽ 
TPWOKOVTO, μάλα πιεζόμενοι ἀνεχωρησαν ἐπὶ πόδα" οἱ ὃ 
᾿] 7 Ν lad ? / > A \ >] 7 
εν τούτῳ πολυ μάλλον ἐπέκειντο. ενταῦθα δὲ ἀποθνήσκει 
, \ / ἢ / \ / 
Χαίρων te καὶ OiBpaxos, audw πολεμάρχω, καὶ Λακράτης 
a. / Seo, ς / / 
ὁ ολυμπιονίκης, καὶ αλλοι οἱ τεθαμμένοι Λακεδαιμονίων 
ΣᾺ, a a > a oa \ A ¢ 
πρὸ τῶν πυλῶν ev Κεραμεικῷ. 84. ὁρῶν δὲ ταῦτα ὁ 
7 x Cr 7, ¢ a > , ᾿ς Ν 
Θρασύβουλος καὶ οἱ αλλοι ὁπλῖται εβοήθουν, καὶ Tayv 
/ Ν a A ESS bea , ς \ / 
παρετάξαντο πρὸ τῶν ἄλλων ἐπ᾿ OKT@. O δε Παυσανίας, 
/ Ν \ ? 7 “ / / X\ 
para πιεσθεὶς, καὶ ἀναχωρήσας ocov στάδια τέτταρα ἢ 
' Ν 7 \ ͵ a 7 
πέντε πρὸς λόφον τινὰ, παρήγγειλε τοῖς “Λακεδαιμονίοις 
Ν a ΕΣ ,ὔ > a x ¢ / ᾿] A 
Kat τοῖς ἄλλοις Evppayols ἐπιχωρεῖν πρὸς EaVTOV. EKEL 
\ / r ν an Ν 4 > ᾿ Ν 
δὲ συνταξάμενος βαθεῖαν παντελῶς τὴν φάλαγγα, ἦγεν ἐπὶ 
iter 7 eo ? “- \ 57 Υ \ 
τοὺς Αθηναίους. οἱ δ᾽ εἰς χεῖρας μὲν ἐδέξαντο, ἔπειτα δὲ 
e ν ἢ / 2 Ν ? Fonte 3 rn Ν i V 36 ὦ 
οἱ μὲν ἐξεωσθησαν εἰς τὸν εν ταῖς Αλαῖς πηλὸν, οἱ δὲ EvE- 


Ne od , > “-“ ¢ / iz / 
κλιναν, καὶ ἀπτοθνησκουσιν αὑτῶν WS πεντήκοντα καὶ EKATOV, 








84 Fall and Restoration of Athens. [Xe 
ἶ 


ree A ΓΑ (4 / 5 ͵ 
.8ὅ. O d¢ Παυσανίας τρόπαιον στησάμενος ἀνεχωρησε". 
3 κε \ / / ᾽ν 
καὶ οὐδ᾽ ὡς ὠργίζετο αὑτοῖς, ἄλλα λαθρα πεμπων ἐδίδασκες 
ἈΝ a - ω / / / . 
tous ἐν Πειραιεῖ οἷα χρὴ λέγοντας πρέσβεις πεμπειν πρὸς 
ε N ὧν Ν / ᾽ U € 2) a * ἃ 
ἑαυτὸν καὶ τοὺς παρόντας ‘Edopous. οἱ ὃ επείθοντο. Ἔ 


/ « / / ἢ / ef 4 
Mpooleval ὡς πλείστους συλλεγομένους, λέγοντας OTL 


¥} \ Ν Ν Ν᾿ a y Ν 3 / Ν A 
διέστη δὲ καὶ τοὺς ἐν τῷ ἄστει, καὶ ἐκέλευε πρὸς σφᾶς 


Jai / r > a al al 3 Ν 
οὐδὲν δέονται τοῖς ἐν τῷ [Πειραιεῖ πολεμεῖν, ἀλλὰ δια 
/ a 3 σις, / Λ 3 
λυθέντες κοινῇ ἀμφότεροι Δακεδαιμονίοις φίλοι εἶναι. 
ea/ a ν / Sf \ / 
36. ἡδέως ταῦτα καὶ Νιαυκλείδας Edopos wv συνήκουεν " 
7 Ν 7 Ν a / a 3 7 
ὥσπερ γὰρ νομίζεται σὺν βασιλεῖ δύο τῶν Εφόρων συστρα- 
΄ Ν 7 A e / Ν +. 3 7 
τεύεσθαι, καὶ τότε παρὴν οὗτος τε καὶ ἄλλος, ἀμφότεροι 
“ Ν / 7 + a 3\ A A 
τῆς μετὰ Παυσανίου γνωμὴς ovtes, μᾶλλον ἢ τῆς μετὰ 
7 \ a 5 ee Ν / 
Avoavépov. διὰ ταῦτα οὖν καὶ es τὴν Δακεδαίμονα mpo- 
Zz 7 , 34g. A Υ N \ 
θύμως ἔπεμπον τοὺς τ εκ ITepaiws, ἔχοντας tas πρὸς 
/ \ \ ‘ aes. a 3 -“ » 
Δακεδαιμονίους σπονδᾶς, καὶ TOUS ἀπὸ τῶν EV τῷ ἄστει 
3 » - / Ν / 3 ἣς , 
ἰδιώτας. Κηφισοφῶντα τε καὶ Medyntov. 8. Ἐπεὶ μεντοι 
@ y ? / 7 Ν Ν δἰ IS an 
οὗτοι ᾧχοντο ἐς Λακεδαίμονα, ἔπεμπον δὴ καὶ οἱ ἅπὸ TOU 
a 5 a yf / ¢/ ] Ν \ Σ / 
κοινοῦ ἐκ TOU ἄστεος, λέγοντας OTL αὐτοὶ μὲν παραδιδοασι 
Ν 4 / Ae ey \ A 2 \ ͵ 
καὶ τὰ τείχη, ἃ ἔχουσι, καὶ σφᾶς αὐτοὺς Λακεδαιμονίοις 
a “ ΄ > - 3; SS, Ν x ? 
χρῆσθαι ὁ τι βούλονται" ἀξιοῦν 6 εφασαν καὶ τους ev Πει- 
A ? /. Ν 5 / / , 
pacer, εἰ φίλοι φασὶν εἶναι “Λακεδαιμονίοις, Tapadioovat τόν 
a . x / > ΄ \ / 
τε Πειραιᾶ καὶ τὴν Μουνυχίαν. \88. ἀκούσαντες δὲ πάντων 
b] a cy By A 5ς.ς,7 / 
αὐτῶν ot Edopor καὶ ot ἐκκλητοι, ἐξέπεμψαν πεντεκαίδεκα 
" ’ pee, / Ni AO δ: ͵ 
ἄνδρας εἰς τὰς A@nvas, καὶ ἐπέταξων σὺν Παυσανίᾳ διαλ- 
t “ ΄ ͵ Ci ῃ sie 
λάξαι ὁπη δύναιντο KadrdoTa. Ot δὲ διήλλαξαν, Ef ᾧτε 
vf ed se Red ς ς 5 , δι ων Ans ΘΟ ἢ \ 
εὐρηνην μὲν ἔχειν WS προς AAA7AOUS, ἀπίεναι δὲ ἐπὶ τὰ 
¢ tal id / ἣ, an Ν a d Ν 
εαυτῶν ἑκάστους, πλὴν τῶν τριάκοντα, καὶ τῶν ἕνδεκα, καὶ 
ig 9 A ον , ᾿ 5 / ig) 
τῶν ἐν τῷ Πειραιεῖ apEavtwv δέκα" εἰ δὲ τινες φοβοῖντο 
_ ? δ yf 3 a XN 3 a “ 
των εἕ ἄστεος. εδοξεν αὐτοῖς τὴν ᾿Ελευσῖνα κατοικεῖν. 
/ \ / / \ A Ἂς 
39. Τούτων δὲ περανθέντων, Παυσανίας μὲν διῆκε τὸ 
ρ ’ 


, ἢ . \ ᾿] a an 5 ? \ - 
στρωτευμα" οἱ δὲ εκ τοῦ Πειραιῶς. ἀνεέλθοντες συν τοῖς 
ρ ἢ 





Hew.2,1v.) The Democracy Restored. 85 


ad 5 Ν 3 ,ὔ Μ .“ a ? Ν Ν 
ὅπλοις εἰς THY ἀκρόπολιν. ἐθυσαν τῇ ᾿Αθηνᾷ. επεὶ δὲ κατέ- 
Ν Μ Ἂ ΄ 4 2, 
βησαν οἱ στρατηγοὶ, ἐνθα δὴ ὁ Θραυσύβουλος ἐλεξευ " 
A yy a5 ~ »” ” ΄ s 
40. Ὑμιν, εφη, ὦ EK TOU ἄστεος ἄνδρες, συμβουλεύω ἐγὼ 
a ς lal 2 ΄ / ’ xX / 3 3 / 
γνώναι ὑμᾶς αὑτοὺς. μάλιστα δ᾽ ἂν γνοίητε, εἰ αναλογι- 
ἀν / Cia δὲ / / ? Ν τ ᾿ - 
σαισθε, ἐπὶ τίνι ὑμῖν μεγα φρονητεον ἐστιν, ὥστε ἡμῶν 
Μ 3 vad / / | ed ? Ν 
ἄρχειν ἐπίχειρειν. “πότερον δικαιότεροι ἐστε ; GAN ὁ μὲν 
A 4, [ἡ vad ΝΥ 2. Χ / cd / 
δῆμος, πενέστερος ὑμῶν WY, οὐδὲν πώποτε ἕνεκα χρημάτων 
A ς “ Ν , / Μ 
ὑμᾶς ἠδίκησεν" ὑμεῖς δε, πλουσιώτεροι πάντων ὄντες, 
\ \ > Ν “ / 7 ? Ν Ν 
πολλὰ καὶ αἰσχρὰ ἕνεκα κερδέων πεποιήκατε. ἐπεὶ δὲ 
΄ Ia ca / / ᾽ 4 + ἢ 
δικαιοσύνης οὐδὲν ὑμῖν προσήκει, σκέψασθε εἰ apa er 
3 / Cf ‘ / ᾿ Ν / Ἃ / 
ἀνδρείᾳ ὑμῖν μέγα φρονητεον. 4. καὶ Tis ἂν καλλίων 
7 ΄ ͵ 4. Je 2 τ , ‘ > , 
κρίσις TOUTOV γένοιτο, ἢ WS ἐπολεμήσαμεν προς ἀλληλους ; 
3 Ν 7 / > xX / ἃ yy Ν a Ν 
ἀλλὰ γνώμῃ Paint ἂν προέχειν, OL, EXOVTES καὶ τείχος καὶ 
¢ Ν ,ὔ Ν , / t Ν 
ὅπλα καὶ χρήματα καὶ ξυμμάχους ]Π]ελοποννησίους, ὑπὸ 
- Ia’ # 3 / 4 3 > , Ν 
τῶν οὐδὲν τούτων ἐχόντων παρελύθητε; αλλ ἐπὶ Aaxe- 
7 Ν yy δ ΄ / i n A 
δαιμονίοις δὴ οἴεσθε μέγα φρονητεον εἰναι; πῶς ; οἱ γε, 
7 Ν᾿ "4 7 a , / 
ὥσπερ τους δάκνοντας κύνας κλοιῷ δήσαντες παραδιδόασιν, 
“4 2 ω ἘΝ αὐ , A 9 , / , 
οὕτω κακείνοι, ὑμᾶς παραδόντες τῷ ἠδικημένῳ τούτῳ δήμῳ, 
x ᾽ , ? , oe a > » Fics iA 
οὐχονται ἀπίοντες ; 4. οὐ pevTOL YE ὑμᾶς, ὦ ἄνδρες, αξιῶ 
πὰ Ὁ 5) , A Iar 5) N \ A Ν 
ἔγω ὧν ὁμωμόκατε παραβῆναι οὐδεν, ANNA καὶ τοῦτο πρὸς 
rn y a 3 . Ὡ Ν yy Ν ὦ ΤΟΣ 
τοῖς ἄλλοις καλοῖς επιδεΐξαι, OTL καὶ EVOPKOL καὶ ὅσιοί ἐστε. 
>] Ν ΧΝ A XN Μ A \ o@ Ia / 
Εἰπὼν δὲ ταῦτα καὶ ἄλλα τοιαῦτα, καὶ OTL οὐδὲν δέοι 
or > Ν a / a 3 / A 
ταράττεσθαι, ἀλλὰ τοῖς νόμοις τοῖς ἀρχαίοις χρῆσθαι, 
ἌΡ Ν 3 7 Ν 7 ‘ 2 Ν 
ἀνεστησε τὴν ἐκκλησίαν. 48. καὶ TOTE MEV ἀρχᾶς κατα- 
, 3 7 ς J Ἀ , > Y 
OTHTAMEVOL ἐπολιτεύοντο" ὑστέρῳ SE χρόνῳ, ἀκούσαντες 
/ A ‘ a a , 

Eevous μισθοῦσθαι τοὺς ev Ελευσῖνι, στρατευσάμενοι Tav- 
Ν 3 2 Ν Ν Ἀ Ν > κα 2 / 
δημεὶ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοὺς, τοὺς μὲν στρατηγους αὐὑτων εἰς λογους 
2 ¥ > / “ x + 5 , \ 
ελθοντας ἀπεκτειναν, τοῖς δὲ ἄλλοις εἰσπέμψαντες TOUS 
Λ Ν > / Ν» ~ » " ,’ 
φίλους καὶ ἀναγκαίους, ἔπεισαν συναλλαγῆναι" καὶ ομο- 

f 53 MR ἈΝ / » Ν »" et an 
σαντες ὅρκους, ἢ μην μὴ μνησικακήσειν, ETL καὶ νὺν ομοῦυ 
» ΄ a / ? / Ε A 
TE πολιτεύονται, καὶ τοῖς ὅρκοις ἐμμένει ὁ δῆμος. 


86 The Battle of Mantinea. [XEN 


lil THE BATTLE OF MANTINEA., 


[Hellenica, VII.] 


3 Ν ΤΌΝ 2 7 > A , mS 
V. τι. ᾿Επεὶ δὲ ἐγένετο Επαμεινωνδας ev τῇ πόλει τῶν 
a “ \ +S ΝΜ >] ὃ Qn 
Σπαρτιατῶν, ὅπου μὲν ἔμελλον ἐν τε ἰσοπέδῳ μαχεισθαι 
Ν δὴ al 2 rn / 3 > / 4 ad 
καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν οἰκιῶν βληθήσεσθαι, οὐκ εἰσῇει ταύτῃ, ovd 
7] \ ͵ a a) ik Is Ἄς τ 
ὅπου γε μηδὲν πλέον μαχεῖσθαι τῶν ὀλίγων πολλοὶ ὄντες" 
y ν fr \ 3 Ψ A Ν εν / 
ἔνθα Se πλεονεκτεῖν av ἐνόμιζε, τοῦτο λαβὼν TO χωρίον 
‘ Ν 2 oe 2 XN /. / 
κατέβαινε, καὶ οὐκ ἀνεβαινεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν. 12. TO γε 
Ἂν > A / y+ Xx x a ᾿) αὖ 
μὴν ἐντεῦθεν γενόμενον ἔξεστι μὲν τὸ θεῖον αἰτιᾶσθαι, 
+ Ν c «ς a 2 / 2 ἃς X\ ς 
ἔξεστι δὲ λέγειν ὡς τοῖς ἀπονενοημένοις οὐδεὶς ἂν ὑπο- 
, > δ . tA 3 J TAA Ole Ν y 
σταίη. ἐπεὶ yap ἡγεῖτο ᾿Αρχίδαμος οὐδὲ ἑκατὸν ἔχων 
+ iN ἃ Ψ 107 4 Υ > ΄ 
ἄνδρας. καὶ διαβὰς ὅπερ ἐδόκει TL ἔχειν κώλυμα, ἐπορεύετο 
Ν +S 3 Ν x > Λ 5 a Ν « a 
πρὸς ὄρθιον ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀντιπάλους, ἐνταῦθα δὴ οἱ πῦρ 
’ « , Ν / ς a Ν 
πνέοντες, οἱ νενικηκοτες τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους, οἱ τῷ παντὲ 
/ ‘\ / ς / / y 2 59. 
πλέονες καὶ προσέτι ὑπερδέξια χωρία ἔχοντες, οὐκ ἐδεξαντο 
Χ Ν 3 / aie / Ν ε 
τοὺς περὶ τὸν Ἀρχίδαμον, GNX ἐγκλίνουσι. LB. καὶ οἱ 
Ν a a > 7 ? / 3 Ν , 
μὲν πρῶτοι τῶν ᾿Επαμεινώνδου ἀποθνήσκουσιν " ἐπεὶ pev- 
> , ie ght 5. 7 εν , Pe 
τοι ἀγαλλόμενοι TH νίκη ἐδίωξαν οἱ ἔνδοθεν πορρωτέρω TOU 
rn e 5 2 / ᾽ Ν ε 
καιροῦ, οὗτοι αὖ ἀποθνησκουσι" περιεγεγραπτο yap, ὡς 
y+ e=aN a / ’ ed ς / o/ 2 [9] 
ἔοικεν, ὑπὸ τοῦ θείου μέχρι ὅσου ἡ νίκη ἐδέδοτο αὑτοῖς. 
Ate ὦ Ν \ 9 / ,ὔ / “ δ > , 
καὶ ὁ μὲν δὴ ᾿Αρχίδαμος τρόπαιὸν τε ἵστατο ἔνθα ἐπεκρα- 
Ν wv ? a tf a / ¢ / 
TNO, Kat τους ἐνταῦθα πεσόντας τῶν πολεμίων ὑποσπον- 
> A 
Sous ἀπεδίδου. 
Γ ε 5 3 , f f , ε 
.14. ὋὉ δ᾽ ᾿Επαμεινωνδας,. λογιζόμενος ὅτε βοηθήσοιεν οἱ 
9 / » a / 3 / Xx 3 - , 
Ἀρκάδες εἰς τὴν Λακεδαίμονα, ἐκείνοις μὲν οὐκ ἐβούλετο 
Ν a / ¢ a / / a 
καὶ πᾶσι Λακεδαιμονίοις ὁμοῦ γενομένοις μάχεσθαι, ἄλλως 
Ν ᾽ / a Ν 5᾽ / Λ " 
τε καὶ εὐτυχηκόσι, τῶν δὲ ἀποτετυχηκότων " πάλιν δε 
Ν ς In 7 U4 3 Ν f A ‘ 
πορευθεὶς ὡς ἐδύνατο τάχιστα εἰς τὴν Teyeav, Tous μέν 
ε / bea 6 \ ave / Μ ? x / 
ὁπλίτας ἀνέπαυσε, Tous ὃ Lmmeas ἔπεμψεν evs THY Mavti- 


Ἂς 2 rn A Ἂ, 7 « 
νειαν, δεηθεὶς αὐτῶν προσκαρτερῆσαι, καὶ διδάσκων ὡς 





HELt. 7, Vv ] The Athenan Cavalry. 87 


, Ν 2% Μ 53 Ν “Ὁ / / 
πάντα μὲν εἰκὸς ἐξω εἶναι Ta τῶν Mavtiwewrv βοσκήματα, 
΄ 4 \ > , ΕΣ Ν 7 aa 
πώντας δὲ Tous ἀνθρωπους. ἄλλως TE καὶ σίτου συγκομιὸδὴς 
Ϊ Ν « Ν + ¢ ahve, - ¢ - 
οὔσης. 25. Καὶ ot μὲν ᾧχοντο" οἱ δ᾽' Αθηναῖοι ἱππεῖς 
/ > 8 “ 3 7ὔ Ν ᾿ 5 ᾿Ξ 
ὁρμηθέντες εξ Ἐλευσῖνος ἐδευπνοποιήσαντο μὲν ἐν ἰσθμῷ, 
7 Ν Ν \ 3 7 / " Ν 
διελθόντες δὲ τὰς Κλεωνᾶς ετύγχανον προσιόντες εἰς τὴν 
/ Ν “ ? Ν , ᾽ 
Μαντίνειαν, καὶ καταστρατοπεδευσάμενοι ἐντὸς τείχους ἐν 
re , , 7 Ν Ν A 3 ΄ ξ 7 
ταῖς οἰκίαις. ἐπεὶ δὲ δῆλοι ἦσαν προσελαύνοντες οἱ πολέ- 
3 / € cr a 2 / a / σ΄ - 
μιοι, ἐδέοντο οἱ Μαντινεῖς τῶν «Αθηναίων ἵππεων βοηθῆσαι, 


Υ 7 y Ν > Ν \ , , Ἂ 
εἰ TL δύναιντο" ἔξω yap εἶναι καὶ τὰ βοσκήματα πάντα καὶ 





Ν ) 7 ψ Ν Ν “ Ν , = 
Tous ἐργώτας, πολλοὺς δὲ καὶ TuLdas καὶ γεραιτέρους τῶν 
3 / > / Ν A ee cal 2 “- 
ἐλευθέρων" ἀκούσαντες δὲ ταῦτα οἱ Αθηναίοι ἐκβοηθοῦσιν, 
+ y 3 ’ Ν 2 \ Ν CF 2 A 
ETL ὄντες AVUpPLOTOL καὶ AUTOL Kal OL ὕἡπποι. 1G. ενταῦθα 

Ν ΄ > Ν 3 » , ? Ἃ ) / ΩΝ Ν 
δὴ τούτων αὖ τὴν ἀρετὴν τίς οὐκ ἂν ἀγασθείη ; OL καὶ 
» Ν / con \ 7 eT / 
πολυ πλείονας ορῶντες τοὺς πολεμίους. καὶ εν Κορίνθῳ 
/ 4 r ς a Ia 4 
δυστυχήματος γεγενημένου τοῖς ἱππεῦσιν, οὐδὲν τούτων 
3 / Ia c Ν 7 \ r r 
ἐπελογίσαντο, οὐδ᾽ ὅτι καὶ Θηβαίοις καὶ Θετταλοῖς τοῖς 
/ ς A 3 A Μ ᾽ὔ ? > 
κρατίστοις ἱππεῦσιν εἶναι δοκοῦσιν ἐμελλον μάχεσθαι, αλλ, 
>? , 2 / be > / \ , 
QLTYUVOMEVOL, EL παρόντες μηδὲν ὠφελήσειαν τοὺς συμμώ- 
i 9 7 Ν ? 7 > “ 
χους, ὡς εἶδον τώχιστα τοὺς πολεμίους, συνέρραξαν,. ἐρῶν- 
> 7 Ν , / Ν 
τες ἀνασώσασθαι τὴν πατρῴαν δόξαν. Α77. καὶ μαχόμενοι 
4 x o / Ἀξξ Μ 7 A r - 
@iTLOL μὲν ἐγένοντο τὰ εἕω TavTa σωθῆναι τοῖς Μαντινεῦ- 
a a π᾿ ; 7, y 2 Ν ΝΣ ΨΥ. \ 
σιν. αὑτῶν δὲ ἀπέθανον ἄνδρες ἀγαθοὶ, καὶ ἀπέκτειναν δὲ 
onr “ / Qs Ν e/ δον Ἂν oe 
ἤλον OTL TOLOVTOUS* οὐδὲν yap οὕτω βραχυ ὅπλον ἐκάτε- 
53 re 2 > a ? . Ν \ N / 
pot εἶχον ῳ οὐκ εξικνοῦντο adANAWV. καὶ τοὺς μεν φιλίους 
Χ 2 / - XN / 3 \ ς ,ὔ 
νεκροὺς οὐ προήκαντο, τῶν δὲ πολεμίων ἦν οὺς ὑποσπὸν- 
> fi 
Sous ἀπέδοσαν. 
ἢ a 9.8 , + ΄ 7 4 
15. Ὁ 6 αὖ ᾿Επαμεινώνδας, ---- ἐνθυμούμενος ὅτι ὀλίγων 
x e uo " ΄, »” > Ν Ν ae A 
μὲν ἡμερῶν avayKN ἔσοιτο ἀπιέναι, δια TO ἐξήκειν TH στρα- 

/ xX 7 3 Se , 3 7, Pe ΟΝ aw) / 

TEL@ TOV χρόνον, εἰ ὃε καταλείψροι ἐρήμους οἷς ἦλθε σύμμα- 
2 a , ip A ) / “ΠΝ Ἀ 
χος, ἐκεῖνοι πολιορκήσοιντο ὑπο τῶν ἀντιπάλων, αὑτὸς δὲ 


τῇ ἑαυτοῦ δόξη παντώπασιν ἔσοιτο λελυμασμένος, ἡττη- 
1) ἢ b μασμένος, TTY 


88 The Battle of Mantinea. [Xen, 


͵ XV 3 / \ aoe A CA / 
μένος μεν ev Aaxedaipovt σὺν πολλῷ OTALTLK@ UT ολίγων, 


ς / δὲ ? M / ε / a δὲ : 
YTTHMEVOS OE EV aAVTLVELE LTTTTOMLAN LA, αὐτίος O€ YEVEYN=- a 


/ AS een > / , A ᾽ 
μένος, δια τὴν εἰς Πελοπόννησον στρατείαν, τοῦ συνεστά- 
7 ἈΝ τ / wi Ν Q , 
vat Aaxedarpoviovs καὶ ᾿Αρκάδας καὶ ᾿Αχαιοὺς καὶ ᾿Ηλεί- 
μῶν / d 2 26 / 9.5 aes Ν 5 
ous καὶ Αθηναίους " ὥστε οὐκ ἐδόκει αὐτῷ δυνατὸν εἶναι 
ΟῚ \ a / “ 2 - / i 
ἀμαχεὶ παρελθεῖν, λογιζομένῳ OTL εἰ μὲν νικῴη, πάντα 
a 2 ΄ 3 Ν 2 / Ἂς ἜΝ \ 
ταῦτα ἀναλύσοιτο" εἰ δὲ ἀποθάνοι, καλὴν τὴν τελευτὴν 
er iny + / A / 2 \ 
ἡγήσατο ἐσεσθαι πειρωμένῳ τῇ πατρίδι ἀρχὴν Πελοπον- 
΄ cr Ν Ν 3 Ψ ΣΝ a a 
νήσου καταλίπειν. 19. TO μεν οὖν αὑτὸν τοιαῦτα διανοεῖ- 
2 / na ‘ 5 / Ν 
σθαι ov πάνυ μοι δοκεῖ θαυμαστὸν εἶναι" φιλοτίμων γὰρ 
> re \ a ; \ , N ͵ 
ἀνδρῶν τὼ τοιαῦτα διανοήματα" τὸ μέντοι τὸ στράτευμα 
, ς 7 7 2 | / if 
παρεσκευακέναι WS πόνον TE μηδένα ἀποκάμνειν [LITE VU- 
Ν / c / / μὰ 2 / , ΄ 
KTOS [NTE ἡμέρας, κινδύνου τε μηδενὸς ἀφίστασθαι, σπαάνιά 
arse 7, + “ 7, ἌΣ ΑΌΥΩΣ 
TE τὰ επιτήδεια ἔχοντας ὅμως πείθεσθαι εθέλειν, ταῦτα 


Ὡς 7 5 Ν XN « ἊΝ 
μοι δοκεῖ θαυμαστότερα εἶναι. 20. καὶ γὰρ ὅτε τὸ τεέλευ- 


a 3 a 7 ς / 2 
TALOV παρήγγειλεν αὑτοῖς παρασκευάζεσθαι ὡς μάχης ἐσο- 


/ Fi Ν 3 A Cyne ΄ Ν i sf 
μένης. προθύμως μεν ελευκοῦντο OL LTTTTELS τὰ κρανὴ κελεύ- 
᾿] 7 93 / Ν Ν € an 3 / ς rt 
OVTOS ἐκείνου, ἐπεγράφοντο d€ καὶ οἱ τῶν ἄρκαδων ὁπλῖται 
Cy ¢ a yy / δὲ > a x / 
potara, ws Θηβαῖοι ὄντες, TavTes ὃε ἠκονώντο καὶ λόγχας 
Ν / Ἂς 3 7 Ν > / 
Kal μαχαίρας, Kal ἐλαμπρύνοντο TAS ἀσπίδας. 
> \ , e/ / Cae 
28. Επεὶ μέντοι οὕτω παρεσκευασμένους εξηγαγεν, 
“ 3 τ Ve , a \ N ef 
ἄξιον av κατανοῆσαι a ἐποίησε. πρῶτον μὲν Yup, ὥσπερ 
ἘΌΝ r A . 7 / rv 7 
εἰκὸς, συνετάττετο. τοῦτο δὲ πράττων, σαφηνίζειν εδόκει 
> 7 7 > / Ν 2 , 2 an 
OTL εἰς μάχην παρεσκευάζετο" ἐπεὶ γε μὴν ἐτέτακτο αὑτῷ 


Ν 7 ς ? , . \ , Ν 
τὸ στράτευμα ὡς εβούλετο, τὴν MEV συντομωτάτην πρὸς 


Ν , > 3 Ν Ν Ν Ν Ὁ / Μ ἃς 
TOUS πολεμίους οὐκ YE, προς δὲ Ta σρος εἐσπέερᾶν OPH και. 


> A A ie ΄ “a «“ 7 r rn 
ἀντιπέραν τῆς Τεγέας ἡγεῖτο" ὥστε δόξαν παρεῖχε τοῖς 
πολεμίοις μὴ σεσθ i ἐκείνῃ TH ἡμέρᾳ. 32. καὶ 
μίοις μὴ ποιήσεσθαι μάχην ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ. 332. καὶ 
Ν δ « Ν a + be hy τὶ Ἂς 3 / f iain ta: ¢ 
yap δὴ ὡς πρὸς τῷ oper ἐγένετο, ἐπεὶ ἐξετάθη αὐτῷ ἢ 
, Cao rn ς mike bil SiGe 7 Ei / 
φαλαγξ, ὑπὸ τοῖς ὑψηλοῖς ἔθετο Ta ὅπλα, ὥστε εἰκάσθη 


/ a Ν 7 +. x lal 
στρατοπεδευομένῳ. τοῦτο δὲ ποιήσας, ἔλυσε μὲν TOV 





Ἂς 
᾿, 
ΨΥ τ 


τι 


7 





Hewt. 7, v.] Victory and Death of Epaminondas. 89 


/ / ἊΝ 3 “ a Ν , 
πλείστων πολεμίων τὴν EV Tals ψυχαῖς πρὸς μάχην Tapa- 
\ 37. Ἂν Ν > -“ , > / ‘ 
σκευὴν, ἔλυσε δὲ THY ἐν ταῖς συντάξεσιν. ἐπεί γε μὴν 
Ν XN ) \ / / / 7 / 
TApayaywv TOUS ἐπί κέρως TTOPEVOMEVOUS λόχους εἰς μετω- 
, A »] / Ν Ν ec Ν Μ , σιν 
πον, ἰσχυρὸν ETOLNTATO τὸ περὶ EavTOV ἔμβολον, τότε δὴ 
> “ Λ ἊΨ ΕΝ, ς r ΄ > / 
ἀναλαβεῖν παραγγείλας Ta ὅπλα ἡγεῖτο" οἱ ὃ ἠκολούθουν. 
€ Ν / « 5 Ν / ? 7 ? Ν ᾽ A 
οἱ δὲ πολέμιοι ws εἶδον παρὰ δόξαν ἐπιόντας, οὐδεὶς αὐτῶν 
΄ 7 yy ᾽ Σ > > ¢ ‘ » ’ \ / ξ 
ἡσυχίαν ἔχειν ἠδύνατο, ἀλλ᾿ οἱ μεν εθεον εἰς τὰς τάξεις. οἱ 
\ , ξ Ν ied > / c Ν , 
δὲ παρετώττοντο, οἱ δὲ ἵππους ἐχαλίνουν, οἱ δὲ θώρακας 
᾽ ͵΄ ΄ \ / A Ἃ , 
ἐνεδύοντο, πάντες δὲ TTELTOMEVOLS TL μᾶλλον ἢ ποιήσουσιν 
sy ε «ς Ν Ν / > / e/ 
ewxecav. 23. O δε τὸ στράτευμα ἀντίπρῳρον ὥσπερ 
“᾿ ‘ 
/ A / 7 > Ν 7 
τριήρη προσῆγε, νομίζων, ὅπῃ ἐμβαλὼν διακόψειε, διαφθε- 
-“ 7. Ἂς a ᾽ / / Ν Ν Ν a Ν 
ρεῖν ὅλον τὸ τῶν ἐναντίων στράτευμα" καὶ γὰρ δὴ τῷ μεν 
Ἂν 7 / 3 / Ν Ν :] / 
ἱσχυροτάτῳ παρεσκευάζετο ἀγωνίζεσθαι, τὸ δὲ ἀσθενέστα- 
7 2 / SAN " ε \ ? 7 ΕῪ 
TOV πόρρω ἀπέστησεν, εἰδὼς OTL ἡττηθεν αθυμίαν ἂν πα- 
7 rn ¢ a ESS, \ rn / ‘ 
ράσχοι τοῖς μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, ῥώμην δὲ τοῖς πολεμίοις. καὶ 
ἈΝ \ « / ec ‘ / 2 74 “ 
μὴν τους LTTEAS οἱ μὲν πολεμιοι ἀαντυπαρετάξαντο WaT EP 
ε κα ͵ ΄, 2 A <> oy Ἂ re 
ὁπλιτῶν parayya βαθος, εφεξῆς καὶ ἔρημον πεζῶν ἁμίπ- 
. 3. / 3 ᾿ς a € . ἊΨ 
mov: 24.06 Emapewwvdas av καὶ τοῦ ἱππικοῦ ἔμβολον 
2 Ἂς 3 / Ν ς / ἈΝ ΄ ? - 
ἰσχυρὸν ἐποιήσατο, καὶ ἁμίππους πεζους συνέταξεν αὑτοῖς. 
/ <2. € Ν 2 Ν 7 «. Ν ? / 
νομίζων TO ἱππικὸν ἐπεί διακόψειεν, ολον TO ἀντίπαλον 
‘\ yy Λ Ν Ν ς ΄“ \ 3 , 
νενικηκὼς ἔσεσθαι" pura yap χαλεπον evpety τους εθελη- 
/ 2 / 4 “- [ἡ a ΄ rn 
σοντᾶς μένειν. ἐπειδὰν τινας φεύγοντας τῶν ἑαυτῶν ὁρῶσι" 
ἌΣ g NAD a e'%5 nr st) Ἂς A 2 ΄ 
καὶ ὅπως μὴ ἐπιβοηθῶσιν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀπὸ τοῦ εὐωνύμου 
΄, Se a Ὁ αν τ / aN ἢ a 
κέρατος ETL TO ἐχόμενον, κατέστησεν ἐπὶ γηλόφων τινῶν 
3 s_@ 2 a Nee / Ne / Vi / 
ἐναντίους αὑτοῖς καὶ ἵππέας καὶ ὁπλίτας. φοβον βουλόμενος 
Ν ΄ Pr ¢ ’ , ¥ e ; 
καὶ τούτοις παρέχειν ὧς, εἰ βοηθήσαιεν, ὀπισθεν οὗτοι επι- 
2 - Ν Ν Ν Ν e/ > 7 
κείσοιντο αὑτοῖς. τὴν μὲν δὴ συμβολὴν οὕτως ἐποιήσατο, 
Ν > 3 va ἘΞ 3. 7 7 ἈΝ Ξς 7 
καὶ οὐκ ἐψεύσθη τῆς ἐλπίδος " κρατήσας γὰρ ἢ προσεβα- 
: «. ? , ΄ Ν - 2 7 a / 
Aev ὅλον ἐποίησε φεύγειν τὸ τῶν ἐναντίων. 25. Επεί ye 
Ν 3 “-“ Μ ς Ν Ia a / , θῶ Μ ὃ / 
μὴν εκεῖνος ἔπεσεν, οἱ λοιποὶ οὐδὲ τῇ νίκῃ ορθῶς ETL εουνά- 
, 3 < 4, ‘ - la “a ? 
σθησαν χρήσασθαι. ἀλλὰ φυγούσης μεν αὐτοῖς THs εναν- 


90 Character of Socrates. [Xen. 


, » κα 7 Sree εε A ar x 
τίας φάλαγγος, οὐδένα ἀπέκτειναν οἱ ὁπλῖται, οὐδὲ προῆλ- 
? a / y+ ¢ > ) / Η / δ 
θον ἐκ τοῦ χωρίου ἔνθα ἡ συμβολὴ ἐγένετο" φυγόντων 
2 a a ¢ b) / Ν Iw? ©. fe r 7 
αὐτοῖς καὶ TOV ἱππέων, ἀπέκτειναν μὲν OVO οἱ ὑππεῖς διω- 
᾿ Μ «ς / Sy e¢ / vA Se ¢ , 
KOVTES οὔτε ἱππέας OVO ὁπλίτας, ὥσπερ OE ἡττωμενοῖ πεφο- 
/ Ν an / / / Ν Ν 
βημένως διὰ τῶν φευγόντων πολεμίων διέπεσον. καὶ μὴν 
᾿ ¢ Ν / r « a 
οἱ ἅμιπποι καὶ OL πελτασταὶ, TUVVEVLKNKOTES τοῖς ὑππεῦσιν, 
3 / 7 » > Ν n 3 ΄ὔ «ς lal 3 lal >) (4 Ν 
ἀφίκοντο μὲν ἐπὶ τοῦ εὐωνύμου, ὡς κρατοῦντες, ἐκεῖ ὃ ὑπὸ 
a 3 / ¢ a 2 a 3 / 
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων οἱ πλεῖστοι αὐτῶν ἀπέθανον. 
͵ὕ Ν / 2 / 3 7 - 
26. Τούτων δε πραχθέντων, τουναντίον EYEYEVNTO οὐ 
3 / Us Μ BA / Ν 
ἐνόμισαν πάντες ἄνθρωποι ἔσεσθαι. συνεληλυθυίας yap 
Ν ς / A ς / Ν 3 / 2 Ἂν 
σχεδὸν ataons τῆς Ελλάδος, καὶ ἀντιτεταγμένων, οὐδεὶς 
53 7 3 + 3 , a4 Ν Ν , 
ἣν ὅστις οὐκ WETO, εἰ μάχη ἔσοιτο, TOUS μὲν κρατήσαντας 
Μ ‘ Ν / ic. / Μ ς Ν Ν 
ἄρξειν, τους δὲ κρατηθέντας ὑπηκόους ἔσεσθαι" ὁ δὲ θεὸς 
« 2 / / 2 / ‘ / e 
οὕτως ἐποίησεν ὥστε ἀμφότεροι μὲν τρόπαιον ὡς νενικη- 
7 ᾽ , \ NT) 3e ἦν Sys a Rta, 
κότες ἐστήσαντο, τοὺς δε ἱσταμένους οὐδέτεροι εκώλυον, 
Ν x 3 / XN ς / ς / 3 / 
νεκροὺς δε ἀμφότεροι μὲν WS VEVLKNKOTES ὑποσπόνδους ὠπέ- 
2 , Mare ς / ¢ / ) 7 
δοσαν, ἀμφότεροι δὲ ὡς ἡττημένοι ὑποσπόνδους ἀπελάμ- 
/ \ , δ γα ” 7 
βανον. 2%. νενικηκέναι δὲ φάσκοντες εκάτεροι οὔτε Ywpa 
έ 
» , 47 5... 3 A Ins Ar / yy 2 7ὕ 
οὔτε πόλει οὔτ ἀρχῇ οὐδέτεροι οὐδὲν πλέον ἔχοντες ἐφώνη- 
‘\ Ν Ν ΄ ΄ 2 / bs Ν Ν 
σαν ἢ πρὶν τὴν μάχην γενέσθαι". ἀκρισία δὲ καὶ ταραχὴ 
oy / \ \ , 5 i x ᾽ ne 
ETL πλείων μετὰ τὴν μάχην ἐγένετο ἢ προσθεν ev τῇ Ελ- 
(ὃ 2 Ν x \ / 7 ΄ Ν Ν Ν 
λάδι. ἐμοὶ μὲν δὴ μέχρι τούτου γραφέσθω" τὰ δε μετὰ 
Qn ”v y+. / 
TAUTA LOWS ἄλλῳ μελήσει. 


eee ee eee, 


IV. CHARACTER OF SOCRATES. 
[Memorabilia, I.] 
I. Πολλάκις ἐθαύμασα, τίσι ποτὲ λόγοις ᾿Αθηναίους 
ἔπεισαν οἱ γραψάμενοι Σωκράτην, ὡς ἄξιος εἴη θανάτου τῇ 


L ε \ N Ν > 2 A tf Φ 
πόλει. ἢ μὲν Yap γραφὴ κατ᾽ αὑτοῦ τοιᾶδε τις ἦν᾽ ---- 









Meo. 1, 1.7 His Piety. 91 


? a / \ be. e ,ὔ ’ 
Αδικεῖ Σωκράτης ovs pev ἡ πόλις νομίξει 
χ > / “ ’ Ν , ; 
θεους ov νομίζων. ἕτερα δε καινὰ δαιμόνια εἰσ- 
͵ > va Ν Ν Ν / 
φέρων: ἀδικεῖ δὲ καὶ τοὺς νέους διαφθείρων. 
ca Ν > e ? ἐκ τίς \ id / / 
~ 2. Πρῶτον μεν οὖν, ws οὐκ evomilev ous ἡ πόλις νομίζει 
\ / > τῷ / / ΄ ‘ 
θεοὺς, ποίῳ ToT ἐχρήσαντο τεκμηρίῳ ; θύων τε yup φανε- 
) 9. , \ oY] ΄, et Pe, n A 
pos ἣν, πολλακις MEV OLKOL, TOAAUKLS δὲ ἐπὶ τῶν κοινῶν 
A /. a \ a / > 3 \ > 
τῆς πόλεως βωμῶν, Kal μαντικῇ χρώμενος οὐκ ἀφανὴς ἣν" 
| 4 Ν e / A Ν , ε a 
διετεθρύλητο yap, ὡς φαίη Σωκρώτης τὸ δαιμόνιον ἑαυτῷ 
͵ 7] N \ 7 7 a i , , 
σημαίνειν" ὅθεν δὴ καὶ μάλιστα μοι δοκοῦσιν αὑτὸν aiTtiu- 
Ἂ / 3 / ς Ν Iar 7, 
σασθαι καινὰ δαιμόνια εἰσφέρειν. 8. ὁ δε οὐδὲν καινότε- 
Σ 4 lal yf cd Ν / , 
pov εἰσέφερε τῶν ἄλλων, ὅσοι, μαντίκην νομίζοντες, οἰω- 
a a Ν / Ν , ‘ / 
νοῖς TE χρῶνται καὶ φήμαις καὶ συμβόλοις καὶ θυσίαις. 
@ / \ ς 7 2 eo a Iar Ν 
οὗτοί TE γὰρ ὑπολαμβάνουσιν οὐ τοὺς ὀρνιίθας οὐδὲ τοὺς 
> al 3 / x / “ / 
ἀπαντῶντας εἰδέναι τὰ συμφέροντα τοῖς μαντευομεένοις, 
2 Ν Ν ἣ Ν 7 PEA | / > an «{ 
ἀλλὰ τοὺς θεους δια τούτων αὑτὰ σημαίνειν, κακεῖνος οὗ- 
ΓΤ > Ἀν Ὁ \ rn / ἜΑ, - 
τως ἐνομιζεν. 4. ἀλλ οἱ μεν πλείστοί φασιν ὑπὸ τε τῶν 
5 / ‘ r > / 3 4 / Ν 4 
ορνίθων Kat TOV ἁπαντωντων ἀποτρέπεσθαι TE καὶ προτρέ- 
/ ἊΝ « 2 ee e/ 20 
πεσθαι' Σωκράτης δὲ ὥσπερ ἐγίγνωσκεν οὕτως ἔλεγε" 
on” / XV Μ / Ν re r / 
To δαιμονίον yap epn σημαίνειν. καὶ πολλοῖς τῶν ξυνον- 
/ Ν Ν nr ἈΝ Ν 4 r ξ΄ A 
των προηγόρευε τὰ meV ποιεῖν, τὰ δὲ μὴ ποιεῖν, WS TOU 
/ / Ν lal Ἂς / > ad 
δαιμονίου προσημαίνοντος. καὶ τοῖς μὲν πειθομένοις αὐτῷ 
/ “ Ν XN / / / 
συνέφερε, Tors δὲ μὴ πειθομένοις μετέμελε. 5. καίτοι 
/ 2 \ ς 7 Δ τας 7 f 19 , / 
τίς οὐκ ἂν ὁμολογήσειεν αὐτὸν βούλεσθαι pnt ἠλίθιον 
Ἂ 9 > / / a a > / aa aK ? / 
pnt ἀλαζόνα φαίνεσθαι τοῖς συνοῦσιν ; ἐδόκει 6 av αμφο- 
A > 7 e ς Ν »“ / 3 
τερα ταῦτα, εἰ Tpoayopevwy ws ὕπο θεοῦ φαινόμενα εἶτα 
7 " 7 a a 77 ? x 1 > 
ψευδόμενος ἐφαίνετο. δῆλον οὖν, OTL οὐκ ἂν προέλεγεν, εἰ 
Ν 3 / 3 / . A Ν / ΕΥ Μ ΄ 
μὴ ἐπίστευεν ἀληθεύσειν. ταῦτα δε τὶς ἂν ἄλλῳ πιστεύ- 
“ἍἋ a ἢ» Ν κ a 2 3 Ν 
σειεν ἢ θεῷ ; πιστεύων δὲ θεοῖς, πῶς οὐκ εἶναι θεοὺς 
By gh 
εἐνομίζεν ; 
2 N \ Σ ͵ N , Ν N 7 / 
6. Adda pny ἐποίει Kal τάδε προς τους ἐπιτηδείους. 


Ν Ν Ν 2 a ΄ Ν / e 3 / 
Ta μὲν γὰρ ἀναγκαία συνεβούλευε καὶ πράττειν. ὡς EVO- 





92 Character of Socrates. Ὁ [Xun, 


" > 4 Ξ ἜΣ ae ἐδ Ψ . 
μιζεν ἄριστ᾽ ἂν πραχθῆναι" περὶ δὲ τῶν ἀδήλων ὅπως 
> / 7 + 3 / \ 
ἀποβήσοιτο, μαντευσομένους ἔπεμπεν EL TOLNTEA. Fs καὶ 

Ν Λ " oS , a δι ἢ ; 
TOUS μέλλοντας οἰκοὺς τε καὶ πόλεις καλως οἰκησειν μαν- 
Ἐν “ = Ν Ν Ν AN . 
τικῆς edn προσδεῖσθαι. τεκτονικὸν μὲν γὰρ ἢ χαλκευτι- 
Ν x Ν \ > / > Ss “δ a ΄ 
κὸν ἢ γεωργικὸν ἢ ἀνθρώπων ἀρχίκοὸν ἢ τῶν τοιούτων 
¥ 3 δ tee Seger ee ray Κα Β᾽ 
ἐργων ἐξεταστικὸν ἢ λογιστικὸν 1 οἰκονομίκον ἢ στρατη- 
Ν / / S a / Nae? 7 iq 
γιίκον γενέσθαι, πάντα Ta τοιαῦτα μαθήματα καὶ ἀνθρώπου 
7 ¢ / a, ἕ 3 εὖ 8 Ν ἊΝ / an 2 
γνωμῃ alpeTea ἐνομίζεν εἰνα - Τὰ O€ μεγιστα τῶν εν 
΄ Μ Ν Ν ς a / e ar 4 
τούτοις ἔφη τοὺς Yeovs ἑαυτοῖς καταλείπεσθαι, ὧν οὐδὲν 
A “- ra] 5 , + Ἂς A r 3 x, 
δῆλον εἶναι τοῖς avOpwirots. οὔτε γὰρ τῷ καλως ἀγρον 
/ A A ’ + a rn 
φυτευσαμένῳ δῆλον ὅστις καρπωσεται" οὔτε τῷ καλῶς 
"ἢ / 3 5 / Sar e/ >) / " BA rn 
οἰκίαν OLKOCOMNTALEVM ONAOV OGTLS οἰκήσει" οὔτε TW OTPA- 

a A 2 , a BA a Aa 
THY UK δῆλον εἰ συμφέρει στρατηγειν " οὔτε τῷ πολιτικῷ 
A 3 [2 A /. va + a “ 
δῆλον εἰ συμφέρει τῆς πόλεως προστατεῖν" οὔτε τῷ καλὴν 

/ “ 2 / A el] Ν ΄ 2 , 
γήμαντι, va εὐφραίνηται, δῆλον εἰ διὰ ταύτην ανιάσεται" 
7 τ ‘ b) r ,, Ν / A "ἢ 
οὔτε τῳ δυνατους ἐν τῇ πόλει κηδεστὰς λαβοντι δῆλον él 
δ ΄ ἌΣ a t Ν x Ν Ἢ 
διὰ τούτους στερήσεταν τῆς πόλεως. 9. τοὺς δὲ μηδεν : 
fn / 5 / 4 / 3 Ν δώ A i 
τῶν τοιούτων οἰομένους εἶναι δαιμονιον, ἀλλὰ πάντα τῆς: 
5 / 7 a A A Ἂ, Ν Ν 
ἀνθρωπίνης γνωμῆης, δαιμονᾶν edn: δαιμονᾶν δὲ καὶ Tous: 
/ ἃ rn 5) , yx ε τ A 
μαντευομένους ἃ τοῖς ἀνθρώποις eOwKay ot θεοὶ μαθοῦσι: 
/ ®@ 5 2 / / 2 , 
διακρίνειν * οἷον, εἰ TLS ETEPWT@N πότερον ἐπιστάμενον 
« a 2 aN a a a Ἃ ἊΝ 2 / x 
ἡνιοχεῖν ἐπὶ ζεῦγος λαβεῖν κρεῖττον, ἢ μὴ επιστάμενον" ἢ 
ἤ 3 , a Logs Ν A ΄σ 
πότερον ἐπίσταμενον κυβερνᾶν ἐπὶ τὴν ναῦν κρεῖττον λα- 
o x doit td / inte: o¥ 2 ’ xX 
βεῖν, ἢ μὴ ἐπιστάμενον" ἢ a ἔξεστιν ἀριθμήσαντας ἢ με- 
,ὕ \ 7 IA 7 Ν ὧν a Ν aA ‘ 
τρήσαντας ἢ στήσαντας εἰδέναι, TOUS τὰ τοιαῦτα παρὰ TOV 
ra a / 52 7 Ae 6 le " \ a 
εῶν πυνθανομένους ἀθέμιτα ποιεῖν ἡγεῖτο. ἔφη Se δεῖν, 
ἃ » / Rigo a ε Ν , A Ν Ν 
ἃ μὲν μαθόντας ποιεῖν ἔδωκαν οἱ θεοὶ. μανθάνειν" ἃ δὲ μὴ 
“A “ > 7 3 Ν A Ν A Ν 
δῆλα τοῖς ἀνθρώποις ἐστὶ. πειρᾶσθαι διὰ μαντικῆς παρὰ 
n a 7 Χ Ν Ν ΙΧ 5 ¢/. 
τῶν θεῶν πυνθάνεσθαι" tous OEeous yap, οἷς ἂν ὦσιν ἔλεῳ, 
7] 
σημαίνειν. 


3 ‘ Ν Σ a 7 Ν A : A 
10. ᾿Αλλὰ μὴν ἐκεῖνός γε ἀεὶ μὲν ἦν ἐν τῷ φανερῷ" TPO 





‘Men. 1, 1] False Philosophers. 93 


N 5 Ν 7 x Ν , ” N 
τε γὰρ εἰς τοὺς περιπάτους Kat τὰ γυμνάσια ἤει, καὶ πλης- 
/ 2 a > lad Ν > Ν Ν Ν πος A ΄ ͵ 
θούσης ἀγορᾶς ἐκεῖ φανερος ἣν, Καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν ἀεὶ τῆς ἡμέρας 
/ / 1 / a. 7 ν᾿ e 
ἣν ὅπου πλείστοις μέλλοι συνέσεσθαι" καὶ ἔλεγε μὲν OS 
Ν Ν “ Ν / IgA 7 / ) Ν Ν 
τὸ πολὺ. τοῖς δε βουλομενοις ἐξῆν ἀκούειν. ἘΔ. οὐδεὶς δὲ 
7 7 29s ) Ν WON 49 OL » , 
πώποτε Σωκράτους οὐδεν ἀσεβὲς οὐδὲ ἀνόσιον οὔτε πρωτ- 
> BY / yy Ia’ Ν ‘ a 
TovTOS εἶδεν, οὔτε λέγοντος ἤκουσεν. οὐδὲ γὰρ περι τῆς 
na 7 7 e rn ΝΜ ς r / 
τῶν πάντων φύσεως, ἤπερ τῶν ἄλλων Ol TAELTTOL, διελέ- 
a / ¢ 7 VR al r 
γετο, — σκοπῶν ὅπως ὁ καλούμενος ὑπὸ τῶν σοφιστῶν 
/ yf Ν / 2 / vA / - ? 
κόσμος ἔχει; καὶ τίσιν ἀνάγκαις ἕκαστα γίγνεται τῶν ουρα- 
,ὕ > Ν Ν Ν / Ἀ A ͵ 
νΐων, ---- ἀλλα καὶ TOUS φροντίζοντας τὰ τοιαῦτα μωραινον- 
> / 
TAS ὠπεδεικνυ. 
Ν fal ‘\ > fal > 7 / / , 
12. Καὶ πρῶτον μεν αὑτὼν ἐσκόπει, TOTEPA ποτε νομι- 
ε ΘΕ, ? Ἵ ὅς 7 ” Stine a Bis ES 
σαντες ἱκανῶς ἤδη τανθρωπινὰα εἰδέναι, ἔρχονται ἔπι TO περί 
a 7 / ΝΥ \ δ > , 7 
τῶν τοιούτων φροντίζειν, ἢ τὰ μεν ἀνθρώπινα παρεντες, 
\ 7 Ν a ς A \ , , 
Ta Sanpovia Se TKOTOUVTES, ἡγοῦνται τὰ προσήκοντα πρωτ- 
’ Ζ \ ’ . Ν “ἃ " Ὁ ? / 
τειν. 38. ἐθαύμαζε Se εν μὴ φανερὸν αὐτοῖς εστιν, OTL 
rn 2 ,ὔ 2 4 , ς rn 3 Ν Ν XN 
radra ov Suvatov eotiv avOpwrors εὑρεῖν " εἴτε ΚΟΥ TOUS 
/ a by ae a Ν / / ? . ΜῈ 
μέγιστον φρονοῦντας ἐπὶ τῷ πέρι τούτων λέγειν οὐ ταυτῷ 
7, > / 2 Ν rc / e / r 
δοξάζειν ἀλλήλοις, ἀλλα τοὺς μαινομένοις ὁμοίως διακεῖσθαι 
Ν > / a Ν / \ Ν 
προς ἀλλήλους. 14. τῶν TE γάρ μαινομένων TOUS μὲν 
ΡΣ - \ ,γ- Χ Ν Ν ‘ Ἂς Ν “ 
οὐδὲ τὰ δεινὰ δεδιέναι, τοὺς δὲ Kal τὰ μή φοβερὰ φοβει- 
Ν a) Ν 5 9 27 val 5 Ν 3 7 
σθαι- καὶ τοῖς μὲν οὐδ ἐν OXAW δοκεῖν αἰσχρὸν εἰναι λε- 
“Δ cr « A r Ἂ, I~ 5353 7] > 2 » 
γειν ἢ ποιεῖν ὁτιοὺν, τοῖς δὲ οὐδ᾽ ἐξιτητέον εἰς ἀνθρώπους 
> a Ν Xx Ν Sr ¢ Ν BA Ν Μ y 
εἶναι δοκεῖν " καὶ TOUS μὲν ov@ ιερον οὔτε βωμὸν οὔτε ἀλλο 
-“ / Ia al Ν Ν Ν / Ν ΄ Ν 
τῶν θείων οὐδὲν τιμᾶν, τοὺς δὲ καὶ λίθους καὶ ξύλα Ta 
/ Ν / / re Ν A al / 
τυχόντα καὶ θηρία σέβεσθαι" τῶν τε περι τῆς τῶν TAVTOY 
΄ 7 cr ἈΝ εκ ‘\ y πων 5 
φύσεως μεριμνωντῶν τοὺς μὲν δοκεῖν ἐν μόνον τὸ ὃν εἶναι; 
rf ~ ΝΜ Ν A ‘ »“ ἃς 2% re ͵7 
τοῖς δὲ ἄπειρα τὸ πλῆθος " καὶ τοὺς μὲν ἀεὶ κινεῖσθαι πάν- 
a \ Iar ae νῷ ἐν \ ε χ ΄ 
τα, τοῖς δὲ οὐδεν ἂν ποτε κινηθῆναι" καὶ τοῖς μὲν πᾶντᾶ 
, , ΝΣ Ek soll a \ yon ͵ 
γίγνεσθαι τε καὶ ἀπόλλυσθαι. τοῖς δὲ οὔτ ἂν γενέσθαι 


Ν Ia Μ >] / > ὕὔ Ν x ? cr 
ποτὲ OVOEV οὔτε ἀπολέσθαι. Ld. Εσκοπει δὲ περι αὐτῶν 





94 Character of Socrates. [Xen : 


Ν / NP To 2 ¢ > , θ , ε = $ 
Kat ταδε- ap 5 ὥσπερ OL τανθρωπεια μαν QAVOVTES nyovvtTat 


An 7] \ / ς a Ν “ δ c/ ΕΥ 
τοῦθ΄, 6 τι ἂν μάθωσιν, ἐαυτοῖς TE καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ὅτῳ ἂν 


7. / / Ν ς΄ Ν nw an , 
βούλωνται ποίησεν, οὕτω καὶ οἱ τὰ θεῖα ζητοῦντες νομί- Ὁ 


2 \ a @ BO: cf / ΄ 
ζουσιν, ἐπειδὰν γνωσιν αἷς ἀνάγκαις EKATTA γίγνεται, ποίη- 
a ΄ hy IY 2 ‘ ἯΣ ΡΤ Ν 
σειν, oTav βούλωνται, καὶ ἀνέμους καὶ ὕδατα καὶ ὥρας καὶ 
“ A A / a “4 Ἃ a \ Ios 
OTOU ἂν ἄλλου δέωνται τῶν τοίουτῶν ; τοιοῦ τ μὲν πόδ 
Iad 3 / 5 “ ᾿] 2 lad rn / @ Qn 7 
οὐδ᾽ ἐλπίζουσιν, ἀρκεῖ ὃ αὐτοῖς γνῶναι μόνον ἢ τῶν τοιού- 
7] 7 Ν Ν 3 “ A 
των ἕκαστα γίγνεται; 1G. περὶ μεν οὖν τῶν TavTa πρα- 
/ A If, AES Ν Ν al 3 
γματευομεένων τοιαῦτα ἔλεγεν. autos δὲ περι τῶν ἀνθρω- 
7 ἅν Ὡς / a / 3 \ a. ' f 
πείων ἀεὶ διελέγετο, σκοόπων TL εὕσεβὲες, τί ἄσεβες - τί 
S / ) / / oy / τὸ ᾿ / ζῶ 
καλον, τί UWaXPOV* TL OLKaLov, TE AdLiKOV* Ὡς σωφροσύνη, 
/ / (dae) / / / / , / / / 
TL μανία" τί ἀνδρία, τί δειλία - τί πόλις, TL πολιτικός τί 
> XN 2 / γι Ὁ Ν ? / Ν Ν lal oS 
apyn ἀνθρώπων, τί ἄρχίκος ἀνθρωπων" καὶ περι τῶν αλ- 
ἃ \ ‘ INS ς fay \ \ . Ν 4 
λων. ἃ τοὺς μεν εἰδότας NYELTO καλοὺυς καὶ ἀγαθοὺς εἰναι, 
\ ae) a ) / \ / 
Tous δὲ ἀγνοοῦντας ἀνδραποδώδεις ἂν δικαίως κεκλῆσθαι. 
“ \ 3 ’ Ne aes, δὲς ᾽ 
17. Oca μὲν οὖν μὴ φανερὸς ἣν ὅπως εγέγνωσκεν, ov- 
\ \ CaEEN 7 Ν 3 a a : 
δὲν θαυμαστὸν UTEP τουτων περὶ αὐτοῦ Tapayvwvat τοὺς 
, a \ ΄ὔ Υγ Ν 5) ᾿ς ΄ 
δικαστάς - ὅσα δὲ πώντες ηδεσαν, θαυμαστὸν εἰ μὴ τουτων 
2 / 7 , Ἂς ΄᾿Ν 
ἐνεθυμήθησαν. 148, βουλεύσας γὰρ ποτε, καὶ τὸν βου- 
Ν “ bina 2 @ 4 \ \ , 
AeUTLKOV OPKOV ομοσᾶς, ἐν ᾧ ἦν κατὰ τους νόμους βου- 
fi 2 7 3 A / 7 2 ’ὔ 
Nevo ev, ἐπιστάτης ἐν τῷ δήμῳ γένομενος, ἐπιθυμήσαντος 
a 5 / Ν \ / 3 ͵ὔ ἊΝ a i 
TOV δήμου παρὰ τοὺς νόμους ἐννέα στρατηγους μιᾷ ψήφῳ 
Ν ? Ν 7] ΝΡ / > a 7 
Tous ἀαμῴφι Θράσυλλον καὶ Ἐρασινίδην ἀποκτεῖναι πάντας, 
2 6 aN 3 / 5 7 Ν > a A ὃ v4 
ουκ ἡθελησεν εἐπιψηφίσαι, οργιζομένου μὲν αὐτῷ TOV δήμου, 
a x Ν an 5) Yh ) XN Ἂς / 
πολλὼν δε Kai δυνατῶν ἀπειλούντων" ἀλλὰ πέρι πλείονος 
᾽ / Σ ra \ / A , Ν Ν / 
“ποιήσατο εὐορκεῖν ἢ χαρίσασθαι TO δήμῳ Tapa To δί- 
\ , \ > A “—) Ν Ν 
Kalov καὶ φυλαξασθαι τους ἀπείλουντας. | 19. Kai yap 
> a θ θ \ > + ᾽ , > ἃ 7 : 
εἐπιμελεισθαι θεοὺς ενομιζεν ἀνθρώπων, OVX OV τρόπον οἱ 
“ἢ / @ ἣν \ yf Ν \ \ 
πολλοὶ νομίζουσιν. οὗτοι μὲν γὰρ olovtat tous θεοὺς τὰ 
ν GS 7 \ \ 2 Sus , an 
μεν εἰδέναι, τὰ δὲ οὐκ εἰδέναι" Σωκράτης δ᾽ ἡγεῖτο πίντα 
\ ἊΝ Ins ΄ 7 ΥὟ Ny 
μεν θεοὺς εἰδέναι, τώ τε λεγόμενα καὶ πραττόμενα. καὶ τὰ 








Mem. 4, vit] Character of Socrates. 95 


! a A ‘ a 
σιγῇ βουλευόμενα, πανταχου δὲ παρείναιυ, καὶ σημαίνειν 
r 3 , = rn > / / 
τοῖς ἀνθρώποις περὶ TOV ἀνθρωπείων πάντων. 
/ 3 «“ ‘ 3 / r 
20. Θαυμάζω οὖν, ὁπως ποτε ἐπείσθησαν ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
, \ Ν i. Ν r Ν , ry* Ν 
Σωκράτην περί τοὺς θεοὺς μὴ σωφρονεῖν, τὸν ἀσεβες μεν 
Bey 7 Ν Ν Ν ΕΣ > / yA / 
οὐδέν ποτε πρὸς Tous Jeous οὐτ EelmovTa οὔτε πράξαντα" 
] lal XN Ν ΄, \ / Ν a a? 
τοιαῦτα δὲ καὶ λέγοντα καὶ πραττοντῶ πέρι θεῶν, οἷα τις 
woe Ν / \ 7 Ν / ἢ , 
ἂν καὶ λέγων καὶ πράττων en TE Καὶ νομίζοιτο εὐσεβε- 


OTATOS. 


—————————— ,'οὰβο--- 


[Book IV., ch. viii] 


aA 5 , ’ @ 3 ἐν 13 A 
111. Τῶν δὲ Σωκράτην γιγνωσκοντῶν vos ἣν, OL ἀρετῆς 
> / 7 54 \ a a , / 
ἐφιέμενοι πάντες ETL καὶ VU διατελοῦσι πάντων μάλιστα 
ft Ste 2 A e > ΄ y Ν > eed 
ποθοῦντες ἐκεῖνον, ὡς ὠφελιμώτατον OVTA πρὸς ἀρετῆς ETI 
t TEN N \ a τ :- ay ΜΝ 7 
μέλειαν. ἐμοί μεν δὴ. τοιοῦτος ὧν οἷον eyo διήγημαι, ---- 
>’ Ν > ed «“ ΧΝ + A a a / 
εὐσεβὴς μὲν οὕτως, ὥστε μηδὲν ἄνευ τῆς τῶν θεῶν γνωμης 
"τῷ ,ὔ err) 2 / ΩΣ \ τ 7 
ποιεῖν δίκαιος Se, ὥστε βλάπτειν μεν μηδὲ μικρὸν μηδένα, 
μ aA ἧς \ / ‘ / ς an >] Ν 
ὠφελεῖν δὲ τὰ μέγιστα τοὺς χρωμένους εαὐτῷ" ἐγκρατῆς 
Ν cd / “ Ν ed > Ν nr 7 
δὲ, ὥστε μηδέποτε προαιρεῖσθαι τὸ ἥδιον ἀντὶ τοῦ βελτιο- 
, ΝΟ ΟΝ \ , , δ / 
νος " φρόνιμος δε, ὥστε μὴ διαμαρτάνειν κρίνων τὰ βελτίω 
Ἂς Ν 7] N + r > 3 > / 
καὶ τὰ χείρω, μηδε ἄλλου προσδεῖσθαι, αλλ avTapKys 
= Ν = 3 / = ε Ν \ Ν 7 ᾽ κ 
εἶναι πρὸς τὴν τούτων γνῶσιν, LKAVOS δὲ καὶ λόγῳ εἰπεὶν 
Ν ’ / Ν A ε Ν ὃς A. oe. 
τε καὶ διορίσασθαι Ta τοιαυτα, ἱκᾶνος δὲ καὶ ἄλλους δοκι- 
Cep? x τ , 3 , Ν ων 
μώσαι τε καὶ ἁμαρτάνοντας ἐξελέγξαι, Kal προτρέψασθαι 
“ek 5 Ν Ν 2 / In / a > > 
ἐπ᾿ ἀρετὴν Kat καλοκἀγαθίαν, ---- ἐδόκει τοιουτος εἶναι, οἷος 
Ἃ Mats ὦ , 53εἰ Ν ? / : / Ἂς 
ἂν εἴη ἄριστὸς τε ἀνὴρ Kat εὐδαιμονέστατος. εἰ δὲ τῷ μὴ 
= bent a / Nee 5 Ν A 
ἀρέσκει TAVTA, παραβάλλων TO ἄλλου ἦθος προς ταῦτα, 


[2 ͵ 
οὕτω κρινέτω. 


PLATO; 








I. SOCRATES BEFORE HIS JUDGES. 


? ee te , > Κ ? a 
1. Ov πολλοῦ xy ἕνεκα χρόνου, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, 
Μ {. Ν ἊΜ ¢ x a / Ν λ , 
ὄνομα ἕξετε καὶ αἰτίαν ὑπὸ τῶν βουλομένων τὴν πόλιν 
a ¢ , > / yo / / Ἅ, 
λοιδορεῖν, ὡς Σωκρωώτη ὠπεκτονατε, ἄνδρα σοφον" φησουσι, 
ν 7 XN 5 > Ν Ν phy ee SX € 7 c ΟΣ 
yap δή με σοφὸν εἶναι, εἰ καὶ μὴ εἰμί, οἱ βουλόμενοι vp 
> AP ὅῃς te ΕΘ, / eR ἡ / δες aa 
ὀνειδίζειν. εἰ οὖν περιεμείνωτε ολίγον χρόνον. aTTO τοῦ 
2 / “δ ὌΧ ὧν n 2 Zz ων Ν be Ν ¢ Ἤ 
αὐτομάτου ἂν ULL TOUTO ἐγένετο" OpaTE γὰρ δὴ τὴν ᾿λι- 
7 a 7 “ 5) ὡς a / , x 2 ΄ ᾿ 
κίαν, OTL πόρρω ἤδη ἐστὲ τοῦ βίου, θανώτου δὲ ἐγγύς. 
7 Ν a > Ν 7 ς α 3 Ἂς Ν Ν > “ᾧ 
λέγω δὲ τοῦτο οὐ πρὸς πάντας ὑμᾶς. ἀλλὰ πρὸς TOUS ἐμοῦ 
/ / / N ιν 7 δ 
καταψηφισαμένους θάνατον. 2 λέγω δὲ καὶ TodEe πρὸς 
\ 2 \ 7 yo Υ Δ. αν 3 , 
TOUS αὑτοὺς τούτους " Lows με οίεσθε, ὦ ἄνδρες, ὠπορίᾳ 
7 ς 7 ΄ @ Ἃ ς «κα ΕΣ 5 Ε . 
λόγων EAXWKEVAL TOLOVTWY οἷς ἂν LEAS ETTELTA, EL ὡμὴν 
mn vA “Pe Ν ΄ cd 2 n * / Γ 
δεῖν ἅπαντα ποιεῖν καὶ λέγειν ὥστε ἀποφυγεῖν τὴν δίκην. 
A a > 3 i S 6} 2 / , : 
πολλοῦ YE δεῖ. adr ἀπορίᾳ μεν EANWKA, οὐ MEVTOL λόγων, 


3 \ / ἣν 49 / Ν ar 1. , Ν 
ἀλλὰ τολμῆς καὶ ἀναισχυντίας καὶ τοῦ εθέλειν λέγειν προς 


NL 2 / ee A an Ν / N 
μου καὶ οδυρομένου καὶ ἄλλα ποιοῦντος καὶ λέγοντος πολλὰ 
eee ty, 2 a ε ae Yi - ἈΝ Ν Sy ¢ a 
καὶ ἀνάξια ἐμοῦ, ὡς eyo φημι" οἷα dn καὶ εἰθισθε υμεῖς 
a y 2 / iat ΡῚ 3 By 4 / 37 a 4 
τῶν ἄλλων ἀκούειν. | B arr οὔτε τότε φήθην δεῖν ἕνεκα 
A δύ a Jar Ψ 7 ΕΒ - 
τοῦ κινδύνου πρᾶξαι οὐδὲν ἀνελεύθερον, οὔτε νῦν μοι μετα- 
Ὁ a 9 / > \ Ν an ε A 
μέλει οὕτως ἁἀπολογησαμένῳ, ἀλλα πολυ μαλλον aLpovpaAt 
δὃ 2 / 6 / aN Ὁ fe ies + Ων 2 
WOE ἀπολογησάμενος τεθνάναι ἢ ἐκείνως ζὴν" οὔτε γὰρ ἐν 
δ᾽ ἌΡ: 505 3 , FF Ὁ ΩΝ Ὧι eae 2 Ins a a 
LkN OUT EV πολέμῳ οὔτ EME οὔτ ἄλλον οὐδένα δεῖ τοῦτο 
A “ 2 74 A “ ΄ Ν 
μηχανᾶσθαι, orws ἀποφεύξεται πᾶν ποιῶν θάνατον. καὶ 


Ν 2 “ / A 
yap ἐν ταῖς μάχαις πολλάκις δῆλον γίγνεται ὅτι TO γε 


Bro.) Warning to his Judges. ὡ 


ἀποθανεῖν ἄν τις ἐκφύγοι καὶ ὅπλα ἀφεὶς, καὶ ἐφ᾿ ἱκε- 
\ τείαν BRET OVO τῶν SiwKdvtoy* καὶ ἄλλαι μηχαναὶ 
πολλαί εἰσιν ἐν ἑκάστοις τοῖς κινδύνοις ὥστε διαφεύγειν 
| θάνατον, ἐάν τις τολμᾷ πᾶν ποιεῖν καὶ λέγειν. Be ἀλλὰ 
μὴ οὐ τοῦτ᾽ ἢ χαλεπὸν, ὦ sdbasad θάνατον ἐκφυγεῖν, ἀλλὰ 
᾿ πολὺ χαλεπώτερον πονηρίαν " θᾶττον γὰρ θανάτου θεῖ. 
καὶ νῦν ἐγὼ μὲν, ἅτε Bpadus ὧν Kat πρεσβύτης. ὑπὸ τοῦ 
βραδυτέρου édrwv, οἱ δ᾽ ἐμοὶ κατήγοροι, ἅτε δεινοὶ καὶ 
ὀξεῖς ὄντες, ὑπὸ τοῦ θάττονος, τῆς κακίας. καὶ νῦν ἐγὼ 
μὲν ἄπειμι ὑφ᾽ ὑμῶν θανάτου δίκην ὀφλὼν, οὗτοι δ᾽ ὑπὸ 
τῆς ἀληθείας ὠφληκότες μοχθηρίαν καὶ ἀδικίαν. καὶ ἐγὼ 
τε τῷ τιμήματι ἐμμένω: καὶ οὗτοι. ταῦτα μέν που ἴσως 
οὕτω καὶ ἔδει σχείν. καὶ οἶμαι αὐτὰ μετρίως ἔχειν. 

5. Τὸ δὲ δὴ μετὰ τοῦτο ἐπιθυμῶ ὑμῖν χρησμῳδῆσαι, ὦ 
καταψηφισάμενοί μου" καὶ γάρ εἰμι ἤδη ἐνταῦθα, ἐν ᾧ 
μάλιστ᾽ eye) pena: γρὴρ δ ROPE ὅταν pedro ἀποθα- 
veicbar. φημὶ γὰρ, ὦ ἄνδρες ol ἐμὲ ἀπεκτόνατε, τιμωρίαν 
ὑμῖν ἥξειν εὐθὺς ere τὸν ἐμὸν θάνατον πολὺ χαλεπωτί- 
ραν, νὴ Al’, ἢ οἵαν ἐμὲ ἀπεκτόνατε" νῦν γὰρ τοῦτο εἰργά- 
σασθε, olopevor μὲν ἀπαλλάξεσθαι τοῦ διδόναι Eneyxor TOU 
βίου τὸ δὲ ὑμῖν πολὺ ἐναντίον ἀποβήσεται, ὡς ἐγὼ Putt 
6. πλείους ἔσονται ὑμᾶς οἱ ἐλέγχοντες, ous νῦν ἐγὼ κατεῖ- 
ΧΟΡ ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐκ ἠσθάνεσθε" καὶ χαλεπώτεροι ἔσονται 
ὅσῳ νεώτεροί εἰσι. καὶ ὑμεῖς μᾶλλον ἀγανακτήσετε. εἰ 
γὰρ οἴεσθε, ἀποκτείνοντες ἀνθρώπους. ἐπισχήσειν τοῦ 
ὀνειδίζειν τινὰ ὑμῖν ὅτι οὐκ ὀρθῶς ζῆτε. οὐκ ὀρθῶς δια- 
νοεῖσθε’ οὐ γάρ ἐσθ᾽ αὕτη ἡ ἀπαλλαγὴ οὔτε πάνυ δυνατὴ 
οὔτε Kad, GAN ἐκείνη καὶ καλλίστη καὶ ῥάστη; μὴ τοὺς 
ἄλλους κολούειν, arn ἑαυτὸν παρασκευάξειν ὅπως ἔσται 
ὡς βελσιστος, ταῦτα μὲν οὖν ὑμῖν τοῖς καταψηφισαμένοις 


μαντευσάμενος ἀπαλλάττομαι. 1} 


“: 





98 Socrates before his Judges. [Prare 


ng γι ἀπ δ ͵ | 

7. Τοῖς δὲ ἀποψηφισαμένοις ἥδέως ἂν διαλεχθείην ὑπὲρ ᾿ 

a i. / b] @ nee? > ὥς 
τοῦ γεγονότος τουτουὶ πράγματος, ἐν ᾧ οἱ ἄρχοντες ἀσχο-ν 


7 Μ Ν 4 + 2 3 / r , a 4 
Alay ἄγουσι, καὶ οὔπω EpXomat οἱ ἐλθόντα με δεῖ TeOvavat, 


2 , > » / A , ar 
ἀλλὰ μοι, ὦ ἄνδρες, παραμείνατε τοσοῦτον χρονον " οὐδὲν 
Ν ΄ A Ν 3 , og » 
yap κωλύει διαμυθολογῆσαι προς ἀλλήλους. ἕως ἐἕξεστιν. 
rn \ Λ 3 > “ 2n/ Ν , 
ὑμῖν γὰρ ὡς φίλοις οὖσιν ἐπιδεῖξαι ἐθέλω τὸ νυνί μοι Evp- 
Ν / - 3 ἣν / eA / 
βεβηκὸς τί ποτε νοεῖ. 8. ἐμοὶ yap, ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταί.--- 
eT rN \ SS a 3 a Ἃ / / , 
ὑμᾶς yap δικαστὰς καλῶν ορθῶς ἂν καλοίην ---- θαυμάσιόν 
/ ς Ν > a7 ΄ ς A / 
Te γέγονεν. ἢ yap εἰωθυϊά μοι μαντικὴ, ἢ τοῦ δαιμονίου, 
3 \ ” 7, / x / Ν eS οὶ \ 
εν μὲν τῷ πρόσθεν χρόνῳ παντὶ πάνυ πυκνὴ αει ἦν, καὶ 
/ > \ a 3 / + / ᾿ς > a 
πᾶνυ ETL σμικροῖς ἐναντιουμένῃ, εἴ τι μελλοίμὲ μὴ ὀρθῶς 
/ ‘ \ , / “ CAB Ν > Ν 
πράξειν" νυνὶ δὲ ξυμβέβηκέ μοι, ἅπερ ορατε καὶ αὐτοὶ, 
Nae? \ > sy, N / » ἧς 
ταυτί ἃ γε δὴ οἰηθείη ἄν τις καὶ νομίζεται ἔσχατα κακῶν 
> ὙΠ Δ ee den ty 7 Υ > ΄ x 
εἰναι. 9. ἐμοὶ de οὔτε ἐξιόντι ἕωθεν οἰκοθεν ἠναντιώθη τὸ 
An rn 6 +f Ὁ / 3 / 3 cr 2) \ ἐν 
τοῦ θεοῦ σημεῖον, οὔτε ἡνίκα ἄνεβαινον ἐνταυθοῖ ἐπὶ τὸ 
ὃ / Line ἀπο a x / ὟΝ a Er / 2 ΔΝ 
“Καστηριον; OUT Ev TH χῦγῳ. οὐδαμοῦ μέ ΧΟΡ TL ἐρεῖν 
/ 3 Μ 7] A , > / 7 
Καίτοι εν ἀλλοις Aoyous πολλαχοῦ δὴ με ἐπέσχε λέγοντα 
7 \ Ν ς᾽ a Ν / ἣς a SF yo as: 
μεταξύ - νυνὶ δὲ οὐδαμοῦ πέρι ταύτην τὴν πράξιν οὔτ᾽ ἐν 
+ b) Ν Ἂν δον / 5 “ / / > 
ἔργῳ οὐδενὶ οὔτ᾽ ἐν λόγῳ ἠναντίωταί μοι. EO. τι οὖν 
ΕΣ 5 ς / 3 ἃ. Crs > a 7 ͵7 
αὐτίον εἰναι ὑπολαμβάνω ; ἐγὼ ὑμῖν ἐρώ " κινδυνεύει γάρ 
Ν ἊΣ an > Ν ͵7ὔ τ > “ > 
Hot τὸ ξυμβεβηκὸς τοῦτο ἀγαθὸν γεγονέναι, καὶ οὐκ ἔσθ 
“ ¢ Toth Fee, a ¢ 7 “ 57 Ν 3 
ὅπως ἡμεῖς ὀρθῶς ὑπολαμβάνομεν, ὅσοι οἰόμεθα κακὸν εἶναι 
> / / / le / 3 \ 
To τεθνάναι. Meya μοι τεκμήριον τούτου γέγονεν" οὐ yap 
2) ef 5) 3 7 oy N 5) XN a > , 
ἐσθ᾽ ὅπως οὐκ ἡναντιωθὴ ἂν μοι τὸ εἰωθὸς σημεῖον, EL μὴ 
y ἌΣ ΩΣ 3 Ν / 
Tl ἐμέλλον ἐγὼ ἀγαθὸν πράξειν. 
3 “4 \ \ A (4 Ν 2 / 3 
Ei. ᾿Εννοήσωμεν δὲ καὶ τῇδε, ὡς πολλὴ ἐλπίς ἐστιν 
3 Ν ἽΝ 53 κ \ / , 3 Ἂς / 
ayabov αὐτὸ εἶναι. δυοῖν yap θάτερόν ἐστι τὸ τεθνάναι - 
A A @ \ 5 > Υγ 7 8 Ἂς 
7 Yap οἷον μηδὲν εἶναι, μηδ αἰσθησιν μηδεμίαν μηδενὸς 
¥ \ A τὶ N \ ’ , 
ἔχειν Tov τεθνεῶτα, ἢ κατὰ τὰ λεγόμενα μεταβολή τις 
7] 5 \ / a a A / A 
τυγχάνει οὖσα, καὶ μετοίκησις Τῇ ψυχῇ τοῦ τόπου τοῦ 
> / ’ Ν. Ν 4 / + / 
evOevde εἰς ἄλλον τόπον. 12. Καὶ εἴτε μηδεμία αἰσθησ ίς 





- 















Avot] Death is a Gain. 99 


τιν, ἀλλ᾽ οἷον ὕπνος ἐπειδάν τις καθεύδων μηδ᾽ ὄναρ 
μηδὲν ὁρᾷ, ΔΌΣ ΚΟΥ κέρδος ἂν εἴη ὁ θάνατος. ἐγὼ γὰρ 
ἂν οἶμαι, εἴ τινα δὐνοδέρενον δέοι ταύτην τὴν νύκτα. ἐν 1) 
οὕτω κατέδαρθεν ὥστε μηδ᾽ ὄναρ ἰδεῖν, καὶ τὰς ἄλλας 
νύκτας τε καὶ ἡμέρας τὰς τοῦ βίου τοῦ ἑαυτοῦ εὐ εσράμονς 
θέντα ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ δέοι oKerpapevov εἰπεῖν, πόσας ἄμει- 
νον καὶ ἥδιον ἡμέρας καὶ νύκτας ταύτη! τῆς νυκτὸς βεβίω- 
κεν ἐν τῷ ἑαυτοῦ βίῳ, οἶμαι ἂν μὴ ὅτι ἰδιώτην τινὰ, ἀλλὰ 
τὸν μέγαν βασιλέα εὐαριθμήτους ἂν εὑρεῖν αὐτὸν ταύτας 
πρὸς τὰς ἄλλας ἡμέρας καὶ νύκτας. Ε 13. εἰ οὖν τοιοῦτον ὁ 
θάνατός ἐστι, κέρδος ΩΝ λέγω" καὶ γὰρ οὐδὲν πλείων ὁ 
πᾶς χρόνος φαίνεται οὕτω δὴ εἶναι ἢ μία νύξ. Εἰ δ᾽ αὖ 
οἷον ἀποδημῆσαι ἐστιν ὁ θάνατος ἐνθένδε εἰς ἄλλον τόπον, 
“καὶ ἀληθῆ ἐστι τὰ λεγόμενα, ὡς ἄρα ἐκεῖ εἰσιν ἅπαντες οἱ 
τεθνεῶτες, τί ἀκόμα ἀγαθὸν TOUTOU εἴη ἂν, ὦ ἄνδρες δικα- 
otal; 14. εἰ γάρ TUS ἀφικόμενος εἰς “Αιδου, ἀπαλλαγεὶς 
τούτων τῶν φασκόντων. δικαστῶν εἶναι, εὑρήσει τοὺς ἀλη- 
θῶς δικαστὰς, οἵπερ καὶ λέγονται ἐκεῖ δικάζειν, ---- Μίνως 
τε καὶ Ῥαδάμανθυς καὶ Αἰακὸς καὶ Τριπτόλεμος καὶ ἄλλοι 
ὅσοι τῶν ἡμιθέων δίκαιοι τ νὴ ἐν τῷ ἑαυτῶν βίῳ. ---- 
ἄρα φαύλη ἂν εἴη ἡ ἀποδημία ; ; ἢ αὖ ᾿Ορφεῖ ὍΝ ἐγώσο 
καὶ Μουσαίῳ καὶ Ἡσιόδῳ καὶ Θμερῳ ἐπὶ πόσῳ av τις 
δέξαιτ᾽ ἂν ὑμῶν ; 15. ἐγὼ μεν. γὰρ πολλάκις ἐθέλω τεθνά- 
μι, εἰ ταῦτ᾽ ἐστὶν ἀληθῆ" ἐπεὶ ewouye καὶ αὐτῷ θαυμαστη 
ἂν εἴη ἡ διατριβὴ αὐτόθι. arene Ai ges τελῶ έδει καὶ 
Αἴαντι τῷ Τελαμῶνος καὶ εἴ τις ἄλλος τῶν παλαιῶν διὰ 
κρίσιν ἄδικον ere avrerapaBaddovre τὰ ἐμαυτοῦ 
πάθη πρὸς Ta ἐκείνων, ὡς ἐγὼ οἶμαι, οὐκ ἂν ἀηδες en. 
Kai δὴ τὸ μέγιστον, τοὺς ἐκεῖ ἐξετάζοντα καὶ ἐρευνῶντα 
ὥσπερ τοὺς ἐνταῦθα hi (a τίς αὐτῶν σοφός ἐστι, καὶ τίς 


οἴεται μὲν ἔστι δ᾽ οὔ. | 16. ἐπὶ πόσῳ δ᾽ ay τις; ὦ ἄνδρες 








ους ἂν τις εἴποι καὶ bps καὶ “Ἐν » οἷς ἐκεῖ hy 


γεσθαι καὶ ξυνεῖναι καὶ ἐξετάζειν ἀμήχανον ἂν εἴη εὐδαι-᾿ 
/ / 3 7 ΄ “ ἘΠῚ ΟΝ 
μονίας. πάντως οὐ δήπου τούτου γε ἕνεκα οἱ ἐκεῖ ἀἅπο- 
f / Ν " ? ’ / 9 € ? a 
κτεινουσι" τὰ TE yap ἄλλα εὐδαιμονεστεροί εἰσιν OL EKEL 
a > / ‘ oy Ν Ν / ? / / b>) 
τῶν evade, Kat ἤδη TOV λούπον χρόνον αθανατοί εἰσιν, 
x N ΄ ’ aa 
eLTEp γε Ta λεγόμενα ἀληθῆ εστιν. 
> Ν ᾿ς A Ν 3 " οὖ Pad 
ΕἼ. ᾿Αλλὰ καὶ ὑμᾶς χρη. ὦ ἄνδρες δικασταὶ, εὐελπιδας 
5 Ν Ν / Ne ce a r “ \ 
εἶναι πρὸς τὸν θάνατον, καὶ ἕν TL τοῦτο διανοεῖσθαι ἀληθὲς, 
[72 5 Μ 3 ις “ a Ν Jar + an Μ 
ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν ἀνδρὶ ἀγαθῷ κακὸν οὐδὲν οὔτε ζῶντι οὔτε 

, Jax 9 - ΕΣ A \ / , ; 
τελευτήσαντι, οὐδὲ ἀμελεῖται ὑπο θεῶν τὰ τούτου πραγ- 

MONON ἡ τ aa x ἢ ΄ t wpe: / 
ματα: οὐδε τὰ EMA νῦν ἀπὸ TOU αὐτομάτου γέγονεν, ἄλλα 

A / 3 A 7 + / x > / 
μοι δῆλον ἐστι τοῦτο, OTL ἤδη τεθνάναι καὶ ἀπηλλάχθαι 

/ , 3 \ a NaN ’ A 
πραγμάτων βελτιον ἣν μοι. διὰ τοῦτο Kab ἐμὲ οὐδαμοῦ 
“ 7 Ν "“ x + lal / 
ἀπέτρεψε TO σημεῖον, καὶ ἔγωγε τοῖς καταψηφισαμενοις 

Ν “Ὁ / > / / ,ὔ 3 
μου καὶ τοῖς κατηγόροις οὐ πανυ χαλεπαίνω. καίτοι οὐ 

΄ B 7 / ’ N , > > 
ταύτῃ τῇ διανοίᾳ κατεψηφίζοντο μου a κατηγόρουν. ἀλλ 
Ὁ δ ω / A 5 nr yf 
οἰόμενοι βλάπτειν" τοῦτο αὐτοῖς aktov μέμφεσθαι. 18. To- 
/ / > - / Ν ες κα 2 Ν ξ , 
σόνδε μέντοι αὐτῶν δεομαι" τοὺς υἱεῖς μου, ἐπειδὰν ἡβη- 

7, ΕῚ 7 a5 58 A A 
σωσι, τιμωρήσασθε, ὦ avdpes, ταῦτα ταῦτα λυποῦντες 
e/ 3 x ς aA 3 Fa > ce fal a “δ 4 x 
ἅπερ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς ελύπουν, ἐὰν ὑμῖν δοκῶσιν ἢ χρημάτων ἢ 
7 / , a “δ " A Ne SN rn ,ὔ 
ἄλλου του πρότερον ἐπιμελείσθαι ἢ ἀρετῆς, καὶ ἐὰν δοκῶσι 
4 \ 4 5 / Ε] - 4 PS ρον sari ας “ 

τι εἶναι μηδὲν ὄντες, OVELOLCETE αὐτοῖς, ὥσπερ EYW ὑμῖν, OTL 
=) > rn e “- Ν By 4 / 3 +S Ψ Ν 
οὐκ ἐπιμελοῦνται ὧν δεῖ, καὶ OLOVTAL τι εἶναι ὄντες οὐδενὸς 
" Ἂς ἘῸΝ A A 7 Ν > Ν Μ 
ἄξιοι. καὶ ἐὰν ταῦτα ποιῆτε, δίκαια πεπονθὼς ἐγὼ ἔσομαι 
ς > ς a ᾿ / Ν c cin 
vp υμῶν, AUTOS TE καὶ OL υἱεῖς. 

PARK a ‘ ἊΣ ed > / 3 Ν Ν 3 θ / 

a yap non wpa ἀπιέναι. ἐμοὶ μὲν ἀποθανουμένῳ, 
con Se τι ε 7, Ἀττι aC en y oe, 
ὑμῖν 0€ Piwgopevois* ὁπότεροι δὲ ἡμῶν ἔρχονται ἐπὶ ἄμει- 
νον πρᾶγμα, ἄδηλον παντὶ πλὴν ἢ τῷ θεῷ 

βραάγμα, aon ΠῚ TINT) TS ee 


ῬΗΛΕΡΟ.] The Death of Socrates;*>’:’: 3.3 101 


II. THE DEATH OF SOCRATES. 


[Phaedo, I.-V.; LXIII.-LXVI.] 





9 7 δῖ ῳ > / , 
1. Ἐχεκράτης. Autos, ὦ Φαίδων, παρεγένου Yo- 
| "4 ? / a Cs / e ‘\ , yy > A 
κράτει ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, ἢ TO φώρμακον ἔπιεν EV τῷ δεσμω- 
' / \ 7 “ 
τηρίῳ, ἢ ἄλλου του ἤκουσας ; 
A aes 5? f 
Φαίδων. Autos, ὦ Eyexpares. 
" 
/ i] fis / > 27% Ν a 
E. Ti οὖν δή ἐστιν ἅττα εἶπεν ὁ ἀνὴρ πρὸ τοῦ Oava- 
\ a 2 ΄ Goce \ \ 4 τῷ > ΄ 
του; καὶ πῶς ετελεύτα ; ἡδέως Yap ἂν ἔγω ἀκούσαιμι. 
\a Ν Μ a > / > Ν , ? 
καὶ γὰρ οὔτε των πολιτων Φλιασίων οὐδεὶς πάνυ τι επι- 
͵ \ τὰ Ὶ , ΕΣ , we ie ἢ 
χωριάζει τὰ νῦν Αθηναζε, οὔτε τις Eevos αφίκται χρόνου 
“ 3 r vA “Δ ξ -“ / > cal “a7 ᾽ 
συχνοῦ ἐκεῖθεν, ὅστις ἂν ἡμῖν σαφὲς τι ἀγγεῖλαι οἷος τ 
3 Ν ΄ ΄, \ ῳ / Ν ? / 
ἣν περὶ τούτων, πλὴν γε On OTL φώρμακον πιὼν ὠποθάνοι" 
κε \ yY Ia 3 ΄ὕ 
τῶν δὲ ἄλλων οὐδεν εἶχε φράζειν. 
Par ἣν Ν A / A ? / \ 
@. Ovde ta περὶ τῆς δίκης apa ἐπύθεσθε ὃν τρό- 
3 / 
πον ἐγένετο ; 
\ A \ AR Se , a aes , 7 
Ε. Nai, ταῦτα μεν ἡμῖν ἤγγείλέ τις, καὶ εθαυμαζομὲέν 
“ Λ / I A A ed / 
γε OTL, πάλαι γενομένης αὑτῆς, πολλῳ ὕστερον φαίνεται 
? ΄ Wes 5 a 3 4 
ἀποθανων. τί οὖν ἣν τοῦτο. ὦ Φαίδων ; 
΄ we in 5? ͵ ¥ . 
®. Τύχη τις αὐτῷ, ὦ Eyexpates, cvveBn* etuye yap 
a / a / is 4 > / A / 
Τῇ προτεραίᾳ τῆς δίκης ἡ πρύμνα ἐστεμμένη TOU πλοίου, 
\ > A 3 a / 
ὃ εἰς Δῆλον ᾿Αθηναῖοι πεμπουσιν. 
a \ N Rr 
E. Totrto ὃὲ Ἢ τί ἐστιν ; 
3 
nig ®. Τοῦτο ἐστι τὸ πλοῖον. ὥς sacle ᾿Αθηναῖοι, εν 
ᾧ Θησεύς ποτε εἰς Κρήτην τοὺς δὶς ἑπτὰ ἐκείνους ᾧχετο 
ἄγων, καὶ ἔσωσέ τε καὶ αὐτὸς ἐσώθη. τῷ οὖν ᾿Απόλλωνι 
Μ ¢ / / > r eo, 54 
εὔξαντο, ws λέγεται, τότε. εἰ σωθεῖεν, ἑκάστου ETOUS θεω- 
͵, > = \ ROE an, N ais ἢ ΑΝ, 
ρίαν ἀπάξειν εἰς Δῆλον ἣν δὴ ἀεὶ καὶ νῦν ete εξ εκείνου 
ro 5 Ν A A / > Ν Ὁ. τὰν 
Kat ἐνιαυτὸν τῷ θεῷ πεμπούυσιν. " ἐπειδὰν οὖν ἀρξωνται 
/ 9“, Ν > “ Σ ἴω , ᾽ὔ 
τῆς θεωρίας, νόμος ἐστὶν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ καθα- 


4 Ἂ ,ὔ \ / / 2 ΄ Ν 
ρεύειν τὴν πόλιν, καὶ δημοσίᾳ μηδενα ἀποκτιννυναι, πρὶν 


102 


« 
€ 
©. €:4€ 
ε «ε 


“he: Deals of Socrates. [Prato 


ee rare 


poe 


ἂν εἰς ee ἀφίκηται τὸ πλοῖον καὶ πάλιν δεῦρο - τοῦτον 
δ᾽ ἐνίοτε ἐν πολλῷ χρόνῳ γίγνεται, ὅταν τύχωσιν ial 
ἀπολαβόντες αὐτούς. ἀρχὴ δ᾽ ἐστὶ ΤῊΣ θεωρίας, ἐπειδὰν ὃ 
ἱερεὺς τοῦ ᾿Απόλλωνος στέψῃ τὴν πρύμναν τοῦ πλοίου 
τοῦτο δ᾽ ἔτυχεν, ὥσπερ λέγω, τῇ προτεραίᾳ τῆς δίκης γεγο- 
/ XN nw Ν Ν i, 3 4 - 
vos. διὰ ταῦτα καὶ πολὺς χρόνος ἐγένετο τῷ Σωκράτει 
2 A / ς Χ A / Ν a / 
ἐν τῷ δεσμωτηρίῳ. ὁ peTakv τῆς δίκης TE καὶ τοῦ θανάτου. 
7 Ν Ν Ἂς Ν De IN Ά, / > Ἵ 
Ε. Τί δε δη τὰ περὶ αὐτὸν τὸν θάνατον. ὦ Φαίδων; 
/ 5 Ν / x / Ν / td 
τίνα ἣν τὰ λεχθεντα καὶ πραχθέντα, καὶ τίνες OL Trapa- 
/ 2 ᾽ 7 aes / satis + «+ 
γενόμενοι τῶν ἐπιτηδείων τῷ ἀνδρί ; ἢ οὐκ εἰων οἱ ἄρχοντες 
-“ 2 ΘΟ, "» on /. 
παρεῖναι, αλλ, Epnmos ετέλεύυτα φίλων ; 
ΡῚ rn > 4 A / Ν 7 
Φ, Οὐδαμῶς : ἀλλα παρῆσάν τινες, καὶ πολλοί γε. 
“-“ Ν / / Γ᾿ id »“" 
Ε. Ταῦτα δὴ πάντα προθυμήθητι ὡς σαφέστατα ἡμῖν 
5) κα. " ,ὔ / ) / / 5 
ἀπαγγείλαι, εἰ μὴ τίς σοι ἀσχολία τυγχάνει οὖσα. 
3 Ν ΄ Ν / δος oes , 
®. “Adda σχολάζω ye, καὶ πειράσομαι ὑμῖν διηγήσα- 
Ν x ‘ A / vs aL os / 
σθαι" καὶ yap τὸ μεμνῆσθαι Σωκράτους Kat αὐτὸν λέγοντα 
Vee ᾽ ΄ y 3, ἃ / “ 
καὶ ἄλλου ἀκούοντα ἔμοιγε ἀεὶ πάντων ἥδιστον. 
> x Ν 53 / ἃς Ss ? / 
E. ᾿ἄλλα μὴν, ὦ Φαίδων, καὶ τοὺς ἀκουσομένους γε 
΄ cr y+ 3 \ n « “Ὁ ΄ Στ / 
τοιούτους ἑτέρους ἔχεις" ἀλλα πειρῶ ws ἂν δύνῃ ἀκριβε- 
rn / 
στατα διελθεῖν πάντα. 
Ν Ν yx / + / 
$. Kai μὴν ἔγωγε θαυμάσια ἔπαθον παραγενομε- 
7 Χ ¢€ , 7 2 % ? / 
νος. οὔτε yap ws θανάτῳ παρόντα pe ἀνδρὸς ἐπιτηδείου 
ὅλ 5 ’ὔ 5 ὮΝ / / Ὁ ΤΑΝ > / S Ἢ x 
ἔλεος εἰσῃει" εὐδαίμων γὰρ μοι ἀνὴρ εφαίνετο, ὦ ἔχε- 
\ A / \ = 7 ς 5) a \ 
KpaTes, Kal τοῦ τρόπου καὶ TOV λόγων, ὡς ἀδεῶς καὶ γεν- 
/ ’ 7 / > r 
ναίως ἐτελεύτα, ὥστε μοι ἐκεῖνον παρίστασθαι μηδ᾽ 
“ 7 Μ / / 5. 2 \ 3 - 2 7 
Αιδου tovta ἄνευ θείας μοίρας ἰέναι, αλλὰ κακεῖσε αφικο- 
3 I δ 7, AA. ΑΚ Νν Ν 
μενον εὖ πράξειν, εἰπερ τις πώποτε καὶ ἄλλος. δια δὴ 
a Jat / 3 Ἂς , / ς 2 “δ / 
ταῦτα οὐδὲν πάνυ μοι ελεεινὸν εἰσῇει. ὡς εἰκὸς ἂν δόξειεν 
3 , ͵7ὔ i 95 Ν / 
εἶναι Tapovte πένθει" οὔτε αὖ ἡδονὴ ὡς ἐν φιλοσοφίᾳ 
¢ a yf e/ DAE \ 7 a / 
ἡμῶν ὄντων, ὥσπερ εἰωθειμεν" καὶ γὰρ οἱ λόγοι τοιοῦτοί 


» 2 ae 5.9 a 5, / / / a / 
τινες σαν" αλλ aTeEXVwS ἀτοπὸν TL μοι πάθος παρῆν, καί 








| Puaevo.] Friends in the Prison. 103 


ΘΟ lal » a A , An 
τις ἀήθης κρᾶσις ἀπό τε τῆς ἡδονῆς συγκεκραμένη ὁμοῦ 
>? Ν᾿ “ > / c/ 2 / ? - 
καὶ ATO τῆς λύπης. ἐνθυμουμένῳ OTL αυτικα EKELVOS ἔμελλε 
Ϊ “Ὁ ΧΝ 7 4 / - 
τελευτᾶν. καὶ πάντες οἱ παρόντες σχεδὸν τι οὕτω διεκεί- 
rs. . rn > / Ν 4 e@ Ν ἕ  “ι. 
μεθα, ὁτὲ μὲν γελῶντες, ἐνίοτε δὲ δακρύοντες, εἰς δὲ ἡμῶν 
, ᾽ ͵ 5 , Ν " 
καὶ διαφερόντως, Amoddodwpos " οἶσθα γάρ που τὸν ἀνδρα 
ἧς / ? an 
καὶ TOV τρόπον AUTOV. 
2 a \ ” 
6. Ε. Πῶς yap ov; 
? na ἢ / ἢ ᾿ 3 
ᾧΦ ᾿ΚΕκεῖνός τε τοίνυν παντάπασιν οὕτως εἶχε; καὶ 
“Ὡς Μ ? / Ν ΄ ΕἾ 
αὑτὸς eywye εἐτεταραγμὴν Καὶ ob αλλοι. 
5 Ἀ 53 7, / ’ 
E. ἜΕτυχον δε, ὦ Φαίδων, τίνες παραγενομενοῦ ; 
e 74 \ > / a > A 
ᾧ. Οὗτός τε δὴ ὁ ᾿Απολλόδωρος τῶν ἐπιχωρίων παρῆν, 
εἶν. K ? ἧς ¢ \ > a K / oy 
καὶ ὁ KpitoBovdos, καὶ ὁ πατὴρ αὐτου [ pitwy |, καὶ ετί 
͵ [] / 5 . ee, / 
“Ερμογενης καὶ ᾿Επιγενης καὶ Αἰσχίνης καὶ Αντισθενης " 
\ , Ν Ν / ‘ 
ἣν δὲ καὶ Κτησιππος ὁ Παιανιεὺς, καὶ Μενεξενος, καὶ 
"- \ a δ / , ἢ 3 9 ἢ 
ἄλλοι τινὲς τῶν ἐπιχωρίων " Πλάτων δέ, οἶμαι, ἠσθενει. 
».} / A 
E. Hevoe δε τινες παρησαν ; 
x / ΄ “ / Ν 
ᾧ. Ναὶ, Σιμμίας τέ ye ὁ Θηβαῖος καὶ Κέβης καὶ Φαι- 
. / ? / Ν 
δωνίδης, καὶ Μεγαρόθεν Εὐκλείδης τε και Τερψίων. 
ῇ / / / 
E. Te 8€; ‘“Aptotummos καὶ Κλεόμβροτος mapeye- 
νοντο ; 
> A 3 5. \ 3. αὶ 3 
ᾧ. Οὐ δῆτα: ev Αἰγίνῃ yap ἐλέγοντο εἰναι. 
yy / A 
E. ἤάλλος δε τις παρὴν ; 
3 
@, Σχεδὸν τι οἶμαι τούτους παραγενέσθαι. 
΄ 3 / , 
E. Ti οὖν δή; tives, dys, ἦσαν οἱ λόγοι ; 
3 / ‘ >] A / / , 
7 Φ, ᾿Εγώ: cou ἐξ. apyns πάντα. πειράσομαι διηγη- 
-"κὶκ Α \ Ν Ν [4 6 ͵ = £ 
σασθαι. ἀεὶ yap on και Tas πρόσθεν ἡμέρας εἰωθειμεν 
a] Ν > ἣν 3 ¢€ " \ x -τ' / 
φοιταν, καὶ εγὼ καὶ Ob ἄλλοι. παρᾶ TOV “WKpaTy), συλ- 
f “ > Ν 7, . e Ps / t antl. 
λεγόμενοι ἕωθεν εἰς τὸ δικαστήριον, ἐν @ καὶ ἢ δίκη ἐγε- 
A: « x / > 
νετο" πλησίον yap ἦν TOU δεσμωτηρίου. περιίεμένομεν οὖν 
Cie “ > / Ν , / ᾽ 
ἑκάστοτε, ἕως ἀνοιχθείη τὸ δεσμωτήριον, διατρίβοντες μετ 


> / . / ‘ > / 3 \ \ > / 
ἀλλήλων: ἀνεῴγετο Yap οὐ TPE" ἐπειδὴ δὲ ανοιχθείη, 


104 The Death of Socrates. [PLAto | Ι 


Chet: Suda ase , ᾿ \ \ , ΐ 
εἰσήειμεν παρᾶ τὸν Σωκράτη, καὶ τὰ πολλὰ διημερεύομεν — 
> > a ἂμ ‘ Ἂς / Poe PA / 
μετ αὐτοῦ. καὶ δὴ καὶ TOTE πρωϊαίτερον ξυνελέγημεν. 
A x / ς ’ . SF 7, Ἵ a ἔ 
τῇ γὰρ προτεραίᾳ nuepa, ἐπειδὴ ἐξήλθομεν εκ τοῦ δεσμω- 
/ ξ / > / 4 ἊΣ ce 32 ΄, 5 
τηρίου eoTrepas, ἐπυθόμεθα οτι TO πλοῖον Ex Andov aduy- 
/ 5 Λ Ie 2 / « ¢ Are 
μενον en. παρηγγείλαμεν οὖν ἀλλήλοις ἥκειν WS TPWial- 
> N 9 ͵ Ne, Sena > \ ς 
Tata εἰς τὸ εἰωθὸς. 8. καὶ ἥκομεν. καὶ ἡμιν ἐξελθὼν ὁ 
\ 4 lal / ¢ ΄ 5 / X Ν 
θυρωρὸς, ὁσπερ εἰωθει ὑπακούειν, εἶπε περιμένειν καὶ μὴ 
/ / 7) “Ἃ SN rd 7 \ 
πρότερον παρίεναι, EWS ἂν AUTOS κελευσῃ" AVOVEL Yap, 
ΜΨ Cenc. / Ν , 4 Xx 
ἔφη, ol ἕνδεκα Σωκράτη Kal παραγγελλουσιν, ὅπως ἂν 
ΩΣ Ae / ay / 3 ἌΝ ἦν 3 i 2 
THOE TH ἡμέρᾳ τελευτήσῃ. οὐ πολυν οὖν χρόνον επι- 
Ν - Nie dlga th, ΡΨ τὶ 5 / οὶ ΄ 3 
OYXOV, ἧκε καὶ ἐκέλευεν ἡμᾶς εἰσιέναι. εἰσιοντες οὖν κατε- 
/ Ν \ / + / \ \ 
λαμβάνομεν Tov μὲν Σωκρατὴη ἄρτι λελυμένον, τὴν δὲ 
— / , N x / Ν 7 
Ξανθίππην ---- γιγνώσκεις yap — €yovocayv τε τὸ παιδίον 
5 A ᾿ς fa ς 3 3 e A t 
αὐτοῦ καὶ παρακαθημένην. ws οὖν εἶδεν ἡμᾶς ἡ Ἐαν- 
/ > , / Ν ἥν 13. ἢ 3 - Ν 2k 
θίππη, ἀανευφημησε TE καὶ τοιαῦτ aTTa εἶπεν, οἷα δὴ εἰω- 
¢ “ hans: 7 e/ ΄ 
θασιν αἱ γυναῖκες. ὅτι QQ Σώκρατες, ὕστατον δὴ σε προσε- 
A A ΕΣ / x Ν ΄ Nee , 
ροῦσι νῦν οἱ ἐπιτηδείοι, καὶ σὺ τούτους. καὶ ὁ Σωκράτης, 
/ ? Ν / ὍΣ / 7 ’ / 
Breas εἰς tov Κρίτωνα, “22 Κρίτων, edn, ἀπαγέτω τις 
5 \ xy NAF 7 \ 3 A Ἂ n a 7 
αὐτὴν οἰκαδε. καὶ ἐκείνην μεν ἀπῆγον τινες τῶν τοῦ Κρί- 
a / ; Ν / ς \ / 
Twvos βοῶσαν τὲ καὶ κοπτομένην. 9. ὁ δὲ Σωκράτης, 
3 / 3 \ / / / Ν / 
ἀνακαθιζοόμενος εἰς τὴν κλίνην, συνέκαμψε TE TO σκέλος 
Ν sees A ᾿ς Ν / od ς » ΜΝ 
καὶ ἐξετριψε τῇ χειρὶ, καὶ τρίβων apa, Qs ἀτοπον. edn, 
3 ΕΙ y / 5 A A A ε + 
ὦ QVOPES, ἔοικε TL εἶναι τοῦτο, Ὁ καλοῦσιν ot ἀνθρωποι 
Ca’ ¢ l , Ν τ A > / 5 
ηδύ" ὡς θαυμασίως πέφυκε πρὸς TO δοκοῦν ἐναντίον εἶναι, 
3, Xx ΄ς ἔοικα ἈΝ > ‘ Ν θέλ / - Ὁ 
TO AUTNPOV, τῷ ἅμα μεν αὕτω μὴ εθελειν παραγίγνεσθαι TH 
3 θ / > δ / 5 ,ὔ \ ef Ν Χ β ,ὔ ὃ / 
ἀνθρώπῳ. Eav O€ τις διώκῃ TO ETEpoV καὶ λαμβάνῃ, σχεδὸν 
᾽ / / Ν ἘΝ τὸ “ 3 s 
TL ἀναγκάζεσθαι λαμβάνειν καὶ TO ἕτερον, ὥσπερ EK μιᾶς 
A , 42 Μἷ / -~ »+ a) ΟΝ 
κορυφῆς συνημμένω δὺ ὄντε. καί μοι δοκεῖ, Edn, εἰ ἐνε- 
/ ’ \ 5 a \ a « Ν 
νόησεν αὑτὰ ἄισωπος. μῦθον ἂν συνθεῖναι, ὡς ὁ θεὸς βου- 
, a , a 3 \ "2 
Aomevos αὐτὰ διαλλάξαι πολεμοῦντα, ἐπειδὴ οὐκ ἠδύνατο, 


A ? mS p Nae \ \ \ \ a @ 
ξυνῆψεν εἰς ταῦτον αὐτοῖς τὰς κορυφὰς, καὶ διὰ ταῦτα ᾧ 





Puarvo.] Why he wrote Poetry. 105 


x eo , 3 - ef Ν Ν 
ἂν τὸ ετερον παραγένηται. ἐπακολουθεῖ ὕστερον καὶ τὸ 
᾿ 3 Ν > A ¥ ? ᾿ Aes a 
ἕτερον. ὥσπερ οὖν καὶ αὐτῷ μοι EoLKEV, ἐπειδὴ ὑπὸ TOU 
e 9 > a ͵ , Ν ᾽ ‘ « \ 
δεσμοῦ ἣν ἐν τῷ σκέλει πρότερον TO ἀλγείνον, ἥκειν δὴ 
φαίνεται ἐπακολουθοῦν τὸ ἡδύ. 
10. ὋὉ οὖν βέβης ὑπολαβών, Νὴ τὸν Δία, ὦ Σώκρατες, 
ἔφη, εὖ γ᾽ ἐποίησας ἀναμνήσας με. περὶ yup τοι τῶν 
, Ὁ 7 ? ͵ \ aA > ΄ 7 
ποιημώτων ὧν πεποίηκας, ἐντείνας TOUS του Δισωπου λο- 
Ν Ν 2 Ν > / / ‘ A ΄ 
yous καὶ TO εἰς TOV Απολλω προοίμιον, καὶ ἄλλοι τινες 
yy Μ BoM N 7 ν , “ Ν 
μὲ ἤδη ἤροντο" atap καὶ ἔνηνος πρωῆην, ὃ τι ποτε διανο- 
Ν > N “ 3 ᾿] / 7 XN / > ν᾿ 
ηθεὶς, ἐπειδὴ δεῦρο ἦλθες. ἐποίησας αὐτὰ, πρότερον οὐδεν 
, , ᾽ > 7 Λ n 4 a ha > 
πώποτε ποιήσας. εἰ οὖν TL σοι μέλει TOU ἔχειν Ewe Ev- 
a 2 / ad 30 2 a 3 28 \ “ 
ηνῷ ἀποκρίνασθαι ὅταν με αὖθις ἐρωτᾳ (εὖ οἶδα yap ὅτι 
3 / ει Ν / , / / / » 
ἐρήσεται) εὐπε τί χρὴ με λέγειν. HE. Aeye τοίνυν. edn, 
? eo 3 / > A 77 > 3 / / 2a 
αὐτῷ, ὦ Κέβης, ταληθῆ, ὅτε οὐκ ἐκείνῳ βουλόμενος οὐδε 
- 7ὕ ? a 2 / 3 ? / A 
τοῖς ποιημασιν αὐτου αντίτεχνος εἰναι ἐποίησα TATA’ 
ΝΥ Ν ς pan ae A > a / A ΡῚ 7, 
ἤδειν γὰρ ὡς οὐ ῥᾷάδιον ELN* AAA ενυπνίων τινῶν «ποπειρώ- 
/ , i / Β΄. ΨΚ / ΄ 
μενος TL λέγει, καὶ αφοσιούμενος εἰ apa πολλάκις ταύτην 
Ν 7 > 7 al 2 Ν Xo. 
τὴν μουσικὴν μοι ETTLTATTOL TOLELY. ἣν Yap δὴ ἄττα τοι- 
΄ 4 “ Ν » Ρ] 4 3 a 
ude* πολλάκις μοι φοιτῶν TO αὑτὸ ενύπνιον EV τῷ παρελ- 
/ / + 5) 3 + Μ 7 Ν δ ὦ ἧς ἈΝ 
θοντι βίῳ, αλλοτ ἐν αλλῃ ὄψει φαινόμενον, τὰ αὐτὰ δε 
/ - / Μ Ν ΄ Ν 3 / 
λέγον, 2 Σώκρατες, edn, μουσικὴν ποίει καὶ εργάζου. 


ΠΣ ΞΟ he »ΆῈ a / / “ 7 “ 
12. καὶ eyw ev ye Tw πρόσθεν χρόνῳ, ὅπερ ἔπραττον τοῦ- 





¢ 7 ΡΨ, ΄ / Mock ͵΄, 
το ὑπελάμβανον αὐτὸ μοι παρακελεύεσθαι τε καὶ ἐπικελεύ- 
«“ [ὦ ἴω 7 7 \ > Ν τ 
εἰν, ὥσπερ οἱ τοῖς θέουσι διακελευόμενοι" καὶ ἐμοὶ οὕτω 
ἃς eee 2 7 “ A ? 7 Ν 
τὸ ενύπνιον ὅπερ ἔπραττον τοῦτο επικελεύειν, μουσικὴν 
r € / Ν Μ 7 a > - 
ποίειν, ὡς φιλοσοφίας μεν οὔσης μεγίστης μουσικῆς, ἐμοῦ 
% A ΄ A 7 Ὥς οὦ 7 > , Ν 
δὲ τοῦτο πράττοντος " VUV δ᾽ ἐπειδὴ ἣ τε δίκη εγένετο. καί 
ς A a c ω / / > , Μ A 
ἡ τοῦ θεοῦ ἕορτη διεκωλυὲ we ἀποθνήσκειν. ἐδοξε χρῆναι, 
a. Ὃν , 7 %, > _ 4 ἈΝ 
εἰ ἄρα πολλακις μοι προστωττοῖ TO ενυπνίον ταυτὴν τὴν 
/ Ν ΄ Ν > A > ΄ > Ν - 
δημώδη μουσικὴν ποιεῖν, μὴ ἀπειθῆσαι avT@. ἀλλὰ ποιεῖν. 


5) 7 \ 3 ἣν ’ / Ν > , ἔ 
ἀσφαλέστερον γὰρ εἶναι μὴ ἀπιέναι πρίν ἀφοσιώσασθαι 


100 The Death of Socrates. [Prato ~ 


΄ Ψ Ν ’ a 3 , [7 | 
ποιήσαντα ποιήματα, καὶ πειθόμενον T@ ενυπνίῳ. ἘΦ. ov- © 
” 
Χ rn Ν , Ἂς Ν ν / ie τῶν ς a } 
τω δὴ πρῶτον μὲν εἰς TOV θεὸν ἐποίησα, οὗ HY ἡ παροῦσα Ὁ 
7] Ν Ν ἈΝ Ν 2 7 « Ν x / 
θυσία" μετὰ δὲ Tov θεὸν, ἐννοήσας ὅτι τὸν ποιητὴν δέοι, 
y+ 4 \ ζυ Β a ΄ 3 9 > 7 
εὐπερ μέλλοι ποιητὴς εἶναι, ποιεῖν μύθους AAN οὐ λόγους, 
Ν ΡΟΝ 2 5 Ν \ a bs ἃ / 
καὶ αὑτὸς οὐκ ἢ μυθολογικος, διὰ ταῦτα δὴ οὺὃς προχείρους 
5 ἊΣ > / 7 Ν b>) td 4 > 4 
εἶχον καὶ ἠπιστάμην μύθους τους Αἰσώπου, τούτους ἐποί- 
@ 7 cee a 3 3 / 2 a 
noa— ois πρωτοῖς ἐνέτυχον. ταῦτα οὖν, ὦ Κέβης, Evnve 
/ XN 3 a Ν “Δ A 2 os 7 e / 
φράζε, καὶ ἐρρῶσθαι, Kat ἂν σωφρονῇ, ἐμὲ διωκειν ὡς τά- 

Μ ~ ¢ yf WA ΄ - 
χίστα. ἄπειμι δε, ὡς ἔοικε, τήμερον " κελεύουσι γὰρ 
᾿Αθηναῖοι. Ξ 

] A: τας , a ͵΄ " ἐς ΓῚ 
.14. Καὶ ὁ Σιμμίας, Οἷον παρακελεύει, ἔφη, τοῦτο, ᾧ 
7] 2) A \ ἣν yf b / a 3 / 
Σώκρατες. Ενηνῷ ; πολλὰ yap ἤδη εντετύχηκα τῷ ἀνδρί Σ 
S 5 2 © aes 7 inde A GS 
σχεδὸν οὖν, ἐξ ὧν ἐγὼ ἤσθημαι, οὐδ᾽ ὁπωστιοῦν σοι ἑκὼν 
3 / ἢ 53 of ? ἢ ? , 
εἰναι πείσεται. Ti δαί; 75 ὃς" οὐ φιλόσοφος Ευηνός ; 
ἡ Ὄπ’ ε ῃ 3 , / y \ 
Epouye δοκεῖ, ἐεφη ὁ Σιμμίας. ᾿Εθελήσει τοίνυν, ἔφη. Kat 
σὺ: IN ᾿ A , 55 ᾿᾿ a ,ὔ / 
Εὔηνος καὶ πᾶς ὅτῳ ἀξίως τούτου τοῦ πρώγματος μέτε- 
1) a 
2 , 3 9} 7 Chow ? 
στιν. οὐ μέντοι y tows βιάσεται αὑτὸν" ov yup φασι 
Ἂς 3 Ν ec / A A Ν / 
θεμιτὸν εἶνα. τᾶ. Kat ἅμα λέγων ταῦτα καθῆκε τὰ σκέ- 
DSN A 7 ITN ἣν - Ν / “ 
An [ἀπὸ τῆς κλίνης] ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, καὶ καθεζόμενος οὕτως 
y+ Ν 3 of 3 SLES ς “ἢ n 
ἤδη Ta λοιπὰ Suedéyero. ἤρετο οὖν αὐτὸν ὁ Κέβης " Πῶς 
a / 5 , λοις τς ee a / 
τοῦτο λέγεις, ὦ Σώκρατες. TO μὴ θεμιτὸν εἶναι εαυτὸν βιά- 
1A / 5. ἃ a 3 / Ν / “ 
ζεσθαι, εθέλειν δ᾽ ἂν Τῷ ἀποθνήσκοντι τὸν φιλόσοφον ἔπε- 
ἥν ι / 2 9 , / \ / 
σθαι; Ti δε, ὦ Κέβης ; οὐκ ἀκηκόατε σύ τε καὶ Σιμμίας 
Ν an / 7 , ? / 
περὶ τῶν τοιούτων, Φιλολάῳ συγγεγονότες ; Ovdev ye σα- 
Ὁ Φ U4 2 Ν ἊΝ 3.τὸ ANS Μὴ 2 A ἘΝ EAE Le) 
pas, ὦ Σώκρατες. ᾿Αλλὰ μὴν κἀγὼ ἐξ ἀκοῆς περὶ αὐτῶν 
᾽ \ N 3 ,ὕ 2 Ἂς / In Ν / 
λέγω" ἃ μὲν οὖν τυγχάνω ἀκηκοὼς, φθόνος οὐδεὶς λέγειν. 
Ν 4 + X , / I 3 »“ 3 
Kal γὰρ LOWS καὶ μάλιστα πρέπει, μέλλοντα EKELTE ἀποδη- 
ra Ν an a) A 2 7 a 
pew, διασκοπεῖν TE καὶ μυθολογεῖν περὶ τῆς ἀποδημίας τῆς 
aE yes / N Bs) iN “7 5 , x + > 
Exel, ποίαν τίνα αὑτὴν οἰόμεθα εἶναι" TL γὰρ ἂν TLS καὶ 


“τοιοῖ ἀλλ 2 a / Wh ὃ a / - 
L ἄλλο EV TH μέχρι ἡλίου δυσμῶν χρονῳ ; 





ΟΡΗΔΕΡοΟ. Concerning his Burial. 107 


> Ν ΄ Ν 7 ‘ 2 / 
(46. ᾿Αλλὰ τούτων δὴ ἕνεκα χρὴ ὧν διεληλύθαμεν, ὦ 
7 a rn 7 3 a Ὡς / ? A / 
Σιμμία, πᾶν ποιεῖν, woTE ἀρετῆς καὶ φρονήσεως ev τῷ βίῳ 
5 “ Ν 3 Ν 3 Ν ς 3 Ν , 
METATYELD " καλον yap το ἀθλον, καὶ ῃ ελπις μεγαλη. 


a \ 5 + 5 / Ν rs ‘ ε 
ὑμεῖς μὲν οὖν, ἔφη. ὦ Σιμμία τε καὶ Κέβης καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι, 





2 a ΝΜ / cd ΄ :Ἔὔ|Ι, ‘ a 
εἰσαῦθις ἐν τινι χρόνῳ ἕκαστοι πορεύσεσθε" Ewe δὲ νῦν 
Μ r / “Δ > ἈΠ" Ν ς ς / Ν / 
ἤδη καλεῖ, φαίη ἂν ἀνὴρ τραγικὸς, ἡ εἱμαρμένη, καὶ σχεδὸν 
͵7 e/ / Ν Ν 7 - Ν Ν 7 
τί μοι ὥρα τραπέσθαι πρὸς τὸ λουτρὸν" δοκεῖ γὰρ δὴ βέλ- 
53 , rn Ν ΄, \ Ν 7 
τιον εἶναι λουσώμενον πιεῖν TO φάρμακον, καὶ μὴ πράγ- 
Lal Ν 7] ‘ 4 
ματα ταῖς γυναιξι παρέχειν vexpov λούειν. 
a Ν 3 / ? ca e “ae 6 3 y+ ? 
17. Ταῦτα δὴ εἰπόντος αὐτοῦ, ὁ Κρίτων, Εἶεν, edn, ὦ 
7 7 Χ ΄ ἣν . ἢ ΑΝ Λ ΕῚ Ν “ 
Σώκρατες " τί δὲ τούτοις ἢ ἐμοὶ ἐπιστέλλεις, ἢ περὶ τῶν 
/ Ἃ Sa “ JA A ¢ “ ? 
παίδων ἢ περὶ ἄλλου TOV, ὃ TL ἂν σοι ποιοῦντες ἡμεῖς EV 
7 Λ rad / > ™ / Μ 49 r 
χάριτι μαλιστα ToLowpen ; Amep ἀεὶ λέγω, edn, ὦ Κρι- 
Ia , f ¢ al ) rn > 7 
των, οὐδὲν καινότερον " OTL ὑμῶν αὐτῶν επιμελούμενοι 
“2 r Ν > Ν Ἂς nf > lal Ν ς lal > “ μι , 
ὑμεῖς, καὶ EM“OL καὶ τοῖς ἐμοῖς καὶ υμῖν αὑτοῖς ἐν χάριτι 
/ tA > \ A \ Ν a ¢ , Xs 
ποιήσετε ATT ἂν ποιῆτε, κἂν μὴ νῦν ὁμολογήσητε" ἐὰν 
XN ς rn Ν 3 fal 3 al Ν ‘N 4 e >? 
δὲ ὑμῶν μὲν αὐτῶν ἀμελῆτε, καὶ μὴ θέλητε, ὥσπερ κατ 
y+ Ν Ν - P | / Ν Ν 3 val y+ 
ἔχνη, κατὰ Ta νῦν TE εἰρημένα καὶ τὰ EV τῷ εἐμπροσθεν 
7 A Iw ase \ ς 7 5 an / Ν 
χρόνῳ ζην, οὐδ ἐὰν πολλὰ ομολογησητε EV τῷ παροντι και 
/ Ia / 7 A XN / 
σφοδρα, οὐδὲν πλέον ποιήσετε. 18. Ταῦτα μὲν τοίνυν 
7] yy c/ a / 7 / 
προθυμηθησόμεθα. ἐφη, οὕτω ποιεῖν" θώπτωμεν δὲ σε τίνα 
/ “ Ἃ y+ ys ie: , 7 
τρόπον; Οπως av, epy, βούλησθε, ἐάνπερ ye λαβητέὲ με, 
Ν Ν 3 7 ς “ 7 Ν [74 ¢ κ“ Ἀ Ν 
καὶ μὴ ἐκφύγω υμᾶς. γελάσας δὲ ἅμα ἡσυχῇ, καὶ πρὸς 
e a 2 / 5 2 / y+ 5 yy tae ἢ 
ἡμᾶς ἀποβλέψας, εἶπεν: Οὐ πείθω, ἔφη, ὦ avdpes, Kpi- 
ec >] , > | e ε / ς Ν / 
TWVA, WS ἐγώ εἰμι οὗτος ὁ Σωκράτης. ὁ νυνὶ διαλεγόμενος 
Ny ͵ « a / > > yo ͵ 
καὶ διατάττων ἕκαστον τῶν λεγομένων, αλλ OLEeTaL μὲ 
3 r 9. A ΕΣ " / vA Ν Ν 5 A 
ἐκεῖνον εἶναι, OV ὁψεται ολίγον ὕστερον νεκρὸν, καὶ ἐρωτᾷ 
\ κα , “ Op 5. ΑΝ , ν , 
δὴ πῶς pe θώπτῃ. ὅτι δὲ ἐγὼ πάλαι πολὺν λόγον πε- 
/ « 3 Ν / Ν ’ὔ > / ς a 
ποίημαι, WS, ἐπειδὰν πίω TO φώρμακον, οὐκέτι ὑμῖν παρα- 
a > 2 2 / > Ν 5 ΄ 7 ? 
μενῶ, GAN οὐχήσομαι ἀπιὼν εἰς μακώρων δή τινας εὐδαι- 


f UT a δοκῶ αὐτῷ ἀλλ λει αμυθού- 
μονίας, ταῦτα μοι δοκῶ αὐτῷ ἀλλως λέγειν, παραμυθοὺ 


108 The Death of Socrates. (ea 


. ‘ ? ; 
μενος ἅμα μὲν ὑμᾶς, ἅμα δ᾽ ἐμαυτόν. 19. ἐγγυήσασθε, 





5 aN r ἡ ” Ν 2 7 ? ΄ AX aA ὃς ‘| 
οὖν με πρὸς Kpitwva, edn, THY ἐναντίαν ἐγγύην ἢ ἣν οὐτοῷς 
ἣν \ \ > rn @ ν \ 5 Ν 
πρὸς τοὺς δικαστὰς ἠγγυᾶτο. οὗτος MEV γὰρ ἢ μὴν παρα- 
a ς ω nN 3 Ν Ν “ 2 ψ 2 
μενεῖν " ὑμεις δὲ ἦ μὴν μὴ παραμενεῖν ἐγγυήσασθε, ἐἔπει- 
Ν 3 7 2 \ 2) / ? , “ 7 en 
dav ἀποθάνω, ἀλλὰ οὐχήσεσθαι ἀπίιοντα, wa Kpitwv ῥᾷον 
7] Ν ‘x a ‘\ a “Δ / x / 
φέρη, καὶ μὴ ὁρῶν μου TO σῶμα ἢ καιόμενον ἢ KATOPUTTO= 
ε 
> an ¢ Ν > A € ὰς , Ν ΄ 
μενον ὠγανακτῇ ὑπερ ἐμοῦ ὡς δεινὰ πάσχοντος. μηδὲ λέγῃ 
2 A a Ξ Ἃ Ἵ ΄ Ἃ ? / ~v\ 
ἐν TH ταφῇ, ὡς ἢ προτίθεται- Σωκράτη ἢ ἐκῴερει  KaTOo- 
΄ 3 Ν 4 3 + ΣᾺΝ, 3 + K, ͵ ὃς N 
ρύττει. εὖ yap tofu, ἢ δ᾽ ὃς, ὦ apiote Κρίτων, τὸ μὴ 
a / 2 7, 9 he A N 2 \ 
καλως λέγειν OU μονον εἰς AUTO τοῦτο πλημμέελες, AAA 
Ἀ 7 2 “ “Ὁ r 2 Ν θ ἴω \ 
Kal κακὸν TL ἐμποίει Tals ψυχαις. adda θαρρεῖν TE χρὴ; 
Ν 7 TS a / Ν / « “ 
καὶ φάναι τουμὸν σῶμα θάπτειν, καὶ θάπτειν οὕτως ὅπως 


of Ἁ 3 Ν 7, id A / 4 ἃ 
av σοι φίλον ἢ, καὶ μαλιστα ἡγῇ νόμιμον εἰναι. 


Ἄς ΟΝ 3. =) x bh if 2 4 , ε 
20. Ταῦτ εἰπὼν ἐκεῖνος μὲν ἀνίστατο εἰς οἰκημα TL ὡς 
7 Ν e » af “ 2 a e A > 3 Λ | 
Aovoopevos, Kat ὁ Kpitwy εἴπετο αὐτῷ, ἡμᾶς ὃ εκέλευε 
/ / 3 Ἄ, ¢ A 2 x / 
περιμένειν. περιεμένομεν οὖν πρὸς ἡμᾶς αὑτοὺς διαλεγο- 
XN nr >] / \ 2 “Ὁ ᾿ 2 = 
μενοι περὶ τῶν εἰρημένων, καὶ ἀνασκοποῦντες, τοτὲ ὃ αὖ 
ἧς ~ A , Ὡ ¢ a A yf 3 
περὶ τῆς ξυμφορᾶς διεξιοντες, ὅση ἡμῖν γεγονυΐα εἴη, ἀτε- 
a ΄ 7 τς ΄ 7 3 ἣν 
χνῶς ἡγούμενοι ὥσπερ πατρὸς στερηθεντες διάξειν ὀρφανοὶ 
N » 7 3 \ Ned 2 ἈΝ gala ee θ 3 
Tov ἔπειτα βίον. ἐπειδὴ d€ ελούσατο, καὶ ἠνέχθη παρ 
= ἢ Ν 7] ᾽΄ὔ΄ Ἂς 2 lal eon x 9 - 
αὑτὸν Ta παιδία ---- δύο γὰρ αὐτῷ υἱεῖς σμικροὶ ἦσαν, εἷς 
‘ / Ν ε 3 “ “ > / 2 / 2 
δε μέγας --- καὶ αἱ οἰκεῖαι γυναῖκες ἀφίκοντο, ἐκείναις ἐναν- 
/ a f , τὰ 2 Λ Ψ 
τίον τοῦ Kpitwvos διαλεχθείς τε καὶ ἐπιστείλας ἅττα 
2 iA Ν Ν a \ x / 3 / 2 Ἂ 
ἐβούλετο, τὰς MEV γυναῖκας καὶ TU παιδία ἀπιέναι ἐκέλευ- 
ΡΤ Ἂς Ν Ὁ > af ἴω 
GEV, αὑτὸς δὲ ἧκε παρ ἡμᾶς. 
σις τ δ΄ 2 Ν e / a / “ 
21. Kai ἣν ἤδη eyyus ἡλίου δυσμῶν: χρόνον yap πο- 
Χ vA » aa Ν ance / / Ν > 
Auv διετρίψεν ἔνδον. ἐλθὼν δ᾽ ἐκαθέζετο λελουμένος, καὶ οὐ 
/ 3) Ὁ ΧΝ A ΄, See ¢ lal Ψ 
TOXX aTTa μετὰ ταῦτα διελέχθη" καὶ ἧκεν ὁ τῶν ἕνδεκα 
ς / \ Ν 2 > eae 53 , y 2 
ὑπηρέτης, καὶ TTaS παρ αὑτὸν, ᾿(2) Σίωκρατες, Eby, οὐ κατα- 
΄ - / y 7, / 
γνωσομαι cov ὅπερ ἄλλων καταγιγνώσκω, OTL μοι χαλε- 


/ Ν a 2 δ 2 ω Λ 
παίνουσι καὶ καταρῶνται, επειδαν αὑτοῖς παραγγέλλω 





ΜΝ ΜΙΝ 


ἔτ λκρο.] The Cup of Hemlock. 109 


7 Ny , > , A ᾽ 7 eT. 
πίνειν τὸ φάρμακον, ἀναγκαζοντων τῶν ἀρχόντων. σὲ ὃ 
-ς ἄν. Ἣν Ψ 7 ΄ A / , 
€y@ καὶ ἄλλως EYVWKU EV τούτῳ TW χρόνῳ γενναιότατον 
\ Ἣν yy + ce ͵ A 
καὶ πραότατον Kal ἄριστον ἄνδρα ὄντα τῶν πώποτε δεῦρο 
>] 7 ) Ν Ν a 9 300 ὦ ? > Ν ͵ 
ἀφικομένων " καὶ δὴ καὶ νῦν εὖ οἷδ᾽ ὅτε οὐκ ἐμοὶ χαλεπαί- 
Ἧς \ \ > 7 tat apie oe A 9 
VELS, γυγνωσκεῖς γὰρ τοὺς αἰτίους, αλλ, εκείνοις. νιν οὖν, 
3 Ν a 9 ’ Λ »" ’ὔ Ν A ε en 
οἶσθα yap ἃ ἦλθον ἀγγέλλων, χαῖρὲ TE καὶ πειρῶ ὡς ῥᾷστα 
7 Senses κ \ , ΄ 
φέρειν τὰ ἀναγκαία. καὶ ἅμα δακρύσας μεταστρεφόμενος 
aa aor Se 7 ᾽ , ἈΝ “ὃς rN 
aTrNel. '22. Kai ὁ Σωκράτης ἀναβλέψας προς αυτον, Kat 
Ἀ yy cig an Ν ξ al ἴω / Ν 7 Ν 
συ, py, χαῖρε. καὶ ἡμεῖς ταῦτα ποιήσομεν. καὶ ἅμα πρὸς 
ε a ¢ 3 ral 54 ee Oy Ν Ν 7 
ἡμᾶς, Qs ἀστεῖος, ἐφη, ὁ avOpwros* καὶ Tapa πώντα μοι 
Ν / / Ν , i \ 8 3 - 
τὸν χρόνον προσῇει, καὶ διελέγετο ἐνίοτε, καὶ ἣν ἀνδρῶν 
4 a Ν A ς / > ὃ £ Ar v 8 Ν 
@OTOS, καὶ νῦν ὡς γενναίως με «ποδακρύει. ἀλλ aye On, 
3 , , ? a baie 7 Ν / 
ὦ Κρίτων, revOwpeda αὐτῷ, καὶ ἐνεγκάτω τις TO φάρμακον, 
> , 2.οἂδὰ N 7 e Av ve 
εἰ τέτρυπται" εἰ δὲ μη, τρυψάτω ὁ ἀνθρωπος. 48. Kal ὁ 
/ > 3, τς ¥ ¥ 3 , " " 
Κρίτων, ᾿Αλλ οἶμαι, edn, ἔγωγε ὦ Σώκρατες. ἔτι ἥλιον 
3 2 4 a “ἤ \ yA ΄ ee A Lee. 50 
εἶναι ἐπὶ τοῖς ὁρεσι, καὶ οὕπω δεδυκεναι. καὶ ἅμα ἐγὼ οἶδα 
ee ΄ ἜΣΣΩ / ᾽ \ Ξ ᾽ 
καὶ ἄλλους πάνυ οψε πίνοντας, ἐπειδὰν παραγγελθῃ av- 
a / ὔ Ν / 3 /. > Ν Ν 
τοῖς. δευπνησαντάς τε καὶ πιόντας εὖ para, — arra μηδεν 
2 7 " \ 5) A “ale ’ ed " 
ἐπείγου" €TL γὰρ ἐγχωρεῖ. καὶ ὁ Σωκρατης, Εἰκότως γ᾽, 
x» ᾿ 3 a ὦν > r ͵ a A aA Ν 7 
εφη, ὦ Κρίτων, εκεῖνοι τε ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν, OVS σὺ λέγεις, 
Ν Ν “ lal / Ν yf “ 
οἰονταιί yap κερδανεῖν ταῦτα ποιήσαντες, καὶ ἔγωγε ταῦτα 
| / 2 ’ὔ, Iar Ν 3 7 5 / 
εἰκότως OU ποιήσω" οὐδὲν γὰρ οἶμαι κερδαίνειν ολίγον 
ed ‘ Υ “Ὁ 2 3 , > ? A 
ὕστερον πίων, AAO γε ἢ γέλωτα οφλησειν Tap ἐμαυτῳ, 
/ fal a Ν / > Ν Μ ΠΝ 
γλιχόμενος τοῦ Env, καὶ φειδόμενος οὐδενὸς ETL ἐνόντος. 
> 2 
αλλ, 


Ν ς 7 ἊΨ 4 y -" Ν / 
24. Kai o Κρίτων ακουσᾶς ενευσε τῷ Talol πλησίον 


y Μ A Ν XN y+ / 
tO, edn, πιθοῦ Kat μὴ ἄλλως ποίει. 


= an ἈΝ ς “-“ 3 χθὰ Ν Ν 7 Σ . / 
εστῶτι, καὶ ὁ παῖς εξέλθων, καὶ συχνὸν χρόνον διατρίψας, 
- Μ Ν Λ 7 Ν , > ΄ 
ἧκεν ἄγων τὸν μέλλοντα διδόναι τὸ φάρμακον, ἐν κύλικι 
/ / >) Ν νι ξ / Ν Μ 
φέροντα τετριμμένον " ἰδων δε ὁ Σωκράτης τὸν ἄνθρωπον, 
3 Μ 9 Λ Ν Ν ΄ 2 / / ’ 
Eiev, edn, ὦ βέλτιστε, σὺ γὰρ τούτων ἐπιστήμων, TL χρὴ 


a IAN Μ Ε ΝΥ / Ψ d A 
ποιεῖν ; Οὐδεν αλλο, εφη, ἢ πιόντα περιίέναι, ἕως ἂν σου 


110 ie he Death of Socrates. [Prato | 


/ 3 al Λ , " a \ 
βάρος ἐν τοῖς σκέλεσι γένηται, ἔπειτα κατακεῖσθαι" καὶ 
ef a aN / Nes, Μ Ν ΄ A 
οὕτως αὐτὸ ποιήσει. καὶ ἅμα ὠρεξε τὴν κύλικα τῷ Σω- 
, Ν \ \ Ν Λ ef 5 > ͵ὕ 
κρατεῖ. 25. καὶ ὃς λαβὼν, καὶ μάλα ἵλεως, ὦ ᾽Εχέ- 
Ia / Ia / y+ A if 
κρατες, οὐδὲν τρέσας, οὐδὲ διαφθείρας οὔτε τοῦ χρώματος 
By na y 3 p>] ce 3 50 Ν ς 
οὔτε TOU προσώπου, AAN ὠσπερ ELWUEL, ταυρηδὸν υπο- 
4 Ν \ y+ , / yf Ν an A 
βλέψας πρὸς τὸν ἄνθρωπον, Ti λέγεις, Eby, περὶ τοῦδε τοῦ 
/ \ Ν ᾿ r , + “Ὁ yy an 
πόματος πρὸς TO ἁποσπεῖσαί τινι ; ἐξεστιν, ἢ ov; Τοσοῦ- 
“ 5 / / “ ἘΝ , 3 
τον, ἔφη, ὦ Σώκρατες, τρίβομεν. ὅσον οἰόμεθα μετριον εἶναι 
rn ; 5 2 «“ 3 ? By / / c 
πιεῖν. ΜΜανθάνω, ἢ δ᾽ ὅς" adr εὔχεσθαι ye που τοῖς 
rt δ΄ / ‘ XN Ν / ἈΝ 3 1% ῳ 3 rn 
θεοῖς ἔξεστί TE καὶ χρὴ, τὴν μετοίκησιν τὴν ἐνθένδε ἐκεῖσε 
3 A / A Ν Ν ἌΝ Μ / \ / 
εὐτυχῆ γενέσθαι" ἃ δὴ καὶ ἐγὼ εὔχομαι TE καὶ γένοιτο 
/ Ἂς ΄ οἱ Ν a 2 7 x / > 
TAUTN* καὶ ἅμα εἰπὼν ταῦτα, ἐπισχόμενος καὶ μάλα εὐχε- 
ne καὶ εὐκόλως ἐξέπιε, 
. Kat ἡμῶν οἱ πολλοὶ τέως μὲν ἐπιεικῶς οἷοί τε ἦσαν 
κατέχειν τὸ μὴ δακρύειν: ὡς δὲ εἴδομεν πίνοντά τε καὶ 
, a/7 3 δ. 59 n / N ἢ αν, ἢ \ 
πεπωκότα, οὐκέτι, ANN ἐμοῦ ye βίᾳ καὶ αὐτοῦ ἀστακτὶ 
ΟΝ ΤΙ, \ 7 Py ᾽ , ΑΨ, ? 7 
ἐχώρει TA δάκρυα, ὥστε ἐγκαλυψάμενος ἀπέκλαιον ἐμαυτὸν" 
> κ᾿ Soy ΡΤ ὙΠ) 9 . N ’ A ΄ a 2 Ny 
ov yap δὴ ἐκεῖνον γε, ἄλλα τὴν ἐμαυτου τύχην, οἰου ἀνδρὸς 
ς / > / yA ¢ N K, / 54 7 
ἑταίρου ἐστερημένος εἴην. ὁ δὲ Kpitwy eTL πρότερος 
᾽ ὦ ‘ > ar > 5 / \ 7 2 / ; 
ἐμοῦ, ἐπειδὴ οὐχ οἷος T ἣν κατέχειν τὰ δάκρυα. ἐξανέστη. 
3 / N Ste Nae. , a ? ΄ 
Απολλόδωρος δὲ καὶ ἐν τῷ ἔμπροσθεν χρονῳ οὐδεν επαύ- 
fe Ν Ἕ Ν / 3 7 Ve 
eTo δακρύων, καὶ δὴ καὶ τότε ἀναβρυχησάμενος κλαίων 
Ny 3 a >] / cf 2 / al / 
καὶ ἀγανακτῶν οὐδένα ὅντινα οὐ κατέκλασε τῶν παρον- 
,ὔ 3 A , oe ers \ @ x 
TOV, πλήν γε αὐτοῦ Σωκράτους. ἐκεῖνος δε, Oia, edn,. 
a 5 7 50x , ? / 7 
ποιεῖτε, ὦ θαυμάσιοι. ἐγὼ μέντοι οὐχ ἥκιστα τούτου. 
vA Ν cr ? / “ἷ Ν a 
EVEKA τὰς γυναῖκας ἀπέπεμψα, να μὴ τοιαῦτα πλημμε- 
λοῖεν " καὶ yap ἀκή ὅτε ἐν εὐ f ἡ τελευτῶ 
καὶ yap ἀκήκοα, oTL ἐν εὐφημίᾳ χρὴ τελευταν. 
᾿ ᾽ eS / BA Ν ΄σ Ν ς “ > “a 
αλλ, ἡσυχίαν TE ἄγετε καὶ KAPTEPELTE. καὶ Ἡμεῖς αἀκοῦὺ- 
? / / Ν 3 ΄ a f. 
σαντες noxuvOnuev τε καὶ επέσχομεν τοῦ δακρύειν. 
« Ν ~ 3 / « ᾿Ὰ 
(27. O δε περιελθὼν, ἐπειδή οἱ βαρύνεσθαι ἔφη τὰ σκέ- 
/ «“ / τ ΡΟ, « 7 
An, κατεκλίθη ὕπτιος " οὕτω γὰρ ἐκέλευεν ὁ ἄνθρωπος " 








PUAEDO.] The Death of Socrates. 1t1 


Ν “ 3 ’ὔ 3 - - ¢ Ν Ν “ 
καὶ ἅμα ἐφαπτόμενος αὐτοῦ οὗτος ὁ δοὺς τὸ φιίρμακον, 
Ν Ἄ 3 / \ / Ν \ / 
διαλίπων χρόνον ἐπεσκόπει TOUS Todas καὶ τὰ σκέλη, 
“ 7 : ᾽ a Ν , “ > > , 
κἄπειτα σφόδρα πιέσως αὐτοῦ τὸν πόδα, ἤρετο εἰ αἰσθώ- 
ς 3 , » Ν Ν a ΓῚ ‘ , 
νοίτο" ὁ ὃ οὐκ ἔφη. Kal μετὰ τοῦτο αὖθις Tus κνήμας" 
eee Ν 4 oes ? a > / od δ 7 
καὶ ἐπανιὼν οὕτως ἡμῖν αὐτοῖς ἐπεδείκνυτο, OTL ψύχοιτό τε 
Ν ΄ Ν Ν 7] \ > Py ) Ἢ 
καὶ THYVUOLTO. καὶ αὐτὸς ἥπτετο, καὶ εἶπεν OTL, ἐπειδὰν 
Ν a , , δ᾽ 5}. 7 ᾽ 7 » 3 
προς τῇῃ καρδίᾳ γένηται αὐτῳ, TOTE οἰχήσεται. ηδὴ οὖν 
, 5) a 9 \ \ a τ, , ee, 
σχεδὸν TL αὐτοῦ HY τὰ περὶ TO ἦτρον ψύχομενα, καὶ EK- 
’ > s. Ν > aA Ν al 
καλυψάώμενος, EVEKEKAXUTTTO Yap, εἶπεν. --- O én τελευταῖον 
3 / > / Μ a2 a > Λ 
εφθέγξατο, ----᾿ 2 Κριτων, edn, τῷ AckdrnTip οφείλομεν 
3 7 2 >] > / Ν Ν 3 / > Ν 
ἀλεκτρυόνα" αλλ ἀπόδοτε καὶ μη ἀμελήῆσητε. BS. ἄλλα 
a Μ Μ ¢ / ? In of + Μ / 
ταῦτα, edn, eatat, ὁ Κρίτων" αλλ ὅρα, εἰ TL ἀλλο reyes. 
an 2 / ᾽ A Jar 4 > / ᾽ a PY, 
TAUTA €POMEVOU AUTOU οὐδὲν ETL ἀπεκρίνατο, αλλ, ολίγον 
Vd Ν >? NA \ fv " , 
χρονον διαλιπὼν, ἐκινήθη τε καὶ ὁ ἄνθρωπος ἐξεκαλυψεν 
> a. ee" A Se y ΩΝ x e / ΄ 
αὐτον, καὶ ὃς τὰ OmpaTta ἔστησεν" Lowy de ὁ Κριτων ξυνε- 
\ , Ν \ > / 
AaBe TO στόμα TE καὶ τους οφθαλμούς. 
“ 8 ¢ Ἂς 59? / an ¢ 7, ει. ἢ b / 
Hée ἡ τέλευτη, ὦ Eyexpates, Tov ἑταίρου ἡμῖν ἐγένετο, 
3 ὃ Ν e ς a A ΕΥ a ; - 3 ΄ 3“ 
ἀνὸρος, WS ἡμεῖς φαῖμεν ἂν, τῶν τότε ὧν ἐπειράθημεν ἀρί- 
8 Ὑ ἍΝ , \ 7 
στου, καὶ ἄλλως φρονιμωτατου καὶ δικαιοτάτου. 


HERODOTUS. 





I. INVASION OF GREECE BY DARIUS. 


he 7 « 2 Α / ε , 
1. Βασιλέι δὲ Δαρείῳ ws ἐξηγγέλθη Σάρδις ἁλούσας 
᾽ A Files > , ᾿ς ey Ξ 5' 
ἐμπεπρῆσθαι ὑπὸ τε ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ ᾿Ιωνων, πρῶτα μὲν 
7 Bis my ¢ 3 ὧν, A > , 2 / 7 
λέγεται αὐτὸν, ὡς ἐπύθετο ταῦτα, Iwvwv οὐδένα λόγον 
; 4 “ 93 ae a Ν XN 
ποιησώμενον, εἰρεσθαι οἵτινες εἶεν οἱ ΑΑθηναιοι" μετὰ δὲ 
7 XA Ν / XN Ν 2 / 
πυθόμενον αἰτῆσαι τὸ τόξον, AaBovta δὲ Kat ἐπιθέντα 
$i. N yo > N ? Ν ᾽ a 7 2 ἈΝ 7 
Οἱστὸν, ἄνω ἐς τὸν οὐρανὸν ἀπεῖναι, καὶ μιν ἐς τὸν ἠέρα 
ve ’ Ane S a 2 / 2 ͵ 
βώλλοντα εἰπεῖν, Q Ζεῦ, ἐκγενέσθαι μοι Αθηναΐί- 
7 of Ν a ΄ εν a 
ovs τίσασθαι: εὐπαντα δὲ ταῦτα προστάξαι ἐνὶ τῶν 
, / / Te N Cz 
θεραπόντων, δείπνου προκειμένου αὐτῷ, ES τρὶς ἑκάστοτε 
τς n ͵ , lal 2 / 
εἰπεῖν, Δέσποτα. μέμνεο τῶν Αθηναίων. 
Ν A > “ ς ἴω ω ¢ , 
2. Mera δὲ τοῦτο ἀπεπειρᾶτο ὁ Δαρεῖος τῶν Ελλήνων, 
cd » , + 4 Xx / Cc a ἃ 5 ὃ , ; 

6 TL ἐν νόῳ ἔχοιεν, κότερα πολεμέειν εωυτῷ ἢ παραδιδόναι 
/ ? τ / 5 / + yy / 
σῴφεας αὐτούς. διέπεμπε ὧν κήρυκας, ἄλλους addy τάξας 
rian \ ς , ΄ > leew 4 Y the A N 
ava τὴν ᾿Ελλαδα, κελεύων αἰτέειν βασιλεῖ γῆν τε Kat 
/ ? N nN > x ς , » ” \ 
ὕδωρ. τούτους μὲν δὴ εἰς τὴν Ελλάδα ἔπεμπε, ἄλλους δε 
/ / 3 \ ¢ a / / x 
κήρυκας διέπεμπε ἐς τὰς ἑωυτοῦ δασμοῴφορους πόλιας τὰς 

/ , 7 N ees Ν 
παραθαλασσίους, κελεύων νέας τε μάκρας καὶ ππαγωγὰ 
rn / - / Ἀν ’ὔ, a 
πλοία ποιέεσθαι. 8. Οὗτοι τε δὴ παρεσκευάζοντο ταῦτα, 
Ν a / 2 ‘ ε 7ὔ Ἂς X > 
καὶ τοῖσι ἥκουσι es τὴν Ελλάδα κήρυξι πολλοὶ μὲν ἡπει- 

/ μή \ τ 5 εὐ δ ς / ΄ δὲ 
ρωτέων ἔδοσαν τὰ προΐσχετο αἰτέων ὁ Πέρσης, πάντες δὲ 
a ? κ᾿ » / ee “ Se 
νησιῶται ἐς TOUS ἀπικοίατο αἰτήσοντες. οἱ τε ON ἄλλοι 
νησιῶται διδοῦ ἣν τ tL ὕδωρ Aapeu i δὴ καὶ 
ησι Vol γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ Δαρείῳ, καὶ δὴ 
3 A / ͵7 “- 3 / μ 3 
Διγινῆται. ποιήσασι δὲ σφι ταῦτα ἰθέως ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐπε- 


/ , IEA / ΒΕ Ἅ 5) / 
KEATO, δοκέοντες ἐπὶ σφίσι ἔχοντας TOUS Διγινῆτας δεδω- 





A 


“VI, 104.] Miltiades. 113 


| 8 d a 7 > Ν , , ‘ 
κέναι, ὡς ἅμα τῷ Πέρσῃ ἐπὶ σφέας στρατεύωνται. καὶ 
τὰν rd 2 / / / > Ν 
ἄσμενοι. προφάσιος ἐπελάβοντο, φοιτέοντέες τε ἐς τὴν 
, fal , \ 
᾿Σπώρτην κατηγόρεον τῶν Αἰγινητέων τὰ πεποιήκοιεν Tpo- 
7, 7 \ \ A 
δόντες τὴν ᾿Ελλώδα. ᾿Αθηναίοισι μὲν δὴ πόλεμος συνῆπτο 
Ν 3 / 
προς Διγινητας. 
Ν / Ν ¢ A > / / > ’ 
4. Ὃ δὲ Πέρσης τὸ ἐεωυτοῦ ἐποίεε, ὥστε ἀναμιμνή- 
, Ἂν 2% a / an / - >? 
σκοντός τε αἰεὶ τοῦ θεράποντος μεμνῆσθαί μιν τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
Ν / ΄ Ν 
ναίων, καὶ Πεισιστρατιδέων προσκατημένων καὶ διαβαλ- 
3 , / ‘ / ¢ r ΄ 
λόντων Αθηναίους, ἅμα δὲ βουλόμενος ὁ Δαρεῖος ταύτης 
A ΄ / a « / 
ἐχόμενος τῆς προφάσιος καταστρέφεσθαι τῆς ᾿Ελλάδος 
Ν \ , > a a Noe , hs \ 
tous μὴ δόντας αὑτῷ γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ. Mapédoviov μεν δὴ 
7 a / 4 A / 
φλαύρως πρήξαντα τῷ στόλῳ παραλύει τῆς στρατηγίης. 
Ν Ν Ν > / > / 2 / > ΄ 
ἄλλους δὲε στρατηγους ἀποδέξας ὠπέστελλε ἐπί τε Epe- 
3 - 2 A 7] Ν᾽ 
tptav καὶ Αθήνας. Aatw τε ἐόντα Μῆδον γένος, καὶ ᾿Αρτα- 
/ Ν 4 / a 2 / ¢ a 
φέρνεα tov Aptadepveos Taida, ἀδελφιδέον EwuTov: ἐν- 
7, ‘ ee a > ᾿ 
τειλάμενος δὲ ἀπέπεμπε, ἐξανδραποδίσαντας Αθήνας καὶ 
2 / > ΄σ ¢€ Aa »] Μ > 3 ’ 
Ἐρέτριαν, ἀγαγεῖν ἑωυτῷ εἰς ὄψιν τὰ ἀνδρώποδα. 
͵ \ ἢ ͵ Nee , 
5. Χειρωσάμενοι de τὴν Ἐρέτριαν, καὶ ἐπισχόντες 
Benn τ nae.’ “ 2 \ > \ / / 
odvyas ἡμέρας, ἐπλωον ἐς τὴν ArTiKnY, κατέργοντές TE 
ἣν Ny , nN wae , , ‘ 
πολλον. καὶ δοκέοντες ταῦτα τοὺς Αθηναίους ποιήσειν TA 
A ἈΝ 3 ΄ 3 / Ν 5 \ ς Ν 
καὶ Tous Ἐρετριέας ἐποίησαν" καὶ, ἦν γὰρ ὁ Μαραθὼν 
2 / A A 3 a ? 
ἐπιτηδεωτατον χωρίον τῆς ᾿Αττικῆς ἐνιππεῦσαι, καὶ ἀγχο- 
΄, ἌΞΩΝ: / ᾽ a 2 , ¢ , - 
τάτω τῆς ᾿Ερετρίης, ἐς τοῦτό ot κατηγέετο ‘Immins ὁ 
΄,ὔ 3 - Ν ΄ - 
Πεισιστράτου. Αθηναῖοι δὲ ὡς ἐπύθοντο ταῦτα, ἐβοή- 
Ν 2 X29 Ν “AA 7 
θεον kat avtot ἐς τὸν Μαραθῶνα. ἦγον δέ σφεας στρατη- 
Ν 4 al / A Ν / 
you δέκα, τῶν ὁ δέκατος ἦν Μιλτιάδης, τοῦ τὸν πατέρα 
/ Ν 7 / - > > , 
Κίμωνα tov Στησαγόρεω κατέλαβε φυγεῖν ἐξ ᾿Αθηνέων 
/ Ν , e Ν 
Πεισίστρατον τὸν “Ἱπποκράτεος. 6. οὗτος δὴ ὧν τότε ὁ 
; / / 2 A , ? Ν 
Μιλτιάδης ἥκων ex τῆς Χερσονήσου. καὶ ἐκπεφευγὼς δι- 
/ / > , > / “ὔ x Ν ε 
πλόον θάνατον, ἐστρατήγεε Αθηναίων. ἅμα μὲν γὰρ οἱ 
, ν > \ cbs , ͵ " Ν 
Φοίνικες αὐτὸν οἱ επιδιωξαντες μέχρι Ιμβρου, περὶ πολ- 


114 Invasion of Greece by Darius. [Henop. 





a ᾽ a a a Ν ,ὔ 
λοῦ εποιεῦντο λαβεῖν τε καὶ ἀναγαγεῖν παρὰ βασιλέα" 


e/ NA? / ΄ ‘ 2 ἐν 2 Ν ς ᾿ 
Ua δὲ εκῴφυγοντα τε TOUTOUS, καὶ απίκομενον ες τὴν εωυ- 


¥ 





A / ΄, 3 5) Bes So ΤΕΣ .Ἔ 
τοῦ, δοκεοντώ τε εἶναι ἐν σωτηρίῃ ἤδη, τὸ ἐνθεῦτέν μιν οὐ 
5 7 Ν ς Ν / Ee. εἶ 
ἐχθροὶ ὑποδεξώμενοι, καὶ ὑπὸ δικαστήριον αὐτὸν ἀγαγόντες, 
7 / A 2 / > bs x Ν ὲ 
εδίωξαν τυραννίδος τῆς ἐν Χερσονήσῳ. ἀποφυγὼν δὲ καὶ 

΄ Ν ed >] / ? < . XN 
τούτους, στρατηγος οὕτω Αθηναίων ὠπεδέχθη, αἱρεθεὶς 
ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου. 

Κ' Ν a Ν 53) Μ 5 a + = Me ς 
7. αὶ πρῶτα μεν, εὖντες ETL EV τῷ ἀστεὶ, οἱ στρατη- 
> / ’ / / / > 
yo. ἀποπέμπουσι ἐς Σπώρτην κήρυκα Φειδιππίδην, AOn- 
“ Ν A y+ ΧΕ / Ἂς A 
ναῖον μὲν ἄνδρα, ἄλλως δὲ ἡμεροδρόμον τε καὶ τοῦτο με- 
a a ‘ ς ad ἡ / Ν 
λετώντα " τῷ δὴ (ὡς αὑτὸς τε ἔλεγε Φειδιππίδης καὶ 
3 , ) / δὰ < / 3 ὃ C2) BS 
“Αθηναίοισι ἀπήγγελλε) περὶ τὸ Παρθένιον οὖρος τὸ ὑπὲρ 
, Ν / , ν +S A 
Teyens ὁ Πὰν περιπίπτει. βώσαντα δὲ τοὔνομα τοῦ Φει- 
᾿ A > / A 3 ω 
διππίδεω, τὸν Πᾶνα ᾿Αθηναίοισι κελεῦσαι ἀπαγγεῖλαι, 

/ A > / A oy d a FFT 
διότι ἑωυτοῦ οὐδεμίαν ἐπιμέλειαν ποιεῦνται, ἐόντος εὐνόου 
> - / y+ / 
Ἀθηναίοισι, καὶ πολλαχῇ γενομένου ἤδη σφι χρησίμου, 

Ἂ 2 / Ν a Ν > a 
τὰ δ᾽ ἔτι καὶ ἐσομένου. καὶ ταῦτα μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι, κατα- 

΄ 5 a , 4 3 
στάντων σφίσι εὖ ἤδη τῶν πρήηγμωτων, πιστεύσαντες εἶναι 
3 / ¢ ΄ ΟΝ ΓΝ, / XX Cs \ 3. (ἧς 
ἀληθεα, ἱδρύσαντο ὕπὸ τῇ ἀκροπόλι Πανὸς ρὸν, καὶ αὐτὸν 
Bir / A 2 / / 3 / x , 
ἀπὸ ταύτης τῆς ἀγγελίης θυσίῃσι ἐπετεῃησι καὶ λαμπαδι 
e / , Ν ἘῸΝ n a . 
ὑλάσκονται. 8. Tote δὲ πεμφθεὶς ὑπὸ τῶν στρατηγῶν ὁ 

Ἂν 7 Ν Ν A Lal 
Φειδιππίδης οὗτος. ὅτε πέρ οἱ ἔφη καὶ τὸν Πᾶνα φανῆναι, 
= rn 2 na? / + 3 2 >= μὰ 2 / 
euTepatos εκ τοῦ Αθηναίων ἄστεος ἣν EV ATAPTH, ἀπικὸ- 
Ne, Ν ‘ yy 7 3 / > 
μενος δὲ ἐπὶ τοὺς apyovTas ἔλεγε" 2 Δακεδαιμοόνιοι, 4θη- 

r ς ᾿ ͵7ὔ A Ἂ he fx 
vaio ὑμέων δέονται σφίσι βοηθῆσαι, καὶ pn περιιδεῖν 

,ὕ ᾽ » 3 » 7 ΄ 
πόλιν ἀρχαιοτάτην ἐν τοῖσι ᾿ Ελλησι δουλοσύνῃ περιπε- 

A SS ᾽ aA 7 Ν ἈΝ A Ἢ / / 
govoay πρὸς ἀνδρῶν βαρβάρων" καὶ yap νῦν Epetpia τε͵ 

/ / / 2 
ἠνδραπόδισται, καὶ πόλι λογίμῳ ἡ ᾿Ελλὰς γέγονε ἀσθενε- 

/ ἐν ? / ? / Laieet 
στερη. ἋὋὉ μὲν δή σφι τὰ ἐντεταλμένα ἀπήγγελλε". τοῖσι 

Suet? \ / > / ὋΣ be 
δὲ ἕαδε μὲν βοηθέειν ᾿Αθηναίοισι, ἀδύνατα δέ σφι ἦν TO 


/ / A 2 / , Ν / 
παραυτίκα TOLEELY ταῦτα, οὐ βουλομένοισι λύειν TOV νόμον" 


VIL, 108.] The Plataeans. 115 


cy) A e , A = , , ? 7 a 5 , 7 
ἦν γὰρ ἱστάμενον τοῦ μηνὸς εἰνώτη, εἰνάτῃ δὲ οὐκ ἐξελεύ- 
wv Ν 3 / Dik = , @ 
σεσθαι epacayv, μὴ ov πλήρεος εοντος τοῦ κύκλου. οὗτοι 
/ Ν Λ y” 
μὲν νυν τὴν πανσέληνον ἐμενον. 
a N £ / < / 
9. Τοῖσι δὲ βαρβάροισι κατηγέετο Ἱππίης ὁ Πεισι- 
7 > Ν a A / Ν Μ 
στράτου ἐς τὸν Παραθῶνα, τῆς παροιχομένης νυκτὸς ow 
ΤᾺ ? nr ef 7, 5 3 os , ε +z / A \ a 
ἰδων ἐν τῷ ὕπνῳ τοιηνδε" ἐδόκεε ὁ ἱππίης TH μητρι TH 
« a a / > 2 - " 7 
ἑωυτοῦ συνευνηθῆναι. συνεβάλετο WY εκ τοῦ ονείρου, κα- 
\ > yy , a / ‘ ᾽ \ 
τελθὼν ἐς Tas ἄθηνας καὶ ἀνασωσάμενος τὴν ἀρχὴν, τελεὺυ- 
7 2 a ¢ a / , Ν Ἀ “- "» 
τήσειν ἐν τῇ EWUTOU γηραιός. ἐκ μεν ON τῆς οψίος συνε- 


" a / Ν / a Ἀ ‘ 
Bureto ταῦτα" 80. τότε δὲ κατηγεομενος, TOUTO MEV τὰ 





2 , ‘ 3 ° 2 / ? 5» “-“ Ν 
ἀνδράποδα τὰ ἐξ Ἐρετρίης ἀπέβησε ες τὴν νῆσον τὴν 
/ 4 Ν ’ 7: A XN / 
Στυρέων, καλεομένην δὲ ΔΑιγίλειαν, τοῦτο δὲ καταγομένας 
᾽ ἣν a \ / of : 2 ΄ > 
es τὸν Mapadova tas νέας ὡρμιζε οὗτος, ἐκβάντας τε ἐς 
A \ ΄ / / ¢ A / 
γῆν τοὺς βαρβαρους διέτασσε. καὶ οἱ ταῦτα διέποντι 
3 an r Ν A / xX ¢ νὰ ς ® / 
ἐπῆλθε πταρεῖν τε καὶ βῆξαι μεζόνως ἢ ws ἐώθεε, οἷα δέ οἱ 
7 Ὁ ἃ al 3 / ¢ a 2 4 
πρεσβυτέρῳ ἐόντι τῶν οδόντων οἱ πλεῦνες ἐσείοντο. τού- 
3 7 a Ia 7 ? , Ν ΕἸ 
TOV ὧν ἕνα τῶν ὀδόντων ἐκβάλλει ὑπο βίης βήξας - ἐκπε- 
7, vio Ν , ? a 2 ͵, ἈΝ \ 
σόντος δὲ ἐς THY Ψώμμον αὑτοῦ, ἐποιέετο πολλὴν σπουδὴν 
3 a -¢ Ν ? ? / Peel ie eS ? / 2 
ἐξευρεῖν. ws δὲ οὐκ εφαίνετὸ οἱ ὁ ὁδὼν, ἀναστενάξας εἶπε 
Ν \ , ς “ὦ > ς / 3 Ν ? ! 
πρὸς τους παραστατας" Ἢ γῆ noe οὐκ ἡμετέρη ἐστὶ, οὐδε 
/ Ὁ 7 i / / / 
μιν δυνησόμεθα ὑποχειρίην ποιήσασθαι" ὁκόσον δὲ τί μοι 
7 aA Ia ἃ e 7, Ν Ν ΄ \ 
μέρος μετῆν, ὁ ὁδὼν μετέχει. ᾿Ϊππίης μὲν δὴ ταὐτῃ την 
Ὑ Λ 3 / 
οψιν συνεβάλετο ἐξεληλυθεναι. 
2 / / 3 [abn Ὁ 7 
11. ᾿Αθηναίοισι δὲ τεταγμένοισι ἐν τεμεένεὶ ᾿Ηρακλέος 
τῷ , 7 / \ ν \ 
ἐπῆλθον βοηθέοντες Πλαταιέες πανδημεί " καὶ yap καὶ 
3 , ͵7 >? XN a / e ¥ 
ἐδεδώκεσαν aodéas αὐτοὺς τοῖσι ᾿Αθηναίοισι ot Πλαταιεες, 
Ν / ¢ Ν 2 n ce ss a \ " ᾽ 
καὶ πόνους ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν οἱ Αθηναῖοι συχνοὺς ἤδη avapat- 
7 BA x e / ων / e 
ρέατο" ἔδοσαν δὲ woe. πιεζόμενοι ὑπὸ Θηβαίων ov Πλα- 
4 nr A / ok a 
ταιέες ἐδίδοσαν πρῶτα παρατυχοῦσι Kreopevel τε τῷ 
> Ν / 7 ᾽ \ ξ \ ᾽ 
Avakavipidew καὶ Λακεδαιμονίοισι σφέας αὐτοὺς, οἱ δὲ ov 


, x ,ὔ , ς a \ ς 7 ἮΕΝ 
δεκόμενοι ἔλεγον σφι τωδε: Ἡμεῖς μεν ἑκαστέρω τε οἰκεο- 


116 Invasion of Greece by Darius. —[Herop, | 


‘ ς κε , , ’ x 2 / , 
μεν, καὶ ὑμῖν τοιὴδε Tis γινοιτ᾽ ἂν εἐπικουρίη ψυχρῆη" 
f ‘s Xv / 3 4 Μ 
φθαίητε γὰρ ἂν πολλάκις ἐξανδραπόδισθεντες ἢ τινὰ 

z εξ / 7 ; Ce ὃ a £ / 
πυθέσθαι ἡμέων. συμβουλεύομεν δὲ ὑμῖν δοῦναι ὑμέας 
> ee | / / / 2 / \ 
αὐτοὺς ᾿Αθηναίοισι, πλησιοχώωροισί TE ἀνδράσι καὶ τιμω- 
aon - o ΄ὔ € 
ρέειν ἐοῦσι ov κακοῖσι. ταῦτα συνεβούλευον οἱ Aaxkedat- 
, ? ‘ + “ δ / ς / 
μόνιοι, ov κατὰ εὔνοιαν οὕτω τῶν IIhatatewv, ws Bovdo- 
\ . ΄ Μ / ° r 
μενοι τοὺς AOnvaious ἔχειν πόνους συνεστεῶτας Βοιωτοῖσι. 
, / A al # 
2. Λακεδαιμόνιοι μὲν νὺν Πλαταιεῦσι ταῦτα συνεβού- 
\ 2 / > > 3 / ς. % / 
Aevov: οἱ δὲ οὐκ ἠπίστησαν, ἀλλ «Αθηναίων ipa ποιεύν- 
rc ͵ cal ε / « / 2 ὡς Ν. ‘ 
των τοῖσι δυώδεκα θεοῖσι, LxeTaL ἱζόμενοι ἐπὶ τὸν βωμὸν 
3. " > ΄ fr Ν / a 
ἐδίδοσαν σφέας αὐτούς. Θηβαῖοι de πυθόμενοι ταῦτα 
3 Ν / ae! / 3 / 
ἐστρατεύοντο ἐπὶ Tous Πλαταιεας" ᾿Αθηναιοι de σφι εβοή- 
Ν ΄ z 7 / 2 
θεον. μελλόντων δὲ συνάπτειν μάχην, KopivOcot ov περι- 
is ’ pP 
r / Ν Ἂς / 3 / 
ELOOV, TAPATUYOVTES δὲ Kat καταλλαξαντες, ἐπιτρεψάντων 
2 / oS Ν / ES / 2A l 
ἀμφοτέρων, οὔρισαν τὴν χώρην ἐπὶ τοισίδε, eav Θηβαί- 
a XN Ν / 3 Ν / 
ovs Βοιωτῶν τοὺς μὴ βουλομένους ες Botwrovs τελεειν. 
r = an / 3 ’ 

13. Κορίνθιοι μὲν δὴ ταῦτα γνοντες ἀπαλλάσσοντο" ᾿Αθη- 
7) δ ? A 3 / Ν - / Nae 
ναίοισι δὲ ἀπιοῦσι ἐπεθήκαντο Βοιωτοὶ, ἐπιθέμενοι δὲ ἐσ- 
᾿ an , ¢ } \ eo R \ ε 
σωθησαν τῇ μάχῃ. ὑπερβάντες δε ot Αθηναίοι τοὺς οἱ 

΄ ͵ a 93 Μ Ψ᾿' 
Κορίνθιοι ἔθηκαν Πλαταιεῦσι εἶναι οὔρους, τούτους ὑπερ- 
, : > εν 2 3 7 3 / 
βάντες tov Ασωπὸν αὐτὸν ἐποιήσαντο ovpov Θηβαιοισι 
Ν , 5 Ν 7 oA XN X «ς 
πρὸς Πλαταιεας εἶναι καὶ Ὑσιάς. ἔδοσαν μὲν δὴ οἱ Πλα- 
yf / 2 ‘ 7AO / 7 ἴω 3 / : - 
ταιέεες σφεας aVTOUS ηναίοισι TPOTM τῷ εἰρημένῳ, ἧκον 
\ 3 oe : 
δὲ τότε ἐς Παραθῶνα βοηθεοντες. 
“ Ν / al ’ f / 
14. Τοῖσι δὲ ᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγοῖσι ἐγίνοντο δίχα ab 
a a Ἂς ᾽ Δ᾽ δ / 5 / x 
γνῶμαι" τῶν μὲν οὐκ εωντων συμβάλλειν, OALYOUS Yap 
9 la la 7 cal rn ἣν Ν Α 
εἶναι στρατιῇ TH Μήδων συμβαλεῖν, τῶν δε καὶ Μιλτιάδεω 
> / 3 / ᾿ ΝΒ / £ / 
κελευόντων. ὡς δὲ δίχα TE ἐγίνοντο, καὶ ενίκα ἡ χείρων 
a , ᾽ a 5 ‘ ς f 
τῶν γνωμέων, ἐνθαῦτα (ἣν γὰρ Evdexatos Arnpidopopos ὁ 
al , Ν 5 / / Ἂ \ 
τῷ κυάμῳ λαχὼν Αθηναίων πολεμαρχεειν, TO παλαιὸν yap 


> “ e / DS , > “ r 
AO@nvaiot ὁμόψηφον Tov πολέμαρχον ἐποιεῦντο τοῖσι στρα- 








Ε VI, 111.] The Polemarch Cailimachus. 117 


e 3 / , / ᾽ fc 
τηγοῖσι, ἣν TE τότε πολέμαρχος Καλλίμαχος ’Adudvaios ) 
rn 3 Ν , 2). / 
πρὸς τοῦτον ἐλθὼν Μιλτιάδης ἔλεγε tude: 15. Ev σοὶ 
a / > Ν \ “- ? 7 ΠΝ / 
νῦν, Καλλίμαχε. ἐστί ἢ καταδουλῶσαι ᾿Αθήνας, ἢ ἐλευθέ- 
, / / > Ν 7 
pas ποιήσαντα, μνημόσυνα λιπέσθαι ες τὸν ἅπαντα ἀνθρώ- 
Σ , e Jas € / / A oe / 
πων βίον, οἷα οὐδὲ ᾿Αρμοδιὸς τε καὶ ᾿Αριστογείτων λεί- 
A Ν Ν 3 e > / ’ rc > / 
πουσι. νῦν γὰρ δὴ, εξ ov ἐγένοντο Αθηναῖοι, ἐς κίνδυνον 
“ν / VON / ¢ ΄ ε is 
ἥκουσι μέγιστον. καὶ ἢν μεν γε ὑποκύψωσι τοῖσι Μήδοισι, 
/ \ 7 δεὸ / ς / ΕΥ \ 
δέδοκται Ta πείσονται παραδεδομενοι ᾿Ϊππίῃη" ἢν δὲ περι- 
“ “ ς Λ “ ee ͵ a ς , 
γενητῶι αὕτη ἢ πόλις, οἴη TE ἐστι TPwTH τῶν ᾿Ελληνίδων 
/ / a 3 ‘ “ @i ae 7 
πολίων γενέσθαι. κῶς ὧν δὴ ταῦτα οἷά τε ἐστι γενέσθαι, 
\ a 3 / ΄ 2 / ω 7 \ A 
καὶ κῶς ἐς TE TL τούτων ἀνήκει τῶν πρηγμώτων TO κῦρος 
» = “ ΄, Ct 2 A = +7 
ἔχειν, νῦν ἔρχομαι φράσων. ἠἡμεων τῶν στρατηγῶν, εὐντων 
/ / / ¢ a a ‘ / 
Sexa, δίχα γίνονται al γνῶμαι, TOV μεν κελευόντων συμβα- 
΄“ al Ν 3 at ‘A / Ν ΄ 
λεῖν, τῶν δε οὐ συμβαλεῖν. ἢν μεν νυν μὴ συμβάλωμεν, 
4" / /. >] “-“ / ‘ 
ελπομαί τινα στάσιν μεγάλην ἐμπεσοῦσαν διασείσειν τὰ 
? / , 7 \ \ , 
Αθηναίων φρονήματα ὥστε μηδίσαι" ἢν δὲ συμβάλωμεν 
/ Ν Ν 3 / / > / 
πρίν τι καὶ, σαθρὸν Αθηναίων μετεξετεροισι ἐγγενέσθαι, 
a Qty. / ont ΟΥ̓ 7 a 
θεῶν τὰ Loa νεμόντων, οἷοί TE εἰμεν περιγενέσθαι TH συμ- 
A A > 7ὕ “, Ν A / Se / / 
Born. ταῦτα ov Tuvta ἐς ce νῦν τείνει καὶ EK σέο ἤρτη- 
mY \ ῳ / cc a ee A 4 / 
ae ἢν yap δ si at Τῇ ἐμῇ προσθῆ, ἐστι TOL πατρίς TE 
/ ‘\ #. rn 5" ».-6-Ὃ- ta A Ν Ν 
ἐλευθερη καὶ πόλις πρωτὴη τῶν ἐν τῇ Ελλαδι, ἢν δὲ τὴν 
a > 86 ‘ ‘ “ ¢ / a 
τῶν aTooTEVOOVTMY THY συμβολὴν Edy, ὑπάρξει TOL τῶν 
53 δ / 3 a Ν τ ᾿- A / ΄ 
εγὼ κατελεξα ἀγαθῶν τὰ ἐναντία. 16. Ταῦτα λέγων ὁ 
7 A Ν a / / 
Μιλτιάδης προσκτᾶται tov Καλλίμαχον. προσγενομένης 
x A /, Ξ3 7 > ͵7 , 
δὲ τοῦ πολεμάρχου τῆς γνώμης, ἐκεκύρωτο συμβαλλειν. 
ΤΟΝ ἐν. ἢ A AA ¢ , x , G 
μετὰ δὲ οἱ στρατηγοὶ τῶν ἡ γνώμη ἔφερε συμβάλλειν, ὡς 
ce ἢ 2. κα Ἄν af A ς 7ὕ , 
εκάστου αὐτῶν ἐγίνετο πρυτανηΐη τῆς ἡμέρης, Μιλτιάδῃ 
, ε Ν / 5 / Ν > / 
παρεδίδοσαν" ὁ δὲ δεκόμενος ov TL κω συμβολὴν ETrOLEETO, 
/ Ἀ ? A 5 5 4. 34 
πρίν γε On αὑτοῦ πρυτανηΐη ἐγένετο. 
Ν > > a a 3 a S39 / 
17. ‘Ds δὲ ἐς ἐκεῖνον περιῆλθε, ἐνθαῦτα δὴ ἐτάσσοντο 
2 ? cr « / A \ - ΄ 
ὧδε ᾿Αθηναῖοι ὡς συμβαλέοντες. τοῦ μὲν δεξιοῦ κέρεος 


118 Invasion of Greece by Darius. [Hrnop, 


em e 7 / e Ν ie / > 
ηγέετο ὁ πολέμαρχος Καλλίμαχος" ὁ yap νόμος TOTE εἶχε 
val 5 / Ss / + , 
οὕτω τοῖσι ᾿Αθηναίοισι, Tov πολέμαρχον ἔχειν κέρας TO 
ὃ ’ ¢ 7 S ΄ 2 δέ ς Υ θ / ς 
εξιον. ἠγεομένου δὲ τούτου, ἐξεδέκοντο ὡς ἡριθμεοντο αἱ 
a ον ? A ce NO ae x 
φυλαὶ, ἐχόμεναι ἀλλήλων " τελευταιοι δὲ ἐτάσσοντο, εχον- 
Ν Se? , / oN ΄ 7 
τες τὸ εὐωνυμον κέρας, Πλαταιέες. ato ταύτης yap ode 
a 2 / 2 / Ν ΄ 
τῆς μάχης, θυσίας ᾿Αθηναίων ἀναγόντων καὶ πανηγύριας 
\ > a / / 7 A 
τὰς EV τῇσι πενταετηρίσι γίνομένας, κατεύχεται ὁ κῆρυξ ὁ 
3 “ 7] 2 / / 7 Ν 2 
Αθηναῖος, ἅμα τε ᾿Αθηναίοισι λέγων γίνεσθαι τὰ ἀγαθὰ 
Ν A / x / a 3 / τ 
καὶ Πλαταιεῦσι. τότε δε, τασσομένων τῶν Αθηναίων ev 
a a > / / Ν ,ὔ 3 J 
τῷ Μαραθῶνι, ἐγίνετο τοιόνδε TL* τὸ στρατόπεδον εξισού- 
A A / Ἂς ἃς 2 an 4 3 
μενον τῷ Μηδικῷ στρατοπέδῳ, τὸ μὲν αὐτοῦ μέσον ἐγίνετο 
DREN / > ie \ 7 S 2 / Ν 7 
ἐπὶ τάξιας OALYAS, καὶ ταύτῃ ἣν ἀσθενέστατον τὸ στρατο- 
xX Ν / ¢ fy 7 es 
πέδον, TO δὲ κέρας ἑκάτερον Eppwro πλήθεϊ. 148. “Qs δέ 
/ Ν x / 2 / Ν ? A € 
σφι διετέτακτο, καὶ τὰ σφαγια ἐγίνετο Kana, ἐνθαῦτα ὡς 
) / ε 2 a / “ δ \ ᾿ 
ἀπείθησαν ot Αθηναίοι, δρόμῳ ἵεντο es τους βαρβάρους. 
5 . ͵ ᾽ aaa? ἈΝ Tee Χ 
ἦσαν δὲ στάδιοι οὐκ ἐλάσσονες τὸ μεταίχμιον αὐτῶν ἢ 
δ ’ S Se Tic ιν ὃ / 3 / / 
oxto@. οἱ δὲ Πέρσαι ὁρέοντες δρόμῳ επιόντας, παρεσκευᾶ- 
e / / a 3 / 3 / 
ζοντο ws δεξόμενοι" μανίην τε τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι ἐπέφερον 
͵ ͵ 2 Ν ὅς τῇ N 7 
καὶ παγχυ ὀλεθρίην, ὁρέοντες αὐυτους OALYOUS, καὶ τουτοὺυς 
f / + “ ς 7 Μ 
δρόμῳ ἐπειγομένους, οὔτε ἑππου ὑπαρχούσης σφι οὔτε το- 
/ a / ς / / 3 
ξευμάτων. ταῦτα μὲν νυν οἱ βαρβαροι κατείκαζον" 44θη- 
cal ‘ 5 / 2 / / = / 
ναῖον δε, ἐπεί τε ἀθρόοι προσεμιξαν τοῖσι βαρβάροισι, 
? / Ies/ / an Χ Ν ς 7 ’ 
ἐμάχοντο ἀξίως λόγου. πρῶτοι μὲν yap Ελληνων παν- 
nr a + / >] / > , a 
TOV TOV ἡμεῖς ἰδμεν δρόμῳ ἐς πολεμίους ἐχρήσαντο, πρῶ- 
Ν BOY 3 Aust Ἂ ΕΠ Ν Ἀν 
Tot δὲ ἀνέσχοντο ἐσθῆτα τε ηδικην ὁρέοντες, καὶ Tous 
yo 7 3 , , \ “ \ 
avopas ταύτην ἐσθημένους " Tews δὲ ἣν τοῖσι Ελλησι Kat 
Ν + Ἂς / 2 n 4 ν᾿ Ν 
τὸ οὔνομα τὸ Mrdwv φόβος ἀκοῦσαι. 19. δωλχομενων δὲ 
3 a an / Ἂν , Ν Ν % / 
ev τῷ Μαραθῶνι ypovos ἐγίνετο πολλὸς. καὶ TO MEV με- 
a / οὐ ἢ ΤῊΝ, ὁ / a f 
σον Tov στρατοπέδου ἐνίκων ot βάρβαροι, τῇ Περσαι τε 
3 Ν Ἂς / > ,ὔ Ν a \ Ni ga’ XS « 
αὐτοὶ καὶ Σάκαι ἐτετάχατο" κατὰ τοῦτο μὲν δὴ ἐνίκων οἱ 


é Ν δύ Ins 3 SS 7) Ν Ν 
BapPapou, και ρήξαντες ἐδίωκον ἐς τὴν μεσογαιαν, τὸ δὲ 








VIL, 117.] Battle of Marathon. 119 


, ae + ae > yf 4 , a 
κέρας ἑκάτερον ἐνίκων A@nvaioi te καὶ Πλαταιέες. νικῶν- 
Ν ἵς \ / - / 4 ΕἾ 
τες δὲ, τὸ μὲν τετραμμένον τῶν βαρβάρων φεύγειν ἔων, 
a Ν Ν / eo 7 al / Ν / 
τοῖσι δὲ TO μεσον ῥήξασι αὐτῶν, συναγαγόντες τὰ κέρεα 
> 7] > / Ν sf 3 9 rn ΄ ‘ 
ἀμφότερα, ἐμάχοντο καὶ ενίκων Αθηναΐῖοι. φεύγουσι δὲ 
“-“ 7 fad / > a " Ν \ / 
τοῖσι Περσησι εἵποντο κόπτοντες, ἐς Ὁ ἐπὶ THY θάλασσαν 
> / a Μ XN > / a a 
ἀπικόμενοι πῦρ TE aLTEOV καὶ ἐπελαμβάνοντο τῶν νεῶν. 
\ a \ > 7 a , ἃ ͵ 
20. Katerovto μὲν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ πόνῳ ὁ πολέμαρχος Καλ- 
͵ / Iv IN / ? Ν Δ τ ΙΑ ΨΚ 
λίμαχος διαφθείρεται, ἀνὴρ γενόμενος ἀγαθὸς, ἀπὸ δ᾽ ἔθανε 
na a / ¢ » - Ν 
τῶν στρατηγῶν Στησίλεως ὁ Θρασύλεω" τοῦτο δὲ Κυνέ- 
> / a >] / rn ᾽ / 
yetpos ὁ Evdopiwvos, ἐνθαῦτα ἐπιλαβόμενος τῶν ἀφλάστων 
Ν \ a ? Ν 8. ΣῈ / a Ne ὧδ 
νεὸς τὴν χείρα ATOKOTTELS TEAEKEL πίπτει, τοῦτο δὲ ἀλλοι 
/ / Ν 2 / ¢ Ν Ν \ 
᾿Αθηναίων πολλοί Te καὶ ουνομαστοί. 21. Entra μεν δὴ 
a a > / / i >] a A ‘ 
TOV νεῶν ἐπεκρατῆσαν τρόπῳ τοιούτῳ Αθηναῖοι, τῇσι δὲ 
- « / 3 / Ν > 7 
λουπῆσι ot βάρβαροι εἐξανακρουσάμενοι, καὶ αναλαβόντες 
3 A / ἢ a \ ’ ? / > 7, 
εκ τῆς νήσου, ἐν τῇ εἐλίπον, τὰ ἐξ Epetpins ἀνδράποδα, 
/ 7 / A Ἃ, > / 
περιέπλωον Σούνιον, βουλόμενοι φθῆναι τοὺς Αθηναίους 
᾽ / 2 Ν y =m 4 \ » > 3 / > 
ἀπικόμενοι ἐς TO ἄστυ. αἰτίη δὲ εἐσχε ev ᾿Αθηναίοισι ἐξ 
3 ὔ A > Ν A > a / 
Αλκμαιωνιδεων μηχανῆς avtouvs ταῦτα ἐπινοηθῆναι" τού- 
\ 6 / c Πέ ? Se > ὃ 
Tous yap, συνθεμένους τοῖσι ΠΠ]ερσῃσι, ἀναδεξαι ἀσπίδα 
: ae + 2 a / ς e \ Ν / 
ἐοῦσι ἤδη ἐν τῆσι νηυσί. 22. οὗτοι μὲν δὴ περιεπλωον 
vA 3 “ Ν ς A > , - 7 
Σούνιον, Αθηναίοι δὲ ὡς ποδῶν εἶχον ταχίστα ἐβοήθεον 
ἢ Ss δ ἀν Δ 7 5) 7 Ν x \ f 
ἐς TO ἀστυ, καὶ εφθησὰν τε ἀπικόμενοι πρὶν ἢ τοὺς βαρβα- 
df ys δας, 7 3 / 3 « / 
ρους ἥκειν, καὶ ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο ἀπιγμένοι εξ ᾿Ηρακλείου 
ἣν ἢ A Ἵ 4 ς 7 A b] } “Ὁ 
tov εν Μαραθῶνι ev ἀλλῳ ᾿Ηρακλείῳ τῷ εν Κυνοσαργεῖ. 
« ὡς / a pie , , a 
οἱ δὲ βάρβαροι τῇσι νηυσὶ ὑπεραιωρηθεντες Φαλήρου (τοῦ- 
Ν > 5.5 Ὗ t Ales / δι rs > 
TO γὰρ ἢν ἐπίνειον τότε τῶν Αθηναίων), ὑπὲρ τούτου ava- 
7 ™ / 3 7 > / > \ > / 
KWXEVTAVTES TAS νεᾶς, ATETAWOV ὀπίσω ES THY AciND. 
3 ΄ Lal 3 nr / ? / r 
23. Ev ταύτῃ τῇ ev Μαραθῶνι μάχῃ ἀπέθανον τῶν 
/ \ « / Ν / ¥ 
βαρβάρων Kata εξακισχίλίους καὶ τετρακοσίους avopas, 
? / ae ee Ν 4 , Ν ΄ Υ \ > 
Αθηναίων δὲ ἑκατὸν ἐνενήκοντα καὶ δύο. επεσον μὲν ap- 


/ A 7 Ν b] / “- / 
φοτέερων τοσοῦτοι" συνήνεικε δὲ αὐτόθι θώυμα γενεσθαι 


120 March of Xerxes. [Hrrop, 


/ 3 a + > / ΝΗ / 9 
τοιόνδε᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖον ἀνδρα ᾿Επίξηλον τὸν -Κουφαγορεω. ἐν 
κ ,ὔ / A ΚΩ͂Ν / ᾽ Ν an 
τῇ συστάσι μαχόμενόν τε καὶ ἀνδρα γινόμενον ἀγαθὸν, τῶν 

5 4 A + / InN an , 
ὀμμάτων στερηθῆναι, οὔτε πληγέντα οὐδὲν τοῦ σώματος 
7 / Ν Ν Ν A / / 2 \ z 
οὔτε βληθέντα, καὶ TO λουπὸν τῆς Sons διατέλέεειν ἀπὸ τού- 
a , 7 / / δὲ 2.4% Μ 
του τοῦ χρόνου ἐόντα τυφλὸν. λέγειν ὃε αὐτὸν ἤκουσα 
\ A / / Ν / + ὃ ς / ε / 
περὶ τοῦ πάθεος τοιόνδε τινὰ λόγον, ἄνδρα οἱ δοκέειν ὁπλί- 
> A 7] vad Ἂς / Ν 3 / A 
την ἀντιστῆναι μέγαν, τοῦ TO γένειον THY ἀσπίδα πᾶσαν 
ly XN \ / a ¢ Ἂν, \ “ Se 
σκιάξειν " τὸ δὲ φάσμα τοῦτο ewuTOV μὲν παρεξελθεῖν, τὸν 
avec A / . a a Ν Ἄχ fe 
δὲ ἑωυτοῦ παραστάτην aToKTewat. ταῦτα μεν δὴ Ἐπίζη- 
> / / 
λον ἐπυθόμην eye. 
/ \ & 3 Ν > 7 / 
24. Λακεδαιμονίων δὲ ἧκον es tas Αθῆνας δισχίλιοι 
Ν Ν / Ὑ Ἂς XN 6 
μέτα την πανσέληνον, EYOVTES σπουδὴν πολλὴν καταλαβεῖν 
/ a 3 / 2 7] 2 A a 
οὕτω, WATE τριταῖοι Ex Σπάρτης ἐγένοντο ev τῇ 'ATTLKN. 
« Ν > / ““ “ e / “ / 
ὕστεροι δὲ ἀπικόμενοι τῆς συμβολῆς, ἐμείροντο ὅμως θηη- 
‘ f 3 4 Roa, Ν - > i) 
σασθαι τοὺς Mndous: edOovtes δὲ es τὸν Μαραθῶνα εθηη- 
Ν \ 3, Fi > / ἃς Ne OF, 2 an 
σαντο. μετὰ oe, aweovtes Αθηναίους καὶ TO Epyov αὑτῶν, 
> / 2 / 
απαλλαάσσοντο OTLOW. 


II. MARCH OF XERXES.— PREPARATIONS OF THE 
GREEKS. 


9 Ν \ ¢ 4 7 9 iL ἮΝ A , A > 
B. Eve: Oe ἢ ἀγγελίη ἀπίκετο περὶ τῆς μαχῆς τῆς ἐν 
a fc s / ΄“ ἃς ς 7] 
Μαραθῶνι γενομένης παρὰ βασιλεα Δαρεῖον τὸν Ὕστα- 
Ν x / , al > / 
σπεος, καὶ πρίν μεγάλως κεχαραγμένον τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι 
Ἂς \ 2 7 > \ - \ xX 4 a 
διὰ τὴν ἐς Σ ἀρδις ἐσβολὴν. καὶ δὴ καὶ τότε πολλῷ TE δει- 
1) τὶ ἢ c 
/ 3 7 \ “ cd f, ϑρ τὰς \ 
VOTEPA ἐποίεε, καὶ μᾶλλον ὥρμητο στρατεύεσθαι επὶ τὴν 
ς ,ὔ Ν be at \ > , / 3 / 
Ελλαδα. καὶ αὐτίκα μὲν ἐπηγγέλλετο TELTIOV ἀγγελους 
\ / ¢ , Ν A / 3 / 
KATA TONS ETOLMACELY στρατιὴν, πολλῷ TAEW ETLTATT WY 
¢ , ΝΥ / cr Ν 4 f 
EXATTOLOL ἢ πρότερον παρεῖχον, καὶ νέας TE καὶ ἵππους 


Ἀ cr ᾿ς rc ΄ \ / ¢e 
καὶ σίτον καὶ πλοία. τούτων δὲ περιαγγελλομένων, ἢ 








VII, 22.] firs vast Preparations. 121 


"A , 5 ΄ δι τ ΔΥ ΨΚ’ ’ - > +9 
gin €OOVEETO ETL τρία ETEA, καταλεγομένων τε τῶν ἀρί- 
ς ie % Ν ξ / / ‘ 
στων ὡς ἐπὶ τὴν Ελλάδα στρατευσομένων, Kai παρασκευα- 
͵7 , Ν + ia ? ΄ Ν 7 
ζομένων. 2 τετάρτῳ Oe ετεὶ Αἰγύπτιοι ὑπὸ Καμβύσεω 
͵ > , δι. 5 / ᾽ i ΝΜ ΑΜ 
δουλωθέντες ὡπεστησαν ἀπὸ ]ΙΪερσέων. ενθαῦτα δὴ καὶ 
A oe Ee IS le ΄ 
μᾶλλον ὥρμητο καὶ er ἀμφοτεροὺυς στρατεύεσθαι. Σ΄τελ- 
͵ Ν / Ἄν. 5 A, 3 ΄ a / 
λομένου δὲ Aapeiov ew Αιγυπτον καὶ Αθήνας, τῶν παίδων 
> A 7 > , ΄ Ν - la ΄ / 
αὐτοῦ στάσις ἐγένετο μεγώλὴη περὶ τῆς ἡγεμονίης, ὡς δέει 
3 / , Ν Ν / , τ 
pw ἀποδέξαντα βασιλέα κατὰ τον ]Ϊερσέων νομὸν οὕτω 
7] / Ν / / ΄ 
στρατεύεσθαι. ᾿Αποδέξας oe βασιλέα Πέρσῃσι Δαρεῖος 
wm / «“ 7 > Ν Ν Ν a 7 
Ἐέρξεα, ὥρμητο στρατεύεσθαι. ἀλλὰ yup μετὰ ταῦτά τε 
Ν 7 ΄ 3 / a ¢ / + a / 
καὶ Διγύπτου ἀπόστασιν τῷ ὑστέρῳ ETE παρασκευαζόμε- 
᾽ὔ ol” - 4 Ν , » 
νον συνήνεικε αὑτὸν Ζαρεῖον, βασιλεύσαντα Ta πάντα ἔτεα 
vA Ν 4 2 al 2 / ec. 4S / Μ Ἀ 
ἕξ τε καὶ τριήκοντα, ἀποθανεῖν, οὐδὲ οἱ ἐξεγένετο οὔτε τοὺς 
3 rn 2 7 ΝΜ 3 ͵7ἷ ’ 
αἀπεστεῶτας Αιγυπτίους οὔτε ᾿Αθηναίους τιμωρήσασθαι. 
3 / Χ / ς 4 3 7 2 Ν 
ἀποθανόντος δὲ Aapevov ἡ βασιληΐη ἀνεχώρησε ἐς τὸν 
“ Ἂς; > / / / ᾽ . 
παίδα τὸν ἐκείνου Ξερξεα. 8. Καὶ Bepéns . . ἐπὶ μὲν 
7 Μ / , , Ν \ , 
τέσσερα ETEA πλήρεα πάραρτεετο στρατιὴν TE καὶ TA προσ- 
“ A , Ν yy ae 2 / 3 / 
dopa τῇ στρατιῇ. πέμπτῳ SE ETE ἀνομένῳ ἐστρατηλάτεε 
κ᾿ L ΄ , Ν a ¢ “ / 
χειρί μεγαλῃ πλήθεος. στόλων yap τῶν ἡμεῖς LOMEV πολ- 
A Ν 7 e 5), εὖ / \ > + 4 a 
A@ δὴ μέγιστος οὗτος ἐγένετο. τί γὰρ οὐκ ἤγαγε ἐκ τῆς 
> i Μ τς ἘΝ Ν ς / / A Ν 7 / 
Aoins εθνος ἐπὶ τὴν EXXdda BepEns ; κοῖον δὲ πινόμενὸν 
iA 2 > / Ν nr / na ξ 
μιν ὕδωρ οὐκ ἐπέλιπε, πλὴν τῶν μεγάλων ποταμῶν ; οἱ 
Ν Ν if / ¢ ‘ > δ > , “ 
μὲν γὰρ veas παρείχοντο, οἱ δὲ Es πεζὸν ἐτετάχατο, TOLCL 
Lo ’ κα San ‘ a / 
δὲ ἵππος προσετέτακτο, τοῖσι δὲ ἱππαγωγὰ πλοία ἅμα 
/ ἴω Ν “ Ν ra Ν / 
στρατευομένοισι, τοῖσι δὲ ἐς Tus γεφύρας μακρᾶς νέας 
/ rn ἈΝ “-“ 7 Ν ’ Ἁ al δ 
παρέχειν, τοῖσι δὲ σῖτά τε καὶ veas. 4. Καὶ τοῦτο μεν, 
ε , an / , ‘ Ν 
ὡς προσπταισάντων τῶν πρώτων περιπλωόντων περὶ TOV 
ν / >? a 5 A / > Ν 
ἄθων, προετοιμάζετο ἐκ τριῶν ἐτέων κου μάλιστα ἐς TOV 
Υ > Ν A A 7 / , 
Adwv: ev yap ᾿Ελαιοῦντι τῆς Χερσονήσου ὥρμεον τριη- 
3 A Ν / 77 Me / 
Pees, ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ ὁρμεόμενοι ὠρυσσον UTO μαστιγῶν πᾶντο- 


An A . ‘ Ν 
δαποὶ τῆς στρατιῆς, διάδοχοι δ᾽ ἐφοίτων - wpvacov δὲ καὶ 


122 March of Xerxes. : [Herop. 


ε a ἃ, Μ / ς Ν od 3 Ν ῷ 
οἱ περὶ τὸν ἄθων κατοικημένοι. O yap ἄθως ἐστι οὖρος 
/ Ν 2 s ’ / a ᾿] 7 
μέγα τε καὶ οὐνομαστον, ἐς θάλασσαν κατῆκον, οἰκημένον 
« Ν ᾿] f A Ν r > ἍΝ, y+ x 3 
ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπων. τῇ δὲ τελευτῷ ες τὴν ἤπειρον τὸ οὖρος, 
/ ? Wee Ἂς « , , 
χερσονησοειδές TE ἐστι καὶ ἰσθμὸς ὡς δυωδεκα σταδίων, 
͵ Ν aA Ἃς Ν 3 / >’ / a 
πεδίον δὲ τοῦτο καὶ KOAWVOL OV μεγάλοι Ex θαλάσσης τῆς 
° ͵ b ] Ν / x ᾽ / 7 y 
AxavOiwv ἐπὶ θάλασσαν τὴν ἀντίον Topwrys. ὅ. Qpve- 
Ν - / Ν a e / εὐὐνν. Δ 
σον δὲ ὧδε: δασάμενοι τὸν χῶρον ot βάρβαροι κατα εθνεα, 
x / /. x / > Νικἃ / 
KATA Σανην πόλιν σχοίνοτενες ποιησάμενοι, ἐπειδὴ ἐγένετο 
, ς - ec x / e a Μ 
βαθέα ἡ διῶρυξ. οἱ μὲν κατώτατα ἐστεῶτες ὠρυσσον, ἕτε- 
Ν / ἊΝ ΣΝ Ie ͵ - SYA 
pot δὲ παρεδίδοσαν τὸν αἰεὶ ἐξορυσσόμενον χοῦν ἀλλοισι 
΄ ¢ ω 3 Ds ‘ ¢ 3 3 ? / ed 
κατύπερθε ἑστεῶσι ἐπὶ βάθρων, ot 5 av exdexopevor eETe- 
“ ? / 3 Ἂς 3 “ - ν 3 / / 
poll, ἕως ἀπίκοντο ἐς TOUS ἀνωτάτω, οὗτοι δὲ εξεφορεὸν 
Ν Aden 7 3 A Ν / > “ 3 , 
τε Kar ἐξεβαλλον. ενθαῦτα δὴ λειμὼν ἐστι, ἵνα σφι ayopn 
τὰ / Ν ἐς γι ’ = 3 / 3 
τε ἐγίνετο καὶ πρητήριον" σῖτος δὲ ade πολλὸς εφοίτα εκ 
A > / ? ΄ € X : , 
τῆς Aoins adnreopevos. Ὁ. ws μεν εμε συμβαλλομενον 
εν» ΄ σ > NN bows eee 
εὑρίσκειν. μεγαλοφροσύνης elvexey αὑτὸ Ξέρξης ορύσσειν 
3 4 2 / N / 
ἐκέλευε, ἐθέλων τε δύναμιν ἀποδείκνυσθαι Kat μνημόσυνα 
, Ν Ν / / / Ἄς > Ἂς 
λιπέσθαι: παρεὸν γὰρ μηδένα πόνον λαβόντας Tov ἰσθμὸν 
ες ΡΩΝ ee >) 1 2 Λ 8 [4 A ΄ 
τὰς νέας διειρύσαι, ὀρύσσειν ἐκέλευε διώρυχα τῇ θαλάσσῃ, 
3 ε ΄ , e mn 3 7, rn 
εὕρος ὡς δύο τριήρεας TAWELY OMOU ἐλαστρευμένας. τοῖσι 
Ν > A / Abd Ἂς So / 
δὲ αὐτοῖσι τούτοισι. τοῖσί TEP καὶ TO ορυγμα, προσετέτακτο 
Ν Ν ,ὔ Ἂς Ue a 
καὶ Tov Στρυμόνα ποταμὸν CevEavtas γεφυρῶσαι. 
271 @ ar @ Ἢ / > ͵ 3 
7. “Ev ᾧ δὲ οὗτοι τὸν προκείμενον πόνον ἐργάζοντο, ev 
ti e x “ / «“ me 7 ᾽ 7 
τούτῳ ὁ Telos ἅπας συλλελεγμενος apa Ξέρξῃ €7 0 PEVETO 
3 Ψ 2 / ΄ ‘ A 3 > / 
ἐς Lupbus, ἐς Κριτάλλων ὁρμηθεὶς τῶν ev Kanmadoxty: 
3 An Ν Υ / , Ἂς 3... 3 
ενθαῦτα yap εἰρητο συλλέγεσθαι TuvTa Tov KAT ἤπειρον 
ἕλλοντα ἅμα αὐτῷ Ἐέρξῃ πορεύεσθαι στρατόν. ἀπικό- 
fi eS sé / ert P 1 Χ ae , a 3 ἃς 
μενος δὲ ἐς Σαρδις, πρῶτα μὲν ἀπέπεμπε κηρυκας ες τὴν 
ὦ ἢ. / > ,ὔ - Ν «“ ᾿ς 7 
ANuba αἰτήσοντας γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ, καὶ προερέοντας 
Ps he 
δεῖπνα βασιλέι παρασκευάζειν. 


Ν Ν a an 3 ΝΥ 
8. Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα παρεσκευάζετο ὡς ἐλῶν ἐς Αβυδον, 





VIL, 36.] Bridge across the Hellespont. 123 


δε Ἂν 3 , ete , ‘av a 

οἱ δὲ ἐν τούτῳ Tov ᾿Ελλήσποντον ἐζεύγνυσαν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ασίης 

5 Ν 2 / v Ν A / a aes 

es τὴν Evpwrnv. ἐστι δε τῆς Χερσονήσου τῆς ev‘ Ελλησ- 

7 a λ, Ν Ν / 

πόντῳ, Σηστοῦ τε πόλιος μεταξὺ καὶ Μαδύτου, ἀκτὴ 
/ > 4. / > 4 / 5 

τρηχέα ἐς θάλασσαν κατήκουσα Αβύδῳ καταντίον. ἐς 


7 3 Ν ? Ν 3 > / ¢ / ᾽ ΣᾺ 
ταύτην ὧν τὴν ἀκτὴν εἕ Αβύδου ορμεομενοῦ εγεῳφυρουν 






ms , \ \ , / Ν δι eas 
τοῖσι TPOTEKEETO, τὴν μὲν λευκολίνου Φοίνικες, τὴν ὃ ἐτέ- 
Ν / ᾿] a Μ Ν c Ν 7 ; 
pnv τὴν βυβλίνην Αιγύπτιοι. ἔστι δὲ ἐπτὰ στάδιοι εξ 
3 ΄ 3 x > / Ν Ν 3 7 a / 
Αβύδου ἐς τὴν ἁπαντίον. Kat δὴ ἐζευγμένου τοῦ πόρου 
? , Ν 7 ͵ ͵ ler 7 ‘ 
ἐπιγενόμενος χειμων μέγας TUVEKOWE TE ExXELVa πάντα καὶ 
L ε ΠΣ Ὑ "ἢ as \ ΄ ‘ 
διέλυσε. 9. ws δ᾽ ἐπύθετο Ξέρξης. δεινὰ ποιεύμενος, tov 
«ς / a / 3 7 , 
Ελλήσποντον ἐκέλευσε τριηκοσίας επικέσθαι μαστιγι πλη- 
\ ἣν “ 3 Ν 4. / a yy a" 
yas, καὶ κατεῖναι ἐς TO πέλαγος πεδέων ζεῦγος. ἤδη Oe 
ΕΣ ε N s «“ » 2 ΄ / 
ἤκουσα, WS καὶ OTLYEAS ἅμα τούτοισι ἀπέπεμψε στίξον- 
Ν ¢ ls 3 4 Ν 5 ΄ / 
tas tov ᾿Ελλήσποντον. ἐνετέλλετο δὴ wv ῥαπίζοντας 
΄ 7 ’ \ > , 5 Ν , 
λέγειν βαρβαρά τε καὶ ἀτάσθαλα " ᾿Ώ πικρὸν ὕδωρ, δεσπό- 
, 2 r 7 Ψ 50. ἡ ar \ 
τῆς ToL δίκην emiTLOct τήνδε. OTL μιν ἠδίκησας οὐδὲν προς 
Ε] ͵ὔ oY , Ν Ν Ν / , 
εκείνου ἄδικον πταθυν. καὶ βασιλεὺς μεν Ξέρξης διαβὴσε- 
/ »Μ ΄ B aN: Μ , 3 Ν δὲ Ν 8 7 
ταὶ σε, ἣν τε σύ γε βούλῃ ἣν τε μὴ" σοι δὲ κατὰ δίκην 
+ 2 Ν 2 / 7 «ς aR ἢ a Ν ΄ a 
apa οὐδεὶς ἀνθρώπων θύει, ws ἐόντε δολερῷ TE καὶ ἁλμυρῷ 
- 7 Ν 7 3 / 4 
ποταμῷ. Try te δὴ θάλασσαν ἐνετέλλετο τούτοισι ζημι- 
a Ν rn 3 7 ἴω 4 Ae / > 
ουν, καὶ τῶν ἐπεστεωτων TH ζεύξι τοῦ Ελλησπόντου aTro- 
cr τς 7, N ε x. = ᾽ , ΝΕ 
ταμεῖν Tas κεφαλας. 10. καὶ οἱ μὲν ταῦτα εποίεον, τοῖσι 
/ [7 οι Ἂἢ ‘ Ν Ἕν ἂν > / 
προσέκεετο αὑτὴ ἡ ἄχαρις τιμη, TAS δε ἄλλοι ἀαρχίτέκτονες 
3 ΄ 3 ΄ Ν [Ὁ / Ν , 
ἐζευγνυσαν. ἐζεύγνυσαν δὲ ὧδε" πεντηκοντέρους καὶ τριη- 
/ ¢ Ν ‘ Xx Ν. A > / / 
peas συνθέντες, ---- ὑπὸ μὲν THY πρὸς τοῦ Εὐξείνου Ποντου 
. ’ὔ - Ν / rd A XN Ν « Ψ 
εξηκοντώ TE καὶ τριηκοσίας, ὑπὸ δὲ τὴν ἑτέρην τεσσερεσ- 
Ἵ / \ 7 A Ν , 3 / a 
καίδεκα καὶ τριηκοσίας, τοῦ μὲν Πόντου ἐπικαρσίας, τοῦ 
δὲ « / Ν c/s [δ > 4 Ν , - 
ε Ελλησπόντου κατὰ poov, wa ἀανακωχεύῃ TOV τονον Τῶν 
“ / Ν 3 ve - / 5 
ὅπλων, ---- συνθέντες δὲ ἀγκύρας κατῆκαν περιμήκεας, TUS 
= ‘\ lal , A Crt z a 5 / “ a 
μὲν πρὸς τοῦ Πόντου τῆς eTEpns τῶν ἀνέμων εἰνεκὲν TOV 
"4 > , A CaP - ς / Ν 
ἔσωθεν ἐκπνεόντων, τῆς δὲ ἕτερης πρὸς ἑσπέρης τε καί 


124 March of Xerxes. [Herop, | 


An > } ¥ NAR “ f SA.7 ee 
τοῦ Αἰγαίου evpov τε καὶ νύτου εἵνεκεν " διέκπλοον δὲ ὑπό- 
/ rn / Ἂ / an τ 
φαυσιν κατέλιπον τῶν πεντηκοντέρων καὶ TPLNPEWY TPLYOD, 
Ν ’ XN , + ς ,ὔ, / 
ἵνα καὶ ἐς tov Πόντον eyn 0 βουλόμενος πλωειν πλοίοισι, 
a ? n 7 “ A \ , 
λεπτοῖσι, καὶ ex τοῦ Πόντου ἐἕω. Uk. ταῦτα δὲ ποιή- 
΄ 3 a “ + fi x 
σαντες, KATETELVOV ἐκ γῆς στρεβλοῦντες ονοισι ξυλίνοισι τὰ 
7 OF! Ν Cl ae i 3 Ν Ζ x 
ὅπλα, OVKETL χωρὶς EXATEPA τάξαντες. ἀλλα δύο μὲν λευκο- 
7 ΄ 3 ΄ VA / ἊΝ a / 
λίνου δασώμενοι ἐς ἑκατέρην, τέσσερα δὲ τῶν βυβλίνων. 
΄, XN 3 ¢e 2 Ἂς Ἂ Ν ᾿ς ,ὔ \ > 
παχυτῆς μὲν ἣν ἡ αὐτὴ καὶ καλλονὴ, κατὰ λογον δὲ ἣν 
2 / Ν / A Λ e A @ 
εμβριθέστερα τὰ λίνεα, τοῦ τάλαντον ὁ πῆχυς ELAKE. 
? ‘ ees) , ε 7, \ 7 / 
ἐπειδὴ δὲ eyepupwOn ὁ πόρος, κορμους ξύλων καταπρίσαν- 
Ν / + a : / a A isis / 
TES, καὶ ποιήσαντες ἰσους τῆς σχεδίης τῷ εὑρεῖ, κοσμῳ 
᾽ / ͵΄, a Ψ a , / Ν 
ἐπετίθεσαν κατύπερθε τῶν ὅπλων τοῦ τόνου, θέντες OE 
3 A 5 An 3 3 Ld -f Ἂν A 
ἐπεξῆς ἐνθαῦτα autis ἐπεζευγνυον. ποιήσαντες δὲ ταῦτα 
OX; 3 / , δὲ θ / \ Ἂς τοῦ a 
ὕλην ἐπεφόρησαν, Koopm oe θέντες καὶ THY ὕλην, γὴν 
3 / 7 \ Ν Ἂς A mS 
ἐπεφόρησαν" Katavatavtes δὲ καὶ τὴν γῆν, φραγμὸν πα- 
/ yf Ν Ψ ¢/ Ni / \ ς 
ρείρυσαν ἔνθεν καὶ ἐνθεν, wa μὴ φοβεηται ta υποζύγια 
Ἂς 2 ς rn Ν Sey: 
τὴν θάλασσαν ὑπερορῶντα καὶ OL ὑπποι. 
ς Ν 7 a / / Ν Ν 
12. ‘Ds δὲ τά τε τῶν γεφυρέων κατεσκεύαστο καὶ τὰ 
\ Ν 7 ad Ν Ν Ἂς 7 A 7 
περὶ τὸν Αθων, οἱ τε χυτοὶ περὶ τὰ στόματα τῆς διωρυχος 
ἃ a 9 / “ 3 /f)- “ Ν , Ν 
(ot τῆς ῥηχίης εἵνεκεν ἐποιήθησαν, ἵνα μὴ πίμπληται τὰ 
7 A 5 7! Ν 2 ἮΝ ς an / 
στόματα τοῦ ὀρύγματος), Kal αὐτὴ ἡ διῶρυξ παντελέως" 
Λ Α A 7 / AL 3 ἢ 
πεποιημένη ἠγγέλλετο, ἐνθαῦτα χειμερίσας, ἅμα τῷ ἐεαρι 
7 Ν 3 a / ς “ 3 5 
παρεσκευασμένος ὁ στρατὸς Ex τῶν Σαρδίων ὡρμᾶτο ἐλῶν 
.“. Κ ε / fin, AC / 2 Ν \ = 
es Αβυδον. ὡρμημένῳ δὲ οἱ ὁ ἥλιος ἐκλιπὼν THY ἐκ τοῦ 
2 edi 2 Ν 3 Yo 35 Λ 3 A 3 / 
οὐρανοῦ ἕδρην αφανὴς ἦν, ovT ἐπινεφέλων εὐντων, αἰθρίης 
\ ΄, > SOS / \ 3 / 2a 7 XN Ν 
τε τὰ μάλιστα, ἀντὶ ἡμέρης τε VUE ἐγένετο. ἰδόντι δὲ καὶ 
abo A A - / 3 λὲ 3 / \ y N 
μαθόντι τοῦτο τῷ Ξερξη ἐπιίμέλες ἐγένετο, καὶ ELPETO TOUS 
΄, Νὰ." Λ Ψ Ν ΄ ¢ ~ a4 
Muryovs, τὸ εθέλοι προφαίνειν τὸ φάσμα. οἱ de εφραζον, 
Comey, (/ ΄ ς Ν Μ“ A / , 
ὡς Ελλησι προδεικνύει ὁ θεὸς ἐκλεύψιν τῶν πολίων, λε- 
͵ 3 ς ‘aan / : Ν 
γοντες ἥλιον εἶναι ᾿Ελλήνων προδέκτορα, σελήνην δὲ 
/ / x A ¢e ma NX a 
σφέων. πυθόμενος δὲ ταῦτα ὁ Ἐξέρξης περιχαρὴς εὡν 





VIL, 41. Order of March from Sardis. 12 
| 


1. 2 7 Υ Ν ». ¢ / ἈΝ a ‘ e 
ἐποιέετο τὴν ἔλασιν. 4B. ἡγέοντο Se TPWTOL μεν OL σκευο- 


σι 





/ ‘ Ν 6 ΄ Ν Ν 4 ᾿ 
φόροι τε καὶ τὰ ὑποζύγια, μετὰ δὲ τούτους στρατὸς παν- 
] , ᾽ 7, ? . ? ΄ Acie Ἢ , 
᾿τοίων ἐθνέων ἀναμιξ, οὐ διακεκριμένοι" τῇ δὲ ὑπερημίσεες 
Φ ᾽ a Λ Ν 2 / - 
ἦσαν, ἐνθαῦτα διελέλειπτο, καὶ οὐ συνέμισγον οὗτοι βασι- 
A a N se ͵ / ? / , 
“Ret. προηγεῦντο μὲν On ὑππόται χίλιοι ex Περσέων πίν- 
> / * ‘ 2 / Λ Ν e 
“TMV ἀπολελεγμένοι" μετὰ δὲ αἰχμοφόροι χίλιοι, καὶ οὗτοι 
> / > / Ν / / > N te 
ες πάντων ἀπολελεγμένοι. TUS λογχᾶς κάτω ες τὴν γὴν 
/ \ Ν ¢ Ν “ 4 id / 
τρέψαντες " μετὰ Se upot Nicaior καλεύμενοι ἵπποι δέκα, 
- / c /. r Ν / ΄“ 
κεκοσμημένοι ὡς κάλλιστα. Νισαῖοι δε καλέονται ἵπποι 
7  % -“ Μ / / A Γ΄ a r »Μ Φυν 
ἐπὶ τοῦδε " ἔστι πεδίον μέγα τῆς Μηδικῆς, τῷ οὐνομώ ἐστι 
: \ 64 cd \ / ΄ Ν 
Νίσαιον. tous ὧν δὴ ὑπποὺυς Tous μεγάλους φέρει τὸ πε- 
, a yf 4 / rn 5 / {4 { ‘ 
δίον τοῦτος ὄπισθε dé τούτων τῶν δέκα LTTwV ἅρμα ALos 
ΟΣ Ψ Y Ν [74 Ν -. Ν . Ν yy 
pov ἐπετέτακτο, TO LTTOL MEV εἷλκον AEUKOL OKT, OTTLA CE 
‘ na “ ida κ φ 7] 3 / rn a 
δε τῶν ἵππων εἵπετο πεζῇ ἡνίοχος EXOMEVOS τῶν χαλινῶν" 
> Ν Ν ᾿ς ae ἡ A Ν / 2 , > / 
οὐδεὶς γὰρ δὴ ἐπὶ τοῦτον Tov θρόνον avOpwrwy ἀναβαίνει. 
, ἣν Μ Z > τὰς pa / 3-3 cd “ 
τούτου δὲ ὁπισθε avtos Ἐέρξης ἐπ ἅρματος ἵππων Νι- 
/ : B β , ac Chee) A κ " © Π 
σαίων" παραβεβῆκεε δὲ οἱ ἡνίοχος, τῷ οὐνομα ἣν Πατι- 
/ > / r > Ν / 
paudns, Otavew παῖς ἀνδρὸς Πέρσεω. 
, ‘ {2 2 / pat / / 
14. Εξηλασε μεν οὕτω ex Σαρδίων BepEns, μετεκβαί- 
wes , ae > -. ᾽ e ΄ 
νεσκε δε, ὅκως μιν λόγος αἱρέοι, EX τοῦ ἅρματος ἐς ἁρμάώ- 
? al Sa, ’ / / e » ὔ 
μαξαν. αὑτοῦ δε ὁπισθε αὐχμοφόροι Περσέων οἱ ἀριστοί 
Ν Sf , Ν / x / ΝΜ 
τε καὶ γενναίοτατοι χίλιοι, KATA νόμον τὰς λόγχας ἔχοντες, 
Ν Ν A 7 / 2 7 ) 7 
peta δὲ ἵππος addy χιλίῆ εκ ITepoewy πολελεγμενή,; 
Ν N Ν [2 ᾿] a al 7 > / 
μετὰ δε THY ἵππον EK τῶν λοιπῶν Περσέων ἀπολελεγμένοι 
7 - δ 3 Ν 7 Λ Ν δ πα - 
μύριοι. ovtos πεΐζος ἣν" καὶ τούτων χίλιοι μεν ἐπὶ τοῖσι 
° ὁ 2 Ν rn , ΄ ‘ 3 / Ν 
δούρασι ἀντὶ τῶν σαυρωτήρων ῥοιὰς εἶχον χρυσέας, καὶ 
΄ oe, Ν my. ¢ . >) Λ 7 Ν 
πέριξ συνεκληΐον τοὺς ἄλλους, οἱ SE εἰνακισχίλιοι ἐντὸς 
΄ lad > , ΄ Ν 3 3 Ν / 
τούτων ἐόντες ἀργυρέας ῥοιὰς εἶχον. εἶχον δὲ χρυσέας 
΄ ‘ ς « τὶ Ἂ A , εν / Ν A 
potas Kat οἱ εἰς THY γὴν τρώποντες τὰς λόγχας, καὶ μῆλα 
οἱ ἄγχιστα ἑπόμενοι Ξέρξ τοῖσι δὲ μυρίοισι ἐπετέτακτο 
γχι Om Ξερξη. ΐ μυρ 


“ / / ἈΝ Ν s eA 4 
ἵππος Περσέων μυρίη. μετὰ δὲ τὴν baov διελελείπτο 


120 March of Xerxes. [Heron 





δ A ΕΝ τ JN Χ / \ = 
ΕΖ. ἀὠπικομένου δὲ τοῦ στρατοῦ επὶ τὸν Σ᾽ καμανδρον, ὃς. 
Pa a ; 7 > ο΄’ « / 2 v4 pa 
πρῶτος ποταμῶν, ETEL TE ἐκ Σαρδίων ὁρμηθέντες ETreyeipy- 
a ὙΦ a 2 Λ Ἂς Coed ᾿ Io? 2 / A ‘a 
σαν τῇ ὁδῷ, ἐπέλιπε TO ῥέεθρον, ovd ὠπέχρησε TH στρατιῇ 
r 7 bien a ee ee 4 Ὶ 
τε καὶ τοῖσι κτήνεσι πινόμενος " ἐπὶ τοῦτον δὴ τὸν ποταμὸν 
ΠΑΡ ΔΕ ͵ ᾽ N 7 / ee, “ 
ὡς ὠπίκετο Ξέρξης, ἐς τὸ ΠΙριώμου Π]ἐργαμον ἀνέβη, ἵμερον 
+7 / θ i δὲ b> 6 / 2 / 
ἔχων θηήσασθαι. Onnoupevos δε, καὶ πυθόμενος ἐκείνων 
a> / a 3 ΄ ΡΒ a / mm Ν 
ἕκαστα, τῇ Αθηναίῃ τῇ Invade εθυσε βοῦς χιλίας, χοὰς δὲ 
an / 2 / al XN , 
οἱ Mayo. τοῖσι ἥρωσι exéeavto. ταῦτα δὲ ποιησαμένοισι 
Ν / 2 Ν / εν vA e / \ 
νυκτὸς φόβος ἐς TO στρατόπεδον ἐνέπεσε. ἅμα ἡμέρῃ δὲ 
3 4 3 - 
ἐπορεύετο ενθεῦτεν. 
3 \ Aint νυ ἢ 2 ΄ὕ L 7 9 
16. ᾿Επεὶ 6 ἐγένοντο ἐν ᾿Αβύδῳ, ἠθέλησε Ἐέρξης ἰδέ- 
΄ ἈΝ 7 \ / τς 7. ἡ 
σθαι παντα τὸν στρατὸν. καὶ προεπεποίητο γὰρ ἐπὶ 
A 3 7 2 a 4 J A 
κολωνοῦ ἐπίτηδες αὑτῷ TAUTN προεξέδρη λίθου λευκοῦ 
3 / Lyre \ > / / 7 
(ἐποίησαν δὲ ᾿Αβυδηνοὶ ἐντειλαμένου πρότερον βασιλέος), 
3 “ lA an » Ἂς al Pe? > “-“ Ν Ν 
ἐνθαῦτα ὡς ἵζετο, κατορῶν ἐπὶ τῆς ἤϊονος ἐθηεῖτο καὶ τὸν 
x Ν Ν , Ν Ἑ / lal ἴω dA 
πεζὸν καὶ Tas νέας. θηεύμενος δὲ ἱμέρθη τῶν νεῶν ἅμιλ- 
5 / 3 ε > 3 / / XN 2. 
λαν γινομένην ἰδέσθαι. ἐπεὶ ὃ ἐγένετο TE καὶ ἐνίκων 
7 jf 7 a € , Ν a A 
Φοίνικες Σιδωνιοι, ἥσθη τε τῇ ἀμίλλῃ καὶ TH στρατιῇ. 
Ν Ν Ν € , Cg a a 
‘Qs δὲ ὥρα πώντα μὲν τὸν ᾿Ελλήσποντον ὑπὸ τῶν νεῶν 
2 / 7 Ν \ 5) N . Neos 5 = 
ἀποκεκρυμμένον, πάσας δὲ Tas ἀκτὰς καὶ Ta APBuvdnvav 
Ἦν κα 9 , 2 A 7 c N 2 , 
πεδία ἐπίπλεα ἀνθρώπων, ἐνθαῦτα Ἐέρξης ἑωυτὸν ἐμακά- 
᾽ν Ν A 3 / Ν / 3 / 
ρίσε, μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο ἐδάκρυσε. 4%. μαθὼν δὲ μιν Apta- 
¢ / ἃ Ἂς κ᾿ , ? Be 2 
βανος ὁ πάτρως ---- ὃς τὸ πρῶτον γνώμην ἀπεδέξατο ἐλευ- 
/ 2 δὰ ,ὔ ΄ τοις ἣν ec 
θερως, ov συμβουλεύων Ἐεέρξη στρατεύεσθαι ἐπὶ τὴν ᾿Ελ- 
7, “ς c N ‘ / / 7 
λαδα ---- οὗτος ὠνὴρ φρασθεις Ἐερξεα δακρύσαντα, εἴρετο 
, > a € Ν 3 Z 3 7 
τάδε" ᾿Ὦ βασιλεῦ. ὡς πολλὸν ἀλλήλων κεγωρισμενα ἐργά- 
. APP 
A Ν 5 / / ‘ Ν 
σαο νῦν TE καὶ OALY@ πρότερον" μακαρίσας Yap σεωυτὸν 
ὃ / ‘ Ν 3 3 A / / 
axpuets. ὁ δε εἶπε" Εἰσῆλθε yap με λογισάμενον κατοι- 
ra ¢ \ 4 ς a 2 7 / 2 ,. 
κτείραι, ὡς Bpayus evn ὁ πᾶς ἀνθρωπινος βίος, εἰ τούτων 


3. ΄' 2 N " ς Ν x” , 
ye εοντῶν τοσουτῶν οὐδεὶς ες EKATOCTOV €ETOS περιέσται. 


1, δ4.] Crossing the Hellespont. 127 







! τὰ > / / 7 ΄ ων 

"ὁ de ἀμείβετο λέγων" “Etepa τούτου παρὰ τὴν ζόην πε- 
,ὕ 2 / 2 Ν « ae / > Ν 
ὄνθαμεν οἰκτρότερα. ἐν γὰρ οὕτω βραχεὶ βίῳ οὐδεὶς 
of x 2X 20 / , " , " 

οὕτω ἀνθρωπος ewv εὐδαίμων πέφυκε, οὔτε τούτων οὔτε 


| a x - 2 , , Ν . ἃ vee 
τῶν ἄλλων, τῷ οὐ παραστήσεται πολλακις, καὶ οὐκι ἅπαξ, 
] 7 4. A “Δ A vA Ν \ 
|reOvavar βούλεσθαι μᾶλλον ἢ ζώειν. αἴ τε yap συμφοραὶ 
] 


͵7 Ν « an ‘ Ν Ν 
'προσπίιπτοῦσαι, Kat αὖ νουσουι συνταρασσοῦσαι, και βραχυν 






Ϊ 4“ Ν 4 > “ Ν / c/ ¢ Ν 
|€ovTa μακρὸν δοκέειν εἶναι ποιεῦσι τὸν βίον. οὕτω ὁ μὲν 
, ral > / A / Ν ¢ ΄ 
θάνατος, μοχθηρῆς ἐούσης τῆς Cons, καταφυγὴ αἱρετωτάτη 

| a > / Ν Ἂς Ν ΄ Ν dn 
'τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ γέγονε" ὁ δὲ θεὸς, γλυκὺν γεύσας τὸν αἰῶνα, 
᾿ς > > an ς / aS mam / Ν ᾽ ᾽ν; 
φθονερὸς ev αὐτῷ εὑρίσκεται ewv. Ἐξερξης δὲ ἀμείβετο 
a: τ + | 7 a / > θ Ε΄. / re es 
eyou ptaBave, βιοτῆς μὲν νυν ἀνθρωπηΐης πέρι, εού- 
΄ “ \ 7 3 7 Ν 
σης τοιαύτης οἱην περ σὺ διαιρεέεαι εἶναι, παυσώμεθα, μηδε 
' κα ΄, . Oy, , 5) 
κακῶν μεμνεώμεθα, χρηστὰ ἔχοντες πρήγματα εν χερσί. 
. 2 ΄ oy / > “iar ΄ 
15. Καὶ Αρταβανον ἀποστείλας ἐς Σοῦσα, δεύτερα με- 
4 / vA Ν / > Ν ,ὔ 
τεπέμψατο Ἐερξης Περσέων τοὺς δοκιμωτώτους " ἐπεὶ δὲ 
« A yf. / , 3 / val 3.3 Ν ς Pa 
οἱ παρῆσαν, ἔλεγε σφι ταδε" M2 Περσαι, τῶνδ eyw ὑμεων 
A / + / 5) \ \ \ 
χρηΐζων συνέλεξα, avdpas τε γίνεσθαι ἀγαθοὺς, καὶ μὴ 
/ ᾿ / 3 ’ / a. F Λ 
καταισχύνειν τὰ πρόσθε epyacueva Περσησι, ἐόντα μεγάλα 
é Ἢ a oo ἜΝ at “ “| da ΄ 
τε καὶ πολλοῦ ἀξια, αλλ εἷς τε ἕκαστος καὶ οἱ σύμπαντες 
/ Μ Ν Ν al A > Ν 7 
προθυμίην ἔχωμεν" ξυνὸν γὰρ τοῦτο πᾶσι ἀγαθὸν σπεύ- 
r Ν vA 7 > / a / 
Setar. τῶνδε δὲ εἵνεκεν προαγορεύω ἀντέχεσθαι τοῦ πολέ- 
>| / ε \ 5 Ν , γα, Ε 
μου ἐντεταμένως" ὡς yap εγὼ πυνθάνομαι, ἐπ᾿ ἄνδρας 
, ? \ τ Χ ,ὕ ? ,ὔ con 
στρατευόμεθα ἀγαθους, τῶν ἢν κρατήσωμεν, οὐ μὴ TLS ἡμίν 
A Ν 2 a 2 ’ a x / 
ἄλλος στρατὸς ἀντιστῇ κοτε ἀνθρώπων. νῦν δε διαβαίνω- 
> 7 - r \ a , 
fev, ἐπευξάμενοι τοῖσι θεοῖσι oi Περσιδα γὴν λελογχασι. 
΄ Χ = e / / > ἣς ’ 
19. Ταύτην μὲν τὴν ἡμέρην παρεσκευάζοντο es την διώ- 
a ye / Th Ν e/ nA?’ Yo/ 
βασιν, τῇ δε ὑστεραίῃ ἀνέμενον Tov ἥλιον ἐθέλοντες ἰδεσθαι 
[ » 

By ͵ a Ge A / 
ἀνίσχοντα, θυμιήματώ τε παντοῖα ἐπὶ τῶν γεφυρέων κατα- 
7, 7, ΄ Ν ὰ 7 « > 7 
γίζοντες καὶ μυρσίνησι στορνύντες τὴν ὁδὸν. ὡς δ᾽ ἐπανέ- 

ἐᾷ 3 7 7 m/s ς Ν 
τελλε ὁ ἥλιος, σπένδων Ex χρυσέης φιάλης Ξερξης ἐς τὴν 


΄ ΕΣ Ν Ν «." , ¢ ΄ 
θώλασσαν, εὔχετο προς TOV ἡλιον μηδεμίαν οἱ συντυχίην 

















128 March of Xerzes.  [Heror 


΄ 7 ΄ ) i 
τοιαύτην γενέσθαι, ἣ μιν παύσει καταστρέψασθαι τὴ 
4? ͵ 7 ἈΝ Ὡς 7 rn 2 / / 
Εὐρώπην, πρότερον ἢ ews τέρμασι τοῖσι εκείνης yevnTa 
> , Ν > / Ν , > Ἂς ς / Ε 
evEupevos δὲ ἐσεβαλε τὴν φιάλην ες τὸν Εἰλλησποντον κα 
΄ A Ν Ν if Ν 2) y ? 
χρύσεον κρητῆρα καὶ ]]ερσικὸν ξίφος, tov ἀκινάκην Kare 
a > Μ > / a Μ 2s a 
ουσι. ταῦτα οὐκ ἔχω uTpEKEWS διακρίναι, οὔτε εἰ τῷ HAUG 
2 Ν aA > Ν / BA > / / Ε ᾿ 
ἀνατιθεὶς κατῆκε ἐς τὸ πέλαγος, οὔτε εἰ μετεμέλησε οἱ TOI 
ς 7, i ees, \ ΄ Ν , 
Ελλήσποντον μαστιγωσαντι καὶ ἀντὶ τούτων τὴν θωλασ' 
2 / ς ‘\ a , ere / / 
σαν ἐδωρέετος 20. ‘Ds de ταῦτα οἱ ἐπεποίητο, διεέβαινο 
Ν Ἂς Ν ee OY f a 7] Ν ἃς an / 
κατὰ μὲν τὴν ἑτέρην τῶν γεφυρεων THY πρὸς τοῦ IIovTou ¢ 
/ Ν eC. if εἶ x Ν ~ \ Ν >] ce 
πεζὸς τε Kal ἡ ἵππος ἅπασα, κατὰ δε THY πρὸς TO Avyator 
\ id ΄ \ e i Gace \ nr Ν ( 
τὰ ὑποζύγια καὶ ἡ θεραπηΐϊη. ἡγέοντο δὲ πρῶτα μὲν οἱ 
7 / 2 / / \ Ν 4 ‘ 
μύριοι Ilepcar, ἐστεφανωμένοι πάντες, μετὰ δὲ τούτους ὦ 
΄ Ν Ἵ 2 / ih x Me 
σύμμικτος στρατὸς παντοίων ἐθνέων. ταύτην μὲν τὴν 
ς , e A Nc / a Ν “ « . / ἈΝ 
ἡμέρην OUTOL, τῇ δὲ ὑστεραίῃ πρῶτοι μεν οἱ τε ὑππόται καὶ 
pas UN ἤτω: ΄ 5 ,ὔ \ we 
ol τὰς λόγχας κώτω τράποντες " ἐστεφάνωντο δε καὶ οὗτοι" 
Ν Ν “, “ ΓΕ 5 Ν Ν Ἂς [72 ιν». bs] Ν Ν 
μετὰ O€ οἱ τε ἵπποι οἱ ἱροὶ καὶ TO ἅρμα TO ρὸν, επὶ δὲ 
ἥν pW Si lielve ysis) , NS here / , ῃ 
αὑτὸς τε Ξερξης καὶ οἱ αἰχμοφοροι Kat οἱ ὑππόται οἱ χίλιοι 
ἅν Ἂ Ν ΄ ς " / x ς / e/ > τὰ 
ἐπι δὲ τούτοισι ὁ ἄλλος στρατὸς. καὶ αἱ VEES ἅμα αἀνή- 
5) x δ , Υ Nor Ria! of 
yovTo ἐς τὴν ἀπεναντίον. ἤδη δὲ ἤκουσα καὶ ὕστατον 
a , U4 e/ Rope / / 
διαβῆναι Bucirea πάντων. 28. Ξερξης δε ἐπεί τε dehy 
9 \ δὼ ἢ . = N ἈΝ εἰ: ͵ 
ἐς τὴν Ευρωπην. ἐθηείτο τὸν στρατὸν ὑπὸ μαστίγων δια- 
, / Xo ve Ν 2 ro (we ε δον ας ΄ Ν 
βαίνοντα. διεβη δὲ ὁ στρατὸς αὑτοῦ εν ἐπτὰ ἡμέρῃσι καὶ 
, ς Ν ) , 3 re 2 7] / ? an ͵ὔ 
ἐν ἐπτὰ εὐφρονῃσι, ελινύσας ovdeva χρόνον. ενθαῦτα λε- 
[ 
a " Μ ,ὔ Ν ς 7 Μ 
γεται, Ἐερξεω ἡδη διαβεβηκότος τὸν ᾿Ελλήσποντον, ἀνδρα 
> rn e , 5 x / \ > Ν Since 
εἰπεῖν Ελλησπόοντίον" 2 Zed, τὶ δὴ ἀνδρὶ εἰδομενος 
, Ν + 2 \ Ἂς (Fy / 3 , 
Περσῃ καὶ οὔνομα ἀντὶ Διὸς Ξέρξεα θέμενος, ἀνάστατον 
\ «ς 7 1n/ a + , ᾽ , 
τὴν Ελλάδα ἐθέλεις ποιῆσαι. ἄγων πάντας ἀνθρωπους ; 
Ν \ Μ A Juan / n 
καὶ yap avev TovTwy ἐξὴν τοι ποιεειν ταῦτα. 
ς ν Ν Μ“ ΕΝ « / / Ν 
22. O δε ναυτικὸς ἔξω τὸν ᾿Ελλήσποντον πλώων παρὰ 
A > / Ν yf / lad a e δ 
γῆν εκομίζετο, τὰ ἐμπαλιν πρήσσων τοῦ πεζοῦ. ὋὉ δὲ 


/ ? \ A if ΟῚ , 
Ζορίσκος ἐστὶ τῆς Θρηΐκης αἰγιαλός τε καὶ πεδίον μέγα, 


TI, 100.] Numbering the Forces. 129 










fees \ δε ae ἰδ Ν , “ ¥ a 
ta δὲ αὐτοῦ ῥέει ποταμὸς μέγας “Epos. ἔδοξε ὧν τῷ 
/ ε a 5 ’ ΄, ? ΄ ae 2 
ἐρξη ὁ χῶρος εἶναι ἐπιτήδεος ενδιατάξαι τε καὶ ἐξαριθμῆ- 
Ν Ν Ν ᾽ / rn Ν Ν ‘ . 
αὐ τὸν στρατὸν, καὶ ἐποίεε ταῦτα. τὰς μὲν δὴ νέας τὰς 
᾿ 7 3 / 2 / id 7 ΄ 
τώσας ἀπίικομένας ἐς Ζορίσκον οἱ ναύαρχοι κελεύσαντος 
[ἰπεὶ / ᾽ Ν ? Xe Ν 7 A 7 ? , 
ἐρξεω ἐς τὸν alyladov Tov προσεχέα Aopickw ἐκόμισαν. 
e ω 3 a / a Ν / al val 
23. ὁ δὲ ev τῷ Ζορίσκῳ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον τῆς στρατιῆς 
> N ᾽ / “ , Ψ a , 
ἀριθμὸν ἐποίέετο. ᾿Οσον μὲν νυν ἕκαστοι παρεῖχον πλή- 
> be. 2 Μ > Ν > Ν > \ / 
Jeos ἀριθμὸν, οὐκ ἔχω εἶπαι τὸ ἀτρεκὲς (ov yap λέγεται 
Ν > a 5) , 7 \ a a a 
πρὸς οὐδαμῶν avOpwrev), σύμπαντος δὲ TOU στρατοῦ τοῦ 
A Ν a ? / ¢ / Ν ¢ \ 7, 
πεζοῦ τὸ πλῆθος εφάνη ἑβδομήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν μυριάδες. 
3 -/ ἣν / Ν / / 3 o 
ἐξηρίθμησαν δὲ τόνδε τὸν τρόπον " συναγαγόντες ἐς ἕνα 
lal / 3 , Ν 7 7 . 
γῶρον μυριάδα ἀνθρώπων, καὶ συννώξαντες ταύτην ὡς μά- 
λιστα εἶχον, περιέγραψαν ἔξωθεν κύκλον, Tepuyparpavres 
δὲ καὶ UTEVTES TOUS μυρίους, αἱμασιὴν περιέβαλον κατὰ τὸν 
κύκλον. ὕψος ἀνήκουσαν ἀνδρὶ ἐς τὸν ὀμφαλον. ταύτην 
\ , ¥ 3 " ? \ , 
δὲ ποιήσαντες, ἄλλους ἐσεβίβαζον ἐς TO περιοικοδομημένον, 
, ΠῚ , 7 A , 2 , ) 
μέχρι OV πάντας τούτῳ τῷ τρόπῳ ἐξηρίθμησαν. αἀριθμή- 
Ν nes / 
σαντες δὲ κατα εθνεα διέετασσον. 
». 7 XN 3 Ν 3 , A , e 
24. Ἐέρξης δε, ἐπεὶ ἠριθμήθη τε καὶ διεταχθὴ ὁ στρα- 
Ἂς >’ 7 > / vf 7 Ν 
ros, ἐπεθύμησε αὑτὸς σφεας διεξελάσας θηήσασθαι. μετὰ 
2 / a Ν x Js cd Ν Μ 
δὲ ἐποίεε ταῦτα, καὶ διεξελαύνων ἐπὶ ἅρματος παρὰ ἔθνος 
\ v4 2 / Ν 2 7 ε \ 
sv ἕκαστον ἐπυνθάνετο, καὶ ἀπέγραφον οἱ γραμματισταὶ, 
7 Siew ved ͵ By τ > + SON Am! ΤᾺ N "τ 
ἕως εξ ἐσχάτων ες ἔσχατα ἀπίκετο, καὶ τῆς ἔππου καὶ τοῦ 
- ς x A /, € 3 / - re 
πεζοῦ. ws δε ταῦτα οἱ ἐπεποίητο, τῶν νεῶν κατελκυσθει- 
͵΄ 2 , ᾽ A e 7 Ν > mee 
σέων ἐς θάλασσαν, ἐνθαῦτα ὁ Ἐέρξης, μετεκβὰς εκ Tov ap- 
2 , , “ ΕΑ ὡς A , Ν ,ὔ 
ματος ἐς νέα Σιδωνίην, ἵζετο ὑπὸ σκηνῇ χρυσέῃ καὶ παρεέ- 
Ν Ν r “- n 3 “ ς 7 
πλωε παρὰ τὰς πρῴρας τῶν νεῶν, ἐπειρωτῶν τε ἑκάστας 
΄ / e ῃ, Ν a Ν P / ‘ / 
ἡμοίως ὡς καὶ τὸν πεζὸν, καὶ ἀπογραφόμενος. Tus δε veas 
ε ν ᾽ , 77 ͵ / als a 
4 ναύαρχοι ἀναγαγόντες ὅσον τε τέσσερα THEO pA ἀπὸ TOU 
> “3 ’ Ν 7 2 A , 
UYLAAXOD AVEKWYEVOV, TAS πρῴρας Es γῆν τρεψαντες πάντες 


Ν Ν "5 if Ν ᾽ / ΄ 2 , 
"μετωπηδὸν, καὶ ἐξοπλίσαντες τους ἐπιβάτας ὡς ἐς TOE: 


150 March of Xerxes. [Heron 


e > 3 Ν “- / / 2 fe Ἂς . 
μον. ὁ δ᾽ ἐντὸς τῶν πρῳρέων πλώων ἐθηεῖτο καὶ TO 








3 a = 
avylanrou. ὴ 
». " \ 3 An , 3 ἤ me. Ν ς ᾿ 
25. EepEns δὲ ἐκ τοῦ Δορίσκου ἐπορεύετο ἐπὶ τὴν Ἔλ- 
, \ \ > / 3 Ν ΄ Ἵ 
Aaba, τοὺς δὲ αἰεὶ γινομένους ἐμποδων συστρατεύεσθαι, 
7 id Ν ς / ¢ / ie Ἂς Ne 
ἠνάγκαζε. οἱ δε ὑποδεκόμενοι ᾿Ελλήνων THY στρατιὴν καὶ 
/ by / 2 A am 5 7 « “ 2.»ϑ ἢ Ἱ 
δειπνίζοντες Ἐέρξεα ἐς πᾶν κακοῦ ἀπίκατο, οὕτω ὥστε ἀνώ-᾿ 
3 a 9 / 2 / f / e Ἂς a 
OTATOL EK TOV οἰκίων ἐγίνοντο" ὅκου γε Θασίοισι ὑπὲρ TaD 
2 a > 7 7 a / / = bey / 
ἐν τῇ ἠπείρῳ πολίων τῶν σφετέρων δεξαμένοισι τὴν Hep= 
ἢ \ / 3 / ate) / 2 
few στρατιὴν καὶ δειπνίσασι, Ἀντίπατρος ὁ Οργέος ἀραι- 
΄ὔ ἴω 2 a ὁ ἐς / € a a / ᾽ 
ρήημένος, τῶν ἀστῶν ἀνὴρ δόκιμος ὁμοία τῷ μάλιστα, ἀπέ- 
2 Ν ra / /. 2 / 
deEe ἐς τὸ δεῖπνον τετρακόσια τάλαντα ἀργυρίου τετελε- 
/ y+ Ν / 3 ~ Pp] / 
σμένα. 26. ἐνθα δὴ Meyaxpeovtos ἀνδρὸς Αβδηρίτεω 
Μ 5 b>] / 3 7, ἃ a8 A 5 / ἱ 
ἐπὸς εὖ εἰρημένον εγένετο, ὃς συνεβούλευσε Αβδηρίιτησι 
Ἂς 2 x Ν a 3 / 3 Ἂς / e Ν 
πανδημεὶ αὐτοὺς καὶ γυναῖκας ἐλθόντας ἐς τὰ σφέτερα ἱρὰ 
σ [λας Κι a a 7, \ ἊΝ , 
ἰζεσθαι ἱκέτας τῶν θεῶν, παραιτεομένους καὶ TO λοιπὸν 
2 Τὰ a 3 , lad Ν € / a 
opt ἁπαμύνειν TOV ἐπιόντων κακῶν τὰ ἡμίσεα, TOV τε πα- 
,ὔ aA , 7ὔ f Ν ». } 
ρούχομενων ἔχειν σφι μεγάλην χάριν, ὅτι βασιλεὺς Ἐερξης 
2 \ Cues CooL = Mite! 4 r Cups / 
ov δὶς ἑκάστης ἡμέρης ἐνόμισε σῖτον αἱρέεσθαι" παρέχειν 
Ν Ἃ 3 / τ wr. Sf / ς a a 
yap av Αβδηρίτησι, εἰ Kal ἄριστον προείρητο ὁμοῖα τῷ 
5 / / s\ Ν ς / el 2 / 
ELTV@ παρασκευάζειν, ἢ μὴ ὑπομένειν Ξερξεα επίοντα, 
\ / 7 , > , A 
ἢ καταμείναντας κάκιστα πάντων ἀνθρώπων διατριβῆναι. 
ς Ἂν Ν ͵ «“ Ν 3 / 3 / 
27. Ov μὲν dn πιεζόμενοι ὅμως TO ἐπιτασσόμενον ἐπετέ- 
».} ΧΝ 2 a ? / 2 a a 
Neov. HepEns de ex τῆς AxavOov ἐντειλάμενος τοῖσι στρα- 
n . Ν τ ς / > / > A 
Τηγοίσι τὸν ναυτικὸν στρατὸν ὑπομένειν ἐν Θερμῃ, ἀπῆκε 
τ) ς A Ν Rs 7 6 Θέ 3 δὲ A 3 a 
aT €WUTOU Tas νεᾶας πορεύεσ ar, ( epun ὃε TH ἐν τῷ 
Θε wie ὌΝ τὴ / 35. 5. 2 Ν ε ὋΝ Kal 
pear κολπῳ οἰκημένῃ, aT ἧς καὶ ὁ κόλπος OUTOS 
= 3 7 y+ ΄ Ν 3 7 , 
τὴν ἐπωνυμίην ἔχει") ταύτῃ γὰρ ἐπυνθάνετο GUPTOMWTATOV 
εἰναι. 
ς N Ν Ν ,ὔ , eo? , ε 
35. Ὁ μεν δὴ περὶ Πιερίην διέτριβε ἡμέρας συχνάς. οἱ 
Ἂ Ν 7 ε 3 / 3 ᾿- ς 2 Pe eS. A 
de δὴ κήρυκες ot ἀποπεμφθέντες ἐς τὴν Ελλάδα ἐπὶ γῆς 
4 IEF ε Χ Ν ¢ \ / a Ν 
QUTNTLV ἀπίκατο, OL μὲν κεινοὶ, οἱ δὲ φέροντες γῆν τε καὶ 








vil, 1391 Demand of Earth and Water. 151 


A * / aA , , es ~ 
ὕδωρ. Τῶν δὲ δόντων ταῦτα éyevovto οἷδε, Θεσσαλοί, 
3 A Ν ΝΜ , , 
Δόλοπες, Awijves, IlepparBor, Aoxpo., Muyvyntes, ηλιεες, 
ἘΣ Ν a Ἀν ies Ga Ν ᾿ 
᾿Αχαιοὶ οἱ Φθιῆται, καὶ Θηβαῖοι, καὶ οἱ ἀλλοι Βοιωτοὶ πλὴν 
Ι 4 ee ΄ δύ οἵ 
Θεσπιέων τε καὶ Πλαταιεων. emi τούτοισι οἱ “ἔλληνες 
ΕΣ Ἷ ce a ᾽ 4. > , ς ‘ 
ἔταμον ὅρκιον οἱ τῷ βαρβάρῳ πόλεμον aecpupevot. τὸ δὲ 
0 e 93 “ Aad , »Μ / > ‘ 
ὅρκιον ὧδε εἶχε: “Ὅσοι τῷ Πέρσῃ edocay σφέας αὑτοὺς 
3 Ν > / s 2 
Ἕλληνες ἐόντες, μὴ ἀναγκασθέντες, καταστάντων ode εὖ 
a / 4 A ω ? r a 
TOV πρηγμάτων, τούτους δεκατεῦσαι τῷ ἐν Δελφοῖσι θεῷ. 
N ‘ \ , - 3 a A ? \ 
τὸ μὲν δὴ ὅρκιον ὧδε εἶχε τοῖσι ᾿Ελλησι. 29. ες de 
᾽ , Ν , 3 ΤΟΝ “-: ; he, ~ 4 
AOnvas καὶ Σ᾽ πώρτην οὐκ ἀπέπεμψε Ξέρξης ἐπι γῆς avty- 
Ψ a “ / / ‘ 
σιν κήρυκας τῶνδε εἵνεκεν " πρότερον Δαρείου πεμψαντος 
~ pA. S A x 2 a \ > Sy 2 Ν / 
ἐπ᾿ αὐτὸ τοῦτο, οἱ μὲν αὐτῶν τοὺς αἰτέοντας es TO Bapa- 
id ων, 7 , / > ‘ A Ν / 
θρον, οἱ δ es φρέαρ ἐσβαλοντες, ἐκέλευον γῆν TE καὶ ὕδωρ 
᾽ / ’ Ν / / \ A ᾽ 
ες τούτων φερειν Tapa βασίλεα. τούτων μεν ELVEKEV οὐκ 
¥ , Ν > , 7 Ν va 3 / 
ἔπεμψε Ἐερξης τοὺς αἰτήσοντας. 6 τι δὲ τοῖσι AOnvai- 
n ’ὔ Ss , 8 3 / 
οἱσι ταῦτα ποιήσασι TOUS κήρυκας συνήνεικε ἀνεθέλητον 
β / 6 >] Μ > Ν cd ’ e / Ν ξ΄ 
γενέσθαι, οὐκ ἔχω εἶπαι. πλὴν ὅτι σφέων ἡ χωρὴ καὶ 7 
7 > Pa; 3 Ν a > \ , τ ΤᾺ 
πόλίς ἐδηϊωθη. adda τοῦτο οὐ διὰ ταύτην τὴν αἰτίην 
ν᾽ / 
δοκέω γενέσθαι. 
ς \ / . / ΚΜ Ν > c 
30. Ἢ δὲ στρατηλασίη ἡ βασιλέος οὔνομα μὲν εἶχε ὡς 
ΝΡ» 9 ’ 7 / Ν 3 A 4 
ἐπ AOnvas ἐλαύνει, κατίετο δὲ ἐς πᾶσαν τὴν ᾿Ελλάδα. 
/ Ἂ A ‘ - eg ? > 
πυνθανόμενοι δὲ ταῦτα πρὸ πολλοῦ, οἱ EAAnves οὐκ εν 
« tA 7, ° A id \ Ν τς a A 
ὁμοίῳ πάντες ἐποιεῦντο" OL μὲν γὰρ αὐτῶν δόντες γῆν TE 
Ν 56 a Πέ 3 θ / ς ΕΣ , 
καὶ ὕδωρ τῷ IIepan εἶχον θάρσος, ws οὐδὲν Teicomevoe 
Μ Ἄς A , . ς δὲ ? ὃ 7 , ὃ / 
ἄχαρι πρὸς tov βαρβαρου" οἱ δε ov δόντες ἐν δείματι με- 
4 z ¢/ + κα 2 f " aie 7, 
γάλῳ κατέστασαν, ATE οὔτε νεων EOVTEWY EV Τῇ Ελλαδι 
> θ Ν 2 Y δέ θ Ν 5 / yy B Xx / 
ἀριθμὸν ἀξιομάχων δεκεσθαι Tov ἐπίοντα, οὔτε βουλομενων 
a a 3 ,ὔ _ ἂν ᾽ὔ / \ 
TOV πολλῶν ἀντώπτεσθαι τοῦ πολέμου, μηδιζόντων δὲ προ- 
4 2 A > | / %e/ , 3 δέ 
θύμως. 88. ἐνθαῦτα ἀναγκαίῃ ἐξέργομαι γνώμην ἀποδε- 
, ,ὕ ἈΝ Ν rn / 3 7 “ 
ξασθαι. ἐπίφθονον μὲν πρὸς τῶν πλεόνων ἀνθρώπων, ὅμως 


δὲ A > % Ν 7 3 » Ν 3 ᾽ ᾽ὔ ᾽ 
ε, τῇ Ὑ εμοὲ φαίνεται εἶναι ἀληθες, οὐκ ἐπισχήσω. εἰ 






152 Preparations of the Grreeks. [Herop. 


᾽ a / Ν 3 , / ΡΞ; | 
A@nvaiot καταρρωδήσαντες Tov ἐπίοντα κίνδυνον εξελίπον. 


4 
δ 


Ν 7 Ἅ Ν er ἀντ ͵ 2 ΧΝ , ΒΩ 4 
THU σφετέρην, ἢ καὶ μὴ ExALTIOVTES ἀλλα μείναντες EdoTaIy 
͵, ? ee Ν ν , 2 NON : 
σφεας αὐτοὺς Ἐερξη. κατα τὴν θάλασσαν οὐδαμοὶ ἂν ἐπει- 
= 2 ͵΄ Ξ ΔῈΝ ᾽ / A \ Λ 
ρῶντο ἀντιεύμενοι βασιλεῖ. εἰ τοίνυν κατὰ τὴν θάλασσαν 
Ν 2 an —/ ’ x % +f PA ’ / 
μηδεὶς ἠντιοῦτο Ξερξῃ, κατὰ ye av τὴν ἤπειρον τοιάδε ἐγί- 
3 ΄Ν΄ ‘ / a 5 2 ΄ 
νετο" εἰ καὶ πολλοι τεύχεων κιθῶνες ἦσαν εἐληλαμένοι διὰ 
λιν Ξ 7 , \ 
τοῦ Ισθμοῦ Πελοποννησίοισι, προδοθεντες ἂν Λακεδαιμό- 
ς Ν val / ? ¢ / 2 » e ᾽ ) 
VLOL ὑπὸ τῶν συμμωχῶὼν οὐκ εκοντων. αλλ UT ἀναγκαίης, 
Ν if. / ς Ν a la A A 
κατὰ πόλις ANLTKOMEVWV ὑπὸ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ στρατου TOV 
͵ 5) , Χο BEX Se 7, 
βαρβάρου, ἐμουνωθησαν, μουνωθεντες δὲ ἂν καὶ αποδεξά- 
+ 7 oe ef? ΄ Ἃ - Ἃ 
μενοι ἔργα μεγάλα ἀπέθανον γενναίως. 82. ἢ ταῦτα ἂν 
y \ Ν A ea \ Ν Χ 5 “ 
ἐπτάθον, ἢ πρὸ τοῦ ὁρέοντες ἂν καὶ TOUS ἄλλους Ελληνας 
δίζοντας, ὁμολογίη ἂν ἐχρήσαντο πρὸς Ξέρξεα. καὶ 
μηδίζοντας, ὁμολογίῃ sais p Fenced. 
cf Ἃ Ὅς «3 3 UY Cae , 
οὕτω ἂν ἐπ ἀμφότερα ἡ ἔλλας εγίνετο ὑπὸ Π]έρσησι. 
Ν Ν > 7 Ν a f a ὃ Ν A SF θ a 
τὴν yap ὠφελίην την τῶν τείχεων τῶν δια τοῦ ἰσθμοῦ 
b) 7 ? ΄ ’ “ Ἃ 3 / 
εληλαμένων ov δύναμαι πυθέσθαι ἥτις av ἦν, βασιλέος 
5 , A / A Se 3 / x7 
ἐπίκρατεοντος τῆς θαλάσσης. νῦν δὲ Αθηναίους av τις 
/ A 7 A € 7 2 \ ¢ / 
λέγων σωτηρας γενέσθαι τῆς Ελλάδος οὐκ ἂν ἀμαρτανοι 
) / e ΩΝ tN ἃς / lal , ’ 7, 
ταλήθεος " οὗτοι yap ἐπὶ OKOTEPA τῶν πρηγμώτων ετρά- 
- e7 eA ¢. , τ x e 7ὔ 
TOVTO, ταῦτα ῥέψειν ἔμελλε. ἐἔλομενοι Oe τὴν Ελλάδα 
(eed 9 / lal Ν ξ \ A Ν Ν 
περιεῖναι ἐλευθερην, τοῦτο τὸ λληνικον πᾶν τὸ λούπον, 
7 Ν > Ψ, 2 Ν - = ¢ " / X\ 
ὅσον μὴ εἐμήδισε, αὐτοὶ οὗτου ἦσαν οἱ επεγείραντες, καὶ 
,ὔ , Χ > / 2.759 , 
βασίλεα peta ye θεοὺς ανωσάμενοι. οὐδὲ σῴφεας χρηστη- 
Ν 3 / 2 la \ Ἵ - 7 
pia φοβερὰ ελθοντα ex Δελφῶν καὶ ἐς δεῖμα βαλόντα 
2) > a Ν e / > Ὡς 7 eRe 
ἔπεισε ἐκλιπεῖν τὴν Ελλάδα, adda καταμείναντες ave- 
Ν 3 / > Ν Ν [4 / 
TXOVTO τὸν ἐπιόντα ἐπὶ THY χωρὴν δεξασθαι. 
/ Ν € a > X\ 
33. Πεμψαντες yap ot ᾿Αθηναῖοι es Aeddovs θεο- 
/ 4 5 ¢ la / / 
πρόπους χρηστηριάζεσθαι ἦσαν ἑτοῖμοι. Kat ode ποιή- 
Ν ΄- (on \ ὔ ¢ > Ν 7 ᾽ 
σασι περὶ τὸ ἱρὸν τὰ νομιζόμενα, WS ES τὸ μέγαρον ἐσελ- 
θά Su “ ¢ / a 5 s 3 , 
ὄντες ζοντο, χρᾷ ἡ Πυθίη, τῇ οὔνομα ἦν Aptotovixn, 
τάδε" | 





ΤΠ. 141 Delphic Oracles. — 133 


ὮΩ μέλεοι, τί κάθησθε ; λιπὼν φεῦγ᾽ ἔσχατα yains 
Aapara καὶ πόλιος τροχοειδέος ὦ ἄκρα “κάρηνα. 

Οὔτε γὰρ ἡ κεφαλὴ μένει ἔμπεδον, οὔτε τὸ σῶμα, 

Οὐτε πόδες νεατοι, ovT ὦν χέρες, οὔτε τι μέσσης 
Δείπεται, ἀλλ᾽ ἀΐδηλα πέλει. κατὰ γάρ μιν ἐρείπει καὶ 
Πῦρ τε καὶ ὀξὺς ᾿ ΄Αρης, Σ υριηγενὲς ἅρμα διώκων. 
Πολλὰ δὲ κἄλλ᾽ ἀπολεῖ πυργώματα, Kou TO σὸν οἷον" 
Πολλοὺς δ᾽ ἀθανάτων νηοὺς μαλερῷ πυρὶ δώσει, 

Οἵ που νῦν ἱδρῶτι ῥεούμενοι ἑστήκασι, 

Δείματι παλλόμενοι, κατὰ δ᾽ ἀκροτάτοις ὀρόφοισι 10 
Aiwa μέλαν κέχυται, προϊδὸν κακότητος ἀνάγκας. 

"AAN τον ἐξ ἀδύτοιο, κακοῖς δ᾽ ἐπικίδνατε θυμόν. 


A > Ὁ e A >? 7 ᾽ὔ 
Ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες, οἱ τῶν Αθηναίων θεοπρόποι συμ- 
a a ,ὔ 3 ΄ ’ - / ? ‘ 
φορῇ τῇ μεγίστῃ ἐχρέοντο. προβάλλουσι δε σφέας αὐτοὺς 
ai Ss a A a / , oh et / 
ὕπο TOU κακοῦ τοῦ κεχρησμένου, Τίμων ὁ AvdpoBovrov, 
r A JN / e r A 4. ͵ 
τῶν Δελφῶν ἀνὴρ δόκιμος ὁμοῖα τῷ μάλιστα, συνεβούλευέ 
δ / a ΄ 9 2 A 
σφι ἱκετηρίας λαβοῦσι δεύτερα αὖτις ἐλθόντας χρᾶσθαι 
a ἢ e € ov. / Ν a - 
τῷ χρηστηρίῳ ὡς ἱκέτας. πειθομένοισι δὲ ταῦτα τοῖσι 
3 / Ν / > A Ἐν in + , 
A@nvaioict, καὶ λέγουσι" ᾿Ώναξ, χρῆσον ἡμῖν ἄμεινον τι 
Ν , 3 Ν \ / 7 ’ὔ 
περὶ τῆς πατρίδος, αἰδεσθεὶς τὰς ἱκετηρίας τάσδε τάς τοι 
“ δ Ἃ yy 4 > a. oe 4 ? ? 
ἥκομεν φεροντες" ἢ OV τοι ἄπιμεν εκ τοῦ αδύτου, αλλ 
? a a / 4 35. ἃ Ν , o 
αυτου τῇδε μεένεομεν, EOT ἂν Kal τελευτησωμεν" 8. ταῦτα 
Ν / e / a ΄ 7, 
de λέγουσι ἡ πρόμαντις χρᾷ δεύτερα τάδε 


= | 4 Ν 93 7 5 
Οὐ δύναται Παλλὰς At’ ᾿Ολύμπιον ἐξιλάσασθαι, 
4 “ x a 
Δισσομένη πολλοῖσι λόγοις καὶ μήτιδι πυκνῇ. 
\ as 1? 3 ¥ ἀμ In 7 , 
Σοὶ δὲ TOO αὗτις ἔπος ἐρέω, ἀδάμαντι πελάσσας. 
A ’ Φ 
Τῶν ἄλλων γὰρ ἁλισκομένων, ὅσα Κεκροπος οὖρος 
3 
Ἐντὸς ἔχει κευθμών τε Κιθαιρῶνος ζαθέοιο, 5 
Τεῖχος Τριτογενεῖ ξύλινον διδοῖ εὐρύοπα Ζεὺς 
Modvov ἀπόρθητον τελέθειν, τὸ σὲ τέκνα τ᾽ ὀνήσει. 
‘ / > cae 
Μηδὲ ov γ᾽ ἱπποσύνην τε μένειν καὶ πεζὸν ἰόντα 
2} , Ne er - 
Πολλὸν am’ ἠπείρου στρατὸν ἥσυχος, ἀλλ ὑποχωρεῖν 


184 Preparations of the Greeks. [Hxrop. © 


a 5) , ¥ / lee ph Oe 
Νῶτον ἐπιστρέψας" €Tt τοὶ κοτε καντίος EooN. 10 
5 “ ς ᾽ al Ν \ 7 ἮΝ 4 
Q θείη Σαλαμὶς, ἀπολεῖς δὲ συ τεκνα γυναικῶν 
7 / / \ ΄ 

H που σκιδναμεένης Anuntepos ἢ συνιούσης. 


A / 9 , Ν a / \ 9 Q 
36. Ταῦτα σφι nTiwtepa yap τῶν προτερων καὶ ἣν Kal 





ΓΞ“ ,ὔ ? / > Nao 9 , 
ἐδόκεε εἶναι, συγγραψάαμενοι ἀπαλλάσσοντο ἐς τὰς Αθηνας. 
\ 7 / 3 , > Ν A 
ὡς δὲ ἀπελθόντες οἱ θεοπρόποι ἀπήγγελλον ες τὸν δῆμον, 
a o Ν / / Ν ἊΣ 
γνωμαΐν καὶ ἄλλαι πολλαὶ ἐγίνοντο διζημένων τὸ μαντήϊον, 

\ ts fr / a 4 ” 
καὶ αἵδε συνεστηκυίαι μαλιστα" τῶν πρεσβυτερων ελεγον 
/ / ~ “ »X 3 4, A 
μετεξέτεροι δοκεειν opt τὸν θεὸν τὴν ἀκρόπολιν χρῆσαι 
, ε . ? , x , κ᾿ 5 / 
περιέσεσθαι" ἢ yap ἀκροπολίς τὸ Tadkat τῶν ᾿Αθηνεων 
e a ? / ἐ ‘ x Ν Ν Ν , 
ῥηχῷ ἐπεῴφρακτο. οἱ μὲν δὴ κατὰ τὸν φραγμὸν συνεβαλ- 
A Ν ΄ a 3 ε > 3 »ν. \ 
λοντο τοῦτο TO ξύλινον τεῖχος εἶναι" οἱ ὃ αὖ ἔλεγον τὰς 
t / x Ν NX 4 ,ὔ sf 
νέας σημαίνειν Tov θεὸν, καὶ ταύτας παραρτέεεσθαι ἐκέλευον 
Ne, 2 , Χ S ΄ς Ν ’ὔ / 3 Ν 
τὰ ἄλλα aTEVTAS. τοὺς ὧν δὴ τὰς νεᾶς AeyovTas εἰναι TO 
΄ a Μ Ν ΄ Ἀ re e 7] ΘΙ ὴνΝ 
ξύλινον τεῖχος ἐσφαλλε τὰ δύο Ta τελευταΐα ῥηθεντα ὑπὸ 
A / 
τῆς Πυθίης, 


3 a Ἁ ,’ A 
Ώ θείη Σαλαμὶς, ἀπολεῖς Se σὺ τέκνα γυναικῶν 
"H που σκιδναμένης Δημήτερος ἢ συνιούσης. 


δ Ξ \ » ’ ε A ~ , 
KATA ταῦτα TA ἔπεα συνέχέοντο al γνῶμαι τῶν φαμένων 
Ν ΄ Ν , a 5 ς Ν ’ 
Tas veas τὸ ξύλινον τεῖχος εἶναι. οὐ yap χρησμολόγοι 
" A 3 7 « 3 Ν - lal / 
Taury ταῦτα ἔλαμβανον, ὡς ἀμφὶ Σαλαμῖνα δεῖ σφεας 

A / 
εἐσσωθῆναι ναυμαχίην παρασκευασαμενους. 
3 ‘ A 3 7 3... 5 2 7, 
97. Hv δὲ τῶν τις ᾿Αθηναίων ἀνὴρ ες TpwTovs νεωστὶ 
ὰ 9 οὔ ἐν nv Θ é is δὲ N é 
TAPLMV, τῷ οὔνομα μεν HY Θεμιστοκλεῆης, Tats ὃε ἱνεοκλέος 
3 4 e eoyeN ? y+ A 5 A Ν if 
EKQNEETO. OUTOS ὠνὴρ οὐκ Ehn πᾶν ὀρθῶς τους χρησμολο- 
’ , Ζ Sian 9 / 3 
yous συμβάλλεσθαι, λέγων Torade* εἰ ἐς «Αθηναίους εἶχε 
ee Ε , 27 ? \ / / 
TO ἔπος εἰρημένον ἐόντως, οὐκ ἂν οὕτω μιν δοκέειν ἠπίως 
A ᾿ ᾿ς ἀπ 3 7 9 a > 
χρησθῆναι, ara woe, Q σχετλίη Σαλαμὶς, ἀντὶ tov “N 
θ / Σ Ν yy ’ yy ς 3 7 3 >? Fee 
€ln Σαλαμίς, εἰ πὲρ γε ἐμέλλον οἱ οἰκήτορες aud αὑτῇ 
΄ 3 XN \ 2" Ν 7 A aD LRN 
τελευτήσειν. ἀλλα γὰρ ES TOUS πολεμίους τῷ θεῷ εἰρῆσθαι 





VIL, 145.] Counsel of Themistocles. — 135 


Ν , / Ν Ὁ" Ν ? 
TO χρηστήριον συλλαμβάνοντι κατὰ τὸ ὀρθὸν, ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἐς 
3 / / 53 > Ν ξ , 
Αθηναίους. παρασκευάζεσθαι wv αὐτοὺς ws ναυμαχήσον- 
7 δ 4 3» lal / / 
tas συνεβούλευε, ὡς τούτου EovTOs τοῦ ξυλίνου τείχεος. 
΄ / > > -“ a 
ταύτῃ Θεμιστοκλέος ὠποφαινομένου, ᾿Αθηναῖοι ταῦτά σφι 
Μ Ὁ és 5 a Δ Ν - 
εγνωσαν αἱρετωτερα εἶναι μάλλον ἢ TU τῶν χρησμολόγων,. 
ἃ ? yx , ? ΄ Ξε \ ΄ 9 Par 
cl οὐκ ἐων ναυμαχίην ἀρτέεσθαι, τὸ δὲ σύμπαν εἶναι οὐδὲ 
r 3 a > \ ? / / \ > ‘ 
χεῖρας ἀνταείρεσθαι, ἀλλὰ ἐκλιπόντας χώρην THY Αττικὴν 
” = be ς ν΄: , 
ἄλλην τινὰ οἰκίζειν. 388. Ετέρη τε Θεμιστοκλεὶ γνωμη 
+ 4 3 Ἂς 7 Ws “ > / 
ἔμπροσθε ταύτης ἐς καιρὸν ἠρίστευσε, ὅτε Αθηναίοισι 
iv 7 3 a a Ν > - 
γενομένων χρημάτων μεγάλων ἐν τῷ κοινῷ, TA EK τῶν 
A “ > Ν / yf y 
μετώλλων σφι προσῆλθε τῶν ἀπὸ Λαυρείου. ἐμελλον λαξε- 
3 Ἃ “ , , , ΄ 
σθαι ὀρχηδὸν ἕκαστος δέκα δραχμάς. τότε Θεμιστοκλέης 
᾽ / ? / A / 4 / 
ἀνέγνωσε ᾿Αθηναίους, τῆς διαιρέσιος ταύτης παυσαμένους, 
᾽ὔ 7 a / , / > Ν 
νέας τούτων τῶν χρημάτων ποιήσασθαι διηκοσίας ἐς τὸν 
/ Ν Ἂς εἰ / / e Ν e / 
πόλεμον, Tov προς Αιγινητας λέγων. οὗτος yap O πόλεμος 
Ν x” U2 ‘ ς / 3 / / 
συστὰς ἔσωσε Tote THY Ed Xada, avayKkacas θαλασσίους 
7 ? ῃ ¢ \ 2 \ \ 3 , > 
γενέσθαι ᾿Αθηναίους. at δὲ ἐς TO μὲν ἐποιήθησαν οὐκ 
2 , 2 / Ν 7 ae / eS e / 
ἐχρήσθησαν, ἐς δέον δὲ οὕτω TH Ελλάδι ἐγένοντο. αὑταί 
\ ς / lal / lal ς A 
τε δὴ at νέες τοῖσι ᾿Αθηναίοισι προποιηθεῖσαι ὑπῆρχον, 
δ᾿ ΛΚ ΕἾ 7 Μ ͵ / Ν Ν 
εἐτέρας τε ἔδεε προσναυπηγέεσθαι. εδοξε TE σφι μετὰ TO 
/, , 3 ͵ὔ ἢ πὰ Ν ε / Ν 
χρηστήριον βουλευομένοισι, ἐπιόντα ἐπὶ τὴν Ελλάδα τὸν 
, , “ Ν 7 a cal , 
βάρβαρον δεκεσθαι thot νηυσὶ πανδημεὶ, τῷ θεῷ πειθομέ- 
7 « / “ / 
vous, ἅμα ᾿Ελλήνων τοῖσι βουλομένοισι. 
Ν XN Ν , A “ / > 
39. Ta μὲν δὴ χρηστήρια ταῦτα τοῖσι ᾿Αθηναίοισι εγε- 
, / tee 5 ἈΝ a \ * ε / 
yovee* συλλεγομένων δὲ ἐς τωυτὸ τῶν περὶ τὴν Ελλάδα 
\ > re / Ν ὃ ὃ / / % / Ν 
τὰ ἀμείνω φρονεόντων, καὶ διδόντων σῴφισι λόγον Kas 
7 Ρ] ral > 2 3 ΄ -“ . 
πίστιν, ἐνθαῦτα ἐδόκεε βουλευομένοισι αὐτοῖσι πρῶτον μεν 
/ / 7, 7 > ‘ 
χρημάτων πάντων καταλλάσσεσθαι Tas τε ἔχθρας Kat 
‘ > , 2%, / 3 Ν ΄ 
τοὺς KAT ἀλλήλους ἐόντας πολέμους. ἦσαν δὲ πρὸς τινας 
δεν Δ > / ς \ 9 / > / / 
καὶ ἄλλους ἐγκεκρημένοι, ὁ δὲ ὧν μέγιστος Αθηναίοισί TE 


4 ? 7 Ν Ν ᾽ —/ Ν a 
kat Αιγινήτησι. peta de, πυνθανόμενοι Ξερξεα σὺν TH 


136 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Herop. 


A 9 ᾽ / 5 ΄ , ΄ 
στρατῷ εἶναι ἐν Zapodict, ἐβουλεύσαντο κατασκοποὺς πὲμ- 
> Ν 5 / a / / + ee "ἢ 
mew ες τὴν ᾿Ασίην τῶν βασιλέος πρηγμάτων, ἐς Apryos τε 
> 4 / ‘ Ν \ , \ 
ἀγγέλους ὁμαυχμίην συνθησομενους πρὸς Tov Llepany, καὶ 
> / ΕΝ / ‘ / Ἂς 7 
ἐς Σικελίην ἄλλους πεμπειν παρὰ Γέλωνα τὸν Aewvopeveos, 
Μ ΄ ΄ / Ῥ Τα 7] ee: 
es τε Kepxupav, κελεύσοντας βοηθεειν tn ἔλλαδι, καὶ ἐς 
΄ yd / , “Sie 
Κρήτην ἄλλους, φρονήσαντες εἰ κως ἕν τε γένοιτο τὸ Εἰλ- 
Ν 3 4 > Ν ὔ / 3 
ληνικὸν, καὶ εἰ συγκύψαντες TWUTO πρήσσοιεν πάντες, WS 


a > / ε , a) “ 
δεινῶν ἐπιόντων ὁμοίως πᾶσι λλησι. 


Ill. THE PASS OF THERMOPYLAE, 


ς \ od 3 4 A / a 

B. Οἱ δὲ “Ελληνες eBovrevovto τῇ TE στήσονται τὸν 

/ ee “ , ec rf Ν 7 2 , 

πόλεμον, καὶ EV OLOLTL χωροισι. ἢ νικῶσα δὲ γνωμη EYER 
Ν ΄ > Ἂς ,ὔ / 

veto τὴν ἐν Θερμοπύλῃσι ἐσβολὴν φυλάξαι. στεινοτερη 


. > 7 a in A 3 7 Ν / 3 / 
yup εφαίνετο ἐοῦσα τῆς ἐς Θεσσαλίην, καὶ pia, ἀγχοτέρη 





A ς a > 3 Ν 2. ἃ ef. Cee 
τε τῆς ἑωυτῶν. THY δὲ ἀτραπὸν, du ἣν ἥλωσαν οἱ λοντες 
ς ͵ » | rt 3 Ν " aD a 7] 
Ελλήνων εν Θερμοπύλῃσι, οὐδὲ ηδεσαν εοῦσαν πρότερον 
ΝΜ »] / 3 7 > 4 / 
ἤπερ - ἀπικόμενον ἐς Θερμοπύλας επύθοντο Τρηχινίων. 

4 Ὁ 2) ys 7 Ἂς "5 Ἂν XN 
ταύτην ὧν εβουλεύσαντο φυλάσσοντες τὴν ἐσβολὴν μὴ 

/ " x e , Ἂς , ἃς Ν ν 
παριέναι es τὴν ᾿Ελλαδα τὸν βαρβαρον., τον O€ ναυτικὸν 

Ν / A a ς 7 Τα) , 

στρατὸν πλέειν γῆς τῆς ᾿Ϊστιαιήτιδος ἐπὶ Aptepiorov, 
= N > - ᾽ , SY Nu ἘΝ ’ N 
TAUTA yap ἀγχου TE ἀλλήλων εστι. WOTE muvOavecbar τὰ 

> ¢ / 27 “ = a Υ κα 
κατ €xaTepous εοντα. 9. Οἱ τε χῶροι οὕτω ἔχουσι" τοῦτο 
Ν Ν "A 7 > A / a a τ αν " > 
μὲν, TO Δρτεμίσιον, Ex τοῦ πελάγεος τοῦ Opnixiov εἕ ev- 
7 ͵ ᾽ \ 5.7 N , N \ 
ρεος συνάγεται ἐς στείνον EOVTa τὸν Topov τὸν μεταξυ 
/ / Ν 9 / / Ἵ 3 Ν n 
νήσου te Σκιάθου καὶ ἠπείρου Μαγνησίης" ex δὲ τοῦ 

A A > / y+ Als / / δ S 
στεινοῦ τῆς Ευβοίης ἤδη τὸ Ἀρτεμίσιον SexeTat αἰγίαλος, 
> ph Pe / εἰσ ¢ Ν 3 Ν a ΚΜ ’ 
ev δὲ Aprtéudos ἱρὸν. ἡ δὲ av διὰ Τρηχῖνος ἔσοδος és 

Ν ς 7, ? X an , ς / 2 Lay 
τὴν Ελλαδα εστὶ, τῇ στεινοτάτη, ἡμίπλεθρον. ov μεντοι 


Ν πον Pe Ζ Ν Ἂς 7, A 7 A y+ 
κατὰ TOUTO Y ἐστί TO OTELVOTATOV Τῆς YwpHs τῆς ἄλλης, 





"VIL, 179.] Description of the Pass. 137 


πεν ᾧ , , eT , 
ἀλλ ἔμπροσθε τε Θερμοπυλέων καὶ ὀπισθε, Kata τε ’AR- 
Ν yf Dik > fn c Ν ΄ x 
πηνοὺς ὄπισθε ἐόντας ἐοῦσα dpakitos μούνη, Kai ἔμπροσθε 
Ν ὕ Ν 3 A ? - ’ ᾿΄ κ 
κατα Φοινικα ποτάμον αγχοῦ Αἰνθηλῆς πόλιος ἁμαξιτὸς 
J v4 “ Ἂς ΄ Ν Ν Ν / 
ἄλλη μούνη. ἃ. τῶν δὲ Θερμοπυλέων TO μὲν πρὸς ἐσπέ- 
3 “ / ΔΩ ΝΣ bf ς Ν > an ; 
pns οὖρος aBatov τε καὶ ἀποκρημνον., ὑψηλὸν, ἀνατεῖνον ἐς 
Ν yy Ν Ν x Ν "σ᾿ A € tal / c 7 
τὴν Οἴτην, τὸ δὲ πρὸς τὴν ἠῶ τῆς ὁδοῦ θάλασσα ὑποδέκε- 
Ν / y+ δὲ 3 a ? "ὃ 7 θ ‘ % [ἢ “ 
Tat καὶ τενάγεα. EoTL δὲ EV TH ἐσόδῳ ταύτῃ θερμὰ λουτρὰ, 
Ν 4 / «ς > ΄ Ν Ν [ 
τὰ Χύτρους καλέουσι οἱ ἐπίχωριοι, καὶ βωμὸς ἱδρυται 
« f Bis ἃ 2 - Ia/ Ν na \ ΄ 
Ἡρακλέος ἐπ᾿ αὐτοῖσι. ἐεδεδμητο δὲ τεῖχος κατὰ ταύτας 
\ ? Ν ᾿ / Ν ΄ ’ a Μ 
τὰς ἐσβολὰς, καὶ τὸ γε παλαιὸν πῦλαι ἐπῆσαν. ἐδειμαν 
Ν / Ν “Ὁ 7 > Ν Ν - » 
δὲ Φωκέες τὸ τεῖχος, δείσαντες, eves Θεσσαλοὶ ἦλθον ἐκ 
Θ a 5 ᾽7ὔ A \ Ai x0 PP - > 
εσπρωτῶν οἰκήσοντες γῆν τὴν Αιολιδα, τὴν περ νῦν ἐκ- 
/ «“ \ / a cal / 
τέαται. ἅτε δὴ πειρωμένων τῶν Θεσσαλῶν καταστρέφε- 
/ a / ¢ / Ν ee, 
σθαι σφεας, τοῦτο προεφυλάξαντο οἱ Pwxees* καὶ TO ὕδωρ 
Ν Ν , τι ἡ ¥ A \ » ἜΝ ἢ 
τὸ θερμὸν τότε ἐπῆκαν ETL τὴν ἔσοδον, ὡς ἂν χαραδρωθείη 
ς “ A / Ἁ / > / ay 
ὁ χῶρος, πᾶν μηχανεόμενοι, ὅκως μὴ σφι εσβαάλοιεν οἱ 
Ν 3 \ / Ν 7ὔ nm ἣν > -“ 
Θεσσαλοὶ es τὴν χώρην. τὸ μὲν νυν τεῖχος τὸ ἀρχαῖον 
3 A τ ’ Ν Ν ͵7] > ~ »¥ Φ cam / 
εκ παλαιοῦ TE εδεδμητο, καὶ TO πλέον αὐτοῦ ἤδη ὑπὸ χρό- 
ΜΟΥ A Ν 3 5 7 y / > 
νου ἐκέετο. 4. τοῖσι δε αὖτις ὀρθώσασι ἔδοξε ταύτῃ ἀπα- 
“4 >? Ν A ¢ / a / / / > 
μύνειν ἀπὸ τῆς Ελλάδος τὸν BapBapov. κωμη δὲ ἐστι 
> / A ¢ χω 8 Ν y ? 7 wy 
ἀγχοτάτω τῆς ὁδοῦ, Αλπηνοὶ οὔνομα" εκ ταύτης δε εἐπισι- 
“ 2 / εἰ ¢ , an - 
τιεῖσθαι ἐλογίζοντο οἱ “ Ελληνες. οἱ μέν νυν χῶροι οὗτοι 
΄“ ¢/ = " 7 2 / / = 
τοίσι Ελλησι εἶναι ehaivovto ἐπιτήδεοι. ἅπαντα yap 
/ “toh ge / “ + 74... ἡ 
προσκεψάμενοι, καὶ ἐπιίλογισθέντες OTL οὗτε πληθεὶ ἕξουσι 
Sear ε , “ “ ΄ ” / 
χρᾶσθαι ot βαρβαροι ovte ἵππῳ, ταύτη σφι edoke δέκεσθαι 
\ ? / " Ν ἈΝ c ͵ ¢ wa Φ ΄ \ ,ὔ 
Tov ἐπιόντα ἐπὶ τὴν Βλλαδα. ὡς δε ἐπύθοντο τὸν Ilep- 
3 > / / > a aie! ὦ ΄ 
σην eovta εν Πιερίη. διαλυθέντες ex τοῦ ἰσθμοῦ εστρατεύ- 
ἐ 
2 A c Ν 5 / a y+ ἢ Χ Ν / 
οντο αὑτῶν οἱ μὲν ἐς Θερμοπύλας πεζῇ, αλλοι δὲ κατὰ Ba- 
ee ee / 
λασσαν ἐπ Apteuicovov. 
« ΧΝ \ J \ e / " ,ὔ 
ὅ. Ὃ δὲ ναυτικὸς Ξερξεω στρατὸς ὁρμεόμενος ἐκ Θερ- 


/ a yf 4 / 
LNs πόλιος παρέβαλε νηυσὶ τῇσι ἄριστα πλεούσησι δέκα 


138 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Hrop, 


ὅδ. , Υ̓ 9 , , rie 
ἰθὺ Σκιάθου, ἔνθα ἦσαν προφυλασσουσαι vees τρεῖς Εἱλλη- 
7 Ν 5) / \ 9 ΄, ew 
vides, Τροιζηνίη te καὶ Avrywain καὶ ᾿Αττικῆ. προΐδοντες 
Ἀ e ἣν 7 a / ? \ cd 
δὲ οὗτοι tas veas τῶν βαρβάρων, es φυγὴν wpynoav. 
a ‘ / a ral / r 3 7 
6. Τῶν δὲ δέκα νεῶν τῶν βαρβάρων τρεῖς ἐπήλασαν περὶ 
Ming Ν ἌΜΨΝ Ν / , 
τὸ ἕρμα To μεταξὺυ cov Σκιάθου τε καὶ Μαγνησίης, xareo- 
Ν 7 3 a e / 2 \ 4 
μενον δὲ Μύρμηκα. ἐνθαῦτα ot βάρβαροι, ἐπειδὴ στήλην 
/ “ / / 2 Ἂ Α vA c , 3 ΄ 
λίθου ἐπέθηκαν κομίσαντες ἐπὶ TO ἕρμα, ὁρμηθεντες αὐτοὶ 
“ «“ ΝΥ δὰ 5) ’ \ 2 ‘ 
ἐκ Θέρμης. ὥς opt τὸ ἐμποδὼν ἐγεγόνεε καθαρον, ἐπεπλεον 
a Ν ἘΝ ΄ Ν \ 
πάσῃσι τῇσι νηυσὶ, ἕνδεκα NuEpas παρεντες μετα τὴν Pa- 
ry Vest > ͵ \ Ν c/ / 
σιλέος ἐξέλασιν ἐκ Θερμης. τὸ δὲ ἕρμα σφι κατηγήσατο 
9.3 3 / / / 7 x . 
ἐὸν ἐν πόρῳ μάλιστα Πάμμων Σί κύριος. πανημερὸν δὲ 
/ ς ’ 3 7 A / / 
πλώοντες οἱ βάρβαροι eEavvovor τῆς Μαγνησίης yopns 
a , N \ 2 ν ν \ , 
ἐπὶ Σηπιάδα τε καὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν τὸν μεταξυ Κασθαναίης 
/ ap Ν τ' / >) A ’ / ΄ 
τε πόλιος ἐόντα καὶ Σηπιαδος ακτῆς. έεχρι μὲν νυν tov- 
A , Ν ’ 3 / r 95 ς 
του τοῦ χώρου καὶ Θερμοπυλέων ἀπαθὴς τε κακῶν ἢν ὁ 
4 
στρατος. 
ς Ν \ a a a id Ν a 7. 
7. Αἱ μὲν δὴ πρῶται τῶν νεῶν ὥρμεον πρὸς γῇ, ἄλλαι 
Oe ees Nar / 9 2 / « Ν a Pp] ATE 
δ᾽ ἐπ᾿ ἐκείνησι ἐπ᾿ ἀγκυρέεων" ἅτε γὰρ τοῦ αἰγιαλοῦ εοντος 
2 U / « ( ? , ἊΝ SHEN γῸ x 
οὐ μεγάλου, TPOKPOTTAL WPLEOVTO ες πόντον Kal ETL ὀκτὼ 
/ ΄ \ \ 2 ΄ «“ Ψ Die, / 5 
νέας. ταύτην μὲν τὴν εὐφρόνην οὕτω" ἅμα δὲ ὀρθρῳ, εξ 
> / Ν / A / , ae ’ 
αἰθρίης τε καὶ νηνεμίης τῆς θαλάσσης ζεσαάσης, ἐπέπεσε 
7 / XN \ 5 3 ΄ Ν 
σῴφι χειμὼν τε μεγᾶς καὶ πολλὸς ἄνεμος ἀπηλιωτῆης, τον 
Ne / / ς Ν a ον ,ὕ > 
δὴ Ελλησποντίην καλεουσι ol περί TAVTA TA χωρια OLKN- 
/ / / 2 A Vest yo A Μ 
μένοι. ὅσοι μέν νυν αὐτῶν αὐξόμενον ἔμαθον τὸν ἄνεμον, 
Ν -»᾿ τ 9 ed ε > lem" 4 x rn 3 
καὶ τοῖσι οὕτω εἶχε ὅρμου, οἱ δ᾽ ἐεφθησαν τον χειμώνα ἀνα- 
΄ Ν / ἈΝ > / A Ν « , 2 
σπάσαντες TAS νέας, καὶ αὐτοί τε περιῆσαν καὶ aL νεες av- 
a 2 XN a a / By Ν Ν 5...) 
τῶν ὅσας δὲ τῶν νεῶν μεταρσίας ἔλαβε, τὰς μεν ἐξεφερε 
δας \ , \ ᾽ ͵ . ἐλ 9 N 
προς πνοὺς καλεομένους τοὺς ev Πηλίῳ, τὰς δὲ ἐς τὸν 
>] / « δὲ Ν 2 \ \ ‘ , e 
αἰγιαλὸν. αἱ δὲ περὶ αὑτὴν τὴν Σηπιάδα περιέεπίπτον. αὐ 
Kae, Ψ , e 199, / > ’ὔ 
δε ἐς Μελίβοιαν πόλιν, at δε es Κασθαναίην ἐξεβρασσοντο. 
9 δὲ aA a a ? / 7, Ν 
ἣν δὲ τοῦ χειμῶνος χρῆμα ἀφόρητον. 8. Δέγεται δε 








“Vil, 191.] The Help of Boreas. 139 


; e > a \ / , , 
λόγος, ws A@nvaiot tov Bopenv cx θεοπροπίου ἐπεκαλέ- 
3 ’ Μ / ‘ ‘ > 7 
σαντο, ἐλθόντος ot ἄλλου χρηστηρίου τὸν γαμβρὸν ἐπί- 
/ / Ν ‘ \ , 
κουρον καλέσασθαι. Βορέης δε κατὰ tov ᾿ Ελλήνων λόγον 
ra 3 \ / \ > ‘ Ν 
ἔχει γυναῖκα Αττικὴν, ᾿Ὠρειθυιαν τὴν Ἐρεχθέεος. κατὰ 
‘ nf a ΞΕ... ΄- ΄ / cd 
δὴ To κῆδος τοῦτο ob AOnvaiol, ws φάτις ὥρμηται, συμ- 
,ὔ / \ / \ 5 ; 
βαλλόμενοι σφι tov Bopenv γαμβρον εἶναι, ναυλοχέοντες 
« > ͵ > ε Ψ Pee, Ἢ ἐξ 
τῆς Εὐβοίης ἐν Χαλκίδι, ὡς ἐμαθον αὐξόμενον τὸν χειμῶνα, 
Ν \ 7 / ΤῊΝ , / , 
ἢ καὶ πρὸ τούτου. ἔθυόν TE καὶ ἐπεκαλέοντο τὸν τε Βορέην 
\ A / Ν - -" 
καὶ τὴν ᾿Ὠρείθυιαν τιμωρῆσαί σφι καὶ διαφθεῖραι τῶν βαρ- 
- ΄ « Ν / ἊΨ ? ΄, 
βάρων τὰς νέας, ὡς καὶ πρότερον περὶ ἄθων. εἰ μὲν νυν 
a lal ’ὔ ΄ 4 e / 4 i 
διὰ ταῦτα τοῖσι βαρβάροισι ὁρμέουσι ὁ Βορέης ἐπέπεσε, 
? yx 3 3 ? ie / 
οὐκ ἔχω εἶπαι" οἱ 8 ὧν ᾿Αθηναῖοί opt λέγουσι βοηθή- 
Ν 7 / Ν ἣν -» / 
σάντα τὸν Βορέην πρότερον καὶ τότε ἐκεῖνα κατεργάσασθαι, 
ΟΝ > / / « , Ν Ν > 
καὶ ἱρὸν ἀπέλθοντες Bopew ἱδρύσαντο παρὰ ποταμὸν ἴλισ- 
, 3 ΄ A , / hee, , / 
σον. 9. εν TOUTM TH πόνῳ VEeus οἱ ελαχίστας λεγουσι 
A 7 >? 3 , yy > 
διαφθαρῆναι, τετρακοσιέων οὐκ ἐλάσσονας, ἄνδρας τε ἀναριθ- 
, ΄ a 7 7 Λ. 
μήτους, χρημάτων τε πλῆθος abCovov: ὥστε ᾿Αμεινοκλέϊ 
A K / ᾽ ὃ Ν Μ ΄ ͵ \ D3 ἊΣ 
τῳ Κρητίνεω avopt ωγνητι γηοχέοντι περὶ Σηπίαδα με- 
I. e / 7 Seek as, ἃ Χ ‘ ΄ 
γάλως ἡ ναυηγίη αὕτη χρηστὴ ἐγένετο. OS πολλὰ MEV χρυ- 
7 / 2 > 
σεα ποτήρια ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ ἐκβρασσόμενα ἀνείλετο, πολλὰ 
ἊΝ > 7 4 lal / e Μ 
δὲ ἀργύρεα, θηραύροως te τῶν Ilepocewv eupe, ἄλλα τε 
[χρύσεα] ἄφατα χρήματα περιεβάλετο. ἀλλ᾽ ὁ βέν. τἄλλα 
οὐκ εὐτυχέων εὑρήμασι μέγα πλούσιος ἐγένετο" ἦν γάρ 
τις καὶ τοῦτον ἄχαρις συμφορὴ λυπεῦσα παιδοφοόνος. 
lal ~ Μ ,ὔ 
10. σιταγωγῶν δὲ ὁλκάδων καὶ τῶν ἄλλων πλοίων δια- 
Δ Ὁ “Ἂς Ν 7 , ε 
φθειρομένων οὐκ ἐπὴν ἀριθμὸς, ὥστε δείσαντες οἱ στρατη- 
A -“ A / / > / 
γοὶ τοῦ ναυτικοῦ στρατοῦ, μή σφι κεκακωμένοισι ἐπιθεων- 
Ν 3 - / ‘ 
Tat οἱ Θεσσαλοὶ, ἕρκος ὑψηλὸν ἐκ τῶν ναυηγίων περιεβα- 
λ ἡμέ tp δὴ eveipal ὃς - τέλος δὲ ἔντομά 
οντο. ἡμέρας yap δὴ ἐχείμαξζε τρεῖς " τέλος μ 
A / A > / ε 7 
τε ποιεῦντες καὶ καταείδοντες γόησι τῷ ἀνέμῳ οἱ αγοι, 


\ = ΄, Ν a Θ 7 Ν a Ν ἐδ θ , 
προς € TOUTOLGL Kab ΤῊ ETL Kab THCt ηρῆηνσε VOVTES, 


140 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Heron 


ἔπα , “ἡμέρῃ, ἢ ἄλλως κως αὐτὸς ἐθέλων Exo: 
υσαν τεταρτῃ ἡμέρῃ, ἢ ἄλλως κῶς αὐτὸς εθελων EKO 
an y+ ‘ ro 3 / Ν 
mace. τῇ δε Θετι ἔθυον πυθυμενοι Tapa τῶν Ιωνων τὸν 
, e 2 an ΄ e ΄ €. ΤῊΝ , 
λόγον, WS ἐκ TOU χωρου τουτου ἁρπασθειηὴ ὑπὸ ΠΠηλεος, 
+ cd ς 3 . ΄ 2 Ν rn + 
εἴη TE ἅπασα ἡ ἀκτὴ ἡ Σηπίας εκεινης TE καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 
fh € ν- ; / ΄ / 2 7 - 
Νηρηΐδων. 11. Ὃ μεν δη τεταρτῃ ἡμέρῃ ἐπέπαυτο" τοῖσι 
νῷ, δὰ ἐδ / > XN a Μ rn 3 ee 
Se Ἕλλησι οἱ ἡμεροσκόποι, απὸ τῶν axpwv τῶν Ἐυβοϊκῶν 
7 / Η ΄ es - € Ν e aA 
καταδραμόντες δευτέρῃ ἡμέρῃ AT NS ὁ χειμὼν ὁ πρῶτος 
> / 3 / / Ν / Ν ᾿ς / 
ἐγένετο, ἐσήμαινον πάντα τὰ γενόμενα περὶ THY ναυηγίην. 
« ἃς « > 4 / A 3 ͵ \ 
οἱ δὲ ws ἐπύθοντο, Ποσειδέωνι σωτῆρι evEapevol, καὶ σπον- 
Ν / ™ / 2) ᾿ ΕῚ / >, Ἂν 
das προχέαντες τὴν ταχίστην, οπίσω ἠπείγοντο ETL TO 
͵ / 3 / 5 / ’ > / Μ 
Ἀρτεμίσιον, ἐλπίσαντες ὀλίγας τινὰς odt ἀντιξοους εσε- 
΄ e - Ἂν Ν 4 2. / ® Ν 
σθαι νέας. οἱ μὲν δὴ τὸ δεύτερον ἐλθόντες περὶ τὸ ᾿Αρτε- 
/ 3 / / A 3 / > ee. 
μίσιον ἐναυλόχεον, Ποσειδέωνος σωτῆρος ἐπωνυμίην ato 
/ ΕΣ Ν 3 7 / ¢ Ν / 
τούτου ἔτι καὶ ἐς τόδε νομίζοντες. ἘΦ. Οἱ de βαρβαροι, 
e 3 ΄' , ᾿ N ἈΝ A » , 
OS ἐπαύσατο TE ὁ ἄνεμος καὶ TO κῦμα EGTPWTO, κατασπᾶ- 
Ἂς / yf \ = Μ / ὃς 
σαντες τὰς νέας ἔπλεον παρὰ τὴν ἤπειρον, κάμψαντες δὲ 
N 7 A / 2 / + 3 Ἂς Λ Ν 
τὴν ἄκρην τῆς Μαγνησίης, ἐιθέαν ἐπλεον ἐς Tov κόλπον τὸν 
᾽ Ν 7 / y+ Ἂς nr 3 A / 
ἐπὶ Παγασέων φέροντα. ἐστι δὲ χῶρος ἐν τῷ κόλπῳ 
7 A / 4 / " «ε / 
τούτῳ τῆς Μαγνησίης, ἔνθα λέγεται τὸν Hpakdea- xata- 
A ε Ἂς 3 / / Ν al / > A 
λειφθῆναι ὑπὸ Incoves τε Kal τῶν συνεταίρων EK TNS 
A : Dae) / / 3 2 Ν ἮῬ \ a + ? 
᾿Αργοῦς er ὕδωρ πεμφθέντα. εὐτ᾽ ἐπὶ TO κώας ἔπλεον ες 
3 \ 3 A \ x ¢ / ? 
Αἶαν τὴν Κολχίδα ἐνθεῦτεν yap ἔμελλον vdpevoapevor ες 
\ L 5) 7 See ΄ δὲ a , “ὔ 2 
τὸ πέλαγος ἀφήσειν, ἐπὶ τούτου OE τῷ χώρῳ οὔνομα γε- 
2 ,ὔ 3 ΄ 53 “ μαι" 3 A 
yove Adetat, ἐν τούτῳ ὧν ὅρμον οἱ Ξέρξεω emovevyto. 
/ \ sie \ \ \ J & 
18. Ἐέρξης de καὶ ὁ πεζος, πορευθεὶς διὰ Θεσσαλίης καὶ 
> / 2 Ν 3 ‘ Ν a 2 / 3 
Ἀχαιίης, ἐσβεβληκὼς ἣν καὶ δὴ τριταῖος ες ηλιεας " ev 
/ 5 Ἂ / “ nr ic A 
Θεσσαλίῃ μεν ἁμίλλαν ποιησάμενος LTTWVY τῶν EWUTOD, 
? / Ν ᾿ / “ , ε 
ἀποπειρεόμενος καὶ τῆς Θεσσαλίης ἵππου, πυθόμενος ὡς 
᾿] / yy lal ) e/ δ Ν ΟΣ ὦ fi “ 
ἀρίστη evn τῶν εν Εϊλλησι" Evia δὴ αἱ ᾿Ελληνίδες ὑπποι 
2. ! , a ) / a 
ἐλείποντο πολλὸν. τῶν μὲν νυν ἐν Θεσσαλίῃ ποταμῶν 


ὌὋὌ / cal ae > / a a 2 Crt é 
VOX @VOS μουνος Ove ATEN OBTE ΤΊ) OT Patt?) TO Pee Pov 








Ι VIL, 3001 The Trachinian Plain. 141 


, a Se ᾽ 5 rf a ὅν ἢ Iar ΄ 
πινόμενος, τῶν δε ἐν Αχαιίῃ ποταμῶν ῥεόντων οὐδὲ ὅστις 
, ? r > Ἂν ᾽ Ν : Ia φ > / > s 
μέγιστος αὐτῶν εστὶ Ἡπιδανος. οὐδὲ οὗτος ἀντέσχε εἰ μὴ 
͵7 “ Ἀ Ἂς > / Ν ‘ 5 
φλαύρως. 14. Ταῦτα μὲν ta ev Θεσσαλίῃ καὶ τὰ ev 
> 3 \ Ν 4 -“ 7] ΕἾ ΕΝ > Ν ͵ 
Αχαιίῃ" ἀπὸ δὲ τούτων τῶν χώρων Hie ἐς τὴν Μηλίδα 
,΄ 4 > cal y+ / Ν , / . ἡ 
παρὰ κόλπον θαλάσσης, ἐν τῷ ἀμπωτὶς TE καὶ ῥηχίη ἀνὰ 
lal ς / / Ἂν Ν Ν / al / > 
πᾶσαν ἡμέρην γίνεται. περὶ δὲ τὸν κόλπον τοῦτον ἐστι 
a Ν a Ν MSS a ‘ Ν , / 
χῶρος πεδινὸος, TH μὲν Eupus, τῇ δὲ καὶ κάρτα aTELWOS. 
Ν Ν Ν a + ¢e \ Ν Μ oh 
περὶ δὲ τὸν χῶρον οὔρεα ὑψηλὰ καὶ ἀβατα περικληΐει 
a ss / A / / / 
πᾶσαν τὴν Μηλίδα γὴν, Tpnyiviat πέτραι καλεόμεναι. 
, / /. ? \ 2 a / γ΄ δὲ Re ,ὔ 
πρωτὴ μὲν νυν TONS εστὶ ἐν τῷ κολπῳ ἰοντί ἀπ Ἀχαιίης 
7A / > A % > Ν ef. ᾽ ΤΠ ὔ 
ντικύρη, παρ ἣν ποταμὸς Σπερχειος ρεων εξ ᾿Ενιήνων 
3 7 2 - ἌΝ: N rd Ν + / 
ἐς θάλασσαν ἐκδιδοῖ. ἀπὸ δε τούτου δια εἰκοσί KOU στα- 
, Μ ᾧ; a y ,ὕ ΄ \ 
δίων ἄλλος ποταμὸς, TH οὔνομα κέεται Avpas, Tov βοη- 
θ if a ‘Hl x hie / ἊΝ, / Ρ] Ν 3 F A 
ἔοντὰ τῷ ρακλεῖὶ καιομένῳ ROYos ἐστὶ ἀναφανῆναι. 
ΑΝ Ν 7 > Μ. + / + / 
ἀπὸ δὲ τούτου δὲ ἄλλων εἴκοσι σταδίων ἄλλος ποταμὸς 
᾽ ᾿ / λ ‘ \ 1 ae A 
ἐστι, ὃς καλέεται Μέλας. 15. Tpnyis δὲ πόλις ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ΛΔ ΄ A Pe / 5) , / Ν 
Μέλανος τούτου ποταμοῦ πέντε στάδια ἀπέχει. ταύτη δε 
Ν 2 4 ξζ΄ 3 ΄ an 7 7 3 -“ 3 / 
καὶ εὐρύτατον ἐστι TATNS τῆς KHOPNS ταύτης EK τῶν OUPEwV 
2 / ἃς. Gh Ν ΄. 7 ‘ 
ἐς θάλασσαν, cat a Tpnyis πεπόλισται" δισχίλια TE γὰρ 
\ Ἅὦ ͵7 a / 2 / - Ν Vv Ν 
καὶ δισμύρια πλέθρα τοῦ πεδίου ἐστί. τοῦ δε οὔρεος, TO 
he bs a » / " . Ν 
περικληΐει τὴν γῆν τὴν Τρηχινίην, ἔστι διασφαξ προς 
/ “ Ν Ν Τὰς 7 > Ν 
μεσαμβρίην Τρηχῖνος, dua δὲ τῆς διασφαγος ἄσωπος πο- 
Ἂς ιν Ν = ¢ / A Μ " Ν 
TAMLOS peel παρὰ τὴν ὑπωρεαν Tov οὔρεος. 6. Εστι δε 
57 “ Ν 2 / ‘ J A 
ἄλλος Φοίνιξ ποταμὸς ov μέγας πρὸς μεσαμβρίην τοῦ 
3 an ΣΧ > A 2 / 7 ef ? Ν 3 Ν 
AcwTov, ὃς ἐκ τῶν οὐρέων τούτων ρεων ἐς τὸν ἄσωπον 
3 al Ν Ν Ν 7] Ν / / 2 
ἐκδιδοῖ. κατὰ δὲ Tov Φοίνικα ποταμὸν στεινοτατὸν ἐστι" 
ς Ν Ν 7 7 , σιν Ἂς Χ A / 
ἁμαξιτὸς yap pia μούνη δέδμηται. ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ Φοίνικος 
a / ΓΝ ᾽ ΄ ἃ de 
eranov πεντεκαίδεκα στάδια ἐστι ἐς Θερμοπύλας. εν ὃὲε 
τῷ μεταξὺ Φοίνικος ἐν μι καὶ er κώμη τέ 
ἐστι, τῇ οὔνομα ᾿Ανθήλη κέεται, Tap ἣν δὴ παραρρέων ὁ 


> 


᾿Ασωπὺς ἐς θάλασσαν ἐκδιδοῖ, καὶ χῶρος περὶ αὐτὴν εὐρὺς, 


142 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Herop. 


3 a , Ν > / I : 
ev τῷ Anuntpos τε ἱρὸν Audixtvovidos ἵδρυται, καὶ ἕδραι 





sels ΄ Ν ᾽ a n? ΄ αν | 
εἰσὶ Ἀμφικτύοσι καὶ avtov τοῦ Ἀμφικτύονος tpov. τ 
Ν Ν XN 7 3 Us A 
BY. Βασιλεὺς μὲν bn Ξέρξης ἐστρατοπεδεύετο τῆς My- 
, 3 A 7 € \ Ἀν 2 a ͵ 
λίδος ἐν τῇ Τρηχινίῃ, οἱ δὲ δὴ ᾿Ελληνες ἐν τῇ διόδῳ. 
/ Ν ς al @ ς Ν ῳ a / ¢€ ͵7 
καλεεται δὲ ὁ χῶρος οὗτος UTO μεν τῶν πλεόνων ᾿Ελλήνων 
7 ¢ Ἂς Ν cr 3 / Ἂς / rd 
Θερμοπύλαι, ὑπὸ δὲ τῶν ἐπιχωρίων καὶ περιοίκων Πύλαι. 
» 4 / ς / 3 i al 
ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο μὲν νυν EKUTEPOL EV τούτοισι τοῖσι χω- 
/ 5 / aT N a Ν / ΚΜ 2 
ρίοισι" ἐπεκρώτεε δὲ ὁ μεν τῶν πρὸς βορέην ἄνεμον ἐχόντων 
, if cad « >» a Ν / Ν 
πάντων μέχρι Τρηχῖνος, οἱ δὲ τῶν πρὸς νότον καὶ μεσαμ- 
/ ΄ Ἃ ΞῪΝ ΄ A 2 7 8 Ἢ 
βρίην φερόντων to ἐπὶ ταύτης τῆς ἠπείρου. 18. Ησαν 
Ν vA ¢ , ee; / Ἂς / 3 7 
de olde “Ελλήνων οἱ ὑπομένοντες τὸν Πέρσην ἐν τούτῳ τῷ 
’ / / ¢ a / 
χώρῳ Σπαρτιητέων τε τριηκόσιοι ὁπλῖται, καὶ Τεγεητέων 
Ν / 1. ς / ¢ / 3 5 A 
kat Mavtwewv χίλιοι, ἡμίσεες exatéepwv, εξ ᾿Ορχομενοῦ τε 
ἌΡ / BA ASG Ν ἈΠ 9 a A 9 / 
τῆς ApKadins εἴκοσι καὶ ἑκατὸν, καὶ EK τῆς λοιπῆς ᾿Αρκαδίης 
/. A Ν ? , 3. 3s Ν / / : 
χίλιοι" τοσοῦτοι μὲν ApKadwy, απὸ be Κορίνθου τετρακόσιοι 
x > Ἂς an / Ν / >) / - 
καὶ ἀπὸ Φλιοῦντος διηκόσιοι καὶ Μυκηναίων oydwxovta:* οὗ- 
x Cite / A Diy Ἂς ‘ a 
tot μὲν ἀπὸ Πελοποννήσου παρῆσαν, ato δε Βοιωτῶν Θε- 
7 ς ͵ N 7 ͵ X 
σπίεων TE ἑπτακόσιοι καὶ Θηβαίων τετρακόσιοι. 19. προς 
΄ es Seale / Crd ΄, : 
τούτοισε ἐπίκλητοι ἐγένοντο Aoxpot Te of Οπούντιοι παν- 
Aa / Λ 2 Ν ’ὔ ee 
στρατιῇ, Kat Φωκέων χίλιοι. αὐτοὶ yap σφεας ob Ελληνες 
3 7 ͵ 3 > Λ ¢ ? ἈΝ / 
ETEKANETAVTO, λέγοντες δὲ ἀγγέλων ὡς αὐτοι μεν ἥκοιεν 
/ fal ἡ ς Ν Ν a , , 
πρόδρομοι τῶν ἄλλων, οἱ δὲ AOLTTOL TOV συμμάχων προσ- 
7 A 5 ς / e f. / / Υ 3 
δόκιμοι πᾶσαν εἶεν ἡμέρην" ἡ θάλασσα TE σφι Ein ἐν 
Feet καθ, / , \ 5) / \ 
φυλακῃ, ὑπ «Αθηναίων τε φρουρεομενη καὶ Διυγινητέων Kat 
a 3 Ν Ν Ν ,ὔ / + x 
τῶν ες TOV ναυτικὸν στρατὸν ταχθέντων, Kab σφι Ely δεινὸν 
2 / 3 Ν Ν 5 “ 5] 7 5. δὰ ἊΝ ε is 
οὐδὲν" ov yap θεὸν εἶναι τὸν ἐπιόντα ἐπὶ τὴν Ελλαδα, 
δ τς EN 5 Ν ὅτι / ϑῳν- a 
arX ἀνθρωπον" εἶναι δὲ θνητὸν οὐδένα οὐδὲ ἔσεσθαι, τῷ 
Ν 2 ? A / > / a Χ / 
κακὸν εξ ἀρχῆς γινομένῳ ov συνεμίχθη, τοῖσι δε μεγίστοισι 
2 tal / " /. 5 Ν ἃς 3 v4 € “ν ἢ 
αὐτῶν μεγίστα" OPELAELY ὧν καὶ τὸν ἐπελαύνοντα, ὡς EOVTA 
“ Θ᾿ A r 77 Ν A Λ 
θνητὸν, ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης πεσεῖν av. Οἱ δὲ ταῦτα πυνθανο- 


, / > Ἀ a / 9S ΄ 
μενον ἐβοήθεον ἐς τὴν Tpnyiva, 20. Τούτοισι ἦσαν μὲν 





ν᾿ z 


vil, 206.) Leonidas and the Three Hundred. 143 


A + Ν Ν / ¢ , ΄ ‘ 
νυν καὶ ἀλλοι στρατηγοὶ κατὰ πόλιας ἑκάστων" ὁ δὲ θωυ- 


, / >. Ν a ΄ c 
μαζόμενος μάλιστα, καὶ παντὸς τοῦ στρατεύματος ἡγεύ- 


μενος, Δακεδαιμόνιος jv Λεωνίδης ὁ ᾿Αναξανδρίδεω τοῦ 


/ - ? / a ? a 
Aéovtos tov Evpuxpatidew τοῦ ᾿Αναξάνδρου τοῦ Εὐρυ- 
/ A / A > lal 
κρώτεος TOU Πολυδώρου τοῦ ᾿Αλκαμένεος τοῦ Τηλέκλου 
~~ 9 4 nw ¢ Λ A 4 a s 
τοῦ Αρχέλεω τοῦ Ἠγησίλεω τοῦ Δορύσσου τοῦ AcwBw- 
me € / an yd a ? 7 A 
teow τοῦ Eyeatpatov τοῦ Hywos tov Ευρυσθένεος τοῦ 
> / a ’ὔ A / acd 
Αριστοδήμου τοῦ ᾿Αριστομάχου tov Κλεοδαίου τοῦ Ὕλλου 
π᾿... δ / ’, Ν a? 3 ΄ 
τοῦ Ἡρακλέος, κτησώμενος τὴν βασιληΐην ἐν Σπάρτη ἐξ 
3 / a / «ς δ A Κ᾽ 
ἀπροσδοκήτου. 21. διξῶν yap οἱ ἐόντων πρεσβυτέρων 
3 n / / Ν / 3 / a 
ἀδελφεῶν, Κλεομένεος τε καὶ Awpieos, ἁπελήλατο τῆς φρον- 
/ Ν A a > / ‘ 7 
τίδος περὶ τῆς βασιληίης. ἀποθανόντος δὲ Κλεομένεος 
Μ 4 / / > / 3 > Ἀ 
ἄπαιδος ἔρσενος γόνου, Δωριέος τε οὐκέτι EOVTOS, ἀλλὰ 
Ν ΄ 2 7 / Ae / 
τελευτήσαντος καὶ τούτου ἐν Σικελίῃ, οὕτω On ες Δεωνίδην 
ae 7, ς op \ 7 ῇ > , 
ἀνέβαινε ἡ Baotrnin, καὶ διότι πρότερος eyeryovee Κλεομ- 
7ὔ - Ν 3 , 2 / sy Ν 
βρότου (οὗτος yup ἣν νεώτατος Avatavopivew Tais ), καὶ 
Ἂ Ny / / ἃ / Y.. > 
δὴ καὶ εἶχε Κλεομένεος θυγατέρα. ὃς τότε ἤϊε es Θερμο- 
/ >] x ‘4 Ξ Ἀ A 
πύλας. ETLAEEUEVOS ἄνδρας TE TOUS KATETTEWTAS TPLNKO- 
, a τον κε τ ‘ 
σιους, καὶ τοῖσι ετυγχανον παῖδες EovTes. 22. παραλαβὼν 
Ν ᾽ ,ὔ Ν , \ 3 Ν > Ν , 
δὲ ἀπίκετο καὶ Θηβαίων τοὺς ἐς τὸν ἀριθμὸν λογισάμενος 
> = 4 7, 7 c ᾿ 7 a 
εἶπον, τῶν ἐστρατήγεε Λεοντιάδης ὁ Evpupayov. τοῦδε 
Ν “ ΄ Ν 9 4 / 7 
δὲ εἴνεκεν τούτους σπουδὴν ἐποιήσατο Λεωνίδης μούνους 
¢ ͵ a 7 7, / / 
Ελλήνων παραλαβεῖν, ὅτι σφέων μεγάλως κατηγόρητο 
/ /- ΕΣ ? Ν , Al "κα 
μηδίζειν. παρεκάλεε ὧν ἐς τὸν πόλεμον, εθέλων ELdEVAL 
4 / yd Sah / > a2 ͵ Ν 
ELTE συμπεμψουσι ELTE καὶ ἀπερέουσι EK τοῦ ἐμφανέος την 
«ς Σ 7 ἈΝ > / Μ 
Ἑλλήνων συμμαχίην" οἱ δὲ ἀλλοῴφρονεέοντες ἔπεμπον. 
Ἕ Ν \ > / ἧς > 
23. Τούτους μεν τους ἀμφὶ Δεωνίδην πρώτους ἀπέπεμψαν 
A ef 7 rn Cr / 
Σπαρτιῆται, wa τούτους ὁρῶντες οἱ ἄλλοι σύμμαχοι στρα- 
΄ \ \ e ᾽ \ ? \ 7 
TEVOVTAL, μηδὲ καὶ οὗτοι μηδίσωσι, ἢν αὐτοὺς πυνθάνωνται 
- / \ / 7 3 > Ν 
ὑπερβαλλομένους - μετὰ δὲ, Κάρνεια γάρ σφι ἣν ἐμποδων, 


ΜΨ ~ e , Ν Ν / > | “- ΄ 
ἐμεῖνλον ορτάσαντες, καὶ φυλακας λύποντες EV Τῇ Σπαρτῇῃ; 


144 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Hrrop, 





\ Ν Ν 6 Ν a 
κατὰ τάχος βοηθήσειν πανδημεί. ὡς δὲ καὶ οἱ λοιποὶ τῶν J 
ee? ἐνένωντο καὶ αὐτοὶ ἕτερα τοιαῦτα ποιήσειν , ἦν Ὁ 
γὰρ κατὰ τὠυτὸ ᾿Ολυμπιὰς τούτοισι τοῖσι πρήγμασι συμ 
an 2 > / ‘ 7 “ , 
πεσοῦσα. οὐκ ὧν δοκέοντες κατὰ τάχος οὕτω διακριθή- 
“pe 3 ΄ A Ν 
σεσθαι τὸν Ev Θερμοπύλῃσι πόλεμον, ἔπεμπον TOUS προ- 
͵ . 
δρόμους. 
- \ ς e ᾿ / , e XN . 
Οὗτοι μὲν δὴ οὕτω dievevwvTo ποιήσειν" οἱ δὲ ἐν 
7 e/ 2 Ν / Fe a A aA τ A 
Θερμοπύλῃσι Ελληνες, ἐπειδὴ πέλας εγένετο τῆς εσβολῆς 
/ v4 2 ἐφ X 3 A 
ὁ Ilépans, καταρρωδέοντες ἐβουλεύοντο περὶ ἀπαλλαγῆς. 
ry / + / a7 ? A > 
τοῖσι μέν νυν ἄλλοισι Πελοποννησίοισι ἐδόκεε, ἐλθοῦσι ἐς 
7 Ν 3 Ν ” 3 A ͵ Ν 
Πελοπόννησον. τὸν ἴσθμον ἔχειν ἐν φυλακῇ " Δεωνίδης δε, 
7 Ν a / a , VA 
Φωκεων καὶ Aoxpov περισπερχεόντων TH γνωμῃ ταύτῃ, 
> fal / 5) / / > / 2 Ν 
αὑτοῦ τε μένειν ἐψηφίζετο, πέμπειν TE ἀγγέλους ES τας 
/ 7 / > / ¢ 3)» 2 a >] / 
πόλιας κελεύοντας σφι ἐπιβοηθεειν, ὡς ἐόντων αὐτῶν OI 
Ν Ν / 3 / 5 A 
γων στρατὸν τὸν ίηδων ἀλεξασθαι. 25. Ταῦτα Bovrevo- 
/ / 4 μ--ι ΄ WA ¢ / 5947 
μένων σφεων, ἔπεμπε Ἐερξης κατάσκοπον ὑππεα, ἰδεσθαι 
Cit / ? Nl τ / ΟῚ ’ὔ Ν + Ν ) 
ὁκόσοι TE εἰσι καὶ ὃ TL TOLEOLEV. ἤκηκοεε δε, ETL εὡν EV 
Θ Xe e oY / ᾿ ΄ x XE X \ 
εσσαλίῃ, WS NALTMEVN ELN ταύτῃ στρατιὴ ολίγη, καὶ TOUS 
td / ς ΕΒ 4 / Ν 7 4 
ἡγεμόνας ὡς εἴησαν Δακεδαιμόνιοι τε καὶ Δεωνίδης cov 
/ ¢ / ¢ \ / ee δ Ν \ 
γένος Ἡρακλείδης. ὡς δὲ προσήλασε ὁ ἵππεὺς πρὸς τὸ 
/ a / Ν 7 A Ν 3 x 
στρατόπεδον, ἐθηεῖτὸ τε καὶ KATWPAa πᾶν μεν οὐ TO στρα- 
/ Ν Ν y+ / a / Oe 
TOTEOOV * TOUS γὰρ ἔσω τεταγμένους τοῦ τείχεος, TO ἀνορ- 
’ 3 > A > er 5 / © ὩΣ 
θωσαντες εἶχον ev φυλακῇ, οὐκ οἷά τε ἣν κατιδεσθαι" ὁ δὲ 
Ν + “ / ω \ a / NK wach bls ad 
τοὺς εξω ἐμάνθανε, τοῖσι TPO TOU τείχεος τὰ ὅπλα EKEETO. 
¥ Ν A Ν / + / 
ἔτυχον δὲ τοῦτον Tov χρόνον “ακεδαιμόνιοι ἔξω τεταγμένοι. 
Ν Ν Ν e/ 4 4 a > A ἮΝ Ν Ν 
Tous μὲν δὴ ὥρα γυμναζομένους τῶν ἀνδρῶν, τοὺς δὲ τὰς 
/ / a » ἥ aay \ oy 
κόμας κτενιζομενους. ταῦτα δὴ θηεύμενος εθωυμαΐζε, Kal TO 
a seuus N \ , 2 , wer 
πλῆθος ἐμάνθανε. μαθὼν δὲ πάντα ἀτρεκέως, aTndavve 
> , aieme / BA , Ia/ 3 / Dele 
ὀπίσω KAT ἡσυχίην" οὔτε Yap TLS εδίωκε, ἀλογίης TE EKU= 
A 2 Ν Ν +. Ν. / / 
pnoe πολλῆς" ἀπελθὼν δὲ ἔλεγε πρὸς Ξερξεα τά περ 
Ε , , 2 ΄ Ὁ ΞΞΥ, > 3 
ὅπώπεε TuvTa, 326. ἀκούων δὲ Ξερξης οὐκ εἶχε συμβα- 





Ἂν 


VU, 210.] First Attack of the Medes. 145 


, aN Ψ , δαὶ ὧν , ἢ . 
λέσθαι τὸ cov, ὅτι TapacKevalowTo ὡς ἀπολεύμενοί τε Kal 
νυ / \ ΄ ) 5) _—- - ‘ > 
| πολεοντες κατὰ δύναμιν "αλλ, αὐτῷ γέλοία yup ἐφαίνοντο 
΄ ΄ , Ν >? / ᾽ 
ποίεειν, μετεπέμψατο Anuwupyntov τὸν Ἀρίστωνος. ἐόντα ἐν 
a / > , ͵ ee , e 
τῷ στρατοπέδῳ. ἀπικόμενον δέ μιν εἰρώτα Ξερξης ἕκαστα 
΄ χὰ ἃ n Ν i \ ὧν 
τούτων. ἐθέλων μαθεῖν τὸ ποιεύμενον πρὸς τῶν “ακεδαιμο- 
͵ c Ν 3 ἡ 7 Ν / 93 
viov. ὁ δὲ εἶπε: Hkovoas μὲν pev καὶ πρότερον, εἶτε 
- nr Cy ; δι Ν € / Ν ral > “ 4 
ὡρμῶμεν ἐπὶ τὴν Ελλαδα, περὶ τῶν ἀνδρῶν τούτων" 
᾽ν χ 4 ͵ " , a «“ ᾽ 
ἀκούσας δὲ γέλωτά pe εθευ λέγοντα τῇ περ ὥρων ἐκβη- 
, , a ᾽ \ Ν Ν 2 / 3 / 
σόμενα πρήγματα ταῦτα. ἐμοὶ yup THY ἀληθείην ἀσκέειν 
? 7] a 5 A 2 Ν ͵ / 2 ΝΜ Ν 
ἀντία σεῦ, ὦ βασιλεῦ, ἄγων μεγιστὸς ἐστι. ἄκουσον δὲ 
Ν a id A Φ ᾽ / / Φ᾽ "δ 
καὶ νῦν. 9. οἱ ἀνδρες οὗτοι ἀπίκαται μαχεσόμενοι ἡμῖν 
Ν a 3 / \ 6 ΄ / , 
περὶ τῆς ἐσόδου, καὶ ταῦτα παρασκευάζονται. νόμος yup 
“ » > / 2 \ / ΄ A a 
ot οὕτω ἔχων ἐστί" ἐπεὰν μέλλωσι κινδυνεύειν TH ψυχῇ. 
,ὔ ἣν Ν / ee A ‘ 5 ΄, 
τότε Tas κεφαλὰς κοσμέονται. ἐπίστασο δε, εἰ τούτους τε 
πες ce ἄρ να , / x SiN s ΟὟ 
καὶ TO ὑπομένον ἐν Σπάρτῃ καταστρέψεαι, ἔστι οὐδεν ἄλλο 
» 2 7 / a e / - > 
εθνος ἀνθρώπων τὸ σε, βασιλεῦ, ὑπομενέει χείρας ἀνταει- 
/ - Ν * S 2 / a ) 
ρόμενον" vuy yap προς βασιληΐην τε καλλίστην τῶν ἐν 
/ , \ + ae, , Ν 
Ἐλλησι προσῴφεέρεαι, καὶ ἄνδρας ἀρίστους. Κωρτα τε δὴ 
A —s > / Ν / 3 ἐν ΄ 
ἄπιστα Ξερξῃ ἐφαίνετο τὰ λεγόμενα εἰναι, καὶ δεύτερα 
2 ’ 7 ’, A ΜΝ a φ A 
ETELPWTA, ὅντινα τρόπον τοσοῦτοι ἐόντες TH ἑωυτοῦ στρα- 
tal 7 e Ν 3 3 A 2 Ν A 
Tin μαχέσονται. ὁ δε εἶπε" 2 βασιλεῦ, ἐμοὶ χρᾶσθαι 
« ae] ὃ Ν 7 “Δ XN a 7 4 9 Br a > νι 
os avopt ψεύστῃ, ἢν μὴ ταὐτά ToL ταύτῃ ἐκβῇ, TH εγὼ 
A a ? ΕΣ ἣν ἐπ ἢ 
Neyo. ταῦτα λέγων οὐκ ἔπειθε τὸν Ἐέρξεα. 
/ ‘x ἣΝ A e 7 >. / - JOM 
28. Τέσσερας pev δὴ παρεξῆκε ἡμέρας, ἐλπίζων αἰεί 
3 7 / X s > ? / 
σφεας «ποδρήσεσθαι. πέμπτῃ δε, ὡς οὐκ «παλλάσσοντο, 
> / « 3 / > / Ν > / / 
ἄλλα ot εφαίνοντο ἀναιδείη TE και αβουλίῃ διαχρεόμενοι 
4 A a4. 9 2 \ 7 Ν / 
μένειν, πέμπει er avtovs Μηδους te καὶ Κισσίους θυμω- 
Ν 2 aT, , + ἜΡ Ν 
Geis, ἐντειλώμενος σφεας ζωγρήσαντας ἄγειν ἐς ow τὴν 
ς aA « wae 23 / , 3 ἘΣ se e 
€wuTov. ws 6 ἐπέπεσον φερόμενοι es Tous E)Anvas οἱ 
A + / x a 3 Pe Ν 2 ? , 
Μῆδοι, ἐπίπτον πολλοί: ἄλλοι ὃ ἐπεσηϊσαν καὶ οὐκ ἀπη- 


, / A Dt aad , 
λαυνον, καίπερ μεγάλως προσπταίοντες. δῆλον ὃ εποίευν 


146 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Hinop, 


f Ν > 7 5. τα na. of Ν . 
παντὶ τεῷ καὶ οὐκ ἥκιστα αὐτῷ ee OTL πολλοι μὲν 
5 5 / ἣν yf 
ἄνθρωποι εἶεν, νος δὲ ἄνδρες. ἐγένετο δὲ 7 συμβολὴν 
δι ἡμέρης. 29. ἐπείτε δὲ οἱ ἀρὰ τς τρηχέως περιείπον- 
το, ἐνθαῦτα οὗτοι μὲν ὑπεξήϊσαν, οἱ δὲ Πέρσαι ἐκδεξά- 
See. : N > , Sees x as 
μενοι ἐπήϊσαν, τοὺς ἀθανάτους ἐκάλεε βασίλευς, τῶν ἦρχε 
Ν we / 3 / / c 
Ὑδάρνης, ws δὴ οὗτοί γε εὐπετέως κατεργασόμενοι. ὡς 
~ ; Ξ “ er , 2 gue 
δὲ καὶ οὗτοι συνέμισγον τοῖσι E)dnot, οὐδὲν πλέον εἐφε- 
aA A A A 2 Ν Ἂ > Ν ed Ἢ 
ροντο τῆς στρατιῆς τῆς Μηδικῆς, ἀλλὰ τὰ avta, ἅτε ἐν 
/ / 7 Ἂς ΄ , 
στεινοπόρῳ TE χώρῳ μαχόμενοι, καὶ Sovpact βραχυτέροισι 
/ Μ “οὖ N ? 4 4 ee / 
χρεόμενοι ἥπερ οἱ E)dAnves, καὶ οὐκ ἔχοντες πληθεὶ χρὴη- 
σασθαι. 
,ὔ Ν 3 , Ins , x 
Aaxedatmovioe δὲ ἐμάχοντο ἀξίως λογου, ἄλλα τε 
3 3 > > / , | , 
ἀποδεικνύμενοι EV οὐκ ἐπισταμένοισι μάχεσθαι ἐξεπιστα- 
ν of 3 7 \ rn ¢. / 4 A 
μένοι, καὶ ὅκως ἐντρέψειαν τὰ νῶτα, adEes φεύγεσκον δῆθεν " 
ς ΧΝ 7 fd / 7 “ Ἂς , 
ot δὲ βάρβαροι ὁρέοντες φεύγοντας Bon τε καὶ πατάγῳ 
3 ἌΝ ¢ 2 KN / ς 7 > / 
ernicav, οἱ & ἂν καταλαμβανόμενοι ὑπέστρεφον ἀντίοι 
5 a , ’ δ , 
εἶναι τοῖσι βαρβάροισι, μεταστρεφόμενοι δὲ κατεβαλλον 
ἌΜΑ. , a / yy \ N see 
πλήθει ἀναριθμήτους τῶν Περσεων" ἔπίπτον δὲ καὶ αὐτῶν 
a / 3 a > / > Ν Ν Ia > / 
τῶν Σπαρτιητέων ἐνθαῦτα ολίγοι ἐπεὶ δὲ οὐδὲν ἐδυνέατο 
a A > 7 ͵7ὔ >< ΝΕ 
παραλαβεῖν οἱ Πέρσαι τῆς ἐσόδου, πειρεόμενοι καὶ κατὰ 
/ s / r 2 / 3 / 
τελεα καὶ παντοίως προσβάλλοντες, ἀπήλαυνον οπίισω. 
Ἔ ΄ὔ mS. ὃ “ / Xe B 
Ba. Εν ταύυτησι τῇσι προσοδοισι THS μάχης λέγεται βασι- 
va Ν > a 3 A / / 
λέα Onedpevov τρὶς ἀναδραμεῖν ἐκ τοῦ θρόνου, δείσαντα 
A a 4 Ν / / a ν᾿ ΤΥ ΡΑ Ὁ 
περὶ τῇ στρατιῇ. τότε μὲν οὕτω ἠγωνίσαντο, τῇ ὃ ὕστε- 
/ Ins yf 7 e/ Ν 5 / 
pain ot βάρβαροι οὐδὲν apewov ἀεθλεον " ἅτε yap ολίγων 
.« 
elt i} / / Ν 2 
ἐόντων, ἐλπίσαντες σφεας κατατετρωματίσθαι τε καὶ οὐκ 
“ x » a ᾽ , , ἢ 
οἵους τε ἔσεσθαι ETL χεῖρας ανταείρασθαι, συνεβαλλον. οἱ 
> 8, * / Ε Ἂς Ν Μ 4 
δὲ “Ελληνες κατὰ τάξις τε καὶ κατὰ eOvea κεκοσμημένοι, 
- Sy > (PPE, ae, > / = 
ἤσαν, καὶ ἐν μέρεϊ ἕκαστοι ἐμάχοντο, πλὴν Φωκεων " οὗτοι 
ek) ‘ 5 a tie ΄ ἊΝ 2 4 ς Ν 
δὲ ἐς τὸ οὖρος ἐτάχθησαν φυλάξοντες τὴν ἀτραπὸν. ὡς δὲ 
οὐδὲν εὕρισκον ἀλλοιότερον οἱ Πέρσαι ἢ τῇ π in ἐντῦ- 
ὕρισκον ἀλλοιότερον οἱ Ilepcas ἢ τῇ προτεραίῃ eve: 





"VIL, 215.] Treachery of Ephialtes. 147 


| pov, ἀπήλαυνον. 82. ᾿Απορέοντος δὲ βασιλίος ὅ τι χρή- 
σηται τῷ’ παρεόντι πρήγματι, ᾿Επιάλτης ὁ Εὐρυδήμου 
ἀνὴρ Μηλιεὺς ἦλθέ οἱ ἐς λόγους, ὡς μέγα τι παρὰ βασι- 
λέος δοκέων οἴσεσθαι, ἔφρασέ τε τὴν ἀτραπὸν τὴν διὰ τοῦ 
οὔρεος φέρουσαν ἐς Θερμοπύλας, καὶ διέφθειρε τοὺς ταύτῃ 
ὑπομείναντας “Ελλήνων. ὕστερον δὲ δείσας Aaxedaipo- 
νίους ἔφυγε ἐς Θεσσαλίην, καί οἱ φυγόντι ὑπὸ τῶν Πυλα- 
σύρων, τῶν ᾿Αμφικτυόνων ἐς τὴν Πυλαίην συλλεγομένων, 
ἀργύριον ἐπεκηρύχθη. χρόνῳ δὲ ὕστερον, κατῆλθε γὰρ 
ἐς ᾿Αντικύρην, ἀπέθανε ὑπὸ ᾿Αθηνάδεω, ἀνδρὸς Τρηχινίου. 
ὁ δὲ ᾿Αθηνάδης οὗτος ἀπέκτεινε μὲν ᾿Επιάλτην 80 ἄλλην 
αἰτίην, τὴν ἐγὼ ἐν τοῖσι ὄπισθε λόγοισι σημανέω, ἐτιμήθη 
μέντοι ὑπὸ “ακεδαιμονίων οὐδὲν ἕσσον. ᾿Επιώλτης μὲν 
οὕτω ὕστερον τούτων ἀπέθανε. 88. Εστι δὲ ἕτερος λεγό- 
μενος λόγος, ὡς Ονήτης τε ὁ Φαναγόρεω ἀνὴρ Καρύστιος 
καὶ Κορυδαλὺς ᾿Αντικυρεύς εἰσι οἱ εἴπαντες πρὸς βασιλέα 
τούτους τοὺς λόγους, καὶ περιηγησάμενοι τὸ οὖρος τοῖσι 
Πέρσησι, οὐδαμῶς ἔμοιγε πιστός. τοῦτο μὲν γὰρ τῷδε 
χρὴ σταθμώσασθαι, ὅτι οἱ τῶν Ελλήνων Πυλαγόροι ἐπε- 
κήρυξαν οὐκ ἐπὶ ‘Ovary TE καὶ Κορυδαλῷ ἀργύριον, ἀλλ᾽ 
ἐπὶ ᾿Επιάχτῃ τῷ Τρηχινίῳ, πάντως κου τὸ ἀτρεκέστατον 
πυθόμενοι, τοῦτο δὲ φεύγοντα τὸν ᾿Επιώλτην ταύτην τὴν 
αἰτίην οἴδαμεν. εἰδείη μὲν γὰρ ἂν, καὶ ἐὼν μὴ Μηλιεὺς, 
ταύτην τὴν ἀτραπὸν ᾿Ονήτης, εἰ τῇ χώρη πολλὰ ὡμιληκὼς 
εἴη" ἀλλ᾽ ᾿Επιάλτης γάρ ἐστι ὁ περιηγησάμενος τὸ οὖρος 
κατὰ τὴν ἀτραπὸν, τοῦτον αἴτιον γράφω. 

84. Ξέρξης δὲ, ἐπεί οἱ ἤρεσε τὰ ὑπέσχετο ὁ ᾿Επιάλτης 
κατεργάσεσθαι, αὐτίκα περιχαρὴς γενόμενος ἔπεμπε Ὑδαρ- 
vea καὶ τῶν ἐστρατήγεε Ὑδάρνης. ὡρμέατο δὲ περὶ λύ- 
χνων ἀφὰς ἐκ τοῦ στρατοπέδου. τὴν δὲ ἀτραπὸν ταύτην 
ἐξεῦρον μὲν οἱ ἐπιχώριοι Μηλιέες, ἐξευρόντες δὲ Θεσσα- 





148 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Herop. 


2 nN 7 / f e 4 ’ 
λοῖσι κατηγήσαντο ἔπι Φωκεας τοτε ὅτε οἱ Pwxees, φραξαν- — 
νῷ \ Ὶ 3 , rn / » <4 
τες TELyel την ἐσβολὴν, ἦσαν ἐν σκεπῃ TOU πολέμου" EK δ 
a Sh ves ων Ν A ἊΣ 
τε τοσοῦδε κατεδεδεκτο εοῦσα οὐδὲν χρηστὴ Μηλιεῦσι. 
Υ \ δ rues . d x Ν ees aan 
35. Eyer δὲ ὧδε ἡ utpatros αὕτη" ἄρχεται μὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ 
9 δ a a Ν a ᾿ ΕΖ Μ PA 
Ἀσωποῦ ποταμοῦ Tov dia τῆς διασῴφαγος peovtos* οὔνομα 
\ a 7 oes ΄ Ν a 2 lal > Ν 7] 2 
δὲ τῷ οὐρεῖ τούτῳ καὶ τῇ ἀτραπῷ τωῦτὸ κέεται, Ανόπαια" 
/ Ae ΤΆ / df eh a Ψ 7ὔ ν 
τείνει δὲ ἡ AvoTata αὕτη κατὰ ῥαχιν τοῦ οὔρεος, λήγει δὲ 
7 9 Ἂς / , " rn an I 
kata τε ᾿ἄλπηνον πολιν, πρωτην εοὔσαν τῶν Δοκρίδων 
Ν an / SS ὃ , / / 
πρὸς τῶν Μηλιεων, καὶ kata ελαμπυγον τε καλεόμενον 
, ἈΝ Ν , ef A Ν Ν / ͵7 
λίθον καὶ κατὰ Κερκώπων ἕδρας, τῇ καὶ τὸ στεινοτατὸν 
3 \ ΄ \ X 3 x \ / 
ἐστι. 86. κατὰ ταύτην δὴ THY ἀτραπὸν καὶ οὕτω ἔχουσαν 
€ , N 3 N ͵ > / N 
ot Πέρσαι, tov ᾿Ασωπὸν διαβάντες, ἐπορεύοντο πᾶσαν τὴν 
/ ? n Ν Μ 7 \ 3 / ? 2 a 
νύκτα, ev δεξιῇ μεν ἔχοντες οὔρεα τὰ Οἰταίων, ἐν ἀριστερῇ 
Ν \ 7 > / Ν / ἣς δ ΟΝ > ff 
de ta Tpnywiwv: ἤως te δὴ διέφαινε, καὶ ἐγένοντο ἐπ᾿ 
3 7 an Sf \ Ν Aa A + " / 
ἀκρωτηρίῳ τοῦ οὔρεος. κατὰ SE τοῦτο TOU οὔρεος ἐφύλασ- 
Ν «ς Ἂς , , , / Λ e - 
σον, ὡς καὶ προτερὸν μοι δεδήλωται, Φωκεων χίλιοι ὁπλῖ- 
/ / Ν / , τς ,ὔ Ν 
ται, PUOMEVOL τε THY σφετερην χωρὴν καὶ φρουρέοντες τὴν 
3 7 ς Ν N , > ὌΡΗ , eae 
ἀτραπὸν. ἢ μὲν yap κάτω ἐσβολὴ ἐφυλάσσετο ὑπ᾽ ὧν 
” Ν ν '᾿ A By 3 Ν »] Ν 7 
εἰρηται, τὴν δὲ διὰ τοῦ οὔρεος ἀτραπὸν ἐθελονταὶ Paxces 
ς , / b) 4 / / 
ὑποδεξώμενοι Aewvidn εφύλασσον. 8. ἔμαθον δὲ σφεας 
Ἂς / Ὁ 2 / 2 / Ν 3 , 
ot Paxces ὧδε αναβεβηκότας " ἀναβαίνοντες γὰρ ἐλανθανον 
΄ / Ν 9 A oN nr 3 7] 3 Ἀ ‘ 
ot Περσαι τὸ οὖρος πᾶν cov δρυῶν ἐπίπλεον. ἦν μὲν δὴ 
/ / Χ / A Ὁ 2X 5 ΄ 
νηνεμίη. ψόφου δε γίνομενου πολλοῦ. ὡς οἶκος ἣν φύλλων 
¢ / \ a \ 3 7 Μ ¢€ / 
ὑποκεχυμένων ὑπὸ τοῖσι ποσὶ, ava TE ἔδραμον οἱ Φωκεες 
Ἀπ Tine! ν gk N ὅπ ἢ e , me 
καὶ ἐνεδυνον τὰ ὅπλα. καὶ αὐτίκα οἱ βάρβαροι παρῆσαν. 
« aS xy 3 7 e/ > / ata 
ὡς δὲ εἶδον avdpas avduopevous ὅπλα, ἐν θωυματιε ἐγένοντο " 
? / Ν Ias 7 2 / > 7 
ἐλπόμενοι yap οὐδὲν σφι φανήσεσθαι ἀντίξοον. ἐνεκύρησαν 
Aa 3 a ς 7 / Ν ε 
στρατῷ 88. ἐνθαῦτα Ὕδαρνης, καταρρωδῆσας μὴ οἱ 
/ y+ 7 “ / « 
Φωκεες ἕωσι Λακεδαιμόνιοι, εἴρετο τὸν Επιάλτην ὁποδα- 
Ν 54 ¢ τ , Nai / ’ N 
TOS €bn ὁ OTpaTOS. πυθόμενος δὲ ἀτρεκέως, διέτασσε TOUS 
, ς ? , « Χ / ς 3 ΄ ἰδ 
Πέρσας ὡς ἐς μάχην. οἱ δὲ Φωκέες, ὡς ἐβάλλοντο τοῖσι 


ry 





Vil, 2301 Some of the Greeks withdraw. 149 


4 σι / Ν “ » 4 
τοξεύμασι TOANOLGL TE καὶ πυκνοίσι. OLYOVTO φεύγοντες 
5 ‘\ A 5», ~~ , 3 ’, ΄ > ‘ 
ἐπὶ τοῦ οὐρεος τὸν κορυμβον, ἐπιστάμενοι ὡς ἐπὶ σφέας 

/ Ἃ Ν / e > / 
ὡρμήθησαν ἄρχην, καὶ παρεσκευάδατο ws ἀπολεόμενοι. 

: Ν Ν - »] 4 Ν . Ν > , 
οὗτοι μὲν δὴ ταῦτα edpoveov, ot Se ἀμφὶ Επιάλτεα καὶ 
ε ΄ ͵ , \ al , ᾽ a . 
Tdupvea Περσαι Φωκέων μὲν οὐδενα λόγον ἐποιεῦντο, οἱ 
\ / ἣν > Ν ΄, 
δὲ κατέβαινον τὸ οὖρος κατὰ τάχος. 
lal Ν 2 / 2 2 ¢ , - 
89. Τοῖσι δὲ ev Θερμοπύλῃσι εοῦὔσι ᾿ Ελλήνων πρῶτον 
Ν « , / νΆ Sa ἂν cs S2-6 49 Μ Ν 7 
μὲν ὁ μάντις Μεγιστίης, ἐσιδὼν ες τὰ ipa, eppace τὸν μελ- 
¥ “Ἁ Sei / Sec% \ Ν να 
λοντα ἔσεσθαι ἅμα jor σφι θάνατον. ere δὲ καὶ αὐτομο- 
« 2 Λ a , Ν 7 
λοι ἦσαν οἱ ἐξαγγείλαντες τῶν Ilepcewv τὴν περίοδον. 
Φ x Μ Ν 3 , / \ ς ¢ ‘ 
οὗτοι μὲν ETL νυκτὸς ἐσήμηναν, τρίτοι δὲ οἱ ἡμεροσκόποι 
/ De 3 al ΝΜ + / e / 
καταδραμόντες ἀπὸ τῶν ἄκρων, ἤδη διαφαινούσης ἡμερης. 
? a 3 ΄ ed / ? / ς 
ἐνθαῦτα ἐβουλεύοντο οἱ Ελληνες, καὶ σφεων εἐσχίζοντο αἱ 
= « ᾿ Ν δὲ “Ὁ ΑΝ ‘ 7 > a ΩΝ 7 
γνῶμαι" οἱ μὲν γὰρ οὐκ εων τὴν τάξιν εκλιπεῖν, οἱ δὲ ἀντε- 
XN \ A / e \ ? / 
τεῖνον. μετὰ de τοῦτο διακριθεντες, οἱ μὲν ἀπαλλάσσοντο 
% , Ν / cd 2 , c x 
καὶ διασκεδασθεντες κατὰ πόλις ἕκαστοι ἐτρώποντο, οἱ δὲ 
) rn 7 / / > A , / 
αὑτῶν ἅμα Λεωνίδῃ μένειν αὐτοῦ παρεσκευάδατο. 49. λε- 
\ ε SV pdr d / > 
yetas δὲ καὶ ws αὑτὸς odeas ἀπέπεμψε Λεωνίδης, μὴ 
3 ’ / > a \ Ν / r 
ἀπόλωνται κηδόμενος" αὐτῷ δὲ Kal Σπαρτιητέων τοῖσι 
A > y+ ᾽ / 3 - Ν / " Ν 
παρεοῦσι οὐκ ἔχειν εὐπρεπέως εκλιπεῖν THY ταξιν, ἐς τὴν 
3 7 > 7, 7 Ν a A , 
ἦλθον φυλάξοντες apynv. ταύτῃ καὶ μᾶλλον τῇ γνωμῃ 
, ae? ? , oo " \ / 
πλεῖστος εἰμι, Λεωνίδην, ἐπείτε αἰσθετο τους συμμάχους 
av > / Ν > > / / 
ἐόντας ἀπροθύμους, καὶ ove ἐθέλοντας συνδιακινδυνεύειν, 

7% / . 4 3 al ‘ > / 2 rn 
κελεῦσαί σφεας ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, αὐτῷ Se ἀπίεναι ov καλῶς 
4 f \ 2 cal at / ? / Ν e / 
ἔχειν. μένοντι δὲ αὐτοῦ κλέος μέγα ἐλείπετο, καὶ ἡ Σπαρ- 

? / 2 > / a, a ‘ ees 

τῆς εὐδαιμονίη οὐκ ἐξηλείφετος 48. ἐκέχρηστο yap vTo 

a / “-“ ’ / Ν a / 

τῆς Πυθίης τοῖσι Σπαρτιητησι χρεομένοισι περὶ Tov πολε- 
΄ ᾿ δ" Ν 3 , ry / 

μου τούτου αὐτέκα κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς ἐγειρομένου, ἢ Λακεδαίμονα 

tes , ΑΝ rn / Ἃ ‘ f 

ἀνάστατον γενέσθαι ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων, ἢ τὸν βασιλέα 

/ 3 “ / > 4 ς / 
σφέων ἀπολέσθαι. ταῦτα δὲ σφι ev ἔπεσι εξαμετροισι 


χρᾷ. ἔχοντα ὧδε: 


150 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Herop, : 


ε a hears 7 5 οὖ ᾽ , 

γμῖν δ᾽, ὦ Σπάρτης οἰκήτορες εὑρυχόροιο, 

ΟῚ ΄, " 2 Ν eS EEK / oh 

H μέγα ἄστυ ἐρικυδες ur ἀνδράσι Περσεἴδησι 
Πέρθεται, ἢ τὸ μὲν οὐκὶ, up Ἢρακλεος δὲ γενέθλης 
Πενθήσει βασιλῆ φθίμενον Λακεδαίμονος οὖρος. 

Οὐ γὰρ τὸν ταύρων σχήσει μένος οὐδὲ λεόντων δ 
᾿Αντιβίην- Ζηνὸς γὰρ ἔχει μένος" οὐδέ ἃ ἕ φημι 
Σχήσεσθαι, πρὶν τῶνδ᾽ ἕτερον διὰ πάντα δάσηται. 


a 7 ae ’ / Ν 7 
Ταῦτά τε δὴ ἐπιλεγόμενον Λεωνίδην, καὶ βουλόμενον κλέος 
7 ΄ / 3 / ‘ , 
καταθέσθαι μούνων Σπαρτιητέων, ἀποπέμψαι τους συμμάώ- 
a Ἃ , ὃ θ “ “ 2 / 7 
Nous, MaAAOV ἢ γνωμῃ ὀιενείχθεντας οὕτω UKOT UWS OLYE- 
Ἂς 3 / af ΄ Ν / 
σθαι τοὺς οἰχομένους. 42. μαρτύριον δέ μοι καὶ τόδε 
> 3. ΄, ie / / 2 \ a Χ 
οὐκ ἐλάχιστον τούτου πέρι γέγονε" οὐ Yap μουνον τοὺς 
ΕΣ ΡῚ Ν x Ν / A ef fr A 7 
ἄλλους, ἀλλὰ καὶ TOV LAVTLY OS ELTETO TH OTPATLYH ταυτῇ, 
/ Ἂς > A / 9 Ν τὶ ͵ὕ 
Μεγιστίην τὸν ᾿Ακαρνῆνα, λεγόμενον εἶναι τὰ ἀνέκαθεν 
23S / a Ν A 2 a Ca te Ν 4 
ἀπὸ Μελάμποδος, τοῦτον τὸν ELTTAaVTa EK τῶν ἱρῶν τὰ μὲλ- 
7 2 / , ) ji 2 / 
λοντά σφι ἐκβαίνειν, φανερὸς ἐστι Aewvidys ἀποπέμπων, 
7 Ν ΄ / e NS 2 / Ψ τὰς Ν 
ἵνα μὴ συναπόληταί σφι. ὁ δὲ ἀποπεμπόμενος αὑτὸς MEV 
2 3 / Ν Ν τοὶ / 77 e 
οὐκ ἀπελείπετο, TOV SE παῖδα TVOTPATEVOMEVOY, EOVTA Ob 
, ’ / ¢ / ΄ « ’ 
pouvoyevea, ἁπέπεμψε. 48. Οἱ μὲν νυν σύμμαχοι ot ἀπο- 
/ + / 3 / Speed / / 
πεμπόμενοι οἴχοντο TE aTrLovTES, καὶ ἐπείθοντο Λεωνίδῃ" 
4 Ν Ν al / rn Ἂς 
Θεσπιέες δὲ καὶ Θηβαῖοι κατέμειναν μοῦνοι Tapa Aaxedai- 
/ 4 ἢ r τς > LY ὦ y+ Ν > 
μονίοισι. τούτων δὲ Θηβαῖοι μὲν ἀέκοντες EmEevov, καὶ ov 
, - , EB / 
βουλομενοι ( KATELYE γὰρ σφεας “Λεωνίδης ev ομήρων λόγῳ 
΄ , Sr eh ὦν , ἃ ? x 
ποιεύμενος)" Θεσπιέες δὲ ExOVTES μάλιστα, CL οὐκ εφασαν 
> ,ὔ / Ν Ν 5) 2 A, a) , 
ἀπολιπόντες Λεωνίδην καὶ Tous μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἀπαλλάξεσθαι, 
3 Ἂς / / 2 / N 3 - 
ἀλλὰ καταμείναντες συναπέεθανον. ἐστρατήγεε δὲ αὐτῶν 
/ i 
Anuodiros Aradpopew. 
mf N 3 S Oe " Λ N 3 , 
44. Ἐερξης δὲ ἐπεὶ ἡλίου avatetAavTos σπονδὰς ETrotn- 
> Ν 7 Ρ] 3 A / “ 
σατο, ἐπισχὼν χρόνον ες ἀγορῆς κου μαλιστα πληθωρην, 
͵ > , ἈΝ Ν δὺο τ > ? / ed 
πρόσοδον ἐποιέετο" καὶ γὰρ ἐπέσταλτο εξ Επιάλτεω οὕτω. 


a2 . ao» ς / / 9 Ν 
ΟΑἼΤΟ γὰρ του ουρέος 1) κατάβασις συντομωτερη TE €OTL, Καί 





ΨΙΙ., 225] Death of the Three Hundred. 151 


7, e rn rrr yy e , 5 x Ν > , 
βραχύτερος 0 χωρος πολλὸν ἥπερ ἢ περίοδος TE καὶ ava- 
Ω Ν ΄, ς > Ν , ae 
βασις. οἱ τε δὴ βάρβαροι οἱ audi Ἐέρξεα προσήϊσαν " 
Ν δι. . Ν / “ « Ν πέος, ,ὔ 
καὶ οἱ ἀμφὶ Aewridnv “Ελληνες, ὡς τὴν ἐπὶ θανάτῳ ἔξοδον 
͵΄ » a A xX , ᾽ \ > fF ᾽ 
ποιεύμενοι, ἤδη πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἢ κατ᾽ ἀρχὰς ἐπεξήϊσαν ἐς 
Ἂς 2 7 lal > / Ν Ν Ν yy A 
TO εὐρύτερον τοῦ αὐχένος. TO μὲν γὰρ ἔρυμα τοῦ τείχεος 
’ , ς Ν "eee Ν / ΩΝ 2 ς / 
εφυλώσσετο, οἱ δὲ ava Tas προτέρας ἡμέρας ὑπεξιόντες ἐς 
᾿ / ane! , \ / ¥ a 
τὰ στεινόπορα ἐμάχοντο. ToTEe δὲ συμμίσγοντες ἔξω τῶν 
a Μ 7 ἜΑ Ν an / Μ 
στεινῶν, ἔἐπίπτον πληθεὶ πολλοὶ τῶν βαρβάρων" ὄπισθε 
Ν « ¢ / lal / Μ ‘ 2 / 
γὰρ ol ἡγεμόνες TOV τέλεων ἔχοντες μαστιγας ἐρράπιζον 
/ y ae us ‘ / >) 7 4 
πάντα ἄνδρα, αἰεὶ ες TO πρόσω ἐποτρύνοντες. 45. πολλοὶ 
Ν ΔΝ / 3 A 3 > / Ν / 
μὲν On ἐσέπιπτον αὐτῶν ἐς τὴν θάλασσαν Kat διεφθείροντο, 
A a we A ’ Ν ς > > / 3 
πολλῴ ὃ ETL πλεῦνες κατεπατέοντο ζωοὶ UT ἀλλήλων" ἦν 
Ν 7 2 \ A > / cd Ν > / 
δὲ λόγος οὐδεὶς TOU ἀπολλυμένους ἅτε γὰρ ἐπιστάμενοι 
x / / + / 3 na / ‘\ 
τὸν μελλοντὰ σφι ἔσεσθαι Oavatov ἐκ τῶν περιιόντων TO 
3 > , 4 7] > . , , Ν 
οὖρος, ἀπεδείκνυντο ῥώμης ὅσον εἶχον μέγιστον ἐς τοὺς 
,ὔ ͵ ͵ Oe π ΄, ͵ 
βαρβαρους, παραχρεόμενοί τε καὶ ἀτέοντες. δούρατα μέν 
fe / > an a 3 Υ͂ / 
νυν τοίσι πλέοσι αὑτῶν τηνικαῦτα ετύγχανε κατεηγότα 
Μ e Ν a / / \ ‘ ἈΝ 
ἤδη, οἱ de τοῖσι ξίφεσι διεργάζοντο τοὺς Πέρσας. 46. Καὶ 
/ > ΄ a , / SX / Μ 
Acwvidns τε ἐν τούτῳ τῷ πόνῳ πίπτει, ἀνὴρ γενόμενος ἄρι- 
xm ποῦ > 2 A ? N 7 a 
OTOS, καὶ ἕτεροι MET αὑτοῦ οὐνομαστοὶ Σπαρτιητέων, TOV 
> Ν « 3 a / ’ 2 ; Ν 3 
eyo ὡς ἀνδρῶν ἀξίων γενομένων ἐπυθόμην τὰ οὐνόματα" 
> / Ν \ / - / Ν ‘ Ν 
ἐπυθόμην δὲ καὶ ἁπάντων τῶν τριηκοσίων. καὶ δὴ καὶ 
/ / > A +” \ N ? 
Ilepcewy πίπτουσι ἐνθαῦτα ἄλλοι TE πολλοὶ καὶ οὐνομα- 
Ν 3 \ Ν Ν 7 / σ΄ / Ν 
στοι, ἐν δὲ dn καὶ Aapeiov δύο παῖδες, ᾿Αββροκόμης τε καὶ 
« / > ~ 7 / Ν 7 
TrepavOns, ex τῆς Aptavew θυγατρὸς Φραταγούνης yeyo- 
/ / eee, / / Ν A , 
votes Δαρείῳ. ὁ δὲ Αρτάνης Δαρείου μὲν τοῦ βασιλέος 
ππν..0 ‘ ε , \ = ἢ a ll 5 
ἣν ἀδελφεος, Ὕστασπεος δὲ τοῦ ᾿Αρσάμεος παῖς, ὃς καὶ 
> Ἃ Ν 7 , ‘ 3 ͵ὔ Ν ς - 
ἐκδιδοὺς τὴν θυγατέρα Δαρείῳ τὸν οἶκον πάντα τὸν ἑωυτοῦ 
ey ε ΄ Cp DOS ΄ / bot / , 
ἐπέδωκε, WS μούνου οἱ €ovans ταύτης TExvov. 47. Ἐερξεω 
" 7 7 πᾳ val / / ς Ν A 
τε δὴ δύο ἀδελφεοὶ ἐνθαῦτα πίπτουσι μαχόμενοι ὑπερ TOU 


a A Ν > 
νεκροῦ τοῦ Acwvidew: Περσέων τε καὶ Aaxedaipovioy ὠθι- 


152 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Herop, 


N ΤΑ, N 3 \ as δ a eo 
σμὸς EYEVETO πολλὸς, ἐς Ὁ τοῦτον TE ἀρετῇ οἱ Ελληνες 
€ / Sed es Χ 2 if 4 ΓΞ 
ὑπεξείρυσαν, καὶ ἐτρέψαντο TOUS ἐναντίους TETPAKLS. τοῦτο 
Ν 7 Ψ Ὁ ¢ XN ΟῚ / / ς 
δὲ συνεστήκεε μέχρι ov οἱ συν ᾿Επιαλτῃ παρεγένοντο. ὡς 
Ν 7 59.. ὦ ed ? a Ψ] ¢ 
δὲ τούτους ἥκειν ἐπύθοντο οἱ EXXnves, ἐνθεῦτεν ἤδη ἐτε- 
ἐν ν a y \ Ἂς Ά A ε aves 
ροιοῦτο τὸ νείκος. 48. ἐς TE Yap TO στεινὸν τῆς ὁδοῦ ave- 
be > / Ν ’ Ν a 2 , 
χώρεον ὀπίσω, καὶ παραμειψάμενοι TO τεῖχος, ελθοντες 
Ὁ“ > ΑΝ Ἂς ᾿, 4, ς / {δ + XN 
tCovTO ἐπὶ TOV KOAWVOV TraVvTES ἄλεες OL ἄλλοι πλὴν On- 
7 ς Ν a ΄ > ? a 9 4 Ὡ a e / 
Baiwv. ὁ δὲ κολωνὸς ἐστι EV TH ἐσοδῳ, ὅκου νῦν ὁ λίθινος 
/ J TS / ? ul / a ΄ ? 
λέων ἕστηκε ἐπὶ Aewvidyn. Ev τούτῳ σῴεας TH χώρῳ ἀλε- 
/ / rad 3 3 7 Μ A 
ξομένους μαχαίρῃσι, τοῖσι αὑτῶν ἐτύγχανον ETL περιεοῦσαι, 
Ν Ν \ / , Ἑ / , 
καὶ χερσὶ καὶ στόμασι, κατέχωσαν οἱ βάρβαροι βάλλοντες, 
id Ν 3 > / 3 / Ν \ Μ A / 
οἱ μεν ἐξ ἐναντίης ἐπισπόμενοι καὶ TO EPULA TOU τείχεος 
, ε Ν / / ,ὔ 
συγχώσαντες, οἱ δὲ περιελθόντες πάντοθεν περισταδον. 
7 Ν Ν / 7 , 
49. Λακεδαιμονίων δὲ καὶ Θεσπιέων τοιούτων γενομέ- 
A / ΕΣ Siren ͵ 7 
νων, ὅμως λέγεται ἄριστος ἀνὴρ γενέσθαι Σ΄ παρτιήτης 
7 X / Ν 3 cal ᾿, » \ s\ a) " 
Διηνέκης, τὸν τοδε φασὶ εὐπεῖν TO ἔπος πρὶν ἢ συμμῖξαι 
a , U U a / 
σφεας τοῖσι ἥηδοισι" πυθόμενον πρὸς τευ τῶν Τρηχινίων 
ε 3 Ἀ ε t 5) ’ κ ΤΥ Ν «. ΕΝ 
ὡς, ἔπεᾶν οἱ βαρβαροι ἀπιεωσι Ta τοξεύματα, τὸν ἥλιον ὑπὸ 
a / a Se a 3 7 Ἂν Re a 
TOU πλήθεος τῶν οἰστῶν ATOKPUTTOVGL,—TOTOUTO TL πλῆ- 
3 a “ Ν Ν 3 / 7 3 “ 2 
Gos αὐτῶν εἶναι" τὸν δὲ οὐκ ἐκπλαγέντα τούτοισι εὐπεῖν, EV 
2 / 7 ἈΝ a 7 a e , 
aroyin ποιεύμενον τὸ τῶν Μηδων πλῆθος, ws πάντα σφι 
9 Ν Ὁ / a 3 / chew | / a 
ἀγαθὰ ὁ Τρηχίνιος ξεῖνος ἀγγελλοι, εἰ ἀποκρυπτόντων TOV 
, Ν «. eo. a + N ΟῚ \ ς , ἣν 
Μήδων τὸν ἥλιον, ὑπὸ σκιῇ ἔσοιτο πρὸς αὕτους ἡ μαχῆ, καὶ 
> 3 (Sue Le a Ν Neo / y , 
οὐκ ἐν ἡλίῳ. 59. TAVTA μεν καὶ ἄλλα TOLOVTOTPOTA ETEA 
/ Ν / 4 / 
φασι Ainvecca τὸν Λακεδαιμόνιον λίπεσθαι μνημόσυνα. 
Ν Ν a " a / / / 
μετὰ δὲ τοῦτον ἀριστεῦσαι λέγονται AaKedaipovior δύο 
᾿] \ 3 / Ν / ? / a 
ἀδελφεοί, ᾿Αλῴφεὸς te καὶ Mapwv ᾿Ορσιφάντου παῖδες. 
/ Ν ᾽ / / a ΕΣ 3 "3 
Θεσπιέων Se εὐδοκίμεε μάλιστα τῷ οὔνομα nv Διθύραμβος 
ς / 
Apparidew. 
ω ; 3 a / A yx ἃς 
ὅ1. Θαφθεῖσι δὲ σφι αὐτοῦ ταύτῃ τῇ περ ἔπεσον, καὶ 
ἐ ε : 
a / 7, A SOREN / > / 
τοίσι πρότερον τελευτήσασι ἢ ὑπὸ Acewvidew ἀποπεμφθεν- 


“ 3 7 7 ΄, Δ 
Tas οίχεσθαι., ἐπιγέγραπται γράμματα λέγοντα τάδε" 





| 
| 





i. wy 
ὩΣ 


VIL, 229.] The Spartan Dead. 153 


, Ν “ , " / 
Mupiaciv ποτε τῇδε τριηκοσίαις ἐμάχοντο 
Ἵ ͵ / / 
Ex Πελοποννάσου χιλιάδες τετορες. 


A Ν Ν “ - 7 / a Ν 

Ταῦτα μὲν δὴ τοῖσι πᾶσι ἐπιγέγραπται, τοῖσι δὲ Σπαρ- 
ἊΨ / 

τιήτησι ἰδίῃ" 

9 al , A 

DQ ξεῖν, ἀγγέλλειν Aaxedarpoviors, ὅτι τῇδε 

a / 
Κείμεθα τοῖς κείνων ῥήμασι πειθόμενοι. 


7 Ν Ν A a Ν / / 
“ακεδαιμονίοισι μὲν δὴ τοῦτο, τῷ δὲ μάντι TOOE* 
A , “- / 7 A 
Moja τοδε κλεινοῖο Μεγιστία, ov ποτε Μηδοι 
- / 
Σπερχειὸν ποταμὸν κτεῖναν ἀμειψάμενοι. 


Mavtwos, ὃς τότε Κῆρας ἐπερχομένας σάφα εἰδὼς 
> Μ ἊΝ ς ͵ ω 
Οὐκ etry Σπώρτης ἡγεμόνας προλιπεῖν. 


2 , ig Ν x ἔξ, x ὃ ῦ “ 
ἐπιγράμμασι μὲν νυν καὶ στήλῃσι, ἔξω ἢ TO τοῦ μαντιος 
ΡΥ, , χὰ ΣΟ δὲ ς 9 ,ὕ 
ἐπίγραμμα, ᾿Αμφικτύονές εἰσὶ σφεας οἱ επικοσμήσαντες, 
Ν Ἂς a / / / e / / 
τὸ δὲ Tov μάντιος Meyiotiew Σιμωνίδης ὁ Aewrpemreds 
2 Ν th ¢ > / 
ἐστι Kata ξεινίην ὁ εἐπίγραψας. 
, Ν ΄ = / / ν ¥ / 
52. Δύο δὲ τούτων τῶν τριηκοσίων λέγεται EvpuTov Te 
Ν | ἠδ Ν 3 tal 3 / a λό 
καὶ Ἀριστόδημον, παρεὸν αὐτοῖσι ἀμφοτέροισι κοινῷ λογῳ 
/ eis A ¢ a9 / ¢e 
χρησαμένοισι ἢ ἀποσωθῆναι ὁμοῦ ες Σπάρτην (ws μεμετι- 
/ 3 ? a / b / Ἂν 
μένοι τε ἦσαν EK τοῦ στρατοπέδου ὑπὸ Λεωνίδεω, καὶ κατε- 
t bi ake rn > aA \ ov i 
Keato ev Αλπηνοῖσι οφθαλμιῶντες ἐς TO ἐσχατον), ἢ εἰ γε 
ee | 4 A 3 r od rc yy 
μὴ εβούλοντο νοστῆσαι, ἀποθανεῖν ἅμα τοῖσι ἄλλοισι. πα- 
ψ' / πο ἂν Υ 3 2 A e / 
peov σφι τουτων τα ἐτερα ποίεειν, οὐκ ἐθελῆσαι ὁμοφρονέειν" 
AX 7 ὃ 8, Es \ 06 ‘ a 
ada γνώμῃ διενείχθεντας, Kuputov μὲν πυθόμενον τὴν τῶν 
Tle / = ὃ 5 / / Ν “ Ν >? / 
ἐρσεων περίοδον, αἰτησαντὰ TE Ta ὅπλα καὶ ενδύντα, 
ov ϑὺν A Ν “ 2 XN / / 
ἄγειν AUTOV κελεύσαι TOV ELAWTA ES TOUS μαχομένους " ὅκως 
δὲ ἐς eS + ἣν i 3 / yy / “ 
€ αὐτὸν HYWye, TOV μεν ἀγαγόντα οἴχεσθαι φεύγοντα, τὸν 
Te. , ᾽ τ , A > ͵ \ 
δε ἐεσπεσόντα ἐς τὸν ὅμιλον διαφθαρῆναι " ᾿Αριστόδημον δὲ 
/ A :] / > “Ὁ 
λείιποψυχέοντα λειφθῆναι. 5S. εἰ μὲν νυν ἣν μοῦνον 
93 / 3 , > A 3 / xX Ν 
Apictodnwov ἀλγήσαντα ἀπονοστῆσαι ἐς Σπάρτην, ἢ καὶ 


e A ,ὔ ? / 5 Ν / / > Ν 
ὁμοῦ σφεων ἀμφοτέρων την κομιδὴν γενέσθαι; δοκέειν ἐμοί, 


184 The Pass of Thermopylae. [Henop. 


3 of 4 A τ / / Ν 
οὐκ ἂν σφι Σπαρτιήτας μῆνιν οὐδεμίαν προσθέσθαι " νυνὶ 
Ν Ἂς » lal 3 nA Ἂν “ Ν 3 A 2 
δὲ, τοῦ μὲν αὐτῶν ἀπολομένου, τοῦ δὲ τῆς μὲν αὐτῆς ἐχομέ- δ 
4 2 3 / Ν 3 , 3 / 
vou προφάσιος, οὐκ εθελήσαντος Se ἀποθνήσκειν, ἀναγκαίως 
“ a , Ἢ , € id “ 
σφι ἔχειν μηνῖσαι μεγώλως Αριστοδήμῳ. οἱ μὲν νυν οὕτω 
A / 3 ‘4 3 Υ͂ Ν Ν ͵7ὕ 
σωθῆναι λέγουσι ᾿Αριστόδημον ἐς Σπάρτην, καὶ διὰ πρό- 
7 ς av + , 3 A , 
φασιν τοιήνδε" οἱ δε ayyedov πεμφθέντα ἐκ τοῦ στρατοπε- 
8 93 Ν > a + B fr x , / 2 26 
ov, e£eov αὐτῷ καταλαβεῖν THY waynY γινομένην, οὐκ ἐθε- 
xX 6 c / 32 a ὃ a 7 θ Ν de 
ἤσαι, ἀλλ ὑπομείναντα ἐν TH ὁδῷ περιγενέσθαι, τὸν δὲ 
? A 2 ’ 3 Ν 7 3 fe 
συνάγγελον αὐτοῦ ἀπίκόμενον ἐς THY μάχην ἀποθανεῖν. 
2 δ ὩΣ / 3 7 
54. ἀπονοστήσας δὲ ἐς Aaxedatpova ὁ ᾿Αριστόδημος ὄνειδός 
3 « 9 / / Ν / / 7 ε 
τε εἶχε καὶ ἀτιμίην. πάσχων SE τοιάδε ἠτίμωτο" οὔτε οἱ 
A 2 Ν “ ’ o , y / 
πῦρ οὐδεὶς evave Σπαρτιητεων οὔτε διελέγετο, ὄνειδος TE 
, € / 3 / , 2 Cea: ἈΞ 3 
εἰχε O τρέσας Ἀριστόδημος KANEOMEVOS. AAN O μεν ἐν 
ue tal / 2 Λ A > 2 La f. (5 
τῇ ev ΠΠλαταιῃσι Hayy ἀνέλαβε πᾶσαν την ἐπενειχθεῖσαν οἱ 
ἽἾ Ν Ν᾿ + 3 / yx > 
αἰτίην. Δέγεται δὲ καὶ ἄλλον ἀποπεμῴφθεντα ἄγγελον ἐς 
A , 4 7 A +S 
Θεσσαλίην τῶν τριηκοσίων τούτων περιγενέσθαι, τῷ οὔνομα 
3 7 Ν A > ‘ ¢ } 
εἶναι Παντίτην " νοστήσαντα δε τοῦτον ἐς Σπαρτην, ws ἠτί- 
3 , 
μωτο, ἀπαγξασθαι. 
Ἂς A rf e if 3 7 
55. Οἱ δὲ Θηβαῖοι, τῶν ὁ Δεοντιάδης ἐστρατήγεε, 
Uy Ν ‘ a ς / Ey 4 ) ye ς 2 > 
Tews μὲν μετὰ τῶν ᾿Ελληνων EovTES ἐμάχοντο UT ἀναγ- 
/ Men ¢ Ν Ν / 7 td δὲ 25 
καίης ἐχόμενοι πρὸς τὴν βασίλεος στρατιὴν" ὡς δε εἶδον 
/ an ‘ / δὰ ’, “ 
κατυπέρτερα τῶν Περσέων γινόμενα τὰ πρήγματα, οὕτω 
ἘΝ A N o 3 4 ci eS Ν 
δὴ τῶν σὺν Λεωνίδῃ ᾿Ελλήνων ἐπευγομένων ἐπὶ τὸν κο- 
Ν 7 4 a Sf 4 XN 
λωνὸν, ἀποσχισθέντες τούτων, χεῖρας TE TPOETELVOY καὶ 
fa 5 fa / 4 Ν 2 ͵ὔ 
ἤσαν ἄσσον τῶν βαρβάρων, λέγοντες τὸν ἀληθέστατον 
κα ¢ Ν ν a Ν᾿ 3 ζ 
τῶν λόγων, ὡς καὶ μηδίζουσι καὶ γῆν τε καὶ ὕδωρ ἐν πρω- 
x Pe RGN δ 9 / ef 2 Θ 
TOLL ἔδοσαν τὸ ὑπὸ δὲ ἀρθηγκαι Ε ἘΜ ΒΜΕΙΝΣ ερμο- 
πύλας ἀπικοίατο, καὶ ἀναίτιοι εἶεν τοῦ τρώματος τοῦ γέεγο- 
νότος βασιλ εΐ. ὥστε ταῦτα λέγοντες περιεγίνοντο . εἶχον 
γὰρ καὶ Θεσσαλοὺς τῶν λόγων τούτων μάρτυρας. 56. οὐ 


΄ Ψ 7, Sink yf ec Ν 3 Ν “. ς 
HEVTOL τῶ YE TWAVTA εὐτύχησαν" ὡς Yap αυτους ἔλαβον οὐ 





VIL, 238.] After the Battle. 155 


7 3 7 \ / ws Ld / , 
βάρβαροι ἐλθόντας. Tous μὲν τινας καὶ ἀπέκτειναν προσιόν- 
\ \ = 5 ae , jon ἦ 57 
Tas, Tous δὲ πλεῦνας αὐτῶν, κελεύσαντος Ξέρξεω, ἔστιζον 
pie 3 7, > Ν a 7 
στίγματα βασιληΐα, ἀρξαμενοι atro τοῦ στρατηγοῦ Λεον- 
/ A Ν ω > / / / 
τιάδεω, τοῦ τὸν παΐίδα Ευρύμαχον χρόνῳ μετέπειτεν ἐφό- 
/ / > a 7 
νευσαν Πλαταιέες, στρατηγήσαντα ἀνδρῶν Θηβαίων τε- 
7 Ν / Ν ΝΜ Ἂς / 
τρακοσίων, καὶ σχόντα τὸ ἄστυ τὸ Πλαταιέων. 
c Ν ‘ Ν ΄ [2 J / 
57. Οἱ μὲν bn περὶ Θερμοπύλας ἔλληνες οὕτω ἠγωνί- 
» / Ν ΄ / , / > / 
σαντο" Ξέρξης δὲ καλέσας Δημάρητον εἰρωτα ἀρξάμενος 
? / ΄ ets eit 5 / / \ a 
ἐνθένδε" Δημάρητε, ἀνὴρ eis ἀγαθὸς. τεκμαίρομαι de τῇ 
3 / “ Ν 3 “ ? / «“ a , 
ἀληθείῃ" ὅσα yap εἶπας, ἅπαντα ἀπέβη οὕτω. νῦν de 
ν᾿ Ν / / 2 ¢ Ν / Α, 
μοι εἰπε, κόσοι τινές εἰσι οἱ λοιποὶ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, καὶ του- 
C2 δὰ a \ ΄ lf he! ς > 
των ὁκόσοι τοιοῦτοι TA πολέμια, ELTE καὶ ἅπαντες. ὁ ὃ 
> 3 a A Ν 7 - ͵ 
εἶπε: (2 βασιλεῦ. πλῆθος μεν πάντων τῶν Δακεδαιμονίων 
ἃς \ /. / Ν Ν > Λ “- >] 7 
πολλὸν, καὶ πόλιες πολλαί" τὸ δὲ εθέλεις ἐκμαθεῖν, εἰδή- 
yy > - / / / 3 rn > 
σεις. ἔστι ev τῇ Δακεδαίμονι Σπάρτη, πόλις ἀνδρῶν oKTa- 
7 7, 7, \ Ὁ 7, 3... ty Oe a n 
κισχίλίων μάλιστα KN, καὶ οὗτοι πάντες εἰσί ὁμοῖοι τοῖσι 
> l ΄, “ \ y 
ἐνθάδε μαχεσαμένοισι " οἱ ye μὲν ἄλλοι Aaxedaipovios 
΄ \ 16 εκ 3 NaN Pian \ n “ 
τούτοισι μὲν οὐκ ὁμοῖοι. ἀγαθοὶ δε. εἶπε πρὸς ταῦτα Ἐέρξης" 
7 4 7 » Pg an 3 A £ 
Anuapynre, τεῳ τρόπῳ ἀπονητότατα τῶν ἀνδρῶν τούτων 
> / yf 3 / ‘\ Ν yy 5 a Ν 
ἐπικρατήσομεν ; LO εξηγεο. av γὰρ ἔχεις αὐτῶν τὰς δι- 
/ an / - Ν / 
εξοδους τῶν βουλευμάτων, οἷα βασιλεὺς yevomevos. . . . . 
a y m— 7 1 ap Ν a a \ 
58. Ταῦτα εἴπας Ἐέρξης διεξηϊε διὰ τῶν νεκρῶν " καὶ Aew- 
ὃ >] Ν [72 ᾽ὔ΄ 5 Ν Ν 
νίδεω, UKNKOwWS OTL βασιλεύς τε ἣν καὶ στρατηγὸς Aaxe- 
/ Sek > 7 Ν Ν > a 
δαιμονίων, ἐκέλευσε αἀποταμοόντας THY κεφαλὴν ἀνασταυρῶ- 
A , - \ \ Ἂἵ / 7 
σαι. δῆλα μοι πολλοῖσι μὲν καὶ ἀλλοισι τεκμηρίοισι, εν 
δ; Ν "ὃ 2 ya 7 oA > ~ me / ΄ 
ε καὶ τῷδε οὐκ ἥκιστα γέγονε, OTL βασίλευς Ἐερξης παν- 
χ ͵ 2 a > r 7 J ? Ν 
por δὴ μάλιστα ἀνδρῶν εθυμωθη a Aewvidn* ov yap 
“ 3 Ν A 4 
ἂν κοτε ἐς TOV νεκρὸν ταῦτα παρενόμησε, ἐπεὶ τιμᾶν μά- 
! a ee > > , , ” 
λιστα νομίζουσι τῶν Eeyw οἶδα ἀνθρώπων Περσαι ἄνδρας 
> Ν \ / € Ν Ν a 2 7 ω > 
ayalous Ta πολέμια. οἱ μὲν δὴ ταῦτα ἐποίευν, τοῖσι ETE 


ὧν / 
TETAKTO TTOLEELV, 


156 The Fleet at Artemisium. [Herop. 


IV. ARTEMISIUM.—MARCH OF XERXES TO ATHENS. — 
SALAMIS.— RETREAT OF XERXES TO ASIA. 


ε κ 2 τῷ ἈΝ Ν ; 7 
1. Οἱ δὲ “Ελλήνων ἐς τὸν ναυτικὸν στρατὸν ταχθέντες 
5 o 9 a Ν / / τ ᾿ς Ν y 
ἦσαν οἵδε" ᾿Αθηναῖοι μὲν νέας παρεχόμενοι ETTA καὶ εἰκοσι 
Υς ¢ / F (fe δὲ 3 A x θ / Πλ / 
Kal €KATOV* ὑπὸ O€ ἀρετῆς TE καὶ προθυμιὴης LLraTALEES, 
A A ἌΡ Ὺ r 3 / 
ἄπειροι τῆς ναυτικῆς ἐόντες: συνεπλήρουν τοῖσι Αθηναίοισι 
\ ᾽ Ν , / 
τὰς νέας" Κορίνθιοι δὲ τεσσεράκοντα νέας παρείχοντο, 
\ oY» N , 3 7, yo 3 
Μεγαρέες δὲ εἴκοσι. καὶ Χαλκιδέες ἐπλήρουν εἰκοσι, AOn- 
/ ‘ 4 > A ᾿  ) / 
ναίων σφι παρεχόντων τὰς νέας " Διγινῆται δὲ οκτωκαί- 
7, \ is / x / 3 
dexa, Σικυώνιοι δὲ dvwdexa, Δακεδαιμονιοι δὲ δεκα, Επι- 
΄ ἈΝ Ν 2 / Na je SS ΄ Ν ’ 
δαύριοι δὲ ὀκτὼ, ρετριεες δὲ erta, Τροιζηνιοι δὲ πέντε, 
/ “4 i \ >A 7 / ns / 
Στυρέες δὲ δύο, καὶ Ketor δύο τε νεας καὶ πεντηκοντέρους 
A, Ν / (oes) ΄ 3 7ὔ 
δύο. Aoxpo δὲ σῴι οἱ Οπούντιοι ἐπεβοήθεον πεντηκον- 
/ “ ς / 5 \ 3 fe; ς 7 
τέρους ἔχοντες ETTA. B. ἦσαν μὲν ὧν οὗτοι OL στρατευο- 
Diets / 7 / \ ς Ν A 
μενοι ἐπ Ἀρτεμίσιον, etpntat δὲ μοὶ καὶ ὡς TO πλῆθος 
co A an / 3 Ν Ν A 
ἕκαστοι τῶν νεῶν παρείχοντο. ἀριθμὸς δὲ τῶν συλλεχθει- 
/ fa > 13 4 3 / a / 
σεων νεῶν ἐπ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον ἣν, παρεξ τῶν πεντηκοντέρων, 
{4 Ne, / ἊΝ / Ν SS Ν Ν 
μία καὶ ἑβδομήκοντα καὶ διηκόσιαι. τὸν δὲ στρατηγὸν τὸν 
> / / y+ / A 2 
τὸ μέγιστον κράτος ἔχοντα παρείχοντο Σπαρτιῆται, Evpv- 
νὴ Ν 2 / € x / , yA s\ 
βιάδεα tov Εὐρυκλείδεω. οἱ yap σύμμαχον οὐκ ἐεφασαν, ἢν 
at re "4 ¢ ‘ "4 3 / “ e / 
μὴ ὁ Λάκων ἡγεμονεύη, AOnvatoror ἕψεσθαι ηἡγεομενοίσι, 
> Ἂς 7 Ν / aS if > ,ὔ 
ἄλλα λύσειν TO μέλλον ἔσεσθαι στράτευμα. 8. EYEVETO 
. 743 ‘ ὔ κ x <a fi / 
γὰρ κατ ἀρχὰς λόγος, πρὶν ἢ καὶ ἐς Σικελίην πεμπειν 
δος 7 « ἃς Ν 3 / ἣν yy 3 
ἐπὶ συμμαχίην, ὡς τὸ ναυτικὸν Ἀθηναίοισι χρεῶν ELN επι- 
/ ΡῚ , \ a / 3 δ. 5 - 
τράπειν. ἀντιβαντων δὲ τῶν συμμάχων. εἶκον οἱ «Αθηναῖοι, 
/ / r Ν ¢ / \ if 2 
LEYA πεποίιημενον TEPLELVAL τὴν ἔλλαδα. καὶ YVOVTES, εἰ 
’ Ν A c / id ᾿] / gaat ὁ Ν 
στασιάσουσι περὶ τῆς ἡγεμονίης, ὡς ἀπολέεται ἡ Ελλας, 
᾿] 6a A / ὡς Μ / ς ’ 
ορθὰ νοεῦντες" στάσις yap ἐμφυλος πολέμου ὁμοῴφρονέον- 
΄ / , 3 “ 2 / 
TOS τοσούτῳ KAKLOV ἐστι, ὅσῳ πόλεμος εἰρήνης. ἐπιστά- 


53 5. ΄ς na b) > , 2 > 5 / 
μενον ὧϊ' AUTO τοῦτο, OVK aVYTETELVOV, αλλ εἰκον MEX pb 





Vul,5.)  Zhemistocles prevents a Retreat. 157 


“ / apa pe ε / ἕξ ‘ “ce , 
ὅσου κάρτα edcovTO αὐτῶν, ws duedeEav. ws γὰρ δὴ ὡσά- 
= ΄ Ν A 3 / / Ν > A ’ 
μενοι τὸν Ilepoea, περὶ τῆς ἐκείνου δὴ τὸν ἀγῶνα eETrol- 
al / Ν 7 ed reel 7 > / 
evvto, πρόφασιν τὴν Ilavoaview ὕβριν προϊσχόμενοι, ἀπεί- 
Ν ς / Ν ᾽ Ν a 
AovTo τὴν ἡγεμονίην τοὺς Aaxedayoviovs. ἀλλὰ ταῦτα 
\ lA , / 
μὲν ὕστερον ἐγένετο. 
, Ν (Ὁ e ἘΦ ΝΡ / € , 7 
4. Tote δε οὗτοι οἱ καὶ ew Αἀρτεμίσιον ᾿Ελληνων ἀπι- 
/ e 3 / \ / " Ν > 
κόμενοι. WS εἶδον Veas TE πολλᾶς καταχθείσας ἐς Tuas Ade- 
Ν N aT ef / ᾽ \ > = \ ᾿ 
τὰς, καὶ στρατιῆς ἅπαντα πλέα, ἐπεὶ αὐτοῖσι Tapa δοξαν 
Ν / an , 3 , xX c > Ν 
Ta πρήγματα τῶν βαρβαρων ἀπέβαινε ἢ ὡς avToL κατε- 
/ , Ν 3 4 > Ν A 
Soxeov, καταρρωδήσαντες δρησμὸν ἐβουλεύοντο ἀπὸ τοῦ 
3 7 Μ 2 Ν ς / / / ς 
Αρτεμισίου ἔσω ἐς τὴν “Ελλάδα. γνόντες δὲ σφεας οἱ 
? / A / 3 7 ? / 
Εὐβοέες ταῦτα βουλευομένους, ἐδέοντο Ευρυβιώδεω προσ- 
= / > / y >? A ? Ν , Ν ‘ 
pevat χρόνον Ολίγον, ἐστ ἂν aUTOL τέκνα TE καί TOUS 
2 7ὔ ς 7 ς Ν > yf ᾿ Ν 
οἰκέτας ὑπεκθέωνται. ὡς δὲ οὐκ ἔπειθον, μεταβαντες TOV 
/ »* / / 3 - a 
᾿Αθηναίων στρατηγὸν πείθουσι Θεμιστοκλέα ἐπὶ μισθῷ 
tf ’ 3 3 Φ / Ν ro 
τριήκοντα TANUAVTOLOL, ET ᾧ TE καταμείναντες TPO τῆς 
>? ͵7] 7 Ν 7] ΄ XN 
Εὐβοίης ποιήσονται τὴν ναυμαχίην. 5. ὁ δὲ Θεμιστο- 
7, ΠΡ 3 rc @ 7 > , ΄ 
κλέης Tous” EdAnvas ἐπισχεῖν ὧδε ποιέει" Εὐυρυβιαδῃ τού- 
a / a / , e >? 
TOV TOV χρημάτων μεταδιδοῖ πέντε τάλαντα, ὡς παρ 
6 A A / ς / ¢ e 2 7 3 a / 
ἑωυτοῦ δῆθεν διδούς. ὡς δὲ OL οὗτος ἀνεπέπειστο, ---- 4δει- 
Ν τὰν, ΄ 3 Ν al ω 
pavtos γὰρ ὁ Mxvtov, Κορινθιων στρατηγὸς, τῶν λοιπῶν 
yf -“ 7 Ἂ , J Ἂς a?) 
ἤσπαιρε μοῦνος, φάμενος aTroTAwaed Oat τε aTTO τοῦ Αρτε- 
7 Ν 2 ΄ N ‘ A 3 ε 
μισίου καὶ οὐ παραμενέειν, ----- πτρὸς dn τοῦτον εἶπε ὁ Θεμι- 
/ 3 / > 7 ¢ / 3 7 2 7 
στοκλέης ἐπομόσας" Ου σύ γε ἡμέας ἀπολείψεις, ἐπεὶ TOL 
πὴ , a 7, Χ Ν “ ε 7 , 
ἐγὼ μέζω δῶρα δωσω ἢ βασιλεὺς av τοι ὁ Μήδων πέμψειε 
3 7 *% , A , / > / Ν 
ἀπολίποόντι τοὺς συμμώχους. ταῦτα τε ἅμα ἠγόρευε. καὶ 
7 Buy x , δ Ἴ 7 , > / 
πέμπει ἐπὶ τὴν νέα τὴν Αδειμάντου τάλαντα ἀργυρίου 
7 @ / Ν 7 f >] / 
Tpia. οὗτοί τε δὴ πληγέντες δωροισι ἀναπεπεισμενσι 
=> Ν a 2 a }] , , , e Ce 
ἦσαν, καὶ τοῖσι Ευβοεῦσι exeyupioto* αὑτὸς τε ὁ (ἐμι- 
7, 5 hein eae, \ N ἊΨ > οὕ! 
στοκλεης ἐκέρδηνε, ἔλανθανε δὲ τὰ λοιπὰ ἔχων " αλλ, ἡπις- 
/ ε / ΄ κ , 9 ᾽ 
στέατο οἱ μεταλαβόντες τούτων τῶν χρημάτων, εκ Τῶν 


3 , >. rf 2S A , ΄ Ν , 
A@nvewv ἐλθεῖν ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ Ta χρήματα. 


158 The Fleet at Artenusiun. (Heron. 


7 Ἀ , ’ὔ 3 A > ,ὔ ἃς , 7 
6. Οὕτω δὴ κατέμειναν τε ἐν τῇ EvBoin καὶ evavpayn- 
Ν ζω ? / XN 3 ‘ > SS \ 
σαν. ἐγένετο δὲ ὧδε" ἐπείτε δὴ ἐς Tus AdeTas περὶ 
oh ΄ RW, ς , ͵ 
δείλην πρωΐην γινομένην ἀπίκατο ot βάρβαροι, πυθόμενοι 
\ \ / N See) / / / 
μὲν ETL καὶ πρότερον περὶ TO ἄρτεμισιον ναυλοχεεῖν νέας 
δ 7 , x ΚΕ τον; ; 5 
“Ελληνίδας ὀλίγας, τότε δὲ avto. ἰδόντες, πρόθυμοι ἦσαν 
3 ͵ yf e/ 2 , 2 ἊΝ Ν A 3 7 
ἐπιχειρέειν, EL κως ἕλοιεν αὐτάς. EK μὲν δὴ τῆς ἀντίης 
γ “ἤ , In? a 5 “ / IAs 
προσπλώειν οὔ κω σφι ἐδόκεε, τῶνδε ELVEKEV, μὴ κως LOoV= 
cod ΄ 2 Ν ε 4 ΄ 
τες οἱ ᾿Ελληνες προσπλωονταᾶς ἐς φυγην ορμήσειαν, pev- 
ἤ ? / t Ὁ ΤᾺΣ a ? ͵ 
γοντάς τε εὐφρόνη καταλάβοι" καὶ ἔμελλον δῆθεν ἐκφεύ- 
¥ \ Ν 7 a? / / 2 , 
ἕεσθαι, ἔδεε Oe unde πυρφόρον, τῷ ἐκείνων λόγῳ, ἐκφυγόντα 
͵΄ Ν a 3 ΄, 3 4 rn 
περιγενέσθαι. 7. πρὸς ταῦτα ὧν ταδε ἐμηχανέοντο" τῶν 
a / 2 / / “ Μ 
νεῶν πασέων ἀποκρίναντες διηκοσίας, περιέπεμπον ἐξω- 
/ e “Ὁ x 5 (A ¢ Ἂς ἴω / 
θεν Σκιάθου (ὡς av μὴ οφθέωσι ὑπὸ τῶν πολεμίων περι- 
/ yy , tA Χ x in 
πλώουσαι EvBouav) κατώ te Καφηρέα καὶ περὶ Γεραιστὸν 
3 Ν “ ef » / ¢ x 7 3 / 
es τὸν Εὐριπον, iva δὴ περιλάβοιεν, οἱ wev ταύτῃ ἀπικόμενοι 
Ν ΄ 5) a Ν 3 / / eas aA . 
καὶ φρώξαντες αὐτῶν τὴν ὀπίσω φέρουσαν ὁδὸν, σφεῖς δὲ 
3 / 2 3 / a , > 4 
ἐπισπόμενοι εἕ ἐναντίης. ταῦτα BovrAEvoapEVoOl, ἀπέπεμπον 
““ a Ν / 3 > > 3 / Μ 4 
τῶν νεῶν Tus ταχθείσας. AVTOL οὐκ EV VOW ἔχοντες ταύτης 
A e 7 a e/ 3 , IA 7 N 
τῆς ἡμέρης τοῖσι ᾿ Ελλησι ἐπιθήσεσθαι, οὐδὲ πρότερον ἢ 
Ν ve , + / > lal / 
To σύνθημα ode ἔμελλε φανήσεσθαι Tapa τῶν περιπλωον- 
€ e / ΄ Ν Ν / rn x 
TOV, ὡς ἡκόντων. ταῦτας μὲν δὴ περιέπεμπον, τῶν δε 
7 A 3 A 3 A 3 lal 3 / 
λοιπέων νεῶν ἐν τῇσι Δφετῆσι ἐποιεῦντο ἀριθμον. 
3 Ν 4 a , > A - 3 Ν 3 A 
8. Ev δε τούτῳ τῷ χρόνῳ. ἐν τῷ οὗτοι apLO pov εποιεῦν- 
« Φ [ c 
A a 3 x 3 a ,ι 7 / 
TO TOV νεῶν, ----ἣν γὰρ ἐν TO στρατοπέδῳ τούτῳ Σκυλλίης 
lal / a / 5 / y+ \ \ 2 A 
Σκιωναῖος, δύτης τῶν τότε ἀνθρώπων ἀριστος. ὃς καὶ ἐν TH 
/ A Ν Ν 7 / Ν Ν ay 
vaunyin Τῇ Kata τὸ ]]ἡλιον γενομένῃ πολλῶ μὲν ἔσωσε 
a ΄, a ΄ \ x Ν 3. Ὁ 
των χρηματων τοίσι ΠῈΕερσησι, πολλὰ δὲ καὶ αὑτὸς πε- 
I & ε / ? / Ἂ 3 ov x 
ρίεβαλετο, ----οὗτος ὁ Σ᾽ κυλλίης εν vom μεν εἶχε APA καὶ 
/ 3 Υ 3 Ν e/ 9 3 » ’ 
πρότερον αὐτομολήησειν ἐς τοὺς ἔλληνας, αλλ, οὐ yap 
ε / e 4 ed Ἂν 87 / Ἂς 3 θ A 
OL παρεσχε ὡς τότε. ὅτεῳ μὲν δὴ τρόπῳ TO ενθεῦτεν 
“ δ᾽... 3 \ @ 5) 4 3 3 ΄, 
ετύ ὠπίκετο ἐς τοὺς Ελληνας, οὐκ ἔχω εἶπαι ἀτρεκέως " 


VIL, 10. The Greeks attack. 159 


, \ 4 Ἢ , Ὧν 5 ? , , . 
θωυμάζω δὲ, εἰ τὰ λεγόμενά ἐστι ἀληθέα. λέγεται γὰρ, 
᾽ > 4 Ν 3 Ν , ᾽ / > 4, 
ὡς ἐξ ᾿Αφετέων δὺς ἐς τὴν θάλασσαν, ov πρότερον uve- 
Ν Ἃ He ee: ber ΄ / , 
axe πρὶν ἢ ἀπίκετο ἐπὶ τὸ Aptepstoror, σταδίους μά- 
/ 7 ? te / Ἃ “ / 
λιστώ κῃ τούτους ἐς ὀγδώκοντα δια τῆς θαλάσσης διεξελ- 
7, / 7, \ » , " 
θών. 9. λέγεται μέν νυν καὶ ἄλλα ψευδέσι ἰκελα περὶ 
ἃ Ν 7 Ν \ / 2 ͵ \ , 
τοῦ ἀνδρὸς τούτου, Ta δὲ μετεξέτερα ἀληθεα. περὶ μεντοι 
΄ ΄ > / ΄ 2 / or. 
τούτου γνώμη μοι ἀποδεδέχθω, πλοίῳ μιν ἀπικεσθαι επὶ 
5... 3 / ς Χ Df 3... ἢ Γ᾽ “ 
τὸ Αρτεμίσιον. ὡς δὲ ἀπίκετο, αὐτίκα ἐσήμηνε τοίσι 
a " / ε , Ν Ν 
στρατηγοῖσι τήν TE ναυηγίην ὡς γένοιτο, καὶ τὰς περίπεμ- 
/ a a ἣν Μ A Ν ? ΄ ς 
φθείσας τῶν νεῶν περὶ Εύβοιαν. τοῦτο δὲ ἀκούσαντες οἵ 
“ ,ὔ / ? ie 0. 7 - Ν 
ἔλληνες, λόγον σφίσι αὐὑτοισι ἐδίδοσαν. πολλῶν δε λε- 
/ ey Ἂν pF Bd 2 / 3 a / 7] 
χθέντων, ἐνίκα τὴν ἡμέρην ἐκείνην αὐτοῦ μείναντάς τε καὶ 
2 , / 7 / / / 
αὐλισθέντας, μετέπειτεν νύκτα μέσην παρέντας πορεύεσθαι 
: > A “- # lal r Ν 
καὶ ἀπαντᾶν τῇσι περιπλωούσῃσι τῶν νεῶν. 10. Mera 
5 a ¢ > / Cee Λ 5 / , 
δὲ τοῦτο, ὡς οὐδείς σφι ἐπέπλωε, δείλην οψίην γινομένην 
is arf 7 7 ΝᾺ ,ὔ ἥν τῷ \ 
τῆς ἡμέρης φυλάξαντες, avTOL ἐπανεπλωον ETL TOUS βαρ- 
΄, 2 7] 3 a / / A 
Bupovs, ἀπόπειραν αὐτῶν ποιήσασθαι βουλόμενοι τῆς TE 
΄ Ν - / δ᾽. ἢ / “ a 
μάχης καὶ Tov διεκπλόου. ὁρέοντες δὲ σφεας οἱ TE ἄλλοι 
a Cc —/ Ν € Ὁ «ἢ ΄ \ 
στρατιῶται οἱ Ἐερξεω Kal ol στρατηγοί ETITAWOVTAS νηυσὶ 
5 7 / , “ 7 5. ὦ Ν 4 XN 
oduynot, πάγχυ σφι MAVINV ἐπενείκαντες, ἀνῆγον καὶ αὐτοί 
Ν 7 3 / / > / e , & / , 
TAS VEAS, ἐλπίσαντες σφεας εὐπετεως αἱρήσειν, OLKOTA καρ- 
3 7 ᾿ , rn ε , yes > / 
Ta ἐλπίσαντες" Tas μὲν ye τῶν Ελληνων opEovTEs ολίγας 
/ Ν Se a χὰ. , pe 
νέας, Tas δὲ ἑωυτῶν πληθεῖ TE πολλαπλησίας καὶ ἄμεινον 
7 f nan 3 a ’ Ν > 
πλωούσας, καταφρονήσαντες ταῦτα, ἐκυκλοῦντο AUTOUS ες 
/ “ / mesa! 3 ” rn 7] 
μέσον. ὅσοι μέν νυν τῶν Iwvwv ἦσαν evvoot τοῖσι EX- 
eid / 3 7 , 2 - 
λησι, GEKOVTES τε ἐστρατεύοντο, συμφορὴν τε ἐποιεῦντο 
, Cif / 3 \ es ΄ 
μεγώλην, ὁρέοντες περιεχομένους AUTOUS, καὶ ἐπιστάμενοι, 
« A ν , OA 2 ν» ad 2 / ? “ 
ὡς οὐδεὶς αὐτῶν ἀπονοστήσει" οὕτω ἀσθενεα σφι εφαινετο 
3 Ν an ε ᾽ὔ , Ψ Ν Ν ΄ / 
εἶναι Ta τῶν Ελληνων πρηγματα. οσοισι δὲ καὶ ἡδομε- 
5 Ν / e/ ; a «“ 2 ἊΝ «“ 
VOLTL ἣν TO γινόμενον, ἀμίλλαν ἐποίευντο, OKWS αὐτὸς εἐκᾶ- 


στος πρῶτος νέα ᾿Αττικὴν ἑλὼν δῶρα παρὰ βασιλέος λάμ- 


160 ‘The Fleet αὐ Artenusium. [Henop. 


/ N Fo ain ἢ 3 κα 3: 
wera. ᾿Αθηναίων yap αὐτοῖσι λόγος ἣν πλεῖστος ἀνὰ τὰ 
/ 
OTpaTomreda. 
nr / € > 7 fr Ὁ 3 π 
Ba. Τοῖσι de” Ελλησι ὡς ἐσήμηνε, πρῶτα μεν ἀντίπρῳ- 
- <a / 32 Ν , \ 7 
pot τοῖσι βαρβάροισι γενόμενοι ἐς TO μέσον Tas πρύμνας 
΄ Ν / x By A 2 
συνήγαγον " δεύτερα δὲ σημήναντος, ἔργου εἴχοντο, ἐν 
Ἄς τ 2 / ‘ ‘ , 3 a : , 
ὀλίγῳ περ ἀπολαμῴφθεντες καὶ KATA στόμα. ἐνθαῦτα τριή- 
, 4 na ’ = ἈΝ ’ a 
κοντα νέας αἱρέουσι τῶν BapBupwv, καὶ tov Γόργου τοῦ 
/ / 3 Ν ’ὔ ἣν / 
Σαλαμινίων βασίλεος ἀδελῴφεον Piruova tov Χερσιος, Aoy0- 
7 ? a / Μ Ἄδα ἢ bas , 
μον ἐόντα ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ ἀνδρα. πρῶτὸς δὲ ᾿Ελλήνων 
/ a / @. ee 3 a / b) 
νέα τῶν πολεμίων εἷλε uvnp AOnvatos Λυκομήδης Δισ- 
7 Sse a x. - \ san a Ξ 
χραίου, καὶ τὸ ἀριστηΐον ἔλαβε οὗτος. τοὺς δ᾽ EV τῇ ναυ- 
/ / ¢ / ? / a ? An 
payin ταύτῃ ἐτεραλκέως ἀγωνιζομένους νυξ επελθοῦσα 
/ ς ‘\ ents pees ee) / cia 
διέλυσε. ob μὲν δὴ Ελληνες ἐπὶ TO Αρτεμίσιον ἀπε- 
«ον 7 2 acer N δ ca , 
πλωον, οἱ de βάρβαροι ἐς τὰς Adetas, πολλὸν Tapa δοξαν 
5 , 3 ΄ a (on τὶ / 7 
ἀγωνισώμενοι. εν ταύτῃ τῇ ναυμαχίῃ Αντίδωρος “ημνιος 
: = A ‘ PE / 27 ἢ / > 
μοῦνος τῶν συν βασιλεὶ Ελλήνων eovTwY αὐτομολέει ες 
Noo ν΄ ens n \ A So, > 
τους " Ελληνας, καὶ οἱ A@nvaior διὰ τοῦτο TO Epyov ἐδοσαν 
2 A a 2 ad ς Ν 3 / 2 / 
αὐτῷ χῶρον ev Σαλαμῖνι. 4. ᾿ς de εὐφρόνη ἐγεγόνεε, 
3 Ν - e/ / / > / x e/ y+ 
ἣν μὲν τῆς ὥρης μεσον θέρος, ἐγίνετο de ὕδωρ TE ἄπλετον 
\ 7 Ps ἈΝ N \ NC pa = 
διὰ πάσης τῆς νυκτὸς, Kal βρονταὶ oxAnpat avo τοῦ 11η- 
7 € X Ν Ἂς Ἂς 4 >) ’ 9 Ν 
λίου" οἱ δὲ νεκροὶ καὶ τὰ ναυήγια ἐξεῴφορεοντο ες Tus 
3 Ν \ / Ν / r a e , \ 
Agetus, Kal περί TE τὰς πρῴρας τῶν νεῶν εἴλεοντο, καὶ 
3 7 Ν XN a Ι «ε by “ 
ἐτάρασσον τοὺς ταρσοὺς τῶν κωπέων. οἱ δὲ στρατιῶται 
ς 7) ᾽ ΄ A ᾽ , 7 3 7 
οἱ ταύτῃ ἀκούοντες ταῦτα ες φόβον κατιστεατο, ἐλπίζοντες 
f ? / 3 ΟΣ pe gal) Ν Ν Ἃ \ 
πάγχυ ἀπολέεσθαι ες οἷα κακὰ ἧκον" πρὶν γὰρ ἢ Kat 
3 ra) f 5, A / Ν ral - A 
avaTvevoal oheas εκ TE τῆς ναυηγίης καὶ τοῦ χειμῶνος τοῦ 
᾿ ΄ \ f CATE 7 Ἂς 3 x 
γενομένου κατὰ Tindwov, ὑπέλαβε ναυμαχίη καρτερὴ, ἐκ δὲ 
A / + / we ed 3 δον ΩΣ 
τῆς ναυμαχίης ὄμβρος τε λαβρος, καὶ ῥεύματα ἰσχυρὰ ες 
/ ¢ / / / x 7 
θάλασσαν WPLNLEVA, Bpovrat τε σκληραί. HB. καὶ του- 
Χ ΄ \ 2 fF a Ν a eet 
TOLOL μὲν τοιαύτη νυξ εγίνετο" τοῖσι δὲ ταχθεῖσι αὐτῶν 


, 7 ¢ 3 a 2 κα Ν 4 
περίπλωειν Εὐυβοιαν ἡ αὐτὴ περ ἐοῦσα νυξ πολλὸν Hv ETE 








VIII, 16.] Wreck of the Persian Peet. 161 


> / 7 Ὡ > ‘ “. ’ὔ Ε / 
AYPLWTEPN, τοσούτῳ ὅσῳ ἐν πελαγεῖ φερομεένοισι EeTETITTE, 

Ν Ν Λ ? / + ς Ν Ν ΄ 
καὶ τὸ τέλος σφι ἐγένετο ἄχαρι" ὡς γὰρ δὴ πλώουσι αὐ- 

a ΄, \ N / ? / ae \ 
τοῖσι χειμών TE καὶ TO ὕδωρ ἐπεγίνετο ἐοῦσι κατὰ τὰ 

rf A ) ye / al 7 Ν > 5 
Κοῖλα τῆς Εὐβοίης, φερόμενοι τῷ πνεύματι, καὶ οὐκ εἰδό- 

ἴω 2 / ᾽ / Ν “ἊΝ / ᾿] / / 
Tes τῇ ἐφέροντο, ἐξέπιπτον πρὸς τὰς πέτρας. εποιέετὸ TE 
A : “Ἢ an a f ΝΥ 2 7 Ἄν. 6 cr Ν 
πᾶν ὑπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ, ὅκως ἂν εξισωθείη τῷ Ελληνικῷ τὸ 
Ν Ν a / yf © / Ν Ν 
Περσικὸν, μηδὲ πολλῷ πλέον εἰη. οὗτοι μὲν νυν περὶ τὰ 
> A A ? / / 
Κοῖλα τῆς Εὐβοίης διεφθείροντο. 
c XN 2 3 a / / 3 / 

4. Οἱ δὲ ev ᾿Αφετῇσι βάρβαροι, ws σφι ἀσμεένοισι 
eo ? 4 5 / 5° \ / / > 
ἡμερὴ ἐπέλαμψε, ἀτρέμας TE εἶχον τὰς νέας, καί ode aTeE- 

a ca] / δ / y+ 2 a / 
χρᾶτο κακῶς πρήσσουσι ἡσυχίην ἄγειν ἐν TH παρεόντι. 

fal en: A 3 ’ / lal Ν / 
τοῖσι δὲ ᾿Ελλησι ἐπεβωθεον νέες τρεῖς καὶ πεντήκοντα 
3 , @ 7 , Pee, > , ι 
Αττικαί. αὕὑταί te dn σῴφεας ἐπέρρωσαν aTriKopeEval, καὶ 
7 > / 2 A ¢ an 7 ¢ , 
ἅμα ayyeden ελθοῦσα ws τῶν βαρβάρων οἱ περίπλωοντες 
Ν “ ΄ yf ͵ eas a / 
τὴν Εὐβοιαν πάντες εἴησαν διεφθαρμένοι ὑπο τοῦ γενομε- 

ral / Ν Ν > Ν ce / 
vou χειμῶνος. huragavtes δὴ THY αὐτὴν ὡρην, TAWOVTES 
be \ / 7 * / ΄ 
ἐπέπεσον νηυσὶ Κιλίσσησι, ταύτας δε διαφθείραντες, ὡς 
; , Day W ΨΥ, Sips 5. ἧς er / 
evppovn ἐγένετο, ἀπέπλωον ὀπίσω ἐπὶ TO Δρτεμισιον. 
ie Vesa ay ἢ , ε χ 
15. Τριτῃ δὲ ἡμερῃ, δεινὸν Te ποιησάμενοι οἱ στρατηγοὶ 
a ΄ ͵ Dy AY, / \ Ν 
τῶν βαρβαρων νέας οὕτω σφι ὀλίγας Χυμαίνεσθαι, καὶ τὸ 
αὐτὸν ger t7 7 > 3.4 ὦ yA \ “ 
ato Ἐξέρξεω δειμαίνοντες, οὐκ ἀνέμειναν ett τοὺς Ελληνᾶς 
+ 3 Ν Ὁ ΄ Ν / ΡΥ. 
μωχῆς ἄρξαι, ἀλλα παρακελευσάμενοι κατὰ μέσον ἡμέρης 
ἊΨ γος / >. f a 2 “ ¢ rs 
avnyov Tas νέας. συνέπιπτε δὲ WATE τῇσι αὐτῇσι ἡμέρησι 
᾿ / / if Ν Ν / Ν 
τὰς ναυμαχίας «γίνεσθαι ταύτας, καὶ Tas πεζομαχίας τὰς 
3 9 Ν A ς > δὰ al ἊΝ / 
ev Θερμοπύλῃσι. ἦν δὲ πᾶς ὁ ἀγὼν τοῖσι Kata θάλασσαν 

\ A Dah , rn ᾽ \ ͵ Ν > 

περὶ τοῦ Ἐυρίπου, ὥσπερ τοῖσι ἀμφὶ Aewvidea την ἐσβο- 

x ΄ ς ἈΝ Ν / “ὔ Ν , 

Anv φυλάσσειν. οἱ μὲν On παρεκελεύοντο ὅκως μὴ παρη- 

3 x ξ 4 \ / e 5 7 ἂς 

σουσι ἐς τὴν ᾿Ελλάδα Tous βαρβάρους, οἱ δ᾽ ὅκως τὸ Ελ- 
bs / / A , , 

ληνικὸν στράτευμα διαφθείραντες τοῦ πόρου κρατησουσι. 
ε Ν , e ΄ 3. «οὐ ε. 

16. ὡς δὲ ταξάμενοι οἱ Ἐερξεω ἐπέπλωον, οἱ ᾿ ἔλληνες 

᾽ 7, 5 Ν a) / éiuas / 

ἀτρέμας εἶχον πρὸς τῷ Aptemioiw. οἱ de βαρβαροι μη- 


102 The Fleet at Artemisium. [Herop. 


A , a Cal 2 “Ὁ ς , 
VOELOES ποιήσαντες τῶν νεῶν, ἐκυκλεῦντο ὡς περιλάβοιεν 
) ΄ 2 a CO 2 / / XN / 
αὐτούς. ἐνθεῦτεν ot Ελληνες ἐπανέπλωον TE καὶ au: ἐ- 
> 4 a / fy 3 , 
μισγον. εν ταὐυτῃ τῇ ναυμαχίῃ παραπλησίιοι ἀνληλοισι 
3 / ς Ν me " \ Ὧι Ν , / Ν 
ἐγένοντο. ὁ γὰρ Ἐέρξεω στρατὸς ὑπὸ μεγαθεὸς τε καὶ 
id δ τῆς ¢ ς a mM / a 
πλήθεος αὐτὸς ὑπ᾽ ἑωυτοῦ ἐπίπτε, ταρασσομένων TE τῶν 
a Ν id Ν 2 , “ ΄ 
νεῶν καὶ περιπιπτουσέων περὺ ἀλλήλας" ὅμως μέντοι 
2 5 Ἂς > > Ν Ν A Ρ] -“ - Ν 
ἀντεῖχε καὶ οὐκ εἶκε" δεινὸν γὰρ χρῆμα ἐποιεῦντο ὑπὸ 
fol 5 / 3 ᾿ς 7 Ν Ν Ν “ 
νεῶν ὀλίγων ἐς φυγὴν τράπεσθαι. πολλαὶ μὲν δὴ τῶν 
ε ΄ὔ / 7 N Seay, A > 
Ελλήνων νέες διεφθείροντο, πολλοὶ δὲ avdpes, πολλῷ ὃ 
Μ rn 7 a 7 Ἂς 4 « Xx 
€TL πλεῦνες νέες Te τῶν BapBupwy καὶ avdpes. οὕτω δὲ 
2 / 7 Ν Ge 
ἀγωνιζόμενοι διέστησαν χωρὶς ἐκάώτεροι. 
A Ν e 2 an ,ὔ Ἂς 
17. Παρὴν δὲ ὁ ἐκ Τρηχῖνος κατάσκοπος" ---- ἣν μὲν 
Ν Clete ἡ / "4 7 / > Ν 
yap er Αρτεμισίῳ κατάσκοπος ΠΠολύας, γένος Αντικυρεὺς, 
a / Ν 5 - A e a ΕῚ 
τῷ προσετέτακτο. καὶ εἶχε πλοῖον κατῆρες ετοΐμον, EL πα- 
/ e Ν Ἂς / “Ὁ ) ΄ὔ 
λήσειε ὁ ναυτικὸς TTPATOS, σημαίνειν τοισι ἐν Θερμοπύ- 
Sa A δ / 5 ? ἢ ε ἢ 2 
Ange ἐοῦσι" ὡς δ αὕτως ἣν Αβρωνιχος ὁ Λυσικλέος Αθη- 
cr Ν s / « (ete r 3... 835 ὦ ,ὔ 2 un 
vaios καὶ Tapa Λεωνίδῃ ἑτοῖμος τοῖσι ew Αρτεμισίῳ ἐοῦσι 
3 L / “ 7 7 Ν 
ἀγγέλλειν τριηκοντέρῳ, ἣν TL καταλαμβάνῃ VEWTEPOV TOV 
ἢ @ RCE: / ἢ / , ΕΞ 
πεζον " ----- οὗτος ὧν 0 ASpwviyos ἀπικόμενος σφι ἐσήμαινε 
Ν / Ν / Ν Ἃ Ν 2 a € Ν 
Ta γεγονότα περὶ Aewvidea καὶ τὸν στρατὸν αὑτοῦ. οἱ δε 
« 3 4 a > / 3 3 A 2 a Ἂς 9 
ὡς ἐπύθοντο ταῦτα, οὐκετι ἐς ἀναβολὰς ἐποιεῦντο τὴν απο- 
, 3 / Ν ς cd > / = / 
χωρησίν, ἐκομίζοντο δὲ ws ἕκαστοθ ετάχθησαν, Κορίνθιοι 
κα / SA rn 3 / \ 7 \ 
πρῶτοι, ὕστατοι δε ᾿Αθηναῖοι. 18. Αθηναίων δὲ νέας τὰς 
A ΄ 3 / / 3 4 
ἄριστα πλωούσας επιλεξαμενος Θεμιστοκλέης επορεύετο 
a \ / « 3 / 3 nr / / 
περὶ τὰ πότιμα ὕδατα, ἐντάμνων ἐν τοῖσι λίθοισι γρώμ- 
ατα τὸ Ἴ > Oe e ¢ ΄ eed we Ἂς 
ματα, τὰ ᾿ἴωνες ἐπέλθοντες τῇ ὑστεραίῃ ἡμέρῃ ἐπὶ τὸ 
7A / 3 , Ν Ἀ 7, ΄ +. 
ρτεμίσιον ἐπελέξαντο. τὰ δὲ γράμματα τάδε ἐλεγε" 
> ὃ Υ ? ΄ ’ Dimes x / / 
Avdpes Iwves, ov ποιέετε δίκαια ἐπὶ τοὺς πατέρας σρατευό- 
N \ ε ΄ 7 > \ , 
μενοι καὶ τὴν Ελλαδα καταδουλούμενοι. αλλὰ μαλιστα 
ἊΝ Ν ¢ / / 5 Ν ¢ lal 3 A Ἂς Ν 
μεν πρὸς ἡμέων γίνεσθε" εἰ δὲ ὑμῖν ἐστι τοῦτο μὴ δυνατὸν 


A ¢ a Ἂν » Ν A Ρ] A 7 εν 0 vA 
ποιῆσαι, ὑμεῖς δὲ ETL καὶ νῦν ἐκ τοῦ μέσου nuw ἕζεσθε, 








VIIL, 34.] - Incursion into Phocis. 163 


Ν 2 Ν Ν a r a / Ν δι Ἢ δ» , 
Kat αὐτοὶ, καὶ τῶν Καρῶν δεεσθε τὰ αὐτὰ ὑμῖν ποίέξειν " 
2 Ν , Ay ἐ 3 - ἀν RES ate / 
εἰ δὲ μηδέτερον τουτων οἷον τε γίνεσθαι, αλλ UT ἀναγκαίης 
/ / xX «“ ᾽ / ¢ r \ ᾿ A 
μέζονος κατέζευχθε ἢ wate ἀπίστασθαι, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἐν τῷ 
ΕΣ ᾽ Ν / 2 / / “ 
ἔργῳ, ἐπεὰν συμμίσγωμεν, εθελοκακέετε, μεμνημένοι ὅτι 

’, f Ne ee ? a IRS. ¢ Ν \ 
ἀπ᾽ ἡμέων γεγόνατε, καὶ ὅτε ἀρχῆθεν ἡ ἔἐχθρη πρὸς τὸν 
/ noe, Oe f Cook / , pe 
βάρβαρον ur ὑμέων ἡμῖν γέγονε. Θεμιστοκλέης δε ταῦτα 

Μ / 3 Ν 2 3 ? / , “ “Δ , 
ἔγραψε, δοκέειν ewor, ἐπ ἀμῴφοτερα νοέων, wa ἢ λαθοντα 
Ν / / y+ , ΄σ Ν / 
τὰ γράμματα βασιλέα Ιωνας ποιήσῃ μεταβαλεῖν και γενε- 
Ν ε A so / 5) A \ A Ν 
σθαι πρὸς ἑωυτῶν, ἢ ἐπείτε ἀνενειχθῇ καὶ διαβληθῃ πρὸς 
t > / , \ 5) A Ν - / 
Ξερξεα, ἀπίστους ποιήσῃ τοὺς Lwvas καὶ τῶν ναυμαχίέων 
> \ hay, 
αὑτοὺς «ποσχῃ. ... 
3 Ν \ A / 3 ‘ / Wr 8 
19. “Ex μὲν δὴ τῆς Τρηχινίης es τὴν Δωρίδα ἐσεβαλον 
ε , ~ ἈΝ 7 7 Ν “ 
[οἱ βάρβαροι]. τῆς γὰρ Δωρίδος χώρης Todewv. στεινὸς 
/ / ¢ , / , / a 
ταύτῃ κατατείνει, WS τριήκοντα σταδίων μαλιστά KN εὖρος, 
/ δ a / ‘ A / , 
κείμενος μεταξυ τῆς τε ηλιδος καὶ τῆς Φωκίδος ywpys, 
«“ 3 ᾿ς be: ,ὕ e Ν , e/ > Ν , 
ἢ περ ἦν τὸ παλαιὸν Apvotis* ἡ δὲ χωρη αὕτη ἐστὶ μητρό- 
7 a > 7ὔ ΄ 3 Ν 
πολις Δωριέων τῶν ἐν [Π]ελοποννήσῳ. ταύτην ὧν τὴν 
7 A 2 ᾽ / 3 / ¢ , 3 , 
Δωρίδα γῆν οὐκ ecivavto ἐσβαλόντες οἱ βάρβαροι" ἐμήδι- 
/ Ν Ἁ 2 2 / Tal ¢ Ν 3 A 
Cov Te yap καὶ οὐκ ἐδόκεε Θεσσαλοῖσι. 20. ‘Ds δὲ ἐκ τῆς 
/ 2 Ἂν / ΣΝ ? \ Ν \ / 
Δωρίδος es τὴν Φωκίδα ἐσεβαλον, αὐτοὺς μὲν τοὺς Φωκεας 
? Cs ¢e Ν Ν A / > Ν Μ A 
οὐκ αἱρεουσι" ol μὲν yap τῶν Φωκεων ἐς Ta ἄκρα TOU 
Cs le Rs Ν ΝΆ / / / 
Παρνησσοῦ ἀνέβησαν (ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἐπιτηδέη δέξασθαι ὅμιλον 
A Fi 36 Ν Ν ’ / , aes 
τοῦ Ilapynooov ἡ κορυφη. κατα Newva πολιν κειμενὴ ἐπ᾽ 
γ΄ A / » > A > Ν Ν 3 7 Ν 
ewuTns* Τιθορεα οὐνομα αὑτῇ, ἐς τὴν δὴ ανηνείκαντο καὶ 
> ‘ 5. ἃ e Ν A Ia ᾽ \ > / 
auTOL ἀνεβησαν)ὴ" οἱ δὲ πλεῦνες αὐτῶν ἐς τοὺς Oforas 
‘ 7 / Ψ 4 7 Ν ς Ν A 
Aoxpovs e€exopicarto, ἐς ἄμφισσαν πόλιν τὴν ὑπερ τοῦ 
/ ? > ? δ Ν ε Ν ’ 
Κρισαίου πεδίου οικεομένην. οἱ δὲ βαρβαροι τὴν χωρὴν 
A PAS ‘ > \ Ν e/ Ss 
πᾶσαν ἐπέδραμον την Φωκιδα" Θεσσαλοὶ yap οὕτω ἦγον 
Ν / ‘ > / f ? / Ν 
τὸν στρατὸν" ὁκόσα δὲ ἐπέσγον, πάντα επεφλεγον καὶ 
ΝΜ > Ν 4. 3 A Ν ’ ‘ «ε / 
ἔκειρον, καὶ ες τὰς TONS ἐνιεντες πῦρ καὶ ἐς Ta Lpa. 
/ x / td 7 ᾽ 7 
21. Παραποταμίους δὲ παραμειβόμενοι οἱ βάρβαοοι ame 


164 Advance of Xerxes. [Henrop, | 


s / > A ee , e 
kovto ἐς Πανοπέας. ἐνθεῦτεν δὲ ἤδη διακρινομένη ἢ oTpa- 


᾿ Ar ls > ͵ ἈΝ ἣν a ‘ 7 
τίη αὑτῶν ἐσχίζετο. τὸ μὲν πλείστον καὶ δυνατώτατον 


A we ie > aA bel ΄ 2 DAE Ὁ , Ἷ 
του στρατου αμα avT@ Ξερξη πορευομένον €7T AOnvas 


ἐσέβαλε ἐς Βοιωτοὺς, és γῆν τὴν ᾿Ορχομενίων. Βοιω- 
τῶν δὲ πᾶν τὸ πλῆθος ἐμήδιξε, τὰς δὲ πόλις αὐτῶν ἄνδρες 
Μακεδόνες διατεταγμένοι ἔσωζον, ὑπὸ Αλεξάνδρου ἀπο- 
πεμῴθεντες. ἔσωζον δὲ τῇδε, βουλόμενοι δῆλον ποιέειν 
Ξέρξη ὅτι τὰ Μήδων Βοιωτοὶ φρονέοιεν. 22. Οὗτοι μὲν 
δὴ τῶν βαρβάρων ταύτῃ ἐτράποντο, ἄλλοι δὲ αὐτῶν ἡγε- 

/ y ¢ / Mie IN Ν ern Ν 3 r ? 
μόνας ἔχοντες ὠρμέατο ETL TO ἱρὸν TO Ev Ζελφοίσι, εν 
δεξιῇ τὸν Παρνησσὸν amépyovtes. ὅσα δὲ καὶ οὗτοι ἐπέ- 
σχον τῆς Φωκίδος, πάντα ἐσιναμώρεον . καὶ γὰρ τῶν Πανο- 


/ ν / Se ‘ / \ ’ / 
πέων τὴν πόλιν ἐνέπρησαν καὶ ΖΔαυλίων καὶ Αιολιδεων. 


’ / ‘ va 3 , A 7 A 
ἐπορεύοντο δὲ ταύτῃ ἀποσχίσθεντες τῆς ἄλλης στρατιῆς. 


lal “ 7 4 "-ο ΔΊΑ, Ν 3 r 
τῶνδε εἵνεκεν, ὅκως συλήσαντες TO Lpov TO ἐν Ζελφοῖσι 
βασιλέϊ Ἐέρξη ἀποδέξαιεν τὰ χρήματα. πάντα δ᾽ ἠπί- 

Ξερξη ἀποὸδε χρήματα. ἠ 
\ . a e¢ ad df / 3 37 ».!" ¢ 3 Ν 
στατο τὰ ἐν τῷ ἱρῷ ὅσα λόγου ἣν ἀξια Ξερξης, ὡς eyo 
΄ yo ΕῚ ep’ rn Dis ", = 
TUVOUVOM"AL, ἄμεινον ἢ TA EV τοῖσι οἰκίοισι EXLTE, πολλῶν 

ἽΝ / / Ν / a 3 ΄ 
αἰεὶ λεγόντων, καὶ μάλιστα τὰ Κροίσου τοῦ ᾿Αλυάττεω 
τ / Ν Ν / a 3 
αναθήματα. 28. Οἱ δὲ Δελφοὶ πυνθανόμενοι ταῦτα ἐς 

a 2 / 2 δὲ εν" 2 / Ὲ / 
πᾶσαν ἀρρωδίην ἀπίκατο" ev δείματι δὲ μεγάλῳ κατε- 

a 3 ΄ Ν a ton / / / 
CTEWTES, ἐμαντεύοντο περὶ TOV Ἰρῶν χρηματων, εἰτε σῴφεα 
Ν A 7 of > / 2 + , 
κατὰ γῆς Katopv&wot, ELTE ἐκκομίσωσι ES AAANV Kwpnv. 

ε . , 5) » , \ eS e Ν 3 = 
ὁ δὲ θεὸς odeas οὐκ Ea κιίνέειν, as αὐτὸς ἱκανὸς εἶναι τῶν 
ν᾿ A A Ν. Ν “- 2 / / 
ewuTou προκατῆσθαι. Δελφοὶ δὲ ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες σφεων 

3 a / ᾿ / / / Ν r / 
αὐτῶν περι εφροντιζον. τέκνα MEV νυν καὶ γυναίκας περὴν 
: ᾿ > / , In ‘ e x ° ok, Be 
es τὴν Αχαιίην διέπεμψαν, αὐτῶν δε οἱ μὲν πλεῖστοι ἀτε- 

> a A ‘ \ Prd Ν ΄ 
βησαν ες τοῦ Παρνησσοῦ tas κορυφὰς και ες τὸ Κωρύκιον 
+ 3 / e Ν 3 » ἃς e 
ἄντρον ανηνείκαντο, οἱ δὲ ἐς ἄμφισσαν τὴν Aoxpida virek- 

a 7) a 9 ΚΟ. x " Ν 
ἤλθον. πάντες δὲ ὧν οἱ Δελφοὶ ἐξέλιπον τὴν πόλιν, πλὴν 
€ ΄ 3 al QA ~ / ? = 
ἐξηκοντα ἀνδρῶν καὶ Tov προφηήτεω. 34. ἔπει de ἀγχοῦ 


: 


=| 





VIIL, 39.] Prodigies at Delphi. 165 


_ 9 e , ’ ἢ ον ΠΥ Ξ 
τε ἦσαν οἱ βαρβϑαροι -πίοντες καὶ ἀπωρεον τὸ ἱρὸν, ἐν 
΄ ΄ J »“ yy Ce ee / c an Ν - 
τούτῳ ὁ προφήτης, τῷ οὔνομα ἦν ᾿ἄκηρατος, ὁρᾷ πρὸ τοῦ 
εν , / Μ 2 A / > 
νηοῦ ὅπλα προκείμενα ἐσωθεν Ex τοῦ μεγάρου εξενηνειγ- 
͵ Wor a ? os 3 « ) 7 > , 
μένα ipa, τῶν οὐκ ὅσιον ἦν ἅπτεσθαι ἀνθρωπων οὐδενί. 
Γ Ν Ν as r lal A / x / 

ὁ μὲν δὴ nie Δελφῶν τοῖσι παρεοῦσι σημανέων TO τέρας" 
c Ν 7 7 Ν 2 / 3 / Ν Ν 5» 
οἱ δὲ βάρβαροι ἐπειδὴ ἐγίνοντο ἐπειγόμενοι κατὰ τὸ ἱρὸν 

a if ᾽ , ) / / é / " ͵ 
τῆς Προνηΐης Αθηναίης, ἐπιγίνεται opt τέρεω ete μέζονα 
A Ν / / a ‘ Ν \ a 
τοῦ “πρὶν γενομένου TEpeos. θῶυμα μὲν γὰρ καὶ τοῦτο 

7 ᾽ Ne ΕΣ. 31s 7 A ¥ “2 
κάρτα ἐστὶ, ὅπλα ἀρήϊα αὐτόματα φανῆναι ew προκείμενα 
rn na 'ς x Ν 3 Ν a / 3 / Ν 
τοῦ νηοῦ" τὰ δὲ δὴ ἐπὶ τούτῳ δεύτερα επιγενόμενα καὶ 
Ν / / + / Λ > Ν 
- διὰ πάντων φασμάτων aka θωυμώσαι μαλιστα. 25. ere 
\ \ 9 2 / ¢ , Ν ἀπ εος Ἂ 
yap δὴ ἦσαν ἐπίοντες οἱ βάρβαροι κατὰ To ἱρὸν τῆς ΠΠρο- 
He 3 / 3 / 2 Ν A > A ᾧ 
νηΐης Αθηναίης, ἐν τούτῳ EK μὲν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κεραυνοὶ 
> -“ > | / 5 %, Ν a A > re 
αὐτοῖσι ἐνέπιπτον, amo δὲ τοῦ Παρνησσοῦ atoppayeicat 
ay ΕΓ, πλῶ 7 3 ? \ \ 7 
vo κορυφαὶ ἐφέροντο πολλῷ πατάγῳ ἐς αὐτοὺς καὶ κατέ- 
7 > ‘ MS - A ΝΜ: , 
λαβον συχνούς σφεων, ex δὲ τοῦ ἱροῦ τῆς Προνηΐης Bon 
nat > Ν 2 / / Ν 4 / 
τε καὶ ἀλαλαγμὸς ἐγίνετο. Συμμιγέντων δὲ τούτων πάν- 
/ vad , 2 7 / Ν 
tov, φόβος τοῖσι βαρβάροισι ἐνεπεπτώκεε. μαθόντες δε 
« x z , 3 , > / 
ot Δελφοὶ φεύγοντας σῴεας, ἐπικαταβαντες ἀπέκτειναν 
a / 2 r e x / 3 Ν A » 
πλῆθος τι αὐτῶν. οἱ Se περίεοντες Lu Βοιωτῶν εφευγον. 
x. wee S35 , @ A 7 ε 5 ® 
ἔλεγον δὲ οἱ ἀπονοστήσαντες ovtot τῶν βαρβάρων, ws eyo 
/ Rhee Ν 7 aN of e/ “ Ἃ 
πυνθάνομαι, ὡς πρὸς τούτοισι καὶ ἄνλα ὧὡρεον θεια" δύο 
Ν c / / A Ν ΕῚ 7, / Μ 
γὰρ ὁπλίτας, μέζονας ἢ κατὰ ἀνθρώπων φύσιν [ἔχοντας], 
“ / / Ν ’ ΄ Se 
ἕπεσθαί σῴι κτείνοντας καὶ διώκοντας. 26. τούτους oe 
τοὺς δὺο Ζελῴφοὶ λέγουσι ἐπιχωρίους ἥρωας εἶναι, Φύλα- 
κόν τε καὶ Αὐτονοον, τῶν τὰ τεμένεά ἐστι περὶ τὸ ἱρὸν, 
Φυλώκου μεν wap αὐτην τὴν ὁδὸν κατύπερθε τοῦ ἱροῦ τῆς 
A. 2 Λ A 7 evs A 
IIpovnins, Avtovoov de πέλας τῆς Κασταλίης ὑπὸ τῇ 
c / “ id Ν Ys > Ν a ~ 
Tauren κορυφῇ. οἱ δὲ πεσόντες ἀπὸ τοῦ ΠΙαρνησσοὺ 
/ y 5 3 [3 3 / 3 A / a a 
λίθοι ἔτι καὶ ἐς ἥμεας ἦσαν cool, ev τῷ τεμένεϊ τῆς IIpo- 
a 4 , / 3 Ν a? \ A 
vnins AOnvains κείμενοι, ἐς TO ἐνέσκηψαν διὰ τῶν βαρ- 


166 Advance of Xerxes. [Herop. 


, , va / a > 5 A [4 ον 
Bupwv φερόμενοι. τούτων μὲν νυν τῶν ἀνὸρων αὕτη ἀπὸ 
Ὁ ΧΕ A 3 Ἂ / 
του Lpov «παλλαγὴ γίνεται. 
« DER 1 / Ν Ν 9 Ν a3 1 
Ο δὲ ᾿Ελλήνων ναυτικὸς στρατὸς ato τοῦ Αρτεμι- 
, > f / 3 an 7 x 
σίου, ᾿Αθηναίων δεηθέντων, ἐς Σαλαμῖνα κατίσχεν τὰς 
/ A Ν A 5 ‘0 eG r Ν 
νέας. τῶνδε δὲ εἵνεκεν προσεδεήθησαν αὐτῶν σχεῖν πρὸς 
a > “ “ 2 Ἂ ea / Ν κ 
Σαλαμῖνα ᾿Αθηναῖοι, tva αὐτοὶ παιδὰς τε καὶ γυναῖκας 
ς 7 > a ? A Ν Ν Ν 4 
ὑπεξαγάγωνται ex τῆς Αττικῆς, πρὸς de καὶ βουλεύσωνται 
Ν / 3 fr yf aN Ν -» ͵7 7 
τὸ ποιητέον αὐτοῖσι ἔσται. ἐπί γὰρ τοῖσι κατήκουσι πρήὴγ- 
Ἀ yf / ἷ - 3 ’ / 
μασι βουλὴν ἐμελλον ποιήσεσθαι, ws ἐψευσμένοι γνωμης. 
,ὔ Ν ς / / Ν ᾿ A 
δοκέοντες γὰρ εὑρήσειν Πελοποννησίους πανδημεὶ ev τῇ 
/ ς , » / a Ν - 
Βοιωτίη ὑποκατημένους τὸν βαρβαρον, τῶν μεν εὑρον 
A δὶ ς \ ? , N 3 Ν 2 Ν 7 
οὐδὲν ἐὸν " οἱ δὲ ἐπυνθάνοντο τὸν ἰσθμὸν αὑτοὺς τειχέ- 
Ν ,ὔ Ν “ / 
ovtas, τὴν Πελοποννησον περὶ πλείστου TE ποιευμένους 
A \ 4 Μ 2 a Ν x yf. 
περιεῖναι, Kal ταύτην ἔχοντας ἐν φυλακῇ, τὰ δὲ ἀλλα 
b) / a θ / 4 > ,ὔ , 
ἀπιέναι. ταῦτα πυνθανόμενοι οὕτω δὴ προσεδεήηθησάν 
a Ν Ν = (2 Ν Ni. ah 
σφεων σχεῖν πρὸς τὴν Σαλαμῖνα. 28. οἱ μὲν δὴ ἄλλοι 
/ 3 Ν ral 3 lal ἃς 2 τις ς aA 
cares op ex. yy το πον δὲ ἐς την εωυτῶν. 
μετὰ δὲ τὴν ἄπιξιν. ΡΟ ΜῈ ἐποιήσαντο, ᾿Αθηναίων τῇ 
τις δύναται σώξειν τὰ τέκνα τε καὶ τοὺς οἰκέτας. ἐνθαῦτα 
οἱ μὲν πλεῖστοι ἐς Τροιζῆνα ἀπέστειλαν, οἱ δὲ ἐς Αἴγιναν, 
Ὁ SS 2 a Ν A e / Lod 
ot δὲ ἐς Σαλαμῖνα. ἔσπευσαν δὲ ταῦτα ὑπεκθέσθαι, τῷ 
te 7) ς / Ν 87 Ν 7) 
χρηστηρίῳ τε βουλόμενοι ὑπηρετέειν, καὶ ON καὶ TOVOE 
a 3 A / 3 a ἊΨ, / 4 
ELVEKEV οὐκ ἥκιστα. λέγουσι ᾿Αθηναῖοι οφιν μέγαν φυλα- 
A ? / 3 a 2 Ao ey on 4 / 
κον τῆς ἀκροπόλιος ἐνδιαιτᾶσθαι ἐν τῷ ἰρῳ. λέγουσι TE 
A \ x Ν 2 3 ’ὔἢ 2 / 
ταῦτα, καὶ δὴ καὶ WS ἐόντι ἐπιμήνια ἐπιτέλεουσι προ- 
θέντες - ta a ΄, , Bias cf δ᾽ 
τίθεντες " τὰ δ᾽ επιμήνια μελιτόεσσά ἐστι. αὕτη 
¢ / 5] A 7 oleh ͵ 3 ΄ 
ἢ μελιτοεσσα, ἐν τῷ πρόσθε αἰεὶ χρόνῳ αναισιμουμένη, 
/ 3 ΥὙ ΄ὔ XN aA a ¢ / a 
τότε ἣν ἄψαυστος. σημηνάσης δε ταῦτα τῆς LpElNsS, μαλ- 
͵ Εἰ A Ἢ , Sate: ἘΣ , 
Aov TL οἱ AOnvator καὶ προθυμότερον ἐξέλιπον τὴν πόλιν, 
ς Ν A A >) / Ν > , « / 
ὡς καὶ τῆς θεοῦ ἁπολελοιπυίης τὴν ἀκρόπολιν. ὡς δὲ σφι 
΄ὔ ς , “ 2 Ν , 9 Ν 
πάντα ὑπεξεκέετο, ἐπλωον ἐς τὸ στρατόπεδον. 29. Ee 





VIIL, 50.] The Muster at Salamis. 167 


Ἀ a Pa | "A / 2 τ' “ , ‘ , 
δὲ οἱ ἀπ Aptepio.ov ες Σαλαμῖνα κατέσχον τὰς νέας, συν- 
7 hd Ν / . Tal Cn , 

ἔρρεε καὶ ὁ λούπος πυνθανόμενος ὁ τῶν ᾿ Ελλήνων ναυτικὸς 


στρατὸς ἐκ Τροιζῆνος " ἐς γὰρ Πώγωνα τὸν Τροιζηνίων 





/ / / / Ν 
λιμένα προείρητο συλλέγεσθαι. συνελέχθησάν τε δὴ 
a A / “Δ Ἅ. oa / ᾽ / Ν 
ποόολλῳ πλεῦνες VEES ἢ ETT ρτεμισίιῳ εναυμάχεον, καὶ 
ρον ὔ ΄ ΄ / 7 7 ε Ν Ρ̓ 
πο πολίων πλευνων. ναύαρχος μὲν νυν ἐπὴν WUTOS ὅσ- 
ee > / > / > / hee,” 
περ ἐπ Αἀρτεμισίῳ, Ευρυβιώδὴς ὁ Ευρυκλείδεω ἀνὴρ 
, ? , PEt a Ψ >” , 
Σπαρτιήτης. οὐ μέντοι γένεος γε τοῦ βασιληΐου ewv. νέας 
Ν a / xX + 7 / 
δε πολλῴ πλείστας TE καὶ ἄριστα πλωούσας παρείχοντο 
"AO al 2 θ Ν δὲ > / e A a a / 
nvatot. αἀριθμος ὃε eyeveTo ὁ Tas τῶν νεῶν, Tape 
a ὶ , Ε Ν Ἀ ¢ , κ 
τῶν πεντηκοντέρων, OKTW καὶ ἐβδομήκοντα καὶ τριηκό- 
σιαι. 
td ‘ 3 Ν A ε 
80. ‘Qs δὲ ἐς τὴν Σαλαμῖνα συνῆλθον οἱ στρατηγοὶ, 
3 ΄ / ? 7 , 3 / 
ἐβουλεύοντο, προθέντος Εὐρυβιάδεω γνωμην ἀποφαίνεσθαι 
\ U Ψ , ? , 5 
tov βουλόμενον, ὅκου δοκέοι εἐπιτηδεωτατον εἶναι ναυμα- 
7] 7 “ 3 Ν / > / > / e Ν 
χίην ποιέεσθαι τῶν αὐτοὶ χωρέων εγκρατεες εἰσί" ἢ yap 
> Si ὃ rn yy A \ / / 7 ς 
Ἀττικὴ ἀπεῖτο ἤδη, τῶν δὲ λοίπέων πέρι προετίθεε. αἱ 
an Ν a / Ε “ 7 Ν 
γνῶμαι δὲ τῶν λεγόντων αἱ πλεῖσται συνεξέπιπτον πρὸς 


Ν > Ν / / Ν A / 
τὸν Ισθμον πλωσαντας vavpayeety πρὸ τῆς ΠΠ]ελοποννήη- 





3 / Ν , / ¢ “Δ / A 
σου" ἐπίλεγοντες Tov λογον τόνδε, ὡς ἢν νικηθεωσι τῇ 
να mn, ἐν Σαλαμῖ ev €0 πολιορκήσονται ἐν 

υμαχίῃ, ἐν Σαλαμῖνι μὲν EovTeEs ρκῆσον 
rs 4 / δ / 3 / Ν δὲ a 
vow, wa σφι τιμωρίη οὐδεμία eTipavnceTal, προς O€ TH 
> a > \ ς a ᾽ 7 A - +X 
ἰσθμῷ es τοὺς ἑωυτῶν εξοίσονται. B81. ταῦτα τῶν ἀπὸ 
/ tal 2 7 3 4 oN 
Πελοποννήσου στρατηγῶν ἐπιλεγομένων, ἐληλύθεε ἀνὴρ 
? a ? / / δ 7 2 Ne ‘ 
Ἀθηναῖος ἀγγέλλων ἥκειν τὸν βάρβαρον ἐς τὴν Αττικην 

Ν - ? Ν / ΄ Ν A a 
καὶ πᾶσαν αὑτὴν πυρπολέεσθαι. ὁ yap διὰ Βοιωτῶν τρα- 
/ Ν “ bs 3 , / \ 
πόμενος στρατὸς ἅμα Ἐέρξη, ἐμπρήσας Θεσπιέων τὴν 
/ 2 a 2 / 3 / Ν e 
πολιν (αὐτῶν εκλελουποόοτων ES ΠελοποννησονῚ Kal τὴν 

/ ¢ 7 τ ἢ 3 Ν 3 , Ν / 

Πλαταιεων ὡσαύτως, ἧκε τε ἐς τας AOnvas Kat πάντα 

νι δὰ ν if, 3... \ 7, J Ἀ , 
ἐκεῖνα édniov. ἐνέπρησε δὲ Θεσπειάν te καὶ IIdatavav, 

} / 7 > 2 7ὔ 
πυθόμενος Θηβαίων ὅτι οὐκ ἐμήδιζον. 


168 Advance of Xerxes. [Hrrop, 


3 Ἂς x a , Ap ie / Μ 
89. Amo δὲ τῆς διαβάσιος τοῦ ᾿Ελλησπόντου, ενθεν 
΄ y+ 2 ΄ 7] 2 nr / 
πορεύεσθαι ἤρξαντο οἱ βώρβαροι, ἕνα αὑτοῦ διατρίψαντες 
“. 3 fr / 3 NS 2 rg ᾿] υΝ € / 
μῆνα, ev τῷ διέβαινον ἐς τὴν Evpwrny, ev τρισί ετεροισι 
> > a a / “ 3 
μησὶ ἐγένοντο ἐν τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ, Καλλιαδεω ἄρχοντος Αθη- 
7 Ν ἘΞ ἢ 2A Si / LOY 
ναίοισι. καὶ αἱρέουσι ἐρῆμον TO ἄστυ, καί τινας OALYOUS 
δι > 2 Age A Dh / a 
εὑρίσκουσι τῶν Αθηναίων Ev τῷ lp@ εοντας, ταμίας TE TOU 
δεν ΠΝ N , > , ἃ ΄, χ ᾽ ! 
ἱροῦ καὶ πενητας ἀνθρώπους, ob φραξάμενοι τὴν ἀκρόπολιν 
Ἂς ΄ 7, Ν ? / / X 
θύρησί τε καὶ ξύλοισι ἠμύνοντο τοὺς ἐπιόντας " ἅμα μὲν 
« tes > / / > 3 ,ὔ 2 lal Ν 
ὑπ᾽ ἀσθενείης βίου οὐκ ἐκχωρήσαντες ες Σαλαμῖνα, πρὸς 
‘ > Ν / ? ΄ ὋΝ Tare Ν ε ), 
δὲ αὐτοὶ δοκέοντες ἐξευρηκεναν τὸ μαντῆϊον, τὸ ἡ Πυθίη 
Ε Ν 7. : c 7 Λ A Ν 
oft ἔχρησε, τὸ ξύλινον τεῖχος ἀνάλωτον ἐσεσθαι, καὶ 
x a > Ἂς 7 Ἂς ᾿ς fn, bn 
αὐτὸ δὴ τοῦτο εἶναι TO κρησφύγετον κατὰ TO μαντηϊον, καὶ 
¢ XN / e / > Ν ς 
οὐ τὰς νέας. 838. Οἱ δὲ Πέρσαι ἱζόμενοι ἐπὶ τὸν καταν- 
l , 7 δ ον a , er cre 
τίον τῆς ἀκροπόλιος ὄχθον, τὸν AOnvator καλέουσι Apzriov 
/ / / / Lad 
πάγον, ἐπολιόρκεον τρόπον τοιόνδε" ὅκως στυπεῖον περὶ. 
‘ Dee ‘ Y “ δὲ. ἡ 3 N / 
Tous ovaTtous περιθεντες ἅψειαν, ἐτόξευον ἐς τὸ φράγμα. 
2 aA 3 f e / d > if / 
ἐνθαῦτα ᾿Αθηναίων ot πολιορκεόμενοι ὅμως ἡμύῦνοντο, καί- 
a 2 / Ἂς A , 
περ ἐς TO ἔσχατον κακοῦ ἀπίγμενοι, καὶ TOU φράγματος 
/ Ia / fal / 
προδεδωκότος. οὐδὲ λόγους τῶν Πεισιστρατιδέων προσ- 
/ Ν « / 3 / 32 ΄ rt ἡ 
φερόντων περὶ ὁμολογίης εἐνεδέκοντο, ἀμυνόμενοι δὲ ἄλλα 
> / Ν Ἂ \ / a / 
τε ἀντεμηχανέοντο, καὶ δὴ καὶ προσιόντων τῶν βαρβάρων 
Ν Ν ΄ > ΄ Diwimah, ed ke / cee 
πρὸς Tas πῦλας OAOLTPOXOUS ἀπίεσαν, ὥστε HepEea επὶ 
7 N 2 , Se 2 7 ͵ 
χρόνον συχνὸν ἀπορίῃησι ἐνέχεσθαι, οὐ δυνάμενον σῴεας 
¢. - / ee! an 3 ’ ’ , / y 
ἐλεῖν. 84. χρόνῳ δ᾽ εκ τῶν ἀπόρων εφανὴ δὴ τις ἔσοδος 
- / 4 Ss a Ν / a 
τοῖσι βαρβάροισι" edee yap κατὰ τὸ θεοπρόπιον πᾶσαν 
Ν 9 Ν Ἀ 3 a 5 / / Che rss / 
τὴν Αττικὴν τὴν ἐν TH ἠπείρῳ γενέσθαι ὑπὸ ITepanor. 
» ΟῚ Ν A 3 / oS Χ a f 
ἐμπροσθε ὧν πρὸ τῆς ἀκροπόλιος, ὄπισθε δὲ τῶν πυλέων 
Ν an hey) a Ν 7 ᾿] 7 SS aK + 
καὶ τῆς ἀνόδου, τῇ δη οὔτε τις ἐφύλασσε OUT ἂν ἤλπισε 
7 / Ν A 2 / 3 "4 4 pay 
μὴ κοτε τίς κατὰ ταῦτα ἀναβαίη ἀνθρώπων, ταύτη ἀνεβη- 
, \ Roe EN A / Ν 3 ϊ / 
σὰν τινες KaTa TO pov τῆς Κεκροπος θυγατρὸς Αγλαύρου, 


/ 2 / 27 a / ε Sues 
KQLTOL περ AT OKP1MVOU EOVTOS TOU χώρου. ως δὲ εἶδον 








β 
β 


VIIL., 56.] The Acropolis taken. 169 


? Ν > / € 9 “ } eth, Ν ᾽ / 
αὐτοὺς ἀναβεβηκότας οἱ Αθηναῖοι ἐπὶ τὴν ἀκρόπολιν, οἱ 
‘ ? / e ‘ Ν a / , Ν 
μὲν ἐρρίπτεον EWUTOUS κατὰ τοῦ τείχεος κάτω καὶ διεφθεί- 
c oS Ν 7 ͵ὔ a \ / 
ροντο, οἱ δὲ es TO μέγαρον κατεφευγον. τῶν δὲ Περσέων 
©. 5 ᾽ὔ A“ Ν > / Ν 4 / 
οἱ ἀναβεβηκότες πρῶτον μὲν ἐτράποντο πρὸς Tas πύλας, 
΄ \ ? / \ α΄ Υ et AY ? Ν / 
ταύτας δὲ ἀνοίξαντες τοὺς ἱκέτας εφόνευον" ἐπεὶ δὲ σφι 
7 7 Ἐπ Pik / A$ al 
πάντες κατέστρωντο, TO ἱρὸν συλήσαντες ἐνέπρησαν πᾶσαν 
Ν > 7 Ν Ν / Ν > / 
την ἀκρόπολιν. Bde Σ χων δὲ παντέλεως τὰς Αθήνας, 
/ ? / 2 a A ec / > / 
Ξέρξης ἀπέπεμψε es Σοῦσα ἄγγελον immea AptaBavo 
5 7 Ν val ΄ 2 7, a AN Ν A 
ἀγγελέοντα τὴν παρεοῦσαν ods εὐπρηξίην. ἀπὸ δε τῆς 
7 al / / e ‘ / > 
πέμψιος τοῦ κήρυκος δευτερῃ ἡμέρῃ, συγκαλέσας AOy- 
\ Is ς a ye ue / ae, / 
ναίων Tous φυγάδας, ἑωυτῷ δὲ ἐπομένους, ἐκέλευε τρόπῳ 
- 7 A Ν Ε Ν >? / > ἊΝ > , 
τῷ σφετέρῳ θῦσαι τὰ ipa, avaBavtas ες τὴν ὠκρόπολιν, ----- 
ΕΣ Ν 3 δ΄ be Χο. 3 / > / A yy 
εἰτε δὴ ὧν ὀψιν τινὰ LOWY EVUTTVLOU ἐνετέλλετο ταῦτα, εἴτε 
, 5 τὰ f δι, δ ἃ > / ee oe C ¢ \ , 
καὶ ἐνθύμιόν οἱ ἐγένετο ἐεμπρήσαντι TO ἱρόν. οἱ δὲ φυγώ- 
a > , 3 / \ > / a 
des τῶν Αθηναίων εποίησαν Ta εντετάλμενα. 806. τοῦ 
5 “ ΄ J / 7 + 3 a > 
δὲ evexev τούτων ἐπεμνήσθην, φράσω. ἔστι ἐν TH ἀκρο- 
ΝᾺ, ΄ ya fH θέ a F x [ 3 Ν 
πόλι ταύτῃ Ἐρεχθεος τοῦ ynyeveos λεγομένου εἶναι νηὸς, 
> mies / Ν ΄ yy Ν / ie / 
εν τῷ ἐλαίη TE Καὶ θωλασσα ἐνι, τὰ λογος Tap Αθηναίων 
᾿ ΄ Ῥ Re / 3 7] Ν A / 
Ilocewdewvu te καὶ AOnvainv ερίσαντας περὶ τῆς YwpNS 
͵ , ΄ > χ + , “ ae 
μαρτύρια θεσθαι. ταύτην ὧν τὴν ἐλαίην ἅμα τῷ ἄλλῳ 
4 A / > a ς Ἂς “- , Ul 
ἱρῷ κατέλαβε ἐμπρησθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν βαρβάρων " δευτερῃ 
δὲ ἡμέρῃ ἀπὸ τῆς ἐ ἴσιος, ᾿Αθηναίων οἱ θύειν ὑπὸ β 
Ἱμερῃ ἀπὸ τῆς ἐμπρησιος, ηναίων οἱ θύειν ὑπὸ βασι- 
, , ε a4 F 5 SG WekiN “ ἢ 
λεος κελευόμενοι ὡς ἀνεβησαν ἐς TO LpoV, ὥρεον βλαστὸν 
4 “ / 7 al 3 / φΦ 
ἐκ τοῦ στελέχεος ὅσον τε πηχυαῖον ἀναδεδραμηκότα. οὗτοι 
͵ ω y+ 
μὲν νυν ταῦτα εφρασαν. 
ι ΄ x 2 a Ὁ“ / > / ξ 
37. Οἱ δὲ ἐν Σαλαμῖνι “Ελληνες, ὡς σφι εξηγγελθη ὡς 
“ \ κ ΝΟ» tS ,ὔ ᾽ ᾽, > & ͵ 
ἔσχε τὰ περὶ THY AOnvewy ἀκρόπολιν, ἐς τοσοῦτον θορυ- 
᾽ / 7 7 ω “ Ia A 
Bov ἀπίκοντο, ὥστε Eviol τῶν στρατηγῶν οὐδε κυρωθῆναι 
Νν Ἂς / a > a: oF Ν / 3, ΤᾺΝ 
ἐμενον TO προκείμενον πρῆγμα, αλλ ες TE τας νεᾶς εσε- 
Ν ¢ / Jaf e 3 ͵ὔ a / 
πίπτον καὶ ἱστία ἀείροντο ws ποθευσομενοι. τοῖσέ TE 


ε 7 ὩΣ ἘΣ + , Ν να n 
ὑπολειπομένοισι αὐτῶν εκυρωθὴ πρὸ τοῦ ἰσθμοῦ vavpa- 


170 The Battle of Salamis. [Herop. 


, 7 “ον ἊΝ eR / 3 a / 
nec. νύξ τε ἐγίνετο, καὶ ot διαλυθέντες ἐκ τοῦ συνεδρίου 
> / > Ν 4 2 a x / 
ἐσέβαινον ἐς tus νέας. 88. ἐνθαῦτα δὴ Θεμιστοκλεα 
2 , δέ ΟΝ x , Υ̓ / δ να Ὁ5 a 
ἀπικόμενον ἐπὶ τὴν νέα εἴρετο Μνησίφιλος ἀνὴρ A@nvaros, 
, ” ͵ ,ὔ N Ν ον: 
ὅ τι σφι εἴη βεβουλευμένον. πυθόμενος δὲ πρὸς αὑτοῦ ὡς 
” 7 πο τ , ἈΝ i) Sg Ν N N 
ein δεδογμένον avayew τὰς νέας πρὸς τὸν ἴσθμον Kat πρὸ 

A , , 5 » yx τ ᾽ 
τῆς Πελοποννήσου ναυμαχεειν, εἶπε" Ov τοι apa, ἢν ἁπα- 

7, ΄Ζ / aX ae Ν 2 va ¥ / 
εἰρωσι τὰς νέας ἀπὸ Σαλαμῖνος, περὶ οὐδεμιῆς ETL πατρί- 

7 Ν Ν / / / Ν 
δος ναυμαχήσεις. κατὰ γὰρ πόλις ἕκαστοι TpEWovTaL, καὶ 

4 / ? / / / / > 
οὔτε σφέας Ευρυβιάδης κατέχειν δυνήσεται, οὔτε τις av- 

, + “ Ν 3 Ξ \ N 
θρωπων ἀλλος, ὥστε οὐ διασκεδασθῆναι την στρατιὴν 

ρ ῆ ὴν, 
3, / / ¢ Ὁ x 2 , > 3 + 7 
ἀπολεεταί Te ἢ Ελλας aBovdinot. adr εἰ τις ἐστι μη- 

Dies oF Ν a / Ν / “ ΄ 
yavn, ἰθι καὶ πειρῶ διαχεαι τὰ βεβουλευμένα, ἣν κως δύνῃ 

3 an " 7, 7 7 >) - 
ἀναγνῶσαι Εὐρυβιώδεα μεταβουλεύσασθαι ὥστε αὐτοῦ 

id / > a Une SZ Cree , 
μενέειν. 89. κάρτα δὴ τῷ Θεμιστοκλεῖ ἤρεσε ἡ ὑποθηκη, 

N ar N A > , “.-. Ὁ oN ἣν ? \ 
Kal οὐδὲν πρὸς ταῦτα ἀμειψάμενος Hie ἐπὶ τὴν Vea την 

᾽ ͵ ἢ , Ἀν ΓΟ 5. ε , 
Εὐρυβιάδεω. ἀπικόμενος δὲ ε εθελειν οὐ κοινὸν τί 

bb 
iA ΄ ς ? 2s ’ Χ / ple 3 7, 
πρῆγμα συμμῖξαι. ὁ δ᾽ αὑτὸν ἐς τὴν Vea ἐκέλευε ἐσβάντα 

/ y yn! ? A ¢ , / ld 
λέγειν, εἴ TL εθέλοι. ενθαῦτα ὁ Θεμιστοκλεης παριζόμενος 

φ / > - ’ f Ν yf Λ 
οἱ καταλέγει ἐκείνά τε Tavta τὰ ἤκουσε Μευησιφίλου, 
ε Ξ ΄ « 5} N Ν δ ΤΥ 
ἑωυτοῦ ποιεύμενος, καὶ ἄλλα πολλὰ προστιθεὶς, ες ὃ ἀνε- 

Ere + A Ἂς 3 A 7 ‘ 
γνωσε χρηΐζων ex τε τῆς νεὸς ἐκβῆναι συλλέξαι TE TOUS 
Ν ᾽ Ν 7 ¢€ eee / 
στρατηγοὺς ἐς τὸ συνέδριον. 40. ᾿ς de apa συνελεχθη- 
Ν ‘\ Ν 2 a Ν / a 
σαν, πρίν ἢ TOV Εὐρυβιάδεα προθεῖναι TOV λόγον τῶν 

“ , Ν ἊΝ Ν 5 ε 
εἵνεκεν συνήγαγε τοὺς στρατηγους, πολλὸς ἣν 0 Θεμίστο- 

, ) a / @ , / , \ 
KAENnS ἐν τοίσι λογοισι οἷα καρτα δεόμενος. δλεγοντος δὲ 

> nA ς / ἣν 3 / > / 3 
αὐτοῦ ὁ Κορίνθιος στρατηγὸς Αδείμαντος ὁ ()κύτου εἶπε" 
9 / 3 “ 2 Tal « 7 
4) Θεμιστοκλεες, ἐν τοῖσι ἀγῶσι ot προεξανιστάμενοι 
e J ς Ν 3 re ἡ id , ? 
ῥωπίζονται. ὁ δὲ ἀπολυόμενος edn > Οἱ δε γε εγκατα- 

/ > An / Ν ,ὔ Ν 
λειπόμενοι οὐ στεφανεῦνται. 41. Tote μὲν ἠπίως προς 

Ν / 5 7, Ἂς ‘ Ν 3 / y 
tov Κορίνθιον ἀμείψατο. πρὸς δὲ τὸν EvpuBiadea ἐλεγε 


3 / Ὡ δ οὗ rar a / ‘ « 
εκείινων μὲν OUKETL οὐδεν των TPOTEPOV λεχθέντων, ως 








VIIL, 60.] Counsel of T'hemistocles. 171 


? 4 > 7 ? Ν a / 7 
ἐπεὰν ἀπαείρωσι ἀπὸ Σαλαμῖνος διαδρήσονται" παρεόν- 
Ν val , ᾽ »Μ / ΄ / ? 4 
TOV γὰρ TOV συμμάχων οὐκ ἔφερε οἱ κόσμον οὐδένα κατη- 
͵ ξ Ν Μ / yy / (ὃ " Ἢ Ν 
γορεειν" 0 δε ἄλλου λόγου εἰχετο,. λέγων ταῦὸε Vv σοι 
Aa > “- >, «ς / 3 > Ν / / 
viv ἐστὶ σῶσαι τὴν ᾿Ελλάδα, ἢν ewot πείθῃ ναυμαχίην 
A / / Ν / / “- 
αὐτοῦ μένων ποίέεσθαι, μηδὲ πειθόμενος τούτων τοῖσι 
, > / Ν Ἀ > Ν \ ΄ ᾽ 7 
λέγουσι ἀναζεύξης πρὸς τὸν ἴσθμον τὰς νέας. ἀντίθες 
Ν « ΄, > : ’ὔ Ν ‘ a Ἵ θ a B Xr 
yap ἑκάτερον ἀκούσας. πρὸς μὲν τῳ ἰΙσθμῳ συμβαλλων 
5 τα , , 3 εν of cm 
ἐν πελαγεὶ ἀναπεπταμένῳ ναυμαχήσεις, ἐς TO ἥκιστα ἡμῖν 
΄ 3 7, “ / ee ‘ oe <p 
σύμφορον ἐστι νέας ἔχουσι βαρυτέρας Kat ἀριθμὸν ελάσ- 
A Ν, > / ἴω ’ὔ’ A M / \ 
govas, τοῦτο δὲ ἀπολέεις Σαλαμίνωα te καὶ Meyapa καὶ 
7 Μ ἈΝ 5. Le, ? , “ Ν A 
Αἴγιναν, nv περ Kal τὰ ἄλλα ευτυχήσωμεν. ἅμα γὰρ τῷ 
A ΠΣ 7 Ν ε ἈΝ / 2 ‘ “ 
ναυτικῷ αὐτῶν ἕψεται καὶ ὁ Telos στρατὸς" καὶ οὕτω 
7 ee v Ia'% X , ΄ 
σῴφεέεας αὐτὸς ἄξεις ἐπὶ τὴν Πελοπόννησον, κινδυνεύσεις τε 
δι ἢ ,Ἄςε / Ἃ Ν Pie: ae / 7 
ἁπάσῃ τῇ Ελλάδι. 42. ἢν δὲ τὰ eyw λέγω ποιήσης, 
͵ 3 “mre \ ec 7 a \ 5 A 
τοσάδε EV αὐτοίσι χρηστὰ εὑρήσεις" πρῶτα μεν εν στεινῷ 
Λλ \ > / = \ xX Ν ΒΓ 
συμβάλλοντες νηυσι ολέίγῃσι πρὸς πολλας, ἣν τὰ OlKOTA 
? A / 2 , ἈΝ , Ν \ ? 
ες TOU πολέμου ἐκβαίνῃ, πολλὸν κρατήσομεν, ---- TO γὰρ εν 
A / \ e , ᾽ Ν 2 ? 7 Ν ‘ 
στεινῷ ναυμαχέειν πρὸς ἡμέων EOTL, EV ευρυχωρίῃ δὲ πρὸς 
2 / 3 Ν Ν 7 ᾽ Ν ς,» 
ἐκείνων, ---- αὖτις δὲ Σαλαμὶς περιγίνεται, ἐς τὴν ἡμῖν 
¢ / / Ν a Ν Ν "ἢ / ᾽ 
UTEKKEETAL τέκνα TE καὶ γυναῖκες. καὶ μὴν καὶ τόδε ἐν 
Aedes ΕΣ n ‘ ΄, , - ῃ ? 
αὑυτοῖσι ἔνεστι, τοῦ καὶ περιέχεσθε μαλιστα" ὁμοίως αὐ- 
A / | 3 , Ν ‘ an 
Tov τε μένων προναυμαχήσεις Πελοποννήσου καὶ πρὸς TO 
T θ a 5 ͵ oy] 3 , y > A N 
σθμῷ. ovde oheas, εἰ περ ev hpovees, ἄξεις ἐπὶ τὴν 
, x ΄ Ν ay +307 % >. / / 
Πελοπόννησον. 48. ἢν δὲ ye καὶ Ta ἐγὼ ἐλπίζω γένηται 
ὧν 7 A ~ 5, tea 3 Ν > Ν / 
καὶ νικησωμεν τῇσι νηυσί, οὔτε ὑμῖν ἐς TOV ἴσθμον παρέ- 
« 4 f Ψ , ς 4 “ 3 
σονται οἱ βαρβαροι, οὔτε προβήσονται ἑκαστέρω τῆς ᾿Α4τ- 
A ἄδν ν ͵ ? N , / , , 
TLKNS, ἀπίασί τε οὐδενὶ κόσμῳ" Μεγαροισί Te κερδανέομεν 
A Ν Ai / Ν Ss ἊΣ “ > a Cc ae Ν ν / / 
περιεοῦσι καὶ Avyivn καὶ Σαλαμῖνι, ἐν TH ἡμῖν καὶ λόγιόν 
> a 2 A 7 ͵ >] / / 
ἐστι τῶν ἐχθρῶν κατύπερθε γενέσθαι. οἰκότα μέν νυν 
͵ - , e < i ὧν 35 Λ , 
βουλευομένοισι ἀνθρώποισι ws τὸ ἐπίπαν ἐθέλει γίνεσθαι " 


» Ν 5 / > >] UZ > Ν ἧς 
μὴ δὲ οἰκότα βουλευομένοισι οὐκ ἐθέλει οὐδὲ ὁ θεὸς προσ- 


112 The Baitle of Salamis. [Heron 


, Ν Ν ᾽ ak 4 ἘΣ 
χώρεεῖν προς τας avOpwrnias yvopas, 44. Ταῦτα λέ- 
/ > ς / 3 / 
yovtos Θεμιστοκλέος, αὖτις ὁ Κορίνθιος Αδείμαντος 
2 “ ΄ Ὁ 7] 2 \ Ν 2 
ἐπεφέρετο, σιγᾶν TE κελεύων τῷ μὴ EOTL πατρὶς, καὶ Ev- 
7 3 IA 3 / 3 /. 3 Ψ / 
ρυβιάδεα οὐκ ἐῶν ἐπιψηφίζειν ἁπολι ἀνδρί" πόλιν γὰρ 
Ν , / ed ee / 
Tov Θεμιστοκλέα παρεχόμενον οὕτω ἐκέλευε γνώμας 
Λ A / ¢ / 7 ξ ͵ 
συμβώλλεσθαι. ταῦτα δὲ οἱ προέφερε, OTL ἡλωώκεσάν 
Ἂς / ¢ 9 A / ec / 
Te Kat κατείχοντο at ᾿Αθῆναι. τότε δὴ ὁ Θεμιστοκλέης 
3 r 7 Ν ~ / ’ ‘ κ 
ἐκεῖνον τε καὶ τοὺς Κορινθίους πολλά τε καὶ κακὰ 
+ ¢ Callens J In ἢ 7 e ” Ν I \ 
EXEYE, EWUTOLTL TE ἐδήλου λογῷ ὡς €lN καὶ πολις καὶ 
A / af 2 / yy 2 DY / / 
yn μεξἕων ἥπερ εκείνοισι, ἐστ ἂν διηκόσιαι νέες σφι 
“7 / 2 Ν Ν « / 2 Ν 
εωσι. πεπληρωμέναι " οὐδαμους yap Ελληνων αὑτοὺς 
3 i 3 7 / ‘ A A 
ἐπιόντας ἀποκρούσεσθαι. 45. Σημαίνων δὲ ταῦτα τῷ 
΄ / 3 ᾽ 7 / a 3 
λόγῳ διέβαινε ἐς Ευρυβιώδεα, λέγων μᾶλλον ἐπε- 
/ \ "5 / 2 A Ἂν / Μ 31 
στραμμένα: Du εἰ μενέεις αὑτοῦ καὶ μένων ἔσεαι ὠνὴρ 
3 7 9 Χ . 2 / Sy Us / N A Ν 
ἀγαθὸς" εἰ δὲ μη, ἀνατρέψεις τὴν Ελλαδα. τὸ πᾶν yap 
¢ A Aa / / ξ / 2 2 2 N\ / 
μιν TOU πολέμου φέρουσι alt νέες. αλλ εμοὶ πείθεο. 
3 \ A XN 7 ξ aA Ἂ ¢€ Sf ᾽ ‘ 
εἰ O€ ταῦτα μὴ ποιήσεις, ἡμεῖς MEV, WS ἔχομεν, ἀναλαβον- 
\ Seat ΄ 2 an N > 5) , ΠῚ 
τες τοὺς οἰκέτας, κομιεύμεθα ἐς Σίριν τὴν ἐν Itadiy, ἣ 
¢ / 4 3 2 A + \ Ἂς / 
περ ἡμετέρη TE ἐστι EX παλαιοὺυ ETL, καὶ τὰ λογία λέγει 
Ἐπ 5, πεν δὼ ἃ , A ς rn ἣν / 
UT ἡμέων αὐτὴν See κτισθῆναι" ὑμεῖς δε συμμάχων τοι- 
A , 7 a > a / a 
ὥνδε μουνωθεντες μεμνήσεσθε TOV ἐμῶν λόγων. 46. Tav- 
Ἂς é / > he 2 , 
τα δὲ Θεμιστοκλεὸος λέγοντος ἀνεδιδάσκετο Ἐυρυβιωδης. 
, 3 , . 7 Si os / ᾽ 
δοκέειν δέ μοι, ἀρρωδήσας μάλιστα τοὺς Αθηναίους avedé- 
, 7 ’ 7 Ἃ ἐν Nees N ie 
δάσκετο μή σφεας ἀπολίπωσι, ἢν πρὸς τὸν ἴσθμον avayn 
Ν / ὶ x > / bea i εἰ he 
Tas νέας. ἀπολιπόντων yap Αθηναίων ovKeTs εγίνοντο 
Dies τὴ ἢ 7 ΄ Ν εἰ Ν , 
ἀξιόμαχοι οἱ λοιποί. ταύτην δὲ alpeeTaL τὴν γνωμῆὴν, 
ὃ ΜΝ ! ? Py \ ε Ν 
αὑτοῦ μένοντας διαναυμαχέειν. Οὕτω μεν οἱ περὲ Σαλα- 
A x 5) ,ὔ 3 / ? / af 
viva ἔπεσι ἀκροβολισάμενοι, ἐπείτε ἘΕυρυβιάδῃ εδοξε, 
? A , Celt pe 4 
αὐτοῦ παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς ναυμαχήσοντες. ἡμέρη TE εγέ- 
Ν 7 »“ / 3 4 ἧς a Μ a 
VETO, καὶ ἅμα TH ἡλίῳ ἀνιόντι σεισμὸς EYEVETO EV TE TH 
A Ν a , Μ / 37 S νὴ 
γῇ καὶ τῇ θαλάσσῃ. ἔδοξε δὲ σφι εὔξασθαι τοῖσι θεοῖσι 





Ϊ 
. 





VIIL, 65.} The Deities of Hleusis. 173 


ἈΝ 3 , ‘ > / / c ; 
καὶ ἐπικαλέσασθαι τοὺς Αιακίδας συμμάχους. ὡς δὲ σφι 
ΝΜ . >] / a > / Ν a a “ἡ 
εδοξε, και ἐποίευν ταῦτα " εὐξάμενοι γὰρ πᾶσι τοῖσι θεοῖσι, 
> / Ν 3 4 lal Y ᾽ὔ Ν - > 
αὐτοθεν μεν εκ Σιαλαμίνος Atavta τε καὶ Τελαμῶνα etrexa- 
͵ὔ > ‘ Ν 2 Ν Ν Ν » Ἵ / ͵ > , 
λέοντο, ew. δὲ Atakov καὶ TOUS ἄλλους Αιακίδας νέα ὠπε- 
> 4 
στελλον ες Διγιναν. 
oy A Ν / ΄ 4 ) δ ’ ΄“ , 
47. Edn δε Δίκαιος ὁ Θεοκύδεος, ἀνὴρ APnvaios, φυγιις 
\ εὖ 7 / , A ‘ 7 
τε καὶ παρὰ Μήδοισι λόγιμος γενόμενος τοῦτον τὸν χρό- 
2 / 3 / cum Ν , a a “ 
νον, ἐπείτε ἐκείρετο ἢ Ἀττικὴ χωρὴη ὑπὸ τοῦ πεζοῦ στρα- 
- a a 7 eS ’ A > / r , ψᾳ, 
τοῦ τοῦ Ξέρξεω εοῦσα ερῆμος ᾿Αθηναίων, τυχεῖν τότε ἐὼν 
f 7 A 7 3 a 7 7 
ἅμα Δημαρήτῳ τῷ Λακεδαιμονίῳ ἐν τῷ Θριασίῳ πεδίῳ, 
3 a XN Ν 7 >] Ν 4 cr ς > - 
ἰδεῶν δὲ κονιορτὸν χωρέοντα πὸ ᾿Εϊλευσίῖνος ὡς ἀνδρῶν 
΄ 7 / ? 7, , N 
μαλιστά κῃ τρισμυρίων: «ποθωυμάζειν τέ oheas τὸν κο- 
Ν Ὡ , yf 2 , ‘ , “- 
νίορτον ὅτεων κοτε εἴη ἀνθρώπων, καὶ πρόκατε φωνῆς 
? "a / t / Ν Ν > Ν Ν 
ἀκούειν, καὶ οἱ φαίνεσθαι τὴν φωνὴν εἶναι τὸν μυστικὸν 
H 5 ᾽ 2 / an δ ne A 3 Ἵ “ 
taxyov. εἶναι 5 ἀδαήημονα τῶν ἱρῶν τῶν ἐν Ἐλευσῖνι 
͵ ἈΝ ΄ὔ ” , 5. χὰ od \ 
γινομένων tov Anuwupntor, εἰρεσθαΐί τε avtov, ὃ τι τὸ φθεγ- 
/ Y A TEN \ > ΄ γ 
γόμενον εἴη τοῦτο" 48. αὐτὸς δε εἶπαι" Anuupyte, οὐκ 
» 7 > / / ay a , a 
ἐστε ὅκως οὐ μέγα TL σίνος ἐσταῖ TH βασιλέος στρατιῇ. 
/ Ν 3 / 2 Ψ a ae A 3 “ c/ “ Α, 
τάδε γὰρ ἀρίδηλα ἐρήμου ἐούσης τῆς Ἀττικῆς, ὅτι θεῖον τὸ 
, et. Re val oN 2 , > / / 
φθεγγόμενον, ἀπὸ Ἐλευσῖνος ἰὸν es τιμωρίην ᾿Αθηναίοισί 
\ A , Nal , ΄ ? 
TE καὶ TOLTL συμμάχοισι. καὶ ἢν μὲν γε κατασκήψη ες 
ae ,ὔ / > a ᾿Ξ Ν a 
την Πελοποννησον, κίνδυνος αὐτῷ τε βασιλεὶ καὶ τῇ στρα- 
a a ᾽ a > ͵ Μ \ co tes δ Ὁ π N ͵ 7, 
Tin TH εν τῇ ἠπείρῳ ἐσταῖ, ἢν δε ETL τὰς νέας τρώπηται 
- ᾽ lal Ν A AX 7 
TUS ev Σαλαμῖνι, τὸν ναυτικὸν στρατὸν κινδυνεύσει βασι- 
ν > ἊΝ . \ ε Ν ΄ 54 > τῆς 
λευς ἀποβαλεῖν. τὴν δὲ ὁρτὴν ταύτην ἄγουσι ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
~ | / Μ A Ν Ν a ΄ x > “- ξ 
ava πάντα etea τῇ ητρι καὶ τῇ Κούρῃ, καὶ αὐτῶν τε ὁ 
/ Ν na + ¢ / ~ Ν Ν 
βουλόμενος καὶ τῶν ἄλλων ᾿Ελλήνων μυεῖται, καὶ τὴν 
Ν Aa 3 7 > ΄ A e a ? 
φωνην, τῆς ἀκούεις, ἐν TavTn TH OpTH ιακχάζουσι. 
a n 2 “ / / 4 ἣς 
49. προς ταῦτα εἰπεῖν Δημάρητον: Σίγα τε καὶ μηδενὶ 
¥ ἈΝ , A " ᾷ , ᾽ , 
ἄλλῳ τὸν λόγον τοῦτον εἰπῆς. HY yap Tot ἐς βασίλεα 


’ A ee fal >] / Ν Ν / 
ἀνενευχ θῇ τὰ ἔπεα ταῦτα, ἀποβαλέεις την κεφαλην, καὶ σε 


174 The Battle of ϑαίαηι. [Herop. 


ΕΣ ae , e7 Sd > 7 ΄ῶνχ 
οὔτε ἐγὼ δυνήσομαι ῥύσασθαι, οὔτ᾽ ἄλλος ἀνθρώπων οὐδὲ 
- ᾿ a] ͵ ~ Ν κι A a“ 
εἷς. ἀλλ᾽ ἔχ᾽ ἥσυχος. περὶ Se στρατιῆς τῆσδε θεοῖσι μελή- 
Ne an 4 3 x A A ‘ 
oc. Tov μὲν δὴ ταῦτα παραινέειν, ἐκ δὲ τοῦ κονιορτοῦ 
“- A / / Ν Ν ͵ 
καὶ τῆς φωνῆς γενέσθαι νέφος, καὶ μεταρσιωθεν φέρεσθαι 
es val 2 ᾿ , bd cal ¢ 
ἐπὶ Σαλαμῖνος ἐπὶ TO στρατόπεδον Te τῶν Ελλήνων. 
ec Ν ? ‘ A τ Ν Ν SS pas > 7 
οὕτω δὲ αὐτοὺς μαθεῖν ὅτι TO ναυτικὸν TO Ξέρξεω ἀπολε- 
A ‘\ / 7 yf 
εσθαι μέλλοι. Ταῦτα μὲν Δίκαιος ὁ Θεοκύδεος ἔλεγε, 
Ν ΄ / 
Δημαρήτου τε καὶ ἄλλων μαρτυρων καταάπτομενος. 
e Ν 3 x / Ἂς Ν 
50. Οἱ δὲ ἐς τὸν Ξέρξεω ναυτικὸν στρατὸν ταχθέντες, 
3 δ 3 - f Ἂ “- Ν Ἂς 
ἐπειδὴ ἐκ Τρηχῖνος θηησάμενοι τὸ τρῶμα τὸ Δακωνικὸν 
3 ἣΝ ¢ / 3 / € / . yy 
διέβησαν ἐς την ᾿Ιστίαιαν, ἐπισχόντες ἡμέρας τρεῖς ETAWOV 
? 2 7 Ν 2 € / Ν e / 3 / > 
δ᾽ Εὐρίπου, καὶ ev ἐτέρῃησι τρισὶ ἡμέρῃσι ἐγένοντο εν 
, 9 Ν N ? >] 7 22 al 
Φαλήρῳ. ἐπειδὴ δὲ παρήγγελλον avaTAwWELV, ἀνῆγον 
Ν / ΩΝ τ (a) SS / fi 
Tus νέας ἐπὶ THY Σαλαμῖνα, καὶ παρεκρίθησαν διαταχθεν- 
3 / ,ὔ / ? 2 , / ξ 
τες κατ ἡσυχίην. τότε μὲν νὺν οὐκ ἐξεχρησὲ σφι 7 
΄ 7 Ν Ν 3 / e x 
ἡμέρη ναυμαχίην ποιήσασθαι, νυξ yap ἐπεγένετο, οἱ δὲ 
΄ 2 x ς / ‘ Sct ων 
παρεσκευάζοντο ἐς τὴν ὑστεραίην. τοὺς de Ελληνας εἶχε 
2 Ν 3 ͵ 2 ed Ν Ν ΠΕ Ν , 
δέος τε καὶ ἀρρωδίη, οὐκ ἥκιστα δὲ τοὺς απὸ ]]ελοποννη- 
ΕῚ 7) Ν ἁἉ > Ν Ν 2 r ͵ 
σου. ἀρρώδεον δὲ, ὅτε αὐτοὶ μὲν ἐν Σαλαμῖνι κατήμενοι 
¢ Ἂν A A > / / Λ , 
ὑπὲρ γῆς τῆς Αθηναίων vavpayeew μέλλοιεν, νικηθέντες 
Σ , 2 / / >] / XN 
Te ἐν νήσῳ ἀπολαμφθέντες πολιορκήσονται, ἀπέντες τὴν 
ς A 3 ΄ - Ν i x Ν 
ἑωυτῶν ἀφύλακτον. ὅ1. Τῶν δὲ βαρβάρων ὁ πεῖζος ὑπὸ 
Ν a 7 > 7 3 Ν ’ 
τὴν παρεοῦσαν νύκτα ἐπορεύετο ἐπὶ την Πελοποννήσον" 
/ Ν Ν , 2 , f 2: ἂν 
καίτοι Ta δυνατὰ πώντα ἐμεμηχανῆτο, ὅκως KAT ἤπειρον 
x > , : ΄ c Ν > 7 / 
μὴ ἐσβώλοιεν ot βάρβαροι. ws yap ἐπύθοντο τάχιστα 
/ x 3 Ἂς / 3 ΄ 
Πελοποννήσιοι τοὺς ἀμφὶ Δεωνίδεα ev Θερμοπύλῃσι τετε- 
, / 2 a , 3 Ν > Ν 
λευτήκεναι, συνδραμόντες ἐκ τῶν πολίων ες τὸν ἰσθμὸν 
67), 2 A Ν ᾿ 3 
ἵζοντο, καί σφι ἐπὴν στρατηγὸς Κλεόμβροτος ὁ Αναξαν- 
/ Ν 3 / 3 n 3 - 
δρίδεω, Acwvidew δὲ ἀδελφεός. ἱζόμενοι δὲ ἐν τῷ Ισθμῷ 
Ν Ls ὩΣ / eas Ν A «Ψ 
καὶ συγχώσαντες τὴν SKipwvida ὁδον, μετα τοῦτο ὡς σφι 


5 A A a 
ἔδοξε βουλευομένοισι, οἰκοδόμεον διὰ τοῦ ᾿Ισθμοῦ τεῖχος" 








VIIL, 75.] Crafi of Themistoeles. 175 


Ψ ae , , ͵ ‘ ‘ 
ἅτε δὲ ἐουσέων μυριάδων πολλέων καὶ παντὸς ἀνδρὸς 
ΡῚ ts > 4 Ν y+ Ν \ / Ν / 
ἐργαζομένου, ἠνύετο TO Epyov, καὶ yap λίθοι καὶ πλίνθοι 
ἧς 4 Ν A , / 3 / Ν 
καὶ ξύλα καὶ φορμοὶ Ψψωώμμου πλήρεες ἐσεῴορέοντο, καὶ 
-.., Bie 2 , ε , > , ” 
ἐλίνυον οὐδένα χρόνον ot βοηθήσαντες ἐργαζόμενοι, οὔτε 
Ν Μ (3 / 
νυκτὸς οὔτε ἡμερης. 
e Ν bin 2 a) A / / 
52. Οἱ μὲν δὴ ἐν τῷ ἰσθμῷ τοιούτῳ πόνῳ συνέστασαν, 
v4 Ν A ΑΝ Μ / / Ν a Ν 
ἅτε περὶ τοῦ παντὸς ἤδη δρόμον θέοντες, καὶ τῇσι νηυσὶ 
? 3 / > , 4 Ν > tal f 
οὐκ edmifovtes ἐλλώμψεσθαι" οἱ δὲ ἐν Σαλαμῖνι ὅμως 
. A 7 > 7 ? 7 Ν / ᾽ “- 
ταῦτα πυνθανόμενοι ἀρρωδεον, οὐκ οὕτω περὶ σφίσι αὐτοῖσι 
/ e Ν a / 5 δ > 
δειμαίνοντες ws περὶ τῇ ]Π]ελοποννήῆήσῳ. τέως μὲν δὴ av- 
a oN 3 Ἀ b. a / ? / - 
τῶν ἀνὴρ ἀνδρὶ παραστὰς σιγῇ λόγον εποίέετο. θῶυμα 
͵7 Ἕ ? 7ὔ ᾽ / 4. Ν b] , 
ποιείμενοι τὴν EvpvBiadew αβουλίην, τέλος δὲ eLeppuyn 
3 ‘\ / / / peed , Ν Ν ᾿] 7, 
ἐς τὸ μέσον. συλλογος TE δὴ ἐγίνετο, καὶ πολλὰ ἐλέγετο 
Ν a 2 “- « Ν ες 3 Ν 7 Ν 
περὶ τῶν αὐτῶν" οἱ μέν, ws ες τὴν Πελοπόννησον χρεὼν 
y bf 7 \ Ν 3 / ΄ \ Ν 
εἴη ἀποπλώειν καὶ περὶ ἐκείνης κινδυνεύειν, μηδὲ πρὸ 
’ὔ 7 / , > - Ν Ν 
χώρης δοριαλωτου μένοντας μάχεσθαι, ᾿Αθηναῖοι de καὶ 
, A Ν ’ὔ 2 A / 3 7 
Αιγινῆται καὶ Meyapees αὐτοῦ μένοντας ἀμύνεσθαι. 
3 a / ¢ ¢ a a fe fees 
53. Ενθαῦτα Θεμιστοκλέης, ws ἐσσοῦτο TH γνωμῃ. ὑπὸ 
a 7 Ν ΕΝ; > a , 
τῶν Πελοποννησίων, λαθὼν ἐξέρχεται εκ τοῦ συνεδρίου, 
5 XN ἈΝ / 3 A / ἃς / Μ 
ἐξελθων δὲ πέμπει Es τὸ στρατόπεδον τὸ Μήδων ἄνδρα 
7] 3 V4 A ͵ὕ Ν a ΕΣ Ν 5 
πλοίῳ, ἐντείλάμενος τὰ λέγειν YPEWY, TW οὔνομα μεν ἣν 
7] 5 / Ν A Ν 9 fal 7 
Σίκιννος, οἰκέτης δὲ καὶ παιδαγωγὸς ἣν τῶν Θεμιστοκλέος 
/ \ St eg ΄ a , 
παίδων" τὸν dn ὕστερον τούτων τῶν πρηγμάτων Θεμιστο- 
/ / ᾽ / ΄ ? / [ / 
κλεης Θεσπιέα τε εποίησε, ws εἐπεδέκοντο οὐ Θεσπιέες 
΄, N , y ἃ , 7 > , 
TOALNTAS, καὶ χρημασι ολβιον. ὃς τότε πλοίῳ ἀπίκομενος, 
Μ. Ν Ν Χ a 7 ΄ y 
ἔλεγε πρὸς Tous στρατηγοὺς τῶν βαρβάρων tudes Επεμ- 
4 Ν > Us ’, a Μ . Ἵ / 
We με στρατηγὸς ὁ Αθηναίων λάθρῃ τῶν ἀλλων Ελλήνων 
,ὔ χ ͵ ‘ / Ν ’ cal 
(τυγχάνει yap φρονεων Ta βασίλεος καὶ βουλόμενος μαλ- 
Ν / ΄ 7, Υ . aA ε , 
λον Ta ὑμέτερα κατύπερθε γίνεσθαι ἢ Ta τῶν ᾿Ελληνων 
’ / / ea ἈΝ , 
πρήγματαὶὴ φράσοντα ὅτι οἱ᾽ Ελληνες δρησμον βουλεύονται 


/ ‘ a / ἮΝ ed A » 
καταρρωδηκοτες" καὶ νῦν παρέχει κάλλιστον LEAS εργον 





170 The Battle of Salamis. [Herop, 


ἁπάντων τὰ ἢν μὴ περιίδητε διαδράντας a 
TOUS. οὔτε γὰρ ἀλλήλοισι ὁμοφρονζουσι, οὔτ᾽ ἔτι ἀντυ- 
στήσονται ὑμῖν, πρὸς ἑωυτούς τε σφέας ὄψεσθε ναυμα- 
Ἵ Ν Ne ae τ / » \ , 
χέοντας τοὺς TU ὑμέτερα φρονέοντας καὶ τοὺς μη. 54. ὁ 
\ ie SS / 5) \ ? ΄, a \ 
μὲν ταῦτα σφι σημήνας ἐκποδὼν «ἁπαλλάσσετο" τοῖσι δὲ 
ε ol Rey, N > , A \ ᾽ Ν κ΄ 
ὡς πίστὰ ἐγίνετο τὰ ἀγγέλθεντα, τοῦτο μεν ες τὴν νησίδα 
x / δ ΟΕ d / ἣν A 
την. Ψυττάλειαν, μεταξυ Σαλαμῖνος τε κειμένην καὶ τῆς 
,ὔ X a f 2 / A X 
ἠπείρου, πολλους τῶν ITepcewy ἀπεβίβασαν, τοῦτο δε, 
3 Ἂν 5 / / 7 a XN a 3 τὶ id / 
ἐπειδὴ EYLVOVTO μέσαι νύκτες, ἀνῆγον μὲν TO UT ἐσπέρης 
7 , ny \ a aus N Cras Nec 
Kepas κυκλούμενοι πρὸς τὴν Σαλαμῖνα, ἀνῆγον Se οἱ aude 
‘ , \ Ν , / ree 2 
την Keov te καὶ την Kuvocovpav τεταγμενοι, κατεῖχον TE 
/ / / x Ἂν a / an 
μέχρι Μουνυχίης πάντα τὸν πορθμὸν τῇσι νηυσί. τῶνδε 
ἊΣ v4 Δ gs \ / “ Ν “ “ Ν 
δὲ εἵνεκεν ἀνῆγον τὰς veas, wa δὴ τοισι Βλλησι μηδὲ 
ra 2A 2 2 / 2 a a rn 
φυγεῖν ἐξῃ, aN ἀπολαμῴθεντες ev τῇ Σαλαμῖνι δοῖεν 
/ a 3325 / 5 , 3 Ν Ν r 
τίσιν τῶν eT Ἀρτεμισίῳ ἀγωνισμάτων. ἐς δὲ τὴν νησίδα 
\ (i? ’ 3 / a / 
τὴν Ψυτταλειαν καλεομένην ἀπεβιβαζον τῶν Περσέων 
a / € 3 Ν / 7 7 A / 
τῶνδε ELVEKEV, WS, ETEAV γένηται ναυμαχίη, ἐνθαῦτα μάλι- 
2 / a 2 tas Ν rn / > Ν 
στα aN ον τῶν τε ἀνδρῶν καὶ τῶν ναυηγίων (ἐν γαῇ | 
δὴ pores τῆς ναυμαχίης τῆς μελλούσης ἔσεσθαι ἐκέετο ἡ 
uAwOR) ἵνα τοὺς μὲν περιποιῶσι, τοὺς δὲ διδφδείθ! 
ἐποίευν δὲ σιγῇ ταῦτα, ὡς μὴ πυνθανοίατο οἱ ἐναντίοι. 
ς ‘ Ν = ~ ἈΝ δὴν 3 / 
Οἱ μὲν δὴ ταῦτω τῆς νυκτὸς οὐδὲν ἀποκοιμήθεντες παραρ- 
/ 
TEOVTO. 
A Ν 2 ra a 3 / 3 Ν 
55. Τῶν δὲ ev Σαλαμῖνι στρατηγων EYLVETO ὠθισμὸς 
’ , " \ 7 / / / 
λόγων πολλὸς. ἤδεσαν δὲ οὔκω OTL σφέας TEPLEKUKAEOVTO 
“ Ν Ὁ ,ὔ 3 Ὅτ a e / Ὡ 
τῇσι vyvot οὐ BupBapot, αλλ ὥσπερ τῆς ἡμέρης ὡρεον 
2 \ , IA 7 Ν ᾽ δ᾿ 
αὐτοὺς τεταγμένους, ἐδόκεον κατὰ χωρην εἶναι. συνεστη- 
, Ν a a > 2 / 7 > , ς 
κότων δὲ τῶν στρατηγῶν, εξ Αιγίνης διέβη ΔΑριστείδης ὁ 
’ δος 3 r Ν 3 / ‘ ς Ν 
Avoipayov, ἀνὴρ A@nvaios μεν, ἐξωστρακισμένος δὲ ὑπὸ 
lal / Ν > ἐὰν ’ὔ , 2 n Ν ΄ 
τοῦ δήμου, τὸν ἐγὼ νενόμικα, πυνθανόμενος αὐτοῦ τὸν τρό- 
4 + / 3 3 ᾿ <a / 
Tov, ἀρίστον ἄνδρα γενέσθαι ev Αθήνῃσι καὶ δικαιότατον. 





= 


VIIL, 81.] Counsel of Aristides. 177 


e Ν ae Ν 7 - , J 
οὗτος ὠνὴρ στὰς ἐπὶ TO συνέδριον ἐξεκαλέετο Θεμιστοκλέα, 
᾿ - Ν id = > \ 5 θ Ν δὲ Ἢ , Α ᾿ 2 

ἐόντα μὲν EWUTM οὐ φίλον, ἐχθρον ὃε Ta μαλιστα" ὑπὸ δὲ 


7 an , a 7 ᾽ / ΄ 
μεγάθεος τῶν παρεόντων κακῶν λήθην ἐκείνων ποιεύμενος 


͵ὔ 3 Λ > A re ‘ © 
ἐξεκαλέετο, ἐθέλων αὐτῷ συμμῖξαι. προακηκόεε δὲ ὅτι 
΄ « > Ν # > / Ν 7 Ν ‘ 
σπεύδοιεν ot ἀπὸ Πελοποννήσου ἀνάγειν Tas νέας πρὸς τὸν 
id \ IGA / e / δέ 
Ισθμόν. 56. ὡς de ἐξῆλθε οἱ Θεμιστοκλέης, ἔλεγε ’Api- 
/ / «ς / 4 / ? Y » 
στείδης τάδε: Hyeas στασιάζειν χρεὼν ἐστι, ἐν TE τῷ 
“ A Χ Ν eee. a ‘ ἐν ΣΟΥ, 4 φο 
ἄλλῳ καιρῷ καὶ δὴ καὶ ἐν τῷδε, περι τοῦ ὁκότερος ἡμέων 
/ ? \ x / 3 ’ , / “ 
πλέω ἀγαθὰ τὴν πατρίδα ἐργώσεται. λέγω δὲ ToL, ὅτι 
" > Ν , \ says , iS , a 
σον ἐστι πολλα TE καὶ OALYA λέγειν περὶ ἀἁποπλοου τοὺ 
> a I > Ν Ν > / / ᾿ 
ἐνθεῦτεν Πελοποννησίοισι. eyo γὰρ αὑτοπτῆς Tor λέγω 
/ cd “ Ia? «ἃ γ».,7 / 7 Ν So & 
γενόμενος, OTL νῦν, οὐδ ἣν εθελωσι Κορίνθιοι τε καὶ αὑτὸς 
> 7 a 7 " > a ἢ \ 
Ευρυβιάδης, οἷοί τε ἔσονται ἐκπλῶσαι" περιεχομεθα yap 
ς Ν r / »» 3 ee ’ rn / 
ὑπο TOV πολεμίων κύκλῳ. αλλ ἐσεέλθων σφι ταῦτα ση- 
«ς 3 > / / , Ν 
μηνον. 87%. °O δ ἀμείβετο τοισίδε" Kapta τε χρηστὰ 
΄ ‘5. 9 \ \ Oaks le ik. , , 
διακελεύεαι καὶ εὖ ἤγγειίλας. τὰ yap ἐγὼ ἐδεόμην γενέ- 
ae ay ΄ [2 + Ν ᾽ τς i 
σθαι, αὑτὸς αὐτόπτης γενόμενος ἥκεις. tole yap ἐξ ἐμέο 
N ΄ erL™ 7 Μ δ oe ? ε » 
τὰ ποιεύμενα ὑπὸ Mréwv. ἐδεε yup, ὅτε οὐκ ἕκοντες ἢθε- 
3 / / ed 2” 
λον es μάχην κατίστασθαι οἱ Ελληνες, aexovtas παρα- 
, ἈΝ Ν > / e/ Ν 2 / 
στήσασθαι. ov Se ἐπεὶ TEP ἥκεις χρηστὰ ἀπαγγέλλων, 
heer "“ \ \ % % ὙΠ: ὦ , / 7 
αὑτὸς oft ἀγγείλον. ἢν γὰρ ἐγὼ αὑτὰ λέγω, δόξω πλά- 
/ Ν > / ε 2 ΄ a , 
σας λέγειν, καὶ OV πείσω ὡς οὐ ποιεύντων τῶν βαρβάρων 
A 2 / , Te Ν ε x 
ταῦτα. ἀλλά ods σήμηνον αὑτὸς TapedOwy ws ἔχει. 
3 \ \ , = \ / A δ \ , 
ἔπεαν δὲ σημηνῃς, NV μεν πείθωνται, ταῦτα On τὰ καλλι- 
“ἡ Ν 3 -“ Ν \ / lal e r ἡ 
στα" ἢν δε αὐτοῖσι μὴ πιστὰ γένηται, ὁμοῖον ἡμῖν ἔσται. 
3 Ν y+ / / / 
ov γὰρ ἔτι διαδρήσονται, εἰ περ περιεχόμεθα πανταχόθεν, 
¢ " Y A 5 Ν €. 2 / 
ὡς ov λέγεις. 58. Ταῦτα edeye παρελθων ὁ Ἀριστείδης, 
V4 > ᾿ΕΝ 3 e/ Ν / > r Ν 
φάμενος ἐξ Αἰγίνης τε ἥκειν καὶ μόγις ἐκπλῶσαι λαθων 
Ν > / / Ν na Ν / 
TOUS ETTOppEovTas* περιέχεσθαι γὰρ πᾶν TO στρατόπεδον 
a Oe Ν Cas rn - a ee / , 6 Ι 
τὸ Ελληνικὸν ὑπὸ τῶν νεῶν τῶν Ξερξεω" παραρτεεσθαι 
> / \ ς x a 
τε συνεβούλευε ws ἀλεξησομένους. Καὶ ὁ μεν ταῦτα 


178 Haittle of Salamis. ee | 


o , a \ 5 ee / ’ 7 
εἴπας μετεστήκεε, τῶν δὲ αὖτις ἐγίνετο λόγων ἀμφισβασίη" 
«ς Ν a a “- > > i Ν >? 
οἱ yup πλεῦνες τῶν στρατηγῶν οὐκ ἐπείθοντο Ta εξαγγελ- 
/ > , ον ΄ ς , > a 
θέντα. 59. ὠπιστεόντων δὲ τούτων, ἧκε τριήρης ἀνδρῶν 
7 2 ’ A 5 SPR / ς 
Τηνίων αὐτομολεουσα, τῆς ἦρχε ἀνὴρ Παναίτιος ὁ Σωσι- 
,ὔ τ ἜΣ ἣν Ν 3 7 A Ν ᾿ rn 
μένεος, ἣ περ On ἔφερε THY ἀληθείην πᾶσαν. διὰ δε τοῦτο 
i MA > - , 7 >) a > / 
τὸ épyov ἐνεγράφησαν Τηνιοι ev Δελφοῖσι ἐς τὸν τρίποδα 
> cr Ν ΄ a Χ δὲ 9 ΄ a 
ἐν τοῖσι τὸν BupBapov κατελοῦσι. συν δὲ ὧν ταύτῃ TH 

ἌΣ: A > , ? a Ν a 7 >] 
vnL TH αὐτομολησασῃ ες Σαλαμῖνα, καὶ τῇ πρότερον ἐπ᾽ 
2 / »" / 3 A Ν Ν A 
Αρτεμίσιον τῇ Anuvin, εξεπληροῦτο TO ναυτικὸν τοῖσι 
¢ 4 Ν τὶ , Ν / / ty Ν 
Ελλησι ἐς τὰς ὀγδωκοντα καὶ τριηκοσίας veas. δύο γὰρ 

Ν An 7 / 3 Ν 5 / 
δὴ νεῶν τότε κατέδεε ἐς TOV ἀριθμὸν. 

60. Τοῖσι δὲ “Ελλησι ὡς πιστὰ δὴ τὰ λεγόμενα ἣν τῶν 
Τηνίων ῥήματα, Golgate ΕΗ, ἀντ ὡς ναυμαχήσοντες. ἠώς 
τε δὴ διέφαινε, καὶ ob σύλλογον τῶν ἐπιβατέων ποιησώμε- 

, ον \ 3 , , 

νοι, προηγόρευε εὖ ἔχοντα μὲν EK πάντων OewtoToKrENs, 

\ ‘ f > é ’ al 7 3 / 
τὰ δὲ ἔπεα ἦν παντα κρέσσω τοῖσι ἕσσοσι αντιτιθέμενα. 
e ‘9 2 7 7 x , 3 , 
ὅσα δε εν ἀνθρώπου φύσι Kal καταστάσι ἐγγίνεται, παραι- 
, Ν rg ‘ / ει Ν ,ὕ iN 
veaas δὴ τούτων τὰ κρέσσω alpecc Oat, καὶ καταπλεξας τὴν 
eA 2 7 eee 3 Ν / \ & > \ 
ῥῆσιν, ἐσβαίνειν ἐκέλευε ἐς τὰς νέας. καὶ οὗτοι μεν δὴ 
δ \ δ ΡΟ tons) Tat , ἃ N \ 
ἐσεβαινον, καὶ nee n am Alyiwns τριήρης, ἣ κατὰ τοὺς 

=) / 3 ,ὔ > A a \ / e , e 
Avaxioas ἀπεδήμησε. ενθαῦτα ἀνῆγον Tas veas ἁπάσας οἱ 
“ 3 / ’ 3. τ / e 
ἔλληνες. Gk. ἀναγομένοισι δὲ σφι αὐτίκα ἐπέεκέεατο οἱ 

’ ς XN Ν y+. ¢/ ᾽ ἃς ων» > | 
βάρβαροι. οἱ μὲν δὴ ἄλλοι EXXAnves ἐπὶ πρύμνην ave- 

΄ὔ΄ Ν Sf x , 9 ͵ὕ Ν \ 

Kpovovto Kat ὠκέλλον Tas νέας, Apewwins de Παλληνευς 
ΡΝ 3 A 93 Ν Ae) Λ / 
ἀνὴρ A@nvaios εξαναχθεὶς νηΐ euBarrEr. συμπλακείσης 
N A N Ν ? , ᾽ ~ / \ ε 
δὲ τῆς νεὸς, καὶ οὐ δυναμένων aTarraynvat, οὕτω δὴ οἱ 
+ ? / ’ὔ / > ral XN 
ἄλλον Αμεινιῃ βοηθέοντες συνέμισγον. Αθηναῖοι μεν 

7 / A / / XN 5 , τ a 
οὕτω λεγουσι τῆς ναυμαχίης γενέσθαι τὴν ἀρχὴν" Διγινῆ- 

Ν ν Ν Ν 2) / 3 ,ὔ 3 4 

Tat δὲ τὴν κατὰ τοὺς Αιακίδας ἀποδημήσασαν ἐς Αἴγιναν, 

7, > Ν y+ ͵ Ν Ν / e / 
ταύτην εἰναι THY apgacav. δλεγεταῖι δὲ καὶ τάδε, ὡς φάσμα 


σφι γυναικὸς ἐφάνη, φανεῖσαν δὲ διακελεύσασθαι, ὥστε καὶ 








VIIL, 87.] Exploit of Artemisia. 179 


Ψ eee « ῃ , ’ 
ἅπαν ἀκοῦσαι τὸ τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων στρατόπεδον, ὀνειδίσασαν 
͵ / > ͵ , , , 
πρότερον τάδε" 2 δαιμονιοι, weypt κόσου ἔτι πρύμνην 
? / Ν % \ ᾽ / > , 
ἀνακρούεσθε; 62. Kata μεν bn Αθηναίους ἐτετάχατο 
7 φ Ν 3 Ν Ν ᾽ ao pe ὃ 
Φοίνικες (οὗτοι γὰρ εἶχον τὸ πρὸς Ελευσῖνος τε καὶ ἑσπέ- 
7 Ν Ν / + e Ps 
ens κερας), κατὰ δὲ Λακεδαιμονίους Iwves: οὗτοι δ᾽ εἶχον 
Ν ." . "“ Ν a ’ 3 , / 
τὸ πρὸς THY ἠῶ τε καὶ TOV TIetpavea. εθελοκάκεον μέντοι 
ΣΝ . \ , 7 ee ἢ eas pa 
αὐτῶν κατὰ Tas Θεμίστοκλεος EVTONAS OALYOL, οἱ δὲ πλεῦνες 
Μ Μ / a > , / 
οὔ. ἔχω MEV νυν συχνῶν οννόματα τριηράρχων καταλέξαι 
“- / ¢ / ¢ / ’ Ν > - Ia’ 
τῶν νέας ᾿Ελληνίδας ἐλόοντων, χρήσομαι δὲ αὑτοῖσι οὐδεν 
ἶν , - / a 3? , Ν , 
πλὴν Θεομήστορος τε τοῦ Avdpodapavtos Kat Φυλάκου 
A °F ͵ ΝΥ / 3 4 ὴὃ δὲ ed 4, 
tov ‘Iotiatov, Σαμίων ἀμφοτέρων. τοῦδε Oe εἵνεκεν pe- 
΄ ΄ / , \ x a Ny 
μνημαι τούτων μούνων, OTL Θεομήστωρ μεν Ota τοῦτο TO 
/ > / / - / 
ἔργον Σάμου etupavvevoe καταστησάντων τῶν Περσεων, 
΄ Ν 3 7 ΄ > / Ν 7 
Φύλακος δὲ εὐεργέτης βασίλεος aveypadn καὶ χώρη οἱ 
3 / / ¢ > , 4 / > 4 
ἐδωρήθη πολλη. οἱ δ᾽ εὐεργεται βασίλεος οροσάγγαι κα’ 
/ 7 Ν , , v7 a 
Aeovtat Περσιστι. 68. Περὶ μὲν νυν τούτους οὕτω εἶχε, 
Ν Ν A a a 93 A ’ A ς Ν 
τὸ δὲ πλῆθος τῶν νεῶν ἐν τῇ Σαλαμῖνι εκεραΐζετο, αἱ μὲν 
| ee / 7, e A € > / 7 
ὑπ Αθηναίων διαφθειρόμεναι. αἱ δὲ ὑπ᾽ Αιγινητεων. ἅτε 
\ = \ ε ’ \ , , . 
yap τῶν μὲν ἔλληνων συν κόσμῳ ναυμαχεοντων κατὰ 
τάξιν a Se B Ba > / y+ ΝΜ ‘ , 
, τῶν δε βαρβάρων ov τεταγμένων ETL, οὔτε συν νόῳ 
ὥ Jar Μ a @# / ai 
TOLEOVTWY οὐδεν, ἐμελλε τοιοῦτο σφι συνοίσεσθαι οἷον περ 
a, / > ἢ SR Aa ΄ ἡ. 
ἀπέβη. καίτοι Noav γε καὶ ἐγένοντο ταύτην τὴν ἡμέρην 
lal % / > | XV ς A “ἉἋ Ν > / A 
μακρῳ ἀμείνονες αὐτοὶ ewutav ἢ πρὸς Ευβοίῃ, πᾶς τις - 
, Ν / —/ Ia/ / ° 
προθυμεόμενος καὶ δειμαίνων BepEea, edoxee Te ἕκαστος 
c \ , , N \ N x Υ 
ἐωυτον θηησεσθαι βασίλεα. 64. κατα μεν δὴ τοὺς ἄλλους 
> y , oe ᾽ , e 7 x 
οὐκ ἔχω μετεξετερους εἰπεῖν ἀτρεκέως WS ἕκαστοι τῶν 
΄, Ἃ a ε , / \ es. 
βαρβάρων ἢ τῶν Ελλήνων ἠγωνίζοντο, κατὰ δὲ Αρτεμι- 
/ s Said 545°) ἦμ 2 / A » Ν 
σίην τάδε ἐγένετο, AT ὧν εὐδοκίμησε μᾶλλον ETL παρὰ 
ΓΝ 2 \ \ 5) , N et \ 
βασιλεῖ" ἐπειδὴ yap ἐς θόρυβον πολλὸν ἀπίκετο τὰ 
,ὔ , 3 Y Α A a ¢ A Cc. 2 
Bacideos πρήγματα, ἐν τούτῳ τῷ καιρῷ ἡ νηῦς ἡ ἄρτεμι- 


΄, στα ets ἈΝ (ἢ a A > ¥ ὃ 
σίης ἐδιώκετο ὑπὸ νεὸς ATTLKNS* Kal ἣ οὐκ ἔχουσα δια- 


180 Battle of Salamis. [Herop, 


wn + εἶ > A 3 57. ’ὔ Λ 6 Ἁ 
φυγεῖν, ἐθπροσθε γὰρ αὐτῆς ἦσαν ἄλλαι vees φίλιαι, ἡ δες 
Se Ν a 7 / ee 4 + Ler ΒΩ / 
αὐτῆς πρὸς τῶν πολεμίων μάλιστα ετύγχανε εοῦσα, εδοξε 
¢ / A Ἂς \ / 7, 7 
οἱ τόδε ποιῆσαι, τὸ καὶ συνήνεικε ποιησάσῃ " διωκομένη 
ἃς ς Ν “ > A - ’ / Nu / > a 
yup ὑπὸ τῆς Ἀττικῆς, φέρουσα eveBare νηΐ φιλίῃ avopav 
7 \ > A 3 ,ὔ cS ! 
te Καλυνδέων, καὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπιπλώοντος τοῦ Καλυνδεων 
/ / 3 Ν Va ce Ν 
βασίλέος Δαμασιθύμουι GS εἰ μὲν καὶ TL νεῖκος προς 
as ? / y+ oC / 27 2 7 
αὐτὸν ἐγεγόνεε ett περὶ Εἰλλήσποντον εοὐντῶν, οὐ μέντου 
57 yf 3 a BY 4 ἊΣ 2 / Ten SN 3 / vy 
ἔγωγε EXW εἰπεῖν, οὔτε EL EK προνοίης αὐτὰ ἐποίησε, OUTE 
3 7 « a / SS ΄ = 
εἰ συνεκύρησε ἡ TOV Καλυνδεων kata τύχην παραπεσοῦσα 
a « Ν Pea 4 / ‘ / 2 / / 
νηῦς. ws de ἐνέβαλέ τε καὶ κατέδυσε, εὐτυχίῃ χρησαμένη 
ς Ν >) Ν 3 , 2 ἢ “- 3. “- 
διπλοα ἑωυτὴν ayafu ἐργάσατο" ὃ τε yap τῆς Ἀττικῆς 
Ν , € 30. 7 3 ΄. Ne 2 a 
νεὸς τριήραρχος, ws εἶδε piv ἐμβαλλουσαν νηΐ ἀνδρῶν 
/ / Ν Ve Ν ? / Ane I 
βαρβάρων, νομίσας τὴν νέα τὴν Αρτεμισίης ἢ Ελληνίδα 
3 Δ ? ΄ ᾽ a / Ν 2 8 Deas ὦ 
εἶναι ἢ αυὐτομολεειν ex τῶν βαρβάρων καὶ avToLoL ἀμύνειν, 
3 ΄ Ν x 3 ͵ a \ 
ἀποστρέψας πρὸς addas ἐτράπετο. G6. ToUTO μεν TOL- 
a 3 A 7 ͵ a Ν Ν >} 
οὔτο αὑτῇ συνήνεικε γενέσθαι διαφυγεῖν τε καὶ μὴ ἀπο- 
7 « δ / e/ Ν > , Shas 
λέσθαι" τοῦτο δε συνεβὴ WaTE κακὸν ἐργασαμένην ἀπὸ 
4 ΚΝ ΄ > a \ ea? / 
τούτων αὐτὴν μάλιστα εὐδοκιμῆσαι Tapa Ξερξη. λέγεται 
Ν ͵ ΄ r Ν / > a Ν 
γὰρ βασιλέα θηεύμενον μαθεῖν τὴν νέα εμβαλοῦσαν, καὶ 
’ 9 a / / ς a > / 
67 τινα εἶπαι τῶν παρεόντων" Δέσποτα, opas Ἀρτεμισίην, 
i eee / \ / a / ἐδ \ 
ὡς εὖ aywvieTaL καὶ νεα τῶν πολεμίων κατεῦυσε; καὶ 
x 5 ἢ 2 3 ’ὔ 3 a / Δαν ἈΓ Ν 
Tov εἐπείρεσθαι εἰ ἀληθεως ἐστὶ Ἀρτεμισίης TO Epyov, καὶ 
Ν. ͵ re xX 3 A ‘ 3 / 
τοὺς φάναι, σαφέως τὸ ἐπίσημον τῆς νεὸς επισταμενους" 
x ἂν ὃ a > , 5 / 4 
τὴν δε διαφθαρεῖσαν ἠπιστέατο εἶναι πολεμίην. TA TE 
Ν 5 ¢ yy 3 3 κι 7 9 >. / / 
YUP ἄλλα. ὡς ELPNTAL, AUTH συνήνεικε ES εὐτυχίην YEVO- 
Ν ᾿ς an 3 ~ A ἐν / 3 
μενα, καὶ τὸ τῶν ἐκ τῆς Καλυνδικῆς νεὸς μηδενα ἀποσω- 
/ , ͵ Ν 3 / 
θεντα κατήγορον γενέσθαι. Ἐέρξην δὲ εἶπαι λέγεται 
ἊΝ Ἂς / ¢ \ + ; / Lay 
προς Ta φραζομενα" Ov μὲν ἄνδρες γεγονασι μοι yUVatKes, 
e δὲ n BA a \ ee / ἐς Ν 3 
ἂν O€ γυναῖκες avopes. ταῦτα μεν Ἐερξην φασὶ εἶπαι. 
ΠΝ Ν va) ᾿ 4 Caos ‘ Μ ς Ν 
67. Ev δὲ τῷ πόνῳ τούτῳ amo μεν ἔθανε ὁ στρατηγος 
3 , ¢ / fe / 9X ᾽ N > Ἑἔ ἈΝ 
ApiaBiyyns ὁ Δαρείου, Ξέρξεω ἐὼν aderdeos, ἀπὸ δὲ 


VIII., 90.] Xerxes views the Battie. 181 


». , Ν ? Ν ᾽ὔ ‘ 
ἄλλοι πολλοί τε καὶ οὐνομαστοὶ Περσέων καὶ Μήδων καὶ 
a wy. ΄’, τὶ / , Ν 
τῶν ἄλλων συμμάχων, ὀλίγοι δὲ τινες καὶ “Ἑλλήνων. ἅτε 
A 7 ΕῚ rd ΄σ ᾿ς / ‘ 
γὰρ νέειν ἐπιστάμενοι, τοῖσι αἱ νέες διεφθείροντο, καὶ μὴ 
σι , > ey ᾽ ν Σ' x = διέ 
ἐν χειρῶν νόμῳ ἀπολλύμενοι, ες τὴν Σαλαμῖνα διένεον. 
Ν 7] « \ 2 a / , 
τῶν δὲ βαρβάρων οἱ πολλοὶ ev τῇ θαλάσσῃ διεφθάρησαν, 
4 2 > , » Ν Ν ¢e cr 7 Ν ᾿᾽ , 
νέειν οὐκ ἐπιστάμενοι. επεὶ SE αἱ πρῶται ες φυγὴν ἐτρά- 
$ al ( al / € ‘ Μ 
ποντο, ἐνθαῦτα αἱ πλεῖσται διεφθείροντο. οἱ yap ὄπισθε 
/ > Ν / a Ν ΄ ᾽ὔ 
τεταγμένοι, ἐς τὸ πρόσθε τῇσι νηυσὶ παριεναι πειρώμενοι, 
td 2 f ,ὔ εἶ ? Vara Lie na / 
ὡς ἀποδεξόμενοι TL καὶ avToL ἐργον βασιλεῖ, τῆσι σφετε- 
Ν ΄ / > / Ν 
ρησι νηυσὶ φευγούσῃσι περιέπύπτον. 68. ἔγενετο de 
\ / > a / / a / ~ 4 
καὶ τόδε EV τῷ θορύβῳ τούτῳ τῶν τινες Φοινίκων, τῶν αἱ 
/ / 2 , Ν / / \ 
νέες SvebOapato, ἐλθόντες παρὰ Bacirea διεβαλλον τοὺς 
a e > > / Ψ / ¢ / e 7 
Ιωνας, ὡς δι ἐκείνους ἀπολοίατο αἱ νέες, ὡς προδόντων. 
, 3 » » > 7 Ν Ν A 
συνήνεικε ὧν οὕτω ὥστε Ιωνων τε τοὺς στρατηγοὺς μὴ 
2 / , \ , a , 
ἀπολέσθαι. Φοινίκων τε Tous διαβάλλοντας λαβεῖν τοιόνδε 
ΕΣ ΄ a VA JBL ἢ 3.9 a 
μισθὸν" ἐτι τούτων ταῦτα λεγόντων ἐνεβαλε νηὶ Αττικῇ 
ele de A e/ ἥδ Ν ’, Ν > 
Σαμοθρηϊκίη νηῦς. ἣ τε On AttiKn κατεδύετο, καὶ ἐπι- 
,ὔὕ 3 / a / a fe ‘ 
φερομένη Auywain νηῦς κατέδυσε τῶν Σαμοθρηΐκων τὴν 
/ cd \ 7 > Ν ¢ foie a > 
yea. ἅτε On ἐόντες ἀκοντισταὶ οἱ Σαμοθρήϊκες τοὺς ἐπι- 
7 aS aX = ’ N , ner 
βάτας ἀπὸ τῆς καταδυσάσης νεὸς βάλλοντες απηραξαν, 
‘ : / , Ν Μ > , a / 
καὶ ἐπεβησὰν τε (Rab Coxon αὐτήν. 69. ταῦτα γενόμενα 
τοὺς Ἴωνας ἐρρύσατο. ὡς γὰρ εἶδέ σφεας Ξέρξης ἔργον 
μέγα ἐργασαμένους, ἐτράπετο πρὸς τοὺς Φοίνικας, οἷα 
ον, 
ὑπερλυπεόμενος τε καὶ πάντας αἰτιώμενος, καί σῴφεων EKE- 
Ν 4 5 “ “ \ > Ν Ἁ / 
Aevoe Tas Kehadas αποταμεῖν, Lva μὴ GUTOL κακοί τγχνο- 
‘ 2 / ’ “ / yy 
μενοι Tous ἀμείνονας διαβάλλωσι. ὅκως yap τινα ἰδοι 
»ι’ a ¢ a ? ΄ ? . 
Ξερξης τῶν ἑωυτοῦ ἔργον τι ἀποδεικνύμενον ἐν τῇ ναυμα- 
/ / an . xy oe a ? / r λ 
χίη; κατήμενος ὑπὸ τῷ οὐρεὶ τῷ ἀντίον Zadapivos, τὸ 
, > i ? 7 Ν , Ν ε 
καλέεται Αἰγάλεως, ἀνεπυνθάνετο τὸν ποιήσαντα, καὶ οἱ 
Ν , / / ἥδ ,ὔ Ἁ 
γραμματισταὶ ἀνέγραφον πατρόθεν τὸν τριήραρχον καὶ 
Ν , Ν / Ν / Λ nN 
τὴν πόλιν. πρὸς δέ Te καὶ προσεβάλετο φίλος εν 


182 Battle of Salamis. [Herop. 


9 , ΦΊῊΝ , ΗΝ 4 ." oh; 
Αριαράμνης ἀνὴρ Πέρσης παρεὼν τούτου τοῦ Φοινικηΐου -ς 
/ 
maQeos. 
Ν x Ν XN / 2 , a 
70. Οἱ μὲν δὴ πρὸς τοὺς Φοίνικας ἐτράποντο" τῶν δὲ 
, ? x / ᾿ SS , a x 
βαρβάρων es φυγὴν τραπομενὼν Kal ἐκπλωόντων προς TO 
Φ ~~ Al A ξ ’ὔ 3 A θ ἊΨ , δέ 
ἄληρον, Αἰγινῆται ὕποσταντες EV τῷ πορθμῷ Epya αἀπεδε- 
’ / e ‘ δ 2 a > a ? 
Eavto λόγου ἄξια. οἱ μὲν yap AOnvator ev τῷ θορύβῳ 
3 La ’ 3 / Ν Ν ig A 
exepuitov Tus τε ἀντισταμένας καὶ Tas evyovcas τῶν 
A ¢ Ν >) a x 3 Ψ ed ‘ ‘ 
νεῶν, οἱ δὲ Αἰγινῆται τὰς ἐκπλωοῦσας " ὅκως δὲ τινες TOUS 
9 / 2 / 3 ᾿ ? Ν᾽ , 
Αθηναίους διαφύγοιεν, φερόμενοι ἐσέπιπτον ες Tous Αιγι- 
2 A ΄ , , 
yytas. Vl. ᾿Ενθαῦτα συνεκύρεον νέες ἥ τε Θεμιστοκλέος 
, ΄ Ἃ, ς / a 4 3 ἧς 5 
διώκουσα νέα, καὶ ἡ Πολυκρίτου τοῦ Κρίου ἀνδρὸς Αιγινή- 
Ἀν ts a / / -- XN ΄ 
τεω νηΐ ἐμβαλοῦσα Seven, ἢ sate ἘΠΕ τ μὴ ἐρυ οα νει 
3 Ν , Ν / Ὁ e 
σουσαν ἐπὶ Σκιάθῳ τὴν Aryivainv, er ἧς ἔπλεε Πυθεης ὁ 
3 ὔ N e , ͵ ᾽ a “ a 
Ισχενοου, Tov ot Περσαι κατακοπεντα ἀρετῆς εἰνεκεν εἶχον 
3 a ek U » Ν / 7 - 
ἐν τῇ νηΐ ἐκπαγλεόμενοι. τὸν δὴ περιάγουσα ἅμα τοῖσι 
/ /. a e / 7 / τ a 
Πέρσῃσι ἥλω νηῦς ἡ Σιδωνίη, ὥστε Πυθέην οὕτω σωθῆναι 
3 , « Ν 3 ΄ Ν £ ‘ > Ν ΄’ 
ἐς Αἴγιναν. ὡς δε εσεῖδε τὴν vea τὴν Αττικην ὁ Πολύ- 
x Ἀ ».. ΩΝ A / ἧς , 
κριτος, ἔγνω TO σημήϊον ἰδὼν τῆς στρατηγίδος, καὶ βωσας 
δὰ ’ 3 “ > fr ’ 4 Ν 
τὸν Θεμιστοκλεα ἐπεκερτόμησε ες τῶν Διγινητεων τον 
Ν 93 / a / a. 3 s 7 
μηδισμὸν ὀνειδίζων. ταῦτα μέν νυν νηΐ euBarwv ὁ Πολύ- 
> / 3 / C4 ἊΣ ’ al e 
Kpttos ἀπέρριψε ἐς Θεμιστοκλέα" ot de βάρβαροι, τῶν ar 
, / / 3 , > , ΦΟΝ Ν 
νέες περιεγένοντο, φεύγοντες ἀπίκοντο ἐς Φαληρον ὑπὸ τον 
πεζὸν στρατόν. 7%. Ev δὲ τῇ ναυμαχίη ταύτη ἤκουσαν 
ἶ parov. 72. Ἐν δὲυτῆιναυμαχον mama rie 
, ’ > A 5. hl ees n a \ 
Ελλήνων ἄριστα Αἰγινῆται, ἐπὶ δὲ Αθηναῖοι, avipov de 
4 ,ὔ , > rn > 4 
Πολύκριτος τε ὁ Αἰγινήτης καὶ ᾿Αθηναῖοι Evpevns te ὁ 
3 ΄ὔ i κ 7 , Ν \ \ 9? , 
Avayvpacwos καὶ Apewvins Παλληνευς, ὃς καὶ Aptepounv 
᾽ , 2 / x Ψ 2 ΄ , 3 
ἐπεδιωξε. εἰ μὲν νυν ἔμαθε ὅτι εν ταύτῃ TAWOL ApTe- 
t 
, ea 9 ΄ , Ἃ a? \ N > N 
μισίη, οὐκ ἂν ἐπαύσατο πρότερον ἢ εἷλε μιν ἢ καὶ AUTOS 
¢/- a ἊΝ > , ’ / 
ἥλω. τοῖσι yap Αθηναίων τριηράρχοισι παρεκεκελεύστο, 
Ν XN Sy Sel ΄ NA acy. > 
πρὸς δὲ καὶ ἄεθλον exeeTo μύριαι δραχμαὶ, os ἂν pw Conv 
σ΄. Ν ,ὔ 3 A A ao A , 7ὔ 
ἕλη" δεινὸν yap τι ἐποιεῦντο γυναῖκα ἐπὶ tas Αθηνας 





VIII, 95.] Story of: the Corinthians. 188 


/ 4 Ν Ἂ e ; y / 
στρατεύεσθαι. αὕτη μὲν 57, ws πρότερον εἰρηταῖ, διέ- 
Φ Ν Ν Ce “ ε / / > 
φυγε, σαν δὲ καὶ οἱ ANXOL, τῶν AL VEES περιεγεγονεσαν, εν 
κ ’ 
τῷ Φαλήρῳ. 
7 \ ἈΝ 7 Ν , 
73. “Adciuavtov δὲ tov Κορίνθιον στρατηγὸν λέγουσι 
’ nw > /, > > Ν [2 ’ « ’ > 
Αθηναίοι αὐτίκα κατ ἄρχας, ὡς συνεμισγον αἱ νέες, εκ- 
/ ¢ “ veg / ᾽ / 4 
πλαγέντα TE καὶ ὑπερδείσαντα, τὰ ἱστία ἀειράμενον οἴχε- 
΄ >] , Ν Ν / Ν / 
σθαι φεύγοντα, ἰδόντας δὲ τοὺς Κορινθίους τὴν στρατηγίδα 
΄ ε ΄ ΕΣ ε ν ” ΄ 
φεύγουσαν, ὡσαύτως οἴχεσθαι. ὡς δὲ ἄρα φεύγοντας 
A / Ν RS 7 / 
γίνεσθαι τῆς Σαλαμινίης κατὰ τὸ ipov ᾿Αθηναίης Σ'κιράδος, 
περιπίπτειν σφι κέλητα θείῃ πομπῇ, τὸν οὔτε πέμψαντα 
φανῆναι ovdeva, οὔτε TL τῶν απὸ τῆς στρατιῆς εἰδόσι 
/ a 7 a \ , 
προσφέρεσθαι τοῖσι Κορινθίοισι. τῆδε δὲ συμβάλλονται 
a Ν A e Ν 3 “- / ral a 
εἶναι θεῖον τὸ πρῆγμα" ὡς γὰρ ἀγχοῦ γενέσθαι τῶν νεῶν, 
ἣν ees A / / , 3 / \ Ἀ 
τοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ κέλητος λέγειν τάδε: Αδείμαντε, συ μὲν 
9 / ‘ / > Ν ε Ν \ 
ἀποστρέψας Tas νέας ἐς φυγὴν ὥρμησαι Katatrpodous τοὺς 
e/ « Ἂς \ Ν rf d ? Ν > rad > 
Ελληνας " οἱ δε καὶ δὴ νικῶσι, ὅσον avTot ἠρῶντο ἐπικρα- 
A A ? a A / >? / s 
τῆσαι τῶν ἐχθρῶν. 4. Ταῦτα λεγόντων, ἀπίστέειν yap 
\ >? , > / / ΄ 2 Ἂς ῳ, > 
tov Adeiwavtor, αὔτις Tade λέγειν, WS αὐτοὶ οἷοί TE εἶεν 
I) / ᾽ , λ \ a , 
ἀγόμενοι ὅμηροι ἀποθνήσκειν, ἢν μὴ νικῶντες φαίνωνται οἱ 
σ ed δι ? / ‘ αἱ 2 / Ν 
Ελληνες. οὕτω δὴ ἀποστρέψαντα την νεα, αὑτὸν TE καὶ 
Χ y ᾽ 3," Ψ 3 lal a ἃς / 
TOUS ἄλλους, ew εξεργασμενοίσι ἐλθεῖν ες TO στρατόπεδον. 
T. rs \ ΄ / ¥ εν. 40 ? / 
οὕτους μὲν τοιαύτη φάτις ἔχει ὑπὸ ναίων. OV μέντοι 
? / , ᾽ 8 .ἢ , / 
αὐτοί ye Κορίνθιοι ὁμολογέουσι. addr ἐν πρώτοισι σφέας 
3 \ A / / / / 
αὐτοὺς τῆς ναυμαχίης νομίζουσι γενέσθαι, μαρτυρέει δὲ σφι 
oe δ 5“Ὁ 7 \ ΄ ’ ῷ ὐᾺ 
καὶ ἡ ἄλλη ᾿Ελλάς. 75. ᾿Αριστείδης δὲ ὁ Δυσιμάχου ἀνὴρ 
᾿] A - 5 / 4 > / 
A@nvaios, τοῦ καὶ ολίγῳ τι πρότερον τούτων ἐπεμνήσθην 
e > % 3 / e 3 - Fi 7 “ Ν 
ὡς: ἀνδρὸς ἀρίστου, οὗτος ἐν τῷ θορύβῳ τούτῳ τῷ περὶ 
ir / / Ἵ / Ν ‘ rn 
Σαλαμῖνα γενομένῳ τάδε ἐποίεε: παραλαβὼν πολλοὺς τῶν 
, Ν 2 ν A 
ὁπλιτέων. Ot TAPATETAYATO Tapa τὴν ἀκτὴν τῆς Σαλαμι- 
7 / / 7 ? nr .] \ , 
vins χώρης, γένος eovtes AOnvaior, es τὴν Ψυτταλειαν 
A 5 4 5 ἃ Ἃς, \ >] ~ δ 
νῆσον ἀπεβησε ἄγων, ot tous Πέρσας τοὺς ev τῇ νησῖδι 


΄ , ’ 
ταὐυτῃ κατεφόνευσαν TavTas. 


184 Retreat of Xerxes. [Herov. 


\ Le / 7. 7 3 SY 
76. ᾿ς δὲ ἡ ναυμαχίη διέλελυτο, κατειρύσαντες ES τὴν 
7) 7 
Sarai be TORK ὃν ναυηγίων ὅσα ταύτη ἐτύγνανε 
αλαμινα οἱ ἡνες των vauny ῃ YX 
+ 7 ς κε > 2 7 4 3 / 
€TL E€OVTA, ETOLMOL ἦσαν ες ἄλλην ναυμαχίην, ἐλπίζοντες 
a Ye Ν +S / θα βασ ΝΕ ra δὲ 
THOL περιεουσησι νηυσι ETL χρήσεσθαι thea. των OE 
/ X ς Ν ΝΜ ’ “ἤ A 
ναυηγίων πολλα ὑπολαβὼν ἄνεμος ζεφυρος εφερε τῆς 
9 A 3... dN \ ψι Ν / / «“ 
ATTLKNS ἐπὶ τὴν Niova τὴν καλεομενὴν Κωλιαδα" ὥστε 
9 in X Ν ’ SA 7 iS < 
ἀποπληῆσαι TOV χρήσμον τὸν TE αλλον παντα τον περί 
A / f 3 4 re Ν / 
τῆς ναυμαχίης ταύτης εἰρημένον Βακιδι καὶ Μουσαίῳ, 
Ν δὴ Ν Ν \ / Ν »Ἤ εξ 6é Ν > 
Kat δὴ Kal κατὰ τὰ eee Ta TaVTN εξενειχθεντα TO εἰ 
ld a Μ 7 3 A 
ρημενον TOANOLTL ETETL πρότερον τουτων EV χρησμῳ Avot- 
/ ? / 3 Ν , ΠΥ Τὶ , é 
στράτῳ ᾿Αθηναίῳ avopt χρησμολόγῳ, TO ἐλεληθεε TravTas 
Ν ¢ 
tous Ελληνας, 


Κωλιάδες δὲ γυναῖκες ἐρετμοῖσι φρύξουσι " 


= Ny ἢ 3 ‘ , 4 
τοῦτο δὲ ἔμελλε ἀπέλασαντος βασίλεος Ecco Oat. 
) \ e Μ Ν x 4, , s 
77. Ἐερξης de, ws ἐμαθε τὸ γεγονὸς πάθος, δείσας μὴ 
A 3 , ἐπὶ A a ¢ x > Ν Ψ 
τις τῶν Iwvev ὑποθῆται τοῖσι ᾿ Εἔλλησι, ἢ αὐτοὶ νοηήσωσι 
> ‘ € / 7 Ν ΄ XN 
πλώειν ἐς τὸν EXXnoTovtov λύσοντες Tas γεφύρας, καὶ 
2 Ν 3 A ᾽ he τὶ , Fad 
ἀπολαμφθεὶς ev τῇ Εὐρώπῃ ἀπολέεσθαι κινδυνεύσῃ, δρη- 
Ν > 4. 3 ’ Ν ᾿Ὶ » ὦ / 9 / a 
σμὸν ἐβούλευε" ἐθέλων δὲ μὴ ἐπίδηλος εἶναι pNnTE τοῖσι 
Ω ’ A ¢€ a > ἈΝ ΄ a > 
Ελλησι μητε τοῖσι ἑωυτοῦ, es τὴν Σαλαμῖνα χῶμα εἐπει- 
A re 7 ἢ / vA 2 / 
pato διαχοῦν, γαυλούς τε Φοινικηΐους συνεέδεε, wa ἀντί τε 
/ “ ἂν , 2 / / 3 , ε 
σχεδίης ἔωσι καὶ τείχεος, APTEETO TE ἐς πόλεμον, ὡς ναυ- 
/ 7 / ere: / / e 
μαχίην ἄλλην ποιησόμενος. ὁρέοντες δὲ ply πάντες ob 
a ’ 3 ,ὔ od 2 Ν ,ὕ 
ἄλλοι ταῦτα πρήσσοντα, εὖ ἠπιστέατο ὡς ἐκ παντὸς νόου 
΄ὔ / 7 / ’ Ian 
παρεσκεύασται μένων πολεμήσειν: Μαρδονιον ὃ οὐδεν 
΄ 3 , td ΄, + 5. A > , 
τούτων ἐλάνθανε, ὡς μάλιστα ἐμπειρον EOVTA τῆς εκείνου 
/ A , [72 ms / 3 , « ΝΜ 
διωνοίης. Ἴϑδ. Ταῦτα τε ἅμα Ξερξης ἐποίεε, καὶ ἔπεμπε 
3 ,ὔ 3 / ἊΝ, a / , 
es Πέρσας ἀγγελέοντα τὴν παρεοῦσαν σφι συμφορῆην. 
4 XN a 2 4 y Par ed a 
τούτων δὲ τῶν ἀγγέλων ἔστι οὐδὲν ὃ TL θᾶσσον πα- 
αγίνεται θνητὸν ἐόν" οὕτω τοῖσι Πέρσησι ἐξεύρηται 
pay | se υ τ ρσῃ Up 








VIII, 108.] Tidings brought to Persia. 185 


io , Ν e od “Δ ξ / 53 ξ ~ tan 
τοῦτο. λέγουσι yap, ὡς ὅσων ἂν ἡμερέων ἢ ἡ πᾶσα ὁδὸς, 
- “ Ν Μ᾽ a ‘ 
τοσοῦτοι ἵπποι TE καὶ ἄνδρες διεστᾶσι, κατὰ ἡμερησίην 
A \ ee 7 \ 
ὁδὸν ἑκάστην ἵππος TE καὶ ἀνὴρ τεταγμένος, TOUS οὔτε 
ἣν > Μ 2 a ? \ » Ἀ > 
νιφετὸς, οὐκ ὄμβρος, ov καῦμα, ov νυξ Epyet μὴ οὐ κατα- 
΄ N 7 ς a / \ / \ 
VUTAL TOV προκείμενον ἑωυτῷ δρόμον THY ταχίστην. ὁ μὲν 
a Ν “ Ν 2 / - / 
δὴ πρῶτος δραμὼν παραδιδοῖ τὰ ἐντεταλμένα τῷ δευτέρῳ, 
An / Ν Ν >] a yy > 7 
ὁ δὲ δεύτερος τῷ τρίτῳ" τὸ δὲ ἐνθεῦτεν ἤδη κατ᾽ ἄλλον 
/ : / ’, “ ¢ 
διεξέρχεται παραδιδόμενα, κατώπερ ᾿ Ελλησι ἡ λαμπαδη- 
/ Ἂς Loi a 7 2 / A Ν , 
opin, τὴν τῷ Ἡφαίστῳ ἐπιτελέουσι. τοῦτο τὸ δρώμημα 
rn f / 3 y Ἀν ς Ν ‘ 
τῶν ἵππων καλέουσι Πέρσαι ayyapyiov. 79. Ἢ pev δὴ 
/ 3 an 3 / 3 / «ς 4 > 7 — " 
TpwTH ἐς Σοῦσα ἀγγελίη ἀπικομένη, ws eyot AOnvas Ἐέρ- 
Μ / / / Ν ς , c 
Ens, ἔτερψε οὕτω δὴ τι Περσέων tous ὑπολειφθέντας, ws 
, ¢ N / / 3 / Se J 
Tas τε ὁδοὺς μυρσίνῃ πάσας ἐστόρεσαν, Kat εθυμίεον θυ- 
, \ 2 \ 9 > 7 / Ν » f e 
pinwata, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἦσαν ev θυσίῃσὶ τε καὶ εὐπαθείῃησι" ἡ 
XN , > / 2 A / «“ «“ 
δὲ δευτέρη σῴφι ἀγγελίη ἐπεξελθοῦσα συνέχεε οὕτω, ὥστε 
* a Z / Ὁ Ν " A 
tous κιθῶνας κατερρήηξαντο πάντες, Bon τε καὶ οἰμωγῇ 
? / > , 3 ΡΨ. , 2 τ 
ἔχρέοντο ὠπλέτῳ, Μαρδονιον ev αἰτίῃ τιθέντες. οὐκ οὕτω 
Ν Ν nr A > 7 an ¢ / Ἂ f c 
de περὶ τῶν νεῶν ἀχθόμενοι ταῦτα οἱ Πέρσαι ἐποίευν, ws 
Ν 2 » / / 
περὶ αὐτῷ Ἐέρξη δειμαίνοντες. 
mm 7 Ν ς Ν a ? 7 3 , 
80. Ξέρξης δὲ ws Tous παῖδας ᾿Αρτεμισίῃ ἐπέτρεψε 
3 ’ Ἂ δι. ΓΚ / / ᾿] 4 / A 
atrayew ες Edecov, καλέσας Mapdoviov ἐκέλευσέ μιν τῆς 
A / x A \ ΄ cal , 
OTPATLYS διαλέγειν Tous βούλεται, καὶ ποιέειν τοῖσι λο- 
beat. ἢ / e - ΄ \ ‘ e / 
γοισι τὰ Epya πειρεόμενον OMoLa. ταύτην μὲν τὴν ἡμέρην 
2 A {eRe A ἡ ὦ Ν ΄ ΄ 
ες TODOUTO εγίνετο" τῆς δε νυκτὸς, κελεύσαντος βασιλέος, 
Ἄς / ¢ Ν 3 cal > A " ᾽ 
τὰς veas οἱ στρατηγοὶ Ex τοῦ Φαλήρου ἀπῆγον ὀπίσω ἐς 
Ν id 7ὔ Τὶ “- 
tov Ελλήσποντον. ὡς τάχεος εἶχε ἕκαστος, διαφυλαξούσας 
Ἂς / A | 3 Ν Ν > aA 3 
Tas σχεδίας πορευθῆναι βασιλεῖ. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἀγχοῦ ἦσαν 
A / « ΄ 3 Ν ΕΣ 
Ζωστῆρος πλώοντες οἱ βάρβαροι, ἀνατείνουσι yap ἄκραν 
Xx Ν A ΕῚ / 7 ἘΝ , / 3 ΝΥ » 
ETTAL τῆς ἠπείρου ταύτης, ἐδοξαν τε νέας εἶναι καὶ ἐφευ- 
ας , , \ , / > ΄ 3 ; > 
γον emt πολλὸν. χρόνῳ δὲ μαθόντες ὅτι οὐ νέες εἶεν αλλ 
x / 2 7 ε \ c 7 > 
ἄκραι, συλλεχθέντες ἐκομίζοντο. 81. Qs de ἡμέρη eye 


186 Retreat of Xerxes. [Hrrop. 


φ / meh x if 7 Ν 
νετο, ὁρέοντες of βλληνες κατὰ χωρηὴν μένοντα τὸν στρα- 
N N d + Ν \ ΄ 53 Ν /- 
Tov Tov πεζον, ἤλπιζον καὶ τὰς νέας εἶναι περὶ Φάληρον, 
) / / / / Uy / CS 3 
ἐδόκεον τε ναυμαχήσειν σφέας, παραρτέοντό τε ὡς ἀλεξη- 
7 3 XN Ἂ 2 ΄ Ἂν / 5 / 3 ͵7 
σόμενοι. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἐπύθοντο τὰς νέας οὐχωκυίας, αὐτίκα 
\ A In? 2 , N / N Ν 
μετὰ ταῦτα ἐδόκεε ἐπιδιώκειν. τὸν μὲν νυν ναυτικὸν τὸν 
ma / Ν > 3 an , / »¥ > 
Ξέρξεω στρατὸν οὐκ ἐπεῖδον διωξαντες μέχρι᾽ Avdpov, ἐς 
. Ν ΕΣ 2 , 3 7 δ ,ὔ 
de τὴν Avdpov ὠπίκόμενοι ἐβουλεύοντο. Θεμιστοκλέης 
΄ 7 ’ / \ , aay Ν 
μέν νυν γνώμην ἀπεδείκνυτο, διὰ νήσων τραπομένους καὶ 
> , ἈΝ / Ve 3 Ψ SN Ν ς / 
ἐπιδιωξαντας Tas νέας, TWAWELW ἰθέως ἐπὶ Tov Ελλήσποντον 
7 Ν tA 2 ΄ Ν XN 3 7 
λύσοντας τὰς γεφύρας. 82. Εὐρυβιάδης δὲ τὴν ἐναντίην 
ve , 2 Θ % / e 5 i ΄ Ν 5 / 
ταύτῃ γνώμην ἐτίθετο, λέγων ws, EL λύσουσι τὰς σχεδίας, 
aA > / ᾽ a Ν Ν € / > , 
TOUT ἂν μέγιστον πάντων σφεῖς κακὸν τὴν Ελλάδα εργα- 
>) Ν 3 / 3 Ν « 4 F 
σαιντο. εἰ yap ἀαναγκασθείη ἀπολαμφθεὶς ὁ Πέρσης μέ- 
3 A 5. ΤΣ» a x ¢ / νος ἂν ς 
νειν ἐν τῇ ξυρωώωπῃ, πειρῷτο ἂν ἡσυχίην μὴ ἄγειν" ὡς 
A / δ ¢ / Μ / al Μ 
ἄγοντι μὲν OL ἡσυχίην οὔτε TL TPOXWPEEW οἷον τε ἔσται 
α ΄, “ N Ay / , a 
TOV TPNYMATWV, οὔτε TLS κομιδὴ TO ὁπίσω φανήσεται, λιμῷ 
/ ς Ὁ δῷς ’ 3 / ᾿ς 3 a Ν 
TE οἱ 1 στρατιὴ διαφθαρέεται" επιχειίρέοντι δὲ αὐτῷ καὶ 
y 2 7 , Ἀ Ἀ ἈΝ 5) ,ὔ ar ΕΣ 
εργου ἐχομένῳ Tavta τὰ κατὰ τὴν Ἐυρωπὴν otu τε ἔσται 
A Ν , Ν 3 yf + ¢ 
προσχωρῆσαι κατὰ πόλις TE καὶ KaT εθνεα, NTOL ἀλι- 
/ ΝΥ Ν 7 e U Ἄ 
σκομένων γε ἢ πρὸ τούτου ομολογεοντων. τροφὴν TE 
vf ΄ Ν 3 δεν Ae ΄ / ? x 
ἕξειν σφέας τὸν ἐπέτεον αἰεὶ τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων καρπὸν. ἀλλὰ 
6 Ν 7, a / ? / > a 2 
StecciD ‘yap νικηθέντα νόσων ἀλη αν ein é TN τ 
/ 3 9 3 δ 
ρωπῃ τον Ilepcea, ἐατέον ὧν εἶναι φεύγειν, ἐς ὃ ἐλθη φεύ- 
2 S ς a ὟΝ a ἊΣ ᾿Ν a 3 , ΄ 
yov es τὴν ἑωυτοῦ. τὸ ἐνθεῦτεν SE περὶ τῆς ἐκείνου TOLE- 
θ + Ν 3 Ἃς Dae. 7 ee, A A 7 
εσθαι non τὸν ἀγῶνα ἐκέλευε. ταύτης δὲ εἴχοντο τῆς γνω- 
\ ΄ a x ς / 
ens καὶ Πελοποννησίων τῶν ἄλλων οἱ στρατηγοί. 
ς \ 2 ͵ ΄ Ἂ. ΄ 
58. Qs δὲ ἔμαθε ὅτι οὐ πείσει τούς γε πολλοὺς πλω- 
5 Ἂν ε , ς 7 Ν Ἀ 
ew ἐς τὸν Ελλησποντον, ὁ Θεμιστοκλέης, μεταβαλὼν πρὸς 
Nast) / - N , 5) ! 
tous Αθηναίους (οὗτοι yap μάλιστα ἐκπεφευγότων περιη- 
if « at iS ’ὔ > ‘ e / / Ν eae 
μέκτεον, ὥρμέατο τε Es TOV Ελλησποντον TWAWELY καὶ ἐπὶ 
͵ aT τε , > ¢@ Ν , ». ͵ 
σφεων αὐτῶν βαλλόμενοι, εἰ ὥλλοι μὴ βουλοίατοὶ) ἔλεγε 








VII, 1101 Message of Thenustocles to the King. 187 


“ Ν ri + lal , 
σφι τάδε: Καὶ αὐτὸς ἤδη πολλοῖσι παρεγενόμην, καὶ 
e / 3 rg ͵ / » > > , 
πολλῷ TAEW ἀκήκοα TOLAde γενέσθαι" avdpas ες ἀναγκαίην 
/ / > / / Ν > F 
ἀπειληθέντας νενικημένους ἀναμάχεσθαιί τε καὶ ἀνϑαλαμ- 
’ ἈΝ / / c “- Ν εὖ \ 
Bavew τὴν προτέρην κακότητα. ἡμεῖς δὲ (εὕρημα yap 
πὰ» παν ? Ν Ἂς ΜΕΝ 8.5 ’, ΄ A 
EUPNKALEV LEAS TE AVTOUS και τὴν ἔλλαδα, νέφος τοσοῦτο 
> a > / Ν / ΜΓ 4 
ἀνθρώπων avwcapevor) pn διώκωμεν avdpas φεύγοντας. 
7 \ ? ¢ - 7 ? Ν / Ν 
84. τάδε γὰρ οὐκ ἡμεῖς κατεργασάμεθα, ἀλλὰ θεοί τε καὶ 
ἣν , 4 “ A ? / \ A ? 
ἥρωες, ob ἐφθόνησαν ἄνδρα eva τῆς τε Ασίης καὶ τῆς Ev- 
΄ a Ws Da Senay TI ae aA . 
ρώπης βασιλεῦσαι, ἐόντα ἀνοσιὸν τε καὶ ἀτάσθαλον" ὃς τὰ 
id \ eee, > ς / 2 / 3 7 Ν 
ἱρὰ καὶ τὰ LOLA ἐν ὁμοίῳ ἐποιέετο, ἐμπίπράς TE καὶ κατα- 
Λ a A ἐξ Sy uty \ \ \ , 
βάλλων τῶν θεῶν τὰ ἀγώλματα" ὃς καὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 
2 / Ἷ al ? > 3 Ν Μ ᾽ x 
ἀπεμαστίγωσε πέδας TE KATHKE. ANA εὖ Yap ἔχει ες TO 
Ν ξ cr A ς 3 ae / / e / 
παρεὸν ἡμῖν, νῦν μὲν ev TH Βλλάδι καταμείναντας ἡμέων 
2 a > A Ν a >] , / > an! 4 
τε αὑτῶν ἐπιμεληθῆναι καὶ τῶν OLKETEWY* καὶ TLS οἰκίην TE 
2 , Ἂς / > a rant 4 / 2 
ἀναπλασάσθω καὶ σπόρου ανακῶς EXETW, TAVTENEWS ἀπε- 
λάσας τὸν βάρβαρον: ἅμα δὲ τῷ ἔ λέ ἐπὶ 
acas τὸν βάρβαρον: ἅμα δὲ τῷ ἕαρι καταπλεωμεν ETL 
«. / King / A 90. 2 4, 4 
EXdnorovtov καὶ Iwvins. Ταῦτα ἔλεγε ἀποθήκην μελ- 
x iS θ 5) N Π 7 “ Δ Υ̓ ͵ 
av ποιήσεσθαι ες τὸν Ilepoea, wa, ἢν apa τί μιν κατα- 
7 Ν 3 / ΄, y > Vs ’ 
λαμβανῃ πρὸς Αθηναίων παθος, ἔχη ἀποστροφὴν" τὰ TEP 
3 δον 3 ΄ Ν - ΄ / 
ὧν καὶ ἐγένετο. 85. Θεμιστοκλέης μὲν ταῦτα λέγων διέ- 
3 a Ἂς 3 / ᾽ Ν Ν - / 
βαλλε, ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ ἐπείθοντο ἐπειδὴ yap, καὶ πρότερον 
͵ 53 x ἢ rN > ΄ ’ \ 
δεδογμένος εἶναι σοφὸς, ἐφάνη ἐὼν ἀληθέως σοφὸς TE Kat 
Ea / ς - > , / « ‘ 
εὐβουλος, πάντως ἑτοῖμοι ἦσαν λέγοντι πείθεσθαι. ὡς δε 
« / (ae / 3 ΠΣ \ a 
οὗτοί οἱ aVEYYWOMEVOL ἦσαν, αὐτίκα μετὰ ταῦτα ὁ Θεμιστο- 
/ Υ ὅς ἢ ΥΚ r re πὶ 
κλεης ἄνδρας ἀπέπεμπε ἔχοντας πλοῖον, τοῖσι ἐπίστευε 
A 2 A , > / Ν \ 3 , 
σιγαν, ἐς πᾶσαν Bucavov ἀπικνεομένοισι, TA AUTOS ενετεί- 
On / n Ν / rN 3 
λατο βασιλεῖ φράσαι" τῶν καὶ Σίκιννος ὁ οἰκέτης αὖτις 
ἥν ΤᾺ ἃ 2 / > / Ν Ν ΕῚ ἈΝ ΄ Ἀ 
ἐγένετο. Ob ἐπεὶ τε ἀπίκοντο πρὸς τὴν ATTLKNY, οἱ μεν 
Σ᾿ a , / Ν 5 Ν ν »:}) 
κατέμενον ἐπὶ τῷ πλοίῳ, Σίκιννος δὲ ἀναβὰς Tapa Ἐερξεα 
Δ. 7, ΕἾ , Ἵ / 
ἔλεγε τάδε: ᾿Επεμψε με Θεμιστοκλέης ὁ Νεοκλέος, στρα- 
Ν Ν 3 7 Jie Ν rn 7 , » 
Tnyos μὲν Αθηναίων, ἀνὴρ δε τῶν συμμάχων πάντων apé- 


. 


188 Retreat of Xerzes. [HeRop. 


XN , , ? Ψ ’ ν 
στος καὶ σοφώτατος, φρασοντά Tot ὅτι Θεμιστοκλεῆς ὁ 
3 n \ ͵ ¢ , oy ND ue 
A@nvatos, σοὶ βουλόμενος vroupyeew, ἐσχε Tous ἔλληνας 
Ν , ΄ , Ν Ν 2 e / 
τὰς νέας βουλομένους SuwKety καὶ Tas εν Ἐλλησποντῳ 
4 ͵ Ἂς A 3 ς , Ν 7 
γεφύρας λύειν. καὶ νῦν κατ ἡσυχίην πολλὴν κομιζεο. 
e Ν a 7, > / ? / 
Ou μεν ταῦτα σημήναντες ὠὡπεπλῶον OTTLT. 
e > 3 ν »ΟΙ:ῃ͵ 2 / 5 / € / \ 
86. Οἱ δ᾽ audi Ξερξεα, ἐπισχόντες oduyas ἥμερας μετὰ 
ἃς 4 3 / 3 Ν Ν 3 Ν [2 7 
τὴν ναυμαχίην, ἐξηλαυνον ἐς Βοιωτοὺς τὴν αὑτὴν odor. 
Μ Ν / ἉΨ ἣΣ / / 7 
ἔδοξε yap Μαρδονίῳ ἅμα μὲν προπέμψαι βασίλεα, ἅμα 
Ν > / 3 Pe i , / Ne 
δε avwpin εἶναι τοῦ ETEOS πολεμέειν " χειμερίσαι δὲ apet- 
53 ? ’, \ 7 Ὡ “ιν A 
νον εἶναι ev Θεσσαλίῃ, καὶ ETELTEV ἅμα τῷ Eapt πειρᾶσθαι 
A / ε \ Se, 3 Ν 
τῆς Πελοποννήσου. ὡς δὲ ἀπίκατο ἐς τὴν Θεσσαλίην, 
3 a , > / / Ν ’ , 
ἐνθαῦτα Μαρδόνιος ἐξελέγετο πρώτους μὲν Πέρσας rave 
Ν 2 , , Nil ake , A 
Tas τους ἀθανάτους καλεομένους, πλὴν Tdapveos τοῦ στρα- 
A e Ν. > 5 7 ’ ΄᾿͵ Ἂς 
τηγοῦ (οὗτος γὰρ οὐκ ἔφη λείψεσθαι βασιλέος), μετὰ δὲ 
- + / Ν / Χ Ν “ 
τῶν ἄλλων Περσέων τοὺς θωρηκοφορους καὶ τὴν ἵππον 
Ν / Ν ΓΦ \ , Ν / 
τὴν χιλίην, Kat Μήδους te καὶ Σάκας καὶ Βακτρίους τε 
Serer \ N Ny N N N “ a N 
καὶ Ινδοὺς, καὶ τὸν πεΐῖον καὶ THY ἵππον. ταῦτα μὲν 
¥ ef ΡΛ > Ν a 57 7 > / 
εθνεα oda eiAeTO, ἐκ δὲ τῶν AAV συμμάχων ἐξελέγετο 
3) 49 / 7 ΄ / , / 
κατ᾽ Ολίγους " ὥστε σύμπαντας τριήκοντα μυριάδας γενε- 
Ν ε a em / Ν / 2 
σθαι σὺν ἱππεῦσι. 8%. Ἐέρξης δε, Μαρδόνιον ἐν Θεσσα- 
if Ἂς 3 / Ν , ? Ν 4 , 
λίῃ καταλίπων, AUTOS ἐπορεύετο κατὰ τάχος ES TOV Ελλησ- 
Ν ? , 3 Ν / A ? ? 
πόντον, καὶ ἀπικνέεται ἐς τὸν πόρον τῆς διαβάσιος ἐν 
/ Ν 7 ¢ 4, 2 ’ a A 
i ah Sl link ich aac) tate 8 
\ 7 ε > a 7 Ὁ / \ 
οὐδὲν μέρος ὡς εἰπεῖν. ὅκου δὲ πορευόμενοι γινοίατο καὶ 
> / 2 7ὔ Ν / Ν ς ΄, 
κατ οὕστινας ἀνθρώπους, τὸν τούτων καρπὸν ἁρπαζοντες 
3 / δ Ν δ ͵ ef € 9 \ / 
ἐσιτέοντο" εἰ δὲ καρπὸν μηδένα εὕροιεν, οἱ δὲ τὴν ποίην 
Ν ΟἹ A A ΡῚ / Ν a / ᾿ς Ν 2 
THY εκ τῆς γῆς ἀναφυομένην καὶ τῶν δενδρέων Tov φλοιὸν 
, Ν Χ re / , 
περιλέποντες καὶ τὰ φύλλα καταδρέποντες κατήσθιον, 
e / fal : / \ a 2 ΄ A Ἐν 2 / 
ὁμοίως TOV TE ἡμέρων καὶ τῶν ἀγρίων, Kal ἔλειπον οὐδὲν * 
“ > ee) / (Srey A 3 Ν ἊΝ / Ἂς 
ταῦτα δ᾽ ἐποίευν ὑπὸ λιμοῦ. ἐπιλαβὼν SE λοιμὸς τε τὸν 


Ν Ν 
στρατὸν καὶ δυσεντερίη κατ᾽ ὁδὸν διέφθειρε. τοὺς δὲ καὶ 








aa 


af 


VIIL, 118.] His Passage to Asia. 189 


7, aw ΄ ᾽ 7 » , “ 
νοσέοντας αὑτῶν κατέλιπε, ἐπιτάσσων THOL πολίσι, Wa 
ξ 7 ,ὔ > ΄ / Ν / ᾽ 
ἑκάστοτε γίνοιτο ἐλαύνων, μελεδαίνειν τε καὶ τρέφειν, εν 

/ / ‘\ > / A / ‘ 3 
Θεσσαλίῃ TE τινας καὶ ev Zips τῆς Παιονίης και ev Maxe- 
~ / » Ν Ν ry { ἈΝ A ‘ o 
Sovin. ἐνθα καὶ τὸ ἱρὸν ἅρμα καταλιπὼν τοῦ Avs, ὅτε 
᾽ Ν «ς ΄ + > Ν >? > Λ 3 Ν ’ 
ἐπὶ τὴν ᾿Ελλώδα ἤλαυνε, «πιὼν οὐκ ἀπέλαβε" αλλα δον- 

« / “ Pan > / — / Μ 
τες οἱ Παίονες τοῖσι Θρήϊξι, ἁπαυτέοντος Ἐέερξεω, ἐφασαν 
/ ς a CaS - + A a ἈΝ 
νεμομένας ἁρπασθῆναι ὑπὸ τῶν ἄνω Opyixwv τῶν περί 
Ν Ά, A 7 >] / [4 ‘\ / 
Tas πηγὰς τοῦ Στρυμόνος οἰκημένων. 58. οἱ de Πέρσαι, 
[ 3 a Ds / > / = τος Ν ,7 
ὡς ἐκ τῆς Θρηΐκης πορευόμενον ἀπίκοντο ἐπὶ τὸν πόρον, 
2 / Ν ς ’ὔ A \ / > 
ἐπειγόμενοι τὸν Ελλήσποντον τῇσι νηυσί διέβησαν ες 
” \ ὌΝ /- 2 e ΚΙ 2 , 
Αβυδον: τὰς yap σχεδιᾶς οὐκ εὗρον ETL ἐντετάμενας, 
? ene Ν ral / 2 A Ἀ , 
ἀλλ᾽ ὑπὸ χειμῶνος διαλελυμένας. ἐνθαῦτα δὲ κατεχόμενοι 

/ / “ἡ ᾿] ean >. / 2 / / 
σιτία τε πλέω ἢ KAT ὁδὸν ἐλάγχανον, οὐδένα TE κόσμον 
2 ’, ᾿ς ce 4. > / A 
ἐμπιπλάμενοι, καὶ ὕδατα μεταβάλλοντες, ἀπέθνησκον τοῦ 

a a , , ¢ ΟΝ aes, bom | 
στρατοῦ τοῦ περιεόντος πολλοί. οἱ δὲ λοιποὶ ἅμα Ξερξη 
3 7, 2 / Μἶἷ Ν > ee A / / 
ἀπικνέονται ἐς Σάρδις. 89. Hote δὲ καὶ ἄλλος ὅδε λόγος 

/ ¢ > pt / 2 7 3 > / > / 
λεγόμενος, ws, ἐπειδὴ Ξέρξης ἀπελαύνων εξ Αθηνέων atri- 

a χα Ν τς 7 ΕῚ A > / ξ΄ 
keto ἐπ Ηἴόνα τὴν ἐπὶ Στρυμόνι, ἐνθεῦτεν οὐκέτι ὁδουπο- 
᾿ A > ek \ Ve se 7 ar he / 
pinot διεχρᾶτο, ἀλλὰ THY μὲν στρατίην Υδαρνεὶ ἐπιτράπει 
? / 2 Ἂς ¢ / 2 o& > 3 Ν Ν / 
ἀπάγειν ἐς τὸν Ελλήσποντον, αὐτὸς ὃ emt νεὸς Φοινίσ- 
> Ν > / > Ν > 7 ἢ / 
ons ἐπιβὰς ἐκομίζετο ἐς τὴν "Acinv. πλώοντα δὲ μιν 
y+ / ¢ a , x / Ν 
ἄνεμον Σ᾽ τρυμονίην ὑπολαβεῖν μέγαν καὶ κυματίην. καὶ 
Ν - ’ ͵ / A Ν ed 
δὴ, μᾶλλον yup τι χειμαίνεσθαι, γεμουσὴης τῆς νεὸς WATE 
was A / 3 / a / rn 
ἐπὶ τοῦ καταστρώματος ἐπεόντων συχνῶν Περσέων τῶν 
δὺν ms / ἕ i ,ὕ 2 θ A > ὃ rn , Ν 
Ξέρξῃ κομιζομένων, ἐνθαῦτα ἐς δείμα πεσόντα τον 
/ y+ 7, Ν 7 δ. ὃ > , 
βασιλέα εἴρεσθαι Bwoavta tov κυβερνήτην, εἰ τίς ἐστί 
,ὔ ἄρον ἃ 3 , ὅν area > , 
σφι σωτηρίη. καὶ τὸν εἶπαι" Δέσποτα, οὐκ ἔστι οὐδεμία, 
xX » ΄ > , / a na > 
ἣν μὴ τούτων ἀπαλλαγὴ τίς γένηται των πολλων εἐπιβα- 
‘ \S »ὠ' ἢ ,ὔ 2 ΄ a 3 
τέων. 90. καὶ Ξέρξεα λέγεται ἀκουσαντὰ ταῦτα εἴπαι" 
4 , A , ς , / , 
ἄνδρες Πέρσαι, viv tis διαδεξάτω ὑμέων βασιλέος κηδό- 

2 εἶ Ν 3 > J EN ὦ £ 7, Ν ν 

μενος " ἐν ὑμῖν γὰρ οἶκε εἶναι ἐμοὶ ἡ σωτηρίη. Tov μεν 


190 Retreat of Xerxes. [Herop, 


a / Ἂς Ν , ᾽ A 3 XN , 
ταῦτα λέγειν, τοὺς δὲ προσκυνέοντας ἐκπηδᾶν ἐς την Bam 
NMOS ray a c Ses A 
λασσαν, καὶ THY νέα ἐπικουφισθεῖσαν οὕτω δὴ ἀποσωθῆναι 
> AS 3 / € Ν > A. , 3 A Ss — " 
es τὴν Aainv. ὡς δὲ ἐκβῆναι ταχίστα ἐς γὴν τὸν Ξερξεα, 
A ἢ oe Ν oY / ‘ \ 
ποιῆσαι τοιόνδε" OTL μὲν ἔσωσε βασίλεος THY ψύχην, 
δωρήσασθ υσέῃ στεφάνῃ τὸν κυβερνήτεα, ὅτι δὲ Πε 
pn vail «cour 1 οὐδ να φὐ ἐῶ Pe 
ip Ν >} / > a Ν A 
σέων πολλοὺς ἀπώλεσε, ἀποταμεῖν την κεφαλὴν αὑτοῦ. 
e \ 7 , , N a pe 
91. Οὗτος δὲ ἄλλος λέγεται λόγος περὶ τοῦ Hepkew 
, 2 a + Ν oy + BA \ 
νόστου, οὐδαμῶς ἔμοιγε πίστος, οὔτε ἄλλως οὔτε τὸ Περ- 
͵ὕ an / ° \ Ἂς A e/ 3 / 3 A 
σέων τοῦτο πάθος. εἰ yap δὴ ταῦτα οὕτω εἰρέθη ἐκ τοῦ 
B / Ν Ξ / 3 / v ͵ὔ > » 
κυβερνήτεω πρὸς Ξέρξεα, ἐν μυρίῃσι γνωμῃσι μίαν οὐκ ἔχω 
> / ee te ἊΝ a / , \ \ ? A 
ἀντίξοον μὴ οὐκ ἂν ποιῆσαι βασιλέα τοιόνδε, TOUS μὲν EX TOU 
, / 3 / / >/ δ, 
καταστρωματος καταβιβάσαι ἐς κοίλην νέα, covtas Περσας 
Ν / Ν ’ A > 23 ͵ Ὕ ’ 
καὶ Περσέων tous mpwtovs, τῶν δ᾽ ἐρετέων εοντων Φοινίκων 
7 ? \ + a - , Digit 2 \ 
ὅκως οὐκ ἂν ἰσον πλῆθος τοῖσι Πέρσησι ἐξέβαλε ἐς την 
͵ 3 ») ε \ e \ , / yo enn 
θάλασσαν. arr ὁ MEV, WS καὶ προτερον pol ELpNTaL, ὁδῷ 
/ [2 a ye A ὧνϑ / 3 Ν 5] / 
NPEOMEVOS ALA τῷ ἄλλῳ OTPATH ATEVOOTHGE ες τὴν Acinv. 
e ave / ? ΄, Ν Bi 
92. Οἱ δὲ Ἕλληνες, τραπόμενοι es Κάρυστον καὶ δηϊω- 
J val Ἂς , 3 / ᾽ a 
σαντες AUTWVY THY χωρην, «παλλασσοντο ες Σαλαμῖνα. 
a 4 A fr > a 2 ,ὔ ΝΜ Ν 
TPWTA μεν νυν τοῖσι θεοῖσι ἐξεῖλον ἀκροθίνια ἀλλα τε καὶ 
͵ κα 7 Ἀ x Chee) Ν ? a Ψ 
τριήρεας τρεῖς Φοινίσσας. τὴν μὲν ἐς ἴσθμον avabeiva, ἣ 
+ Ν ᾽ aN 3 ἈΝ Ν 3. EN 4 Ν Ν A wv 
περ ἔτι καὶ ἐς Ewe ἦν, τὴν δὲ ἐπὶ Σούνιον, τὴν δὲ τῷ AL- 
ε “ > “ Ἂς ἃς an , Ν 
αντι αὐτοῦ ἐς Σαλαμινα. μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο διεδάσαντο τὴν 
τὰ Ν 2 / 3 4 3 Ν 3 a 
Aninv Kat Ta ἀκροθίνια ἀπέπεμψραν es Aedous, ἐκ τῶν 
/ 3 Ν + 2 “ Ν 2 , Ν NS 
ἐγένετο ἀνδριὰς ἔχων ἐν TH χειρὶ ἀκρωτήριον νεὸς, EwV 
/ , / ἢ, Ἂς Ν ,ὔ A 
μέγαθος δυώδεκα πηχεων. 98. Mera δε τὴν διαίρεσιν τῆς 
p y+ ἘΝῚ 3 Ν > Ν 3 he ͵ 
ληΐης ἔπλωον οἱ ἔλληνες ἐς τὸν ἰσθμὸν ἀριστηΐα δωσον- 
« τ / eT , ϑ EX Ν oe 
Tes τῷ ἀξιωτάτῳ γενομένῳ νων ava TOV πόλεμον 
A ‘ 3 tA € x , ἣν 
τοῦτον. ὡς δὲ ἀπικόμενοι οἱ στρατηγοὶ διενέμοντο τὰς 
7 ees - / a a Ἂς a Ν 
ψήφους ἐπὶ τοῦ Ποσειδεωνος τῷ βωμῷ, τὸν πρῶτον καὶ 


Ν ἀφ / 3 , > A A 3 A 
TOV δεύτερον κρίνοντες ΕΚ ἼΤΑΡΤΟΩΨ, ἐνθαῦτα TAS τίς αὐτῶν 


ς ee) Oe ἊΣ A Sa vA ὃ / Μ Ϊ 
εωυτῷ ἐτίθετο τὴν ψῆφον, αὑτὸς ἕκαστος ὄοκεων ἄριστος | 








Υ1Π|., 1807 ,τοπογϑ paid to Themistocles 191 


’ 7 ν» « Ν ,ὔ / 
γενέσθαι, δεύτερα δὲ οἱ πολλοὶ συνεξεπίπτον Θεμιστοκλεα 
ε x ν ἘΞ ͵ Ν 
κρίνοντες. οἱ μεν δὴ ἐμουνοῦντο, Θεμιστοκλέης δὲ δευτε- 
¢ /. / > / ‘ 
ρείοισι ὑπερεβάλλετο πολλὸν. 94. Ov βουλομένων de 
A 4, Lal ¢ / ? 3 > 
ταῦτα κρίνειν τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων φθόνῳ, arr ἀποπλωόντων 
? δ e ~ > 7 ᾿ , 
ἑκάστων ἐς THY ἑωυτῶν ἀκρίτων, ὅμως Θεμιστοκλεης 
΄ Ν 2 / 3 pe, Ν c , 
ἐβώσθη τε καὶ ἐδοξωθη εἶναι ἀνὴρ πολλὸν Ελληνων 
, > \ Ἢ Ν c 7 , \ a ? 
σοφώτατος ava πᾶσαν τὴν ᾿Ελλάδα. ὅτι δὲ νικῶν οὐκ 
7 Ν n 3 al , 3 7 
ἐτιμήθη πρὸς τῶν ἐν Σαλαμῖνι ναυμαχησάντων, αὐτίκα 
Ν a > / 3 / ᾽ ’ A 
peta ταῦτα ἐς Aaxedaiwova ἀπίκετο ἐθέλων τιμηθῆναι. 
/ / a Ν / / Ν 
καί μιν Μακεδαιμόνιοι καλῶς μὲν ὑπεδεξαντο, μεγάλως δε 
> / 3 Ue , Μ ? , > / 
ἐτίμησαν. ἀριστήϊα μὲν νυν ἔδοσαν Ευρυβιαδῃ ελαίης 
΄ / \ Ν , /.. b- 7 
στέφανον, σοφίης δὲ καὶ δεξιότητος Θεμιστοκλεῖ, καί Tov- 
“: Ἐν g or, / ὃ , de Μ a ᾽ 
τῷ στεῴφανον ἐλαίης. εδωρήσαντο δὲ μιν OXY τῷ εν 
, 7 ΒΨ Ν \ / 
Σπάρτῃ καλλιστεύοντι. αἰνέσαντες δὲ ToAAa, προέπεμψαν 
2 2 / / φ “ 
ἀπίοντα τριηκόσιοι Σπαρτιητεων λογωδες, οὗτοι οἵπερ 
6 7 , / Μ a a “ Ν 
ἵππέες καλέονται, μέχρι οὔρων τῶν Τεγεητικῶν" μοῦνον δὴ 
a / «- , a ral yA A 
τοῦτον πάντων ἀνθρώπων τῶν ἡμεῖς ἰὃδμεν Σπαρτιῆται προ- 
, = « Ν 3 A 7 > / > 
ἔπεμψαν. 95. Qs δὲ ἐκ τῆς Δακεδαίμονος ἀπίκετο ες 
Ν > , 3 A 3 a κ > - 
τὰς ᾿άθηνας, ἐνθαῦτα Τιμόδημος ᾿Αφιδναῖος, τῶν ἐχθρῶν 
\ A , +N Ε \ ? A ᾽ , 
μὲν τῶν Θεμιστοκλέος ἐὼν, ἄλλως δὲ ov τῶν επιφανεων 
Ἃ ὃ A θυ / 3 7] Ν Θ XE Ν 
ἀνδρῶν, φθυνῳ καταμαργεων ἐνείκεε τὸν Θεμιστοκλεα, την 
μ 7 / ε \ sass , 4 
ἐς Aaxedaipova ἄπιξιν προφέρων, ws dua tas AOnvas ἔχου 
‘ Ν / > > 2 ’ e / 
Ta yepea τὰ παρὰ Aaxedaipoviwv, ἀλλ ov ot’ εωυτον. 
e ? ’ ? 2 7 a / , 3 
ὁ δε, ἐπείτε οὐκ ἐπαύετο ταῦτα λέγων ὁ Tipodnpos, εἶπε" 
/ x YOK Ν SAN , > , 7 
Οὕτω ἔχει τοι" οὔτ᾽ av ἐγὼ ἐὼν Βελβινίτης ἐτιμηθην οὕτω 
κ ΄ ἮΝ Stat x Μ ὌΝ > ε 
προς Σπαρτιητέων, οὔτ᾽ ἂν σὺ, ὦνθρωπε, ἐων «Αθηναίος. 
« x Ἂς ε , / ¢ , 
96. Ὁ δε ναυτικὸς ὁ Ἐερξεω περιγενόμενος, ὡς προσε- 
μιξε τῇ ᾿Ασίῃ φεύγων ἐκ Σαλαμῖνος καὶ βασιλέα τε καὶ 
τὴν στρατιὴν ἐκ Χερσονήσου διεπόρθμευσε ἐς Άάβιδον, 


ἐχειμέρισε ἐν Κύμῃ. 


THUCYDIDES. 


PYLUS AND SPHACTERIA. 












wy Ν δὲ ‘ 3 x / aA 3 Q 5. | 
1. Ὑπὸ δὲ τοὺς αὑτοὺς χρόνους τοῦ ἦρος, πρὶν τὸν 
a 2 2 a 4 , Ν ε ΄ > a 
σῖτον ev ἀκμῇ εἶναι, Πελοποννήσιοι καὶ ov ξύμμαχοι eoe= 
? δ δ \ con \ 9 3 , 
βαλον ἐς τὴν Αττικὴν, ἡγεῖτο δὲ “Ayis ὁ Ἀρχιδάμου, 
/ ΄ ar / 20/7 ee: 
Δακεδαιμονίων βασιλεύς " καὶ εγκαθεζόμενοι ednovy Typ | 
A 3 “ Ν 7 a ? / i 
γῆν. ᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ τάς TE τεσσαράκοντα ναῦς ἐς Σικελίαν. 
om, τ᾽ of l N : \ va 
aTETTELAAY, ὥσπερ παρεσκευάζοντο, καὶ στρατηγοὺς TOUS | 
ς 7 > / nN 7 7 { 
ὑπολοίπους Ευρυμέδοντα καὶ Σοφοκλέα" Πυθοδωρος yap | 
7, Den + - > / 9 ὙΠ 
ὁ τρίτος αὑτῶν ἤδη προαφῖκτο ἐς Σικελίαν. 2. εἶπον δε, 
΄ Ν / f / a 2 
τούτοις καὶ Κερκυραίων ἅμα παραπλέοντας τῶν ἐν TH: 
ΓΝ 2 Χ An ἃ ὌΝ ων, es ἋΣ 3 Pe | 
πόλει ἐπιμεληθῆναι, ol εἐλῃστεύοντο ὑπὸ τῶν EV TH Opel 
/ Ν / ἜΜΕΝ; A Coir 
φυγάδων" καὶ Πελοποννησίων avtoce νῆες ἑξήκοντα Tape 
7 a > a »+ \ \ AL. oF ' 
TETAEUKETAY TOLS EV τῷ OPEL τιμωροῖ, καὶ λιμου OVTOS | 
, 2 a /. / , ΄ / Ν 
μεγάλου ἐν τῇ πόλει νομίζοντες κατασχήσειν ῥᾳδίως TH 
΄ / δον δι a SR r | 
πράγματα. 4ημοσθένει δε, ὄντι ἰδιωτῃ μετὰ τὴν avax@=| 
ἈΝ 3 ? / 3, Se / 5 a 
pnow τὴν εξ Axapvavias, αὐτῷ δεηθέντι εἶπον χρῆσθαι, 
κα N ΄ ἂν te N Ν 7 
ταῖς ναυσὶ ταύταις, ἢν βούληται, περὶ τὴν Π]ελοποννήῆσον. 
A aie ies, , Ν \ SS αἱ 
3. καὶ ὡς ἐγένοντο πλέοντες κατὰ τὴν AaKwriKny, καὶ 
? , / ε ~ ᾽ ? + ES a 
ἐπυνθάνοντο ott at νῆες ev Κερκύρᾳ ἤδη εἰσὶ τῶν ITeXo-| 
/ ¢ Ν 2 / Ν A ’ / 2 
ποννησίων, ὁ μὲν Ἐυρυμέδων καὶ Σοφοκλῆς ἠπείγοντο ες 
Ν / \ 7 ? X ΄ a ᾿ 
τὴν Κέρκυραν, ὁ δὲ Δημοσθένης ἐς τὴν Πύλον πρῶτον 
3 Λ / 3 XV \ / A a Ν ral 
ἐκέλευε σχόντας αὐτοὺς καὶ TpakavTas ἃ δεῖ τὸν πλοῦν 
a 2 / Ν \ 7 Ν 2 / 
ποιεῖσθαι " ἀντίλεγοντων δε. KATA τύχην χειμὼν ETLYEVO 
͵ Ν A 2 Ν 4 ιν ¢ i 
μένος κατήνεγκε τὰς ναῦς es τὴν Πύλον. 4. καὶ ὁ An- 


Ν 3 £ 
μοσθένης εὐθὺς ἠξίου τειχίζεσθαι TO χωρίον, ---- ἐπὶ τούτῳ 


Ty, 6.1] Fortifying of Pylus. 193 





| Ν . 3 / ? 
yap ξυνεπλεύσε, ---- καὶ ἀπέφαινε πολλὴν εὐπορίαν ξύλων 
} Ν ‘6 Ν 4 Ν “Δ Ν I A ? ’ 
σε καὶ λίθων, καὶ φύσει καρτερὸν ὃν καὶ ἐρῆμον αὐτὸ 
a Be \ A , - tet ‘ 
τε Kal ἐπὶ πολυ τῆς χωρας' ἀπέχει γὰρ σταδίους μά- 
Ἂ, ς vx A by / / φτ ὧν > A 
tata ἡ {Πύλος τῆς Σπαρτῆς τετρακοσίους, καὶ ἐστιν ἐν TH 
/ Ἀ Μ a a Ν TALS c . 
| Μεσσηνίᾳ ποτε οὔσῃ yn, καλοῦσι δε αὐτὴν οἱ Aaxedaipo- 
| , ¢ \ Ν " > 
| wot Κορυφάσιον. οἱ δὲ πολλᾶς ἔφασαν εἶναι ἄκρας ἐρή- 
A , Xx / / 
μους τῆς Πελοποννήσου, ἢν βούληται καταλαμβάνων τὴν 
, A ε -_— > »"ν " \ 
πόλιν δαπανᾶν. 5. ws δὲ οὐκ ἔπειθεν οὗτε τοὺς στρατη- 
Ν Μ ‘ i / Ν a 
yous οὔτε τους στρατιωτας, ὕστερον καὶ τοῖς ταξιάρχοις 
7 e / me oN > / / ? κ “ 
κοινωσας, ἡσύχαζεν ὑπὸ ἀπλοίας. μέχρι αὑτοῖς τοῖς στρα- 
΄ / ΝΣ ΟΝ. a : ᾿ 
τιώταις σχολάζουσιν ὁρμὴ ἐπέπεσε περιστᾶσιν ἐκτειχίσαι 
Ν J Ν 3 / >, a 7 X 
τὸ χωρίον. καὶ ἐγχειρήσαντες εἰργάζοντο, σιδήρια μὲν 
Ν 2 ΓΚ / ‘ / / ‘ 
λιθουργὰ οὐκ ἔχοντες, Aoyadnv Se φέροντες λίθους, καὶ 
/ «ς vA / 7 Ν Ν Ν " 
ξυνετίθεσαν ὡς ἕκαστον τι ξυμβαίνοι" καὶ τὸν πηλὸν, εἰ 
᾿ ΄ § / δ: ἘΝ > εἴ > / Fiat la 7 ¥ 
ov δέοι χρῆσθαι, ἀγγείων ὡπορίᾳ ἐπὶ τοῦ νωτοῦυ εφερον, 
3 , ¢ 7 ΔΛ 2 / Ν Ν - 
ἐγκεκυφοτες TE ὡς μαλιστα μέλλοι ἐπιμένειν, KAL TW χεῖρε 
> > / / “4 x 2 J J 
ἐς τοὐπίσω ξυμπλέκοντες, ὅπως μὴ ἀποπίπτοι. 6. παντί 
, 3 ῃ a \ / Sf 3 
τε τρόπῳ ἠπείγοντο φθῆναι tovs Aaxedamoviovs τὰ ἐπι- 
7, 2 7 \ 2 A Ν χ 7 
μαχωτατα ἐξεργασάμενοι πρὶν ἐπιβοηθῆσαι" τὸ γὰρ πλέον 
- 7 ἈΝ N Cars \ ar + / 
TOU χωρίου αὐτὸ καρτερὸν ὑπῆρχε, καὶ οὐδεν ἐδει τείχους. 
e wes , Μ + es / 
οἱ δὲ ἑορτὴν τινα ἔτυχον ἄγοντες, καὶ ἅμα πυνθανόμενοι 
> » / > A ε “ Ie Λ ΩΝ 2 ς 
ἐν ὀλιγωρίᾳ ἐποιοῦντο, ὡς ὅταν ἐξέλθωσιν ἢ οὐχ ὑπομε- 
lal A x e / 7 / / Ν 2 Ν 
νοῦντας σφᾶς ἢ ῥᾳδίως ληψόμενοι βίᾳ" καὶ τι καὶ αὑτοὺς 
ε Ν x 3 Ans / Ἃ 5... / 
ὁ στρατὸς ETL ἐν ταῖς AOnvas WY ἐπέσχεν. τειχίσαντες 
Ν ἘΠ κ A / Ν > + ~ <a , 
δὲ οἱ AOnvaiot τοῦ χωρίου τὰ πρὸς ἥπειρον καὶ ἃ μάλιστα 
+ > © / aA Ν Ν / Ν a / 
ede. ev ἡμέραις ἕξ, τὸν μὲν Δημοσθένην μετα νεῶν πέντε 
> Ἄ ͵ , rn x 7 ἥν τ ἃ > 
αὐτοῦ φύλακα καταλείπουσιν, Tals δε πλείοσι ναυσὶ TOV ες 
» ΄ a Ν / / ς 2», 
τὴν Κέρκυραν πλοῦν καὶ Σικελίαν ἠπείγοντο. ἢ. οἱ δ᾽ ἐν 
a? ὑπ ν ἂν ΄, ε πο " , 
τῇ Αττικῇ ὄντες Πελοποννήσιοι, ws ἐπύθοντο τῆς Πύλου 
΄, > , \ 7 oe Oe. / 
κατειλημμένης, ἀνεχώρουν KATA τάχος ET οἰκου, νομίζοντες 


‘ ν 5 \ ᾽ “ Ν 
μὲν οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι kar’ Ayis ὁ βασιλεὺς οἰκεῖον σφίσε τὸ 








194 Pylus and Sphacteria. [Trucyp, 
ry 
‘ Ν , 7 x Su? ,ὔ Ν A / ; 
περὶ τὴν Πύλον" ἅμα δὲ πρῷ εσβαλοντες, καὶ τοῦ σίτου 
Μ na oS > , A a a , 
ETL χλωροῦ ὄντος, ἐσπανιζον τροφῆς τοῖς πολλοῖς, χείμων 
2 / \ > a 1 
Te ἐπιγενόμενος μείζων παρὰ τὴν καθεστηκυΐαν ὥραν 
3 f 'ς , «“ / / 2 
ἐπίεσε τὸ στρώτευμα. ὥστε πολλαχόθεν ξυνέβη ἀναχω- 
A a ? Ν Ν 7 / Ν 
ρῆσαΐί τε θᾶσσον αὐτοὺς καὶ βραχυτάτην γενέσθαι τὴν 
3 Ν ͵΄ Ca¥ \ , 7 ᾽ A 
ἐσβολὴν ταύτην " ἡμέρας yap πεντεκαίδεκα ἔμειναν ἐν TH 
ἐς : 
Αττικήη. 
/ XN a 3 A 3 A 
5. ᾿Αναχωρησάντων δὲ τῶν ἐκ τῆς Αττικῆς ITedoTrove 
7 a 2 Ν Ἂς Ν « > 7 a 
νησίων, οἱ Σπαρτιᾶται αὐτοὶ μὲν καὶ οἱ ἐγγύτατα τῶν 
2 Ν > 7ὔ a) Ἂ 4 n Ἂς Μ 
περιοίκων εὐθὺς ἐβοήθουν ἐπὶ τὴν Πύλον, τῶν δὲ ἄλλων 
/ / 3 / Cy. + 3 / 
Δακεδαιμονίων βραδυτέρα ἐγίγνετο ἡ epodos, apts ἀφυγμε- 
> / a Ν Ν x Ν 
νων ap ἑτέρας στρατιᾶς. περιήγγελλον δὲ καὶ κατὰ τὴν 
a - / 72 SN ΄ Ἂ > = 
Πελοπόννησον βοηθεῖν ὅτι τάχιστα ἐπὶ Πύλον, καὶ ἐπὶ 
Ν > a 7 A a Ν c / + ἃ 
τὰς ev τῇ Κερκύρᾳ ναῦς σφῶν tas εξήηκοντα ἔπεμψαν, at 
ς “ Ν 7] 5 Ν Ν A Ν 
ὑπερενεχθεισαι, τὸν Λευκαδίων ἰσθμὸν, καὶ λαθοῦσαι τὰς 
ΕῚ ΄ > \ A > A LN ΄ A 
εν Ζακύνθῳ Αττικὰς ναῦς, ἀφικνοῦνται ἐπὶ Πύλον" παρὴν 
ee Ν » f oe / 
δὲ ἤδη καὶ ὁ πεζὸς στρατός. 4ημοσθένης δὲ, προσπλεόν- 
y a / ς / / 7 A 
των ete τῶν Πελοποννησίων, ὑπεκπέμπει φθάσας δύο ναῦς 
2 a 2 / \ r 3 a x Ψ ΄ = 
ἀγγεῖλαι Ἐυρυμέδοντι καὶ τοῖς ev ταῖς ναυσὶν ev Ζακύνθῳ 
3 / r ς al 7 ¢ 
Αθηναίοις παρεῖναι, ws τοῦ χωρίου κινδυνεύοντος. καὶ ab 
Ν a \ ΄ yo ‘ ce N 
μὲν νῆες κατὰ τάχος ἔπλεον κατὰ τὰ ἐπεσταλμένα ὑπὸ 
if ¢ Ν χ Ξ 
Anpocbevovs: 9. οἱ δὲ Λακεδαιμόνιοι παρεσκευάζοντο ὡς 
a / ω / A es) Ν / 
τῷ τειχίσματι προσβαλοῦντες κατά TE γῆν καὶ κατὰ θά- 
λασσαν, ἐλπίζο ῥαδίως αἱρή ἰκοδὸ διὰ 
σαν, ἐλπίζοντες ρᾳδιως αἱρήσειν οἰκοδόμημα δια ταχέων 
> / Ν 3 ΄ 3. / 2 / , 
εἰργασμένον, καὶ avOpwrav ὀλίγων ἐνόντων. προσδεχο-. 
SS Ν Ν a ΄ a 3 a a a 
μενοι δὲ καὶ THY ἀπὸ Ζακύνθου τῶν ᾿Αττικῶν νεῶν βοή- 


> a 3 ‘\ ” Ν f} «. Ν \ 
θειαν. εν Vo εἶχον, ἢν apa μή ΤρΡΟΤΕρΟν EAWOL, Kat TOUS 


Μ A / 3 / τς Nes a 3 / 
ἐσπλοὺυς Tov λιμένος ἐμφράξαι, ὅπως μὴ ἡ τοῖς Αθηναίοις 
3 / 3 2 ,ὔ Ν a / 
εφορμίσασθαι es αὐτόν. 10. ἡ yap νῆσος ἡ Σ φακτηρία, 
, / / ! Snes 
καλουμενὴ TOV TE ALwEVA, παρατείνουσα καὶ ἐγγὺς ETT LKEL= | 


/ 3 ἧς. n Ν Ν yf Ν A ᾿ς r 
evn, εχυρον TOLEL KAL τους εσπλους OTEVOUS, ΤῊ μεν δυοῖν. 





IV., 111 Preparations by Demosthenes. 195 


re , Ν Ν / a > 7 Ν Ν 
νεοῖν διαπλουν κατὰ τὸ τείχισμα τῶν Αθηναίων καὶ τὴν 
΄' a \ Ν Ἀ + “ » δ) ἀν Ὁ 7 ε 7 
Πύλον, τῇ δὲ πρὸς τὴν ἄλλην ἤπειρον OKTw ἢ ἐννέα" ὑλώ- 
Ἐν, Ν a ee ΄ > Ν / 
dns Te καὶ atpiBns πᾶσα ὑπ᾿ ἐρημίας nv, Kal μέγεθος περὶ 
7] / / Ν Ἀ > Μ 
πεντεκαίδεκα σταδίους μάλιστα. τοὺς μὲν οὖν ἐσπλους 
r Ν > / ΄ / y Ν Ν 
ταῖς ναυσὶν ἀντιπρῴροίς βύζην κλῃσειν ἐμέλλον" τὴν δὲ 
aA ͵ὕ 4 \ 5 > » ᾿ς , ͵ 
νῆσον ταύτην φοβούμενοι μὴ εξ αὐτῆς τὸν πόλεμον σφίσι 
a ς / / >] 2 Ν Ν \ 
ποιῶνται, ὁπλίτας διεβίβασαν ἐς αὐτὴν καὶ Tapa τὴν 
+ x” 5 
ἤπειρον ἄλλους εταξαν. 
,ὔ Ν δι Ν / Λ 
LE. Δημοσθένης δε, ὁρῶν τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους μὲλ- 
. , 7 / ‘ » 
λοντας προσβάλλειν ναυσί τε ἅμα καὶ πεζῷ, παρεσκευ- 
, Ν Bn NS Ν Ν , ¢/ 3 > a > 
ateTo καὶ αὐτὸς, Kal τας τριήρεις αἵπερ ἦσαν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ 
rn r 3 / e Ν Ν / 
τῶν καταλειφθεισῶν ἀνασπάσας ὑπὸ TO τείχισμα προσ- 
΄ εἶ \ 4 > 2 a 7 2 / 
εσταύρωσεν, καὶ τοὺς ναύτας εξ αὐτῶν ὧπλισεν ἀσπίσι TE 
΄ 4 Ν ΕῚ τ ω rn 2 Ν 3 “ > 
φαύυλαις Kal οἰσυΐναις ταῖς πολλαῖς " οὐ γὰρ ἢν ὅπλα εν 
/ a. 2 , 2 Ν Ν A 2 = 
χωρίῳ εἐρημῷ πορίσασθαι, ἀλλα καὶ ταῦτα εκ ληστρικῆς 
͵ / Ν Λ ϑ7. ὃ Μ 
Μεσσηνίων τριακοντορου καὶ κέλητος ἔλαβον, ot ετυχον 
7 e an / “ / 7 
παραγενόμενοι. 12. ὁπλίταί te τῶν Μεσσηνίων τούτων 
€ , 3 / - 3 A Ν a Μ 
ὡς τεσσαρωκοντα EYEVOVTO, οἷς ἐχρῆτο μετὰ τῶν ἀλλων. 
\ Ν 3 ᾿ς a 3. 4 SAVE / 2 = 
TOUS μεν οὖν πολλους τῶν TE COTTAWY καὶ WITALTMEVWV επί 
\ / , Sak ὦ \ A / Ν \ 
TA τετειχισμένα μαλιστα καὶ ἐχυρὰ TOV χωρίου προς τὴν 
ὲ Μ ΕΣ Ν b] ΄ Ν Χ xX 
ἤπειρον ἔταξε, προειπὼν ἀμύνασθαι tov πεζον, ἢν προσ- 
, Tan ‘\ 2 ’ὔ 3 ’ « / ΓΙ / 
Barr»: αὑτὸς δε, aTroneEapevos EK πάντων εἕηκοντα οπλί- 
Ν / 5 / 3 / 4 a / 3. ἃ Ν 
τας καὶ τοξότας ολίγους, ἔχωρει ἐξω τοῦ τείχους ἐπὶ τὴν 
, e Λ 2 / , / 
θάλασσαν, ἢ μάλιστα ἐκείνους προσεδέχετο πειρασειν 
> , 
ἀποβαίνειν. 
6 Ν 7 SYA A by A 
13. Οἱ δὲ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, ἄραντες, τῷ TE KATA γὴν στρα- 
a / a / Ν a Ν «{ ¥ 
τῷ προσεβαλλον τῷ TELYLOMATL καὶ ταῖς ναυσιν ἅμα, οὐ- 
, \ 7 , \ ita 3 / 
σαις TecoapuxovtTa Kal τρισιν" Vvavapxos δὲ αὐτῶν εἐπέ- 
/ / / 
mre Θρασυμηλίδας ὁ Κρατησικλέους, Σπαρτιάτης * 
/ Κι οὐ 7, 7 ‘ ε 
προσέβαλλε δὲ ἥπερ ὁ Δημοσθένης προσεδέχετο. Kat οἱ 
‘ > - 3 / > A % 5-9 , 
μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀμφοτέρωθεν, ἔκ TE γῆς καὶ ex Caracons, 


190 Pylus and Sphacteria. [Tuvcyp. — 


΄ ει 5.5: Ὁ a / , 5 a 
ἠμύνοντο " οἱ δὲ KAT ολίγας ναῦς διέλομενοι, διότι οὐκ ἦν 
/ a Ν 3 / 3 a / 
πλείοσι προσσχεῖν, καὶ ἀναπαύοντες EV τῷ μέρει, TOUS 
9 / ’ rn / / ’ Ν 
ἐπίπλους ἐποιοῦντο, προθυμίᾳ TE πασῃ χρώμενοι καὶ 
A ΕΣ > / «, x / 
TAPAKEAEVT UM, EL πὼς ὠσάμενοι ἕλοιεν TO τείχισμα. 
s Ν / , ᾽ / 
14. πάντων δὲ davepwtatos Βρασίδας ἐγένετο. τρίηραρ- 
a Ν Ν ς a A / an »f \ 
χῶν γὰρ, Kal ὁρῶν TOU χωρίου χαλεποῦ ὄντος τοὺς τρί- 
, Ν / 4 Ν / 5 Ν 3 
ηράρχους καὶ κυβερνήτας, εἰ πη καὶ δοκοίη δυνατον εἶναι 
a > A ἧς / A a ᾿ς 
σχεῖν, ἀποκνοῦντας καὶ φυλασσομένους τῶν νεῶν wn ξυν- 
Sea , ε ᾽ 7. Υ ΄ ͵ 
τρίψωσιν, ἐβόα λέγων ὡς οὐκ εἰκὸς εἴη, ξύλων φειδομένους, 
‘ th 5 a iA an a ve 
TOUS πολεμίους ἐν τῇ χωρᾳ περιιδεῖν τεῖχος πεποιημένους, 
> Ν , / a / δ ὅς ἡ 
ἀλλὰ tas τε σφετέρας ναῦς βιαζομένους τὴν ἀπόβασιν 
΄ Dinh ἢ ‘ Ν / δ > A 
καταγνύναι ἐκέλευεν, καὶ Tous ξυμμάχους μὴ αποκνῆσαι 
> Ν / > rn Ν “ fn / 3 
ἀντὶ μεγάλων εὐεργεσιῶν Tas ναῦς τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις ἐν 
a / 3 a 3 Λ he X a. / 
τῷ παρόντι ἐπιδοῦναι, οκείλαντας δὲ καὶ TavTL τρόπῳ 
Ρ] ͵ A > A ς A U4 A 
atoPavtTas, τῶν τε ἀνδρῶν Kal TOU χωρίου κρατῆσαι. 
Ἂν, x 4 + A 3 / Ν Ν 
15. καὶ ὁ μεν τοὺς τε ἄλλους τοιαῦτα ἐπέσπερχεν, καὶ TOV 
ς - 7 2 i 3 Ge? X a 3 [A 3. = 
ἑαυτοῦ κυβερνητὴν ἀναγκωσας OKELAAL THY ναῦν, EYWpPEL ἐπὶ 
Ν > ΄ Ν , ? / > / ς Ν 
τὴν ἀποβαθραν" καὶ πειρώμενος ἀποβαίνειν, ἀνεκοπη ὑπὸ 
ἴω 3 / ἊΣ Ἂς Ν >. 7 / 
τῶν Αθηναίων, καὶ τραυματισθεὶς πολλὰ εἐλειποψύχησε 
Ν 7 > nA 3 Ν / 4 ? Ν 
τε καὶ πεσόντος αὑτοῦ ἐς την παρεξειρεσίαν ἡ ἀσπὶς περι- 
¥. 3 Ἂς , ἣν Ψ 7 > A ᾽ Ν A 
ερρύη es τὴν θάλασσαν. καὶ εξενεχθείσης αὐτῆς ἐς THY γῆν, 
ς} Ξ > , ee Ny ‘ - 2 , 
οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἀνέλομενοι ὕστερον πρὸς TO τροπαῖον eypT- 
\ + A A 4 € ? + 
σαντο 0 ἔστησαν τῆς προσβολῆς ταύτης. οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι 
2 A Ν > id 7 9 > A r 
προὐυθυμοῦντο μεν, ἀδύνατοι ὃ ἦσαν ἀποβῆναι, τῶν τε χω- 
/ / \ a 3 / / Ν Jar 
ρίων χαλεπότητι Kat τῶν Αθηναίων μενόντων καὶ οὐδεν 
ς τ 2 ΞΕ , ε ΄ , 
ὑποχωρούντων. 1G. es τοῦτο τε περιέστη ἢ TUX. ὥστε 
? / Ν > A Ν 7 A 2 ΄ 
Αθηναίους μὲν εκ γῆς τε καὶ ταύτης Λακωνικῆς ἀμύνεσθαι 
3 / 3 / / Ν > fal Vom 
ἐκείνους ἐπίπλέοντας. AaKxedatmovious δὲ EX νεῶν TE καὶ ES 
Ν ε x ἢ 3 3.132. 3 2 ἢ , 
τὴν ἑαυτῶν πολεμίαν οὖσαν ἐπ Αθηναίους ἀποβαίνειν" 
3. νᾺς XN Ἂς > / A / 3 A / lal Ν > 
ἐπὶ πολὺ γὰρ ἐποίει τῆς δόξης ἐν τῷ τότε, τοῖς MEV NTTEL=— 
7, , 53 \ \ \ / a Ey 
potas μώλιστα εἶναι καὶ τὰ wea κρατίστοις, τοῖς δε! 


/ ‘\ r Ν r 4 
θαλασσίοις τε κὰν TALS ναυσι πλείστον προέχειν. 








IV., 14.] Attack on the Spartan Fleet. 197 


7 XN 3 ν ἢ e / Ν - ΄ ͵ὔ 
17). Ταύτην μὲν οὖν τὴν ἡμέραν καὶ τῆς ὑστεραίας 
" Ν 7 ’ 7 ‘ A 
μέρος τι προσβολὰς ποιησάμενοι ἐπέπαυντο" καὶ TH τρίτῃ 
δ t 
> Ν Tf 3 Ν / a r 
ἐπὶ ξύλα ἐς μηχανὰς παρέπεμψαν TOV νεῶν τινας ἐς 
> / b>] / Ν νν Ν , “- / ‘ 
Acivny, ἐλπίζοντες TO κατὰ TOV λιμένα τεῖχος ὕψος μεν 
», = | / ‘ Λ Μ ς ΄ r 5 
ἔχειν, aTroPaucEws δὲ μάλιστα ovons ἐλεῖν μηχαναῖς. ἐν 
? Χ « 3 A 7 A a , / 
τούτῳ δὲ αἱ ex τῆς Ζακύνθου νῆες τῶν Αθηναίων παρα- 
/ / ’ Ἀ rn 
γίγνονται πεντήκοντα" προσεβοήθησαν γὰρ τῶν τε φρου- 
/ Ν > a a 3 ΄ Ν “-“ / 
ρίδων tives αὐτοῖς τῶν ex Νιαυπακτου καὶ Χίαι τέσσαρες. 
ε Ν 5 , x c an / ΄, 
ὡς δὲ εἶδον τὴν τε ἤπειρον οπλιτῶν περίπλεων τὴν TE 
᾿ς ¥ A 7 ΕἾ Ν “ \ > > ΄ 
νῆσον, Ev TE τῷ λιμένι οὔσας τᾶς ναῦς καὶ οὐκ εἐκπλεού- 
> , «“ / , Ν Ὕ 
σας, ἁπορήησαντες OTN καθορμίσωνται, tote μεν ες ]Ιρω- 
Ν Ν A \ > Ν > / oo Ἂς 9 ΕΣ 
τὴν τὴν νῆσον. ἣ οὐ πολυ ἀπέχει, ἐρῆμος οὖσα, ἐπλευσαν 
Ν > / “ >’ ἐπ / y ΄ > Ν 
καὶ ηὐλίσαντο, τῇ ὃ ὑστεραίᾳ παρασκευασάμενοι ὡς ἐπὶ 
͵ Sy 9 εὐ \ 5) a nt , 
ναυμαχίαν ἀνήγοντο, ἢν μὲν ἀντεκπλειν εθέλωσι σφίσιν 
3 Ν 2 / ? Ν ἈΝ ς 2 Ν >] 4 
ἐς τὴν εὐρυχωρίαν, εἰ δὲ μη, WS αὐτοὶ ἐπεσπλευσούμενοι. 
- ε Ν ΜΝ 2 , BA ἃ μή / 
καὶ οἱ μὲν OUTE ἀντανήγοντο, οὔτε ἃ διενοήθησαν. φράξαι. 
Ν y yy / ¢ / > > ~ 
τοὺς ἔσπλους, ἔτυχον ποιήσαντες, ἡσυχάζοντες δ΄ ἐν τῇ 
A / An > + 7 Ν iC “ἡ > x 7 
γῇ Tas τε ναῦς ἐπλήρουν καὶ παρεσκευάζοντο, ἢν ἐσπλεῃ 
e ᾿] A / y+ 2 a , 
τίς, ὡς ἐν τῷ λιμένι OVTL οὐ σμίκρῳ ναυμαχήσοντες. 
« ἊΨ a / > e /, Ν Μ 
15. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι γνόντες καθ εκώτερον Tov ἐσπλουν 
e/ 31 “Ὁ Σ ἊΝ Ν Ν Ν / \ , 
ὥρμησαν ἐπ AVTOUS, καὶ TAS MEV πλείους καὶ METEWPOUS 
ἊΨ al A ‘ 2 / / 2 ἈΝ 
ἤδη τῶν νεῶν καὶ ἀντυπρῴρους προσπέσοντες ἐς φυγηι 
7 ΠΣ, 7, e \ 7 Υἵ 
κατέστησαν, καὶ ἐπιδιώκοντες ὡς dia βραχέος ἐτρωσαν 
~ ᾿ς / rs: Ν / 4 ? a > 
μὲν πολλὰς, πέντε ὃ ἔλαβον καὶ μίαν τουτων αὑτοῖς ἂν- 
} lal Ν r 3 a lal / > / 
δράσιν" ταῖς δὲ λοιπαῖς ἐν TH γῇ καταπεφευγυίαις ἐνεβαλ- 
« ᾿ς Ν 7 yf Ν 2 ὔ >] , 
λον. αἱ δε καὶ πληρούμεναι ETL πρὶν ἀνάγεσθαι εκόπτοντο. 
/ Ce ΄ Χ Ξ- κ 5) a ? 
καί τινας καὶ ἀναδούμενοι κενὰς εἷλκον, τῶν ἀνδρῶν ες φυ- 
‘ ε 7 aA ¢. # ε , \ 
γὴν ὡρμημένων. 19. ἃ ορώντες οἱ “Λακεδαιμόνιοι καὶ 
A A / ce > ar δ΄. > 
περιαλγοῦντες τῷ πάθει, ὅτι περ αὑτῶν οἱ ἄνδρες ἀπελαμ- 
7 3 A , t Ν 3 / 3 
βάνοντο ἐν τῇ νήσῳ, παρεβοήθουν, καὶ ἐπεσβαίνοντες ες 


, Ν al 7 3 “ > ͵ὔ 
τιν θάλασσαν ξὺν τοῖς ὅπλοις ανθεΐλκον ἐπιλαμβανομενοι 


198 Pylus and Sphacteria. [Tuvcyn. 


a a Ἂ  Ζ , tal In 7 v4 @ , 
τῶν νεῶν" καὶ ἐν τούτῳ κεκωλῦσθαι ἐδόκει ἕκαστος @ μὴ 
x PN gon + A 2 7 4 e 7 4 
τινι καὶ αὑτὸς ἔργῳ παρῆν. ἐγένετο τε ὁ θόρυβος μέγας, 
Ἂς 3 4 A ¢€ / / XN Ν A 
Kal ἀντηλλαγμένος τοῦ ἐκωτέρων τρόπου, περὶ τὰς ναῦς. 
“ x / ς Ν / Ν 2 i, 
ot Te yap Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὑπὸ προθυμίας καὶ ἐκπλήξεως, 
Cs 3 “ y+ 2ar “Ἁ 3 A 2 / “ 3 
ὡς εἰπεῖν, ἀλλο οὐδὲν ἢ EK γῆς εναυμάχουν " οὐ TE Α4θη- 
ΝΥ a Ν , A ΄ ΄, ¢ 7 oN 
vatot κρατοῦντες, Kat βουλόμενοι TH παρούσῃ τύχῃ ὡς ETL 
lal > r > Ν a 3 Ῥ 4 
πλείστον επεξελθεῖν, ἀπὸ νεῶν ἐπεζομάχουν. πολύν TE 
[2 / 3 / Ν / / 
πόνον παρασχόντες ἀλλήλοις καὶ τραυματίσαντες, διεκρί- 
Ν e / Ν ἧς A XN A ἂν 
θησαν, καὶ οἱ Δακεδαιμοόνιοι τὰς κενας ναῦς πλὴν τῶν TO 
A ἴω / 7] ‘ τ , 
πρῶτον ληφθεισῶν διέσωσαν. καταστάντες δὲ ἑκώτεροι 
> ‘ / e Ν cf y+ Ἂς Ν 
ἐς τὸ στρατόπεδον, οἱ μὲν τροπαῖον τε ἔστησαν καὶ νεκροὺς 
3 / ἐν / 2 / Ν Ν rf 2 \ 
ἀπέδοσαν καὶ ναυαγίων ἐκρώτησαν, καὶ THY νῆσον εὐθὺυς 
, hee eles, e A 5) a ) 
περιέπλεον, καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ εἶχον ὡς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἀπειλημ- 
, ies 9 ants ͵ , ae ans ͵ 
μένων " οἱ δ᾽ ἐν τῇ ἠπείρῳ Πελοποννήσιοι καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων 
x / + N / reds aah os ͵΄ 
ἤδη βεβοηθηκοτες ἐμενον κατὰ χωραν ἐπὶ τῇ Πύλῳ. 
3 SS N 7] e Λ Ν / 
20. Es δὲ τὴν Σπάρτην ws ἠγγέλθη τὰ γεγενημένα 
Ν 7 Μ > lal id pie a ΄ \ 
περὶ Πύλον, εδοξεν αὐτοῖς, ws ἐπὶ ξυμφορᾷ μεγώλῃ, τὰ 
4 , 3 Ν / 7 A 
τέλη καταβάντας ες TO στρατόπεδον βουλεύειν, παραχρῆ- 
΄ a ὩἉ s\ a“ Ν ΄ς 3 3 ΄ “Ἃ 
μα ὁρῶντας, ὃ τι ἂν δοκῇ. καὶ ὡς εἶδον ἀδύνατον ὃν τιμω- 
a a 5) 7 \ ΄ » > ΄, Ἂ εν 
ρεῖν τοῖς ἀνδράσι, καὶ κινδυνεύειν οὐκ εβούλοντο ἢ ὑπὸ 
A κα 2 χ ah Pe). iN 7 , 
λιμοῦ τι παθεῖν αὐτους ἢ ὑπὸ πλήθους βιασθέντας κρωτη- 
A + ? ω Ν Ν N A > / 
θῆναι, ἐδοξεν αὐτοῖς, πρὸς Tous στρατηγους τῶν Αθηναίων, 
Ἃ 34’ Ν ΄, Ν Ν ΄ 3 
ἢν εθέλωσι, σπονδὰς ποιησαμένους τὰ περὶ Πύλον, ἀπο- 
a ) \ 3 , , N , \ 
στεῖλαι es τὰς AOnvas πρέσβεις περὶ ξυμβασεως, καὶ 
‘ + € / al / 
Tous ἄνδρας ws τάχιστα πειρᾶσθαι κομίσασθαι. 4213. δε- 
/ x A A ‘ , 3 / \ 
ξαμένων δε τῶν στρατηγῶν TOV λογον, ἐγίγνοντο σπονδαὶ 
/ / ‘N Ν A 3 - 3 ’ 
τοιαίδε. Aaxedatpmovious μὲν τὰς ναῦς ἐν αἷς ἐναυμάχησαν 
Ἂ Ν 3 A a , tA 5 Ἂς 
καὶ Tas ev τῇ Δακωνικῇ πάσας, ὅσαι ἦσαν paKkpal, παρα- 
a / 3 7 3 fi ‘\ 7 C4 
δοῦναι κομίσαντας es Πύλον ᾿Αθηναίοις, καὶ ὅπλα μὴ ἐπι- 
,ὔ A Jj 7ὔ] \ A , ἈΝ 7. 
Pepe TH τειχίσματι μήτε κατὰ γῆν μητε κατὰ θώλασσαν, 


3 / Ν a τ a , > 7 “- IA Ν 3 
Αθηναίους δὲ τοῖς Ev τῇ νήσῳ ἀνδράσι σῖτον ἐᾶν τοὺς ἐν 








ee  ;ἋἊὃὉὔὖὐσὉς---- π  Ὸς--“--“ὙΔἉμκ 


IV., 21.] Spartan Embassy to Athens. 199 


τῇ ἠπείρῳ Aanedaipovious ¢ ἐκπέμπειν τακτὸν καὶ μεμαγμε- 
νον, δύο χοίνικας ἑκάστῳ ᾿Αττικὰς ἀλφίτων καὶ δύο κοτύ- 
λας οἴνου καὶ κρέας, θεράποντι δὲ τούτων ἡμίσεα, ταῦτα 
δὲ ὁρώντων τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, é ἐσπέμπειν, καὶ πλοῖον μηδὲν 
ἐσπλεῖν Nae φυλάσσειν δὲ καὶ τὴν νῆσον ᾿Αθηναίους 
μηδὲν ἧσσον, ὅσα μὴ ἀποβαίνοντας, καὶ ὅπλα μὴ ἐπιφέ- 
pew τῷ πρθιρει ρα ἡ ridge μήτε κατὰ γῆν μήτε κατὰ 
“ΑΝ 22. ὅ τι δ᾽ ἂν τούτων παραβαίνωσιν ἑ ἐκάώτε- 
por καὶ ὁτιοῦν, τότε λελύσθαι τὰς σπονδίςς. ἐσπεῖσθαι δὲ 
αὐτὰς μέχρι οὗ ἐπανέλθωσιν οἱ ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν Δακεδαι- 
μονίων πρέσβεις - ἀποστεῖλαι δὲ αὐτοὺς τριήρει ᾿Αθηναί- 
ους καὶ πάλιν κομίσαι. ἐλθόντων δὲ, tas τε σπονδὰς 
λελύσθαι ταύτας, καὶ τὰς ναῦς ἀποδοῦναι ᾿Αθηναίους ὁ ὁμοίας 
οἵασπερ ἂν “παραλάβωσιν. αἱ μὲν σπονδαὶ ἐπὶ τούτοις 
ἐγένοντο, καὶ αἱ νῆες παρεδόθησαν οὖσαι περὶ ἑξήκοντα, 
καὶ οἱ 1 “ἀπεστάλησαν. δος 
᾿ 98, Οἱ μὲν οὖν Aanedatpovoe τοσαῦτα εἶπον, νομίζοντες 
τοὺς Ἐ λδηβείοε: ἐν τῷ πρὶν χρόνῳ σπονδῶν μὲν ἐπιθυμεῖν, 
” δὲ ἐναντιουμένων κωλύεσθαι, διδομένης δὲ εἰρήνης 
ἀσμένως δεξεσθαί τε καὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας ἀποδώσειν. οἱ δὲ 
τὰς μὲν σπονδὰς, ἔ exer ees TOUS ἄνδρας ἐ ἐν τῇ νήσῳ, ἤδη 
σφίσιν ἐνόμιξον ἑτοίμους εἶναι, ὁπόταν βούλωνται, ποιεῖ- 
σθαι πρὸς αὐτοὺς, τοῦ δὲ πλέονος ὠρέγοντο. 94. μάλιστα 
δὲ αὐτοὺς ἐνῆγε Κλέων ὁ Κλεαινέτου, ἀνὴρ δημαγωγὸς 
κατ᾽ ἐκεῖνον τὸν χρόνον ὧν καὶ τῷ πλήθει πιθανώτατος " 
καὶ ἔπεισεν ἀποκρίνασθαι ὡς χρὴ τὰ μὲν ὅπλα καὶ σφᾶς 
αὐτοὺς τοὺς ἐν τῇ νήσῳ παραδόντας πρῶτον κομισθῆναι 
᾿Αθήναξε, ἐλθόντων δὲ, ἀποδόντας πὐπυδιαγμονίους Νίσαιαν 
καὶ Πηγὰς καὶ Τροιζῆνα καὶ ᾿Αχαΐαν, ----- ἃ οὐ πολέμῳ 
ἔλαβον ἀλλ᾽ ἀπὸ THs προτέρας ξυμβάσεως, ᾿Αθηναίων 
ξυγχωρησάντων κατὰ ξυμφορὰς καὶ ἐν τῷ τότε δεομένων 


200 Pylus and Sphacteria. [Tuucyn. 


A a 1A XN 5 Ν 
TL μᾶλλον σπονδῶν, ---- κομίσασθαι τοὺς ἄνδρας, καὶ σπον- 
Ν 7, e / X\ a / 3 / 
dus ποιήσασθαι ὁπόσον av δοκῇ χρόνον ἀμφοτέροις. 
25 ¢ δὲ Ν ‘ Ν > / Oc 5 cr / 
. οἱ δὲ πρὸς μὲν τὴν ἀπόκρισιν οὐδὲν ἀντεῖπον, ξυνέ- 
Ν / ᾿] Λ ¢. / e/ / 
Spous δὲ σφίσιν ἐκέλευον ἐλέσθαι, οἵτινες λέγοντες καὶ 
Ε] f ἌΣ ey 4 / Nena / “ Ἃ 
ἄκουοντες περὶ εκάστου ξυμβησονται κατὰ ησυχίαν ὃ τι ἂν 
/ > 7 ͵ See OD] A δ \ Seis 
πείθωσιν ἀλλήλους. Κλέων δὲ ἐνταῦθα δὴ πολὺς ενέκειτο, 
/ / X Ν / Ia 3 a + 
λέγων γιγνώσκειν μὲν καὶ πρότερον οὐδὲν EV νῷ ἔχοντας 
7 2 Ν Ν > 93 Ν a “ἶ A Ν 
δίκαιον αὐτοὺς, cages δ᾽ εἶναι καὶ νῦν, οἵτινες τῷ μὲν 
7 Ia b) Λ 2 lal 5 / XN 3 ΄ ΄ 
πλήθει οὐδὲν ἐθέλουσιν εἰπεῖν, ολίγοις δὲ ἀνδράσι ξύνεδροι 
΄ , 2 Ν δὴ τ Ν a ,ὕ 
βούλονται γίγνεσθαι" ἀλλα εἰ TL υγιες διανοοῦνται, λέγειν 
3 Λ «“ δίψαν Χ € / + 
ἐκέλευσεν ἅπασιν. ὁρῶντες δὲ ot Δακεδαιμονιοι οὔτε 
/ e/ X\ 9 7 9 a yy Ne ie Ὁ A 
σφίσιν οἷον τε ὃν ev πλήθει εἰπειν, εἰ TL καὶ ὑπὸ τῆς ξυμ- 
A 3 3} > lal ΄- Ἂς 9 ἈΝ , 
φορᾶς ἐδόκει αὐτοῖς Evyywpew, μὴ ες Tous ξυμμάχους δια- 
a >] / Ν 2 / Sf Xx 9 / 
βληθῶσιν εἰπόντες καὶ οὐ τυχόντες, οὔτε τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους 
> NX / ,ὔ \ a > , 2 
ἐπὶ μετρίοις ποιήσοντας ἃ προυκαλοῦντο, ἀανεχωρησαν EK 
al 3 a y+ 3 / Ν 2 an ΄ 
τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν ἄπρακτοι. 26. ἀφικομένων δὲ αὐτῶν, διελύ- 
Sea ε τε e \ ΄, δ \ A ε 
ovto εὐθὺς αἱ σπονδαὶ αἱ περὶ Πύλον, καὶ τὰς ναῦς "οἱ 


/ / ? 
Δακεδαιμόνιοι ἀπήτουν, καθάπερ ξυνέκειτο " οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθη- 


n 2 / + 3 rs f / 
ναῖοι ἐγκλήματα ἔχοντες --- ἐπιδρομὴν TE TH τειχίσματι 
/ SS oy, ? 2 = 5 > 
παράσπονδον Kat ἀλλα οὐκ aktodoya δοκοῦντα εἶναι ---- οὐκ 


5] 88 9 / «“ a, y+ 3N Ν ς A 
ἀπεδίδοσαν, ἰσχυριζόμενοι OTL ON ELPNTO, ἐὰν καὶ οτιοῦν 
a / Ν , ¢€ Ν / 
mapaBabn, λελύσθαι τὰς σπονδάς. οἱ δὲ Aaxedatmovios 
3 4 / Ν Ia/ > , Ν rn a 
ἀντέλεγον TE καὶ, ἀδίκημα ἐπικαλέσαντες TO τῶν νεῶν, 
> 7 3 / / Ν Ν Ν 
ἀπελθόντες ἐς πόλεμον καθίσταντο. 2%. καὶ τὰ περὶ 
/ c Ἵ 3 / ‘ 7 3 rf 3 - 
Πύλον vr ἀμφοτέρων κατὰ κράτος ἐπολεμεῖτο, Ἀθηναῖοι 
Ν a rn > / 2 N Ν A - A 
μὲν δυοῖν νεοῖν ἐναντίαιν ἀεὶ τὴν νῆσον περίπλεοντες τῆς 
Peay A N N \ of 7, Ν \ 
ἡμέρας, ---- τῆς δὲ νυκτὸς καὶ ἅπασαν περιωρμουν, πλὴν τὰ 
Ν Ν /. ς / BA vy \ > a 3 a 
Tpos TO πέλαγος, ὁπότε ἄνεμος εἴη" καὶ ἐκ τῶν AOnvaY 
2 A yy An 3 Ν᾿ 3 Ν Ν Ὡ ε A 
αὑτοῖς εἰκοσι νῆες ἀφίκοντο ἐς THY φυλακὴν, ὥστε AL TATAL 
ς / 3 / / ΧΝ 3 A ΟῚ / 
ἑβδομήκοντα ἐγένοντο, ---- Πελοποννήσιοι δὲ ev τῇ ἠπείρῳ 


ἐξ εἶ, ’ Ν \ ων A / 
ae καὶ προσβολᾷς ποιούμενοι τῷ τείχει, 








A ρ Πρ -π,.ωώὲτὕ1ὸ ...ὄ.-΄΄.--.. 


ee 





IV., 26.] Blockade of Sphacteria. 201 


A Ν 7 / / ‘ 
σκοποῦντες καιρὸν εἰ TLS παραπέσοι ὥστε τοὺς ἄνδρας 
σῶσαι. 

-ἰ N a ΄ Μ ? / Ν ᾽ a 

28. Ev δὲ τῇ Πύλῳ ett erodopKovy τοὺς ἐν τῇ νήσῳ 
AaxeSatpovi ἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι, καὶ TO ἐν TH ἠπεί { 
AKEOALLLOVLOUS O ἢ t, TO ἐν TH NTELPW OTpPaTO- 
cr / Ν , 4 > 
medov τῶν Πελοποννησίων κατὰ Ywpav ἐμενεν, ἐπίπονος 
» 9 al ᾽ / ¢ τ " > / ὍΣΑ 
δ᾽ ἦν τοις Ἀθηναίοις ἡ φυλακὴ σίτου τε ἀπορίᾳ καὶ ὕδα- 
2 \ 3 f Ἁ Ν / 2 > A a > 4 
τος" ov yap ἣν κρηνὴ OTL μὴ μία EV AUTH TH ἀκροπόλει 
A Ν ec ᾽ / > Ν 7 Ν 
τῆς Πύλου, καὶ αὕτη οὐ μεγάλη, αλλὰ διαμώμενοι τὸν 
,ὔ ¢ “ 2 \ an je Μ e : eh 
καχλήηκα οἱ πλειστοῖ ETL TH θαλασσῃ ἔπινον OLOV εἰκος 
Ζ / 2 ᾿ς ἢ / ee 
ὕδωρ. στενοχωρία TE EV OALYW στρατοπεδευομένοις εγί- 
Ν “ rn ? 3 a ὔ ΄ Ν “ >] a 
γνετο" καὶ τῶν νεῶν οὐκ EYOVO WY ὅρμον. αἱ μὲν σῖτον ἐν τῇ 
Aore A Ν / e ‘ ei “ 3 
γῇ Ὥρουντο κατὰ μέρος, αὖ δὲ METEWPOL ὥρμουν. ZB. αθυ- 
/ / ¢ 2 a Ν / > 
μίαν τε πλείστην ὁ Ypovos παρεῖχε Tapa λογον ἐπιγιγνό- 
δὶ " ε ᾿ς δὶ ὃ , ? 
μενος, DUS WOVTO ἡμερῶν ολίγων εκπολιορκήσειν, EV νήσῳ 
> / % HO ay A / - yf δὲ 3 c 
TE ἐρημῃ καὶ ὕδατι GAMUPH χρωμένους. ALTLOV OE ἣν οἱ 
f / ? ~ ε Sate ΝΣ 
“Δακεδαιμόνιοι, προεύποντες ἐς τὴν νῆσον ἐσάγειν σῖτον TE 
a , 2 / ‘ 3 Ν 4 ¥ 
τὸν βουλόμενον ἀληλεσμένον Kav οἶνον καὶ εἰ TL αλλθ 
a - Ὦ 3 / / ΄ ? / 
βρῶμα, οἷον av es πολιορκίαν ξυμφερῃ. ταξαντες ἀργυρίου 
- a Ν nr ε / n > / 3 / δ 
πολλοῦ, καὶ τῶν Eikwtov τῷ ἐσαγαγόντι ἐλευθερίαν ὑπι- 

΄ Ν 2 lal Μ ΄ Ἅ, 
σχνουμενοι. καὶ ἐσήῆγον αλλοι TE παρακινδυνεύοντες καὶ 

, ς “,. ? / ἜΡΟΝ A 7 
μάλιστα οἱ Εἵλωτες, ἁπαίροντες ἀπὸ τῆς ]]ελοποννήσου 
€ / Ἕ Ν / Μ Ν > Ν Ν 
ὅποθεν τύχοιεν, καὶ καταπλέοντες ETL νυκτὸς ἐς TA προς 
Ν Λ n 7 4, ‘ ᾽ 7 3 / 
TO πέλαγος τῆς νησου. BO. μαλιστα δὲ ετηρουν ἀνέμῳ 

θ : cnr \ Ν Xx x n 7 =r. , 
καταφέρεσθαι" paov yap τὴν φυλακὴν τῶν τριήρων ελαν- 

Ἢ / A ? / By A yf Ν b) / 
θανον, ὁπότε πνεῦμα EK πόντου ELN* ἄπορον Yap εγίγνετο 

a a \ ᾽ ν ¢ / zy 
περιορμεῖν, τοῖς δὲ ἀφειδὴς ὁ κατάπλους καθεστῆκει" 


3 , Ν Ν “ / , \ e 
€TWKEAXNOV γὰρ τὰ TWAOLA τετιμημενα χρημάτων, καὶ Ob 


¢ “ \ Ν ΄ A , 2 ΄ “ 
ὁπλίται περὶ τὰς κατάρσεις τῆς νήσου εφύλασσον. ὅσοι 
Ν / 7 δον ΤᾺ " / Ν Ν Ν 
δὲ γαλήνῃ κινδυνεύσειαν ἡλίσκοντο. ἐσένεον δὲ καὶ κατὰ 
Ν / \ of νυ > Auk Sige 
Tov λιμένα κολυμβηταὶ ὕφυδροι, KaXwbi@ ἐν ἀσκοῖς EdeEr- 


‘ Ν / / 
KOVTES μήκωνα μεμελιτωμένην καὶ λίνου σπέρμα κεκομ“ 


202 Pylus and Sphacteria. [Tuveyp. 


,, @ S a / Nhe, 9 / 
μένον " ὧν TO πρῶτον λανθανόντων, φυλακαὶ ὕστερον ἐγέ- 
/ / «ς Z 3 a ς x > / 
VOVTO* παντί TE τρόπῳ EKATEPOL ETEXVWVTO, οἱ μὲν ἐσπέμ- 
A / ¢ Ἂς NX / A 
πειν τὰ σιτία, οἱ δὲ μὴ λανθωνειν σφᾶς. 
9 \ id , , 5 ew 
81. Εν δὲ ταῖς Αθηναις πυνθανόμενοι περὶ τῆς στρα- 
»“ς f lal ‘ -“ A 3 A is 7] 
τιᾶς, OTL ταλαιπωρεῖται καὶ σῖτος τοῖς EV τῇ νήσῳ ὅτι 
3 al 9 ,ὔ 53 / Ν tal Ν x 
ἐσπλεῖ, ἠπόρουν καὶ EdEdoLKETAY μὴ σφῶν χειμὼν THY φυ- 
\ 3 ’ , N 3 A 7 \ 
λακὴν ἐπίλαβοι. πάντων δὲ εφοβοῦντο μάλιστα τοὺς 
, ef x , 2 N 2 \ ὅν 
“ακεδαιμονίους, ὅτε ἔχοντας TL ἰσχυρὸν αὑτοὺς ενομιζον 
Jie / ? / Ν Λ “9 
οὐκετι σφίσιν επιρηρυκεύεσθαι - καὶ μετεμέλοντο Tas 
Ν 2 / / νὴ \ POA Ἂς 
σπονδὰς οὐ δεξάμενοι. 82. Κλέων δε, γνους αὐτῶν τὴν 
? ἘΡΩ͂Ν ς ἐ mons A 7 A ΄ > 
ες αὑτον ὑποψίαν πέρι τῆς κωλύμης τῆς ξυμβασεως, ou 
2 A + / Ἂς 9 Λ ζ΄ 
ταληθὴ edn λέγειν τους ἐξαγγέλλοντας. παραινούντων 
Χ a > / > Ν / 7 / 
δὲ τῶν ἀφιγμένων, εἰ μὴ σφίσι πιστεύουσι, κατασκόπους 
ἣν / e / ΄ 3 Ν ͵7 
τινὰς πέμψαι, npeOn κατασκοπος αὑτὸς μετὰ Θεογένους 
Ces , \ \ Ψ > / Ἃ cee Ἃ 
ὑπὸ Αθηναίων" καὶ yvous OTL ἀναγκασθήσεται ἢ ταὐτὰ 
, - ΄ ᾿ 5) / 3. ἘΌΝ \ , 
λέγειν ols διέβαλλεν ἢ ταναντία εἰπὼν ψευδὴς φανησε- 
θ / r "AO ᾿ς ες κα 2 Ν \ ¢ / 
σθαι, παρῇνει τοῖς ηναίοις, ορῶν αὑτοὺς καὶ ὡρμημέ- 
Ν 7 A , 7 [ὦ Ν ’ 
νους τι τὸ πλέον τῇ γνωμῃ στρατεύειν, ὡς χρὴ κατασκο- 
Ν Ν / Χ / Ν / 
πους μὲν μὴ πέμπειν μηδὲ διαμέλλειν καιρὸν παριέντας, 
3 CAN a ? a ’ A 3 Ἂς 3 7 rn > x 
εἰ ὃε δοκεῖ αὐτοῖς αληθὴ εἶναι Ta ἀγγεέλλομενα, TEL ἐπὶ 
τ + Aca a9) 7 Ν 7 N 
Tous ἄνδρας. καὶ es Νικίαν tov Νικηρώτου otpatnyov 
» 2 / ? Ν s\ ἣν ᾽ a (ἐπ, 3 
ὄντα ἀπεσήμαινεν, ἐχθρὸς ὧν καὶ ἐπιτιμῶν, ῥᾷδιον εἶναι 
4 3 y+ 3 « Ν 4 
παρασκευῇ. εἰ ἄνδρες εἶεν οἱ στρατηγοῖ, πλεύσαντας λα- 
κε Ν 5) a ΄, Ν a i PN > 4 a 
Sew tovs ἐν TH νήσῳ, καὶ αὑτὸς γ ἂν, εἰ ἤρχεν, ποιῆσαι 
τοῦτο. 
ς Ἃ / A 3 / ¢€ ’ 
88. Ὃ δε Νικίας, τῶν τε Αθηναίων τι ὑποθορυβησαν- 
> > / cd 3 Ν A / res aa / 
tov ἐς Tov Κλέωνα, ὃ TL ov καὶ νῦν πλέει εἰ ῥᾷδιον γε 
2 a / Ν ω CA Sis 3 a SRT IE 
αὐτῷ φαίνεται, καὶ ἅμα ορῶν aVTOV εἐπιτιμῶντα, ἐκέλευεν 
/ 7 ΄ , Sc Se A 3 ? 
ἥντινα βούλεται δύναμιν AaBovta τὸ ἐπὶ σφᾶς εἶναι ἐπι- 
Ρ- ς Ν ὃς XN ὦ > Jia 2 FEN / 7 
χειρεῖν. ὁ δὲ TO μὲν πρῶτον, οἰόμενος αὑτὸν λόγῳ μονον 


3 / ¢ a 3 iF \ δὲ a + 5 / >? es 
ἀφιέναι, ETOLMOS ἣν " Yvous O€ τῷ OVTL παραδωσείοντα. ἂν 








IV., 59} Cleon appointed Commander. 203 


la ‘ > Μ Ψ" Ἂς > 5 4 - a ‘ 
χώρει, Kal οὐκ εφη αὐτὸς αλλ εκεῖνον στρατηγεῖν, δεδιὼς 
“ N ? A 7 , « τι a c a 
ἤδη, καὶ οὐ κἂν OLOMEVOS οἱ αὑτὸν τολμῆσαι ὑποχωρῆσαι. 
9 Ν τ / » a ® 2 Ν ᾽ / A , s / 
αὖθις de ὁ Νικίας ἐκέλευε, καὶ εξίστατο τῆς επὶ Πύλῳ 
> A Ν , ‘ ᾽ / > ce c ‘ 
ἀρχῆς, καὶ μάρτυρας τους Αθηναίους ἐποιεῖτο. 84. οἱ δὲ, 
- Μ lal r d A ς ,ὔ ς / 
οἷον Οχλος φίλει ποιεῖν, ὅσῳ μᾶλλον ὁ Κλεων vrredevye 
Ν A ~~? ’ Ν - / / , 4 
TOV πλοῦν Kat εξανεχωρει Ta εἰρημένα, τόσῳ επεκελεύοντο 
lal N 4, ὃ 5 / Ν > ἈΝ ἈΝ >? / > B , 
τῷ Νικίᾳ παραδιδοναι τὴν apynv, καὶ ἐκείνῳ ἐπεβόων 
-“ « > »v ed fal > / yf 5 
πλεῖν. ὥστε οὐκ ἔχων ὅπως τῶν εἰρημένων ετι εξαπαλ- 
A «ς / Ν al Ν ‘ ΝΜ r 
λαγῇ, ὑφίσταται τὸν πλοῦν, καὶ παρέλθων οὔτε φοβεῖσθαι 
, / oh / is. ? Χ A , 
ἔφη Δακεδαιμονίους, πλεύσεσθαι τε λαβὼν EK μὲν τῆς πο- 
Ia/ 7 . Vas / Ν / 
Aews ovdeva, Anuvious δὲ καὶ IpBpiovs τοὺς παρόντας, 
\ \ \ 98 Ε ” , . 
καὶ πελταστας ob ἦσαν ex τε Atvou βεβοηθηκοτες. καὶ 
+ U / A ia » Μ Ν 
ἄλλοθεν τοξοτας τετρακοσίους " ταῦτα δὲ ἔχων, Edy, πρὸς 
“ 3 Πύλ , > Ν e a ” xX Μ 
τοις εν IluAw στρατιωταῖς, ἐντὸς ἡμερῶν εἰκοσιν ἢ ἀξειν 
/ a s\ > = alia lal lad Wo? 
“ακεδαιμονίους ζῶντας ἢ αὑτοῦ ἀποκτενεῖν. τοῖς δὲ AOn- 
/ = i / Ν ,ὔ ad / > A 
ναίοις ἐνέπεσε μὲν TL καὶ γέλωτος τῇ κουφολογίᾳ αὐτοῦ" 
3 / > ow ’ / tal , val > ΄ 
ἄσμεέενοις δ᾽ ὅμως ἐγίγνετο τοῖς σώφροσι τῶν ἀνθρωπων, 
/ »" Ρ] “-“ A Saal ὦ he ΝΥ / 
λογιζομένοις δυοῖν ἀγαθοῖν τοῦ ετερου τεύξεσθαι. ἢ Κλεω- 
2 \ a Μ \ lal 
vos ἀπαλλαγήσεσθαι. (Ὁ μᾶλλον ἤλπιζον), ἢ σφαλεῖσι 
/ 7 / ’ 
γνώμης Δακεδαιμονίους σφίσι χειρώσασθαι. 
Ν , 7 > a > / Ν 
8. Καὶ παντα διαπραξάμενος ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, και 
/ 3 J > A Ν A al 3 ΄ 
ψηφισαμένων ᾿Αθηναίων αὐτῷ τὸν πλοῦν, τῶν τε εν Πύλῳ 
a i“ , / Ν ? Ν 
στρατηγῶν ἕνα προσελόμενος, Δημοσθενην, τὴν ἀναγωγὴν 
Ν , ? a \ ἊΝ / / 
διὰ τώχους ἐποιεῖτο. τὸν δὲ Anuocbevnv προσέλαβε πυν- 
, Ν 3 / DEN 2 Ν A 5 n θ 
θανομενος τὴν ἀπόβασιν avtov es την νῆσον διανοεισθαι. 
e Ν a a a / a 3 / 
οἱ γὰρ στρατιῶται, κακοπαθοῦντες TOU χωρίου τῃ ἀπορίᾳ, 
Ν a 7 “Ὁ a “ ὃ 
καὶ μᾶλλον πολιορκούμενοι ἢ πολιορκουντες. ὥρμηντο OLA~ 
a oe) se , NEE a ? “ 
κινδυνεῦσαι. καὶ αὐτῷ ἔτι ῥώμην καὶ ἡ νῆσος ἐμπρησθεῖσα 
, ν Ν aha yo eo ee 
παρέσχεν. πρότερον μὲν yap αὐτῆς οὔσης ὑλωδους ET 
‘ ‘\ ? A Ν \ Ss / ? κ Ν 
τὸ πολὺ καὶ ἀτριβοῦς διὰ τὴν ἀεὶ ἐρημίαν, ἐφοβεῖτο, Kas 


~ a / a cide n > a 
πρὸς τῶν πολεμίων τοῦτο ἐνόμιζε μᾶλλον εἰναι" πολλῷ 


204 Pylus and Sphacteria. [Tuucyp, 


\ xX / > / ? ? a ; 
yap av στρατοπέδῳ ἀποβάντι εξ αφανοῦς χωρίου προσ- 
Λ 2 Ν » rn Ν a 
βώλλοντας αὐτοὺς βλάπτειν. 86. τῶν δὲ στρατιωτῶν 
᾽ / Ν Ἂς / A , ce 3 , 
ἀναγκασθεντων διὰ THY στενοχωρίαν τῆς νῆσου τοῖς ἐσχα- 
7 > ᾽ cn N A Ν 
τοις προσίσχοντας ἀριστοποιεῖσθαι διὰ προφυλακῆς, καὶ 
> / / \ Ν a « + x 
ELT PNTAVTOS τινος KATA μικρὸν τῆς VANS ἄκοντος, [καὶ] 
2 Ν / ΄ 2 / “ x ° ee. | Μ΄. 
ἄπο τούτου πνεύματος ἐπιγενομένου τὸ πολυ αὐτῆς ἔλαθε 
ta / XN ΄ / lal 
κατακαυθέν. οὕτω δὴ τούς τε AaKedatpoviovs μᾶλλον 
N ῃ Υ ς a ͵ ? , x 
κατιδὼν πλείους ὄντας (ὑπονοῶν πρότερον εἐλασσοσι, τον 
rn > Ν 3 ͵ , A 2 , 3 
σῖτον αὐτοὺς ἐσπεμπειν) τὴν τε νῆσον εὐαποβατωτεραν ov- 
/ e ? > ? / Χ > / A 
σαν, τότε --- ὡς ἐπ᾿ ἀξιόχρεων τοὺς Αθηναίους μᾶλλον 
᾿ς al ‘ 3 / / 
σπουδὴν ποιεῖσθαι ---- τὴν επιχείρησιν παρεσκευάζετο, 
7 ΄ > a ? ‘ Ψ Ν ἃς 
στρατιάν TE μεταπέμπων εκ τῶν Eyyus ξυμμάχων, καὶ τὰ 
+ ε , 
ἄλλα ετοιμαζων. 
/ ‘\ 2 / / + ΕΝ τὸ . 
37. Κλεων δε, ἐκείνῳ τε προπέμψας ἄγγελον ws ἥξων, 
NM hy ΝΑ rele’ g 3 a 3 ΄ Χ 
καὶ ἔχων στρατιὰν ἣν ἤτήσατο, ἀφικνεῖται ες Πύλον. καὶ 
ig / / lal »] Ν >] fal > / 
ἅμα γενόμενοι πέμπουσι πρῶτον ἐς TO EV TH ἡπείρῳ στρα- 
/ / / 5 ΄ yY ΄ 
τόπεδον κήρυκα, προκαλούμενοι εἰ βούλοιντο avev κινδύνου 
Ν > a / + / , τ Ν A ? 
Tous ἐν TH νήσῳ avdpas σφίσι Ta TE ὅπλα καὶ σφᾶς av- 
Ν + ΄ 8 A ἐφ᾽ e x re - / , 
Tous κελεύειν παραδοῦναι, eh w φυλακῇ τῇ μετρίᾳ τηρή- 
“ + \ rt / a 2 
σονται, ἕως ἂν τι περὶ τοῦ πλέονος ξυμβαθῆ. ov προσδε- 
ξαμένων δὲ αὐτῶν, μίαν μὲν ἡμέ ἐστέ ἡ δ᾽ ὑ , 
μένων UT@V, μίαν μὲν ἡμεραν ἐπ ΕΘ, ats Ty ὑστεραίᾳ 
2 7 x N ee He ey a e , , 
ἀνηγάγοντο MEV VUKTOS,ET OALYAS ναῦς TOUS ὁπλίτας Tap-— 
3 , Ν Ν A “ 3 / 3 / An 
τας ἐπιβιβάσαντες, πρὸ δὲ τῆς ἕω ολίγον ἀπέβαινον τῆς 
,ὔ € / yy a / Ν Ν A , 
νήσου ἐκατερωθεν, ἐκ TE τοῦ πελώγους καὶ πρὸς τοῦ λιμε- 
3 / , Μ e a ke: ) , / 
νος, OKTAKOGLOL μάλιστα OVTES ὁπλῖται, καὶ ἐχώρουν δρόμῳ 
FAL Ν an , A ΄, Se ‘ 
ἐπὶ TO πρῶτον φυλακτήριον τῆς νησου. 38. ὧδε yap διε- 
, 3 ΄ Ν a , ay Me / 
TETUYATO* EV ταύτῃ μὲν TH πρώτῃ φυλακῇ ὡς τριάκοντα 
5 ς a ,ὔ Ν aR 7 ,ὔ Ν N Ν 
ἦσαν ὁπλῖται, μέσον δὲ καὶ ὁμαλωτατὸν τε καὶ περὶ τὸ 
ef ¢€ Py a ad ,ὔ ¢ x 53 
ὕδωρ οἱ πλεῖστοι αὐτῶν καὶ Επιτάδας ὁ ἄρχων εἶχεν, 
4 , ’ Ὡς δ λνῆς Μ“ " ΄ A / 
μέρος δὲ TL OV πολυ αὐτὸ τοὔσχατον ἐφύλασσε τῆς νήσου 


. ἣν Ν ΄ AL erie / ny Ν 
τὸ πρὸς τὴν ΠΠὐλον, 0 ἣν ἐκ τε θαλάσσης ἀπόκρημνον καὶ 





ΠΥ. 38.1 Attack on the Island. 205 





> a A de > / Ν / , ἂν 7 , 
εκ τῆς γῆς NKLOTA ἐπιμαχον" καὶ Yap TL και ἐρυμα αὐτόθι 


—) Ν / / / Rs Se th 
ἦν παλαιὸν λίθων λογάδην πεποιημένον. ὃ ἐνόμιζον σφίσιν. 
? / Ἃ Ψ' > , ? ΄ 
ὠφέλιμον ἂν εἶναι, εἰ καταλαμβάνοι ἀναχωρησις βιαιο- 
/ - 
τέρα. 
, N , > ε Ni 5 A \ 
39. Οὕτω μὲν τεταγμένοι ἦσαν. οἱ δὲ Αθηναῖοι τοὺς 
“ἢ , ΄ : ἣν τὸ δες ἢ ἅ] ἀκ ͵ 
μὲν πρώτους Φύλακας, οἷς ἐπεδραμον, εὐθυς διαφθείρουσιν 
“ r Ἴ “ Μ Ε] ‘ Ν cd Ν 
Εν TE TALS ευναῖς ETL, ἀναλαμβανοντας Ta οπλα, και λα- 
Ν 7 , ν᾿ / > r Ν a Ν 
θόντες τὴν ἀπόβασιν, οἰομένων αὐτῶν τὰς ναῦς κατὰ τὸ 
ἔθος ἐς ἔφορμον τῆς νυκτὸς πλεῖν. ἅμα δὲ ἕῳ : 
ρμον τὴ 2. 17} Ὁ γιγνομενῃ 
Cire.  ¥ . 5. ¥ > Ν a ¢ , 
καὶ ὁ ἄλλος OTPATOS ἀπέβαινον. εκ μεν νεῶν εβδομήκοντα 
Ν OY ἃ / ‘ ‘ / ς «“ 
Kal OALY@ TAELOVWY πᾶντες TARY θαλαμίων, ὡς ἕκαστοι 
> / / ¢e / ᾿ς Ν > 
ἐσκευασμένοι, TOLOTAL TE OKTAKOGLOL καὶ πεέλτασται οὐκ 
> / ΄ / ς ,ὔ 
ἐλάσσους τούτων, Μεσσηνίων τε οἱ βεβοηθηκότες, καὶ 
wv. 7 Ν ΄ ΄ / Ν ΄- ᾽ Ν -“ 
ἄλλοι ὅσοι περὶ ΠΠυλον κατεῖχον πᾶντες πλὴν τῶν ETL τοῦ 
/ 4 / Χ / / 
τείχους φυλάκων. 40. Ζημοσθενους de ta€avtos διεστη- 
δ Ν / Ν / 4 Sh 4 / 
σαν κατὰ διακοσίους τε καὶ πλείους, ἐστι δ᾽ ἢ ἐλάσσους, 
ἕω la Ν / / v4 v4 / 
τῶν χωρίων TA PETEWPOTATA λαβόντες, ὅπως OTL πλείστη 
? > a / / ΄ Ν 
ἀπορία ἢ τοῖς πολεμίοις πανταχόθεν κεκυκλωμεένοις, καὶ 
\ » \ / > , ? ar ἢ 7 
μὴ ἔχωσι προς ὃ τι αντιτάξωνται, αλλ ἀμφίβολοι γίγνων- 
cal / " . r / > ͵ὕ ΄ Ν -“- ,ὕ 
ται τῷ πλήθει, εἰ μὲν τοῖς πρόσθεν εἐπίοιεν, ὑπὸ τῶν κατό- 
7 5 Ν r / en im cr id / 
miv βαλλόμενοι, εἰ δὲ τοῖς πλαγίοις, ὑπο τῶν ἐκατερωθεν 
/ ΄΄ ‘ , e / 
παρατεταγμένων. 41. τοιαύτῃ μὲν γνωμῃ ὁ Δημοσθε- 
, “ Ν ? 7 3 , Ν > a ᾿ς 
νῆς τὸ TE πρῶτον THY ἀπόβασιν ἐπενόει καὶ EV TH EPYD 
ΕΣ ra Ν Ν ἈΝ > , Ν «“ 3 »" 
ἔταξεν" οἱ δὲ περὶ τὸν Επιτάδαν, καὶ ὅπερ ἣν πλείστον 
TOV ἐν τῇ VT ὡς εἶὸ Ὶ δ λακτήριον διε- 
τῶν ἐν τῇ νήσῳ, ὡς εἶδον τὸ τε πρῶτον φυλακτηρι 
/ Ν Ν / 2 7 ΄ Ν 
φθαρμένον, καὶ στρατὸν σφίσιν ἐπίόντα, ξυνετάξαντο καὶ 
» « / r > 7 3 / , > rn 
τοῖς ὁπλίταις τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ernecav, βουλομενοι ες χει- 
> A ? > 7 Ν - , 2 
ρας ἐλθεῖν" ἐξ ἐναντίας γὰρ οὗτοι καθεστήκεσαν, εκ πλα- 
, Ν e Ν Ν Ν 7 r Ν 3 ¢ / 
γίου δὲ οἱ ψιλοὶ καὶ KATA VWTOV. τοῖς μεν οὔν OTALTALS 
4 > , a rar a , ? y , 
οὐκ ἠδυνήθησαν προσμῖξαι οὐδὲ τῇ σφετέρᾳ εμπειρίᾳ χρή- 
ε Ν i? / ft 9 ‘ 
σασθαι" οἱ yap Ψιλοι ἑκατέρωθεν βαλλοντες εἰργον. καὶ 


















206 Pylus and Sphacteria. [Tuvucyp. 
; ὃ 
“ > a ? δὴ ΄ 3 ? e 4 . Ν 
μα EKELVOL οὐκ aVTETTHETAV αλλ ησύχαζον " τους δε. 
Ν so! i. ? al , / 4 
ψίλους, ἢ μάλιστα αὐτοῖς προσθέοντες TPOTKEOWTO, ETPE- 
x A NS / 9 ΄ ” ͵ 
πον" καὶ ob ὑποστρέφοντες ἠμύνοντο, ἀνθρωποι κουφως 
3 / Ν / e / A A 
TE ἐσκευασμένοι καὶ προλαμβάνοντες ῥᾳδίως τῆς φυγῆς, 
Ue , Ν CoN A Ν ? / 
χωρίων τε χαλεπότητι καὶ ὑπὸ τῆς πρὶν ἐρημίας τρα-᾿ 
/ yy 2 @ ε ,ὔ ? 907 , 
χέων ὄντων, ἐν οἷς οἱ Δακεδαιμόνιοι οὐκ NopvavTo διώκειν 
7 y 
ὅπλα ἔχοντες. 
7 N 3 Γαδ ἀν: oe N > Ἢ | 
42. Xpovov μὲν οὖν Twa ολίγον οὕτω πρὸς AAADOLE | 
/ r Ν / 2 ΄ " / 3 ι 
ἠκροβολίσαντο" τῶν δὲ Λακεδαιμονίων οὐκέτι οἕέως ἐπεκ-᾿ 
a @ 7 ,ὔ / ? ‘ € <q 
θεῖν ἢ προσπίπτοιεν δυναμένων. γνόντες αὐτοὺς οἱ ψιλοὶ, 
/ Μ ΕΣ A at Vay » ἢ 
βραδυτέρους ἤδη ὄντας τῷ ἀμύνασθαι, . . . καταφρονή-᾿ 
ΝΣ ,ὔ Ε , e/ 5. Φ 2 ὃν XY 
σαντες Kat ἐμβοήσαντες ἀθρόοι ὥρμησαν ἐπ᾿ αὑτους, Kab | 
Μ, / Ν ΄ ΡΣ / e 4 ἰμ 
ἐβαλλον λίθοις τε καὶ τοξεύμασι καὶ ἀκοντίοις, ὡς EKATTOS | 
/ > , \ a A e ae , 
τι προχείρον εἶχεν. γενομένης δὲ τῆς βοῆς ἅμα TH ἐπι- 
A y 7 τ νὰν ὦ 3 7 DAS 4 ] 
Spoun, ἐκπληξίς τε ἐνέπεσεν ἀνθρώποις αήθεσι τοιαύτης. 
, ὃ N on ter \ , ΑΝ : 
μάχης, καὶ O KOVLOPTOS τῆς ὕλης νεωστὶ κεκαυμένης ἐχώρει. 
Ν 7 y / 3 b) a Ν Ν ς ὅς EEN a 7 
Tous ἄνω, ἄπορον TE ἣν ἰδεῖν TO TPO αὑτοῦ ὑπὸ Tov! 
/ \ / 2 Ν a 2 ͵ Ἂς ay 
τοξευμάτων Kat λίθων «πὸ πολλῶν ἀνθρώπων μετὰ TOD 
foe τ yi , Ψ ? a } 
κονιορτοῦ ἅμα φερομένων. 48. τὸ TE Epyov ἐνταῦθα χα-" 
= es ,ὔ / 4 = « : 
λεπὸν τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις καθίστατο" οὗτε γὰρ οἱ πίλοι, 
» δ ΄ Pa SF ᾽ , | 
ἔστεγον Tu τοξεύματα, δορατιά τε ἐναποκέκλαστο βαλλο-᾿ 
, ins 2a. / ΣΌΣ , ᾽ 
μένων, εἶχον τε οὐδὲν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς χρήσασθαι, ἀποκεκλῃ- 
΄ x a yf A wn ς Ν Ν A / Aa ὃ 
μένοι μὲν TH Ofer τοῦ προορᾶν, ὑπὸ δε τῆς μείζονος Bons | 
a / Ν ᾽ ς r , 3 > F 
TOV πολεμίων TA EV αὐτοῖς παραγγελλομενα οὐκ ETAKOU- 
/ , - Ν ? + 
οντες, κινδύνου TE πανταχόθεν περιεστῶτος, καὶ οὐκ ἔχοντες, 
? / ) Ψ 569 , A 
ελπίδα καθ᾽ ὃ τι χρὴ ἀμυνομένους σωθῆναι. 
Λ Ν ͵ὔ » an Ν ἣν > ΝΥ 
44. Τέλος δε, τραυματιζομένων ἤδη πολλῶν διὰ TO ἀεὶ 
’ A Hey he / 6 x: , 5. 3 x] 
εν τῷ αὑτῷ ἀναστρέφεσθαι, ξυγκλῇσαντες ἐχωρησαν ες τῇ 
x x A , \ > ‘og BC, a N 
ἔσχατον ἐρυμα τῆς νήσου. ὃ OV πολυ ἀπεῖχεν, καὶ TOUS) 
an 4 ¢ δ OE > A yf a 
ἑαυτῶν φύλακας. ὡς δὲ ἐνέδοσαν. ἐνταῦθα ἤδη πολλῷ ETL 


3 A / ¢€ Ν 2 ’ x lal 
πλέονι Bon τεθαρσηκοτες οἱ ψιλοὶ ἐπέκειντο" καὶ TOV) 






V.,37.] The Spartans taken in the Rear. 207 


, 7 Ν ¢ A > ἷ , 
Aaxedatpoviwy ὅσοι μὲν ὑποχωροῦντες ἐγκατελαμβώάώνοντο 
ei? / ¢ Ν Ν / > Ν Μ 

imeOvnoKov, οἱ δὲ πολλοὶ, διαφυγόντες ες τὸ ἔρυμα, μετὰ 
} a 7 / 3 / . a ΄ ’ ΄ 
ὧν ταύτῃ φυλάκων εταξαντο Tapa πᾶν, ὡς ἀμυνούμενοι 
» 3 2 ’ ς Ν e ᾽ r ᾽ , 
περ ἢν ἐπίμαχον. 45. καὶ οἱ Αθηναῖοι ἐπισπόμενοι 
| ͵ \ cin \ ͵ , > Ἄν sl 3 
τερίοδον μεν αὐτῶν καὶ κύκλωσιν χωρίου ἰσχύϊ οὐκ εἶχον, 
᾿ / Ν 2 ? / + 2 a Ν 
τροσιόντες δὲ εξ ἐναντίας ὦσασθαι ἐπειρῶντο. καὶ χρό- 
ν ὡς Ν A e / Ν r 
lov μὲν πολυν καὶ τῆς ἡμέρας TO πλεῖστον ταλαυπωρού- 
᾽ / Φ ’ An , Ν / Ν e / 
wevor ἀμῴφοτεροι ὕπο τε τῆς μάχης καὶ δίψους καὶ ἡλίου 
Ε» rn ΄ ε \ ? 7 5) A 
WTELYOV, πειρώμενοι οἱ μὲν εξελάσασθαι EK TOU μετεώρου, 
i δὲ μὴ ἐνδοῦναι" ῥᾷον δ᾽ οἱ Δακεδαιμοό μύ ἢ ἐ 
μη ῥᾷ KEOALMOVLOL ἠμύναντο ἢ ἐν 
a Ν > Μ a A , > Ν / 
ὦ πρίν, οὐκ οὔσης σφῶν τῆς κυκλώσεως ες TA πλάγια. 
> \ SE a Ay 3 : Ἐν et 
6. Επειδὴ δὲ ἀπέραντον ἦν, προσελθὼν ὁ τῶν Μεσ- 
/ Ν / Ν ΄ Μ »Μ 
τηνίων στρατηγος Κλέωνι καὶ ΖΔημοσθένει, ἄλλως ἔφη 
a A 3 Ν ΄ ε a a a a 
τονεὶν σφᾶς" εἰ δὲ βούλονται ἑαυτῷ δοῦναΐϊ τῶν τοξοτῶν 
| we Ἂς A a ΄ \ , > a c a 
LEpOS TL καὶ τῶν ψιλῶν, περιιέναι KATA VwTOV αὑτοῖς ὁδῷ 
) ὧς eS / ω , \ + Ν . 
) ἂν αὑτὸς εὕρῃ, δοκεῖν βιάσασθαι τὴν ἐεφοδον. λαβὼν δε 
ὶ ’ / 3 A 2 ἴω e ’ὔ “ ἊΣ “-“ > / 
| YTNTATO, EK τοῦ ἀφανοῦς ὁρμῆσας., ὥστε μὴ ἰδεῖν εκεί- 
ν 
Xx ς JN val nm i a” / 
eae," παρεικὸν τοὺ Kpapwadous τῆς ΠΩΣ ΟἿ Ay 
λαίνων, καὶ n οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι χωρίου ἰσχύϊ πιστεύσαντες 
ve ὁ ἐφύλασσον, pres TE καὶ μόλις περιελθὼν ἔλαθεν " 
αἱ ἐπὶ τοῦ μετεώρου ἐξαπίνης ἀναφανεὶς κατὰ νώτου av- 
ὧν, τοὺς μὲν τῷ ἀδοκήτῳ ἐξέπληξεν, τοὺς δὲ ἃ προσεδέ- 
δ.» a a ᾽ , Ν Ὁ 
οντο ἰδόντας πολλῷ μᾶλλον εἐπέρρωσεν. AT. καὶ οἱ 





Ἰακεδαιμόνιοι, βαλλόμενοί τε ἀμφοτέρωθεν ἤδη, καὶ γιγνό- 
ΕἼ ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ ξυμπτώματι (ὡς μικρὸν μεγάλῳ εἰκάσαι) 
ᾧ ἐν Θερμοπύλαις, ---- ἐκεῖνοί τε γὰρ τῇ ἀτραπῷ περιελ- 
ὄντων τῶν Περσῶν διεφθώρησαν, οὗτοί τε ἀμφίβολοι 
On ὄντες οὐκέτι ἀντεῖχον, ἀλλὰ πολλοῖς τε ὀλίγοι μαχό- 
evou καὶ ἀσθενείᾳ σωμάτων διὰ τὴν σιτοδείαν ὑπεχώρουν, 
αἱ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐκράτουν ἤδη τῶν ἐφόδων. 

48. Γνοὺς δὲ ὁ Κλέων καὶ ὁ 4Δημοσθένης ὅτι, εἰ καὶ 


+ Sete 
























208 Pylus and Sphacteria. (Tuveyr 
Ἵ 


e A A 2 , / > \ 
ὁποσονοῦν μᾶλλον ενδωσουσι, διαφθαρησομένους αὑτοῦ 
ς ᾿ς, A 7 al + Ἂς 7 \ Nf 
ὑπὸ τῆς σῴφετερας στρατιᾶς, ἔπαυσαν τὴν μάχην καὶ τοῦ 


δ lal 2 r / > “ > ‘\ 2 Ἁ 
εαυτῶν atreipEav, βουλόμενοι ἀγαγεῖν αὐτοὺς Αθηναίοι 
} 


A y A 7 5) ΄ 2 A : 
ζῶντας, εἰ πως τοῦ κηρύγματος ἀκούσαντες ἐπικλασθεῖεν τ΄ 
, A 7] an x ¢ r an 7 } 
γνώμῃ [τὰ ὅπλα παραδοῦναι] καὶ ἡσσηθεῖεν τοῦ παρόντα 
τὶ a ἢ , ? ἐν Sw ca i 
δεινοῦ. exnpvéuv τε εἰ βούλοιντο τὰ ὅπλα παραδοῦναι Ke 


A 2 \ ? / a / \ 23 Sully 
σφᾶς αὐτους Αθηναίοις, ὥστε βουλεῦσαι ὃ τι ἂν ceca 
| 


Ν \ “ 2 7 n f Ν Η 
καὶ TAS χείρας ὠἀνεσεισαν. δηλοῦντες προσίεσθαι τὰ ΚΕΚΥ 


- ς Ν > 4 A Ἂς > / ς r 
δοκῇ " οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες παρῆκαν Tas ἀσπίδας οἱ πλεῖστι 


7 Ν \ A / A > A 
ρυγμενα. 49. μετὰ δε ταῦὔτω, γένομενης τῆς ανακωχή 
a ? / / / Ἀν Ge / ; 
ξυνῆλθον es λόγους ὃ τε Κλέων καὶ ὁ Δημοσθένης, κι 
> / ΄ ς “ a / > ,ὔ \ 
ἐκείνων Στύφων ὁ Pupaxos, τῶν πρότερον ἀρχόντων TC 
Ν 7 ͵ὕ > ΄ a Ν > 2) ὧς ς 
μεν πρωτου τεθνηκότος, Επιτώδου, τοῦ δὲ wet αὐτὸν “14 
/ 2 / 2 a “ yy A ͵ 
TAY PETOU εφηρημένου ἐν τοις νεκροῖς ETL ζῶντος κειμενὰ 
¢ a P hes / ? / Μ᾽ Ν / 
ws τεθνεῶτος. αὐτὸς τρίτος εφηρημένος ἄρχειν κατὰ VOMO 
Υ x AR ͵ oy. \ ¢ ΄ Ν 
εἰ TL ἐκεῖνοι πάσχοιεν. ὅ0. ἔλεγε δὲ ὁ Στύφων καὶ 
? > A ef 4 rd Ν \ 
μετ αὑτοῦ ὅτι βούλονται διακηρυκεύσασθαι προς TOUS 
me ’ / / c/ Ν A a , 
TH Ἠπείρῳ Δακεδαιμονίους ὃ τι χρὴ σῴφας Tow. kK 
> , x 2 , ) / 2 ral Ἂ lal 9 / 
ἐκείνων μὲν οὐδένα ἀφέντων, αὐτῶν δὲ τῶν ᾿Αθηναιι 
΄ὔ 2 A A , ‘ / 2 
καλουντων εκ τῆς ἠπείρου κηρυκας καὶ γενομένων ἐπέρ᾽ 
z \ xX Ν ¢ val ΄ ? κ᾿ 3 
τήσεων δὶς ἢ τρίς, ὁ τελευταῖος διαπλεύσας αὑτοῖς a! 
a >] A ΟῚ / / 2h νν ᾽ EAP “ iE 
τῶν EK τῆς NTELPOU Aaxedatpoviov avnp αἀπηγγείλεν OTe | 
/ / e A > Χ 
Δακεδαιμόνιοι κελεύουσιν ὑμᾶς αὐτοὺυς πε 


| 


ie a 2 n / Ν 5 Ν if 
υμῶν αὐτῶν βουλεύεσθαι, μηδὲν ataypov To) 
a e Ν ΟΝ ἐν Ν , \ ae 
ovvtas. δ. οἱ δὲ καθ᾽ εαυτους BovrAevoapevol, TA OT) 
/ Ν A > 4 Ἂς 4 ον wy 6 yy 
παρέδοσαν καὶ σφᾶς αὑτούς. καὶ ταύτην μὲν τὴν NLEP 
\ χ > a ΄ 3 na 9 2 \ ec) aa 
καὶ τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν νύκτα ἐν φυλακῇ εἶχον αὑτοὺς o Al) 
κ rA are , ce. δὰ Ἴ n a eit 
ναίοι" τῇ ὃ ὑστεραίᾳ ot μεν AOnvaiot τροπαιον στῆσι 
3 a , Μ. 7 ε 2 a X 
τες EV TH νήσῳ τᾶλλα διεσκευάζοντο ὡς ἐς πλοῦν, Kal TC 
x κε , ͵ 2 N ε ar 
ἄνδρας τοῖς τριηράρχοις διεδίδοσαν es φυλακὴν, οἱ δὲ 4 
/ , / Ν Ν / 
κεδαιμονιοι κήρυκα πιέμψαντες TOUS νεκροὺς διεκομίσαντε 








V, 41] Victory of the Athenians. 209 


9 , 3 A 7 Ν “ > 
2. ᾿Απεθανον δ᾽ ev τῇ νήσῳ καὶ ζῶντες ἐλήφθησαν 
/ » ᾿ν - tal / \ , e 
τοσοίδε" ELKOTL μὲν ὁπλῖται διέβησαν καὶ τετρακόσιοι οἱ 
, / a 2 / " Ν > ᾽ν 
πάντες" τούτων ζῶντες ἐκομίσθησαν ὀκτὼ ἀποδέοντες 
7 [2 Ἀ Μ ᾽ ΄ Ν A ΄ὔ 
τριακόσιοι, οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι ἀπέθανον. καὶ Σπαρτιᾶται τού- 
3 a ΄ Ν y X¢€ , > F 
τῶν ἦσαν τῶν ζωντων περί εἰκοσι Kal ExaTov. Αθηναίων 
‘ > Ν | € A 7 > 
δὲ ov πολλοὶ διεφθάρησαν" ἢ yap μάχη ov σταδία ἦν. 
7 ᾿ς ς / > / Ὡ“ Ε΄ ἂν συ A 7 
χρόνος δὲ ὁ ξύμπας ἐγένετο ὅσον οἱ ἄνδρες οἱ ἐν τῇ νήσῳ 
᾽ ,ὕ ᾿ αὐδῶ" A f , A ? A , 
ἐπολιορκήθησαν, ato τῆς ναυμαχίας μέχρι τῆς ἐν TH νήσῳ 


͵ ς , 617 \ ͵΄ , es 
μάχης, ἑβδομήκοντα ἡμέραι καὶ δύο. τούτων περὶ εἴκοσιν 


——— eee 


e ͵ὔ 3 - € / Ν a -“ > / 
ἥμερας, ἐν als οἱ πρέσβεις περὶ τῶν σπονδῶν ἀπῆήεσαν, 


3 al Ν > Μ r ᾽ / / / 
ἐσιτοδοτοῦντο, τὰς d€ ἄλλας τοῖς ἐσπλεουσι λαθρᾳ διετρέ- 





ΝΥ ἂν rn 3 A / <a" iy, , 

,\Govto. καὶ ἦν σῖτος ἐν τῇ νήσῳ καὶ ἄλλα βρώματα 

ad 2 / ξ Ν + 3 7, 2 / ae: 

| ᾿ἐγκατεληφθη" ὁ yap ἄρχων Ἐπιτάδας ἐνδεεστέρως ἑκάστῳ 

r ΑΥ̓͂ Ν Ν | / 

| Ἔχ. ἢ προς τὴν εξουσίιαν. 

͵ « Ν Ν εκ ε ,ὔ ? 

; | 53. Οἱ μεν δὴ fai καὶ οἱ πα μος ἀνεχώ- 
σαν τῷ eee ἐκ τῆς Πύλου ἑκάτεροι ἐπ᾽ οἴκου, καὶ 

τοῦ Κλέωνος, καίπερ μανιώδης οὖσα, ἡ SES a ἀπέβη. 

ἐντὸς γὰρ εἴκοσιν ἡμερῶν ἤγαγε τοὺς ἄνδρας, ὥσπερ ὑπέ- 

\ 7 Ν M4 a \ Ν 
στη. παρὰ γνώμην τε δὴ μάλιστα τῶν κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον 
A “ e/ 3 / Ἀ Ν / 

_ τοῦτο τοῖς Ελλησιν ἐγένετο" τοὺς γὰρ Aaxedaimoviovs 

] οὔτε λιμῷ οὔτ᾽ ἀνάγκῃ οὐδεμιᾷ Ἰξίουν τὰ ὅπλα παρα- 

Ἷ BG yen Hea τ p 

. δοῦναι, ἀλλὰ ἔχοντας καὶ μαχομένους ὡς ἐδύναντο ἀπο- 

d θνήσκειν. ὅ4. ἀπιστοῦντές τε μὴ εἶναι τοὺς παραδόντας 


, τοῖς τεθνεῶσιν ὁμοίους, καί τινος ἐρομένου ποτὲ ὕστερον 
ht 
vi 
[νήσου αἰχμαλώτων εἰ οἱ τεθνεῶτες αὐτῶν καλοὶ κἀγαθοὶ, 


re 3 - - 
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ξυμμάχων δι᾿ ἀχθηδόνα ἕνα τῶν ἐκ τῆς 


| ἀπεκρίνατο αὐτῷ, τηλοῦ ἂν ἄξιον εἶναι τὸν ἄτρακτον 
a (λέγων τὸν i) el τοὺς ἀγαθοὺς διεγίγνωσκε, δήλωσιν 
Ϊ ποιούμενος ὅτι ὁ ἐντυγχάνων τοῖς τε λίθοις καὶ τοξεύμασι 
ἢ διεφθείρετο. 


= a κ 5 / 
ἡ] ὅδ. Κομισθέντων δὲ τῶν ἀνδρῶν, οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐβού- 
‘ 











210 Pylus and ϑρἠαοίο)α. (Tuvucyp, 
P| 
- δι Ε ‘ 7 ΄, φΦ wa 
λευσαν δεσμοῖς μὲν αὐτοὺς φυλάσσειν μέχρι ov τι Evp-. 
aA “Δ > ε / ον / τὶ Ν ἂν 
βῶσιν, nv δ᾽ ot Πελοποννήσιοι πρὸ τούτου es τὴν γῆν 
> / 3 / 2 ae A XN / Ἷ 
ἐσβώλλωσιν, ἐξαγαγόντες αἀποκτεῖνα. τῆς δὲ Πύλου 
Ν / Ν € > A , 
φυλακὴν κατεστήσαντο, καὶ οἱ ἐκ τῆς Ναυπάκτου Μεσ- 
’ ς 2 / / + Ν as ͵ a 
σήνιοι ws ἐς πατρίδα ταύτην (ἔστι yap ἡ Πύλος τῆς Μεσ- 
/ Ν 7 A / A 3.» on) Χ 
σηνίδος ποτὲ οὔσης γῆς) πέμψαντες σφῶν αὐτῶν τοὺς 
7 4 93 δι: οὖ Ἂ Ν Ν “ \ 
ETLTNOELOTUTOUS, ἐληϊζον Te τὴν Δακωνικὴν καὶ πλεῖστα 
y+ , yx ς Ν ] 
ἔβλαπτον, ὁμόφωνον ὄντες. 56. οἱ δὲ “ακεδαιμοόνιοι, 
> fal Sf > a \ ’ / Ν , / 
ἀμαθεῖς ὄντες ἐν τῷ πρὶν χρόνῳ λῃστείας καὶ τοιούτου, 
,ὔ a ς 7 9 Ψ Ν 48 
πολέμου, τῶν τε Βιλωτων αὐτομολούντων, καὶ φοβου-, 
Ν Ἂς ἧς / / a a} 
μενον μὴ καὶ ἐπὶ μακρότερον σφίσι TL vewTEpicOn τῶν 


κατὰ τὴ ραν, οὐ ῥαδίως ἔφερον, ἀλλὰ, καίπερ οὐ 
τὰ τὴν χωρᾶν, ῥᾳδιως ρον, : τερ Ὁ 
, “ 4 “ ? , 5) { 
βουλόμενοι ἔνδηλοι εἶναι τοῖς AOnvaco.s, ἐπρεσβεύοντο 
’ ? ‘ le a / / \ ‘\ yx 
παρ᾽ αὐτοὺς, Kat ἐπειρῶντο τὴν τε Πύλον καὶ τοὺς ἄνδρας; 
/ ¢€ N / 3 , \ 7 ' 
κομίζεσθαι. οἱ δὲ μειζόνων TE ὠρέγοντο, καὶ πολλάκις, 
, ᾽ Ν > 7 “Δ ἢ α Ν αἱ 
φοιτωντων αὐτοὺς ἀπράκτους ἀπέπεμπον. ταῦτα MEV τᾶ 
\ / / 
περι ΠΠὐλον γενόμενα. 


2 Ὁ ) ) 
’ | are c ὃ Ἂ rs 
ν᾿ ν᾿ 
3 > " “ιν >. ρο » ὦ 
« , . 


) - » 
209399 


NOTES. 


XENOPHON: ANABASIS. 





















Tue Expedition of Cyrus the Younger against his brother Arta- 
xerxes to wrest from his possession the throne of Persia— the Ana- 
BASIS — was made in the year 4018.c. The march from Sardis began 
}in the spring, and about six months later a battle was fought at the 
village of Cunaxa, some forty or fifty miles from Babylon. In this 
battle Cyrus was killed in a hand.to-hand encounter with his brother; 
and the Greeks, though victorious over that part of the opposing force 
which they had attacked, suffered virtual defeat in losing their leader. 
They had marched more than 1800 miles from Ephesus to Cunaxa. 
(See ii. 2.6.) But this route, the only one with which they were 
acquainted, was closed to them; for the first part of it lay through 
the desert of Arabia, in which, had they undertaken to return as they 
came, they would have perished of hunger, They set out, therefore, 
northward under the guidance of Ariaeus, who had been the com- 
mander of the barbarian forces of Cyrus; but subsequently they en- 
tered into negotiations with the King which led to a treaty. By the 
terms of this treaty Tissaphernes, one of the King’s four generals in 
the battle, was to lead them back in safety to Ionia. Beyond the 
Tigris, however, Tissaphernes treacherously entrapped five of the 
generals, four of whom were soon after put to death. Great dejection 
fell in consequence upon the army; but recovering their courage, 
especially under the exhortations of Xenophon, they elected new 
generals, and began their retreat along the upper waters of the Tigris 
and through the highlands of Armenia to the Greek colonies on the 
Black Sea. This “Retreat of the Ten Thousand” from the river Zapa- 
tas to Trapezus was one of incredible hardship, — a constant fight for 
about 700 miles through an enemy’s country in the winter-time. The 
account of it by Xenophon contains by far the most vivid picture that 
has ever been given of the temper, discipline, and endurance of those 
citizen-soldiers who constituted the armies of Greece; and along 
with that an authentic and most interesting account of the tribes of 





























2 XENOPHON. 


Asiatic mountaineers, who lived just outside the circle of the then’ 
eavilized worid.« “Thé.Greeks reached Trapezus, the modern Trebi-. 
zond,.at the end of the ‘winter of 400 B. c., and after a month’s halt’ 

. proceéded Svestayard: partly by land and partly by sea, to Chryso- 
polis on the Thracian Bosphorus opposite Byzantium, which they 
reached in the summer. After passing over into Thrace and subse- 
quently returning to Asia, in the spring of 399 8. c. they joined the 
army of Thibron, and, as the “Ten Thousand,” disappeared from 
history. Consult more at length, on the events here described, Smith’s 
EMistory of Greece, Chap. XX XVI., or the three excellent chapters of 
Grote, LXIX.-LXXI. The last constitute a good running commen-. 
tary on the Anabasis. | 

Cyrus the Younger, the unfortunate leader of this expedition, was 
the second of the four sons of Darius II., who was the grandson of 

Xerxes I. In 407 B.c. he was made by his father satrap of Lydia, 
Phrygia the Greater, and Cappadocia, and military commander (κάρα- 
vos) of the forces that mustered at Castdlus (Anab. i. 1. 2). He 
could not have been at this time more than seventeen years of age at 
most, for he was born after his father’s accession to the throne. The 
commission given him by Darius is found in Hell. i. 4. 3: καὶ Κῦρος 
(sc. ἀπήντησεν), ἄρξων πάντων τῶν ἐπὶ θαλάττῃ καὶ συμπολεμήσων Aak 

δαιμονίοις, ἐπιστολήν τε ἔφερε τοῖς κάτω πᾶσι τὸ βασίλειον σφράγισμα 

ἔχουσαν, ἐν ἣ ἐνῆν καὶ τάδε, Καταπέμπω Κῦρον κάρανον τῶν εἰς Καστωλὸι 
ἀθροιζομένων. His high position made it possible for him to aid the 

Lacedaemonians in the war they were then waging with Athens 

And he did this, partly at the direction of his father, who had seni 

with him large sums of money for this purpose, and partly from his 

own desire. For there is evidence that even at this time he aspirec 
to the throne, and that foreseeing as possible what eventually tool 
place, the succession of his brother, he was preparing to. wrest the 
government from him by violence if need be. He became the warn 
friend of Lysander; and, on being summoned to his father’s bedsidi 
at Babylon in 405 B.c., he turned over to the Spartan admiral thi 
money which he had in hand, and placed at his disposal his entir 
personal revenue from the province of which he was satrap. Th 
timely aid thus rendered to the Lacedaemonians did much to haste! 
the end of the Peloponnesian War. As to the fact that funds wer 
furnished by Cyrus, see Thucydides 11. 65: Κύρῳ te (Sc. ἀντεῖχον 
ὕστερον βασιλέως παιδί προσγενομένῳ, ὃς παρεῖχε χρήματα Πελοποννῃ 
σίοις ἐς τὸ ναυτικόν. An account of him from this time until his deat 
is given in the first book of the Anabasis. Consult further Smith’ 
Dict. of Biography and Mythology, s. v. Cyrus THE YOUNGER. 


ANABASIS 1, 1. 9 


Xenophon, the historian of the expedition, was an Athenian gentle- 
man of culture, the pupil and friend of Socrates the philosopher. 
Neither the date of his birth nor that of his death is known with cer- 
tainty. It is generally believed, however, that he lived to be more 
than ninety years of age. From a story that was current in antiquity 
that he fought at Delium in 424 8. c., it has been concluded that at the 
time of the expedition of Cyrus he must have been past forty; but 
judging from the internal evidence afforded by the Anabasis itself, he 
could not have been at this time more than thirty. He himself relates 
(Anab, iii. 1) the circumstances under which he came to join the 
army of Cyrus. His friend Proxenus was already with the Persian 
prince, and invited Xenophon to come and join him at Sardis, promis- 
ing to introduce him to Cyrus. Xenophon did this after consulting 
the oracle at Delphi, and at the urgent solicitations of Cyrus he joined 
the expedition. He does not appear, however, with any prominence 
until after the murder of the generals, when his rare qualities became 
known and he became the inspiration of the army. During their per- 
ilous retreat northward to the sea, he always showed that high-born 
courage and endurance that have since won the admiration of pos- 
terity as they then gained him the complete confidence of his fellow- 
soldiers. When in 399 8. c. the “Ten Thousand” became incorporated 
with the forces of Thibron, Xenophon appears to have returned to 
Athens, but in 396 B. c. he was again in Asia, and in 394 B. o. fought 
at the battle of Coronéa with the Spartans against the allies. Thongh 
an Athenian, he was anti-democratical, and much more in sympathy 
with the institutions of Sparta than with those of his native city. 
He was now banished, and took up his residence in Scillus in Elis, 
where in entertaining his friends, hunting, and writing, he 15 reported 
to have lived a happy life. He was subsequently expelled from 
Scillus by the Eléans and went to Corinth, where he died. Though 
the decree of banishment against him was eventually repealed, there 
is no evidence that he ever returned to Athens. Xenophon was a 
prolific writer. His most celebrated works besides the Anabasis are 
the Memorabilia (Memorials of Socrates) in 4 books, the Hellenica 
(a continuation of the history of Thucydides) in 7 books, and the 
Cyropedeia (an historical novel) in 8 books. His style is perspicuous 
and unaffected. Consult also Smith’s Dict. of Biography and My- 
thology, s. v. XENOPHON; and on the question of his age at the time of 
the Anabasis, an interesting article by Professor Morris in the Pro- 
ceedings of the American Philological Association for 1874. 





4 ΧΕΝΟΡΗΟΝ. 


BOOK FIRST. 


Tur LEVYING oF AN ARMy.— THE MARCH TO THE NEIGHBORHOOD OF 
BABYLON. — THE BATTLE AT CUNAXA AND DEATH OF CyRUS. 


CHAPTER I. 


Synopsis : Darius, falling dangerously sick, summons to him his two sons, 
Artaxerxes and Cyrus (1, 2). On the King’s death the former succeeds to the 
throne, and being persuaded by the satrap Tissaphernes that his brother is plot- 
ting against him, he has him arrested. Cyrus, saved from death only by his 
mother’s entreaty, returns disgraced to his province and concerts measures against 
the king (3, 4). He conciliates all who come to him, sees to his own native troops 
(5), and secretly collects Greek mercenaries. A part of this army he enlists in 
western Asia Minor, alleging as a reason that the Greek cities which have put 
themselves under his protection are in danger from the machinations of Tissa- 
phernes, and lays siege to Miletus (6-8). Other Greek mercenaries are enlisted 
in the Thracian Chersonésus (9), in Thessaly (10), and in Greece (11). 


1. Δαρείου, Darius 11. or Nothos (νόθος, bastard), a natural son of Arta- 
xerxes I., and a man of feeble character. He died late in 405 8. c., after 
a reign of nineteen years. For the case, a predicate gen. of possession, see 
G.* 169, 1. — Παρυσάτιδος, Parysitis, the half-sister, as well as wife, of 
Darius, a woman of an intriguing and cruel disposition, and of great in- 
fluence with her husband. — γίγνονται, were born. For this use of the 
pres., see G. 200, N. 1. — δύο: there were other sons (thirteen children in 
all), but these are the two now prominently in the mind of the writer. — 
πρεσβύτερος... Κῦρος, Artaxerxes (being) the older, Cyrus the younger, 
These were Artaxerxes I]., surnamed Mnemon (μνήμων), on account of his 
great memory, and Cyrus the Younger, so named to distinguish him from 
Cyrus the Great, founder of the Persian empire. — ἠσθένει, was sick, the 
impf. to denote the continuance of the state (G. 200). The aor. ἠσθένησε 
would mean fell sick (G. 200, N. 5b). ἀσθενέω is a denominative verb 
(G. 128,2 ὃ; 130, 2) from ἀ-σθενής, weak, and this from a- priv. (6. 131, 
4 a) and σθένος, strength. — ὑπώπτευε: peculiar in augment (G. 105, 1, N. 
2). Give its derivation (G. 130, 4) and Latin equivalent. — τοῦ, his (G. 
141, N. 2). --- τὼ παῖδε : dual, but above, the pl. (G. 33, 1). For the case, see 
G. 134, 2. --- παρ-εῖναι, to be by (him), i. 6. at Babylon, where he died. 

2. μὲν... δέ: used to correlate the two sentences. See the lexicon, 
and cf. the casein 81. μέν is not to be translated. — οὖν, now, is here con- 
tinuative, not inferential. Cf. igitur in Lat. — παρὼν ἐτύγχανε, was, as it 
happened, (already) there (G. 279, 4).— μετα-πέμπεται, sends for, sends af- 
ter (G. 191, VI. 3, end), swmmons.— ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς, from his province. 





_ * The references under G. are to the sections of Goodwin’s Greek Grammar, revised 
and enlarged edition. 





ANABASIS I, I. 5 


For the prep. ἀπό, see G.191, 1. 2. — σατράπην : pred. ace. (G. 166). The 
satrap was a viceroy, but with great discretionary powers. According to 
Herod. (iii. 89), Darius I. divided the Persian empire into twenty satrapies. 
- ἐποίησε, had made. The Greek was content simply to refer the action to 
the past, without specifying the time as exactly as we do by the plup, — 
kal... δὲ... ἀπέδειξε, and (δέ) he had also (καί) appointed him, etc., a 
transition from a relative to an independent clause ; not uncommon in Greek. 
καί adds the new particular of the investment of Cyrus with military au- 
thority (the office of satrap was at first chiefly a civil one); δέ is the con- 
junctive word, and the word between the two is emphatic. — πάντων : 
accent (G. 25, 3, N.1).— ὅσοι, who, lit. (so many) as, the rel. of quantity or 
number (G. 87, 1). — eis... ἀθροίζονται, master in the plain of Castilus, 
lit. gather themselves into, etc. For the prep. εἰς, seeG. 191, 111.1. ἀθροί- 
{ovrat is not the historical pres., but pres. to denote a standing fact. It is 
derived from ἀθρόος, close together (G. 130, 6). The position of the plain 
of Castolus, a large and level tract of land in which the troops were annu- 
ally reviewed, is uncertain, though probably it was in Lydia. — ἀναβαίνει, 
ἀνέβη: this change of tense from the historical pres. to the aor. is common. 
Note the chiastic arrangement (χιασμός, crossing, named from the letter x), 
ἀναβαίνει λαβὼν Τισσαφέρνην, ἔχων ὁπλίτας ἀνέβη. --- ὃ Kipos: proper 
name with the art. (G. 141, N. 1 α). --- λαβών : the part. denotes the atten- 
dant circumstance (G. 277, 6). So ἔχων following. — ὡς φίλον : Tissapher- 
nes, at this time satrap of Caria, whom Cyrus had superseded on becoming 
satrap himself, was in fact his enemy, and Cyrus had him accompany him, 
probably because he feared to leave him behind. He proved, however, a 
dangerous companion. — kal... δέ : see above. — τῶν ᾿Εἰλλήνων ὁπλίτας 
τριακοσίους : a body-guard selected from the Greeks then in his service. 
Cyrus knew well the superiority of the Greeks over the Persians as soldiers. 
The hoplite, lit. heavy-armed (foot) soldier (ὅπλον), was armed with shield, 
helmet, breastplate, greaves, spear, and sword. Note the suffix τῆς, signify- 
ing in denominatives one who has to do with (G. 129, 2 6). — ἄρχοντα: 
appos. (G. 137, N. 4). —Ilappasvov: Parrhasia was a district of Arcadia 
(in the Peloponnesus) about Mt. Lycaeus. 

3. ἐτελεύτησε, had ended (his life), died. See note on ἐποίησε in ὃ 2. This 
use of the aor. for the plup. is especially common after particles of time like 
ἐπεί, etc. Cf. the Lat. historical (aoristic) perf. with postquam. τελευ- 
τάω (G. 130, 1) is derived by successive steps from τέλος : τέλος, τελέω, TE- 
λευτή, τελευτάω. --- kal κατέστη... ᾿Αρταξέρξης, and Artaxerxes had been 
established in the kingdom, lit. settled into, and so εἰς with the acc. — δια- 
βάλλει, falsely accuses. The current story, that Cyrus had planned to kill 
Artaxerxes at the time of his coronation, Xenophon evidently believed to 
be false. For the prep. πρός, see G. 191, VI. 6.— ὡς ἐπιβουλεύοι: opt. by 
quot. after the idea of saying in διαβάλλει (G. 243 ; 201, Rem.). Give the 
dir. form.—airta: after the compound verb (G. 187).— ὁ δέ, but he (G. 143, 
1, N. 2). --- συλλαμβάνει : cf. comprehendere in Lat. — ds ἀποκτενῶν, with 
| he avowed object of putting him to death (G. 277,3, and N. 2a). — ἐξαιτησα- 





0 ΧΕΝΟΡΗΟΝ. 




















μένη. . - πάλιν : note the diff. between the Greek and Enclish idioms. In 
Eng., rescues (ἐξ) him by entreaty and sends him off again; but in Greek, 
having rescued (G. 277, 1), lit. begged him off, sends him, ete. The use of 
the part. is much more frequent in Greek than in Eng., and in translating 
this fact must be constantly kept in mind. — ἔπὶ τὴν ἀρχήν : for the prep. 
ἔπί, see G. 191, VI. 2. 

4. ὁ δέ: cf. note on 6 δέ in § 3. — ὡς, as, when, rel. adv. of time. — 
ἀπῆλθε: accent (ἃ. 26, N. 1). — ἀτιμασϑείς ; ἀτιμάζω is derived (G. 130, 5) 
from ἄ-τιμος (without honor). Cf. τιμή, tho. — βουλεύεται .. . ἐκείνου, 
plans that he may never (G. 283, 2) in future be (G. 217) in the power of 
(G.191, VI. 2, 2, end) his brother, but if possible may be king (G. 223) in 
his stead. For the accent of δύνηται, 5666, 122, 2,n.2. For the prep. ἀντί, 
see G, 191, I. 1.— pév: correl. to δέ, ὃ 5; his mother’s support is con- 
trasted with the steps taken by Cyrus himself to bring about the desired 
end. — ὑπῆρχε, supported, followed by the dat. (G. 184, 2). ὑπάρχω, to be 
a foundation or beginning (ἀρχή) : τὰ ὑπάρχοντα, what one can depend on. 
So fond was Parysatis of Cyrus, who in energy and spirit probably resem- 
bled her much more than did his brother, that she had endeavored before 
the death of Darius to induce him to name Cyrus as his successor to the 
throne, on the ground that he was the first son born after his own succes- 
sion. It was on this ground, that he was the first son of the King, that 
Xerxes I. obtained the sovereignty. — βασιλεύοντα : the simple attributive 
part. (G. 276, 1) modifying as an adj. the foll. noun. 

5. ἀφικνεῖτο: common usage would require ἀφικνοῖτο (G. 233, N. 1; 
Moods and Tenses, ὃ 62, N. 1). — παρὰ βασιλέως, from the presence of the 
King, is used with τῶν as an adj., the noun ἄνδρες being omitted (G. 141, 
N. 3). The whole expression is compressed and would read in full: ὅστις 
δ᾽ ἀφικνεῖτο παρὰ βασιλέως τῶν παρὰ βασιλεῖ, k.T.A. For the prep. παρά, 
see G. 191, VI. 4.- βασιλέως : βασιλεύς, when used to designate the king 
of Persia, commonly omits the art. — wévras: pl., because of the distribu- 
tive force of ὅστις, --- οὕτω διατιθεὶς... ὥστε, 80 dis-posing (them) that, ete. 
With δια-τίθημι, cf. Lat. dispono.— αὐτῷ: case (G. 185). So αὐτῷ below | 
at the end. — εἶναι ; result (G. 266, 1). — Kal... δέ: this position of δέ, so 
far from the beginning of the sent., is rare. —Tav βαρβάρων : to give a 
substantive a more emphatic position, it is often transferred, generally with 
change of case, from the dependent to the principal clause. Εἰ g. ὁρῶ τὸν 
ἄνδρα, ὅστις ἐστίν, and in Eng., ‘‘See the learned Bellario how he writes.” 
So here, normally, we should have ἐπεμελεῖτο ὡς of παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ βάρβαροι. 
πολεμεῖν, K. τι A. For the case of βαρβάρων as it stands, see G. 171, 2. — 
πολεμεῖν : with ἱκανοί (G. 261, 1). — ὡς εἴησαν, ἔχοιεν : object clause with 
ὡς and the opt. (G. 217, N. 1). — εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχοιεν : ἔχω and an adverb are 
often joined in the sense of the verb ἐο be and an adj., as καλῶς ἔχει = KG-) 
λόν ἐστιν, zt is well, lit. it has (itself) well, bene habet. For the forma-. 
tion and derivation of εὐ-νοϊκῶς, see G. 74, 1; 6. 129, 13 a. 

6. τὴν δὲ... βασιλέα, and he collected his (G. 141, N. 2) Greck force as 
secretly as possible (lit. concealing himself, G. 277, 2, as most he was able), 








ANABASIS 1, 1. 7 


that he might catch the King as unprepared as possible. Cyrus knew that an 
army of Greeks was his only hope for wresting the throne from his brother 
with all the resources of the empire at his command. Cf. i. 7. 3. —‘EA- 
ληνικήν : a denom. in κός (G. 129, 13 a). 

Page 2. — ὅτι ἀπαρεοισκευότατον : ὅτι or ds is very often prefixed in this 
way to the superlative to strengthen it. (Cf. quam maxime.) In these 
constructions there is a ellipsis of some form of δύναμαι. Sometimes in 
the case of the superlative with ὡς the verb is expressed, as in iii. 4. 48, ὡς 
ἐδύνατο τάχιστα ἐπορεύετο. Cf. with this the simple ὡς τάχιστα in i. 3. 14. 
Cf. also with ὅτι πλείστους, as many as possible, in this section, ὡς ἂν δύ- 
νηται πλείστους in i. 6. 3. — ὅπως λάβοι: purpose (G. 216). — wide, in the 
following manner. — érovetro: middle (G. 199, 2). ---- συλλογήν : from συλ- 
λέγω. --- φυλακάς : antecedent attracted (G. 154). Normally τῶν φυλακῶν 
ὁπόσων (G. 153) εἶχε, x. τι A. The accent shows that φυλακάς is from 
φυλακή, and not from φύλαξ (G. 25, 1). State the difference in meaning 
of the two nouns, and for the suffix of φυλακή, see G. 129, 1. — ἐν ταῖς 
πόλεσι : for the prep. ἐν, see G. 191, II. 1. -- φρουράρχοις : φρουρός, 
watcher, guard (πρό and opdw),and ἄρχω (G. 131, 1 ἃ 3).— λαμβάνειν, en- 
list. — as... πόλεσι, on the ground that Tissaphernes was plotting against 
the cities (G. 278, 1). Compare ὡς ἀποκτενῶν in § 3.— Kal yap... τὸ 
ἀρχαῖον, and (this was a plausible reason), for the cities of Ionia had origi- 
nally (τὸ ἀρχαῖον, G. 160, 2) belonged to Tissaphernes (G. 169, 1). ἦσαν : 
impf. used with τὸ ἀρχαῖον of a time prior to the main action. ἀρχαῖος 
is derived from ἀρχή, beginning (G. 129, 12; οἵ, 128, 2 b). —ék βασιλέως 
δεδομέναι, having been given (G. 277, 6) him by (ἐκ to express the agent) the 
King. For the prep. ἐκ, see G. 191, I. 9. --- ἀφειστήκεσαν : the perfect of 
ἵστημι was originally σε-στη-κα, which with the ε of the plup. (ἃ. 101, 4) 
prefixed would become ἐ-σε-στη-κειν. The o was then transposed and be- 
came ‘, and from this form by contraction came εἱστήκειν. The form ἑστή- 
Kew also occurs (G. 101, 4, N.). — MtArjrov: case (G. 191, I. 5). Cyrus 
had not been invested by his father with the command of the Greek cities 
of Ionia (Grote, Chap. LXIX.), but these remained, so far as they were sub- 
ject to Persian control, under the charge of Tissaphernes. When, how- 
ever, after the accession of Artaxerxes, trouble arose between Cyrus and 
Tissaphernes, these Greek cities revolted to the former with the single ex- 
ception of Miletus. See i. 9. 8,9. This was greatly to the advantage of 
Cyrus, as it kept his way open to the sea. See the map. 

7. προαισθόμενος, having become aware (or in Eng. more commonly, δ6- 
coming aware) beforehand. — τὰ αὐτά : distinguish carefully from the fol- 
lowing ταῦτα (G. 79, 2). In the pl., because the Greek looked at the action 
of revolting with reference to its parts; but in Eng., this same thing. — 
βουλευομένους (sc. τινάς) is in indirect discourse (G. 280). — ἀποστῆναι : 
in app. to the preceding τὰ αὐτὰ ταῦτα. -- τοὺς piv... τοὺς δέ: relic of 
the original demon. meaning of the art. (G. 143, 1). — αὐτῶν : vart. gen. 
(G. 168). — ὑπολαβὼν τοὺς φεύγοντας is subordinated to συλλέξας ἐπόλι- 


8 XENOPHON. 


όρκει, when he had taken the fuyitives under his protection, he collected an 3s 
army and laid siege, etc. ὑπολαβὼν καὶ (mark the conjunction) συλλέξος 
ἔπολιόρκει would mean when he had taken, etc., and had collected, etc., he 
laid siege, etc. — ἐπολιόρκει: continued action. From πόλις and εἵργω, to 
hem in. — καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν, both by land und sea. For the 
prep. κατά, see G,191, IV. 2.— ἐκβάλλω, to eject, banish; φεύγω, to fice, be 
in banishment ; κατάγω, to lead back, restore from banishment ; ἐκπίπτω, to 
fall out, be banished. — καὶ attn... στράτευμα, and in this again he 
had (6. 184, 4) another pretext for collecting (G. 262, 2) an army. αὕτη in 
agreement with the noun in the pred., since otherwise it would be τοῦτο. 

8. ἠξίου... αὐτοῦ: he urged (ἀξιόω, to think ἄξιον, to claim) on the 
ground that he was (G. 277, 2) a brother of his, etc. — δοθῆναι: obj. of 
ἠξίου (G. 260, 1), with πόλεις for its subj. — ot: the indir. reflex. (G. 144, 2). 
Accented because it is emphatic (G. 28, N. 1). — ἄρχειν : parallel in const. 
to δοθῆναι, 1. 6. he thought it right rather that the cities should be given 
to him than (he thought it right) that Tissaphernes should control them. 
— αὐτῶν: case (ἃ. 171, 3). — συνέπραττεν... . αὐτῷ, co-operated with him 
in this, lit. did this with (σύν) him. Why is ταῦτα in the pl.? See note 
on τὰ αὐτά in 8 7. — πρὸς ἑαυτόν : used adj. (G. 141, N. 3). πρός of perso- 
nal relation that is hostile (6. 191, VI. 6,3 ὁ). — ὥστε ἠσθάνετο : ὥστε 
with the ind. after a full stop (G. 237). Cf. ὥστε εἶναι in ὃ 5. — Τισ- 
σαφέρνει. .. δαπανᾶν, but thought that he (αὐτόν, i. e. Cyrus) was incurring 
expense (G. 260, 2) about his forces, because he was at war (G. 277, 2) with 
Tissaphernes (G. 186, N. 1). For the prep. ἀμφί, see 6. 191, VI. 1.— ὥστε 
».. πολεμούντων, consequently he was not at all (οὐδέν͵ G. 160, 2) displeased 
at their being at war (G. 278, 1).— καὶ γάρ, and (the more) because, in- 
volving an ellipsis, as always. Cf. 8 6. — ἀποπέμπω, to send what is due 
(ἀπό), remit. — ὧν : assimilation in case (G. 153). — ἐτύγχανεν ἔχων, had 
previously, as it happened, possessed. Cf. παρὼν ἐτύγχανε in ὃ 2. For the 
tense of ἐτύγχανεν, cf. ἦσαν in § 6. Note throughout this sect. the use of 
the impf. to express continwance. 

9. ἐν Χερρονήσῳ: the Thracian Chersonésus (χέρσος, later xéppos, dry 
land, as opposed to water, and νῆσος, island; Lat. peninsula). See map. 
— ᾿Αβύδου : case (G. 182, 2). — τόνδε τὸν τρόπον, in the following (G. 148, 
N. 1) manner (G. 160, 2), equal to ὧδε in § 6. — Κλέαρχος : the general 
most trusted by Cyrus. An account is given of him in ii. 6. 1-15. — ἠγά- 
σϑη, came to admire (G. 200, N. ὅ δ), aor. of ἄγαμαι. --- δίδωσιν : change 
to the historical pres. Cf. ἀναβαίνει, ἀνέβη in § 2 and Nn. — δαρεικούς : 
the darics mentioned here were gold coins worth about $5.40. See note on 
i. 7. 18. -- χρυσίον, gold money, more lit. a gold piece, der. from χρυσός 
with the suffix vo- (see G. 129, 8).— ἀπό, by means of. — συνέλεξεν, ἔπο- 
λέμει : note the diff. in tense. —Tots Θρᾳξὶ τοῖς . .. οἰκοῦσι : position of 
the attributive adj. phrase (G. 142, 2). Cf. ἐν Χερρονήσῳ τῇ, k. τ΄ A, 
above. The acc. Ἑλλήσποντον with reference to a preceding state of mo- 
tion, as in the phrase εἰς τόπον οἰκῶ, to (yo into and) dwell in a place. 
For the prep. ὑπέρ, see G. 191, IV. 3.—eis, for, of purpose (G. 191, III. 1d). 





ANABASIS 1, 1. 9 


— ἑκοῦσαι: to be translated by an adv. (G. 138, N. 7). — τοῦτο... στρά- 
τευμα, and in this way again this army was secretly supported (G. 279, 4) 
for him. 

Page 3.— 10. ξένος : in the sense often of guest-friend, a citizen of an- 
other state with whom one has a treaty of hospitality, used of both parties, 
though commonly, as here, of the gwest as contrasted with the host. The 
word often means also simply stranger, and again, as below, hired soldier, 
mercenary. —%m6: for this prep., here used to express agency, see (ἃ. 191, 
VI. 7. — οἴκοι: used as adj. (G.141,N.3). Forits accent, see G. 22, Ν. 1.— 
ἀντι-στασιωτῶν, opponents, antagonists. στασιώτης from στάσις, faction 
(t-ora-pat), the suffix ot- signifying action (see G. 129, 3). On the force 
of the suffix ta-, cf. ὁπλίτας in §2 and note. — αἰτεῖ... μισθόν, asks him 
for pay for (eis) 2000 mercenaries (and) for three months (G. 167, 5). Some- 
times rendered, asks him for about (εἰς, cf. note on εἰς, i. 2. 3) 2000 merce- 
naries, etc., but it seems impossible that Cyrus should have been willing to 
send off 4000 Greeks on so distant an expedition, when his whole aim was 
to gather Greek troops about him as rapidly as possible. On thie other 
hand, it was an easy matter for him to furnish Aristippus the means for col- 
lecting this number. — as... ἀντιστασιωτῶν, on the ground that (cf. the 
use of ὡς with ἐπιβουλεύοντος in ὃ 6) in this way he would get the better of 
his opponents. περιγενόμενος dv (G. 277, 2) would, if expressed by a finite 
mood, be περιγένοιτο ἄν (G. 211). The prot. to this apod. is contained in 
οὕτω (G. 226, 1). — μή : with the inf. (G. 283, 3). — καταλῦσαι, to end (se. 
his quarrel). — πρὶν ἂν συμβουλεύσηται : πρίν with the subj. (G. 240, 1 
and 2). - 

11. IIpégevov: the particular friend of Xenophon, at whose invitation 
the latter took part in the expedition. An account is given of him in ii. 6. 
. 16-20. — ὡς βουλόμενος, ὡς παρεχόντων : the first ὡς shows that βουλόμε- 
vos, κι T. X., gives the cause assigned by Cyrus for his command to Proxenus, 
the second ὡς shows that παρεχόντων does the same for βουλόμενος, while 
ὡς further on before πολεμήσων shows that this part. gives the purpose 
declared by Cyrus for ἐκέλευσεν, κι τ A. The further idea, implied in the 
first and third cases, that the cause and the purpose were not the érue 
grounds of his action, is derived from the context and is not necessarily 
implied by this use of ὡς. Neither is there any conditional force in the 
part. with ὡς. Cf. with these three cases of ὡς with the part., the places 
where it occurs in 88 3, 6, and 10. — εἰς, into the cowntry of. — Πισίδας : 
the Pisidians were a marauding race, occupying the western range of 
Mt. Taurus. See map. — ξένους... τούτους, these (G. 137) also being guest- 
Friends (G. 136) of his. — σὺν τοῖς φύγασι, with the aid of the exiles. Cf. 
with this the simple dat. Τισσαφέρνει that precedes (G. 186, N. 1), and for 
the prep. σύν, see G. 191, II. 2.— As stated in the prefatory note, Cyrus, 
jn coming down to the coast as satrap, had used all the means in his power 
to get the good-will of the Lacedaemonians. On the termination of the 
Peloponnesian War in the spring of 404 B. c., many men whose lives had 
been wholly spent under arms were left without employment. This made it 









10 XENOPHON. 


the easier now for Cyrus to collect the army that he wished, an army of 
trained veterans that could be thoroughly depended upon in a dangerous | 
enterprise. Some of those who accompanied him were, like Xenophon, men 
of a superior grade, disheartened by the political condition of things that 
followed the war, and drawn into this expedition by personal admiration for 
the prince, or personal attachment to some of his officers. 


CHAPTER II. 


Synopsis: Cyrus, being now ready to set out inland, assembles his troops at 
Sardis, announcing, in order to conceal his real object, his intention of expelling 
the Pisidians from their territory (1-4). The king, informed of the real facts 
by Tissaphernes, makes ready to meet him. Cyrus sets out from Sardis and 
marches through Lydia across the Maeander to Colossae in Phrygia, where he is 
joined by Menon (5, 6). Thence he proceeds to Celaenae, a city which the his- 
torian describes at some length, where he waits a month and is joined by the 
rest of his Greek troops. He reviews and numbers these (7-9). Thence he 
proceeds northwest through Peltae to Κεραμῶν ἀγορά (11), and then east to 
Kaiorpov πεδίον, where Epyaxa, the wife of the king of Cilicia, meets him and 
furnishes him money with which to pay his troops (11, 12). Thence southeast 
to Thymbrium and Tyriaeum, where he reviews his whole army (13-18), 
Thence through Iconium into Lycaonia (19). From here Menon, accompanied 
by Epyaxa, proceeds due south into Cilicia; Cyrus northeast to Dana (20). 
After some delay caused by the king of Cilicia, Cyrus himself crosses the moun- 
tains and enters Tarsi, which had been abandoned by the king (21-24). Menon 
had reached this city five days before, having lost two companies in the passage 
of the mountains (25). Syennésis the king finally obeys a summons from Cyrus, 
and they seal their compact of friendship with gifts (26, 27). 


1. ἐπεὶ... ἄνω, but when at length it seemed good (not simply it seemed, 
ef. note on i.*8. 11) to him to proceed (G. 202, with 1) inland. More than 
a year had been spent in preparation. ἄνω, up, inland, from the coast. 
So ἀνα-βαίνω, ἀνά-βασις. --- τὴν piv... βουλόμενος, he gave as his pretext 
indeed (that he was going) because he wished. Note the voice of ἔποιεῦτο 
(G. 199, 2). μέν implies the clause with δέ, which if expressed might be, 
τῇ δ᾽ ἀληθείᾳ ἐπὶ βασιλέα ἐπορεύετο. On ὡς βουλόμενος, cf. the note on 
ὡς βουλόμενος in i. 1. 11.— ἐκβαλεῖν ἐκ : prep. repeated, as often. — 
παντά-πασιν: der.?— ὡς ἐπὶ τούτους, avowedly agatist these. —+d βαρ- 
βαρικόν: sc. στράτευμα. So with τὸ “Ἑλληνικόν. Note the suflix_kés 
(G. 129, 13 a), and ef. ξενικοῦ, below. — ἐνταῦθα καὶ ἥκειν, to come there 
also, i. e. to Sardis, § 4. — λαβόντι, with (G. 277, 6). — 8rov... στράτευ- 
pa, whatever troops he had. Cf. ὁπόσας εἶχε φυλακάς in i. 1. 6, with the 
note, and ὃ εἶχε στράτευμα, below. This attraction of the antecedent 
(G. 154) is a common const. in Eng. 8150. --- ᾿Αριστίππῳ: Aristippus did 
not come in person, but sent Menon (i. 2. 6, and ii. 6. 28). — συναλλα- 
yévtt: cf. for the meaning καταλῦσαι ini. 1. 10. — ἀπο-πέμψαι : cf. note 
on ἀπέπεμπε in 1. 1. 8. — τοῦ ξενικοῦ: sc. στρατεύματος, and for the case 


~ 


ANABASIS 1, τι. 11 


see G. 171, 8. -- λαβόντα : so far removed from Feviq, with which we should 
expect it to agree (cf. λαβόντι and συναλλαγέντι, above), that it takes the 
case of the (unexpressed) subject of ἥκειν. See G. 138, Ν. 8 ὁ (Dat.). — 
πλήν : sc. τοσούτων (G. 191, I. 5) as antecedent to ὁπόσοι (G. 87, 1). — 
ἀκροπόλεις : show how ἀκρό-πολις came to have the meaning of citadel. 

2. ἐκάλεσε: short vowel of the stem retained (G. 109, 1, N. 2.}). ---ἐκέλευσε, 
urged. Note the chiastic arrangement, ἐκάλεσε δὲ τοὺς πολιορκοῦντας Kal 
τοὺς φυγάδας ἐκέλευσε. --- ὑποσχόμενος... . οἴκαδε, promising (see ὑπισχνέο- 
μαι) them, ἐγ he should successfully accomplish the objects (G. 152) for which 
he was taking the field, not to stop wntil he should restore them to their homes 
(οἴκαδε, G. 61). Verbs of promising (G. 203, N. 2) may take the infinitive 
either in indirect discourse (i. 6. the future), or not in indirect discourse 
(G. 202) as here. (The fut. παύσεσθαι here has only the authority of a 
correction in one MS.) The dependent verbs, however, except ἐστρατεύετο, 
are constructed on the principles of indirect discourse (G. 248, 1), and we 
might have had ἐὰν καταπράξῃ and πρὶν ἂν καταγάγῃ, representing ἐὰν 
καταπράξω and πρὶν ἂν καταγάγω of the direct form. On the other hand, 
ἐστρατεύετο, for which, on the principles of indirect discourse, we might 
have had either στρατεύοιτο or στρατεύεται (as representing στρατεύομαι 
of the direct form), is not included in the indirect discourse, but is con- 
structed like an ordinary past verb (like those mentioned in G. 243, N. 2); 
for a fuller explanation of this, see Moods and Tenses, ὃ 77,1, N. 2; § 74, 2, 
N. 2; $70, N. 2. --- πρόσϑεν πρίν : cf. i. 1.10, and Moods and Tenses, ὃ 67, 
nN. 4. — ἡδέως : adv. der. from ἡδύς (6. 74, 1). 

Page 4. — αὐτῷ: dat. of indir. obj. (G. 184, 2). — παρῆσαν eis, arrived 
at, i. 6. came to (eis) Sardis and were by (παρ-ἢσαν) it. The army was en- 
camped probably outside the city, so that εἰς means simply to. Sardis was the 
eapital of Lydia and at this time the residence of Cyrus as satrap. See map. 

3. τοὺς ἐκ τῶν πόλεων: cf. τῶν παρὰ βασιλέως in i. 1. 5, and the nN. — 
εἰς, to the number of, with numerals (G. 191, III. 1, ὃ. This word and 
ἀμφί, about (α. 191, VI. 1, 3), when used in this sense, are still prepositions 
and take the numeral in the accus. Cf. πελτασταὶ ἀμφὶ τοὺς ζισχιλίους, 
about two thousund (acc.) peltasts (nom.) below in § 9, where ἀμφὶ... δισ- 
χιλίους is an adj. phrase. ὡς and ὅσον, on the other hand, are in this 
sense adverbs and do not affect the case of the numeral that follows. — 
γυμνῆτας : the accent determines the dec. to which the noun belongs, the 
termination -as being long in the first dec. and short in the third (G. 22, 2). 
The term yupvis, light-armed soldier (der. from γυμνός, with which cf. the 
use of ψιλοί in 111. 3. 7), as opposed to hoplite, is generic, and comprehends 
the πελταστής, targeteer, τοξότης, Lowman, and σφενδονήτης, slinger. — ὡς, 
about, see note on εἰς, above. — Μεγαρεύς: for the suffix see G. 129, 10. 
— #v: in agreement with the nearer subj. (G. 135, N. 1). — τῶν στρατευο- 
μένων : pred. part. gen. (G. 169, 1). 

4, οὔτοι pév: in contrast with those who joined him later (δ 6 and § 9). 
| Sentences in Greek begin in general, contrary to the practice in Eng., with 

a conjunction. The exceptions to this principle in Xen. are mainly such 





12 XENOPHON. 


sentences as begin with demonstratives or adverbs of place ; cf. οὕτοι μὲν, 


k. τ᾿ X., here, τούτου τὸ εὗρος, k. τ. A., in ὃ 5, τοῦτον διαβὰς, κ. τ᾿ A. and ~ 


ἐνταῦθα ἔμεινεν, x. τ. X., in ὃ 6, etc. Such sentences are called cases of 
asyndeton (ἀ-σύν-δετον, ϑέω, to bind). — αὐτῷ : dat. of advantage (G. 184, 3). 
— Trrcadépvns πορεύεται, x. tT. X.: he declares this himself in ii. 8. 19. — 
κατα-νοήσας, remarking, seeing. — ἡγησάμενος : der. from the same root as 
ἄγω. It has, like duco in Lat., the two general meanings of to Jead and to 
think. — εἶναι : quoted inf. (G. 260, 2). — μείζονα ἢ as, too extensive to be, 
lit. greater than as (it would be, if), etc. — ὡς before βασιλέα, to, used only 
with the acc. of a person (G. 191, II]. 2). — βασιλέα: cf. note on βασιλέως 
in 1. 1. 5.— 7... τάχιστα, as rapidly as possible, lit. in what way (se. ὁδῷ, 
G. 188, 1) he could most quickly. — ἵππέας : a denominative in evs (G. 129, 
2a). 

5. ἤκουσε: with double obj. (G. 171, 2, N. 1). — cts: antec. omitted 
(G. 152). — ὡρμᾶτο : the march began in the spring of 401 8. c. — ἀπό: 
not ἐξ, out of, because the army was not encamped within the city. — διά, 


through (G. 191, 1V. 1).— σταθμοὺς τρεῖς, three days’ journey (G. 161). 


The σταθμός was properly the halting (σταμαι) place (cf. Lat. sta-bulum), 
and so the day’s journey or march that preceded. — παρασάγγας : acc. of 
extent of space (ἃ. 161). The parasang was a Persian measure equal to 
30 stadia (11. 2. 6), or about a league (34 statute miles). — εἴκοσι καὶ δύο: 
note the conj. (G. 77, 2, N. 2). This made their rate of travel greater than 
ordinary; according to vii. 8. 26, the average rate was 54 parasangs per 
day. — Μαίανδρον : position (G. 142, 2, nN. 6). Give the Eng. der. See 
map.—amdé6pa: the plethrum measured about 101 Eng. feet. — yépupa... 
ἑπτά, and there was a pontoon-bridge over (it) made of seven boats (G. 188, 1). 

6. διαβάς : relatively past (G. 204). Still we render loosely, crossing this, 
etc. — οἰκουμένην, inhabited, many of the cities of Asia being then, as now, 
deserted, ἔρημοι. --- εὐδαίμονα, prosperous. Give its der. — ἡμέρας : acc. 
of extent of time (G. 161). — Mévav: the general sent by Aristippus. An 
unfavorable account of him is given in li. 6. 21-29. 

7. ἐνταῦθα... ἦν, there Cyrus had (G. 184, 4) a palace. — βασίλεια : se. 
δώματα. With the pl. used in this way of the separate buildings composing 
the palace, cf. aedes in Lat. Distinguish this word from βασίλεια and 
βασιλεία (both of the first dee.) respectively.— fv: agreeing with the nearer 
subj. (G. 135, 2, and N. 1). — παράδεισος : a Persian word meaning prop- 
erly a walled place. What is the Eng. der.?— θηρίων : limiting πλήρης 
(G. 180, 1; 172, 1). — ἀπὸ ὕππου, on horseback, lit. from a horse, because 
in hunting the attack upon the animal hunted proceeds from the horse. 
Where this relation is not to be expressed, the phrase is ἐφ᾽ ἵππου, as in iil. 
4, 49, ἐπὶ τοῦ ἵππου ἦγεν, he led them on horseback. — ὁπότε βούλοιτο: a 
cond. rel. sent. expressing a gen. supposition in past time (G. 233). — διὰ 
... παραδείσου, and through the middle (G. 142, 4, N. 4) of the park, ete. 
-- αὐτοῦ: in the pred. pos. (G. 142, 4, N. 8 α). -- πηγαί εἰσιν ἐκ τῶν βασι- 
λείων : the more precise statement would be ἐν τοῖς βασιλείοις, but the gen. 
is used with ἐκ with reference to the subsequent flowing of the water out 
Srom (under) the palace. 





ANABASIS 1, 1. 13 


Page ὅ. -- 8. ἔστι: accent (G. 28, Ν. 1 (1), end). — ἐπί, close upon, with 
the dat. and a verb of rest. So ὑπό (next line), under, αὐ the foot of. — καὶ 
οὗτος, this also, i.e. the Marsyas as well as the Maeander, — ἐμβάλλει, 
empties, intransitively. — ποδῶν : pred. gen. of measure (G. 169, 3). — λέ- 
yerar... ἐκδεῖραι, Apollo is said to have flayed, etc., the pers. const. for 
the impers., λέγεται ᾿Απόλλωνα ἐκδεῖραι. The dir. form of the anecdote 
would be ἐνταῦθα ᾿Απόλλων ἐξέδειρε.. . ἐκρέμασε (G. 246, with note). 
Μαρσύαν : Marsyas is said to have challenged Apollo to a musical contest, 
on the terms that the vanquished should be at the mercy of the victor, 
When Apollo gained the day, he punished Marsyas for his insolence by 
hanging him to a tree and flaying him alive. (See Marsyas in a Class. 
Dict.) — ἐρίζοντα (G. 277, 2), in a contest. — ot as indir. reflexive (G. 144, 
2a) refers to Apollo. — περί : properly arownd (G. 191, VI. 5). So in a de- 
rived sense here, concerning, Lat. de. — σοφίας, musical skill, lit. wisdom, 
der. from σοφός (G. 129, 7). -- δέρμα : note the suff. par-, signifying the 
result of the action (G. 129, 4), and for the stem cf. ἐκ-δεῖραι (Sep-), above. 
δείρω shows the same root that the Eng. word tear does. — ὅθεν, whence, for 
ὅθι or οὗ, where (G. 87, 2). Cf. εἰσὶν ἐκ τῶν βασιλείων in §7 and note. — 
διά: with the acc. on account of (ἃ. 191, IV. 1, 2). --- Μαρσύας: pred. 
nom. (G. 136). 

9. τῇ μάχῃ, in the well-known (rH) battle (G. 188, 1), that of Salamis, 
480 Β. c. For the suffix of μάχη, see G. 129, 1. --- λέγεται οἰκοδομῆσαι: 
ef. λέγεται ἐκδεῖραι in ὃ 8 and the note. — τοξότας Kpfiras: the Cretan 
bowmen were celebrated in antiquity. — Yodatveros: if this is the general 
mentioned in § 3, the purpose for which he had been left behind must 
remain in doubt. The numbers given in the preceding sections and the 
sum total given here (at the end of the section) will not tally. — ἐξέτασιν : 
from ἐξ-ετάζω, to examine thoroughly, ἐτάζω, from éreds, real. — ἐγένοντο ot 
σύμπαντες, the whole together amounted to. — ὁπλῖται, πελτασταί: a case 
of part. appos. (G. 137, N. 2). The second of these nouns is used generi- 
eally for /ight-armed troops in general, including the γυμνῆτες (δ 3) and 
the τοξόται (mentioned in this section). — ἀμφὶ τοὺς δισχιλίους : see note 
on eis in § 3. 

10. Up to this time the march has been southeast. Cyrus now turns 
back and marches northwest as far as Κεραμῶν ἀγορά, probably with the 
double object of increasing his supplies and getting on the main high-road 
to the east. —év ais: sc. ἡμέραις. --- τὰ Δύκαια ἔθυσε, celebrated the Lycaea 
with sacrifice, a festival in honor of Ζεὺς Δυκαῖος, so named from Mt. Ly- 
caeus in Arcadia. τὰ Λύκαια is a cogn. acc. (G. 159). Cf. the phrase 
πέμπειν Βοηδρόμια, to celebrate the Boedromia by a procession. —orav: in 
agreement with the pred. nom. (G. 135, N. 4). — στλεγγίδες : a sort of tiara, 
made of gold, as here stated, and worn as an ornament for the head. — 
Χρυσαῖ: der. from χρυσός (G. 129, 14). — Κεραμῶν : probably the gen. 
of Κεραμοί, the Ceramians, though this is uncertain. With Kepapav ἀγορά 
ef. the Eng. Newmarket. — ἐσχάτην πρός, the last bordering on, on the road to. 

11. The rate at which Cyrus marched these three days was very rapid. 










14 XENOPHON. 








His object probably was to meet Epyaxa before his troops became clamor. 9 
ous for their pay. — Kavorpov πεδίον, the name of a town (lit. plain of 
the Cajster), a compound noun like Kepapav ἀγορά, above. Cf. the Eng. 
names of places, Dartmoor and Springfield. — ὠφείλετο, there was due. — 
πλέον : used indeclinably for πλεόνων. --- θύρας, quarters, just as ἐπὶ ταῖς 
βασιλέως θύραις in i. 9. 3 means at court. — 6 8... διῆγε, but he continu- 
ally put them off with the hope (of getting their pay). — ἀνιώμενος : quoted 
after δῆλος ἦν (G. 280, N. 1). --- πρός, in accordance with (G.191, VI. 6, 
1 a). — τοῦ Kupov τρόπου : the article limits τρόπου (G. 142, 1). — ἔχον- 
τα, when abie (G. 138, N. 8 δ). 

Page 6. — ἀπ-ήτουν, ἀπο-διδόναι: note the force of the preposition. 
But in ὃ 12 simply δοῦναι, because Cyrus had in fact no claims on Epyaxa. 

12. Syennésis is said to have pursued a double policy and to have en- 
deavored to propitiate both Cyrus and Artaxerxes, determined to keep his 
throne whichever of the two prevailed. The kings of Cilicia were at this 
time tributary to Persia. On the Ionic gen. in Zvewvéoros, see G.53,1,N.3.— 
τοῦ βασιλέως : note the article. — ἐλέγετο δοῦναι : the pers. const., but be- 
low ἐλέγετο συγγενέσθαι Kipov. — οὖν, at any rate, i. 6. however he got 
the money, he at any rate certainly had it to pay his troops with. Cf. οὖν, 
below, in §§ 22, 25.— στρατιᾷ: his Greek army. — φύλακας : note the 
accent, and cf. the note on φυλακάς ini. 1. 6. 

13. παρά: with the acc. because of the course of the water, after it has | 
left the κρήνη, along by the road. Cf. πηγαὶ ἐκ τῶν βασιλείων in ὃ 7 and | 
the note. — κρήνη ... καλουμένη, the so-called (G. 276, 1) spring of Midas, 
lit. the spring called (that) of Midas. — τὸν Σάτυρον: Midas, the prover- 
bially wealthy king of Phrygia, is said to have caught the satyr Silenus (the 
early protector and constant companion of Bacchus) by making the foun- 
tain here mentioned flow with wine, instead of water. Another form of 
the story appears in the account of the ‘‘Gardens of Midas,” placed by 
Herodotus (viii. 158) in Macedonia, in which Silenus is said to have been 
made prisoner by garlands of roses. — οἴνῳ. .. αὐτήν, by mixing wire in 
at, lit. by mixing it with wine (the means, G. 188, 1). 

14. Κύρου: genitive object of δεηθῆναι (G. 172, N. 1). The object inf 
ἐπιδεῖξαι (G. 260, 1) is in this case the acc. — βουλόμενος : Cyrus was the 
more willing to gratify her, since he saw the advantage of giving Syennesis 
a vivid impression of the strength of his army. — τῶν “Ειἰλλήνων kal τῶν 
βαρβάρων : the article repeated, because the Greeks and barbarians are not 
viewed as a single army, but as separate forces. 

15. as... μάχην, as their custom (was) for battle (sc. ταχϑῆναι). νό- 
pos, regulation, custom, law, from νέμω, to distribute, portion out. — στῆναι; 
to take their places, not to βίαπά. --- ἕκαστον : sc. στρατηγόν. — ἐπὶ τεττά- 
ρων, four deep. This made the front of the army very extended. — εἶχε: in 
agreement with the nearer subj. (G. 135, N. 1). — τὸ μὲν δεξιόν, k. τ. A.: the 
positions were respectively the right, the left, and the centre, named in the 
order of danger and honor. The right was the most honorable position, be- 
cause a flank attack on this side left the soldier unprotected, the shield. 








ANABASIS 1, 11. 15 


being carried on the left arm. — εὐώνυμον : εὖ and ὄνομα, properly of good 
name or omen. Hence left, used euphemistically to avoid the ill-omeued 
word ἀριστερός, omens from the left being unlucky with the Greeks. 

16. πρῶτον μέν : correlated by εἶτα δὲ in the next line. For the com- 
parison of πρῶτος, see G. 73, 2. --κατ᾽ Yas... τάξεις, by (ἃ. 191, IV. 2, 
2c) troops and companies, respectively of cavalry and infantry. — τάξις 
(ray-o1s), properly a drawing up, as of troops, see G. 129, 3. — τοὺς 
“EdAnvas: governed by ἐθεώρει, above. — παρελαύνων : Cyrus rode by the 
Greeks with Epyaxa rather than have them march by him, probably because 
in this way they presented a more solid and imposing front. — &ppa, chariot 
(two-wheeled) ; ἅμαξα, wagon ; ἁρμ-άμαξα, eusy-curriage (four-wheeled), 
for women and children. — χαλκᾶ : derived from χαλκός (G. 129, 14). — 
ἐκκεκαλυμμένας, wrcovercd, a circumstantial part. of manner (G. 277, 2). 

17. στήσας: first aorist and so transitive; for its relation to πέμψας, 
see note on ὑπολαβών in i. 1. 7. — πρό, before (G. 191, I. 4 a). — péons: 
ef. μέσου in §7 and note. — προβαλέσθαι τὰ ὅπλα, fo present (throw before 
themselves their) arms. — ὅλην τὴν φάλαγγα, the phalanx in a body (G. 142, 
4, N. 5). — ot δέ, but they (G. 143, 1, N. 2). — ἐσάλπιγξε: an impers. verb 
(G. 134, nN. 1 d). —é« δὲ... σκηνάς, and they (sc. αὐτῶν, G. 278, 1) after 
this (G.191, I. 3 b) advancing more and more rapidly with a shout, of their 
own accord the soldiers (G. 184, 4) began to run toward the camp. 

Page '7. — αὐτόματος, acting of one’s own will (αὐτός and μάω, to desire 
eagerly), Eng. automaton.— ἔπὶ tas σκηνάς : to give the barbarians the im- 
pression that they intended an attack. In the next section the Greeks, it 
is said, ἐπὶ τὰς σκηνὰς ἦλθον, dispersed to their own tents. 

βαρβάρων : subjective gen. (G. 167, 2). With φόβος, sc. Fv. — καὶ 
-..7€... καί; the first καί connects the statement that precedes with the 
double (ve... καί, both. . . and) one that follows. — ot τ τῆς ἀγορᾶς ἔφυ- 
γον, i.e. οἱ ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ ἐκ τῆς ἀγορᾶς ἔφυγον. Cf. § 3, andi. 1. 5. — 
λεμπρότητα: from λαμπρός (see G. 129, 7). --- τὴν “τὰν τοῦ στρατεύμα- 
τος: position (ἃ. 142, 2, Ν. 2, end). — ἥσθη : see ἥδομαι. --- τὸν... ἰδών, 
seeing the terror with which the Greeks inspired the barbarians (G. 141, N. 3). 

19. ταύτην... Ἕλλησιν, this country he gave over to the Grecks to plun- 
der (G. 265). It is at this point that Cyrus first gets out of his own satrapy. 
— πολέμιος : from πόλεμος (G. 129, 12). --- ὡς οὖσαν, on the ground that 
at was (G. 277, N. 2). 

20. τὴν ταχίστην ὁδόν, by the shortest road (G. 159, N. 5), peculiar use 
of the cogn. acc. (G. 159) to include the road or way over which motion pro- 
ceeds. — ἀποπέμπει, συνέπεμψεν : cf. note on ἀναβαίνει, ἀνέβη, 1. 1. 2. — 
στρατιώτας : without the article, as if attracted into the rel. clause, οὕς 
στρατιώτας, x. τ. A. (G. 154). — αὐτόν, himself, i. 6. Menon. — μετά : prop- 
erly among (G. 191, VI. 3). Here in company with. — Δάνα : a nent. pl. 
See map for the two routes into Cilicia here mentioned. — ἐν 3: se. χρύνω, 
and cf. ἐν ais in § 10. — φοινικιστήν βασίλειον, a wearer of the royal pur- 
ple (φοῖνιξ), i.e. a nobleman of the highest rank. — καὶ érepov... δυνά- 
στην, and a certain other powerful man of his subordinates. In 1. 8. 5 


16 XENOPHON. | 
Sl 
Ariaeus is called ὕπαρχος (lit. subordinate commander). Give the Eng. 
der. from δυνάστης. --- ἐπιβουλεύειν αὐτῷ : his charge was, ἐπιβουλεύουσιν 
ἐμοί (G. 260, 2). 

21. ἡ εἰσβολή : the so-called Πύλαι τῆς Κιλικίας.--- ἁμαξ-ιτός : give the 
der. and cf. G. 131, 1. — ἀμήχανος ... . στρατεύματι, impracticable for an 
army (G. 184, 3) to enter (261, 1). — εἴ τις ἐκώλυεν, if there was anybody to 
oppose (lit. trying to prevent, G. 200, N. 2) them. — εἶναι él τῶν ἄκρων : not 
with the intention of real opposition, but to give color to his asserted al- 
legiance to the king. — εἶναι : quoted (6. 246). — διὸ, wherefore, i. 6. διὰ, ὅ, 
- ὑστεραίᾳ: sc. ἡμέρᾳ: For the case, see G. 189. --- ὅτι λελοιπὼς εἴη, 
k. τ᾿ A.: the messenger’s announcement continues to the end of the section. 
He said, λέλοιπε, or λελοιιτώς ἐστι (see G. 118, 4), Συέννεσις, x. τ. δ, 
Syennesis has left the heights since (ἔπεϊ) he learned, etc., and because (καὶ 
ὅτι) he heard, etc. The clause beginning ὅτι τὸ Mévaves is quoted after 
ἤσθετο (see on this form G. 247, with N. 2), ἦν occurring where εἴη or ἐστί 
would be more regular (G. 243, N. 2). The order of the last of the sentence 
is, ὅτι ἤκουε (G. 247) Tapav (G. 42, 2) ἔχοντα (G. 280) τριήρεις περιπλεού- 
σας. The τριήρεις περιπλεούσας, being a much more important fact than 
the Tapév ἔχοντα, is put first, and seems to be the clause quoted after ἤκουε, 
but is not. 

22. οὖν, at any rate, i. e. whatever the reason was that Syennesis left the 
heights. Cf. § 12. — οὐδενὸς κωλύοντος, without hindrance, manner (G. 278, 
1). — τὰς σκηνάς, the camp, antecedent of the relative adverb ov, where. 

Page 8. — ἐφύλαττον : cf. ἦσαν ini. 1. 6, ἐτύγχανεν in i. 1. 8. — ἀνέβη, 
κατέβαινεν : mark the change of tense.— ἐπίρρυτον : der.? see G. 15, 2.— δέν- 
Spev: with σύμπλεων (G. 180, 1). — σύμπλεων : Attic second dec. (G. 64). 
— πολύ: agreement (G. 138, N. 1a). — φέρει : not the hist. pres. Cf. note 
on ἀθροίζονται, i. 1. 2. — ὄρος (Mt. Taurus) δ᾽ αὐτὸ (i. 6. τὸ πεδίον) περιέχει, 
κ᾿ T. X.: see the map. 

23. Tapoots, Tursi or Tarsus, the birthplace of St. Paul. — ἦσαν : ir- 
regular agreement (G. 135, 2). Cf. § 7. — μέσου: neut. of μέσος used as a 
noun, as in the phrase μέσον ἡμέρας, midday. The following gen. is part. 
(G. 167, 6). — ὄνομα, εὖρος : acc. of specification (G. 160, 1). — πλέθρων : 
limits ποταμός (G. 167, 5), not εὖρος. 

24. οἱ ἐνοικοῦντες: substantively (G. 276, 2). — εἰς, ἐπί : with the ace. 
in each case, because of the subsequent motion implied in ἐξέλιπον, aban- 
doned the city for (and fled into) a stronghold up on the mountains. — πλὴν 
of... ἔχοντες : sc. οὐκ ἐξέλιπον. --- of mapa... οἰκοῦντες : cf. τοῖς ὑπὲρ 
“Ἑλλήσποντον οἰκοῦσι, i. 1. 9 and note. Those that remained did so for 
purposes of trade with the army and fleet respectively. 

25. προτέρα. . . ἀφίκετο, reched Tarsi five days (G. 188, 2) before 
(G. 138, n. 7) Cyrus (G. 175, 1). For the comparison of πρότερος, see 
G. 73, 2.— εἰς τὸ πεδίον : adjectively (G. 142, 1N. & 2). — οἱ pév... οἱ δέ, 
some... others (G. 148, 1). — ἁρπάζοντάς τι κατακοπῆναι, had been cut to 
pieces (G. 260, 2) while committing some «ct of plunder (G. 159, N. 2). — 
τὸ ἄλλο, the rest of (G. 142, 2, N. 3). — εἶτα, then, taking up the two pre- 








ANABASIS 1, 1. 17 


ceding participles. — οὖν, however that was. Cf. § 22. — ἑκατόν: ordinarily 
a single λόχος numbered 100 men. 

26. οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι, i. 6. of Menon’s army. Emphatic position, as also be- 
low, Κῦρος δὲ ἐπεὶ, x. τ. A. — τοὺς Ταρσούς : appositive (G. 137). — διήρ- 
macayv: mark the force of the prep. — μετεπέμπετο πρὸς ἑαυτόν, summoned 
repeatedly to himself. Cf. μεταπέμπεται ἀπὸ τῆς ἀρχῆς, i. 1. 2.—6 δ᾽ οὔτε 
... otre... ἤϑελε, but he both declared that he had never before, ete., and 
was then unwilling, etc. The Greek often says οὐκ ἔφη ἐλθεῖν, where we say 
he said that he did not go, οὔ φημι having the sense J deny. Here οὔτε... 
ἔφη ... οὔτε... ἤθελε, lit. he neither declared (i. e. he denied) nor wished, 
is perfectly regular, though it cannot be translated literally. In οὔτε... 
ἔφη the direct discourse was ἦλθον (G. 246); in οὔτε... ἤθελε there is no 
indirect discourse. — οὐδενί (G. 283, 9): the dat. follows εἰς χεῖρας ἐλθεῖν 
(G. 186, N. 1), which implies wnion or approach, and commonly means to 
come to a conflict with some one, and here properly to come into close rela- 
tions with (or into the hands of) some one. See Lidd. and Scott, 5. v. χείρ, 
Il. d. — ἰέναι : sc. εἰς χεῖρας. --- πρὶν ἔπεισε, ἔλαβε (G. 240, 1). Note the 
change of subject in ἔλαβε. 

27. Kipos δέ: sc. ἔδωκε. --- παρὰ βασιλεῖ, at cowrt, i. 6. at the great 
King’s, the article being omitted. — χρυσο-χάλινον, with gold-studded bridle 
(χαλινός). --- ἀκινάκην, ὦ short sword. 

Page 9.-- ἀφαρπάζεσθϑαι : one of the obj. οἵ ἔδωκε supplied above (G. 260, 
1). So ἀπολαμβάνειν in the next line. — τὰ 8... ἀπολαμβάνειν, and (the 
privilege of ) taking back the slaves that had been seized, if they (i. e. Syen- 
nesis and the Cilicians) should fall in with them (i. e. the slaves) anywhere 
(G. 223). The apodosis is the inf. (fut. in time) ἀπολαμβάνειν. In place of 
ἣν που ἐντυγχάνωσιν we might have had εἴ που ἐντυγχάνοιεν (G. 248, 1). 


CHAPTER III. 


Synopsis: A delay of 20 days at Tarsi is caused by the Greek soldiers, who 
now suspect that they are being led against Artaxerxes and refuse to go farther. 
Clearchus, who attempts to force his own troops forward, narrowly escapes being 
stoned to death. Afterwards, seeming to yield to their wishes, he calls them to- 
gether and after shedding many hypocritical tears (1—3) details the benefits he 
has received at the hands of Cyrus, but nevertheless declares his intention to 
desert him and accompany them wherever they may go (4-6). More than 2000 
men desert Xenias and Pasion, and encamp with Clearchus (7). Cyrus sends 
for Clearchus, who refuses to go but returns an encouraging message (8). Cle- 
archus again assembles his soldiers, and in a cunningly constructed address 
points out to them the difficulties which lie in the way of their withdrawal from 
Cyrus (9-12). He is followed by several others (13), one of whom proposes a 
plan at some length which another immediately proves to be nonsense, both act- 
ing at the secret suggestion of Clearchus. They finally agree to send to Cyrus 
and ask his designs (14-19). Cyrus answers that he wishes to march against 
_Abrocdmas, and promises them half again as much pay as before, whereupon 
they agree to follow him (20, 21). 


18 XENOPHON. 


1. οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι, refused to go, said they would not go. Cf. i. 2. 26, 
and note, and μισθωθῆναι δὲ οὐκ ἔφασαν, below. — τοῦ πρόσω, forward, a — 
prose use of the gen. of place (G. 179, 2), like the adverbs in ov, as ποῦ, 
where, ὁμοῦ, in the same place, together, etc. — ὑπώπτευον : cf. 1. 1. 1. — 
ἐπὶ τούτῳ, for this (G. 191, VI. 2, 2 αἹ. --- πρῶτος: he was the first to do 
it; πρῶτον would mean, he did this first, and something else afterwards. 
πρῶτον μέν, on the other hand (correl. to εἶτα δέ below in ὃ 2), means in the 
Jjirst place. Cf. i. 2. 16. — ἐβιάζετο : attempted action (G. 200, N. 2). But 
below the aor. ἤρξατο, (actually) beyan to move forward. Clearchus is said 
in ii. 6.8 to have been a man of stern will. — ἔβαλλον, stoned, sc. τοῖς λίθοις 
(4. 188, 1), as appears from καταπετρωθῆναν in ὃ 2. 

2. μικρόν, by a little, narrowly (G. 160, 2). — μή : added to the inf. to 
strengthen the neg. idea contained in ἐξέφυγε (G. 283, 6). — καταπετρωθῆ- 
vat, being stoned to death (κωτά). --- ἔγνω, had come to know (cf. note on ἔτε- 
λεύτησε, i. 1. 3), and so perceived. — ὅτι δυνήσεται : quoted (G. 243 ; 280, 
N. 8). -- ἐκεκκλησία (καλέω): the Eng. der.?— ἐδάκρυε. . . ἑστώς, stood 
(6. 124, 1) and wept a long time (G. 161). --- τοιάϑε: with ref. to what fol- 
lows (G. 148, Nn. 1). 

3. ἄνδρες στρατιῶται, fellow-soldiers, ἄνδρες prefixed as a term of respect, 
as in the phrase of the courts, ἄνδρες δικασταί, Clearchus deals with the 
difficulty with great skill. — μὴ θαυμάζετε: pres. imperative in prohibition 
(G. 254). — χαλεπῶς. .. πράγμασιν, am greatly distressed (φέρω intrans.) 
ow account of the present trowbles (G. 188,1). πρᾶγ-μα is properly the thing 
done (G. 129, 4). — ξένος: ef. note on ξένος in i. 1. 10. — ἐγένετο, be- 
came, not was, cf. i. 1. 9. --- τά Te. . . καί, both honored in other ways - 
(G. 160, 1) and in particular, etc. — ods... οὐκ... ἐδαπάνων, which I 
did not, when I had received them, lay wp for myself (used reflexively) for 
private use (or, more freely, did not devote to my own personal use), and (lit. 
but) did not even squander in pleasure (κατά, ἡδύς, πάσχω), but capended 
(impf.) on you. 

4, ὑπέρ, for, in behalf of (G. 191, IV. 3, 1 b). — ἐτιμωρούμην (sc. αὖ- 
τούς), took vengeance upon or punished (them). τιμωρεῖν = to avenge, τυμω- 
ρεῖσϑαν (mid.) = to avenge one’s self upon (some one). — ἀφαιρεῖσθαι : double 
oj. (G. 164, with nN. 2). —tva... ἐκείνου, ‘hat, in case he should have (we 
might have had ἐάν τι δέηται, G. 248, N.; Moods and Tenses, § 55, 2) any 
(G. 172, N. 1) need (of me), I might aid (G. 216, 1) him in return for the 
benefits I had received from him, i. 6. ἀντὶ τούτων ὧν (G. 153, with N. 1) εὖ 
ἔπαθον (G. 165, N. 12) ὑπ᾽ ἐκείνου. 

5. ὑμεῖς: emphatic (G. 144, 1). So ἐγώ, below. Cf. also the beginning 
of 8 6. — ἀνάγικἡ : se. ἐστί, --- φιλίᾳ: an instrumental dat. (G. 188, 1, N. 2). 
— εἰ, whether (G. 282, 4). — δίκαια : der. from δίκη (G. 129, 12). — οὖν: 
ef. note on οὖν, 1. 2. 12. — 6 τι ἂν δέῃ (sc. πάσχειν) : a cond. rel. sent. 
(6. 232, 3). — οὔποτε οὐδείς : emphatic negation (G. 283, 9). — ὡς εἱλόμην: 
quoted without change of mood (G. 243). Give the form of the verb in dir. 
disc. — ἀγαγών, προδούς : for the relation of the two participles, see the 

ὦ note on ὑπολαβὼν τοὺς φεύγοντας in i. 1. 7, and ef. στήσας. .. πέμψας, 
»» + ἐκέλευσε in 1. 2. 17. 








ANABASIS 1, u1. 19 


Page 10. — 6. ἐμοί : dat. of indir. obj. (G. 184, 2).— 6 τι... πείσο- 
pat: for the use of the moods, cf. § 5, above. — kal... kal... καί, equally 
...and... and. — σὺν ὑμῖν, 1. 6. if I should remain with you, is the prot. 
(G. 226, 1) to the following ἂν εἶναι, which &tands by quot. (G. 246) for ἂν 
εἴην. In the alternative sentence that follows, the prot. to ἂν εἶναι lies in 
ἔρημος ὦν, = el... εἴην (G. 226, 1; 277, 4). The cond. rel. clause ὅπου 
ἂν ὦ, ubicunque ero, presents the supposed future case more vividly than 
the more regular ὅπου εἴην would have done, — wherever I may be, for 
wherever I might be. See Moods and Tenses, § 63, 4, (a). The opt. with ἄν, 
it should be remembered, is sometimes merely a softened expression for the 
fut. indic. (G. 226, 2, N. 1). — τίμιος : der. from the same stem with τιμή 
(G. 129, 12). --- ὑμῶν : gen. after an adj. of want (G. 180, 1). --- οὐκ ἂν 
ἱκανὸς εἶναι (= οὐκ ἂν ἱκανὸς εἴην) : ἄν (still belonging to εἶναι) is repeated 
after οὔτε before each of the dependent infinitives (G. 212, 2). --- ὠφελῆσαι, 
ἀλέξασθαι : infinitives limiting ἱκανός (G. 261, 1).— ds... ἔχετε, he of 
this opinion, therefore, that I shall go, etc.; or more lit., to show the force 
of the causal gen. abs. with ὡς (G. 278, 1°, end), since, therefore, I shail 
(as I say, ὧς) go, etc., be of this mind. — ὅπῃ ἂν καὶ ὑμεῖς : sc. ἴητε (Moods 
and Tenses, ὃ 42, 3, N. 27). 

7. ταῦτα: with reference to what precedes (G. 148, Ν. 1). — οἵ τε, the 
art. receiving the accent from the following enclitic. — ὅτι... πορεύεσθαι : 
explanatory of ταῦτα (G. 243). The direct discourse of οὐ φαίη πορεύεσθαι 
would be οὔ φημι πορεύεσθαι, 7 deny that I am going (see note on i. 2. 26). 
- πλείους for πλείονες (G. 72, 2, N. 1). --- ἐστρατοπεδεύσαντο: der. from 
στρατοπεδον (G. 131, 1). — Note that παρά occurs in this section with 
each of the three cases (G. 191, N. 1). 

8. τούτοις : dat. of cause (G. 188, 1). --- στρατιωτῶν : gen. with adverb 

(G. 182, 2, end). — αὐτῷ : indir. obj. (G. 184, 1). — ἔλεγε θαρρεῖν, bade him 
not to be discouraged (G. 260, 1): λέγω in this use is equivalent to κελεύω ; 
so εἶπον when used with the inf. (G. 260, 2, N. 1). — as... δέον, since this 
matter would be settled (G. 278, 12) in the right way (G. 139); ὡς (G. 277, 
|W. 2) shows that the participial sentence gives the ground on which C/e- 
archus bade Cyrus to be encouraged. — μεταπέμπεσθαι, to continue to send 
for (him). — αὐτὸς... ἰέναι, but for himself (modifies subj. of ἰέναι, G. 138, 
N. 8) he suid he should not go. αὐτός marks the opposition of the two per- 
sons, the thought being: ‘‘ You continue to send for me, but still 111 not 
go.” 
9. μετὰ δέ ταῦτα, after this (G. 191, VI. 3, 3 6). — θ᾽, 1. 6. τε (G. 17, 1). 
τῶν... . βουλόμενον, any one of the rest (G. 168) that wished (G. 276, 2). — 
τὰ Κύρου: πράγματα omitted (G. 141, nN. 4). — δῆλον : sc. ἐστί. — οὕτως 
«+ ἐκεῖνον, i. 6. his relations to us are in just (περ in ὥσπερ) the same posi- 
tion as ours to him. —émel ye, since at any rate. — ἡμῖν : with the follow- 
ing noun (6. 185). — μισθο-δότης : compound noun expressing the agent 
mr 151, 1; 129, 2 δ). 

10. μέντοι : used in sinister sense: ‘‘ Though our relations are at an end, 
| he may, however, not be done with us.” — καὶ μεταπεμπομένου αὐτοῦ, though 


20 XENOPHON. 


he continues to send, etc. (G. 277, N. 1b).— τὸ μὲν μέγιστον, chiefly (G. 160, 
2): the correl. follows in ἔπειτα kat. — αἰσχυνόμενος, from shame. — ἐψευ- 
σμένος : quoted after σύνοιδα (ἃ. 280, N. 2).— ph... ἔπιθῇ : obj. clause 
(6. 218). — δίκην dv... ἠδικῆσθαι, punishment for those things (sc. τούτων 
limiting δίκην, G. 153, N. 1) in which (ὧν for &, cognate acc., G. 159, N. 2) 
he thinks he has been wronged (G. 260, 2) by me, —i. e. punishment for the 
wrongs he thinks he has suffered from me. 

11. épol... καθεύδειν, the time, therefore, does not seem to me to be (one) 
for sleeping (G. 261, 1). δοκέω in the sense simply of to seem takes the inf. 
in indir. disc. (G. 246). In the sense of to seem good or best, as in the phrase 
δοκεῖ ἀπιέναι, below, the accompanying inf. is not in indir. disc. In either 
case it is the subj. (not obj.) of δοκέω. Cf. the uses of videor in Lat. — 
ἡμῶν αὐτῶν, ourselves (G. 80; 171, 2). — ὅ τι χρή: an indir. question 
(G. 149, 27). — ἐκ τούτων, next (G. 191, I. 8 δ), expressing time (sequence) 
with an implied idea of consequence, in consideration of, in consequence of, 
the present circumstances. — ἕως μένομεν αὐτοῦ, as long as, while, we are 
staying here (αὐτοῦ, adv.). ἕως with the pres. ind. never can mean wnéil. 
— σκεπτέον εἶναι: in the dir. form (ἃ. 246) σκεπτέον ἐστί (G. 281, 2). — 
ἀσφαλέστατα : superlative adv. (G. 75).— ὅττως μένωμεν : an obj. clause 
after a verb of caring for with the subj. (G. 217, N. 1). But in the alterna- 
tive sentence we have the reg. constr. (G. 217), ὅπως ἄπιμεν (G. 200, N. 8 δ), 
ὅπως ἕξομεν. Many editions have μενοῦμεν for μένωμεν by conjecture. 

Page BE. — ἄνευ, without (G. 191, I. 5).— οὔτε... οὐδέν, neither gen- 
eral (G. 167, 1) nor private is of any use. 

12. ὁ δ᾽ ἀνὴρ ... φίλος 4, but the man (i. 6. Cyrus) zs a valuable (lit. 
worth much, G. 178, N.) friend, to whomsoever he is a friend (G. 233). — 
ἐχϑρός, πολέμιος, i. 6. whomsoever he is at war with (ἐν πολέμῳ), he comes 
to hate as a personal enemy, so earnest is he. — ὔναυτικήν : from ναύτης; ὦ 
sailor, and that from vats. Note the suff. in each case, ικός, Ths. — ὁμοίως: 
with πάντες, which we all alike. — δοκοῦμέν por καθῆσθαι: cf. δοκεῖ in 
§ 11, and the note. — αὐτοῦ : construe with πόρρω, αὐ a distance from him 
(G. 182, 2). — ὥρα (se. éorl): cf. § 11, above. 

13. ἐκ τούτου, after this, upon this. — ἐκ τοῦ αὐτομάτου : cf. ἀπὸ τοῦ 
αὐτομάτου, i. 2. 17. — λέξοντες, to say (G. 277, 3); in the next line ἐπιδει- 
κνύντες, showing (G. 277, 3 and 6; Moods and Tenses, § 109, 5, last ex.). — 
ἐκείνου, i. e. Clearchus. — εἴη : indir. question (G. 243). — ἀπορία : give its 
derivation. — μένειν, ἀπιέναι: with ἀπορία (G. 261, 1). 

14. εἷς δὲ δὴ εἶπε, but one in particular proposed. Both this man and 
the one who answered him in § 16 doubtless spoke at the instigation of 
Clearchus. — ἑλέσθαι : with εἶπε, with which in the sense of propose or 
command the inf. is not in indirect dise. (Moods and Tenses, § 15, 2, N. 3). 
Cf.§ 8. The six following infinitives, beginning with ἀγοράζεσθαι, have the 
same construction with ἑλέσθαι. The conditional sentences dependent on 
these inf., εἰ μὴ βούλεται and ἐὰν διδῷ (bis), — being dependent clauses in 
indirect discourse, — might have been each in the opt. (G. 248, 1), although 
εἰ βούλοιτο would have been ambiguous. So ὅπως μὴ φθάσωσι might have 











ANABASIS 1, m1. 91 


been opt., like ὧς ἀποπλέοιεν, above (G. 248, N.). — ἡ δ᾽ ἀγορὰ... στρα- 
τεύματι : thrown in parenthetically by the historian to show the absurdity 
of the proposition. — αἰτεῖν : with two aces. (G. 164). — πλοῖα ; ¢ransport- 
vessels, boats. --- ἐὰν μὴ διδῷ; the verb of the apod. is αἰτεῖν, which after 
εἶπε, proposed, is fut. in force. See G, 223, — φιλίας (sc. οὔσης) : pred. 
adj. (G. 138. Rem.). — ὅστις ἀπάξει: purpose (G. 236). — μηδέ, not even 
(G. 283, 2). --- συντάττεσθαι, ἀγοράζεσθαι, συσκευάζεσθαι : the three uses 
of the mid. voice (G. 199, 1, 2, 3). — τὴν ταχίστην : adv. ace. (G. 160, 2). 
— προκαταληψομένους : sc. ἄνδρας. The part. expresses purpose (G. 277, 
3). — τὰ" ἄκρα, i.e. of Mt. Taurus, the pass by which they had entered 
Cilicia. — ὅπως φθάσωσι : purpose (G. 216). Note the three ways in which 
purpose has been expressed in this section. — é1es... καταλαβόντες, might 
not scize them first (G. 279, 4). — ὧν (the antec. is οἱ Κίλικες) is a part. gen. 
With πολλούς, but a poss. gen. with χρήματα (G. 167, 1 and 6). — πολλοὺς 
Kal πολλὰ χρήματα, many men (as captives) and much property. — ἔχομεν 
ἀνηρπακότες = ἀνηρπάκαμεν καὶ ἔχομεν : notice the sudden change to direct 
discourse. — τοσοῦτον, so much ouly (as follows), This refusal to take the 
lead would embarrass them still more. 

15. ὡς piv... λεγέτω, let no one speak of me as likely to be general on 
this occasion ; the part. with ὡς after Neyérw on the analogy of the constr. 
explained in G. 280. See also Moods and Tenses, ὃ 113, x. 10, (c). — 
στρατηγίαν : cogn. acc. (G. 159). — μηδείς : prohibition (G. 254). — ἐν-ορῷ, 
see in the undertaking. — ποιητέον : sc. ἐστί (G. 281). Since τοῦτο is in 
the neut. sing. the construction may be regarded either pers. or impers. at 
pleasure. — ds πείσομαι: sc. οὕτω λέγετε from the preceding μηδεὶς λεγέτω. 
— dv dv ἕλησθε (G. 232, 3), quemcunque elegeritis, We might have had | 


ᾧ ἂν (G. 153), for which there is slight MS. authority. — ἣ δυνατὸν μά- 


λιστα, to the best of my ability ; μάλιστα belonging to πείσομαι, and 4, as 
(ἃ. 87, 2), to ἐστί understood with δυνατόν. Cf. ὡς μάλιστα, ὡς τάχιστα, 
and note on ὅτι ἀπαρασκευότατον, i. 1. 6. -- ἵνα εἰδῆτε: purpose (G. 216). 
— ὅτι kal... ἀνθρώπων, that I know how also to submit to authority as well 
as any other man that lives; μάλιστα ἀνθρώπων, in the highest degree (best 
of all men, G. 168), belongs to ἐπίσταμαι, and is really superfluous to the 
sense after ὡς τις καὶ ἄλλος, (as well) as any other man whatsoever (καί 
being emphatic). For the latter, εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος is more common (see 
i. 4. 15). 

16. εὐήθειαν : from εὐήθης, simple-minded, from εὖ and ἦθος. Note the 
suffix (G. 129, 7). — ὥσπερ... ποιουμένου, just as (we might ask for 
them, G. 277, N. 3), if Cyrus should make his expedition back again, i. e. 
should give up his plans and return home, so as not to need the boats 
longer. Κύρου ποιουμένου = εἰ Kipos ποιοῖτο. --- ὡς εὔηθες εἴη, that it 
was silly (G. 243), corresponding to τὴν εὐήθειαν in the clause with μέν. 
Tn the dependent clause ᾧ λυμαινόμεθα there is a change to direct discourse 
(otherwise we should have λυμαίνονται or λυμαίνοιντο, G. 247), which con- 
tinues to the close of the speech in ὃ 19. — παρὰ τούτου: in the place of 
the simple τοῦτον. (Cf. the const. with αἰτεῖν in § 14). -- ᾧ dat. of dis- 


nies XENOPHON. 


advantage (G. 184, 3). — πρᾶξις, i. 6. mpay-ots (G. 129, 3), 1. e. plan of 
operations. 

Page 12.— εἰ πιστεύσομεν (G. 221, N.), if we propose to trust; not 
equivalent to ἐὰν πιστεύσωμεν, if we shall trust. — τί κωλύει... προκατα- 
λαμβάνειν (ironical) : the order is τί κωλύει (Sc. Has) καὶ κελεύειν K. apo. 
τὰ ἄκρα ἡμῖν; The meaning is, that if they propose to trust Cyrus’s guide, 
they might as well show still greater confidence in Cyrus himself, and tell 
him to secure the heights for them ! 

17. ἐγώ : emphatic. — yap: the sect. states the grounds for the distrust 
of Cyrus which the speaker would entertain under the conditions supposed. 
- ἃ δοίη : cond. rel. clause (G. 232, 4); so also ᾧ (ἃ. 153) δοίη, following. 
— μὴ καταδύσῃ : obj. clause after a verb of fearing (G. 218); so μὴ ἀγάγῃ, 
following. —atrais ταῖς τριήρεσι, triremes and all (G. 188, 5). The tri- 
rene (τρεῖς, pw; Lat. tri-remis) was a war-vessel with three banks of 
oars. It is hardly possible that the mdota, transports for troops, here 
mentioned, can be soberly called triremes; it is probable that αὐταῖς 
ταῖς τριήρεσι is added to καταδύσῃ to heighten the absurdity, — ‘‘ fleet 
and ali,” as we sometimes say ‘‘ horse, foot, and dragoons” or ‘‘ bag and 
baggage.” There is, however, some MS. authority for omitting αὐταῖς, 
in which case tats τριήρεσι will mean by his own triremes. — φοβοίμην : 
a stronger word than éxvéw, used to indicate a climax of feeling. — ὅθεν, 
i. 6. ἐκεῖσε ὅθεν, to the place from which. — οὐχ οἷόν τε ἔσται, τέ will not be 
possible (G. 151, N. 42). The antecedent of ὅθεν is obviously definite (note 
the neg., G. 230). If he had wished to speak less vividly he would have 
said, ὅθεν οὐκ ἂν οἷόν τε εἴη. -- ἀπιών = εἰ ἀπίοιμι (G. 277, 4). — ἄκοντος 
Kipov, sc. ὄντος : the adjs. ἑκών and ἄκων are often used in this way with- 
out ov, as if themselves participles. — λαθεῖν... ἀπελθών, to get off without 
his knowing it (G. 279, 4). 

18. ἄνδρας: subj. of ἐρωτᾶν. The whole sentence from ἄνδρας to the 
end of ὃ 19 (except the parenth. οὕτω .. . ἀπίοιμεν) is the subj. of Soxet.— 
oitives, such as are (sc. col). —tl... χρῆσθαι, what (G. 149, 2?) wse he 
wishes to make of us (G. 188, 1, N. 2, entire). The same use of the eases 
in οἵᾳπερ (for οἵανπερ by assimilation, G. 153)... τοῖς ξένοις. --- πρόσθεν: 
for the time referred to, ef. i. 1. 2. 

19. τῆς πρόσθεν, than the former one, sc. πράξεως (G. 175, 1). — ἐὰν 
φαίνηται, ἀξιοῦν : note the not infrequent use of the inf. in a future sense 
as the apod. of this class of cond. sentence (G. 223). A case just precedes 
in ὃ 18 in ἐὰν ἦ, ἕπεσθαι, and another follows in 6 τι δ᾽ ἂν λέγῃ ἀναγγεῖλαι 
(G. 232, ὁ). --- ἀξιοῦν, demand, i. 6. the deputies (ἄνδρας) mentioned in 
§ 18. ἀναγγεῖλαι has the same subj.; but βουλεύεσθαι has ἡμᾶς expressed. 
- πείσαντα: e.g. by means of greater pay. Cf. ὃ 21. --- πρὸς φιλίαν, in 
Sriendship. — ἑπόμενοι, ἀπιόντες : these might be respectively εἰ ἑποίμεθα, 
εἰ ἀπίοιμεν (G. 277, 4). — φίλοι, πρόθυμοι : pred. adjs. Give the der. of 
πρό-θυμος. -- πρὸς ταῦτα, with respect to this (G. 191, VI. 6,3 c). 

20. ἔδοξε ταῦτα, this was approved. The ordinary beginning of an Athe- — 
nian decree was ταῦτα ἔδοξε τῇ βουλῇ καὶ τῷ δήμῳ, i. 6. be it enacted by the — 








ANABASIS 1, rv. 23 


Senate and the People. — ἠρώτων τὰ δόξαντα, made the inquiries agreed u pon 
(i. ὁ. ἃ ἔδοξεν). For the dat. with δοκέω in this sense (to seenv good oy Lest), 
see G. 184, 2. — ὅτι ἀκούει: he said ἀκούω, 7 have heard, etc. The Greek, 
like other languages, often uses the pres. of such verbs as J hear, I learn, 
1 say, even when their action is strictly finished (Moods and Tenses, ὃ 10, 
1, x. 5). — ἐχθρὸν ἄνδρα : note the difference between ἐχθρές and πολέμιος 
(see note on ὃ 12, above). — εἶναι, was, as a matter of hearsay, while évra 
would have implied more responsibility for the fact on the part of the 
speaker (G. 280, with N. 3). — ἀπέχοντα... . σταθμούς, twelve stayes off or 
distunt (ἀπέχοντα with ᾿Αβροκόμαν, G. 276, 1). — πρὸς τοῦτον, to hii, 
with an implied sense of agaist, which would be expressed properly by 
erl. — χρήζειν ἐπιθεῖναι : give the dir. form. — ἡμεῖς ἐκεῖ, x. τι X.: the quot, 
here becomes direct. It should be noted with what remarkable ease the 
Greek, contrary to the Eng. idiom, allows this transition from the indirect 
to the direct form. Cf. § 16. 

21. αἱρετοί : verbal from aipéw (G. 117, 3). — τοῖς δὲ... ἦν, but they 
had, etc. (G. 148, 1, N. 2; 184, 4). — ὑπ-οψία : the suff. expresses action 
(cf. G. 129, 3), — ὅτι ἄγει : quoted without change of mood after τοῖς δὲ 
ὑποψία ἣν = ὑπώπτευον δέ. But below, after ἤκουσεν, with change of 
mood, ὅτι ἄγοι (G. 243). — πρὸς βασιλέα : as πρὸς τοῦτον in § 20. — ἐδόκει : 
why ἐδόκει here, but ἔδοξε (aor.) in § 20 1 -- προσαιτοῦσι μισθόν, ask ad- 
ditional (πρός) pay. — ἡμυ-όλιον : der.?— δώσειν : note the tense (G. 203, 
N. 2). — οὗ, 1. 6. τούτου οὗ, than that which, ov for 8 by attraction: ef. ᾧ 
in ὃ 17 and οἵᾳπερ in § 18. The gen. goes with ἡμιόλιον, which has the 
force of a comparative, a half more (G. 175, 1, N. 1). — δαρεικοῦ : see note 
on i. 7. 18. — τοῦ μηνός, each month (G. 179, 1). — ἐν τῷ φανερῷ = dave- 
ρῶς (G. 139, 2). This implies that there was a secret understanding of the 
real facts on the part of some. The soldiers accuse the generals of this in 
1. 4. 12. — By the expedient here described Cyrus led the Greeks nineteen 
stages farther inland (in place of the twelve proposed in § 20) before an- 
nouncing publicly his real purpose. 





CHAPTER IV. 


Synopsis: Cyrus proceeds to the river Psarus, thence to the river Pyramus, 
and finally reaches Issi upon the sea-coast, the last city in Cilicia (1). Here he 
remains three days, during which time his fleet arrives. He is also joined by 
the Greek mercenaries who desert from Abrocémas (2, 3). Hence he proceeds 
to the Gates of Cilicia and Syria. Abrocomas does not attempt to bar lis pas- 
sage, but retreats towards Babylon (4, 5). Cyrus advances through Syria, and 
is deserted at Myriandrus by Xenias and Pasion. It is rumored that he will 
pursue them (6, 7); but calling his Greek generals together, he announces that 
he shall not do so. This decision pleases the Greeks, and they accompany him 
with greater alacrity (8, 9). He crosses the Psarus and reaches the sources of 
the Dardas, where he burns the palace of the Syrian governor (9, 10). At Thap- 
sicus on the Euphrates he announces the real object of his expedition (11). 


24 ΧΕΝΟΡΗΟΝ. 


The troops refuse to go on without extra pay (12), which Cyrus agrees to give 
them. Menon, in the mean time, urges his troops to cross the Euphrates before 
the others decide, and so win the favor of Cyrus by seeming most forward in his 
service (13-15). They comply, and Cyrus expresses his satisfactiou (16). He 
then crosses the Euphrates with the rest of his troops, and proceeds to the 
Araxes, where he remains three days (17-19). 


Page E3.—1. It is now the last of spring, and the army has been on 
the march four months. The distance from Sardis thus far travelled is 
222 parasangs. Review on the map the route travelled up to Tarsi. — στά- 
διον : the common Greek standard of length, equal to 606% Eng. feet, some- 
what less than a furlong. This was the length of the ordéévov, or course for 
foot-races, at Olympia, which measured exactly 600 Greek feet. The noun 
is heterogencous (G. 60, 2): cf. στάδιοι in 8 4. — ἐσχάτην : without the 
art., where we should use it. Cf. 1. 2. 10. —éml... οἰκουμένην, situated 
(lit. being inhabited) close wpon the sea. 

2. Κύρῳ: for the case cf. αὐτῷ in i. 2. 4, and note. The fleet is the one 
already mentioned in i. 2. 21. --- ἐπ’ αὐταῖς, over them, but below in ὃ 3 
ἐπὶ τῶν νεῶν (ἐπί with the gen.), on board the ships. — vat-apxos, admirat 
(ἴοι vav- see G. 131, 1, N.). — ἡγεῖτο δ᾽ αὐταῖς, conducted them (G. 171, 3, 
N).-— ἑτέρας, besides. So often ἄλλος. — ἐπολιόρκει, had been besieging ; so 
συνεπολέμει: the subj. of both of these verbs is a pronoun referring to 
Tamos. Cf. for the tense ἐτύγχανεν, i. 1. 8. — ὅτε ἣν, since it had been (G. 
250). -- αὐτόν, i. 6. Tissaphernes. 

3. μετάπεμπτος, sent for (G. 117, 3), equal to μεταπεμφθείς, and so fol- 
lowed by ὑπὸ Kvpov (G. 197, 1). Chirisophus was sent with these troops 
from Sparta in return for the aid rendered the Lacedaemonians by Cyrus 
during the Peloponnesian War. He became in the retreat senior comman- 
der. — av... Κύρου, the conmand of whom he (now) held under Cyrus. — 
ὥρμουν, lay wt anchor, from ὅρμος, a roadsiead. The quarters of Cyrus, it 
would appear, were pitched close upon the sea. — ef παρ᾽ ᾿Αβροκόμα : cf. 
τῶν παρὰ βασιλέως in i. 1. 5, and note. For the gen. ᾿Αβροκόμα, see 
G.39, 3. This Doric gen. in Attic is found chiefly in foreign proper names. 
— pio8o-dopor: give its der. (G. 131, 1). 

4, πύλας : the article omitted, the noun being used almost as a proper 
name. ‘The pass itself is here meant. — ἦσαν δὲ ταῦτα, and these (gaies) 
consisted of ; ταῦτα for avrar because of τείχη, and ἦσαν for Av (G. 135, 2 
because the two walls were in the writer’s mind. — Tb... τὸ mpd τῆς Ke- 
λικίας : position of the attrib. phrase (G. 142, 2). After ἔσωθεν, sc. τεῖχος. 
—eixe: not, of course, in person. — διὰ μέσου τούτων : cf. διὰ μέσου τῆς 
πόλεως, 1. 2. 23, and note. — ἅπαν τὸ μέσον, the entire distance between. — 
τευχῶν : poss. gen. (G. 167, 1). — ἦσαν agrees with στάδιοι (G. 135, N. 4). 
--- καθήκοντα : to be connected with ἣν, ἣν καθήκοντα being equivalent to 
καθῆκε. --- ὕπερθεν, i. 6. overhinging the pars. — ἐφξειστήκεσαν πύλαι, grates 
had been set in each wall. Here πύλαι has its proper meaning of gates, 
large and double like those in a city wall. 

















“ἀν 


ANABASIS 1, Iv. 25 


5. ἕνεκα, on account of (G. 191, I. 5). Commonly placed after the word 
it governs, or one of the modifiers of that word (as here). — ἀποβιβάσειεν, 
παρέλθοιεν : change of subj. Diff. between βιβάζω and βαίνω ?— εἴσω καὶ 
ἔξω, i. 6. on both sides of the Syrian wall, that he might attack A. both in 
front and rear. The distance between the two walls was over a third of a 
mile (three stades). — εἰ φυλάττοιεν : if the preceding optatives were sub- 
junctives (G. 216, 2) this clause might be ἐὰν φυλάττωσιν. 

Page 14. — ὅπερ, just the thing which, referring to the clause just pre- 
ceding. — ἔχοντα, since he had (G. 277, 2). --- ὄντα : quoted (G. 280). Cf. 
ἀκούει εἶναν in i. 3. 20, and note. — as ἐλέγετο : probably personal, as he 
was said. Cf. i. 2. 8, note. — μυριάδας : Eng. der.? 

6. ἐμπόριον, mart, Lat. and Eng. emporium, from ἔμπορος (περάω, 
πέρα, cf. πορεύω), ὦ traveller, merchant, distinguished from the κάπηλος 
(cf. τὰ καπηλεῖα, 1. 2. 24) by his importing goods in person. — qv: we 
might have had ἐστί, Cf. ἀθροίζονται in i. 1. 2, and note. — τὸ χωρίον : 
the subject; the predicate noun (here ἐμπόριον) generally omits the article. 
-- αὐτόθι: formed with the suff. θὲ (G. 61). — δλκάς is (properly) a ship 
that is towed (€xw), merchantman. 

7. Μεγαρεύς : a gentile noun (see G. 129, 10). — ra... ἐνθέμενοι, put- 
ting on board (G. 199, 3) their most valuable effects. — ὡς μὲν, κ. τ. d.: the 
correl. clause with δέ is omitted ; but μέν implies that there was another 
opinion in the camp. — ἐδόκουν : personal; cf. note on δοκεῖ, i. 3. 11. — 
Φιλοτιμηθέντες, since they were jealous (G. 277, 2): ὅτι... ela Κῦρος is 
also causal (G. 250). — ἀπελθόντας : see i. ὃ. 7. --- ὡς ἀπιόντας : purpose 
(G. 277, 3; 200, N. 30). Cf. ὡς ἀποκτενῶν, 1. 1. 3. — καὶ οὐ : sc. ἰόντας 
from the preceding ἀπιόντας. --- διῆλθε λύγος, α report went abroad. — ὅτι 
διώκοι: quoted (G. 243). — τριήρεσι : the means (G. 188, 1). — ὡς δειλοὺς 
... ληφθῆναι, thet they might be captured, because (in the opinion of ot μέν, 
G. 277, N. 2) they were cowards. —é& ἁλώσοιντο : fut. of ἁλίσκομαι, For 
the mood, G. 226, 4,N. 1; 248, 2. Vor et ἁλώσονται of the direct form, 
see G. 223, x. 1. Cyrus had already shown how severe he could be. Cf. 
i. 2. 20. A striking general instance of this is given in 1. 9. 13. 

8. GAN... ἐπιστάσθωσαν, but, however, let them well (emphasized by 
γέ) know. — ἀποδεδράκασιν, ἀποπεφεύγασιν : the first means to escape by 
sicalth, like a runaway slave ; the second, to escape by rapid flight, so as not 
to he caught. The clauses that follow make this distinction clear. — ὅπῃ 
οἴχονται, in what direction (G. 87, 2) they are gone (G. 200, N. 3). — τριή- 
pets, πλοῖον: cf. note on i. 3. 17. — ὥστε ἑλεῖν : result (G. 266, 1).— μὰ 
τοὺς θεούς : note that the oath is neg. (G. 163).— οὐδ᾽... οὐδείς : emphatic 
neg. (G. 288, 9). — ἕως ἂν παρῇ τις, as long as any one siays by me, gen- 
eral suppos. in pres. time (G. 233). So ἐπειδὰν βούληται. --- αὐτούς : pl. 
though referring to tls. Cf. πάντας, i. 1. 5, and note. — kakds ποιῶ, mal- 
treat (G. 165, N. 11). — περί, in respect to, to. — φρουρούμενα, guarded, i. e. 
under the protection of the resident garrison. Though the modifier of both 
τέκνα and γυναῖκας, φρουρούμενα is neut., since these are looked upon as arti- 
cles of property. For Tralles, see the map, Lydia, — τούτων στερήσονται : 


26 XENOPHON. 


the passive (G. 197, 1) of the const. explained in G. 164, N. 2. — By this ᾿ 
unlooked-for clemency Cyrus got the good-will of the Grecks (cf. what 
immediately follows) and lost little ; for “though the generals deserted, their 
troops remained, numbering some 5000 or 6000. 

9. εἴ τις... ἀνάβασιν, if (there was) any one (who) was even somewhat 
discouraged in regard to the expedition. — τὴν ἀρετήν, the magnanimity. 

Page 15. — pera ταῦτα: mark the asyndeton. — ὄντα, which was 
(G. 276, 1). --- πλέθρου : pred. gen. of measure (G. 169, 3) after ὄντα modi- 
fying ποταμόν, τὸ εὖρος being an ace. of spec. (G. 160, 1); but below in 
§ 10 τὸ εὖρος is the subj. of ἦν understood, πλέθρου having the same const. 
that it has here. For still another const., see 1. 2. 5. — πραέων, tame 
(G. 70, N. 2).— ἐνόμιζον, εἴων : cf. ἣν in ὃ 6, and the note. For the two 
aces. after ἐνόμιζον, see G. 166. — ἀδικεῖν : sc. τινά as subj. — Ταρυσάτι- 
Sos... δεδομέναι, belonged to Parysatis (G. 169, 1), having been given her 
for hirdle: money (cf. our ‘‘ pin-money ”). 

10. AdpSaros: the Dardas. See the map. Cyrus now gets into the 
valley of the Euphrates, but does not cross this river until eight days later 
at Thapsicus. — ἦσαν : cf. for the number, i. 2. 23, and note. — ἄρξαντος : 
note the tense. Belésys had probably fled on the approach of Cyrus, who 
in consequence treated the country as that of an enemy. — αὐτὸν ἐξέκοψε, 
cut it of ; ἐκ-κόππω means lit. to cut trees out of a wood. — κατέκαυσεν : 
κατα-καίω, to burn down (or, as we sometimes say, to burn wp); but ava- 
καίω, to kindle (kindle up), with reference to the direction of the flames. 

11. Cyrus now openly declares the real object of the expedition, which 
must have already been apparent to the Greeks for some time. Cf. i. 3. 20, 
andi. 4. 5. They had continued on, however, intending at the Euphrates 
to demand higher pay (δ 12), which Cyrus now agrees ($ 13) to give them. 
— ὅτι ἔσοιτο : note the tense and give the dir. form (G. 243). — εἰς βαβυ- 
ova: not at Babylon, but connect with ἡ ὁδὸς ἔσοιτο directly. 

12. ποιήσαντες ἐκκλησίαν : cf. συνήγαγεν ἐκκλτσίαν in i. 3. 2.— ἐχαλέ- 
παινον : ἃ denom. verb in alvw (G. 130, 7) from xaderds. This anger of 
the soldiers was, doubtless, more or less feigned, to force from Cyrus the 
greater pay. — στρατηγοῖς : case (G. 184, 2). — αὐτοὺς... κρύπτειν : what 
they said (speaking of them) was πάλαι ταῦτ᾽ εἰδότες κρύπτουσι (G. 200, 
N. 4), though they have known (G. 277, 5) this for a long time, they have 
been keeping it secret (G. 246); or, if they addressed them directly, which is 
more spirited, πάλαι ταῦτ᾽ εἰδότες κρύπτετε. Ling. der. from κρύπτω ? — 
οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι: cf. the same phrase i. 3. 1, and note. —tis: Cyrus, of 
course. —Xphpata: it was not an increase of their regular pay (μισθός) 
that they demanded, but a bownty.— ὥσπερ : sc. ἔδωκε, as he had given it.— 
προτέροις : pred. to ἀναβᾶσι (G. 138, 7); the verbal form would be of ἀνέ- 
βησαν πρότεροι. Cf. προτέρα, i. 2.25. The reference is to the 300 Greeks 
who accompanied Cyrus to Babylon at the time of his father’s death. — καὶ 
ταῦτα, and thut too, sc. ἐποίησε. --- ἰόντων : sc. ἐκείνων, referring to the ot 
ἀναβάντεςς The part. ἰόντων is concessive (G. 277, 5), but καλοῦντος cau- 
sal (G. 277, 2); the latter is opposed to ἐπὶ μάχην, not to ἰόντων. 








i Ὁ 
᾿ : 
| 7 


ANABASIS 1, ιν. oy 


13. ὑπέσχετό δώσειν : he might have used δοῦναι or ξιδόναι (G. 203, 
N. 2). — πέντε μνᾶς : about $90.00. The μνᾶ of 100 drachinas was 4y of a 
talent ; the latter was a weight of silver which at the present day would he 
worth about $1080. — ἀργυρίου : genitive of material (G. 167, 4), — ἐπὴν 
ἥκωσι : cond. rel. clause (G. 232, 3). So μέχρι ἂν καταστήσῃ (CG. 239, 2). 
— τὸν μισθύν : a daric and a half a month (i. 3. 21). — ἐντελῆ : predicate 
adj. The der. of ἐν-τελής ? — τὸ πολύ, the greater part (G.142, 2, ν. 3b).— 
πρὶν εἶναι, before it was (G. 274). This const. occurs again in ὃ 14 (in 
exactly the words used here) and in ὃ 16. — worepov... 4: double indir. 
quest. (G. 282, 5). — οὔ : accented at the end of the sentence (G. 29, Ν. 1). 
The meaning of the word proclitic ?— τῶν ἄλλων : case (G. 182, 2). — Give 
the dir. form of all the quoted sentences in this and the preceding section. 

Page 16.— 14. πεισθῆτε: the aor. mid. of this verb is not used, but 
the aor. pass. has the sense of the mid., obey. — οὔτε... πονήσαντες, with- 
out either toil or danger (G. 277, 2). — τῶν ἄλλων : with στρατιωτῶν, the 
rest of the soldiers (ἃ. 142, 2, N. 3). The gen. is in a sort of double const., 
first with πλέον (G. 175, 1), and then with προ-τιμήσεσθε (G. 177). The 
object is to emphasize the great advantage over the rest to be gained by 
following his advice. προτιμήσεσθε is a mid. with pass. force. — tets”E)- 
Anvas: subj. of ἕπεσθαι, which in turn is the obj. of δεῦται. 

15. ψηφίσωνται, to vote, properly by depositing the white or black 
pebble (ψῆφος) in the urn, but in fact of much broader application : 
ψῆφος, a worn stone, pebble, from paw, to rub. — ὑμεῖς. . διαβαίνειν, you 
(emphatic) will have credit of being the cause of tt, since you were the first 
to cross (G. 262, 2; 171, 1). — tpiv... ἀποδώσει: χάριν οἶδα (fut. εἴσο- 
pet) is the Lat. gratiam habeo, χάριν ἀποδίδωμι is gratiam refero. 
Transl. Cyrus will feel his obligation to you and meet τί. ---- ἐπίσταται : 580. 
χάριν ἀποδιδόναι. — εἴ τις καὶ ἄλλος : cf. the clause at the end of 1. 3. 15. — 
ἀπο-ψηφίσωνται, vote ‘‘No.” — τοὔμπαλιν, i.e. τὸ ἔμπταλιν (G. 11).— as... 
πειθομένοις (G. 277, N. 2) because (as he will feel) you alone carried out his 
wishes. —mirroratos χρήσεται, will treat you as most trustworthy: see 
note on τῶν πιστῶν, i. 5. 15. — λοχαγίας : from Aox-ayds, as στρατηγία 
from στρατ-ηγός. --- ἄλλου ... δέησθε (ἃ. 232, 3), whatever else you may 
want: ἄλλου (for ἄλλο) agrees with οὗτινος by inverted assimilation 
(G. 153, N. 4); it may, however, be explained as a genitive after τεύξεσθε 
(G. 171, 1), although τυγχάνω generally takes the accus. when a gen. of 
the sowrce is added (G. 176, 1), as Kupov here. 

16. ἐπείθοντο, διέβησαν: note the diff. in tense. — διαβεβηκότες, thot 
they had crossed (G. 280). — ἥσθη : see i. 2. 18. --- Γλοῦς, Glus, son of the 
admiral Tamos, ii. 1. 3. —’Ey@ piv... μελήσει : note the frequent expres- 
sion of the pers. pron. in this section to emphasize the contrast. — ὅπως 
ἐπαινέσετε : this obj. clause (G. 217) is in fact here a gen. (G. 171, 2, N. 29. 

17. εὐτυχῆσαι : from εὐ-τυχής, fortunate (G. 130, 2). — ἐλέγετο πέμψαι, 
he was said to have sent, personal construction. — μεγαλοπρεπῶς, will great 
Viberality, from peyado-rpemis (G. 74, 1; 131, 1). — τὸ ἄλλο or, τευμα 
Garay: the order of crossing was: Menon’s force, Cyrus and the barbarians, 

































28 XENOPHON. 


and then the rest of the Greek army. — ἀνωτέρω : the comp. of the adverbY 
éve(G. 75, N.1).— τῶν μαστῶν : μαστός is one of the breasis, στέρνον (i. 8. | 
26) the bree; chest. 
18. of δὲ... πλοίοις : what the inhabitants of Thapsacus said, supply- 
ing the ellipses necessary to the const., was οὐπώποθ᾽ (οὐ-πώ- ποτε) οὗτος 6 
ποταμὸς διαβατὸς (διαβαίνω, Gada, 3) ἐγένετο πεζῇ εἰ μὴ νῦν (except now, 
se οὐπώποτε), ἀλλὰ (διαβατὸς ἐγένετο) πλοίοις (G. 188, 1). Note 
he change of νῦν to τότε in passing from dir. to indir. disc. In the same 
way the person of the quoted verbs is often changed. —@ τότε... διαβῇ: 
a statement added by the historian. — κατέκαυσεν : plup. in ee — ἵνα 
. διαβῇ : note the mood (G. 216, 2). — ἐδόκει 84... βασιλεύσοντι, τύ ap- 
peared accordingly that it (i. 6. the lowness of the river) was a divine inter- 
vention (G. 139, 1), and that the river had plainly retired before Cyrus, 
because (he was) about to be king. The sentiment rather of the truculent 
Thapsacéni than of the historian. 
19. ἐπεσιτίσαντο : because they were about to cross the desert of Arabia, 
See the map. 


CHAPTER V. 


Synopsis: The march is continued through the desert of Arabia along the 
northern bank of the Euphrates (1). The horsemen hunt the wild animals im 
which the plain abounds (2, 3). The deserted city Corsdte on the river Mascas 
is reached (4). Thence Cyrus marches thirteen days through the desert, and 
many of the beasts of burden perish from hunger (5). Grain failing, the sol- 
diers live upon flesh (6). Once during this time the wagons are stuck in the 
mud, and the Persian nobles assist the barbarians in getting them out (7, 8). 
Cyrus marches with the greatest speed possible, hoping to find the King unpre- 
pared (9). The soldiers cross the Euphrates, on rafts made of skins, to Char- 
mande, where they purchase food and wine (10). Here a dispute arises between 
the troops of Clearchus and Menon, and Clearchus narrowly escapes being killed 
(11-14). Cyrus comes up and succeeds in quelling the disturbance (15-17). 


Page 4. -- 1. τῆς “ApaBias: occupied by roving tribes of Arabs, 
called by Strabo “ApaBes Σικηνῖται (from σκηνή). See map. — ἔχων, with 
(G. 277, 6). — ἐρήμους, desert. Eng. der.?— τόπῳ, region. — ἣν μὲν... 
θάλαττα, the ground was wholly a level plain, just like the sea: ἅπαν to be 
construed with πεδίον, where we should expect rather ἅπασα modifying 
γῆ. Cf. iv. 4. 1. — ἀψινθίου: cf. Tristia per vacuos horrent absinthia, 
campos. Ovid. Pont., iii. 1. 23.— ἅπαντα : plur., though the preceding τὶ 
is sing., of there was anything else, etc., they were all, etc. Cf. ὅστις . «. 
πάντας, i. 1. 5. — Sév8pov... ἐνῆν, but there was no tree (emphatic) in tt. 

2. πλεῖστοι, very many. — ὄνοι ἄγριοι : Crosby cites Job xxxix. 5-8 
--- στρουθοί: the orpov8ds was properly a small bird of the sparrow kind, 
but 6 μέγας στρουθός, tie ostrich. (Note the der. of the Eng. word ostrich. 
ἡ στρουθός also (fem.) was used without μεγάλη in the same sense. Cf 
§ 3, below. — ἔπει διώκοι, ἕστασαν (G. 124, 1): for the opt. see G. 23 





ἧς. ANABASIS 1, v. 29 


| So ἐπεὶ πλησιάζοιεν, ἐποίουν. --- ταὐτόν : for τὸ αὐτό (CG. 79, 2, N., end), — 
καὶ οὐκ. .. διαδεχόμενοι, and it was impossible to capture them, unless the 
horsemen, taking their places at intervals, hunted (G. 225) them in succes- 
sion (διαδεχόμενοι, sc. ἀλλήλοις). --- ἐλαφείοις : sc. κρέασι, 

3. πολὺ yap... χρωμένη, for it withdrew to a great distance in its flight, 
using its feet in runing (manner, (ἃ. 188,1),and its w ie (by) raising 
them like a sail, — ἂν (i. 6. ἐὰν) ἀνιστῇ, ἔστι (G. 28, Ν. 1, end): general 

| supposition in present time (ἃ. 225). — ἣν resumes the narrative style. 

4. πλεθριαῖον : we might have had πλέθρου (cf. i. 2. 23). -- ἐρύ μη: not 
uninhabited as opposed to οἰκουμένη (i. 2. 6), but abandoned. — ὄνομα δ᾽ 
αὐτῇ (sc. ἐστί) has ΚΚορσωτή as pred. nom., as if it were ὀνομάζεται δέ 

| (Kiiig.). For a different const. used to express the same thought, ef. i. 4. 

11. — περιερρεῖτο : the pass. of a verb made trans. (the simple péw, to flow, 

is intvans.) by the prep. in comp., as in Eng., was flowed about. — κύκλῳ; 

manner (G. 188, 1). — ἐπεσιτίσαντο : Corsdte thus appears to have been ἃ 
| depot of supplies in the midst of the desert. 

_§. Τίύλας, i. 6. τὰς Βαβυλωνίας, the pass into Babylonia, on the north of 
| the Euphrates. See map. — ὑπὸ λιμοῦ, from hunger (G. 191, VI. 7, 1 ¢c).— 
ἄλλο, besides. — οὐδὲ οὐδέν (G. 283, 9).— ὄνους ἀλέτας, mill-stones. From 
\the ass, as a beast of burden, the term ὄνος came to have various derived 
imeanings, as windlass in Her. vii. 36 (ὄνοισι ξυλίνοισι), and here the upper 
mill-stone : ἀλέτας is a noun used adj., lit. grinders. — παρὰ τὸν ποταμόν: 
why the δου. 

Page 18.— 6. Λυδίᾳ: Gees the Great, after subduing the Lydians, 
jforbade them, at the suggestion of Croesus himself (Her. i. 155), the use 
of arms, and required them to teach their sons the arts of music and selling 
jat retail. So they became a race of hucksters. — kat πρίασθαι... ἐπίσης 
| expressed in full this would be καὶ πρίασθαι (τὸν σῖτον) οὐκ ἦν, εἰ μὴ. 

β βαρβαρικῷ (πρίασθαι ἣν) τὴν καπίθην, K. τ΄ A. — ἀλεύρων : gen. of 1η: ae 
rial (G. 167, 4). — τεττάρων σίγλων : gen. of price (G. 178). — δύναται, is 
worth, transitive. The sig/ws was worth in our money about 225 cts. — 
᾿Αττικοὺς : in agreement with ὀβολούς, though modifying also ἡμιωβόλιον. 
ἐχώρει, held, lit. had room (χώραν) for. The choenix was about a quart, 
‘and this amount of meal or flour cost about 45 cents in the desert, or more 
than fifty times as much as it cost at Athens about this time. (See 
oeckh’s Public Econ. of the Athen., Bk. I. § 15.) — Kpéa.. . διεγίγνοντο, 
soldiers subsisted therefore by cating (or simply on) flesh. 
7. qv.. οὕς, some of these marches, ἣν οὕς being a past form of the 
common ἔστιν οἵ (G. 152, N. 2). In such irregular phrases the verb keeps 
fixed form, without regard to the unexpressed subject. — οὕς : cogn. acc. 
(6. 159) to ἤλαυνεν. --- μακρούς : pred. adj. (G. 138, Rem.). — ὁπότε Bov- 
ἴλοιτο : cf. ἐπεὶ διώκοι in ὃ 2, and note. — καὶ δή : adding a special fact, 
ana once in particular. — ταῖς ἁμάξαις δυσπορεύτου, hard(G. 131, 4 δ) for 
the wagons (G. 184, 3) to get through. —ortparod: part. gen. with a verb 
G. 170, 1). — συν-εκ-βιβάζειν, to aid in getting out. So two lines below 
ἰσπεῦσαι, to aid (σύν) in hurrying on. 






















30 XENOPHON. 




























8. ὥσπερ ὀργῇ, just as if (sc. κελεύων as protasis, G. 277, N. 3) in ange 
(manner, G. 188, 1). --- θεάσασθαι: prop. to look wpon (vith interest ὁ 
wonder), while ἰδεῖν is ¢o see in general. — πορφυροῦς : froin πορφύρα, th 
purple fish, murex (cf. G. 129, 14). — ἵεντο, sent themselves, rushed. = 
ὠσπερ... νίκης, just as one would run (i. e. in a foot-race at the publi 
games) to get the victory. wept νίκης implies the prot. (G. 226, 1), 7h 
should be running for (περί, about, concerning, expressing the aim) victor, 
- al... γηλόφου, even (modifying the entire phrase that follows) dow 
a very (yada) steep hill. — ἔχοντες ... ἀναξυρίδας, having on both the costi 
tunics and colored trousers which they are tr the habit of wearing : τούτου 
marks the dress as one generally known. — ἔνιοι : see note on ἣν ovs i 
§ 7, and 6. 152, N. 2. — εἰσ-πήδησαν eis: cf. ἐκ- βαλεῖν ἐκ, 1. 2. 1, an 
note. —@arrov i)... ᾧετο, more quickly than (omit ὡς, as, in Eng.) 07} 
would have thought (it possible, if he had not seen it). For ἂν @ero (se 
οἶμαι) see G. 226, 2 b.— μετεώρους eEexdprcay, 1. 6. lifted and carried out. 

9. τὸ σύμπαν, upon the whole, in yeneral (G. 160, 2). — δῆλος... om 
Sav, Cyrus himself (&s) showed that he was making haste (G. 280, N. 1 an, 
N. 4). — ὁδὸν : acc. of extent of space (G. 161). — ἀναγκαίου : from ἀνάγκ 
(G. 129, 12). — ὅσῳ... τοσούτῳ, quanto... tanto, the... the (G. 18: 
2). — ὅσῳ . . . μαχεῖσθαι : the thought of Cyrus was, in the dir. form, ὅσ' 
ἂν θᾶττον ἔλθω, τοσουτῳ ... μαχοῦμαι (G. 247). — ἀπαρασκευοτέ 
pred. δα]. --- σχολαίτερον : comparative adv. (6. 75) formed as if fr 
σχολῇ rather than cxodates. See the lexicon. — cvvayeper Oar: in 1] 
dir. form, ὅσῳ ἂν σχολαίτερον ἔλθω, τοσούτῳ πλέον συναγείρεται βασιλ 
στράτευμα, the greater (will be the) army (that) is now collecting for t; 
King, where συναγείρεταν expresses an action in progress, but implies ἢ 
future size of the army which is now collecting, and would, therefore, be 
natural apod. to ὅσῳ ἂν ἔλθῃ (G. 232, 3; cf. 223). — καὶ συνιδεῖν... 0 
oa, but, further (καί), the attentive observer could see at a glance (ovv- Wei 
thut the King’s enpire was strong in its extent of territory and number ¢ 
inhabitants, etc. συνιδεῖν is first introduced as subj. of ἣν, ἐξ was possil 
to see, and the natural constr. would have been τὴν ἀρχὴν ἰσχυρὰν οὖσα 
But after τὸν νοῦν the writer’s point of view changes, and the rest of Ὁ 
sentence is constructed (by anacoluthon) as if for συνιδεῖν Av the near 
equivalent δήλη ἢν had been used (6. 280, N. 1). — προσέχειν τὸν voi 
animum advertere or animadvertere. — πλήθει, both extent and numbe 
takes the two gen. by zeugma (ζεῦγμα, joining). — διεσπάσθαι : perf. - 
διὰ ταχέων, with speed, lit. through quick (measures). — et... ἐποιεῦτο, 1. 
in case of a vigorous attack. 

Page A9.— 10. πέραν τοῦ ποταμοῦ, across the river (G. 182, 2), i. 8.1 
its southern bank. — κατά, over against, epposite. — ἐδνήμους σταθμούς: 5 
§ 1 and 8 5, above. — ὄνομα δὲ Kappdv5y: see note on ὃ 4, above. —t 
φθέρας : Eng. der.? — σκεπάσμοτα, as coverings (G. 187, Ν. 4). — διφθέρα 
χόρτου : double obj. (G. 172, 2).— συνέσπων : see συ-σπάω (6. 16, 5, Ν. ἐ 
— as μὴ ἅπτεσθαι : result (G. 266, N. 1). --- ἐκ, ἀπό: the one owt of, Ὁ 
other of of (G. 191, I. 2 and 3). — τοῦτο... πλεῖστον, for this (thing) W. 
very abundant in the country, τοῦτο neuter, though referring to pedtwns. | 





ANABASIS 1, v. 31 


11. ἀμφιλεξάντων τι, having had some dispute. — ἀδικεῖν, Μένωνος, 
| that Menon’s soldier (probably one of two who began the quarrel) was in 
the wrong (G. 260, 2). Note the perf. force of ASoxetv, to be ἄδικος, to have 
done wrong (Moods and Tenses, § 10, 1, N. 4). — ἐμάν probably on the 
spot, with his own staff, after the Spartan fashion. Cf. ii. 3. 11. — ἐχαλέ- 
παινον... Κλεάρχῳ, took it hard (χαλεπός), and were exceedingly angry at 
Clearchus (G. 184, 2). 

12. ἡμέρᾳ: dat. of time (G. 189). — διάβασιν : a crossing, first the act 
(see G. 129, 3) and then, as here, the place. — -ὴν ἀγοράν, the marketing 
‘(see ὃ 10). — civ... αὐτόν, with few (G. 138, Rem.) about him, lit. with 
|| those about him (being) few. — προσ-ήλαυνε, δι-ελαύνοντα (G. 280): note 
‘the force of the prepositions in comp. —tyot τῇ ἀξίνῃ, hurls his axe at 
| him, lit. sends (at him, sc. αὐτοῦ, G. 171, 1) with his axe (6. 188, 1). — 

᾿αὐτοῦ (G. 171, 1). —AlOw: sc. ἵησι. 

13. καταφεύγει: diff. in meaning from ἀπο-φεύγω, i. 4. 8 1--- αὐτοῦ, 
there, i. e. where they were. — τὰς ΓΝ Υ ΝΗ ... θέντας : the left knee was 
slightly advanced, the shield set firmly in rest upon it, and the spear held 
in readiness for defence. Clearchus saw that he might be repulsed and 
obliged to fall back upon his heavy-armed troops. — τοὺς ἱππέας: not 
mentioned in i. 2. 9. — of ἦσαν αὐτῷ = ois εἶχεν. --- of πλεῖστοι : sc. ἦσαν. 
— ἐκπεπλῆχθαι, were thoroughly frightened (G. 202, 2, N. 2; 266, 1). — οἱ 
δέ, but others, as if τοὺς μέν stood with τρέχειν. --- ἕστασαν, stood (still). 
See G. 124, 1. — τῷ πράγματι : cause (G. 188, 1). 

14, ἔτυχε. .. προσιών, happened to be coming on later (G. 279, 4). — 
αὐτῷ (G. 186). — ἑπομένη : in the same construction as προσιών. ἔτυχε... 
ὁπλιτῶν is parenthetic, and οὖν resumes the narration. — eis τὸ μέσον, 
between. — ἄγων : sc. τὴν τάξιν. 

Page 29. - ἔθετο τὰ ὅπλα, halted under arms. τίθεσθαι τὰ ὅπλα lit- 
erally means to ground arms, i. 6. to stand with the spear and shield resting 
on the ground. But it sometimes means to take up any military position 
‘or simply to appear under arms (properly in military line), where the origi- 
‘nal meaning disappears. In ὃ 17, below, κατὰ χώραν ἔθεντο τὰ ὅπλα means 
they moved back to their former places, i. e. to their quarters, where they had 
| been before the quarrel. It is probable that τίθεσθαι τὰ ὅπλα never means 
‘to stack or pile arms. — airod... καταλευσθῆναι, when he (i. 6. Clearchus) 
had barely escaped, lit. had wanted little (G.172, 1) of, being stoned to death. 
|—héyou: optative in a causal sentence (G. 250, N.).— αὑτοῦ refers to Cle- 
-archus; but the preceding use of αὐτοῦ is strange, and Kriiger proposes to 
omit it. Others have αὐτοῦ here. — ἐκ τοῦ μέσου, out from between (them). 

15. ἐν τούτῳ, during this time (sc. τῷ χρόνῳ), meanwhile. — καὶ Kipos, 
Cyrus also. —rév πιστῶν : part. gen. (G. 168). The trusty counsellors ΟΥ̓ 
‘attendants of a Persian prince were called ot πιστοί, In the Persians of 
| Aeschylus, the twelve elders who form the chorus say of themselves (vs. 1) 
τάδε... Tord καλεῖται (for καλούμεθα Tuco). 

16. ΤΠρόξενε: Proxenus now seemed more ee than Menon. — 
κατακεκόψεσθαι, shall be instantly cut to pieces (G. 200, N. 9). — κακῶς. 















32 XENOPHON. 

















ἐχόντων = ἐὰν τὰ ἡμέτερα κακῶς ἔχῃ (G. 226, 1). --- τῶν παρὰ βασιλεῖ ὄν- 
των, 1. 6. ἢ οἱ παρὰ βασιλεῖ ὄντες. 

17. ἐν ἑαυτῷ ἐγένετο, came to himself, recovered his senses, Lat. ad se 
rediit. — παυσάμενοι : sc. τῆς μάχης. --- κατὰ χώραν ἔθεντο τὰ ὅπλα : see. 
note on ὃ 14, above. 


CHAPTER VI. 


Synopsis: As the army advances, traces of the King’s cavalry are observed, 
Orontas, a Persian nobleman, turns traitor to Cyrus and offers to go forward 
with a thousand horse and cut off the cavalry that is laying the country waste 
by fire, and to this Cyrus consents (1, 2). Orontas then writes to the King, ! 
saying that he shall desert to him with his command ; but his messenger be- 
trays him and carries the letter to Cyrus, who arrests the traitor and summons 
seven Persian noblemen and Clearchus to his tent to try him (3, 4). Clearchus 
afterwards relates how the trial was conducted (5). Cyrus, he says, stated how, 
Orontas had on two previous occasions proved false to him, but had been again 
received into favor, and then asked the prisoner if he had since received any, 
injury from him. Orontas acknowledged that Cyrus had never been unjust to. 
him, and that he had no reason to expect further mercy (6-8). Cyrus then 
referred the case to those present, and Clearchus advised that the culprit should 
be put to death, in which opinion the others concurred. Orontas is led away to 
the tent of Artapites, and is never seen again (9-11). 


1. *Evred@ev: from opposite Charmande. See map. — προϊόντων (sc. ad- 
τῶν), as they advanced, but two lines below, προϊόντες, keeving ahead (of 
the army). — ἐφαίνετο, there appeared continuously (G. 135, 2, and n. 1). 
— os... ἵππων, of about 2000 horse (G. 169, 1). -- οὗτοι : to be referred 
to the ἱππεῖς implied in ἵππων. --- εἴ τι ἄλλο, i.e. whatever else (cf. i. 5. I). 
— γένει : dat. of respect (G. 188, 1, N. 1). But for βασιλεῖ, see G. 184, 2. 
— τὰ πολέμια λεγόμενος, reckoned, in matters pertaining to war (G. 160, 1). 
— Περσῶν : part. gen. (G. 168). — καὶ πρόσθεν, previously also. — πολεμή-, 
σας, καταλλαγεὶς δέ (G. 277, 6). 

2. εἰ αὐτῷ δοίη, k. τ. A.: Orontas said, εἰ ἐμοὶ δοίης, ἢ κατακάνοιμι (see! 
κατα-καίνω) ἂν ἢ oun, κ΄ τ. Χ. (G. 246). --- ὅτι : in unusual pos.; we 
should expect rather ὅτι εἰ αὐτῷ, x. τ΄ Δ. --- ἄν: to be taken also with each 
of the following opts. (G. 212, 4). — τοῦ κάειν ἔπιόντας, from attacking 
(ἐπιόντας modifying the subj. of κάειν) and burning (G. 263, 1). — rou’ 
ceev... δύνασθαι, would cause that they should never be able, ete. ὥστε 
would generally be omitted in this construction. — ταῦτα : subj. of ἐδόκει, 

3. ἥξοι, δύνηται: change of mood in part (G. 247, N. 1). — ὡς ἂν Sivy- 
ται πλείστους (G. 232, 3) might have been ey, ὡς πλείστους. See note 
on i. 1. 6. — trro- δέχεσθαι: for the force of ὑπό in comp., cf. ὑπολάβοι 
i. 1. 7. --ὐἐν-ἣν ἐν: cf. i. 2. 1, andi. 5. 8. 

Page 2. — τῆς πρόσθεν: cf. i. 3.19, andi. 4. 8. — ὁ δέ, but he (G. 148, 
Ne 9), ὃ 

4. ἑπτά, seven of them, added to restrict τοὺς ἀρίστους. --- θέσθαι τὰ 
ὅπλα, to stand under arms. Cf. ἔθετο τὰ ὅπλα in i. 5. 14, and note. — 


ANABASIS 1, vi. 


eo 
Go 


































πρισχιλίους: the great number of men detailed (one quarter of the entire 
| Greek force) would seem to show apprehension on the part of C yrus, 
Orontas was a man of influence, and doubtless had many friends among the 
barbarians. It should be noticed, however, that some of the seven Persians 
summoned to judge Orontas were his relatives (cf. ot συγγενεῖς in ὃ 10). 

5. καὶ αὐτῷ καὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις, not only to him (i. 6. Cyrus) but also to the 
rest (i. e. of the Persians); that is, it was generally known that Clearchus 
was the most prominent man among the Greeks. — τῶν “Ἑλλήνων : part. 
gen. with μάλιστα (G. 168), the thought being strengthened by πρό in 
προτιμηθῆναι, was honored before (the rest). og éghenee ὡς ἐγένετο : for 
ὡς ἡ κρίσις ἐγένετο, how the trial was conducted. Cf. note on τῶν βαρβά- 
pov ini. 1. 5. — κρίσις (see G. 129, 3).— οὐ γὰρ ἀπόρρητον ἦν, i.e. ds 
ἡ κρίσις ἐγένετο. --- τοῦ λόγου, the conference (G. 171, 1). 

6. σὺν ὑμῖν βουλευόμενος, taking counsel with you. —8 τι... ἀνθρώπων, 
whatever is just, etc., rel. clause, summed up emphat. in τοῦτο. --- πρός, in 
the sight of (G.191, VI. 6,1, a). — πράξω: ee ) not fat. <G. 216) 2) ΞΞ 
| rovrovl: with an saphena gesture (G. 83, N. 2). — ἐμός: with the art. 
(6. 147). — εἶναι : purpose G. 265). — ἐμοί : with ὑπήκοον (G. 185). — ὡς 
ἔφη αὐτός, as he himself said (G. 145, 1). In such eases αὐτός is always 
| adj. (= ipse), never substantive ; although in English we can often render 
it (as here) by an emphatic he. Cyrus discredits the statement. Cyrus, 
| probably, in his capacity of military commander (képavos) of Western Asia 
} Minor had put Orontas in charge of Sardis. When, therefore, Artaxerxes 
became King and Orontas renounced the authority of Cyrus, it was an easy 
matter for him to take forcible and absolute possession of the city. — 
Kal ἐγὼ ἐποίησα, and I brought it about, dependent on ἐπεί, above. The 
principal clause begins at μετὰ ταῦτα in § 7. — αὐτόν: not the obj. of 
προσπολεμῶν, Which takes the dat. Cyrus began to say, ἐγὼ αὐτὸν (him, 
emphat.) προσπολεμῶν (manner) ἐποίησα τοῦ πρὸς ἐμὲ πολέμου παύσασθαι 
(αὐτόν being subj. of παύσασθαι), but changed the constr. to an anaco- 
luthon by inserting ὥστε δόξαν τούτῳ (on which see note on ὃ 2). — δεξιὰν 
«+. ἔδωκα : among the Persians a pledge of especial solemnity. 

7. pera ταῦτα, since that, i.e. the pledge given and received. Notice 
the abrupt change of address from the council to Orontas. —%orw... 
ἠδίκησα, is (G. 28, N. 1, end) there any wrong which I have done you ? — 
οὔτ. 29,N.1): sc. ἔστι (or εἴη); or we may consider οὔ as a direct quotation, 
“Wo” (G. 241, 2,N.), like οὐδ᾽... δόξαιμι, below, in § 8. — ἠρώτα, went on 
asking, but the aor. ἠρώτησεν in ὃ 8 with reference to the single question, 
asked. -— Οὐκοῦν : expecting an affirm. answer (G. 282, 2). The diff. be- 
tween this word and οὔκουν ἢ See the lexicon. — οὐδὲν ἀδικούμενος (G. 277, 
5): see note on τί ἀδικηθείς in § 8. For ἀδικούμενος see the note on ἀϑι- 
Kety, 1. 5. 11. — κακῶς ἐποίεις (α. 165, N. 1).—8 τι Uva, in what (G. 160, 1) 
= were able. — ἔφη, said ““ Yes.” — ἔγνως, came to know, had ascertained, 
saw. — μεταμέλειν σοι: in the dir. form, μεταμέλει μοι (G. 184, 2, N, 1). — 
ὁμο-λογέω: der. ἢ 

8. ἀδικηθείς (G. 277, 2), though pass., has τί as cogn. aceus. (G. 169 ; 


gi 4 


34 XENOPHON. 


197, 1, N. 2). So, "Ἢ οὐδὲν ἀδικηθείς, and οὐδὲν ἀδικούμενος i in § 7. ἃ | 
ἐπιβουλεύων (G. 280, N. 1): cf. ϑῆλος ἢν ἀνιώμενος in 1. 2. 11. 

Page 22. — οὐδὲν ΔΗ) δ either a direct quotation, or an indirect 
quotation with ἐπιβουλεύων .. . γέγονε understood. — περὶ ἐμέ: οἵ. περὶ | 
ἡμᾶς, περὶ ἐκείνους in i. 4. 8. — γεγενῆσθαι (G. 246). —"H yap, (I confess) | 
for in truth, etc. — ἂν γένοιο (G. 226, 2b). — ἀδελφῷ (G. 186). — ὅτι, 
(G. 241, 2, N.). 

9. πρὸς ταῦτα, in view of this, thereupon. — πρῶτος, the first: what | 
would πρῶτον mean ?— ἀπόφηναι : voice? Distinguish from ἀποφῆναι and | 
ἀποφήναι. --- ὅ τι σοι δοκεῖ; indir. quest. depending on the idea of declare | 
in ἀπόφηναι γνώμην. --- τοῦτον : expressed three times, contemptuously. — | 
ἐκποδῶν ποιεῖσθαι, to put out of the way.— ὡς δέῃ, ἢ : final (ἃ. 216). — 
ἡμῖν, i.e. to you and me, said arrogantly. Why dat.?— τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον 
εἶναι, as far as this fellow is concerned (G. 268, N.).— τοὺς... τούτους, | 
these (with a gesture) who are your friends of their own free will, lit. these 
your volunteer friends (ἐθελοντάς, noun, not ἐθέλοντα). --- ev ποιεῖν : cf. | 
κακῶς ἐποίεις in ὃ 7. 

10. ἔφη, i. 6. Clearchus, when the trial was over. — ἔλαβον . . . ᾽Ορόν- 
ταν, took Orontas by the girdle (G. 171, 1, κ.). --- ἐπὶ θανάτῳ, as ὦ sign that} 






to execution. — καί, even. — ols προσετάχθη, to whom it was appointed, se. | 
ἐξάγειν. --- προσεκύνουν, προσεκύνησαν: why a change of tense? mpoo-)) 
exvvéw in application to Orientals means to prostrate one’s self. — καίπερ, 
εἰδότες, although they knew (G. 277, N. 1b). — &youro: why opt.? 

11. σκηπτούχων: der.? Der. of σκῆπτρον ?— οὔτε οὐδείς : emphatic} 
neg. (G. 288, 9). So οὐδὲ οὐδείς, following. — ὅπως (how) ἀπέθανεν : perhaps! 
he was buried alive ; see Her. vii. 114, where the historian states that this 
was a Persian custom. — εἰδώς, from his own knowledge. — ἄλλοι ἄλλως, 
some in one way, others in another. | 





CHAPTER VII. 


Synopsis: Cyrus proceeds through Babylonia, and at the end of the third) 
day’s march reviews his troops (1). He receives information respecting the 
King’s army, and assembles his Greek officers for consultation (2). He exhorts 
them to display their zeal in his service (3), describes the manner of a Persian 
onset, and promises to reward them magnificently in case of victory (4). Gau- 
lites says there are doubts as to the sincerity of Cyrus and his ability to fulfil 
his promises (5), whereupon the latter reviews the extent of country he hopes 
to conquer and promises a crown to each Greek (6, 7). The Greeks are much 
encouraged by these assurances (8). Cyrus expresses a decided opinion that his 
brother will not refuse to engage with him (9). The Greeks and barbarians are 
numbered (10), and some account is given of the King’s forces (11-13). Cyrus 
advances a day’s march further, and at midday comes to a deep trench dng by 
the King, beyond which he succeeds in making his way (14-16). The King 
does not come to an engagement, and traces of his retreat are observed (17). 
Cyrus rewards the soothsayer Silanus (18), and, concluding that the King has 
given up the intention of fighting, proceeds with less caution (19, 20). 





ANABASIS 1, νι. 35 


1. ᾿Ἐἰντεῦθεν : probably from near Pylae (i. 5. 5). See i. 6. 1, and note, — 
μέσας νύκτας, midnight, pl. with reference to the various watches (@vAaKkat) 
into which the night was divided. — ἐδόκει, he thought. See lexicon. Sox. 
- εἰς... ἕω, at daybreak (6. 42,2,N.1); εἰς with reference to the time 
when the dawn shall have been reached (G. 191, III. 1, 5). — μαχούμενον : 
future (G. 277, 3). — κέρως : form and case? See G. 56, 2; 171, 3. — τοῦ 
εὐωνύμου, i.e. of the Greeks, who were next the river. Cyrus drew up 
(διέταξε, disposuit) his barbarian force (τοὺς ἑαυτοῦ) on the left of the en- 
tire Greek force. 

2. ἡμέρᾳ : case (G. 186). — αὐτό-μολοι : αὐτός and pod-, go; cf. ἔμολον, 
2aorist of βλώσκω. See also G. 131, 1. 

Page 23. — πῶς ἂν... ποιοῖτο, how (G. 282, 1) he should make the 
Sight, i. 6. if there should be one (G. 226, 2b).—aprve ... τοιάδε, exhorted 
and encouraged them as follows (G. 148, N. 1). 

8. ἀνθρώπων : with ἀπορῶν (G. 172, 1), not because in want of barbarians. 
He adds ἀνθρώπων contemptuously to βαρβάρων, but calls the Greeks ἄν- 
Spes. See note on ὃ 4. — ἀμείνους kal κρείττους, braver and mightier (der. 
from κράτος). — διὰ τοῦτο: takes up νομίζων, because I thought, ... on 
this account. — προσ-έλαβον : force of the prep.? — ὅπως ἔσεσθε: sc. σκο- 
metre (G. 217, N. 4, ex.). — ts... ἧς, which (G. 153) you possess (see κτά- 
opar) and on account of which (G. 173, 1), etc. — ἴστε: see οἶδα, -- ἑλοίμην 
dy: prot. not expressed (ἃ. 226, 2 b.— ἀνθ᾽ av... πάντων, in preference to 
all that (G. 154, nN.) I have. The Persian government was an absolute 
despotism, and regarded all in dependence upon the King as his slaves. In 
i. 9. 29, Cyrus is called the δοῦλος of Artaxerxes. — πολλαπλασίων: a 
multiplicative in πλάσιος, derived from πολύς. Cf. δι-πλάσιος, twice (δίς) 
as many, etc. 

4. ὅπως... εἰδῆτε (sce οἶδα) : not object clause, as above (ὅπως ἔσεσθε), 
but final (G. 216, 1). — εἰς οἷον. . . ἀγῶνα, into what sort of ὦ siruggle you 
are going ; indir. quest. (G. 282, 1). Cf. below, οἵους γνώσεσθε ἀνθρώπους. 
— τὸ πλῆθος : sc. ἐστί. — ἐπίασιν (6. 200, N. 3 6).— ταῦτα, 1. 6. their num- 

bers and outcry. — τἄλλα. . . ἀνθρώπους, as to all else, I feel (lit. seem to 
myself to be) even ashamed (when I think) what sort of men (ἀνθρώπους with 
emphasized contempt at the end of the sentence) you will find those in our 
country arc (G. 280). — ἡμῖν is the ethical dat. (G. 184, 3, x. 6). — ὑμῶν 
BE... γενομένων, but since you are (G. 277, 2) men (emphatic), and if you 
Shall prove yourselves (= ἐὰν γένησθε, G. 277, 4) of good courage. With 
ἀνδρῶν and ἀνθρώπους here cf. what Herod. (vii. 210) says of the Medes at 
Thermopylae, ὅτι πολλοὶ piv ἄνθρωποι εἶεν, ὀλίγοι δὲ ἄνδρες. --- ὑμών 
τὸν βουλόμενον, whoever of you (G. 168) shall wish (G. 276, 2). ---- τοῖς οἴκοι, 
his friends at home (masc.); but, just following, τῶν οἴκοι (neut.), things at 
: home. τοῖς οἴκοι is a dative of the agent with the verbal ζηλωτός ; this is 
the regular construction with the verbal in -réos (G. 188, 3 and 4). 
| 5. πιστὸς δὲ Κύρω, in the confidence of Cyrus. It was probably at the 
direction of Cyrus that Gaulites spoke. — καὶ μὴν : lit. and in truth; free 
Eng., but yet. — διὰ... προσιόντος, vn account of your being (G. 262, 1) 



































36 XENOPHON. 
Ἂ 
at such (a critical point) of the danger that is approaching. κινδύνου limits | 
τοιούτῳ (G. 168), but προσιόντος is still causal (G. 277, 2), the thought | 
being, you promise, etc., because the danger is approaching. — ἂν εὖ γένηταί, 
TL: a purposely vague ref. to his present undertaking. — μεμνήσεσθαν (fut. 
perf.), serving as simple future to μέμνημαι (6. 200, N. 6). — ἔνιοι δέ: se. 
φασί. --- οὐδ᾽ εἰ... δύνασθαι ἄν (G. 211), not even if, etc., would you be 
able (G. 246; 224). — μεμνῇο : formed without connecting-vowel (cf. G. 118, | 
1. N.), μεμνητυμην, μεμνήμην, μεμνη-ιο, μεμνῇο, etc. The common forms. 
μεμνῴμην, μεμνῴῷο, etc. 
6. ἔστι (G. 28, N. 1, end) πρὸς μεσημβρίαν, zs (extends) towards the 
south. ἡμῖν is a dat. of advantage (G. 184, 3). Derivation of μεσ-ημβρία ? 
— μέχρι οὗ, to the point at which (down to where), neut. relative with prep. 
(G. 191, I. 5): in full μέχρι τούτου τοῦ τόπου ἐν &.—TA... πάντα, 
but all between these (limits): cf. τὸ μέσον τῶν τειχῶν ini. 4. 4. 

7. τούτων: with ἐγκρατεῖς (G. 180, 1). — μὴ οὐκ ἔχω ὅ τι δῶ (indirect 
question, G. 244), that I shall not (G. 215, N. 1) know (lit. shall not have) 
what to give; the direct form for 6 τι δῶ would be τί δῶ ; what shall I give? 
(G. 256). So οὐκ ἔχω 6 τι εἴπω (or τί εἴττω), non habeo quod (or quid) 
dicam. Here οὐκ ἔχω is nearly equivalent to ἀπορῶ, to be at a loss, and the 
indirect question in ὅ τι δῶ, etc. is plain. But the analogy of the familiar’ 
expression οὐκ ἔχω ὅ τι δώ, 7 have nothing to give (in which the interroga- 
tive and relative constructions are sometimes hard to distinguish), gave 
rise occasionally to the corresponding expression ἔχω 6 τι δῶ, 7 have some- 
thing to give, in which the relative character greatly preponderates ; and 
here we have (below) ἔχω ἱκανοὺς οἷς δώ, 7 have enough to give to, where the 
construction is purely relative. See Moods and Tenses, ὃ 65, 1, N. 3(@).— 
dv εὖ γένηται (sc. TA πράγματα). --- στέφανον : not, of course, as a badge 
of sovereignty, but as a mark of distinguished military service, like the 
medals and crosses of to-day. A crown was often bestowed in this way as 
a reward of merit among the Greeks. 

Page 24. — 8. ἦσαν, i.e. the generals and captains. Cf. ὃ 2. — σφί- 
σιν: indirect reflexive (G. 144, 2).— ἐμπιμπλὰς τὴν γνώμην, satisfying the 
mind, 

9. παρεκελεύοντο... τάττεσθαι: had Cyrus followed this advice, the 
whole course of Persian history might have been changed. — μάχεσθαι, 
i.e. in person. — éavtav: with ὄπισθεν (G. 182, 2).— yap: with ref. to 
an unexpressed statement: (all this advice is unnecessary) or (there is no 
real danger) for do you think, Cyrus, etc. We should say, What! do you 
think, etc. — Νὴ Δία (6. 163), Yes, by Zeus (he will fight), sc. μαχεῦται, --- 
ἐμὸς ἀδελφός, a brother of mine: ὃ ἐμὸς ἀδελφός would be my brother. — 
ταῦτα: with a gesture. 

10. ἐν τῇ ἐξοπλισία, wader arms, in procinetu. — ἐγένετο, was found to 


ΠῚ 
be. — Gomis... τετρακοσία, 10,400 shield, just as we say ‘‘a thousand), 
horse.” — The sum total here given cannot be made to tally with the num-§,, 


bers previously given separately ; and it is unsatisfactory to speculate on the 
causes of the discrepancy. 





ANABASIS 1, vu. ae 


11. ἑκατὸν καὶ εἴκοσι μυριάδες : probably overstated. Ctesias, the King’s 
private physician (mentioned in i. 8. 26), gave the number as 400,000. — 
ἄλλοι, besides. Cf. i. 5. 5. — αὖ, moreover. 

12. τοῦ: with στρατεύματος. --- ἄρχοντες... ἡγεμόνες : notice Kal be- 
fore both the last two titles, while the proper names below have no conjunc- 
tion. These are both common forms in Greek, while in English we generally 
use and only before the last noun in such a series.— μάχης : after ὑστέρησε 
(der. from ὕστερος) implying comparison (G. 175, 2).— ἡμέραις (G. 188, 2). 

13. ot... βασιλέως, those who had deserted from the ranks of (lit. out of) 
the enemy from (the side of) the great King, etc. τῶν πολεμίων, at the end 
of the section, depends on of (G. 168). The number of prepositional phrases 
in this short section is worthy of ποίο.--- ταὐτά : distinguish carefully from 
ταῦτα above. 

14. συντεταγμένῳ τῷ στρατεύματι: the noun isa dat. of accompaniment 
(G. 188, 5), and the part. expresses the attendant circumstance (G. 277, 6). 
This force of the part. will be easily seen, if the idea of accompaniment is 
dropped and the gen. abs. is substituted, συντεταγμένου τοῦ στρατεύματος, 

Page 23. -— μέσον (G. 142, 4, N. 4). — τάφρος: the word in itself sig- 
nifies an artijicial ditch (cf. θάπτω, τάφος), but this idea is emphasized by 
ὀρυκτή.- dpyural: in apposition to τάφρος, where we should expect rather 
ὀργυιῶν (G. 167, 5). Cf. ποδῶν at the end of ὃ 15. The épyud, the length 
of the outstretched arms (épéya, to stretch out), measured about a fathom 
(6 feet) and was equal to four πήχεις. 

15. παρετέτατο (G. 109, 6 and 4). -- ἔπί, upon, over, to the length of. 
— tov τείχους : see note on ii. 4. 12. The ditch was dug northward, 
obliquely (not at right angles, like the wall) to the Euphrates, which here 
runs about S. E. — διώρυχες : 56. εἰσί, Derivation of δι-ῶρυξ ? — ῥέουσαι, 
which flow (G. 276, 1). — ῥέουσαι, πλεῖ (G. 98, N. 1). — σιτ-αγωγά : deri- 
vation? See also G. 131, 1. — διαλείπουσι, are distant (from one another), 
lit. leave an interval. — ποταμοῦ, τάφρου (G. 182, 2). — Why the ditch 
had not been completed to the river is not stated. The most reasonable of 
the many conjectures that have been made with reference to this is, that 
Cyrus had surprised the King by his rapid marching, and that the latter 
had in consequence abandoned the work in alarm when almost completed. 

16. προσελαύνοντα (G. 280). — παρῆλθε kal ἐγένοντο : the point of view 
shifts ; Cyrus being prominent as subject of παρῆλθε, and the whole army 
as subject of ἐγένοντο. 

17. μέν: see τῇ δὲ τρίτῃ in ὃ 20.— ἦσαν : plural, perhaps, because two 
kinds of tracks are mentioned. 

18. ᾿Αμβρακιώτην : force of suffix? See G. 129, 10. — μάντιν : der. ?— 
Sapexots: the στατὴρ Aapexds, commonly called Δαρεικός, was a Persian 
goid coin, containing about 125.5 grains of gold. It would, therefore, now 
be worth about $5.40 in our gold ($1.00 having 23.22 grains). Here Cyrus 
pays a bet of 10 talents (60,000 drachmas) with 3000 Darics, which shows 
that the Daric was worth 20 drachmas, or $3.60 in silver. The difference 
in these two results comes from the change in the proportional values of 





























98 XENOPHON. 

‘ 
gold and silver. In antiquity the proportion was about 10:1; now itis — 
about 16:1. As the Daric was a gold coin, of course the former value 
(about $5.40) is the correct one. The Daric 15 commonly supposed to have 
derived its name from Darius, the father of Xerxes. In the same way we — 
have Napoleon, Louis dor, etc., as names of coins. — ἀπ᾽ ἐκείνης, i. 6. be- 
fore that (day). — ὅτι 77H... εἶπεν : causal (G. 250). — ἡμερῶν (G. 179, 1). 
Cf. ἡμέρᾳ, above (G. 189), and σταθμόν, ὃ 14 (6. 161). — Ovx... μαχεῖ- 
ται, he will not fight then at all (lit. hereafier) ; see οὐκ ἔτι in lexicon, — 
ov: οὐ rather than μὴ μαχεῖται (G. 219, 3,N.), because he is consciously 
repeating the statement of Silanus (G. 223, N. 1). — ἀληθεύσῃς, shall prove 
to be speaking the truth ; the future apodosis is in ϑώσειν or Sotvat under- 
stood with ὑπισχνοῦμαι. — παρῆλθον : see note oni. 1. 3. 

19. ἐκώλνε: attempted action. — ἔδοξε: personal. — ἀπεγνωκέναι τοῦ 
μάχεσθαι, to have abandoned the idea of fighting (G. 262, 2; 174). --- τῇ 
ὑστεραίᾳ: sc. ἡμέρᾳ. — ὥστε ἐπορεύετο (G. 237). — ἠμελημένως : adverb 
formed from the perfect passive participle of ἀμελέω, 

20. καθήμενος, ἔχων : manner (G. 277, 2). --- αὐτῷ: a dative of dis- 
advantage, but στρατιώταις, just below, one of advantage (G. 184, 3). 





CHAPTER VIII. 


Synopsis: Near the station where he intends to halt for breakfast, Cyrus is 
met by Pategyas riding at full speed, who calls out that the King and his army | 
are approaching (1). Great confusion ensues (2), and Cyrus gives orders for all 
to arm and fall into line (3). They begin to form as quickly as possible (4, 5), 
and Cyrus stations himself at their centre (6, 7). The enemy approach slowly 
and in silence, prepared for battle (8-11). Cyrus calls to Clearchus to attack | 
the centre where the King is, but he is unwilling to do so (12, 13). The King’s 
army continues to advance, the Greek force being not yet completely in line. 
Cyrus surveys both armies, and tells Xenophon, who rides up to him, to an- 
nounce that the sacrifices are favorable (14, 15). The watchword is passed along 
the ranks of the Greeks, and then they advance chanting the paean (16, 17). 
They begin to move more and more rapidly, raising a shout to the God of War, 
at which the barbarians on the right of the King’s army give way and take flight 
(18-20). Cyrus is pleased at the sight, but does not join in the pursuit. He 
directs his attention towards the King, who is beyond his extreme left, and then, 
in fear that he may be encircled, moves directly upon him, putting to rout the 
troops in front (21-24). He attacks the King in person and wounds him, butis 
himself struck with a javelin and killed. Artapates dies upon his body (25-29), 


ey “a cee μὰ ee ee Ε-- 


1. ἣν (6. 134, N. 1 ὁ). --- ἀγορὰν πλήθουσαν, the time of full market, i. & 
from nine or ten o'clock in the morning until noon. Four parts of the day 
were designated, πρῴ (ii. 2. 1), ἀγορὰ πλήθουσα, μέσον ἡμέρας (§ 8), and 
δείλη (ἃ 8). 

Page 26. -- σταθμός: here halting-place. Cf. note on σταθμούς, i. 2. 5. 
— ἔμελλε, i. 6. Cyrus. For ἔμελλε καταλύειν, expressing past intention, 
see G. 118, 6; Moods and Tenses, ὃ 25, 2, N. ἃ. --- καταλύειν, to halt (. 6. 


Ἦν. 
~ 


ε ANABASIS 1, ΥΠΙ. 3g 


for breakfast), lit. to wnyoke, to loose the horses. Cf. καταλύσομεν ἵππους, 
Odyss. iv. 28; and καταλύει tap’ ἐμοί, he lodges at my house.— wpo-patverar 
... κράτος, comes into view in front, riding at the top of his speed (lit. up 
to his might). — ἱδροῦντι τῷ ἵππῳ (G. 188, 5), with his horse in a sweat : 
the part. expresses attendant circumstance (ἃ. 277, 6). Cf. συντεταγμένῳ 
τῷ στρατεύματι in i. 7. 14, and note.— ὡς εἰς μάχην, apparently for battle. 

2. αὐτίκα : construe with ἐπιπεσεῖσθαι ; put first for emphasis. — καὶ 
πάντες δέ, and ail too, i. 6. Persians as well as Greeks (cf. i. 1. 2, and note), 
— σφίσιν (G. 144, 2). — ἐπιπεσεῖσθαι, i. 6. the King (G. 260, 2). 

3. Note in the first two lines the repeated use of the article as a pos- 
sessive pronoun (G. 141, N. 2). — τὰ παλτά : each Persian horseman carried 
two javelins into battle. Cf i. 5. 15. 

4, τὰ ϑεξιὰ τοῦ κέρατος, the right (sc. μέρη, parts) of the wing. κέρας 
here must mean the right wing, τὸ “Εἰλληνικόν, of the entire force of Cyrus, 
as opposed to the left wing where most of the barbarians stood (§ 5). This 
distinction is plain in ἐν τῷ δεξιῷ and ἐν τῷ εὐωνύμῳ (δ 5). But below, τὸ 
εὐώνυμον κέρας τοῦ ‘EAAnvikod means the left wing of this same Greek 
division (or képas). — πρός, in front of, near. — ἐχόμενος, next to, lit. hold- 
ing on to, sc. λεάρχου (6. 199, N. 3; 171, 1). Cf. ἐχόμενοι τούτων in ὃ 9. 

5. tod βαρβαρικοῦ: part. gen. with ἱππεῖς (G. 168). — εἰς : cf. i. 2. 3, 
and note. —tornoav, took their position. The Paphlagonian cavalry and 
Greek peltasts were stationed here to support the hoplites under Clearchus 
and follow up the advantage in case these slower troops should put the 
enemy to rout. 

6. Kupos ... ὡπλισμένοι (sc. ἔστησαν), 1. 6. stood armed. — ὅσον, (so 
much) as = about. Cf. note on εἰς ini. 2. 3. — θώραξι μὲν αὐτοὶ... Ki- 
pov, (the men) themselves on their part (μέν) with breastplates, cwisscs (thigh- 
pieces), and helmets — all except Cyrus. The exception refers only to 
κράνεσι, as appears from the following Κῦρος δέ, x. τ. Δ. οἱ δ᾽ ἵπποι (in 
§ 7) corresponds to θώραξι μὲν αὐτοί. Κύρου: case (G. 191, I. 5). --- 
Wry... κεφαλήν, with his head unprotected (G. 138, Rem.). ° Ctesias (in 
Plutarch, Artax. 11) says that Cyrus wore a tiara in place of a helmet. 

7. Notice the derivation of προ-μετ-πίδια and προ-στερνίδια. --- paxal- 
pas: difference between the μάχαιρα and ξίφος ? 

8. Cf. the beginning of this section with that of ὃ 1.— qvika... ἐγί- 
Ὕνετο, but when it began to be (lit. was becoming) afternoon. Cf. note on ὃ 1. 
The battle was fought between this time and dark.— ἐφάνη, there was seen. 
—Kovi-optds: der.?— χρόνῳ... πολύ, but some time (G. 188, 2) later (the 
dust appeared) just like a sort of blackness in the plain for a great distance 
(ἐπὶ πολύ). ---- χαλκός τις ἤστραπτε, here and there (ris) their bronze armo 
began to flash. 

9. λευκο-θώρακες : probably of linen; cf. λινοθώρηξ, 77]. 11. 539. 

| Page 97. - ἐχόμενοι τούτων : cf. note on ἐχόμενος in ὃ 4. — κατὰ ἔθνη, 
| nation by nation (6. 191, 1V. 2, 2 ε). --- ἕκαστον τὸ ἔθνος : in appos. to 
οὗτοι, but attracting ἐπορεύετο into an agreement with it: but these were all 
proceeding (normally ἔπορεύοντο) nation by nation, each nation in the form 
of @ solid square. 





40 ΧΕΝΟΡΗΟΝ. 


10. ἅρματα : sc. ἦν. --- καλούμενα : cf. note on καλουμένη in i. 2. 13. ~ 
ἐκ τῶν ἀξόνων : inserted into the projecting extremity of the axle and sta- | 
tionary. — εἰς πλάγιον, sideways. — βλέποντα, pointing. — ὡς διακόπτειν : 
result (G. 266, N. 1). — ὅτῳ (i. 6. ᾧτινι, G. 86). — ἐντυγχάνοιεν (6. 248, 2). 
— 4 δὲ γνώμη ἣν ds... ἐλῶντα (see ἐλαύνω), K. τ. A, and they were de- 
signed to drive, etc.; the partic. are nomin., as if γνώμην εἶχεν had preceded, 
and ὡς is used (G. 277, N. 2) as if the chariots themselves had the design. 
The covinni, or scythe-chariots of the ancient Britons, are well known. 

11. ὃ μέντοι, what however, taken up in τοῦτο, two lines below. — καλέ- 
σας... Ἕλλησι: we might have had (cf. i. 7. 18) καλέσας τοὺς “EAAnvas 
παρεκελεύετο αὐτοῖς, but in Greek the obj. is regularly expressed but once, 
— ἐψεύσθη τοῦτο, in this (G. 160, 1) he was mistaken.— κραυγῇ : manner: 
SO σιγῇ; ἡσυχῇ. — σιγῇ ὡς ἀνυστόν, with as little noise as possible ; in fuil 
ὡς ἀνυστὸν ἣν προσιέναι σιγῇ : see note on ἡ δυνατὸν μάλιστα in i. 3. 15. 
- ἐν ἴσῳ, wiih even step, sc. βήματι : cf. ὁμαλῶς in § 14. 

12. αὐτός, i. 6. attended on/y by Pigres and the few others mentioned. 
— ἄγειν : obj. inf. not in indirect disc., following ἐβόα as it would ἐκέλευς 
(6. 260, 1). — τὸ τῶν πολεμίων (6. 142, 2). — ὅτι εἴη : causal (G. 250, N.). 
— κἂν (kal ἂν) νικῶμεν (G. 223). The apod. πεποίηται, though a perf. in 
form, refers vividly to the fut. (G. 200, N. 7), owr whole work ts (will be) 
done. — ἡμῖν (G. 197, 21). 

13. ὁρῶν τὸ μέσον στῖφος, though he saw the compact body at the centre 
(στῖφος from στεΐβω, to tread), i. 6. the 6000 cavalry mentioned in i. 7. 11. 
ἀκούων is also concessive (G. 277, 5). — Κύρου : gen. of source (ἃ. 171, 2, 
N. 1). The clause ἔξω ὄντα (G. 280)... βασιλέα constitutes the obj. ace. 
— τοῦ εὐωνύμου : with ἔξω (ἃ. 182, 2).— τοσοῦτον . . . ἔξω ἣν : parenth.— 
πλήθει, in numbers (α. 188, 1, N. 1). — ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως, but still, resuming after 
the parenthesis, with emphatic repetition of ὁ Kiéapxos. — μὴ κυκλωθείη, 
that he might be encircled (der. from κύκλος ; cf. Eng. cycle). Why opt.?— 
ὅτι αὐτῷ... ἔχου : he said ἐμοὶ μέλει (G. 184, 2, Ν. 1, the clause that fol- 
lows being the object gen.) ὅπως καλῶς ἔχῃ (G. 217, N. 1). — If Clearchus - 
had been less cautious and obeyed orders, the result of the battle might 
have been very different. Plutarch (Artax. 8) says of Clearchus: 6 δ᾽ αὖ- 
τῷ μέλειν εἰπὼν ὅπως ἕξει κάλλιστα, τὸ πᾶν διέφθειρεν. 

14. τὸ βαρβαρικὸν στράτευμα: the King’s army. --- ὁμαλῶς : cf. ἐν tow 
in ὃ 11, and note.— συνετάττετο... προσιόντων, was forming its line from 
those still coming up. — οὐ πάνυ πρός, by no means near, at some distance 
from. — πρὸς αὐτῷ τῷ στρατεύματι means near the army itself, αὐτῷ 
strengthening the idea of nearness. — ἑκατέρωσε (with ἀποβλέπων) : cf. 
ἑκατέρωθεν in ὃ 13, and see G. 61. — κατεθεᾶτο, took a survey: δράω, to see 
in general; βλέπω, to twrn the eyes, look ; θεάομαι, to gaze at. 

15. Ἐξενοφῶν: the first mention of Xenophon in the Anabasis. — ὡς 
συναντῆσαι: purpose (G. 266, N. 1). — εἴ τι παραγγέλλοι, whether (G. 282, 
4) he had any commands (G. 243).— ἐπιστήσας (sc. Tov ἵππον), pulling up. 

Page 28. — ἱερά, omens from inspecting the inwards of the victims; σφά- 
για, omens from the acts and movements of the victims. 





ANABASIS 1, vu. 41 


16. λέγων, while saying (G. 277, 1).—ths... εἴη, what the noise was 
(G. 243); but two lines below, ὅ τι εἴη, k. τ. A. (G. 149, 27). — ὁ Κλέαρχος: 
Clearchus had ridden up in the mean time ; some MSS. have Bevodav. — 
σύνθημα, a thing agreed upon (συν-τίθημι), watchword. — wapépxeran ; 
what might have been the mood? Cf. παραγγέλλει and εἴη, below. — 
δεύτερον : the watchword passed first down the line from man to man, and 
then back again to make sure that it was understood.— καὶ ὅς, and he, i. 6. 
Cyrus (G. 151, N. 3°). — τίς παραγγέλλει, 1. e. who was giving it out with- 
out his approval. 

17. ᾿Αλλὰ... ἔστω, weil, 1 accept it (the password), and let it be this. 
ἀλλά marks the opposition between his present concession and preceding 
surprise. — καὶ οὐκέτι... ἀλλήλων, 1. 6. the two lines were now less than 
three or four stades (G. 161) apart. — διειχέτην τὼ φάλαγγε (G. 33, 1; 78, 
N. 2). — ἐπαιάνιζον, beyan to sing the paean, as an omen of victory. — προ- 
ἤρχοντο, beyan first (πρό), i. 6. before the enemy. — ἀντίοι (G. 138, N. 8; 
185). 

18. ὡς 8... φάλαγγος, but when, as they (sc. αὐτῶν) proceeded, a part 
(sc. μέρος with τὶ) of the phalanx (G. 168) surged forward (beyond the rest), 
lit. bil/owed out (κύμα, a wave), etc. — δρόμῳ θεῖν, to go on the run, double 
quick (dat. of manner).— οἷόνπερ ... ἐλελίζουσι, just as they raise the war- 
ery to Enyalius (Aves): ἐλελίζω, to shout ἐλελεῦ. --- καὶ πάντες δέ: cf. ὃ 2 
and note. — φόβον... ἵπποι (G. 277, 6), thereby frightening (lit. causing 
Sright among) the horses (G. 184, 3). 

19. πρὶν δὲ... ἐξικνεῖσθαι : lit. before an arrow reached them, i. 6. before 
the Greeks got within bowshot of them (G. 274).— κατὰ κράτος : cf. ἀνὰ κρά- 
τος in ὃ 1. — θεῖν δρόμῳ : here involving the idea of confusion and disorder 
(ef. § 18). 

20. τὰ δ᾽ ἅρματα, i. 6. of the enemy. — τὰ μέν, τὰ δέ: in partitive appo- 
sition to ἅρματα (G. 137, N. 2). — ἡνιόχων (G. 180, 1): derived from ἡνία, 
a rein, and ἔχω. — ἐπεὶ mpotSorev, διίσταντο, stood apart (separated), when- 
ever they saw them in front of them (G. 259). --- ἔστι δ᾽ ὅστις : we should 
expect rather ἣν δέ τις 8s. Cf. the expressions in G. 152, N. 2, and ἢν ovs 
in i. 5. 7, with note.—KkaredqoOn ἐκπλαγείς, was caught (i. 6. by not getting 
out of the way of a chariot) in his consternation. —immodSpopw: derivation ? 
--Ο-:-μαὶ... ἔφασαν, and yet, in fact (καὶ μέντοι), they said that not even he 
suffered any harm (οὐδέν, G. 159, N. 2).— οὐδὲ... δέ: the negative expres- 
sion corresponding to kal... 8é Cf. i. 1. 2, and note. — οὐδ᾽ οὐδεὶς ov- 


| δέν: emphatic negation (G. 283, 9). So just preceding οὐδὲν οὐδέ. --- τὶς, 





probably, ὦ single man. 

21. δρῶν, when he saw. —vixavras, διώκοντας : pred. participles in in- 
direct discourse (G. 280). — τὸ καθ᾽ αὑτούς : sc. πλῆθος or στράτευμα. --- 
HOSpevos, although he was pleased. — οὐδ᾽ ws (G. 29, N.1), not even then (un- 
der these circumstances).— ἐξήχθη, was led on, tempted (ἐξάγω). --- συνεσπει- 
ραμένην : cf. note on ἐκκεκαλυμμένας ini. 2.16: σπειράομαι, to be coiled up, 
from σπεῖρα (cf. Eng. spira/).— ποιήσει, would do, might have been ποιή- 
σοι (G. 243). — ἤδει αὐτὸν ὅτι ἔχοι, knew him that he had, i. 6. knew that 


A? XENOPHON. 


he had. Cf. i. 6. 5, and note, The thought could be expressed also in this © 
way, ἤδεν αὐτὸν ἔχοντα, but not αὐτὸν ἔχειν (6. 280, and N. 3). 

Page 29. — 22. τὸ αὑτών (G. 142, 2; 167, 1). — ἡγοῦνται, command, 
i. 6. they always hold this position in commanding their armies. — οὕτω, 
thus, takes up the idea of μέσον ἔχοντες τὸ αὑτῶν, and is itself further de- 
fined by ἢν 7]... ἑκατέρωθεν, thus, viz. if purt of their force is on either side 
of them: οὕτω has besides a conditional force on αἰσθάνεσθαι dv. — ἐν 
ἀσφαλεστάτῳ : sc. τόπῳ. --- εἶναι (G. 260, 2) is apod. to the general cond. 
ἣν ἡ (G. 225). — ἡ ἰσχὺς avrav (G. 142, 4, N. 3). — εἰ χρήζοιεν.. .. ἂν 
αἰσθάνεσθαι (G. 246; 247, N. 3): cf. also G. 226, 3; 211.--ἡμίσει χρόνῳ: 
more commonly ἐν ἡμίσει χρόνῳ (ἃ. 189, N. 2). 

23. δὴ tote... ὅμως, i.e. the King accordingly (δή) on this occasion held 
(G. 277, 5) the centre, but still, etc. — ἐκ τοῦ ἀντίου (sc. μέρους), from the 
opposite side.—— αὐτοῦ : with ἔμπροσθεν (G. 182, 2).— ἐπέκαμπτεν ... κύκλω- 
σιν, wheeled round (lit. against), as if to encircle them. By this movement 
the King’s left, from being at right angles to the river, came to face it. — 
κύκλωσιν (G. 129, 3). 

24. μὴ κατακόψῃ (G. 216, 2; 201, Rem.).— ἐλαύνει ἀντίος, advances 
against him (G. 138, N. 7). — τοὺς ἑξακισχιλίους : identical with tots πρὸ 
βασιλέως τεταγμένους, but expressed to emphasize the contrast between the 
two forces, 600 on one side, 6,000 on the other. — αὐτὸς τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χειρί, 
himself with his own hand. 

25. τροπή, the turning of anenemy, rout (G. 129, 1). — εἰς τὸ διώκειν, 
in pursuit (G. 262, 1).— πλήν : here a conj. Cf. its use as a prep. in i. 2. 1. 
-- σχεδὸν . .. καλούμενοι, chicfly his so-called (cf. note oni. 2. 13) tadle- 
compcomnions. 

26. τὸ ἀμφ᾽ ἐκεῖνον στῖφος : the King’s ὁμοτράπεζοι, probably, in turn, 
who, now that the 6,000 had fled, formed a crowd (στῖφος) about him for 
his protection. — ἠνέσχετο : double augm. (G. 105, 1, N. 3). — καὶ ido Gar 
-.. φησι, and he says that he himself healed (he said ἰώμην, G. 203, N. 1) the 
wound. The present infinitive can be used for the imperfect only when 
something in the sentence or in the context makes it plain that this 
is the case: here (as often) the well-known time of the event makes the 
meaning plain. (See examples in Woods and Tenses, ὃ 15, 3.) We should 
expect here a relative sentence. The conjecture has been made, ὃς καὶ 
ἰᾶσθαι, kK. τ. A., who says also, ete. 

27. αὐτόν, 1. 6. Cyrus. — ὑπὸ τὸν ὀφθαλμόν, under the eye (implying 
motion towards the eye).— paxépevor... ἑκατέρου : the construction begun 
by these subjects is not finished, except so far as it is partially resumed in 
Κῦρος δέ; but it breaks suddenly off in the indirect quest. ὁπόσοι... ἀπέ-, 
θνησκον. — ἀπέθνησκον refers to several being killed at different times, 
whereas ἀπέθανε is used of Cyrus alone. — Κτησίας λέγει; we should say, 
this I leave for Ctesias to tell. — ἔκειντο, lay dead, jacebant. 

28. ὃ πιστότατος θεράπων, the attendant most in his confidence.— πεπτω- 
κότα: quoted afier εἶδε (G. 280). — περιπεσεῖν αὐτῷ: lit. to have fallen 
about him (G. 187), i. e. so as to embrace him. Cf. Q. Curtius, viii. 11. 16: 
super amici corpus procubuit. 








᾿ 
| 
¢ 
Ν᾿. 
oe 
ἥ ΜΝ 
! 


ANABASIS 1, rx. 43 


29. kal... Κύρῳ: construe in the Greek order, —émopdtat αὐτὸν 
(Artapates) Κύρῳ (G. 187), to slay him over Cyrus, i. e. as a sacrifice. See 
ἐπισφάζω in lexicon. -- ἑαυτὸν ἐπισφάξασθαι : strongly reflexive, s/ew him- 
self by his own hand, ἑαυτόν being added to the verb already in the mid. 
Note the force of σπασάμενον (G. 199, 9). --- εὔνοιαν, πιστότητα : substan- 
tives formed with suffixes expressing quality (G. 129, 7). 


CHAPTER IX. 


Biographical Sketch of Cyrus. 


Synopsis: Cyrus is agreed to have been the most worthy to reign of all Per- 
sians since Cyrus the Great (1). When a boy he excelled all others (2). The 
sons of Persian nobles are educated at the King’s palace, and early learn to gov- 
ern and obey (3, 4). Here Cyrus was remarkable for his modesty and obedience, 
as well as his love of horses and for learning warlike exercises (5). When 
older, he was fond of the chase (6). While satrap, he was careful to keep his 
promises (7); and cities, individuals, and even enemies had the greatest con- 
fidence in him (8). In his warfare with Tissaphernes all the cities, except Mi- 
letus, put themselves under his protection ; and the inhabitants of Miletus feared 
him, because he showed by deeds and words that he would not desert the exiles 
whom they had banished (9, 10). He was always anxious to outdo those who 
did him either a kindness or an injury (11). A great number confided to 
his charge their property, cities, and persons (12). He was unsparing in his 
punishment of the criminal and unjust (13); but paid honor to warlike talents 
and bravery (14, 15), and rewarded those who loved justice (16). Foreign gen- 
erals in his employ found it profitable to serve him well (17), for diligence was 
never unrewarded (18). Skilful and just managers of his lands were never de- 
prived of their earnings (19). He was successful in attaching friends to him- 
self, and ready to assist them in their own purposes (20, 21). He received and 
gave many presents, surpassed his friends in kind attentions, and was univer- 
sally beloved (22-28): in proof of this no one deserted from him to the King 
(29). His virtues and his quickness in discerning the trustworthy are proved 
by the fact that, when he died, all his most intimate friends, except Ariaeus, 
fell fighting in his behalf (30, 31). 


Page 30.—1. μέν: without correlative. — οὕτως: what would ὧδε 
mean ?— ἀνὴρ ὦν, a man (G. 137) who was, etc. — Περσῶν γενομένων 
(G. 168): the Persians meant are those of the royal line born (γενομένων) 
after the time of (μετά, G. 191, VI. 3, 3 5) Cyrus the Great. — βασιλικώ- 
τατος: note the suffix txo- (see G. 129, 13). παρά: with the gen. of the 
agent in place of ὑπό (G. 197, 1, N. 1). — τῶν δοκούντων γενέσθαι, those who 
are reputed to have become (γενέσθαι, G. 260, 2). —év πείρᾳ Κύρου, i. 6. 
intimately acquainted with Cyrus. 

2. πρῶτον μέν : correl. to ἐπεὶ δέ in § 6, which marks the second period 
in his life, and to ἐπεὶ δέ in § 7, which marks the third. — ἔτι παῖς ὦν, 
. (G. 277, 1) still a boy. — ἔπαιδεύετο : derivation and suffix? See 

5.180, 4. 





44 ΧΕΝΟΡΗΟΝ. “| 


3. émi... θύραις: as we say, at court. —owhpoctyny, self-control, der. Ὁ 
from σώ-φρων (σῶς, σῶος, and φρήν) with the suff. σύνα- (see G. 129, 7). 
— καταμάθοι ἄν (6. 226, 2 b).— αἰσχρὸν ... ἔστι (G. 28, N. 1, end): for 
the construction cf. ἢν ἰδεῖν... ἀνθρώπους in ὃ 13, below, and οὐκ ἢν Aa- 
βεῖν in i. 5. 2. — οὐδὲν otre... οὔτε (G. 283, 9). 

4. θεῶνται καὶ ἀκούουσι, they sce some (sc. τινάς) honored and hear of 
them (G. 280).— εὐθὺς παῖδες ὄντες (G. 277, N. 1), ὧν their very boyhood.— 
μανθάνουσιν ἄρχειν, learn how to rule (G. 280, N. 3). 

5. αἰδημονέστατος : put first for emphasis, displacing pév: otherwise 
the order would be πρῶτον μὲν αἰδημονέστατος. --- ἐδόκει εἶναι, had the 
reputation of being.— τοῖς Te... πείθεσθαι, and of being more obedient to his 
elders than (were) even those tnferior to himself in rank. — φυιλυππότατος 

® (6. 186, N. 3a) with ἐδόκει εἶναι, but χρῆσθαι with ἐδόκει alone. — ἔκρινον: 
they (i. e. men in general) judged him, οἵα. --- ἔργων : with the two super. 
at the end of the sect. (G. 180, 2). — ἀκοντίσεως : force of the suff. σις ? — 
Give the derivation at length of αἰδήμων, ἡλικιώτης, ὑποδεής, φίλιππος, 
τοξική, ἀκόντισις, φιλομαθής, and μελετηρός. 

6. ἡλικίᾳ (ἃ. 184, 2). — μέντοι, moreover. So below at the end. — ém- 
φερομένην, that rushed upon him (G. 276, 1): ἄρκτος is epicene (G. 33, 2, 
N. 2). — οὐκ ἔτρεσεν, was not afraid of, did not shrink from. Cf. τρέω, 
τρέμω, tremo, tremble. — συμπεσών: the idea is that of grappling, not of 
failing to the ground, with the bear. — τὰ μέν: cogn. ace. (G. 159, N. 2), 
suffered somewhat, received some wounds. Often a different word takes the 
place of the article in one part of the correlation 6 pév... ὁ δέ (G. 143, 1), 
as here τέλος δέ (G. 160, 2). — πολλοῖς : dat. of the agent with the verbal 
adj. μακαριστόν (from μεκαρίζω, μάκαρ). 

7. κατεπέμφϑη : why κατά ?— σατράπης, as satrap. See, with ref. to 
the facts here mentioned, i. 1. 2, and the prefatory note. — στρατηγὸς δὲ 
kai: cf. with ref. to pos. kal στρατηγὸν δέ in i. 1. 2. — οἷς : dat. of indir. 
obj. after καθήκει (ἃ. 184, 2).— πρώτονμέν : weakly correlated by δέ in § 11. 
— ἐπέδειξεν αὑτὸν ὅτι, κ. τ. X., he showed himself, that he made, etc., em- 
phatic attraction. Cf. note on τῶν βαρβάρων, 1. 1. 5.— ὅτι. .. ποιοῖτο, 
that he made it of the yreatest importance, regarded it most inyportant ; the 
direct form of the sent. being περὶ πλείστου ποιοῦμαι, ἐάν τῳ σπείσωμαυ 
(G. 225) kal... συνθῶμανι kal... ὑπόσχωμαί τι, μιηϑὲν ψεύδεσϑαι (G. 247). 
— tw: what other form was possible? See G. 84. — σπένδομαι of making 
a treaty (by libations) ; συντίθεμαι of entering into an agreement ; ὑπισχνέ- 
opat of promising in the common sense. 

8. καὶ γάρ, and (proof is at hand) for. — σππεισαμένου, temporal. — μη- 
δὲν ἂν παθεῖν, in direct form οὐδὲν ἂν πάθοιμι (G. 211; 226, 20): for the 
change of neg. see G. 242, 4. 

Page $2.—9. τοιγαροῦν, therefore.— ἑκοῦσαι (G. 138, κ. 7).----Μιλησίων : 
we should expect Μιλήτου. --- οὗτοι δὲ... αὐτόν : a proof, drawn from an 
enemy, that Cyrus was to be trusted.— προέσθαι, to abandon (see προίΐημι). 

10. καὶ yao... ἔλεγεν, for he both (καὶ... καί in correlation) showed 
repeaicdly by what he did, and declared repeatedly, or, more freely, showed 





ANABASIS 1, ΙΧ. 45 


repeatedly both by word and deed, — προοῦτο (G. 127, III., ν. 1). --- ἅποξ is 
once for all; but ποτέ, once on a time (ὃ 6), some time, ever. — οὐδ᾽ εἰ... 
γένοιντο, not even Uf they should become still fewer, i. 6. should be cut down 
in numbers by their misfortunes.— ὅτι, πράξειαν : in direct form οὐκ ἄν 
ποτε προοίμην, eel... ἐγενόμην, οὐδ᾽ el... γένοιντο... πράξειαν (CG. 247, 
N. 2 and ν. 3). 

11. φανερὸς δ᾽ ἣν Kal πειρώμενος, but it wus obvious also that he strove 
(6. 280, N. 1). — et ποιήσειεν : prot. to πειρώμενος. The fact made evident 
(i.e. the direct discourse) is ἐάν tls... ποιήσῃ, πειρῶμαι (G. 225). For 
the two accusatives after ποιήσειεν, see G. 165. For the parallel construe- 
tion at the end of the section, see G. 165, N. 1, and cf. § 10. — ἐξέφερον, 
reported. — as εὔχοιτο: quoted (G. 243) after εὐχὴν ἐξέφερον, which in- 
volves the idea of saying. They said, εὔχεται (i. 6. he sometimes prays) tiv 
ἔστ᾽ ἂν νικᾷ (G. 239, 2; 232, 3); the future apod. to ἔστ᾽ ἂν νικᾷ is ζῆν. 
For the change by quot. of the subj. νικᾷ to the opt., see G. 247. — νικῴη 
ἀλεξόμενος, should outdo in returning like for like. 

12. καὶ γὰρ οὖν : as in ὃ 8.—8y: with the superlative, just as μέγιστος 
δή means the very greatest. The phrase ἑνί ye ἀνδρί also (ἀνδρί, of course, 
is grammatically in app. to αὐτῷ) logically modifies the superl.; the num- 
ber, i. e., was the very greatest in view, at least (yé), of the fact that it was 
a single man (ἑνὶ ἀνδρί) that was in question. — τῶν ἐφ᾽ ἡμῶν, of the men 
of our time, part. gen. with αὐτῷ, but affected also by the superlative πλεῖ- 
στοι, as if it had been said he was trusted most of all the men of our day. 
For this meaning of él, see G. 191, VI. 2, 1 ὁ. — προέσθαι, to intrust. 
Cf. § 9. 

13. οὐ μὲν (= μὴν) δὴ οὐδέ, nor yet now in truth. — ἀφειδέστατα πάν- 
τῶν, most unsparingly of all.— ἣν ἰδεῖν, it was possible to sce, you might see. 
— ποδῶν, χειρῶν, ὀφθαλμῶν : why gen.?— μηδὲν ἀδικοῦντι, if in no respect 
(G. 159, N. 2) a wrong-doer (G. 277, 4). —8 τι προχωροίη, whatever it was 
to his advantage (G. 233) to have (sc. ἔχειν). For ἤθελεν (which might have 
been ἐθέλοι), see G. 233, N. 1. 

14, μέντοι, however.— ὡμολόγητο, he had been (and so was) acknowl- 
edged, pers. const. (cf. § 20). — qv αὐτῷ πόλεμος : principal sentence where 
we should expect a dependent one, such as ὄντος ποτὲ αὐτῷ πολέμου ; for 
πρῶτον μέν, notwithstanding its position, goes with ἄρχοντας ἐποίει and is 
correlated by ἔπειτα. --- καὶ αὐτός, even in person. — ἐθέλοντας: cf. ἑκοῦσαι 
in ὃ 9, and note, and ἐθελοντάς in i. 6. 9, and note. — is κατεστρέφετο 
Χώρας (6. 154, N.). 

15. ὥστε... εἶναι, so that (in his dominions) the good appeared (G. 266, 1) 
most prosperous, and the bad were deemed fit to be their slaves: φαίνεσθαι 
would regularly either stand within the clause with μέν or else belong 
to both subjects. — οἴουτο : for the mood cf. προχωροίη in ὃ 13. — αἰσθή- 
σεσθαι: quoted (G. 260, 2). 

16. γὲ μὴν, certainly at least, adding a case in the general testimony to 
the high character of Cyrus that could not be controverted ; more simply, 
moreover, — εἰς δικαιοσύνην (see G. 129, 7 and 12): with ἐπιδείκνυσθαι, 





46 XENOPHON. 


to distinguish himself for wprightness. — εἰ γένοιτο, ἐποιεῖτο (G. 225). — 
βουλόμενος : quoted. Cf. φανερὸς ἢν πειρώμενος in ὃ 11. — περὶ παντὸς. 
ἐποιεῖτο : cf. περὶ πλείστου ποιοῖτο in ὃ 7. --- τούτους : pl. because of the 
distributive force of τὶς to which it refers. —€« τοῦ ἀδίκου, by injustice 
(G. 139, 2). 

Page 32. - 17. δικαίως, with fidelity.— διεχειρίζετο, were managed, lit. 
were had in hand.— war... ἐχρήσατο, and he secwred the services of (G. 200, 
nN. 5 b)an army worthy of the name, justo exercitu.—érAeveav: coming 
as mercenaries across the sea. — ἐπεὶ ἔγνωσαν, because they judged it, ete. 
(6. 250). — πειθαρχεῖν (G.131,2a).— τὸ κατὰ μῆνα κέρδος is in the same 
construction as πειθαρχεῖν, the subject of εἶναι, which might have been τὸ 
πειθ. (G. 259 and N.). For κατὰ μῆνα, monthly, seeG. 191, 1V. 2, 2c. 

18. εἴ τίς γέ τι: one proclitic, three enclitics. The proclitic takes the 
accent of tls ; for the accent of the enclitics, see G. 28, N. 2. — τίς ye, any 
one (emphatically), no matter how insignificant. — tv: with ὑπηρετήσειεν, 
did him (G. 184, 2) any (G. 159, N. 2) good service. With ὑπηρετήσειεν 
cf. γένοιτο in § 16, and the ref., and also ὁρῴη in § 19.— οὐδενὶ... προθυ- 
μίαν, he never let his (lit. any one’s, G. 184, 3) zeal (see G. 129, 7) go un- 
rewarded. —«patirror δή: cf. πλεῖστοι δή in ὃ 12, and note. — ὑπηρέται, 
supporters.— Kipw... γενέσθαι, Cyrus was said to have had, lit. were said 
to have been (become) to Cyrus (poss. dat., G. 184, 4). 

19. τινὰ ὄντα, that any one was (G. 280). So the two participles that 
follow. — οἰκονόμον, manager, Eng. eco-nomist. Note the derivation. — 
ἐκ τοῦ δικαίου, according to justice, or we may freely transl. δεινὸν... δι- 
kaiov, a skilful and just manager.— ἧς ἄρχοι is part of the conditional rela- 
tive sentence (= εἴ τινος ἄρχοι) and follows the construction of ὁρῴη. See 
Moods and Tenses, ὃ 64, N. 2.— χώρας (6. 154).— οὐδένα dv... ἀφ-είλετο, 
he would never deprive (G. 206) him (lit. any one) of (his territory, sc. χώραν, 
and see G. 164). The ἄν belongs equally to προσεδίδου (G. 212, 4). This 
aorist with &v, since it expresses a customary action, is a natural apodosis 
to εἰ ὁρῴη. See again G. 225, and Moods and Tenses, § 51, Rem.— ἐπέπατο 
(see πάομαι, to acquire): cf. the use of the perf. and plup. of κτάομαι. --- 
αὖ, moreover. — Kipov (G. 164). — οὐ φθονῶν ἐφαίνετο ἀλλὰ πειρώμενος, it 
was clear that he did not envy, but strove, etc. (G. 280). | 

20. φίλους : emphasized by position and the following particles ; obj. of 
θεραπεύειν. --- ὅσους ποιήσαιτο (G. 233): the apodosis is θεραπεύειν (not 
γενέσθαι). This use of the optative, as also the corresponding one in con- 
ditional clauses not relative (G. 225), occurs repeatedly in this chapter and 
should be watched for. — ὄντας: cf. ὄντα in § 19. — ἱκανοὺς συνεργοὺς 8 τι, 
τυγχάνοι, competent co-workers in whatever he chanced, etc. —6 τι τυγχά- 
vou (= εἴ τι τυγχάνοι) : see note on ἧς ἄρχοι in ὃ 19. — βουλόμενος: cf. 
παρών ini. 1. 2, and note. — πρός, by (G. 191, VI. 6, 1 ὁ, end). — κράτι- 
στος δή: cf. § 12 and ὃ 18.— γενέσθαι : in the dir. form ἐγένετο (G. 260, 2). 

21. αὐτὸ τοῦτο οὗπερ ἕνεκα, κ. τ᾿ A., he tried to secure for his friends that 
very object for which he thought that he needed friends himself,— viz. that he 
might have co-workers, —he tricd (I say) also on his own part to be a most — 











ANABASIS 1, ΙΧ. 47 


vigorous co-worker with his friends, etc. αὐτὸ τοῦτο would naturally have 
been the object of some verb like πράττειν after ἐπει, aro, but for this simple 
αὐτὸ τοῦτο πράττειν the amplified expression wvvepyds... εἶναι... ἐπιθυ- 
μοῦντα was substituted, to express the same idea more fully. Cf. ἃ... καί- 
ove in iii. 5. 5.— τούτου : emphatic (G. 152).— ὅτου (i. 6. οὗτινος, G. 84) 
is not gen. by assimilation, but gen. independently (G. 171, 2). — émOv- 
μοῦντα : quoted after αἰσθάνοιτο (G. 280). 

22. οἶμαι : by syncope for οἴομαι. The word is here parenthetic, like 
our J think.— εἷς γε ὧν ἀνήρ : cf. ἑνί ye ἀνδρί in § 12, and note.— διὰ πολ- 
ha, for- many reasons. — δι-εδίδου, dis-tribuied. — καὶ ὅτου : 50. πρός and 
the indef. antecedent of ὅτου.--- δεόμενον : how is the part. to be construed ? 

23. κόσμον : in app. to ὅσα ἴα. 137, N. 4). —... ἢ, either... or. — 
ὡς εἰς πόλεμον: the ὡς marks the purpose for which the objects were sent 
(εἰς πόλεμον) as subjectively conceived by the sender. Cf. ὡς εἰς μάχην in 
i. 8.1, and ὡς εἰς κύκλωσιν in i. 8. 23.— καλλ-ωπισμόν : der.?— καί, more- 
over, with the following sentence as a whole. — λέγειν: an imperfect infini- 
tive with ἔφασαν (G. 203, N. 1): they said ἔλεγε, he used to say. Cf. ἐλέ- 
χθησαν γενέσθαι in ὃ 18. — δύναιτο (G. 245); νομίζοι (G. 243). Cyrus 
said οὐκ ἂν δυναίμην... φίλους δὲ... νομίζω. 

24. καὶ τὸ μὲν... ποιοῦντα, and his surpassing (G. 259, N.) his friends 
in conferring great (with emphasis) benefits, etc. τὰ μεγάλα is cognate acc. 
with εὖ ποιοῦντα, benefiting (G. 159, N. 2). — ἐπιμελείᾳ: dative of respect 
(G. 188, 1, N. 1). — φίλων (G. 175, 2). 

Page $3. — τῷ προθυμεῖσθαι : parallel in construction to τῇ ἐπιμελείᾳ 
(G. 262, 2). — ταῦτα takes up τὸ περιεῖναι, K. τ. Xr. 

25. οἴνου (G. 167, 4).— ἡμι-δεεῖς (δέω, fo want).— οὔπω δὴ πολλοῦ xpo- 
vov, not for a long time (G. 179, 1), lit. not as yet now within a long time. 
— ὅτι... ἐπιτύχοι represents ἐπέτυχον, K. τ. X., in the words of Cyrus 
(G. 243); but the next sentence gives the actual words of the messenger, 
who in delivering the gift would say: Κῦρος οὔπω δὴ πολλοῦ... ἐπέτυχεν" 
τοῦτον οὖν σοι ἔπεμψε, kK. τ. A. Cf. the last half of § 26, τούτοις ἥσθη Κῦ- 
pos: βούλεται, κ. τ. Δ. -- ἐκπιεῖν, to drink it up (lit. owl): cf. Germ. aus- 
trinken. — σὺν ois (G. 153, N. 1). 

26. ἡμιβρώτους : der.? — ἡμίσεα, halves (G. 139, 1). — ἔπι-λέγειν, to say 
in addition (to presenting the gifts), to add. — τούτων γεύσασθαι, fo take a 
taste of (note the force of the aorist) these (G. 171, 2). 

27. ἐδύνατο: there is some MS. authority for δύναιτο, See G. 233, 
Ν. 1, and Moods and Tenses, ὃ 62, N. 1. — ϑδια-πέμπων : force of διά ?— ὡς 
μὴ ἄγωσιν : subj. of purpose after a secondary tense (G. 216, 2). The stu- 
dent will note that a clause of negative purpose can be introd. either by the 
simple μή, or by μή preceded by ἵνα, ds, ὅπως, the meaning in both cases 
being simply that not, lest. Cf. the examples under G. 216, 1. 

28. πλεῖστοι, very many. — μέλλοιεν ὄψεσθαι : see i. 8. 1, and note. — 
ἐσπουδαιο-λογεῖτο, he engaged in earnest conversation (with them), a denom. 
verb (G. 130, 2) der. from σπουδαῖος and λέγω, and σπουδαῖος from σπουδή, 
σπεύδω (G. 129, 12). — ὡς δηλοίη obs τιμᾷ (τιμᾷ indic.), that he m ight show 





48 XENOPHON. 


(G. 216, 1) whom he honored (G. 248, N., end). The purpose in hisown 
mind was, ὡς δηλῶ (subj.) οὖς τιμῶ (indic.). — ἐξ dv ἀκούω, from what I~ 
hear: cf. ἀκούει in i. 3. 20, and ποῖο.--- Ελλήνων, βαρβάρων : with οὐδένα. 

29. τούτου, τόδε: ditt. of use ?— δούλου ὄντος, though he was a slave. 
Cf. i. 7. 8. --- πλήν : conj. Cf. i. 8. 25. — καὶ οὗτος. .. εὗρε: the order is, 
καὶ οὗτος δὴ ταχὺ εὗρε αὐτὸν ὃν ᾧετο, K. τι A. Cf. 1. 6. 3. For ot, see 
G. 144, 2. — φιλαίτερον : for the more common Φίχτρον (G. 73, 1, 10). — 
tr αὐτοῦ: the King. — euyareree ἀγαπάω is properly to show by out- 
ward signs that one regards ; τ λέω (§ 28, end), on the other hand, is used 
of the fee of friends. — τυγχάνειν ἂν is quoted after νομίζοντες (G. 246): 
the protasis lies in ὄντες = εἰ εἴησαν (G. 226, 1). 

30. τὸ αὐτῷ γενόμενον, what happened to him, sc. ἐστί: τεκμήριον is 
pred. — rots... BeBatovs: the article is expressed but once, because the 
writer is speaking of a single class of persons possessing all the qualities 
mentioned, those who were faithful, well-disposed, and constant. 

31. συν-τράπεζοι: cf. ὁμοτράπεζοι in 1. 8. 25. — ὑπέρ, over, in behalf of 
(G. 191, IV. 3, 1b). — τεταγμένος : what use of the part.? Explain the 
use also of πεπτωκότα in the next line. 


CHAPTER X. 


Synopsis: The head and right hand of Cyrus are cut off; the King falls upon 
his camp, and the troops of Ariaeus flee (1). The camp is pillaged, except 
where a few of the Greeks, who have been left on guard, make a successful 
stand (2, 3). Both armies freee’ as if victorious, the Gr eeks pursuing, the 
Persians plundering (4); but when they discover one another’s movements, the 
King collects his forces, cad Clearchus consults with Proxenus (5), The King 
is seen approaching ; but instead of making an attack upon the rear of the Greek 
army, as is expected, he leads off his troops to the left (6), joined by Tissapher- 
nes, who has charged through the Greek lines (7, 8). The Greeks fall back upon 
the river (9). The King draws up his troops opposite, but is again put to flight 
(10, 11). His cavalry rally upon a hill, but on the approach of the Greeks aban- 
dou this also (12, 13). Clearchus sends a scout upon the hill to report their 
movements (14), who brings back word that they are flying at the top of their 
speed (15). The Greeks abandon the pursuit, and wonder at the absence of 
Cyrus (16). They resolve to return to their camp (17); but finding this plun- 
dered, they encamp supperless for the night (18, 19). 


Page 34.— 1. The narrative is resumed from Chap. viii.— ἀποτέμνεται 
.. δεξιά: a Persian custom. Iniii. 1. 17 it is stated that the head and 
hand of Cyrus were exposed to view fixed on a stake. — ἀποτέμνεται, διώ- 
κων, εἰσπίπτει : note aud explain the number and agreement of these words. 
— Kipeov: an adj. in place of the more common poss. gen. Kipov.— στρα- 
τόπεδον : merely the place where they had halted in the hurry of the un- 
expected engagement (i. 8. 1 sq.). — οἱ μετὰ ᾿Αριαίου, Ariaeus and those 
with him, like the phrase ot ἀμφὶ Τισσαφέρνην, iii. 5. 1: pera “Apratov — 
inplies participation (G.191, VI. 3, 1), but σὺν αὐτῷ above implies accom- 





ANABASIS 1, x. 49 



















paniment (G.191, 11. 2).— ἔνθεν ὥρμηντο : on the morning of the battle. It 
will be remembered that the battle was fought on the afternoon of the third 
day (i. 7. 20) after the midnight review mentioned in i. 7. 1, and that this 
review was held on the night after the third day’s march from Pylae. Cf. 
note on ἐντεῦθεν, i. 7. 1. — τέτταρες... ὁδοῦ, and the distance was said to 
be four parasangs, lit. there were said to be four parasangs of the road. 

2. πολλά: pred., to a great amount. — τὴν Paxaida... εἶναι, ‘ie Pho- 
caean woman, the concubine (G. 137) of Cyrus, who was said (τὴν . .. Neyo- 
μένην = i... ἐλέγετο : G. 276, 2; 137) to be, etc. Athenaeus says that 
she was first named Milto, and afterwards Aspasia. Phocaea was a city of 
Ionia. See the map. —AapBaver: with βασιλεύς, above. 

3. ἡ νεωτέρα, the younger (of the two).— γυμνή, lightly clad, without her 
mantle. —Tav “Ἑλλήνων : sc. τινάς (a rare omission).— ἐν Tots σκευοφόροις 
(neut.), i. 6. among the baggaye. — ὅπλα ἔχοντες, under arms, standing 
guard (G. 279, 4). — Kal ἀντιταχθέντες (sc. ovtor). — οἱ δὲ καὶ αὐτῶν, and 
some also of their own number : ot δέ is correl. to πολλοὺς μέν. Cf. note on 
τὰ μέν in i. 9. 6. --- ἐντὸς αὐτῶν, within their lines. —éyévovto: plural from 
the influence of ἄνθρωποι. 

4, ἀλλήλων : why gen.?— οἱ EdAnves: the main body. — ot μέν : refer- 
ring chiastically (see note on ἀναβαίνει... ἀνέβη in i. 1. 2) to οἱ “HAAnves. 
— ὡς πάντας νικῶντες, thinking that they were victorious over all (G. 277, 
N. 2), but below,as... νικώντες, thinking that now they were ali victorious. 
5. This entire section consists of four clauses arranged chiastically, 
1) referring chiefly to the Greeks, 2) chiefly to the King, 3) to the King, 
and 4) again to the Greeks. — εἴη : why opt.?— Τισσαφέρνους : stationed 
at the King’s extreme left (i. 8. 9), he had charged through the right of the 
Greeks and joined the King in the camp of Cyrus in the rear (δ 7). — 
νικῷεν, οἴχονται : one verb changed to the opt. by quot., the other not; for 
which see Moods and Tenses, § 70, 2, Rem. 1, end. Cf. also α. 247, N. 1.— 
πλησιαίτατος : comparative how formed ὃ (G. 71, N. 2). — πέμποιεν, ἴοιεν : 
in the direct questions, πέμπωμεν, ἴωμεν; (G. 256; 244). Ford. 5-2 3 
introducing the double indirect question, see G. 282, 5. 

6. δῆλος ἢν προσιών; οἵ. δῆλος ἣν ἀνιώμενος in i. 2. 11, and note. — 
ὡς ἐδόκει ὄπισθεν, i. 6. apparently from their rear. — στραφέντες, facing 
about. It will be remembered that the two forces were somewhat more 
than three miles apart (§ 4). --- παρεσκευάζοντο . . . δεξόμενοι, prepared 
themselves with a view to his advancing in this way (i. e. ὄπισθεν) and to 
their receiving (him so): ὡς (G. 277, N. 2) belongs not only to δεξόμενοι 
(part. of purpose), but also to προσιόντος (part. of cause). προσιόντος (50. 
αὐτοῦ) is the genitive abs.; δεξόμενοι modifies ot “HAAnves. See, further, 
Moods and Tenses, § 111. — ἡ δὲ παρῆλθεν, κ΄ τ᾿ A.: cf. 1. 8. 23. The aor. 
is a pluperfect in force.” Cf. i. 1. 2. — ἀπήγαγεν, marched back. 

_ Page 35. — 7. διήλασε... πελταστάς, charged along (rapa) the river 
into (κατά) the Greek peltasts and through them. —Sredabvar δέ, and as he 
drove through them. For the force stationed at the extreme right of Cyrus 
when the battle began, see i. 8. ὅ. --- ἔπαιον : probably with their swords. 





50 XENOPHON. 


--- αὐτούς: the cavalry of Tissaphernes. — ᾿ Αμφιπολίτης, of Amphipolis, | 
an important Greek city on the Strymon in Thrace.— ἐλέγετο. . - γενέσθαι, 

was said to have proved himself (G. 260, 2) sagacious (to have eon his wis- 

dom) by pursuing this course of tactics. 

8. οὖν, at any rate. Cf. 1. 2. 12.— as... ἀπηλλάγη, after he had 
come off (note the force of the tense) with the worst of it, lit. having less. — 
— τὸ τῶν ᾿Ειλλήνων (G. 142, 2). — ὅμου πάλιν ἐπορεύοντο, proceeded back 
together. 

9. τὸ εὐώνυμον : the historian has the position of the Greeks when the 
battle began in mind, their right then resting on the river. They had now 
faced about (στραφέντες, § 6). — μὴ προσάγοιεν, κατακόψειαν : why opt.? 
- ἀναπτύσσειν Td κέρας : lit. fo fold back the wing. The object was to 
bring their line parallel to the river. At present they are at right angles to 
it. For the const. of ἐδόκει ἀναπτύσσειν, cf. i. 3. 11, and note, and with 
ἀναπτύσσειν, to fold back, cf. περιπτύσσειν, to fold about, enfold, above. 

10. ἐβουλεύοντο: before the Greeks had even begun to change their 
position, while they were as yet simply planning it, the King was already 
executing relatively the same manceuvre, with the intention of presenting 
his front to the river. This shows that the apprehension of the Greeks, 
mentioned in ὃ 9, ἔδεισαν. . . κατακόψειαν, was well grounded. It is not 
implied by ἐβουλεύοντο that the Greeks did not subsequently effect their 
change of position. — καὶ 83}... συνήει, the King in truth also, changing 
his line of battle to the same form (i. 6. τοῖς “Ελλησιν), stationed it opposite, 
just as at first he had met them for battle.— ὄντας, παρατεταγμένους : what 
use of the participles ?— αὖθις : see the description of the first charge of 
the Greeks ini. 8. 17 sq. — τὸ πρόσθεν : adverbial accusative (G. 160, 2). 
Cf. τὸ πρῶτον, above. 

11. ἐκ πλείονος, when at a greater distance from them.— ἔπ-εδίωκον : note 
the force of the preposition. — κώμης τινός : possibly Cunaxa (Keotvaga), 
the village near which, as Plutarch says, the battle was fought. 

12. ἀνεστράφησαν, rallicd.— πεζοί (without article), predicate, sc. ὄντες. 
The const. changes at τῶν δὲ ἱππέων, where we should expect ἱππεῖς δὲ, av | 
© λόφος, kK. τ. A. — TOV... ἐνεπλήσθη : the passive of the construction ex- 
plained in G. 172, 2. — τὸ ποιούμενον : τὸ γιγνόμενον is more common in 
this sense.— μὴ γιγνώσκειν : sc. τοὺς “EAAnvas. —- ἀετόν... ἀνατεταμένον, — 
(probably) a kind of (τινά) golden eagle, with wings extended, perched on ἃ 
bar of wood (and raised) upon a lance. πέλτη, Which commonly means — 
a shield or target, is also used for δόρυ or λόγχη ; and ἐπὶ ξύλου may refer to 
a horizontal piece of wood on which the eagle was perched. So ἐπὶ ξύλου 
καθεύδεις, roost like a fowl, Aristoph. Nwb. 1431. The ξύλον with the eagle | 
was then raised on the point of a lance (ἐπὶ πέλτῃ). In the Cyrop. vii. 1. 4 | 
the Persian standard is called ἀετὸς χρυσοῦς ἐπὶ δόρατος μακροῦ ἀνατετα- — 
μένος. Curtius, 111. 3. 16, calls it auream aquilam pinnas extendenti 
similem. 

13. ἐνταῦθα: for ἐνταυθοῖ, just as we use here or there in the sense of | 
hither or thither. — ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν, some from one part (of the hill), others 


& 





ANABASIS 2, 1. 51 


from another, or, as we should say, some in one direction, others in another. 
— tev ἱππέων : with ἐψιλοῦτο, was cleared of the horsemen. Cf. τῶν tr- 
πέων ἐνεπλήσθη in ὃ 12. — τέλος : cf. i. 9. 6. 

14. ὑπ᾽ αὐτόν, at the foot of it. — κατ-ιδόντας : note the preposition. 

Page 36. - τί ἐστιν: in what other mood might the verb have been ἢ 
What case of the same sort is there in the next section ? 

15. σχεδὸν. .. ἦν, 1. 6. and about this time. 

16. θέμενοι τὰ ὅπλα : see note on i. 5. 14. — φαίνοιτο, παρείη : optative 
in a causal sentence (G. 250, Ν.). --- τεθνηκότα: cf. πεπτωκότα in i. 8. 28. 
— διώκοντα οἴχεσθαι, had gone (G. 246) in pursuit (G. 279, 4, N.). — 
καταληψόμενόν τι προεληλακέναι, Had pushed on (give the direct form) to 
take possession of (G. 277, 3) something. 

17. εἰ ἄγοιντο ἢ ἀπίοιεν : cf. εἰ πέμποιεν ἢ ἴοιεν in ὃ 5, and note. — 
δορπηστόν, supper-time (although they went supperless, § 19): derived from 
δόρπον, which in Homer is the common name for the afternoon or evening 
meal, Lat. coena, the chief meal of the day. In the primitive Homeric 

᾿ times there were two regular meals, ἄριστον, an early meal, breakfast, and 
δόρπον, a late meal, supper. Either could be called δεῖπνον, which in Attic 
Greek meant the chief meal of the day, and as this came late in the after- 
noon, δεῖπνον took the place of the older name δόρπον. Cf. ἄ-δειπνοι in 
§19. The Attic ἄριστον was a midday meal, lunch, or dinner. 

18. διηρπασμένα (G. 279, 1). --- εἴ τι... ἣν, whatever there was to eat or 
drink (ποτόν, verbal adjective from πίνω). --- μεστάς : predicate adjective, 
sc. οὔσας, (that had been) full (G. 204, N. 1). τὰς ἁμάξας and the τοῦτο 
that is to be understood as the antecedent of the clause εἴ tL... ἣν are, 
along with τὰ πλεῖστα, objects of καταλαμβάνουσι.--- εἰ λάβοι (G. 248, N.). 
— ἅμαξαι: predicate to ἦσαν, αὗται being the subject. — καὶ ταύτας ... 
διήρπασαν : this is partly a repetition of what has already been expressed 
in διηρπασμένα. - τότε: see ὃ 2. 

19. ἄδειπνοι ἦσαν: ἦσαν ἀνάριστοι : what is such an arrangement of 
the parts of a sentence called? Note also the case that follows, καταλῦσαι 
τὸ στράτευμα, βασιλεὺς ἐφάνη. Cf., concerning the fact stated in πρὶν γὰρ 
-.. ἐφάνη, i. 8. 1, and note. — μέν : correlative to δέ in ii. 1. 2. 








BOOK SECOND. 


NEGOTIATIONS WITH THE Kinc.—CoNcLUSION oF A TREATY. — BEGIN- 
NING OF THE MARcH HoMEWARD. — TREACHEROUS SEIZURE OF THE 
FIVE GENERALS. — THEIR CHARACTERS. 


CHAPTER I. 





Synopsis : The preceding Book is reviewed in outline (1). At daybreak the 
generals meet and express surprise that Cyrus neither appears himself nor sends 


ων “τ XENOPHON. 


them orders. They resolve to march forward and meet him (2); but just αὖ sun- 
rise messengers bring word that he is dead, and that Ariaeus proposes to set out 
on the next day for Ionia (3). The Greeks are afflicted at the death of Cyrus, 
but, accepting the facts, send word to Ariaeus that they will make him king (4). 
Chiriséphus and Menon go back with the messengers (5). Clearchus awaits their 
return, and the troops slaughter the beasts of burden for food (6). Heralds ar- 
rive from the King (7), who announce that he commands the Greeks to give up 
their arms and sue at his gates for favor (8). Clearchus, replying briefly, leaves 
the rest to answer while he returns to conclude a sacrifice (9). Various replies 
are made, some threatening, others conciliatory (10-14). Clearchus returns 
and shrewdly asks the advice of Phalinus, one of the heralds and himself a 
Greek, hoping that he will advise them not to surrender (15-18). But he replies 
that they have no chance for life except from the King’s mercy (19). Clearchus 
contemptuously replies that they will keep their arms (20). Phalinus then in- 
forms them that the King will consider that a truce exists between himself and 
them, as long as they remain where they are; but otherwise, war (21). Clearchus 
bids him report that this is a satisfactory arrangement (22), but refuses to give 
any intimation of his intentions (23). 


1. The first section of Book II., and the similar introductions prefixed 
to most of the following books, are generally supposed to be the work of an 
editor who divided the Anabasis into books. — as... ἐστρατεύετο : the 
first of five indirect questions, subjects of δεδήλωται. --- οὖν : to introduce 
the recapitulation. — Κύρῳ: dative of advantage (G. 184, 3), not of the 
agent. — ἐκοιμήθησαν: κοιμάω, to put to sleep, is akin to κεῖμαι. — τὰ 
πάντα, at all points (G. 160, 2). Why is the subject of νικᾶν omitted ? 
(G. 134, 8). --- νικᾶν : their thought was, νικῶμεν, we have conquered (are 
victorious), a pres. with an approach to the signif. of the perf. (Aloods and 
Tenses, ὃ 10, N. 4). — ἔμπροσθεν (G. 141, N. 8). --- λόγῳ, narrative, i. 6. in 
Book I. 

2. ἅμα δὲ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ: cf. i. 7. 2, and reference. For δέ, see note on μέν 
in i. 10. 19: the editor above-mentioned (note on ἃ 1) probably used the 
μέν at the beginning of § 1 without noticing the preceding sentence. 

Page 37. — ὅτι πέμποι, φαίνοιτο : cf. the opt. in i. 10. 16, and note. — 
onpavotyta: what does the part. express ?— εἰς τὸ πρόσθεν : cf. i. 10. 5. 
— (ως συμμίξειαν : optative in a dependent clause by quotation (G. 248, 3). 
What other mood might we have had, and why? What would then be 
added to ἕως ? 

3. ἐν ὁρμῇ ὄντων, when they (sc. αὐτῶν and cf. i. 2. 17) were on the point 
of starting. — ἡλίῳ : the names of the heavenly bodies, like proper names, 
may omit the article. Cf. ἥλιος in i. 10. 15. — ΤἹΙροκλῆς : of the third dee. 
(G. 52, 2, N. 8). — TevOpavias: a town and district in Mysia. — γεγονώς, 
descended from. — Δαμαράτου, Damardtus, a Spartan king, deposed in 
491 8. c., who settled in southwestern Mysia. See a dict. of biography. — 
Τλοῦς : mentioned ini. 4. 16. He had now gone over to Artaxerxes. For 
Tamos see i. 2. 21, and note.— τέθνηκεν might have been τεθνήκοι (G. 243): 
ef. the optatives that follow, εἴη, λέγοι, φαίη. — σταθμῷ: cf. 1. 10. 1. — 








ANABASIS 2, 1. 53 


ὅθεν = ἐξ ov. — ἡμέραν (6. 161). — περιμείνειεν ἂν .. - βέλλοιεν: ‘in the 
dir. form (G. 247), περιμείναιμι ἂν αὐτοὺς, εἰ pak bec: ἥκειν (G. 227, 1). 
— τῇ ἄλλῃ, on the next day. — ἀπιέναι (G. 200, N.3b) φαίη : cf. with λέγοι 
ὅτι, k. T. λ., above, and see G. 260, N. 1. --- ἐπὶ ᾿Ιωνίας, in the direction of 
Tonia (G. 191, VI. 2, 1 @). 

4. ἀκούσαντες of στρατηγοὶ καὶ οἱ ἄλλοι “EAnves πυνθανόμενοι : 
chiastic. —°AAAGd: often begins a speech opposed to one that precedes. 
Cf. i. 7. 6. — dere... ζῆν, Could that Cyrus were living (G. 251, 2, N. 1). 
How else might the thought have been expr essed ¢?— νικῶμεν : cf. the note 
on ὃ 1, and af also ὃ 8, 8 9, and καὶ 11. — εἰ μὴ ἤλθετε, ἐπορευόμεθα dv: the 
ἊΝ referring to the past, the ἐν to the present (G. 222).— καθιεῖν, see 
καθίζω (G. 110, II. ν. 1 ο).--- τῶν νικώντων : predicate genitive of possession 
(ἃ. 169, 1). — τὸ ἄρχειν : subject infinitive with the art. (G. 259, n.). 

5. ταῦτα: why did the Greeks use the plural, and why do we translate 
by the singular ?— τοὺς ἀγγέλους : Procles and Glus, § 3. — καὶ γάρ: cf. 
i. 1. 6, and note. 

6. οἱ pév: asyndeton. See note oni. 2. 4, and cf. i. 2. 25. — ὅπως, «as, 
= as. — ξύλοις, for fucl (G. 137, N. 4). — pixpdv... οὗ, going forward a 
short distance (G. 161) from the main body, to where, etc.— οἰστοῖς, arrows, 
derived from the root that appears in οἴσω, the future of φέρω. Lit. then 
οἰστός is that which is borne or 5ἢοί. --- ἠνάγκαζον : had compelled: cf. 
ἐποίησε in i. 1. 2, with note, and ἐπολιόρκει, συνεπολέμει in i. 4. 2. — τοὺς 
αὐτομολοῦντας : cf. i. 10. 6. — φέρεσθαι ἔρημοι, left to be carried away, 
i. e. for fuel (G. 265). See Moods and Tenses, ὃ 97, N. 1, end. — κρέα : ob- 
ject of both participle and verb. 

Page 38.— 7. καὶ ἤδη. .. ἀγοράν: cf. i. 8. 1, and note. — οἱ μὲν ἄλ- 
λοι: in apposition to κήρυκες. We should expect εἷς δ᾽ αὐτῶν Φαλῖνος 
Ἕλλην to follow.— βάρβαροι: predicate to ὄντες to be supplied. — ἐντίμως 
ἔχων, to be in honor. Cf. note on εὐνοϊκῶς ἔχοιεν, 1. 1. 5. — ἐπιστήμων : 
derivation ?— τῶν ἀμφὶ τάξεις = τῶν τακτικῶν. For the case, see G. 182, 2. 
— ὁπλο-μαχίαν, the art of fighting in heavy armor (G. 131, 1). 

8. ὅτι... ἀγαθόν: what changes of mood are possible in this sentence ? 
(G. 247): λέγουσιν has the force of an historical tense (G.201, Rem. ).— 
νικῶν : what use of the part.? Cf. also note on νικᾶν in ὃ 1. — παραδόν- 
tas: for the relation of this part. to the eas ἰόντας εὑρίσκεσθαι, cf. 
note on ὑπολαβών in i. 1. 7. — εὐοίσκεσθαι.. .. ἀγαθόν, to seek to get what- 
ever (lit. if any) favor they could (6. 229). 

9. βαρέως, with anger. — ὅμως : Clearchus, though himself angry, never- 
theless, etc. — etn: why opt.2— ἔφη, continued he. —8 τι: cogn. acc. to 
ἀποκρίνασθαι to be supplied with ἔχετε. --- ἥξω, will return. Cf., as to 
Meaning, ἐλθόντες in § 1. — bras... ἐξῃρημένα, that he might see the en- 
trails (after they had been) taken out. — θυόμενος : why middle # 

10. πρόσθεν ἢ παραδοῖεν : πρόσθεν ἤ (where πρίν might have been used) 
with the opt. (G. 240, with n.; 232, 4). There is no change of mood in 
quoting what Cleadnor said (G. 245 ; 247, N. 3). — θαυμάζω, should like to 
know. — πότερα... . %: double indirect question (G. 282, 5). — ὡς κρατῶν : 


54 XENOPHON. 


force of ὡς --- ἢ ds... δῶρα, or as gifts (G. 137, N. 4) on the alleged (as) 
ground of friendship, as if he had said ὡς φίλος ὦν. --- Tl... ἐλθόντα, why 
should he ask for them and (why should he) not (οὐ, not μή) come and take 
them ὃ --- πείσας, by persuasion, opp. to ὡς Kpatav. — τί ἔσται... . χαρί- 
σωνταυν: cf. i. 7. 8, Tl... κρατήσωσιν. 

11. πρὸς ταῦτα, in reply to this.— αὐτῷ: with ἀντυποιεῖται (G. 186, 
Ν. 1). —éorw: why accented ?— ἀρχῆς: causal genitive (G. 173,1,N. 2). 
—€avtod: pred. gen. of poss. (G. 169, 1). — μέσῃ τῇ χώρᾳ: cf. μέσου τοῦ 
παραδείσου in i. 2. 7, and note. — οὐδέ : the ov goes with δύναισθε ἄν, the 
δέ (even) with et... ὑμῖν. ---- παρέχοι: sc. ἀποκτεῖναι. 

12. εἰ μή, except, afteraneg. Cf. 1. 4. 18; 1. 5. 6. — ἔχοντες = εἰ ἔχοι- 
μεν (G. 226, 1).— ἄν: with χρῆσθαι (G. 246). So the ἄν that follows 
belongs to στερηθῆναι, and παραδόντες = εἰ παραδοῖμεν. 

Page 39. — μή: the neg. with the imperative is always μή (G. 283, 2). 
παραδώσειν : sc. ἡμᾶς as subject, which would have been expressed if 
ἡμῖν had not preceded. 

13. ᾿Αλλὰ... ἀχάριστα : ironical. On ᾿Αλλά, see § 4. When Phalinus 
calls him a ‘‘philosopher,” he means to stigmatize his remarks about ἀρετή 
and ἀγαθά as unpractical. The literal meaning of φιλό-σοφος ? — ὦν, that 
you are (G. 280). — περιγενέσθαι ἄν, could (under any circumstances) prove 
superior (G. 246 ; 226, 2b). — δυνάμεως : case (G. 175, 2). 

14. ἔφασαν : Xenophon writes as if he had not himself been present. 
— λέγειν : cf. λέγειν in i. 9. 23, and note. — ὑπο-μαλακιζομένους, losing 
courage somewhat (ὑπό). The underlying word is μαλακός, soft. For ὑπό, 
see G.191, VI. 7, end. — τὶ (G. 188, 1, N. 2): cf. i. 3. 18, and note. — 
συγκαταστρέψαιντ᾽ ἄν : serving loosely as an apodosis to the first protasis 
also, εἴτε θέλοι, but belonging more fitly to the second. 

15. et, whether (G.. 282, 4). — ἀποκεκριμένοι εἶεν : periphrastic perfect 
(G. 118, 1). Why opt. ?— Οὗτοι : in partitive appos. to the phrase ἄλλος 
ἄλλα (G. 137, N. 2). — ἄλλος ἄλλα, some one thing, others another, lit. an- 
other other things. Cf. ἄλλοι ἄλλως in i. 6. 11, and ἄλλοι ἄλλοθεν in 1. 10. 
13, and the notes. — λέγεις, mean, intend. 

16. The sparring that follows to the end of the chapter shows much 
Greek humor. — ἄσμενος (G. 138, N. 7). — οἶμαι... πάντες, and all the 
rest also, I think. οἶμαι is parenthetic and does not affect the construction. 
— ἡμεῖς : sc. “HEAAnvées ἐσμεν. --- πράγμασι: cf. 1. 1. 11. 

17. ὅ τι: the antecedent of this word is a cogn. ace. to συμβούλευσον, 
give us whatever advice, etc. —érera: to be how construed ? — λεγόμενον 
(by conjecture for ἀναλεγόμενον), ὅτι Padivds, x. τ. A.: when reported as 
follows, viz. ‘‘ Phaiinus once,” ete. (G. 241, 2, Note).—ovpBovdevopevots 
συνεβούλευσεν : why a difference in voice? The same distinction above. — 
τάδε, the following advice (G. 148, N. 1), would be followed by the actual 
advice, if the report should ever be made in Greece. What sort of an accu- 
sative is rade? — ὅτι ἀνάγκη (sc. ἐστί), that it is inevitable. 

18. ὑπ-ήγετο, craftily (ὑπό) suggested this. — εὐέλπιδες :. declined like 
ἐλιτίς (G. 66, N. 3). — ὑπο-στρέψας, turning adroitly, avoiding the trap. — 
παρὰ τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, contrary to what he had expected(G. 191, VI. 4, 3d). 














ANABASIS 2, rm. 55 


19. εἰ... ἐστι, if you have one chance in ten thousand (G. 77, 2, N. 3°). 
— σωθῆναι : limits ἐλπίς, to be supplied with pla τις (G. 261, 1). In the 
second line below, the noun σωτηρίας is used in the same sense.—dkovros : 
used almost like a participle. Cf. i. 3. 17, and note. 

Page 40. — 20. πρὸς ταῦτα : cf. 811. ---Αλλά: ef. § 4, and note. — 
ταῦτα : cf. with τάδε in the next line (G. 148, N. 1. Cf. also ὃ 21, be- 
ginning. — ἡμεῖς : emphatic, opposing what the Greeks thought to what the 
King had demanded (δ 8). — εἶναι : sc. ἡμᾶς as subj. — πλείονος (G. 178, 
N.). — ἔχοντες : a second protasis (G. 226, 1) to ἂν εἶναι, which is quoted 
(G. 246): see note on ἔχοντες and παραϑόντες in ὃ 12. 

21. αὐτοῦ: adv.— én... εἴησαν, thai there was (not would be) a truce, 
etc., the direct form being μένουσι (partic., sc. ὑμῖν, = ἢν μένητε) σπον- 
δαί εἰσιν, there is a truce for you (i. 6. for you to depend on), if you remain 
(G. 223). See § 22, Ἢν μένωμεν. Cf. below, σπονδαί εἰσιν after pevetre. — 
εἴπατε: iniperative of the first aor. εἶπα, not of the second aor. εἶπον. See 
the lexicon, and the Appendix to G., 5. v. εἶπον. --- πότερα... 4: cf. § 10. 
— ὡς... ayyeda, shall [ announce from you that there is war? lit. asswm- 
ing that there is war, shall I announce it from you ? (G. 280, N. 4, ex.). 

22. ταὐτά: not ταῦτα. —d&mep: sc. δοκεῖ, --- ἀπεκρίνατο : note the asyn- 
deton. — σπονδαί : sc. εἰσίν (see note on ὃ 21). 

23. ὅ τι ποιήσοι (indirect quest.): the fut. opt. is never used except as 
the representative of the fut. indicative in indirect discourse (G. 203, N. 3). 





CHAPTER II. 


Synopsis: Phalinus departs; and Chirisophus and a messenger return from 
Ariaeus, who refuses to be made king, and again tells the Greeks that he shall 
set out early next morning (1). Clearchus declines to say whether they will join 
him or not (2). At sunset he tells the generals and captains that the sacrifices 
were extremely favorable for joining Ariaeus (3), and gives directions how they 
shall proceed (4). From this time on, Clearchus assumes virtual command (5). 
Computation of distances (6). Miltocythes deserts to the King (7). The Greeks 
join Ariaeus about midnight, and give and receive pledges of good faith (8, 9). 
Ariaeus shows that it will not do for them to return as they came (10, 11), and 
adds that at first they must make their marches as long as possible (12). At 
daybreak they begin their march northward (13). In the afternoon they think 
they see the enemy’s cavalry (14); but scouts bring back word that what they 
see are only beasts of burden, and it is concluded that the King is encamping 
near by (15). Clearchus nevertheless advances straight on, and encamps in cer- 
tain villages (16). In the darkness and confusion the Greeks make much noise 
and frighten the enemy (17), of whom, on the next day, no traces are to be seen 
(18). During the night the Greeks also suffer a panic (19). Clearchus by a 
stratagem succeeds in quieting them, and at daybreak they again fall into line 
(20, 21). 


1. αὐτοῦ παρὰ ᾿Αριαίῳ: cf. αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ ποταμοῦ in iv. 3. 28. Glus 
also remained: cf. ii. 1. 3, 5. -- ἔλεγον, φαίη : the first takes a clause with 





δ0 ΧΕΝΟΡΗΟΝ. 


ὅτι, the second the inf. (G. 260, nN. 1). — βελτίους, of higher rank. — ods 
οὐκ ἂν ἀνασχέσθαι : for ot οὐκ ἂν ἀνάσχοιντο, arel. clause with the inf. by 
assimilation (G. 260, 2, N. 2). --- αὐτοῦ βασιλεύοντος : pred. part. after a 
verb of enduring (G. 279, 1). For the case see G. 171, 2. Cf. further 
Moods and Tenses, 8 112, 2, N. 2. — ἀλλ᾽ εἰ, k. τ᾿ Δι: a change to the direct 
discourse. — ἤδη, immediately. —et δὲ μή, otherwise, 1. 6. if you do not 
come, = ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἥκητε. See § 2. In such alternatives, εἰ δὲ μή is reg- 
ularly used in the second clause, even when a subjunctive or an affirmative 
verb would be required if the ellipsis were supplied. See Moods and 
Tenses, § 52, 1, N. 2. — αὐτός (G. 138, N. 8), himse/f, adj. pron. emphasiz- 
ing the omitted subj. of ἀπιέναι, which is fut. in force (G. 200, N. 3 0). 

2. οὕτω: with ref. to what follows as well as to what precedes. — χρὴ 
ποιεῖν : sc. ἡμᾶς, referring to both Greeks and barbarians. — ὥσπερ λέγετε: 
understand before this χρὴ ἡμᾶς ἥκειν τῆς vuKrds. — εἰ δὲ μή : see note on 
εἰ δὲ μή in § 1.— πράττετε is more animated than χρὴ ὑμᾶς πράττειν would 
have been.— ὁποῖόν τι: τὶ adds to the indefiniteness of ὁποῖον, whatsoever. 
— οὐδέ, i. 6. not even to the friendly barbarians, just as before he had sent 
Phalinus off without satisfying him (ii. 1. 23, end). 

3. ἰέναι : purpose (G. 265). Construe with οὐκ ἐγίγνετο, did not result 
(favorably) for going. This phrase is interpreted by καλὰ ἣν at the end of 
the section. — ἄρα, as it seems. — ἐν μέσῳ, between. Cf. 1. 7. 6, and note. 
— ναυσί-πορος (G. 131, 1, N.). 

Page 4H. — οὐ μὲν δή, nor yet indeed. — γέ: force ?— οἷόν τε: 50. ἐστίν, 
15 it possible (G. 151, N. 47). — ἔστιν : accent ? 

4. δειπνεῖν : explanatory of ὧδε ποιεῖν. The infinitive const. changes to 
the imperative in συσκευάζεσθε, x. τι A. Cf. πράττετε in ὃ 2, and note. 
- σημήνῃ: cf. ἐσάλπιγξε in i. 2. 17, and note. — ὡς ἀναπαύεσθαι (with 
σημήνῃ), shall give the signal for going to rest (G. 266, N. 1). — τὸ δεύτε- 
pov: cogn. acc. to σημήνῃ to be supplied. — ἀνατίθεσθε: mid. (ἃ. 199, 8). 
— ἐπὶ τῷ τρίτῳ, at the third signal. — τῷ ἡγουμένῳ, the van (neut.) = τοῖς 
ἡγουμένοις. --- πρός, towards: note that the genitive follows (G.191, VI. 6, 
1 a). — τὰ ὅπλα = τοὺς ὁπλίτας. Cf. ἀσπίς ini. 7. 10. 

5. τὸ λοιπόν : adv. (G. 160, 2). — Set: sc. φρονεῖν. 

6. This entire section is thought by many to be an interpolation. — 
ἀριθμὸς τῆς ὁδοῦ, amount of the way, distance. — tis ᾿Ιωνίας, in Lonia 
(G. 167, 6). — μάχης, scene of the battle, battle-field. So below. — ἐλέγοντο 
εἶναι, there were said to be, it was said that there were. 

7. ἐπεὶ σκότος ἐγένετο, when it became dark (G. 134, N. 1 ὃ. Cf. ἡμέρα 
ἐγένετο in ὃ 13, and ὀψὲ ἣν in § 16. — εἰς, ds: cf. note on εἰς ini. 2. 3. 

8. τοῖς ἄλλοις : dative (G. 184, 3) after ἡγεῦτο in place of the genitive 
(6. 171, 3). — κατὰ τὰ παρηγγελμένα, in accordance with his previous in- 
structions. For these see ὃ 4.— παρὰ ᾿Δριαῖον : why acc.?— μέσας νύκτας : 
ef. note on i. 7. 1.— ἐν... ὅπλα, halting under arms in line of batile. 
Cf. 1. 5. 14, and note. θέμενοι modifies the following nominatives, the 
officers being said to halt when they order their men to do so. — of κράτι- 
στοι, the highest in rank. Cf. βελτίους in § 1. — phe... τέ, not only not 











ANABASIS 2, 11. 57 


.. . but also: the correlatives are merely te... Te. — προδώσειν, ἔσεσθαι, 
ἡγήσεσθαι : quoted (G. 202, 3 a).—mpoo-dpooay, swore besides (G.191, VI. 
6, end). 

9. εἰς ἀσπίδα, i. 6. the blood was caught in the hollow of a shield. — of 
Ἕλληνες, οἱ βάρβαροι : subjects of ὠμοσαν. 

10. ἐπεὶ δὲ τὰ πιστὰ ἐγένετο, but when the pledges had been given (aor. 
with force of plup.); with the pledge here given (an oath and offering) ef. 
ii. 3. 28, where the pledge is an oath and the giving and taking of the right 
hand, and iv. 8. 7, where it is an oath and the exchange of spears. 

Page 42. — πότερον... ἤ: how used ?— ἥνπερ : sc. δδόν, and for the 
construction of this accusative with ἤλθομεν, cf. note on δδόν in i. 2. 20. 

11. ἀπιόντες : prot. = εἴ ἀπίοιμεν (G. 226, 1). — παντελῶς, witerly, der. 
from παν-τελής (TéXOS).— ὑπὸ λιμοῦ : cf. i. 5. 5, and note.— ὑπάρχει ἡμῖν, 
we have to depend on: for the meaning of ὑπάρχω, cf. note on i. 1. 4. — 
οὐδὲν τῶν ἐπιτηδείων, nothing in the way of provisions. — ἑπτακαίδεκα γάρ : 
yap is doubly related, introducing not only a ground for παντελῶς... ἀπο- 
λοίμεθα, but also one of the causes of bwdpxe... ἐπιτηδείων. --- σταθμῶν: 
the σταθμός is here looked upon as a period of time. Cf. for the case ἡμερῶν 
in i. 7. 18. — ἐγγυτάτω : adj. (G. 141, N. 3; 142, 2). — ἔνθα, there. — viv 
δ᾽ ἐπινοοῦμεν, i.e. I and those with me. νῦν δέ corresponds to ἣν μὲν ἤλ- 
θομεν, and τῶν δ᾽... ἀπορήσομεν to μακροτέραν pév.— μακροτέραν : sc. 
ὁδόν ; cf. note on ἥνπερ in § 10. --- ἐπιτηδείων : why genitive ? 

12. πορευτέον : sc. ἐστί (G. 281, 2). — σταθμούς : cognate acc. to πορευ- 
téov, we must make our first marches, lit. march our first marches. — ὡς 
+++ μακροτάτους, as long as possible. Cf. note oni. 1. 6, and ὡς πλεῖστον 
just below. μακροτάτους is predicate (cf. G. 142, 3). — ἀποσπασθῶμεν : 
explain the accent and mood. — στρατεύματος : why genitive? — ἅπαξ: cf. 
note on i. 9. 10. --- δύο: here indeclinable (G. 77, 1, N. 1). — ἡμερῶν : gen. 
of measure (G. 167, 3). —améoxopev: why subj.?— οὐκέτι μὴ δύνηται: 
emphatic fut. affirmation (G. 257). — στρατεύματι : dat. of accompaniment 
(G. 188, 5), equiv. to ἐὰν ἔχῃ ὀλίγον στράτευμα, corresp. to πολὺν δ᾽ ἔχων 
(below) Ξ-Ξ ἐὰν ἔχη. --- σπανιεῖ: fut. of σπανίζω (G. 110,11. N. 1c). —éywye 
is expressed for emphasis, and further emphasized by γέ and by its position. 

13. Ἦν δυναμένη, amounted to, meant: οὐδὲν ἄλλο δυναμένη stands like 
a pred. adjective after ἣν, the expression differing little from ἐδύνατο. --- 
στρατηγία, plan of operations. — ἀποδρᾶναι ἢ ἀποφυγεῖν : cf. i. 4. 8, and 
note. — τὸν ἥλιον, ἡλίῳ : cf. note on ἡλίῳ in ii. 1. 3. — τοῦτο: cf. ἐψεύσθη 
τοῦτο in i. 8. 11, and note. » 

14. ἔτι δέ, but furthermore. — δείλην : cf. note on i. 8. 1. — τῶν “Εἰλλή- 
vev: depends on the omitted (indefinite) antecedent of ot (G. 152). — of μὴ 
ἔτυχον : a conditional relative clause (G. 232, 1; 231, end). 

15. εἰσίν, véporro: partial change of mood in quotation. Cf. note on 
1 10. 5. — ἐστρατοπεδεύετο : impf. (not plup.), was encamping. — καὶ yap 
καί : an unusual connection of particles, and (they were sure of this) for 
smoke also, ete. 

. 16. ἀπειρηκότας, were weary, as pf. of ἀπ-αγορεύω, to renounce, give up, 


58 XENOPHON. 


grow weary: the perf. ἀπ-είρηκα, to have grown (and so to be) weary. CE. 


i. 5. 8. — od... ἀπέκλινε, he did not, however, even (δέ in οὐδέ) turn aside, — 


much less retreat. 

Page 43. — εὐθύωρον, straight on, an uncommon word, — eis: with ref. 
to the previous marching into the villages. — kal... ξύλα, even the very 
timbers in ( from) the houses (G. 191, N. 6). Cf. τοὺς ἐκ τῶν πόλεων in i. 2. 
3, and note. 

17. ὅμως : notwithstanding the villages had been pillaged.— τρόπῳ τινί, 
after a fashion. — σκοταῖοι, in darkness (G. 138, N. 7). — ἐτύγχανον : sc. 
αὐλιζόμενοι. --- ὥστε ἀκούειν, ὥστε ἔφυγον : in the second case the result is 
stated as an independent fact, rather than merely as a result (G. 266, 1 ; 237) 

18. καὶ βασιλεύς, even the King, and not only ot ἐκ τῶν σκηνωμάτων 
φεύγοντες. — οἷς (G. 153, with N. 1). 

19. tots “Εἰλλησι : after the compound verb (G. 187). --- οἷον : mascu- 
line accusative, subject of γίγνεσθαι, qualem par est fieri. 

20. τῶν τότε: sc. κηρύκων. Homer says (//iad v. 786) that Stentor (cf. 
Eng. stentorian), the ‘‘ brazen-voiced,” was able to shout as loud as fifty 
other men together. — τοῦτον : taking up Τολμίδην. --- τὰ ὅπλα: in a 
Greek camp the arms (heavy shields and spears) were generally stacked in 
one place. — ὅτι λήψεται : cf. i. 6. 2, and note. — ds ἂν μηνύσῃ, λήψεται : 
conditional relative sentence referring vividly to the future (G. 232, 3). — 
τάλαντον ἀργυρίου: cf. i. 7. 18. 

21. εἰς τάξιν τὰ ὅπλα τίθεσθαι, to get under arms in (lit. into) line of 
battle. Cf. i. 5. 14, and note. — ἧπερ εἶχον, just as they were (or stood). — 
ἡ μάχη; 1. 6. che battle of Cunaxa. 


CHAPTER III. 


Synopsis: At sunrise the King sends heralds to propose a truce (1). Clear- 
chus arranges the army so as to present the most formidable appearance, and, 
coming forward (2, 3), asks what they want (4). He directs them to tell the 
King that they must fight first, as the Greeks have had no breakfast (5). The 
heralds depart, but soon return with word that, if the truce (which is to be gen- 
eral) should be concluded, the Greeks will be furnished provisions (6,7). Cle- 


archus thinks best to conclude the truce, and commands the heralds to lead the | 


way (8, 9). They come upon ditches and canals, over which they are obliged to 
construct bridges (10). Clearchus punishes those who loiter, and himself takes 
part in the work (11), so that the older men also give their assistance (12). 
Clearchus suspects that the King has flooded the plain with a purpose (18). 
They arrive at certain villages where they procure provisions (14-16). They 
remain here three days, and Tissaphernes comes to confer with them (17), and 
says that he has asked the King to allow him to lead them hack to Greece (18, 
19), but that the King wishes to know why they took the field against him (20). 
Clearchus explains how they were drawn into the expedition (21, 22), but says 
that now, however, they wish simply to return (23). Tissaphernes reports this 
to the King (24), and on the third day returns saying that the King consents to 


his leading them home in safety (25). He swears on his part to do this faithfully — 








ANABASIS 2, m1. 59 


and to furnish provisions ; and the Greeks swear to do no harm to the country 
on their way (26 -- 28). Tissaphernes then goes back to the King, promising to 
return after completing his preparations (29), 


1.°O... ἔγραψα: in ii. 2. 18. — τῷδε, from what follows (G. 188, 1; 
148, N. 1). --- πέμπων : sc. κήρυκας (cf. 11. 1. 7). 

2. τοὺς προφύλακας, the pickets. — ἐζήτουν : diff. in use between this 
word and airéw on the one hand and ἐρωτάω on the other ? — τυχών, ἐπι- 
σκοπῶν : classify these partic. — εἶπε, told. Cf. ἔλεγε θαρρεῖν in i. 3. 8, and 
note. — ἄχρι ἂν cxoAdoy: on the principle of indirect discourse we might 
have ἄχρι σχολάσειε (G. 248, 3). 

3. κατέστησε, had drawn up.— eore... πυκνήν, so that it should be 
(G. 266, 2) well arranged to be seen (G. 261, 2) everywhere as a compact line 
(i. e. to have this appearance in all parts). 

Page 44. — μηδένα: why not οὐδένα ? — εἶναι : in the same construction 
with the preceding ἔχειν. --- τέ, τέ: the first τέ is correlative to the καί be- 
fore τοῖς ἄλλοις ; the second, to the καί before εὐειϑεστάτους. --- ταὐτά, 1. 6. 
προελθεῖν, κ. T. Δ. 

4. πρός, in front of (G. 191, VI. 6). — ἥκοιεν, had come, the direct form 
is ἥκομεν (G. 200, N. 3) ἄνδρες οἵτινες ἐσόμεθα (G. 247, N. 1). See Jloods 
and Tenses, ὃ 74, 1, Ν. 1. 

5. μάχης: genitive of want (G. 172, 1).— ὁ τολμήσων, the man that will 
dare (G. 276, 2), subj. of the preceding ἔστιν. — μὴ πορίσας = ἐὰν μὴ πο- 
ploy (G. 226, 1). — Notice ἄριστον at both beginning and end of the last 
sentence. 

6. @: the antecedent is the preceding sentence, ἧκον ταχύ. --- δοκοῖεν, 
ἥκοιεν : the direct discourse would show the person of each verb: εἰκότα 
δοκεῖτε. .. Kal ἥκομεν. .. οἵ ἄξουσιν ἔνϑεν ἕξετε. -- of... ἐπιτήδεια, who 
would conduct them (the purpose for which the guides were brought), 7f 
there should be a truce, to a place (se. ἐκεῖσε) from which they would get (the 
object in view) provisions. For this use of the fut. ind. with relative words 
(here of and ἔνθεν) to express purpose or object, see G. 236, with N. 8. For 
the partial change of mood in the quoted sentence tt... ἐπιτήδεια, see 
note on ὅτι... βασιλεῖ in § 4. 

7. εἰ... ἀπιοῦσιν, whether he was making a truce merely (αὐτοῖς) for 
the men (as they were) coming and going, i. e. for the King’s envoys. The 
direct question was σπένδομαι.... i... ἔσονται. --- τοῖς ἄλλοις (G. 184, 3 
or 4). — διαγγελθῇ : why subjunctive? Force of διά 3 

8. μεταστησάμενος, had them retire, and, etc. (G. 191, VI. 3, end). — 
ἐδόκει ποιεῖσϑαι : cf. ἐδόκει πορεύεσθαι in i. 2. 1, and note.— καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν, 
i. 6. without being harassed by the enemy. Force of the suffix in ἡσυχία ἢ 
— ἐπί, after, in order to get, involving the idea of purpose, but below, in 
§ 9 at the end, πρός in the sense simply of fo. 

9. διατρίψω (sc. χρόνον). --- ἀποδόξῃ : why subj.? For the force of ἀπό, 
οὗ ἀπο-Ψψηφίσωνται in 1, 4. 15, and note. —Katpds, proper time, whereas 
Χρόνος is time in general. 





60 XENOPHON. 

10. ot μέν : correlated by KXéapxos μέντοι. --- τάφροις: cf. for the case, 
ois, 1. 8. 1.— αὐλῶσιν, canals.— ὡς μὴ δύνασθαι, so that they were not able, 
ὡς with the inf. to express result (G. 266, N. 1). Cf. 1. 5. 10, and note,— 
ἐποιοῦντο : sc. γεφύρας. --- ἦσαν ἐκπεπτωκότες : periphrastic pluperfect (G. 
118, 4), which makes the idea of being on the ground more prominent than 
that of falling. 

Page 45.——-11. Κλέαρχον... ἐπεστάτει : lit. to learn Clearchus well, 
how he commanded. Cf. note on τῶν βαρβάρων, i. 1. 5, and also i. 6. 5. — 
τὸ δόρυ, his spear, but in the next line βακτηρίαν, a staff or stick, without 
the art., because the staff was no part of his regular equipment as a soldier, 
Give the stem from which βακτηρία is derived. — εἰ δοκοίη : why opt.? — 
τὸν ἐπιτήδειον : sc. παίειν (G. 261, 1). — ἔπαισεν ἄν: an iterative aorist 
(G. 206). For the use of the stick in Spartan military discipline, see i. 5. 
11, and note. — αὐτὸς προσελάμβανεν, took hold himself. — μὴ οὐ (G. 283, 
7): the μή negatives the following inf. regularly ; the οὐ (here very irreg- 
ular) strengthens the neg. idea underlying αἰσχύνην εἶναι, were ashamed, 
were un-willing (Moods and Tenscs, § 95, 2, N. 1, Rem.). 

12. πρός: cf. i. 9. 20. It is doubtful whether we should read αὐτοῦ or 
αὐτό. MSS. αὐτόν. --- ol... γεγονότες here must mean those that were thirty 
years old and less, which would regularly be of εἰς τριάκοντα ἔτη (as in 
vil. 3. 46). For the case of ἔτη, see G. 161. — σπουδάζοντα, in earivcst. 
— προσελάμβανον : cf. § 11. 

13. ὑποπτεύων : cf. 1. 1. 1, and note.— μή: in the direct form od | 
(ἃ. 242, 4).— ἄρδειν : with οἵα (sc. τοιαύτη), on the principle of G. 261, 1: 
τί was not the proper season for watering, etc. Cf. Moods and Tenses, ὃ 99, 
1, N. 1.— #8, forthwith, at the very start.— εἰς, with reference to, for. — 
τούτου ἕνεκα : taking up ἵνα προφαίνοιτο. Cf. G. 215, Rem. — ἀφεικέναι: 
see ἀφίημι. 

14. ὅθεν : cf. ii. 1. 8, and note, and below, ὃ 16. As an adverb ὅθεν 
goes with λαμβάνειν ; as a relative it introduces the sentence. — ἀπέδειξαν 
λαμβάνειν, gave them notice to take. — οἶνος φοινίκων, palm wine. Cf. i. 5. 
10.— ὄξος ... αὐτῶν, ὦ sowr (cf. ὀξύς) drink made from the same by boiling © 
(ἕψω, to boil). 

15. αὐταὶ at βάλανοι, the dates themselves (opposed to the wine, etc.), in 
partitive appos. (G. 137, N. 2). — τοῖς οἰκέταις : with ἀπέκειντο (G. 184, 3). 
οἰκέτης, from οἶκος (G. 129, 2 6), properly ἃ howse-servant. — ἀπέκειντο, | 
were set apurt ; equiv. to pass. of ἀπετίθεσαν, below. — κάλλους : gen. of 
cause (G. 173, 1). — ἠλέκτρου : abridged for ἠλέκτρου ὄψεως. Cf. the simi- 
lar case explained in G. 186, N. 2. — τὰς δέ τινας, but some (τινάς) others. 
— τραγήματα, for sweetmeats, to be eaten at dessert (G. 137, N. 4). — καὶ 
ἣν... ἡδὺ μέν, and these (the τραγήματα, G. 135, 2) were a palatable thing | 
(G. 138, Ν. 2c) also at a symposium (πότον, not ποτόν). --- κεφαλ-αλγές : | 
derivation? See G. 131, 1. 

16. τὸν ἐγ-κέφαλον, the crown (lit. brain), a large terminal cabbage-like | 
growth at the top of the stem of the palm-tree. — ἰδιότητα, peculiar-ity | 
(see G. 129, 7). — ἡδονῆς, flavor. Cf. ἡδύ, above.— ἐξαιρεθείη: why opt.? 
— ὅλος, entirely (G. 138, N. 7): we sometimes say, it al] dried up. 


~ 








᾿ ANABASIS 2, 111. 61 


17. 6... ἀδελφός: note the position of the genitives (G. 142, 1), — 
γυναικός: by name Statira. — αὐτοῖς : case (ἃ. 186). Cf. “Εἰλλάδι in the 
next section. 

18. γείτων : predicate nom. -to οἰκῶ (G. 136; cf. 137, N. 4). — olka: see 
Hellen. iii. ἃ. 12, Karta, ἔνθαπερ ὁ Τισσαφέρνους οἶκος. 

Page 46. — πελλὰ κἀμήχανα (i. 6. καὶ ap.), many difficulties, lit. many 
and inextricable (straiis, G. 141, N. 4): ἀμήχανα = ἐν οἷς οὐδεμία μηχανή. 
-- εὕρημα, a piece of good fortune; from εὑρίσκω (eip-, G. 129, 4). — 
εἰ δυναίμην : we might have had ἐὰν δύνωμαι (G. 248, 2; 226, 4, N. 1), as 
the context implies, J thought it would be a εὕρημα, --- οἶμαι... ἔχειν, for 
T think it would not be a thankless labor for me (G. 246). For ἀχαρίστως 
ἂν ἔχειν, cf. note on i. 1. 5, end. — πρὸς ὑμῶν : as if a passive had preceded 
in place of ἀχαρίστως ἔχειν. 

19. ἐπιστρατεύοντα : quoted after ἤγγειλα (G. 280). For the fact men- 
tioned, see i. 2. 4. — καὶ μόνος, x. τ΄ X.: cf i. 10. 7 and 8. — σὺν τοῖσδε: 
with a gesture. — αὐτῷ : the King. 

βουλεύσεσθαι: what other tenses might be used? (G. 203, nN. 2), — 
εὐ-πρακτότερον: verbal adj. (G. 117, 3) in the comparative. The subj. of 
εὐπρακτότερον ἢ is διαπράξασθαι understood, the διαπράξασθαι expressed 
being the object of δύνωμαι. 

21. μεταστάντες : second aor. Cf. μεταστησάμενος in ὃ 8. — Κλέαρχος 
δ᾽ ἔλεγεν, i. 6. Clearchus was their spokesman. — ὡς βασιλεῖ πολεμήσοντες, 
with the intention of warring with the King (G. 186, N. 1). When, as here, 
the subject of the leading verb is also the speaker (cf. G. 277, N. 2), ὡς 
simply emphasizes the cawse or pwrpose denoted by the participle. 

22. The speaker is referring in this section, probably, to the agreement en- 
tered into at Thapsacus, i. 4. 11 -13.— θεούς, ἀνθρώπους : objects of ἠσχύν- 
Onpev (G. 158, N. 2). The infinitive προδοῦναι is a second obj. of εν μὸν same 
verb (G. 260, 1).— παρέχοντες (sc. αὐτῷ), when we had offered (G. 204, N. 1). 
— εὖ ποιεῖν : purpose (ἃ. 265 ; 165, N. 1). 

23. ἐπεί: here, since; above, in ὃ 22, when. — βασιλεῖ... ἀρχῆς : cf. 
ii, 1. 11. — τὴν χώραν κακώς ποιεῖν : cf. i. 4. 8, and note. Cf. below, ἡμᾶς 
εὖ ποιῶν. ---εἴ τις... λυποίη, 1. 6. if no one should molest us: τὶς is like 
French on and German man, with no exact English equivalent. — ἀδικοῦν- 
Ta: sc. twa, and cf. βουλευομένους in i. 1. 7. — ἡμᾶς... ὑπάρχῃ, shall 
take the first step also (καί) in doing us good (G. 279, 1), καὶ εὖ ποιῶν ein- 
phatically opposed to ἀδικοῦντα, — εὖ ποιοῦντες (G. 277, 2). 

Page 47. — 24. ἥκω: mood ?—al... μενόντων, let the truce continue. 
—Gyopav παρέξομεν, will provide a market, i.e. an opportunity for the 
Greeks to buy provisions. 

25. εἰς : cf. εἰς ἕω, i. 7. 1, and note. — διαπεπραγμένος (cf. διαπράξασθαι 


in ὃ 20): with δοθῆναι as its object.— δοθῆναι αὐτῷ : cf. the corresponding 


active δοῦναι ἐμοί in ὃ 18. -- καίπερ : with the following concessive part. 


(6. 277, n. 16).— ἄξιον βασιλεῖ, befitting the King (G. 185; 184, 2). Cf. 


|G. 178, n. 


26. τέλος: cf. i. 10. 13. — παρέξειν: sc. ἡμᾶς. The inf. is quoted after 


02 ΧΕΝΟΡΗΟΝ. 





\ 
the idea of Promising in πιστά (G. 202, 3.4). So ἀπάξειν. --- agin δ᾽ ἂν Mie 
why not ov? 

27. πορεύσεσθαι, ἕξειν: both quoted after ὀμόσαι. Cf. the two fat 
infinitives in § 26. — ds διὰ φιλίας (sc. χώρας), as (you would go) through | 
a friendly ae 

28. ταῦτα ἔδοξε: cf. note on i. 3. 20. — ὥμοσαν.. .. ἔδοσαν : cf. note on 
πιστά in 11. 2. 10. 

29. ὡς βασιλέα : cf. 1. 2. 4. — διαπράξωμαι, shall have accomplished, 
with future perfect force (Moods and Tenses, § 20, N. 1). — ἃ Séopar: se. 
διαπράξασθαι. --- ὡς ἀπάξων καὶ ἀπιών (G. 200, N. 3): cf. note on ὡς πο- 
λεμήσοντες in ὃ 21. , 


CHAPTER IV. 


Synopsis: The Greeks and Ariaeus remain encamped near each other for 
more than twenty days, during which time the barbarians receive visits from 
their friends (1). The Greeks grow uneasy and ask their generals why they 
remain, and express their suspicions of the King’s intentions (2-4). Clearchus 
answers that it will not do to go away, as that would break the truce and they | 
would be left without provisions, guide, or friends (5); that, moreover, the Eu- | 
phrates bars their way, and that they have no cavalry (6). He declares his faith | 
in the King’s oath (7). Tissaphernes and Orontas arrive with their armies (8). 
The Greeks proceed with Tissaphernes as guide (9), but are suspicious of the 
Persians, and march apart from them. Mistrust increases on both sides, and 
they sometimes come to blows (10, 11). They arrive at the wall of Media (12), 
and from thence a march of two days brings them to the Tigris. The Greeks 
encamp near Sitaice, and the barbarians cross the river (13, 14). After supper 
a man brings a warning from Ariaeus to the Greeks to beware of a night- 
attack, and to guard the bridge over the Tigris (15-17). Clearchus is greatly | 
alarmed (18); but the story is observed to be inconsistent (19, 20), and after | 
questioning the messenger it is concluded that he has been sent with an ulterior | 
object (21, 22). Nevertheless, a guard is sent to the bridge (25). At daybreak | 
the Greeks cross the bridge (24), and proceed in four days to the river Physeus. | 
Near Opis they are met by an illegitimate brother of the King, who views them 
as they pass, and is amazed at their number (25, 26). They proceed through 
Media, plundering the villages of Parysatis (27), and along the right bank of the 
Tigris, procuring provisions from Caenae, a city across the river 8). 


1. εἴκοσιν : sc. ἡμέρας. --- of ἄλλοι ἀναγκαῖοι, his other relatives: &vay- 
καῖος (from ἀνάγκη, see G. 129, 12) is the Lat. necessarius. — δεξιάς, as- 
Surances, pledged by the person who brought them with the right hand. | 
pa)... αὐτοῖς, that the King would bear them no ill-will (μνησι-κακήσειν | 
μιμνήσκω, stem uya-,and kakds). The inf. is quoted after δεξιάς ; ef. παρέ- 
ἕξειν in li. 3. 26. -- ἐπιστρατείας : gen. of cause (G. 173, 1).— τῶν TrApolxo- 
μένων, of what was past (G. 200, N. 3). ἢ 

2. οἱ περὶ ᾿Αριαῖον, Ariaeus and those with him (G. 141, Nn. 8). Cf. ob 
ἀμφὶ Τισσαφέρνην, 111. 5. 1. — @Sndor. . . voty, evidently paid less regard 
to the Greeks. For προσέχοντες, cf. ἀνιώμενος in i. 2. 11, and note. | 


= ae 





d ANABASIS 2, Iv. 63 
Page 48.—3. % may introduce the second part of an alternative 
“question (G. 282, 5), even when the former part is only implied (here πότε: 
pov ἄλλως ἔχει). Cf. the use of an in Lat. — περὶ παντὸς ποιήσαιτο : οἴ, 
περὶ πλείστου ποιοῖτο in i. 9. 7, and note. — ἢ : subj. of purpose (G. 216). 
The opt. referring to the future has the force of a primary tense (Moods and 
‘Tenses, ὃ 34, 2). — στρατεύειν : dependent on φόβος (G. 261, 1, with Ν. 1). 
We might have had ot ἄλλοι “E. φοβῶνται... στρατεύειν. --- ὑπάγεται : 
ef. ii. 1. 18. — διεσπάρθαι; see διασπείρω and G? 262, 1.— ἁλισθῇ: οἵ, 
διαπράξωμαι, ii. 3. 29. ---οὐκ ... ἡμῖν, it is not possible that he will not 
attack us, lit. there is not how (introducing the indir. quest.) he will not, 
etc. (G. 283, 8). 

4, ἢ... ἀποτειχίζει, is either trenching or walling off some point. Cf. 
the use of τὶ in i. 10. 16. — τοσοίδε, so few: accent (G. 27, 4).—éml.., 
αὐτοῦ, at his very doors. 

5. ἐπὶ πολέμῳ = πολεμήσοντες. --- ἔπειτα, moreover, introducing πρῶτον 

μέν, αὖθις δέ, etc. — ὅθεν, (a place) from which. — ἐπισιτιούμεθα : purpose 
ἴα. 236). — ἅμα and εὐθύς (G. 277, N. 1) both qualify ἀφεστήξει, which 
| is a future perfect (G. 110, IV. ὁ, N. 2; 200, N. 9). Cf. below, λελείψεται. 
| -- ὄντες : sc. φίλοι. 
| 6. ποταμός: emphatic, as if he had said, but as to rivers, I don’t know 
whether (εἰ), etc.— διαβατέος : the verbal in -τέος used personally (G. 281, 
| 1).— οὐ μὲν δή: cf. i. 9. 18, and note. — ἄν, i. 6. ἐάν. --- ov... εἰσιν : im- 
plying also, nor will there be.— τῶν 8... ἄξιοι, whereas the enemy's 
horse are very numerous (lit. the most, compared with those of other na- 
tions) and very efficient. —- ὥνικῶντες = εἰ νικῷμεν ; but ἡττωμένων, to which 
σωθῆναι is apod., = ἐὰν ἡττώμεθα, or perhaps εἰ ἡττῴμεθα (see Moods and 
Tenses, ὃ 54, 2b). — οἷόν τε: sc. ἐστίν. 

7. σύμμαχα, helps.—8 τι, on what account (G. 160, 2; 149, 27). — 
αὐτόν : repeating βασιλέα. --- θεούς : cf. θεούς in ii. 3. 22, and G. 158, ν. 2. 

Page 49. — 8. ὡς ἀπιών (G. 277, N. 2): here the writer and the subj. 
of the leading verb are not the same person (cf. note on ὡς πολεμήσοντες 
‘in ii. 3. 21, and ii. 3. 29), so that ἀπιών expresses the intention professed 
by Tissaphernes. There is nothing in the use of ὡς to indicate the histo- 
Tian’s opinion as to the honesty of this profession. See note on ὡς βοηθή- 
gay in § 25. — εἰς οἶκον = οἴκαδε : see note on οἰκῶ in ii. 3. 18. Besides 
Caria he now had the satrapy of Cyrus. — ἦγε; i. 6. Orontas. Cf. iii. 4. 13. 
—éml γάμῳ, in marriage, as his wife. 

10. αὐτοὶ ... ἐχώρουν, proceeded [themselves] by themselves. — ἐστρατο- 
medevovro: the Greeks and barbarians. — ὥσπερ πολεμίους (sc. φυλαττό- 
pevot), just as (if they were guarding against) enemies (G. 277, N. 3). 
| 11. τοῦ αὐτοῦ : sc. τόπου, and cf. i. 8. 14. — πληγὰς ἐνέτεινον : cf. 1. 5. 
11. 

12. τεῖχος : mentioned in i. 7.15. If we suppose that the southern part 
of this wall, which reached from the Tigris to the Euphrates, was in ruins, 
jit is easy to account, first, for Xenophon’s not describing it in i. 7. 15, but 
here ; and, secondly, for the King’s digging the ditch for the purpose, on 

























64 XENOPHON. 



























that assumption, of completing the line of defence furnished by the north. 
ern part of the wall. In the retreat Tissaphernes led the Greeks westward | 
on the southern side of the ditch, in order that they should not see the rich 
plain of Babylonia, and so brought them outside of the wall again, which | 
they now pass within (πἀρῆλϑον) on their way to the Tigris. — ἣν ὠκοδο- | 
μημένον = wxoddpnto (G. 118, 4). — κειμέναις, lying ; we say laid. — | 
ποδῶν: why gen.  --- μῆκος δ᾽ ἐλέγετο, but in length, it was said, ete. 
13. τὴν 8’... ἑπτά, and the other (by its having been) br tdged over (means, 
Gl 2/7, 2) with seven Beis. See note on ὃ 24. — ἦσαν ἀπό: cf. εἰσὶν ἐκ in 
1. 2. 7. — - ὥσπερ : sc. κατατέτμηνται. ᾿ 
14. δένδρων: with παράδεισος (G. 167, 4). If it went with Sacéos it | 
would be δένδροις (cf. iv. 7. 6). — ot δὲ βάρβαροι : sc. ἐσκήνησαν. 
Page 30, — 15. érvxov... ὄντες, happened to be walking. — πρὸ ray | 
ὅπλων : cf. note on 11. 2. 20. — οὐκ ἐζήτει, did not ask for, ask to see. — καὶ 
ταῦτα ὦν: cf. i. 4. 12, and note. | 
16. ὅτι: introducing. direct discourse. Cf. i. 6. 8, end, and note. — 
"Exreppe: agreement (G. 135, N. 1).— πιστοί: ef. note oni. 5. 15. — μὴ 
ἐπιθῶνται (G. 216). 
17. ὡς διανοεῖται, since J. intends, ete.; but in the next line as, in order 
that. — τῆς διώρυχος : the second of the two mentioned in § 13; over this) 
there was only a pontoon bridge, which could be destroyed easily. 
19. νεανίσκος τις : conjectured to have been Xenophon himself. — οὐκ, 
ἀκόλουθα, inconsistent. — Td τε ἐπιθήσεσθαι καὶ λύσειν, i. 6. the two stories) 
of an intention to attack, and at the same time to destroy the bridge: we 
should expect τὸ also before λύσειν. For the unusual fut. inf. see G. 202, 
35; also Moods and Tenses, ὃ 27, N. 2 ὑ.--- νικᾶν ; sc. αὐτούς as subject. — 
τί δεῖ ..««Ἴέφυραν : why ae they destroy the bridge? implying what good 
will it do them, εἴα. It is thus a proper apod. to the future prot. éav... 
νικῶσι (G. 223). — ἂν (i. 6. ἐὰν) ὦσιν, ἔχοιμεν ἄν : a subj. in the prot.) 
(G. 223), with an opt. with &v in the apod. (G. 224), the latter belonging to. 
an implied prot. in the opt., such as, if we should urish to escape (G. 227, 1; 
Moods and Tenses, § 54, 1a”). The od in οὐδέ, not even, modifies ἔχοι 
ἄν, the meaning being, even if there are (shall be) many bridges, we should. 
not know, ete. Cf. for this meaning of οὐκ ἔχω, i. 7. 7, and note; and see: 
also οὐχ ἕξουσιν in ὃ 20. 
22. ὑποπέμψειαν, had sent with a false message (ὑπό) : the dir. form was; 
cet hed (6. 243). — ἔνθεν μέν, ἔνθεν δέ, on this side, on that. — πολλῆς, 
. ἐνόντων, since it was extensive and fertile, and since there were men in ΤΠ 
to work τί. 
Page ᾧ Ε. -- εἴ τις βούλοιτο : might have been ἐάν τις βούληται (G. 248, 
Ν.). 
28. ἐπὶ μέντοι... . ὅμως, yet they nevertheless, etc., i. 6. notwithstanding! 
that they now knew the man’s statements were false. Cf. ii. 2. 17.— 
ἀπήγγελλον, i. 6. the next morning. 
24. ἐζευγμένην : the Greek could say ζευγνύναι γέφυραν (G. 159), to buile 
(lit. join) a bridge, or tevyvivar ποταμόν (or διώρυχα), to bridge a river (Ol 





᾿ ANABASIS 2, v. 65 


channel) ; for the latter see § 13.— as... πεφυλαγμένως, as guardedly as 
possible: supply ἦν with οἷόν τε (= δυνατόν). --- τῶν παρὰ Τισσαφέρνους 
Ἅλ.: οἵ. τῶν παρὰ βασιλέως, i. 1. ὅ, and note. — διαβαινόντων (sc. αὐτῶν): 
we should expect the dat. after ἐπιθήσεσθαι, rather than the gen. absolute, 
In the same way διαβαινόντων occurs in the next line, notwithstanding 
the following αὐτοῖς. --- σκοπῶν : participle. — διαβαίνοιεν : in the direct 
form διαβαίνουσι (G. 242), to see whether they were crossing. — @xeTo ἀπε- 
λαύνων, went riding off (G. 279, 4, N.); ᾧχετο, lit. was off (ἃ. 200, N. 3). 

25. πλέθρου : cf. πλέθρων, i. 2. 23. — κεῖτο : cf. οἰκουμένην, 1. 4. 1. — 
ἡ ὄνομα ὮὯπις: cf. i. 5. 4, and note. — πρὸς ἥν: why accusative ?— ὡς 
βοηθήσων (G. 277, N. 2): ὡς shows only that the partic. gives the purpose 
which is professed by the subject (ὁ ἀδελφός). See note on ὡς ἀπιών in ὃ 8, 
and on ὡς πολεμήσοντες in ii. 3. 21. Cf. ‘also i. 1. 11, and note. 

26. εἰς δύο, two abreast (G. 191, III. 1 ὁ). They marched by in column. 
— ἄλλοτε... ἐφιστάμενος, halting now and then. — τὸ ἡγούμενον (object) : 
ef. ii. 2. 4, and note. — ἐπιστήσειε: why opt.?— ἔπίστασιν : force of the 
suffix ows ? — ἐκπεπλῆχθαι : see note oni. 5. 13. 

27. Κύρῳ ἐπεγγελών, insulting Cyrus (G. 184, 2) besides (él), i.e. besides 
gratifying the Greeks. Cf. ἐπι-λέγειν, i. 9. 26. — διαρπάσαι... ἐπέτρεψε: 
ef, i. 2. 19, and note. — πλὴν ἀνδραπόδων, 1. 6. except that the men in them 
were not to be made slaves. 


CHAPTER V. Ξ 


Synopsis: They arrive at the river Zapatas, and Clearchus sends ἃ messenger 
to Tissaphernes and requests an interview (1, 2). When they meet, Clearchus 
expresses lis hope that they shall be able to dispel the mutual distrust of the 
Greeks and barbarians (3, 4); mentions cases where great evil has been done 
through misunderstanding (5, 6); refers to their oaths and the vengeance of 
the Gods should they break them (7); details the facts which render it neces- 
sary for the Greeks to retain the friendship of the Persians (8-12), and the ad- 
vantages to the barbarians of an alliance with his Greek army (13, 14); and 
finally he asks to know who has excited the suspicions against them (15). 
Tissaphernes assures Clearchus that the Greeks have no cause for distrust (16), 
showing how completely they are in the power of the Persians (17-19), and how 
unnecessary it would be for the latter to resort to perjury if they wished to 
destroy their former enemies (20, 21). He expresses great personal friendship 
for the Greeks, and hints at an especial service they may do for him (22, 25). 
_Clearchus believes him sincere, and when he promises to disclose the names of 
those who have sought to create distrust between them, if Clearchus with the 
rest of the generals will come to him, the Greek general consents (24-26). The 
next day he returns to camp and states what has been agreed upon, and, though 
opposed by some of the soldiers, finally persuades five of the generals and twenty 
captains to accompany him (27-30). The generals are invited to enter the tent 
of Tissaphernes, and not long after they are seized and those without murdered 
(31, 32). Nicarchus alone escapes, and flees terribly wounded to the Greeks 
(33), who run to arms (34). Ariaeus with 300 Persians approaches the camp, 
and calls for some general or captain (35, 36). Cleanor, Sophaenetus, and Xen- 





00 XENOPHON. 


ophon come forward (37). Ariaeus tells them that Clearchus, having violated 
the truce, is dead, but that Proxenus and Menon are in great hoaor, and that 
the King demands their arms (38). In answer Cleanor reproaches him for his 
treachery, and Xenophon skilfully asks that Proxenus and Menon may be sent 
to the Greeks to advise them (39-41). The barbarians leave without making 
answer (42). 


Page 62.—1. ὑποψίαι, feelings of distrust. — φανερά, pred. to ἐφαίνε- 
το, is specially opposed to ὑποψίαι. 

2. Τισσαφέρνει : cf. τούτῳ in i. 1. 9.— εἴ δύναιτο, x. τ. A. (G. 248, 2), 
in case he could in any way stop, etc. The apod., suggested by παῦσαι; 


would be ἵνα παύσειε or the like. See Moods and Tenses, § 53, N. 2, for 


further details of this important construction. — πρὶν γενέσθαι (G. 274). — 
ἐροῦντα (G. 277, 3). 

3. Τισσαφέρνη : a heteroclite voc. (G. 60,1 0). --- ἀδικήσειν : cf. μνησι- 
κακήσειν in il. 4. 1, and note. — φυλάττομενον ἡμᾶς, are on your guard 
against us (G. 280). — ὧς πολεμίους, as (you would be against) an enemy. 

4. οὐ δύναμαι οὔτε: we should expect οὔτε δύναμαι to correspond to ἐγώ 
τε οἶδα. See note on μήτε ... τε in ii. 2. 8. — πειρώμενον (G. 280). — ὅτι 
.. . οὐδέν, that we on our part do not even think of any such thing (G. 280, 





N. 3). —— εἰς λόγους σοι ἐλθεῖν, to have an interview with you (G. 186, N. 1, | 


end). — εἰ δυναίμεθα (G. 248, N.). Cf 8 2. — ἀλλήλων (6. 174). 


5. ἐκ, iv consequence of. — ot... ἐποίησαν : we should expect φοβηϑέν- | 
Tas... βουλομένους ... ποιήσαντας (G. 280), but such an accumulation ἡ 
of participles would be harsh. — φϑάσαι : sc. ποιήσαντές τι (G. 279, 4). — | 


μέλλοντας, intending, transitively. — αὖ, i. e. what is more. 
6. ἀγνωμοσύνας, misunderstandings (G. 129, 7). 
7. πρῶτον... μέγιστον, for first and chiefly. Cf. i. 3.10. The correl. 


of μέν is δέ in § 8. — θεῶν (G. 167, 3), oaths (sworn) by the Gods, as we say 
ὀμνύναι θεούς. -- εἶναι (G. 263, 1). — τούτων, i. 6. τῶν θεῶν ὅρκων (G. 171, | 


2). ---παρημεληκώς (6. 280, N. 2): οἷ, ἐψευσμένος, i. 3. 10, and note. — 


Tov θεῶν πόλεμον, the Gods’ war (G. 167, 2). — ἀπό, with, by the aid of. — | 
φεύγων, flying ; but ἀποφύγοι ἄν, could make his escape. For ἀποφύγοι | 


and ἀποδραίη, cf. i. 4. 8, and note. 


Page 33. — 8ras... ἀποσταίη, how he could retire to a strong place, } 


i.e. toa place that would prove really éxvpév against the Gods. For the 


three apod. with prot. implied, see G. 226, 26.— πάντῃ πάντα : cf. πάντων. 


πάντα in i. 9. 2, and the πανταχῆ πάντων following.— θεοῖς (G. 185 ; 184, 
2). With this section compare Psalm exxxix. 7-12. 

8. περὶ μὲν δή: μέν is repeated from πρῶτον μέν in § 7. — παρ᾽ ois (1. 6. 
τοὺς θεοὺς)... κατεθέμεθα, in whose hands we have deposited the friendship 
which we have compacted.— τῶν δ᾽ ἀνθρωπίνων, but of human things (G. 168). 
—év τῷ παρόντι, in the present crisis. 

9. πᾶσα ὁδός, every road ; but following, πᾶσα ἡ ὁδός, all the way. — 
αὐτῆς : with ovSév. — φοβερώτατον (G. 138, N. 2c). 


10. ἄλλο τι (sc. ποιοῖμεν) Av ἤ: ἄλλο τι ἤ or the simple ἄλλο τι is, 


\ 





ANABASIS 2, ν. 67 


equivalent in asking a question to ov or dpa ov, Lat. nonne (G. 282, 3).— 
εὐ-εργέτην, bene-factor (Β΄. ta-).— ἔφεδρον, a fresh opponent, a successor in 
the contest, prop. of an odd combatant in the public games, who remained 
without an adversary when the others had been paired by lot, and sat by (ἐπί 
and ἕδρα) ready to engage (of course at a great advantage) with any athlete 
who should beat his adversary. — ταῦτα repeats the indirect question. 

11. τῶν τότε (G. 141, N. 37). — ὃν βούλοιτο (G. 247; 233) might be ὃν 
ἂν βούληται. — ἔχοντα, σώζοντα, οὖσαν (G. 280). — Jj... ἐχρῆτο, which 
Curus found hostile. — ταύτην : repeating tiv... δύναμιν with emphasis. 

12. rotrov ... ὄντων, but since this is so. — ὅστις οὐ βούλεται ; result 
(G. 237, Ν.). --- ἀλλὰ μήν begins the sent. as if the parenthesis ἐρῶ... 
εἶναι were to be followed by a sentence like καὶ ἡμεῖς ὑμᾶς πολλὰ ὠφελεῖν 
δυνησόμεθα. (Kriiger.) This is really said in other words in ὃ 13 and § 14. 

13. ods νομίζω dv παρασχεῖν, whom I think I could render (παράσχοιμι 
dv): cf. 1. 8. 6. So παῦσαι ἄν (G. 134, 3). — év-oxAotvra, disturbing, lit. 
crowding (ὄχλος) wpon (G. 279, 1).— ots: with τεθυμωμένους, cdncensed 
(G. 184, 2). — koAdoato Qe: doubtful emendation for κολάσεσϑε, nade on 
ace. of dv (G. 208, 2). — Tis... οὔσης = ἢ τῇ... οὔσῃ. 

14. ὡς μέγιστος (sc. φίλος), the very greatest: cf. note on ὅτι ἀπαρα- 
oKevoTatoy, i. 1. 6. 

Page d4. — ἔχων ὑπηρέτας = εἰ ἔχοις, x. τ. X.: additional protasis to 
both ἂν εἴης and ἂν ἀναστρέφοιο. — τῆς χάριτος: with ἕνεκα. — ἣν ἂν 
ἔχοιμεν : χάριν ἔχω is exactly the Lat. gratiam habeo: cf. note on i. 4. 15. 

15. οὕτω θαυμαστόν, so surprising. — τοὔνομα tis: a mingling of two 
constructions, ἥδιστ᾽ ἂν ἀκούσαιμι τίς, K. τ᾿ A, and τοὔνομά tives ὅστις, 
κι τ A. Rehdantz, however, explains the words: J would gladly hewr by 
name, who is so skilled, οἷο. -- ἀπημείφθη, replied, a form found only here. 
It reminds us of ἀπαμειβόμενος and ἀμείβετο in Homer. 

16. ᾿Αλλά: ef. ii. 1. 4, and note.— ἥδομαι ἀκούων : cf. ἥσθη ἰδών, i. 2. 
18. — ἀκούων σον λόγους (G. 171, 2, N. 1). --- γιγνώσκων, since you know. 
— μοι δοκεῖς must be transl. impers., it seems to me, in order to bring in 

κακόνους ἂν εἶναι, that you would be evil-minded, in Eng. — as ἂν μάθῃς 
(G. 216, κ. 2). 

17. εἰ ἐβουλόμεθα, supposing it was our wish, i.e. when we made the 
treaty (G. 221); to this the apod. is ἀπορεῖν (= ἀποροῦμεν) quoted after 
δοκοῦμεν. Cf. ἀπορεῖν ἄν in 8 18, and note. — ἐν 4, by means of which. — 
ἀντιπόάσχειν: with κίνδυνος (G. 261, 1); sc. εἴη ἄν. 

18. ἐπυτίθεσϑαι : with émurnSelwv. — ἀπορεῖν dv (= ἀποροῖμεν ἄν) : cf. 
note on ὃ 16, and ἀπορεῖν in ὃ 17, and note. — τοσαῦτα : with a gesture. 
— ὄντα, though they are. - ὑμῖν ὄντα πορευτέα, must be crossed by you, 
quoted after ὁρᾶτε (G. 280): direct form, ὑμῖν πορευτέα ἐστίν (G. 281, 1). 
Cf. with the active of this const., ὄρη πορεύεσθαι, the note on ὁδόν in i. 2. 
20. — ταμιεύεσθαι, to parcel out, like a steward (ταμίας), and so to have by 
themselves, to deal with at once, etc.; sc. τοσούτους, antec. of ὁπόσοις. 
19. ἀλλά, sti/7.— ὃν κατακαύσαντες (causal).— οὐδ᾽ εἰ, not even if: the 

οὐ goes with ἂν δύναισθε ; the δέ (even), with the conditional clause. 











eu 


da 


3 


68 XENOPHON. 


20. ἔχοντες : conditional (note in the next line μηδένα) = εἰ ἔχομεν. 
For εἰ ἔχομεν ἐξελοίμεθα dv, see G. 227, 1. -- ἔπειτα: cf. εἶτα ini. 2. 2b, 
and note. — πῶς dv... ἂν ἐξελοίμεθα (G. 212, 2). — πρός (G. 191, VI. 6, 
aa): 

21. παντάπασι .... ἐστί, but it is characteristic of (belongs to, G. 169, 1) 
those altogether without resources. 

Page 33. — καὶ τούτων, and that too. — οἵτινες ἐθέλουσι : used as if 
ἄποροί εἰσιν, κ. τ. A. preceded ; we should expect simply ἐθέλειν, to be will- 
me, Ck. τ: 6. 6. 

22. ἐξόν, when it was possible, acc. absolute (G. 278, 2). --- οὐκ... ἤλθο- 
μεν, did we not proceed to do it ?— ἔρως, earnest desire : sc. ἐστί, --- τούτου 
refers to οὐκ . . . ἤλθομεν. --- Td... ἰσχυρόν : the whole infin. clause stands 
as an object acc. after the verbal idea in tpws: trans. my desire that I may 
secure the confidence of the Greeks (cf. note oni. 7. 4, end), and with that 
mercenary force (G. 154) with which (G. 188, 5) C. made his expedition . . 
with this (τούτῳ) I may return to the coast, ete. μισθοδοσίας and evep- 
γεσίας (see G. 129, 8) are accusatives. 

23. ὅσα: with χρήσιμοι (G. 160, 1). — ἐστέ, ave by anticipation, and so 
for ἔσεσθε. --- τὰ μὲν... εἶπας, some you also have mentioned. — τιάραν : a 
steeple-shaped head-dress of distinguished Persians, worn upright (ὀρθήν) 
only by the King ; when worn by others, the point was bent forward.— tiv 
8’... ἔχοι (sc. ὀρθήν) : as it was the outward sign of royalty to wear the 
tiara upright on the head, so wearing tt upright in the heart means aspiring 
to royal dignity, i. e. bearing the royal symbol in the heart, though not on 
the head. TT. thus intimates his intention to revolt from the King by the 
aid of the Greeks, in order to blind Clearchus to his real plans. 

24. εἶπεν (i. 6. Clearchus) : repeated in ἔφη. --- οὐκοῦν, therefore, in ques- 
tions implies an affirm. answer, and is generally to be rendered by πού then. 
— τοιούτων ὑπαρχόντων, when such grounds exist. — παθεῖν (G. 261, 1). 

25. ot... Aoxayol: in app. to the subj. of βούλεσθε. --- ἐλθεῖν ἐν τῷ ἐμ- 
φανεῖ, i. 6. so that it shall be apparent to both armies that we trust one an- 
other. Cf. ἐν τῷ φανερῷ in i. 3. 21. 

26. σοί (accented) is emphatic.— αὖ, in turn.— ὅθεν, from what quarter. 

27. ἐκ, after, in consequence of, Germ. in Folge. Cf. i. 8. 11. — δῆλός 7 
ἣν οἰόμενος : cf. i. 2. 11. --- πάνυ φιλικῶς διακεῖσθαι, that he was on very 
Sriendly terms with. — ἐκέλευσε (subj. Tio.) : sc. ἰέναι. --- of ἂν ἐλεγχθώ- 
ot: the verb might have been in what other mood? Could ἐκέλευσε have 
been so changed? See G. 247, with n. 2.— διαβάλλοντες (G. 280). — τῶν 
“Ἑλλήνων : with οἵ. -- ol... αὐτούς : cf. dv... αὐτόν in i. 9. 29: αὐτούς is 
added for emphasis. 

28. aire, i. 6. Clearchus. — ὅπως... ἡ (G. 216, 2). 

Page 36. — 29. ἔχειν τὴν γνώμην, to be devoted.— τοὺς παραλυποῦντας, 
troublesome rivals (note the prep.). — ph ἰέναι, μηδὲ πιστεύειν (G. 260, 1): 
the underlying idea is that of a command, not that of a statement of fact. 

30. ἰσχυρῶς κατέτεινεν, insisted strenuously.— ἔστε διεπράξαντο (G. 239, 
1). — ὡς εἰς ἀγοράν, i. 6. without arms. 





ANABASIS 2, vr. 69 


; 
32. ἀπό, at. —ot ἔνδον, of ἔξω (G. 141, ν. 32). — ᾧτινι πάντας : οἵ i. 
1. 5, and note. 
33. ἱππασίαν : force of the suff.? — ἠμφεγνόουν (ἃ. 105, 1, N. 3). — εἰς 
τὴν γαστέρα : the accusative with reference to the motion of the weapon. 
36. εἴ tis... λοχαγός, i. 6. whatever general or captain there was (G. 248, 
1), direct εἴ τίς ἐστιν, suggests the subject of προσελθεῖν. --- ἀπαγγείλωσι : 
why subjunctive ? 
37. τῶν ‘EAArjvev: depending on the proper names. — στρατηγοὶ μὲν, 
σὺν αὐτοῖς δέ: the first two are contrasted, as generals, with Xenophon. — 
Eievoav : cf. ili. 1. 4 sy. — τὰ περί, the fate of. 
Page 37%. — 38. ἔστησαν εἰς ἔπήκοον, got within hearing distance. — 
ἔπιορκών, λύων (G. 280).— ἔχει τὴν δίκην, has received his deserts. — αὐτοῦ 
(G. 142, 4, N. 3). — ἀπαιτεῖ (G. 164). — ἑαυτοῦ (ἃ. 169, 1). — elvar: se. τὰ 
ὅπλα. --- δούλου : cf. i. 7. 3, and note. 
89. ἔλεγε δὲ Κλεάνωρ : ef. ii. 8. 21.--- Ορχομένιος, of Orchomenus, a city 
οἵ Boeotia, famous in the ancient legends of the Minyae. — οἱ ἄλλοι : in 
app. to ὑμεῖς understood, you others. Cf. ὃ 25. — θεούς, ἀνθρώπους : cf. ii. 
3. 22, and note. — οἵτινες ἀπολωλέκατε, ἔρχεσθε : causal (G. 238). — ἡμῖν; 
with ὀμόσαντες ; cf. ois, below. — τοὺς αὐτούς (sc. ἡμῖν), the same that we 
should: the position of ἡμῖν expressed forbids its being taken with τοὺς 
αὐτούς. — φίλους καὶ ἐχθρούς (ἃ, 137, N. 4). — νομιεῖν (G. 110, I]. N. 1¢). 
- τοὺς ἄλλους ἡμᾶς, the rest of us. 

40. γάρ, (we are not that) for. — émBovdrctov: cf. i. 6. 8. 

41. ἐπὶ τούτοις, wpon this. — ei... Ave (G. 221). — Πρόξενος, Μένων : 
in emphatic position before ἐπείπερ : we should render, but as to P. and 1-, 
since indeed they are, etc. — εὐεργέται : force of the suffix ? 
























CHAPTER VI. 


Biographical Sketches of the Five Generals. 


Synopsis: Of the five generals, who after their seizure are taken to Babylon 
and beheaded, Clearchus was the most prominent ; a man well qualified for war 
and fond of it (1). He fought during the Peloponnesian War against the Athe- 
hians, and at its close undertook an expedition to Thrace (2). When ordered to 
return by the Ephors, he disobeyed (3) and was condemned to death. Being 
now an exile, he went to Cyrus and received from him 10,000 darics (4), with 
which he collected an army and plundered the Thracians until summoned to 
Asia (5). Summary of the evidence that he was fond of war (6) and fitted for 
it (7). As evidence that he was fitted for command, notwithstanding his gloomy 
and harsh, disposition, he was skilful in providing supplies for his army and an 
excellent disciplinarian (8-10). In time of danger his soldiers willingly obeyed 
him, but left him, when the peril was over, for a general of less harsh disposi- 
tion (11, 12). No one was personally attached to him, but his troops were ex- 
cellent soldiers (13, 14). He was about fifty years of age when he died (15). —. 
_ Proxenus was ambitious from boyhood (16). He joined Cyrus, hoping to gain 
Wealth, influence, and a great name (17), but was unwilling to acquire any of 


70 XENOPHON. 


these by unjust means (18). He was able to command well-disposed men, but 
could not inspire ordinary soldiers with fear or respect; he was thirty years 
old when he died (19, 20). — Menon was avaricious, stooping to perjury, false- 
hood, and deceit to gain his ends (21, 22). He respected and spared an enemy 
because he was dangerous, but ridiculed and plundered his friends (23, 24). 
He respected perjury and injustice, but looked upon the pious and truthful as 
fools (25). He took pride in deceit and ridicule of friends (26), and sought to be 
honored and courted by showing his power and willingness to do wrong (27). Even 
in extreme youth he was notoriously licentious (28). He was not put to death 
with the others, but died like a malefactor, after being tortured alive for a whole 
year (29). — Agias and Socrates were both courageous in war and faithful to 
their friends ; and at the time of their death each was thirty-five years old (30). 


1. μέν: cf. μέν in 1. 10. 19, and note. — οὕτω, so, as above described. — 
τὰς κεφαλάς (G. 197,1, N. 2, last ex.): the corresp. active constr. would be 
αὐτοῖς ἀποτέμνουσι Tas κεφαλάς. --- εἷς : in app. to (part of) στρατηγοί. --- 
μέν : correl. to δέ in § 16. --- ὁμολογουμένως ἐκ πάντων, as was agreed by 
(cf. ἐκ ini. 1. 6) ald. — αὐτοῦ (G. 182, 1; 180, 1). — δόξας γενέσθαι, i. 6. 
who appeared to have been (lit. to have become or to have shown himself). — 
Cf. with this section i. 9. 1. 

2. πόλεμος : the Peloponnesian War (431-404 8. c.). 

Page 38. — τοὺς “Εἰλληνας : the Greek colonists in the Thracian Cherso- 
nesus. — διαπραξάμενος παρὰ τῶν ἐφόρων, having secured (his object) from 
the Ephors. — ὡς πολεμήσων : cf. 1. 1. 11, and note. 

3. μετα-γνόντες πῶς, changing their mind for some reason. — &p-opor 
(over-seers), Ephors. —’Io®p0d: of Corinth.— ᾧχετο πλέων : cf. ᾧχετο ἀπε- 
λαύνων in ii. 4. 24, and note. 

4. ἐθανατώθη, was condemned to death (G. 130, 3): cf. θάνατος, θνήσκω, 
— τελῶν, magistrates, the ἔφοροι. --- ἄλλῃ: no such arguments (λόγοις) are 
. given in the Anabasis. Cf. i. 1. 9, andi. 3. 8, 4. — δαρεικούς : cf. note on 
1:18] 

5. ῥᾳθυμίαν, a life of case (ῥάδιος and θυμός). --- ἀπὸ... χρημάτων : cf. 
i. 1. 9.— ἀπὸ τούτου, from this time on.— ἔφερε καὶ ἦγε, plundered, or pil- 
laged : φέρω properly of objects that can be carried off, ἄγω of cattle ; Lat. 
ferre et agere. — πολεμῶν διεγένετο, went on warring (G. 279, 1). 

6. φιλο-πολέμου (G. 131, 1): cf. πολεμικός (W. 55, 1, 2, a) in § 7. — 
ὅστις αἱρεῖται: cf. οἵτινες ἐθέλουσι in ii. 5. 21, and note. — ἐξόν : cf. 11. 5. 
22. —aicytvn, βλάβη (see G. 129, 1). — atpetrar, chooses. — ὥστε πολε- 
μεῖν, 1. 6. provided that he may be (laboring) in war (G. 266, 2). — εἰς παι- 
δικά, wpon a favorite, — ϑαπανᾶν, to make outlays. 

7. ταύτῃ, herein, in these regards. — ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός, by day or night 
(indifferently, G. 179, 1). — ἄγων : like the two adjectives, with ἣν, ready 
to lead. — πανταχοῦ πάντες : cf. 11. 5. 7, and note. 

8. ὡς δυνατὸν... εἶχεν, so far as was possible with (i. e. for a man of) 
such a temper as he certainly (kat) had. — ds... ἄλλος : cf. i. 8. 15, and 
note. — ὅπως ἔχοι (G. 217, N. 1). — αὐτῷ (G. 184, 3, N. 6). — ἐμποιῆσαι 
τοῖς παροῦσιν, fo inspire in those present (the feeling). — ὡς πειστέον εἴη = 
ὡς δέοι αὐτοὺς πείθεσθαι, that they must obey (G. 248; 281, 2). 























ANABASIS 2, v1. 71 


9. ἐκ rod... εἶναι, by being severe (G. 262, 1; 138, N. 8).— ὁρᾶν (sce G. 
261, 2).— ὡς (G. 266, 2, N. 1). 

Page 69. — ἔσθ᾽ ὅτε, sometimes, lit. there is when: cf. ἐνίοτε just pre- 
ceding (G. 152, N. 2), and the note on fv... οὕς ini. 5. 7. — γνώμῃ, on 
principle, systematically : note καί before γνώμῃ.--- ἀκολάστου, widisviplined. 
—orpatevparos... ὄφελος : cf. i. 3. 11. 

10. λέγειν αὐτὸν ἔφασαν: Xen. states the facts not on his own authority. 
Cf. i. 9. 23. — τὸν ἄρχοντα, his commander, — εἰ μέλλοι, if he were either 
to, ete. (G. 247): the dir. form would be δεῖ hoBeto Gar... εἰ μέλλει, Kk. τ΄ A, 
— φυλακάς : why 800.  --- ἀ-προφασίστως (πρό-φασις), boldly, promptly, 
lit. without making excuses. 

11. τὸ στυγνόν, the sternness, gloom (G. 139, 2): cf. τὸ χαλεπόν and τὸ 
ἐπίχαρι, below.— φαιδρόν : prec. to φαίνεσθαι. --- ἐν τοῖς προσώποις (poetic 
plural): connect with τὸ στυγνόν. -- ἐρρωμένον, soincihing strong or vigor- 
ous; like vigor. 

12. ὅτε γένοιντο (G. 233). — πρὸς ἄλλον ἀρχομένους ἀπιέναι, i. 6. to Go 
away into the service of another. — διέκειντο, were disposed. The active is 
expressed by διατίθημι G. 1. 5). 

13. καὶ yap οὖν: cf. 1. 9. 8. — τεταγμένοι... κατεχόμενοι (sc. παρεῖναι 
αὐτῷ).- opsipa... ἐχρῆτο (G. 98, N. 2), he found exceedingly obedient, 
i. e. these yielded him tinplicit obedience. 

15. οὐ μάλα ἐθέλειν : as we say, did not like very much. — ἀμφὶ τά: cf. 
the note on εἰς ini. 2. 3. 

16. εὐθύς (G. 277, N. 1). --- Γοργίᾳ : the brilliant rhetorician of Leontini 
in Sicily, who lived about 485-3808. c. His fee (ἀργύριον) was 100 minae 
(about $1,800). 

17. ἐπεὶ συνεγένετο αὐτῷ, aficr he had been his pupil: συνεῖναί τινι often 
means to be one’s pupil or disciple. — thos... πρώτοις, while he was oa 
Jriendiy terms with those of highest rank. — eepyerav: cf. ἀλεξόμενος in 
i, 9. 11. — ζετο κτήσεσθαι, expected to get (G. 246). 

18. ἐπιθυμῶν (G. 277, 5). — ἔνϑηλον ... εἶχεν, he moreover made this 
also evident. 

Page 60. — τῷ δικαίῳ καὶ καλῷ: cf. τὸ στυγνόν in ὃ 11, and note. 
The principle of G. 139, 2, is illustrated often in this chapter. 

19. καλῶν κἀγαθῶν : as we should say, ‘‘ gentlemen.” See Lidd. and 
Scott, 5. v. καλο-κἀγαθός. --- aida ἑαυτοῦ, respect for himself (G. 167, 3).— 
στρατιώταις (G. 187, end; 184, 1). Cf. 8 8. -- στρατιώτας : cf. θεούς in 
i. 5. 39, and note. — φοβούμενος : what use of the part.? See G. 280, n. 1, 
and cf. δῆλος ἢν ἐπιθυμῶν in ὃ 21, and στέργων φανερὸς ἣν and ἔνδηλος 
ἐγίγνετο ἐπιβουλεύων in ὃ 28. See 4150 1. 2. 11, and note. 

20. πρὸς τὸ... δοκεῖν, for being, and having the reputation of being, fit 
to govern (G. 262, 1). This const. occurs several times below. ἀρχικόν 
modifies τινά understood, the subject of the infinitives. — ἔπαινεῖν (dis) : 
subject of ἀρκεῖν (G. 259). — ἐτῶν (G. 169, 3). 

21. μέγιστον : adverbially with δυναμένοις, the most powerful.— ἀδικῶν : 
ef. for the tense the note oni. 5.11. So ἀδικοῦντα in ὃ 20. — μὴ διδοίη 
δίκην, might not pay the penalty : cf. ἔχει τὴν δίκην, ii. 5. 38. 


ΤΣ ΧΕΝΟΡΗΟΝ. 


22. ὧν (G. 152). — τῷ ἠλιθίῳ (G. 186). Cf. note on § 18, above (at the 
end). 

23. τούτῳ, taking up the relative clause, is to be connected in construc- 
tion with émBovdetwv. — ἔνδηλος ἐγίγνετο : how different from ἔνδηλος ἢν 
and ἔνδηλος éyévero ? — οὐδενός (G. 177). — τῶν συνόντων, his associates : 
connect with καταγελῶν ; διελέγετο would require the dative (G. 186). 

24. povos... dv, he thought that he alone (G. 188, N. 8) understood that 
at was (G. 280) easiest. 

26. ἀγάλλεται ἐπί: below, with ἠγάλλετο, we have the simple dative of 
cause), τῷ δύνασθαι, κ. T. A. (G. 262, 2). For the formation of the three 
nouns after ἔπί, expressing quality, see G. 129, 7. — ψευδῆ : from ψευδής, 
not ψεῦδος. 

Page 61, — τῶν ἀπαιδεύτων : partitive; cf. τῶν στρατευομένων, i. 2. 8, 
and note. — διαβάλλων τοὺς πρώτους, by s/andering those who were already 
Jirst (in their friendship). — τούτους : takes up the relative clause. 

27. τὸ... παρέχεσθαι (G. 199, 2): obj. of ἐμηχανᾶτο. An obj. clause 
with ὅπως would be more common (Ὁ. 217).— ἐκ : ef. § 9.— ἠξίου, expected. 
- ἐπιδεικνύμενος (G. 277, 2). — ὅτι δύναιτο καὶ ἐθέλοι ἄν : in direct form 
δύναμαι καὶ ἐθέλοιμι ἄν. --- εὐεργεσίαν δὲ κατέλεγεν, and he accounted it 
against (the person) an act of kindness (G. 129, 3). 

28. τὰ δὴ ἀφανῆ ἔξεστι ψεύδεσθαι, 1. 6. there is room for false statements, 
it is true, about doubtful matters (G. 159). — τάδε, the following. — mapa 
᾿Αριστίππῳ: with ὦν; cf. for the facts stated i. 1. 10, and 1. 2. 6, and 
note. — ξένων (G. 171, 3). — ἥδετο, 1. 6. Ariaeus. 

29. οὐκ ἀπέθανε: to be connected with the genitive absol. above, which 
expresses time (G. 277, 1). — κεφαλάς : cf. § 1, and note. — {ov... ἐνιαυ- 
τόν, after being tortured alive for a year. 

30. Note the interchange of the dual and plural in this section (G. 33, 1). 
— καὶ τούτω: emphatic repetition of the subject in the form of a pronoun. 
— αὐτούς is irregularly inserted before ἐμέμφετο, as this verb cannot govern 
the gen. τούτων, which by its position would naturally be the object of both 
the clauses with οὔτε. --- ἔτη ἀπὸ γενεᾶς, years from birth, years of age. 


The third and fourth books of the Anabasis give an account of the 
retreat of the Greeks, after the loss of their commanders at the river 
Zapatas, through a savage and mountainous country inhabited only 
by barbarians, until they beheld the welcome sight of the sea and 
reached Trapezus, a friendly Greek city on the Euxine. The three 
remaining books continue the narrative of the return of the Greeks 
from the arrival at Trapezus until the union of the Greek force with 
the army of Thibron in Asia Minor in the spring of 399 8.c. From 
the beginning of the third book, Xenophon himself becomes an 
important person in the councils of the Greeks. 











HELLENICA 2, II. 73 


HELLENICA. 


[Book IT.] 


Tue Peloponnesian War lasted twenty-seven years, from Β. σ. 431 
to 404, of which the first twenty are included in the narrative of Thu- 
cydides, and the remainder in the Hellenica of Xenophon. It arose 
from the fear and jealousy felt by Sparta and other Greek states at 
the power and glory of the Athenian Empire, aided by the uneasi- 
ness of the subject allies of Athens herself under what they believed 
to be an oppressive rule. Since the formation of the confederacy of 
Delos in 477 B. c. — which was a defensive union of voluntary allies 
under Athens as presiding city, made to secure the Aegean against 
the possibility of another Persian invasion, — the maritime power of 
Athens had steadily increased, and the smaller states had gradually 
been changed from independent allies to subjects of an imperial city. 
This change is well explained in Chapters XLIV. and XLV. of Grote’s 
History of Greece. The splendor of Athens reached its height under 
Pericles, the most illustrious of her statesmen (who died in 429 8. c.); 
and her Dorian neighbors in Sparta, Corinth, Megara, and Thebes 
were now ready to combine for her destruction. In 432 B. oc. the dis- 
putes between Corinth and Athens about the Corinthian colonies of 
Corcyra and Potidaea gave a plausible pretext for war, and war was 
at once declared. But, as Thucydides tells us, the war arose chiefly 
from the alarm felt by Sparta at the extent of the Athenian power, 
and her dread of its further increase. The war began in the spring 
of 431 8. c.; ‘and it ended in the spring of 404 8. c. with the surrender 
of Athens, which is described in the first extract from the Hellenica. 
The power of Athens had been seriously crippled by the disastrous 
expedition to Syracuse (8. c. 415-413); it was finally broken by the 
destruction of the Athenian fleet at Aegospotami, as related in the 
chapter immediately preceding the narrative here given. 

Aegospotami, or Goat’s River, was a station on the European side 
of the Hellespont, opposite the Asiatic town of Lampsacus, which 
had just been captured by Lysander, the Spartan commander. 
It was “an open beach, without harbor, without good anchorage, 
without either houses or inhabitants or supplies”; and was chosen 
by the Athenian commander, merely to compel Lysander to an 
engagement. Each morning the fleet would cross the strait in line 
of battle, but the Spartan forces kept close under shelter of their port. 
Each day it withdrew to its anchorage, followed only by a few scout- 
boats to watch the disembarking; and then the men would stray on 


74 XENOPHON. 


shore for provisions, as far as Sestos, a few miles below. For five 
days the same scene was repeated. In vain Alcibiades, then living in — 
exile near by, warned the generals of the exposed condition of their 
fleet, and urged that they should at least fall back to the safe and 
friendly harbor of Sestos; he was dismissed with the taunt that they 
were now in command, not he. “At length, on the fifth day, Lysan- 
der ordered the scout-ships, which he sent forth to watch the Athe- 
nians on their return, to hoist a bright shield as a signal as soon ag 
they should see the ships at their anchorage, and the crews ashore in 
quest of their meal.” The moment he beheld this welcome signal, 
he gave orders to his entire fleet to row across the strait as swiftly 
as possible, while the land forces marched along the strand in case 
of need. The fleet was taken by complete surprise. A squadron of 
twelve vessels under Conon, with the sacred ship called Paralos, 
escaped. All the remainder, nearly one hundred and seventy in 
number, were captured on the shore, defenceless, and seemingly with- 
out the least attempt on the part of any one to resist. This sweeping 
victory was won without the loss of a ship, almost without the loss 
ofa man. Of more than thirty thousand prisoners, all the Athenians, 
some three or four thousand, were put to death. It had been charged 
against them that they had resolved, if victorious, to cut off the right 
hands of all their prisoners; and one of their generals, Philocles, had 
put to death the captured crews of two ships, allies of the Lacedae- 
monians, by hurling them headlong from a precipice. Charges like 
these, at the end of a long and obstinate war, account for the vindic- 
tive and bitter temper of the conquerors. (See Grote, Ch. LXV.) 

The battle at Aegospotami was fought in September, B. c. 408. 
Byzantium surrendered directly after; Lysander permitting its garri- 
son, with other Athenians found there or elsewhere, to sail to Athens, 
‘‘but nowhere else,” says Xenophon, “for he knew that the more 
there were gathered in the city and Piraeus, the sooner they would 
be brought to straits by famine.” 


II. 3. Παράλου : the Paralos (‘‘ Seaboard”) and the Salaminia were 
two sacred vessels maintained by Athens, and used in the service of the 
government. They carried deputations to the sacred festivals, and em- 
bassies ; and were sometimes used to bring state criminals to Athens, as in 
the case of Alcibiades in 415 8. ο. --- νυκτός (G. 179, 1). — ἣ ξυμφορά 
(= συμφορά), the disaster to the fleet at Aegospotami: ξύν is often used 
for σύν in the older Attic. — Πειραιῶς, the Piraeus was the principal port 
of Athens ; it was fortified, and connected with the city (ἄστυ) which was 
four and a half miles distant by the two long walls of Pericles. (See the 
plan at the end of the volume.) — ὁ repos... παραγγέλλων : we should 
expect the gen. absol., but the nominative is in apposition with the 











HELLENICA 2, 11. 75 


nominative implied in the verbal noun οἰμωγή (as if ᾧμωΐον had been 
used). 


Page 62. — πενθοῦντες, agreeing with the subject implied in οὐδείς, as 
if it had been, all were sleepless. —mweloer Bar, that they were to suffer 
(G. 246). —ota ἐποίησαν : see G. 247 (last example) and Ν. 2. —My- 
Alovs: Melos, a Spartan colony, had been subjugated by Athens in 416 B. c.; 
the men of military age were put to death, and the women and children 
were enslaved. 


4, ἔδοξε, they voted, lit. it pleased them : the expression is the same which 
was used in the Athenian decrees, ἔδοξε τῇ βουλῇ καὶ τῷ δήμῳ. --- ἀποχῶσαι 
(Vv. ἀποχώννυμι), to block the channel. —wepl ταῦτα, thus enployed. 


5. ναυσίν (G. 188, 5). --- κατεσκευάσατο, es/ablished, i. 6. in the form of 
*‘an oligarchy of ten native citizens, chosen from among his most daring 
and unscrupulous partisans, to govern in conjunction with the Lacedaemo- 
nian harmost.” — τὰ ἐπὶ Θράκης, often without χωρία, a common expres- 
sion for the coast of Thrace. 


6. ἀφειστήκει, had (already) revolted. —’A@nvatwv (gen. governed by 
ἀπο- in ἀφειστήκει, G. 193), from the Athenians. — σφαγὰς... ποιή- 
σαντες, having made a massacre of the aristocrats: this massacre took place 
eight years before, but was recent enough to forbid the Samians to hope 
for mercy. 


7. Δεκέλειαν : a post in Attica, whence Agis, the Spartan king, was now 
threatening the city. — ὅτι : understand λέγοντάς τινας, or ἀγγέλλοντας 
after ἔπεμψε. --- προσπλεῖ (G. 243). — τοῦ ἑτέρου, the other of the two kings, 
Agis being one. 





8. ἐν τῇ ᾿Ακαδημίᾳ τῷ καλουμένῳ γυμνασίῳ, the common reading, would 
be an unusual expression for iz the gymnasium called the Academy. Per- 
haps we may insert a comma after ᾿Ακαδημίᾳ, and take the following words 
in apposition with ᾿Α καδημίᾳ, in the Academy, viz. in the gymnasium thus 
named. Many scholars consider the last three words as an interpolation. 
The Academy (i. e. the grove of the hero Academus) was northwest of the 
city, on the Sacred Way leading to Eleusis. It was afterwards made 
famous by Plato, who used it as his place of instruction ; and its name is 
thus a familiar word in all modern languages. 


9. Αἴγιναν : in the first year of the Peloponnesian war (431 B. c.), the 
Athenians expeiled the Aeginetans with their families from their island, 
and the Spartans allowed them to settle in Thyrea. — ἀπέδωκε implies that 
Lysander restored Aegina to its former inhabitants. — ὅσους ἐδύνατο πλεί- 
στους, the greatest number which he was able (to collect), like ὡς πλείστους 
or ὅτι πλείστους. --- ds αὔτως, likewise, adv. of 6 αὐτός, the same. —My- 
Alois: see note on ὃ 3 above. — τῆς αὑτῶν, sc. χώρας (G. 141, N. 4). — 
πρὸς τὸν Ilapara, he came to the Piraeus and anchored there. 


10. τί χρὴ ποιεῖν (G. 243). 


70 XENOPHON. 


Page 63. — ὄντων (G. 277, 2.) --- σωτηρίαν rod μὴ παθεῖν, security 
against suffering, the μή strengthening the negative idea (of prevention) 
implied in σωτηρίαν (G. 263, 1). —@... μικροπολίτας, what they had not 
done for punishment, but had done wnjustly (ἠδίκουν) through insolence to 
men of the small states: & is direct object of ἐποίησαν and cognate object 
of 78ikovv. — οὐδ᾽ ἐπὶ μιᾷ, more emphatic than ἐπ᾽ οὐδεμιᾷ, -- ἐκείνοις, the 
Lacedaemonians. 


11. ἀτίμους ἐπιτίμους ποιήσαντες : they passed a vote of amnesty, 
restoring to full civic rights all who had forfeited any of those rights 
(i. e. who had become ἄτιμοι) either as public debtors or by sentence of the 
law. After this vote, the citizens met in the acropolis and pledged them- 
selves to harmony. — ἀποθνησκόντων (G. 277, 5.) — ἔχοντες, keeping. — 
ἐπὶ τούτοις, on these conditions. ἥν 

12. εἶναι, sc. ἔφη. --- κύριος αὐτός (G. 186, Ν. 8 α) : αὐτός is adjective 
pronoun, himself (145, 1). 

13. πλησίον τῆς Λακωνικῆς : as Sellasia is generally said to be in La- 
conia, πλησίον should perhaps be omitted here. — ota, sc. τοιαῦτα. --- at- 
τόθεν, instantly. — εἰ δέονται (G. 247). — τι, at all, — κάλλιον (G. 75). 


14. ἧκον (G. 200, N. 3). — ἐνέπεσε, ν. ἐμπίπτω. --- ἕως dv πέμπωσιν, 
while they should be sending (G. 247 ; 202, 1): ἕως πέμποιεν might have 
been used. 


15. Λακεδαιμονίοις, dat. with εἰρήνην ποιεῖσθαν (G. 186, nN. 1). —ép’ 
ols προεκαλοῦντο, on the terms which they offered (G. 153, N. 1). — ἑκάτε- 
pov, i. 6. each of the two long walls leading to the Piraeus ; see note on 
§ 20, below. — μὴ ἐξεῖναι depends on the verbal force of ψήφισμα 
(G. 261, 1, N.). 

16. εἰ βούλονται, ἐγ they wished (G. 247): the direct form of the sen- 
tence following ὅτι would be, εἰ βούλεσθέ με πέμψαι, ἥξω εἰδὼς πότερον 
ἀντέχουσι, &c. — Λακεδαιμονίους is by anticipation object of εἰδώς, in- 
stead of being subj. nominative of ἀντέχουσι. --- ἤ connects βουλόμενου 
(G. 277, 2) to πίστεως ἕνεκα (in order to secure good fuith). 





Page 64. — ὅ τι τις λέγοι, whatever any one might propose (G. 248). — 
ὁμολογήσειν (G. 202, 3, N.). 

17. τέως, for some time. — κατέχοι and κελεύοι are instances of the rare 
imperfect optative, representing κατεῖχε and ἐκέλευε of the direct discourse, 
which would regularly be retained in such cases (G. 243, N. 1). — εἶναι, 
sc. ἔφη. --- κύριος (G. 136, N. 3a). — dv ἐρωτῷτο, of what he (Lysander) 
was asked (G. 153, N. 1), the direct form being ὧν ἐρωτῶμαι (indic.). — 
δέκατος αὐτός, a common expression for one of ten, generally applied to the 
principal person in the number mentioned. 


18. ἀγγελοῦντα (G. 277, 3) ὅτι ἀπεκρίναιτο, to inform them that he had 
replied, &c. (the message was ἀπεκρίνατο Δύσανδρος, &c. ). 


19. ἐπὶ τίνι λόγῳ, in what capacity. — καλεῖν ἐκέλευον, gave orders to 





HELLENICA 2, 111. 77 


summon them. — μὴ σπένδεσθαι, [urging] to make no terms. — ἐξαιρεῖν, 
80. τὴν πόλιν. 


20. οὐκ ἔφασαν .. . ἀνδραποδιεῖν, refused to [said they would not] en- 
slave, ἄς. It is said that, when a Theban delegate advocated the destruc- 
tion of Athens, a Spartan replied, that he would not put out one of the 
eyes of Greece, and leave her ἑτερόφθαλμον. The same argument was used 
at Athens in favor of helping Sparta, after the battle of Leuctra, in 
371 B. c. — ἀνδραποδιεῖν (G. 110, 11. x. 1 6). --- ἐποιοῦντο, offered to inake 
(G. 200, N. 2). --- ἐφ᾽ &.. . ἕπεσθαι (G. 267). — τὰ μακρὰ τείχη : probably 
only the two long walls leading to the Piraeus are meant ; as the third or 
Phaleric wall, leading to the old port of Phalerum, was now of less account, 
since the Piraeus had been strongly fortified and connected with the city 
by two walls. — καθέντας (v. καθίημι), restoring. — τὸν αὐτόν, &c., lit. 
regarding as foe and friend the same with the Lacedaemonians. 


21. μὴ ἥκοιεν, lest they might have come (G. 200, N. 3; 202, 2). --- οὐ 
γὰρ ἔτι ἐνεχώρει μένειν, for there was no longer room (χώρα) for delay. 





22. ἐφ᾽ ois... ποιοῖντο, the terms on which (they said) the L. offered to 
make peace ; ποιοῖντο representing ποιοῦνται of the direct form (G. 248, 4): 
see ἐποιοῦντο in ὃ 20, above. 


Page 65. — ὑπ᾽ αὐλητρίδων, to the music of flute-girls. 


III. 1. τῷ ἐπιόντι ἔτει, the year beginning at midsummer 404 B. c., 

the first year of the ninety-fourth Olympiad. —6v . .. οὐκ ὀνομάζουσι, whom 

| the Athenians do not name, i. e. among the ἄρχοντες ἐπώνυμοι : the first of 

| the nine Archons gave his name to the year, whence he was called the 

| Eponymus. — ἀναρχίαν : the word ἀναρχία was entered in the public 

records for this year instead of the name of Pythodorus. — There are 

strong reasons for believing all of § 1, except τῷ δ᾽ ἐπιόντι ἔτει, to be an 

interpolation ; it will be seen that the other words break the construction 

of the sentence, which becomes grammatical only by taking to... ἔτει 
with ἔδοξε in § 2. 


2. ἔδοξε τῷ δήμῳ, the people voted: see note on II. 4, above. —of... 
ξυγγράψουσι (G. 236, N. 3), who were to compile, &c.: see note on ὃ 1|, 
below. 


The omitted sections (4-10) refer to matters in Thessaly and Syracuse 
(under the tyrant Dionysius), to the surrender of Samos to Lysander, and 
to Lysander’s return to Sparta. 

11. ἐφ᾽ ᾧτε ξυγγράψαι (G. 267), equivalent to of ξυγγράψουσι in 8 2. — 
πολιτεύσοιντο is an indirect statement (G. 248, 4) of the idea of the Athe- 
nians in choosing the Thirty: in § 2 the indicative of the direct form is 
retained. For the middle voice, see G. 199, N. 1. — ἀεὶ ἔμελλον, they con- 
tinually delayed. 


12. ζῶντας and ὄντας (G. 246 ; 280). — βαρεῖς, odiows. — ὑπῆγον Ga- 
varov, arraigned capitally (G. 178, last example). — αὐτῶν (G. 173, 2, N. ). 











78 XENOPHON. 


Page 66. — ὅσοι ξυνήδεσαν ... ὄντες (G. 280, N. 2). 


13. ὅπως dv ἐξείη... . ὅπως βούλοιντο, how they might get the power to treat 
the city as they pleased ; indirect question, representing πῶς ἂν ἐξείη ἡμῖν τῇ 
πόλει χρῆσθαι ὅπως βουλοίμεθα (G. 245 ; 247, N. 3). The first ὅπως is 
an indirect interrog itive (like πῶς) ; the second is relative (G. 282, 4). — 
φρουροὺς σφίσι Evprpagar ἐλθεῖν, to help bring it about that guards should 
come to them, i. 6. to aid in having guards sent them: σφίσι refers to the 
Thirty (G. 144, 2). —@ws ... καταστήσαιντο (G. 239, 2; 248, 3). — 
θρέψειν (G. 17, 2, N.; 203, N. 2). --- Compare αὐτοῖς πεμφθῆναι with 
σφίσιν ἐλθεῖν above: as Δύσανδρος is subject of ξυνέπραξεν, σφίσιν would 
have been incorrect here. 


14. ds... πράττοιεν (G. 248, N.): the idea of the Thirty was ὧς πάντα 
ἐπαινῇ ἃ ἂν πράττωμεν (or ἃ πράττομεν), that he may praise everything 
which we may do (or everything which we do). — τῶν φρουρῶν, depending 
on the omitted antecedent of ovs. — ἥκιστα. .. ἀνέχεσθαι, representing 
ἥκιστα ... ἀνέχονται, they [are men who] least endure being thrust out 
(unless ἄν is omitted by accident before ἀν-έχεσθαι, or unless ἄν in the 
next clause affects ἀνέχεσθαι also). — πλείστους dv... λαμβάνειν, would 
get most adherents (G. 211): the protasis is expressed in ἐπιχειροῦντας, 
= εἰ ἐπιχειροῖεν (G. 226, 1). 

15. ἐπὶ τὸ... ἀποκτείνειν (G. 262, 1). —&re... φυγών, inasmuch as | 
he had been exiled (G. 277, N. 2): φεύγειν often means to be exiled ; hence | 
ὑπὸ τοῦ δήμου follows, as if the verb were passive (G. 197, 1).—e τις | 
ἐτιμᾶτο ... εἰργάζετο, in case one was honored, tc. depends as protasis on | 
ἀντέκοπτε λέγων, and not on εἴη : if it belonged to the indirect discourse 
after ὅτι, we should expect τιμῷτο or τιμᾶται, &c. 


16. οἰκείως ἐχρῆτο, treated as a friend. — ὅτι οὐκ ἐγχωροίη, that it was 
not possible (lit. there was no room). — ph οὐις ἐκποδὼν ποιεῖσθαι, not to pub | 
out of the way (G. 283, 7) + when we should have (affirmatively) éyxopet 
μὴ τοῦτο ποιεῖν, we may have (negatively) οὐκ ἐγχωρεῖ μὴ οὐ τοῦτο ποι- 
civ. — ἧττόν τι belongs to ἐπιμελεῖσθαι. --- ὥσπερ τυραννίδος, as ὦ tyranny: 
the meaning is, if you think that our large number prevents our government — 
from being in spirit a tyranny (properly a rule of one), and from requiring | 
the same vigilance as a tyranny, you are a fool. 





17. δῆλοι, evidently (G. 138, N. 7 ; 280, N. 1). ---ξυνιστάμενοι, banding © 
together (in a threatening way). 


Page 67. -- εἰ μή... λήψοιτο,. . . ἔσοιτο, representing εἰ ph... λή- 
ψεται (G. 223, ν. 1), ἀδύνατον ἔσται (G. 202, 4). --- τις, they (by the 
English idiom) ; for we should say wiless we take for εἰ ph τις λήψεται in 
the direct form. 


18. συρρυείησαν, v. συρρέω. --- καταλέγουσι, register them in the list 
(κατάλογος, catalogue) mentioned in ὃ 20. — τοὺς μεθέξοντας δή, who (as 
they said) were to take part in the administration (G. 277, 3): we might 
have had ot μεθέξουσι (see § 2, above). 





HELLENICA 2, ur. 79 


19. κοινωνοὺς ποιήσασθαι belongs at once with βουλομένους and with 
τρισχιλίους, that, wishing to make the best of the citizens partners, they made 
three thousand of them partners. — τό before πρῶτον belongs to ποιήσασθαι, 
which is the subject of δοκοίη : we should expect another infinitive after 
ἔπειτα δέ, but after the new verb ὁρῶ the construction changes to that of 
the participle (G. 280). — domep... εἶναι, as if this number (three thou- 
sand) must needs be honorable men: ἔχειν ἀνάγκην τινὰ ποιεῖν τι is fo be 
under some necessity of doing something (G. 261,1, κ. 1). For the accusa- 
tive absolute see G. 278, 2, N; for ὥσπερ, G. 277, N. ὃ. --- οἷόν τε εἴη is 
irregularly added, by an entire change in the form of the sentence, as if εἰ 
ἔχοι had been used after ὥσπερ in the preceding clause, instead of the con- 
ditional participle ἔχοντα (G. 277, 4). Here οἷόν te ὄν would have been 
the regular form after ὥσπερ (without et), as if it were possible; εἴη rep- 
resenting et... ἐστίν in the words of Theramenes, as δοκοίη (above) 
represents δοκεῖ, -- γενέσθαι has τινάς understood as its subject, and is fol- 
lowed by σπουδαίους and πονηρούς in the predicate. — κατασκευαζομένους 
is added, by a sort of apposition, to explain πράττοντας. --- ἥττονα τῶν 
ἀρχομένων, weaker than its subjects. 


20. οἱ δ᾽ ἐξέτασιν, &c. The meaning of this obscure description seems 
to be as follows. The Thirty held a general review of all the citizens 
capable of bearing arms; but while the Three Thousand were reviewed 
together in the market-place, the other citizens were scattered over the city 
in small detachments (ἄλλων ἀλλαχοῦ). Then, while the ordinary citizens 
were dismissed for dinner or some other purpose (ἀπεληλύθεσαν), leaving 
their arms stacked at the places of review, a general call to arms was sud- 
denly sounded (κελεύσαντες él ta ὅπλα) ; on which the Spartan garrison 
(φρουροί) and those citizens who understood the plot rushed and seized the 
arms of the unsuspecting citizens before the latter could return and secure 
them. — ἐκεῖνοι, those who were ἔξω τοῦ καταλόγον. --- ἐν τῷ ναῷ, in tle 

temple, i. 6. the Parthenon. 


21. ὡς ἐξόν, since (as they thought) it was in their power (G. 277, N. 2). 
— ὅ τι βούλοιντο (G. 248). — τῶν μετοίκων, resident foreigners, living at 
Athens chiefly for purposes of trade, without political rights ; as many of 
them were rich, they were selected as victims. Lysias (in Eratosth. ὃ 2) 
says that the Thirty seized ten μέτοικοι in this way, including two poor 
men in the number lest the purity of their motives should be suspected. — 
ἀποσημήνασθαι, to confiscate (properly to put a seal upon). 


During this reign of terror, the orator Lysias was arrested by order of the 
Thirty while he was entertaining friends at dinner; but he escaped from 
custody and fled to Megara. His brother Polemarchus, however, was 
arrested in the street by Eratosthenes, one of the tyrants, and was put to 
death without trial, and without so much as hearing the offence with which 
he was charged. The house of Polemarchus was plundered, even the 
golden ear-rings were torn from the ears of his wife, and his family were 
dependent on the charity of friends for the means of giving him a decent 





50 XENOPHON. 

ὯΝ 
burial. Lysias describes these terrible scenes in his oration against Εταΐοβ- 
thenes, whom he afterwards prosecuted for the murder of Polemarchus. 


22. ὅντινα βούλοιτο (G. 248, 1): this use of the optative must not be 
confounded with that seen in παρ᾽ ov λαμβάνοιεν, below (G. 233). — φά- 
σκοντας, while we declare. 


Page 68. — μηδέν (G. 283, 4). — τῷ παντί, in every way. 


23. ἐμποδὼν τῷ ποιεῖν (G. 262, 2; 185). — ἰδίᾳ... ἄλλος πρὸς ἄλλον, 
privately ; one to this man, one to that. 


24. πλέονας τοῦ καιροῦ, more than ts fitting (lit. seasonable). — μεθί- 
στανταῖι, are changing. — ois... μεθιστᾶσι, those who are changing (the 
government). — διὰ rd... εἶναι, because the city is; διὰ 7d... τεθράφθαι, 
because the people have been reared (G. 202, 2). 


25. τοῖς οἵοις ἡμῖν, to such as we (G. 153, N. 5). —ot βέλτιστοι, the 
aristocracy (the better class), opposed to the δῆμος, the mass of the people. 


26. ἐὰν αἰσθανώμεθα (G. 225). — ἐκποδὼν ποιούμεθα, put out of our way. 


27. ots δύναται, by whatever means he can. — as δὲ ταῦτα ἀληθῆ, and (as 
a proof) that this is true. See § 33, below. — ἢν κατανοῆτε (G. 223); but 
ὅταν βουλώμεθα (G. 233). — εἰ ἐγίγνωσκε, tf he had this opinion (G. 221), 
has two apodoses, ἣν and ἐνομίζετο ἄν. The latter has its main protasis 
implied in δικαίως, if he were justly estimated, to which it conforms (G. 222). 
See G. 227, 1; and Moods and Tenses, § 54, 1 (a). 


Page 69. — 28. τοῦ δήμου, of the democracy. — rots... εἰς ἡμᾶς, on those 
who were first brought before us (for judgment), follows ἔπιτιθέναι (G. 187). — 
αὐτῷ ἀρέσκει, by anacoluthon, where τοῖς γιγνομένοις ἀρέσκεται would be 
expected. — ἐν τῷ ἀσφαλεῖ, in safety (G. 139, 2). 

29. ὅσῳ... φανεροῦ, by as much as what is secret is harder to guard 
against than what is open. —éy@rov (v. ἐχθρός), more hostile. — οὔτε ἐσπεί- 
σατο οὔτ᾽ ἐπίστευσε, gnomic aorists (G. 205, 2; see N. 1): the subjune- 
tive λαμβάνωσι (G. 233) depends on these aorists, as they are primary 
tenses (G. 201, end). — τοῦ λοιποῦ, for the future (G. 179, 1). 


30. ἀναμνήσω (v. ἀναμιμνήσικω) here takes two accusatives (G. 164) ; 
this verb may also take the accusative and the genitive (G. 171, 2, N. 3). 
κατὰ τὸν πατέρα, i. 6. as his father had been. — τοὺς τετρακοσίους, the 
oligarchy of the Four Hundred was established in Athens in 411 8. ¢. ; it 
lasted only four months. See Grote, Chap. LXII. — ἀντίπαλόν τι τῇ 
ὀλιγαρχίᾳ, a party hostile to the oligarchy. 


31. κόθορνος, a high buskin, worn by tragic actors: see the cut in 
Smith’s Dict. of Antiq. s. v. Cothurnus. — ἀποβλέπει, it is adapted to both 
feet, as the man who is said to resemble it has an eye to both sides. — 
ἄνδρα τὸν ἄξιον ζῆν, the man (who is) jit to live (G. 142, 2). — od... ξύν- 
ovtas: οὐ belongs to εἶναι, and προάγειν depends on δεινόν. --- ἕως ἂν εἰς 
οὖρον καταστῶσιν, until they get into fair sailing (G. 239, 2; 299). --- 
ἐπειδάν τι ἀντικόψῃ : we should expect the optative, by assimilation to 








HELLENICA 2, 111. 81 


πλέοιεν (G. 235), and we must translate it like one. See Greek Moods and 
Tenses, ὃ 34, 1 (6). 

32. SH ov, no ἀοιιδί. --- πλείστοις, . . ἀπολωλέναι, you are in part to 
blame that very many who were on the side of oligarchy have perished at the 
hands of the people : αἴτιός τινί τινος means the cause of something to some 
one; and αἴτιος may take the simple infinitive (G. 261, 1) as here, or the 
infinitive with τοῦ (G. 262, 2). 


Page 750. — ἀνελέσθαι (Vv. dvatpéw), to take up or recover. — ναυμαχίᾳ, 
the sea-fight at Arginusae, B. c. 406, in which the Athenian fleet was vic- 
torious, but sailed away leaving, besides the slain, more than a thousand 
perishing upon the wrecks: the commanders were afterwards brought to 
trial before the people, and six of them sentenced to death, for this neglect ; 
but the trial was hasty and informal, and their execution was regarded by 
many as a public crime. — ἀπέκτεινεν αὐτούς, caused their death: Thera- 
menes, who was one of the commanders, joined in the accusation of the 
others. 

33. τοῦ πλεονεκτεῖν, gain; τοῦ καλοῦ, honor. — τούτου, gen. after φεί- 
σασθαι, v. φείδομαι (G. 171, 2). — ἡμᾶς ταὐτό, the same to us (G. 165). 


34. καλλίστη : Critias, who was a very able man, a kinsman of Plato 
and a friend of Socrates, wrote a treatise on the excellence of the Spartan 
constitution. —dvtl... πείθεσθαι, instead of yielding to the majority. — 
τοῖς πραττομένοις, the acts of the government. — ἄν before οἴεσθε belongs 
to ἀξιωθῆναι (G. 211). — πολλοὺς . .. ὑμῖν, would make many of those who 
hold views (γυγνωσκόντων) hostile to you haughty. — τῶν ἔξω, the political 
exiles, those who afterwards restored the democracy. 


35. ἀποκτεῖναι (G. 203). — οὐκ ἦρχον κατ᾽ ἐκείνων λόγου, i. 6. my 
charge against them did not begin the οοτιγουογϑῃ. ---- προσταχθέν, when it 
was ordered (G. 278, 2). — ἀπολογούμενος, alleging in defence. — οὐδέ, not 
even. — pr ὅτι, not to say, much less. — oka... λέγειν, was acknowledged 
to have spoken (seemed to speak) reasonably. 


Page 71. — προέμενοι, v. mpolnpr. — ἀπολέσθαι (6. 265). — ἀποπλέ- 
οντες ᾧχοντο, sailed away (G. 279, 4, N.). 

36. παρανενομηκέναι, has acted unlawfully (i. 6. in accusing me) ; for 
which some editors suggest the milder trapavevonkévat, has erred in judg- 
ment. — πενέστας, serfs (like the Laconian Helots) : the charge of exciting 
a democratic revolt would be particularly galling to a proud aristocrat like 
Critias. 

37. ὧν, sc. ἐκείνων, depending on pydév. — μηδὲν... γένοιτο, may noth- 
ing of the kind be done here? — ὑμᾶς, obj. of παῦσαι, depose you (see ὃ 43, 
below). — δίκαιον εἶναι explains τάϑε, the obj. of spodoya. — εἰ κατανοή- 
cere, see last note on ὃ 31. ; 

88, μέχρι... καταστῆναι, until you were established in the magistracy 
(βουλείαν) : μέχρι τοῦ belongs also to ἀποδειχθῆναι and ὑπάγεσθαι ; but 
With ὑπάγεσθαι, μέχρι must be translated while. — Νικηράτου, son of the 
famous Nicias, who fell in Sicily 8, c. 413. 


wn 


82 XENOPHON. 


40. ὑπόπτως ἕξοιεν, would be suspicious (G. 202, 4). --- ἕκαστον, see 
§ 21. — τούτων ἀπολομένων (G. 226, 1) represents the protasis to ἔσοιντο: 
in the direct form, ἐὰν οὗτοι ἀπόλωνται, πολέμιοι ἔσονται. 


Page 72. — 41. παρῃροῦντο, took away (see § 20, above). — Saas... 
ὠφελεῖν, in appos. with τούτου ἕνεκα (G. 215, Rem.). — μηδέν, in nothing. 
— ev yap, &c., for if they had wanted that, they might have left no one 
(G. 222, N. 2) by distressing [the city] with famine a Little longer (ἔτι) : 
πιέσαντας agrees with the understood subj. of λιπεῖν (G. 138, nN. 8 δ). 


42. οὐκ αὖ ἐδόκει por, again, I did not approve. — τὸ ἀντίπαλον, the op- 
position, of which the head-quarters were with the exiles. — οὕτως, in this 
way, referring to the following protasis. — et... προσγενήσοιντο.... φα- 
νήσοιντο : μέν and δέ show that εἰ belongs to both verbs. In the direct 
form fhe protasis would have the fut. indic. (G. 223, n. 1). 


44. ἃ ἐγὼ λέγω and @ οὗτοι πράττουσιν are subj. of γίγνεσθαι. --- ἄν 
belongs to βούλεσθαι (G. 211). --- οὗτοι, i. 6. the Thirty, represented by 
Critias. — αὐτούς, 1. 6. the exiles. — χαλεπὸν . . . χώρας, that they think it 
would be hard to get even a footing anywhere in the country: ἡγεῖσθαι, like 
νομίζειν, depends on otpat (αὐτούς) ; and χαλεπὸν ἂν εἶναι (= χαλεπὸν ἂν 
ἣν) depends on ἡγεῖσθαι. 

45. οἷος, [such a one] as, with infin. (G. 261). — ἅ, sc. ἐκεῖνα (α. 160). 


Page 4 9. — τετρακοσίων, see § 30, above. — πάσῃ πολιτείᾳ, any form 
of government (G. 184, 2). 


46. ἐκεῖνοι οὐδὲν ἀνίεσαν, they (the Spartans) relaxed- nothing of their 
hostility. —ot ἀμφὶ, &c. the party of the oligarchy (G. 141, ν. 3). — 
ἔρυμα: this was a fort on the mole (χῶμα) which commanded the entrance 
of the harbor of Piraeus, built under pretence of defending the city from a 
hostile fleet, but really to introduce a Lacedaemonian force to uphold the 
tyranny of the Four Hundred. —tq’ αὐτοῖς ποιήσασθαι, make subject to 
themselves, 

47. ἀποκαλεῖ, nicknames. — ὧς πειρώμενον, because (as he says) I try. 
— τί ποτε, what in the world ? 

48. οὐ πρόσθεν... πρίν, not... until. — καὶ οἱ δοῦλοι .. . μετέχοιεν, 
until even the slaves, and those who for poverty would sell the state for ὦ 
drachna, should receive a drachma, i. 6. have a seat in the Senate, the pay 
of a senator being a drachma (17 cts.) a day. Or the passage may mean 
simply, until all who would sell the state for a drachma should have an 
opportunity to do so, i. 6. should have a drachma offered them. — εἶναι ἄν 
represents εἴη ἄν, and mplv... peréxorev stands like a conditional relative 
sentence (G. 240, 1, third example). — ot . δ΄ ἂν ἀποδόμενοι (6. 211) is 
equivalent to ἐκεῖνοι ol... ἂν ἀπόδοιντο. --- ἐγγενέσθαι dv (= ἐγγένοιτο 
ἄν), could arise or be formed. — εἰς TO... τυραννεῖσθαι, lit. into the [con- 
dition of] being under the tyranny of a few. —vd μέντοι . . . πολιτείαν, 
but with the help of the powerful, both by horses and by shields, to aid the 
government (I say) by these means; all this is the subject of εἶναι, if the 





HELLENICA 2, III. 83 


text is correct. But διὰ τούτων is thus a mere repetition of what precedes, 
and the words have probably been corrupted in copying. 

49. ἐὰν... éheyx0O... mpdrtwv... πεποιηκώς, if J am (shall he) con- 
wicted of doing... or of having done (G. 280): the apodosis δικαίως ἂν 
ἀποθνήσκειν, that I should justly die, has another protasis implied in 
παθών (= εἰ πάθοιμι) ; see note on ὃ 27, above. —éryatétara (double 
superlative), extremest. 

50. SHAn... ἐπιθορυβήσασα, let it be seen that it applauded with favor 
(G. 280, Nn. 1). 


Page '74. — εἰ ἐπιτρέψει : some MSS. have ἐπιτρέψοι, corresponding to 
ἀποφεύξοιτο (see G. 247, N. 1). — οὐ βιωτόν, intolerable. — tots... ἔχον- 
ras, the young men mentioned in ὃ 23. — φανερῶς τῇ βουλῇ (G. 185). — 
δρυφάκτοις, the railing, which separated the Senate from the spectators. 


51. προστάτου.... οἵου Set, that it is the duty of a leader who is what he 
ought to be (for τοιούτου οἷον εἶναι Set). — ὃς Gv... μὴ ἐπιτρέπῃ, not to per- 
mit: irregular for rd... μὴ ἐπιτρέπειν. --- οἵδε, the young men above 
mentioned. — τῶν ὄντων, dep. on μηϑένα. --- κυρίους θανατοῦν, competent to 
put to death. — ξυνδοκοῦν, since it is agreed on (G. 278, 2). 

52. ‘Eoriav: the altar of Hestia (Vesta), the Goddess of the Household, 
“**the senatorial hearth, the altar and sanctuary in the midst of the Senate 
house.” — ἐπὶ Κριτίᾳ, in the power of Critias. 

53. ὑμῶν, obj. of θαυμάζω (G. 171, 2). — Kal ταῦτα γιγνώσκοντες, and 
that too, when you kiiow. — οὐδέν (G. 160, 2). --- τὸ ὑμῶν ἑκάστου, that of 
any one of you. 

54. τοὺς ἕνδεκα, the Eleven, who had charge of prisons and executions. 
— ἐπὶ τὸν Θηραμένην, fo seize Theramenes. — ἐκεῖνοι, nom. without verb. 


Page 73. — ov δεῖ, to the proper place, with ἀπαγαγόντες. --- τὰ ἐκ τού- 
tov, what follows from this, 1. 6. execution. 

δῦ. τὸ ἔμπροσθεν, the space in front. 

56. δηλοῦντα οἷα ἔπασχε, proclaiming aloud the treatment he was suffer- 
ing. — otk... οἰμώξομαι, shall 7 not suffer? The word, as used by Saty- 
rus, meant that he would suffer for it if he did not keep quiet. — τὸ λευπό- 
“μενον, i. e. the last few drops of hemlock. — ἀποκοτταβίσαντα, jerking out: 
the κότταβος was a sort of toast, in which the guest flung out a few drops 
of wine, at the same time calling the name of his beloved ; the sound of 
the wine, as it struck the mark aimed at, was accepted as an omen, or sign 
of favor. — ἐκεῖνο τοῦ ἀνδρός, this quality of the man. —é belongs to ἀπο- 
λιπεῖν, in appos. with ἐκεῖνο, 

**The scene just described,” says Mr. Grote, ‘‘is one of the most strik- 
ing and tragical in ancient history. The atrocious injustice by which 
Theramenes perished, as well as the conrage and self-possession which he 
displayed in the moment of danger, and his cheerfulness even in the prison, 
not inferior to that of Socrates three years afterwards, naturally enlisi tle 
warmest sympathies in his favor. But... he was a selfish, cunning, 


84 XENOPHON. 


and faithless man ; ready to enter into conspiracies, yet never foreseeing 


their consequences ; and breaking faith to the ruin of colleagues whom he 
had first encouraged, when he tound them more consistent and thorough- 
going in crime than himself.” : 

IV. 1. προεῖπον μὴ εἰσιέναι, i. 6. excluded or expelled from the city. — 
Hyov, arrested : it was said that as many as fifteen hundred prisoners suf- 
fered death. Among the banished were the most eminent intellectual 
teachers, native or foreign, Socrates being hardly spared. — φευγόντων, 
genitive absolute. — ἐνέπλησαν (v. ἐμπίπλημι), i. 6. the Thirty caused 
Megara, &c. to be filled with the fugitives (ὑποχωρούντων). 

2. as σύν, with αδοιιί. ---- Φυλήν, Phyle, a frontier fortress among the 
hills, on the road to Thebes, about fifteen miles from Athens. 

Page 59. - 3. τῆς νυκτὸς καὶ τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, during the night (G. 179, 1) 
and on the next day (G. 189). — ὑπό, [taken] dy. 

4. λεηλατήσοιεν, would forage (i. e. those in Phyle). —gvAds: the 
Attic army was mustered according to the ten tribes. 

5. συνειλεγμένων (v. συλλέγω), as there were gathered, gen. abs. with 
περὶ ἑπτακοσίους. 

6. ἀνίσταντο, i. 6. the forces of the Thirty. — ὅποι, to [the post] where 
(after ἀνίσταντο, which implies motion), i. 6. each to his own work. — 
ὅπλων, encampment. — ἔστι μὲν ots, some (G. 152, N. 2). 


Page ἃ 2. --8. ἐν τοῖς ἱππεῦσι, under guard of the cavalry. — πόσον 
elev, i. 6. the people of Eleusis. — προσδεήσοιντο (G. 243), how much ad- 
ditiunal garrison they would need (i. 6. in consequence of the seizure of 
Phyle). — τὸν ἀεὶ ἐξιόντα, every one as he went out. — ξυνειλημμένοι 
(v. ovAAapBdve), seized. A similar visit and seizure of prisoners was 
made at Salamis. — τοῖς ἕνδεκα, i. 6. for execution. 


9. ᾿᾽Ωιδεῖον : not the Odeum of Pericles, but the older building near the 
Ilissus, once used as a theatre. — τοὺς ἄλλους, those not mentioned in 
§ 4 and ὃ 6.— ταὐτὰ ἡμῖν, the same with us (G. 159, N. 2; 186, N. 2). 

10. Scots... ἔμελεν, to such as cared only for gain. The number thus put 
to death, says Lysias, was about three hundred. — ἐβοήθουν, went to their 
relief (i. 6. that of their party in Piraeus). — ἔπειτα, i. 6. on approaching 


the Piraeus. — ἀναφέρουσαν, leuding up, i. 6. to the high ground. 


11. μὴ ἀνιέναι αὐτούς, not to let them come up, i. e. upon any of the high 
land of the peninsula. — κύκλος, the whole cirewit of the fortifications which 
surrounded the Piraeus. The name Piraeus was given to the whole penin- 
sula with its three harbors ; this included Munychia, which was the high 
hill on the east side of the peninsula, directly overlooking the smallest of 
the three harbors, the little bay of Munychia. The town of Piraeus occu- 
pied part of the larger lower hill south of the great harbor (the har- 
bor called Piraeus), and extended across the isthmus along the shore, and 
over the low land west and northwest of Munychia, to the place at which 
the two long walls from Athens joined the fortifications of the Piraeus. In | 











HELLENICA 2, Iv. 85 


this northern part of the town of Piraeus was the market-place named for 
Hippodamus of Miletus, who was employed by Pericles to lay out the new 
town of Piraeus. Hippodamus astonished the Athenians by his broad 
straight streets, crossing each other at right angles. One of these was the 
street here mentioned, leading from the great square (the ἀγορά) up the 
hill of Munychia ; on which hill stood the temple of Artemis Munychia 
and that of the Thracian Artemis (Bendis). [On many maps the relative 
positions of Munychia and Piraeus are reversed, and Phalerum is wrongly 
made one of the three harbors of the peninsula of Piraeus. | 


Page 78. — ἐγένοντο... . ἀσπίδων, they formed [a body] not less than ° 
Jifty shields in depth. — ἄνω, upwards, to Munychia. 


12. ἀντανέπλησαν, i. 6. Thrasybulus and his men jil/ed the upper part 
of the same street to oppose them. —ém’ αὐτοῖς, behind them. — αὐτόθεν, 
from that quarter. —év ᾧ, while. — θέσθαι, to rest the shield on the ground. 
-- στάς, taking his stand (not standing) : see G. 200, N. 5 ὁ. 


13. εἰσὶ τῶν προσιόντων, &c., there are among those who are advancing 
against us (G. 169, 1), first, those on the right, whom, &c. — ἡμέραν πέμ.- 
πτὴν, four days ago (G. 161, N.). See Anab, 4, V. 24. — ἀπεσημαίνοντο, 
marked for death: this word usually means fo put ὦ seal on property taken 
for confiscation (see above, 11. 21, with note). — ov, where, explained in 
the next section. 





14. ἔχοντες... καθέσταμεν, we stand in front of them, with arms in our 
hands. —dtv... ξυνελαμβανόμεθα, because we were seized while dining, ke. 
— οἱ δὲ kal, some of us also. — οὐχ ὅπως ἀδικοῦντες, not only when we were 
guilty of no wrong : lit. not to speak of our being guilty of any wrong: in 
full οὐ λέξω ὅπως (= ὡς) ἀδικοῦντες ἐφυγαδευόμεθα. --- χειμῶνα, &c., see 
§§ 3 and 6 (above). 


Page @9.— 15. ἐξιξόμεθα, v. ἐξικνέομαι : it governs the gen. by G. 
171, 1. 


16. ᾧετο ἄν tis, one might suppose (G. 226, 2). --- ἁμαρτήσεται, will 
miss: the object αὐτῶν (antec. of ὦν, § 238) is understood. — δραπετεύ- 
gover, will skulk, a word used in contempt of fugitive slaves. — évaddo- 
μένους, leaping or rushing upon them, agrees with ἡμᾶς, the omitted sub- 
ject of ἀνατρέπειν, instead of agreeing with ἡμῖν understood after ἐξέσται 
(G. 138, n. 8). 


17. ἕκαστός tis... dv, cach man shall be conscious to himself of being 
the main cause of victory (G. 217). --- αὕτη, she, viz. νίκη. --- οἷς εἰσί, to 
those who have them (G. 153, N. 1). — ἡμῶν, gen. part. after of. — ἐπίδωσι 
(G. 232, 3), v. ἐφοράω. --- pvnuelov... τεύξεται, for none so rich, who shall 
win so fair a sepulchre: the construction is idiomatic ; understand οὕτω 
before καλοῦ. --- ᾿Εἰνυάλιον, the God of battles, a name of Ares (or Mars). — 
ἀνθ᾽ ὧν ὑβρίσθημεν, in requital of the insults we have borne: the active 
construction would be, ταῦτα ἡμᾶς ὑβρίζειν (G. 159, ν. 4; 153, N. 1). 





- 
s 


86 XENOPHON. 





















18. ὃ μάντις : the article is used because the prophet or diviner had his | 
official place in the host. — ἔπειδὰν. . . δοκεῖ, the words of the diviner. 


19. τέθαπται, lies buried. — τῶν δέκα, chiefs of the force established by 
the Thirty. — Χαρμίδης : he was an uncle of Plato, from whom one of 
Plato’s dialogues is named. — πολλοί, many [of both parties]. 


Page 90. -- 20. ὁ τῶν μυστῶν κῆρυξ, the herald of the [Eleusinian] 
mysteries, belonging to one of the ancient priestly families. (See Hwmol- 
pidae in Smith’s Dict. of Antiquities). — κατασιωπησάμενος, having pro- 
claimed silence. — fvyyopevtat, companions in the choral dance. 


21. πρός, in the name of. — ὀλίγου Seiv, almost (G. 268). — ἀπεκτόνα- 
σιν, ν. ἀποκτείνω. --- μησίν, v. μήν. --- δέκα ἔτη, the last ten years of the 
Peloponnesian war, the Decelean war. 


22. τῶν ἀποθανόντων, part. gen. after ἔστιν ots. — ἀλλὰ Kal... κατε- 
Saxptoapev, some of them we too greatly lamented. — οἱ λουποί, the survivors 
of the Thirty. 


23. ξυνεκάθηντο, v. συγκάθημαι. --- διεφέροντο, disputed, wrangled. — 
βιαιότερον (sc. τοῦ προσήκοντος), unusually or unduly violent. 


Page SA. — τοῖς τριάκοντα, dat. after πείθεσθαι. ---- τὸ τελευταῖον, final- 
ly (G. 160, 2). — ἐκείνους καταπαῦσαι, to depose them (the Thirty). 


24, *"EXevoivade (G. 61), see § 8, above. — τῶν ἐν ἄστει, those in the 
city (gen. following ἐπεμέλοντο). --- ἐφώδευον, they patrolicd. — τὸ μὲν ἀφ᾽ 
ἑσπέρας (G. 161), after dark. — τὸ δὲ πρὸς ὄρθρον, but towards morning, 
an exception to the preceding statement. 


25. οἵτινες, [to] whoever: understand an antecedent dative after ἔσε- 
σθαι, depending on mora δόντες, giving pledges that all who, &c. should 
have equal rights. The direct discourse would be [πᾶσιν] οἵτινες ἂν Evp- 
πολεμήσωσι, Kal ἐὰν ξένοι ὦσιν, ἰσοτέλεια ἔσεται. 


Many exiles came to their aid, others sent money or arms, — the orator 
Lysias sending two hundred shields and two thousand drachmas in money, 
and hiring, besides, 300 fresh soldiers ; there was one loan of five talents 
in money ($5,400), afterwards repaid by the people. 


26. ἔστιν ὅτε, at times. — λῃστὰς ἐχειροῦντο, roughly handled foragers. 
— Αἰξωνέων, men from Aexone, a town (or deme) on the coast of Attica. 
— πολλῶν ἱππέων, i. 6. many of the men under Lysimachus. 


27. τῶν ἱππέων, possessive gen. (sc. ὄντα) after Καλλίστρατον. 


Page 82. — el δὲ... Set εἰπεῖν, if I may be permitted to speak: the 
apodosis (ἐρῶ, 7. will speak) is omitted. — τοῦ μηχανοποιοῦ depends on 
τοῦτο. --- κατὰ Tov ἐκ Λυκείου δρόμον, over the race-course leading from the 
Lyceum. The Lyceum was a gymnasium just outside of the city walls on 
the east ; and it was used in the next century by Aristotle as his place of 
instruction, as the Academy was used by Plato (see note on II. 8, above). 





HELLENICA 2, rv. 87 


For this reason the word is a familiar one in modern languages, though in 
a somewhat different meaning. — ὅπου βούλοιτο (G. 248). — τοῦ δρόμου, 
partitive gen. after ὅπονυ. --- πράγματα, érouble. 


28. Str... εἴη, that it was possible (not would be): the direct discourse 
was οἷόν τέ ἐστιν . . . ἐὰν ἀποκλεισθῶσιν (G. 229). --- αὐτοῖς, the oligarchy 
at Athens. 

29. μέγα ἐφρόνουν ἐπὶ τῷ Λυσάνδρῳ, were highly elated with hopes of 
Lysander. — προχωρούντων (sc. τῶν πραγμάτων), when matters were thus 
going on. — ei... εὐδοκιμήσοι. .. ποιήσοιτο (G. 248, 2; 226,4, ν. 1). 
πείσας, by consent of. — φρουράν (in its Spartan sense), an armed force. 


Lysander’s selfish policy had already disgusted the general feeling of the 
Greeks ; and a party in Sparta, jealous of his authority, were resolved that 
he should not plant his own creatures a second time as rulers of Athens. 
On his arrival at Athens, Pausanias was beset with prayers for protection 
and redress by those who had suffered from the tyranny of the oligarchs, 
which strongly inclined him to make terms with the patriot party. 


30. ὅτι ἐγίγνωσκον, because they were of opinion: they suspected that 
Pausanias meant to make Attica a separate province of Sparta (οἰκείαν καὶ 
πιστήν). ---Αλιπέδῳ, the low land near Piraeus. 


Page 83. — 31. ἐπὶ τὰ ἑαυτῶν, fo their homes. — ὅσον ἀπὸ βοῆς ἕνεκεν, 
only for appearance’ sake (lit. as far as shouting went, implying with no real 
purpose). One preposition is superfluous, and the simpler ὅσον ἀπὸ βοῆς 
is found in later Greek. — δῆλος . .. dv (G. 280, N. 1). — κωφὸν λιμένα, 
the stell harbor, probably the small cove west of the principal harbor of 
Piraeus. — πῇ εὐαποτείχιστος, i. e. where was the best line for blockading 
the Piraeus (i. e. on the side towards Athens). 


32. évévras (v. ἐνίημι), at full speed, used intransitively. — tots ... 
ἥβης, i. 6. those who had been ten years of the military age ; referring to 
the civic épnBia, which began in the eighteenth year. 


33. ἐπὶ πόδα, backward (without turning). — ot τεθαμμένοι (v. θάπτω) 
ἐν Κεραμεικῷ, i. 6. whose graves are in the Ceramicus. The outer Cerami- 
cus is described by Thucydides as ‘‘the most beautiful suburb” of Athens. 
It was northwest of the city, and the road to the Academy (see note on 
II. § 8, above) passed through it. On this road (as on the Roman Via 
Appia) were many monuments of illustrious men, especially of such as had 
fallen in battle. 

34. ἐπὶ ὀκτώ, eight deep. — ἐξεώσθησαν, v. ἐξωθέω. --- ἐν ταῖς ‘AXdais: 
this must refer to the marshy district at the junction of Piraeus with the 
mainland, not to either of the Attic demes called ‘Adat. 


Page 84. — 35. οὐδ᾽ ὥς, not even under these circumstances: ὥς for 
οὕτως is rare in Attic prose (G. 29, N.). —ota is object of λέγοντας, which 
belongs to πρέσβεις. --- διίστη, divided (by making discord). ‘‘It seems 
plain that this is not a correct account. Pausanias did not create this dis- 


88 XENOPHON. 


cord, but found it already existing, and had to choose which of the parties * 
he would adopt. The peace-party was already uppermost in Athens, and | 


it was both easiest, and most for the Lacedaemonian interest, to follow the 
course he did.” Grote. 


36. νομίζεται, it is according to [Spartan] custom. — ris γνώμης ὄντες, 
being of the opinion. 

37. ἀπὸ τοῦ κοινοῦ, i. 6. those representing the government, the Ten 
($$ 23, 24), the first embassy being sent by Pausanias. — χρῆσθαι ὅ τι 
βούλονται, to deal with as they pleased (G. 248). — ἀξιοῦν, thought Jit. 


38. ἔχειν (G. 267). — ἀπιέναι, &c., i. 6. no man should be molested for 
past acts, except the Thirty, &c. 
39. ϑιῆκε (v. δυίημι), disbanded. 


Page 83. — 40. ἐκ τοῦ ἄστεος ἄνδρες, i. 6. those who had fought against 
Thrasybulus. — γνῶναι ὑμᾶς αὐτούς, to come to know yourselves. — ἐπὶ τίνι 
» +. Gpovyntéov... ὥστε, on what ground you have a right to be (so) pre- 
suming, as, &c, — δικαιοσύνης οὐδὲν ὑμῖν προσήκει, i. 6. you have no claim 
on the score of justice. 


41. ἢ ds, than the manner in which. —ot ye would naturally be the sub- 
ject of otyovrat, but it is disregarded after the clause ὥσπερ. .. παρα- 
διδόασιν, and κἀκεῖνοι is introduced (by anacoluthon) after οὕτω. The sub- 
ject of παραδιδόασιν is τινές understood. — ἀπιόντες (G. 279, 4, N.). 


42. ὦ ἄνδρες : here he addresses his own followers, who had just taken 
the oath in the Acropolis. — od... ἀξιῶ... παραβῆναι οὐδέν, 7 adjure you 
not to violate any part of the oath which you have taken (ὧν οὐδέν = οὐδὲν 
ἐκείνων &). Οὐκ ἀξιῶ sometimes means J ask some one not to do something 
(like οὔ φημι, J deny): here οὐδέν (not μηδέν) merely repeats the negative 
idea expressed in od... ἀξυώ. --- ἐπιδεῖξαι depends on ἀξιῶ (without οὐ). 

43. ἀρχάς, magistrates (authorities) : the chief Archon then chosen, the 
Eponymus of the year 403 — 402, was Euclides, whose year is a famous era 
in Athenian history. — τοὺς ἐν ᾿Βιλευσῖνι : see § 24, above. — ἢ μήν, a 
formula often prefixed to an oath. — μὴ μνησικακήσειν, not to remember 
evil, i. 6. they declared an amnesty (a- and μνῆστις). A part of the oath 
was as follows: καὶ od μνησικακήσω τῶν πολιτῶν οὐδενὶ, πλὴν τῶν τριά- 
κοντα καὶ τῶν ἕνδεκα. --- ὅμου πολιτεύονται, they conduct the government in 
harmony, i. 6. the oligarchical party and the democracy. 


After these events, Athens was still left comparatively weak, dis- 
abled by the loss of her fortifications and of the long walls connect- 
ing the city with the port, until the great naval victory of Conon at 
Cnidus (8. co. 894) enabled him to rebuild the walls, and restore to the 
city something of its ancient glory and strength. 


3 





| 
; 


HELLENICA 7, v. 89 


[Book VII.] 





Tae peace of Antalcidas (8. c. 387) had left Sparta still supreme 
in Greece. But a few years later (8. c. 379) the patriot party in 
Thebes, by a fortunate surprise, expelled the Spartan garrison, and 
made the city independent. Under Epaminondas, her one great gen- 
eral and statesman, Thebes rapidly rose to power; and for nearly ten 
years after the great victory of Leuctra (Β. c. 371) she held the first 
rank among the Grecian states. In 369 8. oc. Epaminondas invaded 
the Peloponnesus, and established Arcadia as an independent power, 
with a strong military frontier against Sparta. It was to secure this 
that the second invasion was made, resulting in the battle of Manti- 
nea, which closed the long period of the domestic wars of indepen- 
dent Greece. The battle of Mantinea was fought in 362 8, c. 

Mantinea was a town about forty miles north of Sparta, and the 
head-quarters of the Peloponnesian army. Tegea was about ten miles 
farther south. Epaminondas had made a rapid march upon Sparta, 
and had actually entered the outskirts of the city, which was without 
walls; and, says Xenophon, “had not a Cretan providentially (θείᾳ 
τινὶ μοίρᾳ) come and told Agesilaus that the army was at hand, he 
would have taken the city, all defenceless, like a nest of young birds. 
But Agesilaus was warned, and beforehand in the city; and the Spar- 
‘tans, though very few, held their ground in good order.” At this 
point the narrative begins. 


V. 11. Page 96. — ἐπεὶ ἐγένετο, after he had entered, &c. — ταύτῃ, 
antecedent of ὅπου. --- βληθήσεσθαι, to be hit with missiles. —ov8’ ὅπου... 
πολλοὶ ὄντες, nor where they (the Thebans) being many would have no ad- 
vantage in battle over the small number (of the enemy). — τοῦτο λαβὼν... 
κατέβαινε, &c., 1. 6. he took possession of this place (and held it until he was 
driven from it, as is deseribed in § 12), and descended to the low land, with- 
out going up (farther) into the city. Sparta was built on a line of hills 
along the right bank of the Eurotas. Epaminondas must have ascended 
these hills to enter even the outskirts of the city ; and he was obliged to 
descend to the bank of the river to take the road to Tegea and Mantinea. 

12. τὸ ἐντεῦθεν γενόμενον, what ensued, accusative (G. 160, 1) for the 
regular genitive (G. 173, 2): ἐντεῦθεν refers to χωρίον λαβών, not to κατέ- 
Bowe. - ἔξεστι, we may. — τοῖς ἀπονενοημένοις (G. 187), the desperate 
(lit. those who have lost all thought, i. 6. for life).—’Apy(8apos, son of the 
great king Agesilaus. — ὅπερ .. . κώλυμα, i. 6. difficult grownd. — πῦρ 
πνέοντες refers to the excitement of the Thebans on actually entering 
Sparta. 

13. περιεγέγραπτο, a limit had been set (lit. a line had been drawn). — 








αὐτοῖς, the Spartans (see beginning of § 12). 


90 ΧΕΝΟΡΗΟΝ. 


14. ot ᾿Αρκάδες, i. 6. the Peloponnesian army at Mantinea. — ἄλλως τε 
καί, especially. — εὐτυχηκόσι, victorious, in the conflict just narrated. — 
τῶν δέ, &c., while they (the Thebans) had failed (G. 148, 1, N. 2). --- δεηθεὶς 
αὐτῶν, urging them. 


Page 87. — εἰκός, sc. εἴη or ἐστίν. --- ἔξω, abroad, exposed. 


15. ἐξ “EXevoivos: they had accordingly marched between fifty and 
sixty miles the first day ; and after passing the night at the Isthmus, they 
had come nearly forty miles without food that day (ἀνάριστοι). --- ἐτύγ- 
Xavov προσιόντες, i. 6. they happened to arrive just as the Thebans were 
coming up from Sparta. 


16. αὖ, as well, 1. 6. as that of the Spartans. — δυστυχήματος : the 
Corinthians were at peace with Thebes, and probably inflicted some annoy- 
ance on this hostile troop. — ὡς εἶδον : the Thebans were within a mile of 
the town. — συνέρραξαν (v. συρρήγνυμι and συρράσσω). --- ἐρῶντες, eager. 


17. αἴτιοι... σωθῆναι, it was through them that the Mantineans saved 
all their out-door possessions. — ἄνδρες ἀγαθοί : among them was Gryllus, 
son of Xenophon, who was represented in a picture made at the time in the 
act of killing the Theban commander ; hence the story that in the battle 
which followed he slew Epaminondas with his own hand. — δῆλον ὅτι 
(sc. ἀπέκτειναν), manifestly, is parenthetical, as usual. — οὐ προήκαντο 
(v. προίημι, G.110, III. 1,N.1). did not leave unburied. — ἢν οὕς (G. 152, 
N. 2), some, imperfect of ἔστιν of. 


18. ᾿Επαμεινώνδας would naturally be subject of some verb meaning 
thought: but after the long participial sentence, the construction changes 
to ὥστε οὐκ ἐδόκει αὐτῷ. --- εἰ δὲ καταλείψοι οἷς ἦλθε. . . πολιορκήσοιντο : 
the direct discourse would be εἰ καταλείψω οἷς ἦλθον (G. 247 with N. 2) 
»+. πολιορκήσονται. -- ἔσοιτο λελυμασμένος represents ἔσομαι λελυμασμέ- 
vos, I shall have ruined, periphrastic fut. perf. mid. of λυμαίνω (G. 109, 6, 
N.); the fut. perf.act. is generally formed thus (G. 118, 3).— 80&y(G. 184. 2). 


Page 88. - τοῦ συνεστάναι, of the alliance (between those mentioned). 
- οὐκ... δυνατόν : as if he had come with any other object than fighting. 
—dvaricotto, would make good (properly, wndo, cancel, hence, restore to the 
former condition) : see G. 199, 2. — πειρωμένῳ (se. ἑαυτῷ), after καλήν. 


19. ds... ἀποκάμνειν, so as to shrink from no labor (G. 266, N. 1). 


20. ds... ἐσομένης, because, as he said, there was to be a battle (G. 277, 
N. 2; 278). — ἐπεγράφοντο. .. ῥόπαλα, probably, painted the figure of a 
club (as the arms of Thebes, in memory of Hercules as a Theban hero) on 
their shields, thus identifying themselves with the Thebans (ὡς Θηβαῖοι 
ὄντες). There is equally good authority for reading ῥόπαλα ἔχοντες, which 
would imply a sneer at the Arcadian ‘‘ heavy-infantry,” armed only with 
clubs (see Grote’s note), and ἐπεγράφοντο would then seem to mean, they 
inscribed their shields (1) as if they were Thebans, i. 6. with the letter 0. 





4 





HELLENICA 7, ν. 91 


21. τὴν συντομωτάτην (sc. ὁδόν), the directest way. — τὰ πρὸς ἑσπέραν 
ὄρη, the hills on the west are that part of the range of Maenalus which faces 
Tegea. The great eastern plain of Arcadia, which is two thousand feet 
above the sea and surrounded by high mountains, may be compared in its 
shape to an hour-glass, its two parts — the plain of Mantinea and the plain 
of Tegea — being separated by a narrow passage about a mile wide. When 
Epaminondas marched with the greater part of his army from Tegea (see 
§ 14), instead of taking the direct road to Mantinea (ten miles distant), he 
turned to the left, approaching the hills which enclose the plain of Tegea 
on the northwest. 





22. πρὸς τῷ Spa... ὑπὸ τοῖς ὑψηλοῖς refer to the part of Maenalus 
which was near the narrow pass leading into the valley of Mantinea. 


Page 89. — ἐπὶ κέρως, in column. — τὸ ἔμβολον, the attacking column: 
ἔμβολον commonly means the pointed beak with which a ship makes an 
attack (see § 23). This attack was made from the Theban left wing. — 
πεισομένοις (sc. τισίν), men likely to suffer. 


23. ἀντίπρῳρον, ‘bows on.” --- τῷ ἰσχυροτάτω, i. 6. the Thebans and 
other Boeotians, under Epaminondas himself. — τὸ ἀσθενέστατον, i. 6. the 
Argives. —@omep... βάθος, i. 6. “only with the ordinary depth of a 
phalanx of hoplites (four, six, or perhaps eight deep).” Grote. — πεζῶν 
ἁμίππων, infantry mixed with the cavalry, light-armed, and running beside 
the horses. 


24. νενικηκὼς ἔσεσθαι, fut. perf. (see note on ὃ 18, above, and G. 118, 
3). — ἐπειδὰν. .. ὁρῶσι (G. 232, 3) refers to the fut. ἐθελήσοντας as 
its apodosis: it might have been opt. (G. 248). --- τὸ ἐχόμενον, the next 
adjacent part of the army. —@s... ἐπικείσοιντο (G. 202, 4) depends as 
indirect discourse on φόβον ; fear that these would attack them, for the 
common construction, fear lest they might attack, φόβον μὴ ἐπικέοιντο. 
See Greek Moods and Tenses, ὃ 46, N. 6 (α). --- εἰ βοηθήσαιεν represents 
ἐὰν βοηθήσωσιν of the direct discourse (G. 247). — συμβολήν, the attack. 


Page 9O. — 25. φυγόντων αὐτοῖς, having taken flight for them 
(G. 184, 3), i. 6. when they had put them to flight. — διέπεσον, &c., they 
slipped through the retreating enemy in their terror. — ἔπὶ τοῦ εὐωνύμου, 
i. e. of the enemy. 


‘The calculations of Epaminondas were completely realized. The 
irresistible charge, both of infantry and cavalry, made by himself with his 
left wing, not only defeated the troops immediately opposed, but caused 
the enemy’s whole army to take flight. It was under these victorious 
circumstances, and while he was pressing on the retiring enemy at the head 
of his Theban column of infantry, that he received a mortal wound with a 
spear in the breast.”” Grote. 


26. τοὐναντίον οὗ, the opposite of what (G. 153, N. 2). 


27. οὐδὲν πλέον : the campaign of Mantinea, however, secured the 


99 XENOPHON. 


independence of the Arcadian allies of Thebes, and of the anti-Spartan 
frontier, including Messene. 


The death of Epaminondas — one of the purest of patriots, and the 
most eminent military genius of Greece — was soon followed (861-360 
B. 6.) by that of Agesilaus, the last of the kings who maintained the 
ancient glory of Sparta. In the next year (860-359 B. c.) Philip of 
Macedon ascended the throne, and the whole course of Greek history 
was suddenly changed. The struggles for supremacy among the 
Greek states gave way to a long and hopeless struggle for indepen- 
dence, which ended in the fatal battle of Chaeronea (338 Β. c.) and 
the subjugation of Greece to Macedonia. 


MEMORABILIA. 


Tne trial and death of Socrates took place in the year Β. σ. 399. 
At this time Xenophon was still absent, on the expedition recorded 
in the “ Anabasis.” Soon after his return to Athens, while his grief 
and indignation were still fresh, he wrote that mteresting defence of 
his master’s reputation, and illustration of his manner of teaching, 
given in the “ Memorabilia” (Memorials). In this work he begins 
with a full and distinct denial of the charges made at the trial, fol- 
lowed by personal anecdotes of Socrates and specimens of his con- 
versation. Xenophon is chiefly anxious to prove that he was a good 
citizen, in religious belief as well as in way of life; while the later 
accounts given by Plato in his dialogues show him much more clearly 
as an original and independent thinker. Both agree in testifying the 
hjghest veneration and the warmest personal regard. 

Socrates was about seventy years old when brought to trial. He 
had served the state as a soldier in several campaigns in the Pelo- 
ponnesian war; and he once saved the life of Alcibiades— one ac- 
count says, of Xenophon also—=in battle. He also served as pre- 
siding officer in the public assembly when the generals who had been 
victorious at Arginusae (406 B. 0.) were put on trial on the charge of 
neglecting the shipwrecked and the dead after the battle; and the 
cool determination of the old philosopher was never better shown 
than by his stern refusal to put the question of condemnation to the 
people in an illegal form. (See note on ὃ 18, below.) He had also © 
incurred the hate and distrust of the Thirty Tyrants by resisting their 
tyranny; and the revolution under Thrasybulus saved his life from 
their resentment. 





MEMORABILIA 1, 1. 93 


The general feeiing against Socrates was part of the conservative 
reaction after the democracy was restored. Twenty years before this 
time Aristophanes had ridiculed him in the “Clouds,” as one of the 
contemptible but dangerous innovators in morals and belief; and the 

_ prejudice then so pointedly expressed seems to have been felt at the 
_ time of his trial. For at least a quarter of a century he had been in 
the habit of discussing with all sorts and conditions of men, in streets 
and public walks or at private entertainments, in a manner very. 
pointed and free, on any question of opinion or practice that might come 
up. In particular, he was unsparing in forcing his antagonists to 
push their conclusions to absurd lengths, and driving them into a cor- 
ner by his sharp questions. In this way he made some jealous and 
bitter enemies. Besides, he had been intimate with several men after- 
wards declared to be public enemies, — particularly Alcibiades, the 
most dangerous of politicians, and Critias, chief of the Thirty Tyrants, 
The formal charge against him was, that he did not acknowledge or 
worship the Gods whom the city worshipped, but introduced new 
divinities of his own; and that he corrupted the youth of Athens. 
Each of these counts is distinctly met and replied to in this defence, 
which gives us the most clear and interesting portrait that has been 
left us of any of the remarkable men of antiquity. The portion here 
given is the first chapter of the first book, with the closing paragraph 
_ of the work. 





















I. 1. τίσι λόγοις, by what reasonings (G. 149, 2). — οἵ γραψάμενοι, 
those who made the charge. The middle γράφεσθαι in Attic commonly 
means to indict. The accusers of Socrates were Meletus, a poet of poor 
reputation ; Anytus, a wealthy tradesman, who resented the influence of 
Socrates to draw his son from his own trade of tanner ; and Lycon, a pop- 
ular orator and demagogue. Meletus is said to have been put to death, 
and the others banished, a few years later, when the people repented of 
their judgment. — 4 γραφή, the bill of indictment. — τῇ πόλεν (G. 184, 3). 


Page DE.— ots... νομίζει, not regarding as Gods those whom the city so 
_ regards. See note on Anab. 4, II. 23. 

2. ὡς ἐνόμιζεν depends on the verbal noun τεκμηρίῳ. --- μαντικῇ, divina- 
tion. —SrereSpvdAnTo, 12 was notorious. — τὸ δαιμόνιον, the divinity: the 
daemon of Socrates, as he believed, manifested itself by signs or indica~ 
tions, never urging him to any act, but constantly warning him against 
_ things wrong or dangerous. — ὅθεν δή, on which very ground, indeed. 

3. τῶν ἄλλων, than others [do]. — φήμαις, omens from words ; συμβό- 
λοις, from signs or accidents ; θυσίαις, from sacrifices. 

| 4. ξυνόντων, associates. — ὡς, on the ground that (G. 277, N. 2). — τοῖς 
| ... συνέφερε, to those persuaded by him, it was an advantage: μὴ (G. 283, 
4). — μετέμελε, repented (G. 184, 2, N. 1). 


94 XENOPHON. 


5. ἐδόκει ἄν, he would have seemed, supply εἶναι. The imperfects here 
and in the next sentence refer to past time (G. 222). — εἶτα, then, after all 
this. — ταῦτα, i. 6. as to the future. 


6. ἀλλὰ phy, but moreover. — τάδε, the following (see G. 148, nN. 1). — 
τὰ ἀναγκαῖα, things which must be done, opposed to τὰ ἄδηλα in the next 
clause. — καὶ πράττειν : the force of καί would be plainer here if οὕτως 
preceded, as he believed, &c., so also to do them. 


Page 92. - ἄριστ᾽ ἂν πραχθῆναν = ἄριστ᾽ ἂν πραχθείη (G. 211). — 
ὅπως ἀποβήσοιτο, indirect question for πῶς ἀποβήσεται, --- εἰ ποιητέα, 
(sc. ἐστίν or εἴη), whether they (i. e. τὰ ἄδηλα) were to be done (G. 281, 1). 

7. προσδεῖσθαι, necded besides. — τεκτονικόν, &c. (pred. after γενέσθαι), 
capable of building, &c.— ἀνθρώπων, gen. after ἀρχικόν, able to govern men 
(G. 180, 1). --- πάντα... .. μαθήματα repeats the preceding idea, τεκτονικὸν 
. 2 γενέσθαι. --- καὶ ἀνθρώπου γνώμῃ αἱρετέα εἶναι, could be grasped even by 
the mind of nan, i. 6. by man’s mind without divine help. The clause 
τεκτονικὸν μέν, &c. refers to the mere acquisition of these arts, as opposed 
to τὰ δὲ μέγιστα τῶν ἐν τούτοις, which follows. 

8. καταλείπεσθαι, reserved. — ὧν οὐδὲν εἶναι (for εἴη or ἐστί), by assimi- 
lation to καταλείπεσθαι (G. 260, 2, N. 2). --- TO... λαβόντι, to him who 
has gained powerful connections by marriage in the state. —ed... orepyoe- 
ται, i. 6. whether he will not be banished for being thus connected, in 
case of political troubles. 

9. Satpovay: notice the play upon this word and δαιμόνιον. --- μαντευο- 
pévous... διακρίνειν, who seek by divination [to know] what the Gods have 
granted to men to understand by learning. — οἷον, for example.—eérl ζεῦγος, 
i.e. for taking charge of a team. — τὴν ναῦν, his ship. —& ἔξεστιν... εἰδέ- 
var, what may be known by counting, &c. — ots (G. 152). — ὦσιν (G. 247 
and 299). --- ἵλεῳ, propitious (G. 64). 


Page 93. - 10. περιπάτους, porches or public walks. — πληθούσης ἀγο- 
pas, at the time of full market, towards noon (G. 179, 1). — ἔλεγε ὡς τὸ 
πολύ, he was generally talking. 


11. Σωκράτους, gen. after both εἶδεν and ἤκουσεν, by zeugma, taking the 
case required by ἤκουσεν. --- τῆς τῶν πάντων φύσεως, about the nature of 
the universe, —8irws... ἔχει, how what sophists call the World (lit. Order) 
is constituted. The sophists were professional teachers of rhetoric, philos- 
ophy, &c., whom it was the special delight of Socrates to convict of igno- 
rance in what they assumed to teach. — ἀνάγκαις, necessary laws. — μωραί- 
voytas (G. 280). 

12. πρῶτον μέν : this corresponds to ἐσκόπει δέ in § 15. — αὐτῶν ἐσκό- 
met, he used to inquire, in regard to them, &c.: αὐτῶν is a possessive gen. 
(G. 167, 1), depending on the following clause as on a substantive; 
cf. σκοπεῖν αὐτῶν τόδε, to examine this in (or about) them. In ὃ 15 we 
have ἐσκόπει περὶ αὐτῶν. --- πότερα... ἤ (G. 282, 5). — παρέντες (Vv. πα- 
ρίημι), neglecting. 











MEMORABILIA J, I. 95 


13. ἐθαύμαζε εἰ, he wondered that (G. 228), not he wondered whether. 
On the principle of indirect discourse we might have had εἰ εἴη here 
(G. 248, examples under 2). — τοὺς μέγιστα φρονοῦντας ἐπί, those who take 
most pride in. — δοξάζειν depends on ἔφη implied in ἐθαύμαζε : see, how- 
ever, ὃ 8, above. — τοῖς μαινομένοις... . διακεῖσθαι, i. 6. their relation to 
each other is like that of madmen (G. 186). 


14. τῶν... μαινομένων τοὺς μέν, for of madmen, some, &e. (G. 143, 1). 
- οὐδ᾽... εἶναι, not to seem disgraceful, &c., even in public. — δτιοῦν, 
anything whatever: arelative becomes an indefinite by the addition of -οῦν. 
— ἐξιτητέον εἶναι (= ἐξιέναι δεῖν), that they ought to come out (G. 281, 2). 
— τὰ τυχόντα, which they may chance to find, i. e. accidental. — τῶν Te... 
μεριμνώντων, part. gen. (corresponding to τῶν τε μαινομένων, above) 
depending on τοῖς μέν and τοῖς δέ, which is twice repeated. — ἕν μόνον τὸ 
ὄν εἶναι, that all Being (τὸ ὄν) is but one. — ἄπειρα, pred. after εἶναι, 
referring to τὸ ὄν, i. 6. that Being has countless forms. — οὐδὲν ἄν ποτε 
«κινηθῆναι, that nothing could under any circumstances (ποτέ) be moved (or 
move): the direct form would be οὐδὲν ἄν ποτε κινηθείη (G. 211). This 
refers to the paradox of Zeno the Eleatic (460 B. c.), which attempted to 
show the impossibility of motion. — γίγνεσθαί τε kal ἀπόλλυσθαι, referring 
to the doctrine that all things are generated (or created) and are (in time) 
destroyed, as opposed to the doctrine that there can be neither generation 
nor decay in the universe. — ott’... ἀπολέσθαι, = οὔτ᾽ ἂν γένοιτο... 
οὔτ᾽ (av) ἀπόλοιτο (G. 212, 4). Socrates compares these opposing doc- 

trines of the physical philosophers with the different opinions held by dif- 
ferent madmen on the matters mentioned in the beginning of the section. 





Page 94. - 15. dpa introduces a direct question (G. 282, 2): a second 
part of the same question is introduced by 4. In the former part, the lead- 
ing clause is ot... νομίζουσιν. --- ποιήσειν ὅ τι dv μάθωσιν, that they are 
to practise (do) whatever they have learnt ; but ποιήσειν ἀνέμους, &c., that 
they are to create winds, &c. — 4, how (as indir. interrogative). 





16. τοιαῦτα, i. 6. as above. — ἅ is object of both εἰδότας and ἀγνοοῦντας, 
as is shown by the position of μέν and 8€é. — δικαίως ἂν κεκλῆσθαι (= κε- 
κλημένοι ἂν elev), would justly be called (G. 211, and 200, N. 6). 


17. εἰ μὴ τούτων ἐνεθυμήθησαν, that they paid no regard to these 
(G. 171, 2). See § 13 above. 


18. βουλεύσας, chosen senator (G. 200, N. 5b), equivalent to βουλευτὴς 
γενόμενος. The Senate (βουλή) of Five Hundred was chosen annually by 
lot, and contained fifty members from each of the ten Attic tribes. Each 
set of fifty were called Prytanes (πρυτάνεις) during a tenth part of the year 
(called πρυτανεία) ; and it was then their duty to remain through the 
whole day in the Tholos (or Rotunda, near the Senate House), where their 
meals were provided them at the public expense. Every morning they 
chose one of their own number to be the Zpistates, or President of the day, 
who (besides other duties) presided at any meeting of either the Senate or 


96 PLATO. 


the Assembly of the people which was held on that day. The Assembly 
met regularly on four days in each prytany; on other days, except holi- 
days, the Senate met.* It thus appears how Socrates, by being chosen 
senator for the year, happened to be the presiding officer in the Assembly 
(ἐπιστάτης ἐν τῷ δήμῳ γενόμενος) on the day in question. It was the 
memorable day (in 406 B. c.) when the generals who had gained the naval 
battle of Arginusae were tried and condemned by the Athenian Assembly 
acting as a court. (See Grote, Chap. LXIV.; and note on Hell. 2, III. 
32, above.) — fv... βουλεύσειν : one of the clauses in the senatorial oath 
Was κατὰ τοὺς νόμους βουλεύσω, J will act as a senator in accordance with 
the laws. — μιᾷ ψήφῳ, by a single vote: the illegality against which Socra- 
tes protested was chiefly (if not wholly) that of condemning several per- 
sons by one decree. When Socrates refused to bring the illegal proposi- 
tion (which had already passed the Senate) before the Assembly (érupy- 
φίσαι), it seems that the other Prytanes interfered and appointed some 
less scrupulous member of their body to act as president. — περὶ πλείονος, 
of greater account. 


19. οὐχ dv τρόπον, not, however, as (G. 160, 2, and 154). 


Page 95. — 20. tovattra... οἷά τις dv... εἴη, such, that any one say- 
ing and doing them would be, &c.: ἄν belongs to both εἴη and νομίζουτο 
(G. 212, 4), and λέγων καὶ πράττων contains the protasis, = εἰ λέγοι καὶ 
πράττοι (G. 226, 1). 


IV. Cuar. VIII. —11. Σωκράτην... οἷος ἦν, accus. of anticipation : 
οἵ. Mark i. 24, οἶδά σε tis εἶ, “41 know thee who thou art.” — ot ἀρετῆς 
ἐφιέμενοι is limited by τῶν γιγνωσκόντων. --- ποθοῦντες (G. 279, 2, N.). — 
ὡς ὄντα (G. 277, N. 2). — ἐμοί, dat. after ἐδόκει (in the tenth line below). 
- οὕτως is understood with δίκαιος, ἐγκρατής, &c. — παραβάλλων ... 
κρινέτω, let him coinpare the character of some other man with these (1. 6. the 
qualities just mentioned) and then (οὕτως) judge. 


PLATO.— 1. Aponoery; 


The “ Apology” of Plato probably contains very nearly the actual 
defence spoken by Socrates before his judges. It is not a formal re- 
ply to the indictment, but a protest against the falsehood of the charge 





* Τὴ the following century, in the time of Demosthenes, we find a different 
system, by which the Epistates chose by lot nine senators daily, one from each 
of the tribes except his own, who were called πρόεδροι and presided (as a board) 
in both Senate and Assembly. 





APOLOGY. 97 

































im general.* Socrates claims that, so far from being a disbeliever in 

- the Gods, he was fulfilling an express divine commission in instructing 
his fellow-citizens; nay, if his life should be spared on condition of 
refraining, he could not so disobey the command of the divinity. The 
~ Delphic oracle had pronounced that there was no wiser man than he. 
Astonished at this, he had tried to satisfy himself what it meant; 
until he learned that his wisdom consisted in knowing his own igno- 
rance, and in the wish to learn. He had never professed to be a 
teacher; he had no part in the opinion of such natural philosophers 
as Anaxagoras; he had never received pay for his teaching, like the 
“Sophists”’; he had done the duties of a good soldier and citizen, in 
the face of danger and public prejudice; he could have had no motive 
| —as he shows in a brief dialogue with his principal accuser, Meletus 

_ —to mislead or injure any of the young men who came under his in- 
fluence. These are the main points of this celebrated Defence, which 
he closes by distinctly, even haughtily, refusing any appeal to the 
‘compassion of his judges to violate their oath requiring an honest 
verdict, for this would be practical atheism; and by “leaving it to 
them and to God to judge concerning him, as should be best both for 
him and them.” 


The Defence, thus far, occupies about three fourths of the ‘“Apol- 
ogy.’ When it was closed, Socrates was declared guilty by a ma- 
jority of about 60 out of 501 votes. The penalty proposed by his 
prosecutors was death. But, in the class of trials to which this be- 
longed, the defendant was called on to propose a penalty for himself, 
the court appearing to be bound by custom, if not by law, to choose 
between the penalties thus proposed. If Socrates had now proposed 
a sentence which the court had been likely to accept, his life would 
doubtless have been spared. Instead of this, he first proposed a pub- 
lic maintenance in the Prytaneum, — the city hall, where the hospi- 
talities of the state were given to foreign ambassadors and other pub- 
lic guests, and where certain private citizens, as a reward for special 
services, were allowed to take their meals at the public table, — the 
_ highest civil honor which could be paid. He next declared that a 

_ life spent in exile, or under restraint of free speech, would be more 
intolerable than death; and finally proposed, as a money fine, one 
mina (about seventeen dollars), which, at his friends’ suggestion, he 
_ increased to thirty minae. Upon this, the vote of the court was again 
| taken, and the death penalty was decreed by a majority which (ac- 


98 PLATO. 


cording to one account) was larger by eighty votes than that by 
which he was found guilty at first. 

The portion of the Apology here given contains the last words of 
Socrates before his judges, spoken after the sentence of death had 
been pronounced. 


Page 96.— 1. od... χρόνου, for the sake of no long time, since Socra- 
tes was now an old man. — as... ἀπεκτόνατε, indirect discourse after the 
idea of saying implied in ὄνομα ἕξετε καὶ αἰτίαν. --- ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου, of 
itself. — πόρρω τοῦ βίου, advanced in life (G. 168) : his age is said to be 
advanced, and near death. — ἐμοῦ... θάνατον (6. 173, 2, N.). 

2. ἀπορίᾳ.... τοιούτων, have been condemned through lack of such words, 
άπ. --- πολλοῦ γε Set, not at all. — τοῦ ἐθέλειν, one of the genitives depend- 
ing on ἀπορίᾳ. --- ἀκούειν (G. 261, 2). — θρηνοῦντος, &c. (G. 277, 6) : 
these words explain λέγειν, &c. 

3. τότε, then, in making my defence. — ἀνελεύθερον, slavish (unworthy 
of a freeman). — ἀτολογησαμένῳ (G. 277, 2; 184, 2, N. 1). — ἐκείνως, so, 
i. e. by an unworthy defence. — ὅπως ἀποφεύξεται (6, 217). — πᾶν ποιῶν; 
by any and every means. — ἀφείς (G. 277, 2). 


Page 9. - 4. μὴ od ἡ (G. 218, N. 2). --- πονημίαν, sc. ἐκφυγεῖν. --- 
θᾶττον. .. θεῖ, buseness runs fuster than death. — ἅτε ὦν, as being (G. 277, 
N. 2). --- ὑπὸ τοῦ βραδυτέρου ἑάλων, 7 have been (was) overtaken by the 
slower (Death). — ὀφλών, convicted (v. ὀφλισκάνω) : lit. failing in a suit, 
and so condemned to pay the debt or penalty ; here, death (θανάτου). We 
find ὀφλεῖν ζημίαν, to incur a penalty; ὀφλεῖν χρήματα, to incur a fine 
(as ὦφλε χιλίας δραχμάς, in the former part of the defence) ; ὀφλεῖν κλο- 
πῆς δίκην (also ὀφλεῖν κλοπῆς), 40 be convicted on a charge of theft ; ὀφλεῖν 
γέλωτα, αἰσχύνην, to incur laughter, disgrace ; ὀφλεῖν μωρίαν, tu incur the 
charge of folly: so ὠφληκότος μοχϑηρίαν, below. — τῷ τιμήματι, the sen- 
tence (the result of τίμησις, which is the act of settling the amount or kind 
of penalty). — οὕτω σχεῖν, to come out thus. — μετρίως, well enough. 

5. χρησμῳδῆσαι, to utter my oracle. — ὅταν μέλλωσιν ἀποθανεῖσθαι 
(G. 202, 8, N.), depending on χρησμωδοῦσιν, where we should expect 
a phrase meaning simply αὐ the point of death, explaining évtat0a, — οἵαν 
(sc. τιμωρίαν) is cognate accus. after ἀπεκτόνατε, such punishment as you 
have inflicted in condemning me to death. — τοῦ διδόναν (G. 262, 2). — τὸ 
δέ, but the fact (G. 1438, 1, N. 2). 

6. ἀποκτείνοντες (G. 138, N. 8). — τοῦ ὀνειδίζειν (G. 263, 1). — ὑμῖν 
(G. 184, 2). — od... οὔτε... οὔτε (G. 283, 9). — ὅπως ἔσται (G. 217). 


Page 98.- 7. ἐν ᾧ.... ἄγουσι, while the officers are busy. — oi, whither, 
i. 6. to the prison. — διαμυθολογῆσαι, to have a talk ; opposed to the formal 
judicial arguments which had preceded. — tt more νοεῖ, what it means. 

8. ϑικασταί : his address before had been “‘ Athenians”; to those who 
voted justly he now speaks as ‘‘ Judges.” — ὀἰωθυῖα (v. ἔθω), accustomed. — 
τοῦ Saimovlov: Socrates believed that there was a divine voice within him 








APOLOGY. 99 


(δαιμόνιόν τι), which often warned him not to do certain things, but never 
urged him to any positive act. — πάνυ ἐπὶ σμικροῖς, in very Litile things. 
— εἴ τι μέλλοιμι (G. 225). — οἰηθείη ἄν tis, one might think. — καὶ νομί- 
ἵεται, and (what) ts generally thought, & (as nom.) being understood. 

9. λέγοντα μεταξύ (G. 277, N. 1). 

10. κινδυνεύει... γεγονέναι, seems likely to be (lit. rwns a risk of being). 
Plato uses κινδυνεύω nearly in the sense of δοκέω, so that the infin. after it 
stands in indirect discourse (G. 203), as here. — οὐκ ἔσθ᾽ ὅπως, it is not 
(possible) that, &c. 

11. δυοῖν θάτερον, one of two things. — οἷον μηδὲν εἶναι, (such) as to be 
nothing (i. e. like annihilation). — τὰ λεγόμενα, the common saying. 


Page 99. - 12. μηδ᾽ ὄναρ μηδέν, not even any dream. — ἐπειδὰν... 
ὁρᾷ depends on ἐστί understood with ὕπνος (G. 233). For the whole sen 
tence, see G. 227, 1. — ἐγὼ γὰρ ἂν οἶμαι : the force of ἄν falls upon εὑρεῖν, 
several lines below, where it is twice repeated (G. 212, 2): οἶμαι is also 
' repeated after the long protasis, and δέοι is repeated before σκεψάμενον. ---- 
The sentence reads, 7 think, if one were obliged to select that night in which 
he slept so soundly as to have no dream at all, and, comparing with that 
night the other nights and days of his life, were obliged to examine and say 
how many days and nights in his life he had lived better than that night, 
(J think) not only any private person, but the great King would himself find 
these easy to count (i. e. very few), compared with his other days and nights. 
The conditional sentence (without οἶμαι) would be: εἰ δέοι τινα... εἰπεῖν, 
εὕροι ἄν. μὴ ὅτι is elliptical for μὴ λέγωμεν ὅτι (Jet ws not say that, &c.), 
not to speak of, i. e. not merely; it is often used, as here, where ὅτι forms 
no part of the construction of the sentence, and where the origin of the 
expression was probably not thought of. 


13. οὐδὲν πλείων, no longer. — εἰ δ᾽ αὖ, but if, on the other hand. — φῖον 
ἀποδημῆσαι, like a migration. 


14. “Adov (sc. δῶμα), the (realm) of Death, or Hades. For the proper 
names which follow, see a classical dictionary ; Triptolemus was not usually 
counted one of the judges in Hades, and Socrates probably follows some 
local Attic myth. — éyévovro, proved themselves. — ἐπὶ πόσῳ, at what 
price ? 


(15. ἔμοιγε kal αὐτῷ, to myself also. — ὅπότε ἐντύχοιμι, when I should 
mect (G. 232, 4), like εἴ ποτε εὐτύχοιμι. --- διὰ κρίσιν ἄδικον, in consequence 
of an unjust judgment : referring to the contest for the armor of Achilles 
between Odysseus and Ajax, after which the defeated Ajax killed himself ; 
this is the subject of the Ajax of Sophocles. — ἐξετάζοντα : Socrates de- 
lights in the thought that he can go on examining and cross-questioning 
and exposing false pretensions to wisdom in Hades, as he had done in 


Athens. 


Page 100. — 16. τὸν... ἀγαγόντα, 1. 6. Agamemnon. —4 Σίσυφον, 
ἢ — ἄλλους μυρίους (as the sentence might be written): instead of con- 


100 PLATO. 


tinuing the question by adding other names, he changes the form of the 
sentence, and adds, one might mention ten thousand others, &c. — οἷς is the 
object of ἐξετάζειν only by zeugma. — ἀμήχανον εὐδαιμονίας, ὦ vast amount 
of joy. —ot ἐκεῖ, i. 6. those who dwell below. — τούτου ἕνεκα, i. 6. especially 
τοῦ ἐξετάζειν, for which Socrates implies that he is to suffer death. 

17. οὔτε... . τελευτήσαντι, either during life (pres.) or after death 
(aor.). — ἀπὸ τοῦ αὐτομάτου, of its own accord, 1. 6. by chance. — ἀτηλλάχθαι 
πραγμάτων, to be free (lit. to have been freed, G. 202, 2) from troubles. — 
τὸ σημεῖον, the divine sign, the same as τὸ δαιμόνιον. --- τοῖς κατηγόροις 
(G. 184, 2). --- οἰόμενοι βλάπτειν, thinking that they were doing me an in- 
jury (G. 203). — τοῦτο αὐτοῖς μέμφεσθαι : τοῦτο is cognate acc.; for at- 
tots, see G. 184, 2. μέμφομαι sometimes takes the simple object-accusative. 

18. δέομαι (6.172, N.1). — τιμωρήσασθε, take your vengeance on. — ταὐτὰ 
ταῦτα λυποῦντες, vexing them in this same way (G. 159, N. 4). --- ἐὰν... ὄντες, 
af they think themselves to be something when they are nothing. — ὀνειδίζετε 
αὐτοῖς (G. 184, 2). — ὧν δεῖ, sc. ἐπιμελεῖσθαι. -- οὐδενός : compare this use 
of οὐδέν in a causal sentence with μηδὲν ὄντες in the conditional sentence 
above (see G. 283, 1 and 2). — δίκαια πεπονθὼς ἔσομαι, 7 shall have been 
justiy treated (G. 98, 2, κ.). --- αὐτός τε καὶ οἱ υἱεῖς, both myself and my 
sons ; apposition, as if the latter were included in ἐγώ. --- &pa ἀπιέναι, time 
to depart (G. 261, 1, N.). 


The circumstances of the imprisonment of Socrates, and the occa- 
sion of the long delay in the execution of his sentence, are given in 
the extract from the “ Phaedo” which follows. 


2. PHAEDO. 


Durine his thirty days’ confinement, Socrates was freely visited by 
his friends in prison. As the time of his execution drew near, they 
were anxious for his escape; and one of them, Crito, a man of wealth, 
and near his own age, had prepared a plan of rescue, with the con- 
nivance of the friendly jailer. Socrates, however, refused to avoid 
his fate, on the ground that the highest duty of a citizen, especially 
in a free state, is absolute obedience to the laws, accepting his sen- 
tence as the voice of the State itself,— which he sets forth in the 
brief dialogue called ‘“ Crito.” On the morning of the day of execu- 
tion, several of his friends gathered in his prison, — among them 
Phaedo, who afterwards tells his friend Echecrates and others the oc- 
currences of the day in the Dialogue bearing his name. Much the 
largest part of it is taken up with discussing the views of Socrates 
on the nature and immortality of the soul. The portion here given 





PHAEDO. 101 


is the introductory narrative, and the conclusion, containing that story 

of his last hours, “which,” says Cicero, “I often vehelsWithstears.”"* +) 
The dialogue between Phaedo and Echecrates is supposed to fake. 

place at Phlius in Peloponnesus, the home ‘of, Fehegrates °°, | 


zis Sno? 819 

Page 801.- 1. ἢ... ἤκουσας; or did you hear it from some one 
else ?— αὐτός : Phaedo was a citizen of Elis, a disciple of Socrates, and 
afterwards the head of a philosophical school in his native place. — τῶν 
πολιτῶν Φλιασίων οὐδείς, no one of the citizens — Phliasians: the posi- 
tion of Φλιασίων shows that it is not a mere adjective. — ἐπιχωριάζει 


᾿Αθήναζε, ever goes to Athens to live at all (wave τι). 


2. ἐστεμμένη, v. στέφω, wreathed with laurel, which was sacred to 
Apollo. —wéptrovor, send in state, i. 6. every year. — θεωρία, a sacred 
embassy. 


3. τοὺς δὶς ἕπτα ἐκείνους, the well-known fourteen, i. 6. the seven virgins 
and seven youths whom the Athenians were obliged to send once in nine 
years to Minos of Crete, to be devoured by the Minotaur in the Labyrinth. 
The sacred trireme, the Delias, which carried the deputation to Delos, was 
believed to be the same vessel which carried Theseus to Crete. For the 
account of the voyage of Theseus, the death of the Minotaur, and the 
escape of Theseus with the victims by the help of Ariadne, see a classical 
dictionary under Theseus, and Plutarch’s Life of Theseus, § 15. — εἰ σω- 
θεῖεν... ἀπάξειν (G. 247). — καὶ νῦν ἔτι : “the custom was continued,” 
says Plutarch, ‘‘to the time of Demetrius Phalereus,” i. e. till about 
ae. ο. 300. — ἐπειδὰν ἄρξωνται (G. 233). — μηδένα... πρὶν ἄν (G. 240). 





Page 492. — τύχωπιν ἀπολαβόντες, happen to hinder them (G. 279, 4): 
compare ἔτυχεν... . yevds (below), happened to have been done (perf.). 


4. τὸ μεμνῆσθαι, Zo commemorate, i. 6. in conversation, as he explains it 
in αὐτὸν (sc. ἐμὲ) λέγοντα καὶ ἄλλα ἀκούοντα. --- τοιούτους ἑτέρους, others 
of the same mind (with yourself). — as ἂν δύνῃ (G. 232, 8) ἀκριβέστατα, 
as accurately as you can: by omitting ἂν δύνῃ, we have the usual form ὡς 
ἀκριβέστατα (see ὡς σαφέστατα, above). 


5. θαυμάσια ἔπαθον, 7 was marvellously affected. — ἔλεος εἰσήει, did pity 
enter [ny mind]. — τοῦ τρόπου καὶ τῶν λόγων, causal gen. after εὐδαίμων 
(G. 173, 1). — ὡς (= ὅτι οὕτως), i. 6. he died so fearlessly, &c. (G. 238). — 
ὥστε. .. παρίστασθαι, so that it came into my mind, that he, &c. — ἰέναι 
and πράξειν are both futures after παρίστασθαι (G. 203). — ἄνευ θείας pot- 
pas, i.e. uncared for by the Gods. — εἰκὸς παρόντι πένθει, natural to one 
present at suffering. — ἡδονή, sc. εἰσήει. --- ὡς... ὄντων, i. 6. from the 
thought that we were engaged in philosophical discussion (G. 277, N. 2). — 
τοιοῦτοί tives, on some such subject (i. e. as philosophy). — ἀτεχνῶς, abso- 
lutely or simply. 





* Cuius morti illacrimari soleo, Platonem legens. Nat. Deor. III. 33. 


102 PLATO. 


Page EOS. — évOiipevpéve, agreeing with μοι, when I reflected. — ὅτα 
spt... ἐνίοτε δέ, sb omertime, and at another: notice the accent of oré (ποῦ 
ve) when it has this sense’ «-- ᾿Απολλόδωρος : he was a man of melancholy 
_ and exvitabié agi ‘sometimes called the Fanatic. Among those present 
ot ths cdeath of Sourates are Antisthenes, the founder of fle Cynics, and 
. Euclides, the founder of the Megaric school. The absence of Aristippus, the 
founder of the Cyrenaics, is reece Plato excuses his own absence, § 6. 

6. Αἰγίνῃ, in Aegina (G. 190, N.). —oyéSov TL... παραγενέσθαι, 1. 6. 7 
think these are about all who (lit. about these) made up the company (G. 246). 

7. ἕως ἀνοιχθείη (G. 239, 2): see ἐπειδὴ ἀνοιχθείη, below. 


Page O4. — 8. εἶπε περιμένειν (G. 260, 2, N. 1), he bade us wait (ἔφη 
περιμένειν would mean he said he was waiting). —tas dv... κελεύσῃ, until 
he should himself give us orders: tos... κελεύσειε might have been used 
after the past tense (G. 248). — λύουσι : from this it appears that Socrates 
had been kept chained. — παραγγέλλουσιν, they are giving him directions. 
— ὅπως ἄν (G. 216, 1, N. 2). — εἰσιόντες, as we entered. — avian, the 
well-known termagant wife of Socrates. — ἀνευφήμησε, uttered cries of 
lamentation, such as were held to be of bad omen: the word is taken, as 
similar words often were, in the opposite of its proper sense. Thus the 1677, 
which was ill-omened, was called εὐώνυμον, good-omened. — ὅτι before a 
direct quotation (G. 241, 1). — τῶν τοῦ Κρίτωνος, of Crito’s attendants. 


9. as... εἶναι, how curiously it is related to what seems its opposite. — 
TO... παραγίγνεσθαι, that they will not come to a man together: τῷ be- 
longs also to ἀναγκάζεσθαι (G. 262, 2). --- συνημμένω (Vv. συνάπτω), 1. 6. 

43 bli 


attached to one head. — δύ᾽ ὄντε, Pe they are two. — μῦθον ἂν συνθεῖναι 
(= μῦθον ἂν συνέθηκε), would have composed a fable (G. 211). 


Page 105. — ᾧ ἂν παραγένηται (G. 233). — ὥσπερ... ἔοικεν, as then 
1 too believe (i. 6. 1, as Aesop would have done). — ὑπὸ τοῦ δεσμοῦ, on 
account of the chain. —tkev φαίνεται, appears to have come: φαίνομαν 
generally takes the participle. 


10. ἀναμνήσος : for the peculiar use of the aorist partic., see G. 204, N. 2. 
— -ἐντείνας (τόνος), versifying. —7d... προοίμιον, the proemium (or hymn 
used at the beginning of a festival) in honor of Apollo: the Homeric Hymn 
to Apollo is an example of such a poem. — καὶ ἄλλοι. . . Hinves, not only 
had certain others previously asked me, but also Euenus, dc. — ὅ τι διανοη- 
Gels, with what intention. — σον μέλει τοῦ ἔχειν (G. 184, 2, N. 1). — ἐμέ 15 
subject of ἔχειν. 

11. ἀντίτεχνος, rival. — τί λέγει, (to see) what they meant. — ἀφοσιού- 
peeves... ποιεῖν, clearing my conscience in case they (the dreams) should per- 
chance command me to compose music of this kind (G. 248, 2). — ἄλλοτ᾽ ἐν 
ἄλλῃ ὄψει, at different times in different shapes. 

12. αὐτό, it, i. 6. the vision, subject of παρακελεύεσθαι (fo wrye one to 
the act) and ἐπικελεύειν (to cheer one in the act). — τοῖς θέουσι, runners in 
a race. — καὶ ἐμοὶ. .. ἐπικελεύειν : supply ὑπελάμβανον from the preceding 








PHAEDO. 103 
͵ 

tlause : ἐμοί follows ἐπικελεύειν. --- ὡς... οὔσης (C. 277, N. 2): this con- 
tains the ground on which ¢he vision urged Socrates. — μεγίστης μουσικῆς, 
the highest- form of music, 1. 6. music in its wide Greek sense, including all 
literature and accomplishments. — τοῦτο πράττοντος, making this (philos- 
ophy) my business: ef. Lat. hoc agere and aliud agere. — πρὶν ἀφοσιώσα- 
σθαι, before performing my pious duty, = ὅσια ποιῆσαι : πρίν here takes 
the infinitive, when it might have taken the subjunctive or optative as de- 
pending on a negative sentence (G. 240, 2). 


Page 106. — ποιήσαντα and πειθόμενον denote the means. 


13. μύθους GAN’ οὐ λόγους, fudles, but not Imere] narratives: here μῦθος 
has its special sense of fables, and λόγου its wider sense of narratives, while 
above (§ 10) Aesop’s fables are called by Cebes by the more general name 
of λόγοι. -- οὐκ ἢ (sc. ἐγώ) represents the same in the direct discourse 
(G. 243, N. 1). — τούτους ἐποίησα, J put these into verse. — οἷς πρώτοις évé- 
τυχον, the first which I came upon (for τοὺς πρώτους οἷς ἐνέτυχον), added 
as further explanation of τούτους, to which the principal relative clause ovs 
... Αἰσώπου also belongs. — ταῦτα φράζε, καὶ ἐρρῶσθαι, tell him this, and 
also (bid him) farewell. 


14. οἷον is exclamatory (G. 155). — ἑκὼν εἶναι, a peculiar phrase in 
which εἶναν seems superfluous, meaning willingly (G. 268, N.). —8Tw... 
μέτεστιν, who worthily shares in this thing (philosophy). — βιάσεται αὑτόν, 
i. e. by committing suicide: the first part of the following discussion (here 

omitted) refers to suicide, against which the authority of Philolaus (a cele- 
brated Pythagorean) is quoted. 

15. ἅμα λέγων (G. 277, N. 1). — τὸ -μὴ θεμιτὸν εἶναι (G. 262, 2) differs 
very slightly in meaning from οὐ θεμιτὸν εἶναι in indirect discourse : it 
means its not being right. In the following clause, ἐθέλειν ἄν (= ἐθέλοι 
ἄν) depends directly on λέγεις : that the philosopher should be willing 
(G. 226, 2) to follow, &c. — μυυθολογεῖν, to talk (familiarly) : see Apology, 
§ 7. 

Here follows the celebrated dialogue on Immortality, ending with 
a striking parable, or myth, which sets forth the Greek imagery of 
the judgments of the future world, where “ they who are sufficiently 
purified by philosophy live without the body forevermore, and come 
into dwellings fairer than these, which it were not not easy to de- 
scribe, nor is there time enough at present.” 


Page 107. — 16. τούτων, &c. referring to the discourse just ended. — 
καλὸν yap τὸ ἄθλον, for noble is the reward. — Φαίη ἂν ἀνὴρ τραγικός, 
i. e. as a tragedian would express it. — λουσάμενον, after bathing. — λού- 
ev depends on the verbal idea in πράγματα, as we often say, to take the 
trouble to do a thing. 


17. elev, well then (lit. let this be as it is, G. 251, 1). — ἐπιστέλλεις is 
appropriately used of the last commands of one about to die. — ὅ τι Av... 


104 PLATO. 


ποιοῖμεν, i. 6. which we should especially gratify you by doing: ἄν belongs 
to ποιοῖμεν. --- οὐδὲν καινότερον, in English, simply = nothing new. — 
ὑμῶν αὐτών ἐπιμελούμενοι = édv... ἐπιμελῆσθε, corresponding to ἐὰν δὰ 
ὑμῶν μὲν αὐτῶν ἀμελῆτε, below (G. 226, 1): in the latter clause μέν is 
irregular, and is omitted in many MSS. — οὐδ᾽ ἐὰν ὁμολογήσητε, not even 
if you assent, &c. — πλέον ποιεῖν = to profit. 

18. ὅπως ἂν βούλησθε, as you please (G. 232, 3). —épwrgd... θάπτῃ, 
he asks how he shall bury ME: the subjunctive here represents the interroga- 
tive subjunctive πῶς θάπτω, (G. 256) of the direct question, as it is seen 
above in θάπτωμεν, &c. (G. 244). — ἄλλως λέγειν : ἄλλως is here equiva- 
lent to parny, idly, or without meaning. 


Page Ε908.-- 19. ἐγγύην (G. 159, N. 4). — otros ... παραμενεῖν, for 
he [gave surety in court] that I would remain, i. 6. would not escape: ἢ 
μήν is especially used in oaths and other solemn statements. — οὐχήσε- 
σθαι ἀπιόντα (G. 203, N. 2) represents οἰχήσομαι ἀπιών of the direct dis- 
course (G. 279, 4, N.). —@s... Σωκράτη, that it is Socrates that he lays 
out for burial. —% δ᾽ ὅς (6. 151, N. 3). — 7d... λέγειν, &c. to speak 
wrongly is not merely a mistake as regards the act itself. — καὶ θάπτειν 
(sc. χρὴ) οὕτως, &c. and [you must] bury it in such a way as shall be, ke. 
(G. 232, 3). 

20. ἀνίστατο εἰς οἴκημά τι, arose [and went] into a room. — ὅση (sc. ἧ 
Euudopa) ... εἴη, 1. 6. how heavy [a calamity] had befallen us: indirect 
question. — ἀτεχνῶς... στερηθέντες, exactly as [we should have done] τῇ 
we had been bereft of a father (G. 277, N. 3: 226, 1). — οἰκεῖαι, of the 
Samily. 

21. ὅπερ ἄλλων καταγιγνώσκω, (the fault) which I find with others 
(G. 173, 2, N.).— ἐπειδὰν παραγγέλλω (G. 233), referring to different cases. 


Page LOD. — ἀλλ᾽ ἐκείνοις, sc. τοῖς αἰτίοις. 

22. εἰ τέτριπται, if 11 is mixed. The hemlock was first bruised in a 
mortar ; hence the use of tpiBw. — ὁ ἄνθρωπος (at end), 1. e. a servant. 

23. πίνοντας, sc. τὸ φάρμακον (G. 280). — ἐπειδὰν παραγγελθῇ, afier the 
order has been given them, depends directly on the following participles, 
δειπνήσαντας, &c., but indirectly on πίνοντας, which is frequentative. — 
οὐδὲν... ὀφλήσειν, that I gain nothing except [this] that I shall make my- 
self ridiculous in my own estimation: see note on Apol. § 4. — φειδόμενος 
... ἐνόντος, sparing when nothing is left. Hesiod (Works and Days, 367) 
says, δειλὴ δ᾽ ἐνὶ πυθμένι φείδω, which Seneca thus translates: Sera parst- 
monia in fundo est; "tis a sorry thrift at the bottom of the cup, i. 6. when 
only the dregs are left. 

Page Ε 49. — 24. tas dv... γένηται, until ὦ heaviness shail be felt (G. 
239, 2). — Kal οὕτως αὐτὸ ποιήσει, and then it [the poison] will du vis own 
work: αὐτό is nominative (G. 145, 1). 


25. καὶ ὅς (G. 151, N. 8). ---- τοῦ χρώματος (G. 170, 1). --- ταυρηδόν, 
Jixedly. — πρὸς τὸ ἀποσπεῖσαι, as regards pouring a libation from τέ. ---- 











HERODOTUS. 105 


γενέσθαι, after εὔχεσθαι (α. 203, N. 2). --- γένοιτο (G. 251, 1). — ἐπισχό- 
μενος (Vv. ἐπέχω), holdiny it (to his lips). 


26. τὸ μὴ δακρύειν (G. 263, 2). — ἐμοῦ ye Bid καὶ αὐτοῦ, even n spite of 
myself. — οἵου = ὅτι τοιούτου (G. 238). — ἐστερημένος εἴην (G. 248 ; ef. 
250, Note). — ἀναβρυχησάμενος, sobbing aloud. — οὐδένα ὅντινα οὐ (G. 153, 
N. 4), every one. —karéxdace, pierced to the heart (lit. broke). — ἐν εὐφη- 
pia, here in a negative sense, when no sounds of evil omen are heard: a 
common proclamation of silence before a religious ceremony was εὐφημία 
ἔστω. The saying ἐν εὐφημίᾳ χρὴ τελευτᾶν is called Pythagorean. — τοῦ 
δακρύειν : after ἐπέσχομεν we might have had τοῦ μὴ Saxpdew without 
change of meaning (G. 263, 1). 


Page ΜῈ L.— 27. ovros ὁ δούς, this man [of whom I spoke] who had given, 
(πο. --- διαλιπὼν χρόνον, from time to time: see note on the same expres- 
sion in ὃ 28. — ἐπανιών, going upwards. —8tr ψύχοιτο, that he was becoin- 
ing cold. — αὐτὸς ἥπτετο, he felt of himself. — τότε οἰχήσεται, then he should 
be gone (in direct discourse οἰχήσομαι), one of the phrases used by the 
Greeks to avoid the mention of death. —’AokAnme@ ἀλεκτρυόνα : those 
who recovered from sickness often sacrificed a cock io Aesculapius. Socrates 
suddenly remembers a neglected sacrifice ; or, possibly, he asks Crito to make 
an ofiering in gratitude for his release from life. — μὴ ἀμελήσητε (G. 254). 

28. ὀλίγον διαλιπών, after a little while: the same phrase is general 
(= at iutervals) as used above, because there it is joined with the imper- 
. fect διεσκόπει. -- καὶ ὅς, i. 6. Socrates. —éoryeev is active, and the meaning 
is, his eyes became fixed. — ξυνέλαβε, closed. — tov tote... ἀρίστου, the 
best of his time whom we knew. 


HERODOTUS. 


Tue chief events of the great Persian Wars are the capture of Eu- 
boea and the battle of Marathon, s. c. 490; the defence of Thermo- 
pylae and the sea-fights at Artemisium and Salamis, Β. ο. 480; and the 
battles of Plataea and Mycale in the following year. The narrative 
of these events makes the most interesting and important part of the 
History composed by Herodotus in the generation immediately fol- 
lowing. 

Herodotus was born at Halicarnassus, one of the Doric cities on 
the western coast of Asia Minor, about the year 484 s.c. In his 
manhood he travelled extensively in Asia, Egypt, and Greece, a keen, 
intelligent, and accurate observer. His history is one of the earliest, 
and is much the most curious and interesting, of our sources of knowl 


100 HERODOTUS. 


edge as to the countries, people, customs, history, local politics, and 
family traditions of the century before his own day. It is in nine 
Books, named for the nine Muses. It is full of illustrations of the re- 
ligious beliefs, omens, oracles, customs, and feelings of the time. The 
conflict between Asia and Europe appears in Herodotus as part of a 
great drama, in which the Argonautic expedition and the Trojan war 
had been successive acts, which was watched at every point and 
guided by the manifest direction of the Gods; while in the earlier 
parts of his History he is constantly tracing proofs of that divine 
judgment, which humbles the pride and punishes the crimes of men. 

Asia Minor, with the Greek colonies on its western coast, had been 
added to the Persian dominions by Cyrus the Great, who conquered 
Croesus, king of Lydia, B.c. 546. About the year 8. co. 500, the Ionic 
cities, with Miletus at their head, revolted against the Persian rule; 
and, with the help of allies from Greece, especially the Athenians, 
captured and burned the Lydian capital, Sardis. The war continued 
about six years, and ended in a complete Persian victory. The Ionic 
city of Miletus was captured and reduced to slavery, to the pas- 
sionate grief of its generous allies in Athens. But the attention of 
the Persians had been drawn to the free states and islands towards 
the west, and these hostilities led the way to their two formidable in- 
vasions. Meanwhile the tyrant Hippias, son of Pisistratus, had been 
driven from Athens (8.6. 510), and had taken refuge at the Persian 
court. He was now a feeble old man; but his hate of the Athe- 
nians and desire of revenge made him eager to serve the invader, 
whom he accompanied himself to the plain of Marathon. 

Although Herodotus was a Dorian by birth, he wrote his History 
in Ionic Greek. His intercourse with the Ionic cities in his imme- _ 
diate neighborhood must have made him familiar with their speech, 
even if we reject the account given by Suidas of his long residence 
as an exile in the Ionic island of Samos. But he probably chose the 
Tonic dialect chiefly because it had been used by the historians or an- 
nalists who preceded him. The dialect of Herodotus is known as the 
New Ionic, which, where it differs from the Attic, is very similar to the 
Old Ionic of Homer. Its general peculiarities should be learnt by the 
beginner from the grammar.* Others will be seen in the Lexicon; 
as the use of κ for m in κῶς, ὅκως, κότε, &c., for πῶς, ὅπως, πότε, Xe., 
and the interchange of aspirates in ἐνθαῦτα, ἐνθεῦτεν, κιθών, for ἐν- 
ταῦθα, ἐντεῦθεν, χιτών. The chief peculiarity in syntax is the use of 





* See G. Introduction, pp. 1 and 2; §§ 30; 39; 44; 59; 67, Note 1; 70; 
Notes to 76-86; §$119; 120; 126; Notes to 127; see also §§140, Note 4; 
148, Note 4. Much of the detail in the notes can be learnt by practice while 
reading. 











HERODOTUS. 107 


the forms of the article beginning with r as relative pronouns (G. 140, 
n. 4), which must be kept constantly in mind. 

The story of the Persian Wars is begun in the sixth book of He- 
᾿ rodotus, and is continued in the three following books. The extracts 
here given include the battle of Marathon and the battles of Ther- 
_mopylae, Artemisium, and Salamis, and end with the retreat of Xerxes 
to Asia after his defeat at Salamis. They begin with VI. 48, to which 
ΟΥ͂. 105 is prefixed by way of introduction. 


1. 


Page 88.9..- 1. βασιλέϊ, uncontracted form for βασιλεῖ (G. 53, 8). --- 
ὡς, when. — Σάρδις = Σιάρδεις (α. 53, 1, N. 3), accus. plural. —’Iévev... 
ποιησάμενον, making no account of the Ionians. — μετὰ δέ, but afterwards 
(6.191, N. 2). — πυθόμενον, like ὡς ἐπύθετο above. — elper Oar, used to ask, 
imperfect infinitive (G. 208, N. 1). — ἀπεῖναι for ἀφεῖναι (ν. ἀφίημι : 
ΠΟ. 17, 1, N.), let fly. —plv for αὐτόν (G. 79, 1, N. 4), 1. 6. the arrow. — 
βάλλοντα, as he let it fly (G. 204). — ἐκγενέσθαι, infinitive for optative in 

a wish (G. 270), be it granted. — προστάξαι depends on λέγεται (third line). 
— ἐς τρίς, thrice. — ἑκάστοτε, i. e. every day at supper. — μέμνεο (for μέμ.- 
᾿ς ψησο), as if from a present pépvopar: the form μέμνῃ is found in Homer. 
᾿ς ῷ, μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο : Darius had sent an army and a fleet in 492 B. c., un- 
der his son-in-law Mardonius, to subdue Eretria and Athens, reducing the 
_ Greek populations on the way. Some, including the Macedonians, were 
subdued by the army ; but as the fleet beat about Mount Athos, ‘‘ there 
fell on them a north wind, great and ungovernable, which treated them 
very roughly, dashing many of the ships against Athos ; three hundred of 
them are said to have perished, and more than twenty thousand men. 
And as this sea about Athos is most full of monsters, many were seized and 
devoured by them, and some were crushed against the rocks ; and some 
could not swim and so were lost ; and some perished with cold. So then 
fared that fleet.” (Hdt. VI. 44.) After some successes in the south of 
Thrace, Mardonius returned to Asia. —8 τι ἔχοιεν, indirect question. — 
κότερα = πότερον. --- ἑωυτῷ = ἑαυτῷ. --- σφέας αὐτούς = ἑαυτούς. - ὧν 
_ = οὖν, therefore. —&ddovs ἄλλῃ τάξας, i. 6. ordering them to different 
places. — πόλιας -- πόλεις (G. 53, 1, N. 3). — νέας μακράς, ships of war, 
haves longas. 

3. τὰ προΐσχετο aitéwv, what he put forward as his demand. — és τοὺς 
ἀπικοίατο = cis ols ἀφίκοιντο (G. 233). — Kal δὴ καί, lit. and moreover 

also, an emphatic formula very common in Hdt. Here it stands for the 
usual καί in the expression ἄλλοι te... καί. --- σφί = σφίσι (G. 79, 1, 
N. 2), used like αὐτοῖς in Attic (G. 144, 2.) — ἐπεκέατο (G. 127, VI. N.). 
᾿ς ἐπὶ σφίσι ἔχοντας, aiming a blow at them (as English, ‘‘ have at them”). 






Page LIS. — ads... στρατεύωνται, so as to join the Persians in march- 
ang upon them. The jealousy thus roused threatened a war which would 
‘ 


a 


108 HERODOTUS. 


have divided and weakened Greece : it was composed in season, and the 
men of Aegina fought bravely against the Persians at Salamis and Plataea. 
— τὰ πεποιήκοιεν, what [as the Athenians said] they had done (G. 248, 4, 
last ex.). —ovvijrro: the active form συνάπτειν πόλεμον (cf. συνάπτειν 
μάχην in ὃ 12, to join battle), means, to engage in war. The hostility be- 
tween Aegina and Athens is traced by Herodotus to the following circum- 
stance: In time of famine, the Epidaurians had brought two statues of 
sacred olive-wood from Athens, paying therefor a yearly service at the 
shrine of Erechtheus. After these had for many years been effectual to 
avert the barrenness of the land, they were stolen by Aeginetans, colo- 
nists of Epidaurus, and the tribute ceased. The Athenians then sent to 
demand it at Aegina; but, while they were attempting to drag away the 
sacred statues, a violent storm burst forth, with an earthquake, so that 
their whole expedition, struck with frenzy, fell upon one another and 
perished, except one man who fled to tell the tale. 


4. ὥστε is used with the participle by Hdt. in the same sense as ἅτε in 
Attic (G. 277, N. 26); not in the sense of as. — Πεισιστρατιδέων, i. 6. Hip- 
pias and his household. Pisistratus, the father of Hippias, became tyrant 
at Athens B. c. 560. Hippias was expelled and the democracy restored 
B. Ο. 510, twenty years before the battle of Marathon. — προσκατημένων 
= προσκαθημένων. --- ταύτης... . προφάσιος, adhering to this purpose. — 
“Ἑλλάδος, partitive genitive with τοὺς μὴ δόντας. --- φλαύρως πρήξαντα, 
οἵ. κακῶς πράττειν (α. 165, N. 2). --- παραλύει, ‘‘ relieves.” — ἀποδέξας 
= ἀποδείξας, having appointed. — Δᾶτιν, ᾿Αρταφέρνεα, in apposition with 
στρατηγούς. 








Here follows the expedition of the fleet against the Grecian islands, and 
the capture of Eretria, in Euboea, the inhabitants of which were colonized 
by Darius eastward of the Persian Gulf. 


5. ἐς τὴν ᾿Αττικήν : Eretria was opposite the northern point of Attica, 
across the strait, which is here about five miles wide. —katépyovtes = καθ- 
είργοντες, hemming in the Athenians greatly: the word is doubtful. — 
δοκέοντες... τά, expecting to do the same by the Athenians, as, &c. (G. 165). 
—«al... γάρ : here the separate force of these particles can be seen, and 
... for. Generally, however, καὶ yap means simply jor swrely (more em- 
phatic than γάρ alone), the original ellipsis of a clause with καί being for- 
gotten. —6 Μαραθών : ‘the plain of Marathon is about six miles from 
north to south, and of varying width, having the eastern declivities of 
Pentelicus on the west, and the sea on the east.” Felton. It is about 
twenty miles northeast from Athens, and fifteen southeast from Eretria. — ~ 
ἐνιππεῦσαι, i. 6. for cavalry movements. — κατηγέετο = καθηγεῖτο. --- σφί — 
(G. 171, 8, N.). — δέκα, i. 6. one from each Attic tribe. — δέκατος, one of 
ten (not tenth). — τοῦ, whose. —karédaBe, it befell: its subject is φυγεῖν, 
which means properly to get banished (aorist), while φεύγειν is to be in exile: 
φεύγω is of course transitive, lit. to flee from, hence Πεισίστρατον. 








HERODOTUS. 109 


6. ἥκων ἐκ τῆς Χερσονήσου : this refers to the Thracian Chersonesus 
(on the west side of the Hellespont), where Miltiades had been several 
years governor or ‘‘despot.” Hence Byron’s familiar lines, 


‘The tyrant of the Chersonese,”’ &c. 


His uncle, Miltiades, the so-called οἰκιστής (or founder of the Chersonese), 
had led the first Athenian colony to this region during the reign of Pisis- 
tratus. Miltiades the younger, according to Herodotus, had advised 
breaking down the bridge on the Danube, and leaving Darius to perish in 
his campaign against the Scythians (about 516 B. c.): hence the king's 
enmity against him, and attempt to seize him, described below. 


Page LU4. — περὶ πολλοῦ ἐποιεῦντο, made great efforts. — τὸ ἐνθεῦτεν, 
thereupon. — ὑποδεξάμενοι, watching for his return: the simple ἐδεξάμην in 
Ionic Greek, as in Attic, belongs to δέχομαι : but in compounds care must 
be taken to avoid confusion with this and similar Ionic forms (as ἐδέχθην) 
belonging to δείκνυμι. ---- ἀπεδέχθη, was appointed. 

7. τοῦτο μελετῶντα, i. 6. this was his profession. —T@ = 4, dative after 
περιπίπτει, falls in with (G. 187). — βώσαντα (v. Bodo), calling. — Πᾶνα, 
subject of κελεῦσαι, which depends on ἔλεγε understood: Pan was the Pe- 
lasgic (i. e. aboriginal) deity, whose chief seat of worship was the Pelasgic 
district of Arcadia. — ἀπαγγεῖλαι, to carry this message (implying to ask). 
— διότι (= διὰ τί)... ποιεῦνται, why they paid no reverence to him. —ta 
δέ is used before ἔτι as if τὰ μέν stood before πολλαχῇ. — καταστάντων 
e+ + πρηγμάτων, when their affairs were now restored to good condition. — 
εἶναι : the subject is ταῦτα after πιστεύσαντες. --- ἱρόν, shrine: this was a 
grotto below the Acropolis, with a descent of 47 steps. — ἀπό, in conse- 
quence of. — λαμπάδι, a torch-race. 

8. δευτεραῖος, within two duys: the distance is about 140 miles. —aeputre- 
σοῦσαν (like περιπεσεῖν), aorist participle without time (G. 279, 3). — 
πρός, at the hands of. — πόλι, dative of difference (G. 188, 2): Greece is 
become poorer by one notable city. — ἕαδε, v. av8dvw. — ἀδύνατα ἦν, it was 
impossible, a common expression for ἀδύνατον Av (G. 135, 2). 








Page 115. — ἱσταμένου τοῦ μηνός : the lunar month was divided into 
three parts, called ἱστάμενος, μεσών, φθίνων. --- εἰνάτη = ἐνάτη, ninth. It 
is supposed that in this particular month occurred the Carneia, the creat 
Dorian festival in honor of Apollo, lasting from the seventh to the fifteenth 
(i. e. till the full moon), during which no Dorian might bear arms. It 
occurred generally in August, but this year early in September. — μὴ οὐ 
(G. 289,7, Rem.) ... τοῦ κύκλου, while the moon’s disk was not yet full. 


9. συνευνηθῆναι τῇ μητρί : this he understood to mean, that he should 
sleep in the grave in his native land. — γηραιός, in his old age. — κατεὰ- 
ϑών (G. 138, κ. 8). 

10. τοῦτο pév... τοῦτο δέ (G. 148, n. 4). --- ἀπέβησε, put ashore. — 
καταγομένας, brought to land: the corresponding ἀνάγεσθαι is to put to sea. 
—oi, to him, dative following ἐπῆλθε, — ἐώθεε for εἰώθει, v. Hw. — ola 





110 HERODOTUS. 

Ὺ 
(G. 277, κι. 2 Ὁ) with ἐόντι, since he was. — πρεσβυτέρῳ, rather old. — ἔξε- 
ληλυθέναι, had come to puss (lit. had come out). 

11. ἐν τεμένει Ἡρακλέος, i. 6. in Marathon. — Πλαταιέες, the city of 
Plataea was about twenty-five miles northwest from Athens, in the terri- 
tory of Boeotia. — dvapatpéaro, for ἀνήρηντο, v. dvatpew, had undertaken 
(G. 119, 3). — ἑκαστέρω, too far off (to be of any use to you). 

Page REG. — τοιήδε... ψυχρή, such a service would prove to be cold, | 
i. e. too weak to be of use. — φθαίητε. .. ἡμέων, for you might be enslaved 
many vimes before any of us would hear (G. 279, 2) : -πυθέσθαν here follows | 
φθαίητε 4 from the force of πρίν implied in the verb (G. 274, N.); a rare 
construction. — τυμωρέειν οὐ κακοῖσι, 20 cowards to help. — cvverrearas, | 
v. συνίστημι, coming in collision. —Bovwrotor: especially Thebans, who 
would object to the proposed union of Plataea and Athens. 

12. οὐκ ἠπίστησαν, 1. 6. they followed their advice. — ποιεύντων is 
temporal. — ἐπιτρεψάντων ἀμφοτέρων, both sides choosing then. umpires. — 
οὔρισαν for ὥρισαν, v. ὁρίζω. --- ἐᾶν... τελέειν, that the Thebans should 
leave at liberty (€av) those of the Boeotians who were unwilling to belong to 
the Boeotian league, which was under the exclusive control of Thebes. 

13. ἔπεθήκαντο (G. 110, III. 1, n. 1). --- ἑσσώθησαν (for ἧσσ-, v. ἧσ- 
σάομαι), were defeated. — tois... οὔρους, the boundaries which, &c.; τούς 
is relative. 

14. ἐγίνοντο δίχα, were divided. — τῶν μέν, &c., one part voting not to 
engage. — ὀλίγους, too few. —tav δέ, &c., the other, including Miltiades, 
urging τέ, --- ἐνίκα, ἥ χείρων, the more timid was likely to prevail (imper- 
fect). — κυάμῳ λαχών, elected by lot (lit. by the bean). The polemarch was 
the third in rank of the nine archons, and he was originally (as his name | 
denotes) a military commander. Soon after the Persian Wars, however, — 
his duties were confined to the management of the affairs of foreigners resi- 
dent at Athens, and military matters were left to the board of ten generals — 
(στρατηγοί). 

Page 8.1 δ. -- 15. οὐδέ, ὅτο., not even Harmodius and Aristogiton, πο 
delivered Athens by slaying Hipparchus, the son of Pisistratus and brother 
of Hippias, who was then tyrant : they were from the same deme with Cal- 
limachus (Aphidnae). — δέδοκται τὰ πείσονται, it is already determined 
what they shall suffer : i. e. the tyranny of the Pisistratidae will be restored _ 
and the democracy abolished. — περιγένηται, shall get the victory. — οἵη τέ 
ἐστι (G. 151, N. 4). --- ἀνήκει és σέ, has come up to you [for decision]. — 
ἔλπομαι, 7 anticipate. — στάσιν, commotion or civil conflict. — ὥστε μη- 
Sicat, so that they will favor the Persians, i. e. prove traitors to the na- 
tional cause: in this verb μηδίζω, and often elsewhere, the Persians are — 
incorrectly called Medes by the Greek writers. —ampiv tu... ἐγγενέσθαι, 
before there come anything rotten (cowardly or corrupt) into one and another 
of the Athenians. — θεῶν . . . νεμόντων, if the Gods judge justly. — ἢν ἕλῃ, 
if you prefer (v. αἱρέω). --- τῶν . . . ἀγαθῶν (for av... ἀγαθῶν), by attrac- 
tion and assimilation (G. 154, N.) for τῶν ἀγαθῶν (G. 181, N.) ἃ κατέλεξα, 














HERODOTUS. lil 































16. μετὰ δέ (G. 191, N. 2). — πρυτανηΐη τῆς Autpns, command for the 
day, which passed in rotation through the whole board of ten generals: as 
_ one general belonged to each tribe, it is likely that the same order was fol- 
lowed here as in the ordinary succession of the tribes in the πρυτανεία, 
ΠΟΙ was determined annually by lot (see note on ὃ 17, below, and on 
_ Xen. Mem. ὃ 18). —Sexdpevos = δεχόμενος. 
not yet. — πρίν, wntil (G. 240, 1). 


Page 519. - 17. τότε, &c.: the right wing was the post of honor, as 
_ being most perilous, that side being unprotected by the shield; it was 
anciently assigned to the king. —as ἠριθμέοντο, in order, as they were 
numbered ; see note on ὃ 16, above. — ἀπὸ ταύτης . .. σφι μάχης, from 
their fighting in this battle: for opt (the Plataeans) see G. 184, 3, N. 4. — 
θυσίας... γινομένας, when the Athenians celebrate the sacrifices and festi- 
vals which take place every four years: this refers especially to the greater 
_ Panathenaic festival. — λέγων is parenthetical, and γίνεσθαι depends on 
κατεύχεται (G. 203, N. 2). — ἐξισούμενον, extended to equal length. —ém\ 
 πάξιας ὀλίγας, but a few ranks deep. 





οὐ... κω: = ov... Te, 





18. ὡς δέ σφι διετέτακτο, impersonal (see G. 188, 3, second ex.) — ἀπεί- 
θησαν (v. ἀφίημι), were allowed to advance (lit. let go or sent forth) ‘like 
“racers in the course” (Stein). — μανίην ... ἐπέφερον, they imputed mad- 
mess: in fact, only the admirable training of the Athenians saved them 
_ from being thrown into disorder, by which they must have perished. — 
ἵππου (fem.), cavalry. — ἀνέσχοντο ὁρέοντες, endured to behold. — ταύτην 
ἐσθημένους, wearing it (a peculiar word: G. 164; 197, 1, N. 2). — τέως, 
bill then. — φόβος ἀκοῦσαι (6. 261, 2, N.). 


19. μαχομένων, genitive absolute denoting time, while they fought. — 
τὸ μέσον (G. 160, 1), at the centre, like κατὰ τοῦτο ἐνίκων just below. — 
τῇ, where. — Σάκαι: these were Scythian bowmen, serving probably as 
| mariners in the fleet, and efficient in land service. — ἐτετάχατο = τετα- 
᾿γμένοι ἦσαν. --- ῥήξαντες, breaking through. 


| Page Ε19.- ἔων, they suffered, for εἴων. --- τοῖς... , ῥήξασι, dative 
after ἐμάχοντο. --- φεύγουσι, in their flight. — Πέρσῃσι (G. 186, N. 1). 





20. ἀπὸ δ᾽ ἔθανε, the verb is ἀπέθανε, the prepositions being separated 
| by tmesis (G. 191, N. 3). — γενόμενος, having proved himself. — Kuvéya- 
| pos, a brother of the poet Aeschylus: he was attempting to climb into the 
|, ship by the stern-works (ἀφλάστων). --- τὴν χεῖρα (G. 197, 1, N. 2). 

| 21. €avaxpovedpevor, backing water. — ἀπικόμενοι (G. 279, 4). — αἰτίη, 
| &c., an accusation became current (ἔσχε) that they planned this by con- 
| trance of the Alcmaconidae: this was a powerful family in Athens, at 
| feud with Miltiades, — the same to which, in the next generation, Pericles 
| belonged. — ἀναδέξαι ἀσπίδα, displayed a shield (G. 203): this depends 
j On the idea of saying in αἰτίη. This shield, ‘‘ discernible from its polished 
| surface afar off, was seen held aloft upon some high point of Attica, — per- 
| haps on the summit of Mount Pentelicus. ... A little less quickness on 


: 


142 HERODOTUS. 





























the part of Miltiades in deciphering the treasonable signal and giving the . 
instant order of march, —a little less energy on the part of the Athenian 
citizens in superadding a fatiguing march to a no less fatiguing combat, 
and the Persians, with the partisans of Hippias, might have been found in f 
possession of Athens. . . . Nothing could have rescued her, except that 
decisive and instantaneous ‘attack which Miltiades so emphaticaiiy urged.4 
Grote. 

22. ποδῶν (G. 168, N. 3), genitive following τάχιστα, i. 6. at the top of 2 : 
their βρεεί. --- ἔφθησαν ἀπικόμενοι (G. 279, 4). — πρὶν ἢ ἥκειν (G. 274, κ.). ὦ 
— Κυνοσάργεϊ, ἃ grove and gymnasium, eastward of the city, like the Acad- | 
emy (see note on Xen. Hellen. ii. 2. 8). — ὑπεραιωρηθέντες, lying of (lit. 
above): in the same way the Greeks spoke of a vessel leaving the shore by : 
ἀνάγεσθαι, and of one approaching the shore by κατάγεσθαι, Compare the ἢ 
active expression νέας ἀνακωχεύσαντες, keeping the ships at anchor, just be- | 
low. — Φαλήρου, the old port of Athens (see map, and note on Xen. Hell. @ 
p- 42): at this time the Piraeus had not been fortified. 


23. συνήνεικε, v. cupdépa, it befell. 


Page 120. - πληγέντα, struck with — or pike ; βληθέντα, hit with — 
arrow or javelin. — σκιάζειν (G. 260, 2, κ. 2). = 

24. ἔχοντες... . οὕτω, making such Reais to reach Athens in time for the 
battle. — τρνταῖοι, on the third day from Sparta (i. 6. two days after leay- 
ing Sparta). Plato says that they arrived the day after the battle. 
θηήσασθαι (v. θεάομαι). 

After the victory at Marathon, Miltiades procured an armament of sev- 
enty ships under his own command, for secret service, — which proved t 
be an attack on Paros, to revenge, says Herodotus, a private quarrel. He 
returned unsuccessful, and was impeached of treason by Xanthippus, father 
of Pericles. The penalty of death was commuted for a fine of fifty talents 
and before this was paid, he died of a wound or bruise received in hi 
escape from Paros. Meanwhile, the Greeks were left in security and peaee, 
and the next invasion, under Xerxes, was delayed for a period of tem 
years. 


The date of the battle of Marathon, according to the most satisfae 
tory calculations, is September 12, 8. c. 450. The account of the batth 
in Herodotus, although it is the best that we have, is very far from satis 
factory. We have no detailed description of the movements, no 86 
count of the feeling in Athens either before or after the victory, 2 
statement (even on conjecture: of the numbers engaged on eithe 
side. This silence on some points probably arose from the fact tha 
the invasion of Xerxes was the chief object of interest in his histo 
and the invasion of Darius was looked upon chiefly as introductor 
to this. But on other points, especially as to the numbers, we maj | ' 
safely presume that he is silent simply because he had no authent | 


HERODOTUS. 113 

































| information. He is very minute in giving the numbers of the slain, 
me of which at least (that of the one hundred and ninety-two Athe- 
| nians) he could have known from inscriptions. As to the numbers 
| of the Persians, hardly a guess can be made: they are variously stated 
| by later historians from 600,000 to 110,000, which last is the esti- 
| mate of Cornelius Nepos. The same historian gives the number of 
Greeks as 10,000, including 9,000 Athenians and 1,000 Plataeans. 
Others give 10,000 Athenians and 1,000 Plataeans. If this estimate 
“included only the heavy armed, and the usual addition is made for 
| light armed, we shall make the whole Greek force consist of 20,000 
‘or 22,000 men. (See Rawlinson, Appendix to Book VI.) 

| Herodotus does not mention cavalry in the battle, although he states 
| that the field of Marathon was selected by the Persians because it 
Was excellent for cavalry movements (ἐνιππεῦσαι). We may suppose 
he cavalry to have been absent foraging on the day of the battle, 
which the Persians were not expecting (as Rawlinson suggests) ; or it 
|May not yet have been landed, for some reason not given. At all 
prents, no account is given of its re-embarkation, which would have 
Been difficult after the defeat. 

ΒΥ the view given in Blakesley’s “ Excursus,” the landing at Mara- 
thon was meant only foralodgement. The region near held many par- 
fisans of Hippias, who were also formidable in the city; and if their 
xxpected movement had taken place, the Persians‘might have landed 
heir cavalry, destroyed the little army of the Greeks, and occupied 
he country at their leisure. This plan was foiled by the generalship 
f Miltiades, who, after the two armies had held each other several 
days in check, suddenly extended his wings, and struck his blow so 
" omptly that the Persians were beaten by sheer surprise. They 
yen drove the Athenian centre in rout, as Herodotus says, into 
he interior (μεσόγαιαν) ; the wings, alone, had fled in “ panic” flight, 

nd perished in the marshes on the flanks, — the service rendered, at 
this crisis, by the god Pan. On the whole, the main force must have 
pome off with small loss and in good order, the greatness of the vic- 
7 being exaggerated by the patriotic pride of the Greeks. Their 
εἰ ips lay moored, stern to the shore, and were easily got off, only 
seven of the whole fleet being” taken or sunk. The battle was won, 

mot by the mere superior valor of the Greeks, but by the skill and 
Snergy of their commander, who for many days kept his little army 
Safe from attack, in a well-chosen position, and fought when a longer 
lelay might have been fatal; for the Persians were expecting a dem- 
istration from the disloyal faction in Athens, which was prevented 
ly by the promptness and completeness of his victory. 


δ 
FA 
t 


. 


114 HERODOTUS. 


11. 


Page 120..- Ἰ, κεχαραγμένον, exasperated, lit. sharply cut: the same 
verb (χαράσσω) from which our own word character is derived. — δεινό- 
τερα ἐποίεε, comparative of δεινὰ ποιεῖν, to take (a thing) 7, aegre ferre. 


Page U2. — ἐδονέετο, was kept in commotion (‘* din”). — as... στρα- 
τευσομένων, since they were to attack Greece: this phrase gives the reason 
of ἀρίστων. 

2. τετάρτῳ ἔτεϊ, i. 6. probably in the summer of B. c. 487. — Καμβύ- 
oew: Cambyses, son and successor of Cyrus the Great, had made Egypt | 
a Persian province in 525 B. 6. --- μᾶλλον ὥρμητο, was the more eager (lit. 
had been the more impelled). — στελλομένου, about proceeding, i. 6. getting — 
ready his στόλος. --- παίδων : the dispute was between Xerxes and Arta- 
bazanes. Xerxes, though the younger, was son of Atossa, daughter of Cy- 
rus the Great, the queen of Darius. Through her he inherited his own 
claim of sovereignty, and she was now all-powerful at the Persian court. 
He had, besides, the claim of having been ‘‘ born in the purple,” after Da- 
rius came to the throne, — Artabazanes being son of a former wife. — ἣγε- 
povins, precedence as to the succession. — as δέει depends on the idea of | 
demanding vaguely implied in στάσις ἐγένετο. --- οὕτω refers back to ἀπο- | 
δέξαντα : the meaning is, that after nominating a successor he should so set 
forth, i. e. he should πού set forth until he had done this. — παρασκευαζό- | 
μένον agrees with Δαρεῖον, which is subject of ἀποθανεῖν. --- συνήνεικε, ἐξ΄ 
happened. 

3. καὶ Ξέρξης : Herodotus represents that Xerxes was at first indifferent | 
to the expedition against Greece, but was urged to it by Mardonius (after- 
wards slain at Plataea), who hoped to become satrap of Greece. In a royal 
council held after Egypt was subdued, Xerxes declared his intention to 
make the invasion by way of the Hellespont, and was supported by Mar- 
donius, but dissuaded by his uncle Artabanus, his wisest counsellor, — 
who, however, yielded to the terror of a vision, which ‘‘ threatened to burn | 
out his eyes with hot irons” for his opposition to the will of destiny. He 
now ‘‘openly favored the expedition ; and so Xerxes gathered together his 
host, ransacking every corner of the continent.” — ἐπὶ τέσσερα ἔτεα, four 
full years, counting from the reduction of Egypt in B. c. 485. — avopev@ 
(v. ἄνω), advancing, i. 6. in the course of the year. — χειρὶ μεγάλῃ πλήθεος, 
with a mighty (hand of) force: with this use of χείρ cf. Laiin manus. — 
στόλων : this refers to the expedition of Darius against the Scythians, the 
great Scythian invasion of Media, the war of Troy, and the conquest of 
Thrace and Northern Greece, still earlier, by the Mysians and Teucrians ; 
‘yet not all these,” says Herodotus, ‘‘ nor all others which have ever been, 
were worthy to be compared with this single one.” — of μέν, &c., i. 6. the 
several nations and districts subject to Xerxes. — és πεζὸν ἐτετάχατο, had 
orders for foot soldiers: τὸ awefév means foot soldiers when opposed to 





HERODOTUS. 115 


eavalry, but land force (in general) when opposed to a naval armament. —~ 
ἵππος (fem.), cavalry, ‘‘ horse.” --- ἅμα (G. 277, N. 1). — γεφύρας, see be- 
low, ὃ 10. 

4. τοῦτο μέν (G. 148, ν. 4), here with no correlative τοῦτο δέ. --- ὡς im- 
plies that προσπταισάντων gives the reason of Xerxes for digging the canal 
through Athos (G. 277, N. 2): for προσπταισάντων, see note on 1. § 2, — 
προετοιμάζετο (impersonal), preparations were made in advance. ~ék« τριῶν 
ἐτέων, from a time three years ὈΔΟΚ. --- ᾿λαιοῦντι, Hlwews, at the extreme 
southwest point of the Chersoneus, was the base of the naval operations at 
Athos ; the military head-quarters were at Sestos, about eighteen miles 
while oppedpevor is an Ionic form (= ὁρμώ- 
pevor) from oppaw. — ὑπὸ μαστίγων, i. e. driven to their work by scourges. 
See below, ὃ 21; and III. § 44, where Hdt. describes the Persians εἴ 
Thermopylae as driven into the battle by scourges. — παντοδαποί, various 
detachments. — διάδοχοι, in relays. 

Page E22.-— 5. σχοινοτενές, ὦ straight line (as if by a stretched cord). 
— βαθέα (for βαθεῖα) : at the greatest depth, the canal would be about sixty 
feet below the surface. — βάθρων, stagings: the Phoenicians, according to 
Herodotus, were the only ones skilful enough in engineering to avoid the 
caving in of the banks by beginning the excavation with double the width 
required at the bottom. —apnrfptov, lon. for πρατήριον, ὦ market, a place 
_ for selling, from mpa- (stem of πιπράσκω). --- ἀληλεσμένος (Vv. ἀλέω), ready 
ground. 

6. as... εὑρίσκειν, so far as I can find out (G. 268): in fact, it was not 
a very difficult work, and was highly politic, especially in case Greece 
should be subjugated. The canal, which has been traced, ‘‘is about a mile 
and a quarter long, and twenty-five yards across ; it has been much filled 
up with mud and rushes.” — παρεόν (G. 278, 2), when it was in his power. 
— - διειρύσαι, to hawl across, an operation easily performed with the light 
vessels of the ancients. — εὖρος as... πλώειν, of [such] width that two tri- 
remes could pass through (G. 266, N. 1). — ἐλαστρευμένας (for ἐλαυνομέ- 
vas), driven by oars. — ζεύξαντας γεφυρῶσαι, simply to bridge the river: 
the Greeks said ποταμὸν ζεῦξαι (ἃ 8) and ποταμὸν γεφυρῶσαι, and Hit. 
has even γεφύρας ζευγνύων. 

7. Kptrdddov, the frontier town of Cappadocia. — γῆν τε kal ὕδωρ, see 
below, ὃ 28. — δεῖπνα, see below, § 25. 


Page 423.—8. οἱ δέ: those who had charge of the work (see τοῖσι 
προσεκέετο below). — ἐξεύγνυσαν, were (in the mean time) building. — τὴν 
μὲν... τὴν δέ : understand γέφυραν from ἐγεφύρουν above. — βυβλίνην, 
_ Of papyrus: this plant was used by the Egyptians for ropes as well as for 
paper. - ἔστι... στάδιοι (G. 135, N. 5). 

9. ἐπικέσθαι μάστιγι (= μαστιγώσαι); {0 scourge, here takes πληγάς as a 
cognate accusative (G. 159), to strike the stream three hundred blows with a 
ἯΣ “lash. Understand τινάς as subject of both ἐπικέσθαι (v. ἐφικνέομαι) and 
. ἃ κατεῖναι (v. καθίημι). --- ποταμῷ : the current, about three miles an hour, 
a gives the Hellespont the aspect of a river. 










110 HERODOTUS. 


10. τὰς δέ, the bridges. — ὑπό, wnder, as a support. — ἑξήκοντά τε καὶ 
τριηκοσίας : the upper bridge may have been made stronger (of three hun- 
dred and sixty vessels) to resist the greater force of the stream ; or it may 
have been at a broader part of the channel, which is here about a mile 
wide. (See Grote’s note.} — τοῦ pév... κατὰ ῥόον, at right angles with 
the Pontus, and in the line of the current of the Hellespont (to diminish 
the resistance). — ἵνα ἀνακωχεύῃ, that it [this arrangement of vessels] 
might ease (i. 6. by lifting) the strain on the tackle: ἀνακωχεύω (kindred to 
avéxw) means to hold up, with the idea of relieving or keeping quiet (see 
ἀνακωχεύσαντες τὰς νέας, Keeping the ships off the coast, in I. § 22): so 
ἀνακωχή means a truce. It is hard to see why (according to the common 
interpretation, that the force of the stream might keep up the tension of the 
cables, i. e. keep them taut) there should be any anxiety to provide for the 
tension of cables which were stretched over a strait a mile wide, and rested 
on vessels in a stream running three miles an hour ! — συνθέντες is re- 
peated after the long parenthesis. — τὰς pév... τῆς ἑτέρης, [they cast] those 
(ἀγκύρας) of [the ships forming] one bridge towards the Pontus. — εἵνεκεν, 
to guard against. — ἔσωθεν, i. 6. from the Euxine. — τῆς δὲ ἑτέρης, i. 6. the 
anchors of the other bridge. — πρὸς ἑσπέρης, sc. κατῆκαν.--- εὔρου, νότου : 
these were southeast and south winds, both blowing more or less up stream. 





Page 124. — διέκπλοον : the small craft (πλοῖα λεπτά) would pass in 
and out underneath the cables. 


11. χωρὶς ἑκάτερα, i. 6. the flaxen cables and those of papyrus. — εἷλκε, 
weighed: if the talent here meant is the Euboean, or old Attic, a cubit 
(eighteen inches) weighed nearly eighty pounds. — τῶν ὅπλων τοῦ τόνου, 
the stretching of the cables, i. e. the cables, as they were stretched across the 
strait. — ἐπεζεύγνυον, joined them above, either by ropes or by strips of wood. 


12. xvrot, breakwaters. — ῥηχίης, surf: the tide in this sea being very 
slight. — ὁ ἥλιος ; no eclipse of the sun, visible at Sardis, took place in 
B. C. 480, if the latest astronomical calculations can be trusted ; the story 
here told may belong to the departure from Susa in the preceding year, 
when there was such an eclipse. The date of the invasion of Xerxes 
(8. ο. 480) is too well established to admit of doubt. — ἐπινεφέλων ἐόντων, 
genitive absolute : the indicative would be ἐπινέφελά ἐστιν, 2 18 cloudy 
(G. 135,2).— αἰθρίης (noun), in fair weather, is genitive of time 
(6. 179, 1). — τὸ ἐθέλοι (= τί ἐθέλοι), τό being relative used interroga- 
tively (G. 282, 1). — προδέκτορα, verbal of προδείκνυμι, that which desig- 
nates or foreshows. 


Page E25.— 13. ἀναμίξ, i. 6. not divided into separate bodies, as they 
marched according to cities or provinces. — διελέλευπτο, impersonal. — 
οὗτοι, these, who marched in advance. — προηγεῦντο, i. 6. led the part of 
the army which accompanied the king ; opposed to οὗτοι. --- κάτω τρέψαντες, 
this was a mark of respect to the king, who followed them. — ἅρμα Διός : 
by Zeus Hdt. means the chief God of the Persians, Auramazda or Ormuzd. 











HERODOTUS. 117 


14. λόγος, choice or fancy. — κατὰ νόμον, i. 6. with point upward. — 
οὗτος, the ten thousand just mentioned. — fords, pomeyranutes, probably 
as sacred emblems. — ἀντὶ σαυρωτήρων, in the pluce of points at the lower 
end. — oi... τράποντες (lon. for τρέποντες, present), those who preceded 
the Nisaean horses (ὃ 13). 


Page 126.— 15. Σκάμανδρον, the Scamander of the Iliad: here a 
shallow brook, in a bed about two hundred feet broad ; in the dry season 
only three feet deep. — ῥέεθρον (G. 160, 1). — οὐδ᾽ ἀπέχρησε... πινό- 
pevos, and did not have water sufficient for the army to drink (lit. did not 
suffice when drunk, &c.). — ὡς ἀπίκετο repeats the genitive absolute ἀπικο - 
μένου after the long relative clause. 


16. ‘On this transit from Asia into Europe, Herodotus dwells with 
peculiar emphasis ; and well he might do so, since when we consider the 
bridges, the invading number, the unmeasured hopes succeeded by no less 
unmeasured calamity, it will appear not only to have been the most im- 
posing event of his century, but to rank among the most imposing events 
of all history.” Grote. — Kal... γάρ are here to be separated, and —as 
(for) a seat had been erected for him here, &c. (See note on 1. § 5, above.) 


o 


— ἐθηεῖτο = ἐθεᾶτο. --- dpa = ἑώρα, imperfect of ὁράω. 

17. ὧνήρ = ὁ ἀνήρ.--- φρασθείς, perceiving (see Lexicon). —as... εἰ 
περιέσται, the direct. exclamation would be, mwas... ἐστὶν, εἰ περιέσται ; 
how short is the whole of man’s life, if no one... is to be alive, ke. 
(G. 221, n.). 


Page 12%. —the second οὕτω qualifies εὐδαίμων. --- τῷ (G. 237, N.). — 
γλυκὺν γεύσας τὸν αἰῶνα, after giving [man] a taste of the sweetness of life, 
lit. ὦ taste of life as (being) sweet. — φθονερός, jealous, 1. 6. lest man should 
vie with him in blessedness. 

18. τῶνδ᾽ ἐγὼ ὑμέων χρηΐζων, wanting this (G. 148, nN. 1) of you: so 
δέομαι occasionally takes two genitives, instead of the common construc- 
tion (G. 172, Ν. 1). — ξυνὸν. .. σπεύδεται, for this which we are seeking is 
for the good of all in common: the construction being τοῦτο yap omevderar 
(passive) [ὃν] ἀγαθὸν πᾶσι ξυνόν : the adjective Euvds = κοινός. --- évrera- 
μένως, vigorously (adverb formed from participle of ἐντείνω). --- τῶν (= ὧν) 
for kal τούτων. --- od μή τις... ἀντιστῇ (2 aorist), an emphatic future ex- 
pression (G. 257). --- λελόγχασι (v. Aayxdvw), have in charge (as if as- 
signed by lot): ef. Latin sortiti sunt. 

19. τὸν ἥλιον, the Sun, under the name of Jfithra, was one of the chief 
objects of worship in the Persian religion. 


Page 128. — # μιν παύσει (G. 236). — πρότερον i}... γένηται, = πρὶν 
dy... γένηται (G. 240, N.). — ἀκινάκην, a short, straight-pointed sword, 
or dirk. — μαστιγώσαντι (G. 277, 2). 

20. ἐπὶ δὲ αὐτὸς ἘΞέρξης, i. 6. after the chariot. —dvfjyovro, put off 
_ form the shore. 


118 HERODOTUS. 


21, εἰδόμενος, likening thyself; ϑέμενος, taking to thyself. — fv... 
ποιέειν (G. 222, N. 2). 

22. τὸν ᾿Εἰλλήσποντον, accusative governed by the phrase ἔξω πλώων, as 
if it were a compound verb like ἐκλείπειν, which takes the accusative. — 
“τρήσσων τὰ ἔμπαλιν τοῦ πτεζοῦ, taking the opposite direction from the land 
force (lit. doing the opposite), i. e. sailing southwest towards the Aegean, 
while the army marched northeast into Thrace. — Δορίσκον : this was a 
strong Persian fortress, which had been held since the invasion of Scythia 
by Darius. (See note on I. § 6.) 


Page 129. — 23. πλήθεος ἀριθμόν, number of people. — τοῦ πεζοῦ, of 
the foot-soldiers (as we know from Hdt. VII. 184, where the cavalry are 
estimated at 80,000 in addition to this number. — τὸ πλῆθος ; by this 
reckoning, 1,700,000 men, a very uncertain estimate, as the numbers 
might easily be exaggerated in the loose way of counting. Ctesias makes 
800,000, and Aelian 700,000; but ‘‘we may well believe,” says Mr. Grote, 
‘that the numbers of Xerxes were greater than were ever assembled in 
ancient times, or perhaps at any known epoch of history.” — συννάξαν- 
τες ταύτην, 1. 6. τὴν μυριάδα, Compare κατανάξαντες τὴν γῆν in ὃ 11, 
above. — ὕψος (G. 160, 1). 


24. διεξελάσας (G. 138, N. 8) θηήσασθαι, ἐο sce them in review (G. 204, 
N. 2). — μετά, afterwards. — ἀπέγραφον οἱ γραμματισταί : these lists, it 
has been thought, may have fallen into the hands of the Greeks, and been 
the authority for the account of Hdt. (see Rawlinson). —écov te τέσσαρα, 
about four ; τέ being used by Hat. after ὅσος, as it is even in Attic Greek 
after οἷος, able (G. 151, N. 4). — ἀνεκώχευον (Vv. ἀνακωχεύω). See I. § 22. 

Page 130. — ἐντός, between, governs both πρῳρέων and αἰγιαλοῦ. 

25. Tods... ἐμποδών, whoever came in his way. — és wav κακοῦ, into all 
sorts of distress. — ἀνάστατοι ἐγένοντο, lost house and home. — ὅκου (= ὅπου), 
at which time. —@actovor... ἀπέδεξε (v. ἀποδείκνυμι), rendered an accownt 
to the Thasians for 400 talents spent (about $400,000). Compare ἀποδει- 
κνύναι λόγον. --- ἀραιρημένος (V. aipéw), appointed (to manage the business). 


Herodotus adds: ‘‘As soon as the herald’s message came, the people 
would distribute their stores of grain, and proceed to grind wheat and 
barley-flour for many months’ supply ; then buy up and fatten the finest 
cattle ; feed poultry and waterfowl in pens and coops for the service of the 
army ; and provide gold and silver drinking-cups and bowls. These things 
for the king’s table only; for the others, food alone. When the army 
arrived, a tent stood ready spread, in which Xerxes took his rest, while the 
troops remained in the open air. When dinner-time came, great was the 
toil of the entertainers ; and after spending the night well fed, the army 
next day tore down the tent, and carried off all it held, leaving nothing.” 


26. ἔπος εὖ εἰρημένον, a saying well expressed, a bon mot. — καὶ τὸ dot- 
mov, also for the future (as they had done in the present case). — παρέχειν 
dy, = παρεῖχεν dv (G. 211); depends on the idea of saying implied in 








HERODOTUS. 119 


συνεβούλευσε: Jor it would have subjected them to the alternative, &c. ~ 
-κάκιστα, &c., by the worst fute that ever befell men. (G. 168.) 

27. ὑμομένειν, to wait (for him). — ἀπῆκε (v. ἀφίημι), sent off. —Odppy 
δέ τῇ. - οἰκημένη, and [I mean] Therma which is situated, ce, 

The account of the march of Xerxes from Doriscus (§ 25) to Acanthus 
(§ 27), which is chiefly descriptive, is here omitted. Acanthus is just 
northwest of the Isthmus of Mount Athos, through which the canal (§ 4) 
had been dug by order of Xerxes. Here therefore, as is stated in § 27, the 
king separated from his fleet, sending it through the canal and round the 
two western capes of Cha!cidice to the head of the Gulf of Therma. The 
only account given by Herodotus of the passage of the fleet through the 
canal is in the words (VII. 122), διεξέπλωσε τὴν διώρυχα τὴν ἐν τῷ Ἄθῳ 
γενομένην. The fleet remained at Therma until its departure for the coast 
of Thessaly (p. 137, § 5). 

Meanwhile Xerxes marched with his army across Chalcidice, from Acan- 
thus to Therma. On the way (according to Hdt. VII. 125) the camels 
which carried the provisions were attacked by lions (#). On reaching 
Therma, they encamped on the shore of the Gulf, the camp extending 
' from Therma to the mouth of the Haliacmon on the western coast. South 
of this river and north of Mount Olympus was Pieria, celebrated as the 
birthplace and the home of the nine Muses. In this region Xerxes 
remained (δ 28), until he began his march of eleven or twelve days to 
Thermopylae (p. 140, § 13). 

28. κήρυκες : see p. 122, ὃ 7. — κεινοί (= κενοῦ), empty-handed. 

Page LSE. — érapov ὅρκιον: cf. Latin ferire foedus. — καταστάντων 
εὖ, having come into (i. 6. being in) a good condition.— opt (G. 184, 3, N. 4). 
— δεκατεῦσαι (causal) depends on ὅρκιον εἶχε, as if it were they took an 
oath to, de. (G. 271). 

29. Δαρείου πέμψαντος : see p. 112, § 2.— ot μέν, the Athenians. — 
τὸ βάραθρον, the pit: this was a deep hole at Athens, like a well, into 
which the dead bodies of executed criminals (and sometimes even living 
criminals) were cast, iron hooks in the sides tearing the body to pieces 
as it fell. Miltiades is said to have counselled this act, wishing to com- 
mit the city to inexpiable hostility against Persia. — συνήνεικε (ν. συμ- 
φέρω) γενέσθαι, chanced to befall. — ἀνεθέλητον, lit. wawelcome, belongs 
to 8 τι. --- In later times it was believed that the misfortunes of Miltiades 
were the retribution of this impiety. In Sparta, the wrath of the hero 
Talthybius, herald of Agamemnon, fell upon the state, and would not be 
appeased until two noble Spartans had offered themselves in expiation, and 
surrendered themselves to the Persians; Xerxes, however, generously 
spared their lives. But their sons, when proceeding as Spartan envoys to 
Persia, during the Peloponnesian War, were captured by the Athenians 
and put to death. Then at length, sixty years after it was committed, 
the crime against the ambassadors of Darius was atoned. 

30. κατίετο, was scni forth. — οὐδὲν wecopevor ἄχαρι, likely to suffer 
no harm. 


120 HERODOTUS. | 


31. ἐξέργομαι, Tam constrained. UHerodotus is writing some fifty years 
after the Persian wars, when Athens was unpopular in consequence of the 
extent of her empire. 


Page 132. — ἐπειρῶντο ἀντιεύμενοι, would have attempted opposition : 
in Hdt. πειράομαι takes the participle like the verbs mentioned in G. 279, 
4, N. — ἠντιοῦτο and ἐγίγνετο both refer to past time, like ἐπειρῶντο ἄν 
above (G. 222). — εἰ καὶ πολλαί, i. 6. no matier how many. — κιθῶνες 
(Ionic for χυτῶνες), an unusual expression for walls: Hdt. once calls a 
wall a θώρηξ (I. 181), and Demades the orator uses ἐσθῆτα τῆς πόλεως in 
the same sense. (Kriiger.) Compare the English curtain of a fortress. — 
ἐληλαμένοι διά, extended across. — προδοθέντες Av... ἐμουνώθησαν : ἄν 
belongs to the verb (not to the participle). So below, in μουνωθέντες ἂν 
... ἀπέθανον : in ὃ 32, ὁρέοντες dv... dv ἐχρήσαντο, we find ἄν repeated 
on account of the length of the sentence, as it might have been in the 
two other cases. (See G. 212, 2; and also Greek Moods and Tenses, ὃ 42, 
3, Note 1). 


32. πρὸ rod, beforehand (G. 143, 2). — βασιλέος ἐπικρατέοντος, prot- 
asis to ἢν ἄν, = εἰ βασιλεὺς ἐπεκράτεε (G. 226, 1). — ἄν τις λέγων : ἂν 
belongs to ἁμαρτάνου : see last note on § 31, above. — τοῦτο τὸ ᾿Εἰλληνικόν 
(accusative after ἐγείραντες) = τούτους tovs” EAnvas. 


Page 1338. — 33. The oracles are in hexameter verse (G. 295, 4), and 
the language is generally an imitation of the Homeric; the constructions 
are often confused, as would be expected from the fact that the verses 
were (or purported to be) spoken under the inspiration of the moment. 
(1.) φεῦγ᾽ is addressed to the whole people represented by the messengers, 
as if it were but one person. — ἔσχατα γαίης, to the ends of the earth 
(G. 162). (2.) δώματα and κάρηνα are governed by Aurav. — τροχοει- 
δέος refers to the walls of Athens, which made an irregular circuit around 
the Acropolis or citadel. (3.) ἔμπτεδον (as adverb), firm, in its place. 
(4.) μέσσης (for μέσης), sc. πόλεως. (5.) κατά belongs to ἐρείπει (G. 191, 
N. 3). (6.) Σιυριηγενές, i. 6. Assyrian: the Persians, who were high- 
landers, having learned the use of chariots from the Assyrians of the plain. 
-- διώκων, driving: in the Persians of Aeschylus (vs. 83), Xerxes is said 
to come Σύριον ἅρμα διώκων. (7.) ἀπολεῖ, 50. Ἄρης. (8.) ἱδρῶτι ῥεού- 
μένοι, dripping with sweat, in their terror. (9.) kara belongs to κέχυται : 
the meaning seems to be that blood falls in showers from the temple roofs, 
in which case the dative ὀρόφουσι must be explained as in certain Homeric 
constructions (G. 184, 8, N. 1-4). But karayéw generally takes the da- 
tive in Homer (as the genitive in Attic) in the sense shower down upon, 
which does not suit the present passage as well, but perhaps is correct. — 
(10.) προϊδόν, foreboding, as if the blood were itself terrified. (11.) trov, 
apparently addressed to ¢7ro messengers; but the plural follows immedi- 
ately. — émuxidvare, &c., deluge your souls with woes (perfundite animum 
inalis, Stein); or (as Liddell and Scott translate), spread a brave spirit 











HERODOTUS. 121 


over your lis: the former suits the context better: κίδνημι is kindred to 
σκεδάννυμι, scatter. 


34. ἐχρέοντο, felt themselves in. —mpoBdddover σφέας αὐτούς, abandon- 
ing themselves to despair (dat. after συνεβούλευε). --- ἱκετηρίας (ῥάβδους), 
the suppliunt olive-branches. — ἐλθόντας agrees with the omitted subject of 
χρᾶσθαι, instead of taking the case of oi (G. 138, ν. 8). —dvak (= ὦ 
ἄναξ) : for the special sense of the title ἄναξ in Homer, see Gladstone's 
Juventus Mundi, p. 152, according to whom it corresponds nearest with 
the partly religious and partly feudal term Lord. — ἔστ᾽ ἂν τελευτήσωμεν 
(G. 239, 2). 

35. λέγουσι (dative), as they spoke. (2.) λισσομένη (G. 277, 5). (3.) 
ἀδάμαντι πελάσσας (sc. αὐτό), making it like (i. 6. firm as) adamant. 
(4.) οὖρος may be either for ὄρος, mownt, hill, or for ὅρος, bowndary : it 
may mean, therefore, either the Acropolis of Athens or the bounds of At- 
tica. Cecrops is one of the early (mythical) kings of Athens, in whose 
reign (says Hdt.) the people were called ἹΚεκροπίδαι. (5.) Κιθαιρῶνος, 
the boundary of Attica towards Delphi (see map). (6.) τεῖχος ξύλινον, 
this is the celebrated wooden wall of the oracle. (8.) μένειν, infinitive for 
imperative. 


Page 134.— (10.) ἔτι... ἔσσῃ, yet a day shall come (ποτέ) when thou 
shalt meet him. (12.) Rawlinson translates 


‘‘ When men scatter the seed, or when they gather the harvest.’ 


36. συνεστηκυῖαι, opposed, like wrestlers who stand together in the ring. 
— ῥηχῷ, palisade: there were a few who clung to this interpretation, and 
perished on the sacred hill (see 1V. § 34). — κατὰ τὸν φραγμὸν .... εἶναι, 
was (used) with reference to, &c.— τοῦτο, this expression. — συνεχέοντο, 
were confounded (con-fusi). 

37. Θεμιστοκλέης, a Greek of the Greeks, able, keen-witted, patriotic, 
and unscrupulous : the man who by his single counsel proved the deliverer 
of Greece. — et... édvtws, if the saying had really been uttered with refer- 
ence to the Atheniais (etye... εἰρημένον = εἴρητο : Stein). — οὐκ dv... 
χρησθῆναι = οὐκ ἂν ἐχρήσθη (G. 211). —plv δοκέειν, (he said) that he 
believed. — τῷ θεῷ, by the God (G. 188, 3). 


Page 135. — συλλαμβάνοντι κατὰ τὸ ὀρθόν, to one judging rightly 
(G. 184, 5): Themistocles may probably have devised the oracle, as well 
as the interpretation, wishing-to impress the deepest terror at the real dan- 
ger, so as to overcome the timid clinging to the city, and persuade the 
people to accept the only chance of safety. — τούτου, this, refers to παρα- 
okevdter Oar... ναυμαχήσοντας : i. 6. the ships (here implied) were the 
wooden wall of the oracle. —¢yvacav, decided (G. 200, N. ὅ δ): σφί belongs 
to αἱρετώτερα. --- τὸ σύμπαν εἶναι (G. 268, N.), i short. 

38. ἐς καιρὸν ἠρίστευσε, prevailed (proved to be best) seasonably. —tav 
ἀπὸ Aavpelov (G. 191, N. 6) belongs to μετάλλων. --- ὀρχηδόν, in shares, 
to each male citizen. If Hadt. is right (V. 97) is estimating the Athenian 


122 HERODOTUS. 


citizens at thirty thousand, the sum must have been fifty talents (about 
fifty thousand dollars). — δέκα δραχμάς, about two dollars. — χρημάτων, 
genitive of price. — διηκοσίας : as Athens had only two hundred ships at 
Salamis, and must have had a fleet before this resolution of Themistocles 
(Miltiades sailed to Paros just after the battle of Marathon with seventy 
ships), and as fifty talents are an incredibly small sum for building two 
hundred ships of war, we must understand Hdt. to mean that this money 
was used (with other sums trom the treasury) in building the fleet of two 
hundred ships which fought at Salamis. Plutarch (Them. IV.) says the 
money from the mines was used in building one hundred ships. — τὸν πρὸς 
Αἰγινήτας : see above, I. ὃ 3. The Aeginetans at this time had the finest 
navy in Greece, and they were called θαλασσοκράτορες, rulers of the sea, 
during the ten years from 490 to 480 B. c. Plutarch says of them at this 
time, κατεῖχον ot Αἰγινῆται πλήθει νεῶν τὴν θάλασσαν. --- és τό, for what 
(for the purpose for which). —és δέον, nearly equivalent to ἐς καιρόν, 
seasonably. — τοῖσι βουλομένοισι (G. 186). 





39. ἐς τὠντό, into one place, probably the Isthmus of Corinth, after- 
wards the place of meeting of various councils of war (see below, IIT. § 1). 
-- σφίσιν, to each other, as reflexive in sense of reciprocal (G. 146, N. 3; 
144, 2). --- πρῶτον. . . πάντων, first of all things: according to Plutarch, 
Themistocles proposed this general reconciliation. — ἔγκεκρη μένοι (which 
is an emendation for ἐγκεχρημένοι), from ἐγκεράννυμι : the wars are said to 
have been mixed up or concocted. See πόλεμος συνῆπτο above, I. § 3. 


Page 136. — πρηγμάτων, objective genitive. — dpovqcavres εἴ κως ἕν 
τε γένοιτο, &c.: the sense is, they resolved to send these spies and mes- 
sengers, having formed a wise plan (φρονήσαντες) in case the Greek race 
should in ayy way become united, &c. The apodosis to eb... yévorro... 
πρήσσοιεν is suppressed (G. 226, N.), being implied in the context: i. 6. 
their plan would succeed (or the hike) in case of union. See Hdt. VI. 52: 
βουλομένην εἴ κως ἀμφότεροι γενοίατο βασιλέες, wishing that both might in 
some way become kings, lit. having α wish (which would be realized) in case 
both should in some way become kings. (See Greek Moods and Tenses, § 53, 
N. 2).— ds... ἐπιόντων gives the ground on which the Greeks acted 
(G. 277, N. 2). 


In the narrative which follows, the spies sent to Persia are taken and 
brought before Xerxes, who ‘‘ gave orders to his guard to take them round 
the camp, and show them all the footmen and all the horse, letting them 
gaze at everything to their heart’s content ; then, when they were satisfied, 
to send them away unharmed to whatever country they desired,’ — think- 
ing he was thus surest to terrify the Greeks from all thought of resistance. 
Argos jealously refused the alliance, unless she should have equal command 
with Sparta, claiming that the supreme authority was justly hers, by right 
of descent from Agamemnon. She was even charged with having invited 
the Persians to the invasion of Greece. Gelo (whose exploits in Sicily are 
told at length) refused his aid, unless he should be put in supreme com- 








HERODUTUS. 123 


mand, —- to which the Greeks retorted that they came ‘‘to ask for an army, 
and not a general” ; so Gelo stood ready to submit if the Persians were 
victorious. He afterwards claimed, however, that he would have helped 
the Greeks but for the embarrassment of a war with Hamilcar of Carthage. 
Corcyra promised help, but kept back her fleet (under pretence of head 
winds) till the crisis was past. The Cretans refused to assist, having 
once suffered calamity from Minos (who had perished in his pursuit of Dae- 
dalus) for the aid given by Idomeneus in the Trojan war. And the Thes- 
salians submitted, reluctantly, to overwhelming force. 


IIT. 


Page 136.— 1. τῇ (= ἢ), where (in what region). — ἐν οἵοισι χώροι- 
σι, on what sort of σγοιινά. --- ἐσβολήν, 1. 6. from Thessaly into Central 
Greece. — τῆς és Θεσσαλίαν, i. 6. the pass of Tempe, at the mouth of the 
Peneius. Herodotus gives three reasons why the pass of Thermopylae was 
preferred : the second (καὶ μία), that it was single, refers to the Persians 
having entered Thessaly by another route, and not by Tempe as was ex- 
pected ; and to justify the choice on this ground, he mentions the igno- 
rance of the Greeks as to the mountain pass, τὴν ἄτραπον, by which 
Thermopylae was finally turned. —‘“IervavqtiB0s, the territory of Histiaca 
(afterwards Oreus) in the north of Euboea. (For the bearing of these 
places, see a map of Greece.) This position was chosen to prevent the Per- 
sian fleet from taking the flank or rear of their force at Thermopylae. 

2. τοῦτο μὲν, τὸ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον, first, as to Artemisium : τοῦτο μέν cor- 
responds to ἡ δὲ ad... ἔσοδος (i. 6. the pass of Thermopylae) below. — 
ἐκ. . . Θρηϊκίου, after (coming from) the Uhracian sea. — συνάγεται (sc. TO 
πέλαγος) és... Tov πόρον, it (the sea) contracts into the strait, &c. — ἐκ τοῦ 
στεινοῦ Séxerat, i. 6. after passing the strait, the shore (of) Artemisiwm in 
Euboea (possessive genitive) comes next: S€i-erat is used like ἐκδέχεται and 
ὑποδέχεται (ὃ 3), excipit. — ἡμίπλεθρον, about 50 feet. The line of the 
coast is now much farther from the hill, owing to the deposits made by the 
river. Rawlinson says: ‘‘The pass is now separated from the sea through- 
out its entire extent by a tract of marshy ground, a mile or two in width.” 
— 7b στεινότατον τῆς χώρης τῆς ἄλλης, the narrowest part of the whole 
puss: τῆς ἄλλης is used as Thucydides speaks of the Peloponnesian war as 
ἀξιολογώτατον τῶν προγεγενημένων, lit. the most notable of tivose which had 
_ preceded it ; and as we often hea¥ a thing called ‘‘the most perfect of all 
_ others.” See map of Thermopylae at the end of the volume. 


Page 13'7.— 3. τὸ πρὸς ἑσπέρης (G. 160, 2), towards the west: im 
_ fact, more nearly towards the south ; Hdt. thought of the coast as lying 
_ from north to south. — χύτρους, caldrous: of these there are two, en- 


i 


_ closed in masonry. The hot springs of Thermopylae are salt, and of the 






194 HERODOTUS. 


temperature of 100° Fahr. —“Hpaxdéos: it was said that these springs 


were created miraculously that Hercules might have a warm bath after one- 


of his labors. — τὴν Aiodtda, the Acolian land, the more ancient name of 
Thessaly. This irruption of Thessalians from Epirus is one of the earliest 
. movements mentioned in the traditions of the race afterwards called Hel- 
lenic. Thucydides (1. 12) speaks of the migration of Boeotians from Ame 
in Thessaly into the land afterwards called Boeotia, a result of this Thes- 
salian migration ; and he assigns the sixtieth year after the capture of Troy 
as its date. — ἐπῆκαν, conducted (by trenches). — ὡς ἄν : Homer and Hat. 
sometimes used ὡς ἄν and ὅπως ἄν with the optative, as all writers do with 
the subjunctive, without affecting the sense (G. 216, 1, N. 2). Here the ἄν 
belongs to the particle, not to the verb (G. 207, 2) ; in Attic Greek, such 
an ἄν would belong to the verb and form an apodosis. 

4, ἐν Τιερίῃ : see note on II. § 27, above. — διαλυθέντες ἐκ τοῦ ᾿Ισθμοῦ, 
breaking wp [at, and departing] aon the Isthinus. 


Page 13 ἰθὺ Σκιάθου (G. 182, 2). — Τροιζηνίη : this ship was 
captured by the Persians, who (as Hdt. adds) ‘‘took the handsomest man 
on board, and sacrificed him at the ship’s prow,” reckoning it a good omen, 
— the more so as the man’s name was Leon. The two other triremes were 
taken ; but the crew of the Athenian ship escaped. On hearing of this ad- 
vance of the Persian fleet, the Greeks left their anchorage at Artemisium, 
and retreated to Chalcis on the western coast of Euboea. 





6. περὶ τὸ ἕρμα, wpon the reef: this still lies in the mid-channel. — 
κομίσαντες, having brought it (the column) for this purpose. — καθαρόν, 
removed, i. 6. by being made harmless. — ἕνδεκα ἡμέρας : see note on 
Il. ἃ 27, above. — πανημερὸν πλώοντες : the distance is about 100 miles. 
— τῆς Μαγνησίης χώρης, possessive genitive with the following accusa- 
tives. — στρατός, the whole armament (army and navy). 

In the estimate which follows (VII. 184 -- 187, here omitted), Herodotus 
makes the whole Persian armament, including army and navy, before the 
battle of Thermopylae and before the storm, to consist of 2,641,610 men. 
ΤῸ the number of 1,700,000 foot-soldiers counted in the review at Doriscus 
(see above, II. § 23), he now adds 80,000 for the cavalry, 517,610 for the 
crews and marines of the fleet, 20,000 for Arabs with camels and Libyans 
with chariots, and lastly 324,000 for the land and sea forces furnished by 
the Thracians, Macedonians, and Thessalians, whom Xerxes had pressed 


into his service since he entered Europe (see 11. § 25). This immense | 


total of 2,641,610 Herodotus proposes to double, to include all the non- 
combatants (attendants, erews of corn-vessels, and camp-followers). giving 


a grand total for the entire host of 5,283,220! Rawlinson, on various 


grounds, reduces the estimates for the military force to about 1,500,000, 
taking no account of the still greater exaggerations in the number of non- 
ΠΣ “Of all these myriads, ” says Herodannss “there was not 


than Xerxes himsel 5 Sy 





aaa 


ἘΞ eee — 


ἘΞ 





ἘΞ ἘΞ ΞΟ 
pi: E 





HERODOTUS. 125 












































7. wpéxpocoa ... νέας, they lay at anchor, arranged alternately (or 
in a quincunz), heading seaward, and eight rows deep. The scholia on 
Il. XIV. 35 explain προκρόσσας (sc. νῆας) ἔρυσαν as follows: ἄλλην πρὸ 
ἄλλης παραλλήλως ἀνείλκυσαν κλιμακηδόν, 1. 6. they drew them up in 
porallel rows like steps ; Aristarchus adds, that this would give the appear- 
ance of a theatre, κρόσσαι yap ai κλίμακες. This means the seats of the 
Greek theatre, which were steps like those of a modern circus ; aud we may 
refer κλιμακηδόν (= πρόκροσσαι) to 
the general appearance of the ships 
from the sea, which, if they were ar- 
ranged (for example) as in the figure, 
might suggest the idea of a cwneus 
in the theatre, especially if the shore 
were curved, and if the inner rows 
of ships were drawn up (as here) on a sloping beach. In II. 125, Hat. 
says that the steps on the outside of the pyramids of Egypt were sometimes 
called κρόσσαι. We may, however, refer kAtpaxndov to the irreg- o 
ular lines in which the ships were arranged from front to rear (as in ο 


ΣΟ Ot Ὁ σιν OS 
ΒΟ. Οὐ ΕΣ ΟΝ 
συν sO. dil sO 
Ὁ. σ᾽. Ὁ 


the second figure). For another explanation, opposed to that of ὃ a 
Aristarchus, see Liddell and Scott, 5. v. πρόκροσσοι. --- οὕτω (sc. 6 
@ppcov). — Lerarns, having become seething (1. ὁ. before the storm ° 
burst). — ἀτηλιώτης (ἀπό-ἥλιος), properly an east wind, here (east- © 
northeast, referring to the ᾿Ειλλησποντίας. --- τοῖσι... ὅρμου, who ye = 
were so anchored (as to allow it) : for οὕτω εἶχε ὅρμου (impersonal), ο 


see G. 168, N. 8. --- οἱ δὲ (G. 234; 227, 2), these. —dvacmacav- oO 
τες (G. 279, 4). --- μεταρσίας, at sea. — ἔλαβε (sc. ὁ xetpav). — ’Invots, 
Ovens: see below. — τοῦ χειμῶνος χρῆμα, the matter of the storm, a com- 
mon expression for the storm: cf. ὑὸς χρῆμα μέγα, a huge wild boar 
(Hdt. I. 36). 

Most writers place Sepias, the rocky headland on which the Persian fleet 
‘was wrecked, near the southeastern point of Magnesia, or even (as Grote) 
beyond that point upon the southern coast. For the following account of 
the topography we are indebted to Professor Sophocles, who was born on 
the coast of Magnesia, and who has known the whole shore as a boy and 
studied it as a scholar : — 

The east-northeast wind, the “EAAyorovrias of the ancients, is still the 
terror of navigators on the ‘‘ harborless coast of Pelion” (Eurip. Alcest. 595). 
But it is dreaded chiefly north of Cape Nekhori ; a vessel overtaken by the 
wind south of this point can easily enter the channel between Thessaly and 
BEuboea. The rocky headland directly east of the highest point of Pelion 
Bagrees best with the accounts of Sepias. Between this and the probable 
site of Casthanaia (four miles below) are two beaches, separated by a point 
Bot rocks. North of Sepias is another small beach, beyond which are several 

caves in the steep cliffs (ἐν ΤΠηλίῳ), which are probably the Ἴπνοί or 
HOvens. On these three beaches the fleet must have been drawn up, and 
ere the disaster must have oceurred. 


















120 HERODOTUS, 





Page 139.— 8. ᾿Ωρείθυιαν : Orithyia, daughter of the Attic king 
Erechtheus, was said to have been carried off by Boreas (ihe northeast — 
wind), as she was picking flowers on the banks of the Hissus. The story 
is pleasantly told in the beginning of Plato’s Phaedrus. —@ppytar, has gone 
Jorth or spread. — wep” A®wyv: see above, I. § 4, and note on I. ὃ 2. 


9. λέγουσι διαφθαρῆναι is understood with οὐκ ἐλάσσονας, --- γηοχέ- 
οντι, being a landholder (γήοχος or yarnoyos). — καὶ τοῦτον, him too (as 
well as other men), object of λυπεῦσα. --- συμφορὴ . . . παιδοφόνος, a ca- 
lamity afflicting him by the death of a child (or children): this seems to 
imply that he was accidentally the cause of his child’s (or children’s) 
death. 


10. οὐκ ἐπῆν ἄριθμος, there was no reckoning. — καταείδοντες γόησι, 
singing incantations by enchanters : yéynou is suspected by many recent edi-— 
tors. — ἀνέμῳ belongs to both participles. — Θέτι, Thetis, the sea-goddess, 
mother of Achilles. It was said that the place at which Thetis was seized 
by Peleus was called Sepias, because she there changed herself into a cuttle- 
fish (σηπία) to escape her lover. 


Page E40. — 11. ὀπίσω ἠπείγοντο : see note on ὃ 5, above. — ἔπωνυ- 
μίην... . νομίζοντες, keeping up the name, i. 6. continuing to invoke Posei- 
don with this title of Saviour. 


12. τὴν ἄκρην : the southeast cape of Thessaly, often mistaken for Se- 
plas itself. — ἰθέαν (sc. ὁδόν), straight. — φέροντα, leading (Pagasae being | 
at the head of the bay, the Gulf of Volo). — ir’... ἔπλεον, i. e. on the 
Argonautic expedition, τὸ κῶας being the famous Golden Fleece. —’Ade- 
tat, Aphetae, or place of departure, from ἀφίημι (through &deros) in its” 
neuter sense seen in ἀφήσειν, to set sail. 


13. πορευθείς : see note on IT. § 27, above. — és Μηλιέας, i. e. into the 
land of the Malians, at the head of the Gulf of Malis, in whose territory 
was the outer end of the pass of Thermopylae. — τὸ ῥέεθρον (G. 160, 1) 
belongs to ἀπέχρησε : see note on II. § 15, above. | 


Page H&L. — οὗτος is not antecedent to ὅστις, but repeats the idea of 
the relative clause for emphasis. 


14. ὄἄμπωτίς τε καὶ ῥηχίη, ebb and flow of the tide, which is seldom suf- 
ficient to be noticed in the Mediterranean. — ἰόντι (G. 184, 5). — βοηθέ- 
οντα, as an aid: the future is more common in this sense (G. 277, 3). — 
καιομένῳ, when he burnt himself on Mount Oeta. — ἀποφανῆναι (G. 203). 


15. κατ᾽ &, at which = where, referring to ταύτῃ (where ἡ would have 
been more regular). — δισχίλια... πλέθρα, 22,000 plethra, i. e. in sur- 
face: the πλέθρον is a long measure of 100 (Greek) feet in length, or a 
square measure of 10,000 square feet ; the Trachinian plain, therefore, 
must have contained nearly 8 square miles. 


16. ᾿Ασωποῦ, not to be confounded with the Boeotian Asopus (see above, 
1. § 18). | 















HERODOTUS. 127 


τσ 


ὅ Page Ε42. - -᾿Αμφικτύοσι, i. 6. for the Amphictyonic Council, which 
met twice in each year, once at Thermopylae and once at Delphi. The 
word ᾿Αμφικτύονες (the same as ἀμφικτίονες) originally meant neiahbors, 
and shows the origin of this and other similar assemblies. The hero 
_Amphictyon, whose temple is here mentioned, was probably invented to 
connect the foundation of this famous council with the Greek mythology. 


17. Θερμο-πύλαι, from the hot springs. — φερόντων (like ἐχόντων just 
before it), evtending: see note on ὃ 12, above. —-d ἐπὶ... ἠπείρου 
(G. 160), as regards what was on this continent (Greece): see above, § 3. 


18. τοσοῦτοι μέν, i. 6. the 2120 just mentioned. 


19. ἥκοιεν represents ἥκομεν of the direct discourse (G. 200, ν. 3). — 
οὐ γὰρ θεὸν εἶναι : the indirect discourse changes here from the optative to 
the infinitive (G. 240). --- τῷ (= &).. . συνεμίχθη : this aorist, being in 
a dependent clause, could not be changed to the optative (G. 247, ν. 2). 
--- ὀφείλειν . .. πεσεῖν dv, ought to fall: ἄν may belong to ὀφείλειν 

= ὀφείλοι ἄν), it would be his due to fall; or it may belong to πεσεῖν 
(πέσοι ἄν), it is his due that he should fall (if he should test his fortune). 
In the former case it is very irregular in its position ; in the latter, in its 
construction. (See Greek Moods and Tenses, § 42, 2, N.; § 41, N. 4.) 


Page 143.— 20. Hdt. honors Leonidas, the king of Sparta who be- 
longed to the elder branch of the royal family, by giving his genealogy 
through the line of Spartan kings up to Aristodemus, the great-great- 
grandson of Hercules, one of the semi-fabulous Heraclidae who led the Do- 
rian invasion of Peloponnesus. The twin sons of Aristodemus — Eurys- 
thenes and Procles — founded the two lines of Spartan kings. (See 
Smith’s larger History of Greece, Chap. IV.) 


21. ἔρσενος γόνου (G. 180,1, N.2): Leonidas became king in 491 B. c. — 
εἶχε, i. 6. in marriage. — τοὺς κατεστεῶτας, the established number of 300, 
this being the regular body-guard of a Spartan king ; Leonidas, however, 
knowing the desperate nature of the present undertaking, instead of taking 
youths, as usual, now took only those who had sons living, that no family 
might become extinct. 


22. κατηγόρητο, impersonal (G. 134, N. 2), it had been charged against 

them, μιηδίζειν being the subject. — εἴτε συμπέμψουσι : the future optative 
might be used (G. 243). — ἀλλοφρονέοντες, reluctantly, or leaning to the 
other side. 


— «23. Wa... στρατεύωνται (G. 216, 2); subj. on the principle of indi- 
_ rect discourse. — μηδέ, and not, sc. ἵνα : and that these too might not join 
the Persians in case they should learn, &c. (G. 248). — ὑπερβαλλομένους, 
| backward, putting off. — Kdoveaa, the same festival which kept the Spar- 
_ tans from Marathon: see note on I. ὃ 8. — ὁρτάσαντες, after keeping the 
festival. 


128 HERODOTUS. 


Page E44. — évévwvro (v. νοέω). --- ds δὲ kal... καὶ αὐτοὶ ἕτερα τοι-. 
atta, pleonastic. — συμπεσοῦσα (like an adjective with ἢν), coincident: 
the Olympic festival occurred every fourth year on the first full moon 
after the summer solstice, about a month before the Spartan Carneia. 


24. ἐλθοῦσι (G. 138, N. 8). — περισπερχεόντων, being much incensed : 
the word is very doubtful, and most probably a mistake for περισπερχθέν- 
τῶν (see Liddell and Scott). — ἀλέξασθαι depends on ὀλίγων, too few. 


25. oKdcor... ποιέοιεν (G. 243): the direct questions would be πόσοι 
εἰσίν ; and τί ποιοῦσιν ; — τοὺς ἡγεμόνας (G. 160, 1), by anticipation, in- 
stead of being subject of εἴησαν. --- -ΗἩρακλείδης : see above, § 20. — πᾶν 
μὲν οὐ, not the whole, in antithesis to ὁ δὲ τοὺς ἔξω. — ddhoyins .. . πολλῆς, 
i. 6. very little notice was taken of him. — ὀπτώπεε (Vv. dpa). 








Page H45.— 26. adda... γάρ, but... since. — Δημάρητον : Dema- 
ratus was king of Sparta in the younger or Proclid line, but was declared 
illegitimate and succeeded on the throne (491 B. c.) by the next heir, Leo- 
tychides ; soon after which he left his country to join the Persians. He 
proved the most sagacious counsellor of Xerxes, but was almost always 
overruled by the jealousy of the Persian court-officers. — γέλωτά pe Bev, 
you made fun of me. — ἀγὼν μέγιστός ἐστι, it 15 my utmost endeavor. 


27. νόμος, (here) custom. — οὕτω ἔχων, of this nature. —tocrotror, so 
few. — χρᾶσθαι (ἃ. 269). 

28. παρεξῆκε (Vv. παρεξίημι), Jet pass. — φερόμενοι, tmpetuously. — 
ἔπεσήϊσαν, came up to succeed them (ém-). — καίπερ (G. 277, N. 1 Ὁ). 


Page B46. — πολλοὶ μὲν ἄνθρωποι, ὀλίγοι δ᾽ ἄνδρες, many people, but 
Sew men, 

29. τρηχέως περιείποντο, were roughly handled: περιέπειν = to follow — 
round, to tend, to treat, &c. — ἐκδεξάμενοι, succeeding: see note on ὃ 2, 
above. — ἀθανάτους, Zmmortals: this body of 10,000 picked Persians were 
so called because the vacancies in their ranks were immediately filled, so 
that the number always remained the same (Hdt. VII. 83). — κατεργασό-, 
μενοι, sc. τοὺς “Βιλληνας. --- οὐδὲν πλέον ἐφέροντο, gained no more: see be- 
low, ὃ 32, μέγα τι οἴσεσθαι. 


80. ἄλλα te... καί, showing, both in other ways, and especially [in 
this]. — ἐξεπιστάμενοι, used (like an infinitive) with ἀποδεικνύμενοι, show- — 
ing that they thoroughly (é¢€-) understood how to fight, &c. (G. 280). — ὅκως 
ἐντρέψειαν (G. 233). — φεύγεσκον (G. 119, 10). — δῆθεν implies that the 
flight was a pretence. — ἄν belongs to ὑπέστρεφον in the iterative con- 
struction (G. 206), not in apodosis. — καταλαμβανόμενοι, when they were 
overtaken (in their pretended flight). — etvar (G. 265). — ἐδυνέατο (G. 126, 
5 ; 119, 3), imperfect for ἐδύναντο. 


31. ἀναδραμεῖν, Zeapt. ‘‘ With the grave Orientals, nothing could so 
completely indicate an all-engrossing feeling of fear or horror as a gesture | 
of this kind.” Blakesley. — κατατετρωματίσθαι, indirect discourse with 





͵ 


Hi 
7 
᾿ ἔσεσθαι after ἐλπίσαντος, --- τὴν ἀτραπόν, the secret path mentioned above 
‘in § 1. — ἐνώρων (v. évopdw). 


| Page Ἐ4}7. -- 52. 8 τι... πρήγματι (G. 244; 188, 1, nN. 23). --- ϑιέ- 
φθειρε, brought destruction upon. — ἸΤυλαγόρων, a portion of the delegates 
to the Amphictyonic council were so called. The meeting of the council 
was called IIvAafa from ΠΠύλαι (see note on ὃ 16, above), even when it 
met at Delphi. 
33. IIvAcydpot: there is also a form Πυλαγόραι. --- πάντως κου... 
πυθόμενοι, having certainly gained the most accurate knowledge. Many 
_ names were current of persons said to have betrayed the pass to Xerxes ; 
“probably it may have been made known by more than one, in a region where 
many favored the invasion, and many more were in terror of the invader, 
— τοῦτο δέ, and secondly. — ei... ὧμιληκὼς ein, if he should have had 
‘much to do with the region, 1. e. as a consequence of having had much to do 
with it (G. 202, 2): for the force of the rare perfect optative, see Greek 
Moods and Tenses, § 18, 1, with Note. 
34. ἤρεσε (ν. ἀρέσκω). --- τῶν ἐστρατήγεε (see note on ὃ 29). — ὡρμέατο 
(6. 119, 3), for ὥρμηντο. --- περὶ λύχνων adds, about lamplight. 


































HERODOTUS. 129 


Page 848. - τότε (see note on ὃ 3, above). — ἐν σκέπῃ τοῦ πολέμου, 
sheltered from the war (G. 167, 3). —€k... χρηστή, at so remote a period 
(see G. 191, N. 6) had it (the path) been shown by the Malians (G. 188, 3) 
to be a pernicious thing: οὐδὲν χρηστή (commonly οὐδὲν χρήσιμος), of 110 
good, isa euphemism for bad : these words are sometimes understood to refer 
to the pass of Thermopylae itself (ἐσβολήν), and to mean that the Malians 
had so long ago shown the pass to be useless, 

35. Μελάμπυγον : this was an epithet of Hercules, implying manli- 

ness and strength. — ΚΚερκώπων : these Cercopes were droll, mischievous 
dwarfs, who appear often in the stories of Hercules, sometimes amusing and 
sometimes tormenting the hero. In the local legend of Thermopylae, they 
appear as footpads lurking about the pass (hence their seats, ἕδρας, at the 
narrowest place), where they steal the arms of Hercules while he is sleep- 
ing. Hercules seizes two of them and ties them to a pole, which he throws 
over his shoulders and walks away with them. They have been warned by 
their mother to beware of the MeAdparvyos ; and on seeing this character- 
istic of Hercules as they are swinging behind him, they make such sport 
of him that finally he too begins to laugh at their jokes and releases them. 
_A bas-relief taken from a temple at Selinus in Sicily represents Hercules 
earrying the two Cercopes on his shoulders. The stone called Μελάμπυγος 
‘probably had some imaginary resemblance to the sleeping Hercules. 
36. τὰ Οἰταίων : the mountain (usually called Callidromus) over which 
the path led forms a part of the Thessalian range of Oeta: the words ἐν 
Bag refer to the march southward and eastward after crossing the Asopus. 
a ῥυόμενοι, ‘Keeping guard (as protectors). — φρουρέοντες, 9 guarding (as 
sentinels). — ἡ κάτω ἐσβολή (G. 141, N. 3), 1. 6. Thermopylae itself. — 
ὑποδεξάμενοι, having pledged themselves (or given a promise) to Leonidas. 


130 HERODOTUS. 


37. ἀναβεβηκότας (G. 280). — ὦδε, as follows, belongs to ἔμαθον. ----᾿ 
ἐνέδυνον ... ἐνδυομένους (G. 199, N. 1): as they were putting on their — 
own armor, the middle is more exact. — oi βάρβαρον is subject of ἐγένοντο, 
— φανήσεσθαι (G. 203, ν. 2). 

38. pip... ἔωσι, lest they might prove to be (G. 218 ; 216, 2). 


Page BAD. — φεύγοντες (G. 279, 4, N.). —doyhy, originally, i. 6. on 
purpose to attack them. — mapeoxevadaro (G. 108, 4, I.).— of 8έ refers to 
ἹΤέρσαι, the subject of the preceding clause: this is not an Attic usage 
(G. 143, 1). 

39. ἠοῖ (G. 55, N. 1). — ἐπί, besides (G. 191, N. 2). — οὗτοι, the diviner 
and the deserters. — οὐις ἔων, forbade. 

40. οὐκ ἔχειν (G. 203, N. 1), depends on λέγεται, by a change of con- 
struction (G. 260, 2, N. 1). --- ἀρχήν : see § 38, above ; ἀρχήν may often 
be translated αὐ all, like Latin omnino. — τῇ γνώμῃ πλεῖστός εἰμι, 7 ain 
most strongly inclined to the opinion: so πολύς εἰμι (see Liddell and Scott). 
- κελεῦσαι (G. 203) depends on the phrase τῇ γνώμῃ πλεῖστός εἰμι. --- 
αὐτῷ, intensive. — ἔχειν (G. 208, N. 1). — ἐλείπετο, awaited. — οὐκ ἐξηλεί- 
ᾧετο, remained undiminished. 

41. γενέσθαι... ἀπολέσθαι : we should expect these to be in the future, 
on the principle of indirect discourse (G. 203) ; but verbs signifying to give 
an oracle are exceptional, probably because they imply a command. (See 
Greek Moods and Tenses, ὃ 23, 1, N. 2). — ‘‘ The notion which gave rise to 
this oracle seems to be the one, that in a dire extremity the anger of the 
deity was only to be propitiated by a most costly offering.” Blakesley. 
It was related that Leonidas, before he left Sparta, gave instructions to his 
wife Gorgo for her conduct in widowhood ; and that ‘‘ funeral games were 
performed, as over him, in his presence.” 


Page 150. — (2.) Περσείΐδῃσι, descendants of Perseus: Herod. (VII. 61) 
says that the Persians received their name from Perses, son of the Greek 
hero Perseus ; a mere device to unite the two similar names. — (3.) τὸ μὲν 
οὐκὶ... δέ, not this, but, dc. — (4.) οὖρος (= ὅρος, boundary), Sparta’s 
bounds. — (5.) τόν (G. 140), him, i. 6. the invading Persian. — (7.) ἕτε- 
ρον, one or the other. — δια-δάσηταν (v. ϑατέομαι or δαίομαι). --- ἀποπέμψαι 
and οἴχεσθαι depend on τῇ γνώμῃ πλεῖστός εἰμι in § 40, being partly a 
repetition of κελεῦσαι, &c. in that passage. All from μένοντι δέ (ὃ 40) 
through the oracle is a sort of parenthesis. 


42. τὰ ἀνέκαθεν, by descent. — οὐκ ἀπελείπετο, remained not behind, 
i. 6. did not separate himself from the army. Kriiger. 


43. Θηβαῖοι ἀέκοντες : as unwilling hostages, they could have been of 
little service ; it is probable that this is the representation made afterwards | 
by the Thebans, to reconcile themselves with the Persian conqueror. (See — 
§ 55.) Their politics were at this time ‘‘ essentially double-faced and 
equivocal.” Grote. A later orator, confounding Thespians and Plataeans, _ 
says of the latter, that one half the adult citizens perished in the pass, | 






HERODOTUS. 131 


ie 
and the remainder fought in the Athenian fleet at Artemisium and Salamis. 
_— οὐκ ἔφασαν, said that they would not, «το. ---- ἀπολιπόντες (G. 138, N. 8). 





























44. és ἀγορῆς. . . πληθώρην, wntil about full-market time, i. e. the last 
part of the forenoon, before μεσημβρία. 


Page HO. — χώρος, here = space to be passed over. — τὸ μὲν γὰρ. 
Γ᾿ ἐφυλάσσετο refers to the fight of the two preceding days. 


45. πολλοί refers to the Persians: but the ‘subject changes suddenly at 
ἅτε yap. — τοῦ ἀπολλυμένου, the dying. — ῥώμης ὅσον εἶχον μέγιστον, 
their utmost strength ; like ὡς μέγιστον expanded into ds (or ὅσον) ἐδύ- 
VUYTO μέγιστον. — παραχρεόμενοι (sc. τοῖς σώμασιν), making their lives 
of no value. — aréovtes, reckless. —Katenyota (Vv. κατ-άγνυμι). --- οἱ δέ, 
referring to τοῖς πλέοσι, not Attic (see note on ὃ 38, above). 





46. γενόμενος, having proved himself (not having been). —va οὐνόματα : 
the names of the 300 could still be read on a column in Sparta in the time 
of Pausanias, 600 years afterwards. — οἶκον, his estate. — ὡς ἐούσης gives 
the reason of Artanes himself. 


Page E52. - τοῦτον ὑπεξείρυσαν, rescued his body. The bones of 
Leonidas were carried to Sparta forty years later, according to Pausanias ; 
when the column just mentioned was erected. — τοῦτο συνεστήκεε, this 
kind of battle continued. 


48. πλὴν Θηβαίων : see below, ὃ 55.—Xé€wv, with reference to the 
name «Λεωνίδης. --- τοῖσι... περιεοῦσαι, such of them as happened still to 
have them (payarpar) left. —Kal χερσὶ καὶ στόμασι, as we say ‘tooth and 
nail,” 1 ἐναντίης, in front. — περι- 
σταδόν (adv. from stem of περιίστη μι), so as to surround them. 





49. πρὶν % (G. 274, Ν.). --- τοσοῦτο ... εἶναι depends on ἔφη implied 
in what precedes. — τὸν δέ, but he, irregularly inserted, as if the sentence 
had not been introduced by the relative τόν, to which πυθόμενον belongs. 
— ὡς ἀγγέλλοι depends on the past tense εἰπεῖν (G. 203; 201, ν. 2). --- εἰ 
...- ἔσοιτο represents ei ἔσται in the direct form (G. 221, N.), if it was to 
be (not if it should be). 


51. αὐτοῦ ταυτῇ τῇ περ ἔπεσον, there (i. 6. at Thermopylae), on the spot 
_ where they fell. — σφί refers to the Spartans and Thespians. — πρότερον 
fi)... οἴχεσϑαι, like πρὶν 4 in ὃ 49: the subject of οἴχεσθαι is τοὺς συμ- 
μᾶχους understood, which is also implied (in the genitive) after τοῖς πρό- 
τερον τελευτήσασι. --- ἐπιγέγραπται : this verb applies especially to in- 
scriptions, properly called ἐπιγράμματα (see below, after the inscriptions). 


τ Page ὦ. - ΤΤελοποννάσου : the Doric form, with a for ἡ (G. 30, 1). 
: In ihe preceding verse, τᾷδε and τριάκοσίαις are sometimes substituted (on 
᾿ conjecture) for the Ionic forms of the MSS. ., Which can hardly be correct. — 
Χιλιάδες τέτορες : the number who fought (ἐμάχοντο), although Herodotus 
elsewhere speaks as if 4,000 fed? (VIII. 25). The inscription refers only to 
- those from Peloponnesus, who (according to § 18) amounted to 3,100. But 


19. HERODOTUS. 


later writers speak of 700 or 1,000 Lacedaemonians besides the 300 Spartans, 
and these must be included, although Herodotus makes no mention οὗ 
them. The whole question of the numbers at Thermopylae is much dis- 
puted. The stern simplicity of the second inscription has made it 
especially famous. — ἀγγέλλειν is used for the imperative (G. 269). — In 
the third inscription, Μεγιστία is Doric genitive (G. 39) ; and οὐκ ἔτλη 
= scorned (Rawlinson). — ἔξω ἤ, eacept. — Σιμωνίδης : Simonides, the great 
lyric poet of Ceos, was often considered the author of all three epigrams. 
His still more famous ode on the heroes of Therinopylae (or perhaps only a 
fragment) is preserved by Diodorus : — 


Τῶν ἐν Θερμοπύλαις θανόντων 

εὐκλεὴς μὲν ἁ τύχα, καλὸς δ᾽ ὁ πότμος, 

βωμὸς δ᾽ ὁ τάφος, πρὸ γόων δὲ μνᾶστις, ὁ δ᾽ οἶκτος ἔπαινος. 
᾿Εντάφιον δὲ τοιοῦτον οὔτ᾽ εὐρὼς 

οὔθ᾽ ὁ πανδαμάτωρ ἀμαυρώσει χρόνος, ἀνδρῶν ἀγαθῶν, 

Ὁ δὲ σακὸς οἰκέταν εὐδοξίαν 

Ἑλλάδος εἵλετο - μαρτυρεῖ δὲ Λεωνίδας 

ὁ Σπάρτας βασιλεὺς, ἀρετᾶς μέγαν λελοιπὼς 

κόσμον ἀέναόν τε κλέος. 


“ΟΥ̓ those who at Thermopylae were slain, 
Glorious the doom, and beautiful the lot ; 
Their tomb an altar: men from tears refrain, 
To honor them ; and praise, but mourn them not. 
Such sepulchre nor drear decay 
Nor all-destroying time shall waste ; this right have they. 
Within their grave the home-bred glory 
Of Greece was laid ; this witness gives 
Leonidas the Spartan, in whose story 
A wreath of famous virtue ever lives.” 
Translated by STERLING. 


52. παρεόν = παρόν (G. 278, 2). — peperipévor (see μεθίημι in Cat. of 
Verbs). — οὐκ ἐθελῆσαι depends on λέγεται in the first line. — τὸν εἵλωτα, 
his Helot servant: each Spartan soldier was entitled to be accompanied by 
seven Helots, and probably many of these fell in the first battles at Ther- 
mopylae, unmentioned by the historian (see, however, VIII. 25). — λειπο- 
Ψυχέοντα, (here) faint-hearted. 


53. eb... ἦν, if it had been the case. — κομιδήν, retwrn: see κομί- 
ἵεσθαι. 


Page 154. — προσθέσθαι ἄν (= προσέθετο ἄν) depends on λέγεται 
in ὃ 52. — προφάσιος (6. 171, 1). 





τρια θη 


HERODOTUS. 133 


54. ἠτίμωτο, he was disgraced, as the perfect ἠτίμωται means he is dis- 
graced, — ἐν ἸΠλαταιῇσι, i. 6. at Plataea, in the following year (479 B. Ο.). 
— ἀνέλαβε, he made up for. — ἐπενειχθεῖσαν (v. ἐπιφέρω). 

δῦ. os... μηδίζουσι.. . . ἀπικοίατο (G. 243). 


Page 155.—56. πλεῦνας = πλέονας. --- σχόντα... Πλαταιέων : this 
attack of the Thebans on Plataea was the first hostile act committed in the 
Peloponnesian War (431 B. C.). 

57. τῇ ἀληθείῃ, truthfulness. — τὰς διεξόδους, ‘‘ the ins and outs.” — 
οἷα βασιλεὺς γενόμενος, since you were once their king. (See note on § 26, 
above.) The counsel of Demaratus (here omitted) was that Xerxes should 
oceupy with part of his fleet the island of Cythera, off the south coast of 
Laconia, which would draw off the Spartans from the defence of the Isth- 
mus, and put all Greece in his power. This wise counsel was overruled by 
the Persian Achaemenes. It was followed afterwards by the Athenians, 
in the Peloponnesian War. 

58. ἀποταμόντας, sc. τινάς. -- δῆλα... γέγονε (G. 135, 2). — τῶν 
(= ov)... ἀνθρώπων (G. 154, Note). 


IV. 


Page 156. - 1. ναυτικὸν στρατόν : the return of the Greek fleet from 


‘the Euripus to its position at Artemisinm has been mentioned in III. § 11. 


After describing the battle of Thermopylae in the Seventh Book, Herodotus 
begins the Eighth Book with the sea-fight at Artemisium, which took place 
on the same three days with the battles at Thermopylae (see below, § 15). 
— Πλαταιέες : see I. 88 11-13. — πεντηκοντέρους : these were vessels of 
the older style with fifty oars, all in one row ; while the triremes, the more 
modern ships of war with three banks of oars, were specially called νῆες, 
sometimes νῆες paxpat. 

2. ἐπ᾽’ ᾿Αρτεμίσιον (G. 191, N. 6). — ἡγεμονεύῃ, be commander-in-chief. 

3. ἐς Σικελίην : see 11. § 39. — εἰ στασιάσουσι, ὡς ἀπολέεται (G. 223, 
N. 1; 247). --- τοσούτῳ... ὅσῳ (G. 188, 2). 


Page 8 5.7. - μέχρι... . ἐδέοντο, so long as they (the Athenians) were in 
extreme need of them (the Peloponnesian allies): μέχρι ὅσου here = ὅσον 
Χρόνον. The desertion of these allies, all of whom acknowledged the head- 
ship of Sparta, would have withdrawn 113 ships. — περὶ τῆς ἐκείνου, i. 6. 
to liberate the Greeks in Asia Minor and the islands: this refers to the be- 
ginning of the Confederacy of Delos (about 477 B. c.). See notes, p. 31. 

4. ᾿Αφετάς : see III. ὃ 12, above. — παρὰ δόξαν... ἢ ὡς κατεδόκεον, 
Pleonastic for otherwise than as they expected, παρὰ δόξαν being more em- 
phatic than the simple ἑτέρως. --- δρησμόν, a retreat, which would have 
betrayed the force at Thermopylae to destruction, besides leaving Euboea 


19: HERODOTUS. 



















unprotected against the Persian fleet. — mpeo-petvar... yodvov, to waita 
little longer. — Θεμιστοκλέα : Herodotus is writing after Themistocles had 
died in exile, when even his disinterested-acts were liable to be suspected 
of corruption. But whatever we may think of his personal motives, we 
may easily believe that he used money furnished by the richer Euboeans in 
the way described in ὃ 5. —ém’ ®... ποιήσονται (G. 236, N. 2 and 3). 


5. ἐπισχεῖν (G. 265). — ἤσπαιρε, struggled, i. 6. resisted. — ἀπολυπόντι 
represents et ἀπολίποις, as protasis to πέμψειε ἄν (G. 226, 1). ---- ἠπιστέατο, 
imperfect, supposed (G. 126, 5; 119, 3): cf. ἐδυνέατο above, III. ὃ 30. 


Page 158. — 6. εἴ κως ἕλοιεν (G. 226, 4, N. 1), in case they should capture 
them, i. 6. to capture them if they could. — καταλάβοι, should close in about 
them (and save them), — an unusual meaning. — καὶ ἔμελλον δῆθεν ... 
περιγενέσθαι, and they were likely (as the Persians thought, δῆθεν) to make their 
escape (i. 6. if their flight was not hindered) ; whereas (δέ), according to their 
(the Persians’) talk, not even a torch-bearer was to come off alive. The torch- 
bearer in an army or fleet kept alive the sacred fire which was brought 
from home, and his person was held sacred. His fall, therefore, implied 
the utter annihilation of the whole army. It was a common saying that 
‘‘not even a torch-bearer escaped” (οὐδὲ πυρφόρος ἐλείφθη), implying | 
utter destruction. 





7. πρὸς ταῦτα ὧν : this corresponds to ἐκ μὲν τῆς ἀντίης in ὃ 6, taking — 
the place of a clause with δέ. --- ὡς ἄν (G. 216, 1, N. 2). — ot μέν, i.e | 
those who sailed round Euboea ; σφεῖς δέ, and they, i. 6. the main force ; 
both in apposition with the subject of περιλάβοιεν. --- ἐξ ἐναντίης, in front, 
like ἐκ τῆς ἀντίης in ὃ 6. — τὰς ταχθείσας, i. 6. the two hundred. 


8. αὐτὸς περιεβάλετο, got for himself. — ἀλλ᾽ οὐ γάρ οἱ παρέσχε ὡς τότε, 
but [had not done so], for he had never had [such] an opportunity as then. — | 
ἔτι, at length. 


Page 159. —és ὀγδώκοντα: a swim of about nine miles! This is 
matched by another later story, that, during the storm at Sepias, the same 
man with the help of his daughter (also a diver) destroyed many Persian 
ships by diving down and loosening their anchors. 


9. ἀποδεδέχθω, v. ἀποδείκνυμι (G. 202, 2, N. 1).— ὡς γένοιτο, that it 
had taken place (G. 243). 

10. ἐπενείκαντες, ascribing or imputing. — καταφρονήσαντες ταῦτα, 
resolved on this ; καταφρονεῖν has this rare sense only in Ionic Greek. — és 
μέσον implies that they hoped to get the Greeks into the circle which they 
were about to make. — ἐπιστάμενοι, feeling sure. — ἀπονοστήσει, would re- 
turn safe. — ἡδομένοισι ἢν (G. 184, 3, N. 6). — ὅκως . . « λάμψεται depends 
on the idea of striving in ἅμιλλαν ἐποιεῦντο (G. 217). 


Page 60. — 11. ὡς ἐσήμηνε, when the signal was given (G. 134, N. 1, 4). 
- ἐς τὸ μέσον : the sterns were brought together as the prows were turnet 
toward the enemy on every side. — ἔργου εἴχοντο, held to the work. — katt 





} 


* 
| 
ke 


HERODOTUS. 135 


στόμα, beak to δοαΐ. ---- Σαλαμινίων : the Salamis in Cyprus is meant ; but 


ἐν Σαλαμῖνι below refers to the island near Athens. 

12. μέσον θέρος, intdsummer: τῆς ὥρης is partitive genitive. The hattles 
of Thermopylae and Artemisium took place in July, 480 B. c. — κατιστέα- 
το, imperfect, = καθίσταντο. --- ἐλπίζοντες, apprehending. —és ola = ὅτι 
és τοιαῦτα, causal relative (G. 238). --- ῥεύματα ἰσχυρά, swollen torrents. 


Page AGE.— 13. ὅκως ἄν (G. 216, 1, N. 2). — τὰ Κοῖλα, the Hollows 
of Euboea are probably on the southwest side, opposite Attica. 

14. ἐπεβώθεον, came as reinforcement: these 53 ships, added to those 
mentioned in § 1, raised the Athenian fleet to the full number of 200. — 
τὴν αὐτὴν ὥρην, the same time of day (see ὃ 9, above). 

15. σφι λυμαίνεσθαι, should harass them (G. 184, 2). — τὸ ἀπὸ Ἐέρξεω, 
what Xerxes might do. — ot pév refers to the Greeks both at Thermopylae 
and at Artemisium ; ot δέ to the Persians at both places: πόρου refers to 
the passage by sea and that by land. — ὅκως κρατήσουσι (G. 217, N. 2). 


Page 162. — 16. παραπλήσιοι, equally matched, not in numbers, but 
as is explained in the next sentence. —adros ὑπ᾽ ἑωυτοῦ ἔπιπτε : a Corin- 
thian speaker in Thucyd. I. 69 speaks of the armament of Xerxes as αὐτὸν 
περὶ αὑτῷ σφαλέντα. --- τράπεσθαι (lonic present passive), in apposition 
with χρῆμα, 

17. παλήσειε, should suffer: cf. ἤν τι καταλαμβάνῃ (G. 248). — on- 
patvey depends on προσετέτακτο and also on ἑτοῖμον. --- és avaBodds, with 
delay. The fieet had suffered so severely in the engagements, — half of 
the Athenian ships being disabled, — that it had already determined to 
withdraw ; and, by advice of Themistocles, the Greeks were slaughtering 


_ the cattle of the Euboeans for their own supplies. : 


18. περὶ τὰ πότιμα ὕδατα, i. 6. on the northern shore of Euboea, where 
the Persians would land for drinking-water. — ἐπὶ τοὺς πατέρας ; Attica 
was called the parent city of the Jonians in Asia Minor. — μάλιστα μέν, 
best of all. — ἐκ τοῦ μέσου ἡμῖν ἕζεσθε (G. 184, 3, N. 6), 1. 6. be neutral. 


Page 163. - καὶ αὐτοί, opposed to τῶν Kapav. — ἡ ἔχθρη .. . γέγονε: 
i. 6. in the assistance given by Athens in the Jonic revolt. — βασιλέα, ob- 
ject of λαθόντα. — ἐπείτε dveveryOq : Herodotus occasionally omits ἄν in 
this construction, contrary to the usage in Attic prose (G. 234; 223, Ν. 2). 
— διαβληθῇ (sc. τὰ γράμματα), should be misrepresented (G. 248, N.). 


In the interval which follows, Xerxes is said to have brought the soldiers 


_ of his fleet to Thermopylae, that they might view the Grecian dead, — con- 
 cealing the trenches where 20,000 of his own dead lay buried, — ‘‘ truly a 


laughable device,” says Herodotus, ‘‘ which deceived nobody ; on one side 
a thousand men lying about the field [as if these were all the Persians had 


lost], and on the other four thousand crowded together into one spot.” He 
is also related to have asked of some Arcadian deserters what the Greeks 


were doing. ‘‘ Holding the Olympic games,” was the reply, and ‘‘ seeing 


136 HERODOTUS. 


wresiling and chariot-races.” ‘And for what prize?” he asked. ‘‘ An 


olive-wreath to the winner.” Upon which a Persian officer exclaimed, 


‘* What men are these against whom we are brought out to fight ?— men 
who contend with one another for honor, and not for gain!” At this time, 
too, the Thessalians (who had an old border-feud with the Phocians) sent 
a messenger into Phocis, offering, for a ransom of fifty talents, to save the 
district from being ravaged by the Persians: to which the Phocians replied, 
that they were free as the Thessalians to make friends with the Medes, if 
they chose ; but they would never of their own will be traitors to the lib- 
erties of Greece. This heroic answer greatly endeared them in later times 
to the Athenians; but the opinion of Herodotus was, that their ancient 
hate would have led them to choose the side opposite to the Thessalians, 
whichever that had been. 


19. és τὴν Δωρίδα : it is strange that Herodotus represents the whole 
army of Xerxes as marching into Boeotia by the road which leads through 
Doris and Central Phocis by the valley of the Cephissus, — a road which, 
by crossing a mountain ridge, avoided the pass of Thermopylae altogether. 
Stein remarks, that probably a part of the army at least passed through 
Thermopylae and took the upper road, which appears from the names of 
towns on that route which were burned by the Persians. This road also 
would be the only one practicable for the cavalry. — ποδεών, footlet or spur 
(see Lexicon). — ἥ περ refers to Doris. — μητρόπολις, i. 6. the starting- 
place of the Dorian emigration : the earlier home of the race was in Thes- 
saly. — οὐκ ἐδόκεε, i. 6. the Thessalians advised against it. 


20. ἡ κορυφή, the name Tithorea was given to one of the summits in the 
mass of mountains called Parnassus: the place here mentioned was proba- 
bly a natural fortress described by Plutarch (Sull. 15), below the highest 
peak of Tithorea ; the present Velitza. — κατὰ Νέωνα, at (or above) Neon. 
— κειμένη ἐπ᾽ ἑωυτῆς, lying by itself, 1. 6. a solitary peak. — ἀνηνείκαντο, 
understand their possessions. 

21. Παραποταμίους, “ Riverside,” a town and people of the same name 
on the Cephissus. : 


Page 164. — ras δὲ πόλις... ἔσωζον, were protecting their cities, 1. e. 
when the Persians entered Boeotia. 

23. ere... κατορύξωσι, (G. 244): the direct question being κατορύξω- 
μεν ; shall we bury them? (G. 256). — αὐτός before εἶναι is adjective (G. 138, 
w. 8). --- πέρι (G. 191, N. 4). — πέρην, i. e. across the Gulf of Corinth. — 
Κωρύκιον ἄντρον, the Corycian cave, sacred to Pan and the nymphs, was 
high above Delphi, in the side of one of the heights of Parnassus. It is 
described as about 800 feet deep, 40 feet high, and abounding in stalac- 
tites. 

Page 165. — 24. ἀπώρεον, were in sight of. — IIpovytys, a title of the 
Delphian Athena (Attic IIpovata), who was so called because her temple 
stocd on the way leading to the great temple of Apollo, being thus before 








HERODOTUS. 137 


the temple (πρὸ ναοῦ). --- διὰ πάντων, above all: 4 has occasionally (in 
Herodotus as in the poets, not in Attic writers) a meaning of pre-eminence, 
of going through or beyond. 

25. δύο κορυφαί (G. 138, N. 6), great masses of rock detached from the 
mountain and thrown down, probably, by the defenders : many such frag- 
ments are now to be seen in the pass, — ἰθὺ Βοιωτῶν (G. 182, 2). — μέζο- 
vas ἢ κατὰ ἀνθρώπων φύσιν, of more than human stature: ἔχοντας cannot be 
correct here unless there is some error in the preceding words. 

26. τούς and δύο belong to ἥρωας. --- τῆς Κασταλίης, the famous foun- 
tain of Castalia, which flows from the cleft between the two lofty peaks, 
the Φαιδριάδες, which overhang Delphi. One of these peaks was called 
Hyampeia. These two peaks above Delphi have caused the idea that the 
chief peak of Parnassus, Lycoreia, has a double crest. 


Page 166. — 27. τὸ ποιητέον = ὃ ποιητέον, as indirect question. — 
ἐπὶ τοῖσι κατήκουσι (Vv. καθ-ήκω) πρήγμασι, on the circumstances that had 
arisen (or come in), like the Attic τὰ καθεστῶτα. --- τῶν. οὐδέν, nothing of 
the kind. — ot δέ, the Athenians: see note on III. ὃ 38, above. — ἀπιέναι 
(v. ἀφίημι) depends irregularly on ἐπυνθάνοντο, which takes the participle 
τευχέοντας regularly (G. 280). 

28. ᾿Αθηναίων τῇ τις δύναται σώζειν, for ᾿Αθηναίων τινὰ τῇ (= ἡ) δύ- 
ναται σόζειν. --- ἐς Τροιζῆνα : Troezen, on the Argolic coast, was ἃ sea- 
faring place, sacred to Poseidon, and inhabited by an Ionic people kindred 
to the Athenians. It deserves to be remembered to the honor of the Troe- 
zenians, that they received the Athenian exiles ‘‘ with eager good-will,” 
and ‘‘ passed a vote that they should be maintained at the public charge 
by a daily payment of two obols to every one, and leave be given to the 
children to gather fruit where they pleased, and schoolmasters paid to in- 
struct them.” (Plutarch, Them. 10.) --- τῷ χρηστηρίῳ, that with reference 
to the ‘‘ wooden walls.” — ἐν τῷ ἱρῷ, in the temple of Athena Polias, which 
formed part of the Erechtheum on the Acropolis of Athens. Here was pre- 
served the olive-wood statue of the Goddess, which was believed to have 
fallen from heaven, and which was decorated with the costly peplus at the 
great Panathenaic festival. — ὡς ἐόντι, i. 6. to the serpent as actually exist- 
ing, implying some doubt of his reality on the historian’s part. — ἐπιμήνια, 
monthly food-offerings. — as... ἀπολελοιπυίης : it was a common ancient 
belief, that a city could not be taken or destroyed unless first forsaken by 
its divinity. Thus the Romans had a formula for summoning forth the 
Gods of the cities they were about to attack ; while the true name of Rome 
and that of its tutelar divinity were said to be kept as a mystery, lest they 
should become known to an enemy who might thus disarm the city of its 
protector. (See Macrobius, Sat. III. 9.) 


Page 16'7. — 30. προθέντος (for the more common λόγον προθέντος), 
having given notice, the usual formula for opening a debate. — τῶν (= ὧν) 
χωρέων, by attraction for ὅκου χωρέων τῶν ἐγκρατέες εἰσί, in which of the 
places they were themselves masters of. — ἐπιλέγοντες, as if ἔλεγον or ἔγνωσαν 





198 HERODOTUS. 


had preceded. — ἵνα, where. — πρὸς δὲ τῷ ᾿᾿σθμῷ, supply ἐόντες from the 


clause with μέν. 


31. ἥκειν, had (already) come (G. 200, N. 3); but πυρπολέεσθαι (regular 
present), was burning: so with ἧκε and ἐδηΐου below. 


Page 368. — 32. τρισὶ prot: it was now September, B. c. 480, on the 
20th of which the battle of Salamis was fought. — ἄρχοντος, being Archon, 
i. e. Eponymus for the year: see note on Xen. Hell. 2, HI. 1.— 710 ἄστυ, 
the city proper, all within the circuit of the walls. — ταμίας, stewards, having 
charge of the temple-treasures. 


33. ᾿Αρήϊον πάγον, the Areopagus, or Mars’ ΗΠ]. ---ὅκως ... ἅψειαν 
(G. 233). —éveSéxovro, did they entertain them, i. e. the proposals of the 
exiled family of Pisistratus. 

34. ἐκ τῶν ἀπόρων : ἄπορα is used like ἀπορίαι. --- ἔμπροσθε : the north 
side of the Acropolis is still sometimes called the front; the gateway and 
the only entrance are on the west side. — ἤλπισε has here so much force 
of apprehension that it takes μή and the optative like ἐφοβήθη (G. 218) : 
for ἤλπισε ἄν, see G. 226, 2. --- ἱρὸν . . . ᾿Αγλαύρου : the Aglaurium, 
a sanctuary which commemorated the place where Aglaurus, daughter of 
Cecrops, was said to have thrown herself from the Acropolis. 


Page 169. — πρὸς τὰς πύλας, the gates of the temple, in the precincts 
of which they had ascended. 


35. ᾿Αρταβάνῳ : an uncle of Xerxes, who had been left in chief authority 
at the Persian capital, although he had attempted to dissuade Xerxes from 
his expedition against Greece. 

36. γηγενέος, born of the Earth: see Il. 11. 548, τέκε δὲ ζείδωρος ἄρουρα. 
The temple of Erechtheus was one of the three temples united in the build- 
ing commonly called the Erechtheum ; a second was the temple of Athena 
Polias (see note on ὃ 28, above) ; the third was the Pandroseum, which 
contained the sacred olive-tree planted by Athena, and the salt spring 
(θάλασσα) made by the stroke of Poseidon’s trident. These were proofs 
(μαρτύρια) offered by the rival deities in their famous contest for the pos- 
session of Athens, which was represented by Phidias in the group of statues 
on the western pediment of the Parthenon. — ὅσον τε, about, like ὡς with 
words denoting number or size: the τέ is a poetic addition (not Attic) 
allowed by Herodotus (G. 151, N. 4). 

37. κυρωθῆναι depends on ἔμενον, which sometimes takes the infinitive 


in the sense of waiting for something to be done. — πρῆγμα, subject of dis- 
cussion (see § 30, above). 


Page 8'70. — καὶ οἵ (G. 151, N. 3). 

38. περὶ οὐδεμιῆς... ναυμαχήσεις, i. e. you will no longer have any coun- 
try to fight for (for οὐ... οὐδεμιῆς, see G. 283, 9). — μὴ οὐ (G. 288, 7). — 
ἀναγνῶσαι, to prevail upon: this meaning of ἀναγιγνώσκω is not found in 
Attic. 


+e 


ἘΦ 





ica ia ταν 


eye 


γῶν 


rs 
Ὁ 5 


Forte 


e 
Ψ 
3, 
ζ 
4 
é 
a 
| 
: 


ree 





Ss 6 
ΓΙ Ὁ 


HERODOTUS. 139 


39. σεμμῖξαι, communicare. — ἑωυτοῦ ποιεύμενος, making (or represent: 
ing) them as his own. 

40. τῶν εἵνεκεν (relative), = τούτων ὧν, &e.: τούτων depending on 
λόγον. --- πολλός, frequent or urgent; i. 6. he had much to say. — ἀπολυό- 
μενος, in his defence, sese purgans. — οἱ ἐγκαταλειπόμενοι, they who do not 
enter the lists. 








Page 17}. -- 41. ἀναζεύξῃς, break up, move off; lit. yoke up, used prop- 
erly of moving by land. — ἀναπεπταμένῳ, open (as a bird with its wings 
spread), in contrast with the narrow waters at Salamis. — és τό (relative), 
supply ἀνάγειν or some similar verb. — βαρυτέρας (if correct) must mean 
heavier in movement, not larger. — σφέας, the Persians. — kwwSvuvetoes ... 
“Ἑλλάδι : compare κινδυνεύειν τῇ Ψυχῇ, in III. 27. 

42. τοσάδε, the following (G. 148, N. 1). — πρὸς ἡμέων, for our advantage. 
—és τήν (G. 191, N. 6). —év αὐτοῖσι (as above), i. 6. in what I propose. 
— μένων = ἢν μένῃς (G. 226, 1). 

43. περιεοῦσι : cf. περιγίνεται in ὃ 42. —Adyov refers to the oracle, 
11. § 35. --- οἰκότα is object of βουλευομένοισι, and is also understood as 
subject of ἐθέλει, which here is used like φιλεῖ = solet. — βουλευομένοισι 
before οὐκ ἐθέλει is dat. commodi, i. 6. for their sake. 


Page ἢ 72- — προσχωρέειν.. . γνώμας, conform (go over) to human ideas. 

44. τῷ ph errs (G. 238): μή shows that there is a conditional as well 
as a causal force in the relative clause. — ἐπιψηφίζειν ἀπόλι ἀνδρί, to put a 
guestion to vote for (i. 6. on the motion of) a man without a country. — οὕτω 
συμβάλλεσθαι, then (i. 6. after declaring his country) to join in proposing 
opinions. — éwutota., {9 himself and his fellow-citizens. —tor ἄν, so long as: 
the subjunctive in the direct discourse depends on ἐστί (here changed to 
εἴη), which has a future (as well as present) sense ; the idea being, we can 
certainly be said to have 1 country, so long as we have 200 ships to show. 

45. ἐπεστραμμένα (Vv. ἐπιστρέφω), pressing, emphatic. — εἰ pevéas καὶ 
ἔσεαι : the apodosis is suppressed, it will be well.— τὸ wav... φέρουσι, 
i. e. with them rests the whole fortune of war. — οἰκέτας, (here) our households. 
— iptv, a town near Sybaris in Southern Italy. — kal... αὐτήν, and 
which (G. 156): a relative is seldom repeated in a new case, but a personal 
or demonstrative takes its place. 

46. δοκέειν, used absolutely (@. 268). — μὴ... ἀπολίπωσι (ἃ. 218; 
216, 2). — οὐκέτι belongs to ἀξιόμαχοι. --- οἵ περὶ Σαλαμῖνα (ἃ. 141, N. ὃ): 
ἀκροβολισάμενοι, after skirmishing. 

Page 173. — AiaxiSas: among th> descendants of Acacus were Peleus 
and his son Achilles. It is not to be guj posed that the ship was sent for 
images of these heroes ; but it was believe? that they would come in per- 
son, though unseen, to help the Greeks. 

47. Δημαρήτῳ : see note on III. 8 57. —Apractw πεδίῳ, between YParneg 
and Eleusis. — ὅτεών κοτε εἴη, indirect question, like ὅ τε ety (below). — 
πρόκατε (= πρόκα τε), suddenly, all at once. —\taxyov, the soug sung by 


140 HERODOTUS. 


the procession of the initiated (μύσται or μεμυημένοι) as they marched 
along the Sacred Way from Athens to the temple at Eleusis at the annual 
festival of Demeter: the name comes from the frequent recurrence of the 
verse Ἴακχ᾽, ὦ Ἴακχε, in which Dionysus (or Bacchus) was invoked un- 
der the name of Iacchus. 

48. αὐτός belongs to the omitted subject of εἶπαι (see G. 138, N. 8): 
ἔφη is still understood. — ἐρήμου ἐούσης, causal. —Mytpl καὶ τῇ Κούρῃ, 
to Demeter (the Earth-mother or Ceres) and Core (the Daughter, Proserpine or 
Persephone ; Κόρη, Ionic Kovpy). — μνεῦται, is initiated: the term proba- 
bly refers to the candidates for initiation having their eyes closed or οου- 
ered. — τὴν φωνήν (G. 159). 


Page 174. — 49. οὐδὲ eis, ne unus quidem, more emphatic than the 
simple οὐδείς. --- ἐκ τοῦ κονιορτοῦ, after the dust. — ἐπὶ Zadapivos, towards 
Salamis ; but ἐπὶ τὸ στρατόπεδον, into the camp. — καταπτόμενος, calling to 
witness ; properly used of clinging to the image of a God who is invoked. 

50. θηησάμενοι : see note after § 18, above. — Φαλήρῳ, the old port of 
Athens ; see map, and note on Xen. Hell. 11. 4, 11. 


Herodotus now describes a discussion (here omitted), in which an im- 
mediate attack on the Greek fleet at Salamis was urged by all the Persian 
commanders except Artemisia, the queen of Halicarnassus. She advised 
distracting the Greeks by threatening various parts of their coast with 
attack. But her counsel seemed timid and slow, and was overruled by the 
majority, whom Xerxes followed. Herodotus also remarks, that the army 
and navy of Xerxes, when they reached Attica, were as numerous as they 
had been before the storm at Sepias and the battles at Artemisium and 
Thermopylae, the losses being made up by accessions from the Greeks. 
This, however, may well be questioned. 

The movement mentioned in the words ἀνῆγον τὰς νέας ἐπὶ τὴν Σαλα- 
piva, seems to have consisted in sailing across to some position southeast 
of Salamis, from which an attack could be made the next day on the Athe- 
nian fleet, which was lying in the Bay of Salamis (on the east side of the 
island). — ὅτι... μέλλοιεν (G. 250, N.). 


51. ἐπορεύετο, began its march. — συγχώσαντες, having destroyed (dug 
away) : the road along the shore from Megara to Corinth is here artificially 
made on the steep side of the Scironian cliff (Σκιρωνίδες), and it is still 
rendered impassable by an ordinary rain-storm. This is the place at which 
the robber Sciron kicked travellers into the sea, until he was himself served 
in the same way by Theseus. (He has resumed his old business in later 
years, and a new Theseus is sadly needed there. ) 


Page 175. — hoppol ψάμμου πλήρεες, gabions. 

52. περὶ τοῦ παντὸς δρόμον θέοντες, running a race for the whole, i. e. 
having everything at stake. —dvip ἀνδρὶ παραστάς, each man with his neigh- 
bor. — τέλος (G. 160, 2). — ἐξερράγη, the excitement broke out (like a 
storm). — οἱ μέν, as if πολλοὶ ἔλεγον preceded ; to this corresponds ᾿Αθη- 








HERODOTUS. 141 


ναῖοι δέ, &c. —dptverbar depends on some word like κελεύοντες under- 
stood. with ᾿Αθηναῖοι, &c. 


53. λαθών, secretly. — ἐπεδέκοντο πολιήτας : after the great losses sus- 
tained at Thermopylae and later at Plataea, Thespiae was obliged to admit 
new citizens. This Sicinnus was an Asiatic by birth, and probably spoke 
Persian. —Ad@py = λάθρᾳ (G. 182, 2). — φρονέων τὰ βασιλέος, favoring 
the King’s cause. — παρέχει, affords you an opportunity. 


Page 176. — περιίδητε διαδράντας, allow to escape: notice the tense of 
the participle (G. 279, 3). — πρὸς ἑαυτούς, against each other (G. 146, N. 3). 


The first object of Themistocles was certainly to make a retreat of the 
Greek fleet impossible, as he believed that thus only could the progress of 
Xerxes be checked. He also wished to divert the attention of the Persian 
commanders from their original plan of attack to an entirely new one of 
cutting off a retreat, thus making them careless at the critical moment, 
and perhaps inducing them to divide their fleet. It can hardly be doubted, 
however, that here —as in his later stratagem (ὃ 85) — he had a crafty 
scheme for ‘‘laying up treasure” (ἀποθήκην μέλλων ποιήσεσθαι, § 84) 
with the King, in case the Greek cause should fail or he himself (as actual- 
ly happened) should be driven to seek the protection of Persia. 


54. τοῦτο δέ, secondly. — ἀνῆγον... Σαλαμῖνα, they brought their west 
wing up to Salamis, sailing round the island (or surrounding the island, i. e. 
with ships stationed at important points). This refers to the ships which 
formed the west wing as they were stationed the evening before the battle 
(see note on ὃ 50). — ot ἀμφὶ... Kuvdcovpav τεταγμένοι, those who had 
been stationed about Ceos and Cynosura: it is now generally agreed that this 
Cynosura must be some point of Salamis, and not the Cynosura of the bay 
of Marathon. The word (lit. doy’s tail) means simply a long point of land, 
and the eastern point of Salamis suits the description better than any other. 
Ceos must be some place or point in the immediate neighborhood. — κατεῖ- 
Xov... πορθμόν : the ships just mentioned, which were lying off Cynosura 
at nightfall, now advanced and blockaded the channel between Salamis 
and the peninsula of Piraeus (in which is Munychia). — ἀπεβίβαζον τῶν 
Περσέων (cf. πολλοὺς τῶν Περσέων, above), sc. twas (G. 170, 1). — ὡς 
... ἐξοισομένων, because (they thought) both the men and the wrecks would be 
especially likely to be brought ashore here. — ἐν πόρῳ, &c., i. 6. ia the passage 
where the battle was to be fought. 


The description of Herodotus, thus interpreted, agrees in all essential 
points with that of Aeschylus. The great tragedian, who had fought in the 
Athenian ranks of Marathon, was also in the battle of Salamis. It is to be 
assumed that no account of the position of the Persian fleet on that event- 
ful morning can be correct, which does not agree with his description in 
the ‘‘ Persians.” This tragedy, exhibited in Athens in 472 B. c., contains 
a graphic account of the battle, which a messenger, just arrived at the 
Persian court from Salamis, narrates to Queen Atossa, the mother of 


142 HERODOTUS. 


Xerxes. The three principal points mentioned by Herodotus in § 54 are 
prominent in Aeschylus. The landing of Persian troops on Psyttaleia, and 
their slaughter, are made a most important part of the story (see note 

n§ 75). The stratagem of Themistocles is mentioned as the chief cause 
of the Persian defeat. In consequence of this, Xerxes first orders a triple 
line of ships ‘‘to guard the passage out and the roaring straits” (1, 6. the 
southern entrance of the straits of Salamis); then ‘‘others (‘‘to guard,” or 
“*to sail”) in a circle round the isle of Ajax” (i. 6. Salamis). The former 
are the ships described by Herodotus as holding ‘‘all the channel as far as 
Munychia”; the latter must be ‘‘the west wing,” which the Persians 
bring round to Salamis (κυκλούμενοι). This last is made clearer by the state- 
ment of Diodorus, that Xerxes sent round the Egyptian ships to blockade 
the passage between the northwest point of Salamis and the mainland of 
Megara. This is the movement to which Aristides refers in § 58. We 
may suppose that other ships were placed at other points around Salamis, 
where they would be of service if the Greeks made their expected attempt 
to escape by night. Aeschylus then describes the disappointment of the 
Persians when no signs of flight appeared; and their consternation, at 
break of day, when, as the sun rose, they heard the solemn paean — the 
war-cry of the Greeks — and the blast of the trumpet echo from the hills 
of Salamis. He represents the attack as begun by a Greek ship. The bat- 
tle seems to have been fought chiefly within the straits, so that the Persian 
right extended towards Eleusis, and their left towards Piraeus (§ 62). The 
Persians probably advanced in line from the open sea into the narrows, 
where they were soon thrown into confusion from want of room. Aeschy- 
lus speaks of the stream (ῥεῦμα) of the Persian fleet, which probably refers to 
their mode of entering the straits. The Persians were so soon thrown into 
confusion, that the fight must have rapidly lost its regularity, and probably 
no systematic plan of the Greek commander was carried out. This explains 
the confused accounts which we have of the progress of the battle, as to 
which Herodotus (§ 64) confesses himself unable to give details. 


The battle of Salamis was fought on the 20th of September, 480 B. c. 


55. συνεστηκότων, in conflict (see note on II. ὃ 36, above). —’Aptoret- 
Sys: Aristides, who had been one of the generals at Marathon, was ban- 
ished from Athens by ostracism (see Dict. of Antiquities) in 482 B. c.; but 
his sentence had been revoked since the invasion of Xerxes had begun, on 
the motion of Themistocles, his bitter enemy and rival. Recalled too late 
to return to Athens, he thus joined the Athenians in their camp at Salamis 
the night before the eventful battle, bringing news of the movement of the 
Persians which was most welcome to Themistocles. 


Page B'7'%.—56. περὶ τοῦ, &c., on the question, ὅ:Ὁ.---- ἴσον ἐστί, it is all 
one. — ἹΤελοποννησίοισι is to be joined with ἀποπλόου. 

57. ἐξ ἐμέο, at my instigation. — παραστήσασθαι, to bring them over, 1. 68. 
to my opinion. — ds οὐ ποιεύντων . «. ταῦτα, because (as they will say) the 
barbarians are not really doing this (G. 277, N. 2). 








oo Se 


=> 
- 


a ee 


ἐξ 
r 


2 Soroprigees τ hic φακώνα, Ey 
. 


Cee eS erCr nea 








HERODOTUS. 143 


58. ἥκειν καὶ ἐκπλῶσαι, indirect discourse for ἥκω καὶ ἐξέπλωσα. --- 
τοὺς ἐπορμέοντας shows that the sea between Salamis and Aegina was 
occupied during the night by part of the Persian fleet (see note on § 54). 


Page 178. — ἐπείθοντο here takes the accusative, as in II. § 34. 


59. és τὸν τρίποδα : this tripod was erected after the battle of Plataea. 
A portion of the pedestal, 16 feet high, is now in Constantinople ; and the 
names of the states which ‘‘ overthrew the Barbarian” (including the Teni- 
ans) are still to be read in the Doric inscription. (See Rawlinson’s Herod- 
otus, IV. p. 395.) — τῇ Δημνίῃ : see § 11, above. — κατέδεε, supply τὸ 
ναυτικόν. 

60. τῶν Τ᾿ ηνίων is adnominal genitive with ῥήματα where we should ex- 
pect ὑπό and the genitive with λεγόμενα. --- καὶ of (G. 151, N. 3)... ποιη- 
σάμενοι, used irregularly for the genitive absolute, as if other speakers be- 
sides Themistocles were to be mentioned in apposition. — ἐπιβατέων, 
marines, fighting men on a ship, as opposed to sailors and rowers: ἐπιβάτης 
originally means any one who embarks (ἐπιβαίνει) ; see below, § 89. — 
προηγόρενε εὖ ἔχοντα ἐκ πάντων, i. 6. made the best speech of all. — τὰ δὲ 
trea... ἀντιτιθέμενα, and his words throughout contrasted things nobler with 
things baser. — ὅσα refers to τούτων. --- καταστάσι, constitution. — κατα- 
πλέξας, having brought to an end. — τριήρης : see ὃ 46, above. — ἀνῆγον, got 
under way, i. 6. began to advance: in the next line, the middle is used in the 
same way, without véas. 


61. ἐπεκέατο, were close-upon them. —étl πρύμνην ἀνακρούεσθαι (also 
without ἐπί) is to back water: the statement is, that most of the ships at 
first backed water and were on the point of running ashore on the island 
behind them. — ἐξαναχθείς, advancing from the line. Ameinias is said to 
have been a brother of Aeschylus ; another brother, Cynegeirus, fell at 
Marathon (1. ὃ 20). ---- φανεῖσαν agrees with γυναῖκα implied in the pre- 
ceding accusative. 


Page 179. — ἀνακρούεσθε (G. 200, N. 7). 


62. κατά, opposed to. — πρὸς ἑσπέρης and πρὸς τὴν ἠῶ here are north- 
west and southeast ; Eleusis and the Piraeus giving the general direction 
of the Persian line. — Θεμιστοκλέος ἐντολάς ; see ἃ 18, above. — χρήσο- 
por... οὐδέν (G. 188, 1, N. 2). —evepyérns ἀνεγράφη : “ Lecording the 
name is repeatedly spoken of in the inscriptions of Assyria and Babylonia 
as the highest object of man’s ambition. See Esther vi. 1.” (Rawlinson. ) 


63. τῶν νεῶν, i.e. Persian, as τούτους refers to certain Persians. — 
ἔμελλε... συνοίσεσθαι, the result was bound to be such, §-c. — ἦσαν καὶ ἐγέ- 
vovto, were and proved themselves. — αὐτοὶ ἑαυτῶν, compared with themselves 
(1. e. at other times): the comparative here takes two constructions, a 
genitive and a clause with #, the former being inserted merely for 
emphasis. 


64. μετεξετέρους, individuals. —’Apreprotyv: as Artemisia was queen 


144 HERODOTUS. 


of Halicarnassus, the birthplace of Herodotus, he makes more special men- 
tion of her. (See also note on ὃ 50, above.) — καὶ ἥ : see below. 


Page 180. — ἔμπροσθε yap: the clause introduced by γάρ ends with 
ἐοῦσα, after which ἔδοξέ οἱ, it pleased her, irregularly takes the place of a 
personal verb belonging to καὶ ἥ. --- πρὸς .. . μάλιστα, close upon. — τὸ καὶ 
συνήνεικε, which succeeded too: see § 66, below. — φέρουσα, bearing down. 
— ἀνδρῶν te... Kal: this implies that the ship was not only (τέ) manned 
by Calyndians, but also (kat) bore the king (?) of Calynda (a Carian town): 
ἐπιπλώοντος is genitive absolute. 

65. εἰ μὲν καί τι... ἐγεγόνεε, even of we admit that she had had some 
quarrel with him, still, §c. — μέντοι is used like δέ in apodosis (G. 227, 2). 
— παραπεσοῦσα : Herodotus used συγκυρέω (as well as συμπίπτω) with 
the participle, like τυγχάνω in Attic (G. 279, 4). 

66. ἀπὸ τούτων, by what she had done (not especially κακόν). --- καὶ τόν 
(G. 143, 2): so καὶ tots. — φάναι, assented (imperfect). — ἐπισταμένους, 
recognizing; but ἠπιστέατο, believed (wrongly). — αὐτῇ συνήνεικε, proved 
Jortunaie for her (Kriiger), as in § 64, above; γενόμενα being causal: but 
συνήνεικε may perhaps be taken with γενόμενα, happened to result fortunate- 
ly, like συνεκύρησε in ὃ 65 (we have, however, συνήνεικε γενέσθαι in ὃ 66). 
— καὶ to... γενέσθαι, and especially the circumstance, that, §c., referring to 
τά τε ἄλλα. --- γεγόνασί μοι (G. 184, 3, N. 6). 

67. ἀπὸ δέ (sc. ἔθανον) = ἀπέθανον. 


Page LSE. — ἐν χειρῶν νόμῳ, in the hand-to-hand conflict. — ἀποδεξόμιενοι 
here belongs to ἀποδείκνυμι, as amodcEapevor in 11. ὃ 17: see note on 
186. 

68. ὡς... ἀπολοίατο (G. 122, 2), i. 6. that the collision was not acci- 
dental. — ὡς προδόντων, sc. τῶν ᾿Ιώνων, because (as the Phoenicians charged, 
ὡς) they had been traitors: the genitive absolute is more emphatic than the 
simpler ὡς προδόντας would have been. — τοιόνδε, as follows. — κατεδύετο 

. κατέδυσε: notice the difference in the voice and the tense. — τῆς 
καταδυσάσης νεός, the ship which hud sunk them. —éoyov, took possession 
(not had or held). 


69. ἐκέλευσε, Sc. τινάς as ; subject of ἀποταμεῖν. --- αὐτοί refers to the 
Phoenicians generally, who were to be taught a lesson. — ὅκως... tot, 
whenever he saw (G. 233). — ὑπό, at the Veer of: the eminence on ‘whieh 
Xerxes sat during the battle is Jow compared with the higher mountain of 
which it is a projection. — πατρόθεν, i. 6. adding his father’s name to his 
own, in the Athenian style. — προσεβάλετο.... πάθεος, i. 6. he contributed 
somewhat (τι) to this disaster of the Phoenicians (G. 170). — φίλος ἐών, 
se. τοῖς ἴωσι, 


Page 182.— 70. ἐν τῷ ἘΡῸῚ between Psyttaleia and the Piraeus. 
The battle was fought between Salamis and the mainland, so that this 
remote position of the Aeginetans could still be called τη the channel: hence 
ἐκπλωόντων and ἐκπλωούσας. 





HERODOTUS. 145 


71. διώκουσα νέα, (sc. πολεμίην). --- τὴν προφυλάσσουσαν ἐπὶ Σκιάθῳ : 
see note on III. § 5. — κατακοπέντα, bad/y mangled, cut up. — τῆς στρατη- 
yidos, the flag-ship (of Themistocles).— és τὸν μηδισμόν refers to the 
charges made against the Aeginetans before the battle of Marathon: see 
I. § 38. — ὑπό, to the protection of. 


72. ἤκουσαν ἄριστα, gained the greatest glory: εὖ (or κακῶς) ἀκούειν 
= bene (or male) audire. —’Apreproiny: see § 65, and note on ὃ 64, — 
πρότερον ἢ εἷλε = πρὶν εἷλε, before he had captured, priusquam cepisset 
(G. 240, 1; 232, 2).— % after pry = or.— ὃς ἂν ἕλῃ, [to anybody] who 
should take her alive (G. 248). — γυναῖκα: so Demosthenes afterwards 
resented the Athenians’ fear of the later queen Artemisia of Caria (the 
builder of the Mausoleum), calling her βάρβαρον ἄνθρωπον, kal ταῦτα γυ- 
γαῖκα, a barbarian, and a woman at that. 


Page 183.— ἦσαν δὲ... Φαλήρῳ repeats the statement of the last 
sentence in § 71, after the digression. 


73. ὡς 8... γίνεσθαι, and when they came, §c. (ἃ. 260, 2, N. 2). — 
ἱρὸν ᾿Αθηναίης Σικιράδος : this was probably on the southern point of 
Salamis. — οὔτε τι... εἰδόσι for οὐδέν Te... εἰδόσι. --- ἠρῶντο (Vv. dpdo- 
μαι), prayed. 

74. οἷοί τε, ready. — ἔπ᾽ ἐξεργασμένοισι, after all was over. — οὐ μέντοι, 
&c.: Herodotus, who evidently disbelieved this story, (as Rawlinson re- 


marks) ‘‘ recorded it more on account of its poetic character than from ill- 
will towards Corinth.” 


75. κατεφόνευσαν : this is represented by the messenger in the Persians 
of Aeschylus as taking place after the battle, and as the worst disaster of 
the day. The Persian here slain are called ‘‘ the finest, the bravest, the 
noblest, and the first in the King’s confidence.” (See § 54, above.) 


Page 184. — 76. Κωλιάδα : this was on the Attic coast, a little more 
than two miles southeast of Phaleram. — ἀποπλῆσαι, to fulfil, governs τὸν 
χρησμόν, which is explained by τόν τε ἄλλον... Μουσαίῳ, and irregular- 
ly by τὸ εἰρημένον, &c.: for the latter we should expect τὸν κατὰ τὰ vavt- 
για... εἰρημένον. --- ἐλελήθεε, had escaped the notice of. — φρύξουσι in the 
oracle must mean shall roast (i. e. cook) with the wood of the oars which 
shall drift ashore. The MSS. have φρίξουσι, which might mean shall 
shudder at the sight of oars (?). The following words, ἀπελάσαντος Bact- 
λέος, favor the common emendation φρύξουσι. 


77. χῶμα διαχοῦν, to build a mole or dam from the Attic shore to Sala- 
mis. He also (τέ) began a bridge of boats, and pretended to be preparing 
for another sea-fight, while he was really planning a retreat (δρησμόν). --- 
ἐκ παντὸς νόου, in real earnest. — πολεμήσειν is irregular after παρεσκεύα- 
ora (G. 202, 3. 


78. παραγίγνεται, travels (lit. comes in, arrives). — οὕτω, with such skill. 
Page 185. — ὅσων ἂν ἡ (G. 225). — μὴ od (G. 283, 7; 263, 1, N.). — 


146 HERODOTUS. 


κατ᾽ ἄλλον, by one after another, a strange expression (perhaps a mistake) for 
κατ᾽ ἄλλον kal ἄλλον. --- λαμπαδηφορίη, torch-race, like λαμπάς (1. § 7). 

80. Μαρδόνιον : see below, § 86. — πειρεόμενον, in attempt, 1. e. so far 
as he could, belongs to the subject of ποιέειν. --- és τοσοῦτο ἐγίνετο, thus fur 
did matters advance. — ὡς τάχεος εἶχε (G. 168, N. 3). — διαφυλαξούσας... 
βασιλέϊ, to guard the bridges for the King’s passage (G. 265). — Ζωστῆρος : 
Zoster is a promontory of Attica about half-way between the Piraeus and 
Sunium. — ἐπὶ πολλόν, to a great distance. 


Page 186. — 81. ἤλπιζον, they supposed, followed by εἶναν in indirect 
discourse (G. 203). 

82. εἰ λύσουσι ... τοῦτ᾽ dv... ἐργάσαιντο : the direct form would 
have the same tenses and moods (G. 227, 1). — ἡσυχίην μὴ ἔχειν, to avoid 
keeping quiet. — ἄγοντι μέν = ἐὰν μὲν ἄγῃ (G. 226, 1). — οὔτε... . ἔσται, 
neither can anything succeed. — κομιδή, return. — τὸν ἐπέτεον αἰεὶ καρπόν, 
the harvest of each successive year. — ἀλλά belongs to ἐατέον εἶναι (sc. ἔφη). 
— és ὃ ἔλθῃ, until he comes, without ἄν (G. 232, 3; 234). 

83. μεταβαλών, turning, i. 6. from the others to the Athenians. — éppéa- 
το, were eager (set out). — καὶ ἐπὶ σφέων αὐτῶν βαλλόμενοι, even taking it 
upon themselves, i. 6. on their own responsibility. —@AdNov = οἱ ἄλλοι, 


Page 815}. — πολλοῖσι, many occasions. — ἀναλαμβάνειν, retrieve. — 
εὕρημα, good luck or godsend: the idea is, that the rescue of ourselves and 
of Greece is a piece of special good fortune. 


84. καταβάλλων τὰ ἀγάλματα : the Persian religion, like the Jewish, 
was uncompromisingly hostile to idols (iconoclastic). A Persian therefore 
might commit acts with no sacrilegious intent which would be gross in- 
piety in the eyes of a Greek. —dmepaoriyeoe : see II. ὃ 9, above, — 
GAN... γάρ, but, since. — ἐπιμεληθῆναι (G. 270), let us care for: we should 
expect Set here. — καί τις (G. 150, N.). τ-- ἀποθήκην : see note on § 53. — 
τά περ ἐγένετο : Themistocles took refuge in Persia after the death of 
Xerxes, when he claimed the favor of the King on the ground of the ser- 
vices rendered to the Persian cause at this time, confessing and boasting 
that his action had been treacherous to the Greeks. It may be doubted 
whether he deceived the Greeks, or the Persians, or both. Grote remarks : 
««There existed in the mind of this eminent man an almost unparalleled 
combination of splendid patriotism, long-sighted cunning, and selfish 
rapacity. .. . Moreover, a clever man tainted with such constant guilt 
might naturally calculate on being one day detected and punished, even if 
the Greeks proved successful.” 


85. διέβαλλε, deceived them. — Connect σιγᾶν τὰ (= ἃ) ἐνετείλατο. 


Page 158. -- ἀπέπλωον ὀπίσω : after this, Themistocles sent threaten- 
ing messages to many of the Greek islanders, by which he extorted large 
sums of money, which laid the foundation of his great wealth of 80 or 100 
talents. At Andros he demanded payment in the name of ‘‘ those mighty 
Gods of Athens, Persuasion and Necessity”; but the Andrians refused in 








HERODOTUS. 147 


the name of their ‘‘two unprofitable Gods, who never desert their island, 
Poverty and Helplessness,” and submitted to a siege, in which they baffled 
all the efforts of the Athenians. 

86. ἔδοξε with προπέμψαι (G. 202) means tt seemed good; but with εἶναι 
(G. 203) it means it seemed, and so with the following infinitive. — οὐκ 
ἔφη, i. 6. said that he would ποί. ---- τριήκοντα μυριάδας : this is the army 
which remained in Greece during the winter, and was defeated at Plataea 
in the following year (479 8. c.). 

87. οὐδὲν μέρος, i. e. no important part, compared with the host with 
which he entered. — οἱ δέ (G. 227, 2). 


Page 189. — ἵνα. .. γίνοιτο ἐλαύνων, wherever he happened to come in 
his march, depends on the frequentative force of ἐπιτάσσων (G. 233). — 
ἅρμα τοῦ Διός : see note on II. § 13, above. — ἀπέλαβε, receive back: so 
ἀποδίδωμι means give back or repay. — νεμομένας, as they were in pasture, 
refers to the eight white mares (called simply ἵπποι λευκοί in II. 13) 
which drew the sacred chariot : compare the poetic use of ad’ ἵππων, &c., 
referring to the chariot. 

88. τῇσι νηυσί : see §§ 80 and 96. — ἐμπιπλάμενοι, gorging themselves. 

89. ὅδε, as follows, after λεγόμενος ; not ὅδε λόγος (without 6): this is 
probably a specimen of the tales current in Greece which were invented to 
malign the servile temper of the Asiatics. — χειμαίνεσθαι (sc. τὸν βασι- 
λέα), was suffering from the storm. — ὥστε = ἅτε (G. 277, N. 2). --- ἐπιβα- 
τέων, here probably simply passengers: see note on ὃ 60. 

90. κηδόμενος (G. 280). — οἶκε = ἔοικε, 


Page 190. — ἀποσωθῆναι, was brought safe. — ds St ἐκβῆναι (G. 260, 2, 
N. 2). 


91. οὔτε ἄλλως οὔτε Td... πάθος, neither in other points, nor as to this 
which [is said to have] happened to the Persians. — ἀντίξοον μὴ οὐκ ἂν ποιῆ- 
σαι τοιόνδε, opposed to the idea that he would have done something like this: ph 
is used because of the negative idea of ἀντίξοος (G. 283, 6), while οὐ is 
added because of οὐκ ἔχω (G. 283, 7.) — τοὺς μὲν καταβιβάσαι (sc. dv) is 
added (by apposition) to explain ποιῆσαι dv; but ὅκως οὐκ dv... ἐξέ- 
βαλε reverts to the construction which ποιῆσαι ἄν represents (ἐποίησε ἄν). 


92. τραπόμενοι, after the fruitless siege of Andros: see note on § 85, — 
ἐγένετο ἀνδριάς, a statue was made. 


93. τῷ γενομένῳ, to him who had shown himself. — διενέμοντο, gave their 
votes ; lit. distributed among themselves, because all voted for some of those 
present. 


Page 191. δεύτερα (adverb), in the second ρίαοο. ---- συνεξέπιπτον, hap- 
pened ( fell out) to agree: see ὃ 30. — ἐμουνοῦντο, had but one vote apiece. 

94. ἀκρίτων, in active sense: Kriiger, however, interprets it unjudged, 
with their merits undecided. — ἀριστήϊα μέν : we must understand avSpa- 
γαθίης or some such word ; Plutarch says (Them. XVII.), HipuBiddy μὲν 


148 THUCYDIDES. 


ἀνδρείας, ἐκείνῳ (i. 6. Themistocles) δὲ σοφίας ἀριστεῖον ἔδοσαν. (Stein 
will even insert the word in the text.) — ἱππέες : the 300 knights were 
the regular body-guard of a Spartan king when he went into battle ; Leoni- 
das, however, chose a special band of 300 to accompany him to Thermo- 
pylae (see note on III. § 21). 

95. @s... ἔχοι depends on the idea of saying in évetkee. — Τιμόδημος : 
we must suppose this man to have been a native of Belbina, a little island 
near Sunium, and to have been made an Attic citizen and enrolled in the 
deme of Aphidnae. Plato and many other writers tell the same story of a 
Seriphian, without making him a citizen of Athens. — ἐών, of I were, = εἰ 
ἣν (G. 222; 226, 1), and 17) thou wert. —’A@nvaios must here mean Lorn in 
Athens. 

96. ναυτικός, Sc. στρατός. --- ὁ ἘΖέρξεω περιγενόμενος, unless 6 is insert- 
ed before the participle, will mean which remained to (belonging to) Xerzes. 
— προσέμιξε, arrived at. — Kipn, in Aeolis, on the coast of Asia Minor. 


In the following spring, the army of Mardonius re-entered Central 
Greece, and again occupied Athens; the Athenians, as before, retreat- 
ed to Salamis. At the great battle of Plataea, in which the Greeks 
were commanded by the Spartan Pausanias, Mardonius was defeated 
and slain, and his army nearly annihilated. This disaster, with the 
defeat in the sea-fight at Mycale, on the same day, was the final act 
of the Persian wars in Greece. 


THUCYDIDES. 


THUCYDIDES is by universal consent acknowledged to be the first of 
Greek historians. The conscientious care with which he collected 
and sifted his materials, the calm unprejudiced spirit in which he 
judged both eyents and persons, the clear conception which he formed 
of the tendencies of his age, and of the secret springs of political ac- 
tion, and the acuteness displayed in the philosophic observations with 
which (unfortunately too seldom) he accompanied his narrative, have 
rarely been equalled and never surpassed. His sole work is the His- 
tory of the Peloponnesian War, in eight books, which includes the 
period from the beginning of the war in 431 B.c. to the middle of 
411 8. Ο., where it breaks off suddenly. Xenophon finished the his- 
tory of the war, and continued the narrative to the battle of Manti- 
nea (in 362 8. c.), in his Hellenica, a work which makes the greatness 
of Thucydides conspicuous by striking contrast. 

Little is known of the life of Thucydides: in the first sentence of 








THUCYDIDES. 149 


his history he calls himself “an Athenian,” and states that he began to 
write his account of the Peloponnesian War at the very beginning 
of the struggle, foreseeing its magnitude and the importance of the 
prize at stake. He elsewhere tells us that he continued his labors 
until after the end of the war in 404 8.0. (See page 117.) 

The passage here given is taken from the fourth book. It contains 
the account of the fortification of the Messenian Pylus in 425 Β. ©, 
by the Athenians under Demosthenes (the same general who twelve 
years later fell a victim in the disastrous Sicilian expedition), the at- 
tempt of the Spartans to dislodge them, the blockade of the Lace- 
daemonian force in the little island of Sphacteria, the appointment of 
Cleon to the chief command, and the final surrender of 292 Lacedae- 
monians, including 120 real Spartans, — such a prize as had never be- 
fore fallen into an enemy’s hands. The account is especially enliv- 
ened by the brilliant and amusing episode of Cleon, the leather-dresser 
and politician, the great popular leader of the day at Athens, who 
complained bitterly (and probably with reason) of want of energy in 
the siege of Sphacteria, saying it would be easy to take the island 
“if the generals were men,” and he would have done it himself if he 
had been general. Nicias resigned his office of general, and nominated 
Cleon as his successor. The latter accepted unwillingly, and only in 
consequence of the clamor of the people; but he did it with the 
characteristic boast, that within twenty days he would either bring 
home the Lacedaemonians as prisoners or leave them dead on the 
island. This promise he actually performed to the letter, and the 
Spartan prisoners were brought back as Cleon’s prize. Thus the at- 
tempt of Cleon’s enemies to make nim ridiculous and to ruin him 
ended in giving him still greater glory and wider influence. 

The present extract begins with the second chapter of the fourth 
book, and ends with the forty-first. About one third of the whole 
passage, as it stands in Thucydides, is here omitted. 


Page 192. —1. τοῦ ἦρος, i. 6. the spring of 425 8. c. — ἡγεῖτο δὲ, &c., 
a form of words often used by Thucydides in describing the Peloponnesian 
invasions of Attica, of which this was the fifth. — tds... vats, i. 6. the 
ships mentioned at the end of Book III. In the preceding winter Athens 
had voted to send 40 ships to Sicily, and had chosen three commanders, 
one of whom, Pythodorus, went immediately ;—— whence the two others 
are called here τοὺς ὑπολοίπους. 

2. ἅμα παραπλέοντας, as they coasted along (G. 277, N. 1). Coreyra 
(Corfu) lay on the route by which the Athenians usually sailed to Sicily, 
following the coast as far as possible. — φυγάδων : these were of the ex- 
pelled oligarchial party, restored and sustained by the Spartans: they had 
already (B.C. 427) provoked a bloody and desperate revolution in Corcyra, — 


150 THUCYDIDES. 


αὐτόσε, i. 6. to Corcyra. — καὶ λιμοῦ ὄντος, &c.: here καί connects τιμωροί 
and νομίζοντες, while ὄντος is ὁδιι58]. --- κατασχήσειν τὰ πράγματα, that 
they should gain the mastery.—é§’ Ακαρνανίας, Demosthenes had commanded 
an army in Acarnania the year before. — αὐτῷ δεηθέντι, at his own request. 
3. ἐγένοντο... κατὰ τὴν A., arrived off the coast of Laconia. — ἠπεί- 
yovro, wished to press on (G. 200, N. 2). 
4, ἠξίου, called upon them, asked them. 


Page 193. — εὐπορίαν, sc. οὖσαν (G. 280). — ἐπὶ πολὺ τῆς χώρας, i. 6. 
a large extent of the country: ἔπὶ πολύ is used as a neuter noun and one of 
the subjects of ὄν (see ὃ 16). --- σταδίους, i. 6. about 46 miles. — ποτὲ 
οὔσῃ (G. 204, N. 1). --- τὴν πόλιν δαπανᾶν, to put the state to expense. 

5. torepov... κοινώσας, implying that he communicated his plan to 
them without success. — ὑπὸ ἀπλοίας, i. 6. detained by the storm which 
brought them into Pylus. — περιστᾶσιν, coming round, or setting to work 
(Arnold), agreeing with στρατιώταις. --- λογάδην, picking the stones, an ad- 
verb of manner. — @s... ξυμβαίνοι, as each piece happened to fit (G. 233). 
— πηλόν, mortar. — ἐγκεκυφότες (Sc. οὕτως) ὡς, stooping [in such a way] 
that, as a final clause ; or ὡς μέλλον may be taken like @s... EvpPatvor, 
above (G. 233). — ὅπως μὴ ἀποπίπτοι (G. 216). 


6. τὰ ἐπιμαχώτατα, the parts most exposed to attack. — ἐξεργασάμενοι 
(G. 279, 4). — αὐτό, of itself, naturally. — ἐποιοῦντο, sc. τὸ πρᾶγμα. --- ὡς 
ον οὐχ ὑπομενοῦντας σφᾶς, accusative absolute (G. 278, 2, N.; 277, N. 2), 
in the belief that they (the Athenians) would not withstand them (σφᾶς, Spar- 
tans). — ληψόμενοι agrees with the subject of ἐποιοῦντο, and is therefore 
not in the accusative absolute. — ἐν tats ᾿Αθήναις, in Aitica, all of which 
was politically a part of Athens: see, below, ἐν τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ. 

7. OS... κατειλημμένης, we should expect the acc. (G. 280) ; but the 
genitive is occasionally used, as this case generally follows πυνθάνομαι 
(G. 171, 2). — οἰκεῖον σφίσι (sc. εἶναι), as we say, 7 came home to them. 





Page 194. — mpd ἐσβαλόντες refers to the invasion of Attica. — χει- 
pov, bad weather. 

8. οἱ ἐγγύτατα τῶν περιοίκων, i. 6. those who were nearest to the city 
of Sparta. The perioeci were descendants of the old Achaean population 
of Laconia, which had been subjugated by the Dorian invasion ; they 
formed an intermediate class between the Dorian aristocracy (ot Σιπαρτιᾶ- 
ταν αὐτοί) and the Helots (who were slaves). — ὑπερενεχθεῖσαι, carried 
over the isthmus by machines. A canal had been cut through this Leuca- 
dian isthmus about two centuries before, but it had since been choked by 
sand so as to be impassable. — πεζός here means land force, as it opposed to 
naval forces: see note on Herod. 11. ὃ 23. — προσπλεόντων (temporal). — 
φθάσας, hastily. — ἀγγεῖλαι (G. 265). 





9. καί connects εἰργασμένον and ἐνόντων, as both contain reasons for 
ἐλπίζοντες... αἱρήσειν. --- iv... wor might have been et... ἕλοιεν 
(G. 248). — és αὐτόν (G. 191, N. 6). 








THUCYDIDES. 151 


10. Ζφακτηρία, the long island now called Sphagia, which nearly closes 
the entrance to the great bay of Navarino. The channels on both sides, how- 
ever, are now much wider than they were in 425 B.c. See plan of Pylus. 
-τῇ μὲν... τῇ δέ, on one side (i. 6. the northern), and on the other. 

Page 195. — ὀκτὼ ἢ ἐννέα, sc. ναυσὶ διάπλουν, i. 6. eight or nine ships 
could sail through the channel abreast. — dvturpdpots, with their prows 
facing (any one entering the bay). 

11. τῶν καταλειφθεισῶν : of the five ships left him (§ 6) two had been 
sent to summon Eurymedon (ὃ 8). — προσεσταύρωσε, he built a stockade 
(to defend them) im addition to the protection afforded by the fort. — παρα- 
γενόμενοι (G. 279, 2). 

12. ἢν προσβάλλῃ, sc. ὁ πεζός (G. 248). — ἐκείνους, i. 6. the Lacedae- 
monians. 





13. ἄραντες : Thucydides often uses atpw intransitively (perhaps with 
vats or στόλον understood) of making a movement with a fleet or an army. 


Page 196. — oi δὲ... ἐποιοῦντο: the meaning is, that they made 
divisions, each containing few ships ; and made their attacks with single 
divisions, allowing the others to rest in the mean time. — ἐν μέρει, in turn, 
belongs equaily to ἀναπαύοντες and to the following words. — εἴ mas... 
ἕλοιεν, in case they should succeed in capturing the fort, §c. (G. 226, 4, N. 1). 

14. ἐγένετο, made himself (not was). — σχεῖν, like προσσχεῖν above, to 
effect a landing. — ἀποκνοῦντας follows ὁρῶν (G. 280). — τῶν νεῶν (sc. τι- 
vas) belongs to ξυνδιατρίψωσιν. --- ξύλων, (mere) timbers. — φειδομένους 
belongs to the omitted subject of mepudetv. — πεποιημένους (G. 279, 3). — 
ὀκείλαντας belongs to τοὺς ξυμμάχους, which is subject of κρατῆσαι as well 
as of ἀποκνῆσαι. 


15. τοιαῦτα and πολλά (G. 159, N. 2). — παρεξειρεσία was applied to 
those parts of the ship (either at the bow or the stern) which were beyond 
the seats of the rowers, ἔξω τῆς εἰρεσίας. --- περιερρύη (Vv. περιρρέω), s/ipped 
Jrom around (his arm). — προσβολῆς depends on 8, being attracted from 
the antecedent clause where it would depend on τρόπαιον. --- τῶν ᾿Αθη- 
vatwy... ὑποχωρούντων (G. 277, 2), connected by καί with the causal 
dative χαλεπότητι. 

16. καὶ ταύτης, and that too, as often kal ταῦτα. --- ἐπὶ πολὺ τῆς δόξης 
is nearly equivalent to πολὺ μέρος τῆς δόξης, ἐπὶ πολύ being used almost 
like a substantive (see § 4). The meaning is, it made at that time much of 
the glory of the one (the Spartans) that they were peculiarly an inland people, 
&§c., and of the others (the Athenians) that they were maritime, &c.—é€v τῷ 
τότε (G. 141, N. 3). ἠπειρώταις, predicate after εἶναι (G. 138, N. 8) ; 80 
θαλασσίοις, sc. εἶναι. 

Page 897. - 17. παρ-έπεμψαν, sent along (the οοαβί). --- ᾿Ασίνην, 
on the Messenian Gulf. — ἐλπίζοντες .. . μηχαναῖς : the principal idea is in 
ἐλπίζοντες. .. ἑλεῖν (G. 203, N. 2), while ὕψος μὲν ἔχειν interrupts the main 
construction, depending loosely on the idea of thinking implied in ἐλπίζοντες 


152 THUCYDIDES. 


(G. 203), — hoping, although the wall was high, still to take it by their engines, 
since it was particularly easy to land (ἐπειδὴ ἀπόβασις μάλιστα iv). — ὅπῃ 
καθορμίσωνται (G. 244, last ex.).— ἢν pév... ἐθέλωσι, sc. of Λακεδαιμόνιοι 
(G. 247) ; an apodosis like ὡς ναυμαχήσοντες, to have a sea-fight, is to be 
supplied from ὡς ἐπὶ ναυμαχίαν. --- εἰ δὲ μή, otherwise; see Greek Moods 
and Tenses, § 52, 1, N. 2: the full sentence would be ἢν δὲ μὴ ἐθέλωσι. --- 
ὡς αὐτοὶ ἐπεσπλευσούμενοι, with the intention of themselves sailing in against 
them (G. 277, N. 2). — καὶ οἱ μέν, i. 6. the Lacedaemonians. — ἃ διενοή- 
θησαν : see ὃ 9. — φράξαι, in apposition with the antecedent of & — οὔτε 
2» ἔτυχον ποιήσαντες (G. 279, 4), nor did they happen to do. 








18. γνόντες, perceiving, i. 6. that the entrances were open. — ἑκάτερον : 
see ὃ 10. καὶ μετεώρους ... ἀντιπρῴρους, both already afloat and with 
prows pointing towards them. — ὡς διὰ βραχέος, as (was likely) at so short a 
distance, belongs to what follows. — érpwoav, disabled, seldom used of 
ships. — αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσιν (G. 188, 5, κ.). --- ἐν τῇ γῇ, where we should 
expect és τὴν γῆν ; by a mixture of two expressions, ἐν τῇ γῇ οὔσαις and 
és τὴν γῆν καταπεφευγυίαις. Kriiger remarks that this use of ἐν for ἐς is 
found in Attic Greek only with the perfect. — πληρούμεναι, i. 6. as they were 
taking their crews on board. — ἀναδούμενοι, making fast to them (G. 98, N. 1). 


19. ἔπεσβαίνοντες, see ἐπεσπλευσούμενοι in ὃ 17, above. 

Page 8.98. --- τῶν νεῶν, genitive after ἐπιλαμβανόμενοι (G. 171, 1), in- 
stead of accusative after ἀνθεῖλκον. ---ἐν τούτῳ... παρῆν (for ἐν τούτῳ τῷ 
ἔργῳ . . « ᾧ τινι μὴ καὶ αὐτὸς παρῆν), each man believed that there had been 
slow progress in any work in which he had not been personally present: κεκω- 
λῦσθαι represents the impersonal κεκώλυται, there has been a hindrance, of 
the direct discourse ; for ᾧ μή τινι παρῆν, see G. 232, 1. ---ἀντηλλαγμένος, 
mutually changed. — περὶ tas ναῦς belongs to ἐγένετο θόρυβος. --- ὡς εἰπεῖν 
(6. 268). --- ἄλλο οὐδὲν ἤ, i. 6. they were doing nothing else than. — ὡς ἔπὶ 
πλεῖστον, as far as possible. — περιέπλεον, they sailed round the island, in 
token of defiance. — καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων, i. 6. from all, as well as from the few 
mentioned in § 8. 

20. τὰ τέλη, the magistrates, used like at ἀρχαί, the authorities: it takes 
masculine participles (G. 138, N. 4). --- ὡς ἐπὶ συμφορᾷ μεγάλῇ, upon what 
they acknowledged (&s) to be a great calamity. — παραχρῆμα, on the spot, be- 
longs to ὁρῶντας ; and 8 τι ἂν δοκῇ to βουλεύειν. --- ἀδύνατον ὄν (G. 280). 
- παθεῖν and κρατηθῆναι depend on κινδυνεύειν. --- παθεῖν τι is a common 
euphemism for θανεῖν. --- τὰ περὶ Πύλον is used as if σπεισαμένους pre- 
ceded, having made a truce for the neighborhood of Pylus; like σπένδεσθαι 
ἀναίρεσιν τοῖς νεκροῖς, to make a truce for the removal of the dead (Thucyd. 
III. 24). 

21. «Λακεδαιμονίους ... παραδοῦναι (G. 271). — ὅπλα ἐπιφέρειν, like 
πόλεμον ἐπιφέρειν. 


Page L99. — σῖτον τακτὸν καὶ μεμαγμένον, meal (lit. grain) in a fixed 
quantity and ready-kneaded: a χοῖνιξ was about a quart, and a κοτύλη 
about half a pint. — κρέας, a piece of meat, of course limited in size. — θερά- 





> Sate 





᾿ 
i$ 
μέ. 
᾿ 
i? 
5 
¢ 


THUCYDIDES. 153 


movres are Helots. —dpavrav τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων, under the inspection of the 
Athenians. — ὅσα μὴ ἀποβαίνοντας, so far us (they can) without landing. 


22. ὅ τι δ᾽ dv... παραβαίνωσιν καὶ ὁτιοῦν, and whutever of these terms 
either party shall transgress, even in any particular, = ἤν te... παραβαίνωσιν 
(G. 232, 8). --- λελύσθαι, shall (at once and beyond question) be void (G. 202, 
2, N. 2). --ἐσπεῖσθαι αὐτάς, that it (the treaty) shall be considered as having 
been made.— péxpt ov, until, takes the subjunctive or optative like the simple 
μέχρι (G. 239, 2): for ἄν omitted, see G. 239, 2, N.1.—ot ἐκ τῶν ᾿Αθηνῶν, 
lit. the ambassadors from Athens, by prolepsis (πρόληψις, anticipation), — 
ἐλθόντων (sc. τῶν πρέσβεων), on their return. — Ἀλελύσθαι, perfect (as above), 
shall be (finally) void; while ἀποδοῦναι is the aorist infinitive in its ordi- 
nary use (G. 202), shall return. — ὁμοίας οἵασπερ refers to the condition of 
the 5}}105. --- παραλάβωσιν refers to the future (G. 232, 3), its apodosis 
being found in ἀποδοῦναι. --- ἐπὶ τούτοις, on these terms. 





Four chapters here omitted contain the speech of the Spartan embassy in 
the Athenian assembly. ‘‘ Their proposition was in substance a very sim- 
ple one, — Give up to us the men in the island, and accept, in exchange for 
this favor, peace, with the alliance of Sparta.” Grote. 


23. τοσαῦτα (6. 148, Ν. 1) refers to the speech here omitted. — ém6v- 
μεῖν, κωλύεσθαι, SeEeo Bar, and ἀποδώσειν represent in the direct discourse 
ἐπεθύμουν, ἐκωλύοντο (G. 203, N. 1), δέξονται, and ἀποδώσουσιν. --- σφῶν, 
the Spartans (G. 144, 2). --- διδομένης, offered (G. 200, N. 2). --- τὰς σπον- 
Sis... ποιεῖσθαι πρὸς αὐτούς, that trey now had the treaty in their own 
power, to negotiate it with them (the Spartans) whenever they might please. — 
ἑτοῖμος is here declined with two terminations (G. 63, N). — ποιεῖσθαι is 
middle, and has σπονδάς understood as its object. 

24. τοὺς ἐν νήσῳ is subject of κομισθῆναι : ὅπλα and σφᾶς αὐτούς are 
objects οἵ παραδόντας. --- ἐλθόντων, see ὃ 22, above. — Λακεδαιμονίους, 
subject of κομίσασθαι, recover. — ἀπὸ... ξυμβάσεως, i. 6. by the Thirty 
Years’ Truce, made in 445 B. c., by which Athens gave up all her rights in 
Peloponnesus. (See Thucyd. I. 115; Grote, Vol. V. Chap. 45.) — kara 
Eupdopds, in consequence of defeats. — δεομένων... σπονδῶν, being then 
somewhat more in need of a truce: for τι, see G. 160, 2. 


Page 3900. — 25. EvvéSpous, i. 6. a committee. — σφίσιν (G. 144, 2), 
i. 6. for the Spartans. — οἵτινες... ξυμβήσονται (G. 236, N. 5). --- πολὺς 
ἐνέκειτο, was vehement against them (G. 138, N. 7). — γιγνώσκειν... πρότε- 
ρον, imperfect infinitive (G. 203, Ν. 1). —@xovras... αὐτούς (G. 280). — 
οἵτινες, causal relative (G. 238). — εἰ διανοοῦνται (G. 248, 1). — tt belongs 
to ξυγχωρεῖν (G. 159), to make any concession.—ovd τυχόντες, not having 
gained [their object]. — ποιήσοντας, like ὄν, depends on ὁρῶντες. 

26. ἰσχυριζόμενοι, maintaining stoutly (toxupas). — λελύσθαι, used as in 
§ 22. — ὀὠὀδίκημα, as an act of injustice, follows τὸ τῶν νεῶν. 

27. τὰ περὶ Πύλον ἐπολεμεῦτο, passive for τὰ περὶ τὸν Πύλον πολε- 
μεῖν, to carry on the war about Pylus (G. 198). --- ὁπότε .. . εἴη, belongs only 


154 THUCYDIDES. 


to the preceding clause, except, in case of a wind, Sc. (G. 233). — ἑβδομή- 
κοντα, see ὃ 17. 


Page 208.— εἴ tis παραπέσοι (sc. καιρός), in case one should occur 
(G. 226, 4, ν. 1), ποῦ an indirect question. —@ore ... σῶσαι, connected 
with καιρόν. 


28. ὅτι μὴ pla, except one; here ὅτι was originally the relative 8 τι, 
and the ellipsis was 6 τι μὴ Fv pla (none which was not one). — οἷον εἰκὸς 
ὕδωρ, such water as was to be expected (i. 6. on the coast, ἐπὶ τῇ θαλάσσῃ). 
— αἱ pév... ὥρμουν, i. e. some of the ships came near the shore for the 
crews to take their meals, while others were anchored at some distance 
from the shore. 

29. οὕς, causal, = ἐπεὶ αὐτούς (G. 238). — ἡμερῶν (G. 179, 1). — ἐν 
νήσῳ, sc. ὄντας. --- αἴτιον ἢν (G. 155, N. 4). — τὸν βουλόμενον, quemvis, 
subject of ἐσάγειν. — ἀληλεσμένον, v. ἀλέω (G. 102). — τάξαντες, &e., 
having fixed [118 price] at a large sum, i. e. offering a high price for it. — ἐσα- 
γαγόντι, past to the future idea of giving implied in ὑπισχνούμενοι. --- τῆς 
νήσου, partitive genitive. 

30. ἐτήρουν ἀνέμῳ καταφέρεσθαι, they watched [for a chance] to be car. 
ried in by the wind: opposed to ὅσοι 8... ἡλίσκοντο. The intermediate 
words explain ἀνέμῳ καταφέρεσθαι. --- τοῖς δέ, as if τοῖς μέν (referring to 
the Athenians) had preceded ἄπορον. --- ἀφειϑής, reckless, without regard to 
risk: the following clause with γάρ gives the reason of their recklessness. 
— τετιμημένα χρημάτων, rated in money, i. 6. since it was understood that 
a certain sum would be paid for them if they were injured (G. 142, 3). — 
ot ὁπλῖται, i. 6. of the besieged. —ébidAacoov, were wutching (for them). — 
κατὰ Tov λιμένα, i. 6. on the side of the great harbor. — καλωδίῳ, by a cord, 
diminutive of κάλως. --- μήκωνα, poppy-seed, which mixed with honey was 
taken to relieve hunger. — λίνου σπέρμα, flax-seed. 


Page 202. — σφᾶς (G. 144, 2) is the object of λανθάνειν, to which τοὺς 
ἐσπέμποντας or τὸ ἐσπέμπειν is understood as subject. 


31. τὴν φυλακὴν ἐπιλάβοι, might come upon their blockade. — ἔχοντάς τι 
ἰσχυρόν, having some strong ground of confidence. — δεξάμενοι (G. 277, 2). 


32. κωλύμης, see § 24. --- ταὐτὰ οἷς διέβαλλεν = ταὐτὰ ἐκείνοις οὕς 
(G. 158, N. 1). —for the case οὗ εἰπών and ψευδής, see G. 138, N. 8. — 
φανήσεσθαι may depend on ἀναγκασθήσεται, in the exceptional construc- 
tion noticed in G. 202, 8 (see Greek Moods and Tenses, ὃ 27, N. 2, a) ; or 
it may depend on γνούς irregularly, and by a change of construction. — 
Kal ὡρμημένους ... γνώμῃ; even somewhat more inclined in mind. — ἀπεσή- 
μαινεν, he alluded. — ῥάδιον etvat depends on the idea of saying implied 
either in ἀπεσήμαινεν or in ἐπιτιμῶν. --- παρασκευῇ; with a (proper) force. 
— εἰ ἄνδρες εἶεν, if the generals were men, representing εἰ ἄνδρες εἰσίν of the 
direct form (like εἰ μὴ πιστεύουσι and εἰ δοκεῖ above) ; not the same with 
el ἄνδρες ἦσαν. -- αὐτός γ᾽ av... ποιῆσαι τοῦτο, he would have done this 
himself, if he had been in command. See G. 211 and 222 (ποιῆσαι ἄν = 
*rolnoa ἄν). --- αὐτός is adjective (G. 145, 1); for its case see G. 138, N. 8. 








= 


απο SNA lings i? Rg NGA RCE 


Se a ON Rates inl? 


— 


πρός δας, τῷ a 






THUCYDIDES. 155 


33. ἐς τὸν Κλέωνα, against Cleon. —8 τι od... πλέει, [asking] why he 
did not sail, even as things stood. — εἰ φαίνεται, if it appeared, might have 
been εἰ φαίνουτο, like el... elev in § 32. — τὸ ἐπὶ σφᾶς εἶναι, so fur as they 
(the generals) were concerned (G. 268, N.). — ἀφιέναι, resigned. παρα- 
δωσείοντα (desiderative of παραδίδωμι), wished to transfer it [the com- 
mand]. 


Page 209. — οὐκ ἔφη ... στρατηγεῖν (G. 138, nN. 8). — οὐκ ἂν oldpe- 
vos... τολμῆσαι, here τολμῆσαι dv = τολμήσειεν ἄν (Ui. 211): compare 
ποιῆσαι dv in ὃ 32. 

34. ἐξανεχώρει (transitive), sought to escape from what he had said. — οὐκ 
ἔχων ὅπως .. . ἐξαπαλλαγῇ; indirect question for πῶς ἐξαπαλλαγῶ; (CG. 244), 
not knowing how he should longer evade, Sc. — οὔτε φοβεῖσθαι... πλεύσεσθαί 
τε λαβὼν, &c. represents οὔτε φοβοῦμαι... πλεύσομαί τε λαβὼν, &e., of 
the direct form ; so below, ταῦτα ἔχων ἢ ἄξω... ἢ αὐτοῦ ἀποκτενῶ For 
λαβών and ἔχων see G. 138, Ν, 8. --- ἔκ τε Αἴνου, from Aenos, on the coast 
of Thrace ; this τέ would naturally stand after πελταστάς. --- ἦσαν βεβοη- 
θηκότες, periphrastic pluperfect (G. 118, 4). --- αὐτοῦ, on the spot. — 
ἀσμένοις ἐγίγνετο, were pleased with what had happened, lit. it happened to 
them pleased (G. 184, 3, N. 6). — τοῦ ἑτέρου, one or the other (of two). — 
ἀπαλλαγήσεσθαι depends (in sense) on λογιζομένοις, being in apposition 
with τεύξεσθαι. --- χειρώσασθαι would regularly stand in the same con- 
struction (i. e. in the future), but it depends on the idea of hoping implied 
in the preceding words (see G. 203, N. 2): translate ἢ σφαλεῖσι.... χει- 
ρώσασθαι, or, if they should be disappointed in this calculation (i. ὁ. in getting 
rid of Cleon), [hoping] to get the Lacedaemonians into their hands. — σφα- 
λεῖσι = εἰ σφαλεῖμεν (G. 226, 1). 

35. διαπράξαμενος and προσελόμενος belong to Κλέων understood. — 
προσ-ελόμενος, taking, in addition to himself; so προσ-έλαβε. --- ὥρμηντο, 
were eager. — popnv... παρέσχεν, also the burning of the island gave him 
encouragement. —orTpatotédw follows προσβάλλοντας. --- βλάπτειν dv de- 
pends on ἐνόμιζε, to be supplied from the preceding clause. 


Page 204. — 36. τοῖς ἐσχάτοις προσίσχοντας (G. 138, N. 8): the Athe- 
nians were obliged to land on the edge of the island to take their meals. — διὰ 
προφυλακῆς, under guard (lit. an outpost). — κατὰ μικρὸν τῆς ὕλης, a smali 
extent of the forest: cf. ἐπὶ πολύ, § 4, above, and note. — ἔλαθε κατακαυθέν 
(G. 279, 2): for [καί] see below. — ἐλάσσοσι, for a less number than they 
pretended : ὑπονοῶν (with πρότερον) is imperfect participle (G. 204, N. 1). 
— τήν te vijcov... οὖσαν : this clause is transferred from its usual place 
after ποιεῖσθαι by Classen, on Kriiger’s suggestion: καί above is enclosed 
in brackets by Classen. Without these changes the passage is hardly 
intelligible. — ἀξιόχρεων . . . ποιεῖσθαι, i. 6. a thing which deserved greater 
pains on the part of the Athenians, 

37. ὡς ἥξων (G. 280, N. 4). --- ἅμα γενόμενοι = ξυνελθόντες. --- σφίσι, 
the Athenians. — κελεύειν παραδοῦναι depends on προκαλούμενοι, but is 
also understood with βούλοιντο : summoning them, if they wished, to command, 


156 THUCYDIDES. 


¥ 


&§c. — ἐφ᾽ ᾧ, on condition that (G. 236, N. 2): τηρήσονται, as passive. — — 


ξυμβαθῇ : the active would be συμβαίνειν τι, to make some agreement (G. 159, 
nN. 2). See §§ 55, 56.— νυκτός, i. 6. before daybreak, included in τῇ 
ὑστεραίᾳ. --- ὀλίγον belongs to mpd τῆς ἕω. --- τῆς νήσου, partitive genitive 
after ἑκατέρωθεν, which implies that they landed from both sides. 

38. ὧδε, as follows. — Svererayato(G.118,5,N.). — καὶ opaddrardy τε 
Kal περὶ τὸ ὕδωρ, and what was at the same time (τέ) most level and near the 
water. — αὐτὸ τοὔσχατον, the very farthest [corner] of the island, explained 
by τὸ πρὸς τὴν Πύλον. 

Page 205. — λίθων (G. 167, 4). --- λογάδην : see § ὅ. -- εἰ... κατα- 
λαμβάνοι, i. 6. if they should be driven to a forced retreat; βιαιοτέρα : the 
comparative implies greater compulsion than they then had reason to ex- 
pect. 

39. οἷς ἐπέδραμον (G. 187), see δρόμῳ, end of ὃ 37: ἐπιτρέχω in this 
sense may take the accusative. — λαθόντες τὴν ἀπόβασιν, not being perceived 
in their landing (G. 160, 1): although this belongs to ᾿Αθηναῖοι, it is 
connected by καί to the other descriptive clause ἔν τε ταῖς εὐναῖς ἔτι, 
which refers to φύλακας. --- αὐτῶν refers to φύλακας : the participial clause 
is more prominent in the genitive absolute than if the participle agreed 
with its noun. — és &boppov: see ὃ 27. — ἅμα δὲ ἕῳ (ἃ. 186). — θαλα- 
μίων : these were the rowers of the lowest bench of a trireme, those of the 
upper and middle benches being called θρανῦται and ζυγῖται. --- ὡς ἕκαστοι 
(sc. ἔτυχον). in various ways. — κατεῖχον (neuter), were stationed. 

40. διέστησαν, divided themselves —ampds 8 τι ἀντιάξωνται, indirect 
question (G. 244). — ἀμφίβολοι, properly, in a position in which they 
were attacked on every side (πανταχόθεν βαλλόμενοι) ; here perhaps simply 
in perplexity, not knowing which way to turn: see ὃ 47, below. — ἑκατέρωθεν : 
on either side. 

41. of περί (G. 141, N. 8). — ὅπερ ἣν πλεῖστον = τὸ πλεῖστον, or ot 
πλεῖστοι, the greater part. — ἐξ ἐναντίας, in front of them, opposed to ἐκ 
“λαγίου, on the sides. — οὗτοι, i. 6. οἱ ὁπλῖται, called ἐκεῖνοι below. 


Page 206. — προσκέοιντο (G. 233; see 127, VI.).— καὶ ot, and they 
(G. 151, x. 3). — προλαμβάνοντες τῆς φυγῆς, getting the start in flight (lit. 
securing beforehand a part of their flight), like προλαμβάνειν τῆς ὁδοῦ 
(G. 170), — τραχέων ὄντων, sc. τῶν χωρίων, expressing the cause of mpo- 
καταλαμβάνοντες, and connected by καί to the causal dative χαλεπότητι. 
— ὅπλα, i. e. the heavy arms of ὁπλῖται. 





42. προσπίπτοιεν, sc. of idol (G. 233). — ὄντας (G. 280). — τῷ ἀμύ- 
νισθαι, in their defence. —vewot κεκαυμένης, see § 36. — ἐχώρει πολὺς 


ἄνω, rose thick. — τὸ πρὸ αὑτοῦ, what was before him, αὑτοῦ referring to τινά 
understood as subject of ἰδεῖν. 

43. πῖλοι, cuirasses of felt (Liddell and Scott), or perhaps ‘‘stuffed cloth- 
ing of wool or felt” (Grote). — ἔστεγον, were proof against: στέγω (cf. Latin 
tego) means to keep out what is outside (as applied to a ship which does not 











_ st co See 


ese = o> 


THUCYDIDES. 157 


teak), or to hold a liquid without leaking. — βαλλομένων, when they (the 
Lacedaemonians) were hit, — οὐδὲν. . χρήσασθαι, compare τί Cobre 
χρήσομαι; (G. 188, 1, N. 2). — τοῦ προορᾶν (G. 262, 2) : τῇ ὄψει adds 
1016 to the meaning οἵ προορᾶν, to look forward with the sight. — κινδύνου 
TE... καὶ οὐκ ἔχοντες, these two clauses denote the circumstances of what 
precedes (G. 277, 6). — καθ᾽ ὅ τι... σωθῆναι, indirect question depend- 
ing on ἐλπίδα ; the idea being, they were in despair when they thought 
how they could defend themselves and be saved. 

44. ἀναστρέφεσθαι (like Latin versari), to move about in a place ; some- 
times simply to be. —fvyxAyjoavres, closing their ranks, forming a clase 
body. — ἐνέδοσαν, gave way, retired. — πολλῷ (G. 188, 2). 

Page 20 7. — παρὰ πᾶν, sc. τοῦ ἐρύματος. — ἧπερ ἣν ἐπίμαχον refers 
to παρὰ πᾶν, as if this were an adverb like πανταχῇ. 

45. χωρίου ἰσχύϊ, owing to the strength of the place. — περίοδον αὐτῶν καὶ 
᾿κύκλωσιν οὐκ εἶχον = περιιέναι αὐτοὺς καὶ κυκλοῦσθαι οὐκ εἶχον : with the 
verbal nouns ἔχω has the same force as with the infinitive. For αὐτῶν, see 
G. 167, 3. — ἐξ ἐναντίας, in front, i. 6. directly upon them — ὥσασθαι, like 
ἐξελάσασθαι below. —ocpayv τῆς κυκλώσεως, like αὐτῶν κύκλωσιν above. — 
és τὰ πλάγια, the act of surrounding, κύκλωσις, implies an attack upon the 
sides (G. 191, N. 6). 

46. ἀπέραντον ἦν, it (the business) was endless. — ἔφη, &c.: the direct 
discourse would be: ἄλλως (in vain) πονοῦμεν ἡμεῖς " εἰ δὲ βούλεσθε ἐμοὶ 
δοῦναι... μέρος τι, περιιέναι ((. 266)... ὁδῷ ἡ ἂν αὐτὸς εὕρω, ϑοκῶ 
βιάσασθαι (I have a mind to force) τὴν ἔφοδον. When δοκῶ has this 
meaning, the dependent infinitive does not stand in indirect discovrse 
(G. 202 and 203). — κατὰ νώτου αὐτοῖς, in their rear (G. 184, 3, N. 4). — 
κατὰ TO ἀεὶ παρεῖκον ... νήσου, i. 6. wherever he could find a place which 
offered a foothold on the steep cliffs of the island; det being used as in 6 ἀεὶ 
βασιλεύς, whoever wus king. — περιελθὼν ἔλαθεν, he got round unobserved 
(G. 279, 4). — τοὺς μέν, the Lacedaemonians; τοὺς δέ, his friends. — τῷ 
ἀδοκήτῳ, by the unexpected act, or by the unexpectedness of the act (G. 139, 2). 
47. γιγνόμενοι. .. ξυμπτώματι, falling into the same mischance: cip- 
᾿ πτῶμα (rare in classic Greek) means properly the coincidence of one thing 
with another (whence our symptom) ; then accident, mischance. — ὡς εἰκά- 
σαι (G. 268). — τῷ ἐν Θερμοπύλαις, sc. ξυμπτώματι, depending on τῷ av- 
τῷ (6. 186).— οὗτοί re corresponds to ἐκεῖνοί re, and the following words 
(through ὑπεχώρουν) belong to it, leaving of «Λακεδαιμόνιοι without a 
| verb. — πολλοῖς te... καὶ ἀσθενείᾳ σωμάτων gives two reasons for 
| δπεχώρουν, and διὰ τὴν σιτοδείαν gives the reason for ἀσθενείᾳ. 

48. γνούς (G. § 138, Nn. 2, Ὁ) would regularly have been γνόντες : see 
ἔπαυσαν. (G. 135, N. 1.) 


Page OS. — br. . . . διαφθαρησομένους : after γνούς we might have 
either ὅτι διαφθαρήσονται (-σοιντο) or διαφθαρησομένους without 8re 
(G. 280) ; a mixture of constructions like this in so simple a sentence prob- 
he ably comes from mere carelessness. — εἴ πως ἐπικλασθεῖεν (G. 226, 4, N. 1; 













πο νυ 5 





cm τεσσ: 


158 THUCYDIDES. 


248, 2), in case they should de broken in spirit: if [τὰ ὅπλα παραδοῦναι] is 
not an interpolation here (as it seems to be), it must depend on the idea 
of compulsion or persuasion implied in the preceding words. — τοῦ ϑεινοῦ 
(G. 175, 2). — παραδοῦναι may depend on ἐκήρυξαν or on βούλοιντο (or 
on both): either they proclaimed (to them) to, surrender, &c., if they wished ; 
or they proclaimed (to them), if they wished to surrender, &c., to do so. — 
ὥστε βουλεῦσαι, on condition that (G. 266, 2) they (the Athenians) should 
determine. —8 tv... δοκῇ (G. 232, 3). — παρῆκαν... ἀνέσεισαν, lowered 
their shields and waved ther hands, to signify assent. — προσίεσθαι, assent to 
(lit. admit): the participial construction common with δηλόω (G. 280) is 
not used here, as the expression δηλοῦντες προσιέμενοι would be awkward. 


49. ἐκείνων, the Lacedaemonians. — ἐφῃρημένου, chosen as successor 
(ému-). — εἰ... πάσχοιεν, in case anything should happen to those (the other 
two). 


50. διακηρυκεύσασθαι, to send heralds over (Sta-), implying to ask; on 
which idea 6 tL... ποιεῖν depends. — ἐκείνων... . ἀφέντων, the Athenians 
not letting any one of them (the Lacedaemonians) go on this errand. — ἀπήγ- 
yetAev ὅτι (G. 241, 1, end): the quotation is here direct, and ὅτι is not to 
be translated. — μηδὲν αἰσχρὸν ποιοῦντας, provided ye do nothing disgraceful. 


51. διεκομίσαντο, carried their dead over (&va-) to the mainland. 


Page 999. — 52. ὀκτώ, genitive with ἀποδέοντες (G. 77, 2). — Σπαρ- 
τιᾶται : of the 292 prisoners, about 120 were full-blooded Spartan citizens, 
some of them of the first families in Sparta; the others were Lacedaemo- 
nian perivect (see note on § 8). --- οὐ σταδία, not a regular hand-to-hand 
battle, pugna stataria. —év ais... ἀπήεσαν, while the ambassadors went 
away; but the emendation ἀπῆσαν, were absent, is generally accepted here. 
— λάθρᾳ, as described in ὃ 30. — ἐνδεεστέρως . . . ἐξουσίαν, i. Θ. more spar- 
ingly than the state of his supplies required. 


53. ἀπέβη, was fulfilled (lit. came οἱ). --- ὥσπερ ὑπέστη, as he undertook 
to do: see § 34. — μάλιστα qualifies παρὰ γνώμην. --- ἠξίουν. .. mapa- 
δοῦναι, i. ὁ. they did not think it possible for the Lacedaemonians to sur- 
render their arms (lit. they did not expect the Lacedaemonians to surrender, 
&§c.). — ἀποθνήσκειν, sc. ἠξίουν. 





54. μὴ εἶναι (G. 283, 6). — καί τινος... τῶν ξυμμάχων : Thucydides — 
seems to wish to relieve the Athenian citizens from the charge. — δι 4}@,- 
δόνα, to annoy him. —e&... κἀγαϑοί ; the question was asked in a way 
which implied that those who were not killed were not καλοὶ κἀγαθοί. --- 
εἶνα. ἄν = ἣν ἄν. — τὸν ἄτρακτον, the shaft, used both for a spindle and | 
for an arrow ; the words λέγων τὸν οἰστόν imply that ἄτρακτος was not | 
the common Attic name for arrow. — ὃ évtvyxavev... λίθοις, he who hap- — 
pened to be struck by (lit. he who met with) stones, Sc. 


Page 2HE@. — 55. μέχρι οὗ τι ξυμβώσιν (G. 239, N. 1), until they should — 
have come to some (τι) agreement: see § 37 [συμβαθῇ). --- ἐξαγαγόντες 








THUCYDIDES. 159 


(6. 138, N. 8). — ὡς ἐς πατρίδα ταύτην, for és ταύτην ὡς és πατρίδα, to be 
joined with πέμψαντες. These ‘‘ Messenians of Naupactus” were settled 
in this place (in Ozolian Locris, north of the Corinthian Gulf) by the 
Athenians, who took them under their protection after the surrender of 
_ Ithome (in Messenia) in 455 B. C. (For the revolt of the Helots and the 
long siege of Ithome, see Grote, Chap. XLV.) — οὔσης, shown by ποτέ to 
be imperfect (G. 204, N. 1), which was a part, §&c. See ὃ 4, above; and 
ἀμαθεῖς ὄντες, below. — ὁμόφωνοι, of the same (Greek) dialect. 
| 56. pay... Te νεωτερισθῇ, lest some revolution of still greater magnitude 
should be stirred up for them in the country: this represents an active con- 
struction νεωτερίζειν τι τῶν κατὰ τὴν χώραν, to revolutionize some of the 
affairs in the country. For σφίσι, see G. 184, 3, N. 4. — ἔνϑηλοι clvar: 
a participle is understood, to be supplied froin οὐ ῥᾳδίως ἔφερον (G. 280, 
N. 1). — κομίζεσθαι, to recover. — φουτώντων, genitive absolute with a pro- 
- noun to be supplied from αὐτούς. See note on ὃ 39, above. — ἀπράκτους, 
active, = οὐδὲν πράξαντας. 


In the year after the taking of Sphacteria (8. c. 424), the historian 
Thucydides was appointed to a command in Thrace, where he had a 
family estate in a district rich in gold mines. While he was in com- 


᾿ς mand, Amphipolis was suddenly attacked by the Spartan Brasidas. 


Thucydides was summoned to bring aid; but Brasidas entered Am- 
_ phipolis a few hours before Thucydides with his fleet sailed into the 
mouth of the Strymon, at Hion, about three miles below Amphipolis. 


| For this misfortune or fault the historian was banished from Athens. 


His exile (of “twenty years,” as he says) he spent in regions under 
the Spartan rule, chiefly in Peloponnesus, gathering the materials of 
his history. His death took place about B. c. 401, when he was near 
the age of seventy. 





INDEX 


TO THE SYNTAX OF GOODWIN’S ELEMENTARY GREEK GRAMMAR, WITH 
PARALLEL REFERENCES TO HADLEY’S AND CROSBY’S GRAMMARS. 


ne H CoD μα 


be Hw CoD eH δ᾽ OT Co DD μὶ 


— .55- 
Crosby, 1871. Goodwin. 
δ7 5 § 157, 1 
400, 571, 666s 2 
568 158 
569 159 
498 5 100,1 
59 a, 393 b 2 
898 5 161 
894¢ 162 
898 d 163 
896 164 
894 "Ὁ 165 
504, 493 5 166 
506 167 
507 168 
5165 169 
520s 170 
522s pr ia & 
5380 6 Ye 
526 3 
5273 172 
527 175. 
664 2 
523, 1 8 
523, 2, 8 174 
523 b TS 
524 176 
518s 7 
586 178 
539 179 
540s 180 
537 181 
538 182 
542 8 183 
564 184 
548 185 
549 5 186 
551 187 
Boilies 188, 1 
559 a 2 
584 5 3 
5515s 4 
564 b 5 
562 189 


Crosby, 1871. 
400 
484 
472 
477s 
481 
483 
482 
472 g 
476d 
480¢ 
480 Ὁ 
480 a 
435 ἃ 
4153 
421 5 
428 5 
424 5 
432 
407 
414 
429 
431¢ 
429 f 
404 5 
408 
412 
699 
431 
433 
444 
437 Ὁ 
445 
675 
452 8 
452s 
449 5 
699 
4668 
468 
461 
458 
465 5 
409 ἃ 











INDEX. 


Goodwin. Hadley. Crosby, 1871. Goodwin. Hadley. Crosby, 1871. 


§ 190 612 469 b § 236 710 ο, 885. 642 
191 614 688 s 237 771, 875f 671d 
192 620 688 a 238 822 558 4 
193 614 699 239 755,758  641¢ 
194 — 685 5 240 771 703d 
195 684 577 241 733 5 62k 
196 693 30a 242 735,783 643e 
197 693 586 s 243 735s 643 5 
198 694 Ὁ 586 244 737 647 
199 687 578s 245 735 ο, 736 4. 646 
200 695 590s 246 714,788 6598 

N. 1 699 609 247 738 643 s 

2 702 594 248 729,781 648e 

3 698 612 249 863 b 701i 

4 699 604 250 869, 877, 731701) 

5 701 591s 251 721,834 638 

6 712 268 252 723,755 6558 

7 -- 609s 253 720 ἃ, 833 628 a 

8 = 597 254 720 b, 723.a 628 ¢ 

9 — 601 255 720 6 617 b 
201 696 = 256 720¢ 647 
202 720 590 5 257 845 627 
203 733 643 s, 6598 258 763 663 5 
204 788 660 259 763,778 6684 
205, 1 697 602 260 764 663 d 

2 707 606 261 767 663 4, 6 
206 746 616 262 780 - 82 663 f 
207 744 618 263 580,764 664, 713 
208 745 620 264 778 522 d 
209 747 619 265 765 664 
210 748 618 266 770 671 
211 783 658 a 267 813 671 
212 757 621s 268 772 665, 671¢ 
213 719 613 s 269 784 670 
214 727 623 270 508 b 670 
215 739 624s 71 14. 670 ἃ 
216 739 624 5, 650 212 119, 641 670 b 
217 756 624 b 273 508 b 669 
218 743 624 s, 650 274 769 703 ἃ 
219 732 631 s 275 785 673 
220 745 681 5 276, 1 785 673 
221 744 631 a 2 786 679 
222 746 631 Ὁ 277 788 674 
223 747 631 ¢ 278 790 675 
224 748 631 ἃ 279 796 677 
225 729 Ὁ, 749 4. 634 280 803 659, 677 
226 751, 722,783 635 5 281 804 682, 3 
227 750 649 s 282 824 687 
228 830 639 288,1 882 686 b 
229 755 549 2 833 686 a 
230 755 640 8 83 686 ¢ 
231 757 641 4 835 686 ἃ 
232 761, 757s 641 5 840 686 6 
233 man iS 641 6 838 713 ἃ 
234 759,738 641 γι 846 713 f 
235 760d 649 8 843 713 a,j 





SOME OF THE IMPORTANT DATES UF GREEK HISTORY. 


———— 

Legislation of Solon : . - . 3 - . B.c. 594 
Tyranny of Pisistratus and ie Sons . . . - . 560 -- 510 
Conquest of Asia Minor by Cyrus . - - Β A - δ40 
Hippias, son of Pisistratus, expelled . . . . . : 510 
Democratic Constitution of Clisthenes . ° . - . Φ, BOR 
Ionic Revolt in Asia Minor . : : - : ς δ00 
Defeat of the Revolt: Miietus taken 494 
First Persian Invasion: Battle of Marathon 490 

Invasion of Xerxes: Thermopylae and Artemisium J uly), : 
Salamis (September) ; : ; : 480 
Battles of Plataea and Mycale. - : : 5 479 
Athens fortified by Themistocles . : Ε - P : 478 
Confederacy of Delos’. : : (about) 477 
Cimon banished: Ascendency τ Pericles! : 3 : : : 461 
Thirty Years’ Truce between Athens and Sparta. : . 445 
PELOPONNESIAN WAR : - - Ξ - 451 -- 404 
Death ‘of Pericles. : : - . ° Ξ 429 
Seditions at Corcyra . : : : - - : 427 
Pylus and Sphacteria : Β - . 425 
Peace of Nicias (Truce for Fifty easy Β : - 421 
Sicilian Expedition . : : ° - 415-413 
Revolution at Athens : Oligarchy of “400 . . 411 
Sea-Fight at Arginusae : ! 406 
Battle Aegospotami . - - 405 
Capture of Athens: Thirty Tyrants. . . 404 
Athenian Democracy restored : 403 
Retreat of the Ten Thousand . : : ὸ ς 400 
Death of Socrates : : - 999 
Battle of Leuctra : ΤΠ. dennis τς το σε τ 371 
Battle of Mantinea: Death of Epaminondas 362 
Accession of Philip of Macedon  . : 5 . 860 
Phocian or Sacred War : : : : - : A 357 — 346 
Amphissean Sacred War . ὃ - : : 339 
Battle of Chaeronea: Death of enone ὃ ὃ ° : - 998 
Death of Philip: Accession of Alexander ° : . Β . 336 
Campaign of Alexander: Conquest of Persia ° 334 - 330 
Death of Alexander ; : : : : Ξ - - 323 
Death of Demosthenes . . . ° ° ° . : 322 














ο ° 
5 
5.» 
-» 
ΜῊ 594 5 
mne'e σῷ ὃν 
ae .59 
‘al ο afer 
. » 
» 
oe,? 
e @ 
ecee 
o°e 

δ ο -" 
ο 4,9 
. 

Φὸ " 
8... e 
ο ΓΥ 
ener en0n 
9ace@ Φ 
.5 9 

» 

οοδοο eee 
° 

eec0 5 
Θ ο ο 

δ ο 

nana” Θ᾽ 
ο © 
° - 








Savuay fo pas 5 





4 -, yy 


μ᾽ 


ΤῊΝ ὃ 


STILOTO) 


= —— 


—maLavs 
’ 








ὡς Ξε === == 


—— 
@Nicaea 
; Ι ; oF penus 
| 4 el ῦθι a «¢ —“Wlelatopy gon 
yp of Xerxes / -- ir nae ) 


“. j 473 ᾿ 


j 


Oh cee, 
ς WoloWe a 





ς 


Tarphe 


hy----- \. . = ᾽ Phary sae 
\ | Lath Or Hydart’s. ‘ 





MAGN 











ΠΣ πὸ ΣΕ. ὁ» 2 wmwhtie 








ΓῚ ὶ 
" .- 
ad al 
- 
4. Ζ aff 
"5." 
12h, . ᾿ 
ayer ac ! 
2° ὶ » 
are er? ay 
» r an | “ιν 
“ 
Seda ae FOES 
wa 
~-66 
Arn 
- A “- 
> nA 
9 
an a γέ 
~ da a © ἔ 
1 ᾽ ‘a Ann 
aAAA AnAG ᾿ 
οὶ naAne A 
“ 
" at = δ 
.-: ΣΝ AAT 
/ ς 
; nnna ah 
Β A n A fal - 
a 
a Ὁ 
nanan La} ‘ 
ia a ‘ 
Ψ ἢ 9 
᾿ . On ee 





~e 
Te 
ῥ 








Pig ttm oe κα 










- τ . ΤΣ ΝΣ nal 
r ἊΝ te DY ee ‘ Spe tn 
i 2 ; : 
ἢ : ἐὰν. ἐπτῇ ᾿ Jia > iw aad 

εἰ τ View 
᾿ » x σον “ νὰ ae 





7 


: tw 
| eee 
κι ule 











OF EES wat 











Wagnesia Cera 








we ‘ ; Uy 
Bisanthe τον ἐν ρυνίνων, 5 
Neonteivha: ν 
areas ropontis 


(gull 

Mi, 
ον] 
ae gn 7 








AGordiam 
3 ᾿- 
Pesstnus 
x 


ὯΝ Cdpottonta ,5 m 7 FIRS J 
= Sg 


fo lavstrupedion (Υἱ 
da ea 
Q 


: oa Cel aenre ... 
ere Colossaé SP es 





Wa ( 


ΡΩΝ Υ 
Eye 
Baw 


newewrewwetoute of the Ten Thowsand. 
_......Loundary of the Satrapy of Grrus. 


Persian Parasangs ot 30 Stadia each. 
7 
70 20 20 AO 50 


English Mules. 
700 














- WD Gre 
ANABASIS. SeEC UOTE, 





δὰ se a7 Abi ᾿ 


Ki 


MK ς 5 

Nile Wiig SoS 
oe 

Ca 





Ἂ ime rely Ky 
Ae) νὴ Arbelny~ 


Larissa’ ar be 


~~ 


ΤῈΣ Chen . Ὁ 
πεν SS 


ve rirysdlliciogeo’ 





ney 
| 


Pe 


»\ “@ A 
ao } ἜΘ 
(harmande dae sitfac 
Is ‘ o 
et 


OF an ἘΠ 
- 


ΠΣ 


BAB” 
,ABYLON 

















ὶ 
\ 








HOME USE 
CIRCULATION DEPARTMENT 
MAIN LIBRARY 


This book is due on the last date stamped below. 
1-month loans may be renewed by calling 642-3405. 
6-month loans may be recharged by bringing books 
te Circulation Desk. 

Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior 
to due date. | 
ALL BOOKS ARE SUBJECT TO RECALL 7 DAYS 
AFTER DATE CHECKED OUT. 


ee - τ! 


Be Τῶν Η 
REC’D CIRC DEPT MAR 2 1774 91 | 








Bh 

| 

Way) 

‘ie 

yal Oma DEPT. eee alps Y 4 
ΒΗ ΤΩ; AMG6-~A'-3 2 niversi alifornia “ἡ 

RRM A Aap τος ὧν» 


th 


GENERAL LIBRARY - U.C. BERKELEY 


(MNO 






Bo00925975 


%, 
7 
~ Ay 
nr - a 
Ἢ , 
a -ὦ 
ty, ὰ 
ΟΝ ᾿ 
> 
Ἂ τ a) 
A 
™ 


A eS 
ἡ ΤΩΝ 
᾽ ΠΝ Ἢ i i 


yet 
pot tat 


Paces 
SUE 


᾿ 
" 
Pel’ 

ra 


[νιον 


ter 


ΙΝ 
γε 


» JO AeE 
‘Bey rer) 


ε 
ΜΙ 
ay he 


in 


gegen 
eae 


i He 


Πα Νὴ 


thud oe 
“ἐκ δεν, 


% 


᾿ 
ΓΗ 





